Yamaha ES8 Handleiding

Merk: Yamaha

Model: ES8

Categorie: Sequencer

Type: Handleiding

SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION

PRODUCT SAFETY MARKINGS:

Yamaha electronic

products may

have either labels similar to the graphics shown below or

molded/stamped facsimiles of these graphics on the enclosure.

The explanation of these graphics appears on this page. Please

observe all cautions indicated on this page and those indicated

in the safety instruction section.

The exclamation point within the equilateral

triangle is intended to alert the user to the

presence of important operating and maintenance

(servicing) instructions in the literature

accompanying the product.

The lightning ﬂash with arrowhead symbol, within

the equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the

user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous

voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may

be of sufﬁcient magnitude to constitute a risk of

electrical shock.

IMPORTANT NOTICE:

All Yamaha electronic products are tested and

approved by an independent safety testing laboratory in order that you

may be sure that when it is properly installed and used in its normal and

customary manner, all foreseeable risks have been eliminated. DO NOT

modify this unit or commission others to do so unless speciﬁcally

authorized by Yamaha. Product performance and/or safety standards

may be diminished. Claims ﬁled under the expressed warranty may be

denied if the unit is/has been modiﬁed. Implied warranties may also be

affected.

SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE:

The information

contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the time of printing.

However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of the

speciﬁcations without notice or obligation to update existing units.

ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES:

Yamaha strives to produce products that

are both user safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe

that our products and the production methods used to produce them,

meet these goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law,

we want you to be aware of the following:

Battery Notice:

This product MAY contain a small non-rechargable

battery which (if applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span

of this type of battery is approximately ﬁve years. When replacement

becomes necessary, contact a qualiﬁed service representative to

perform the replacement.

Warning:

Do not attempt to recharge, disassemble, or incinerate this

type of battery. Keep all batteries away from children. Dispose of used

batteries promptly and as regulated by applicable laws. Note: In some

areas, the servicer is required by law to return the defective parts.

However, you do have the option of having the servicer dispose of these

parts for you.

Disposal Notice:

Should this product become damaged beyond

repair, or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at an end,

please observe all local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the

disposal of products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc.

NOTICE:

Service charges incurred due to lack of knowledge relating to

how a function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed)

are not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the

owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult

your dealer before requesting service.

NAME PLATE LOCATION:

The graphic below indicates the location

of the name plate. The model number, serial number, power

requirements, etc., are located on this plate. You should record the

model number, serial number, and the date of purchase in the spaces

provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your

purchase.

Model

Serial No.

Purchase Date

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK.

DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).

NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.

REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

BREATH

OUTTHRU

USB

TO HOSTTO DEVICEmLAN

I/O EXPANSION

AC INLET

POWER

ON OFF

MIDI

mLAN I/O EXPANSION

AC INLET

POWER

ON OFF

mLAN I/O EXPANSION

AC INLET

POWER

ON OFF

MOTIF ES6

MOTIF ES7

MOTIF ES8

92-469-

➀

(rear)

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

INFORMATION RELATING TO PERSONAL INJURY, ELECTRICAL SHOCK,

AND FIRE HAZARD POSSIBILITIES HAS BEEN INCLUDED IN THIS LIST.

WARNING-

When using any electrical or electronic product, basic

precautions should always be followed. These precautions include, but

are not limited to, the following:

Read all Safety Instructions, Installation Instructions, Special

Message Section items, and any Assembly Instructions found in this

manual BEFORE making any connections, including connection to the

main supply.

Do not attempt to service this product beyond that described in the

user-maintenance instructions. All other servicing should be referred to

qualiﬁed service personnel.

Main Power Supply Veriﬁcation: Yamaha products are

manufactured speciﬁcally for the supply voltage in the area where they

are to be sold. If you should move, or if any doubt exists about the

supply voltage in your area, please contact your dealer for supply

voltage veriﬁcation and (if applicable) instructions. The required supply

voltage is printed on the name plate. For name plate location, please

refer to the graphic found in the Special Message Section of this

manual.

DANGER

-Grounding Instructions: This product must be grounded

and therefore has been equipped with a three pin attachment plug. If

this product should malfunction, the ground pin provides a path of low

resistance for electrical current, reducing the risk of electrical shock. If

your wall socket will not accommodate this type plug, contact an

electrician to have the outlet replaced in accordance with local

electrical codes. Do NOT modify the plug or change the plug to a

different type!

WARNING:

Do not place this product or any other objects on the

power cord or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip

over, or roll anything over power or connecting cords of any kind. The

use of an extension cord is not recommended! If you must use an

extension cord, the minimum wire size for a 25’ cord (or less) is 18 AWG.

NOTE: The smaller the AWG number, the larger the current handling

capacity. For longer extension cords, consult a local electrician.

Ventilation: Electronic products, unless speciﬁcally designed for

enclosed installations, should be placed in locations that do not

interfere with proper ventilation. If instructions for enclosed installations

are not provided, it must be assumed that unobstructed ventilation is

required.

Temperature considerations: Electronic products should be

installed in locations that do not seriously contribute to their operating

temperature. Placement of this product close to heat sources such as;

radiators, heat registers etc., should be avoided.

This product was NOT designed for use in wet/damp locations and

should not be used near water or exposed to rain. Examples of wet /

damp locations are; near a swimming pool, spa, tub, sink, or wet

basement.

This product should be used only with the components supplied or;

a cart,rack, or stand that is recommended by the manufacturer. If a cart,

rack, or stand is used, please observe all safety markings and

instructions that accompany the accessory product.

10.

The power supply cord (plug) should be disconnected from the

outlet when electronic products are to be left unused for extended

periods of time. Cords should also be disconnected when there is a

high probability of lightning and/or electrical storm activity.

11.

Care should be taken that objects do not fall and liquids are not

spilled into the enclosure through any openings that may exist.

12.

Electrical/electronic products should be serviced by a qualiﬁed

service person when:

a. The power supply cord has been damaged; or

b. Objects have fallen, been inserted, or liquids have been spilled

into the enclosure through openings; or

c. The product has been exposed to rain; or

d. The product does not operate, exhibits a marked change in

performance; or

e. The product has been dropped, or the enclosure of the product

has been damaged.

13.

This product, either alone or in combination with an ampliﬁer

and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound

levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for a

long period of time at a high volume level or at a level that is

uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears,

you should consult an audiologist.

IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before

damage occurs.

14.

Some Yamaha products may have benches and/or accessory

mounting ﬁxtures that are either supplied as a part of the product or as

optional accessories. Some of these items are designed to be dealer

assembled or installed. Please make sure that benches are stable and

any optional ﬁxtures (where applicable) are well secured BEFORE

using. Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only. No

other uses are recommended.

PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL

92-469-3

(2)-8

1/2

PRECAUTIONS

PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING

* Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.

WARNING

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical

shock, short-circuiting, damages, ﬁre or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

• Only use the voltage speciﬁed as correct for the instrument. The

required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument.

• Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust

which may have accumulated on it.

• Use only the supplied power cord/plug.

• Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters

or radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage

the cord, place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where

anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over it.

• This instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. Do not

attempt to disassemble or modify the internal components in any

way.

• Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp

or wet conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids

which might spill into any openings.

• Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.

• Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit.

A burning item may fall over and cause a ﬁre.

• If the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there

is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any

unusual smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it,

immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect the electric

plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected by

qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

CAUTION

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to

the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

• Always connect the three-pin attachment plug to a properly

grounded power source. (For more information about the main

power supply, see page 26.)

• When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet,

always hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord

can damage it.

• Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is

not to be used for extended periods of time, or during electrical

storms.

• Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a

multiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or

possibly cause overheating in the outlet.

• Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or

extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or

in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel

disﬁguration or damage to the internal components.

• Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo

equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise,

the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise.

• Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might

accidentally fall over.

• Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables.

• Do not place objects in front of the instrument’s air vent, since this

may prevent adequate ventilation of the internal components,

and possibly result in the instrument overheating.

Power supply/AC power adaptor

Do not open

Water warning

Fire warning

If you notice any abnormality

Power supply/Power cord Location

(2)-8

2/2

• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components,

turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on

or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also,

be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum

levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the

instrument to set the desired listening level.

• When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use

paint thinners, solvents, cleaning ﬂuids, or chemical-impregnated

wiping cloths.

• Do not insert a ﬁnger or hand in any gaps on the key cover or

instrument.

• Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the

gaps on the panel or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the power

immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then

have the instrument inspected by qualiﬁed Yamaha service

personnel.

• Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument,

since this might discolor the panel or keyboard.

• Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the

instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons,

switches or connectors.

• Do not operate the instrument for a long period of time at a high

or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent

hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the

ears, consult a physician.

Saving and backing up your data

• DRAM data (see page 186) is lost when you turn off the power to

the instrument. Save the data to a SmartMedia/USB storage

device.

• Never attempt to turn off the power while data is being written to

Flash ROM (while an “Executing...” or “Please keep power on”

message is shown). Turning the power off in this state results in

loss of all user data and may cause the system to freeze (due to

corruption of data in the Flash ROM). This means that this

synthesizer may not be able to start up properly, even when

turning the power on next time.

Backing up the SmartMedia/external media

•To protect against data loss through media damage, we

recommend that you save your important data onto two

SmartMedia/external media.

Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modiﬁcations to the instrument, or data that is lost

or destroyed.

Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.

Connections

Maintenance

Handling caution

Saving data

Introduction

Owner’s Manual

Introduction

Congratulations and thank you for your purchase of the Yamaha MOTIF ES6/MOTIF ES7/MOTIF ES8 Music

Production Synthesizer!

You now own what is perhaps the best-sounding, most versatile, and certainly most powerful synthesizer and

total music production instrument on the planet.

We strove to put virtually all our synthesizer technology and music making know-how into one instrument —

and we succeeded. The new MOTIF ES not only gives you the latest and greatest sounds and rhythms (as well

as the ability to create and sample your own), it gives you powerful, easy-to-use tools for playing, combining

and controlling these dynamic sounds/rhythms — in real time, as you perform!

Take time to look through this manual carefully. It’s packed with important information on how to get the most

from this amazing instrument.

Dive in now and enjoy!

Accessories

The following items have been included with your MOTIF ES 6/MOTIF ES 7/MOTIF ES 8. Check to see that you

have everything listed here.

• AC Power cord

• CD-ROM x 3

• Owner’s Manual (this book)

• Data List

• Installation Guide

• Copying of commercially available music sequence data and/or digital audio ﬁles for any purpose other than your

own personal use is strictly prohibited.

• This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with

respect to which it has license to use others' copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all

computer software, styles ﬁles, MIDI ﬁles, WAVE data and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such

programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of copyright has

legal consequences. DON'T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES.

About the included CD-ROMs

The following three CD-ROMs are included in the MOTIF ES package.

• TOOLS for MOTIF ES6/MOTIF ES7/MOTIF ES8

This CD-ROM contains special software for use with this instrument.

It includes the latest version of SQ01 (V2), a full-featured audio/MIDI sequencer/mixer for comprehensive

music production, Voice Editor, which gives you comprehensive and intuitive sound editing tools, and

Multi Part Editor, for editing the Mixing parameters of Songs and Patterns.

For details, see the separate Installation Guide or the online manuals included with the software.

• Sound Library for MOTIF ES6/MOTIF ES7/MOTIF ES8

This CD-ROM contains various types of data for use with the MOTIF ES. For information on the contents,

refer to the List ﬁle in the CD-ROM. You can use the data by loading it in the File mode. Insert the CD-ROM

into a CD-ROM drive* connected to the USB TO DEVICE connector via USB and execute the Load

operation. Alternately, you can access the data from a USB storage device (such as a hard disk) or a

SmartMedia card (inserted to the CARD slot) to which the data has been copied.

For details about how to load each type of data, refer to the following pages.

• Voice extension: W7V page 87

• Pattern extension: W7P page 132

• WAV ﬁle extension: WAV pages 100 and 109

* For information on what USB devices (model name, etc.) can be used with the MOTIF ES, see page 29.

If you are loading audio WAV ﬁles, make sure that DIMM modules are installed to the imt. (For DIMM compatibility information,

see page 289.) Also, when loading Voice data from this CD-ROM, make sure to install DIMM modules, because the Voice data

contains User Waveforms. If DIMM modules are not installed, an error message appears when you try to load a WAV ﬁle or

Voice data from this CD-ROM.

• TOOLS for Modular Synthesis Plug-in System

This CD-ROM contains a variety of computer applications, including the Voice Editor for editing Voices of

the optional Plug-in Boards. For more information, refer to the “Readme” ﬁle in the CD-ROM.

Main Features

Owner’s Manual

Main Features

Wide range of

dynamic and authentic voices

. Use

the

Category Search

function to quickly call up the

sounds you want, based on their instrument type.

Performance mode

lets you use four different voices

together — in layers or in a keyboard split.

Integrated Sampling Sequencer

— seamlessly

combines audio and MIDI recording.

•

Full

Sample recording and editing

features, and up

to 512MB of sample memory (with optional DIMM

modules).

•

Wide

data compatibility

lets you load AIFF and WAV

ﬁles, as well as samples and program/voice data

from other popular samplers, such as the Yamaha A-

series.

•

Convenient

Resampling

function lets you sample

the sound of the MOTIF itself directly. Play your own

melodies, riffs and rhythms — and use them as

samples.

•

Unique

Slice feature

automatically chops up your

rhythms and riffs into their individual beats and notes.

This lets you manipulate the component parts of your

sample loops as MIDI data, and gives you the power

to easily change tempo and even the rhythmic feel,

without disturbing the pitch or sound quality.

Extensive

effect processing

, with Reverb (20 types),

Chorus (49 types), eight separate Insertion blocks

each of which has two blocks

(total 116 types),

Master Effect (8 types), and a digital equalizer (3-band

Part EQ and 5-band Master EQ).

Comprehensive

real-time control with four knobs

and four sliders

— letting you adjust ﬁlter, levels,

effects, EG, and more, while you play.

Pattern mode

functions let you craft different rhythmic

sections and riffs as individual elements — which you

can easily and intuitively combine in real time to create

full rhythm tracks.

In addition to being able to create User voices in the

Voice mode, you can create special

Mixing voices

for

Songs and Patterns. These voices can be edited and

stored in the Song/Pattern mode, making it

exceptionally easy and convenient to create voices for

use with Songs and Patterns.

The versatile

Arpeggio

feature automatically plays a

variety of sequenced phrases in response to the keys you

play. This function is especially powerful with drum voices

— letting you easily call up various rhythm patterns at the

touch of a key, and providing instant inspiration for song

creation and performance. When used with normal

voices, the Arpeggio phrase changes harmonically and

melodically with the chords you play, giving you intuitive

control over the patterns as you compose or perform.

Arpeggios can be triggered not only according to the keys

you play, but also by how strongly you play them — for

even greater performance power.

page 60

page 67

page 172

page 289

pages 100, 270

page 99

page 107

page 177

page 50

page 106

page 105

page 66

Once you’ve collected all the audio samples, loops,

MIDI data, and patterns you need for your song, use

Pattern Chain

to arrange the pieces in real time. This

hands-on approach makes it easier than ever to come

up with great ideas and amazing songs.

Song Scene

is another powerful tool that lets you take

“snapshots” of the sequencer track settings (such as

pan, volume, track mute and so on). Then, during

playback or recording, simply switch among the

Scenes for instant, dynamic changes.

Master mode

— for using the MOTIF ES as a master

keyboard controller (with independent Zones), and for

easily reconﬁguring the instrument between Voice/

Performance play and Song/Pattern play in live

applications.

Exceptionally

easy-to-understand interface

with two-

tiered operation buttons: [F1] - [F6] and [SF1] - [SF5]

Remote Control

— for operating your favorite

sequencing software from the panel controls. Mute

tracks, control transport (Play, Stop, Record, etc.), mix

both MIDI and audio tracks (up to 16) with this

instrument’s knobs and sliders, pan the tracks, control

EQ, and tweak effect sends — all without ever touching

the mouse.

Three

Modular Synthesis Plug-in System

slots let

you upgrade the MOTIF ES with a completely new

synthesizer or sound-processing engine. These Plug-in

boards give you more voices, more effects, more

polyphony and more instrument parts. Plus, special

Plug-in voices have already been programmed and

stored to the MOTIF ES, ready to be played as soon as

you install the proper board.

A full rear panel of input/output connections provides

maximum interfacing ﬂexibility. These include

Assignable Outputs, A/D Inputs, MIDI, two USB

connectors and a memory card slot. Moreover, an

optional AIEB2 or mLAN16E board can be installed.

The

mLAN interface

is particularly powerful — making

it possible to transfer both digital audio and MIDI data

via a single broadband cable.

The instrument features

two USB connectors

— USB

TO HOST for connecting to computer, and USB TO

DEVICE for connecting to storage devices, such as a

hard disk drive or ﬂash disk.

Included software

— the CD-ROM accompanying

your instrument (Tools for MOTIF ES) features a variety

of convenient and powerful programs for using the

MOTIF ES with a computer. These include the

Voice

Editor

which provides comprehensive, easy-to-use

editing features and parameters, and a

Multi Part

Editor

for intuitive editing of Song/Pattern Mixing

parameters from your computer screen.

page 115

page 123

page 136

page 47

page 147

page 74

page 39

page 29

page 142

How to use this manual

Owner’s Manual

How to use this manual

The Controls & Connectors ...............................................................................................Page 16

Use this section to ﬁnd out about all of the buttons, controls and connectors of this instrument.

Setting Up ..........................................................................................................................Page 26

Before going on to any other part of the manual, we strongly suggest you read this section ﬁrst. It shows you how to get

started playing and using your new instrument.

Application Index ................................................................................................................ Page 9

This special index is organized not by single words, but by functions and applications — allowing you to quickly and

easily ﬁnd how to perform a particular operation or explore a topic of interest.

Basic Structure ................................................................................................................. Page 154

This section provides a detailed overview of all of the main functions and features of this instrument, and shows how they

ﬁt together.

Basic Operation.................................................................................................................. Page 45

This section introduces you to the basic operating conventions of this instrument, such as editing values and changing settings.

Quick Guide........................................................................................................................ Page 55

In this tutorial section, you will take a guided tour through the various functions of this instrument, and get some hands-on

experience in playing and using it.

Reference .........................................................................................................................Page 188

The MOTIF ES encyclopedia. This section explains all parameters, settings, functions, features, modes and operations in full detail.

Troubleshooting...............................................................................................................Page 279

If this instrument does not function as expected or you have some problem with the sound or operation, refer to this

section before calling your Yamaha dealer or service center. Most common problems and their solutions are covered here

in a very simple and easy-to-understand way.

Appendix .......................................................................................................................... Page 275

This section contains detailed information on this instrument such as Speciﬁcations and an Alert Message List as well as

instructions for installing optional equipment (e.g., DIMM modules, AIEB2, mLAN16E interface, and Plug-in Boards).

Data List (separate booklet)

This contains various important lists such as the Voice List, Preset Pattern Phrase List, Effect List, MIDI Data Format, and

MIDI Implementation Chart.

Installation Guide (separate booklet)

Refer to this for instructions on installing the included software programs (on the “TOOLS for MOTIF ES6/MOTIF ES7/

MOTIF ES8” CD-ROM) to your computer.

Various pages and menus appear on the LCD display of this instrument depending the selected mode or function.

Throughout this manual, arrows are used in the instructions, indicating in shorthand the process of calling up certain

displays and functions. The example instructions below indicate to 1) press the [VOICE] button, 2) select a Normal Voice,

3) press the [EDIT] button, 4) select an Element, 5) press the [F1] OSC button, and 6) press the [SF2] OUTPUT button.

[VOICE]

→→

Normal Voice selection

→→

[EDIT]

→→

Element selection

→→

[F1] OSC

→→

[SF2] OUTPUT

When a conﬁrmation message (page 52) or Control Function window (page 50) is shown in the display, press the [EXIT] button to exit from that

condition, then execute the instructions as in the above example. Likewise, press the REMOTE [ON/OFF] button to exit from the Remote Control

mode, then execute the instructions as in the above example when the MOTIF ES is in the Remote Control mode.

* Apple and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.

* Windows is the registered trademark of Microsoft

Corporation.

* All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders.

* The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different

from those on your instrument.

Application Index

Owner’s Manual

Listening to the MOTIF ES

• Listening to the Demo song/pattern

.....................................................................................................................................................................Page 55

• Listening to Song Chain playback

........................................................................................................................................................................Page 59

• Listening to Pattern Chain playback

..................................................................................................................................................................Page 115

• Listening to Arpeggio playback

.................................................................Pages 66 (Voice mode), 70 (Performance mode), 105 (Song/Pattern mode)

Playing the keyboard

• Selecting a Voice and playing the keyboard

..................................................................................... Pages 60 (Voice mode), 102 (Song/Pattern mode)

• Selecting a Voice of the Plug-in Board and playing the keyboard

.................................................. Pages 75 (Voice mode), 121 (Song/Pattern mode)

• Selecting a Performance and playing the keyboard

...........................................................................................................................................Page 67

• Using the instrument as a Master Keyboard

.....................................................................................................................................................Page 136

• Sounding the metronome

..................................... [SONG] or [PATTERN]

→

[UTILITY]

→

[F3] SEQ

→

[SF1] CLICK

→

Mode = all ................Page 262

• Splitting the keyboard – Setting upper and lower ranges for the Voices

..................................... Pages 70 (Performance mode), 141 (Master mode)

•Layering two Voices (or Parts) together

.......................................................................................... Pages 70 (Performance mode), 141 (Master mode)

Selecting programs and making settings on the MOTIF ES

• Selecting a Voice

................................................................................................................................. Pages 60 (Voice mode), 102 (Song/Pattern mode)

Using the Category Search function

....................................................................................................................................................................Page 62

• Selecting a Performance

.......................................................................................................................................................................................Page 67

• Selecting a Song

....................................................................................................................................................................................................Page 56

• Selecting a Pattern

Selecting a Section

................................................................................................................................................................................................Page 57

Selecting a Phrase and assigning it to a Pattern track

.....................................................................................................................................Page 113

• Selecting a Mixing template for a Song/Pattern

................................................................................................................................................Page 103

• Selecting a Master

• Selecting an Arpeggio type........................................................................Pages 66 (Voice mode), 70 (Performance mode), 105 (Song/Pattern mode)

• Selecting a Waveform ..........................................................................................................................................................................................Page 174

• Selecting a Filter type..........................................................................................................................................................................................Page 209

• Selecting an Effect type

Selecting a Reverb type/Chorus type/Insertion type

[VOICE] → Voice selection → [F3] EFFECT .........................................................................................................................................................Page 194

[PERFORM] → Performance selection → [F3] EFFECT → [SF1] CONNECT ......................................................................................................Page 215

[SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song/Pattern selection→ [MIXING] → [F3] EFFECT → [SF1] CONNECT ...................................................................Page 235

Selecting a Master Effect type

[VOICE] → [UTILITY] → [F3] VOICE → [SF2] MEF ..............................................................................................................................................Page 262

[PERFORM] → Performance selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F2] OUT/MEF → [SF3] MEF ......................................................................Page 214

[SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song/Pattern selection→ [MIXING] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F2] MEQ/MEF → [SF2] MEF .................................Page 234

Selecting a Master EQ type

[VOICE] → [UTILITY] → [F3] VOICE → [SF1] MEQ .............................................................................................................................................Page 262

[PERFORM] → Performance selection→ [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F2] OUT/MEF → [SF2] MEQ ......................................................................Page 214

[SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song/Pattern selection→ [MIXING] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F2] OUT/MEF → [SF1] MEQ .................................Page 234

Using controllers ..............................................Pages 66 (Voice mode), 69 (Performance mode), 104 (Song/Pattern mode)

• Understanding the organization and structure of the controllers...................................................................................................................Page 154

• Assigning functions to the controllers for each Voice (Controller Set) ..........................................................................................................Page 155

• Assigning Control Change numbers to each controller...................................................................................................................................Page 156

• Setting the Pitch Bend Range

[VOICE] → Voice selection→ [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF5] OTHER → PB Upper/PB Lower .............................................Page 190

[SONG] or [PATTERN]

→

Song/Pattern selection

→

[MIXING]

→

[EDIT]

→

Part selection

→

[F1] VOICE

→

[SF5] OTHER

→

PB Upper/PB Lower

..............Page 235

• Checking the currently assigned parameters for knob control................Page 81 (Voice mode), 90 (Performance mode), 129 (Song/Pattern mode)

• Checking the currently assigned parameters for Control Slider (CS) control ...............................................................................................Page 140

• Using a Foot Pedal as a sustain pedal.................................................................................................................................................................Page 42

• Starting/stopping a song or pattern by pressing a Footswitch................................ [UTILITY] → [F4] CTL ASN → [SF3] FT SW ................Page 263

• Changing a Voice or a Performance by pressing a Footswitch................................ [UTILITY] → [F4] CTL ASN → [SF3] FT SW ................Page 263

•Turning Arpeggio playback on or off by pressing a Footswitch............................... [UTILITY] → [F4] CTL ASN → [SF3] FT SW ................Page 263

Application Index

Owner’s Manual

• Determining how the sound responds to a Breath Controller

[UTILITY] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF1] TG → BCCurve .........................................................................................................................................Page 260

•Keeping the effect of a controller (Modulation Wheel, etc.) the same, even when changing Voices

[UTILITY] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF4] OTHER → CtrlReset = hold ...................................................................................................................... Page 261

Sounding only the speciﬁed Part or Voice

•Turning each element on or off in the Voice Edit mode......................................................................................................................................Page 79

• Determining whether each Element is used or not in the Voice Edit mode

[VOICE] → [EDIT] → Element selection → [F1] OSC → [SF1] WAVE → ElementSw = on/off ............................................................................. Page 195

• Determining whether each Part is used or not in the Performance mode

[PERFORM] → Performance selection→ [EDIT] → Part selection → [F1] VOICE → [SF1] VOICE → PartSw = on/off ....................................... Page 216

•Turning each track (Part) of a song/pattern on or off......................................................................................................................................... Page 58

•Turning off or muting playback of a Song/Pattern Part, by setting the receive channel to off

[SONG] or [PATTERN]

→

Song/Pattern selection

→

[MIXING]

→

[EDIT]

→

part selection

→

[F1] VOICE

→

[SF2] MODE

→

ReceiveCh

................. Page 235

Adjusting the volume or output level

• Overall

Adjusting the Master Volume output................................................................................................................ [MASTER VOLUME] .................. Page 18

Adjusting the entire volume of the instrument’s internal tone generator block

..... [UTILITY] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF1] TG → Volume ................ Page 260

Adjusting the output gain of each Output connector....................................................... [UTILITY] → [F2] I/O → [SF2] OUTPUT ................Page 261

• In the Voice mode

Adjusting the volume balance of the Elements of a Normal Voice with the Control Sliders

[VOICE] → Normal Voice selection → [EDIT] → Element selection→ [F4] AMP → [SF1] LVL/PAN → Level ........................................................ Page 81

Adjusting the entire volume for the selected Voice (common to all Elements/keys)

[VOICE] → Voice selection→ [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F2] OUTPUT → Volume ...............................................................................................Page 190

• In the Performance mode

Adjusting the volume balance of the Parts of an edited Performance with the Control Sliders

[PERFORM] → Performance selection → [EDIT] → Part selection → [F2] OUTPUT → [SF1] VOL/PAN → Volume ....................................... Page 81

Adjusting the entire volume for the selected Performance (common to all Parts)

[PERFORM] → Performance selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F2] OUT/MEQ → [SF1] OUT → Volume .................................................. Page 213

Adjusting the volume of the audio input (of a microphone or external audio equipment)

[PERFORM] → Performance selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F5] AUDIO IN → [SF1] OUTPUT → Volume ............................................ Page 215

• In the Song mode/Pattern mode

Adjusting the volume balance of the Parts of an edited Song with the Control Sliders

[SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song/Pattern selection → [MIXING] → Part Selection → [F1] VOL/PAN → VOLUME ................................................ Page 130

Adjusting the volume of the audio input (of a microphone or external audio equipment)

[SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song/Pattern selection → [MIXING → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F5] AUDIOIN → [SF1] OUTPUT → Volume .......... Page 235

Inputting audio from a microphone, instrument or other audio device

• About the organization of audio input parts..................................................................................................................................................... Page 165

• Connecting a microphone to the A/D INPUT connector.......................... [UTILITY] → [F2] I/O → [SF1] INPUT → Mic/line = mic .................. Page 72

• Connecting audio equipment to the A/D INPUT connector.................... [UTILITY] → [F2] I/O → [SF1] INPUT → Mic/line = line .................. Page 73

• Setting audio input related parameters

[PERFORM] → Performance selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F5] AUDIO IN ............................................................................................ Page 214

[SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song/Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F5] AUDIO IN ....................................................... Page 235

• Sampling (recording) audio from a microphone.................................................................................................................................................Page 94

• Sampling (recording) audio from another audio device ....................................................................................................................................Page 98

• Applying a vocal harmony effect to the microphone sound by using the Plug-in Board PLG100-VH...........................................................Page 78

Using Plug-in Boards

• Installing a Plug-in Board....................................................................................................................................................................................Page 283

• Checking that a Plug-in Board is properly installed..................................................... [UTILITY] → [F6] PLUG → [SF1] STATUS ..................Page 75

• Checking the receive port of the installed Plug-in Board......................................................... [UTILITY] → PLUG → [SF2] MIDI .................. Page 75

• Selecting and playing a voice of a Single Part Plug-in Board (PLG150-AN, PLG-150-PF, PLG150-DX, PLG150-VL, etc.)

• Playing an XG song by using the Multi-part Plug-in Board PLG100-XG .........................................................................................................Page 77

• Applying a vocal harmony effect to the microphone sound by using the Plug-in Board PLG150-VH...........................................................Page 78

Application Index

Owner’s Manual

Creating Data

• Creating a Voice

Creating a Normal Voice in the Voice Edit mode .................................................................................................................................................Page 79

Creating a Drum Voice in the Voice Edit mode ....................................................................................................................................................Page 82

Creating a Plug-in Voice in the Voice Edit mode .................................................................................................................................................Page 84

Creating a Normal Voice/Drum Voice by using the Sampling function .............................................................................................................Page 94

Creating a Sample Voice by using the Sampling function ...............................................................................................................................Page 107

Creating a Normal/Drum Voice by importing a WAV or AIFF ﬁle......................................................................................................................Page 100

Creating a Sample Voice by importing a WAV or AIFF ﬁle................................................................................................................................Page 109

Creating a Mixing Voice especially for a Song or Pattern ................................................................................................................................Page 105

• Creating a Performance.........................................................................................................................................................................................Page 87

• Creating a Song

Recording your keyboard performance to a Song track (Realtime Recording).............................................................................................Page 118

Recording over (replacing) existing material in a Song track — Punch-in Recording

[SONG] → [●] (Record) → [F1] SETUP → Type = punch ....................................................................................................................................Page 119

Recording additional material to an existing Song track (without erasing previous material) — Overdub Recording

[SONG] → [●] (Record) → [F1] SETUP → Type = overdub ................................................................................................................................Page 119

Sounding a metronome during recording ............................... [SONG] → [UTILITY] → [F3] SEQ → [SF1] CLICK → Mode = rec ................Page 262

Recording a Song by using a Performance ......................................................................................................................................................Page 120

Recording a Song with the sounds of a Plug-in Board ....................................................................................................................................Page 121

Using the Step Recording function.......................................................... [SONG] → [●] (Record) → [F1] SETUP → Type = step ................Page 238

Editing MIDI events for each track of an already-recorded Song ...................................... [SONG] → [EDIT] → Track selection ................Page 124

Inserting Tempo change information in the middle of the Song ............................................. [SONG] → [EDIT] → [F4] TR SEL ................Page 125

Inserting Voice change information

[SONG] → [EDIT] → Track selection → Inserting a Bank Select MSB/LSB and Program Change ....................................................................Page 225

Editing Song Mixing settings, such as the volume of each Part ................................................................. [SONG] → [MIXING] ................Page 127

Using convenient “Jobs,” such as Copy, Clear, Quantize........................................................ [SONG] → [JOB] → Job selection ................Page 126

• Creating a Pattern

Assigning a Preset Phrase to each track of a Pattern (Patch function)..........................................................................................................Page 113

Recording (Sampling) your favorite rhythm (audio) to a Pattern track to create a Phrase...........................................................................Page 107

Importing a WAV ﬁle or an AIFF ﬁle to a Pattern track to create a Phrase .....................................................................................................Page 109

Recording your keyboard performance to a Pattern track to create a Phrase...............................................................................................Page 110

Recording a newly found Arpeggio rhythm pattern to a Pattern track ...........................................................................................................Page 112

Sounding the metronome during recording....................... [PATTERN] → [UTILITY] → [F3] SEQ → [SF1] CLICK → Mode = rec ................Page 262

Using the Step Recording function..................................................... [PATTERN] → [●] (Record) → [F1] SETUP → Type = step ................Page 238

Editing MIDI events for each track of an already-recorded Pattern................................ [PATTERN] → [EDIT] → Track selection ................Page 124

Editing Pattern Mixing settings, such as the volume of each Part......................................................... [PATTERN] → [MIXING] ................Page 127

Using convenient “Jobs,” such as Copy, Clear, Quantize................................................... [PATTERN] → [JOB] → Job selection ................Page 126

Programming a sequence of a Section to create a Pattern Chain....................................................... [PATTERN] → [F6] CHAIN ................Page 115

Converting a Pattern Chain to Song data...................... [PATTERN] → Pattern selection → [F6] CHAIN → [EDIT] → [F3] SONG ................Page 117

• Creating a Master.................................................................................................................................................................................................Page 136

• Creating an Arpeggio ..........................................................................................................................................................................................Page 130

• Creating a Waveform .............................................................................................................................................................................................Page 94

Storing/Saving the created data

•

Storing an edited Voice to internal memory (Flash ROM) and saving all the Voices in internal memory to a SmartMedia/USB storage device

.............Page 85

• Storing an edited Performance to internal memory (Flash ROM) and saving all the Performances in internal memory to a

SmartMedia/USB storage device..........................................................................................................................................................................Page 91

•Saving the Song/Pattern data

Storing Song Mixing/Pattern Mixing settings to internal memory (DRAM)....................................................................................................Page 131

Storing the entire Song/Pattern data to SmartMedia/USB storage device.....................................................................................................Page 132

• Storing Mixing settings to internal memory (Flash ROM) as a template........................................................................................................Page 104

• Storing an edited Master to internal memory (Flash ROM) and saving all the Masters on internal memory to a SmartMedia/USB

storage device .....................................................................................................................................................................................................Page 137

•Saving all Arpeggios in internal memory (Flash ROM) to a SmartMedia/USB storage device.....................................................................Page 269

•Saving all Samples (obtained via the Sampling function) in internal memory (DRAM) to a SmartMedia/USB storage device ..................Page 97

Application Index

Owner’s Manual

Naming your created data..........................................................................................................................................Page 53

Recovering lost data

•Voice

Comparing the Voice before editing with the just-edited one (Compare function)..........................................................................................Page 80

Recalling an edited, but not-stored Voice (when another Voice has been selected) — Recall function........................................................ Page 82

•Performance

Comparing the Performance before editing with the just-edited one (Compare function)............................................................................. Page 89

Recalling an edited, but not-stored Performance (when another Performance has been selected) — Recall function.............................. Page 91

• Song/Pattern

Canceling the changes made in the recent session such as Recording and Job to restore the data to its previous status

[SONG] or [PATTERN] → [JOB] → [F1] UNDO ....................................................................................................................................................Page 127

Comparing the Mixing settings before editing with the just-edited ones (Compare function) ................................................................... Page 129

Recalling edited, but not-stored Mixing settings (when another Mixing set has been selected) — Recall function................................. Page 129

Initializing

• Resetting the User Memory to the Initial Factory Settings................................................................................................................................Page 44

• Formatting a SmartMedia card...........................................................................................................................................................................Page 268

• Initializing the edited Voice ............................................................................................................... [VOICE] → [JOB] → [F1] INIT ................Page 208

• Initializing the edited Performance............................................................................................. [PERFORM] → [JOB] → [F1] INIT ................Page 219

• Initializing the edited Master.......................................................................................................... [MASTER] → [JOB] → [F1] INIT ................ Page 273

• Initializing the edited Song Mixing settings................................................................ [SONG] → [MIXING] → [JOB] → [F1] INIT ................ Page 236

• Initializing the edited Pattern Mixing settings........................................................ [PATTERN] → [MIXING] → [JOB] → [F1] INIT ................ Page 248

Pitch related settings (Tune, Note Shift, etc.)

• Overall

Changing the octave setting of the keyboard ............................................ [UTILITY] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF2] KBD → Octave .................. Page 63

Shifting the note up or down on the keyboard ..................................... [UTILITY] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF2] KBD → Transpose .................. Page 63

Shifting the note up or down in the tone generator block........................ [UTILITY] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF1] TG → NoteShift ................ Page 260

Adjusting the tuning to other instruments........................................................ [UTILITY] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF1] TG → Tune ................ Page 260

• In the Voice mode

Setting the tuning system for the voice

[VOICE] → Voice selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF2] PLY MODE → M.TuningNo. ............................................ Page 190

Adjusting the pitch for each Element of the edited Voice in semitones

[VOICE] → Voice selection→ [EDIT] → Element selection→ [F2] PITCH → [SF1] TUNE → Coarse .................................................................. Page 196

Finely adjusting the pitch for each Element of the edited Voice

[VOICE] → Voice selection→ [EDIT] → Element selection→ [F2] PITCH → [SF1] TUNE → Tune ...................................................................... Page 196

Setting the all notes (keys) to the same pitch

[VOICE] → Voice selection→ [EDIT] → Element selection→ [F2] PITCH → [SF4] KEY FLW → PitchSens = 0 .................................................. Page 197

• In the Performance mode

Shifting the note up or down for each Part of the edited Performance

[PERFORM] → Performance selection → [EDIT] → Part selection → [F4] TONE → [SF1] TUNE → NoteShift ................................................... Page 218

Finely adjusting the pitch for each Part of the edited Performance

[PERFORM] → Performance selection → [EDIT] → Part selection → [F4] TONE → [SF1] TUNE → Detune ......................................................Page 218

• In the Song mode/Pattern mode

Shifting the note up or down for each Part of the current Song/Pattern

[SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song/Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → Part selection → [F4] TONE→ [SF1] TUNE → NoteShift ............... Page 236

Finely adjusting the pitch for each Part of the current Song/Pattern

[SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song/Pattern selection→ [MIXING] → [EDIT] → Part selection → [F4] TONE → [SF1] TUNE → Detune ............. Page 236

• In the Master mode

Shifting the keyboard octave up or down for each zone of the edited Master

[MASTER] → Master selection → [F2] MEMORY → ZoneSwitch = on → [EDIT] → Zone selection → [F2] NOTE → Octave ............................ Page 272

Finely adjusting the keyboard pitch for each zone of the edited Master

[MASTER] → Master selection→ [F2] MEMORY → ZoneSwitch = on → [EDIT] → Zone selection → [F2] NOTE → Transpose ........................ Page 272

Application Index

Owner’s Manual

Connecting to a computer/external MIDI instrument

• Determining which connector (among the MIDI, USB TO HOST, mLAN) is used as a MIDI input/output connector

[UTILITY] → [F5] MIDI → [SF4] OTHER → MIDI IN/OUT .....................................................................................................................................Page 265

• Using the sounds of the MOTIF ES for song playback from a MIDI sequencer ...............................................................................................Page 36

• Setting whether or not Bulk Dump data can be received

[UTILITY] → [F5] MIDI → [SF2] SWITCH → RevBulk = on/protect ......................................................................................................................Page 264

• Sounding only the external MIDI tone generator and turning the internal tone generator off

[UTILITY] → [F5] MIDI → [SF2] SWITCH → LocalCtrl = off .................................................................................................................................Page 264

• Synchronizing with an external MIDI instrument/computer

Using the MOTIF ES as a MIDI master

[UTILITY] → [F5] MIDI → [SF3] SYNC → MIDI Sync = internal, ClockOut = on, Seqctrl = out ..........................................................................Page 36

Using the MOTIF ES as a MIDI slave

[UTILITY] → [F5] MIDI → [SF3] SYNC → MIDI Sync = MIDI, ClockOut = off, Seqctrl = in ....................................................................................Page 36

Using the MOTIF ES as a MTC slave

[UTILITY] → [F5] MIDI → [SF3] SYNC → MIDI Sync = MTC, ClockOut = off, Seqctrl = in ....................................................................................Page 37

• Disabling synchronization with the external MIDI instrument/computer

Maintaining normal playback on an external MIDI sequencer, even when starting/stopping Song/Pattern playback on the MOTIF ES

[UTILITY] → [F5] MIDI → [SF3] SYNC → MIDI Sync = internal, Seqctrl = off .................................................................................... ................Page 264

Maintaining normal Song/Pattern playback on the MOTIF ES, even when starting/stopping playback on an external MIDI sequencer

[UTILITY] → [F5] MIDI → [SF3] SYNC → Seqctrl = off ...................................................................................................................... ................Page 264

• Synchronizing the LFO wave speed of the Voice with an external MIDI instrument/computer

[UTILITY] → [F5] MIDI → [SF3] SYNC → MIDI Sync = MIDI ................................................................................................................................Page 264

[VOICE] → Normal Voice selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F5] LFO → [SF1] WAVE → TempoSync = on ................................................Page 193

• Setting which MIDI events will be transmitted or recognized via the MIDI, USB TO HOST, and mLAN connectors

[SONG] or [PATTERN] → [UTILITY] → [F3] SEQ → [SF2] FILTER .......................................................................................................................Page 262

• Setting the MIDI transmit channel

Setting the MIDI transmit channel of the keyboard in the Voice mode/Performance mode

[UTILITY] → [F5] MIDI → [SF1] CH → KBDTransCh ..............................................................................................................................................Page 64

Setting the MIDI transmit channel and port for each track of a Song/Pattern

[SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song/Pattern selection → [F3] TRACK → [SF1] CHANNEL ........................................................................................Page 221

Setting the MIDI transmit channel of Arpeggio playback

[UTILITY] → [F3] VOICE → [SF3] ARP CH → TransmitCh ...................................................................................................................................Page 262

• Setting the MIDI receive channel

Setting the MIDI receive channel of the keyboard in the Voice mode/Performance mode

[UTILITY] → [F5] MIDI → [SF1] CH → BasicRcvCh .............................................................................................................................................Page 263

Setting the MIDI receive channel for each part of a Song/Pattern

[SONG] or [PATTERN]

→

Song/Pattern selection

→

[MIXING]

→

[EDIT]

→

Part selection

→

[F1] VOICE

→

[SF2] MODE

→

ReceiveCh

..................Page 235

• Setting parameters for Program Change transmission/recognition

Enabling or disabling the sending of Bank Select and Program Change messages, when selecting a Voice or Performance

[UTILITY] → [F5] MIDI → [SF2] SWITCH → BankSel, PgmChange .....................................................................................................................Page 264

Enabling or disabling selection of MOTIF ES Voices/Performances from an external MIDI device

[UTILITY] → [F5] MIDI → [SF2] SWITCH → BankSel, PgmChange .....................................................................................................................Page 264

[SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song/Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → Part selection→ [F5] RCV SW → BankSel, PgmChange ...............Page 235

Setting related parameters so that the MIDI messages produced by the Song/Pattern playback will not be transmitted via MIDI

[SONG] or [PATTERN] → [UTILITY] → [F3] SEQ → [SF2] FILTER ....................................................................................................................Page 262

• Setting whether each track playback sounds the internal tone generator or an external tone generator

[SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song/Pattern selection → [F3] TRACK → [SF2] OUT SW ..........................................................................................Page 222

Other tips

• Loading the speciﬁed ﬁle on the SmartMedia/USB storage device automatically when the power is turned on ......................................Page 135

• Setting the Mode set automatically when the power is turned on

[UTILITY] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF4] OTHER → PowerOnMode .........................................................................................................................Page 261

• Setting an individual Output connector for each key of the Drum Voice or for each part of the Performance/Song/Pattern......................Page 31

Table of Contents

Owner’s Manual

Introduction.................................................................... 6

Accessories ................................................................... 6

Main Features ................................................................ 7

How to use this manual ................................................ 8

Application Index................................... 9

The Controls & Connectors .................. 16

Front panel................................................................... 16

Rear Panel.................................................................... 22

Setting Up ............................................. 26

Power Supply............................................................... 26

About data storage to SmartMedia cards and

USB storage devices................................................... 27

Data lost and data retained when power is turned off........27

Using the SmartMedia™* cards .........................................28

Using USB storage devices................................................29

Connections................................................................. 31

Connecting to External Audio Equipment...........................31

Connecting External MIDI Instruments ...............................34

Connecting to a Computer .................................................38

Connecting Various Controllers ..........................................42

Turning the power on/off............................................ 43

Power-on Procedure ...........................................................43

Turning the MOTIF ES on/off...............................................43

Resetting the User Memory to the Initial Factory

Settings ........................................................................ 44

Basic Operation .................................... 45

Modes........................................................................... 45

Mode Structure ...................................................................45

Mode table..........................................................................46

Functions and Sub-Functions.................................... 47

Selecting a Program.................................................... 47

Moving the Cursor and Setting Parameters.............. 49

Knob (KN) and Control Slider (CS)............................ 50

Knob (KN) ...........................................................................50

Control Slider (CS) ..............................................................51

About the editing functions........................................ 51

Edit Indicator.......................................................................51

Compare Function ..............................................................52

Edit Recall Function ............................................................52

Confirmation Message................................................ 52

Information Display..................................................... 53

Note (Key) settings...................................................... 53

Naming ......................................................................... 53

Quick Guide — Playing the MOTIF ES..55

Playing the Demo Songs/Patterns .............................55

Playing the Keyboard (in the Voice Play mode)........60

Selecting a Voice ................................................................60

Using Controllers ................................................................64

Using the Arpeggio feature ................................................66

Playing the Keyboard (in the Performance Play mode)

.........67

Selecting a Performance ....................................................67

Using Controllers ................................................................69

Using the Arpeggio feature ................................................70

Assigning desired Voices to each part...............................70

Using the A/D input sound..................................................72

Using the Plug-in Board..............................................74

Available Plug-in Boards ....................................................74

Using a Single Part Plug-in Board ......................................75

Using a Multi Part Plug-in Board.........................................77

Using an Effect Plug-in Board ............................................78

Quick Guide — Advanced Course ........79

Editing a Voice.............................................................79

Normal Voice Edit ...............................................................79

Drum Voice Edit ..................................................................82

Plug-in Voice Edit................................................................85

Storing/Saving the created Voice .......................................85

Editing a Performance.................................................87

Storing/Saving the created Performance............................91

Creating a Voice by using the Sampling function....94

Sampling your voice with a microphone and creating a Normal

Voice ...................................................................................94

Sampling the sound of an audio device to create a Drum Voice

......98

Creating a Song on the MOTIF ES............................102

Recording your keyboard performance ...........................102

Creating a Pattern.............................................................106

Creating a Song................................................................117

Storing/Saving the created Song/Pattern .........................131

Using as a Master Keyboard.....................................136

Selecting a Master ............................................................136

Memorize to a Master .......................................................137

Using Zones (keyboard area)...........................................137

Quick Guide — Computer applications

....142

Setting up ...................................................................142

Controlling the instrument from a computer ..........143

Using a sequencer to play multiple Voices on the MOTIF ES

....143

Using the Multi Part Editor to create/edit Mixing settings.144

Using the Voice Editor to create/edit a Voice ...................145

Using the TWE Wave Editor to edit Samples....................146

Controlling a computer from the instrument ..........147

Setting up for Remote Control ..........................................148

Functions assigned to the panel buttons in

the Remote Control mode.................................................150

Table of Contents

Owner’s Manual

Basic Structure ....................................154

Internal Structure (System Overview)......................154

Controller Block.................................................................154

Tone Generator block .......................................................157

Sequencer Block...............................................................165

Sampling Block .................................................................172

Effect Block .......................................................................177

About MIDI..................................................................181

MIDI channels ...................................................................181

MIDI Messages Transmitted/Recognized by this synthesizer

........181

Internal Memory and File Management....................185

Maintaining data ...............................................................185

Reference ............................................188

Voice mode.................................................................188

Voice Play mode ...............................................................188

Voice Edit mode................................................................189

Voice Store mode..............................................................208

Voice Job mode ................................................................208

Performance mode ....................................................212

Performance Play mode....................................................212

Performance Edit mode ....................................................213

Performance Job mode ....................................................219

Performance Store mode ..................................................220

Song mode..................................................................221

Song Play mode................................................................221

Song Record mode...........................................................222

Song Edit mode ................................................................225

Song Job mode.................................................................226

Song Mixing mode ............................................................233

Song Mixing Edit mode.....................................................234

Song Mixing Job mode .....................................................236

Song Mixing Store mode...................................................237

Pattern mode..............................................................241

Pattern Play mode.............................................................241

Pattern Record mode........................................................243

Pattern Edit mode .............................................................244

Pattern Job mode..............................................................244

Pattern Mixing mode .........................................................248

Pattern Mixing Edit mode..................................................248

Pattern Mixing Job mode ..................................................248

Pattern Mixing Store mode................................................248

Mixing Voice mode.....................................................249

Mixing Voice Edit mode ....................................................249

Mixing Voice Store mode ..................................................250

Mixing Voice Job mode ....................................................250

Sampling mode ..........................................................251

Sampling Record mode ....................................................251

Sampling Edit mode..........................................................255

Sampling Job mode..........................................................256

Utility mode.................................................................260

Utility mode .......................................................................260

Utility Job mode ................................................................265

File mode ....................................................................266

File mode ..........................................................................266

Master mode...............................................................271

Master Play mode .............................................................271

Master Edit mode..............................................................271

Master Job mode ..............................................................273

Master Store mode............................................................274

Appendix ............................................ 275

Information Displays................................................. 275

Display Messages...................................................... 277

Troubleshooting........................................................ 279

Installing Optional Hardware.................................... 282

Available devices..............................................................282

Installation locations..........................................................282

Installation Precautions .....................................................282

Optional Plug-in Board Installation ...................................283

Optional AIEB2 or mLAN16E Installation ..........................285

Optional DIMM Installation................................................289

Glossary..................................................................... 290

Specifications............................................................ 292

Index ................................................... 294

The Controls &

Connectors

Setting Up

Basic Operation

Quick Guide —

Playing the MOTIF ES

Quick Guide —

Advanced Course

Quick Guide —

Computer

applications

Basic Structure

Reference

Voice mode

Performance mode

Song mode

Pattern mode

Mixing Voice mode

Sampling mode

Utility mode

File mode

Master mode

Appendix

The Controls & Connectors

Front Panel

Owner’s Manual

Front Panel

The Controls & Connectors

DOWN UP

OCTAVE

SCENE

SF1 SF

F1 F2

REMOTE ARPEGGIO

ON/OFF ON/OFF

R-AUDIO

G-MIDI

BYPASS

INSERTION SYSTEM

MASTER

EFFECT

VOICE

SONG

PERFORM MASTER

PATTERN FILE

EFFECT

MODE

SEQ TRANSPORT

SEQUENCER

LOCATE 1 2

INTEGRATED

SAMPLING

MIXING UTILITY

EDIT

COMPARE SCENE STORE

SET LOCATE

JOB STORE

DEMO

KNOB

CONTROL

FUNCTION

MASTER

VOLUME

ZONE 1

CS 1

VOLUME

SWIN G

CUTOFF

PAN

ASSIGN A

GATE TIME

RESONANCE

REVERB

ASSIGN B

VELOCITY

ATTACK

CHORUS

ASSIGN 1

UNITMULTIPLY

RELEASE

TEMPO

ASSIGN 2

LOW

VOLUME 2

LOW MID

VOLUME 3

HIGH MID

VOLUME 4

HIGH

CS 2

ZONE 2

CS 3

ZONE 3

CS 4

ZONE 4

ARP FX

TONE

ASSIGN

PAN/ SEND

E0 F0 G0 A0 B0 C1 D1 E1 F1 G1 A1 B1 C2

6 8

7 9 #! )

@ &

KNOB

CONTROL

FUNCTION

MASTER

VOLUME

ZONE 1

CS 1

VOLUME

SWIN G

CUTOFF

PAN

ASSIGN A

GATE TIME

RESONANCE

REVERB

ASSIGN B

VELOCITY

ATTACK

CHORUS

ASSIGN 1

UNITMULTIPLY

RELEASE

TEMPO

ASSIGN 2

LOW

VOLUME 2

LOW MID

VOLUME 3

HIGH MID

VOLUME 4

HIGH

CS 2

ZONE 2

CS 3

ZONE 3

CS 4

ZONE 4

ARP FX

TONE

ASSIGN

PAN/ SEND

SCENE

SF1 SF

2 SF3 SF4 SF5

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

INFORMATION

REMOTE ARPEGGIO

ON/OFF ON/OFF

R-AUDIO

G-MIDI

BYPASS

INSERTION SYSTEM

MASTER

EFFECT

VOICE

SONG

PERFORM MASTER

PATTERN FILE

EFFECT

MODE

SEQ TRANSPORT

SEQUENCER

LOCATE 1 2

INTEGRATED

SAMPLING

MIXING UTILITY

EDIT

COMPARE SCENE STORE

SET LOCATE

JOB STORE

DEMO

DOWN UP

OCTAVE

C1 D1 E1 F1 G1 A1 B1 C2 C3

6 8

7 9 # $ %! )

@ ^& *

MOTIF ES6

MOTIF ES7

The Controls & Connectors

Front Panel

Owner’s Manual

F2 SF3 SF4 SF5

F3 F4 F5 F6

INFORMATION

COMMON

ELEMENT/ PERF. PART/ZONE

FAVORITES

DRUM KITS

A. PIANO KEYBOARD ORGAN

PRE 5 PRE 6

PRE 1 PRE 2 PRE 3 PRE 4

MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER

Integrated Sampling Sequencer /

Modular Synthesis Plug-in System / Real- time External Control Surface

USER 1

GUITAR/

PLUCKED

SYN LEAD

ABCDEFG

87654321

MUTE

TRACK

SELECT

SECTION

GROUP

NUMBER

CATEGORY

BANK

SOLO

1412 13

SYN PAD/

CHOIR

SYN COMP

CHROMATIC

PERCUSSION

DRUM/

PERCUSSION

SE MUSICAL FX COMBI

USER 2

STRINGS

PLG 1

SLOT 1 SLOT 2 SLOT 3

BRASS

PLG 2

REED/PIPE

PLG 3

BASS

EXIT ENTER

EXECUTE

DEC/NO INC/YES

C4 C5 C6

$ % (¡ º ∞

^ •¶* £ ¢

™

‚

⁄

COMMON

ELEMENT/ PERF. PART/ZONE

FAVORITES

DRUM KITS

A. PIANO KEYBOARD ORGAN

PRE 5 PRE 6

PRE 1 PRE 2 PRE 3 PRE 4

MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER

Integrated Sampling Sequencer /

Modular Synthesis Plug-in System / Real- time External Control Surface

USER 1

GUITAR/

PLUCKED

SYN LEAD

ABCDEFG

87654321

MUTE

TRACK

SELECT

SECTION

GROUP

NUMBER

CATEGORY

BANK

SOLO

1412 13

SYN PAD/

CHOIR

SYN COMP

CHROMATIC

PERCUSSION

DRUM/

PERCUSSION

SE MUSICAL FX COMBI

USER 2

STRINGS

PLG 1

SLOT 1 SLOT 2 SLOT 3

BRASS

PLG 2

REED/PIPE

PLG 3

BASS

EXIT ENTER

EXECUTE

DEC/NO INC/YES

C4 C5 C6

(¡ º ∞

•¶£ ¢

™

‚

⁄

n When both of the [OCTAVE] buttons are turned off, each key corresponds to the note name shown in the

illustrations. Refer to this illustration when setting parameters having note name values, such as Note Limit.

Front Panel

Owner’s Manual

The Controls & Connectors

1 Keyboard

The MOTIF ES6 features a 61-key keyboard, while the

MOTIF ES7 has 76 keys and the MOTIF ES8 has 88 keys.

All are equipped with a touch response feature (both initial

touch and aftertouch). With initial touch, the instrument

senses how strongly or softly you play the keys, and uses

that playing strength to affect the sound in various ways,

depending on the selected voice. With aftertouch, the

instrument senses how much pressure you apply to the

keys while playing, and uses that pressure to affect the

sound in various ways, depending on the selected voice.

Moreover, any of a variety of functions can be assigned to

aftertouch for each voice.

2 OCTAVE [UP] and [DOWN] buttons Page 63

Use these buttons to change the note range of the

keyboard. To restore the normal octave setting, press both

buttons simultaneously.

n Because of its extended keyboard, the MOTIF ES8 does not have

OCTAVE buttons.

3 Pitch bend wheel Page 64

Controls the pitch bend effect. You can also assign other

functions to this controller.

4 Modulation wheel Page 64

Controls the modulation effect. You can also assign other

functions to this controller.

5 Ribbon controller Page 65

This Controller is touch sensitive, and is controlled by

running your ﬁnger lightly across its surface laterally.

You can also assign other functions to this controller.

6 MASTER VOLUME

Adjusts the volume of the overall sound, as output from

the rear-panel OUTPUT L/MONO and R jacks as well as

the PHONES jack.

7 Four KNOB CONTROL FUNCTION buttons and

four Knobs Page 50

These four highly versatile knobs let you adjust various

aspects or parameters of the current Voice. Use the

[KNOB CONTROL FUNCTION] buttons to change the

parameter set for the knobs. The corresponding LED

lights to indicate which group of parameters are active.

REMOTE ARPEGGIO

ON/OFF ON/OFF

R-AUDIO

G-MIDI

BYPASS

INSERTION SYSTEM

MASTER

EFFECT

VOICE

SONG

PERFORM MASTER

PATTERN FILE

EFFECT

MODE

SEQ TRANSPORT

SEQUENCER

LOCATE 1 2

INTEGRATED

SAMPLING

MIXING UTILITY

EDIT

COMPARE SCENE STORE

SET LOCATE

JOB STORE

DEMO

A-1 B-1 C0 D0 E0 F0 G0 H0 B0 C1 C2

KNOB

CONTROL

FUNCTION

MASTER

VOLUME

ZONE 1

CS 1

VOLUME

SWIN G

CUTOFF

PAN

ASSIGN A

GATE TIME

RESONANCE

REVERB

ASSIGN B

VELOCITY

ATTACK

CHORUS

ASSIGN 1

UNITMULTIPLY

RELEASE

TEMPO

ASSIGN 2

LOW

VOLUME 2

LOW MID

VOLUME 3

HIGH MID

VOLUME 4

HIGH

CS 2

ZONE 2

CS 3

ZONE 3

CS 4

ZONE 4

ARP FX

TONE

ASSIGN

PAN/ SEND

6 8

7 9 #! )

MOTIF ES8

Front Panel

Owner’s Manual

The Controls & Connectors

8 [CS1] - [CS4] (Control Slider) Page 51

These sliders control the volume of four elements which

make up a Normal Voice in the Voice mode, the volume of

four parts in the Performance mode, the volume of four

parts including the current part in the Song mode/Pattern

mode, and the volume of four zones in the Master mode.

n If all of the Control Sliders are set to the minimum, you may not

hear any sound from the instrument, even when playing the

keyboard or a song/pattern. If this is the case, raise all the sliders

to a suitable level.

n The [MASTER VOLUME] slider adjusts the output level from this

instrument. On the other hand, the Control Slider adjusts the MIDI

volume value for the corresponding element or part.

9 REMOTE buttons Page 147

The Remote mode lets you control sequencer software on

your computer from the panel controls of the instrument.

Turn the [ON/OFF] button on to enter the Remote mode.

You can use the [R-AUDIO/G-MIDI] button to switch

control between your audio tracks (red lamp) and MIDI

tracks (green lamp), when Mode A or B is set to “General”

([UTILITY] → [F4] CTL ASN → [SF4] REMOTE).

n When setting the MIDI IN/OUT parameter to “MIDI” ([UTILITY] →

[F5] MIDI → [SF4] OTHER) or setting both of Mode A and Mode B

to “off” ([UTILITY] → [F4] CTL ASN → [SF4] REMOTE), you

cannot enter the Remote mode even by pressing the REMOTE

[ON/OFF] button. Set these parameters to appropriate values

(page 148) then enter the Remote mode.

) EFFECT buttons Page 177

The extensive effect section of the instrument provides

Insertion effects (eight sets, with two effect units per set),

System effects (Reverb and Chorus), and Master effects.

The effects can be applied to the keyboard-played voices

and to Song/Pattern playback. These three buttons enable

you to turn the corresponding Effect blocks (as printed on

the panel) on or off with a single touch.

Keep in mind that the [INSERTION] and [SYSTEM] buttons

are bypass switches, while the [MASTER EFFECT] button

is an on/off switch. The distinction is important — when

the lamp of the [INSERTION] or [SYSTEM] button is on,

the effect is off (or bypassed). The [MASTER EFFECT]

button is the opposite: when the lamp is on, the Master

effect is on. Also, to access the Master Effect setting

display, press and hold the [MASTER EFFECT] button for

a second or two.

! [ARPEGGIO ON/OFF] button Page 66

Press this button to enable or disable playback of the

Arpeggio for each Voice, Performance, Song, or Pattern. If

the Arpeggio Switch of the selected part is set to off in the

Performance/Song/Pattern mode, however, pressing this

button has no effect.

SCENE

SF1 SF

2 SF3 SF4 SF5

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

COMMON

ELEMENT/ PERF. PART/ZONE

FAVORITES

DRUM KITS

A. PIANO KEYBOARD ORGAN

PRE 5 PRE 6

PRE 1 PRE 2 PRE 3 PRE 4

MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER

Integrated Sampling Sequencer /

Modular Synthesis Plug-in System / Real- time External Control Surface

USER 1

GUITAR/

PLUCKED

SYN LEAD

ABCDEFG

87654321

MUTE

TRACK

SELECT

SECTION

GROUP

NUMBER

CATEGORY

BANK

SOLO

1412 13

SYN PAD/

CHOIR

SYN COMP

CHROMATIC

PERCUSSION

DRUM/

PERCUSSION

SE MUSICAL FX COMBI

USER 2

STRINGS

PLG 1

SLOT 1 SLOT 2 SLOT 3

BRASS

PLG 2

REED/PIPE

PLG 3

BASS

INFORMATION

DEMO

EXIT ENTER

EXECUTE

DEC/NO INC/YES

C3 C4 C5 C6 C7

$ % (¡ º ∞

^ •& ¶* £ ¢

™

‚

⁄

n When [UTILITY] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF2] KBD → Octave is set to “0,” each key corresponds to the note name shown in the illustrations.

Refer to this illustration when setting a note name of a parameter like Note Limit.

Front Panel

Owner’s Manual

The Controls & Connectors

@ SEQ TRANSPORT buttons Page 56

These buttons control recording and playback of the

Song/Pattern sequence data.

[ ](Top) button

Instantly returns to the beginning of the current song or

pattern (i.e., the ﬁrst beat of the ﬁrst measure).

[ ](Reverse) button

Press brieﬂy to move back one measure at a time, or hold

to continuously rewind.

[ ](Forward) button

Press brieﬂy to move forward one measure at a time, or

hold to continuously fast-forward.

[●] (Record) button

Press this to enable recording (Song or pattern phrase).

(The indicator lights.)

[ ](Stop) button

Press to stop recording or playback.

[ ](Play) button

Press to start playback from the current point in the song

or pattern. During recording and playback, the indicator

ﬂashes at the current tempo.

# MODE buttons Page 45

These buttons select the operating modes (e.g., Voice

mode).

$ LCD Display

The large backlit LCD displays the parameters and values

related to the currently selected operation or mode.

% LCD Contrast Control Page 43

Use this control to set the LCD display for optimum

legibility.

^ [F1] - [F6] (Function) buttons Page 47

These buttons located directly below the LCD display call

up the corresponding functions indicated in the display. In

the display hierarchy, these functions [F] rank just below

the modes.

& [SF1] - [SF5] (Sub Function) buttons Page 47

These buttons located directly below the LCD display call

up the corresponding sub functions indicated in the

display. In the display hierarchy, these sub functions [SF]

rank just below the functions [F].

These buttons can be also used to store/recall the

Arpeggio type in each Play mode and Song/Pattern

Record mode. They can be also used to store/recall the

Song Scene (page 123) in the Song Play/Song Record/

Pattern Chain Record modes.

* [INFORMATION] button Page 53

For calling up a special “help” feature that shows

information about the currently selected mode. You can go

back to the previous display by pressing this button again

or pressing any other button.

Depending on the selected display, this button may be

used to call up a window for inputting characters (page

54), for inputting numbers (page 49), for selecting note

lengths (page 49), or for selecting keys or note names

(page 53).

( Data dial Page 49

For editing the currently selected parameter. To increase

the value, turn the dial right (clockwise); to decrease the

value, turn the dial left (counter-clockwise). If a parameter

with a wide value range is selected, you can change the

value in broader strokes by quickly turning the dial.

º [INC/YES] button Page 49

For increasing the value of the currently selected

parameter. Also use it to actually execute a Job or a Store

operation.

¡ [DEC/NO] button Page 49

For decreasing the value of the currently selected

parameter. Also use it to cancel a Job or a Store

operation.

n You can also use the [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons to quickly

move through parameter values in 10-unit jumps, especially those

with large ranges. Simply hold down one of the buttons (of the

direction you want to jump), and simultaneously press the other.

For example, to jump in the positive direction, hold down the [INC/

YES] button and press [DEC/NO].

™ Cursor Buttons Page 49

The cursor buttons move the “cursor” around the LCD

display screen, highlighting and selecting the various

parameters.

£ [EXIT] button Page 46

The menus and displays of this synthesizer are organized

according to a hierarchical structure.

Press this button to exit from the current display and return

to the previous level in the hierarchy.

¢ [ENTER] button

Use this button to execute a Job or a Store operation. Also

use this button to actually enter a number when selecting

a Memory or Bank for Voice or Performance. In the File

mode, use this button to go to the next lowest level in the

selected directory.

Front Panel

Owner’s Manual

The Controls & Connectors

∞ SLOT 1-3 lamps Page 284

These three lamps show the installation status of the Plug-

in Boards.

If the Plug-in Board has been correctly installed, the

corresponding SLOT lamp will light.

n The Vocal Harmony Plug-in Board (PLG100-VH) can be installed

only to slot 1. It cannot be installed to slot 2 or 3.

n The Multi part Plug-in Board (PLG100-XG) can be installed only to

slot 3. It cannot be installed to slot 1 or 2.

§ BANK buttons Page 60

Each button selects a Voice or Performance Bank.

When the [CATEGORY SEARCH] button is turned on,

these buttons can be used to select the desired category

(printed below each button). When the [SECTION] button

is turned on in the Pattern mode, these buttons are used

to select the desired section.

¶ GROUP [A] - [H] buttons Page 48

Each button selects a Voice or Performance Group.

When the [CATEGORY SEARCH] button is turned on,

these buttons can be used to select the desired category

(printed below each button). When the [SECTION] button

is turned on in the Pattern mode, these buttons are used

to select the desired section.

• NUMBER [1] - [16] buttons Page 48

Use of these buttons differs depending on the on/off

status of the [TRACK SELECT] and [MUTE] buttons.

ª [CATEGORY SEARCH] button Page 62

When this button is turned on in the Performance mode,

the lower row of [BANK] buttons (labeled A.PIANO -

REED/PIPE below the buttons) and the [GROUP] buttons

can be used to select the Performance category.

When this button is turned on in another mode, the lower

row of [BANK] buttons (labeled A.PIANO - REED/PIPE

below the buttons) and the [GROUP] buttons can be used

to select the Voice category.

‚ [SECTION] button Page 57

When this button is turned on in the Pattern mode, the

GROUP [A] - [H] buttons can be used to select Pattern

Sections A - H and the [PRE5] - [PLG3] buttons of the

BANK buttons can be used to select Pattern Sections I - P.

⁄ [TRACK SELECT] button Page 58

Turning this button on in the Song/Pattern mode enables

the NUMBER [1] - [16] buttons for selecting

corresponding Song/Pattern tracks. The on/off status of

this button affects the NUMBER [1] - [16] buttons in

different ways, depending on the selected mode. (See •

“NUMBER [1] - [16] buttons” above.)

¤ [MUTE] button Page 58

Turning this button on in the Song/Pattern mode enables

the NUMBER [1] - [16] buttons for muting corresponding

Song/Pattern tracks.

Press one of the NUMBER [1] - [16] buttons while holding

this button to solo the corresponding track of the current

selected Song/Pattern.

The on/off status of this button affects the NUMBER [1] -

[16] buttons in different ways, depending on the selected

mode. (See • “NUMBER [1] - [16] buttons” above.)

Functions of the NUMBER [1] - [16] buttons

When [TRACK

SELECT] is on

When [MUTE]

is on

When both

[TRACK SELECT]

[MUTE] are off

Voice Play mode

Keyboard

transmit channel

setting

—

Voice selection,

according to Groups

A - H

Voice Edit mode

Element selection (1 - 4) and Element

Mute setting (9 - 12)

—

Performance

Play mode

Keyboard

transmit channel

setting

Performance part

Mute setting

(1 - 4)

Performance or

Voice selection

(if cursor is located

at Voice name),

according to Groups

A - H

Performance

Edit mode

Performance part

selection (1 - 4)

Master Play

mode

Keyboard transmit

channel setting

(when memorizing

the Voice mode or

Performance

mode to the

current Master) or

Song/Pattern track

selection (when

memorizing the

Song mode or

Pattern mode to

the current

Master)

—

Master selection,

according to Groups

A - H

Master Edit

mode

Zone selection

(1 - 4)

——

Song/Pattern

Play mode

Song/Pattern

track selection

Song/Pattern

track Mute

setting

Song/Pattern

selection, according

to Groups A - H

Song/Pattern

Mixing mode

Song/Pattern part

selection

Song/Pattern part

Mute setting

Mixing Voice

Edit mode

Element selection (1- 4) and Element

Mute setting (9- 12)

—

The Controls & Connectors

Rear Panel

Owner’s Manual

Rear Panel

BREATH

ASSI

OUTTHRU

USB

TO HOSTTO DEVICEmLAN

I/O EXPANSION

AC INLET

POWER

ON OFF

MIDI

1 2 3 4 65

mLAN I/O EXPANSION

AC INLET

POWER

ON OFF

1 2 3

mLAN I/O EXPANSION

AC INLET

POWER

ON OFF

1 2 3

MOTIF ES6

MOTIF ES7

MOTIF ES8

The Controls & Connectors

Rear Panel

Owner’s Manual

GREEN

YELLOW

ORANGE

Plug-in SLOT

A/D INPUT

OUTPUT

RL/MONO

PHONES

ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT

FOOT

CONTROLLER

SSIGNABLE

SUSTAIN

FOOT

SWITCH

CARD

3.3V

GAIN

! #7 8 9 ) @

$ %

GREEN

YELLOW

ORANGE

Plug-in SLOT

A/D INPUT

OUTPUT

RL/MONO

PHONES

ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT

FOOT

CONTROLLER

BREATH

ASSIGNABLE

SUSTAINOUTTHRU

USB

TO HOSTTO DEVICE

FOOT

SWITCH

CARD

3.3V

1IN

MIDI

GAIN

4 6 ! #5 7 8 9 ) @

$ %

CARD

3.3V

USB

TO HOSTTO DEVICE

GREEN

YELLOW

ORANGE

Plug-in SLOT

A/D INPUT

OUTPUT

RL/MONO

PHONES

ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT

GAIN

FOOT

CONTROLLER

BREATH

ASSIGNABLE

SUSTAINOUTTHRU

FOOT

SWITCH

1IN

MIDI

4 6 ! #5% 7 8 9 ) @

Rear Panel

Owner’s Manual

The Controls & Connectors

1 POWER Switch Page 43

Press to turn power ON or OFF.

2 AC INLET (AC Power Cord Socket) Page 26

Be sure to plug the AC power cord into this socket before

plugging the power cord into an AC outlet.

Use only the AC power cord supplied with this instrument.

If the supplied cord is lost or damaged and needs to be

replaced, contact your Yamaha dealer.

The use of an inappropriate replacement can pose a ﬁre

and shock hazard!

3 mLAN expansion board (mLAN16E) or I/O

expansion board (AIEB2) cover Page 25

Either the mLAN expansion board (mLAN16E) or the I/O

expansion board (AIEB2) sold separately can be installed

to this instrument. With the mLAN16E board, you can

conveniently and easily hook up your MOTIF ES to other

mLAN compatible instruments or devices.

The AIEB2 board gives you additional digital I/O options,

featuring both optical and coaxial connectors. Moreover,

the board also includes three stereo ASSIGNABLE

OUTPUT pairs (six analog jacks).

4 USB connectors Page 29

This instrument is equipped with two types of USB

connectors on the rear panel – USB TO HOST and USB

TO DEVICE. The USB TO HOST connector is used to

connect this instrument to the computer via the USB

cable. The USB connection between the instrument and

the computer can only be used for transfer of MIDI data.

No audio data can be transferred via USB. The USB TO

DEVICE connector is used to connect this instrument to a

USB storage device (hard disk drive, CD-ROM drive, MO

drive, ﬂash disk, etc.) via the USB cable. This lets you

save the data created on this instrument to the external

USB storage device and load the data from the external

USB storage device to the instrument. Save/Load

operations can be performed in the File mode.

n For details about USB, see Page 29.

5 MIDI IN/OUT/THRU connectors Page 34

MIDI IN is for receiving control or performance data from

another MIDI device, such as an external sequencer.

MIDI THRU is simply for redirecting any received MIDI

data (via MIDI IN) to connected devices, allowing

convenient chaining of additional MIDI instruments.

MIDI OUT is for transmitting all control, performance and

playback data from the MOTIF to another MIDI device,

such as an external sequencer.

6 BREATH Controller Jack Page 42

Connect an optional Yamaha BC3 Breath Controller here

for expressive breath control capability.

7 FOOT SWITCH jacks Page 42

For connection of optional FC4 or FC5 Footswitches.

When connected to the SUSTAIN jack, the Footswitch

controls sustain. When connected to ASSIGNABLE, it can

control one of various different assignable functions.

8 FOOT CONTROLLER jacks Page 42

For connection of optional foot controllers (FC7, etc.).

Each jack lets you continuously control one of various

different assignable functions – such as volume, tone,

pitch, or other aspects of the sound.

9 ASSIGNABLE OUT L and R jacks Page 31

Line level audio signals are output from this instrument via

these phone jacks (1/4" mono phone plug).

These outputs are independent of the main output (at the

L/MONO and R jacks below), and can be freely assigned

to any of the Drum Voice keys or the Parts. This lets you

route speciﬁc Voices or sounds for processing with a

favorite outboard effect unit.

The parts which can be assigned to these jacks are as

follows:

• Drum Voice key to which the drum/percussion

instrument is assigned Page 203

• Any part of a Performance* Page 218

• Any part of a Song* Page 235

• Any part of a Pattern* Page 235

* Including the Audio Input part

) OUTPUT L/MONO and R jacks Page 31

Line level audio signals are output via these phone jacks.

For monophonic output, use just the L/MONO jack.

! PHONES jack Page 31

For connection to a pair of stereo headphones.

@ A/D INPUT jacks Page 33

External audio signals can be input via these phone jacks

(1/4" mono phone plug).

Various devices such as microphone, guitar, bass, CD

player, synthesizer can be connected to these jacks and

their audio input signal can be sounded as the AUDIO IN

part of the Performance, Song, or Pattern.

In the Sampling mode, these jacks are used for capturing

audio data as samples. For stereo signals (such as from

audio equipment), use both jacks. For mono signals

(such as from a microphone or guitar), use only the L jack.

USB

USB is an abbreviation for Universal Serial Bus. It is a serial

interface for connecting a computer with peripheral devices,

and enables much faster data transfer compared to

conventional serial port connections.

Rear Panel

Owner’s Manual

The Controls & Connectors

# GAIN knob Page 73

For adjusting the input gain of the audio at the A/D INPUT

jacks (above). Depending on the connected device

(microphone, CD player, etc.), you may need to adjust this

for optimum level.

$ CARD (Card slot) Page 27

Insert a SmartMedia (memory) card here to transfer

various data to/from this instrument. Read carefully the

precautions on using a SmartMedia (page 28) before

inserting a SmartMedia card.

% Plug-in board cover Page 283

Installing an optional Plug-in Board to this instrument lets

you greatly expand the sonic palette of the instrument. Up

to three boards can be installed to the rear panel.

■ When the optional mLAN16E has been

installed:

1 mLAN (IEEE1394) connector 1, 2

For connecting mLAN devices or IEEE1394-compatible

(FireWire) devices via standard IEEE1394 (6-pin) cables.

* The name “mLAN” and its logo (above) are trademarks.

n The digital audio output via the mLAN connector is ﬁxed to a

resolution of 24 bit/44.1 kHz.

■ When the optional AIEB2 has been

installed:

1 OPTICAL IN, OUT connectors Pages 33, 34

Use these connectors to input or output digital signals

over optical-ﬁber cable. You can use the OPTICAL IN to

record a digital signal at frequencies of 48kHz, 44.1kHz,

or 32kHz. The OPTICAL OUT connector outputs a digital

signal of 44.1kHz.

2 DIGITAL IN, OUT connectors Pages 33, 34

Use these connectors to input or output digital signals

over coaxial (RCA-pin) cable. The digital signal format is

CD/DAT (S/P DIF). You can use the DIGITAL IN connector

to record a digital signal at frequencies of 48kHz,

44.1kHz, or 32kHz. The DIGITAL OUT connector outputs a

digital signal of 44.1kHz.

3 ASSIGNABLE OUT jacks (AS1 to AS6) Page 31

Line level audio signals are output from this instrument via

these phone jacks (1/4" mono phone plug).

These outputs are independent of the main output (at the

L/MONO and R jacks above), and can be freely assigned

to any of the Drum Voice key or the Parts. This lets you

route speciﬁc Voices or sounds for processing with your

favorite outboard effect unit.

The parts which can be assigned to these jacks are as

follows:

• Drum Voice key to which the drum/percussion instrument is

assigned Page 203

• Any part of a Performance* Page 218

• Any part of a Song* Page 235

• Any part of a Pattern* Page 235

* Including the Audio Input part

n Digital audio output via the OPTICAL OUT connector or DIGITAL

OUT connector can be changed between 20-bit and 24-bit

resolution in the [UTILITY] → [F2] I/O → [SF2] OUTPUT display.

The frequency, however, is ﬁxed at 44.1 kHz.

About mLAN

“mLAN” is a digital network designed for musical applications.

It uses and extends the industry standard IEEE 1394 high

performance serial bus.

For details, refer to the Guide Book of the mLAN16E.

mLAN EXPANSION BOARD mLAN16E

ACTIVE

MADE IN JAPAN

IEEE1394

1 2 3

Setting Up

Power Supply

Owner’s Manual

Please read this section carefully before using your new MOTIF ES.

This section explains how to connect your MOTIF ES to an AC power source, external audio and MIDI devices, and a computer

system. Only switch the MOTIF ES on after you have made all the necessary connections (page 43).

Power Supply

1 Make sure the POWER switch on the MOTIF ES is set to OFF.

2 Connect the supplied power cord to the AC INLET on the instrument’s rear panel.

3 Connect the other end of the power cord to an AC outlet. Make sure your MOTIF ES meets the voltage requirement for the

country or region in which it is being used.

Make sure your MOTIF ES is rated for the AC voltage supplied in the area in which it is to be used (as listed on the rear panel). Connecting the unit to the

wrong AC supply can cause serious damage to the internal circuitry and may even pose a shock hazard!

Use only the AC power cord supplied with the MOTIF ES. If the supplied cord is lost or damaged and needs to be replaced, contact your Yamaha dealer. The

use of an inappropriate replacement can pose a ﬁre and shock hazard!

The type of AC power cord provided with the MOTIF ES may be different depending on the country in which it is purchased (a third prong may be provided

for grounding purposes). Improper connection of the grounding conductor can create the risk of electrical shock. Do NOT modify the plug provided with

the MOTIF ES. If the plug will not ﬁt the outlet, have a proper outlet installed by a qualiﬁed electrician. Do not use a plug adapter which defeats the

grounding conductor.

Setting Up

Rear panel

AC INLET

Power cord (included)

WARNIN

Setting Up

About data storage to SmartMedia cards and USB storage devices

Owner’s Manual

About data storage to SmartMedia cards and

USB storage devices

As you make music with this instrument, you’ll create a wide variety of data — such as custom Voice data (including Voices,

Performances, etc.), MIDI sequence data (Songs, Patterns, Arpeggios), and waveform data (with the Sampling function).

Naturally, you’ll want to store this data for safekeeping and future use, and the instrument is equipped with a variety of storage

options. You can save your data to SmartMedia card (inserted to the Card slot) or to a USB storage device (connected to the

USB TO DEVICE connector). To recall the data, use the Load function. (Save and Load operations are done in the File mode;

see page 266.)

Keep in mind that certain types of data are lost when you turn off the power and should be properly saved. Also keep in mind

that since there are several storage options (including SmartMedia card, hard disk, ﬂash disk, etc.), you should always have the

proper media formatted and on hand BEFORE you start creating or editing data.

n The Save/Load operation in the File mode can be executed between the SmartMedia card inserted to the CARD slot on the rear panel and the instrument, or

between the USB storage device connected to the USB TO DEVICE connector and the instrument. Please keep in mind that the Save /Load operation in the

File mode cannot be executed between the SmartMedia card inserted to the CARD slot on the rear panel and the USB storage device connected to the USB

TO DEVICE connector. In short, data can be saved/loaded between the storage media and the instrument, but not between the two storage media devices.

Data lost and data retained when power is turned off

The chart below lists the data types you can create on the instrument and the internal memory locations to which they are stored,

permanently or temporarily.

Make sure to save any data remaining in DRAM to SmartMedia or a USB storage device before turning off the power, other wise the data will be lost.

* Includes the Mixing settings (pages 103, 127)

** If you create the User Voices or Sample Voices by using the Sampling function, the corresponding Waveforms can be saved automatically by

saving the User Voice data or Song/Pattern data to the SmartMedia/USB storage device.

***

Song Mixing/Pattern Mixing can be stored as Song/Pattern data and as a Mixing Template (which are not associated with a speciﬁc Song/Pattern).

n For details about the data types you can create on this instrument, the internal memory locations to which they are stored, and ﬁle types when saving the

created data to the SmartMedia/USB storage device, refer to “Memory Structure” on page 186.

Data of up to 128 MB can be saved to a SmartMedia card inserted to the CARD slot on the rear panel. Yamaha recommends the use of a large-capacity USB

storage device, since you may want to save data more 128 MB — especially if you’ve installed optional DIMMs (page 289) and are using the Sampling feature.

Data types Page Mode in which data is created Internal memory types to which data is stored

Voice 79 Voice mode Flash ROM

Mixing Voice 105 Mixing Voice mode DRAM ➜ Will be lost when turning the power off!

Performance 87 Performance mode Flash ROM

Song* 117 Song mode DRAM ➜ Will be lost when turning the power off!

Song Chain 59 Song Chain mode DRAM ➜ Will be lost when turning the power off!

Pattern* 106 Pattern mode DRAM ➜ Will be lost when turning the power off!

Pattern Chain 115 Pattern Chain mode DRAM ➜ Will be lost when turning the power off!

Phrase (Pattern) 110 Pattern mode DRAM ➜ Will be lost when turning the power off!

Arpeggio 130 Song mode, Pattern mode Flash ROM

Master 136 Master mode Flash ROM

Waveform** 94 Sampling mode DIMM (DRAM) ➜ Will be lost when turning the power off!

Mixing Template*** 103 Song Mixing mode, Pattern Mixing mode Flash ROM

System settings 185 Utility mode Flash ROM

MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER

MOTIF ES

SmartMedia (page 28)

USB TO DEVICE connector

USB storage device (page 29)

CAUTION

About data storage to SmartMedia cards and USB storage devices

Owner’s Manual

Setting Up

Using the SmartMedia™* cards

Be sure to handle SmartMedia cards with care. Follow the important precautions below.

* SmartMedia is a trademark of Toshiba Corporation.

■ Compatible SmartMedia card Type

3.3V (3V) SmartMedia cards can be used. 5V type

SmartMedia cards are not compatible with this instrument.

■ Memory Capacity

There are seven types of SmartMedia cards: 2MB/4MB/8MB/

16MB/32MB/64MB/128MB. Keep in mind that only

SmartMedia cards conforming to SSFDC standards (bearing

the SmartMedia logo) can be used.

■ Inserting/Removing SmartMedia cards

Inserting a SmartMedia card

With the gold-plated contact side facing down, insert the

SmartMedia card ﬁrmly but carefully into the card slot, as far

as it will go. Be careful not to insert the card upside down or

back side in. Also, do not insert anything else into the slot,

other than a proper SmartMedia card.

Removing a SmartMedia card

Before removing the SmartMedia card, be sure to conﬁrm that

the SmartMedia card is not in use, or it is not being accessed

by the instrument. Then pull the SmartMedia card out slowly

by hand. If the SmartMedia card is being accessed*, a

message indicating that it is in use appears on the

instrument’s display.

* This includes all save, load, format, delete and create directory

operations for the SmartMedia card. Also, be aware that the

instrument will automatically access the SmartMedia card to check

the media type when it is inserted while the instrument is turned on.

Never attempt to remove the SmartMedia card or turn the power off during

accessing. Doing so can damage the data on the instrument/SmartMedia

card and possibly the SmartMedia card itself.

■ Formatting SmartMedia cards

Before using a SmartMedia card with your instrument it must

ﬁrst be formatted (page 268). Once it is formatted all data on

it will be erased. Make sure that no important data is

contained on the card beforehand.

n The SmartMedia cards formatted with this instrument may be

unusable with other instruments or devices.

■ About the SmartMedia cards

Handle SmartMedia cards with care!

• SmartMedia cards are very sensitive and can be damaged

by static electricity. Before handling a SmartMedia card,

make sure to discharge any static electricity in your body by

touching something made of metal, such as a door knob or

aluminum blinds.

• Be sure to remove the SmartMedia card from the CARD slot

when it is not in use for a long time.

• Do not expose the SmartMedia card to direct sunlight,

extremely high or low temperatures, or excessive humidity,

dust or liquids.

• Do not place heavy objects on a SmartMedia card or bend

or apply pressure to the SmartMedia card in any way.

• Never touch the gold-plated contact with your ﬁngers or let

it come in contact with any other metallic or hard surface.

• Do not expose the SmartMedia card to magnetic ﬁelds,

such as those produced by televisions, speakers, motors,

etc., since magnetic ﬁelds can partially or completely erase

data on the SmartMedia card, rendering it unreadable.

• Do not attach anything other than the provided labels to a

SmartMedia card. Also make sure that labels are attached

in the proper location.

Protecting your data (write-protect)

To prevent important data from being inadvertently erased,

apply the write-protect seal (provided with the SmartMedia

card) to the circle spot indicated on the card. If you are

saving data to the card, make sure to remove the write-protect

seal. Do not reuse a seal that has been removed; it may not

stick properly to the card and could come off in the slot.

■ Data Backup

For maximum data security Yamaha recommends that you

keep two copies of important data on separate SmartMedia

cards. This gives you a backup if one SmartMedia card is lost

or damaged.

■ Burglarproof Lock

This instrument is equipped with a burglarproof lock for the

SmartMedia card. If necessity arises, install the burglarproof

lock onto the instrument.

To install the burglarproof lock:

1 Remove the metallic part using a Phillips screwdriver.

2 Turn the metallic part upside down and replace it in the

new position.

CAUTION

About data storage to SmartMedia cards and USB storage devices

Owner’s Manual

Setting Up

Using USB storage devices

When using USB storage devices, make sure to connect them to the USB TO DEVICE connector, and follow the important

precautions below.

■ Compatible USB devices

Connect only a USB storage device (such as hard disk, CD-

ROM, ﬂash disk and other drives) to the USB TO DEVICE

connector. Other devices such as a computer keyboard or

mouse cannot be used.

Both bus-powered (powered by the host device) or self-

powered (battery or external power supply) types can be

used.

The MOTIF ES does not necessarily support all commercially

available USB storage devices. Yamaha cannot guarantee

operation of USB storage devices that you purchase. Before

purchasing USB storage devices, please consult your

Yamaha dealer, or an authorized Yamaha distributor (see list

at end of the Owner’s Manual) for advice, or see the following

page:

http://www.yamahasynth.com/

n Although CD-R/W drives can be used to load data to the instrument,

they cannot be used for saving data. However, you can transfer data

to a computer and save data to a CD using the CD-R/W drive on the

computer.

■ Formatting USB storage media

When a USB storage device is connected or media is

inserted, a “Disk or card unformatted” message may appear

in the LCD display, indicating that the device or media must

be formatted for use. Execute the Format operation in the File

mode (page 268).

■ Protecting your data (write-protect)

To prevent important data from being inadvertently erased,

apply the write-protect provided with each storage device or

media.

If you are saving data to the USB storage device, make sure

to remove the write-protect.

Precautions when using the USB TO DEVICE

connector

• Never turn the USB device’s power on/off and never plug/unplug

the USB cable when the connected USB storage device is the self-

powered type. Doing so may result in the operation of the

synthesizer “freezing” or hanging up.

• While the instrument is accessing data (such as in the Save, Load

and Delete operations in the File mode), do NOT unplug the USB

cable, do NOT remove the media from the device, and do NOT turn

the power off to either device. Doing so may corrupt the data on

either or both devices.

CAUTION

USB connector types

There are two different types of USB connectors, and the

rear panel of the instrument features both. Take care not

to confuse the two.

■ USB TO HOST connector

This type is used to connect the instrument to a

computer, and allows you to transfer MIDI data between

the devices. Unlike MIDI, USB can handle multiple ports

via a single cable.

USB cables have different connectors on each end: the

A type and the B type. Connect the A type to your

computer and the B type to the USB TO HOST

connector.

■ USB TO DEVICE connector

This type is used to connect the instrument to a USB

storage device, and allows you to save data you’ve

created to the connected device, as well as load data

from the connected device. Save and Load operations

are executed in the File mode.

USB cables have different connectors on each end: the

A type and the B type. Connect the A type to the USB TO

HOST connector and the B type to the USB storage

device.

n The computer cannot access the USB storage device

connected to the MOTIF ES’s USB TO DEVICE connector, even

if connecting as shown above. Only from the File mode on the

instrument itself can you access the data on the USB storage

device connected to the USB TO DEVICE connector.

n Though the MOTIF ES supports the USB 1.1 standard, you can

connect and use a USB 2.0 storage device with the MOTIF ES.

However, note that the transfer speed complies to USB 1.1.

MOTIF ES

MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER

MIDI data transfer

Connecting to a computer

Connecting to a

USB storage device

(hard disk, CD-ROM,

ﬂash disk and other

drives)

Saving/Loading data in

the File mode (page 266)

A typeB type

USB TO DEVICE

connector

USB TO HOST

connector

About data storage to SmartMedia cards and USB storage devices

Owner’s Manual

Setting Up

Basic settings for using SmartMedia or a USB

storage device

1 Press the [FILE] button to enter the File mode.

2 Press the [SF1] CURRENT button to check

which device is selected.

When Current is set to “CARD”

The instrument recognizes the SmartMedia inserted to the

Card slot.

When Current is set to “USB”

The instrument recognizes the USB storage device.

3 Set Current to “CARD” if you wish to access the

SmartMedia, or set Current to “USB” if you wish to

access the USB storage device.

If the USB storage device supports multiple types of media,

you’ll need to set the Slot number after setting Current to

“USB.” To check which media corresponds to which USB

number (1 or 2) and which slot number, see the Volume Label

or Partition setting in this window.

Once you’ve made the settings above, you can perform

any of the other File operations (in the bottom tabs, called

up with the [F2] - [F5] buttons).

When a USB storage device is connected or media is inserted, a

“Disk or card unformatted” message may appear in the LCD display,

indicating that the device or media must be formatted for use.

Execute the Format operation in the File mode (page 268).

Backing up your data to a computer

• Backing up MOTIF ES data to a computer

Once you’ve saved data to a SmartMedia card or USB

storage device, you can copy the data to the hard disk

of your computer, then archive and organize the ﬁles

as desired. Simply reconnect the device as shown

below.

n Though the example here shows the use of a connected USB

storage device, you can also back up your created data that

you’ve saved to a SmartMedia inserted to the CARD slot on

the rear panel.

• Loading data from a computer to the MOTIF ES

Data and ﬁles contained on the hard disk of a computer

can be loaded to the MOTIF ES by copying them ﬁrst to

the storage media, then transferring them to the

instrument.

In this way, you can use data created on the computer or

another instrument with the MOTIF ES. For example, you

can load Standard MIDI ﬁles to the instrument as Song/

Pattern data, or import audio WAV or AIFF ﬁles for use as

waveform data.

Volume Label of the selected device

TIP

MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER

MOTIF ES

MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER

MOTIF ES

Saving created data to the USB storage device in the File mode (page 266)

Computer

USB storage device

USB TO DEVICE connector

Disconnect the USB storage

device from the synthesizer and

connect it to the computer

Backing up data to a computer and organizing ﬁles/folders

Computer

USB storage device

MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER

MOTIF ES

MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER

MOTIF ES

Computer

USB storage device

Computer

USB storage device

Copying the ﬁles of the hard disk of the computer to the USB storage device

Disconnect the USB storage

device from the computer and

connect it to the synthesizer

Loading ﬁles on the USB storage device to the synthesizer in the

File mode (page 266)

USB TO DEVICE connector

Setting Up

Connections

Owner’s Manual

Connections

Connecting to External Audio Equipment

Since the MOTIF ES has no built-in speakers, you’ll need an external audio system or a set of stereo headphones to properly

monitor it. The following illustrations show various connection examples; use the one most similar to your intended setup.

Audio Output

■ Connecting stereo powered speakers (analog output)

For optimum, accurate reproduction of the instrument’s rich sounds, effects and full stereo image, use a pair of powered

speakers. Connect the powered speakers to the OUTPUT L/MONO and R jacks on the rear panel.

n When using just one powered speaker, connect it to the OUTPUT L/MONO jack on the rear panel.

■ Connecting a mixer

There are extra audio outputs in addition to the OUTPUT (L/MONO and R) jacks. Connect these outputs to a mixer for separately

controlling the analog outputs of Drum keys or parts (Performance, Song, and Pattern). You can expand the output capabilities

by installing the optional I/O board (AIEB2) or the optional mLAN16E. Installing the AIEB2 adds six extra OUTPUT jacks, while

installing the mLAN16E expands the output capabilities with fourteen addition digital outputs, over a single FireWire (IEEE 1394)

connector/cable. For details on how to set the Part/output jack assignments, refer to the chart below.

Outputting separate notes

(keys) of a Drum Voice

Determined from the OutputSel parameter (as selected below) as Drum Voice data. Page 203

[VOICE] ➞ Drum Voice selection ➞ [EDIT] ➞ Drum Key selection ➞ [F1] OSC ➞ [SF2] OUTPUT ➞ OutputSel

This setting is available for the Part for which the OutputSel parameter is set to “drum” in another mode

(e.g., Performance or Song).

Outputting separate Parts

of a Performance

Determined from the OutputSel parameter (as selected below). Page 218

[PERFORM] ➞ Performance selection ➞ [EDIT] ➞ Part selection ➞ [F2] OUTPUT ➞ [SF3] SELECT ➞ OutputSel

Assigning an audio input Part of a Performance to an output is done from the OutputSel parameter (as selected

below).

[PERFORM] ➞ Performance selection ➞ [EDIT] ➞ [COMMON] ➞ [F5] AUDIO IN ➞ [SF1] OUTPUT ➞ OutputSel

Outputting separate Parts

of a Song

Determined from the OutputSel parameter (as selected below). Page 235

[SONG] ➞ Song selection ➞ [MIXING] ➞ [EDIT] ➞ Part selection ➞ [F2] OUTPUT ➞ [SF3] SELECT ➞ OutputSel

Assigning an audio input Part of a Song to an output is done from the OutputSel parameter (as selected below).

[SONG] ➞ Song selection ➞ [MIXING] ➞ [EDIT] ➞ [COMMON] ➞ [F5] AUDIO IN ➞ [SF1] OUTPUT ➞ OutputSel

Outputting separate Parts

of a Pattern

Determined from the OutputSel parameter (as selected below). Page 235

[PATTERN] ➞ Pattern selection ➞ [MIXING] ➞ [EDIT] ➞ Part selection ➞ [F2] OUTPUT ➞ [SF3] SELECT ➞

OutputSel

Assigning an audio input Part of a Pattern to an output is done from the OutputSel parameter (as selected below).

[PATTERN] ➞ Pattern selection ➞ [MIXING] ➞ [EDIT] ➞ [COMMON] ➞ [F5] AUDIO IN ➞ [SF1] OUTPUT ➞ OutputSel

MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER

MOTIF ES

OUTPUT L/MONO

OUTPUT R

PHONES

Powered speaker (Left)

Powered speaker (Right)

Headphones

Setting Up

Connections

Owner’s Manual

The following settings can be made from the parameter pages listed above.

* Available only when the optional AIEB2 board or mLAN16E board has been installed.

** Available only when the optional mLAN16E board has been installed.

Connection example when the optional AIEB2 board has been installed (analog output)

Connection example when the optional mLAN16E board has been installed (analog and digital output)

n About the main output jacks and the Assignable Output jacks

• Connecting a set of headphones to the PHONES jack does not affect the sound output from the OUTPUT L/MONO and R jacks. The sound monitored

through the headphones is identical to the sound of the OUTPUT L/MONO and R jacks.

• Any parts assigned to the ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT jacks (including those of the optional AIEB2 interface or mLAN16E interface) will not be output through

the OUTPUT L/MONO and R jacks or PHONES jack.

• The System Effects (Reverb, Chorus), the Master EQ, and the Master Effect are not applied to the sound output through the ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT jacks

(including those of the optional AIEB2 interface or mLAN16E interface). (Only the Part EQ and the Insertion Effect are applied.)

LCD Output jacks Stereo/Mono LCD Output jacks Stereo/Mono

L&R OUTPUT L and R Stereo asL ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT L Mono

asL&R ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT L and R Stereo asR ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT R Mono

as1&2 ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT 1 and 2 Stereo (1: L, 2: R) * as1 ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT 1 Mono *

as3&4 ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT 3 and 4 Stereo (3: L, 4: R) * : : :

as5&6 ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT 5 and 6 Stereo (5: L, 6: R) * as6 ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT 6 Mono *

as7&8 ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT 7 and 8 Stereo (7: L, 8: R) ** as7 ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT 7 Mono **

as9&10 ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT 9 and 10 Stereo (9: L, 10: R) ** : : :

as11&12 ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT 11and 12 Stereo (11: L, 12: R) ** as14 ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT 14 Mono **

as13&14 ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT 13 and 14 Stereo (13: L, 14: R) **

ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT R

ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT L

OUTPUT R

OUTPUT L/MONO

MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER

MOTIF ES

AIEB2

OUTPUT L

OUTPUT R

Pro R3

Headphones

PHONE jack

Mixer Ampliﬁer

Speaker

(Left)

Speaker

(Right)

ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT R

ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT L

OUTPUT R

OUTPUT L/MONO

MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER

MOTIF ES

mLAN16E

OUTPUT L

OUTPUT R

Headphones

PHONE jack

Mixer

Ampliﬁer

Speaker

(Left)

Speaker

(Right)

IEEE1394 cable

Setting Up

Connections

Owner’s Manual

■ Digital Output using the optional AIEB2

When the optional AIEB2 board has been installed to the rear panel, the sound output through the OUTPUT jacks by analog can

also be output by digital through the OPTICAL OUTPUT jack and the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. Using these digital output jacks,

you can record the keyboard performance or Song/Pattern playback of this synthesizer to external media (e.g., an MD recorder)

with exceptionally high-quality sound.

n The digital output resolution of the optionally installed AIEB2 board can be set in the UTILITY mode with the following operation.

Audio Input

■ Connecting a microphone or other audio equipment to the A/D INPUT jacks (analog input)

External instruments and audio equipment, such as a microphone, guitar, bass, CD player or even another synthesizer/keyboard

can be connected to the A/D INPUT jacks. This audio can be used as input for the AUDIO IN Part in the Performance/Song/

Pattern mode, and can be used to create samples with the Sampling function (page 172). With the use of an optional PLG100-

VH Plug-in Board, you can even apply an automatic vocal harmony effect to the microphone sound.

n Depending on the connected equipment, change the parameter settings in the Utility mode as needed, with the following operations.

• When the output level of the connected equipment (such as a microphone, guitar, bass) is low:

• When the output level of the connected equipment (such as a synthesizer, keyboard, CD player) is high:

n After the above connections are complete, you may need to adjust the input gain of the audio source using the GAIN knob (page 73).

n The audio input sound is not available in the Voice mode because the Voice mode does not have an AUDIO IN Part.

[UTILITY] ➞ [F2] I/O ➞ [SF2] OUTPUT Page 261

[UTILITY] ➞ [F2] I/O ➞ [SF1] INPUT ➞ Mic/Line = mic

[UTILITY] ➞ [F2] I/O ➞ [SF1] INPUT ➞ Mic/Line = line

MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER

MOTIF ES

DAT DAT

OPTICAL

INPUT

DIGITAL

INPUT

DIGITAL OUTPUTOPTICAL OUTPUT

AIEB2

Recording

DAT or CD recorder

Coaxial cable

Optical cable

MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER

MOTIF ES

A/D INPUT R

MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER

MOTIF ES

MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER

MOTIF ES

MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER

MOTIF ES

A/D INPUT L A/D INPUT L A/D INPUT L

Stereo audio equipment

(CD player, etc.)

Microphone (MONO)

Apply effects to the

microphone sound by

using the Vocal

Harmony Plug-in board

(PLG100-VH)

Bass

Guitar

Setting Up

Connections

Owner’s Manual

■ Digital Input using the optional AIEB2

By installing the optional AIEB2 I/O expansion board, you can directly record digital audio from digital sources — such as a CD

player or DAT deck. For maximum compatibility and ﬂexibility, the AIEB2 board includes two different input types: OPTICAL

(optical ﬁber) and DIGITAL (coaxial cable).

n Either one of the connectors (OPTICAL or DIGITAL) can be used; however, both cannot be used at the same time. Select which connector is used for digital

input in the Utility mode with the following operation.

■ Digital Input using the optional mLAN16E

The optional mLAN16E allows you to connect this instrument to an mLAN device or computer, giving you high-speed audio and

MIDI data transfer between devices with just one IEEE 1394 cable connection.

Connecting External MIDI Instruments

With a standard MIDI cable (available separately), you can connect an external MIDI device, and control it from the MOTIF ES.

Likewise, you can use an external MIDI device (such as a keyboard or sequencer) to control the MOTIF ES sounds. Below are

several different MIDI connection examples; use the one most similar to your intended setup.

n Any one of the these interfaces can be used for MIDI data transmission/reception: the MIDI connectors, the mLAN connector (when an optional mLAN16E

has been installed), or the USB connector. However, they cannot be used at the same time. Select which connector is used for MIDI data transfer in the

Utility mode with the following operation.

■ Controlling from an external MIDI keyboard

Use an external keyboard to remotely select and play Voices of the MOTIF ES.

[UTILITY] ➞ [F2] I/O ➞ [SF1] INPUT ➞ Digital Page 261

[UTILITY] ➞ [F5] MIDI ➞ [SF4] OTHER ➞ MIDI IN/OUT Page 265

MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER

MOTIF ES

DAT

MOTIF ES

DAT

OPTICAL

OUTPUT

DIGITAL

OUTPUTDIGITAL INPUT

OPTICAL INPUT

AIEB2

MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER

AIEB2

Sampling

Optical cable

DAT or CD recorder

Sampling

Coaxial cable

DAT or CD recorder

mLAN16E

MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER

MOTIF ES

IEEE1394

mLAN device

(Data Rate S400)

IEEE1394 cable

Computer with an IEEE1394 interface

MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER

MOTIF ES

MIDI IN

MIDI OUT

External MIDI keyboard or synthesizer, such as

the S/SY/EX series

Setting Up

Connections

Owner’s Manual

■ Controlling an external MIDI keyboard from this synthesizer

This connection lets you sound an external MIDI tone generator (synthesizer, tone generator module, etc.) by playing the MOTIF

ES or playing back the Song/Pattern of the MOTIF ES. Use this connection when you wish to sound the other instrument as well

as the MOTIF ES.

MIDI Transmit Channel and Receive Channel

Make sure match the MIDI Transmit Channel of the external MIDI instrument with the MIDI Receive Channel of the MOTIF ES. For

details on setting the MIDI Transmit Channel of the external MIDI instrument, refer to the Owner’s Manual of the MIDI instrument.

For details on setting the MIDI Receive Channel of the MOTIF ES, check the following points.

• In the Voice mode/Performance mode (using the MOTIF ES as a single timbre tone generator)

Check the MIDI Basic Receive Channel with the following operation.

If necessary, change this parameter to the same number as the MIDI Transmit Channel of the external MIDI instrument.

• In the Song mode/Pattern mode (using the MOTIF ES as a multi-timbral tone generator)

Check the MIDI Receive Channel for each part of the Song/Pattern with the following operation.

Change the settings of the desired parts to match the MIDI Transmit Channel settings on the external MIDI instrument. Please note that all

the parts whose MIDI Receive Channel are same as MIDI Transmit Channel of the external MIDI instrument are sounded by your keyboard

performance.

n The functions of the internal tone generator differ depending on whether the Voice/Performance mode (single timbre, keyboard playback) or the

Song/Pattern mode (multi-timbral, sequencer playback) is selected. For details, see page 163.

Splitting the sound between the MOTIF ES and an external tone generator by MIDI channel (Part 1)

Using the connection example shown above, you can play both instruments and have them separately sound different

parts — for example, having your keyboard performance sound the external instrument while the Song/Pattern plays the

sounds of the MOTIF ES. Check the following points.

• In the Voice mode/Performance mode

You can check the MIDI Transmit Channel at the right corner of the [F1] PLAY display in the Voice Play mode/Performance Play mode.

If necessary, you can change the MIDI Transmit Channel by turning the [TRACK SELECT] button on and entering the desired value with the

[NUMBER] buttons.

When you wish to sound only the external tone generator, set Master Volume to “0” or set Local Control to “off” with the following operation.

About how to set the MIDI Receive Channel of the external MIDI instrument, refer to the Owner’s Manual of the external MIDI instrument.

• In the Song mode/Pattern mode

You can check the MIDI Transmit Channel for each track of the current Song/Pattern with the following operation. Change this setting as

necessary.

Alternately, you can set the output destination (Internal or external MIDI tone generator) for each track from the following display.

In this case, you’ll need to set the external MIDI tone generator to multi-timbral operation and set the MIDI Receive Channel for each part.

For details, refer to the owner’s manual of the external MIDI tone generator.

Alternately, you can have your keyboard performance split and assigned to different MIDI channels by using the Zone settings in the

Master mode. (See page 137.)

n The functions of the internal tone generator differ depending on whether the Voice/Performance mode (single timbre, keyboard playback) or the

Song/Pattern mode (multi-timbral, sequencer playback) is selected. For details, see page 163.

[UTILITY] ➞ [F5] MIDI ➞ [SF1] CH ➞ BasicRcvCh

[SONG] or [PATTERN] ➞ [MIXING] ➞ [EDIT] ➞ Part selection ➞ [F1] VOICE ➞ [SF2] MODE ➞ ReceiveCh

MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER

MOTIF ES

MIDI OUT

MIDI IN

External MIDI keyboard or synthesizer, such as

the S/SY/EX series

TIP

[UTILITY] ➞ [F5] MIDI ➞ [SF2] SWITCH ➞ LocalCtrl

[SONG] or [PATTERN] ➞ [F3] TRACK ➞ [SF1] CHANNEL

[SONG] or [PATTERN] ➞ [F3] TRACK ➞ [SF2] OUTSW

Setting Up

Connections

Owner’s Manual

■ Recording and playback using an external MIDI sequencer

In this connection example, song data on the external MIDI sequencer plays the sounds of the tone generator on the MOTIF ES.

The external song data can also be recorded to Song/Pattern tracks on the MOTIF ES.

In this case, make sure that the MOTIF ES is set to the Song mode or Pattern mode. If the instrument is set to the Voice mode or

to the Performance mode in which multi-channel MIDI messages are not recognized, the external sequence data (containing

multi-channel data) will not play back properly on the MOTIF ES. In addition, you may have to make certain MIDI

synchronization settings (see below).

■ Controlling another MIDI instrument via MIDI THRU

If you have more synthesizers and tone generators than MIDI ports, you can use the MIDI THRU jack to connect and control

additional devices. Here, the playback data of a MIDI sequencer is used to play the sounds of another MIDI instrument

(connected to the MIDI THRU connector) as well as the MOTIF ES. The MIDI THRU connector simply redirects any received

MIDI data (via MIDI IN) to connected instrument.

In this case, make sure that the MOTIF ES is set to the Song mode or Pattern mode. If the instrument is set to the Voice mode or

to the Performance mode in which multi-channel MIDI messages are not recognized, the external sequence data (containing

multi-channel data) will not play back properly on the MOTIF ES. In addition, you may have to make certain MIDI

synchronization settings (see below). Likewise, make sure to set the MIDI tone generator (connected to the MIDI THRU

connector) to the multi-timbral mode.

Beside, you need to set the MIDI synchronization related parameters of the MOTIF ES to use of the external clock from the

following display.

Synchronizing with an external MIDI instrument (Master and Slave)

The Songs and Patterns of this instrument can be synchronized to the playback of an external MIDI sequencer, To do this,

one device must be set to internal clock operation and the other (as well as all other devices to be controlled) to external

clock. The device set to internal clock serves as a reference for all connected devices, and is referred to as the “master”

instrument. The connected devices set to external clock are referred to as “slaves.”

When recording playback data of the external MIDI sequencer to a Song/Pattern of the MOTIF ES in the above connection

example, make sure to set the MIDI synchronization parameter to the use of external clock in the Utility mode with the

following operation.

n For details on how to record the playback data of an external MIDI sequencer to a Song on the MOTIF ES, see page 143.

[UTILITY] ➞ [F5] MIDI ➞ [SF3] SYNC ➞ MIDI Sync = MIDI

MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER

MOTIF ES

MIDI OUTMIDI IN

Sounding the MOTIF ES tone generator from a

MIDI sequencer, such as the QX/QY series,

RM1x, RS7000

[UTILITY] ➞ [F5] MIDI ➞ [SF3] SYNC ➞ MIDI Sync = MIDI

MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER

MOTIF ES

MIDI OUT

MIDI THRUMIDI IN

MIDI OUTMIDI IN MIDI IN

MIDI tone generator

MIDI synthesizer

MIDI sequencer such as the QY/

QX series, RM1x, RS7000

Setting Up

Connections

Owner’s Manual

■ Using an mLAN interface (when an optional mLAN16E has been installed)

The connection example shown on page 32 lets you transfer MIDI messages as well as audio data. The mLAN connection to

computer (page 39) allows you to transfer both audio and MIDI data between your MOTIF ES and a computer.

■ Connecting to an MTR (Multi Track Recorder)

Since this synthesizer can receive the MTC (MIDI Time Code) and can transmit the MMC (MIDI Machine Control), you can

produce music by synchronizing to a MTC- or MMC-compatible multi-track.

You can use two types of MTR control (illustrated below) by setting the MIDI Sync to MTC in the Utility mode, with the following

operation.

n MTC and MMC are available only in the Song mode.

• Synchronizing the MOTIF ES to the MTC signal from an external MTR

After receiving the MTC signal transmitted from the MTR by starting the MTR playback, the Song of the MOTIF ES will start at the

moment the MTC Start Offset time elapses (set from the display [UTILITY] ➞ [F5] MIDI ➞ [SF3] SYNC ➞ MTC StartOffset in the

Utility mode).

n MTC (MIDI Time Code) allows simultaneous synchronization of multiple audio devices via standard MIDI cables. It includes data corresponding to hours,

minutes, seconds, and frames. The MOTIF ES does not transmit MTC. An instrument such as the Yamaha AW4416 is necessary as an MTC master.

• Controlling an MTR by using MMC transmitted from the MOTIF ES

You can control the start/stop and fast forward/rewind of the MMC-compatible MTR from the SEQ TRANSPORT buttons on the

front panel of this synthesizer, outputting MMC messages via MIDI.

n MMC (MIDI Machine Control) allows remote control of multitrack recorders, MIDI sequencers, etc. A MMC-compatible multitrack recorder, for example, will

automatically respond to start, stop, fast forward, and rewind operations performed on the controlling sequencer, thus keeping playback of the sequencer

and multitrack recorder aligned.

Splitting the sound between the MOTIF ES and an external tone generator by MIDI channel (Part 2)

In this connection example shown above, you can split the sequence playback between the MOTIF ES and another

instrument connected to MIDI THRU and have them sound different parts.

For example, on the MOTIF ES assign the Song/Pattern parts to MIDI Receive Channels 1 through 9 with the following

operation, and set the rest of the parts (not to be sounded) to off.

On the connected MIDI tone generator, assign the parts to be sounded to MIDI Receive Channels 10 through 16, and set

the rest of the parts (not to be sounded) to off.

[UTILITY] ➞ [F5] MIDI ➞ [SF3] SYNC ➞ MIDI Sync = MTC

TIP

[SONG] or [PATTERN] ➞ [MIXING] ➞ [EDIT] ➞ Part selection ➞ [F1] VOICE ➞ [SF2] MODE ➞ ReceiveCh

MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER

MOTIF ES

MIDI IN

MTC OUT

MIDI cable

AW4416, etc.

MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER

MOTIF ES

SEQ TRANSPORT

LOCATE 1 2

MIDI IN MIDI OUTMIDI OUT MIDI IN

MIDI cable

AW4416, etc.

Setting Up

Connections

Owner’s Manual

Connecting to a Computer

Connecting this instrument to a computer via MIDI opens up a whole world of musical possibilities — such as using sequencer

software to record and play back compositions with the MOTIF ES sounds or using the included Voice Editor software to create

and edit your own custom Voices.

n When connecting to a Macintosh computer (with the exception of Mac OS X), make sure to install OMS to the computer as well as the desired software

(sequence software, Voice Editor, etc.). For details, refer to the separate Install Guide.

Using a USB TO HOST connector

When connecting via this method, make sure to set the following parameter to “USB.”

n USB cables have different connectors on each end: the A type and the B type. When connecting this synthesizer to the computer, connect the A type to your

computer and the B type to the USB TO HOST connector.

n When connecting to a computer (Windows/Macintosh) via USB, make sure to install the USB-MIDI driver to the computer as well as the desired software

(sequence software, Voice Editor, etc.). For details, refer to the separate Installation Guide.

n If you are using the Remote Control function to control operations on a computer sequencer, you should make connections with a USB cable.

[UTILITY] ➞ [F5] MIDI ➞ [SF4] OTHER ➞ MIDI IN/OUT = USB

MIDI channel and MIDI port

While a MIDI cable can transfer MIDI messages of 16 channels simultaneously, a USB cable can transfer MIDI messages of

more than 16 channels simultaneously.

MIDI data is assigned to one of sixteen channels, and this synthesizer is capable of simultaneously playing sixteen

separate parts, via the sixteen MIDI channels. However, the sixteen-channel limit can be overcome by using separate MIDI

“ports,” each supporting sixteen channels.

A USB cable can handle MIDI data on up to eight ports, letting you use up to 128 channels (8 ports x 16 channels) on your

computer.

n This synthesizer can recognize and use up to three ports at the same time.

n When using a USB connection, make sure to match the MIDI transmit port and the MIDI receive port as well as the MIDI transmit channel and the MIDI

receive channel.

MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER

MOTIF ES

USB TO HOST

USB cable

Computer with a USB interface

Setting Up

Connections

Owner’s Manual

Precautions when using the USB TO HOST connector

When connecting the computer to the USB TO HOST connector, make sure to observe the following points.

If you do not observe these points, you risk freezing the computer, corrupting the data, and losing the data. If the computer or the instrument

freezes, turn the power to the instrument off or restart the computer.

• Before connecting the computer to the USB TO HOST connector, exit from any power-saving mode (such as suspended, sleep, standby) of the

computer.

• Before turning on the power to the instrument, connect the computer to the USB TO HOST connector.

•Execute the following before turning the power to the instrument on/off or plugging/unplugging the USB cable to/from the USB TO HOST

connector.

- Quit any open applications (such as Voice Editor, Multi Part Editor, and SQ01).

- Make sure that data is not being transmitted from the instrument. (Data is transmitted only by playing notes on the keyboard or playing back a

song.)

• While a USB device is connected to the instrument, you should wait for three seconds or more between these operations: When turning the power

of the instrument off then on again, or when alternately connecting/disconnecting the USB cable.

Using an IEEE1394 interface (when an optional mLAN16E has been installed)

By installing an optional mLAN16E interface, you can connect a computer (with an IEEE 1394 interface) to this instrument via a

single cable.

When connecting via this method, make sure to set the following parameter to “mLAN.”

The mLAN connection using an IEEE1394 cable lets you transfer both MIDI data and audio data. For example, you can record

your keyboard performance and Song/Pattern playback to hard disk of the computer as audio data (page 153).

About the Thru Port Setting

MIDI ports can be used to divide playback among multiple synthesizers, as well as expand the MIDI channel capacity

beyond sixteen.

In the example below, a separate synthesizer connected to the MOTIF ES is played by MIDI data via port 5, as set in the

ThruPort parameter with the following operation.

[UTILITY] ➞ [F5] MIDI ➞ [SF4] OTHER ➞ MIDI IN/OUT = mLAN

TIP

[UTILITY] ➞ [F5] MIDI ➞ [SF4] OTHER ➞ ThruPort = 5

MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER

MIDI OUT USB TO HOST

MIDI IN

Only MIDI data over port 5 will be

transmitted through the MOTIF ES to

this tone generator.

MIDI cable USB cable

Outputting the MIDI data

via multiple ports

Only MIDI data over ports 1, 2, and 3 are recognized. For details on the

relationship between the MIDI port and the tone generator block, see page 163.

CAUTION

MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER

MOTIF ES

mLAN16E

mLAN connector

Computer with an IEEE1394 interface

IEEE1394 cable

Setting Up

Connections

Owner’s Manual

Using a MIDI interface

• Using the computer’s MIDI interface

• Using an external MIDI interface

n Please use the appropriate MIDI interface for your computer.

n If you are using a computer that has a USB interface, make sure to connect the computer and this synthesizer by USB. (The data transfer rate is faster than

MIDI and you’ll have access to multiple MIDI ports.)

Selecting Voices from a computer

You can select Voices on this instrument from your computer software by specifying the following MIDI messages.

• Bank Select MSB

• Bank Select LSB

• Program Change

For details on what values are assigned to the Voice Bank/Number of this synthesizer, refer to the separate Data List.

MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER

MOTIF ES

MIDI OUTMIDI IN

MIDI cable

Computer with MIDI interface

MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER

MOTIF ES

MIDI OUTMIDI IN

MIDI cable

MIDI interface

Serial port (modem or printer port)

or USB port

Computer

Setting Up

Connections

Owner’s Manual

Local On/Off – when Connected to a Computer

When connecting this synthesizer to a computer, the keyboard performance data is generally sent to the computer, and

then returned from the computer to play the tone generator block. If the Local Control in the Utility mode is set to “on,” a

“double” sound may result, since the tone generator is receiving performance data from both the keyboard directly and the

computer. Use the setting suggestions below as a guideline; speciﬁc instructions may differ depending on your computer

and the software used.

• When MIDI “Echo” (MIDI through) is set to on the software/computer:

n When transmitting or receiving System Exclusive data (such as with the Bulk Dump function), use the setting example below, making sure that MIDI

“Echo” (MIDI through) on the computer software is set to “off.”

• When MIDI “Echo” (MIDI through) is set to off the software/computer:

n Although not indicated in the illustration above, the MOTIF ES actually receives and responds to MIDI data from the computer application

(sequencer), regardless of the Local Control setting on the MOTIF ES.

* MIDI “Echo” is a function on sequencers that takes any data received via the MIDI IN and “echoes” it (or sends it as is) through the MIDI

OUT. In some software, this function is also called “MIDI Thru.”

n For details about the MIDI Echo, refer to the owner’s manual of your particular software.

MOTIF ES

IN OUT

USB TO HOST

OUT

Computer (SQ01, etc.)

MIDI Echo (MIDI thru) = on

Tone generator

block

Keyboard

[UTILITY] ➞ [F5] MIDI ➞ [SF2] SWITCH ➞ LocalCtrl = off

OUT

USB TO HOST

MOTIF ES

Computer (SQ01, etc.)

MIDI Echo (MIDI thru) = off

Tone generator

block

Keyboard

[UTILITY] ➞ [F5] MIDI ➞ [SF2] SWITCH ➞ LocalCtrl = on

Setting Up

Connections

Owner’s Manual

Connecting Various Controllers

The MOTIF ES features several controller jacks on the rear panel — letting you independently control various aspects of the

sound and a variety of functions with optional controllers.

■ Breath Controller

You can connect an optional Breath Controller (BC3) to the BREATH jack on the rear panel. Then use it to control a large number

of this synthesizer’s parameters, particularly those controlled by a wind player’s breath: dynamics, timbre, pitch and so on. The

Breath Controller is ideally suited for realistic expression with wind instrument type Voices.

n Breath Controller parameters can be set for each Voice (page 192).

■ Footswitch (assignable)

An optional Yamaha FC4 or FC5 Foot Switch connected to the rear panel FOOT SWITCH ASSIGNABLE jack can be assigned to

a range of parameters. It is suited for switch-type (on/off) controls, such as Portamento Switch, increment/decrement of a Voice

or Performance Number, start/stop of the Sequencer, and holding the Arpeggiator on or off.

n The parameter assigned to the Footswitch is set in the Utility mode (page 263).

■ Footswitch (sustain)

An optional FC4 or FC5 Footswitch connected to the SUSTAIN jack on the rear panel lets you control sustain — particularly

useful when playing piano and strings voices.

Keep in mind that some sounds may not be suitable for use in all situations with the Sustain footswitch. For example, for organ

sounds that have no natural decay, the sound continues at the same level when holding down the Sustain footswitch.

On the other hand, many sounds beneﬁt from the use of Sustain, such as piano, which has a natural decay when a note is held.

Using Sustain with these kinds of Voices provides a smooth after-sound and gives you expressive control in your performance.

n The sustain level of the Amplitude EG (page 162) is maintained while holding down the Sustain footswitch, even when releasing your ﬁngers from the keys.

n You cannot assign a function other than Sustain to the SUSTAIN jack.

■ Foot Controller

Optional Foot Controllers (such as the FC7), connected to the FOOT CONTROLLER jacks on the rear panel, can be assigned to

a number of controller parameters. By using a foot controller for parameter control, both your hands are left free to play the

keyboard (or to operate other controllers) — exceptionally convenient when you’re playing live.

n Foot Controller parameters can be set for each Voice (page 192).

GREEN

YELLOW

ORANGE

Plug-in SLOT

A/D INPUT

OUTPUT

RL/MONO

PHONES

ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT

FOOT

CONTROLLER

BREATH

ASSIGNABLE

SUSTAIN

OUTTHRU

USB

TO HOSTTO DEVICEmLAN

I/O EXPANSION

AC INLET

ON OFF

FOOT

SWITCH

CARD

3.3V

1IN

MIDI

GAIN

FOOT

CONTROLLER

BREATH

ASSIGNABLE

SUSTAIN

FOOT

SWITCH

MOTIF ES rear panel

BC3

FC4 or FC5

FC7

Setting Up

Turning the power on/off

Owner’s Manual

Turning the power on/off

Power-on Procedure

Once you’ve made all the necessary connections between your MOTIF ES and any other devices, make sure that all volume

settings are turned down all the way to zero. Then turn on the every device in your setup in the order of MIDI masters (senders),

MIDI slaves (receivers), then audio equipment (mixers, ampliﬁers, speakers, etc.). This ensures smooth signal ﬂow from the ﬁrst

device to the last (ﬁrst MIDI, then audio). When powering down the setup, ﬁrst turn down the volume for each audio devices,

then switch off each device in the reverse order (ﬁrst audio devices, then MIDI).

When using the MOTIF ES as MIDI receiver:

Turning the MOTIF ES on/off

The explanations here apply when audio equipment (ampliﬁer and speaker) is connected to the MOTIF ES.

1 Make sure that the external audio equipment is connected to the MOTIF ES properly. Also be sure to set the volume of the

MOTIF ES and the external audio equipment to 0.

2 Press the POWER switch on the rear panel to turn the MOTIF ES on.

The Opening display (together with the message that conﬁrms the status of the Plug-in Board installation) appears and after

a while, the Master mode display appears.

n At the time this synthesizer is shipped from the factory, the Master mode display will appear when turning the power on. You can change the default display

when turning the power on with the following operation. [UTILITY] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF4] OTHER → PowerOnMode (page 261)

n Because the Auto Load parameter (page 135) is set to on at the time this synthesizer is shipped from the factory, it takes a short amount of time before the

instrument assumes normal playing status (in which you can play the keyboard).

You can switch the on/off status of the Auto Load function from the [UTILITY] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF5] OTHER display (page 135).

3 Turn the power of the connected audio equipment on.

4 Raise the sound system volume of the audio equipment and the MOTIF ES gradually to a reasonable level.

5 If necessary, adjust the legibility of the LCD display by using the LCD Contrast Control.

6 After turning the power of the audio equipment off or turning down the volume of the audio equipment, turn the MOTIF ES’s

power off.

MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER

POWER

ON!!

1 2 3

MUSIC SYNTHESIZER

Modular Synthesis Plug-in System

MIDI sender MOTIF ES

Audio equipment (ﬁrst mixer, then ampliﬁer)

AC INLET

POWER

ON OFF

Rear panel of the MOTIF ES Master mode display

Setting Up

Resetting the User Memory to the Initial Factory Settings

Owner’s Manual

Resetting the User Memory to the Initial Factory Settings

The original factory setting of this synthesizer’s User Memory (page 186) can be restored as follows.

When the factory settings are restored, all the Voice, Performance, Song, Pattern, and system setting in the Utility mode you created will be erased.

Be sure to save all important data to SmartMedia or USB storage device before executing this procedure (pages 85, 91 and 131).

1 Press the [UTILITY] button to enter the Utility mode (the lamp lights).

2 Press the [JOB] button to enter the Utility Job mode.

3 Press the [ENTER] button. (The display prompts you for conﬁrmation.)

n To cancel the Job, press the [DEC/NO] button.

4 Press the [INC/YES] button to execute the Job.

After the Job has been completed, a “Completed” message appears and operation returns to the original display.

An “Executing...” or “Please keep power on” message is shown when it takes a short amount of time to execute the Job. Never attempt to turn off the power

while data is being written to Flash ROM (while an “Executing...” or “Please keep power on” message is shown). Turning the power off in this state results

in loss of all user data and may cause the system to freeze (due to corruption of data in the Flash ROM). This means that this synthesizer may not be able

to start up properly, even when turning the power on next time.

n All settings in the Utility mode that are related to the Plug-in boards are stored only to the memory on those respective boards, and not to the User memory

of this synthesizer. Because of this, the Factory Set operation cannot be used to restore settings for those boards.

CAUTION

SONG

PATTERN FILE

SEQUENCER

INTEGRATED

SAMPLING

MIXING UTILITY

EDIT

COMPARE SCENE STORE

SET LOCATE

JOB STORE

DEMO

SONG

PATTERN FILE

SEQUENCER

INTEGRATED

SAMPLING

MIXING UTILITY

EDIT

COMPARE SCENE STORE

SET LOCATE

JOB STORE

DEMO

CAUTION

Modes

Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

In this section, we’ll take a look at the fundamental operating conventions of the MOTIF ES. Here, you’ll learn the basics – how to

select modes, call up the various functions, change settings, and edit parameter values. Take time to familiarize yourself with

these nuts-and-bolts operations, and you’ll be on your way to mastering the instrument.

Before reading further, familiarize yourself with the basic terms used with the MOTIF ES in the chart below.

Modes

Mode Structure

This synthesizer is organized into various modes, each covering a different set of operations and functions.

Keep in mind that there are two basic types of modes, depending on the status of the tone generator block. The ﬁrst type

includes the Voice and Performance modes, and the internal tone generator is used in single timbre operation — meaning that

only one Voice, or one channel of MIDI data is used. The second type includes the Song and Pattern modes, and the internal

tone generator is used in multi-timbral operation — meaning that several Voices, or multiple MIDI channels are used. Along with

each of these types are sub modes — the Sampling mode and the Utility mode. Remember that the particular displays and

parameters in these two modes differ depending on which type of mode (Voice/Performance or Song/Pattern) was active before

calling up the sub-mode. In addition to the above mentioned, there are two special modes. The Master mode lets you memorize

your desired settings in each mode (Voice/Performance/Song/Pattern) and recall them instantly anytime you need them with a

single button. The File mode lets you manage your created data.

Basic Operation

Term Description Page

Voice Musical instrument voices 158

Performance A program in which multiple Voices are combined in a layer 158

Song Music data consisting of MIDI events 166

Pattern Rhythm pattern data which consist of MIDI events used for looped playback 167

Sampling

The function that lets you record the audio data (such as your own voice and CD playback sound) and play

those sounds just like any other synthesizer’s Voice.

172

Master A program which lets you register the settings in each mode – Voice, Performance, Song, and Pattern 136

File A collection of settings for storing and managing your created data 186

VOICE

SONG

PERFORM MASTER

PATTERN FILE

MODE

SEQUENCER

INTEGRATED

SAMPLING

MIXING UTILITY

DEMO

VOICE

PERFORM

SONG

PATTERN

MIXING

MASTER

FILE

INTEGRATED

SAMPLING

UTILITY

Voice mode

Voice Play mode

Voice Edit mode

Voice Job mode

Voice Store mode

Performance mode

Performance Play mode

Performance Edit mode

Performance Job mode

Performance Store mode

Master mode

Master Play mode

Master Edit mode

Master Job mode

Master Store mode

File mode

Keyboard Playback mode (single timbre tone generator)

Sampling mode

Sampling Record mode

Sampling Edit mode

Sampling Job mode

Utility mode

Utility Job mode

Song mode

Song Play mode

Song Record mode

Song Edit mode

Song Job mode

Song Mixing mode

Song Mixing Edit mode

Song Mixing Job mode

Song Mixing Store mode

Pattern mode

Pattern Play mode

Pattern Record mode

Pattern Edit mode

Pattern Job mode

Pattern Mixing mode

Pattern Mixing Edit mode

Pattern Mixing Job mode

Pattern Mixing Store mode

Keyboard Playback mode

(multi-timbral tone generator)

(Mixing Voice mode)

Mixing Voice Edit mode

Mixing Voice Job mode

Mixing Voice Store mode

Basic Operation

Modes

Owner’s Manual

Mode table

The functions of each mode and how to enter each mode are as follows:

■ How to leave the current display

For most operations or displays (except for the File mode, Song/Pattern Record mode, and Remote Control mode), pressing the

[EXIT] button will let you leave the current display and return you to the previous one. You can return back to any of the modes —

Voice Play, Performance Play, Song Play, Pattern Play, and Master Play — by pressing the [EXIT] button several times in the

respective mode.

Mode Function How to enter the mode

Voice mode Voice Play mode Playing a Voice [VOICE]

Voice Edit mode Editing/Creating a Voice [VOICE] → [EDIT]

Voice Job mode Initializing a Voice, etc. [VOICE] → [JOB]

Voice Store mode Storing a Voice to internal memory [VOICE] → [STORE]

Performance mode Performance Play mode Playing a Performance [PERFORM]

Performance Edit mode Editing/Creating a Performance [PERFORM] → [EDIT]

Performance Job mode Initializing a Performance, etc. [PERFORM] → [JOB]

Performance Store mode Storing a Performance to internal memory [PERFORM] → [STORE]

Song mode Song Play mode Playing a Song [SONG]

Song Record mode Recording a Song [SONG] → [●] (REC)

Song Edit mode Editing a Song MIDI events [SONG] → [EDIT]

Song Job mode Converting and transforming Song data [SONG] → [JOB]

Song Mixing mode Setting tone generator parameters [SONG] → [MIXING]

Song Mixing Edit mode Setting tone generator parameters in detail [SONG] → [MIXING] → [EDIT]

Song Mixing Job mode Initializing a Song Mixing, etc. [SONG] → [MIXING] → [JOB]

Song Mixing Store mode Storing a Song Mixing internal memory [SONG] → [MIXING] → [STORE]

Pattern mode Pattern Play mode Playing a Pattern [PATTERN]

Pattern Record mode Recording a Pattern [PATTERN] → [●] (REC)

Pattern Edit mode Editing a Pattern MIDI events [PATTERN] → [EDIT]

Pattern Job mode Converting and transforming Pattern data [PATTERN] → [JOB]

Pattern Mixing mode Setting tone generator parameters [PATTERN] → [MIXING]

Pattern Mixing Edit mode Setting tone generator parameters in detail [PATTERN] → [MIXING] → [EDIT]

Pattern Mixing Job mode Initializing a Pattern Mixing, etc. [PATTERN] → [MIXING] → [JOB]

Pattern Mixing Store mode Storing a Pattern Mixing internal memory [PATTERN] → [MIXING] → [STORE]

(Mixing Voice mode)

Mixing Voice Edit mode Editing/Creating a Voice dedicated for Song/Pattern

[SONG] or [PATTERN] → [MIXING] →

[F5] VCE ED

Mixing Voice Job mode Initializing a Mixing Voice, etc.

[SONG] or [PATTERN] → [MIXING] →

[F5] VCE ED → [JOB]

Mixing Voice Store mode Storing a Mixing Voice to internal memory

[SONG] or [PATTERN] → [MIXING] →

[F5] VCE ED → [STORE]

Sampling mode Sampling Record mode Recording a Sample [INTEGRATED SAMPLING]

Sampling Edit mode Editing a sample [INTEGRATED SAMPLING] → [EDIT]

Sampling job mode Converting and transforming Sample data [INTEGRATED SAMPLING] → [JOB]

Utility mode Utility mode Setting System related parameters [UTILITY]

Utility Job mode

Resetting the User Memory to the Initial Factory Settings

[UTILITY] → [JOB]

Master mode Master Play mode Playing a Master [MASTER]

Master Edit mode Editing/Creating a Master [MASTER] → [EDIT]

Master Job mode Initializing a Master, etc. [MASTER] → [JOB]

Master Store mode Storing a Master to internal memory [MASTER] → [STORE]

File mode File mode Managing Files and Folders (Directories) [FILE]

EXIT ENTER

EXECUTE

DEC/NO INC/YES

Functions and Sub-Functions

Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Functions and Sub-Functions

Each mode described above contains various displays, with various functions and parameters. To navigate your way through

these displays and select a desired function, use the [F1] - [F6] buttons and the [SF1] - [SF5] buttons. When you select a mode,

the available displays or menus appear directly above the buttons at the bottom of the display (as shown below).

Using the Function buttons [F1] - [F6]

Depending on the currently selected mode, up to six functions are available and can be called up with the [F1] - [F6] buttons.

Keep in mind that the available functions differ depending on the selected mode.

Using the Sub-Function buttons [SF1] - [SF5]

Depending on the currently selected mode, up to ﬁve functions (sub-functions) are available and can be called up with the [SF1]

- [SF5] buttons. Keep in mind that the available functions differ depending on the selected mode. (Some displays may not have

any sub-functions for these buttons.)

Selecting a Program

In order to play the MOTIF ES you’ll need to call up one of its programs, i.e., a Voice, Performance, Song, Pattern, or Master.

These programs can be selected in each Play mode via the same procedure.

■ Using the [INC/YES], [DEC/NO] buttons and the data dial

The [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons let you step up or down through the program numbers in any of the Play modes (Voice,

Performance, Song, Pattern, and Master).

Rotating the data dial to the right (clockwise) increases the program number, while rotating it to the left (counter-clockwise)

decreases it. This control works in the same way as the [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons, but lets you scroll through the

programs more quickly.

SCENE

SF1 SF

2 SF3 SF4 SF5

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

INFORMATION

These functions can be selected via the

corresponding button ([F1] - [F6]).

In this example, press the [F5] button to go

to the LFO display.

SCENE

SF1 SF

2 SF3 SF4 SF5

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

INFORMATION

These functions can be selected via the

corresponding button ([SF1] - [SF5]).

In this example, press the [SF5] button to

go to the OTHER display.

DEC/NO INC/YES

Decreases number Increases number

Increases number

Decreases number

Basic Operation

Selecting a Program

Owner’s Manual

■ Using the [GROUP], [NUMBER] buttons

As shown below, you can select a program number by pressing any of the GROUP [A] - [H] buttons and pressing any of the

NUMBER [1] - [16] buttons.

n The convenient Category Search function (page 62) lets you easily locate and select the Voices you want by type.

The Voice program numbers and the corresponding Group/Numbers are listed below.

n When selecting a Voice, it is necessary to press one of the [BANK] buttons before pressing the [GROUP] and [NUMBER] buttons.

n The amount of numbers differ depending on the program. For example, while the selected number range of the Normal Voice, Performance, and Master is

001 - 128, the selected number range of the Song and Pattern is 001- 064.

Program

Number

Group Number

Program

Number

Group Number

Program

Number

Group Number

Program

Number

Group Number

001 A 1 033 C 1 065 E 1 097 G 1

002 A 2

034 C 2 066 E 2 098 G 2

003 A 3

035 C 3 067 E 3 099 G 3

004 A 4

036 C 4 068 E 4 100 G 4

005 A 5

037 C 5 069 E 5 101 G 5

006 A 6

038 C 6 070 E 6 102 G 6

007 A 7

039 C 7 071 E 7 103 G 7

008 A 8

040 C 8 072 E 8 104 G 8

009 A 9

041 C 9 073 E 9 105 G 9

010 A 10

042 C 10 074 E 10 106 G 10

011 A 11

043 C 11 075 E 11 107 G 11

012 A 12

044 C 12 076 E 12 108 G 12

013 A 13

045 C 13 077 E 13 109 G 13

014 A 14

046 C 14 078 E 14 110 G 14

015 A 15

047 C 15 079 E 15 111 G 15

016 A 16

048 C 16 080 E 16 112 G 16

017 B 1

049 D 1 081 F 1 113 H 1

018 B 2

050 D 2 082 F 2 114 H 2

019 B 3

051 D 3 083 F 3 115 H 3

020 B 4

052 D 4 084 F 4 116 H 4

021 B 5

053 D 5 085 F 5 117 H 5

022 B 6

054 D 6 086 F 6 118 H 6

023 B 7

055 D 7 087 F 7 119 H 7

024 B 8

056 D 8 088 F 8 120 H 8

025 B 9

057 D 9 089 F 9 121 H 9

026 B 10

058 D 10 090 F 10 122 H 10

027 B 11

059 D 11 091 F 11 123 H 11

028 B 12

060 D 12 092 F 12 124 H 12

029 B 13

061 D 13 093 F 13 125 H 13

030 B 14

062 D 14 094 F 14 126 H 14

031 B 15

063 D 15 095 F 15 127 H 15

032 B 16

064 D 16 096 F 16 128 H 16

ELEMENT/PERF. PART /ZONE

A. PIANO KEYBOARD ORGAN

PRE 5 PRE 6 USER 1

GUITAR/

PLUCKED

SYN LEAD

ABCDEFG

87654321

MUTE

TRACK

SELECT

SECTION

GROUP

NUMBER

CATEGORY

BANK

SOLO

1412 13

SYN PAD/

CHOIR

SYN COMP

CHROMATIC

PERCUSSION

DRUM/

PERCUSSION

SE MUSICAL FX COMBI

USER 2

STRINGS

PLG 1

SLOT 1 SLOT 2 SLOT 3

BRASS

PLG 2

REED/PIPE

PLG 3

BASS

The explanations here apply when these four button indicators are off.

Moving the Cursor and Setting Parameters

Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Moving the Cursor and Setting Parameters

■ Inputting a number directly

For parameters having large value ranges (such as the start and end points of a sample), you can also enter the value directly,

using the buttons below the LCD display as a numeric keypad. When the cursor is located on such a parameter, the [NUM] icon

appears at the lower right corner of the LCD display indicating that you can call up the number input window by pressing the

[INFORMATION] button. From this window, you can input a number directly by pressing the [F1] - [F6] buttons and the [SF1] -

[SF5] buttons. First, press the [F6] button so that the cursor appears at the Input Number within the bracket. Move the cursor to

the desired digit by using the Cursor buttons [>] and [<], then input the number of the selected digit. After completing the

number input, press the [ENTER] button to actually enter the number. Press the [EXIT] button to go back to the original display.

■ Selecting a note type

When the cursor is located on the parameter to which the note type is set, the note icon appears at the lower right corner

indicating that you can call up the Note Type selection window by pressing the [INFORMATION] button. You can specify the note

type by pressing the [F1] - [F6] buttons and the [SF1] - [SF5] buttons. After selecting one of the note types, press the [ENTER]

button to actually enter the selection. Press the [EXIT] button to go back to the original display.

EXIT ENTER

EXECUTE

DEC/NO INC/YES

Moving the cursor

Use these four buttons to navigate the display, moving the

cursor around the various selectable items and parameters

in the screen. When selected, the relevant item is highlighted

(the cursor appears as a dark block with inverse characters).

You can change the value of the item (parameter) at which

the cursor is located by using the data dial, [INC/YES] and

[DEC/NO] buttons.

Changing (editing) parameter values

Rotating the data dial to the right (clockwise) increases the

value, while rotating it to the left (counter-clockwise)

decreases it.

For parameters with large value ranges, you can increase

the value by 10 by simultaneously holding down the [INC/

YES] button and pressing the [DEC/NO] button.

To decrease by 10, do the opposite; simultaneously hold

down the [DEC/NO] button and press the [INC/YES] button.

SCENE

SF1 SF

2 SF3 SF4 SF5

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

INFORMATION

SCENE

SF1 SF

2 SF3 SF4 SF5

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

INFORMATION

Number Input window Input Number

SCENE

SF1 SF

2 SF3 SF4 SF5

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

INFORMATION

SCENE

SF1 SF

2 SF3 SF4 SF5

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

INFORMATION

Note Type selection window

Basic Operation

Knob (KN) and Control Slider (CS)

Owner’s Manual

Knob (KN) and Control Slider (CS)

Knob (KN)

You can change the brightness and tone characteristics of the current Voice or Performance in realtime by turning the knobs

while you play. Rotating it to the right (clockwise) increases the program number, while rotating it to the left (counter-clockwise)

decreases it. You can select the function set assigned to the knobs among the following seven sets by pressing the appropriate

[KNOB CONTROL FUNCTION] button.

Function sets assigned to the Knobs (KN)

* For Drum Voices, this affects the release time for all played notes, whether held or released.

** Available only when setting the Zone Switch to on in the Master Mode (page 137)

When pressing any of the [KNOB CONTROL FUNCTION] buttons, the lamp(s) of the buttons will light according to the above

table and the status of the Knobs and Control Sliders (currently assigned functions and set values) is shown on the LCD display.

The appearance of the knob in the display indicates the actual control status of the knob. When a knob indication is black, the

control knob on the panel affects the sound. When an indication is white, moving the panel knob does not affect the sound, until

the current value is reached (after which the indication turns black, indicating normal control).

Operation

Button of which the

lamp is turned on

Functions controlled by each Knob

KN1 (Knob 1) KN2 (Knob 2) KN3 (Knob 3) KN4 (Knob 4)

When pressing the [PAN/

SEND] button

[PAN/SEND] button Pan (stereo position)

of the Voice/

Performance

Reverb Send Level Chorus Send Level Tempo of the Song/

Pattern/Arpeggio

playback

When pressing the [TONE]

button

[TONE] button Filter Cutoff

Frequency (degree of

brightness)

Resonance (the level

of the signal in the

area of the cutoff

frequency)

Attack Time of the

sound

Release Time of the

sound (decay time

after the key is

released)*

When pressing the [ARP

FX] button

[ARP FX] button Swing degree of the

Arpeggio playback

Gate time (length) of

the Arpeggio

playback

Velocity of the

Arpeggio playback

time

When pressing the [EQ]

button

[EQ] button Low band of the

Master EQ in the

Voice/Performance

mode, part EQ in the

Song/Pattern mode

Low-mid band of the

Master EQ in the

Voice/Performance

mode, Mid band of

the Part EQ in the

Song/Pattern mode

High-mid band of the

Master EQ in the

Voice/Performance

mode. (Not available

in the Song/Pattern

mode.)

High band of the

Master EQ in the

Voice/Performance

mode, part EQ in the

Song/Pattern mode

When pressing the [PAN/

SEND] button and the

[TONE] button

simultaneously

[PAN/SEND] button

[TONE] button

Function assigned from the [UTILITY] → [F4]

CTLASN → [SF2] ASSIGN display (page 263) in

the Utility mode

Function assigned for each Voice from the

[VOICE] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F4]

CTLSET display (page 155)

When pressing the [TONE]

button and the [ARP FX]

button simultaneously**

All the buttons are off Function assigned for each Master from the [MASTER] → [EDIT] → Zone selection → [F5] KN/CS

display (page 140)

When pressing the [ARP

FX] button and the [EQ]

button simultaneously

[ARP FX] button

[EQ] button

Function assigned to the Master Effect parameters from the [UTILITY] → [F4] CTLASN → [SF5] MEF

display.

KNOB

CONTROL

FUNCTION

SWING

CUTOFF

PAN

ASSIGN A

GATE TIME

RESONANCE

REVERB

ASSIGN B

VELOCITY

ATTACK

CHORUS

ASSIGN 1

UNITMULTIPLY

RELEASE

TEMPO

ASSIGN 2

LOW

LOW MID

HIGH MID

HIGH

ARP FX

TONE

ASSIGN

PAN/SEND

Tu rning these Knobs will affect the sound.

Tu rning these Knobs will not affect the sound.

About the editing functions

Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Control Slider (CS)

You can adjust the volume of the Voice/Performance you play on the keyboard, or the volume of the speciﬁed part (track) of the

Song/Pattern by using the Control Sliders (CS). In the Master mode, various functions as well as the volume can be assigned to

the Control Sliders (CS) when the Zone Switch is set to on (page 137).

Function sets assigned to the Control Slider (CS)

n The [MASTER VOLUME] slider adjusts the overall output level of the instrument, while the Control Sliders adjust the MIDI Volume setting of the

corresponding Element or Part.

About the editing functions

There are three types of method for creating data – Editing parameters (Voice, Performance, etc.), Recording MIDI data (Song,

Pattern, etc.), and Recording audio data (Sampling).

In this section, we’ll explain the basic operations for editing the Voice, Performance, Song Mixing, Pattern Mixing, Mixing Voice

settings.

n For details on recording MIDI data, see pages 118 (Song) and 110 (Pattern). For details on recording audio data (for Sampling), see pages 94 and 107.

n The Song Edit function (for editing the Song MIDI sequence data) and the Pattern Edit function (for editing the Pattern MIDI sequence data) are not

explained here. See page 124.

Edit Indicator

You can adjust or set various parameters by using the data dial, [INC/YES] button, [DEC/NO] button, Knobs, and Control Sliders

in the Voice mode (Play/Edit mode), Performance mode (Play/Edit mode), Song Mixing mode, Pattern Mixing mode, and Mixing

Voice mode. When changing the value of the parameter in these modes, the [E] (Edit Indicator) will appear on the top left corner

of the LCD display. This indicates that the current program has been modiﬁed but not yet stored. If you wish to store your sound

obtained by edit operation, be sure to store the current program to internal User memory in the Store mode before selecting

another program.

Mode

Functions controlled by each Slider

CS1 CS2 CS3 CS4

Voice mode When a Normal Voice is

selected (page 60)

Element1 Volume Element2 Volume Element3 Volume Element4 Volume

When a Drum Voice is

selected (page 61)

Volume of the entire Voice sound (moving any Slider produces same volume)

Performance mode Part1 Volume Part2 Volume Part3 Volume Part4 Volume

Song mode/Pattern mode When tracks (Parts) 1 - 4

are selected

Track1 (Part1) Volume Track2 (Part2) Volume Track3 (Part3) Volume Track4 (Part4) Volume

When tracks (Parts) 5 - 8

are selected

Track5 (Part5) Volume Track6 (Part6) Volume Track7 (Part7) Volume Track8 (Part8) Volume

When tracks (Parts)

9 - 12 are selected

Track9 (Part9) Volume

Track10 (Part10)

Volume

Track11 (Part11)

Volume

Track12 (Part12)

Volume

When tracks (Parts)

13 - 16 are selected

Track13 (Part13)

Volume

Track14 (Part14)

Volume

Track15 (Part15)

Volume

Track16 (Part16)

Volume

Master mode When the Zone Switch is

set to on (page 137)

Function assigned for each Master from the [MASTER] → [EDIT] → Zone selection → [F4] KN/CS

display (page 140)

EDIT

COMPARE SCENE STORE

SET LOCATE

JOB STORE

Edit Indicator

Voice Edit

Performance Edit

Song Mixing Edit

Pattern Mixing Edit

Mixing Voice Edit

If the Edit Indicator

appears...

Voice Store

Performance Store

Song Mixing Store

Pattern Mixing Store

Mixing Voice Store

Basic Operation

Confirmation Message

Owner’s Manual

Compare Function

This convenient function lets you switch between the edited sound and its original, unedited condition – allowing you to listen to

the difference between the two and better hear how your edits affect the sound.

For example, when editing a Voice in the Voice Edit mode, the “E” Edit indicator is shown. Pressing the [COMPARE] button in

this condition reverts to the original unedited sound (the button lamp ﬂashes and the “C” Compare indicator is shown). Press the

[COMPARE] button again to return to the edited sound.

Edit Recall Function

If you are editing a program and select a different program without storing your edited one, all the edits you’ve made will be

erased. However, the edited program is maintained in a backup memory location called the Recall buffer (page 187). To restore

the lost data with your latest edits intact, use the Edit Recall function in the Job mode.

Conﬁrmation Message

When you execute certain operations, such as those in the Job, Store, and File modes, this synthesizer shows a conﬁrmation

message. This lets you actually execute the operation or cancel it if desired.

If a conﬁrmation message (like the one illustrated above) appears, press the [INC/YES] button to execute the operation or press

the [DEC/NO] button to cancel it.

Job mode How to call up the Edit Recall display

Voice [VOICE] → [JOB] → [F2] RECALL

Performance [PERFORM] → [JOB] → [F2] RECALL

Song Mixing [SONG] → [MIXING] → [JOB] → [F2] RECALL

Pattern Mixing [PATTERN] → [MIXING] → [JOB] → [F2] RECALL

Mixing Voice [SONG] or [PATTERN] → [MIXING] → [F5] VCE ED → [JOB] → [F2] RECALL

EDIT

COMPARE SCENE STORE

SET LOCATE

JOB STOREEDIT

COMPARE SCENE STORE

SET LOCATE

JOB STORE

Edit Indicator (newly edited sound) Changes to the Compare Indicator (original sound)

Lamp ﬂashes

Information Display

Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Information Display

This convenient function lets you call up relevant details about the selected mode – simply by pressing the [INFORMATION]

button. For example, when the Voice mode is active, you can quickly check information about which voice bank is selected, what

Play mode (poly or mono) is being used, which effects are applied, and so on.

For details, see page 275.

Note (Key) settings

Several parameters let you set a key range for a function – for example, in setting up a keyboard split – by specifying certain

note values. You can use the [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons or data dial to set these parameters, or you can directly enter the

values from the keyboard by pressing the appropriate keys (as shown below).

n About the note name assigned to each key, see page 16.

Naming

You can freely name the created data like Voice and the ﬁle saved to the SmartMedia/USB storage device. The chart below lists

the types of data that can be named along with the operations for calling up the respective naming displays.

First, call up the name input display according to the above table, then, move the cursor by using the Cursor button to the

desired location and input a character. See below for details.

n Since the name of the program is part of the data, make sure that you properly save the program after naming it.

Data types that can be named How to call up the naming display Page

Voice [VOICE] → [EDIT] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF1] NAME 80

Performance [PERFORM] → [EDIT] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF1] NAME 89

Song [SONG] → [JOB] → [F6] SONG → 04: Song Name 233

Pattern [PATTERN] → [JOB] → [F6] PATTERN → 05: Pattern Name 248

Mixing Template [SONG] or [PATTERN] → [MIXING] → [JOB] → [F6] TEMPLATE 237

Mixing Voice [SONG] or [PATTERN] → [MIXING] → [F5] VCEED → [F1] GENERAL →[SF1] NAME 106

Phrase [PATTERN] → [JOB] → [F4] PHRASE → 09: Phrase Name 246

Master [MASTER] → [EDIT] → [F1] NAME 138

Waveform [INTEGRATED SAMPLING] → [JOB] → [F2] WAVE → 04: NAME 259

Arpeggio [SONG] → [JOB] → [F5] TRACK → 07: Put Track To Arp 130

[PATTERN] → [JOB] → [F5] TRACK → 06: Put Track To Arp 130

Volume Label of the SmartMedia/

USB storage device

[FILE] → [F1] CONFIG → [SF3] FORMAT 266

File/Folder saved to the SmartMedia/

USB storage device

[FILE] → [F2] SAVE or [F4] RENAME 132

INFORMATION

When Note Limit is selected, the [KBD] mark appears,

indicating that you can use the keyboard to set the value.

Simultaneously hold down the [INFORMATION] button

and press the appropriate key.

Basic Operation

Naming

Owner’s Manual

■ Basic naming operation

As shown below, you can set the name by repeating the two operations – moving the cursor to the desired location by using the

Cursor button and selecting a character by using the data dial, [INC/YES] button, and [DEC/NO] button.

■ Using the character list

If you ﬁnd it difﬁcult to select the desired characters with the above method, you may want to use the following method —

selecting the characters from a list.

EXIT ENTER

EXECUTE

DEC/NO INC/YES

Moving the cursor to the desired location on the name Selecting a character at the cursor location

EXIT ENTER

EXECUTE

DEC/NO INC/YES

INFORMATION

INFORMATION INFORMATION

When the cursor is located at the Name, this [LIST]

icon appears and you can call up the Character List

display by holding the [INFORMATION] button.

Release the [INFORMATION] button to return back

to the original display.

Select a character for the cursor location on the name.

Move the cursor to the desired location.

Perform the operations below while holding the [INFORMATION] button.

Playing the Demo Songs/Patterns

Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide — Playing the MOTIF ES

Playing the Demo Songs/Patterns

Here’s the best place to start your explorations of the MOTIF ES. The Song and Pattern Demos have been specially programmed

so you can hear just how amazing the sounds are, and ﬁnd out just how powerful the instrument really is — for music creation,

performance and production. Before you can play the Demos, you’ll need to load the Demo data (contained in ROM) to the

DRAM memory location as shown below.

n For details about ROM and DRAM, see page 187.

When the Demo Song/Pattern data is loaded, the memory area for playback will be overwritten and

the following Utility settings will be changed in order to play back the Demo Song/Pattern properly.

[UTILITY] →→

→→

[F1] GENERAL →→

→→

[SF1] TG →→

→→

Volume, NoteShift, Tune

[UTILITY] →→

→→

[F1] GENERAL →→

→→

[SF4] OTHER →→

→→

CtrlRest

[UTILITY] →→

→→

[F1] GENERAL →→

→→

[SF3] EF BYPAS

Important data should always be backed up to a SmartMedia/USB storage device.

In some cases such as those listed below, the Demo

Song/Pattern data will be loaded automatically when

turning the power on.

• When turning the power on with no SmartMedia card

in the CARD slot when the instrument is in its factory-

shipped state or after the Factory Set (page 44) is

executed.

• When turning the power on with a SmartMedia card

containing no Auto Load ﬁles in the CARD slot when

the instrument is in its factory-shipped state or after

the Factory Set (page 44) is executed.

In cases such as those listed above, steps #1-#3 are

unnecessary. Press the [SONG] button to enter the

Song mode, then perform the instructions below from

step #4.

n This synthesizer features an Auto Load function by which the

Demo Song/Pattern data or the speciﬁed ﬁles in the

SmartMedia card inserted in the CARD slot will be loaded

automatically when turning the power on. For details about

the Auto Load function, see page 135.

Quick Guide — Playing the MOTIF ES

(ROM)

Load

Song 01

Sections A - P Sections A - P

Song 02

(DRAM)

(ROM) (DRAM)

A P

Song 01

Song 02

Song 64

Pattern 01

Pattern 02

Pattern 01

Pattern 02

Pattern 64

Demo Song data

Memory area for Song playback

Memory area for Pattern playback

Demo Pattern data

CAUTION

Press the [FILE] button and [UTILITY] button

simultaneously.

VOICE

SONG

PERFORM MASTER

PATTERN FILE

MODE

SEQUENCER

INTEGRATED

SAMPLING

MIXING UTILITY

DEMO

Quick Guide — Playing the MOTIF ES

Playing the Demo Songs/Patterns

Owner’s Manual

You can select from the three Load Types listed below. Here,

we’ll select “All.”

After the data is loaded, the Song Play display is

automatically called up.

If “Pattern” is selected in step #2 above, the Pattern Play

display is automatically called up once the data is loaded.

n Keep in mind that the example displays shown in this manual are for

instruction purposes only, and the contents (for example, the Demo

Song/Pattern names) may differ slightly from those on your instrument.

When playback of the selected Song is ﬁnished, the Song

automatically stops. You can stop the Song anytime during

playback by pressing the [■] (Stop) button. This pauses the

song at the current position. To resume playback of the Song

from that point, press the [F] (Play) again. To instantly

return to the beginning of the Song, press the [ ] (Top)

button.

Move the cursor to “Song Number: Name” (with the cursor

buttons) then select another song by using the Data Dial, or

the [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons.

Next, let’s play a Demo Pattern.

Set the LoadType to “All.”

All Loads both the Demo Song and Pattern data.

Song Loads only the Demo Song data.

Pattern Loads only the Demo Pattern data.

Press the [ENTER] button to load the Demo data.

Press the [F] (Play) button to start Song

playback.

SEQ TRANSPORT

LOCATE 1 2

SEQ TRANSPORT

LOCATE 1 2

Start Stop

Top button

Select and play another Demo Song.

Press the [PATTERN] button to enter the Pattern

mode.

SEQ TRANSPORT

LOCATE 1 2

DEC/NO INC/YES

Decreases number Increases number

Increases numberDecreases number

Song Number: Name

Start

VOICE

SONG

PERFORM MASTER

PATTERN FILE

MODE

SEQUENCER

INTEGRATED

SAMPLING MIXING UTILITY

DEMO

Quick Guide — Playing the MOTIF ES

Playing the Demo Songs/Patterns

Owner’s Manual

There is another way to start Pattern playback – by pressing the

note son the keyboard. Move the cursor to the keyboard icon

and press the [INC/YES] button so that the F mark appears.

In this status, press any key to start the pattern playback.

Press the [DEC/NO] button with the cursor located at the

keyboard icon to turn the F mark off.

Make sure that the [SECTION] lamp is on (press the button if

necessary), then press any of the buttons shown below to

select and play the various Sections contained in a Pattern.

Pressing the [A] - [H] buttons calls up Sections A - H and

pressing the [PRE5] - [PLG3] buttons calls up the Sections I -

P. Try out various rhythm variations by changing the Section.

n Some Sections of the Demo Pattern may have no data. Because of

this, selecting some Sections may result in no sound.

Unlike Song playback, Pattern playback continues in a loop

until the [■] (Stop) button is pressed.

You can stop the Pattern anytime during playback by

pressing the [■] (Stop) button. This pauses the Pattern at the

current position. To resume playback of the Pattern from that

point, press the [F] (Play) again.

To instantly return to the beginning of the Pattern, press the

[] (Top) button.

Selecting a Pattern is done in the same way as selecting a

Song. Refer to step #5 above.

Parameters in the Song Play mode

Press the [F] (Play) button to start Pattern

playback.

Select different Sections of the Pattern.

A. PIANO KEYBOARD ORGAN

PRE 5 PRE 6 USER 1

GUITAR/

PLUCKED

SYN LEAD

ABCDEFG

SECTION

GROUP

CATEGORY

BANK

SYN PAD/

CHOIR

SYN COMP

CHROMATIC

PERCUSSION

DRUM/

PERCUSSION

SE MUSICAL FX COMBI

USER 2

STRINGS

PLG 1

BRASS

PLG 2

REED/PIPE

PLG 3

BASS

Press the [■] (Stop) button to stop Pattern

playback.

Select and play another Demo Song.

SEQ TRANSPORT

LOCATE 1 2

SEQ TRANSPORT

LOCATE 1 2

Start Stop

Top button

03 : New Song 1

Song track number and

track mute/solo status

Track data status

Indicates muted track.

Indicates soloed track (page 58).

Indicates that the track has no recorded data.

Indicates a sample track (page 168)

containing a Sample Voice (page 173).

Indicates a MIDI track (page 168) containing

MIDI sequence data.

Location settings for the selected Song

Measure : Beat

(for current playback location)

ARP1-ARP5

Use the [SF1] - [SF5] buttons to call up the

Arpeggio type and Song Scene assigned

to each button (page 123).

Tempo for the selected Song

Time signature for the selected Song

(You can change the value by

moving the cursor here and using the

[INC/YES]/[DEC/NO] buttons and

data dial.)

Transpose setting

(for entire Song)

Currently selected Song

Song number Song name

Quick Guide — Playing the MOTIF ES

Playing the Demo Songs/Patterns

Owner’s Manual

Using Mute/Solo with the Song and

Pattern tracks

Try this with the Demo Songs to hear how the tracks sound

both in isolation and in various combinations.

■ To mute a track

The corresponding track is set to mute (its lamp goes off) and

produces no sound. When pressing the same number button

again, the track mute is canceled (its lamp lights).

To turn Mute off, press the [MUTE] button again (the lamp

goes off).

■ To solo a track

Simultaneously hold down the [MUTE] button and press one

of the NUMBER buttons [1] to [16] to solo the corresponding

track. Once you’ve selected a track for soloing, the [MUTE]

button’s lamp ﬂashes, indicating the Solo function is active.

While Solo is active, you can change the soloed track simply

by pressing the corresponding NUMBER button [1] to [16].

To cancel the Solo function, press the [MUTE] button again.

Selecting a Song/Pattern track and

playing the keyboard

You can play along with the Song or Pattern using the sound

of a track — for example, playing additional drum/percussion

sounds on a drum track while the Song plays. Press the

[TRACK SELECT] button so that its lamp lights, and select a

track by pressing the one of the NUMBER buttons [1] to [16].

If you want you can also mute a track and play the part of the

track yourself. To do this, select the desired track as

described, then mute the track (as explained in “To mute a

track” above).

Song Location

The Song Play mode has a convenient Location function that

lets you jump to user-speciﬁed parts of a song. This lets you

assign a speciﬁc measure number in the selected song, and

instantly jump to the assigned measure – either during

playback or when the song is stopped. Two Locations can be

assigned.

■ Assigning Locations

Select the desired measure in the recorded song for the

Location. (Highlight “MEAS” and use the [INC/YES] and

[DEC/NO] buttons or data dial.) Then, to assign the measure

to Location 1, simultaneously hold down the [SET LOCATE]

button and press the [G] (Reverse) button.

To assign Location 2, use the [H] (Forward) button.

■ Jumping to an assigned Location

To instantly jump to the assigned Location 1 or 2,

simultaneously hold down the [LOCATE] button and pressing

the [G] (Reverse) button (for Location 1) or the [H]

(Forward) button (for Location 2).

Press the [MUTE] button (the lamp lights).

Press any of the NUMBER [1] - [16] buttons to

select the track number to be muted.

ELEMENT/ PERF. PART/ ZONE

87654321

MUTE

TRACK

SELECT

NUMBER

SOLO

1412 13

ELEMENT/ PERF. PART/ ZONE

87654321

MUTE

TRACK

SELECT

NUMBER

SOLO

1412 13

ELEMENT/ PERF. PART/ ZONE

87654321

MUTE

TRACK

SELECT

NUMBER

SOLO

1412 13

EDIT

COMPARE SCENE STORE

SET LOCATE

JOB STORE

SEQ TRANSPORT

LOCATE 1 2

Specify a measure number

to be registered.

In this example, the selected measure

is assigned to Location 1. The current

settings for Locations 1 and 2 are

shown at the top right of the display.

SEQ TRANSPORT

LOCATE 1 2

Playing the Demo Songs/Patterns

Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide — Playing the MOTIF ES

Song Chain

This function allows Songs to be “chained” together for

automatic sequential playback. In this section, try using the

Song Chain features with the Demo Songs.

From this display you can program and play your own custom

Song sequences.

Move the cursor to “001” by using the cursor buttons and

select the desired Song by using the Data Dial, or the [INC/

YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons. Likewise, assign the other

Songs to locations 002, 003, 004, and so on.

In addition, the following parameters can be set in the Song

Chain.

Move the cursor to the top of the Song Chain display, and

press the [F] (Play) button to start Song playback.

When the Song Chain programmed in step #2 reaches to the

end, playback stops automatically. Press the [■] (Stop) button

during playback to stop Song Chain playback.

n The Song Chain can only be played back in the Song Chain display,

and not from any other display.

Parameters in the Pattern Play mode

Pattern Chain

Pattern Chain allows you to string several different Sections together to make a single Song.

About the Pattern Chain structure, see page 168. For information on how to create Pattern Chain data, see page 115.

Press the [F6] CHAIN button to call up the Song

Chain display.

Program the desired order of the Songs.

skip Skips past (ignores) the selected chain number and

continues playback from the next chain number.

stop Stops Song Chain playback at that chain number. You

can restart Song Chain playback from the next chain

number by pressing the [F] (Play) button.

end Indicates the end mark of the Song Chain data.

Play the Song Chain.

SEQ TRANSPORT

LOCATE 1 2

01 : New Pattern A

Pattern track number and

track mute/solo status

When theFmark appears, pressing

any note on the keyboard starts

Pattern playback (page 57).

Track data status

Indicates a MIDI track (page 168) containing MIDI

sequence data.

Indicates a sample track (page 168)

containing a Sample Voice (page 173).

Indicates that the track has no

recorded data. (No Phrase is

assigned.)

Indicates soloed track (page 58).

Indicates muted track.

Measure : Beat

(for current playback location)

ARP1-ARP5

Use the [SF1] - [SF5] buttons to

call up the Arpeggio type

assigned to each button (page

123).

Tempo for the selected

Pattern

Time signature for the selected pattern

(You can change the value by moving

the cursor here and using the [INC/

YES]/[DEC/NO] buttons and data dial.)

Transpose setting

(for entire Pattern)

Pattern number

Currently

selected Pattern

and Section

Pattern number Section

Playing the Keyboard (in the Voice Play mode)

Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide — Playing the MOTIF ES

Playing the Keyboard (in the Voice Play mode)

The Voice Play mode is where you select and play the instrument sounds (voices) of this synthesizer.

Selecting a Voice

Selecting a Normal Voice

Internally, there are two Voice Types: Normal Voices and Drum Voices. Normal Voices are mainly pitched musical instrument-type

sounds that can be played over the range of the keyboard. Drum Voices are mainly percussion/drum sounds that are assigned

to individual notes on the keyboard. In this section, we’ll show you how to select a Normal Voice.

You can select the desired Voice from various Voice Banks (Preset 1~6, User 1~2, GM preset, Plug-in 1~3) as shown below.

In this condition, playing the keyboard sounds the Voice indicated in the display.

The parameters shown in the Voice Play mode are brieﬂy explained below.

n Keep in mind that the example displays shown in this manual are for instruction purposes only, and the contents (for example, the Voice name here) may

differ slightly from those on your instrument.

Press the [VOICE] button to enter the Voice Play mode.

A. PIANO KEYBOARD ORGAN

PRE 5 PRE 6

PRE 1 PRE 2 PRE 3 PRE 4

USER 1

GUITAR/

PLUCKED

USER 2

STRINGS

PLG 1

SLOT 1 SLOT 2 SLOT 3

BRASS

PLG 2

REED/PIPE

PLG 3

BASS

Preset Bank

Contains the Voices

built into this

instrument.

User Bank

Contains the voices you create in

the Voice Edit mode.

Plug-in Bank

Available when Plug-in Boards have

been installed. See page 74.

GM Bank

Contains the voices allocated according to the

GM standard. For details, see page 160.

Voice Bank

USR1 : 001 (A01) Gt : MegaAcGtr

VOICE PERFORM MASTER

MODE

ARP1-ARP5

Use the [SF1] - [SF5] buttons to call

up the Arpeggio type assigned to

each button (page 66).

Indicates the Keyboard MIDI

transmit channel. See page

64 for details.

Indicates the Keyboard Octave

setting set via the [OCTAVE]

buttons. See page 63 for details.

Indicates the functions assigned to the respective Control

knobs. See page 81.

Bank

(selected via the

BANK buttons)

Number

(selected via the NUMBER

[1]-[16] buttons)

Group

(selected via the GROUP [A]-[H] buttons)

Voice Program number

(corresponding to Groups A to H and Numbers 01 to 16)

Bank and Voice Program number

Indicates the currently selected voice.

Category and Voice name

Category

Voice name

Playing the Keyboard (in the Voice Play mode)

Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide — Playing the MOTIF ES

Select one of the Banks from Preset 1~6, User 1~2, and GM.

Voices in each Bank are divided into Groups [A] ~ [H]. Select

a Group to display the Voices that belong to the selected

Group.

Press one of the NUMBER [1] - [16] buttons.

Selecting a Drum Voice

Internally, there are two Voice Types: Normal Voices and Drum

Voices. Normal Voices are mainly pitched musical instrument-

type sounds that can be played over the range of the

keyboard. Drum Voices are mainly percussion/drum sounds

that are assigned to individual notes on the keyboard. In this

section, we’ll show you how to select a Drum Voice.

While holding the [DRUM KITS] button, press one of the

arrow-indicated buttons: [PRE5] (Preset Drum), [USER1]

(User Drum), or [GM] (GM Drum).

This operation is basically the same as in selecting a Normal

Voice. You can select a Group from A to D when selecting the

Preset Drum Bank in step #2. You can select a Group from A

or B when selecting the User Drum Bank in step #2. You can

select only A when selecting the GM Drum Bank in step #2.

This is the same as in selecting a Normal Voice.

n For details about the instrument assignments for each key, refer to the

separate Data List.

Using the [INC/YES], [DEC/NO] buttons and data dial

You can select a Voice Number by using the [INC/YES],

[DEC/NO] buttons and data dial in steps #3 and #4.

n The procedure for selecting Voices in other modes differs

from above. For details on selecting Voices in the

Performance mode, see page 71. For details on selecting

Voices in the Song/Pattern mode, see page 102.

Select a Normal Voice Bank.

Select a Normal Voice Group.

Select a Normal Voice Number.

Play the keyboard.

A. PIANO KEYBOARD ORGAN

PRE 5 PRE 6

PRE 1 PRE 2 PRE 3 PRE 4

USER 1

GUITAR/

PLUCKED

USER 2

STRINGS

PLG 1

SLOT 1 SLOT 2 SLOT 3

BRASS

PLG 2

REED/PIPE

PLG 3

BASS

VoiceGroup

SYN LEAD

ABCDEFG

SECTION

GROUP

SYN PAD/

CHOIR

SYN COMP

CHROMATIC

PERCUSSION

DRUM/

PERCUSSION

SE MUSICAL FX COMBI

ELEMENT/PERF. PART /ZONE

87654321

MUTE

TRACK

SELECT

NUMBER

SOLO

1412 13

Press the [VOICE] button to enter the Voice Play

mode.

Select a Drum Voice Bank.

Select a Drum Voice Group.

Select a Drum Voice Number.

Play the keyboard and check what instrument is

assigned to each key.

FAVORITES

DRUM KITS

A. PIANO KEYBOARD ORGAN

PRE 5 PRE 6 USER 1

GUITAR/

PLUCKED

USER 2

BASS

DEC/NO INC/YES

Decreases number Increases number

Quick Guide — Playing the MOTIF ES

Playing the Keyboard (in the Voice Play mode)

Owner’s Manual

Using the Category Search function

This synthesizer features a powerful Category Search function

that gives you quick access to the sounds you want,

irrespective of their bank locations. Simply select a Voice

category, such as A. PIANO or SYN LEAD, and you can

browse through all related Voices one by one – and audition

each of them, too. If you’ve installed a Plug-in Board to the

instrument, those Voices are automatically included in the

search as well. Plus, you can use the special Favorites

category to store the Voices you use most.

In this condition with the button lit, you can use the BANK and

GROUP buttons to specify the Category.

Press the [CATEGORY SEARCH] button again to turn this

function off.

Press one of the BANK and GROUP buttons to call up the

selected Category name and the Voice list. The ﬁrst Voice in

the Category is selected.

All Categories are divided into two or three Sub Categories for

further ease in selection. The Sub Category names are

displayed at the bottom of the Category Search display. Press

the [F1] - [F3] buttons to select the ﬁrst Voice in the

corresponding Sub Category.

n An alternate way of selecting categories is to use the Cursor buttons to

select and highlight the Category name in the display, then use the

[INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons or the data dial to select the

Category. Then, move the cursor to the Voice list at the right of the

display to select the Voice (see step #3 below).

n Some Voices such as User Voices may not be registered to any

Category. You can search for these Voices by setting the Category to

“--------------.”

Step through the available Voices by using the data dial. You

can also use the [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons, or use the

Cursor [ ]/[ ] buttons.

n You can also use the [ENTER] button or [EXIT] button to exit from the

Category function.

Turn the Category Search function on by

pressing the [CATEGORY SEARCH] button.

Select a Category.

A. PIANO KEYBOARD ORGAN

PRE 5 PRE 6 USER 1

GUITAR/

PLUCKED

SYN LEAD

ABCDEFG

SECTION

GROUP

CATEGORY

BANK

SYN PAD/

CHOIR

SYN COMP

CHROMATIC

PERCUSSION

DRUM/

PERCUSSION

SE MUSICAL FX COMBI

USER 2

STRINGS

PLG 1

BRASS

PLG 2

REED/PIPE

PLG 3

BASS

Category

Sub Category

Voice

A. PIANO KEYBOARD ORGAN

PRE 5 PRE 6 USER 1

GUITAR/

PLUCKED

SYN LEAD

ABCDEFG

SECTION

GROUP

CATEGORY

BANK

SYN PAD/

CHOIR

SYN COMP

CHROMATIC

PERCUSSION

DRUM/

PERCUSSION

SE MUSICAL FX COMBI

USER 2

STRINGS

PLG 1

BRASS

PLG 2

REED/PIPE

PLG 3

BASS

Category

Category names

Sub Category

Voice List

Select a Voice from the Voice List in the display.

Press the [CATEGORY SEARCH] button to turn this

function off and go back to the original display.

SF 1SF 2SF 3

F1 F2 F3

SF 1SF 2SF 3

F1 F2 F3

EXIT ENTER

EXECUTE

DEC/NO INC/YES

Playing the Keyboard (in the Voice Play mode)

Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide — Playing the MOTIF ES

■ Favorite Category

Use this convenient function to store all your favorite, often-

used Voices in a single, easy-to-access location – and call

them up by pressing the [FAVORITES] button. Select any

Voice you want, from any desired category, and enter each to

the Favorites Category. In this way, you can go directly to all

the Voices you use the most, without having to hop around

other Categories – a great aid when playing live.

You can un-checkmark it by pressing the [F5] button again.

You can use the [F5] SET/CLR and [F6] CLR ALL buttons also

in this display to register/remove the voices to/from the

Favorite Category.

Make sure to execute step #7. The settings made in steps #3 - 4 will be lost

if you turning the power off without executing step #7.

Never attempt to turn off the power while data (e.g., Voice) is being written

to Flash ROM (while a “Please keep power on” message is shown). Turning

the power off in this state may not only cause the system to freeze (due to

data corruption in the Flash ROM) and prevent normal startup the next

time the power is turned on, it may also result in loss of all user data.

Keyboard octave setting

(MOTIF ES6/MOTIF ES7)

Sometimes when playing a voice, you may wish to play in a lower or

higher pitch range. For example, you may want to shift the pitch down

lower to get extra bass notes, or shift up to get higher notes for leads

and solos. The Octave Up/Down controls let you do this quickly and

easily. Each time you press the [OCTAVE UP] button on the panel, the

overall pitch of the voice goes up by one octave.

Likewise, each press of the [OCTAVE DOWN] button takes the pitch

down by one octave. The range is from -3 to +3, with 0 being

standard pitch. When this is set to Octave Up, the lamp of the

[OCTAVE UP] button lights, and when it is set to Octave Down, the

[OCTAVE DOWN] button’s lamp lights. The current octave setting is

shown at the top right of the display. You can instantly restore

standard pitch (0) by simultaneously pressing both the [OCTAVE UP]

button and the [OCTAVE DOWN] button (both lamps turn off).

n The Octave setting made here is automatically reﬂected in the

identical Octave parameter in the Utility mode ([UTILITY] → [F1]

GENERAL → [SF2] KBD → Octave). This setting is available in all

modes.

Transpose setting of the keyboard

You can set the amount in semitones by which the range

of the keyboard is shifted up or down as well as the

octave setting.

Press the [UTILITY] button to enter the Utility mode.

Turn the Category Search function on by

pressing the [CATEGORY SEARCH] button.

Specify the Category and Sub Category, then

select a Voice (page 62).

Favorite Category by Pressing the [F5] SET/CLR

button to checkmark the box next to the Voice

name.

Set other Voices to the Favorite Category as

required by repeating step #2 - 3.

Press the [FAVORITES] button to see the Voices

set to the Favorite Category in steps #2 - 4.

Press the [FAVORITES] button again to return to

the Category Search display.

SF 1SF 2SF 3SF 4 SF 5

F1 F2 F3 F4 F6F5

Checkmark on

Checkmark off

Pressing [F5]

toggles between

the two settings:

To r emove all the marked Voices from the Favorite

Category, simply press the [F6] CLR ALL button.

FAVORITES

DRUM KITS

Pressing the [CATEGORY SEARCH] button to exit from

the Category Search display will store the Favorite

Category settings to internal Flash ROM automatically.

CAUTION

DOWN UP

OCTAVE

TIP

SONG

PATTERN FILE

SEQUENCER

INTEGRATED

SAMPLING

MIXING UTILITY

EDIT

COMPARE SCENE STORE

SET LOCATE

JOB STORE

DEMO

Quick Guide — Playing the MOTIF ES

Playing the Keyboard (in the Voice Play mode)

Owner’s Manual

2 Press the [F1] GENERAL button, then the [SF2]

KBD button.

3 Move the cursor to “Transpose” by using the

Cursor button.

4 Change the Transpose value by using the [INC/

YES], [DEC/NO] buttons and data dial.

5 Press the [STORE] button to store the Transpose

setting to internal Flash ROM.

Make sure to execute step #5. The settings made in step #4 will be

lost if you turning the power off without executing step #7.

Never attempt to turn off the power while data (e.g., Voice) is being

written to Flash ROM (while a “Please keep power on” message is

shown). Turning the power off in this state may not only cause the

system to freeze (due to data corruption in the Flash ROM) and

prevent normal startup the next time the power is turned on, it may

also result in loss of all user data.

n The transpose setting is available in all modes.

Keyboard MIDI transmit channel setting

This function is especially convenient when recording to an

external sequencer or controlling another instrument via MIDI.

It lets you easily change the transmit channel with just a

couple of button presses. Press the [TRACK SELECT] button

(the lamp lights), then press the appropriate NUMBER button

([1] - [16]). The transmit channel setting is shown at the top

right of the display.

n You can also set the MIDI keyboard transmit channel from the Utility

mode ([UTILITY] → [F5] MIDI → [SF1] CH → KBDTransCh). This

parameter is available for the Voice mode/Performance mode but not

for the Song mode/Pattern mode.

Using Controllers

Pitch Bend Wheel

Use the Pitch Bend wheel to bend notes up (roll the wheel

away from you) or down (roll the wheel toward you) while

playing the keyboard. This wheel is self-centering and will

automatically return to normal pitch when released. Try out the

Pitch Bend wheel while pressing a note on the keyboard.

n Each preset Voice has its own default Pitch Bend Range setting. The

Pitch Bend Range setting for each Voice can be changed in the

[VOICE] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF5] OTHER

display and stored as a User Voice in the Voice Store mode. From this

display you can also reverse the Pitch Bend function — so that moving

the wheel up lowers the pitch, and moving it down raises the pitch.

n Functions other than Pitch Bend can be assigned to the Pitch Bend

Wheel in the [VOICE] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F4] CTL SET

display. These assignment settings can be stored as a User Voice in

the Voice Store mode. Even if a different function is assigned to this

wheel, the Pitch Bend function is available and Pitch Bend messages

are still generated when the wheel is used.

n Using the Pitch Bend wheel generates the same MIDI message to

extend devices, regardless of the assignments made in the Voice Edit

mode.

Modulation Wheel

Even though the Modulation wheel is conventionally used to

apply vibrato to the sound, many of the preset Voices have

other functions and effects assigned to the wheel. The more

you move this wheel up, the greater the effect that is applied

to the sound. Try out the Modulation wheel with various preset

voices while playing the keyboard.

n To avoid accidentally applying effects to the current Voice, make sure

the Modulation Wheel is set to minimum before you start playing.

Various functions can be assigned to the Modulation Wheel in the [VOICE]

→ [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F4] CTL SET display. These assignment

settings can be stored as a User Voice in the Voice Store mode.

n Using the Modulation wheel generates the same MIDI message to

external devices, regardless of the assignments made in the Voice

Edit mode.

SCENE

SF1 SF

2 SF3 SF4 SF5

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

INFORMATION

CAUTION

ELEMENT/ PERF. PART/ ZONE

87654321

MUTE

TRACK

SELECT

NUMBER

SOLO

1412 13

Pitch Up

Pitch Down

Pitch Bend Wheel

Maximum

Minimum

Modulation Wheel

Playing the Keyboard (in the Voice Play mode)

Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide — Playing the MOTIF ES

Ribbon Controller

The Ribbon Controller is touch sensitive, and is controlled by

running your ﬁnger laterally across the surface. Various

function are assigned to each preset Voice.

Try out the Ribbon Controller with various preset Voices while

playing the keyboard.

n You can set the Ribbon Controller to control different functions on

connected external MIDI devices from the functions assigned for the

instrument itself. You can also determine whether the Ribbon

Controller value returns to the center, or stays at the point where you

released your ﬁnger. Both of these setting can be made in the Utility

mode ([UTILITY] → [F3] VOICE → [SF4] CTL ASN).

Knobs (KN)

These knobs let you change various aspects of the Voice’s

sound in real time – while you play. Turn a knob to the right to

increase the value, and left to decrease it. For each preset

Voice, various functions are assigned to four knobs. Try out

these knobs with various preset Voices while playing keyboard.

You can change which particular group of functions or

parameters the knobs are assigned to by pressing any of the

[KNOB CONTROL FUNCTION] buttons. For details, see page

81.

n In certain situations, using the knobs may not result in any change in

the sound. For more information, refer to page 50 in the Basic

Operation section.

Edit Indicator

Tweaking the knobs in the Voice mode directly changes

the parameters of the Voice. When any of the Voice

parameters are changed, the [E] (Edit) Indicator

appears in the top left of the display. This indicates that

the current voice has been modiﬁed but not yet stored.

If you’re satisﬁed with the tweaks you made and the

resulting sound, you can store the changes as a User

Voice in the Voice Store mode (page 85).

If you select another Voice during editing, the [E] (Edit) indicator will

disappear and all your edits will be lost.

It is a good idea to store the edited Voice data from the Voice Store

mode (page 85). Even if you lose the edited Voice data, you can

restore it by using the Edit Recall function (page 82).

Control Sliders

In the Voice mode, the four Control Sliders let you

independently adjust the levels of the Elements of a

Normal Voice or the Drum Voice keys. When Normal

Voice is selected, you can adjust the volume balance

among the four Elements.

n Inadvertent use of the sliders may result in no sound. If this

occurs, move the sliders upward.

SWING

LOW

CUTOFF

PAN

ASSIGN A

GATE TIME

RESONANCE

REVERB

ASSIGN B

VELOCITY

ATTACK

CHORUS

ASSIGN 1

UNITMULTIPLY

RELEASE

TEMPO

ASSIGN 2

LOW MID

HIGH MID

HIGH

Edit Indicator

CAUTION

ZONE 1

CS 1

VOLUME

ZONE 1

VOLUME

ZONE 1

VOLUME

ZONE 1

VOLUME

ZONE 1

CS 1

VOLUME

1 VOLUME 2 VOLUME 3 VOLUME 4

CS 2

ZONE 2

CS 3

ZONE 3

CS 4

ZONE 4

Quick Guide — Playing the MOTIF ES

Playing the Keyboard (in the Voice Play mode)

Owner’s Manual

Using the Arpeggio feature

This function lets you trigger rhythm patterns, riffs and phrases using the current Voice by simply playing notes on the keyboard.

Since the preset Voices already have their own Arpeggio types pre-assigned, all you need to do is select the desired Voice and

turn on the Arpeggio function. Try selecting different Voices and check out the various Arpeggio types.

n For details about Arpeggio, see page 169.

For certain Voices, simply selecting the Voice will turn Arpeggio on.

The particular rhythm pattern or phrase that plays depends on the

actual notes or chords you play, as well as on the selected Arpeggio

type. For details, refer to page 169 in the Basic Operation section.

■ Changing the Arpeggio type during keyboard

performance

A different Arpeggio type is assigned to each of the [SF1] ARP1 -

[SF5] ARP5 buttons for each preset Voice. When a musical note icon

appears to the right of each Arpeggio number in the display (see

below), the corresponding button is assigned an Arpeggio type. Try

out various Arpeggio types by pressing the [SF1] - [SF5] buttons.

You can conﬁrm the currently selected Arpeggio type in the [F6] ARP

display.

You can change the default settings and assign any Arpeggio

types you like to the [SF1] - [SF5] buttons. The selected

Arpeggio indication is highlighted in white. If two buttons

share the same type, both will appear in white. The settings

can be stored as a User Voice in the Voice Store mode.

1 Press the [ARPEGGIO ON/OFF] button to turn

Arpeggio on.

2 Select the desired Arpeggio type in the [VOICE] →→

→→

[F6] ARP display.

3 While holding the [STORE] button, press one of

the [SF1] - [SF5] button.

The currently selected Arpeggio type is assigned to

the pressed button. If you execute this operation with

the [ARPEGGIO ON/OFF] lamp off, no Arpeggio type

will be assigned to the pressed button.

4 Repeat steps #2 - 3 as necessary.

5 Press and release the [STORE] button to enter the

Voice Store mode and store the setting as a User

Voice (page 85).

n Keep in mind that holding and releasing the [STORE] button

WITHOUT pressing one of the [SF1] - [SF5] buttons will

automatically enter the Voice Store mode, instead of storing the

Arpeggio type.

■

Controlling Arpeggio playback by using the knobs

You can adjust the Arpeggio related parameters such as volume

and tempo by rotating the knobs. If you are satisﬁed with the results,

you can store the changes as a User Voice in the Voice Store mode.

Selecting some voices automatically turns this lamp on.

For details on what functions each knob controls while the

[ARP FX] lamp is on, see page 81.

Press the [ARPEGGIO ON/OFF] button to turn

Arpeggio on.

Play a note or notes on the keyboard to trigger

the Arpeggio playback.

Bank Indicates “pre (preset)” or “usr (user).”

Ctgr See page 169.

Type Refer to the separate Data List booklet.

REMOTE ARPEGGIO

ON/OFF ON/OFF

R-AUDIO

G-MIDI

SF 1SF 2SF 3 SF 4SF 5

Arpeggio type currently selected

Press the KNOB CONTROL FUNCTION [ARP FX]

button (the lamp lights).

Tweak the knobs while the Arpeggio is playing.

If you’re satisfied with the results, you can store

the changes as a User Voice in the Voice Store

mode (page 85).

SWING

LOW

KNOB

CONTROL

FUNCTION

ARP FX

TONE

ASSIGN

PAN/SEND

CUTOFF

PAN

ASSIGN A

GATE TIME

RESONANCE

REVERB

ASSIGN B

VELOCITY

ATTACK

CHORUS

ASSIGN 1

UNITMULTIPLY

RELEASE

TEMPO

ASSIGN 2

LOW MID

HIGH MID

HIGH

Playing the Keyboard (in the Performance Play mode)

Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide — Playing the MOTIF ES

Playing the Keyboard (in the Performance Play mode)

As in the Voice Play mode, the Performance Play mode is where you select and play the instrument sounds of this synthesizer.

In a Performance, you can mix several different Voices together in a layer, or split them across the keyboard, or even set up a

combination layer/split. Each Performance can contain up to four different Parts.

Selecting a Performance

128 Performances (1 bank) are provided in internal User memory (Flash ROM). In the Performance Play mode, you can select

and play individual User performances. Since there is only one bank for Performances, you need not select a Performance Bank.

In this condition, playing the keyboard sounds the Performance indicated in the display.

The parameters shown in the Performance Play mode are brieﬂy explained below.

n Keep in mind that the example displays shown in this manual are for instruction purposes only, and the contents (for example, the Performance name here)

may differ slightly from those on your instrument.

Performances are divided into Groups [A] ~ [H]. Select a

Group to show a list of the Performances.

Press one of the NUMBER [1] - [16] buttons.

Press the [PERFORM] button to enter the Performance Play mode.

USER : 001 (A01) Ap : New Peform

VOICE PERFORM MASTER

MODE

Indicates the Keyboard MIDI

transmit channel. See page 68 for

details.

Indicates the Keyboard Octave

setting set via the [OCTAVE]

buttons. See page 68 for details.

Indicates settings related to the Control knobs.

See page 90.

Number

(selected via the NUMBER

[1]-[16] buttons)

Bank and Performance Program number

Indicates the currently selected Performance.

Category and Performance name

Category

Performance name

Bank

ARP1-ARP5

Use the [SF1] - [SF5] buttons to call

up the Arpeggio type assigned to

each button (page 70).

Group

(selected via the GROUP [A]-[H] buttons)

Performance Program number

(corresponding to Groups A to H and Numbers 01 to 16)

Select a Performance Group.

SYN LEAD

ABCDEFG

SECTION

GROUP

SYN PAD/

CHOIR

SYN COMP

CHROMATIC

PERCUSSION

DRUM/

PERCUSSION

SE MUSICAL FX COMBI

Group Performance

Select a Performance Number.

ELEMENT/ PERF. PART/ ZONE

87654321

MUTE

TRACK

SELECT

NUMBER

SOLO

1412 13

Quick Guide — Playing the MOTIF ES

Playing the Keyboard (in the Performance Play mode)

Owner’s Manual

Using the [INC/YES], [DEC/NO] buttons and data dial

Rather than using the BANK/NUMBER buttons

described in steps #2 and 3 above, you can select a

Performance by using the [INC/YES], [DEC/NO] buttons

and data dial.

Performance Part mute/solo

Each performance can contain a maximum of four Parts, each

of which can be turned on or off independently.

Muting and soloing of Parts is done in the same way as that of

tracks in a Song/Pattern. See page 58.

Using the Category Search function

As in the Voice Play mode, you can use the Category Search

and Favorite Category functions in the Performance Play

mode. For details on how to use the function, see page 62.

Keyboard octave setting

(MOTIF ES6/MOTIF ES7)

As in the Voice Play mode, you can use the [OCTAVE UP/

DOWN] button to shift the note of the keyboard up or down in

octaves.

n The Octave setting made here is automatically reﬂected in the

identical Octave parameter in the Utility mode ([UTILITY] → [F1]

GENERAL → [SF2] KBD → Octave). This setting is available in all

modes.

Transpose setting of the keyboard

As in the Voice Play mode, you can set the amount in

semitones by which the range of the keyboard is shifted

up or down in the Utility mode.

n The transpose setting is available in all modes.

Keyboard MIDI transmit channel

setting

As in the Voice Play mode, you can change the MIDI transmit

channel for the keyboard. Press the [TRACK SELECT] button

(the lamp lights), then press the appropriate NUMBER button

([1] - [16]). The transmit channel setting is shown at the top

right of the display.

n You can also set the MIDI keyboard transmit channel from the Utility

mode ([UTILITY] → [F5] MIDI → [SF1] CH → KBDTransCh). This

parameter is available for the Voice mode/Performance mode but not

for the Song mode/Pattern mode.

Play the keyboard.

DEC/NO INC/YES

Decreases number Increases number

ELEMENT/PERF. PART /ZONE

87654321

MUTE

TRACK

SELECT

SOLO

1412 13

TIP

Playing the Keyboard (in the Performance Play mode)

Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide — Playing the MOTIF ES

Using Controllers

Pitch Bend Wheel

This is basically the same as in the Voice Play mode (page

64).

n The Pitch Bend Range setting depends on the setting (made in the

Voice mode) of the Voice assigned to each Part.

n The functions assigned to the Pitch Bend Wheel depend on the setting

(made in the Voice mode) of the Voice assigned to each Part.

n Even if a different function is assigned to the wheel, Pitch bend is still

available and Pitch Bend messages are still generated when the

wheel is used.

Modulation Wheel

This is basically the same as in the Voice Play mode (page

64).

n To avoid accidentally applying effects to the current Voice, make sure

the Modulation Wheel is set to minimum before you start playing.

n The functions assigned to the Modulation Wheel depend on the

settings (made in the Voice mode) of the Voice assigned to each Part.

n Using the Modulation wheel generates the same MIDI message to

external devices, regardless of the assignments made in the Voice

Edit mode.

Ribbon Controller

This is basically the same as in the Voice Play mode (page

65).

n The functions assigned to the Ribbon Controller depend on the

settings (made in the Voice mode) of the Voice assigned to each Part.

n You can set the Ribbon Controller to control a different functions on

connected external MIDI devices from the functions assigned for the

Performance on the instrument itself. You can also determine whether

the Ribbon Controller value returns to the center for each

Performance, or stays at the point where you released your ﬁnger.

Both of these setting can be made in the Performance Edit mode

([PERFORM] → Performance selection → [EDIT] → COMMON → [F4]

CTL ASN).

Knobs (KN)

These knobs let you change various aspects of the

Performance sound in real time – while you play. Turn a knob

to the right to increase the value, and left to decrease it. For

each Performance, various functions are assigned to four

knobs. Try out these knobs with various Performances while

playing the keyboard.

You can change which particular group of functions or

parameters the knobs are assigned to by pressing any of the

[KNOB CONTROL FUNCTION] buttons. For details, see page

90.

n In certain situations, using the knobs may not result in any change in

the sound. For more information, refer to page 50 in the Basic

Operation section.

Edit Indicator

Tweaking the knobs in the Performance mode directly

changes the parameters of the Performance. When any

of the Performance parameters are changed, the [E]

(Edit) Indicator appears in the top left of the display. This

indicates that the current Performance has been

modiﬁed but not yet stored.

If you’re satisﬁed with the tweaks you made and the

resulting sound, you can store the changes as a User

Performance in the Performance Store mode (page 91).

If you select another Performance during editing, the [E] (Edit)

indicator will disappear and all your edits will be lost. It is a good

idea to store the edited Performance data from the Performance

Store mode (page 91). Even if you lose the edited Performance data,

you can restore it by using the Edit Recall function (page 91).

When shipped from the factory, this synthesizer contains a full set

of specially programmed 128 User Performances in the User bank.

You can edit and store these Performances and overwrite them in

the Performance Store mode. You can also restore them to the

original factory presets by pressing the [ENTER] button in the

[UTILITY] →→

→→

[JOB] display (page 44).

Control Sliders

In the Performance mode, the four Control Sliders let

you independently adjust the levels of the Parts of a

Performance. You can adjust the volume balance

among four parts.

n Inadvertent use of the sliders may result in no sound. If this

occurs, move the sliders upward.

n In certain situations, using the Control Sliders may not result in

any change in the sound. For more information, refer to page

50 in the Basic Operation section.

Edit Indicator

CAUTION

ZONE 1

CS 1

VOLUME

ZONE 1

VOLUME

ZONE 1

VOLUME

ZONE 1

VOLUME

ZONE 1

CS 1

VOLUME

1 VOLUME 2 VOLUME 3 VOLUME 4

CS 2

ZONE 2

CS 3

ZONE 3

CS 4

ZONE 4

Playing the Keyboard (in the Performance Play mode)

Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide — Playing the MOTIF ES

Using the Arpeggio feature

As in the Voice mode, you can use the Arpeggio feature in the Performance mode.

In the Performance mode, you can make independent Arpeggio playback settings for each Part of the Performance — including

the on/off setting, as well as the Arpeggio type and related parameters. This means you can set the Performance such that any

or all Parts can be used to trigger Arpeggio playback. A useful application of this would be to assign a Drum Voice to one Part

and use Arpeggio playback on only that Part — so that you can have a rhythm pattern accompaniment playing while you play

another Voice.

Since the preset Performances already have their own Arpeggio types pre-assigned, all you need to do is select the desired

Performance and turn on the Arpeggio function. Try selecting different Performances and check out the various Arpeggio types.

n Different Arpeggio types cannot be played back for each Part.

n For details about Arpeggio, see page 169.

■ Changing the Arpeggio type during your performance

As in the Voice Play mode (page 66), the Performance play mode lets you use the [SF1] - [SF5] buttons to assign the Arpeggio

types and recall them.

The Arpeggio type for the current Performance can be selected in the [PERFORM] → [F6] ARP display or the [PERFORM] →

[EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F3] ARP display.

If you assign the desired Arpeggio type to the [SF1] - [SF5] buttons, store the settings as a User Performance in the Performance

Store mode (page 91).

■ Controlling Arpeggio playback by using the knobs

You can tweak Arpeggio related parameters such as volume and tempo by using the knobs. If you’re satisﬁed with the tweaks

you made and the resulting sound, you can store the changes as a User Performance in the Performance Store mode.

For information on using the knobs, refer to the Voice Play mode (page 66).

Assigning desired Voices to each part

Performances can be made up of a maximum of four Parts (Voices), selected from the internal tone generator Parts 1 - 4 and

Plug-in board Parts 1 - 3.

You can create a Performance by layering several Voices together, and by assigning different Voices to separate ranges of the

keyboard. You can then store up to 128 of your original, edited Performances to internal User memory.

1234

PLG1 PLG2 PLG3

1234

PLG1 PLG2 PLG3

Built-in tone

generator Parts

Layer (example)

Split (example)

Plug-in Parts*

*Available when the Plug-in

Board has been installed.

Built-in tone

generator Parts

Plug-in Parts*

Playing the Keyboard (in the Performance Play mode)

Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide — Playing the MOTIF ES

This calls up a list indicating which Voice is assigned to each

Part of the current Performance.

Move the cursor to the desired Part. When a Voice has

already been assigned to the selected Part, change the Voice

Bank or Number by using the data dial, the [INC/YES] and the

[DEC/NO] button. When no Voice is assigned to the selected

Part, press the [SF1] ADD INT button or [SF2] ADD PLG

button to execute the assignment, then change the Voice

Bank or Number.

You can also select a Voice Bank/Number by using the BANK,

GROUP, and NUMBER buttons (page 60).

n Voices of the Multi part Plug-in Board PLG100-XG cannot be assigned

to Performance parts.

When an internal Voice is assigned to a Part, the following

Voice Banks are available.

When a Plug-in Board Voice is assigned to a Part, the

available Voice Banks differ depending on the installed Plug-

in Board. For details, refer to the Owner’s Manual that came

with the Plug-in Board.

You can set the lowest note of the range over which the Voice

of the selected Part sounds by simultaneously holding the

[SF4] button and pressing the desired key. To set the highest

note of the range, simultaneously hold the [SF5] button and

press the desired key.

Press the [STORE] button to enter the Performance Store

mode, select the destination Performance number, then press

the [ENTER] button to execute the store operation. For details

about Performance Store, see page 91.

Press the [F2] VOICE button in the Performance

Play mode.

Assign the desired Voice to each Part.

SCENE

SF1 SF

2 SF3 SF4 SF5

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

INFORMATION

SCENE

SF1 SF

2 SF3 SF4 SF5

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

INFORMATION

DEC/NO INC/YES

Select a Voice

Bank/Number at

the cursor location.

Voice Bank Voice Number

Assign an internal Voice

to the selected Part.

Delete the Voice assignment of the

selected Part.

Assign a Plug-in Voice to the selected Part.

(Available when the Plug-in Board has been installed.)

PRE1 (Preset1) ~

PRE6 (Preset 6)

Preset Banks 1 - 6 of the Normal Voice. These

correspond to the [PRE1] - [PRE6] buttons in the Voice

mode.

USER1 ~ USER2 User Banks 1 - 2 of the Normal Voice. These correspond

to the [USER1] - [USER2] buttons in the Voice mode.

GM GM Normal Voice Bank. This corresponds to the [GM]

button in the Voice mode.

PDR (Preset Drum) Preset Bank of the Drum Voice. This corresponds to

pressing the [DRUM KITS] button and the [PRE5] button

simultaneously.

GMDR (GM Drum) GM Drum Voice Bank. This corresponds to pressing the

[DRUM KITS] button and the [GM] button simultaneously.

UDR (User Drum) User Bank of the Drum Voice. This corresponds to

pressing the [DRUM KITS] button and the [USER1]

button simultaneously.

Specify the note range of each part, as required.

Change the volume of each Part and adjust the

relative balance among the four Parts by using

the Control sliders.

Store the settings as a User Performance in the

Performance Store mode.

SF 4 SF 5

Note Limit Low Note Limit High

Quick Guide — Playing the MOTIF ES

Playing the Keyboard (in the Performance Play mode)

Owner’s Manual

Using the A/D input sound

One of the enormous beneﬁts of the Performance mode is that you can have the A/D input sound — such as your voice through

a microphone, a guitar, bass, or CD player — assigned as one of the four Parts of a Performance. Various Part parameters such

as volume, pan, and effects can be set for this Part, and the sound of the Part is mixed and output together with the other Parts.

These parameters are set and stored in the Performance Store mode for each Performance.

n The Audio Input part is available also in the Song mode/Pattern mode, but is not available in the Voice mode. The procedure and explanations here apply to

the Song and Pattern modes as well. The microphone related parameters (corresponding to step #8 below) of each Song/Pattern are edited in the Song

Mixing mode/Pattern Mixing mode.

Connecting a microphone to the A/D

INPUT jack

The explanation below applies in particular to low-level

equipment, such as microphones, guitars and basses.

n A standard dynamic microphone is recommended. (The MOTIF ES

does not support phantom-powered condenser microphones.)

Move the cursor to the “Mic/Line” parameter by using the

Cursor button and set it to “mic” by using the [INC/YES]

button, [DEC/NO] button, or data dial.

n When the output level of the connected equipment (such as a

microphone, guitar, bass) is low, set this parameter to “mic.” When the

output level of the connected equipment (such as a synthesizer

keyboard, CD player) is high, set this parameter to “line.”

n This setting is available for all modes. If you wish to store this setting,

press the [STORE] button.

Make sure to turn the power of the MOTIF ES off

and set the GAIN knob on the rear panel to the

minimum.

Plug the microphone to the A/D INPUT jack on

the rear panel.

Turn the power on.

Press the [PERFORM] button to enter the

Performance Play mode and select the desired

Performance.

A/D INPUT

GAIN

Press the [UTILITY] button to enter the Utility

mode, press the [F2] I/O button, then press the

[SF1] INPUT button.

Set Mic/Line to “mic.”

SONG

PATTERN FILE

SEQUENCER

INTEGRATED

SAMPLING

MIXING UTILITY

DEMO

SCENE

SF1 SF

2 SF3 SF4 SF5

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

INFORMATION

Playing the Keyboard (in the Performance Play mode)

Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide — Playing the MOTIF ES

For details about each parameter, refer to page 214 in the

Reference section.

Connecting audio equipment to the A/D

INPUT jack

The explanation below applies in particular to high-level audio

equipment, such as CD players, synthesizers, and other

keyboards.

Move the cursor to the “Mic/Line” parameter by using the

Cursor button and set it to “line” by using the [INC/YES]

button, [DEC/NO] button, or data dial.

n When the output level of the connected equipment (such as a

microphone, guitar, bass) is low, set this parameter to “mic.” When the

output level of the connected equipment (such as a synthesizer

keyboard, CD player) is high, set this parameter to “line.”

n This setting is available for all modes. If you wish to store this setting,

press the [STORE] button.

For details about each parameter, refer to

page 214

in the

Reference section. When an optional AIEB2 or mLAN16E has

been installed, press the [SF5] button to call up the A/D display.

n Audio input signals from the OPTICAL INPUT and DIGITAL INPUT

connector (when the optional AIEB2 has been installed) or the mLAN

connector (when the optional mLAN16E has been installed) can also

be handled as Audio Input Parts. For details, see page 165.

Adjust the microphone input level by using the

GAIN knob on the rear panel.

Set the audio input related parameters as

necessary from the AUDIO IN display ([PERFORM]

→→

[EDIT] →→

→→

[COMMON] →→

→→

[F5] AUDIO IN).

Store the settings as a User Performance in the

Performance Store mode (page 91).

Make sure to turn off the power of both the

MOTIF ES and the relevant audio equipment.

Plug the audio equipment cable to the A/D INPUT

jack on the rear panel.

Switch the power of the connected audio

equipment on, then switch the power of the

MOTIF ES on.

A/D INPUT

GAIN

When the optional AIEB2 or mLAN16E has been installed,

the [F5] AUDIO IN menu has two indications: “A/D” and

“AIEB2” or “mLAN16E.” Here, call up the A/D display by

pressing the [SF5] button.

A/D INPUT

GAIN

Press the [PERFORM] button to enter the

Performance Play mode and select the desired

Performance.

Press the [UTILITY] button to enter the Utility

mode, press the [F2] I/O button, then press the

[SF1] INPUT button.

Set Mic/Line to “line.”

Adjust the audio input level by using the GAIN

knob on the rear panel.

Set the audio input related parameters as

necessary from the AUDIO IN display

([PERFORM] →→

→→

[EDIT] →→

→→

[COMMON] →→

→→

[F5]

AUDIO IN).

Store the settings as a User Performance in the

Performance Store mode (page 91).

A/D INPUT

GAIN

Quick Guide — Playing the MOTIF ES

Using the Plug-in Board

Owner’s Manual

Using the Plug-in Board

Plug-in Boards give you an enormous amount of additional sonic ﬂexibility and power. When installed, they work seamlessly and

transparently within the system of this synthesizer – meaning that you can use their sounds and functions just as if they were built

right into this synthesizer at the factory.

The boards that are available for and can be installed to this synthesizer are described below.

Up to three Plug-in boards can be installed to the MOTIF ES. These boards are not simply a source of more Voices; they are also

full-featured, editable tone generators in their own right and extend the system-level speciﬁcations such as maximum polyphony.

In addition, they allow you to use synthesis systems besides AWM2. You can play Plug-in Voices just like ordinary internal Voices

and use them as Parts in a Song/Pattern/Performance.

This synthesizer is compatible with the Modular Synthesis Plug-in System (see below).

About MODULAR SYNTHESIS PLUG-IN SYSTEM

The Yamaha Modular Synthesis Plug-in System offers powerful expansion and upgrade capabilities for Modular Synthesis-

Plug-in-compatible synthesizers, tone generators and sound cards. This enables you to easily and effectively take

advantage of sophisticated synthesizer and effects technology, allowing you to keep pace with the rapid and multi-faceted

advances in modern music production.

Available Plug-in Boards

There are three types of Modular Synthesis Plug-in System-compatible Plug-in Boards: Single Part, Multi-Part and Effect Plug-in

Board. Using these, you can build your own system based on the sounds you require.

Single Part Plug-in Boards

Single Part Plug-in Boards let you add a completely different

synthesizer or single timbre tone generator (page 162) and

play its voices by using a single part of this synthesizer. Some

boards allow you to use synthesis systems besides AWM2.

● Analog Physical Modeling Plug-in Board (PLG150-AN)

Using Analog Physical Modeling (AN) synthesis, the very latest digital

technology is used to accurately reproduce the sound of analog

synthesizers. With this board installed, you have real-time control over

the playback of vintage synthesizer sounds as well as the very latest

sounds heard in today’s club-oriented music.

● Piano Plug-in Board (PLG150-PF)

A massive waveform memory is dedicated to the reproduction of

piano sounds. This board offers 136 stereo sounds, including a

number of acoustic and electric pianos, and up to 64-note polyphony.

You can even install two of these boards to double the polyphony to

128 notes.

● Advanced DX/TX Plug-in Board (PLG150-DX)

The sounds of the DX7 are available on this Plug-in Board. Unlike

PCM-based tone generators, this board uses the powerful FM

Synthesis system – the same as found on DX-series synthesizers – for

extraordinarily versatile and dynamic sound shaping potential.

Sounds are compatible with those of the DX7, and the board can

even receive DX7 data via MIDI bulk dump.

● Virtual Acoustic Plug-in Board (PLG150-VL)

With Virtual Acoustic (VA) synthesis, the sounds of real instruments

are modeled (simulated) in real time, giving a degree of realism that

cannot be achieved using conventional PCM-based synthesis

techniques. When playing these sounds using an optional MIDI Wind

Controller (WX5), you can even capture some of the physical feel of

woodwind instruments.

● Drum Plug-in Board (PLG150-DR)/Percussion Plug-in

Board (PLG150-PC)

Once connected and installed, the PLG150-DR/PLG150-PC

becomes a seamless additional sound source of AWM2 for the host

tone generator or synthesizer – providing a total of 88 drum/

percussion voices. Thanks to the built-in effect processing power, the

PLG150-DR/PLG150-PC has two separate effect blocks – Insertion

and Reverb – that can be applied to each kit.

Multi-Part Plug-in Board

Multi-Part Plug-in Boards let you add a completely

independent multi-timbral tone generator to the MOTIF ES

(page 162) — expanding the Voice capacity and polyphony

of the instrument with a full sixteen additional instrument

parts.

● XG Plug-in Board (PLG100-XG)

This Plug-in Board is a 16-part XG sound generator. You can play

back XG/GM song ﬁles using the rich variety of sounds and effects on

this board.

Effect Plug-in Board

Effect Plug-in Boards let you add a completely different effect

block to the host synthesizer.

● Vocal Harmony Plug-in Board (PLG100-VH)

With this board installed, you can add harmonies to selected parts

using four types of effects. Chorus parts for vocals can be created

automatically from chords that have been prepared and stored as

MIDI data. You can also use this synthesizer like a vocoder by

connecting and using a microphone while playing the keyboard.

Using the Plug-in Board

Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide — Playing the MOTIF ES

Using a Single Part Plug-in Board

Install any of the Single Part Plug-in Boards such as PLG150-AN, PLG150-PF, PLG150-DX, PLG150-VL, PLG150-DR, and

PLG150-PC to the MOTIF ES and play the Plug-in Voice in the Voice Play mode.

See page 283.

The corresponding slot indicator at the right top of the front panel

lights. This indicates that the board has been successfully installed.

n If the MIDI Port number here is set to “1” or “off,” the Plug-in Voice may

sound simultaneously with the internal Voice, when playing back

Song/Pattern data. To keep this from happening, make sure the MIDI

Port number of the Plug-in Board is set to “2” or “3” — especially when

using the Song/Pattern mode. To prevent a similar problem when

using both a Single Part Plug-in Board and a Multi Part Plug-in Board

together, set each board to a different MIDI Port number.

Selecting a Plug-in Voice is done in the same way as selecting a

Normal Voice (page 60) with the exception that you select one of the

PLG (Plug-in) Banks. Press the PLG button which corresponds to the

slot to which the Plug-in Board has been installed.

You’ll also need to select a Bank within the Plug-in Board. Press the

[F2] BANK button to call up the Plug-in Board Bank selection display,

then select the desired Bank.

n For details about the Bank structure of each Plug-in Board, refer to the

Owner’s Manual of each Plug-in Board. Regarding the PLGPRE (Plug-

in Preset) bank, refer to the Plug-in Voice List. Regarding the Board

Voice bank displayed as “035/000,” refer to the Voice Map/List. The

PLGUSR (Plug-in User) banks contain the Voices you edited and

stored as User Voices.

n Playing Voices of the Plug-in User banks (PLG1USR, PLG2USR,

PLG3USR) will result in no sound, if the Plug-in Board has just been

installed. These banks become available only after you edit a Plug-in

Voice and store it as a User Plug-in Voice.

After turning the power off, install a Single Part

Plug-in Board to the instrument.

Switch the MOTIF ES on.

Check the status of the installed Plug-in Boards

in the [UTILITY] → [F6] PLUG → [SF1] STATUS

display.

STRINGS

PLG 1

SLOT 1 SLOT 2 SLOT 3

BRASS

PLG 2

REED/PIPE

PLG 3

SCENE

SF1 SF

2 SF3 SF4 SF5

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

INFORMATION

VOICE

SONG

PERFORM MASTER

PATTERN FILE

MODE

SEQUENCER

INTEGRATED

SAMPLING

MIXING UTILITY

DEMO

The name of the installed Plug-in Board is displayed.

Set the MIDI port of the installed Plug-in Board to

“2” or “3” in the [UTILITY] → [F6] PLUG → [SF2]

MIDI display.

Press the [VOICE] button to enter the Voice Play

mode and select a Plug-in Voice.

Play the keyboard.

STRINGS

PLG 1

SLOT 1 SLOT 2 SLOT 3

BRASS

PLG 2

REED/PIPE

PLG 3

Quick Guide — Playing the MOTIF ES

Using the Plug-in Board

Owner’s Manual

Plug-in Voices and Board Voices

The Voices of a Single Part Plug-in Board installed to this synthesizer can be divided into two types: Board Voices and

Plug-in Voices. Board Voices are unprocessed, unaltered Voices of the Plug-in board – the “raw material” used for the Plug-

in Voices. Plug-in Voices, on the other hand, are edited Board Voices – Voices that have been specially programmed and

processed for optimum use with the host synthesizer.

Since the MOTIF ES includes preset Plug-in Voices for all the Plug-in Boards, you can call up and play appropriate Voices

for each board immediately after installing it.

n The Plug-in Voices can be edited in the Voice Edit mode.

n The Board Voices can be edited using the computer software supplied for each Plug-in Board.

Playing the PLG150-VL sound with the Breath Controller

With Virtual Acoustic (VA) synthesis, the PLG150-VL has the sounds of real instruments modeled (simulated) in real time,

giving a degree of realism that cannot be achieved using conventional PCM-based synthesis techniques. When playing

these sounds using an optional Breath Controller, you can even capture some of the physical feel of woodwind

instruments.

1 Install the PLG150-VL to the MOTIF ES.

2 Connect the Breath Controller BC3 to the BREATH

connector on the rear panel (page 42).

3 Switch the MOTIF ES power on.

4 Set the Plug-in Board related parameters in the

Utility mode, corresponding to steps #3 and 4 in

the instructions on the previous page.

5 Set the Breath Controller Curve via the [UTILITY]

→ [F1] GENERAL → [SF1] TG → BCCurve

parameter (page 260).

6 Press the [VOICE] button to enter the Voice Play

mode, then select a Plug-in Voice of the PLG150-VL.

7 Play the Voice and blow into the Breath Controller to

expressively change the sound.

You can also use the MIDI Wind Controller WX5 to play

the Plug-in Voice of the PLG150-VL. Connect the WX5 to

the MOTIF ES with a MIDI cable.

TIP

BREATH

ASSIGNABLE

SUSTAIN

FOOT

SWITCH

WX5

MIDI OUT connector

MIDI IN connector

MIDI cable

MOTIF ES

MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER

Using the Plug-in Board

Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide — Playing the MOTIF ES

Using a Multi Part Plug-in Board

In this section, we’ll explain how to play back an XG for mat song, using the PLG100-XG Plug-in Board. Naturally, to get the most

out of these instructions, you should have XG song data (Standard MIDI File) stored on a SmartMedia card or USB storage device.

See page 283 for details.

n If the MIDI Port number here is set to “1” or “off,” the Plug-in Voice may

sound simultaneously with the internal Voice, when playing back

Song/Pattern data. To keep this from happening, make sure the MIDI

Port number of the Plug-in Board is set to “2” or “3” — especially when

using the Song/Pattern mode. To prevent a similar problem when

using both a Single Part Plug-in Board and the PLG100-XG together,

set each board to a different MIDI Port number.

1 Insert a SmartMedia card which contains the XG

song ﬁles into the CARD slot, or use a USB storage

device (connected to the USB TO DEVICE connector)

containing appropriate XG song ﬁles.

2 Press the [FILE] button to enter the File mode, then

set the basic parameters.

Refer to “Basic settings for using SmartMedia or a USB

storage device” on page 30.

3 Set the [FILE] → [F3] LOAD → TYPE parameter to

“Song.”

4 Move the cursor to the list of ﬁles to be loaded, select

the desired ﬁle, then press the [ENTER] button.

5 Specify the destination Song number, then press the

[ENTER] button to execute the Load operation.

Loading data to this synthesizer automatically erases and replaces any

existing data in the User memory. Make sure to save any important data

to a SmartMedia/USB storage device before performing any Load

operations.

After turning the power off, install the Multi Part

Plug-in Board PLG100-XG to slot 3 of this

synthesizer.

Switch the MOTIF ES power on.

Check the status of the installed Plug-in Boards

in the [UTILITY] → [F6] PLUG → [SF1] STATUS

display.

Set the MIDI port of the PLG100-XG to “2” or “3”

in the [UTILITY] → [F6] PLUG → [SF2] MIDI

display.

Press the [SONG] button to enter the Song

mode, then press the [FILE] button to enter the

File mode.

Load the XG song file (Standard MIDI file) from

the SmartMedia/USB storage device to the

MOTIF ES in the [FILE] → [F3] LOAD display, as

described in the sub-instructions below.

The name of the installed Plug-in Board is displayed.

Press the [SONG] button to enter the Song Play

mode, then select the Song number to which the

XG song file was loaded.

Set the MIDI transmit port of all the tracks to the

number set in step #4 from the [SONG] → [F3]

TRACK → [SF1] CHANNEL display.

Press the [FF

] (Play) button to play the XG

song.

File/folder list

CAUTION

Set MIDI transmit ports.

Quick Guide — Playing the MOTIF ES

Using the Plug-in Board

Owner’s Manual

Using an Effect Plug-in Board

In the example explanation below, the PLG100-VH Vocal Harmony Plug-in Board is used to apply harmony effects to the

microphone sound in the Performance mode.

n For Songs/Patterns, the Effect Plug-in Board related parameters (which correspond to step #6 - 7 below) can be edited in the Song Mixing mode/Pattern

Mixing mode.

n Please note that the Effect Plug-in Board cannot be used in the Voice mode.

See page 283 for details.

n A standard dynamic microphone is recommended. (The MOTIF ES

does not support phantom-powered condenser microphones.)

For details, refer to steps #4 - 9 on page 72.

For details, refer to the Owner’s Manual of the PLG100-VH.

After turning the power off, install the Effect

Plug-in Board PLG100-VH to slot 1.

Plug the microphone to the A/D INPUT jack on

the rear panel (page 72).

Turn the MOTIF ES power on.

Press the [PERFORM] button to enter the

Performance Play mode, select the desired

Performance, then set the microphone related

parameters.

Check the status of the installed Plug-in Boards

in the [UTILITY] → [F6] PLUG → [SF1] STATUS

display.

Select “PartAD” as the Part to which the Plug-in

Insertion Effect is applied in the CONNECT

display ([PERFORM] →→

→→

[F3] EFFECT →→

→→

[SF1]

CONNECT).

A/D INPUT

GAIN

Move the cursor here, then select the Part.

Set related parameters (such as the Effect Type,

and others) from the Plug-in Effect display

([PERFORM] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F6]

EFFECT → [SF3] PLG-EF).

Sing or talk into the microphone to check the

effect sound, and adjust the settings as

necessary.

If desired, store the settings for the microphone

sound and PLG100-VH as a Performance in the

Performance Store mode (page 91).

A/D INPUT

GAIN

Editing a Voice

Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide — Advanced Course

Editing a Voice

The Voice Edit mode ([VOICE] → [EDIT]) gives you comprehensive tools for creating your own original Voices, either from

scratch by changing the basic sounds, or by tweaking the various Voice parameters. Create your custom sounds by calling up

a preset Voice and editing as desired. The actual parameters available and the methods for editing differ depending on the

Voice type.

● Normal Voice Edit

A Normal Voice can consist of up to four Elements. There are two types of Voice Edit displays: those for Common Edit to edit the

settings common to all four Elements, and those for editing individual Elements.

● Drum Voice Edit

Each Drum voice consists of various Waves and/or Normal voices, each assigned to notes across the keyboard, from C0 to C6.

There are two types of Drum Voice Edit displays: those for Common Edit to edit the settings that apply to all Drum keys in the

voice, and those for editing individual keys (Elements).

● Plug-in Voice Edit

This is basically the same as Normal Voice Edit. Unlike with Normal voices, the Plug-in voices only have one Element for editing.

Normal Voice Edit

If you wish to edit the sounds that make up a Voice and the basic parameters that determine the sound, such as Oscillator, Pitch,

Filter, Amplitude, and EG (Envelope Generator), call up the Element Edit display. If you wish to edit more global parameters

related to the overall Voice and how it’s processed, such as Arpeggio, Controller, and Effects, call up the Common Edit display.

Quick Guide — Advanced Course

Press the [VOICE] button to enter the Voice mode, then select a Normal Voice to be edited.

Press the [EDIT] button to enter the Voice Edit mode.

Call up the Common Edit display or Element Edit display.

EDIT

COMPARE SCENE STORE

SET LOCATE

JOB STORE

COMMON

ELEMENT/ PERF. PART/ ZONE

FAVORITES

DRUM KITS

A. PIANO KEYBOARD ORGAN

PRE 5 PRE 6 USER 1

GUITAR/

PLUCKED

SYN LEAD

ABCD

4321

SYN PAD/

CHOIR

SYN COMP

CHROMATIC

PERCUSSION

USER 2

Calling up the Common Edit display

Press the [COMMON] button to call up the

Common Edit display.

In the Edit mode, the [DRUM KITS] button

functions as the [COMMON] button.

While in the Voice Edit mode, you can switch

between the Common Edit display and the

Element Edit display as shown below.

Indicates a Common Edit display.

Calling up the Element Edit display

Press the desired element number from the ELEMENT [1]

- [4] buttons to call up the Element Edit display.

Indicates the display for editing Element 1.

Common Edit

Element Edit 1

Element Edit 2

Element Edit 3

Element Edit 4

To turn each Element on or off (to hear how each affects the overall sound), use

buttons [9] - [12]. You can also isolate or solo an Element by holding down the

[MUTE] button and pressing the desired number button ([9] - [12]). To cancel the

solo, press the [MUTE] button again.

Editing a Voice

Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide — Advanced Course

The following brieﬂy describes the main Voice parameters.

● Basic parameters for creating a sound

If you wish to edit the basic sound-generating and sound-

shaping parameters for the Voice, such as Oscillator, Pitch,

Filter, Amplitude, and EG (Envelope Generator), use the

Common Edit display.

● Effect related parameters....................Pages 177 and 194

The Effects use DSP (Digital Signal Processing) to alter and

enhance the sound of a Voice. Effects are applied in the ﬁnal

stages of editing, letting you change the sound of the created

Voice as desired. The Common Edit display lets you edit the

Effect related parameters.

● Controller related parameters...........Pages 155 and 192

For each Voice, you can assign various functions to built-in

controllers such as Pitch Bend Wheel, Modulation Wheel,

Ribbon Controller, Knobs (ASSIGN1 and 2), Keyboard

Aftertouch and optionally connected controllers such as

Footswitch, Foot Controller, Breath Controller. These settings

can be edited in the Common Edit display.

● Arpeggio related parameters.............Pages 169 and 191

For each Voice, you can set the Arpeggio related parameters

such as Arpeggio type and playback tempo. These can be

edited in the Common Edit display.

Enter a name for the Voice from the NAME display ([COMMON]

→ [F1] GENERAL → [SF1] NAME). For detailed instructions on

naming, refer to page 53 in the Basic Operation section.

The edited Voice can be stored in the Voice Store mode. See

page 85 for details.

Keep in mind that edited Voice data is stored to internal User

memory (Flash ROM) and is stored even when turning the

power off. As such it is not necessary to save the data to

SmartMedia card or another device; however, you may want

to save it to another media for backup or organizational

purposes. For more information, see page 85.

Compare Function

This convenient function lets you switch between the

edited Voice and its original, unedited condition –

allowing you to listen to the difference between the two

and better hear how your edits affect the sound.

1 In the Voice Edit mode (the [EDIT] indicator

lighting), press the [EDIT] button so that its

indicator ﬂashes.

The [C] indicator is shown at the top of the display (in

place of the [E] indicator), and the original, unedited

voice is restored for monitoring.

2 Press the [EDIT] button again to disable the

“Compare” function and restore the settings for

your edited Voice.

Compare the edited sound with the unedited sound by

repeating steps #1 and 2.

n While Compare is active, you cannot make edits to the Voice.

Select the menu you wish to edit by pressing the

[F1] - [F6] and [SF1] - [SF5] buttons, then edit the

parameters.

Element selection →→

→→

[F1] - [F6]

[F1] OSC (Oscillator) pages 160, 195

[F2] PITCH pages 160, 196

[F3] FILTER pages 161, 197

[F4] AMP (Amplitude) pages 162, 199

[F5] LFO pages 162, 201

[F6] EQ (Equalizer) pages 178, 201

[COMMON] →→

→→

[F6] EFFECT

[COMMON] → [F3] ARP (Arpeggio)

Repeat #3 - 4 as desired.

Name the edited Normal Voice.

Enter the

desired

Voice name.

Store the edited Voice to internal User memory

(page 187).

If desired, save the edited and stored voices to a

SmartMedia/USB storage device.

EDIT

COMPARE SCENE STORE

SET LOCATE

JOB STORE

Editing a Voice

Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide — Advanced Course

Editing a Voice by using the Knobs

The four knobs at the top left of the instrument are not only for tweaking the sound while you perform — you can also use

them to edit a Voice, either in the Voice Play mode or the Voice Edit mode.

● When the [PAN/SEND] indicator is turned on:

● When the [TONE] indicator is turned on:

n The settings above are applied as offsets to the AEG and FEG settings in the Voice Edit mode.

● When the [ARP FX] indicator is turned on:

● When the [EQ] indicator is turned on:

n The settings above are applied as offsets to the EQ settings in the [VOICE] → [UTILITY] → [F3] VOICE → [SF1] MEQ display.

● When both the [PAN/SEND] and [TONE] indicators are turned on (by pressing them simultaneously):

n In addition to above functions, Master Effect related parameters (set in the [UTILITY] → [F3] VOICE → [SF2] MEF display) can be assigned to

these four knobs by pressing the [ARP FX] and [EQ] buttons simultaneously. The particular parameters assigned to the four knobs can be set in the

[UTILITY] → [F4] CTL ASN → [SF5] MEF display.

Editing a Voice by using the Control Sliders (CS)

In the Voice mode, the four Control Sliders let you independently adjust the levels of the Elements of a Normal Voice or the

Drum Voice keys. When a Normal Voice is selected, you can adjust the level balance among the four Elements.

n Inadvertent use of the sliders may result in no sound. If this occurs, move the sliders upward.

PAN Determines the stereo pan position of the Voice. [VOICE] → Voice selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] →

[F2] OUTPUT → Pan

Page 190

REVERB Determines the amount of Reverb effect that is applied to the Voice. [VOICE] → Voice selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] →

[F2] OUTPUT → RevSend

Page 191

CHORUS Determines the amount of Chorus effect that is applied to the Voice. [VOICE] → Voice selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] →

[F2] OUTPUT → ChoSend

Page 191

TEMPO

Determines the tempo of the Arpeggio assigned to the currently selected Voice.

[VOICE] → Voice selection → [F6] ARP → Tempo Page 189

CUTOFF Raises or lowers the Filter cutoff frequency to adjust the tone brilliance. [VOICE] → Voice selection → [F5] EG → CUTOF Page 189

RESONANCE Boosts or attenuates the level at the area around the Filter cutoff

frequency.

[VOICE] → Voice selection → [F5] EG → RESO Page 189

ATTACK Determines the attack time of the sound. For example, you can adjust a

strings Voice so that the sound gradually swells in volume by setting a

slow attack time – simply turn this knob to the right.

[VOICE] → Voice selection → [F5] EG → ATK (AEG) Page 189

RELEASE Determines the release time of the sound. Turning the knob to the right

sets a long release time and (depending on the selected Voice) lets the

sound sustain after the key is released. To produce a sharp release, in

which the sound abruptly cuts off, set a short release time.

[VOICE] → Voice selection → [F5] EG → REL (AEG) Page 189

SWING Adjusts the swing feel of the Arpeggio playback. [VOICE] → Voice selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] →

[F3] ARP → [SF3] PLAY FX → Swing

Page 192

GATE TIME Adjusts the Gate Time (length) of the Arpeggio notes. [VOICE] → Voice selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] →

[F3] ARP → [SF3] PLAY FX → GateTimeRate

Page 192

VELOCITY Adjusts the velocity of the Arpeggio notes. [VOICE] → Voice selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] →

[F3] ARP → [SF3] PLAY FX → VelocityRate

Page 192

UNITMULTIPLY Adjusts the Arpeggio playback time based on tempo. [VOICE] → Voice selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] →

[F3] ARP → [SF3] PLAY FX → UnitMultiply

Page 192

LO Determines the amount of boost or attenuation applied to the low

frequency band of the Master EQ.

[VOICE] → Voice selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] →

[F1] GENERAL → [SF3] MEQ OFS → LOW

Page 190

LO MID Determines the amount of boost or attenuation applied to the low-

midrange frequency band of the Master EQ.

[VOICE] → Voice selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] →

[F1] GENERAL → [SF3] MEQ OFS → LOW MID

Page 190

HI MID Determines the amount of boost or attenuation applied to the high-

midrange frequency band of the Master EQ.

[VOICE] → Voice selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] →

[F1] GENERAL → [SF3] MEQ OFS → HIGH MID

Page 190

HI Determines the amount of boost or attenuation applied to the high

frequency band of the Master EQ.

[VOICE] → Voice selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] →

[F1] GENERAL → [SF3] MEQ OFS → HIGH

Page 190

ASSIGN A Adjusts parameters assigned to these knobs in the [UTILITY] → [F4] CTL ASN → [SF2] ASSIGN display. Page 263

ASSIGN B

ASSIGN 1 Adjusts parameters assigned to these knobs in the [VOICE] → Voice selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F4] CTL SET display. Page 192

ASSIGN 2

[VOICE] → Voice selection → [EDIT] → Element selection → [F4] AMP → [SF1] LVL/PAN → Level

TIP

Editing a Voice

Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide — Advanced Course

To solo an Element for editing

This feature is useful for isolating the sound of single

Element, for ease in editing.

1 In the Normal Voice Edit mode, simultaneously

hold down the [MUTE] button and press one of the

NUMBER buttons [9] to [12] to solo the

corresponding Element.

Once you’ve selected an Element for soloing, the [MUTE]

button’s lamp ﬂashes, indicating the Solo function is

active and only the selected Element can be edited.

2 To solo another Element, simply press the

appropriate number button ([9] - [12]).

3 To exit from the Solo function, press the [MUTE]

button again.

Edit Recall

If you are editing a Voice and select a different Voice

without storing the one you were editing, all the edits

you’ve made will be erased. If this happens, you can

use Edit Recall to restore the Voice with your latest edits

intact.

1 Press the [JOB] button in the Voice mode to enter

the Voice Job mode.

2 Press the [F2] RECALL button to call up the

Recall display.

3 Press the [ENTER] button. (The display prompts

you for conﬁrmation.)

If you wish to cancel the operation, press the [DEC/

NO] button.

4 Press the [INC/YES] button to execute Edit Recall

to restore the voice.

Drum Voice Edit

If you want to edit the sounds that make up a Drum Voice and the basic parameters that determine the sound, such as Oscillator,

Pitch, Filter, Amplitude, and EG (Envelope Generator), call up the Key Edit display. To edit more global parameters related to the

overall Drum Voice and how it’s processed, such as Arpeggio, Controller, and Effects, call up the Common Edit display.

ELEMENT/ PERF. PART/ ZONE

87654321

MUTE

TRACK

SELECT

NUMBER

SOLO

1412 13

In this example, only Element 3 is turned on and can be edited.

Press the [VOICE] button to enter the Voice mode, then select a Drum Voice to be edited.

Press the [EDIT] button to enter the Voice Edit mode.

Call up the Common Edit display or Key Edit display.

EDIT

COMPARE SCENE STORE

SET LOCATE

JOB STORE

COMMON

ELEMENT/ PERF. PART/ ZONE

FAVORITES

DRUM KITS

A. PIANO KEYBOARD ORGAN

PRE 5 PRE 6 USER 1

GUITAR/

PLUCKED

SYN LEAD

ABCD

4321

SYN PAD/

CHOIR

SYN COMP

CHROMATIC

PERCUSSION

USER 2

Key 1 Key 5 Key 10 Key 18 Key 21 Key 73

While in the Voice Edit mode, you can switch between

the Common Edit display and the Element Edit display

as shown below.

Indicates a Common Edit

display.

Common Edit

Calling up the Key Edit display

Press any of the ELEMENT [1] - [4] buttons to call

up the Key Edit display, then select the key to

which the desired instrument is assigned.

Key Edit (1-73)

Indicates the display for editing the key C0.

Calling up the Common Edit display

Press the [COMMON] button to call up the

Common Edit display.

In the Edit mode, the [DRUM KITS] button

functions as the [COMMON] button.

Quick Guide — Advanced Course

Editing a Voice

Owner’s Manual

The main parameters available are basically the same as in the

Normal Voice Edit (page 80). What is called Key Edit in the Drum

Voice corresponds to Element Edit in the Normal Voice. Please keep

in mind that the LFO parameters are not available in the Drum Voice.

Enter a name for the Voice from the NAME display

([COMMON] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF1] NAME). For detailed

instructions on naming a voice, refer to page 53 in the Basic

Operation section.

The edited Voice can be stored in the Voice Store mode. See

page 85 for details.

Keep in mind that edited Voice data is stored to internal User

memory (Flash ROM) and is stored even when turning the

power off. As such it is not necessary to save the data to

SmartMedia card or another device; however, you may want

to save it to another media for backup or organizational

purposes. For more information, see page 85.

Assigning drum/percussion instruments to individual keys

In the Drum Voice Edit mode, you can create your own original drum kits by assigning speciﬁc instrument sounds to

individual keys — in any desired order — and edit detailed parameters for each key’s sound.

Call up the Key Edit display in the Voice Edit mode.

Refer to step #3 on page 82.

2 Call up the [F1] OSC → [SF1] WAVE display.

3 Press the key to which you want to assign a

sound.

The drum instrument currently assigned to the

pressed key will sound.

4 Select the desired Waveform to be assigned.

Move the cursor to “Number” and change the value by

using the data dial, [INC/YES] button, and [DEC/NO]

button. Then, press the same key set in step #3 again to

conﬁrm the selected instrument sound.

Create your original drum kit by repeating steps #3 - 4.

6 Store the created drum kit as a Drum Voice in User

memory.

The edited Voice can be stored in the Voice Store mode.

See page 85 for details.

7 If desired, save the edited and stored voices to a

SmartMedia/USB storage device.

Select the desired menu for editing by pressing

the [F1] - [F6] and [SF1] - [SF5] buttons, then edit

the parameters.

Repeat #3 - 4 as desired.

Name the edited Drum Voice.

Enter the

desired Voice

name.

Store the edited Voice to internal User memory

(page 186).

If desired, save the edited and stored voices to a

SmartMedia/USB storage device.

[VOICE] → Drum Voice selection → [EDIT] → Key selection → [F1] OSC → [SF1] WAVE

TIP

You can also select a different sound category (such as

Percussion, or even a Normal Voice sound), by moving

the cursor to “Category”and changing the setting.

Editing a Voice

Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide — Advanced Course

Setting the drum key for independent open and closed hi-hat sounds

In a real drum kit, some drum sounds cannot physically be played simultaneously, such as open and closed hi-hats.

You can prevent drum instruments from playing back simultaneously by assigning them to the same Alternate Group.

The preset Drum Voices have many such Alternate Group assignments to ensure the most authentic, natural sound. When

creating a Voice from scratch, you can use this feature — either to ensure authentic sound, or to create special effects,

where playing one sound cancels out a previous one.

Call up the Key Edit display in the Voice Edit mode.

Refer to step #3 on page 82.

2 Call up the [F1] OSC → [SF5] OTHER display.

3 Press the key which corresponds to “Hi-Hat

Open” and set the Alternate Group to “1.”

Press the key which corresponds to “Hi-Hat Close”

and set it to the same Alternate Group (1) as in step #3.

5 Conﬁrm whether the Alternate Group has been set

properly.

Immediately after pressing the “Hi-Hat Open” key, press

the “Hi-Hat Close” key. Pressing the second key should

cut off the sound of the ﬁrst.

Since the settings above are included in the Drum Voice

data, store them as a Drum Voice in the Voice Store mode.

Determining how the Drum Voice responds when the key is released

You can determine whether or not the selected Drum key responds to MIDI Note Off messages. Setting the Receive Note Off

parameter to “off” can be useful for cymbal sounds and other sustaining sounds. This lets you have the selected sounds

sustain to the length of their natural decay – even if you release the note, or when a Note Off message is received. If this

parameter is set to “on,” the sound will stop immediately when the note is released or a Note Off message is received.

Setting the Output jack for each key (drum/percussion instrument)

You can change the output jack on the rear panel for the individual Drum key signal. This function is useful when you wish

to apply a connected external effect to a speciﬁc drum instrument.

For details, see page 31.

[VOICE] → Drum Voice selection → [EDIT] → Key selection → [F1] OSC → [SF5] OTHER → AltnateGroup

TIP

[VOICE] → Drum Voice selection → [EDIT] → Key selection → [F1] OSC → [SF5] OTHER → RcvNoteOff

[VOICE] → Drum Voice selection → [EDIT] → Key selection → [F1] OSC → [SF2] OUTPUT → OutputSel

TIP

Quick Guide — Advanced Course

Editing a Voice

Owner’s Manual

Plug-in Voice Edit

The Plug-in Voices (available when installing optional Plug-in Boards to the instrument) can be edited in basically the same way

as in Normal Voice Edit (page 79). Unlike with Normal voices, the Plug-in voices only have one Element for editing. In addition,

some of the other parameters may not be available. Refer to page 205 in the Reference section.

Storing/Saving the created Voice

Two steps are necessary in order to store (save) your voice – storing the edited voice to internal memory and saving the stored

voices to a SmartMedia/USB storage device.

Keep in mind that edited Voice data is stored to internal User memory (Flash ROM) and is stored even when turning the power

off. As such it is not necessary to save the data to SmartMedia card or another device; however, you may want to save it to

another media for backup or organizational purposes, using the Save operation. For more information, see page 86.

Storing the edited Voice as a User Voice

to internal memory

Make sure to execute the Store operation before selecting

another Voice.

Select a User Bank (“USR1” or “USR2” when storing a Normal

Voice, “UDR” when storing a Drum Voice, “P1-U” ~ “P3-U”

when storing a Plug-in Voice) and the desired Voice number

by using the data dial, [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] button.

When you execute the Store operation, the settings for the destination

memory will be overwritten. Important data should always be backed up to

a separate SmartMedia/USB storage device.

The display prompts you for conﬁrmation.

To cancel the Store operation, press the [DEC/NO] button.

User Plug-in Voice 064

User Plug-in Voice 001

User Plug-in Voice 002

User Plug-in Voice 003

User Plug-in Voice 064

User Plug-in Voice 001

User Plug-in Voice 002

User Plug-in Voice 003

Voice Edit

STORE

User Normal Voice 128

User Normal Voice 001 User Drum Voice 001

User Drum Voice 002

User Drum Voice 003

User Drum Voice 32

User Drum Voice Bank

Internal memory (Flash ROM)

User Normal Voice 002

User Normal Voice 003

User Normal Voice Bank 1

User Normal Voice 128

SmartMedia

USB storage

device

User Plug-in Voice 001

User Plug-in Voice 002

User Plug-in Voice 003

User Plug-in Voice 064

User Plug-in Voice Bank 1

File extension: W7A

File extension: W7V

File extension: W7E

SAVE

All the User

Voice data in

internal

memory can

be saved as

a single ﬁle.

The W7E ﬁle can be loaded to the

Voice Editor, computer software.

Storing

edited Voices

individually

[VOICE] → [STORE]

After editing the Voice, press the [STORE] button

to enter the Voice Store mode.

Select the destination Voice memory.

Select a User Bank.

Select a Voice number.

Press the [ENTER] button.

CAUTION

EXIT ENTER

EXECUTE

DEC/NO INC/YES

Editing a Voice

Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide — Advanced Course

After the Voice has been stored, a “Completed” message

appears and operation returns to the Voice Play display.

Keep in mind that the Store operation may take a short time to complete,

during which an “Executing..” or “Please keep power on” message may be

shown. Never attempt to turn off the power while data is being written to

Flash ROM while such a message is displayed. Turning the power off in this

state results in loss of all user data and may cause the system to freeze (due

to corruption of data in the Flash ROM). This may also result in the MOTIF ES

being unable to properly start up the next time the power is turned on.

If you select another Voice without storing, the currently edited Voice will

be lost. Make sure to store the edited Voice before selecting another Voice.

Saving the edited Voices to a

SmartMedia/USB storage device

Whether you are saving data to SmartMedia or a USB storage

device, the procedure is the same. Insert a SmartMedia card

(to the CARD slot) or connect the USB device and follow the

instructions below.

Refer to “Basic settings for using SmartMedia or a USB

storage device” on page 30.

Move the cursor to TYPE, then select a ﬁle type by using the

data dial, [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons. The following

three ﬁle types are available for saving Voice data. Here,

select “All Voice.”

Move the cursor to the ﬁle name input location, then input a

ﬁle name. For detailed instructions on naming, refer to page

53 in the Basic Operation section.

If you are about to overwrite an existing ﬁle, the display

prompts you for conﬁrmation. Press the [INC/YES] button to

execute the Save operation to overwrite the existing ﬁle, or

press the [DEC/NO] button to cancel it.

While the data is being saved, make sure to follow these precautions:

•Never remove or eject the media from the device (SmartMedia or USB

storage).

•Never unplug or disconnect any of the devices.

•Never turn off the power of the MOTIF ES or the relevant devices.

Press the [INC/YES] button to execute the Store

operation.

[FILE] → [F2] SAVE

Press the [FILE] button to enter the File mode,

then execute the basic settings.

Press the [F2] SAVE button to call up the Save

display.

EXIT ENTER

EXECUTE

DEC/NO INC/YES

CAUTION

Set the Type parameter to “All Voice.”

All When this is selected, execute the Save operation to

save all the created data including the User Voices as a

single ﬁle (extension: W7A).

All Voice When this is selected, execute the Save operation to

save all User Voices as a single ﬁle (extension: W7V).

Voice Editor When this is selected, execute the Save operation to

save all User Voices as a single ﬁle (extension: W7E)

which can be exported to the Voice Editor software

contained in the included CD-ROM.

Input a file name.

Press the [ENTER] button to execute the Save

operation.

File name

EXIT ENTER

EXECUTE

DEC/NO INC/YES

CAUTION

Quick Guide — Advanced Course

Editing a Performance

Owner’s Manual

■ Loading Voice data from the SmartMedia/USB

storage device

In the previous section, we saved Voice data as an “All Voice”

ﬁle to a SmartMedia card or USB storage device. Here, we’ll

recall that Voice data and load it to the instrument with the

Load operation.

Refer to “Basic settings for using SmartMedia or a USB

storage device” on page 30.

The ﬁle saved in operation explained on the previous page

has all the User Voices. If you wish to load all the User Voices,

set Type to “All Voice.” If you wish to load only a speciﬁc

voice, set Type to “Voice.”

Move the cursor to the ﬁle (extension: W7V) saved in the

operation explained on the previous page. If you’ve set the

Type to “AllVoice” in step #3, go to step #5. If you’ve set the

Type to “Voice” in step #3, execute the operations in the

following box, then go to step #5.

When Type is set to “Voice”:

When Type is set to “Voice,” you can specify and load a

speciﬁc Voice from a ﬁle (with the extension W7V or W7A).

If you want to change the source Voice Bank/Number, press

the [EXIT] button to return the display to the ﬁrst one (shown at

the top of this box) then perform the above instructions again.

Loading data to this synthesizer automatically erases and replaces

any existing data in the User memory. Make sure to save any

important data to a SmartMedia/USB storage device before

performing any Load operations.

After the data has been loaded, a “Completed” message

appears and operation returns to the original display.

While the data is being saved, make sure to follow these precautions:

•

Never remove or eject the media from the device (SmartMedia or USB storage).

•Never unplug or disconnect any of the devices.

•Never turn off the power of the MOTIF ES or the relevant devices.

Editing a Performance

The Performance Edit mode ([PERFORM] → [EDIT]) lets you create your own original Performances — containing up to four different

Parts (Voices) — by editing the various parameters. The Voices can be selected from the internal tone generator or the installed Plug-in

Boards. After assigning different Voices to separate ranges of the keyboard, edit the detailed parameters in the Performance Edit mode.

[FILE] → [F3] LOAD

Press the [FILE] button to enter the File mode,

then execute the basic settings.

Press the [F3] LOAD button to call up the Load

display.

Select the file type to be loaded.

Select a file ( ) to be loaded.

Press the [ENTER] button to execute the Load

operation.

ENTER

EXECUTE

ENTER

EXECUTE

Move the cursor to the ﬁle (extension: W7V) saved

in the operation explained on the previous page.

Select a source Voice Bank from the selected ﬁle with the following operation.

To select a User Normal Voice Bank, press one of the [USER1] and [USER2]

buttons. To select a User Drum Voice Bank, simultaneously hold the [DRUM

KITS] button and press the [USER1] button. To select a User Plug-in Voice

Bank, press one of the [PLG1], [PLG2] and [PLG3] buttons. After selecting a

source Voice Bank, all the Voices contained in the selected Bank are listed in

the display. Move the cursor to the desired Voice to be loaded.

Select a destination Voice Number.

You can also change the destination Voice Bank when loading a Normal

Voice or a Plug-in Voice by moving the cursor to the location of “USR1” in the

above display and using the data dial. When loading Plug-in Voice data,

note that the Plug-in Board for the source Voice Bank should match the one

for the destination Voice Bank. When a source Voice Bank is created for the

PLG150-AN, for example, you should select the Voice Bank for the PLG150-

AN as the destination.

CAUTION

Editing a Performance

Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide — Advanced Course

Use the Part Edit to edit the parameters for each Part. Use Common Edit to edit the parameters for all of the Parts.

The following brieﬂy describes the main Performance parameters.

●

Parameters for the Voice assigned to each Part

...Page 216

The Voice assigned to each part and its note range can be set also in

the Performance Play mode (page 71). In addition to the parameters

available in the Performance Play mode, the Performance Edit mode

also lets you set Portamento (pitch glide) and Arpeggio Switch (which

determines whether the Arpeggio plays a speciﬁc Part or not).

● Basic parameters for making sound................Page 218

If you wish to edit the basic parameters for the synthesizer

such as Tune, Filter, and Amplitude, use the Part Edit display.

●

Parameters related to the Audio Input part

...........Page 214

The audio signal input from the A/D INPUT jack (or the

optional audio inputs) can be handled as an Audio Input part.

You can apply various parameters such as Volume, Pan, and

Effect settings to this Part — just as you can with the other

Parts. The parameters related to the Audio Input Part can be

edited in Common Edit for each Performance.

● Parameters related to the OUTPUT jacks for each

part

................................................................................Page 218

You can assign each individual Part’s Voice to be output from

a speciﬁc hardware output jack on the rear panel. This

function is useful when you want to output a speciﬁc Part to a

separate speaker or process it with a favorite external effect.

Press the [PERFORM] button to enter the Performance mode, then select a Performance to be edited.

Press the [EDIT] button to enter the Performance Edit mode.

Call up the Common Edit display or Part Edit display.

COMMON

ELEMENT/PERF. PART/ZONE

FAVORITES

DRUM KITS

A. PIANO KEYBOARD ORGAN

PRE 5PRE 6 USER 1

GUITAR/

PLUCKED

SYN LEAD

ABCD

4321

SYN PAD/

CHOIR

SYN COMP

CHROMATIC

PERCUSSION

USER 2

While in the Voice Edit mode, you can switch between

the Common Edit display amd the Part Edit display

as shown below.

Indicates a Common Edit

display.

Common Edit

Calling up the Common Edit display

Press the [COMMON] button to call up the

Common Edit display.

In the Edit mode, the [DRUM KITS] button

functions as the [COMMON] button.

Calling up the Part Edit display

Press the desired Part number from the

PERF. PART [1] - [4] buttons to call up the

Part Edit display.

To switch between the Part 1 - 4

display and the Plug-in Part 1 - 3

display, press the [F6] button.

Indicates the display for editing Part 1.

Part1 Edit

Plug-in part 1 (PLG1) Edit

You can select the four Performance Parts

from this group of seven.

Parts to which Internal

voices are assigned

Parts to which Plug-in

Board voices are

assigned

n You can mute or solo a Part in the Performance

Edit mode, just as in the Performance Play mode

or the Song/Pattern mode (page 68).

Part2 Edit

Part3 Edit

Part4 Edit

Plug-in part 2 (PLG2) Edit

Plug-in part 3 (PLG3) Edit

Select the menu you wish to edit by pressing the

[F1] - [F6] and [SF1] - [SF5] buttons, then edit the

parameters.

Part selection → [F1] VOICE

Part selection → [F4] TONE

[COMMON] → [F5] AUDIO IN

Part selection → [F2] OUTPUT → [SF3] SELECT →

OutputSel

Quick Guide — Advanced Course

Editing a Performance

Owner’s Manual

● Effect related parameters................ Pages 177 and 215

The Effects use DSP (Digital Signal Processing) to alter and

enhance the sound of a Performance. The Common Edit

display lets you edit the Effect related parameters.

● Master EQ related parameters ........ Pages 178 and 214

These parameters let you use the ﬁve-band Master EQ to

process the overall sound of the Performance. Master EQ

also features separate EQ shape parameters for the Low and

High bands, as well as the Frequency, Gain and Q controls for

each band.

● Controller related parameters........... Pages 155 and 214

For each Performance, you can assign the Control Change

Number to built-in controllers such as Ribbon Controller,

Knobs (ASSIGN1 and 2), and optionally connected

controllers, such as Foot Controller and Breath Controller.

n Functions assigned to Controllers depend on the settings of each

Part’s Voice edited in the Voice Edit mode.

● Arpeggio related parameters............. Pages 169 and 214

For each Performance, you can set the Arpeggio related

parameters, such as Arpeggio type and playback tempo.

These can be edited in the Common Edit display.

Enter a name for the Performance from the NAME display

([COMMON] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF1] NAME).

For detailed instructions on naming, refer to page 53 in the

Basic Operation section.

The edited Performance can be stored in the Performance

Store mode. See page 91 for details.

Keep in mind that edited Performance data is stored to

internal User memory (Flash ROM) and is stored even when

turning the power off. As such it is not necessary to save the

data to SmartMedia card or another device; however, you

may want to save it to another media for backup or

organizational purposes. For more information, see page 91.

Compare Function

Just as in the Voice Edit mode, you can use the Compare function also in the Performance Edit mode. This convenient

function lets you switch between the edited voice and its original, unedited condition – allowing you to listen to the

difference between the two and better hear how your edits affect the sound.

1 In the Performance Edit mode (with the [EDIT] indicator lit), press the [EDIT] button so that its indicator ﬂashes.

The [C] indicator is shown at the top of the display (in place of the [E] indicator), and the original, unedited Performance

is restored for monitoring.

2 Press the [EDIT] button again to disable the “Compare” function and restore the settings for your edited

Performance.

Compare the edited sound with the unedited sound as desired by repeating steps #1 and 2.

n While Compare is active, you cannot make edits to the Performance.

[COMMON] → [F6] EFFECT

[COMMON] → [F2] OUT/MEF → [SF3] MEF (Master Effect)

[COMMON] → [F4] CTL ASN (Controller Assign)

Repeat steps #3 - 4 as desired.

Name the edited Performance.

Store the edited Performance to internal User

memory (page 186).

If desired, save the edited and stored

Performances to a SmartMedia/USB storage

device.

Enter the desired Performance name.

Quick Guide — Advanced Course

Editing a Performance

Owner’s Manual

Editing a Performance by using the Knobs

The four knobs at the top left of the instrument are not only for tweaking the sound while you perform — you can also use

them to edit a Performance, either in the Performance Play mode or the Performance Edit mode.

● When the [PAN/SEND] indicator is turned on:

● When the [TONE] indicator is turned on:

n The settings above are applied as offsets to the AEG and FEG settings in the Performance Edit mode.

● When the [ARP FX] indicator is turned on:

● When the [EQ] indicator is turned on:

n The settings above are applied as offsets to the EQ settings in the [PERFORM] → Performance selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F2] OUT/MEF

→ [SF2] MEQ (Master EQ) display.

● When both the [PAN/SEND] and [TONE] indicators are turned on (by pressing them simultaneously):

n In addition to above functions, Master Effect related parameters (set in the [PERFORM] → Performance selection → [COMMON] → [F2] OUT/MEF

→ [SF3] MEF display) can be assigned to these four knobs by pressing the [ARP FX] and [EQ] buttons simultaneously. The particular parameters

are assigned to the four knobs can be set in the [UTILITY] → [F4] CTL ASN → [SF5] MEF display.

PAN Determines the stereo pan position of the Performance. [PERFORM] → Performance selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON]

→ [F2] OUT/MEF → [SF1] OUT → Pan

Page 213

REVERB Determines the amount of Reverb effect that is applied to the

Performance.

[PERFORM] → Performance selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON]

→ [F2] OUT/MEF → [SF1] OUT → RevSend

Page 213

CHORUS Determines the amount of Chorus effect that is applied to the

Performance.

[PERFORM] → Performance selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON]

→ [F2] OUT/MEF → [SF1] OUT → ChoSend

Page 213

TEMPO Determines the tempo of the Arpeggio assigned to the currently selected

Performance.

[PERFORM] → Performance selection → [F6] ARP → Tempo Page 213

CUTOFF Raises or lowers the Filter cutoff frequency to adjust the tone brilliance. [PERFORM] → Performance selection → [F5] EG → CUTOF Page 213

RESONANCE Boosts or attenuates the level at the area around the Filter cutoff

frequency.

[PERFORM] → Performance selection → [F5] EG → RESO Page 213

ATTACK Determines the attack time of the sound. For example, you can adjust a

strings Voice so that the sound gradually swells in volume by setting a

slow attack time – simply turn this knob to the right.

[PERFORM] → Performance selection → [F5] EG → ATK (AEG) Page 213

RELEASE

Determines the release time of the sound. Turning the knob to the right sets a

long release time and (depending on the Voice assigned to the selected

Performance) lets the sound sustain after the key is released. To produce a

sharp release, in which the sound abruptly cuts off, set a short release time.

[PERFORM] → Performance selection → [F5] EG → REL (AEG) Page 213

SWING Adjusts the swing feel of the Arpeggio playback. [PERFORM] → Performance selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON]

→ [F3] ARP → [SF3] PLAY FX → Swing

Page 214

GATE TIME Adjusts the Gate Time (length) of the Arpeggio notes. [PERFORM] → Performance selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON]

→ [F3] ARP → [SF3] PLAY FX → GateTimeRate

Page 214

VELOCITY Adjusts the velocity of the Arpeggio notes. [PERFORM] → Performance selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON]

→ [F3] ARP → [SF3] PLAY FX → VelocityRate

Page 214

UNITMULTIPLY

Adjusts the Arpeggio playback time based on tempo.

[PERFORM] → Performance selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON]

→ [F3] ARP → [SF3] PLAY FX → UnitMultiply

Page 214

LO Determines the amount of boost or attenuation applied to the low

frequency band of the Master EQ.

[PERFORM] → Performance selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON]

→ [F1] GENERAL → [SF3] MEQ OFS → LOW

Page 213

LO MID Determines the amount of boost or attenuation applied to the low-

midrange frequency band of the Master EQ.

[PERFORM] → Performance selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON]

→ [F1] GENERAL → [SF3] MEQ OFS → LOW MID

Page 213

HI MID Determines the amount of boost or attenuation applied to the high-

midrange frequency band of the Master EQ.

[PERFORM] → Performance selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON]

→ [F1] GENERAL → [SF3] MEQ OFS → HIGH MID

Page 213

HI Determines the amount of boost or attenuation applied to the high

frequency band of the Master EQ.

[PERFORM] → Performance selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON]

→ [F1] GENERAL → [SF3] MEQ OFS → HIGH

Page 213

ASSIGN A Adjusts parameters assigned to these knobs in the [UTILITY] → [F4] CTL ASN → [SF2] ASSIGN display. Page 263

ASSIGN B

ASSIGN 1 Depends on the settings of the Voice assigned to the selected Performance. Page 192

ASSIGN 2

TIP

Quick Guide — Advanced Course

Editing a Performance

Owner’s Manual

Editing a Performance by using the Con-

trol Sliders (CS)

In the Performance mode, the four Control Sliders let you

independently adjust the levels of the Parts (Voices), letting you

control the overall balance of the Parts.

n Inadvertent use of the sliders may result in no sound. If this

occurs, move the sliders upward.

Edit Recall

If you are editing a Performance and select a different

Performance without storing the one you were editing, all the edits

you’ve made will be erased. If this happens, you can use Edit

Recall to restore the Performance with your latest edits intact.

1 Press the [JOB] button in the Performance mode to

enter the Performance Job mode.

Press the [F2] RECALL button to call up the Recall display.

3 Press the [ENTER] button. (The display prompts you

for conﬁrmation.)

If you wish to cancel the operation, press the [DEC/NO]

button.

Press the [INC/YES] button to execute the Edit Recall

to restore the Performance.

Storing/Saving the created Performance

Two steps are necessary in order to store (save) your Performance – storing the edited Performance to internal memory and saving the stored

Performances to a SmartMedia/USB storage device.

Keep in mind that edited Performance data is stored to internal User memory (Flash ROM) and is stored even when turning the power off. As

such it is not necessary to save the data to SmartMedia card or another device; however, you may want to save it to another media for backup or

organizational purposes, using the Save operation.

Storing the edited Performance as a User Performance to internal memory

Make sure to execute the Store operation before selecting another

Performance.

Select a Performance number by using the data dial, [INC/YES] and

[DEC/NO] button.

When you execute the Store operation, the settings for the destination

memory will be overwritten. Important data should always be backed up to

a separate SmartMedia/USB storage device.

The display prompts you for conﬁrmation.

To cancel the Store operation, press the [DEC/NO] button.

[PERFORM] →→

→→

Performance selection →→

→→

[EDIT] →→

→→

Part selection →→

→→

[F2] OUTPUT →→

→→

[SF1] VOL/PAN

→→

Volume

TIP

Performance Edit

STORE SAVE

USB storage

device

SmartMedia

Performance 001

Performance 002

Performance 003

Performance 128

Internal memory

(Flash ROM)

Storing edited

Performances individually

All the User

Performance data in

internal memory can

be saved as a single

ﬁle.

File extension: W7A

[PERFORM] → [STORE]

After editing the Performance, press the [STORE]

button to enter the Performance Store mode.

Select the destination Performance memory.

Press the [ENTER] button.

CAUTION

EXIT ENTER

EXECUTE

Editing a Performance

Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide — Advanced Course

After the Performance has been stored, a “Completed” message

appears and operation returns to the Performance Play display.

Keep in mind that the Store operation may take a short time to complete,

during which an “Executing..” or “Please keep power on” message may be

shown. Never attempt to turn off the power while data is being written to

Flash ROM while such a message is displayed. Turning the power off in this

state results in loss of all user data and may cause the system to freeze (due

to corruption of data in the Flash ROM). This may also result in the MOTIF ES

being unable to properly start up the next time the power is turned on.

If you select another Performance without storing, the currently edited

Performance will be lost. Make sure to store the edited Performance before

selecting another Performance.

Saving the edited Performances to a

SmartMedia/USB storage device

Whether you are saving data to SmartMedia or a USB storage

device, the procedure is the same. Insert a SmartMedia card

(to the CARD slot) or connect the USB device and follow the

instructions below.

Refer to “Basic settings for using SmartMedia or a USB

storage device” on page 30.

Move the cursor to TYPE, then select a ﬁle type by using the

data dial, [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons. When Type is set

to “All,” execute the Save operation to save all the created

data, including the Performances as well as the Voices

assigned to them, as a single ﬁle (extension: W7A).

Move the cursor to the ﬁle name input location, then input a

ﬁle name. For detailed instructions on naming, refer to page

53 in the Basic Operation section.

If you are about to overwrite an existing ﬁle, the display

prompts you for conﬁrmation. Press the [INC/YES] button to

execute the Save operation to overwrite the existing ﬁle, or

press the [DEC/NO] button to cancel it.

While the data is being saved, make sure to follow these precautions:

•Never remove or eject the media from the device (SmartMedia or USB

storage).

•Never unplug or disconnect any of the devices.

•Never turn off the power of the MOTIF ES or the relevant devices.

■ Loading the Performance data from the

SmartMedia/USB storage device

In the previous section, we saved Performance data as an

“All” ﬁle (extension: W7A) to a SmartMedia card or USB

storage device. Here, we’ll recall that Performance data and

load it to the instrument with the Load operation.

Refer to “Basic settings for using SmartMedia or a USB

storage device” on page 30.

Press the [INC/YES] button to execute the Store

operation.

[FILE] → [F2] SAVE

Press the [FILE] button to enter the File mode,

then execute the basic settings.

Press the [F2] SAVE button to call up the Save

display.

Set the Type parameter to “All.”

EXIT ENTER

EXECUTE

DEC/NO INC/YES

CAUTION

Input a file name.

Press the [ENTER] button to execute the Save

operation.

[FILE] → [F3] LOAD

Press the [FILE] button to enter the File mode,

then execute the basic settings.

Press the [F3] LOAD button to call up the Load

display.

File name

EXIT ENTER

EXECUTE

DEC/NO INC/YES

CAUTION

Editing a Performance

Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide — Advanced Course

The ﬁle saved in operation explained on the previous page contains all the Performances.

If you wish to load all the Performances, set Type to “All.” In this case, all data that can be created on the MOTIF ES will be

loaded in step #5 below. If you wish to load only a speciﬁc Performance, set Type to “Performance.”

When Type (ﬁle type) is set to “All” and the Load operation is executed, all data that can be created on the instrument will be loaded. This means that any

existing data in User memory will automatically be overwritten and lost. Make sure to save any important data to a SmartMedia/USB storage device before

performing the Load operations, especially when Type is set to “All.”

n When Type (ﬁle type) is set to “Performance” and the Load operation is executed, the sound of the Performances may not be reproduced properly if the

User Voices assigned to the Performances saved in the ﬁle have been changed by editing.

Move the cursor to the ﬁle (extension: W7A) saved in the operation explained on the previous page. If you set the Type

parameter to “All” in step #3, go to step #5. If you set the Type parameter to “Performance” in step #3, execute the operations in

the following box, then go to step #5.

When Type is set to “Performance”:

When Type is set to “Performance,” you can specify and load a speciﬁc Performance from a ﬁle (with the extension W7A).

Loading data to this synthesizer automatically erases and replaces any existing data in the User memory. Make sure to save any important data to a

SmartMedia/USB storage device before performing any Load operations.

After the data has been loaded, a “Completed” message appears and operation returns to the original display.

While the data is being saved, make sure to follow these precautions:

•Never remove or eject the media from the device (SmartMedia or USB storage).

•Never unplug or disconnect any of the devices.

•Never turn off the power of the MOTIF ES or the relevant devices.

Select the file type to be loaded.

Select a file ( ) to be loaded.

Press the [ENTER] button to execute the Load operation.

SmartMedia/USB storage device

Performance 001

Performance 002

Performance 003

Performance 128

File extension: W7A

Internal Memory

(Flash ROM)

Performance 001

Performance 002

Performance 003

Performance 128

Loading a speciﬁc

Performance when Type

is set to “Performance.”

All Performances are

loaded when Type is set

to “All.”

CAUTION

ENTER

EXECUTE

ENTER

EXECUTE

Move the cursor to the ﬁle (extension:

W7A) saved in the operation

explained on the previous page.

All the Performances contained in

the selected ﬁle are listed on the

display. Move the cursor to the

desired Performance.

Select the desired

Performance to be loaded.

Select the destination Performance number.

CAUTION

Creating a Voice by using the Sampling function

Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide — Advanced Course

Creating a Voice by using the Sampling function

Sampling is a powerful function that lets you bring your own recorded sounds – your voice, an instrument, rhythms, special

sound effects, etc. – into the system of this synthesizer, and play those sounds just like any other voices. These sounds, the

audio data you capture with the Sampling function, are referred to as “Samples.”

The data you create by Sampling differs depending on which mode you enter the Sampling mode from — the Voice/

Performance mode or the Song/Pattern mode. In this section, we’ll describe how to use the Sampling function from the Voice/

Performance mode in creating a User Voice.

n See page 173 for instructions on using the Sampling function in the Song mode/Pattern mode.

In order to use the Sampling function, DIMM modules must be installed to the instrument. For details on installing DIMMs, see page 289.

Depending on the size of the audio (sample) data obtained via the Sampling function, you may not be able to save all of the desired data to a SmartMedia

card (maximum capacity: 128MB). For this reason, we recommend using a large-capacity USB storage device for your Sampling data.

Sampling your voice with a microphone and creating a Normal Voice

Follow steps #1 - 8 on page 72.

Type: sample

Source: A/D

Next: off

Mono/Stereo: L mono

Frequency: 44.1k

For details about each parameter, see page 251.

n If the Voice parameter above is set to “off,” you won’t be able to play

the sampled sound as a Voice after completing this operation.

However, you can call up the sampled sound by selecting a

Waveform. For details on how to select a Waveform, see .

Connect a microphone to the instrument.

Press the [INTEGRATED SAMPLING] button in

the Voice mode or Performance mode to enter

the Sampling mode.

Press the [F2] SOURCE button to call up the

display for setting the Sampling Source, then set

the parameters as shown below.

VOICE

SONG

PERFORM MASTER

PATTERN FILE

MODE

SEQUENCER

INTEGRATED

SAMPLING

MIXING UTILITY

DEMO

Press the [F1] DEST button to call up the display

for setting the Sampling Destination, then set the

parameters as described below.

Waveform Determines the Waveform number. Select a number

which has no data ([--- : -----------] is indicated). For

details about the Waveform, see page 173.

Keybank Here, set this parameter to “C3.” After the Sampling is

completed, you can hear the sampled sound by

pressing the note set here. For details about the

Keybank, see page 173.

Part This is available when entering the Sampling mode

from the Performance mode. This parameter

determines the Performance Part to which the Voice

(below) created by sampling is assigned.

Voice Set the Bank to “USR1” or “USR2” (one of the User

Normal Voice Banks), then select a User Normal Voice

Number. After the Sampling is completed, you can hear

the created Voice by selecting the Voice number set

here.

Quick Guide — Advanced Course

Creating a Voice by using the Sampling function

Owner’s Manual

● Setting the Conﬁrm function

When the [F2] CONFM (Conﬁrm function) is turned on ( is

indicated), you can easily listen back to your just-recorded

sample and conveniently re-record it if you’re not satisﬁed

with the results. Here, set the [F2] CONFM button on.

● Setting the Trigger mode

The Trigger mode lets you determine how the Sampling

actually starts. For example, you can start the Sampling

simply by pressing the button or when the Song/Pattern

playback reaches a speciﬁed point. Here, set the TrggrMode

(Trigger mode) to “level” which lets you start sampling as

soon as the microphone level exceeds the speciﬁed Trigger

Level.

● Setting the Trigger Level

When the Trigger mode is set to “level,” you’ll also need to set

the Trigger Level. This determines when sampling actually

starts, depending on the level of the input signal (in this case,

your voice). As you sing into the microphone, notice the

movement of the level meter (bar), and when the bar crosses

the Trigger Level arrow. If necessary, select the Trigger Level

value and use the data dial to change it, moving the arrow as

low or as high as needed.

Doing this puts sample recording on standby, waiting for an

input signal that exceeds the Trigger level.

Sing into the microphone. (You may want to match the pitch

of your voice to the note C3, set in step #4 above.) The

sampling actually starts as soon as the an input signal

exceeding the speciﬁed trigger level is received.

Press the [F3] AUDITION button to hear the sampled sound.

If you’re not satisﬁed with the results and you wish to try

again, press the [F4] CANCEL button to return to the

Sampling Standby display and try sampling from step #5

again. If you are satisﬁed with the results, press the [F5] OK

button to store the sampled sound as a “sample” and return

to the [F1] DEST or [F2] SOURCE display.

Keep in mind that if the Conﬁrm function is turned off in step

#5 above, the display shown above will not appear when

stopping sampling. Instead, stopping sampling returns

directly to the [F1] DEST or [F2] SOURCE display.

Press the [F6] REC button to call up the

Sampling Record display (Sampling Standby

status), then set the parameters as required.

Turn the Conﬁrm

function on or off

Indicates Sampling

Standby status.

Trigger Level

You can change the

Keybank (set in step

#4) also in this display.

Trigger Level

Indicates Sampling

Standby status.

The section of the bar exceeding

the Trigger Level becomes black.

Press the [F6] REC button again to enable

Sampling Trigger Waiting.

Sing into the microphone to start sampling.

Press the [F6] STOP button to stop sampling,

then check the results.

Indicates that sample recording is waiting

for a signal of an appropriate level.

Creating a Voice by using the Sampling function

Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide — Advanced Course

Immediately after sampling, the sample is assigned only to

one key — the one set in step #4 as “KeyBank.” This display

lets you expand the key range within which the sample is

sounded. Here, set the key range to C2 - B3.

For example, in step #4 set Keybank to “G4,” sing into the

microphone as described in step #7 (matching the pitch G4, if

necessary), and set the Key Range to C4 - E5 in step #10. As a

result, the sample is assigned to the keys as illustrated below.

When you play the sample from the keyboard, the more

distant the played samples are from the original key, the less

natural the samples sound. For this reason, you should try to

make multiple samples and multiple key ranges, so that each

key range is shorter and the samples sound more natural.

Refer to “Saving a Sample” on page 97.

The recorded (edited) sample data resides temporarily in DIMM (page 187).

Because data contained in DIMM is lost when the power is turned off, you

should always save any data residing in DIMM to a SmartMedia /USB

storage device before turning off the power.

About Samples, Key Banks, Waveforms, and Voices

Understanding the Sampling-related terms below will

help you better understand the Sampling function itself

and how to use it. Keep in mind the hierarchy here as it

relates to sampling — the audio source (e.g., your voice)

starts as a Sample, becomes part of a Key Bank, which

makes up a Waveform, which is used to create a Voice.

● Sample

The sound obtained via the Sampling function is

referred to as “Sample.”

● Key Bank

In order to play the sample from the keyboard, the

sample must be assigned to notes on the keyboard.

First, assign the sample to a speciﬁed key when

sampling (step #4 on page 94), then expand the key

range within which the sample is sounded (step #10 on

page 96). The Key Range and the Velocity Range within

which the sample is sounded is referred to as a “Key

Bank.” In step #10 above, you saw how to set the Key

Range. From the same display, you can also set a

Velocity Range. Using these two parameters, you can

create a Key Bank.

● Waveform

The group of Key Banks to which sample data is

assigned is referred to as a “Waveform.” The Waveform

is assigned to each Element of a Normal Voice. In step

#11 above, you saw how to add Key Banks one by one

to create a Waveform.

● Voice

After completing a Waveform, you can create an

Element by applying various sound-making parameters

such as Pitch, Filter, Amplitude and other parameters

such as Effect and EQ to it. Finally, combine four

Elements (each containing its own Waveform) to create

a Normal Voice.

n You can select and hear the Waveforms created via the

Sampling function as well as all the preset Waveforms in the

WAVE display ([VOICE] → [EDIT] → Element selection →

[F1] OSC → [SF1] WAVE).

Press the [EDIT] button to enter the Sampling

Edit mode, then press the [F4] RANGE button to

call up the Range setting display.

Set the key range within which the sample is

sounded.

Repeat step #4 - 10 to add another sample to the

same Voice (Waveform).

EDIT

COMPARE

Set the key

range.

Use the data

dial, [INC/YES]

and [DEC/NO]

button, or press

the key while

holding the

[INFORMATION]

button.

Play the keyboard within the key range set above.

Your sampled voice is sounded, following the pitches of the

notes you play.

Indicates the original key of the currently selected sample.

If you wish to select a different sample, call up the [F1]

KEYBANK display, then press a different key while holding

the [INFORMATION] button.

C3 G4

The sample is sounded

within this key range.

The sample is sounded

within this key range.

The original sample is

assigned to this key.

The original sample is

assigned to this key.

Save your newly created User Voice to a

SmartMedia/USB storage device.

CAUTION

Quick Guide — Advanced Course

Creating a Voice by using the Sampling function

Owner’s Manual

Assign the Samples obtained via the Sampling function to speciﬁc Key Ranges to create a Waveform. Because the Waveform data

including Samples which resides temporarily in DIMM (page 187) is lost when the power is turned off, you should always save the

Waveform data or Samples to a SmartMedia/USB storage device before turning off the power. The following four methods can be used to

save a Sample that is assigned to a Waveform. Execute the Save operation in the File mode.

While the data is being saved, make sure to follow these precautions:

•Never remove or eject the media from the device (SmartMedia or USB storage).

•Never unplug or disconnect any of the devices.

•Never turn off the power of the MOTIF ES or the relevant devices.

● Saving as a User Voice

When you save a User Voice that contains Samples, all the

related data — the Waveform assigned to the Voice, the

Samples assigned to the Waveform, as well as the User Voice

itself — is automatically saved together. Insert a SmartMedia

into the CARD slot or connecting the USB storage device to

this synthesizer, and follow the instructions below.

1 Press the [FILE] button to enter the File mode, then

execute the basic settings.

Refer to “Basic settings for using SmartMedia or a USB

storage device” on page 30.

2 Press the [F2] SAVE button to call up the Save display.

3 Set the TYPE parameter to “All” or “AllVoice.”

When “All” is selected, execute the Save operation to save

all the created data including the User Voices as a single

ﬁle. When “AllVoice” is selected, execute the Save

operation to save all User Voices, including Waveforms

assigned to Normal Voice Elements or Drum Voice Keys, as

a single ﬁle.

4 Input a ﬁle name.

Move the cursor to the ﬁle name input location, then input a

ﬁle name. For detailed instructions on naming, refer to page

53 in the Basic Operation section.

5 Press the [ENTER] button to execute the Save

operation.

If you are about to overwrite an existing ﬁle, the display

prompts you for conﬁrmation. Press the [INC/YES] button to

execute the Save operation to overwrite the existing ﬁle, or

press the [DEC/NO] button to cancel it.

● Saving as a Waveform

When you save a Waveform that makes up a Voice, all the

Samples that are assigned to the Waveform are automatically

saved together. The procedure for saving is the same as

described in “Saving a User Voice” above, with the exception

that Type is set to “AllWaveform” in step #3.

● Saving as a WAV ﬁle

You can select a speciﬁc Sample from a Waveform and save it

as a WAV ﬁle (Windows audio format). Insert a SmartMedia into

the CARD slot or connecting the USB storage device to this

synthesizer, and follow the instructions below.

1 Select a Voice containing the Sample to be saved in the

Voice Play mode, then press the [FILE] button to enter

the File mode, and execute the basic settings.

Refer to “Basic settings for using SmartMedia or a USB

storage device” on page 30.

Set the TYPE parameter to “Wav” in the [F2] SAVE display.

3 Input a ﬁle name.

Move the cursor to the ﬁle name input location, then input a ﬁle

name. For detailed instructions on naming, refer to page 53 in

the Basic Operation section.

4 Press the [ENTER] button, then select a Sample to be saved.

When a Normal Voice is selected in step #1:

Specify the Element and Key Bank to call up the Sample

assigned to the selected Voice. You can hear the Sample by

pressing the [SF1] AUDITION button. Go through the Samples

in this way to ﬁnd the desired Sample.

When a Drum Voice is selected in step #1:

Specify the Note and Key Bank to call up the Sample assigned

to the selected Drum Voice. You can hear the Sample by

pressing the [SF1] AUDITION button. Go through the Samples

in this way to ﬁnd the desired Sample.

5 Press the [ENTER] button to execute the Save operation.

If you are about to overwrite an existing ﬁle, the display prompts

you for conﬁrmation. Press the [INC/YES] button to execute the

Save operation and overwrite the existing ﬁle, or press the

[DEC/NO] button to cancel it.

● Saving as a AIFF ﬁle

You can select a speciﬁc Sample from a Waveform and save it as a

AIFF ﬁle (Macintosh audio format). The procedure for saving is the

same as described in “Saving as a WAV ﬁle” above with the

exception that Type is set to “AIFF” in step #2.

Saving a Sample

[FILE] → [F2] SAVE

CAUTION

This is available only when the cursor is located at

the KeyBank. Each press of the [SF2] button calls up

a different Key Bank assigned to a speciﬁc velocity

range (for the same key).

You can hear the selected sample by

pressing the [SF1] button. (Audition function)

You can hear the selected sample by pressing

the [SF1] button. (Audition function)

Creating a Voice by using the Sampling function

Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide — Advanced Course

Sampling the sound of an audio device to create a Drum Voice

In the previous section on

page 94, you learned how to record a Sample using a microphone. Here, you’ll learn how to record

Samples from an audio device, such as a CD player or MD player, and use the Samples to create a Drum Voice.

In order to use the Sampling function, DIMM modules must be installed to the instrument. For details on installing DIMMs, see page 289.

Depending on the size of the audio (sample) data obtained via the Sampling function, you may not be able to save all of the desired data to a SmartMedia

card (maximum capacity: 128MB). For this reason, we recommend using a large-capacity USB storage device for your Sampling data.

Follow steps #1 - 8 on page 73.

Type: sample

Source: A/D

Next: on

Mono/Stereo: stereo

Frequency: 44.1k

When creating a Drum Voice consisting of many separate

Samples, you’ll want to quickly be able to record a Sample,

assign it to a key, then move on to the next one. To do this

smoothly and easily, set the Next parameter to “on.”

For details about each parameter, see page 251.

n If the Voice parameter above is set to “off,” you won’t be able to play

the sampled sound as a Voice after completing this operation.

However, you can call up the sampled sound by selecting a

Waveform. For details on how to select a Waveform, see page 174.

● Setting the Conﬁrm function

When the [F2] CONFM (Conﬁrm function) is turned on ( is

indicated), you can easily listen back to your just-recorded

sample and conveniently re-record it if you’re not satisﬁed

with the results. Here, set the [F2] CONFM button on.

● Setting the Trigger mode

The Trigger mode lets you determine how the Sampling

actually starts. For example, you can start the Sampling

simply by pressing the button or when the Song/Pattern

playback reaches a speciﬁed point. Here, set the TrggrMode

(Trigger mode) to “level” which lets you start sampling as

soon as the input signal from the audio device exceeds the

speciﬁed Trigger Level.

● Setting the Trigger Level

When the Trigger mode is set to “level,” you’ll also need to set

the Trigger Level. This determines when sampling actually

starts, depending on the level of the input signal of the audio

device. As the sound plays, notice the movement of the level

meter (bar), and when the bar crosses the Trigger Level arrow.

If necessary, select the Trigger Level value and use the data

dial to change it, moving the arrow as low or as high as needed.

Connect an audio device (CD player, etc.) to the

instrument.

Press the [INTEGRATED SAMPLING] button in

the Voice mode or Performance mode to enter

the Sampling mode.

Press the [F2] SOURCE button to call up the

display for setting the Sampling Source, then set

the parameters as shown below.

Press the [F1] DEST button to call up the display

for setting the Sampling Destination, then set the

parameters as described below.

Part This is available when entering the Sampling mode from the

Performance mode. This parameter determines the Performance

Part to which the Voice (below) created by sampling is assigned.

Voice

Set the Bank to “UDR” (User Drum Voice Bank), then select a User

Drum Voice Number. After the Sampling is completed, you can

hear the created Voice by selecting the Voice number set here.

Key Here, set this parameter to “C3.” After the Sampling is

completed, you can hear the sampled sound by pressing the

note set here.

Press the [F6] REC button to call up the

Sampling Record display (Sampling Standby

status), then set the parameters as required.

Turn the Confirm

function on or off

You can also change the

Keybank (set in step #4)

in this display.

Indicates

Sampling

Standby status.

Trigger Level

Indicates

Sampling

Standby status.

The section of the bar exceeding the

Trigger Level becomes black.

Trigger Level

Quick Guide — Advanced Course

Creating a Voice by using the Sampling function

Owner’s Manual

Doing this puts sample recording on standby, waiting for an

input signal that exceeds the Trigger level.

The sampling actually starts as soon as the an input signal

exceeding the speciﬁed trigger level is received.

Press the [F3] AUDITION button to hear the sampled sound.

If you’re not satisﬁed with the results and you wish to try

again, press the [F4] CANCEL button to return to the

Sampling Standby display and try sampling from step #5

again. If you are satisﬁed with the results, press the [F5] OK

button to store the sampled sound as a “sample” and return

to the Sampling Standby display.

Keep in mind that if the Conﬁrm function is turned off in step

#5 above, the display shown above will not appear when

stopping sampling. Instead, stopping sampling returns

directly to the Sampling Standby display.

In step #7, select a different sound (on a CD, for example) for

each Sample. Though the Key is automatically set to the note

name the next one higher than that just assigned, you can

change it in step #5.

By repeating steps #5 - 8 above, you can create a Drum Voice

in which each key has a different sound (as shown below).

Refer to “Saving a Sample” on page 97.

The recorded (edited) sample data resides temporarily in DIMM (page 187).

Because data contained in DIMM is lost when the power is turned off, you

should always save any data residing in DIMM to a SmartMedia /USB

storage device before turning off the power.

Example Sampling sources

The examples below show you some of the different audio

sources you can use as raw material for your Samples and

Sample Voices.

● Vocals with effects

With a PLG100-VH Plug-in Board installed, you can apply a

vocal harmony effect to your voice, and sample the entire

processed sound. After setting the PLG100-VH related

parameters as required referring to “Using an Effect Plug-in

Board” on page 78, execute the Sampling operation.

● The sound of an mLAN compatible instrument

After setting up referring to page 34, execute the Sampling

operation. You should set the [INTEGRATED SAMPLING] →

[F2] SOURCE → Source parameter to “mLAN1 - 4.”

● Electric guitar or bass

Instruments such as guitar and bass can also be sampled,

using the A/D INPUT jack. After setting up referring to page

33, execute the Sampling operation. You should set the

[INTEGRATED SAMPLING] → [F2] SOURCE → Source

parameter to “A/D.”

● Digital audio

With an optional AIEB2 interface installed to the instrument,

you can connect to the digital out jack on your DAT deck or

CD/MD player and directly record digital audio, for the

highest possible sound quality. For details on installing the

AIEB2, refer to page 285; for details on connecting digital

audio devices to the instrument, refer to

page 34

. When

executing AIEB2, you should set the [INTEGRATED

SAMPLING]

→

[F2] SOURCE

→

Source parameter to

“AIEB2.”

● Resampling the MOTIF ES

You can also resample anything you play on the MOTIF ES

itself — riffs, rhythms, melodies, thick multi-layered chord

pads, etc. You should set the [INTEGRATED SAMPLING] →

[F2] SOURCE → Source parameter to “resample.”

● WAV or AIFF audio ﬁles

Audio data created and edited on a computer can also be

used for Samples. (For details, see the next page.)

Press the [F6] REC button again to enable

Sampling Trigger Waiting.

Start the external audio device.

Press the [F6] STOP button to stop sampling,

then stop the external audio device.

Repeat steps #5 - 8 above to assign additional

Samples to the notes as desired to create your

Drum Voice.

Indicates that sample recording is waiting

for a signal of an appropriate level.

Save your newly created User Voice to a

SmartMedia/USB storage device.

Sound Effect C Sound Effect Y

Sound Effect B

Sound Effect A

CAUTION

Creating a Voice by using the Sampling function

100

Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide — Advanced Course

Loading WAV or AIFF audio ﬁles to create a Waveform/Voice

Any audio data created and edited on a computer and saved in the WAV or AIFF format can also be used as material for

Samples on the MOTIF ES. Set up the media containing the desired WAV/AIFF audio ﬁles (e.g., insert a SmartMedia card

to the CARD slot or connect a USB storage device), then follow the instructions below.

In order to use the Sampling function, DIMM modules must be installed to the instrument. For details on installing DIMMs, see page 289.

Depending on the size of the audio (sample) data obtained via the Sampling function, you may not be able to save all of the desired data to a

SmartMedia card (maximum capacity: 128MB). For this reason, we recommend using a large-capacity USB storage device for your Sampling data.

n The instructions here apply when you enter the File mode from the Voice mode. When entering the File mode from the Performance mode, the

instructions are the same with the exception that you should set the destination Performance number and Part in step #4.

1 In the Voice mode, press the [FILE] button to enter

the File mode, then execute the basic settings.

Refer to “Basic settings for using SmartMedia or a

USB storage device” on page 30.

2 Press the [F3] LOAD button to call up the Load

display.

3 Select the ﬁle type to be loaded.

Set Type to “Waveform.” This setting lets you select

and load a speciﬁc Waveform from a ﬁle (extension:

W7W) saved as “AllWaveform” or load a WAV ﬁle/

AIFF ﬁle as a Waveform.

4 Select the ﬁle ( ) to be loaded and specify the

destination.

When moving the cursor to a WAV ﬁle (extension:

WAV) or AIFF ﬁle (extension: AIF), the destination

parameter automatically appears in the display.

When assigning a WAV ﬁle/AIFF ﬁle to a Normal

Voice:

When assigning a WAV ﬁle/AIFF ﬁle to a Drum Voice:

n When assigning a WAV ﬁle/AIFF ﬁle to a Drum Voice, a

Sample from the WAV ﬁle/AIFF ﬁle is assigned to the empty

Waveform automatically.

Loading data to this synthesizer automatically erases and

replaces any existing data in the User memory. Make sure to save

any important data to a SmartMedia/USB storage device before

performing any Load operations.

5 Press the [ENTER] button to execute the Load

operation.

After the data has been loaded, a “Completed” message

appears and operation returns to the original display.

While the data is being saved, make sure to follow these

precautions:

•Never remove or eject the media from the device (SmartMedia

or USB storage).

•Never unplug or disconnect any of the devices.

•Never turn off the power of the MOTIF ES or the relevant

devices.

TIP

Voice When this is set to “on,” you can load and assign a

WAV ﬁle/AIFF ﬁle to the destination Voice set

below.

USR1:001

(A01)

This is available when the Voice (above) is set to

“on.” Select “USR1” or “USR2” as the destination

Normal Voice Bank and select a destination Voice

number.

Waveform Determines the destination Waveform number.

KeyBank Determines the destination Key Bank of the

Waveform set above.

Voice When this is set to “on,” you can load and assign a

WAV ﬁle/AIFF ﬁle to the destination Voice set below

UDR:001

(A01)

This is available when the Voice (above) is set to

“on.” Select “UDR” as the destination Drum Voice

Bank and select a destination Voice number.

Note Determines the destination key of the Drum Voice

set above.

CAUTION

Quick Guide — Advanced Course

Creating a Voice by using the Sampling function

101

Owner’s Manual

6 Depending on whether you’re creating a Normal

Voice or a Drum Voice, follow the appropriate

instructions below.

When creating a Normal Voice in steps #4 - 5

After entering the Sampling Edit mode

([INTEGRATED SAMPLING] → [EDIT]), press the

[F1] KEYBANK button to call up the Key Bank

display. From this display, select a Waveform and

Key Bank. To specify the Key Bank, simultaneously

hold down the [INFORMATION] button and press the

desired note on the keyboard. To select Waveforms

assigned to different velocities, hold down the

[INFORMATION] button and press the [SF2] SELECT

button.

After selecting a Waveform and Key Bank above,

press the [F4] RANGE button.

Once you’ve loaded the sample in step #5, it can

only be sounded by playing the note speciﬁed in

step #4. From this display however, you can expand

the note range over which the loaded sample will

sound.

When creating a Drum Voice in steps #4 - 5

By repeating steps #5 - 8 above, you can create a Drum

Voice in which each key has a different sound (as

shown below).

After creating the Normal or Drum Voice, go on to step

#7 below.

7 Play the Voice created by the Load operation.

Press the [VOICE] button to enter the Voice Play mode,

then select the Voice number set in step #4.

Determine the Key Range.

Use the data dial, [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO]

buttons or press the note on the keyboard while

holding the [INFORMATION] button.

Play the keyboard within the Key Range set above.

You can hear the loaded sample following the pitches of the

notes you play.

Sound Effect C Sound Effect Y

Sound Effect B

Sound Effect A

Creating a Song on the MOTIF ES

102

Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide — Advanced Course

Creating a Song on the MOTIF ES

The MOTIF ES is a full-featured and enormously powerful music production machine, and all of the instrument’s advanced

features and functions come together seamlessly in the creation of a Song. Here, you’ll learn how to get the most out of the

sequencer-related functions of the MOTIF ES, using primarily the Song and Pattern modes.

This section is quite detailed and comprehensive. However, rather than following it step-by-step all the way through and trying to

use every feature in a single song, use it instead as a guide or a springboard for further exploration.

Recording your keyboard performance

Generally, you’ll start recording a Song or Pattern by playing a Voice from the keyboard. Since the instrument is set to multi-

timbral operation (page 162), the Voice you actually play and record depends on the Voice settings for the Song or Pattern,

made in the Mixing settings described below.

Selecting a Voice

Selecting a Voice for recording is different than selecting a

Voice for playing. Voice settings for the Song/Pattern mode

are handled in Song Mixing/Pattern Mixing.

See page 56 for instructions on how to select a Song or

Pattern.

For information on how to select a Song track or Pattern track,

see page 58.

● Move the cursor to “Bank” and select the desired Voice

Bank by using the data dial, [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO]

buttons.

● Move the cursor to “Number” and select the desired Voice

Number by using the data dial, [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO]

button. Refer to the separate Data List.

n With the [TRACK SELECT] lamp turned off, Normal Voices can be

selected in the way described on page 60.

n With the exception of Sample Voices and Mixing Voices, you can also

use the Category Search (page 62) in this display.

The Voice for each Part of the current Song or Pattern can be selected

also in the [SONG] → Song selection → [MIXING] → [F2] VOICE display

or the [PATTERN] → Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [F2] VOICE

display. You can also use the Category Search (page 62) in this display.

For information on how to select a voice of a Plug-in Board in the Song

mode/Pattern mode, see page 121.

Press the [SONG] button/[PATTERN] button to

enter the Song mode/Pattern mode, then select a

Song number/Pattern number to be created.

Enter the Mixing Edit mode ([MIXING] →→

→→

[EDIT]),

then select a Part (track) and call up the Voice

setting display ([F1] VOICE →→

→→

[SF1] VOICE).

SONG

PATTERN FILE

SEQUENCER

INTEGRATED

SAMPLING

MIXING UTILITY

EDIT

COMPARE SCENE STORE

SET LOCATE

JOB STORE

DEMO

ELEMENT/ PERF. PART/ ZONE

87654321

MUTE

TRACK

SELECT

NUMBER

SOLO

1412 13

SCENE

SF1 SF

2 SF3 SF4 SF5

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

INFORMATION

Turn the [TRACK SELECT] indicator on and

select one of the [1] - [16] buttons.

Indicates the current Part number. Parts 01-16 are internal tone

generator Parts. Parts 17-32 are tone generator Parts of the

PLG100-XG Multi Part Plug-in Board. Parts PLG01-03 are tone

generator parts of the Single Part Plug-in Board. Keep in mind

that the example instructions here use the internal tone generator.

Press the [F6] button

to switch between

the display for Parts

01-16, 17-32, and

PLG1-3.

Select a voice referring to the instructions below.

PRE1 (Preset1) ~ PRE6

(Preset 6)

Preset Banks 1 - 6 of the Normal Voice. These

correspond to the [PRE1] - [PRE6] buttons in the

Voice mode.

USER1 ~ USER2 User Banks 1 - 2 of the User Voice. These

correspond to the [USER1] - [USER2] buttons in

the Voice mode.

GM GM Normal Voice Bank. This corresponds to the

[GM] button in the Voice mode.

PDR (Preset Drum) Preset Bank of the Drum Voice. This corresponds

to pressing the [DRUM KITS] button and the

[PRE5] button simultaneously.

GMDR (GM Drum) GM Drum Voice Bank. This corresponds to

pressing the [DRUM KITS] button and the [GM]

button simultaneously.

UDR (User Drum) User Bank of the Drum Voice. This corresponds to

pressing the [DRUM KITS] button and the

[USER1] button simultaneously.

SMPL (Sample Voice) Indicates the Bank for the Sample Voices created

via the Sampling function (page 173).

MIXV (Mixing Voice) This bank is for the Mixing Voices (page 105)

dedicated for the Song mode/Pattern mode.

Play the keyboard to confirm the selected Voice.

Repeat steps #2 - 4 to set the Voice settings

(Mixing Settings) for each Part (track).

Quick Guide — Advanced Course

Creating a Song on the MOTIF ES

103

Owner’s Manual

● First, store the Voice settings as Song Mixing/Pattern

Mixing. Press the [STORE] button to enter the Song Mixing

Store mode/Pattern Mixing Store mode, then press the

[ENTER] button to execute the Store operation (page 131).

● Next, save the stored Song Mixing as a ﬁle for all Songs

created on the instrument before turning the power off.

Press the [FILE] button to enter the File mode, then execute

the Save operation by following the instructions described

on page 132.

Selecting a Mixing Template

Here is an exceptionally convenient Song/Pattern creation

tool. The MOTIF ES has 32 different Mixing Templates for use

with a Song or Pattern, each pre-programmed for a variety of

music styles and applications. Simply dial up the template

that comes closest to the type of Song or Pattern you wish to

create, tweak the settings as desired, then start recording. It’s

a quick, smooth and inspiring way to get your ideas down.

Select a Template number by using the data dial, or the [INC/

YES]/[DEC/NO] buttons. For details, refer to the Mixing

Template list in the separate Data List booklet.

You can conﬁrm the Voice settings for the Parts by selecting

tracks one by one and playing the keyboard with each. If you

wish to check the detailed settings, call up and view each

display in the Song Mixing mode and Song Mixing Edit mode.

Tweak and change the Mixing parameters — especially the

Voices — to ﬁt the song you intend to create. For details about

the Mixing Edit mode, see page 127.

If desired, make a backup of the Voice (Mixing)

settings made above.

Press the [SONG]/[PATTERN] button to enter the

Song mode/Pattern mode, then select a Song/

Pattern number to be created.

Call up the Mixing Template selection display in

the Song Mixing Job mode ([MIXING] →→

→→

[JOB] →→

→→

[F6] TEMPLATE).

SONG

PATTERN FILE

SEQUENCER

INTEGRATED

SAMPLING

MIXING UTILITY

EDIT

COMPARE SCENE STORE

SET LOCATE

JOB STORE

DEMO

Move the cursor to the Template number

location, then select a Mixing Template.

Press the [SF4] button to actually call up the

selected Mixing Template for the current Song.

Play the keyboard to check the Mixing settings

— especially the Voices.

Change the Mixing settings as desired.

Template number Template name

SF4

EXIT

The Edit indicator appears.

Creating a Song on the MOTIF ES

104

Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide — Advanced Course

● First, store the Voice settings as Song Mixing/Pattern Mixing. Press the [STORE] button to enter the Song Mixing Store mode/

Pattern Mixing Store mode, then press the [ENTER] button to execute the Store operation (page 131).

● Next, save the stored Song Mixing as a ﬁle for all Songs created on the instrument before turning the power off. Press the

[FILE] button to enter the File mode, then execute the Save operation by following the instructions described on page 132.

The Mixing settings you make can be stored as a Template — letting you create your own custom Mixing/Voice conﬁgurations for

future use in recording Songs. Press the [SF5] PUT button in step #4 above to store the settings to the destination (current)

Template number. The following illustration shows the memory structure for Mixing.

Whereas Mixing Template data resides in internal Flash ROM, Song data and Pattern data — including the Mixing settings — resides in DRAM. Because

data contained in DRAM is lost when the power is turned off, you should always save any data residing in DRAM to a SmartMedia/USB storage device in the

File mode before turning off the power.

The currently edited Mixing program will be lost when selecting a different Song/Pattern or going to a different mode without saving (putting) it to a

template or storing it to the current Song/Pattern. In addition, simply playing back the Song/Pattern or receiving any MIDI messages from an external MIDI

instrument may change the current Mixing program. Make sure to put or store the Mixing program before executing these operations.

Using Controllers

Just as in the Voice/Performance mode, the controllers of the

instrument — Pitch Bend wheel, Modulation wheel, Ribbon

Controller, Knobs, and Control Sliders — can also be used in

the Song/Pattern mode.

n The Pitch Bend Range in the Song mode/Pattern mode can be set in

the Mixing Edit made for each Song/Pattern. This can be changed with

the PB Upper/Lower parameters ([SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song or

Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → Part selection → [F1]

VOICE → [SF5] OTHER → PB Upper/PB Lower).

n The functions assigned to the Pitch Bend Wheel, Modulation Wheel,

Ribbon Controller, and Knobs (ASSIGN 1 and 2) in the Song mode/

Pattern mode depends on the setting (made in the Voice mode) of the

Voice assigned to each Mixing Part .

n The functions assigned to the Knobs (ASSIGN A and B) can be set in

the [UTILITY] → [F4] CTL ASN → [SF2] ASSIGN display.

You can set the Ribbon Controller to control different functions on

connected external MIDI devices from the functions assigned in Song

Mixing/Pattern Mixing for the instrument itself. You can also determine

whether the Ribbon Controller value returns to the center, or stays at the

point where you released your ﬁnger. Both of these setting can be made

in the Song/Pattern Mixing Edit mode ([SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song or

Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F4] CTL ASN).

n For information on using the Control Sliders in the Song mode/Pattern

mode, see page 130.

Edit Indicator

Tweaking the knobs in the Song or Pattern mode directly

changes the Song/Pattern Mixing parameters. When

any of the Song Mixing/Pattern Mixing parameters are

changed, the [E] (Edit) Indicator appears in the top left

of the display. This indicates that the current Song

Mixing/Pattern Mixing has been modiﬁed but not yet

stored. If you’re satisﬁed with the tweaks you made and

the resulting sound, you can store the changes as a

Song Mixing/Pattern Mixing in the Song Mixing/Pattern

Mixing Store mode (page 131).

n The [E] (Edit) indicator also appears in the following situations

— even if the Mixing parameters are not edited.

•

Playing back song data (either on this instrument or from a

connected MIDI sequencer) that changes the settings, such as

the Voices.

• Calling up the Mixing template.

If you select another Song/Pattern during editing, the [E] (Edit)

indicator will disappear and all your edits will be lost. It is a good

idea to store the edited Song Mixing/Pattern Mixing data in the Song

Mixing/Pattern Mixing Store mode (page 131). Even if you lose the

Song Mixing/Pattern Mixing edited data, you can restore it by using

the Edit Recall function (page 129).

If desired, make a backup of the Mixing settings made above.

DRAM

Mixing Template 01 - 32

Flash ROM

Song 01 - 64

GET

PUT

SAVE

SmartMedia

USB storage

device

SAVE

GET

PUT

Mixing Template 32

Mixing Template 01

Song 64

Song 01

Mixing*

Pattern 01 - 64

Pattern 64

Pattern 01

Mixing*

Save as Song data/Pattern data

GET....Loads the Mixing template to the current Song/Pattern.

PUT....Stores the Mixing settings for each Song/Pattern to the Template.

*Mixing parameters can be edited and stored as Song/Pattern data in the Song

Mixing mode and Pattern Mixing mode.

CAUTION

Quick Guide — Advanced Course

Creating a Song on the MOTIF ES

105

Owner’s Manual

Using the Arpeggio Function

Just as in the Voice/Performance mode, you can use

Arpeggio playback in the Song/Pattern mode.

This parameter can be set to “on” simultaneously for more

than one Part, but only if the Parts have the same MIDI

Receive Channel settings.

n Just as in the Voice mode and Performance mode, the Song mode

and Pattern mode let you register the desired Arpeggio type to the

[SF1] - [SF5] buttons.

n Arpeggio related parameters (such as Type, etc.) are included in

Song/Pattern Mixing data.

Using the Audio Input sound

Just as in the Performance mode, the audio input can be

used as an audio Part in the Mixing settings in the Song

mode/Pattern mode. The related parameters can be set with

the following operation: [SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song/

Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] →

[F5] AUDIO IN.

Creating Mixing Voices exclusively for

Songs/Patterns

If you assign User Voices to your Song or Pattern and then

edit them (in the Voice Edit mode), the Voices may sound

different than expected. This convenient feature lets you

create dedicated Mixing Voices for your songs and Patterns

— ensuring that the Voices will play exactly as they were

edited for the Song/Pattern.

n Only Normal Voices can be created/edited as Mixing Voices.

See page 56 for instructions on how to select a Song or

Pattern.

n You can enter the Mixing Voice Edit mode only when a Normal Voice is

assigned to the current Part.

These displays are the same as in the Voice mode. See page

79.

The actual parameters and procedures for editing them are

the same as in the Voice Edit mode. See page 80.

Set the ArpSwitch parameter for the current part

to “on” ([SONG] or [PATTERN] →→

→→

[MIXING] →→

→→

[EDIT] →→

→→

Part selection →→

→→

[F1] VOICE →→

→→

[SF2]

MODE).

Select an Arpeggio type ([SONG] or [PATTERN]

→→

[MIXING] →→

→→

[EDIT] →→

→→

[COMMON] →→

→→

[F3] ARP

→→

[SF1] TYPE).

With the [ARPEGGIO ON/OFF] lamp turned on,

press any note on the keyboard to trigger

Arpeggio playback.

Press the [SONG] button/[PATTERN] button to

enter the Song mode/Pattern mode, then select

the desired Song/Pattern for which the Mixing

settings will be edited.

Press the [MIXING] button (the lamp lights) to

enter the Song Mixing mode/Pattern Mixing

mode, then select the Part containing the desired

Voice.

Press the [F5] VCE ED (Voice Edit) button to

enter the Mixing Voice Edit mode.

Call up the Common Edit or Element Edit display

as required.

Select the desired menu for editing by pressing

the [F1] - [F6] and [SF1] - [SF5] buttons, then edit

the parameters.

Repeat steps #4 and 5 as desired.

MIXING

ELEMENT/PERF. PART /ZONE

87654321

MUTE

TRACK

SELECT

SOLO

1412 13

Creating a Song on the MOTIF ES

106

Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide — Advanced Course

Input a name in the [COMMON] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF1]

NAME display.

For detailed instructions on naming, refer to page 53 in the

Basic Operation section.

Press the [STORE] button to enter the Mixing Voice Store mode.

2 Set the destination Voice Bank to “MIXV” and select the

destination Voice number.

3 Press the [ENTER] button to execute the Store operation.

You can store the Voice edited in the Mixing Voice Edit mode as a User

Normal Voice by setting the Voice Bank to “USER1” or “USER2.”

Press the [EXIT] button several times to return to the Song

Mixing mode/Pattern Mixing mode, press the [STORE] button

to enter the Song Mixing Store mode/Pattern Mixing Store

mode, then press the [ENTER] button to execute the Store

operation (page 131).

Mixing Voices are assigned to Parts of the Song/Pattern and stored to

internal DRAM. Because data contained in DRAM is lost when the power is

turned off, you should always save any data residing in DRAM to a

SmartMedia/USB storage device in the File mode before turning off the

power.

Creating a Pattern

When you create a Song, one of the most essential aspects is the rhythm. It is almost always the ﬁrst thing you start with, and

provides a foundation for the rest of the music. The Pattern mode gives you the tools to create rhythm patterns for the

accompaniment of the Song. Here, in brief, are the basic steps in using Patterns to create a Song:

1) In the Pattern mode, create and chain together the phrases that will be used for the accompaniment and the Song.

2) Convert the Pattern data to a Song.

3) In the Song mode, record a melody on a separate track of the Song.

Here, we’ll explain in detail the ﬁrst of these steps.

The created pattern (phrase) data resides temporarily in DRAM (page 187). Because data contained in DRAM is lost when the power is turned off, you

should always store any data residing in DRAM to a SmartMedia/USB storage device before turning off the power.

Creating a Phrase by recording a rhythm pattern to a track

In the following sections you’ll learn various different methods of creating Pattern data (also called “Phrases” — the raw material

for a Pattern) to a single track. The following ﬁve methods are explained.

● Sampling a rhythm loop (audio data) to a Pattern track ................................................................................................ Page 107

● Loading a WAV ﬁle/AIFF ﬁle to a Pattern track .............................................................................................................. Page 109

● Recording your keyboard performance to a Pattern track ............................................................................................ Page 110

● Recording a rhythm pattern created by Arpeggio playback to a Pattern track............................................................. Page 112

● Assigning a pre-programmed Phrase to a Pattern track .............................................................................................. Page 113

The ﬁrst two methods involve using both audio data (created via Sampling, or imported from another device) and MIDI data.

Keep in mind that to use audio data, DIMM modules must be installed (page 289). The other three use only MIDI data.

Name the edited Mixing Voice.

Store the edited Mixing Voice to internal User

memory.

Destination Voice Number

Destination Voice Bank

Store the edited Song Mixing/Pattern Mixing to

internal User memory.

Save the Song data/Pattern data to a

SmartMedia/USB storage device in the File mode

(page 132) before turning off the power.

CAUTION

Quick Guide — Advanced Course

Creating a Song on the MOTIF ES

107

Owner’s Manual

■ Sampling a rhythm loop (audio data) to a Pattern track

With this method, you can record drum loops and rhythm patterns from CDs to the MOTIF ES by using the Sampling function, then

slice the sample into separate components and assign the slices to different keys. This powerful feature lets you match the

sampled rhythm to virtually any tempo without stretching or compressing the audio, since each “hit” becomes a separate MIDI note.

In order to use the Sampling function, DIMM modules must be installed to the instrument. For details on installing DIMMs, see page 289.

Follow steps #1 - 8 on page 73, substituting the instructions

below for steps #4 and 8. In step #4, press the [PATTERN]

button to enter the Pattern mode, then select a pattern

number and section to be created. In step #8, set the related

parameters in the [PATTERN] → [MIXING] → [EDIT] →

[COMMON] → [F5] AUDIO display.

Type: slice+seq

Source: A/D

Next: off

Mono/Stereo: stereo

Frequency: 44.1k

For details about each parameter, see page 253.

Refer to step #5 on page 98.

Doing this puts sample recording on standby, waiting for an

input signal that exceeds the Trigger level.

The sampling actually starts as soon as an input signal

exceeding the speciﬁed trigger level is received.

Press the [F6] STOP button at the point you want sample

recording to stop, and the Slice display is automatically called

up. After stopping recording, stop playback of the connected

audio device.

Sampling

Sample

Slice

Sample Voice

MIDI sequence data

CANCEL

Connect an audio device (CD player, etc.) to the

instrument.

Press the [INTEGRATED SAMPLING] button in the

Pattern Play mode to enter the Sampling mode.

Press the [F2] SOURCE button to call up the

display for setting the Sampling Source, then set

the parameters as shown below.

Press the [F1] DEST button to call up the display

for setting the Sampling Destination, then set the

parameters as described below.

Track This parameter determines the Pattern track to which the

Sample Voice is assigned.

Press the [F6] REC button to call up the

Sampling Record display (Sampling Standby

status), then set the TrggrMode to “level” and set

an appropriate Trigger Level value.

Press the [F6] REC button again to enable

Sampling Trigger Waiting.

Start the audio device (CD player, etc.).

Press the [F6] STOP button to stop sampling.

Indicates that sample

recording is waiting for a

signal of an appropriate level.

Creating a Song on the MOTIF ES

108

Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide — Advanced Course

1 Press the [SF1] AUDITION button to hear the recorded sample.

2 Set the start and end points to determine the actual portion of

the sample to be used.

The “Start” parameter determines the actual start of the sample

(letting you cut unwanted sound at the beginning), while the “End”

parameter determines the end of the sample (letting you cut

unwanted sound at the end).

Pressing [SF3] SET END calls up the following convenient display

for making rhythmically accurate End point edits.

Many commercially available sample/loop CDs include information

on the tempo and meter of speciﬁc loops. Use that information to

make the settings here and ensure proper playback.

After setting the parameters (above right), press the [ENTER]

button to automatically determine the proper End point. Listen

back to the edited sample by pressing the [SF1] AUDITION button.

If you’re satisﬁed with the results, press the [F6] OK button. If

you’re not and you want to continue editing, press [F5] CANCEL.

3 Once you’ve trimmed the sample above, you may want to

delete the unneeded portions of the sound (before and after

the Start/End points), to free up memory space. Press the

[SF4] EXTRACT button to delete this excess data.

4 Press the [F2] SLICE button to call up the Slice display.

1 Set the parameters shown below.

Set other parameters as necessary, referring to page 254.

2 Press the [ENTER] button (the display prompts you for

conﬁrmation), then press the [INC/YES] button to execute the

Slice.

3 Conﬁrm the result of the operation.

Play the assigned keys in order (C3, C#3, D3, etc.) to hear the

individual slices of the sample.

To hear how the resulting pattern would sound when played by

MIDI sequence data, press the [SF1] AUDITION button.

4 If you’re satisﬁed with the results of the Slice operation, press

the [F6] OK button.

If you’re not satisﬁed with the results and want to continue editing,

press the [F5] CANCEL button and attempt the operation again

from step #10-1 above.

Edit the sample data in the [F1] TRIM display.

These parameters determine the portion of the sample that will be used.

Press the [SF1] AUDITION button to sound the recorded sample

according to the settings in this display.

When the menu indication here is “LP=ST,” the Start (Start Point) and the

Loop (Loop Start Point) will share the same address, meaning that both

of them will be changed simultaneously, even if just one of them is

changed. Pressing the [SF2] button in this condition changes the menu

from “LP=ST” to “LP≠ST.” When the menu indication here is “LP≠ST,” the

Start (Start Point) and the Loop (Loop Start Point) can be changed

independently. When pressing the [SF2] button in this condition, the

address value of the Start will be copied to the one of the Loop, with the

result that both of them share the same address value. The menu

indication also changes from “LP≠ST” to “LP=ST.”

See below.

Press the [SF4] EXTRACT button to delete all unnecessary sample data

(located ahead of the Start point and located after the End point).

Press the [F5] and [F6] buttons to zoom in and out of the wave display.

BCDEF

Start

(Start Point)

Loop

(Loop Point)

[SF4] EXTRACT

End

(End Point)

Start

(Start Point)

Loop

(Loop Point)

End

(End Point)

Execute the Slice operation in the [F2] SLICE

display.

Measure Determines the number of measures the sample is

recognized as having.

Meter Determines the rhythmic meter the sample is

recognized as having.

Return to the Pattern Play mode by pressing the

[PATTERN] button or [EXIT] button.

Press the [FF

] (Play) button to play the created

Pattern.

Save the created Pattern data to a SmartMedia/

USB storage device (page 132) before turning the

power off.

Slice display (before executing Slice)

Slice display (after

executing the Slice)

[ENTER] button

[F5] CANCEL button

Quick Guide — Advanced Course

Creating a Song on the MOTIF ES

109

Owner’s Manual

■ Loading a WAV ﬁle/AIFF ﬁle to a Pattern track

Audio data you’ve created and stored in the common WAV or AIFF computer audio formats can be loaded to the instrument and

used with the Slice function to divide the sample and assign the slices to different MIDI notes — letting you match the sampled

rhythm to virtually any tempo. Set up the media containing the desired WAV/AIFF audio ﬁles (e.g., insert a SmartMedia card to

the CARD slot or connect a USB storage device), then follow the instructions below.

In order to use the Sampling function, DIMM modules must be installed to the instrument. For details on installing DIMMs, see page 289.

Depending on the size of the audio (sample) data obtained via the Sampling function, you may not be able to save all of the desired data to a SmartMedia

card (maximum capacity: 128MB). For this reason, we recommend using a large-capacity USB storage device for your Sampling data.

Refer to “Basic settings for using SmartMedia or a USB

storage device” on page 30.

Set Type to “Waveform.” This setting lets you select and load

a speciﬁc Waveform from a ﬁle (extension: W7W) saved as

“AllWaveform” or load a WAV ﬁle/AIFF ﬁle as a Waveform.

When moving the cursor to a WAV ﬁle (extension: WAV) or

AIFF ﬁle (extension: AIF), the destination parameter

automatically appears in the display.

Loading data to this synthesizer automatically erases and replaces any

existing data in the User memory. Make sure to save any important data to

a SmartMedia/USB storage device before performing any Load operations.

After the data has been loaded, a “Completed” message

appears and operation returns to the original display.

While the data is being saved, make sure to follow these precautions:

•Never remove or eject the media from the device (SmartMedia or USB

storage).

•Never unplug or disconnect any of the devices.

•Never turn off the power of the MOTIF ES or the relevant devices.

Load

Sample

Slice

Sample Voice

MIDI sequence data

CANCEL

In the Pattern mode, select a Pattern and Section

to be created, press the [FILE] button to enter the

File mode, then execute the basic settings.

Press the [F3] LOAD button to call up the Load

display.

Select a file type to be loaded.

Select the file ( ) to be loaded and specify the

destination.

Track

Determines the destination Track number of the current pattern.

KeyBank Determines the key to which the loaded ﬁle is to be

assigned. Immediately after loading, you can hear the

loaded ﬁle sound by pressing the key set here.

Press the [ENTER] button to execute the Load

operation.

Press the key set in step #4 for Key Bank to

confirm the loaded file sound.

Press the [INTEGRATED SAMPLING] button,

then the [JOB] button to enter the Sampling Job

mode.

CAUTION

Creating a Song on the MOTIF ES

110

Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide — Advanced Course

Press the [F1] KEYBANK button, move the cursor to “12:

Slice,” then press the [ENTER] button.

1 Set the parameters shown below.

Set other parameters as necessary, referring to page 258.

2 Press the [ENTER] button (the display prompts you for

conﬁrmation), then press the [INC/YES] button to execute

Slice.

3 Conﬁrm the result of the operation.

Play the assigned keys in order (from the one set in step #9-1

above) to hear the individual slices of the sample.

To hear how the resulting pattern would sound when played by

MIDI sequence data, press the [SF1] AUDITION button.

4 If you’re satisﬁed with the results of the Slice operation, press

the [F6] OK button.

If you’re not satisﬁed with the results and want to continue editing,

press the [F5] CANCEL button and attempt the operation again

from step #9-1 above.

■ Recording your keyboard performance to a

Pattern track

You can make changes to the Voice settings after entering the

Record mode (in step #4 below). However, if you intend to

make detailed settings to the Mixing parameters, you should

do so before enabling recording.

Call up the Slice Job display.

Execute the Slice Job.

Measure Determines the number of measures the sample is

recognized as having.

Meter Determines the rhythmic meter the sample is recognized

as having.

LowestKey Determines the lowest key (ﬁrst MIDI note) from which the

sample slices will be assigned in order.

Slice display (before executing Slice)

Indicates the Waveform and Key Bank containing the

sample for which the Job is applied. In this case, you

won’t need to change these settings since they were

set when loading the data.

Slice display (after executing Slice)

[F5] CANCEL button

[ENTER] button

Return to the Pattern Play mode by pressing the

[PATTERN] button or [EXIT] button.

Press the [F] (Play) button to play the created

Pattern.

Save the created Pattern data to a SmartMedia/

USB storage device (page 132).

In the Pattern Play mode, select a Pattern and

Section to be created.

Set the Mixing parameters (including the Voice

settings) by following the instructions on pages

127 - 128.

Set the meter (time signature), tempo, and length

of the pattern.

Press the [●] (Record) button to enter the Pattern

Record mode.

Meter (time signature) Tempo Length of pattern

SEQ TRANSPORT

LOCATE 1 2

Quick Guide — Advanced Course

Creating a Song on the MOTIF ES

111

Owner’s Manual

Set the Type to “overdub” then set the Loop to “on.” These

settings let you repeat the pattern recording in a “loop” and

record additional note events without deleting already-

recorded data.

Set other parameters as necessary. See page 243 for details.

Call up the display for setting a Voice by pressing the [F2]

VOICE button. You won’t need to make settings in this display

if you’ve already completed Voice/Mixing settings in step #2

above.

When a Drum Voice is selected, for example, try recording the

rhythm pattern shown below.

As shown in the example below, notes that you record will

play back from the next repetition (loop), letting you record

while hearing previously recorded material.

This operation exits from the Pattern Record mode to the

Pattern Play mode.

Press the [TRACK SELECT] button (the lamp

lights), then select the desired track from the

number buttons [1] - [16].

Set the parameters related to recording in the

[F1] SETUP display.

Set the parameters related to the Voice you wish

to use during recording in the [F2] VOICE

display.

ELEMENT/PERF. PART /ZONE

87654321

MUTE

TRACK

SELECT

SOLO

1412 13

Recording track

This lets you turn the click sound (metronome)

on/off for recording. (Press the [F5] button.)

Bank Number

Press the [F] (Play) button to start recording.

Press the [■] (Stop) button to stop recording.

Press the [F] (Play) button to hear your newly

recorded phrase.

Record different phrases to other tracks by

repeating steps #4 - 10.

Save the created Pattern data to a SmartMedia/

USB storage device (page 132) before turning the

power off.

SEQ TRANSPORT

LOCATE 1 2

Bass Drum

Snare Drum

Bass Drum

Snare Drum

Hi-Hat

Bass Drum

Actual recording starts

after one measure.

Loop 1st round

Loop 2nd round

Loop 3rd round

Start recording

Creating a Song on the MOTIF ES

112

Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide — Advanced Course

■ Recording a rhythm pattern created by Arpeggio

playback to a Pattern track

The Arpeggio function is a virtually endless source of creative

inspiration, putting a huge variety of rhythm patterns, riffs and

phrases at your ﬁngertips — patterns that change depending

on the notes you play. Once you come with some patterns

you like and want to use in a Song, you can record them to a

Pattern track.

You can make changes to the Voice settings after entering the

Record mode (in step #5 below). However, if you intend to

make detailed settings to the Mixing parameters, you should

do so before enabling recording.

1 Enter the Mixing Edit mode ([MIXING] →→

→→

[EDIT]), select the

desired Part (track to be recorded), then press the [F1] VOICE

button, followed by the [SF2] MODE button.

2 Set the ArpSwitch (Arpeggio Switch) parameter to “on.”

3 Call up the Arpeggio Type selection display ([COMMON] →→

→→

[F3]

ARP →→

→→

[SF1] TYPE).

4 Select the desired Arpeggio type in the [SF1] TYPE display,

then press the [ARPEGGIO ON/OFF] button (the lamp lights).

Try out various Arpeggio types, and also try tweaking various

parameters in the [SF1] - [SF4] displays. When you ﬁnd a

rhythm or phrase that you like and want to use, go to step #4.

For details about how to select a track, see page 58.

Set Type to “replace” and set Loop to “off.”

Set other parameters as necessary. See page 243 for details.

Call up the display for setting a Voice by pressing the [F2]

VOICE button. You won’t need to make settings in this display

if you’ve already completed Voice/Mixing settings in step #2

above.

Call up the display for setting a Voice by pressing the [F3]

ARP button. You won’t need to make settings in this display if

you’ve already completed Arpeggio settings in the Mixing Edit

mode, in step #3 above.

In the Pattern mode, select a Pattern and Section

to be created.

Set the Mixing parameters (including the Voice

settings) by following the instructions on pages

127 - 128.

Play with the Arpeggio features and find a

rhythmic pattern/phrase you like.

REMOTE ARPEGGIO

ON/OFF ON/OFF

R-AUDIO

G-MIDI

Select an Arpeggio Type and Bank.

Go back to the Pattern Play mode, then set the

meter, tempo, and length of the current pattern.

Press the [●] (Record) button to enter the Pattern

Record mode.

Select the desired track for recording ([1] - [16]).

Set the parameters related to recording in the

[F1] SETUP display.

Set the parameters related to the Voice you wish

to use during recording in the [F2] VOICE

display.

Set the parameters related to an Arpeggio you

wish to use during recording in the [F3] ARP

display.

Set the RecArp parameter to “on” in the [F4]

RECARP display.

When this is set to “on,” the Arpeggio playback data is

recorded to a track as MIDI sequence data.

Creating a Song on the MOTIF ES

113

Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide — Advanced Course

During recording, play the note or notes needed to trigger the Arpeggio you found in step #3.

■ Assigning a pre-programmed Phrase to a Pattern track

The Pattern mode also has a versatile Patch function that lets you assign pre-programmed one-track rhythm “Phrases” to each

track. Use the special preset Phrases already in internal memory, or create your own User Phrases — by recording, or loading

Pattern data from the included CD-ROM (Sound Library for MOTIF ES6/MOTIF ES7/MOTIF ES8). Use the Assigning Phrases

function to assemble your original Patterns, with up to 16 tracks.

The instrument provides a total capacity of 256 User Phrases. Keep in mind that these are originally empty and have no data,

unless you record or load data to them.

Press the [F] (Play) button to start recording.

Turn the [ARPEGGIO ON/OFF] indicator off, and press the [F] (Play) button to hear your newly recorded phrase.

Save the created Pattern data to a SmartMedia/USB storage device (page 132) before turning the power off.

In the Pattern Play mode, select a Pattern and Section to be created.

Press the [F4] PATCH button to call up the Patch display.

Select the desired track and assign a Phrase to the selected track.

Select another track and assign a User Phrase to it.

SEQ TRANSPORT

LOCATE 1 2

Recording stops automatically

when Pattern playback reaches

the end, since Loop is set to “off.”

Start recording

Actual recording

starts after one

measure.

Arpeggio playback

ELEMENT/ PERF. PART/ ZONE

87654321

MUTE

TRACK

SELECT

SOLO

1412 13

DEC/NO INC/YES

SEQ TRANSPORT

LOCATE 1 2

Select a track.

Select a Preset Phrase.

Play the Pattern to

conﬁrm the

assigned Phrase.

Indicates the category

of the preset Phrases.

Indicates the Phrase

number.

ELEMENT/ PERF. PART/ ZONE

87654321

MUTE

TRACK

SELECT

SOLO

1412 13

DEC/NO INC/YES

SEQ TRANSPORT

LOCATE 1 2

Select a track.

Select a User Phrase.

Play the Pattern to

conﬁrm the

assigned Phrase.

Quick Guide — Advanced Course

Creating a Song on the MOTIF ES

114

Owner’s Manual

The User Phrases that can be assigned with the Patch function are limited to the ones contained in the currently selected

Pattern. To copy Phrases from other Patterns for use in the current one, follow the instructions below.

1 In the [F4] PATCH display, press the [SF5] COPY button to call up the Copy Phrase display.

2 First, specify the source Pattern number and Phrase number as well as the destination (current Pattern) Phrase number and track

number. Then, press the [ENTER] button to execute the Copy operation.

3 Press the [EXIT] button to return to the [F4] PATCH display, then check the assigned Phrase by pressing the [FF

] (Play) button to

play the Pattern.

Using the Groove function

The Groove function makes it possible to adjust the pitch, timing, length, and velocity of notes in a speciﬁed track via a 1-measure

16th-note grid to create interesting, unique “grooves” that would not be possible with precise sequencer-like programming.

n The Groove settings are applied to all measures of the current Pattern. Keep in mind that you cannot apply different Groove settings to each measure.

n The Grid Groove function affects Pattern playback without actually changing the MIDI sequence data (created via the Recording, Sampling, File Loading,

and Patch functions). The Groove settings are handled separately from MIDI sequence data. See page 167.

Select a different track and copy the User Phrase from the another pattern to the selected Pattern’s track.

Save the created Pattern data to a SmartMedia/USB storage device (page 132) before turning the power off.

In the Pattern Play mode, select a Pattern and Section for which the Groove is to be applied.

Press the [F2] GROOVE button to call up the Groove display.

Select the desired track and adjust the Groove parameters.

Source Pattern number, Phrase number

Destination Phrase and track of the current

edited Pattern.

When this box is checkmarked, Sample Voices

assigned to the source Phrase are copied to

the destination Phrase as Sample Voices, and

are assigned to the corresponding tracks in

the selected Pattern.

ELEMENT/ PERF. PART/ ZONE

87654321

MUTE

TRACK

SELECT

SOLO

1412 13

SEQ TRANSPORT

LOCATE 1 2

DEC/NO INC/YES

EXIT ENTER

EXECUTE

DEC/NO INC/YES

VELO OFST

GATE OFST

CLOCK SFT

NOTE OFST

Move the cursor... Set the value.

Grid

minus plus

NOTE OFST (Note Offset) Raises or lowers the pitch of the note(s) on the selected grid in semitones.

CLOCK SFT (Clock Shift) Shifts the timing of the note(s) on the selected grid forward or backward

in clock increments.

GATE OFST (Gate time Offset) Lengthens or shortens the note(s) on the selected grid in clock

increments.

VELO OFST (Velocity Offset) Increases or decreases the velocity of the note(s) on the selected grid.

n You can edit the Groove parameters in real time

during playback.

Select a track.

Set each

parameter.

Play the Pattern

to check the

result of the

Groove settings.

Move the cursor to the desired

parameter and grid point and set

the offset value.

Quick Guide — Advanced Course

Creating a Song on the MOTIF ES

115

Owner’s Manual

Using the Groove settings to change the Pattern data

Grid Groove is a playback-only feature that processes the recorded data of a Pattern without actually changing it. In other

words, the original data (created via the Recording, Sampling, File Loading and Patch functions) remains intact. If you

want to make the Grid Groove settings permanent and change the data, use Normalize Play Effect in the Pattern Jobs

([PATTERN] → [JOB] → [F5] TRACK → 04: Normalize Play Effect). From this display, specify the track to be changed

according to the Groove settings, and press the [ENTER] button to execute.

Creating a Section and Pattern Chain

■ Creating a Section

Each Pattern consists of 16 Sections (A~H) which can be used as Pattern variations. Create the desired rhythm pattern

variations, or Sections, that you wish to use as accompaniment and backing for your new Song. After you’ve created the

Sections, you can string these Sections together in any order desired to assemble the backing part of the Song, over which you

can record a melody line and any other parts, in the Song Record mode.

n Pattern Mixing, Groove, and Phrase Voice (Track Voice) on/off (page 167) cannot be set independently for each Section, but apply to all Sections.

The same User Phrases can be assigned to different Sections within a pattern. Keep in mind, however, that the Section data will automatically be changed

if another Section sharing the same User Phrase is changed. For example, if you’ve assigned a certain User Phrase to both Section A and Section D, and

you change that User Phrase for Section A, the same Phrase will be changed for Section D as well.

■ Creating a Pattern Chain by changing a Section

while playing a Pattern

Switching of sections, track muting, scene/mute changes,

and tempo changes can all be recorded in real time as the

Pattern Chain.

In the Pattern Chain Record Setup display, you can set the

Recording track and tempo. Three Pattern Chain track types

are available. The Tempo track lets you record tempo

changes for the Chain, and the Scene track lets you record

track on/off changes.

The Pattern (“patt”) track lets you record Section changes at

the desired measure points in the Song.

Save the created Pattern data to a SmartMedia/USB storage device (page 132) before turning the power off.

TIP

........

Section A Section B Section F Section H

Convert

Song

Pattern Chain

.....Enter the desired Sections for the Song

CAUTION

In the Pattern Play mode, select a Pattern for

which data has already been created.

Press the [F6] CHAIN button to call up the

Pattern Chain Play display.

Press the [

●

] (REC) button to enter the Pattern

Chain Record mode, then set the basic parameters.

SEQ TRANSPORT

LOCATE 1 2

Pattern Chain Play display

Pattern Chain Record Setup display

Set the recording track to “patt” and enter

the Sections to the desired measures.

Tempo

Creating a Song on the MOTIF ES

116

Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide — Advanced Course

Change the Section at the desired points, as the Pattern plays.

Operation returns to the Pattern Chain display.

You can also record the Tempo track and Scene track as

desired. When the recording track is set to “tempo,” move the

cursor to tempo value (during recording in step #4 above)

and use the data dial and the [INC/YES]/[DEC/NO] buttons to

change the tempo while the Chain is playing. When the

recording track is set to “scene,” press the [MUTE] button

(the lamp lights) and use the number buttons [1] - [16] to turn

each track on/off as desired during recording.

■ Editing a Pattern Chain

The Pattern Chain Edit mode makes it possible to edit the

order of the Sections in a chain as well as inserting tempo,

and scene/mute event data.

Press the [F] (Play) button to start recording

and play the Pattern.

Press the [■] (Stop) button to stop recording.

Press the [F] (Play) button to hear the recorded

Pattern Chain.

Save the created Pattern data to a SmartMedia/

USB storage device (page 132) before turning the

power off.

SEQ TRANSPORT

LOCATE 1 2

A. PIANO KEYBOARD ORGAN

PRE 5 PRE 6 USER 1

GUITAR/

PLUCKED

SYN LEAD

ABCDEFG

SECTION

CATEGORY

SYN PAD/

CHOIR

SYN COMP

CHROMATIC

PERCUSSION

DRUM/

PERCUSSION

SE MUSICAL FX COMBI

USER 2

STRINGS

PLG 1

BRASS

PLG 2

REED/PIPE

PLG 3

BASS

Section I-P

Section A-H

In the Pattern Play mode, select a Pattern for

which data has already been created.

Press the [F6] CHAIN button to call up the

Pattern Chain Play display.

Press the [EDIT] button to enter the Pattern

Chain Edit mode, then edit each track of the

Pattern Chain.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the Pattern

Chain Play display, then press the [F] (Play)

button to hear the edited Pattern Chain.

Save the created Pattern Chain as Pattern data to

a SmartMedia/USB storage device (page 132)

before turning the power off.

EDIT

Press the [F6] button to

clear the event at the

cursor location.

Press the [F5] button to insert

the event to the cursor location.

Press the [F6] button to delete

the event at the cursor location.

Pattern Track Edit

Scene Track Edit

Tempo Track Edit

[F4] button

Enter the desired section

(A - P) or the End mark by

using the [INC/YES] and

[DEC/NO] buttons.

Quick Guide — Advanced Course

Creating a Song on the MOTIF ES

117

Owner’s Manual

■ Converting a Pattern Chain to Song data

The Pattern Chain data is converted to Song data and copied

to the top measure of the destination Song.

This operation overwrites any data already existing at the destination

Song.

The created Song data resides temporarily in DRAM (page 187). Because

data contained in DRAM is lost when the power is turned off, you should

always store any data residing in DRAM to a SmartMedia/USB storage

device before turning off the power.

Creating a Song

The following chart illustrates the basic procedure for creating a Song, using the various methods and functions described in this

tutorial. Now, that you’ve assembled the backing tracks for your Song (by converting the Phrases or Pattern Chain to Song data,

you can now record melody parts on top of them.

The created Song data resides temporarily in DRAM (page 187). Because data contained in DRAM is lost when the power is turned off, you should always

store any data residing in DRAM to a SmartMedia/USB storage device before turning off the power.

In the Pattern Play mode, select a Pattern for

which Pattern Chain data has already been

created.

Press the [F6] CHAIN button to call up the

Pattern Chain Play display.

Press the [EDIT] button to enter the Pattern

Chain Edit mode.

Press the [F3] SONG button to call up the

“Convert to Song” display, then specify the

destination Song.

When this box is checkmarked, program change

messages in the MIDI sequence data are not copied.

Destination Song number and

the top measure number

Press the [ENTER] button to execute the Convert

operation.

Save the Song data to a SmartMedia/USB

storage device (page 132) before turning the

power off.

CAUTION

Song track 1

Song track 2

Song track 3

Song track 4

Song track 5

Song track 6

Song track 7

Song track 8

Song track 9

Song track 10

Song track 11

Song track 12

Song track 13

Song track 14

Song track 15

Song track 16

Record your keyboard performance to each track one

by one in the Song Record mode, called up via [SONG]

→ [●] (REC).

Record audio data in the Sampling mode.

Copy the Phrase to the Song in the [SONG] → [F5]

PHRASE display.

Convert the Pattern Chain to Song data ([PATTERN]

→ [F6] CHAIN → [EDIT] → [F3] SONG).

Page 118

Page 122

Page 222

Page 117

Keyboard

Performance

Audio data

Phrase

Pattern Chain

Song track

CAUTION

Creating a Song on the MOTIF ES

118

Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide — Advanced Course

Recording with the keyboard to a Song

track (in the Song Record mode)

■ Recording your keyboard performance to an

empty track (Replace)

Use the Replace recording method to record your keyboard

performance to an empty track or overwriting an already

recorded track with new data.

You can make changes to the Voice settings after entering the

Record mode (in step #3 below). However, if you intend to make

detailed settings to the Mixing parameters, you should do so

before enabling recording.

Song data is made up of three different types — Scene, Tempo and

Pattern — each of which have their own separate tracks. The Scene

track contains Song Scene (page 123) changes and the Tempo track

contains playback tempo changes. The Song tracks (1 - 16) contain

the actual note data. Since you’ll be recording a melody with the

keyboard, select one of the number tracks, using the [1] - [16] buttons.

n When the RecTrack is set to “multi,” you can simultaneously record

multiple channels of MIDI data (up to 16 channels) to all 16 tracks.

For details, see page 143.

Set the Type parameter to “replace.”

Set other parameters as necessary. See page 222 for details.

Call up the display for setting a Voice by pressing the [F2]

VOICE button. You won’t need to make settings in this display

if you’ve already completed Voice/Mixing settings in step #2

above.

n Non-note settings (such as Voice, volume and pan) that are made at

the beginning of a Song are not recorded as MIDI sequence data but

rather as Mixing setup data. However, when these non-note settings

are recorded in the middle of a Song, they are recorded as part of the

MIDI sequence data.

Listen to the playback of the already recorded tracks and play

(record) the keyboard along with them.

This operation exits from the Song Record mode to the Song

Play mode.

In the Song Play mode, select a Song to be created.

Set the Mixing parameters (including the Voice settings)

by following the instructions on pages 103 - 104.

Press the [●] (Record) button to enter the Song

Record mode.

Press the [TRACK SELECT] button (the lamp

lights), then select the desired track from the

number buttons [1] - [16].

SEQ TRANSPORT

LOCATE 1 2

ELEMENT/ PERF. PART/ ZONE

87654321

MUTE

TRACK

SELECT

SOLO

1412 13

tempo

scene 1-16

Set the parameters related to recording in the

[F1] SETUP display.

Set the parameters related to the Voice you wish

to use during recording in the [F2] VOICE display.

Press the [F] (Play) button to start recording.

Press the [■] (Stop) button to stop recording.

Press the [F] (Play) button to hear your newly

recorded song.

Record additional melody parts to the other

tracks as needed by repeating steps #3 - 9 above.

Save the created Song data to a SmartMedia/USB

storage device (page 132) before turning the

power off.

This lets you turn the click sound (metronome)

on/off for recording. (Press the [F5] button.)

Bank Number

SEQ TRANSPORT

LOCATE 1 2

Start recording

Actual recording

starts after one

measure.

Quick Guide — Advanced Course

Creating a Song on the MOTIF ES

119

Owner’s Manual

■

Re-recording a speciﬁc part of a Song (Punch In/Out)

Use the Punch In/Out recording method to record over only a

speciﬁc portion of the track. In the example instructions

below, you’ll see how to re-record measures three through ﬁve

of an already recorded Song.

Set the Type parameter to “punch” and specify the area to be

re-recorded.

Set other parameters as necessary. See page 222 for details.

n Punch In/Out recording is available only in the Song Record mode.

This is not available in the Pattern Record mode.

■ Recording additional notes to an already-

recorded track (Overdub)

Use the Overdub recording method when you want to add

more data to a track that already contains data. This is useful

not only for recording more notes to a track; it’s also

convenient for adding non-note, sound-shaping data, such as

that of the Knobs and Ribbon Controller.

Set the Type parameter to “overdub.”

Set other parameters as necessary. See page 222 for details.

Playback starts, and the notes (or controller data) you play

are added to the existing data.

In the Song Play mode, select a Song to be created.

Press the [●] (Record) button to enter the Song

Record mode.

Press the [TRACK SELECT] button (the lamp

lights), then select the desired track from the

number buttons [1] - [16].

Set the parameters related to recording in the

[F1] SETUP display.

Press the [F] (Play) button to start recording.

Press the [■] (Stop) button to stop recording

after the Song playback reaches the Punch Out

point.

Press the [F] (Play) button to hear the part

you’ve just re-recorded.

Punch In (Recording start measure : beat)

Playback of the recording track is turned off from this point, and

your keyboard performance will be recorded to the track.

Location setting

(page 58)

Punch Out (Recording end measure : beat)

Recording ends at this point and normal playback of the

recording track starts.

Press the [SF1] COPY LOC to assign the measure numbers registered to

the Locations (Loc1 and Loc2) to the Punch In and Punch Out points.

SEQ TRANSPORT

LOCATE 1 2

When Song playback

reaches the Punch In

point, play the keyboard.

Playback start

Save the created Song data to a SmartMedia/USB

storage device (page 132) before turning the

power off.

In the Song Play mode, select a song to be

created.

Press the [●] (Record) button to enter the Song

Record mode.

Press the [TRACK SELECT] button (the lamp

lights), then select the desired track from the

number buttons [1] - [16].

Set the parameters related to recording in the

[F1] SETUP display.

Press the [F] (Play) button to start recording.

Press the [■] (Stop) button to stop recording

after the Song playback reaches the Punch Out

point.

Press the [F] (Play) button to hear the part

you’ve just re-recorded.

Save the created Song data to a SmartMedia/USB

storage device (page 132) before turning the

power off.

Creating a Song on the MOTIF ES

120

Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide — Advanced Course

Rehearsing parts before recording

The MOTIF ES has a convenient Rehearsal mode in

recording, that lets you easily and temporarily disable

recording in order to practice a part or try out various

ideas (while listening to the other tracks) without actually

recording.

To temporarily disengage the record mode and enter

the “Rehearsal” mode, simply press the [●] (Record)

button during realtime recording – the [●] (Record)

indicator will ﬂash and playback will continue

uninterrupted but no data will be recorded. To return to

the record mode press the [●] (Record) button again –

the [●] (Record) indicator will light continuously. You

can repeat this process as often as you wish, pressing

the [■] (Stop) button to cancel the Rehearsal mode.

The Record button lamp indicates the Recording/

Rehearsal status: continuously lit indicates Recording,

and ﬂashing indicates Rehearsal.

Insert a Tempo change event to the

middle of the Song

You can use the following three methods to change the

tempo in the middle of the already-recorded song.

● Using the Tempo track

Start recording after setting the Type parameter to

“replace,” setting RecTrack to “tempo,” and moving the

cursor to the tempo value in step #4 on page 118.

During recording, change the tempo value while

listening to Song playback.

● Song Edit

In the Song Play mode, press the [EDIT] button to enter

the Song Edit mode. Select the Tempo track (TMP) by

pressing the [F4] TR SEL button once or twice, then

change the existing tempo value or insert a new tempo

value by using the [F5] INSERT button.

For details about Song Edit, see page 124.

● Step Recording

In step #4 on page 118, set the Type parameter to

“step” and RecTrack to “tempo” then press the [F]

(Play) button to start Step recording. After moving the

cursor to “Value,” move the song pointer by using the

[H] (Forward) button and change the tempo value at

the desired point.

For details about Step Recording, see page 238.

Song Recording using a Performance

If you have a favorite Performance or one that would ﬁt

the Song to be recorded, you can copy certain settings

of up to four Parts of the Performance to the Song

Mixing settings currently being edited.

1 Enter the Song Mixing Job mode ([SONG] →→

→→

[MIXING] →→

→→

[JOB]).

2 Press the [F5] PF COPY button to call up the

Performance Copy display.

3 Set the parameters as necessary in the [F5] PF

COPY display, then press the [ENTER] button to

execute the Copy operation.

4 Press the [SONG] button to return to the Song

Play mode, then select Track 1 and play the

keyboard.

Check whether the sound you hear is the same as

that of the source Performance or not.

5 Record your keyboard performance to Track 1.

6 Store the Song Mixing in the [SONG] →→

→→

[MIXING]

→→

[STORE] display.

The settings copied from the Performance should be

stored as Song Mixing data.

7 Save the created Song data to a SmartMedia/USB

storage device (page 132) before turning the

power off.

n The explanations above also apply to the Pattern mode.

Step Recording

The explanations in this Quick Guide have concentrated

on Realtime Recording. However, the Step Recording

method is also available, letting you record a Song by

entering notes and events individually — much like

writing them down on paper. This is especially useful for

recording passages that would be difﬁcult or impossible

to play. The Step Recording can be executed by setting

the Type to “step” in the [F1] SETUP display in the Song

Record mode. For details on using Step Recording, see

page 238.

n Step Recording can be used both in the Song Record mode

and the Pattern Record mode.

TIP

SEQ TRANSPORT

LOCATE 1 2

SEQ TRANSPORT

LOCATE 1 2

Recording Rehearsal mode

(playback continues)

TIP

The destination Mixing Parts appear automatically. The displayed

Part numbers differ depending on the source Performance. If the

source Performance contains four Parts, “1, 2, 3, 4” appears here.

Select a source Performance.

Checkmark the boxes of the

desired parameters.

Quick Guide — Advanced Course

Creating a Song on the MOTIF ES

121

Owner’s Manual

Song Recording using Plug-in Voices

This section shows you how to use the Voices of an optional Single Part Plug-in Board (such as PLG150-AN, PLG150-PF

and PLG150-DX) in recording a Song.

1 ~ 4

Install a Single Part Plug-in Board to the

instrument, then follow steps #1 - 4 on page 75 to

set the necessary parameters.

In step #4, set PORT.NO (port number) to “2” or “3.”

Keep in mind that if you’ve also installed a PLG100-

XG Multi-Part Plug-in Board, the boards should be

set to different numbers.

5 Enter the Song Play mode and call up the MIDI

output setting display ([SONG] →→

→→

[F3] TRACK →→

→→

[SF1] CHANNEL).

6 Select the track for recording, making sure that

the track number is the same as that of the slot to

which the Plug-in Board is installed, and set the

port number.

The track number must match the slot number, and

the port number must be the same as set in step #4

above.

7 Select a Voice of the installed Plug-in Board.

Enter the Mixing Edit mode ([MIXING] → [EDIT] →

Part selection). Press the [F6] button once or twice to

call up the display for the Plug-in Board parts (PLG

parts) as shown below (page 164). Next, press the

[TRACK SELECT] button (the lamp lights), and select

the PLG Part of Slot 1 by pressing the [1] button.

Finally, press the [F1] VOICE button, followed by the

[SF1] VOICE button, then select the desired Voice on

the Plug-in Board.

When you play the keyboard, you should be able to hear

the selected Voice of the Plug-in Board. If the Voice of the

Plug-in Board does not sound as expected, check the

following points.

● Make sure that the OUT CH of the track matches the

Receive Channel of the corresponding Part of the

tone generator.

Check the ReceiveCh (MIDI Receive Channel) in the

display called up by pressing the [SF2] MODE in the

above display, then check the OUT CH (MIDI Output

Channel) of track 1 in the display shown in step #6.

These two channels should be same.

● Make sure that the destination tone generator is set

to internal, not external.

Check the settings in the display called up via the [F1]

PLAY → [SF2] OUT CH button. The INT SW of the

corresponding track (1 in this case) should be set to

“on.”

8 Record your keyboard performance using the Plug-

in Voice to track 1.

9 Store the Song Mixing settings in the [SONG] →→

→→

[MIXING] →→

→→

[STORE] display (page 131).

The settings related to the Plug-in Board voice should

be stored as Song Mixing data.

10 Save the created Song data to a SmartMedia/USB

storage device (page 131) before turning the

power off.

n The explanations above apply also to the Pattern modes.

TIP

When a Single Part Plug-in Board has been installed to

slot 1, move the cursor here then set the port number.

When a Single Part Plug-in Board has been installed to

slot 1, move the cursor here then set the port number.

Voice Bank

Voice Number

Creating a Song on the MOTIF ES

122

Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide — Advanced Course

Using the Groove function

Just as in the Pattern Play mode, the Groove function is

available also in the Song Play mode.

For details, refer to the explanation of Groove in the Pattern

Play mode (page 114).

The created Song data resides temporarily in DRAM (page 187). Because

data contained in DRAM is lost when the power is turned off, you should

always store any data residing in DRAM to a SmartMedia/USB storage

device before turning off the power.

Sampling a one-shot sound to a Song

track

The MOTIF ES conveniently lets you sample audio material,

even while a Song is playing. This allows you to quickly and

easily “ﬂy in” samples to your Song as you need them — for

example, capturing short sound effects from a CD, or

recording background vocal phrases with a microphone.

Sounds like these can be added to the Song as desired, and

can even be aligned in time as needed after recording in the

Song Edit mode.

In order to use the Sampling function, DIMM modules must be

installed to the instrument. For details on installing DIMMs, see page

289.

Follow steps #1 - 8 on page 73, substituting the instructions

below for steps #4 and 8.

In step #4, press the [SONG] button to enter the Song Play

mode then select a song to be created.

In step #8, set the related parameters from the AUDIO IN

display ([SONG] → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F5]

AUDIO IN).

Type: sample+note

Source: A/D

Next: off

Mono/Stereo: stereo

Frequency: 44.1k

For details about each parameter, see page 253.

Set the TrggrMode (Trigger Mode) to “meas” then specify the

Punch In measure (at which the Sampling starts

automatically) and the Punch Out measure (at which

Sampling stops automatically).

In the Song Play mode, select a Song for which

the Groove settings are to be applied.

Press the [F2] GROOVE button to call up the

Groove setting display.

Select a track, then adjust the Groove settings.

Save the created Song data to a SmartMedia/USB

storage device (page 132) before turning the

power off.

Connect an audio device (CD player, etc.) to the

instrument.

Press the [INTEGRATED SAMPLING] button in

the Song mode to enter the Sampling mode.

CAUTION

Press the [F2] SOURCE button to call up the

display for setting the Sampling Source, then set

the parameters as shown below.

Press the [F1] DEST button to call up the display

for setting the Sampling Destination, set the

parameters as described below.

Track This parameter determines the Song track to which the

Sample Voice is assigned.

Keybank This parameter determines the note to which the sample

is assigned.

Press the [F6] REC button to call up the

Sampling Record display (Sampling Standby

status), then set the parameters as required.

Punch Out measure

Measure number at which

Sampling stops

automatically

Punch In measure

Measure number at which

Sampling starts automatically

Indicates Sampling

Standby status.

Quick Guide — Advanced Course

Creating a Song on the MOTIF ES

123

Owner’s Manual

Doing this puts sample recording on standby, waiting for

song/pattern playback to reach the speciﬁed Punch-in

measure.

Audio is recorded to the instrument.

Press the [F3] AUDITION button to hear the sampled sound.

If you’re not satisﬁed with the results and you wish to try

again, press the [F4] CANCEL button to return to the

Sampling Standby display and try sampling from step #5

again. If you are satisﬁed with the results, press the [F5] OK

button to store the sampled sound as a “sample” and return

to the [F1] DEST or [F2] SOURCE display.

Keep in mind that if the Conﬁrm function is turned off in step

#5 above, the display shown above will not appear when

stopping sampling. Instead, stopping sampling returns

directly to the [F1] DEST or [F2] SOURCE display.

Listen back to the Song (the sample automatically sounds

along with playback) and check that the timing is correct. If

you’re not satisﬁed with the timing, you can adjust it as

needed in the Song Edit mode. For details about Song Edit,

see page 124.

Registering a Song Scene and Arpeggio type simultaneously to the [SF1] - [SF5] buttons

Song Scenes and Arpeggio types can both be registered to the [SF1] - [SF5] buttons (when the ARP1 - ARP5 menu items are shown

at the bottom of the display). These settings are stored as Song data. Song Scene is a powerful function that allows you to store ﬁve

different “snapshots” of important Song related parameters – including transpose, tempo, track mute status, and the basic sound/

mixing controls (all parameter settings controllable from the Knobs with the [PAN/SEND] or [TONE] lamp turned on, and the Control

Sliders). The Arpeggio function and Arpeggio types are discussed in detail in the Voice mode, on page 66. You can call up both the

Song Scene and Arpeggio type simultaneously by simply pressing one of the [SF1] - [SF5] buttons (when ARP1 - ARP5 are shown at

the bottom of the display in the Song mode).

Press the [F6] REC button again enable Punch In

Waiting.

Press the [F] (Play) button to start Song

playback.

Start the audio equipment when the Song

reaches the Punch In point (when sampling

actually starts).

Indicates that sample recording is waiting for song/pattern

playback to reach the speciﬁed Punch-in measure.

Stop the audio equipment when the Song

reaches the Punch Out point (when sampling

stops).

Press the [SONG] button or [EXIT] button to

return to the Song Play mode.

Press the [F] (Play) button to play the Song.

Save the Song data to a SmartMedia/USB

storage device in the File mode (page 132) before

turning the power off.

SCENE

SF1 SF

2 SF3 SF4 SF5

SCENE STORE

SET LOCATE

STORE

SCENE

SF1 SF

2 SF3 SF4 SF5

ARPEGGIO

ON/OFF

● Registering a Song Scene and Arpeggio type

simultaneously to the [SF1] - [SF5] buttons

● Recalling a Song Scene and Arpeggio type

simultaneously from the [SF1] - [SF5] buttons

In the Song mode, you can register the Song Scene and Arpeggio

type simultaneously to the [SF1] - [SF5] buttons only when the

ARP1 - ARP5 menus appear at the bottom in the display.

Simultaneously hold

the [STORE] button

and press one of

the [SF1] - [SF5]

buttons.

Creating a Song on the MOTIF ES

124

Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide — Advanced Course

■ Recalling a Song Scene and Arpeggio type during recording

ARP1 - ARP5 menus appear also in the [F3] ARP display in the Song Record mode as well as the [F1] PLAY display in the Song

Play mode. These indicate that you can change the Song Scene and Arpeggio type simultaneously during Song recording from

the [F3] ARP display.

■ Recording Song Scene changes to a song

Each Song contains a Scene track to which you can record Scene changes. When the RecTrack is set to “scene” in step #4

described on page 118, you can record Scene changes from any display (even from those in which ARP1 - ARP5 are not shown)

by pressing the [SF1] - [SF5] buttons during recording.

n The explanations on Arpeggio here also apply to the Pattern mode.

n As in the Voice mode and Performance mode, Arpeggio types can only be registered to the [SF1] - [SF5] buttons when the [ARPEGGIO ON/OFF] button is

turned off.

n For details on how to select an Arpeggio type in the Song mode/Pattern mode, see page 105.

Editing the recorded song

The Song Edit mode and Song Job mode can be used to edit or change the data of the already recorded song.

The Song Edit mode lets you change the recorded data and insert new data if needed. This includes note data as well as non-

note data, such as program (Voice) changes and MIDI control change messages. The Song Job mode on the other hand

provides a comprehensive variety of tools you can use to transform the recorded data — such as cleaning up the timing

(Quantize), transposing, changing the velocity of notes, modifying the length of notes, and other useful operations for altering the

sound. It also includes a variety of convenient operations, such as copying or erasing data. Most of these operations can be

performed on either an entire track or a selected range of measures in the track.

n The explanations here also apply to the Pattern mode.

■ Editing the recorded Song data by MIDI event (in the Song Edit mode)

Press the [SONG] button to enter the Song Play mode, then select a Song to be edited.

Enter the Song Edit mode by pressing the [EDIT] button (the lamp lights), then press the [F1] CHANGE

button to call up the MIDI event list display.

EDIT

007:1-007

Song position

MIDI events

Clock (480 clocks

per quarter-note)

Beat

Measure

number

Quick Guide — Advanced Course

Creating a Song on the MOTIF ES

125

Owner’s Manual

Select one of the three available track types by pressing the

[F4] TR SEL (Track Select) button. Each press of the button

alternates among the track types.

To select one of the Pattern tracks (1 - 16), make sure the 1-16

track edit display is selected (see below), then turn the

[TRACK SELECT] button on and press any of the [1] - [16]

buttons.

● Editing/Deleting Existing Events

To edit data in the Event List, use the up/down cursor buttons

to highlight the speciﬁc event you want to edit, and use the

left/right cursor buttons to highlight the data type or

parameter to be edited. Then, change the value as needed

by using the [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons or the data

dial.

The entire line of the edited event will ﬂash on the display.

Press the [ENTER] button to actually enter the edited data

(the entire line of the edited event will stop ﬂashing). To abort

an edit simply highlight to a new event location without

pressing the [ENTER] button.

Press the [F6] button to delete the event at the current

location.

● Inserting New Events

To insert an event, use the up/down cursor buttons to

highlight an event at the desired point in the track measure,

beat, clock) – this is the location to which the new event will

be inserted. Then, follow the steps below.

In the Event List display, you can edit various types of events

such as Voice, volume, and pan as well as note events. This

means that you could, for example, enter Voice changes to

the middle of a track, even if the track was recorded using

only one Voice.

n For details about the MIDI events handled in the Event List display,

see page 225.

n If you ﬁnd the display too cluttered, you can ﬁlter out certain event

types with the View Filter. Simply press the [F2] VIEW FLT button and

select the event types you want to be displayed. For details, see page

225.

Select a track to be edited.

Edit the MIDI events of the Song.

ELEMENT/ PERF. PART/ ZONE

7654321

MUTE

TRACK

SELECT

SOLO

1412 13

Select a track to be edited from 1 - 16.

1 - 16 track edit display

Scene track edit display

Tempo track edit display

[F4] button

When changing the value, the entire line will ﬂash on the

display indicating this is being edited and not ﬁxed yet.

This value has been

ﬁxed as data.

Press the [F6] button to delete the

event at the current location.

[ENTER] button

ENTER

EXECUTE

Press the [F1] button or [EXIT] button

to abort and return to the main Event

List display.

Press the [F6] SET button to actually insert

the event shown in the display and remain

in display. If you wish to insert the event

type currently shown in the display several

times, use [F6] SET and press the [F1] or

[EXIT] button to return to the main Event

List display.

Press the [ENTER] button to actually insert the

event and return to the main Event List display.

[F5] button

[F1] button or

[EXIT] button

Creating a Song on the MOTIF ES

126

Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide — Advanced Course

Since the Song can be played back from within the Song Edit

mode, you can instantly hear and check the changes you’ve

made while editing. If you want to hear just the track being

edited, use the Solo function (page 58).

■ Transforming the recorded data and other

operations — Song Job mode

The Song Job mode has a wide variety of operations for

changing and working with Song data. Virtually all of the Jobs

share the same procedure, so we’ll explain only one of them

here — Quantize, which lets you clean up the timing of a

previously recorded track.

In the following example, this musical passage has been

written with exact quarter-note and eighth-note values.

Even though you think you may have recorded the passage

accurately, your actual performance may be slightly ahead of

or behind the beat (or both!). Quantize allows you to align all

the notes in a track so that the timing is absolutely accurate to

the speciﬁed note value.

As shown below, the Jobs are divided into six main groups,

each of which is selected using the [F1] - [F6] buttons.

After specifying the track and range over which the Job is to

be applied, set Quantize to “ ” (8th note) according to the

notation example above. Set the Strength to “100%,”

SwingRate to “050%,” and GateTime to “100%.” Regarding

these parameters, see page 227.

n Set the Quantize value to correspond to the smallest value notes in the

track you are working with. For example, if the data was recorded with

both quarter notes and eighth notes, use eighth note for the quantize

value.

After the Job has been completed, a “Completed” message

appears and operation returns to the original display.

An “Executing...” message is shown when it takes a short amount of time to

execute the Job. Never attempt to turn off the power while the Job is being

executed. Turning the power off in this state results in loss of all user data.

If you are satisﬁed with the result of the Job, go to step #7.

If not, execute the UNDO Job in the [F1] UNDO display in the

Song Job mode to restore the data to its previous state, then

try out the Job (from step #4) again. For details about Undo,

see next page.

In addition to Quantize, you’ll ﬁnd a variety of other useful and

powerful Jobs in the Song Job mode (page 226) and Pattern

Job mode (page 244).

Press the [F] (Play) button to hear your edited

data.

Edit other tracks as required by repeating steps

#3 through #5 as desired.

After editing, press the [SONG] button to return

to the Song Play mode.

Save the edited Song data to a SmartMedia/USB

storage device (page 132) before turning the

power off.

Press the [SONG] button to enter the Song Play

mode, then select a Song for which the Job is to

be applied.

Press the [JOB] button to enter the Song Job mode.

[F1] [F2] [F3] [F4] [F5] [F6]

Indicates the Job List. Because all the Jobs cannot be

displayed simultaneously, you will need to use the cursor

buttons to scroll the display in order to ﬁnd the desired Job.

[F1] UNDO Undo (Canceling the executed Job)/Redo

(Restoring the executed Job) functions

[F2] NOTE Note Data Job

[F3] EVENT Event Job

[F4] MEAS Measure Job

[F5] TRACK Track Job

[F6] SONG Song Job

Press the [F2] NOTE button, move the cursor to

“01: Quantize” then press the [ENTER] button to

call up the Quantize Job display.

Set the relevant Job parameters.

Press the [ENTER] button to execute the Job.

Press the [SONG] button to return to the Song

Play mode, then press the [F] button to hear

the song over which the Job is applied.

Save the Song data to a SmartMedia/USB

storage device in the File mode (page 132) before

turning the power off.

Track over which the Job is applied Range over which the Job is applied

CAUTION

Creating a Song on the MOTIF ES

127

Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide — Advanced Course

Using the Undo/Redo functions

If you’re not satisﬁed with the results of a just-executed Job, or you want to hear the difference of the sound before and

after using a Job, you can use the convenient Undo and Redo functions. After changing the data with a particular Job,

repeat steps #1 -4 as desired.

1 Press the [SONG] button to return to the Song Play mode, then press the [F] button to hear the Song as it was

changed by the Job.

This lets you check the results of the Job.

2 After stopping the song, press the [JOB] button followed by the [F1] UNDO button to call up the Undo display.

Press the [ENTER] button to execute Undo.

The Song data is restored to its previous state.

3 Press the [SONG] button to return to the Song Play mode, then press the [FF

] (Play) button to play the song.

This lets you check the sound before actually making changes to it with the Job.

4 After stopping the song, press the [JOB] button followed by the [F1] UNDO button to call up the Undo display.

Press the [ENTER] button to execute the Redo.

This lets you “redo” the Job, restoring the Song to the changes you made before using Undo in step #2 above.

n Undo/Redo is applied to the most recent operation (Job, Edit, Record, etc.).

n The Undo/Redo Job is available also in the Pattern Job mode.

Editing Mixing parameters to complete a Song (in the Mixing mode/Mixing Edit mode)

In this ﬁnal step (other than saving your precious work, which we’ll cover next), you can mix down your tracks with the Song

Mixing function – adjusting the volume balance and pan setting of all the parts and tweaking the effect levels.

n The explanations here also apply to the Pattern mode.

Select the menu you wish to edit by pressing the [F1] - [F4] buttons, then edit the parameters in each display.

You can use the Song Mixing mode for Sample Mixing as well. For information on the available parameters, see page 233.

If you wish to edit more detailed Mixing parameters, enter the Song Mixing Edit mode.

Press the [SONG] button to enter the Song Play mode, then select a Song for which Mixing edits have been made.

Enter the Song Mixing mode by pressing the [MIXING] button (the lamp lights).

TIP

Indicates the operation to be affected by Undo. Changes to “Redo.”

[ENTER]

button

Indicates the operation to be affected by Redo. Changes to “Undo.”

[ENTER]

button

If you alter any parameters, the [E] indicator will appear in the top left of the display.

Press the [F6] button to switch between the display for

Parts 01-16 (for the internal tone generator), 17-32 (for

the Multi-Part Plug-in Board PLG100-XG), and PLG1-3

(for the Single Part Plug-in Board).

Press the [F5] VCE ED button to enter the Mixing

Voice Edit mode (page 105).

Quick Guide — Advanced Course

Creating a Song on the MOTIF ES

128

Owner’s Manual

Use Part Edit to edit the parameters for each Part. Use Common Edit to edit the parameters for all of the Parts.

For details on the available parameters, see page 234.

After pressing the [EXIT] button to return to the Song Mixing mode, press the [STORE] button to enter the Song Mixing Store

mode, then press the [ENTER] button to execute the Store operation (page 131).

Press the [EDIT] button to enter the Song Mixing Edit mode.

Call up the Common Edit display or Part Edit display.

Select the menu you wish to edit by pressing the [F1] - [F5] buttons and [SF1] - [SF5] buttons, then edit the

parameters in each display.

Repeat steps #4 - 5 as desired.

Store the edited Song Mixing settings to internal User memory (DRAM).

Before turning the power off, save the stored Song Mixing settings to a SmartMedia/USB storage device as

Song data in the File mode (page 132).

EDIT

COMPARE SCENE STORE

SET LOCATE

JOB STORE

COMMON

ELEMENT/PERF. PART/ZONE

FAVORITES

DRUM KITS

A. PIANO KEYBOARD GUITAR/

PLUCKED

PRE 5PRE 6 USER 1

GUITAR

SYN LEAD

ABCD

321

SYN PAD/

CHOIR

SYN COMP

CHROMATIC

PERCUSSION

USER 2

......

..........

Calling up the Common Edit display

Press the [COMMON] button to call up the

Common Edit display.

In the Edit mode, the [DRUM KITS] button

functions as the [COMMON] button.

While in the Song Mixing Edit mode, you can switch

between the Common Edit display and the Element

Edit display as shown below.

Indicates a Common Edit

display.

Calling up the Part Edit display

Press the desired Part number from the PART [1] -

[16] buttons to call up the Part Edit display.

Indicates the display for editing Part 1.

Common Edit

Part1 Edit

To switch between the Part 1 - 16

display, Part 17 - 32, and Part PLG1

- 3 display, press the [F6] button.

n Common Edit operations cannot be

performed on the Multi-part Plug-in parts

17 - 32. The Mixing settings for the Multi-

Part Plug-in Part (17~32) apply not to one

individual song but to all 64 songs.

Internal Tone

Generator

Multi-Part Plug-in

Board PLG100-XG

Single Part

Plug-in

Board

n You can mute or solo a Part just as is done with

tracks in the Song Play mode or Pattern Play mode.

Part2 Edit

Part3 Edit

Part4 Edit

Part 16 Edit

Part 17 Edit

Part 32 Edit

Plug-in part 1 (PLG1) Edit

Plug-in part 2 (PLG2) Edit

Plug-in part 3 (PLG3) Edit

Creating a Song on the MOTIF ES

129

Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide — Advanced Course

Editing a Mixing by using the Knobs (in the Song mode/Pattern mode)

The four knobs at the top left of the instrument can be used to tweak the Song/Pattern Mixing settings as they play (in the

Song Play/Pattern Play mode). What’s mode, you can use them to edit the Mixing settings, in the Song Mixing Edit/Pattern

Mixing Edit modes.

For details on the parameters edited by the knobs, refer to the descriptions in the Performance mode (page 90).

● When the [PAN/SEND] indicator is turned on:

● When the [TONE] indicator is turned on:

● When the [ARP FX] indicator is turned on:

● When the [EQ] indicator is turned on:

● When both the [PAN/SEND] and [TONE] indicators are turned on (by pressing them simultaneously):

n In addition to the above functions, Master Effect related parameters ([SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song/Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] →

[COMMON] → [F2] MEQ/MEF → [SF2] MEF) can be assigned to these four knobs, and the knobs can be used for these assignments by pressing

the [ARP FX] and [EQ] buttons simultaneously to turn them on. The particular parameters assigned to the four knobs can be set in the [UTILITY] →

[F4] CTL ASN → [SF5] MEF display.

Compare function and Edit Recall (in the Song mode/Pattern mode)

These are the same as in the Voice mode and Performance mode. See pages 80 and 82.

PAN [SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song/Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → Part selection → [F2] OUTPUT →

[SF1] VOL/PAN → Pan

Page 235

REVERB [SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song/Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → Part selection → [F2] OUTPUT →

[SF2] EF SEND → RevSend

Page 235

CHORUS [SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song/Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → Part selection → [F2] OUTPUT →

[SF2] EF SEND → ChoSend

Page 235

TEMPO Tempo of the current Song/Pattern Pages 57

and 59

CUTOFF [SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song/Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → Part selection → [F4] TONE → [SF2] FILTER →

Cutoff

Page 236

RESONANCE [SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song/Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → Part selection → [F4] TONE → [SF2] FILTER →

Resonance

Page 236

ATTACK [SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song/Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → Part selection → [F4] TONE → [SF4] AEG →

Attack

Page 236

RELEASE [SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song/Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → Part selection → [F4] TONE → [SF4] AEG →

Release

Page 236

SWING [SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song/Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F3] ARP → [SF3] PLAY FX →

Swing

Page 234

GATE TIME [SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song/Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F3] ARP → [SF3] PLAY FX →

GateTimeRate

Page 234

VELOCITY [SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song/Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F3] ARP → [SF3] PLAY FX →

VelocityRate

Page 234

UNITMULTIPLY

[SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song/Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F3] ARP → [SF3] PLAY FX →

UnitMultiply

Page 234

LO [SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song/Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → Part selection → [F3] EQ → Low Gain Page 236

LO MID [SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song/Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → Part selection → [F3] EQ → Mid Gain Page 236

HI MID —-

HI [SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song/Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → Part selection → [F3] EQ → High Gain Page 236

ASSIGN A Adjusts parameters assigned to these knobs in the [UTILITY] → [F4] CTL ASN → [SF2] ASSIGN display. Page 263

ASSIGN B Page 263

ASSIGN 1 Depend on the settings of the voice assigned to the currently selected part. Page 192

ASSIGN 2 Page 192

TIP

Quick Guide — Advanced Course

Creating a Song on the MOTIF ES

130

Owner’s Manual

Editing a Mixing by using Control Sliders (in the Song mode/Pattern mode)

In the Song/Pattern mode, the four Control Sliders let you independently adjust the levels of the Parts (Voices), letting you

control the overall balance of the Parts.

n Inadvertent use of the sliders may result in no sound. If this occurs, move the sliders upward.

Creating an Arpeggio

In addition using the preset Arpeggios, you can also create your own original Arpeggio data.

Actually, there is no direct operation for recording Arpeggios. First, you have to record a Phrase to a Song or Pattern track.

Then, use the appropriate Song or Pattern Job function to convert the data to Arpeggio data.

■ Determining how Song/Pattern data is converted to an Arpeggio — Convert Type

MIDI sequence data (of Song/Pattern tracks) can be converted to Arpeggio data in one of three ways, according to the

Convert types below. These types can also be selected independently for each destination track — providing enormous

ﬂexibility and performance control.

[SONG] →→

→→

Song selection →→

→→

[MIXING] →→

→→

[EDIT] →→

→→

Part selection →→

→→

[F2] OUTPUT →→

→→

[SF1] VOL/PAN →→

→→

Volume

Normal The Arpeggio is played back using only the played note and its octave notes.

Fixed Playing any note(s) will trigger the same MIDI sequence data.

OrgNotes (Original Notes) Basically same as “Fixed” with the exception that the Arpeggio playback notes differ according to the played chord.

TIP

Track 1

Track 2

Track 3

Track 4

Track 5

Track 6

Track 7

Track 8

Track 9

Track 10

Track 11

Track 12

Track 13

Track 14

Track 15

Track 16

Track 1

Track 2

Track 3

Track 4

Record

User Arpeggio 256

User Arpeggio 001

Song or Pattern

Arpeggio

[SONG] → [JOB] → [F5] TRACK → 07: Put Track To Arp

Record

Convert

You can record MIDI sequence data for

the Arpeggio to any of the tracks. After

recording, select four tracks from all

sixteen and convert them to Arpeggio

data.

Specify the tracks of the source Song or

Pattern. Set unused tracks to “off.”

Set the root note when the

convert type of any track is

set to “OrgNote.”

Specify the destination Arpeggio number.

Specify the source Song/

Pattern number and

measure range.

Select a convert type by track (see below).

After setting the parameters as shown below,

press the [ENTER] button to execute Convert.

Convert the MIDI sequence data (recorded to

the Song or Pattern) as Arpeggio data.

Record the MIDI sequence data to be

used as the basis for base of the Arpeggio

to a Song or Pattern.

Creating a Song on the MOTIF ES

131

Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide — Advanced Course

Record the MIDI sequence data to a Song or Pattern track, referring to the previous instructions in this chapter as needed.

The examples listed below are used as reference.

● Creating a rhythm pattern (using a Drum Voice)

● Creating a bass line (using a Normal Voice)

● Creating a guitar backing (using a Keyboard Mega Voice)

n Up to 16 unique note numbers can be recorded to the Arpeggio track. (This does not apply to multiple instances of the same note number.) If more

than 16 different note numbers have been recorded to the MIDI sequence data, the Convert operation reduces the notes in excess of the limit.

Because of this, be careful to record only up to 16 different notes when you create an Arpeggio, especially when using all four tracks.

■ Convert type which determines how the Song/Pattern data is converted to the Arpeggio data

The Arpeggio data created via the above instructions is stored on internal Flash ROM, meaning that it will not be lost, even

if you turn the power off. When saving the Arpeggio data to a SmartMedia/USB storage device, set the ﬁle type (TYPE) to

“All” or “UsrArp” in step #3 described on page 132.

Storing/Saving the created Song/Pattern

The created Song/Pattern data resides on DRAM (page 187). Because data contained in DRAM is lost when the power is turned

off, you should always save any data residing in DRAM to a SmartMedia/USB storage device in the File mode before turning off

the power. Please note that the edited Mixing settings should be stored before saving to a SmartMedia/USB storage device.

Storing the edited Song Mixing/Pattern Mixing settings to internal memory (DRAM)

Press the [STORE] button to enter the Song Mixing Store mode/Pattern Mixing Store mode, then press the [ENTER] button to

execute the Store operation. The Mixing settings are actually stored to a Song/Pattern by executing the Store operation.

The currently edited Mixing program will be lost when selecting a different Song/Pattern or going to a different mode without storing it to the current Song/

Pattern. In addition, simply playing back the Song/Pattern or receiving any MIDI messages from an external MIDI instrument may change the current Mixing

program.

Make sure to store the Mixing program before executing these operations.

Track 1 Record a basic rhythm pattern using various drum instruments. ➔ Convert via “Fixed.”

Track 2 - 4 Record a different rhythm pattern using a speciﬁc drum instrument to each track. ➔ Convert via “Normal.”

Track 1 Record a bass line using a speciﬁc desired key (root). ➔ Convert via “OrgNote” after the

OrgNotesRoot is set.

Track 2 - 4 ➔ off

Track 1 Record a guitar backing part using a speciﬁc desired key (root). ➔ Convert via “Normal.”

Track 2 Record a different rhythm using one of the “special” sounds, such as a ﬁnger

mute or scratching noise.

➔ Convert via “Fixed.”

Track 3 - 4 ➔ off

[MIXING] →→

→→

[STORE]

Mixing Edit

Song/Pattern

SmartMedia

USB storage device

Save

Store

Internal memory (DRAM)

Mixing Voice Edit

Record

Sampling

Settings in the Play mode

Mixing

Mixing Voice

MIDI sequence data

Sample

Groove, etc.

File extension: W7A

File extension: W7S

File extension: W7P

Save all Songs or Patterns

in internal DRAM as a

single file.

CAUTION

Creating a Song on the MOTIF ES

132

Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide — Advanced Course

Saving the Song/Pattern data to the

SmartMedia/USB storage device

The recorded Song, Pattern and Sample (Waveform) data resides

temporarily in DIMM (page 187). Because data contained in DIMM is lost

when the power is turned off, you should always save any data residing in

DIMM to a SmartMedia /USB storage device before turning off the power.

After inserting a SmartMedia into the CARD slot or connecting

the USB storage device to this synthesizer, follow the

instructions below.

Refer to “Basic settings for using SmartMedia or a USB

storage device” on page 30.

Move the cursor to the TYPE, then set the File type by using

the data dial, [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] button. You can select

one of the following four ﬁle types to save the Song or Pattern

data. Here, select “All” because various kinds of data have

been created in order to complete a song.

Move the cursor to the ﬁle name input location, then input a

ﬁle name. For detailed instructions on naming, refer to page

53 in the Basic Operation section.

If you are about to overwrite an existing ﬁle, the display

prompts you for conﬁrmation. Press the [INC/YES] button to

execute the Save operation to overwrite an existing ﬁle, or

press the [DEC/NO] button to cancel it.

After the data has been saved, a “Completed” message

appears and operation returns to the original display.

While the data is being saved, make sure to follow these precautions:

•Never remove or eject the media from the device (SmartMedia or USB

storage).

•Never unplug or disconnect any of the devices.

•Never turn off the power of the MOTIF ES or the relevant devices.

Saving a Song or a Pattern Section as a

Standard MIDI File

After inserting a SmartMedia into the CARD slot or

connecting the USB storage device to the instrument,

follow the instructions below.

1 Press the [FILE] button to enter the File mode,

then execute the basic settings.

Refer to “Basic settings for using SmartMedia or a

USB storage device” on page 30.

2 Press the [F2] SAVE button to call up the Save

display.

3 Set the TYPE parameter to “SMF” then select a

Song/Pattern to be saved.

4 Input a ﬁle name.

Move the cursor to the ﬁle name input location, then

input a ﬁle name. For detailed instructions on

naming, refer to page 53 in the Basic Operation

section.

[FILE] →→

→→

[F2] SAVE

Press the [FILE] button to enter the File mode,

then execute the basic settings.

Press the [F2] SAVE button to call up the Save display.

Set the TYPE parameter to “All.”

All All data in this synthesizer’s internal User Memory is treated as a

single ﬁle (extension: W7A), and can be saved to a SmartMedia/

USB storage device.

All Song All the User Song data in this synthesizer’s internal User Memory

(DRAM) is treated as a single ﬁle (extension: W7S), and can be

saved to a SmartMedia/USB storage device. Please keep in mind

that Sample Voices and assigned Waveforms created via the

Sampling function in the Song mode are also saved together.

All

Pattern

All the User Pattern data in this synthesizer’s internal User Memory

(DRAM) is treated as a single ﬁle (extension: W7P), and can be

saved to a SmartMedia/USB storage device. Please keep in mind

that Sample Voices and assigned Waveforms created via the

Sampling function in the Pattern mode are also saved together.

SMF Sequence track (1 - 16) and Tempo track data of a Song/Pattern

created in the Song/Pattern mode can be saved to a SmartMedia/

USB storage device as Standard MIDI File (format 0) data.

Input a file name.

CAUTION

File name input

location

Press the [ENTER] button to execute the Save

operation.

CAUTION

Select a Song number.

Select a Pattern number and Section.

When saving a Pattern as SMF:

When saving a Song as SMF:

Quick Guide — Advanced Course

Creating a Song on the MOTIF ES

133

Owner’s Manual

5 Press the [ENTER] button to execute the Save

operation.

If you are about to overwrite an existing ﬁle, the

display prompts you for conﬁrmation. Press the [INC/

YES] button to execute the Save operation to

overwrite an existing ﬁle, or press the [DEC/NO]

button to cancel it. After the data has been saved, a

“Completed” message appears and operation

returns to the original display.

n When loading a SMF (Standard MIDI File), set the ﬁle type to

“Song” or “Pattern.”

n Only the sequence track (1 - 16) and tempo track data of a

Song/Pattern created in the Song/Pattern mode can be saved

to a SmartMedia/USB storage device as Standard MIDI File

(format 0) data. The Mixing settings will not be saved to a

Standard MIDI File. If you wish to save the entire Song/Pattern

including the Mixing settings, set the ﬁle type to “All” or

“AllSong.” or “AllPattern.”

Saving a Sample Voice as a WAV ﬁle/AIFF ﬁle

After inserting a SmartMedia into the CARD slot or

connecting the USB storage device to the instrument,

follow the instructions below.

1 In the Song mode/Pattern mode, select a Song/

Pattern including the desired Sample, press the

[FILE] button to enter the File mode, then execute

the basic settings.

Refer to “Basic settings for using SmartMedia or a

USB storage device” on page 30.

Press the [F2] SAVE button to call up the Save display.

Set the TYPE parameter to “Wav” or “Aiff,” press the

[ENTER] button, then select a sample to be saved.

4 Press the [ENTER] button to execute the Save

operation.

If you are about to overwrite an existing ﬁle, the

display prompts you for conﬁrmation. Press the [INC/

YES] button to execute the Save operation to

overwrite an existing ﬁle, or press the [DEC/NO]

button to cancel it.

After the data has been saved, a “Completed”

message appears and operation returns to the

original display.

Loading a ﬁle saved to a SmartMedia/

USB storage device

These instructions describe how to recall the data saved as a ﬁle type

“All (extension: W7A)” described on page 132 from the SmartMedia/

USB storage device to the instrument by using the Load operation.

Loading a ﬁle (extension: W7A) to this synthesizer automatically erases

and replaces all existing data in the User memory. Make sure to save any

important data to a SmartMedia/USB storage device before performing any

Load operations.

n If you wish to select and load a speciﬁed Waveform in the ﬁle

(extension: W7A), enter the File mode (in step #1 below) after

executing the following operations:

•

Enter the Voice mode if you wish to assign the Waveform to a Voice.

• Select a Performance in the Performance mode if you wish to assign

the Waveform to a Part of the Performance.

• Select a Song in the Song mode if you wish to assign the Waveform

to a Part of the Song.

• Select a Pattern in the Pattern mode if you wish to assign the

Waveform to a Part of the Pattern.

n If you wish to select and load a speciﬁed Sample Voice in the ﬁle

(extension: W7A), enter the File mode (in step #1 below) after

executing the following operations:

• Select a Song in the Song mode if you wish to assign the Sample

Voice to a Song.

• Select a Pattern in the Pattern mode if you wish to assign the Sample

Voice to a Pattern.

Refer to “Basic settings for using SmartMedia or a USB

storage device” on page 30.

You can load the ﬁle (extension: W7A) saved as “All” by

selecting one of the following ﬁle types.

Select the track containing the

sample to be saved.

This is available only when the cursor is

located at KeyBank. Each press of the [SF2]

SELECT button selects, one by one, the Key

Banks assigned to speciﬁc velocity ranges

for the selected key.

You can hear the selected

sample by pressing the

[SF1] button.

(Audition function)

[FILE] →→

→→

[F3] LOAD

Press the [FILE] button to enter the File mode,

then execute the basic settings.

Press the [F3] LOAD button to call up the Load display.

Select a file type to be loaded.

All All data in a ﬁle that is saved to the SmartMedia/USB storage

device as an “All” type can be loaded and restored to this

instrument.

Voice A speciﬁed Voice in a ﬁle can be individually selected and

loaded to this instrument.

Performance A speciﬁed Performance in a ﬁle can be individually selected

and loaded to this synthesizer.

Song A speciﬁed Song in a ﬁle can be individually selected and

loaded to this instrument.

Pattern A speciﬁed Pattern in a ﬁle can be individually selected and

loaded to this instrument.

Waveform A speciﬁed Waveform in a ﬁle can be individually selected and

loaded to this instrument.

Sample Voice A speciﬁed Sample Voice in a ﬁle can be individually selected

and loaded to this instrument.

CAUTION

Quick Guide — Advanced Course

Creating a Song on the MOTIF ES

134

Owner’s Manual

Move the cursor to the ﬁle (extension: W7A) which was saved as “All” on previous page.

When Type is set to “All,” go to step #5.

When Type is set to something other than “All,” follow the instructions below then go to step #5.

● When Type is set to “Voice” or “Performance”:

You can select and load a speciﬁed Voice or Performance in the ﬁle (extension: W7A) to this instrument.

● When Type is set to “Song” or “Pattern”:

You can select and load a speciﬁed Song or Pattern in the ﬁle (extension: W7A) to this instrument.

● When Type is set to “Waveform”:

You can select and load a speciﬁed Waveform in the ﬁle (extension: W7A) to this instrument.

In this case, the destination differs depending on the mode selected before entering the File mode.

Select a file ( ) to be loaded.

When entering the File mode from the Voice mode: Set the Voice bank and number as the destination.

When entering the File mode from the Performance mode: Set the Part of the current Performance then set the Voice bank/number of the Part as the

destination.

When entering the File mode from the Song mode/Pattern mode: Set the track of the current Song/Pattern as the destination.

ENTER

EXECUTE

ENTER

EXECUTE

Move the cursor to the ﬁle (extension:

W7A) which was saved as “All” on

previous page.

All Voices or Performances in the

selected ﬁle are listed. Move the

cursor to the desired Voice or

Performance to be loaded.

Select the destination Voice number

or Performance number.

Select the desired Voice or

Performance.

ENTER

EXECUTE

ENTER

EXECUTE

Move the cursor to the ﬁle (extension:

W7A) which was saved as “All” on

previous page.

All Songs or Patterns in the

selected ﬁle are listed. Move the

cursor to the desired Song or

Pattern to be loaded.

Select the destination Song number

or Pattern number.

Select the desired Song or Pattern.

ENTER

EXECUTE

ENTER

EXECUTE

Move the cursor to the ﬁle (extension:

W7A) which was saved as “All” on

previous page.

All Waveforms in the selected ﬁle

are listed. Move the cursor to the

desired Waveform to be loaded.

Select the destination. (See below.)

Select the desired Waveform.

Quick Guide — Advanced Course

Creating a Song on the MOTIF ES

135

Owner’s Manual

● When Type is set to “Sample Voice”:

Only when entering the File mode from the Song mode/Pattern mode, you can select and load a speciﬁed Sample Voice in the

ﬁle (extension: W7A) to this instrument.

Loading data to this synthesizer automatically erases and replaces any existing data in the User memory. Make sure to save any important data to a

SmartMedia/USB storage device before performing any Load operations.

After the data has been loaded, a “Completed” message appears and operation returns to the original display.

While the data is being saved, make sure to follow these precautions:

•Never remove or eject the media from the device (SmartMedia or USB storage).

•Never unplug or disconnect any of the devices.

•Never turn off the power of the MOTIF ES or the relevant devices.

Setting a speciﬁc ﬁle to load automatically when the power is turned on

The MOTIF ES is very easy to use and you can create Voices, Performances, Patterns and Songs very quickly on it. However, there

may be times that creating and editing of data may be spread out over several sessions. In such a case, you may ﬁnd it convenient to

have the instrument automatically load the appropriate ﬁles for you when you turn it on, so you can easily resume your editing session.

n The Auto Load parameter is set to on when this synthesizer is

shipped from the factory.

n The ﬁle types which can be loaded automatically are “All,”

“Plugin All Bulk 1,” “Plugin All Bulk 2,” and “Plugin All Bulk 3.”

Change the names of the ﬁles you wish to have load

automatically when the power is turned on as described below,

and save them together in a single folder or in the root directory.

After you’ve ﬁnished naming the appropriate ﬁles, keep the

corresponding folder selected in the display and go to step #2.

Enter the Utility mode and call up the Auto Load display

([UTILITY] →→

→→

[F1] GENERAL →→

→→

[SF4] OTHER).

Set “Auto Load” to on, and press the [SF5] GET button.

The device and folder selected in step #1 (the folder

containing the desired ﬁles for auto loading) are

registered as the Auto Load path.

Press the [STORE] button to store the Auto Load setting.

n If the Auto Load ﬁles cannot be found (for example, a SmartMedia/USB

storage device is not installed properly or a SmartMedia/USB storage

device containing no Auto Load ﬁles is installed, etc.) when turning the

power on even with the Auto Load parameter set to on, the Demo Song/

Pattern data (page 55) in the internal ROM will be loaded automatically.

Press the [ENTER] button to execute the Load operation.

ENTER

EXECUTE

ENTER

EXECUTE

ENTER

EXECUTE

ENTER

EXECUTE

Move the cursor to the ﬁle

(extension: W7A) which was

saved as “All” on previous page.

Select “Pattern” or “Song.”

All Songs or Patterns which contain the Sample

Voices are listed.

Move the cursor to the desired Song or Pattern.

All Sample Voices assigned to the selected Song

or Pattern in the selected ﬁle are listed. Move the

cursor to the desired Sample Voice to be loaded.

Select the track of the current

Song or Pattern as destination.

CAUTION

TIP

MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER

Save the data after editing.

The saved ﬁles are loaded automatically

when you turn the power on next time.

Turn the power off

Save

Auto Load

File type File name

All AUTOLOAD. W7A

Plugin All Bulk 1 (for slot 1) AUTOLD1. W7B

Plugin All Bulk 2 (for slot 2) AUTOLD2. W7B

Plugin All Bulk 3 (for slot 3) AUTOLD3. W7B

Set this to on.

Quick Guide — Advanced Course

Using as a Master Keyboard

136

Owner’s Manual

Using as a Master Keyboard

This synthesizer is loaded with such a wealth of different features, functions and operations, you may ﬁnd it difﬁcult to locate and

call up the particular feature you need. This is where the Master function comes in handy. You can use it to memorize the

operations you use most often in each mode, and call them up instantly anytime you need them with a single button press. This

synthesizer has space for a total of 128 of your own User Master settings.

Selecting a Master

The MOTIF ES features 128 specially programmed Masters, stored to internal User memory (Flash ROM). Try some of these out

now.

Selecting a Master is done in basically the same way as selecting a Voice. Since the there is only one bank for Masters, you

need not select a Master Bank.

When the Mode is set to Voice or Performance, play the keyboard.

When the Mode is set to Song or Pattern, press the [F] (Play) button.

Master

Number

Setting examples

Memorized mode Memorized program number Zone Switch *

001 Voice mode Voice number 102 (Preset 1) Off

002 Voice mode Voice number 088 (Preset 3) Off

003 Voice mode Voice number 049 (Preset 2) Off

004 Voice mode Voice number 092 (Preset 2) Off

005 Performance mode Performance number 044 Off

:: : :

127 Pattern mode Pattern number 061 On

128 Song mode Song number 025 On

Press the [MASTER] to enter the Master Play mode.

Select a Master.

Play the selected Master program.

MASTER

Mode memorized to the current Master.

Program number (Voice number in this

example) memorized to the current Master.

Use the [SF1] - [SF5] buttons to call up the

Arpeggio type assigned to each button

(page 66). Assigned types depend on the

program number memorized to the current

Master.

Indicates information related to the Control

Knobs. The settings depend on the program

number memorized to the current Master.

Indicates the currently

selected Master.

Indicates the Keyboard Octave setting set

via the [OCTAVE] buttons. Same as in the

Voice mode/Performance mode (page 63).

SEQ TRANSPORT

LOCATE 1 2

* See page 137 about “Zone Switch.”

Quick Guide — Advanced Course

Using as a Master Keyboard

137

Owner’s Manual

Memorize to a Master

Input a name in the [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F1] NAME

display.

For detailed instructions on naming, refer to page 53 in the

Basic Operation section.

Press the [STORE] button to enter the Master Store mode.

2 Select the destination Master by using the data dial,

[INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] button.

When you execute the Store operation, the settings for the destination

memory will be overwritten. Important data should always be backed up

to a separate SmartMedia/USB storage device.

3 Press the [ENTER] button. (The display prompts you for

conﬁrmation.)

To cancel the Store operation, press the [DEC/NO] button.

4 Press the [INC/YES] button to execute the Store

operation.

Keep in mind that the Store operation may take a short time to

complete, during which an “Executing..” or “Please keep power on”

message may be shown. Never attempt to turn off the power while data

is being written to Flash ROM while such a message is displayed.

Turning the power off in this state results in loss of all user data and

may cause the system to freeze (due to corruption of data in the Flash

ROM). This may also result in the MOTIF ES being unable to properly

start up the next time the power is turned on.

If you select another Master without storing, the currently edited Master

will be lost. Make sure to store the edited Master before selecting

another Master.

For details, see page 132. Set the ﬁle type to “All.”

Using Zones (keyboard area)

In the Master mode, you can divide the keyboard into (up to) four independent areas (called “Zones”). To each Zone can be

assigned different MIDI channels and different functions of the Knobs and Control Sliders. This makes it possible to control

several parts of the multi-timbral tone generator simultaneously by a single keyboard or to control voices of an external MIDI

instrument over several different channels in addition to the internal voices of this synthesizer itself — letting you use the MOTIF

ES to effectively do the work of several keyboards. You can set the parameters related to the four Zones in the Master Edit mode

and store the settings as a User Master.

Select a Master to be created.

Press the [F2] MEMORY button to call up the

Mode setting display.

Set the Mode, Program number and Zone Switch

on/off (page 138) which you wish to memorize to

the Master.

When the Mode is set to Voice Select a Voice bank and number.

When the Mode is set to Performance Select a Performance bank and number.

When the Mode is set to Song Select a Song number.

When the Mode is set to Pattern Select a Pattern number.

Name the edited Master.

Determine the mode that is called up

when the Master number is selected.

Set the Zone Switch (below) to

on or off.

Determine the Program number that is

called up when the Master is selected.

Input a Master name.

Store the edited Master to internal User memory.

As necessary, save the edited and stored

Masters to a SmartMedia/USB storage device.

CAUTION

Select a Master to be created.

Quick Guide — Advanced Course

Using as a Master Keyboard

138

Owner’s Manual

Use Zone Edit to edit the parameters for each Zone. Use Common Edit to edit the parameters for all of the Zones.

See the next page for details and some setting examples.

Input a name in the [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F1] NAME display.

For detailed instructions on naming, refer to page 53 in the Basic Operation section.

For details, refer to steps #5 - 6 on page 137.

Press the [F2] MEMORY button to call up the Mode setting display.

After setting the Mode and Program number which you wish to memorize to the Master, set the Zone Switch

to “on”.

Press the [EDIT] button to enter the Master Edit mode.

Call up the Common Edit display or Zone Edit display.

Select the menu you wish to edit by pressing the [F1] - [F6] and [SF1] - [SF5] buttons, then edit the parameters.

Name the edited Master.

Store the edited Master to internal User memory.

Determine the mode that is called

up when the Master number is

selected.

Set the Zone Switch to “on.”

Determine the Program number that is called up when the Master is selected.

EDIT

COMPARE SCENE STORE

SET LOCATE

JOB STORE

COMMON

ELEMENT/PERF. PART/ZONE

FAVORITES

DRUM KITS

A. PIANO KEYBOARD GUITAR/

PLUCKED

PRE 5PRE 6 USER 1

GUITAR

SYN LEAD

ABCD

4321

SYN PAD/

CHOIR

SYN COMP

CHROMATIC

PERCUSSION

USER 2

Calling up the Common Edit display

Press the [COMMON] button to call up the

Common Edit display.

In the Edit mode, the [DRUM KITS] button

functions as the [COMMON] button.

While in the Master Edit mode, you can switch

between the Common Edit display and the Zone

Edit display as shown below.

Calling up the Zone Edit display

Press the desired Zone number from the ZONE

[1] - [4] buttons to call up the Zone Edit display.

Indicates a Common Edit

display.

Indicates the display for editing Zone 1.

Common Edit

Zone 1 Edit

Zone 2 Edit

Zone 3 Edit

Zone 4 Edit

Using as a Master Keyboard

139

Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide — Advanced Course

Using Zones effectively with external

The two examples below show how to use the Zones with both the internal tone generator and a connected external tone

generator. These instructions correspond to step #6 on the previous page.

n Though all four Zones are used in the example below, you can use any number of Zones (two, three, or four). The settings are made with the MIDISwitch

parameter ([MASTER] → [EDIT] → Zone selection → [F1] TRANS → MIDISwitch) and the TGSwitch parameter ([MASTER] → [EDIT] → Zone selection →

[F1] TRANS → TGSwitch).

n In these examples, the Zones are assigned to different areas of the keyboard. However, two or more Zones can also be assigned to the same area in a

layer, from the NOTE display ([MASTER] → [EDIT] → Zone selection → [F2] NOTE).

■ Master settings with the Voice mode/Performance mode (Single-timbre tone generator mode)

■ Master settings with the Song mode/Pattern mode (Multi-timbral tone generator mode)

For each Zone, set whether or not MIDI data is transmitted

to the external instrument.

Corresponds to step #6 on the previous page

Determine the MIDI Transmit Channel for each zone.

[MASTER] → [EDIT] → Zone selection → [F1] TRANS → TransCh

For each Zone, set whether or not MIDI data is transmitted

to each Part of the internal tone generator.

[MASTER] → [EDIT] → Zone selection → [F1] TRANS → TGSwitch

Determine the note range of each zone.

[MASTER] → [EDIT] → Zone selection → [F2] NOTE → NoteLimitH

[MASTER] → [EDIT] → Zone selection → [F2] NOTE → NoteLimitL

[MASTER] → [EDIT] → Zone selection → [F1] TRANS → MIDISwitch

Internal tone generator (Single Timbre)

External tone generator (Multi-timbral)

Set the MIDI receive channel for each part.

MIDI Transmit

Channel 1

MIDI Transmit

Channel 2

MIDI Transmit

Channel 3

MIDI Transmit

Channel 4

[UTILITY] → [F5] MIDI → [SF1] CH → BasicRcvCh = 01

For each Zone, set whether or not MIDI data is transmitted

to the external instrument.

Corresponds to step #6 on the previous page

Determine the MIDI Transmit Channel for each zone.

[MASTER] → [EDIT] → Zone selection → [F1] TRANS → TransCh

For each Zone, set whether or not MIDI data is transmitted

to each Part of the internal tone generator.

[MASTER] → [EDIT] → Zone selection → [F1] TRANS → TGSwitch

Determine the note range of each zone.

[MASTER] → [EDIT] → Zone selection → [F2] NOTE → NoteLimitH

[MASTER] → [EDIT] → Zone selection → [F2] NOTE → NoteLimitL

[MASTER] → [EDIT] → Zone selection → [F1] TRANS → MIDISwitch

Internal tone generator (Multi-timbral)

External tone generator (Multi-timbral)

Set the MIDI receive channel for each part.

MIDI Transmit

Channel 1

Part 05

Receive

Channel 1

Part 13

Receive

Channel 2

MIDI Transmit

Channel 2

MIDI Transmit

Channel 3

MIDI Transmit

Channel 4

[SONG] → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → Part selection →

[F1]VOICE → [SF2]MODE → ReceiveCh

Quick Guide — Advanced Course

Using as a Master Keyboard

140

Owner’s Manual

Assigning Control Change numbers to the Knobs/Sliders for each Zone

Here in the KN/CS display of the Master Edit mode, you can set how the Control Knobs and Sliders will affect each Zone. This

lets you specify a separate MIDI Control Change number for each Knob and Slider.

Set the parameters as shown below, corresponding to step #6 on page 138.

In the example above, the Control Knobs for all Zones have been set to 10 (Pan), and the Sliders have been set to 11

(Expression). In this way, you can control the stereo position of each Zone with the appropriate Knob, and use the Sliders to

adjust the relative volume balance among the Zones.

KNOB

CONTROL

FUNCTION

MASTER

VOLUME

SWING

CUTOFF

PAN

ASSIGN A

GATE TIME

RESONANCE

REVERB

ASSIGN B

VELOCITY

ATTACK

CHORUS

ASSIGN 1

UNITMULTIPLY

RELEASE

TEMPO

ASSIGN 2

LOW

LOW MID

HIGH MID

HIGH

ARP FX

TONE

ASSIGN

PAN/SEND

ZONE 1

CS 1

ZONE 1 ZONE 1 ZONE 1ZONE 1

CS 1 CS 2

ZONE 2

CS 3

ZONE 3

CS 4

ZONE 4

VOLUME 1 VOLUME 1 VOLUME 1 VOLUME 1VOLUME 1 VOLUME 2 VOLUME 3 VOLUME 4

All indicators are turned off by setting the

[MASTER] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F2] OTHER

→ Knob/Slider parameter to “zone.”

You can determine which Control Change numbers are used for the Knobs

and Sliders for each zone in the [MASTER] → [EDIT] → Zone selection →

[F5] KN/CS display.

Using as a Master Keyboard

141

Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide — Advanced Course

Setting up the Master Zones to Split or Layer

This operation lets you easily determine whether the Zones of the selected Master are to be used in a Split or a Layer. The

note range settings for each Zone can be determined by setting the NoteLimitH and NoteLimitL parameters from the NOTE

display ([MASTER] → [EDIT] → Zone selection → [F2] NOTE).

n Zones 1 and 2 are used in the explanations here.

1 In the Master Play mode, press the [JOB] button to enter the Master Job mode.

2 Press the [F1] INIT button to call up the Initialize display.

3 Uncheckmark the box of “All” by using the [DEC/NO] button and checkmark the box of “Zone.”

4 Set the Type to “Split” or “Layer.”

When Type is set to “Split”

Set the UpperCh (MIDI transmit channel of the upper range), LowerCh (MIDI transmit channel of the lower range), and Split

Point (which separates the keyboard into the upper range and lower range).

When Type is set to “Layer”

Set the UpperCh (MIDI transmit channel of Zone 1) and LowerCh (MIDI transmit channel of Zone 2).

5 Press the [ENTER] button. (The display prompts you for conﬁrmation.)

To cancel the Job, press the [DEC/NO] button.

6 Press the [INC/YES] button to execute the Job.

After the Job has been completed, a “Completed” message appears and operation returns to the original display.

Keep in mind that the Job may take a short time to complete, during which an “Executing..” or “Please keep power on” message may be shown.

Never attempt to turn off the power while data is being written to Flash ROM while such a message is displayed. Turning the power off in this state

results in loss of all user data and may cause the system to freeze (due to corruption of data in the Flash ROM). This may also result in the MOTIF

ES being unable to properly start up the next time the power is turned on.

TIP

Lower Upper

Split Point

(C3)

Layer (Upper)

Layer (Lower)

CAUTION

Quick Guide — Computer applications

Setting up

142

Owner’s Manual

Although the MOTIF ES is a powerful instrument in its own right and can effectively be used by itself for music creation and

production, it is also designed for easy and comprehensive interfacing with a computer system. In this section, we’ll show you

how set up the instrument with a computer (via USB) and how to use it with the software provided on the included CD-ROM,

“Tools for MOTIF ES.”

n For information on how to install each software and the minimum system requirements, refer to the separate Installation Guide.

n About how to use each software, refer to the relevant documentation (PDF manual or on-line Help).

n By installing an optional mLAN16E board and using the mLAN connection with your computer, you can transfer both audio and MIDI data between the

devices over the same mLAN cable. See page 39.

Setting up

•

For software on the included “Tools for MOTIF ES” CD-ROM

(Voice Editor, USB MIDI driver, etc.), refer to the separate

Installation Guide.

• For other software, refer to the relevant manual or

documentation.

n You can also connect the instrument to a computer by using MIDI

cables (page 40) or IEEE1394 cable (page 39).

•

For a computer running Windows, the Add New Hardware

Wizard may appear on the computer display. In this case,

install the driver following the on-screen instructions. For

details, refer to the separate Installation Guide.

• For a Macintosh computer, install OMS then install the USB

MIDI driver. Refer to the separate Installation Guide.

n If you have installed the optional mLAN16E and are connecting the

instrument to a computer with an IEEE 1394 cable, you’ll need to install

the mLAN driver.

•To install software from the included “Tools for MOTIF ES”

CD-ROM (Voice Editor, SQ01, etc.), refer to the separate

Installation Guide.

•To install other software, refer to the relevant manual or

documentation.

The settings in the Utility mode are stored as system settings to internal

Flash ROM. Never attempt to turn off the power while data is being written

to Flash ROM (while a “Please keep power on” message is shown). Turning

the power off in this state results in loss of all user data and may cause the

system to freeze (due to corruption of data in the Flash ROM). This may

also result in the MOTIF ES being unable to properly start up the next time

the power is turned on.

Quick Guide — Computer applications

Confirm the minimum system requirements of

the software you wish to use.

Connect the computer to the instrument with a

USB cable.

Start the computer and insert the “Tools for

MOTIF ES” CD-ROM into the CD drive of the

computer.

Turn the power of the MOTIF ES on.

Install the USB MIDI driver to the computer.

USB

TO HOSTTO DEVICE

USB connector

A type

USB cable

B type

Rear panel

USB TO HOST

connector

Install the desired software to the computer.

Set the MIDI IN/OUT parameter to “USB”

([UTILITY] →→

→→

[F5] MIDI →→

→→

[SF4] OTHER), then

press the [ENTER] button to store the Utility

settings.

EDIT

COMPARE SCENE STORE

SET LOCATE

JOB STORE

CAUTION

Controlling the instrument from a computer

143

Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide — Computer applications

Controlling the instrument from a computer

Using a sequencer to play multiple Voices on the MOTIF ES

The sequence software program SQ01 contained in the included CD-ROM lets you create and edit multi-part song data — which

can be played using the sounds of the MOTIF ES.

Refer to the separate Installation Guide.

For details on the MIDI settings, refer to the separate

Installation Guide.

For details on synchronization settings, refer to the on-line

help of the SQ01.

From the “File” menus on the SQ01, select “Open” to call up

the dialog box. Then select the desired song ﬁle.

These settings make it possible for the Songs and Patterns on

the MOTIF ES to start, play and stop in exact synchronization

with the external controlling device (in this case, the computer

sequencer).

Click the [F] (Play) button on the SQ01 to start the selected

song.

Recording sequencer song data to Song tracks on the MOTIF ES

If you have MIDI sequence data on your computer and want to use it as a Song on the MOTIF ES, you can play back the

data on a MIDI sequencer (such as the SQ01) and record it to the MOTIF ES.

1 Follow the instructions described in “Setting up for

using a computer” (page 142).

2 Start the SQ01 on the computer then set all MIDI-

related parameters, including synchronization.

For details on the MIDI settings, refer to the separate

Installation Guide.

For details on synchronization settings, refer to the on-

line help of the SQ01.

3 Open the desired song ﬁle on the SQ01.

From the “File” menus on the SQ01, select “Open” to

call up the dialog box. Then select the desired song.

4 Set the MIDI Sync parameter to “MIDI” and the

SeqCtrl to “in” in the SYNC display ([UTILITY] →→

→→

[F5]

MIDI →→

→→

[SF3] SYNC).

These settings make it possible for the Songs and

Patterns on the MOTIF ES to start, play and stop in

exact synchronization with the SQ01.

5 Press the [SONG] button to enter the Song Play

mode, then select a Song to be recorded.

6 Press the [●] (Record) button to enter the Song

Record mode.

7 Set RecTrack to “multi.”

This setting makes it possible to record MIDI sequence

data to 16 tracks simultaneously.

8 Start song playback on the SQ01.

Song recording on the MOTIF ES automatically starts at

the same time.

9 Stop the song playback on the SQ01.

Song recording on the MOTIF ES automatically stops at

the same time.

10 Save the recorded song on the MOTIF ES.

Before selecting a different Song, store the Mixing

settings as Song data (page 131).

Before turning the power off, save the recorded Song to a

SmartMedia/USB storage device (page 132).

Follow the instructions described in “Setting up

for using a computer” (page 142) then install the

SQ01 to the computer.

Start the SQ01 on the computer then set all MIDI-

related parameters, including synchronization.

Open the desired song file on the SQ01.

Set the MIDI Sync parameter to “MIDI” and

SeqCtrl to “in” in the SYNC display ([UTILITY] →→

→→

[F5] MIDI →→

→→

[SF3] SYNC).

Press the [SONG] button to enter the Song mode.

Start the song playback on the SQ01.

TIP

Quick Guide — Computer applications

Controlling the instrument from a computer

144

Owner’s Manual

Using the Multi Part Editor to create/edit Mixing settings

The Multi Part Editor software (included on the CD-ROM) provides an intuitive way to create and edit the Mixing settings of the

currently selected Song or Pattern. Thanks to the easy-to-understand graphical interface, you can edit virtually all of the Mixing

parameters right from your computer – using the mouse to adjust the virtual knobs, sliders, and buttons and entering values from

the computer keyboard.

n If you want to assign a User Voice to a Part, make sure to transfer the User Voice data on the MOTIF ES to the computer (with the Bulk Dump function) before

editing parameters on the Multi Part Editor.

n Parts to which Mixing Voices have been assigned cannot be edited with the Multi Part Editor.

For details about how to install the Multi Part Editor, refer to

the separate Installation Guide.

Refer to the PDF manual of the Multi Part Editor.

Press the [MIXING] button then [STORE] button to enter the

Song Mixing mode/Pattern Mixing mode, then press the

[ENTER] button to execute the Store operation.

n You can store the settings as a Mixing Template. See page 132.

MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER

Edit the Mixing

To edit Mixing settings based on data saved to

computer, make sure to transfer the Mixing data

to the current Song/Pattern on the MOTIF ES

(with the Bulk Transmission function) before

editing.

To edit Mixing settings based on data

contained on the MOTIF ES, make sure to

transfer the Mixing data of the current Song/

Pattern to the computer (with the Bulk Dump

function) before editing.

Save a set of Mixing

settings as a single ﬁle.

After storing the Mixing settings

as a Song Mixing/Pattern Mixing,

save all the Songs/Patterns.

SmartMedia/USB

storage device

Follow the instructions described in “Setting up

for using a computer” (page 142) then install the

Multi Part Editor to the computer.

Enter the Song mode or Pattern mode on the

MOTIF ES, then select the desired Song or

Pattern.

Start the Multi Part Editor on the computer.

Set the MIDI related parameters on the Multi Part

Editor.

Edit the parameters on the Multi Part Editor to

create your original Mixing.

Check the results of your edits by playing the

Song/Pattern or playing the keyboard on the

MOTIF ES.

Store the edited Mixing settings to the current

Song Mixing/Pattern Mixing.

Save all the songs or patterns to a SmartMedia/

USB storage device.

Also save the edited data as a Multi Part Editor

file to your computer’s hard disk.

Controlling the instrument from a computer

145

Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide — Computer applications

Using the Voice Editor to create/edit a Voice

The Voice Editor software (included on the CD-ROM) provides an intuitive way to create and edit Voices for the MOTIF ES.

Thanks to the easy-to-understand graphical interface, you can edit virtually all of the Voice parameters right from your computer

– using the mouse to adjust the virtual knobs, sliders, and buttons and entering values from the computer keyboard.

For details about how to install the Voice Editor, refer to the

separate Installation Guide.

Refer to the PDF manual of the Multi Part Editor.

Refer to the PDF manual of the Voice Editor.

Create a new Library ﬁle or open an existing Library ﬁle. To

edit data contained on the MOTIF ES, use the Bulk Receive

function to transfer User Voice data to the computer.

For details, refer to the PDF manual of the Voice Editor.

Refer to the PDF manual of the Voice Editor.

The Bulk Transmission from the computer to the MOTIF ES will erase

(overwrite) the destination Voice Bank data on the MOTIF ES. If you wish to

maintain the voices of the destination Bank, save the Voice data to a

SmartMedia/USB storage device before executing Bulk Transmission.

MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER

Edit the Voice

Use the Bulk Transmission function to

transfer the edited Voice data (in a Voice

bank) to the MOTIF ES.

Library ﬁle = Voice Editor ﬁle (extension: W7E)

All voices stored on internal User memory are

saved to a single ﬁle which can be loaded to

the Voice Editor on the computer.

Load a Library ﬁle

(extension: W7E).

Save the result of editing

as a Library ﬁle

(extension: W7E).

Load a Voice

Editor ﬁle

(extension: W7E).

Save the result of

editing as a Voice Editor

ﬁle (extension: W7E).

Use the Bulk Receive function to

transfer the speciﬁed User Voice bank

from the MOTIF ES to the computer.

SmartMedia/USB storage device

Follow the instructions described in “Setting up

for using a computer” (page 142) then install the

Voice Editor to the computer.

Enter the Voice mode on the MOTIF ES, then

start the Voice Editor on the computer.

Set the MIDI related parameters on the Voice

Editor.

Call up the Voice data to be edited on the Voice

Editor.

Edit the parameters on the Voice Editor to create

your original Voice.

After editing the Voice, store the data, then

transfer it to the MOTIF ES with the Bulk

Transmission function on the Voice Editor.

Save the edited data as a Library file to your

computer’s hard disk.

Check the results of your edits by selecting the

User Voice and playing the keyboard in the Voice

Play mode.

CAUTION

Controlling the instrument from a computer

146

Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide — Computer applications

Editing Plug-in Voices and Board Voices

As described on page 76, the voices of a Plug-in Board installed to the MOTIF ES can be divided into two types: Board

voices and Plug-in voices. Plug-in Voices can be edited in the Voice Edit mode on the MOTIF ES or can be edited by using

the Voice Editor on the computer. Board Voices, however, are edited using the dedicated editor software contained on the

included CD-ROM, “TOOLS for Modular Synthesis Plug-in System.”

Using the TWE Wave Editor to edit Samples

The TWE wave editing software (included on the CD-ROM) lets you edit audio on your computer and save them as samples for

use with the MOTIF ES. Thanks to the easy-to-understand graphical interface, you can edit virtually all of the wave parameters

right from your computer.

n For details on how to install TWE and the minimum system requirements, refer to the separate Installation Guide.

n For information on how to use TWE, refer to the TWE manual (PDF format) on the CD-ROM.

MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER

■ Plug-in Voice

■ Board Voice

Plug-in Board

Edit in the Voice Play

mode/Voice Edit.

Voice Play display

Voice Edit display

Use the Voice Editor contained

in the included CD-ROM,

“TOOLS for MOTIF ES6/7/8.”

SmartMedia/USB

storage device

Use the dedicated Editor

contained in the included

CD-ROM, “TOOLS for

Modular Synthesis

Plug-in System.”

Save

Select and call up

Store

Select

Bulk transmission/Edit

Board Custom

Voice

Board Preset

Voice

MOTIF ES

Save*

* Set the file type to Plugin All Bulk 1, 2 or 3 (file extension: W2B)

Plug-in

Preset Voice

Plug-in

User Voice

Computer

MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER

Edit the Wave using TWE

Save the result of editing as

a WAV ﬁle or AIFF ﬁle.

SmartMedia/USB storage device

Load a WAV ﬁle or AIFF ﬁle.

Load a WAV ﬁle or

AIFF ﬁle (page 100).

Save the sample as a WAV ﬁle or

AIFF ﬁle (page 97).

Quick Guide — Computer applications

Controlling a computer from the instrument

147

Owner’s Manual

Controlling a computer from the instrument

As you’ve seen in previous sections, the MOTIF ES can be controlled from a computer. In this section, we’ll see how it can do the

opposite — control the operation of music/audio software on the computer. This powerful feature lets you control two different

software programs by using knobs, sliders and buttons on the panel of the MOTIF ES, rather than your computer’s mouse and

keyboard. The MOTIF ES can be used to control DAW (digital audio workstation) software, such as Cubase SX and SONAR, as

well as the Multi Part Editor program (contained on the included CD-ROM). The Remote Control function emulates popular

hardware controllers such as the Yamaha 01X, letting you use the panel buttons/controllers on the MOTIF ES for controlling your

music/audio software.

As shown in the example below, the MOTIF ES uses two of the four available USB ports to control two different software

programs, while the two remaining ports handle MIDI sequence data.

MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER

REMOTE

ON/OFF

R-AUDIO

G-MIDI

DEC/NO INC/YES

SEQ TRANSPORT

LOCATE 1 2

USB cable

Mode A- Cubase, Port 4....

Mode B- General, Port 3....

Among other things, the Remote Control mode

lets you start/stop the playback of the DAW

software on the computer by using the SEQ

TRANSPORT buttons and control the song

position on the DAW software by using the

data dial, [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons.

For more information about the functions

assigned to the panel buttons in the Remote

Control mode, see page 151.

The functions of eight knobs/faders on the emulated hardware controllers (such as the Yamaha 01X) are

assigned to the four Knobs/Sliders on the MOTIF ES. Pressing the [SF5] button changes which group's functions

(1 - 4 or 5 - 8) are assigned to the four Knobs/Sliders.

The eight knobs on the emulated hardware controllers (such as the Yamaha 01X) can also be used as switches.

However, since the four Knobs on the MOTIF ES do not have switch capability, the [PRE1] - [PRE4] buttons are

used instead. While the eight knobs on the emulated devices have “endless” rotary control, the four Knobs on

the MOTIF ES stop at certain points. For some parameters this may mean that the value may not reach to the

minimum and maximum points. If this occurs, you can use the data dial to adjust the value as desired. The data

dial is active for the parameter corresponding to the Knob last turned.

Various functions are assigned to the [F1] - [F6] and [SF1]

- [SF5] buttons depending on the DAW software to be

controlled. The assigned functions are shown at the

bottom of the display. For details, see page 151 and the

separate Data List.

n As with the USB connection explained

here, Remote Control can also be used

with an IEEE1394 cable connection when

the optional mLAN16E has been installed.

Press the REMOTE [ON/

OFF] button (the lamp

ﬂashes) to enter the Remote

Control mode. Press this

button again to exit from the

Remote Control mode.

Panel operations on the MOTIF ES control

sequencer (Cubase SX) functions on the

computer via MIDI port 4.

Panel operations on the MOTIF ES control

mixing software (Multi Part Editor) functions

on the computer via MIDI port 3. The

“General” mode setting lets you control

Yamaha software.

The MIDI data played back by the

Cubase SX is transferred to the MOTIF

ES via the MIDI ports 1 and 2.

Multi Part Editor

(Mixing software)

Cubase SX

(DAW software)

Change the software (port) to

be controlled.

USB TO HOST

connector

Computer with a USB interface

Quick Guide — Computer applications

Controlling a computer from the instrument

148

Owner’s Manual

■ Computer Software that can be controlled from the instrument

• For Windows • For Macintosh

Setting up for Remote Control

Setting up on the MOTIF ES

The settings in the Utility mode are actually stored on internal User

memory (Flash ROM) by pressing the [STORE] button. Please keep in mind

that the settings will be lost if you turn off the power without executing the

Store operation.

The settings in the Utility mode are stored as system settings to internal

Flash ROM. Never attempt to turn off the power while data is being written

to Flash ROM (while a “Please keep power on” message is shown). Turning

the power off in this state results in loss of all user data and may cause the

system to freeze (due to corruption of data in the Flash ROM). This may

also result in the MOTIF ES being unable to properly start up the next time

the power is turned on.

Setting up on the computer

For details on the Yamaha software contained in the included

CD-ROM, refer to the separate Installation Guide.

For instructions on how to start the software, refer to the

relevant documentation.

Set the MIDI port, referring to the illustration on the previous

page.

For details, refer to the documentation of the particular

software. Instructions on how to set up the various software

follow on the next page.

SQ01 V2 Logic 5.5

Cubase SX Digital Performer 3.1

SONAR 2.0

Multi Part Editor for MOTIF-RACK

Multi Part Editor for MOTIF ES6/7/8

Set the MIDI IN/OUT parameter to “USB”

([UTILITY] →→

→→

[F5] MIDI →→

→→

[SF4] OTHER), When

connecting the computer to the MOTIF ES via

mLAN (with the optional mLAN16E installed), set

this parameter to “mLAN.”

Call up the Remote Control Setup display by

pressing the [F4] CTL ASN button, followed by

the [SF4] REMOTE button.

Set the software to be controlled and Port

number, referring to the illustration on the

previous page.

Press the [ENTER] button to actually call up the

settings made in step #3 above.

Press the [STORE] button to store the settings

made in steps #1 and 4 above.

CAUTION

After following the instructions in “Setting up for

using a computer” on page 147, install the

desired software to your computer.

Enter the Song mode or Pattern mode on the

MOTIF ES, then start the software on the

computer.

Set the parameters related to MIDI and Remote

Control on the computer software.

Controlling a computer from the instrument

149

Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide — Computer applications

■ Cubase SX

1 Pull down the [Devices] menu and select [Device Setup]

to call up the “Device Setup” window.

Click the [Add/Remove] tab and add the “Mackie Control.”

3 Select the added Mackie Control device and click the

[Setup] tab.

4 When setting the Port to “4,” for example, in step #3 of

“Setting up on the MOTIF ES,” set the MIDI Input to

“YAMAHA USB IN 0-4” and the MIDI Output to

“YAMAHA USB OUT 0-4.”

n The functions of buttons on the Mackie Control are assigned to the

buttons of the MOTIF ES, with the exception of UserA and UserB

(FootSw) which are not supported by the MOTIF ES.

■ SONAR

1 Pull down the [Options] menu and select [MIDI Devices]

to call up the “MIDI Devices” window.

2 When setting the Port to “4” for example in step #3 of

“Setting up on the MOTIF ES,” add “YAMAHA USB IN

0-4” to the “Inputs” and add “YAMAHA USB OUT 0-4” to

the “Outputs.”

3 Pull down the [Options] menu and select [Control

Surfaces] to call up the Control Surface window.

4 Click the “New” icon, select “Mackie Control,” then set

the Input Port to “YAMAHA USB IN 0-4” and the Output

Port to “YAMAHA USB OUT 0-4” (for example, when

setting the Port to “4” in step #3 of “Setting up on the

MOTIF ES”).

■ Digital Performer

1 Pull down the [Basics] menu and select [Control

Surface Setup] to call up the “Control Surface” window.

2 Select “Mackie Control” in the Driver section.

If Mackie Control is not available here, see the

supplementary instructions below.

3 In the box for setting “Unit” and “MIDI,” select “Mackie

Control” in the “Unit” section and select the MIDI port in

the “MIDI” section.

When you cannot select “Mackie Control” in step #2:

1) Download the Mackie Control Plug-in software from

“www.motu.com” and save it to your hard disk.

2) Move the Mackie Control ﬁle to the “Plug-ins” folder

contained in the folder to which Digital Performer has

been installed.

3) Start Digital Performer.

* Mackie Control is the trademark of Mackie Designs, Inc.

■ Logic

When turning on the power of the MOTIF ES before

starting Logic:

1 Set the software to be controlled to “Logic” in the Utility

mode, then enter the Remote Control mode.

2 Start Logic on the computer.

Logic automatically recognizes the MOTIF ES and

performs the required settings.

When starting Logic before turning on the power of the

MOTIF ES:

1 Start Logic on the computer, then turn the power to the

MOTIF ES on.

If you have already set the software to be controlled to

“Logic” in the Utility mode, you need not perform step #2

because Logic automatically recognizes the MOTIF ES

when this step is performed.

2 Set the software to be controlled to “Logic” in the Utility

mode, then enter the Remote Control mode.

Logic automatically recognizes the MOTIF ES and

performs the required settings.

If for some reason Logic fails to recognize the MOTIF ES,

follow the instructions below.

1) Select [Option] →→

→→

[Preference] →→

→→

[Control Surface] →→

→→

[Install] from the menu.

2) Scan Logic Control on the window called up in step #1).

When the scanning is successful, the Logic recognizes the

MOTIF ES and performs the required settings automatically.

If Logic still fails to recognize the MOTIF ES even after

performing the above instructions, follow the instructions

below.

1) Select [Option] →→

→→

[Preference] →→

→→

[Control Surface] →→

→→

[Install] from the menu.

2) Add Logic Control on the window called up in step #1).

3) Specify the Input Port and Output Port on the

CONTROL SURFACE SETUP window called up in step

#2).

* Logic Control is the registered trademark of Emagic, Inc.

■ SQ01

For information about how to set the MIDI port, refer to the

separate Installation Guide. For information on using Remote

Control, follow the instructions below.

1 Select [Setup] →→

→→

[Remote Control] to call up the

Remote Control Setup window.

2 Select “01X” as mode, then set the Input Device/Output

Device to the appropriate port number.

Controlling a computer from the instrument

150

Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide — Computer applications

Functions assigned to the panel buttons in the Remote Control mode

To enter the Remote Control mode, press the REMOTE [ON/OFF] button (the lamp ﬂashes). The REMOTE display appears (like

those shown below), and the panel controls are enabled for Remote operation of the computer software (their normal functions

are disabled).

Press this button again to exit from the Remote Control mode.

REMOTE

ON/OFF

R-AUDIO

G-MIDI

REMOTE

ON/OFF

R-AUDIO

G-MIDI

SF5

KNOB

CONTROL

FUNCTION

ARP FX

TONE

ASSIGN

PAN/SEND

Mode A Mode B

This button is available when the Mode is set to

“General” and is used to switch between editing audio

tracks (lamp is red) and MIDI tracks of the sequence

software (lamp is green).

Changing the Mode

(Changing the software to be

controlled)

Change the Mode by pressing the REMOTE [ON/OFF] button

while holding the [F6] SHIFT button.

This is the cursor which indicates the currently edited

track/part by the knob/slider.

Controlling the knob/slider moves the cursor to the

corresponding track/part automatically. You can also

move the cursor by using the Cursor [<] and [>] buttons.

Press the [KNOB

CONTROL FUNCTION]

button to change the

functions assigned to the

[F1] - [F6] and [SF1] -

[SF5] buttons (shown at

the bottom of the

display).

Refer to the separate

Data List.

Parameters and their values controlled by knobs/

sliders are shown in two rows, in the boxes.

n Parameter names are shown

according to the information

transferred from the DAW

software on the computer.

The characters may be

garbled depending on the

DAW software or OS language

of your computer.

When [<<BANK] and [BANK>>] are shown

here, you can use the [F4] and [F5] buttons to

change the bank of eight tracks/parts (shown

in the display) to be controlled.

Controlling the knob may change the [SF4] menu to indicate [DIAL].

When [DIAL] is shown here, the function of the last operated knob is

assigned to the data dial, [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons. If you wish

to restore these to the original function (song position control), press the

[SF4] button to delete the [DIAL] menu.

To switch the cursor

between the upper

and lower row, press

the [SF5] button.

Controlling a computer from the instrument

151

Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide — Computer applications

The following explains which sequencer functions are assigned to which panel controls in the Remote Control mode.

■ SEQ TRANSPORT buttons

The Remote Control mode lets you start/stop playback of the

DAW software on the computer by using the SEQ

TRANSPORT buttons and control the song position on the

DAW software by using the data dial, [INC/YES] and [DEC/

NO] buttons.

n When the cursor is shown at any track/part in the boxes of two rows of

the LCD display, the data dial, [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons

function as the last operated knob and cannot be used to control the

song position. To restore these to the original song position control,

press the Cursor [<]/[>] buttons several times or press the [SF4]

button (if the [DIAL] menu is shown) to delete the cursor.

■ Knob, Data dial, and [PRE1] - [PRE4] buttons

The functions of eight knobs on the emulated hardware

controllers (such as the Yamaha 01X) are assigned to the four

Knobs on the MOTIF ES. Pressing the [SF5] button changes

which group’s functions (1 - 4 or 5 - 8) are assigned to the four

Knobs. When [<<BANK] and [BANK>>] are shown in the

display, you can use the [F4] and [F5] buttons to change the

bank of eight tracks/parts (shown in the display) to be

controlled.

The eight knobs on the emulated hardware controllers (such

as the Yamaha 01X) can also be used as switches. However,

since the four Knobs on the MOTIF ES do not have switch

capability, the [PRE1] - [PRE4] buttons are used instead. For

convenience, the switch function corresponding to the last

Knob operated is also assigned automatically to the [ENTER]

button.

While the eight knobs on the emulated devices have

“endless” rotary control, the four Knobs on the MOTIF ES stop

at certain points. With some parameters this may mean that

the value may not reach to the minimum and maximum points.

If this occurs, you can use the data dial to adjust the value as

desired. For convenience, the data dial is active for the

parameter corresponding to the Knob last turned.

n To restore the function of the data dial, [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO]

buttons to the original song position control, press the [SF4] button (if

the [DIAL] menu is shown) to delete the cursor.

■ Control Sliders

The functions of eight faders on the Mackie Control, Logic

Control and 01X are assigned to the four Sliders on the MOTIF

ES. Pressing the [SF5] button changes which group’s

functions (1 - 4 or 5 - 8) are assigned to the four Sliders. When

[<<BANK] and [BANK>>] are shown in the display, you can

use the [F4] and [F5] buttons to change the bank of eight

tracks/parts (shown in the display) to be controlled.

■ [F1] - [F6] buttons and [SF1] - [SF5] buttons

The functions assigned to these buttons depends on the

selected Mode (A or B) and the particular software being

used (as set in step #3 in “Setting up on the MOTIF ES” on

page 148).

When the Mode is set to “General,” these buttons are assigned

to perform the same functions as panel buttons on the Yamaha

01X, for controlling various Yamaha music/audio software. The

corresponding names of the 01X panel buttons are also

indicated at the bottom of the display of the MOTIF ES.

When the Mode is set to “Logic,” these buttons are assigned

to perform the same functions as panel buttons on the Logic

Control, for controlling Logic on the computer. The

corresponding names of the Logic Control panel buttons are

also indicated at the bottom of the display of the MOTIF ES.

When the Mode is set to “Cubase” or “SONAR” or “D.Perf,”

these buttons are assigned to perform the same functions as

panel buttons on the Mackie Control, for controlling the

corresponding software on the computer. The corresponding

names of the Mackie Control panel buttons are also indicated

at the bottom of the display of the MOTIF ES.

The function assignment can be changed by pressing the

[KNOB CONTROL FUNCTION] buttons.

The function assignment tables of the [F1] - [F6] buttons and

[SF1] - [SF5] buttons for each DAW software are contained in

the separate Data List.

n Among the functions assigned to the [F1] - [F6] buttons and [SF1] -

[SF5] buttons, the functions indicated with brackets (such as [DIAL])

are not related to the Mackie Control, Logic Control and 01X but are

unique to the MOTIF ES.

■ Data dial, [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons

Although the data dial and [INC/YES]/[DEC/NO] buttons are

generally to change the song position on the DAW software,

when you turn one of the Knobs on the MOTIF ES, the control

function assigned to that Knob is automatically assigned to

these panel controls as well, and the [DIAL] menu appears (at

the [SF4] button). In this condition, these controllers cannot

be used to control the song position. To restore the function of

the data dial, [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons to the original

song position control, press the [SF4] button (if the [DIAL]

menu is shown) to delete the [DIAL] menu.

Quick Guide — Computer applications

Controlling a computer from the instrument

152

Owner’s Manual

■ Cursor [<] and [>] buttons

By moving the cursor left/right, you can change the track or

part to controlled by the data dial and [INC/YES]/[DEC/NO]

buttons. For example, when the cursor is at the upper box in

the display, pressing the Cursor [>] button moves through the

columns in succession (1, 2, 3, 4...). After 4, the cursor is

hidden and wraps around to 1. When the cursor is shown in

the display, the parameter at which the cursor is located can

be edited by the data dial, [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons.

When the cursor is hidden, the data dial and [INC/YES]/[DEC/

NO] buttons can be used for their normal function —

controlling the song position.

■ Cursor [ ] and [ ] buttons

When the Mode is set to “General,” the Cursor [ ]/[ ]

buttons perform the same function as that of the DISPLAY

[ ]/[ ] buttons on the 01X.

When the Mode is set to something other than “General,” the

Cursor [ ]/[ ] buttons perform the same function as that of

the Cursor [ ]/[ ] buttons on the Mackie Control and Logic

Control.

■ [EXIT] button

When the Mode is set to “General,” this button performs the

same function as that of the [PAGE SHIFT] button on the 01X.

When the Mode is set to something other than “General,” the

button has no control function.

■ BANK, GROUP and NUMBER button

These buttons are assigned to perform the same functions as

the buttons directly over the faders on the 01X, Mackie

Control and Logic Control.

Checking the Remote Control assignments

If you’re unsure as to which software function has been

assigned to a particular panel control on the MOTIF ES,

this convenient feature lets you quickly check it from the

display.

1 In the Remote Control mode, press the

[INFORMATION] button to call up the information

display, indicating the function of the last pressed

button.

2 Press the button for which you want to check the

assignment.

This display shown above appears when you press

the [F] (Play) button of SEQ TRANSPORT. In this

way, you can check each button’s control assignment

simply by pressing it.

3 Press the [INFORMATION] button again to return

to the Remote Control mode.

n While the Information display is shown, the panel buttons

cannot be used to control the computer software.

[PRE1] - [PRE4]

buttons

The eight knobs on the 01X, Mackie Control

and Logic Control can also be used as

switches. However, since the four Knobs on

the MOTIF ES do not have switch capability,

the [PRE1] - [PRE4] buttons are used instead.

[PRE5] - [PLG3]

buttons

The functions of the eight [REC/RDY] buttons

on the Mackie Control and Logic Control are

assigned to these buttons. Please note that

these buttons are not available when the

Mode is set to “General.”

[A] - [H] buttons

The functions of the eight [SOLO] buttons on

the Mackie Control and Logic Control are

assigned to these buttons. Please note that

these buttons are not available when the

Mode is set to “General.”

[1] - [8] and [TRACK

SELECT] buttons

When the Mode is set to “General,” the

functions of the nine [SEL] buttons on the 01X

are assigned to these buttons. When the

Mode is set to something other than

“General,” the functions of the eight [MUTE]

buttons on the Mackie Control and Logic

Control are assigned to the [1] - [8] buttons.

[9] - [16] and [MUTE]

buttons

When the Mode is set to “General,” the

functions of the nine [ON] buttons on the 01X

are assigned to these buttons. When the

Mode is set to something other than

“General,” the functions of the eight [SELECT]

buttons on the Mackie Control and Logic

Control are assigned to the [9] - [16] buttons.

Controlling a computer from the instrument

153

Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide — Computer applications

Recording the sounds of the MOTIF ES to computer via mLAN

By using the optional mLAN16E interface and an IEEE 1394 cable connection, you can record multitrack audio from the

MOTIF ES to an mLAN-compatible DAW (digital audio workstation) program on your computer. This lets you transfer the

audio data of multi-part Songs on the MOTIF ES to the DAW application for further editing and storage on your computer’s

hard disk drive.

In the example instructions below, Song playback and/or your keyboard performance in the Song mode can be recorded

to the computer, on separate tracks of the DAW application.

Setup for connecting the computer to the MOTIF ES via mLAN

Install the optional mLAN16E to the MOTIF ES (page 288).

After turning the power on, set the MIDI IN/OUT

parameter to “mLAN” ([UTILITY]

→

[F5] MIDI

→

[SF4] OTHER).

Press the [SONG] button to enter the Song mode

and select the desired Song for playback, or the

particular Mixing settings you want to use.

Set the mLAN MonitorSw parameter to “on”

([UTILITY]

→

[F2] I/O

→

[SF2] OUTPUT).

When this parameter is set to on, the audio signal output

via mLAN to the computer is also output to the external

audio equipment via the main OUTPUT L/MONO and R

jacks.

This allows you to monitor the sound going to the

computer with a set of headphones.

Determine the Output connector or channel of audio

signal for each part.

Make the desired OutputSel parameter settings

([SONG]

→

[MIXING]

→

[EDIT]

→

Part selection

→

[F2]

OUTPUT

→

[SF3] SELECT). For example, set the

OutputSel parameter for Part 1 to “as1&2,” Part 2 to

“as3&4,” and Part 3 to “as5&6.”

These settings (as1&2, as3&4, etc.) indicate the

hardware output jacks on the optional AIEB2, when the

device has been installed. When the mLAN16E is

installed, these indicate the different audio channels

within the single mLAN connection.

Connect the computer to the MOTIF ES using an

IEEE1394 cable.

Install all necessary software to the computer,

including the mLAN driver.

Refer to the relevant documentation for the mLAN16E.

Install an mLAN-compatible audio sequencer or

DAW application to the computer.

Refer to the separate Installation Guide for information

on how to install mLAN-compatible Yamaha

applications.

Set the audio related parameters on the DAW

software.

Refer to the relevant documentation for the particular

software.

Executing the Hard Disk Recording

After completing the setup described above, try out to

record your keyboard performance to the hard disk of the

computer by using the DAW software. For details about

how to execute this, refer to the relevant document of the

software.

MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER

MOTIF ES Computer with an IEEE1394 interface

mLAN input

Audio signal of the MOTIF ES sound

mLAN16E

Setup on the MOTIF ES

Setup on the computer

Basic Structure

Internal Structure (System Overview)

154

Owner’s Manual

This section gives you an easy-to-understand overview of the MOTIF ES — its wide range of sophisticated features, its MIDI

control and performance functions, and its convenient ﬁle management system for original data you’ve created with the

instrument.

Internal Structure (System Overview)

This synthesizer is made up of several blocks, as shown here.

Controller Block

This block consists of the keyboard, Pitch Bend and

Modulation Wheels, Ribbon Controller, Knobs, Control Sliders

and so on.

The keyboard itself doesn’t generate sounds, but instead

generates/transmits note on/off, velocity and other information

(MIDI messages) to the synthesizer’s tone generator block

when you play notes. The controllers also generates/transmits

MIDI messages.

The synthesizer’s tone generator block produces the sound

according to the MIDI messages transmitted from the

keyboard and controllers.

Controller supported by the MOTIF ES

The controllers you can use on this synthesizer and the

reference pages are as follows:

● Controllers with which the MOTIF ES is equipped

Keyboard (Initial Touch, Aftertouch) ................ page 18

Pitch Bend Wheel ............................................ page 64

Modulation Wheel............................................ page 64

Ribbon Controller............................................. page 65

Knob (KN)........................................................ page 50

Control Slider (CS)........................................... page 51

● Controllers (sold separately) that can be connected

to the rear panel of the MOTIF ES

Foot Controller ................................................. page 42

Footswitch ....................................................... page 42

Breath Controller.............................................. page 42

Basic Structure

ZONE 1

CS 1

VOLUME

1 VOLUME 2 VOLUME 3 VOLUME 4

CS 2

ZONE 2

CS 3

ZONE 3

CS 4

ZONE 4

SWING GATE TIME VELOCITY

UNITMULTIPLY

LOW

LOW MID

HIGH MID

HIGH

Controller block

Keyboard Controllers

MIDI output

Audio (sound)

output

Recording by the

keyboard performance

Keyboard performance

Operating

the panel

Sequencer block

Tone Generator block

MIDI sequence data

• Song

• Pattern

• Arpeggio

Internal AWM2 Plug-in

board

• Voice

• Performance

Sampling block

Playback

Effect block

DSP

• Reverb

• Chorus

• Master Effect

• Part Equalizer

• Master Equalizer

Recording

External MIDI instrument

Playback

Microphone, Guitar, Bass,

Audio equipment, etc.

Microphone, Guitar, Bass,

Audio equipment, etc.

Audio signal ﬂow

MIDI messages ﬂow

Playback

Basic Structure

Internal Structure (System Overview)

155

Owner’s Manual

Controller related parameters in each mode

The chart below shows the operations for calling up the Controller related parameters in each mode. Parameters for the

Footswitch and the Assign Knobs A/B apply to the entire instrument, regardless of the selected program (Voice/Performance/

Song/Pattern).

Aside from their default control parameters, the controllers of the instrument, such as the Pitch Bend wheel and the Modulation

wheel, can be freely assigned to a variety of different parameters. For example, you could assign Resonance to the Modulation

Wheel and set aftertouch to apply vibrato. These settings for all the controllers are referred to as a “Controller Set,” and up to six

Controller Sets can be created for each Voice.

● Source and Destination

“source” refers to the hardware controller and “destination” refers to the parameter or function being controlled. An extensive

variety of destination parameters are available, far more than those listed above. For a complete list of destination parameters,

see the separate Data List.

Voice mode

Controller Set (for each Voice) [VOICE] → Voice selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F4] CTL SET See below.

Assigning the Control Change number to each

Controller (for all Voices)

[VOICE] → [UTILITY] → [F3] VOICE → [SF4] CTL ASN Page 262

Performance

mode

Assigning the Control Change number to each

Controller (for each Performance)

[PERFORM] → Performance selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] →

[F4] CTL ASN

Page 214

Song mode

Assigning the Control Change number to each

Controller (for each Song Mixing)

[SONG] → Song selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] →

[F4] CTL ASN

Page 234

Pattern mode

Assigning the Control Change number to each

Controller (for each Pattern Mixing)

[PATTERN] → Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] →

[F4] CTL ASN

Page 248

All modes

Assigning the function and Control Change

number to the Assign Knob A/B

[UTILITY] → [F4] CTL ASN → [SF2] ASSIGN Page 263

Assigning the function and Control Change

number to the Footswitch (connected to the

ASSIGNABLE connector)

[UTILITY] → [F4] CTL ASN → [SF3] FT SW Page 263

Controller Set

[VOICE] →→

→→

Voice selection →→

→→

[EDIT] →→

→→

[COMMON] →→

→→

[F4] CTL SET Page 192

SWING GATE TIME

LOW

LOW MID

ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF

234

Voice

Controller Set 1 - 6

Volume, Reverb Send Level, Chorus Send Level, Filter

Cutoff Frequency, Filter Resonance, etc.

Controller Set

Source = Controller

Depth = Degree to which the

controller affects the sound

Element Switches

Destination (Dest) = function

n You can set whether the controller affects each

Element by setting the Element Switch on or off as

desired. Note that this applies only to Normal Voices.

n The Element Switch parameters are not available

when a function unrelated to Elements (1 - 40) is set

as the destination.

Internal Structure (System Overview)

156

Owner’s Manual

Basic Structure

● Using one source to control several destinations

For example, set the Source parameter of Control Set 1 to MW (Modulation Wheel) and the Destination parameter to ELFO-PM

(Element LFO Pitch Modulation Depth). Then set the Source parameter of Control Set 2 also to MW, but set the Destination

parameter to ELM PAN (Element Pan). You will also need to specify the Element to be controlled and also the depth (amount) of

control.

In this example, when you move the Modulation Wheel upward, the amount of Pitch Modulation increases accordingly, and the

Element is panned from left to right. In this way, you can have the sound change in several different ways, simply by adjusting a

single controller.

● Using several sources to control one destination

For example, set the Source parameter of Control Set 1 to MW (Modulation Wheel) and the Destination parameter to ELFO-PM

(Element LFO Pitch Modulation Depth). Then set the Source parameter of Control Set 2 to FC (Foot Controller) and set the

Destination parameter also to ELFO-PM (Element LFO Pitch Modulation Depth).

Now, Pitch Modulation is assigned to both the Modulation Wheel and Foot Controller. In this way, you can have several different

controllers affect the same aspect of the sound. This can be useful in live performance situations, letting you use any one of

several controllers depending on which is convenient at the time.

n The Controller Set edited in the Voice Edit mode is available when the corresponding Voice is selected in the Performance mode, Song mode, and Pattern

mode.

n The function assigned to the Controller by the Controller Set function can be applied only to the internal tone generator block. Operating the Controller will

transmit the MIDI message (Control Change Number assigned below) to the external MIDI instrument.

Assigning Control Change numbers to the controllers

The functions assigned to the controllers by the Controller Set function can be applied only to the internal tone generator block.

For connected external MIDI instruments, use of the controllers generates MIDI Control Change messages, as shown in the

chart below.

* These Controllers are not used in the Controller Set function

As shown above, the keyboard Aftertouch, Pitch Bend Wheel, Modulation Wheel, Footswitch connected to the SUSTAIN

connector, were originally designed for a particular purpose, and send pre-deﬁned MIDI Control Change messages when used,

regardless of their Control Set allocations within the synthesizer. For example, when the pan function is assigned to the Pitch

Bend Wheel with the Controller Set, using the Pitch Bend Wheel will apply the pan function to the internal tone generator and will

transmit the Pitch Bend messages to the external MIDI instrument.

Using the other controllers will transmit the Control Change messages set from the display shown above to the external MIDI

instrument while it will apply the functions set via the Controller Set to the internal tone generator block.

You can also set up a controller such that it sends one kind of Control message to the synthesizer’s internal tone generator yet

another kind to the external MIDI instrument. For example, in a Controller Set you could assign Resonance to the ASSIGN Knob

1. Then, in the Utility mode, you could assign Control Change Number 1 (modulation) to the same knob. Now, when you turn the

knob, resonance will be applied to the sound of the internal tone generator block; however, at the same time, modulation

messages will be transmitted to the external MIDI instrument.

Controller Generated MIDI message Display

Aftertouch Channel Aftertouch (DnH) –

Pitch Bend Wheel Pitch Bend (EnH) –

Modulation Wheel Control Change (BnH, 01H) –

Footswitch (connected to the

SUSTAIN connector)*

Control Change (BnH, 40H) –

ASSIGN Knob A, B* Control Change (BnH) [UTILITY] → [F4] CTL ASN → [SF2] ASSIGN

Footswitch (connected to the

ASSIGNABLE connector)*

Control Change (BnH) [UTILITY] → [F4] CTL ASN → [SF3] FT SW

Ribbon Controller Control Change (BnH) [VOICE] → [UTILITY] → [F3] VOICE → [SF3] CTL ASN

ASSIGN Knob 1, 2 [PERFORM] → Performance selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F4] CTL ASN

Foot Controller 1, 2 [SONG] → Song selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F4] CTL ASN

Breath Controller [PATTERN] → Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F4] CTL ASN

Basic Structure

Internal Structure (System Overview)

157

Owner’s Manual

Tone Generator block

The Tone Generator block is what actually produces sound in response to the MIDI messages generated by playing the

keyboard, using the controllers, and the playback of the sequencer (Song/Pattern/Arpeggio).

Internal AWM2 Tone Generator and optional Plug-in boards

The tone generator block in this synthesizer consists of the built-in AWM2 sound source and optional Plug-in Board(s).

● AWM2 (Advanced Wave Memory 2)

AWM2 (Advanced Wave Memory 2) is a synthesis system based on sampled waves (sound material), and is used in many

Yamaha synthesizers. For extra realism, each AWM2 Voice uses multiple samples of a real instrument’s waveform. Furthermore,

a wide variety of parameters — envelope generator, ﬁlter, modulation, and others — can be applied.

You can also create your own waves (Samples) via microphone or from external audio equipment by using the Sampling

function. These are then stored in internal memory (DRAM) and can be used just like the preset waves.

● Plug-in Board

For details on using the optional Plug-in Boards for even more sounds, see page 74.

AMPFILTERPITCHOSC

Outputs the wave that

makes up the sound.

To the Effect block

Changes the tonal quality of the

sound output from the PITCH unit.

Controls the output level (amplitude) of the sound

output from the FILTER unit. The signals are then

sent at this level to the Effect block.

Controls the pitch of the sound.

Tone

Generator

Internal AWM2

Tone Generator

Plug-in boards (optional)

Up to three boards can be installed.

Basic Structure

Internal Structure (System Overview)

158

Owner’s Manual

Voice, Performance, and Mixing

This instrument features three different types of programs,

that form the basis for creating and playing sounds.

● Voice

A program that contains the sonic elements for generating a

speciﬁc musical instrument sound is referred to as a “Voice.”

Each Voice consists of up to four elements (Normal Voice) or

up to 73 keys (Drum Voice). Each Voice is created by editing

parameters unique to each element/key and parameters

common to all the elements/keys in the Voice mode (page

188) or in the Mixing Voice mode (page 249).

● Performance

A program in which multiple Voices (parts) are combined in a

layer, or in other conﬁgurations is referred to as a

“Performance.” Each Performance can contain up to four

different parts (Voices). Each Performance can be created by

editing parameters unique to each part and parameters

common to all the parts in the Performance mode (page 212).

● Mixing

A program in which multiple Voices are assigned to Parts for

multi-timbral play in the Song and Pattern modes is referred to

as a “Mixing.” Each Mixing can contain up to 34 parts (page

163). Each Mixing can be created by editing parameters

unique to each part and parameters common to all the parts

in the Song Mixing mode (page 233) or in the Pattern Mixing

mode (page 248).

n The Mixing belongs to the Song or Pattern.

The illustration below shows the structure and

interrelationship of the Voices, Performances, and Mixings.

n The Drum Voice Key Edit parameters do not contain LFO settings.

CH16

CH1

VOICE

PITCH

OSC

(Oscillator)

FILTER

AMP

(Amplitude)

LFO

PEG FEG AEG

PERFORM

SONG

MIXING

PATTERN

MIXING

One Voice

Up to four elements (Normal Voice)

Up to 73 keys (Drum Voice)

Pitch Envelope

Generator

One Mixing

Waveform

(AWM2)

Common Edit parameters

Part Edit parameters

Common Edit parameters

This synthesizer has two types of Voices – Voices created in the

Voice mode and Mixing Voices (dedicated for the Song/Pattern)

created in the Mixing Voice mode.

Common Edit parameters

Arpeggio, Effects, Controller Set, etc.

Element 1 - 4

or Key C0-C6

•1 - 16 parts (of the internal tone

generator)

• 17 - 32 parts (of the optionally

installed PLG100-XG)

• PLG1 - 3 parts (of the optionally

installed single part Plug-in boards)

Filter Envelope

Generator

Amplitude Envelope

Generator

Low Frequency

Oscillator

Different Voice for each part

One Performance

Up to four parts

One Part

Voice

Different Voice for each part

One Part

Voice

Element Edit parameters

or Key Edit parameters

Set in the Voice Edit mode (page 79)

Basic Structure

Internal Structure (System Overview)

159

Owner’s Manual

The following illustrations may help in understanding the memory structure of the Voices, Performances, and Mixings.

..................

VOICE

Preset 1

(128 Voices)

1 2 ...... 128

Preset 2

(128 Voices)

1 2 ...... 128

Preset 3

(128 Voices)

1 2 ...... 128

Preset 4

(128 Voices)

1 2 ...... 128

Preset Drum

(64 Voices)

1 2 ...... 64

GM Preset

(128 Voices)

1 2 ...... 128

GM Drum

(1 Voice)

User 1

(128 Voices)

1 2 ...... 128

User 2

(128 Voices)

1 2 ...... 128

Song 01

(16 Voices)

1 2 ...... 16

Song 64

(16 Voices)

1 2 ...... 16

Pattern 01

(16 Voices)

1 2 ...... 16

Pattern 64

(16 Voices)

1 2 ...... 16

Song 01

(128 Voices)

1 2 ...... 128

Song 64

(128 Voices)

1 2 ...... 128

Pattern 01

(128 Voices)

1 2 ...... 128

Pattern 64

(128 Voices)

1 2 ...... 128

User Drum

(32 Voices)

1 2 ...... 32

Preset 5

(128 Voices)

1 2 ...... 128

PLG1 Preset

(64 Voices)

1 2 ...... 64

User 1

(128 Performances)

1 2 ...... 128

PLG1 User

(64 Voices)

1 2 ...... 64

PLG2 Preset

(64 Voices)

1 2 ...... 64

PLG2 User

(64 Voices)

1 2 ...... 64

PLG3 Preset

(64 Voices)

1 2 ...... 64

PLG3 User

(64 Voices)

1 2 ...... 64

Song 01

(16 Parts + PLG Parts)

Pattern 01

(16 Parts + PLG Parts)

Song 64

(16 Parts + PLG Parts)

Te mplate

......

Pattern 64

(16 Parts + PLG Parts)

Preset 6

(128 Voices)

1 2 ...... 128

ORGAN

USER 1

PERFORM

SONG

MIXING

PATTERN

MIXING

STRINGS

PLG 1

SLOT 1 SLOT 2

BRASS

PLG 2

SLOT 3

REED/PIPE

PLG 3

ORGAN

USER 1

GUITAR/

PLUCKED

USER 2

BASS

PRE 1

PRE 2

PRE 3

PRE 4

A. PIANO

PRE 5

KEYBOARD

PRE 6

DRUM KITS

FAVORITES

A. PIANO

PRE 5

DRUM KITS

FAVORITES

BASS

DRUM KITS

FAVORITES

ORGAN

USER 1

➜

Normal Voice

The Sample Voices can be selected only in

the Song mode/Pattern mode. These cannot

be selected in the Voice mode or assigned to

each Part in the Performance mode.

The Sample Voices can be created by

recording the audio signal to a Song/Pattern

track via the Sampling function (page 172).

Normal Voices: 768

Drum Voices: 64

Drum Voice

Voices

Preset Voice

Normal Voices: 128

Drum Voice: 1

GM Voice

Normal Voices: 256

Drum Voices: 32

User Voice

(Up to 128 Voices for each Song/Pattern,

1024 Voices for all Songs/Patterns)

Sample Voice

* When the PLG150-VL is

installed, there are three Preset

Banks and 192 Preset Voices.

Plug-in Voice

Performance

Mixing

Normal Voices: up to 256

(Up to 16 Voices for each Song/Pattern)

Mixing Voice

The Mixing Voices can be selected only

in the Song mode/Pattern mode. These

cannot be selected in the Voice mode or

assigned to each Part in the

Performance mode.

Basic Structure

Internal Structure (System Overview)

160

Owner’s Manual

■ Normal Voices & Drum Voices

Internally, there are two Voice Types: Normal Voices and Drum

Voices. Normal Voices are mainly pitched musical instrument-

type sounds that can be played over the range of the

keyboard. Drum Voices are mainly percussion/drum sounds

that are assigned to individual notes on the keyboard. A

collection of assigned percussion/drum waves or Normal

Voices is known as a Drum Kit.

■ GM Voices

GM (General MIDI) is a worldwide standard for Voice

organization and MIDI functions of synthesizers and tone

generators. It was designed primarily to ensure that any song

data created with a speciﬁc GM device would sound virtually

the same on any other GM device – no matter the

manufacturer or the model. The GM Voice bank on this

synthesizer is designed to appropriately play back GM song

data. However, keep in mind that the sound may not be

exactly the same as played by the original tone generator.

■

Tone generator parameters that produce the Voice sound

Among various parameters that makes up one Voice,

Oscillator, Pitch, Filter, Amplitude, LFO and three Envelope

Generators (PEG, FEG, AEG) shown in the illustration on

pages 160-162 are the basic parameters for creating the Voice

sound. Parameters about Oscillator, Pitch, Filter and Amplitude

determine the three basic elements of the sound – Pitch (how

low or high it is), Tone (or its overall sound quality), and Volume

(how loud its volume level is) of the Voice. Parameters such as

LFO and EG (Envelope Generator) determine the transition in

these three basic elements of the sound from the moment the

sound starts to the moment the sound stops.

In the sections that follow, we’ll explain in detail about the

sound-related parameters and provide an introduction to the

basics of electronic synthesis.

● Oscillator

This unit outputs the wave which determines the basic pitch.

You can assign the wave (or basic sound material) to each

Element of the Normal Voice or each Key of the Drum Voice.

In the case of the Normal Voice, you can set the note range

for Element (the range of notes on the keyboard over which

the Element will sound) as well as the velocity response (the

range of note velocities within which the Element will sound).

For example, you could set one Element to sound in an upper

range of the keyboard, and another Element to sound in a

lower range. Thus, even within the same Voice, you can have

two different sounds for different areas of the keyboard or you

can make the two Element ranges overlap so that their

sounds are layered over a set range. Furthermore, you can

set each Element to respond to different velocity ranges so

that one Element sounds for lower note velocities, whereas

another Element sounds for higher note velocities. See the

illustration at left of this page.

n You can assign the wave with the following operation.

[VOICE] → Voice selection → [EDIT] → Element selection/Drum Key

selection → [F1] OSC → [SF1] WAVE

Strictly speaking, what is assigned here to an Element or Key is not a

“wave” but a “waveform.” The difference between the two terms is

explained on page 173.

● Pitch

This unit controls the pitch of the sound (wave) output from

the Oscillator. In the case of the Normal Voice, you can

detune separate Elements, apply Pitch Scaling and so on.

Also, by setting the PEG (Pitch Envelope Generator), you can

control how the pitch changes over time.

PEG (Pitch Envelope Generator)

Using the PEG, you can control the transition in pitch from the

moment the sound starts the moment the sound stops. You

can create the PEG by setting parameters as illustrated

below. When you press a note on the keyboard, the pitch of

the Voice will change according to these envelope settings.

This is useful for creating automatic changes in pitch, which is

effective for the Synth Brass. Furthermore, different PEG

parameters can be set for each Element or each Key.

Key 1 Key 5 Key 10 Key 18 Key 21 Key 73

C1 C6

Waveform (Preset 1-1859, User 1-1024)

Normal Voice

Individual drum

sounds (different

for each key)

Drum Voice

One Voice

Element 4

Element 1

Element 2

Element 3

Velocity

VOICE] → Voice selection → [EDIT] → Element selection/

Drum Key selection → [F1] OSC

[VOICE]

→→

Voice selection

→→

[EDIT]

→→

Element selection/

Drum Key selection

→→

[F2] PITCH

Pitch

Hold

Level

Attack

Level

Decay1

Level

Sustain Level

(Decay2 Level)

Release

Level

Hold

Time

Attack

Time

Decay1

Time

Decay2

Time

Release

Time

Pressing the key (Key on) Releasing the key (Key off)

Internal Structure (System Overview)

161

Owner’s Manual

Basic Structure

● Filter

This unit modiﬁes the tone of the sound output from Pitch by

cutting the output of a speciﬁc frequency portion of the sound.

Cutoff Frequency and Resonance

Here’s how ﬁlters work. In the example below (a low pass

ﬁlter), a portion of the signal lower than a given frequency is

allowed to pass, and signals above that frequency are cut.

This frequency is referred to as the cutoff frequency. You can

produce a relatively bright or darker sound by setting the

cutoff. Resonance is a parameter that boosts the level of the

signal in the area of the cutoff frequency. By emphasizing the

overtones in this area, this can produce a distinctive “peaky”

tone, making the sound brighter and harder.

About the main Filter types

The Low Pass Filter is shown in the illustration above –

however, this synthesizer features other Filter types (four total)

as shown below.

•Low Pass Filter (above)

This passes only those signals below the Cutoff frequency.

You can then use the Reso (Resonance) parameter to add

further character to the sound.

• High Pass Filter

This passes only those signals above the Cutoff frequency.

You can then use the Reso (Resonance) parameter to add

further character to the sound.

• Band Pass Filter

This passes only those a band of signals around the Cutoff

frequency. The width of this band can be varied.

• Band Elimination Filter

This attenuates a band of signals around the Cutoff

frequency, but passes everything else.

FEG (Filter Envelope Generator)

Using the FEG, you can control the transition in tone from the

moment the sound starts to the moment the sound stops. You

can create the FEG by setting parameters as illustrated

below. When you press a note on the keyboard, the cutoff

frequency will change according to these envelope settings.

This is useful for creating automatic wah or ﬁlter sweep

effects, for example. Furthermore, different FEG parameters

can be set for each Element Key.

[VOICE] → Voice selection → [EDIT] → Element selection/

Drum Key selection → [F3] FILTER

These frequencies are “passed” by the ﬁlter.

Cutoff frequency

Resonance

Frequency (pitch)

Level

Frequency (pitch)

Cutoff frequency

Level

Resonance

Cutoff frequency

These frequencies are

“passed” by the ﬁlter.

Level

Frequency

Range passed

Cutoff range

Level

Center frequency

Level

Cutoff range

Range passed

Center frequency

Frequency

Cutoff

Frequency

Hold

Level

Attack

Level

Decay1

Level

Sustain Level

(Decay2 Level)

Release

Level

Hold

Time

Attack

Time

Decay1

Time

Decay2

Time

Release

Time

Pressing the key (Key on) Releasing the key (Key off)

Basic Structure

Internal Structure (System Overview)

162

Owner’s Manual

● Amplitude

This unit controls the output level (amplitude) of the sound

output from Filter. The signals are then sent at this level to the

Effect block. Also, by setting the AEG (Amplitude Envelope

Generator), you can control how the volume changes over time.

AEG (Amplitude Envelope Generator)

Using the AEG, you can control the transition in volume from

the moment the sound starts is to the moment the sound

stops. You can create the AEG by setting parameters as

illustrated below. When you press a note on the keyboard, the

volume will change according to these envelope settings.

Furthermore, different AEG parameters can be set for each

Element Key.

n When you release the key while holding the Footswitch connected to

the SUSTAIN connector, the sound will maintain at the Sustain Level

shown above. For Voices having a Sustain Level value greater than 0,

the sound continues. For Voices having a Sustain Level of 0, the

sound decays naturally to silence.

● LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator)

As its name suggests, the LFO produces a wave of a low

frequency.

These waves can be used to vary the pitch, ﬁlter or amplitude

of each Element to create effects such as vibrato, wah and

tremolo. LFO can be set independently for each Element; it

can also be set globally for all Elements.

Single Timbre Tone Generator (Voice/

Performance mode) and Multi-timbral

Tone Generator (Song/Pattern mode)

The internal tone generator block operates in two different

ways (Single timbre and Multi-timbral) depending on the

selected mode. The difference between the two is whether

they can handle the multi-MIDI channels or not at the same

time.

●

Single Timbre Tone Generator (Voice/Performance mode)

A MIDI tone generator that receives over a single MIDI

channel and plays a single instrument part is referred to as a

“single timbre” tone generator. This is the operating status of

the internal tone generator in the Voice and Performance

modes.

n To set the MIDI receive channel for single timbre operation (Voice and

Performance modes), use the following operation in the Utility mode.

[UTILITY] → [F5] MIDI → [SF1] CH → BasicRcvCh

● Multi-timbral Tone Generator (Song/Pattern mode)

A MIDI tone generator that simultaneously receives over

multiple MIDI channels and plays multiple instrument parts is

referred to as a “multi-timbral” tone generator. This allows

playback of multi-channel MIDI song data — such as on a

MIDI sequencer or computer — with each internal part being

assigned to and played by a different track or channel. This

is the operating status of the internal tone generator in the

Song and Pattern modes.

n To set the MIDI receive channel for multi-timbral operation (Song and

Pattern modes), use the following operation in the Utility mode.

[SONG] or [PATTERN] → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → Part selection → [F1]

VOICE → [SF2] MODE → ReceiveCh

n When using an external MIDI sequencer or computer to play this

instrument, make sure to use the Song mode or Pattern mode.

Maximum Polyphony

Maximum polyphony refers to the highest number of notes

that can be sounded simultaneously from the internal tone

generator of the instrument.

The maximum polyphony of this synthesizer is 128. When

the internal tone generator block receives a number of

notes exceeding the maximum polyphony, previously

played notes are cut off. Keep in mind this may be

especially noticeable with Voices not having decay.

Furthermore, the maximum polyphony applies to the

number of voice elements used, not the number of voices.

When the normal voices that include up to four elements

are used, the maximum number of simultaneous notes

may be less than 128.

n When the Plug-in board is installed, the maximum polyphony

increases accordingly. For details on maximum polyphony for

the Plug-in Boards, refer to the Owner’s Manual of the

particular board.

[VOICE] →→

→→

Voice selection →→

→→

[EDIT] →→

→→

Element selection/

Drum Key selection →→

→→

[F4] AMP

[VOICE] → Voice selection → [EDIT] → Element selection/

Drum Key selection → [F5] LFO

[VOICE] → Voice selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F5]

LFO

Level

(Volume)

Initial

Level

Attack

Level

Decay1

Level

Sustain Level

(Decay2 Level)

Time

Attack

Time

Decay1

Time

Decay2

Time

Release

Level

Release

Time

Pressing the key (Key on) Releasing the key (Key off)

Internal Structure (System Overview)

163

Owner’s Manual

Basic Structure

Part structure of the tone generator block

This synthesizer plays the sounds in the tone generator block in

response to MIDI messages received from the controller or

sequencer block. The MIDI messages are assigned to sixteen

independent channels, and this synthesizer is capable of

simultaneously playing sixteen separate parts, via the sixteen

MIDI channels. However, the sixteen-channel limit can be

overcome by using separate MIDI “ports,” each supporting

sixteen channels. The multiple sound sources of this

synthesizer (internal tone generator and Plug-in Boards) take

advantage of the three MIDI ports included on the instrument.

As shown in the above illustration, up to 48 parts are provided

for the modes (excepting the Voice mode). However, the

number of parts that are actually used is a maximum of 34 in

the Song and Pattern modes, as we will see later in some

examples.

n The USB cable supports up to eight separate MIDI ports. The Tone

Generator block of this synthesizer supports three separate ports as

illustrated above.

n A single MIDI cable/connection cannot handle data over multiple MIDI

ports.

■ Part structure of the tone generator block in the

Voice mode

In this mode, a Voice is played from the keyboard, using a

single part. This part is used also when the Plug-in Voice is

selected. The tone generator block in the Voice mode

receives MIDI data over a single channel. Keep in mind that

song data on an external sequencer consisting of multiple

MIDI channels will not play back properly in this mode. If you

are using an external MIDI sequencer or computer to play the

instrument, make sure to use the Song mode or Pattern mode.

n The MIDI receive channel in the Voice mode can be set from the

following display in the Utility mode.

[UTILITY] → [F5] MIDI → [SF1] CH → BasicRcvCh

The MIDI port number which this synthesizer can recognize in the

Voice mode is 1.

n The Multi-Part Plug-in Board (PLG100-XG) cannot be used in the Voice

mode.

■ Part structure of the tone generator block in the

Performance mode

This mode lets you play a Performance (which multiple Voices

(parts) are combined – in a layer, or in other conﬁgurations)

using the keyboard. While a total of seven parts are available

in this mode (as shown below), a maximum of four parts can

be used simultaneously. Although this mode lets you play

several parts at the same time, all are set to receive over the

same single MIDI channel, as in the Voice mode. For this

reason, song data on an external sequencer consisting of

multiple MIDI channels will not play back properly in this

mode. If you are using an external MIDI sequencer or

computer to play the instrument, make sure to use the Song

mode or Pattern mode.

n The MIDI receive channel in the Performance mode can be set with

the following operation in the Utility mode.

[UTILITY] → [F5] MIDI → [SF1] CH → BasicRcvCh

In the Voice mode, the instrument recognizes only data over MIDI Port 1.

n The Multi-part Plug-in Board (PLG100-XG) cannot be used in the

Performance mode.

Port 1

Part 1

Part 2

Part 14

Part 15

Part 16

Port 2

Part 17

Part 18

Part 30

Part 31

Part 32

Port 3

Part 33

Part 34

Part 46

Part 47

Part 48

Tone Generator block

Parts used in modes other than the Voice mode

Part for Voice mode

Port 1

Part 1

Part 2

Part 3

Part 4

Part 5

Part 16

Port 2

Part 17

Part 18

Part 30

Part 31

Part 32

Port 3

Part 33

Part 34

Part 46

Part 47

Part 48

Tone generator block

Parts used in modes other than the Voice mode

Part for Voice mode

Parts 1-48 are not used.

PLG1 part

PLG3 part

PLG2 part

Port 1

Part 1

Part 2

Part 3

Part 4

Part 5

Part 13

Part 14

Part 15

Part 16

Port 2

Part 17

Part 18

Part 30

Part 31

Part 32

Part 46

Part 47

Part 48

Port 3

Part 33

Part 34

PLG1

PLG3

PLG2

Tone generator block

When three single part Plug-in boards

are installed to the synthesizer.

Parts 5-13 and 17-48 are not used.

These seven parts (1, 2, 3, 4, 14, 15, 16) are reserved for use in the

Performance mode; however, only up to four of them can be used

at the same time.

Internal Structure (System Overview)

164

Owner’s Manual

Basic Structure

■ Part structure of the tone generator block in the Song mode/Pattern mode

In these modes, multiple parts are provided and different voice and different melodies or phrases can be played back for each

part. Because these modes let you set the MIDI channel for each part of the tone generator block, you can use an external MIDI

sequencer as well as the sequencer block of the instrument to play the sounds.

As illustrated below, the sequence data of each track plays the corresponding parts (those having the same MIDI channel

assignment) in the tone generator block.

The MIDI Transmit Channel/Port of the Song/Pattern can be set with the following operation.

When sounding the internal tone generator block, assign the tracks to Transmit Port 1 and use Parts 1 - 16. Keep in mind that

data over Transmit Ports 2 or 3 cannot sound the internal tone generator block. The tone generator of the installed Plug-in Board

can be sounded via any of the MIDI ports 1 - 3.

The MIDI Receive Channel of the tone generator’s part can be set with the following operation.

You can set the port number assignment for the Plug-in Board with the following operation.

n For details about MIDI, see page 181.

n The Plug-in Board lets you use only a single Voice at the same time. Please note that you cannot assign multiple Voices of the Plug-in Board to multiple parts

at the same time.

n The Voice and related settings (volume, pan, etc.) are sounded by the keyboard according to the Part parameters in the Mixing settings of the current Song/

Pattern and Part. Other settings such as Controllers and Effect types correspond to the Common parameters in the Mixing settings of the current Song/

Pattern.

In the Song mode: [SONG] → Song selection → [F3] TRACK → [SF1] CHANNEL

In the Pattern mode: [PATTERN] → Pattern selection → [F3] TRACK → [SF1] CHANNEL

n the Song mode: [SONG] → Song selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → Part selection → [F1] VOICE → [SF2] MODE → ReceiveCh

In the Pattern mode: [PATTERN] → Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → Part selection → [F1] VOICE → [SF2] MODE → ReceiveCh

[UTILITY] → [F6] PLUG → [SF2] MIDI

Track 1 Transmit Channel = 1 (Port 1) Part 1 Receive Channel = 2

Port 1

Port 2

Port 3

Part 2 Receive Channel = 3

Part 3 Receive Channel = 4

Part 4 Receive Channel = 1

Part 15 Receive Channel = 5

Part 16 Receive Channel = 6

Part 17 Receive Channel = 8

Part 18 Receive Channel = 7

Part 19 Receive Channel = 10

Part 20 Receive Channel = 13

Part 31 Receive Channel = 14

Part 32 Receive Channel = 15

Part 33

Part 34

Part 35

Part 46

Part 47 Receive Channel = 11

Part 48 Receive Channel = 16

Track 2 Transmit Channel = 2 (Port 1)

Track 3 Transmit Channel = 3 (Port 1)

Track 4 Transmit Channel = 4 (Port 1)

Track 5 Transmit Channel = 5 (Port 1)

Track 6 Transmit Channel = 6 (Port 1)

Track 7 Transmit Channel = 7 (Port 2)

Track 8 Transmit Channel = 8 (Port 2)

Track 9 Transmit Channel = off (Port off)

Track 10 Transmit Channel = 10 (Port 2)

Track 11 Transmit Channel = 11 (Port 3)

Track 12 Transmit Channel = off (Port off)

Track 13 Transmit Channel = 13 (Port 2)

Track 14 Transmit Channel = 14 (Port 2)

Track 15 Transmit Channel = 15 (Port 2)

Track 16 Transmit Channel = 16 (Port 3)

Sequencer block (example)

When setting the Transmit Channel/Port to the

following example in the Song/Pattern mode or

on the external MIDI sequencer or on the

computer:

Tone Generator block (example)

When a Multi-part Plug-in Board (PLG100-XG) and a two

Single part Plug-in Board are installed to this synthesizer and

setting the Receive Channel/Port to the following example:

Multi-part

Plug-in Board

Single part

Plug-in Board

Single part

Plug-in Board

Parts 33-46 are not used.

Basic Structure

Internal Structure (System Overview)

165

Owner’s Manual

Audio Input Part (AUDIO IN)

The Performance mode, Song mode, and Pattern mode are capable of handling the audio input signal as a Part. Various

parameters such as volume, pan, and effect can be set to this Part and the sound is output together with other Parts. Other

available settings include how stereo input signals are handled, as well the output assignment of the audio Part.

These parameters are set and stored for each Performance, Song Mixing, and Pattern Mixing. Please note that the Audio

Input Part is not available in the Voice mode.

Among the following three types of Audio Input parts which this synthesizer can handle, two types (ﬁve stereo parts if the

mLAN16E has been installed) can be handled at the same time, since the optional mLAN16E and AIEB2 cannot be

installed together.

Parameters for the above Parts can be set with the following operations.

n Although the Insertion Effects of this synthesizer can be applied to the A/D Input Part, they cannot be applied to the mLAN Input part and the AIEB2

Input part.

Sequencer Block

This block lets you create songs and patterns by recording and editing your performances as MIDI data (from the controller

block), then playing it back with the tone generator block. The sequencer block can be operated in the Song mode, in the

Pattern mode, and with the Arpeggio feature. When a Song or a Pattern is played back, the musical data of each sequence track

is transmitted to the tone generator block according to the Transmit Channel settings.

n Songs can be played back only in the Song mode. They cannot be played back in other modes.

Patterns can be played back only in the Pattern mode. They cannot be played back in other modes.

Arpeggios can be played back in any modes.

Song and Pattern

Songs and Patterns are MIDI sequence data consisting of up to 16 tracks.

A Song on this synthesizer is effectively the same as a Song on a MIDI sequencer, and playback automatically stops at the end

of the recorded data.

In the MOTIF ES, the term “Pattern” refers to a relatively short musical or rhythmic phrase — 1 to 256 measures — which is used

for looped playback. Therefore, once Pattern playback starts, it continues until you press the [■] (Stop) button. This synthesizer

features a variety of preset Phrase data that is used as the basic material in making up Patterns.

A/D Input part This part (one stereo part) is input from the external audio equipment connected to the A/D INPUT jack.

mLAN Input parts (when the

optional mLAN16E has been

installed)

These four stereo parts are input from external mLAN-compatible audio equipment connected to the mLAN

jack via a single IEEE1394 cable.

AIEB2 parts (when the optional

AIEB2 has been installed)

This part (one stereo part) is input from external audio equipment connected to the OPTICAL INPUT or the

DIGITAL INPUT (Coaxial) connector.

Either one of the connectors (OPTICAL or DIGITAL) can be used; however, both cannot be used at the same

time. Select which connector is used for digital input with the following operation in the Utility mode.

[UTILITY] → [F2] I/O → [SF1] INPUT → Digital

In the Performance mode [PERFORM] → Performance selection→ [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F5] AUDIO IN

In the Song mode [SONG] → Song selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F5] AUDIO IN

In the Pattern mode [PATTERN] → Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F5] AUDIO IN

Basic Structure

Internal Structure (System Overview)

166

Owner’s Manual

■ Song data structure

The following illustration shows the track structure of a Song. Songs are created by recording MIDI sequence data to individual

tracks and by setting tone generator related parameters (in Song Mixing).

● Song Mixing

Even if you record your keyboard performance to a Song

track, the setup data (non-note events such as voice, pan,

volume) which for proper playback should be recorded at the

top of the Song will not be recorded to it. For this reason, the

setup data handled as Song Mixing settings should be stored

in the Song Mixing Store mode.

Because the Song Mixing is a collection of settings related to

the tone generator, it can be applied to the sequence data

transmitted from the external MIDI sequencer as well as this

synthesizer’s Song playback.

n When the Multi-Part Plug-in Board PLG100-XG has been installed,

Mixing of sixteen parts (17 - 32) can be set. Please note that the Multi-

part Plug-in Part (17 - 32) settings apply not to one individual Song but

to all 64 Songs.

● Scene

A Song Scene is a “snapshot” of important settings, and

contains parameter settings such as transpose, tempo, and

track mute and the tone generator related parameters

controllable from the Knobs with the [PAN/SEND] or [TONE]

lamp turned on, and the Control Sliders. Five settings can be

registered to the [SF1] - [SF5] buttons for each Song.

● Song Chain

This function allows songs to be “chained” together for

automatic sequential playback. The Song Chain can be created

and played back from the [SONG] → [F6] CHAIN display. This

instrument allows you to create one Song Chain data.

Song 64

Musical performance data

Song Mixing (Tone Generator related settings)

Song 63

Song 02

Song 01

Tempo track

Track 1

Track 2

Track 3

Track 16

Part 1

Part 2

Part 3

Part 16

Mixing settings

Part 17

Part 18

Part 19

Part 32

Mixing settings

Part PLG1

Part PLG2

Part PLG3

Audio Input part

Mixing settings

Mixing Voice 16

Mixing Voice 01

Please note that the Multi-part Plug-in Part (17-32) settings apply not to one individual Song but to all 64 Songs.

Set in the Song Play mode

Created in the Song Record mode, Song Edit mode, and Song Job mode

Created in the Mixing Voice Edit mode

Created in the Sampling mode entered from the Song mode

Set in the Song Mixing mode and Song Mixing Edit mode

MIDI sequence data

Groove, Transmit Channel/Port, Track loop settings

Sample Voice

Scene track

Tempo change

Scene 1 Scene 2 Scene 3 Scene 4 Scene 5

Mixing Common Edit Parameters

applied to all the parts

Track mute status/Scene memory

change/Arpeggio type change

(including tempo, transpose, etc.)

Song 01 Song 22 Song 15

Internal Structure (System Overview)

167

Owner’s Manual

Basic Structure

■ Pattern data structure

The following illustration shows the track structure of a Pattern. Patterns are created by recording MIDI sequence data to

individual tracks, by assigning Phrases (Preset and User) which is material for a Pattern to individual tracks, and by setting tone

generator related parameters (in a Pattern Mixing).

● Pattern Mixing

Even if you record your keyboard performance to a Pattern

track, the setup data (non-note events such as voice, pan,

volume) which for proper playback should be recorded at the

top of the Pattern will not be recorded to it. For this reason, the

setup data handled as Pattern Mixing settings should be

stored in the Pattern Mixing Store mode. Unlike the Song, only

the voice number is recorded to a track as a Track Voice

(Phrase Voice) which is used for playback normally. Because

the Pattern Mixing is a collection of settings related to the tone

generator, it can be applied to the sequence data transmitted

from the external MIDI sequencer as well as this synthesizer’s

Pattern playback.

n When the Multi-Part Plug-in Board PLG100-XG has been installed,

Mixing of sixteen parts (17 - 32) can be set. Please note that the Multi-

Part Plug-in Part (17 - 32) settings apply not to one individual Pattern

but to all 64 Patterns.

● Section

A Pattern consists of one or more “Sections” (Pattern

variations). You can play the Pattern by specifying a Section

after selecting a Pattern.

● Phrase

This is the basic MIDI sequence data – and the smallest unit –

used in creating a Pattern. “Phrase” is a short musical/

rhythmic passage for a single instrument, such as a rhythm

pattern for the rhythm part, a bass line for the bass part, or a

chord backing for the guitar part. This synthesizer features

687 Preset Phrases, and features memory space for 256 of

your own original User Phrases.

Mixing settings

User Phrase 1 - 256

(MIDI sequence data)

Mixing Common Edit Parameters

applied to all the parts

Part 1 Mixing settings Part 17 Mixing settings

Part 18 Mixing settings

Part 19 Mixing settings

Part 32 Mixing settings

16 Sections

Mixing Voice 01

Mixing Voice 16

Part 2 Mixing settings

Part 3 Mixing settings

Part 16 Mixing settings

Pattern Chain

Part PLG1

Part PLG2

Part PLG3

Audio Input part

Mixing settings

Set in the Pattern Play mode

Created in the Pattern Record mode, Pattern Edit mode, and Pattern Job mode

Created in the Mixing Voice Edit mode

Created in the Sampling mode entered from the Pattern mode

Created in the Pattern Chain mode

Set in the Pattern Mixing mode and Pattern Mixing Edit mode

Pattern 64

Pattern 01

Groove, Transmit Channel/Port, Track loop, Track Voice settings

User Phrase 1 - 256

(MIDI sequence data)

Preset Phrase 1 - 687

(MIDI sequence data)

Mixing Common Edit Parameters

applied to all the parts

Please note that the Multi-part Plug-in

Part (17-32) settings apply not to one

individual Pattern but to all 64 Patterns.

Copy the Phrase

recorded to a track of

another pattern

The Patch function lets you assign

a Phrase to each track.

Track 1 MIDI sequence data

Track 2 MIDI sequence data

Track 3 MIDI sequence data

Track 16 MIDI sequence data

User Phrase

Preset Phrase

Sample Voice

Pattern Mixing (Tone Generator related settings)

Basic Structure

Internal Structure (System Overview)

168

Owner’s Manual

● Pattern Chain

Pattern Chain allows you to string several different Sections

(within a single Pattern) together to make a single Song. You

can have the synthesizer automatically change Sections by

creating Pattern Chains in this way beforehand.

You can create the Pattern Chain by recording a Pattern

playback with Section changes from the [PATTERN] → [F6]

CHAIN display or by editing the timing of Section changes

from the [PATTERN] → [F6] CHAIN → [EDIT] display. The

created Pattern Chain can be played back when calling up

the [PATTERN] → [F6] CHAIN display.

You can also use them when creating Songs based on a

certain Pattern, since the created Pattern Chain can be

converted into a Song from the [PATTERN] → [F6] CHAIN →

[EDIT] → [F3] SONG display. This synthesizer lets you create

one Pattern Chain for each Pattern.

■ MIDI tracks and Sample tracks

The Song/Pattern tracks (1 - 16) of this synthesizer are

divided into two groups: MIDI tracks and Sample tracks.

MIDI tracks are created by recording your keyboard

performance in the Song Record mode/Pattern Record mode.

On the other hand, Sample tracks are created by recording

and obtaining a Sample in the Sampling mode.

● Sample tracks — with Sample Voices

Voices which are automatically created and stored using the

Sampling feature in the sequencer (Song/Pattern) mode, are

referred to as “Sample Voices.” Tracks using these Sample

Voices are referred to as “Sample” tracks — to distinguish

them from the MIDI tracks. Sample Voices are stored as

original, dedicated Voices for each Song or Pattern. If you

wish to use a Sample Voice of a certain song/pattern for

another song/pattern, execute the copy operation in the Song

Job mode (page 226) or in the Pattern Job mode (page 244).

■ MIDI track recording method

The following explanations are important points for you to

keep in mind as you record your User Songs/Patterns. The

recording methods explained here should be set from the

Setup display in the Song Record mode/Pattern Record mode

before recording.

n See page 173 for details about the Sample track recording method.

● Realtime recording and Step recording

Realtime recording

With realtime recording, the instrument functions in the same

way as a tape recorder, recording the performance data as it

is played. This allows you to capture all the nuances of an

actual performance. This method is used for the Recording

types explained below, such as Replace, Overdub, Loop, and

Punch In/Out.

Step recording (Type = step)

With step recording, you can compose your performance by

“writing” it down one event at a time. This is a non-realtime,

step recording method — similar to writing music notation

onto paper.

● Replace and Overdub (Song/Pattern)

Replace

You can use this method when you want to overwrite an

already recorded track with new data. The ﬁrst recording is

lost, and the new one takes its place.

Overdub

You can use this method when you want to add more data to a

track that already contains data. The ﬁrst recording is kept,

and the new one is added. This method lets you build up a

complex phrase together with Loop recording (below).

● Loop Recording (Pattern)

Pattern repeats the rhythm pattern of several measures (1 to

256 measures) in a “loop,” and its recording is also done

using loops. This method is used when recording a Pattern

Phrase using the Overdub method (above). As shown in the

example below, notes that you record will play back from the

next repetition (loop), letting you record while hearing

previously recorded material.

When recording a rhythm of Bass Drum, Snare Drum,

Hi-Hat cymbal in order:

n Loop Recording can only be used with Realtime recording.

[SONG] or [PATTERN] → [●] (Record) → [F1] SETUP → Type

Pattern Chain

Example

Pattern track

Section J Section H Section P

Scene track

Tempo track

Section change

Track mute setting

Tempo change

[PATTERN] → [●] (Record) → [F1] SETUP → loop = on

Loop 1st round

Loop 2nd round

Loop 3rd round

Bass Drum

Snare Drum

Bass Drum

Hi-Hat

Snare Drum

Bass Drum

Basic Structure

Internal Structure (System Overview)

169

Owner’s Manual

● Punch In/Out (Song)

You can use this method when you want to re-record only over a speciﬁc area of the track. You’ll need to set the start and end

points before re-recording.

In the eight-measure example below, the third measures through the ﬁfth measure are re-recorded.

n Punch In/Out Recording can only be used with Realtime recording.

n Note that the Punch In/Out method always replaces (destroys) the original data over the speciﬁed area.

Arpeggio

This function lets you automatically trigger musical and rhythmic phrases using the current Voice by simply pressing a note or

notes on the keyboard. The Arpeggio sequence also changes in response to the actual notes or chords you play, giving you a

wide variety of inspiring musical phrases and ideas — both in composing and performing.

n A single Arpeggio type can be played back at the same time even in the Performance, Song, and Pattern mode, enabling you to play multiple tone

generator’s parts simultaneously.

■ Category of the Arpeggio type

The Arpeggio types are divided into 18 categories as listed below.

n Keyboard Mega Voices

Normal voices use velocity switching to make the sound quality and/or level of a voice according to how strongly or softly you play it. This makes the voices

sound authentic and natural. However, with Keyboard Mega Voices, each velocity range (the measure of your playing strength) has a completely different

sound. For example, a guitar voice includes the sounds of various performance techniques. In conventional instruments, different voices having those

sounds would be called up via MIDI and played in combination to achieve the desired effect. However, now with Keyboard Mega voices, a convincing guitar

part can be played with just a single voice, using speciﬁc velocity values to play the desired sounds.

LCD Category Name Description

Seq Synth Sequence Various arpeggio phrases suited for synth voices.

ChSq Synth Chord Sequence Various rhythmic chord phrases or synth voices.

HySq Synth Hybrid Sequence Various arpeggio types programmed so that bass phrases are played with the lower keys and chords or melodies

are played with the midrange and higher keys. These arpeggio types ar e useful for split voice combinations. In

addition, there are also Hybrid Velocity (“HybVel...”) types that feature different phrases for different velocity

ranges, letting you change the arpeggio phrase depending on how str ongly you play the keyboard.

APKb Acoustic Piano & Keyboard Various arpeggio types suited for piano and other keyboar d voices, such as electric piano and clav.

Orgn Organ Various arpeggio types suited for organ voices.

GtPl Guitar & Plucked Various arpeggio types suited for guitar and harp voices.

GtKM Guitar - Keyboard Mega Voice Various arpeggio types suited for guitar Keyboard Mega voices (see note below).

Bass Bass Various arpeggio types suited for bass or synth bass voices.

BaKM Bass - Keyboard Mega Voice Various arpeggio types suited for bass Keyboar d Mega voices (see note below).

Strn Strings Various arpeggio types suited for strings and pizzicato voices.

Bras Brass Various arpeggio types suited for brass voices.

RdPp Reed & Pipe Various arpeggio types suited for saxophone and ﬂ ute voices.

Lead Synth Lead Various arpeggio types suited for synth lead voices.

PdMe Synth Pad & Musical FX Various arpeggio types suited for synth pad voices and special musical ef fects voices, including percussive

sounds.

CPrc Chromatic Percussion Various arpeggio types suited for chromatic percussion voices.

DrPc Drum & Percussion Various arpeggio types suited for drum and per cussion voices (drum kits).

Comb Combination Various arpeggio types suited for Per formances. These are combination arpeggios, with separate phrases

suitable for drum voices, bass voices, and chord/melody instruments.

Cntr Control Various arpeggio types programmed primarily with Control Change and Pitch Bend data. These arpeggio types

change the tone or pitch of the sound, rather than play speciﬁ c notes. In fact, some types contain no note data at

all. When using a type of this category, set the KeyMode parameter to “direct” in each mode.

1234567 8

Recording start

Recording stop

Before re-recording

Punch In

After re-recording

Newly recorded data

Punch Out

Internal Structure (System Overview)

170

Owner’s Manual

Basic Structure

■ Arpeggio playback types

The MOTIF ES features a total of 1787 Arpeggio types divided into 18 categories, each with its own playback type designed for

use with particular types of Voices, as described below.

● Arpeggios for Normal Voices

Arpeggio types (belonging to the categories except for the DrPC and Cntr) created for use of Normal Voices have the following

two playback types.

n The two playback types above are not distinguished by the category name or type name. You’ll have to actually play the types and hear the difference.

n Since these types are programmed for Normal Voices, using them with Drum Voices may not give musically appropriate results.

● Arpeggios for Drum/Percussion Voices — Category: DrPc

These arpeggio types are programmed speciﬁcally for use with Drum Voices, giving you instant access to various rhythm

patterns. Three different playback types are available.

n The three playback types above are not distinguished by the category name or type name. You’ll have to actually play the types and hear the difference.

n Since these types are programmed for Drum Voices, using them with Normal Voices may not give musically appropriate results.

● Arpeggios for Performances — Category: Comb

The Arpeggio types belonging to the category “Comb” are programmed so that different arpeggios are triggered — an arpeggio

for a Normal Voice and an arpeggio for a Drum Voice — depending on the played note. These types are useful in the

Performance mode in which multiple voices (Drum Voice and Normal Voice) are combined in a layer since these types enable

you trigger the arpeggio for the Normal Voice and the Drum Voice at the same time.

● Arpeggios containing mainly non-note events — Category: Cntr

These arpeggio types are programmed primarily with Control Change and Pitch Bend data. They are used to change the tone or

pitch of the sound, rather than play speciﬁc notes. In fact, some types contain no note data at all. When using a type of this

category, set the KeyMode parameter to “direct” with the following operations.

Playback only of the played notes The Arpeggio is played back using only the played note and its octave notes.

Playback of a programmed

sequence according to the played

chord

These Arpeggio types have the several sequences each of which is suited for a certain chord type. Even if you press

only one note, the Arpeggio is played back using the programmed sequence — meaning that notes other than the

ones you play may be sounded. Adding notes to those already held changes the sequence accordingly — in other

words, the arpeggio plays back according to the chord you play.

Playback of a drum pattern Pressing any note(s) will trigger the same rhythm pattern.

Playback of a drum pattern, plus

additional played notes

(assigned drum instruments)

Pressing any note will trigger the same rhythm pattern. Adding notes to the one already held produces additional

sounds (assigned drum instruments) for the drum pattern,

Playback only of the played notes

(assigned drum instruments)

Playing a note or notes will trigger a rhythm pattern using only the notes played (assigned drum instruments). Keep in

mind that even if you play the same notes, the triggered rhythm pattern differs depending on the order of the notes

played. This gives you access to different rhythm patterns using the same instruments simply by changing the order

in which you play the notes.

Voice mode [VOICE] → Voice selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F3] ARP → [SF1] TYPE → KeyMode

Performance [PERFORM] → Performance selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F3] ARP → [SF1] TYPE → KeyMode

Song mode [SONG] → Song selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F3] ARP → [SF1] TYPE → KeyMode

Pattern mode [PATTERN] → Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F3] ARP → [SF1] TYPE → KeyMode

Internal Structure (System Overview)

171

Owner’s Manual

Basic Structure

■ Arpeggio related parameters

The Arpeggio related parameters can be set from the following displays, depending on the selected mode.

● Voice mode

n MIDI output parameters for Arpeggio playback are set for each Voice in the Voice mode. In the other modes, however, they can be set for each

Performance, Song, and Pattern.

● Performance mode

● Song mode

n Arpeggio related parameters in the Song mode belong to the Mixing. Therefore, if desired, store them to internal memory (DRAM) in the Song Mixing Store

mode and save them to the SmartMedia/USB storage device as Song data in the File mode.

● Pattern mode

n Arpeggio related parameters in the Pattern mode belong to the Mixing. Therefore, if desired, store them to internal memory (DRAM) in the Pattern Mixing

Store mode and save them to the SmartMedia/USB storage device as Pattern data in the File mode.

Arpeggio type parameters called up when selecting a Voice [VOICE] → Voice selection → [F6] ARP Page 189

[VOICE] → Voice selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F3] ARP Page 191

Assigning Arpeggio types to the [SF1] - [SF5] buttons for each Voice [VOICE] → Voice selection → [F1] PLAY Page 188

MIDI output parameters for Arpeggio playback for all the Voices [VOICE] → [UTILITY] → [F3] VOICE → [SF3] ARP CH Page 262

Arpeggio type parameters called up when selecting a Performance

(including MIDI output parameters for Arpeggio playback)

[PERFORM] → Performance selection → [F6] ARP Page 213

[PERFORM] → Performance selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] →

[F3] ARP

Page 214

Assigning Arpeggio types to the [SF1] - [SF5] buttons for each

Performance

[PERFORM] → Performance selection → [F1] PLAY Page 212

Parameters about the Arpeggio type called up when selecting a Song

(including MIDI output parameters for Arpeggio playback)

[SONG] → Song selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] →

[F3] ARP

Page 234

Assigning Arpeggio types to the [SF1] - [SF5] buttons for each Song [SONG] → Song selection → [F1] PLAY Page 221

[SONG] → Song selection → [●] (Record) → [F3] ARP Page 223

Arpeggio type parameters in recording [SONG] → Song selection → [●] (Record) → [F4] REC ARP Page 223

Parameters about the Arpeggio type called up when selecting a Pattern

(including MIDI output parameters for Arpeggio playback)

[PATTERN] → Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] →

[COMMON] → [F3] ARP

Page 248

Assigning Arpeggio types to the [SF1] - [SF5] buttons for each Pattern [PATTERN] → Pattern selection → [F1] Play Page 241

[PATTERN] → Pattern selection → [●] (Record) → [F3] ARP Page 243

Arpeggio type parameters in recording [PATTERN] → Pattern selection → [●] (Record) → [F4] REC ARP Page 243

Internal Structure (System Overview)

172

Owner’s Manual

Basic Structure

Sampling Block

Sampling is a powerful function that lets you bring your own recorded sounds – voice, instrument, rhythm, special sound effects,

etc. – into the system of this synthesizer, and play those sounds just as you would the Voices of the instrument.

In order to use the Sampling features of the instrument, you’ll need to install DIMM memory modules (sold separately) to the instrument.

n In addition to being able to record samples directly with the MOTIF ES, you can also import existing audio data (in WAV or AIFF ﬁle format) in the File mode.

This lets you use audio you’ve recorded and edited on computer with the instrument.

127



2 A



2 G



A/D INPUT

GAIN

OPTICAL DIGITAL

OUTIN

DAT

CARD

3.3V

Microphone, etc. CD, MD, etc.

USB connector

mLAN device

(Data Rate S400)

A/D INPUT jacks

OPTICAL IN connector or

DIGITAL IN connector

(when the optional AIEB2

has been installed)

mLAN connector

(when the optional

mLAN16E has been

installed)

Optional DIMM (up to 512MB)

Velocity

Key number (Note number)

Waveform

Sample 1

(Key bank)

Sample 2

(Key bank)

Sample 4

(Key bank)

Sample 3

(Key bank)

Sample 5

(Key bank)

USB

TO HOSTTO DEVICE

Sampling Source

Loading the WAV ﬁle/AIFF ﬁle from

the [FILE] → [F3] LOAD display,

setting the ﬁle type to “Waveform.”

Before sampling, connect the source to the

appropriate connector.

SmartMedia/

USB storage device

Load

Sampling

Executing from the [INTEGRATED SAMPLING] →

[F6] REC display in the Sampling mode

Sample (Wave)

Sampling Destination

Before sampling, set the appropriate location for storing the sample (Waveform, User

Voice) from the [INTEGRATED SAMPLING] → [F1] DEST display.

Waveform

User Voice Sample Voice

(When executing the Sampling function

in the Voice mode/Performance mode)

(When executing the Sampling function

in the Song mode/Pattern mode)

Internal Structure (System Overview)

173

Owner’s Manual

Basic Structure

Data created by Sampling

Regardless of the mode, the raw Sampled data is the same,

of course. However, various parameters are different,

depending on the particular mode or settings. Brieﬂy, here is

an explanation of what kinds of data are created in the

Sampling function.

● Sampling data common to all modes

Wave (Sample data)

This is the raw audio data stored in this synthesizer’s internal

memory when sampling.

Key Bank

The note range and velocity range to which the Sample is

assigned, is called the Key Bank.

Waveform

The group of Key Banks to which sample data is assigned is

called the Waveform.

●Data created by sampling in the Voice/Performance

mode

User Voice

Before you can play the recorded/imported sample data

(Waves), you’ll need to save them as User Voices, after which

they can be selected and played from the keyboard or

sequencer — the same as other Voices. Also, these User

Voices can be assigned as Performance parts – just as with

the Preset Voices.

● Data created by sampling in the Song/Pattern mode

Sample Voice

When sampling in the Song/Pattern mode, the recorded/

imported sample data is automatically stored as a Sample

Voice.

Sample Voices can be assigned to the Mixing parts

corresponding to the track which was assigned from the

[INTEGRATED SAMPLING] → [F1] DEST display, and they

can be sounded while Song/Pattern data is being played

back. Sample Voices are original, dedicated Voices for the

particular Song/Pattern that was selected when sampling.

Because of this, you cannot take a Sample Voice belonging to

one Song or Pattern and use it in another Song or Pattern.

You cannot select Sample Voices in the Voice or Performance mode.

(However, you CAN select the Wave of the Sample Voice in Voice Edit.)

Note Data

When you set the Type to “Sample + note” from the [SONG] or

[PATTERN] → [INTEGRATED SAMPLING] → [F2] SOURCE

display and execute Sampling, a Sample Voice is created

and the sampled wave is assigned to a speciﬁed note and

recorded as simple MIDI sequence data to a speciﬁed track

(as shown below).

Key Bank and Sequence data

When you set the Type to “Sample + seq” from the [SONG] or

[PATTERN] → [INTEGRATED SAMPLING] → [F2] SOURCE

display and execute Sampling, a Sample Voice is created

and the sampled wave is “sliced” or divided into several

component samples — and each is assigned to speciﬁc

notes, with sequence data for playing the notes to recreate

the sample. This is useful with rhythmic samples, giving you

ﬁne control over the playback, including tempo changes.

Song or Pattern

Sampling

Track 1

Track 2

Track 3

Track 16

Specify the track.

Record to create a

Sample Voice.

Sample

Assign the Sample to a

specified key (note) to

create a Sample Voice.

Sequence data

Sample

Slice the Sample and

assign the sliced Sample

to specified keys (notes)

to create a Sample Voice.

Sequence data

Basic Structure

Internal Structure (System Overview)

174

Owner’s Manual

Waveform and User Voices/Sample Voices

n When executing the Sampling in the Sampling mode entered from the

Voice mode/Performance mode, you can specify the Waveform

number and User Voice number as a Destination (location to which the

sampled wave is stored) beforehand. Likewise, you can specify the

same parameters also when loading the WAV ﬁle/AIFF ﬁle in the File

mode entered from the Voice mode/Performance mode.

n When executing the Sampling in the Sampling mode entered from the

Song mode/Pattern mode, you can specify the track number as a

Destination (location to which the sampled wave is stored)

beforehand. Likewise, you can specify the same parameters also

when loading the WAV ﬁle/AIFF ﬁle in the File mode entered from the

Song mode/Pattern mode. When creating Waveforms, sampled audio

waves are automatically stored starting from the lowest numbered

available space.

n Up to 128 keybanks can be assigned to a single waveform. Up to a

maximum of 4096 key banks can be created on the instrument.

■ How to select and hear the Waveform

You can select and hear any of Waveforms from the following

display in the Voice Edit mode.

If you set the Bank parameter to “usr wave,” you can select

and hear the Waveform obtained by using the Sampling

function or loading the WAV ﬁle/AIFF ﬁle.

You can also select and hear the User Waveform from the

following display in the Sampling mode.

A B C P

001

002

003

004

005

006

007

008

009

010

1023

1024

001

002

003

004

005

128

127



2 A



2 G



Velocity

Waveform

Sample 1

(Key bank)

Sample 2

(Key bank)

Sample 4

(Key bank)

Sample 3

(Key bank)

Sample 5

(Key bank)

User Voice

Pattern 64

Pattern 02

Pattern 01

Pattern

Sample Voices (recorded to each track)

16 sections

Track 2

Track 3

Track 1

Track 16

Track 2

Track 16

Track 1

Track 3

Sampling

When entering Sampling mode

from Voice/Performance mode

Loading WAV/AIFF files

Waveform

(User 001 - 1024)

When entering File mode from

Voice/Performance mode

Sampling

When entering Sampling mode

from Pattern mode

Loading WAV/AIFF files

When entering File mode from

Pattern mode

Sampling

When entering Sampling mode

from Song mode

Loading WAV/AIFF files

When entering File mode from

Song mode

Song 64

Song 02

Song 01

[VOICE] → [EDIT] → Element selection → [F1] OSC → [SF1]

WAVE

[INTEGRATED SAMPLING] → [EDIT] → [F1] KEY BANK

Internal Structure (System Overview)

175

Owner’s Manual

Basic Structure

Trigger mode

The Trigger mode is a convenient feature in Sampling that lets

you determine how sample recording is started — manually

or automatically, based on the audio level.

■ Start recording manually

Regardless of the audio input signal level or the Song/Pattern

playback status, sampling starts soon after you press the [F6]

REC button in the Sampling Setup display. Sampling also

starts regardless of the playback/stop status of the Song/

Pattern.

■ Start recording when the input signal exceeds the

Trigger Level

After pressing the [F6] REC button in the Sampling Setup

display (in any mode), sampling starts as soon as a strong

enough audio signal is received. The threshold for this audio-

triggered start is called the Trigger Level (explained in the

illustration below).

As you can see, the higher the Trigger Level setting, the

louder the input audio needs to be in order to start sampling.

On the other hand, if the Trigger Level is set too low, a soft

noise may be enough to inadvertently start sampling.

■ Start recording when the Song/Pattern playback

reaches a speciﬁed point

After pressing the [F6] REC button in the Sampling Setup

display, start and stop of sampling is linked to playback of the

Song/Pattern.

This setting is available only when the Song/Pattern mode

and recording type (Rec Type) are set to “Slice + Seq” or

“Sample + Note.”

[INTEGRATED SAMPLING] → [F6] REC → TriggerMode

=manual

[INTEGRATED SAMPLING] → [F6] REC → TriggerMode

=level

ABC D E

Level

Sample recording starts here.

Recording

trigger level.

Recording

trigger level.

[INTEGRATED SAMPLING] → [F6] REC → TriggerMode =

meas

1234567 8

1234567

Song/

Pattern

start

Sampling start

Sampling stop

Punch In

Punch Out

Wave data

Basic Structure

Internal Structure (System Overview)

176

Owner’s Manual

Sample playback types

Samples can be set to play back in the following three

different ways.

■ One Shot

When you press a note on the keyboard, the Sample plays

from beginning to end just once. This type of playback is

commonly used for drum and percussion sounds.

■ Loop

This is used primarily to create long continuous sounds, such

as brass and strings, or instruments with naturally long decay,

such as piano. An appropriate part of the sample near the

end is looped to reproduce a long sustain or decay.

When you play a note on the keyboard, the Sample plays from

the start point to the end point. It then returns to the loop start

point and plays to the end point again, and keeps doing this

until you release the note. With musical instruments in

general, the characteristic part of the sound (the “attack”

section) is usually at the beginning, just after the start point.

After this, the sound does not vary a great deal while the note

is being held, and you can set the loop and end points at

either end of this section. When playing back a Sample of an

instrument that has been looped like this, the attack section of

the sound is played back once and then the looped section is

played back continuously until you release the note. Looping

is also way of creating usable instrument sounds without

using up too much memory.

You can set each point in the Sampling mode. Since this

synthesizer is capable of displaying the entire image of the

sampled audio data in the LCD (zoom in and zoom out are

available), you can edit the loop points visually – making

sample editing accurate and easy.

■ Reverse

When you press a note on the keyboard, the Sample plays

from end to beginning just once. This is useful for creating

reversed cymbal sounds and other special effects.

[INTEGRATED SAMPLING] → [EDIT] → [F3] PARAM →

PlayMode

[INTEGRATED SAMPLING] → [EDIT] → [F3] PARAM →

PlayMode = oneshot

[INTEGRATED SAMPLING] → [EDIT] → [F3] PARAM →

PlayMode = loop

Start Point

Key on

End Point

[INTEGRATED SAMPLING] → [EDIT] → [F3] PARAM →

PlayMode = reverse

Start Point End Point

Sample Wave Loop Playback

Top Point

Start Point End Point

Internal Structure (System Overview)

177

Owner’s Manual

Basic Structure

Effect Block

This block applies effects to the output of the tone generator

block, processing and enhancing the sound using

sophisticated DSP (digital signal processing) technology.

Effect structure

The effect processing of this synthesizer features the System

Effects, Insertion Effects, Master Effect, Part EQ (Equalizer),

and Master EQ (Equalizer).

■ System Effects (Reverb, Chorus)

System Effects are applied to the overall sound, whether it be

a Voice, an entire Performance, a Song, etc.

With System effects, the sound of each Part is sent to the

effect according to the effect Send Level for each Part. The

processed sound (referred to as “wet”) is sent back to the

mixer, according to the Return Level, and output – after being

mixed with the unprocessed “dry” sound. This arrangement

lets you prepare an optimum balance of the effect sound and

the original sound of the Parts.

Reverb

The Reverb effects add a warm ambience to the sound,

simulating the complex reﬂections of actual performance

spaces, such as a concert hall or a small club. A total of 20

different Reverb types are available.

Chorus

The Chorus effects use various types of modulation

processing, including ﬂanger and phaser, to enhance the

sound in a variety of ways. A total of 49 types are available,

including reverb and delay effects.

n About the System Effect related display in each mode, see pages 179

and 180.

■ Insertion Effects A, B

Insertion effects can be applied individually to each part.

Insertion effects are mainly used to directly process a single

part. The depth of the effect is adjusted by setting the dry/wet

balance. Since an Insertion effect can only be applied to one

particular part, it should be used for sounds you want to

drastically change or for sounds that use an effect unintended

for other sounds. You can also set the balance so that only the

effect sound is heard, by setting Wet to 100%.

This synthesizer features eight sets of Insertion effects (one

set has A and B units). They can be applied to all parts of the

Performance, and applied to eight parts (maximum) of the

Song/Pattern.

A total of 116 different Chorus types are available.

n In the Voice mode, only one set of the Insertion effects is available.

n For details on the displays related to the Insertion effects in each

mode, see pages 179 and 180.

n Among the AUDIO IN parts, Insertion effects cannot be applied to the

mLAN parts and AIEB2 parts.

■ Plug-in Insertion Effects

This is a special effect system, only available when an effect-

type Plug-in Board is installed. Plug-in Board effects are not

available in the Voice mode.

n For details on the displays related to the Plug-in Insertion effects in

each mode, see pages 179 and 180.

■ Master Effect

This block applies effects to the ﬁnal stereo output signal of

the entire sound. A total of 8 different Master Effect types are

available.

n For details on the displays related to the Master effects in each mode,

see pages 179 and 180.

EFFECT Buttons

Three EFFECT buttons on the panel let you switch each

effect block on and off.

Press the [INSERTION] button below “BYPASS” so that

the lamp lights to turn the Insertion effects off. You can

specify which Insertion effects (only the internal

Insertion effect, only the Plug-in Insertion effect, or both

of them) are bypassed from the [UTILITY] → [F1]

GENERAL → [SF3] EF BYPS display in the Utility mode.

Press the [SYSTEM] button below “BYPASS” so that the

lamp lights to turn the System effects off. You can

specify which System effects (only the Reverb effect,

only the Chorus effect, or both of them) are bypassed

from the [UTILITY] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF3] EF BYPS

display in the Utility mode.

Press the [MASTER EFFECT] button so that the lamp

lights to turn the Master effect on. Keep in mind that

pressing and holding this button calls up the Master

effect setup display in the current mode.

Controlling the Master effect by using the Knobs

When pressing the [ARP FX] button and the [EQ] button

simultaneously (both lamps light), you can control the

Knobs to adjust the Master effect related parameters

speciﬁed in the [UTILITY] → [F4] CTL ASN → [SF5]

MEF display of the Utility mode.

BYPASS

INSERTION SYSTEM

MASTER

EFFECT

Basic Structure

Internal Structure (System Overview)

178

Owner’s Manual

■ Equalizer (EQ)

Usually an equalizer is used to correct the sound output from

amps or speakers to match the special character of the room,

or to change the tonal character of the sound. The sound is

divided into several frequency bands, and adjustments are

made to the sound by raising or lowering the level of each

band.

By adjusting the sound according to the genre – classical

music being more reﬁned, pop music more crisp, and rock

music more dynamic – you can draw out the special

characteristics of the music and make your performance

more enjoyable.

Three separate EQ sections are available on the instrument:

Element EQ, Part EQ, and Master EQ.

● Element EQ

The Element EQ is applied to each element of the Normal

Voice and each key of the Drum Voice. You can specify which

shape is used among the two shapes described below and

set the related parameters.

Peaking type

This type of EQ shape lets you attenuate/boost the signal at

the speciﬁed Frequency setting.

Shelving type

This type of EQ shape lets you attenuate/boost the signal at

frequencies above or below the speciﬁed Frequency setting.

n In addition to the individual gain controls, there is also an overall level

parameter that attenuates/boosts the entire frequency range.

● Part EQ

This 3-band EQ is applied to each part of the Performance/

Song/Pattern, The high band and low band are the shelving

type. The middle band is the peaking type.

n The part EQ is not available in the Voice mode.

● Master EQ

Master EQ is applied to the ﬁnal (post-effect), overall sound of

the instrument. In this EQ, all bands can be set to peaking, or

the lowest and highest bands can be set to shelving (as

shown below).

EQ for which all bands are set to peaking type

EQ for which LOW and HIGH are set to shelving type

[VOICE] → Voice selection → [EDIT] → Element selection/

Key selection → [F6] EQ

–

Gain

Frequency

–

Gain

Low Gain High Gain

Low Freq High Freq

Frequency

–

LOW HIGHMID

Gain

3 bands

Q (frequency bandwidth)

Frequency

LOW HIGHHIGHMIDMIDLOWMID

–

Gain

3 bands

Q (frequency bandwidth)

Frequency

LOW HIGHHIGHMIDMIDLOWMID

–

Gain

5 bands

Q (frequency bandwidth)

Frequency

Basic Structure

Internal Structure (System Overview)

179

Owner’s Manual

Effect connection in each mode

● In the Voice mode

The Effect parameters in the Voice mode are set for each Voice and the settings are stored to internal ﬂash ROM as a User Voice.

Please note that the Master Effect and Master EQ parameters are set for all the Voices in the Utility mode and stored to internal

ﬂash ROM as System settings by pressing the [STORE] button also in the Utility mode.

n The parallel connection is not available for Plug-in voices.

n The Plug-in Insertion effect (when the Effect Plug-in board has been installed) is not available in the Voice mode.

● In the Performance mode

The Effect parameters in the Performance mode are set for each Performance and the settings are stored to internal ﬂash ROM

as User data.

[VOICE] → Voice selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON]

→ [F6] EFFECT → [SF1] CONNECT

[VOICE] → [UTILITY] → [F3] VOICE → [SF2] MEF

(for all Voices)

[VOICE] → [UTILITY] → [F3] VOICE →

[SF1] MEQ (for all Voices)

[VOICE] → Voice selection → [EDIT] →

[COMMON] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF3]

MEQ OFS

You can set which Insertion system, A or B,

is applied to each Element (or to each key

when the Drum voice is selected). The

Insertion effect can also be bypassed.

Tone Generator block

Element or Key

Element EQ

Reverb (REV), Chorus (CHO)

Send Level Return Level

You can select the Insertion connection

from the three types shown below.

Insertion Effect

System Effect

Master Effect Master EQ

Output

A to B

B to A

parallel

[PERFORM] → Performance selection → [EDIT] →

[COMMON] → [F6] EFFECT → [SF1] CONNECT

The Insertion connection type

depends on the setting of the Voice

assigned to the selected part.

[PERFORM] → Performance selection → [EDIT] → Part selection → [F3] EQ

[PERFORM] → Performance selection → [EDIT] →

[COMMON] → [F2] OUT/MEF → [SF1] OUT

Select the part to which the Plug-in Insertion effect is applied from Parts 1-4,

Plug-in Parts 1-3, and the audio input Part in the following display.

[PERFORM] → Performance selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F6]

EFFECT → [SF1] INS SW

Among all of the audio input Parts, the Insertion effect can be applied

only to the A/D Input Part.

[PERFORM] → Performance selection → [EDIT] →

[COMMON] → [F2] OUT/MEF → [SF2] MEQ

[PERFORM] → Performance selection → [EDIT] →

[COMMON] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF3] MEQ OFS

Part 1

Part EQ

Insertion Effect

(VCE INS)

Audio Input part

Plug-in Insertion Effect

(PLG-EF)

When the PLG100-VH

has been installed

Tone Generator

block

Part 1

[PERFORM] → Performance selection → [EDIT] →

[COMMON] → [F2] OUT/MEF → [SF3] MEF

Master Effect Master EQ Output

Send Level Return Level

Reverb (REV), Chorus (CHO)

System Effect

Internal Structure (System Overview)

180

Owner’s Manual

Basic Structure

● In the Song mode/Pattern mode

The Effect parameters in the Song mode/Pattern mode are set for each Song/Pattern. The Effect settings are stored to internal

DRAM in the Song Mixing mode/Pattern Mixing mode and saved to the SmartMedia/USB storage device in the File mode.

n The Insertion Effect, Plug-in Insertion Effect, and the System Effect cannot be applied to Parts 17-32 (using the Multi-part Plug-in board PLG100-XG).

n The Part EQ cannot be applied to parts of the Plug-in Board.

n The System Effects (Reverb, Chorus), the Master EQ, and the Master Effect are not applied to the sound output through the ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT jacks

(including those of the AIEB2) or the mLAN connector of the mLAN16E board. (Only the Part EQ and the Insertion Effect are applied.)

Tone Generator block

[SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song/Pattern

selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → [COMMON]

→ [F2] MEQ/MEF → [SF2] MEF

The Insertion effects can be applied to up to eight Parts, selectable from Parts 1-4, Plug-in

Parts 1-3, and the A/D input Part in the following display.

[SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song/Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] →

[F6] EFFECT → [SF2] INS SW

The connection type depends on the setting of the Voice assigned to the selected part.

[SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song/Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] →

Part selection → [F3] EQ

Select the part to which the Plug-in Insertion effect is applied from Parts 1-4, Plug-in Parts 1-

3, and the audio input Part.

Among all of the audio input Parts, the Insertion effect can be applied only

to the A/D Input Part.

[SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song/Pattern selection → [F4] EF SEND

[SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song/Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] →

[F2] MEQ/MEF → [SF1] MEQ

[SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song/Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] →

[F1] GENERAL → [SF1] MEQ OFS

Part 17-32

(When the Multi-part Plug-in Board

PLG100-XG has been installed)

[SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song/Pattern selection → [MIXING]

→ [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F6] EFFECT → [SF1] CONNECT

Part 1-16

Insertion Effects

(VCE INS)

Tone Generator block

Part 1

Reverb (REV), Chorus (CHO)

System Effects

Part 1

Part EQ

Plug-in Part 1-3

(When the Single part

Plug-in board has

been installed)

Audio Input part

Plug-in Insertion Effect

(PLG-EF)

When the PLG100-VH

has been installed

Send Level Return Level

Master Effect Master EQ Output

About MIDI

181

Owner’s Manual

Basic Structure

About MIDI

MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) is a standard which allows electronic musical instruments to communicate with each

other, by sending and receiving compatible Note, Control Change, Program Change and various other types of MIDI data, or

messages.

This synthesizer can control other MIDI devices by transmitting note related data and various types of controller data. It can also

be controlled by incoming MIDI messages which automatically determine the tone generator mode, select MIDI channels,

voices and effects, change parameter values, and of course play the voices speciﬁed for the various Parts.

Many MIDI messages are expressed in hexadecimal or binary numbers. Hexadecimal numbers may include the letter “H” as a

sufﬁx. The letter “n” indicates a certain whole number.

The chart below lists the corresponding decimal number for each hexadecimal/binary number.

MIDI channels

MIDI performance data is assigned to one of sixteen MIDI channels. Using these channels, 1 - 16, the performance data for

sixteen different instrument parts can be simultaneously sent over one MIDI cable.

Think of the MIDI channels as TV channels. Each TV station transmits its broadcasts over a speciﬁc channel.

Your home TV set receives many different programs simultaneously from several TV stations and you select the appropriate

channel to watch the desired program.

MIDI operates on the same basic principle.

The transmitting instrument sends MIDI data on a speciﬁc MIDI channel (MIDI Transmit Channel) via a single MIDI cable to the

receiving instrument. If the receiving instrument’s MIDI channel (MIDI Receive Channel) matches the Transmit Channel, the

receiving instrument will sound according to the data sent by the transmitting instrument.

For information on how to set the MIDI transmit channel and the MIDI receive channel, see page 35.

MIDI data is assigned to one of sixteen channels. However, we can overcome the sixteen-channel limit by using separate MIDI

“ports,” each supporting sixteen channels. For details, see page 38.

MIDI Messages Transmitted/Recognized by this synthesizer

MIDI messages can be divided into two groups: Channel messages and System messages. Below is an explanation of the various

types of MIDI messages which this synthesizer can recognize/transmit. The messages transmitted/recognized by this synthesizer

are shown in the MIDI Data Format and MIDI Implementation Chart of the separate Data List.

n This synthesizer’s tone generator and sequencer blocks handle different MIDI events. These are listed separately in the MIDI Data Format as well as in the

MIDI Implementation Chart.

Weather Report

News

MIDI Transmit channel 2 MIDI Receive channel 2

MIDI

cable

Basic Structure

About MIDI

182

Owner’s Manual

CHANNEL MESSAGES

Channel messages contain data related to the performance

on the keyboard for the speciﬁc channel.

■ Note On/Note Off (Key On/Key Off)

Messages which are generated when the keyboard is played.

Reception note range = C-2 (0) - G8 (127), C3 = 60

Velocity range = 1 - 127 (Only the Note On velocity is

received)

Note On: Generated when a key is pressed.

Note Off: Generated when a key is released.

Each message includes a speciﬁc note number which

corresponds to the key which is pressed, plus a velocity value

based on how hard the key is struck.

■ Control Change

Control Change messages let you select a voice bank, control

volume, panning, modulation, portamento time, brightness

and various other controller parameters, through speciﬁc

Control Change numbers which correspond to each of the

various parameters.

Bank Select MSB (Control #000)

Bank Select LSB (Control #032)

Messages which select variation voice bank numbers by

combining and sending the MSB and LSB from an

external device. The functions of MSB and LSB messages

differ depending on the tone generator mode. MSB numbers

select voice type (Normal Voice or Drum Voice), and LSB

numbers select voice banks.

(For more information about Banks and Programs, see Voice

List in the separate Data List.)

A new bank selection will not become effective until the next

Program Change message is received.

Modulation (Control #001)

Messages which control vibrato depth using the Modulation

Wheel.

Setting the value to 127 produces maximum vibrato and 0

results in vibrato off.

Portamento Time (Control #005)

Messages which control the duration of portamento, or a

continuous pitch glide between successively played notes.

When the parameter Portamento Switch (Control #065) is set

to on, the value set here can adjust the speed of pitch

change.

Setting the value to 127 produces maximum portamento time

and 0 results in minimum portamento time.

Data Entry MSB (Control #006)

Data Entry LSB (Control #038)

Messages which set the value for the parameter speciﬁed by

RPN MSB/LSB (page 183) and NRPN MSB/LSB (page 183).

Parameter value is determined by combining the MSB and

LSB.

Main Volume (Control #007)

Messages which control the volume of each Part.

Setting the value to 127 produces maximum volume and 0

results in volume off.

Pan (Control #010)

Messages which control the stereo panning position of each

Part (for stereo output).

Setting the value to 127 positions the sound to the far right

and 0 positions the sound to the far left.

Expression (Control #011)

Messages which control intonation expression of each Part

during performance.

Setting the value to 127 produces maximum volume and 0

results in volume off.

Hold1 (Control #064)

Messages which control sustain on/off.

Setting the value between 64 - 127 turns the sustain on,

between 0 - 63 turns the sustain off.

Portamento Switch (Control #065)

Messages which control portamento on/off.

Setting the value between 64 -127 turns the portamento on,

between 0 - 63 turns the portamento off.

Sostenuto (Control #066)

Messages which control sostenuto on/off.

Holding speciﬁc notes and then pressing and holding the

sostenuto pedal will sustain those notes as you play

subsequent notes, until the pedal is released.

Setting the value between 64 -127 turns the sostenuto on,

between 0 - 63 turns the sostenuto off.

Harmonic Content (Control #071)

Messages which adjust the ﬁlter resonance set for each Part.

The value set here is an offset value which will be added to or

subtracted from the voice data. Higher values will result in a

more characteristic, resonant sound. Depending on the voice,

the effective range may be narrower than the range available

for adjustment.

About MIDI

183

Owner’s Manual

Basic Structure

Release Time (Control #072)

Messages which adjust the AEG release time set for each

Part.

The value set here is an offset value which will be added to or

subtracted from the voice data.

Attack Time (Control #073)

Messages which adjust the AEG attack time set for each Part.

The value set here is an offset value which will be added to or

subtracted from the voice data.

Brightness (Control #074)

Messages which adjust the ﬁlter cutoff frequency set for each

Part.

The value set here is an offset value which will be added to or

subtracted from the voice data. Lower values result in a softer

sound.

Depending on the voice, the effective range may be narrower

than the range available for adjustment.

Decay Time (Control #075)

Messages which adjust the AEG decay time set for each Part.

The value set here is an offset value which will be added to or

subtracted from the voice data.

Effect1 Depth (Reverb Send Level) (Control #091)

Messages which adjust the send level for the Reverb effect.

Effect3 Depth (Chorus Send Level) (Control #093)

Messages which adjust the send level for the Chorus effect.

Data Increment (Control #096)

Decrement (Control #097) for RPN

Messages which increase or decrease the MSB value of pitch

bend sensitivity, ﬁne tune, or coarse tune in steps of 1. You will

need to assign one of those parameters using the RPN in the

external device in advance. The data byte is ignored. When

the maximum value or minimum value is reached, the value

will not be incremented or decremented further. (Incrementing

the ﬁne tune will not cause the coarse tune to be

incremented.)

NRPN (Non-Registered Parameter Number)

LSB (Control #098) (Plug-in Board only)

NRPN (Non-Registered Parameter Number)

MSB (Control #099) (Plug-in Board only)

Messages which adjust a voice’s vibrato, ﬁlter, EG, drum

setup or other parameter settings.

First send the NRPN MSB and NRPN LSB to specify the

parameter which is to be controlled. Then use Data Entry

(page 182) to set the value of the speciﬁed parameter.

Note that once the NRPN has been set for a channel,

subsequent data entry will be recognized as the same

NRPN’s value change. Therefore, after you use the NRPN, you

should set a Null (7FH, 7FH) value to avoid unexpected

results.

For details, refer to the owner’s manual of the relevant Plug-in

Board.

RPN (Registered Parameter Number) LSB (Control #100)

RPN (Registered Parameter Number) MSB (Control #101)

Messages which offset, or add or subtract values from a

Part’s pitch bend sensitivity, tuning, or other parameter

settings. First send the RPN MSB and RPN LSB to specify the

parameter which is to be controlled. Then use Data

Increment/Decrement (page 183) to set the value of the

speciﬁed parameter. Note that once the RPN has been set for

a channel, subsequent data entry will be recognized as the

same RPN’s value change. Therefore after you use the RPN,

you should set a Null (7FH, 7FH) value to avoid unexpected

results.

The following RPN numbers can be received.

■ Channel Mode Messages

The following Channel Mode Messages can be received.

All Sounds Off (Control #120)

Clears all sounds currently sounding on the speciﬁed

channel. However, the status of channel messages such as

Note On and Hold On is maintained.

Reset All Controllers (Control #121)

The values of the following controllers will be reset to the

defaults.

All Notes Off (Control #123)

Clears all notes currently on for the speciﬁed channel.

However, if Hold1 or Sostenuto is on, notes will continue

sounding until these are turned off.

RPN MSB RPN LSB PARAMETER

00 00 Pitch Bend Sensitivity

00 01 Fine Tune

00 02 Coarse Tune

7F 7F Null

2nd BYTE 3rd BYTE MESSAGE

120 0 All Sounds Off

121 0 Reset All Controllers

123 0 All Notes Off

126 0 - 16 Mono

127 0 Poly

CONTROLLER VALUE

Pitch Bend Change 0 (center)

Aftertouch 0 (off)

Polyphonic

Aftertouch

0 (off)

Modulation 0 (off)

Expression 127 (max)

Hold1 0 (off)

Portamento 0 (off)

Sostenuto 0 (off)

Soft Pedal 0 (off)

Portamento Control Cancels the Portamento source key number

RPN Number not speciﬁed; internal data will not change

NRPN Number not speciﬁed; internal data will not change

Basic Structure

About MIDI

184

Owner’s Manual

Mono (Control #126)

Performs the same function as when an All Sounds Off

message is received, and if the 3rd byte (mono number) is in

the range of 0 - 16, it sets the corresponding channel to Mono

Mode (Mode 4: m = 1).

Poly (Control #127)

Performs the same function as when an All Sounds Off

message is received, and sets the corresponding channel to

Poly Mode.

■ Program Change

Messages that determine which voice to select for each Part.

With a combination of Bank Select, you can select not only

basic voice numbers, but also variation voice bank numbers.

For a list of the Voices, see the separate Data List.

■ Pitch Bend

Pitch Bend messages are continuous controller messages

that allow the pitch of designated notes to be raised or

lowered by a speciﬁed amount over a speciﬁed duration.

■ Channel Aftertouch

Messages which let you control the sounds by the pressure

you apply to the keys after the initial striking of the keys, over

the entire channel.

This synthesizer does not transmit this data from the

keyboard; however, this synthesizer does properly respond to

this data when received from an external device.

■ Polyphonic Aftertouch

Messages which let you control the sounds by the pressure

you apply to the keys after the initial striking of the keys, for

each individual key. This synthesizer does not transmit this

data from the keyboard; however, the data is transmitted from

the internal sequencer.

SYSTEM MESSAGES

System messages are the data related to the overall system of

the device.

■ System Exclusive Messages

System Exclusive messages control various functions of this

synthesizer, including master volume and master tuning, tone

generator mode, effect type and various other parameters.

General MIDI (GM) System On (Song mode/Pattern only)

When “General MIDI system on” is received, the MOTIF ES

will receive the MIDI messages which are compatible with GM

System Level 1, and consequently will not receive NRPN and

Bank Select messages.

F0 7E 7F 09 01 F7 (Hexadecimal)

n Make sure that the interval between this message and the ﬁrst note

data of the song is at least a quarter note or greater in length.

Master Volume

When received, the Volume MSB will be effective for the

System Parameter.

F0 7F 7F 04 01 ll mm F7 (Hexadecimal)

* mm (MSB) = appropriate volume value, ll (LSB) = ignored

■ System Realtime Messages

These messages control the sequencer, that is to say Song

and Pattern.

Active Sensing (FEH)

Once FEH (Active Sensing) has been received, if no MIDI

data is subsequently received for longer than an interval of

approximately 300 msec, the MOTIF ES will perform the same

function as when All Sounds Off, All Notes Off, and Reset All

Controllers messages are received, and will then return to a

status in which FEH is not monitored

Timing Clock (F8H)

This message is transmitted with a ﬁxed interval (24 times per

1/4 note) to synchronize connected MIDI instruments.

You can select whether the sequencer block uses the internal

Timing Clock, or external Timing Clock messages received

via MIDI IN by setting the MIDI Sync parameter: [UTILITY] →

[F5] MIDI → [SF3] SYNC → MIDI Sync.

Start (FAH)

This message lets the MIDI sequence data start playing back

from the beginning. This message will be transmitted when

pressing the [F] (Play) button at the top of the Song or

Pattern.

Continue (FBH)

This message lets the MIDI sequence data start playing back

from the current song position. This message will be

transmitted when pressing the [F] (Play) button at the

middle of the Song or Pattern.

Stop (FCH)

This message causes MIDI sequence data (song) to stop

playing back. This message will be transmitted when

pressing the [■] (Stop) button during playback.

n You can select whether this synthesizer will transmit Timing Clock,

Start, Continue, and Stop messages by setting the SeqCtrl parameter:

[UTILITY] → [F5] MIDI → [SF3] SYNC → SeqCtrl.

■ System Common Message

System Common messages also control the sequencer,

including Song Select and Song Position Pointer messages.

Basic Structure

Internal Memory and File Management

185

Owner’s Manual

Internal Memory and File Management

As you use the MOTIF ES, you’ll create many different kinds of data, including Voices, Performances, Songs, and Patterns. This

section describes how to maintain the various types of data and use the memory devices/media for storing them.

Maintaining data

You can maintain the data you’ve created via the following three methods.

● Store

This is a process of transferring or saving the created data of this synthesizer to a dedicated location (User Memory) in the

internal memory. Each type of data can be stored with the following operations.

* Please note that pressing the [STORE] in the Utility mode starts the Store operation of the System settings immediately.

Since Song Mixing, Pattern Mixing, and Mixing Voice data is stored to DRAM (page 187), all such data is lost when turning off the power — even if the data

has been stored with the operations above. Make sure to save this data to the SmartMedia/USB storage device in the File mode after storing.

Never attempt to turn off the power while data (e.g., Voice) is being written to Flash ROM (while an “Executing...” or “Please keep power on” message is

shown). Turning the power off in this state may cause the system to freeze (due to corruption of data in the Flash ROM) and prevent normal startup the next

time the power is turned on, as well as resulting in the loss of all user data.

This is a process of transferring or saving the created data of this synthesizer to an external memory device (SmartMedia/USB storage device).

This process can be done in the File mode. The Save operation can be done via various methods, such as saving all data as a single ﬁle or

saving a speciﬁed type of data (e.g., only Voices) as a single ﬁle. For details, see Memory Structure (page 186) and Reference (page 188). The

saved data as ﬁles can be recalled by loading them in the File mode.

● Bulk Dump

This function lets you save the data in the Edit buffer (DRAM) or Flash ROM by transmitting it as Bulk data (system exclusive message) to an

external MIDI instrument or sequence software on a computer. This can be done with the following operations.

n Mixing Voice data cannot be transmitted as Bulk data via panel operations.

n User Arpeggio data and some of the System settings are not handled as Bulk data.

n The data in the User Memory of Flash ROM can be transmitted to an external MIDI instrument or computer upon reception of a bulk request message. For

details about the bulk request message and bulk dump format, see the separate Data List.

Voice and Plug-in Voice data can be transmitted to a computer for editing with the Voice Editor software (on the included CD-ROM). The edited

Voice data can then be transmitted back to the instrument in banks as bulk data. Similarly, Voice data created in the Voice Edit mode can be

sent to the computer in banks as bulk data.

Song Mixing and Pattern Mixing data can also be transmitted to a computer for editing, using the Multi Part Editor software (on the included CD-

ROM). The edited Mixing data can then be transmitted back to the instrument as bulk data. Mixing data created in the Song Mixing Edit and

Pattern Mixing modes can also be sent to the computer in banks as bulk data.

Voice [VOICE] → Voice selection → [STORE] Page 85

Performance [PERFORM] → Performance selection → [STORE] Page 91

Song Mixing [SONG] → Song selection → [MIXING] → [STORE] Page 131

Pattern Mixing [PATTERN] → Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [STORE] Page 131

Mixing Voice [SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song/Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [F5] VCE ED → [STORE] Page 106

Master [MASTER] → Master selection → [STORE] Page 137

System settings [UTILITY] → [STORE] * Page 260

● Save [FILE] → [F2] SAVE

Voice [VOICE] → Voice selection → [JOB] → [F4] BULK

Performance [PERFORM] → Performance selection → [JOB] → [F4] BULK

Song Mixing [SONG] → Song selection → [MIXING] → [JOB] → [F4] BULK

Pattern Mixing [PATTERN] → Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [JOB] → [F4] BULK

Master [MASTER] → Master selection → [JOB] → [F4] BULK

CAUTION

Internal Memory and File Management

186

Owner’s Manual

Basic Structure

Memory Structure

This diagram details the relationship among the functions of the MOTIF ES and the internal memory and SmartMedia/USB storage device.

*1 For details on the Bulk Dump, Save, and Store operations, see page 185.

*2 Only the currently edited data can be transmitted as Bulk data. Note that the Mixing Voice cannot be transmitted as Bulk data.

*3 The Mixing settings can be stored/recalled as a template in the Song Mixing Job mode/Pattern Mixing Job mode.

*4 You can convert the MIDI sequence data recorded in the Song Record mode/Pattern Record mode to Arpeggio data. This can be executed with the following

operations: • [SONG] → [JOB] → [F5] TRACK → 07: Put Track to Arp • [PATTERN] → [JOB] → [F5] TRACK → 06: Track to Arp

*5 In order to create a Waveform by sampling or importing an audio ﬁle, optional DIMM modules must be installed.

Sequence software

Voice Editor in the included CD-ROM

Multi Part Editor in the included

CD-ROM

MIDI instrument or computer

SmartMedia/USB storage device

Excluding Master and

Utility settings

Recall Buffer

Compare Buffer

(DRAM)

• Voice

• Plug-in Voice

• Preset Phrase (Pattern)

• Preset Arpeggio

• Demo

Preset Data (ROM)

Edit Buffer

(DRAM)

User Memory

Flash ROM

Bulk Dump

Store

lk D

Internal Memory

• Voice Edit • User Voice (Normal, Drum) File extensions “.W7V” and “.W7E”

• File extensions “.WAV” and “.AIF”

• A5000/4000/3000 data

• AKAI format data

File extensions “.W7G”

File extensions “.W7A”

(including all the data on the User Memory)

File extensions “.MID”

File extensions “.W7S”

File extensions “.W7P”

File extensions “.W7W”

• File extensions “.WAV” and “.AIF”

• A5000/4000/3000 data

• SU700 data

• AKAI format data

File extensions “.W2B”

Internal data communication

Data communication between this

synthesizer and the external device

• Mixing Voice Edit

• Plug-in Voice Edit

• Master Edit

• Utility settings

• Pattern Mixing Edit

• Song Mixing Edit

• Pattern Record

• System settings

(Utility settings

+ Mixing Template)

• Pattern Patch

• Pattern Chain

• Sampling • Waveform

• Song Record

• Song Chain

• Phrase

• Pattern

• Pattern Chain

• Song

• Song Chain

• Performance Edit

• User Plug-in Voice

• User Master

• User Arpeggio

• User Performance

Editing the Board Voice

(page 76) using the

software Plug-in Board

Editor supplied with

each Plug-in Board

Computer

DRAM

• Plug-in All Bulk

Plug-in board (DRAM)

Load/Save (executed in the File mode)

Basic Structure

Internal Memory and File Management

187

Owner’s Manual

Internal Memory

Below are explanations of the basic terms used in the Memory Structure illustration on the previous page.

● Flash ROM

ROM (Read Only Memory) is memory designed speciﬁcally for reading out of data, and as such data cannot be written to it.

Unlike conventional ROM, Flash ROM can be overwritten – allowing you to store your own original data. The contents of Flash

ROM are maintained even when the power is turned off.

● DRAM

RAM (Random Access Memory) is memory designed speciﬁcally for data writing and data reading operations. There are two

different kinds of RAM, depending on the condition for storing the data: SRAM (Static RAM) and DRAM (Dynamic RAM).

The created data stored on DRAM is lost when the power is turned off. Because of this, you should always store any data

residing in DRAM to the SmartMedia/USB storage device before turning off the power.

● DIMM

DIMM modules must be installed in order to use the Sampling function or to load audio data (Waveform/WAV ﬁle/AIFF ﬁle) to the

instrument. As with DRAM described above, the created data stored on DIMM is lost when the power is turned off. Because of

this, you should always store any data residing in DIMM to the SmartMedia/USB storage device before turning off the power.

● Edit Buffer and User Memory

The edit buffer is the memory location for edited data of these types: Voice, Performance, Master, Song Mixing, and Pattern

Mixing. Data edited in this location will be stored to the User Memory.

If you select another Voice, Performance, Master, Song, or Pattern, the entire contents of the edit buffer will be rewritten with the

newly selected Voice/Performance/Master/Song Mixing/Pattern Mixing data. Make sure to store any important data before

selecting another Voice, etc.

● Edit Buffer and Recall Buffer

If you’ve selected another Voice/Performance/Song/Pattern without storing the one you were editing, you can recall your original

edits, since the edit buffer’s contents are stored in backup memory.

n Keep in mind that the recall buffer is not available in the Master Edit mode.

Reference Voice Mode

Voice Play mode

188

Owner’s Manual

Voice mode

■ Creating Voices — basic procedure

You can create and edit your original Voices by setting various parameters in both the Voice Play mode and Voice Edit mode, while the Voice Job

mode provides some basic parameter-related tools, such as Initialize and Copy. Once you’ve edited a Voice, you can store it to a User Bank in

internal memory (Flash ROM) and save all edited Voices to a SmartMedia/USB storage device in the File mode.

The Voice Play mode lets you perform a variety of general editing operations on the selected voice. For more detailed and comprehensive

editing operations, use the Voice Edit mode.

n In the Voice Play mode and Voice Edit mode, you can set the parameters for each Voice. The parameters for all the Voices such as Master EQ and Master

Effect can be set from the [UTILITY] → [F3] VOICE display in the Utility mode.

n The parameters that have the same name in the Voice Play mode and in the Voice Edit mode have the same functions and settings.

n When a Plug-in voice is selected, certain parameters are not available for editing, even if they’re described here.

Reference

Voice Play mode

[VOICE] → Voice selection

[F1] PLAY

TCH (Transmit Channel) Indicates the Keyboard MIDI transmit channel.

You can change the Keyboard MIDI transmit channel by pressing the [TRACK SELECT] button so that its indicator

lights and pressing any of the NUMBER [1] - [16] buttons. The Keyboard MIDI transmit channel can be changed

also with the following operation: [UTILITY] → [F5] MIDI → [SF1] CH → KBDTransCh.

OCT (Octave) Indicates Keyboard Octave setting set via the [OCTAVE] buttons.

This can be changed also with the following operation: [UTILITY] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF2] KBD → Octave.

ASA (ASSIGN A),

ASB (ASSIGN B)

Indicates the functions assigned to the respective Knobs (printed “ASSIGN A” and “ASSIGN B”) when the lamps of

both the [PAN/SEND] and [TONE] buttons are turned on. The functions are assigned with the following operation:

[UTILITY] → [F4] CTL ASN → [SF2] ASSIGN.

n TCH (Transmit Channel), OCT (Octave), ASA (ASSIGN A), and ASB (ASSIGN B) settings do not belong to each Voice. Because of this, these are not stored as an individual

Voice in the Voice Store mode (page 208).

AS1 (ASSIGN 1),

AS2 (ASSIGN 2)

Indicates the functions assigned to the respective Knobs (printed “ASSIGN 1” and “ASSIGN 2”) when the lamps of

both the [PAN/SEND] and [TONE] buttons are turned on. The functions are assigned by setting the Voice Edit

common parameters with the following operation: [VOICE] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F4] CTL SET.

[SF1] ARP1 (Arpeggio 1) - [SF5]

ARP5 (Arpeggio 5)

You can register the desired Arpeggio types to these buttons and call them up any time during your keyboard

performance. Refer to page 66 in the Quick Guide section.

[F2] BANK

This display is available only when a Plug-in Board has been installed and a Voice of the Plug-in Board is selected.

From this display you can select the particular bank on the Plug-in board, and determine whether you will be using a Plug-in voice or a “Board” voice. Board

voices are unprocessed, unaltered voices of the Plug-in board – the “raw material” for Plug-in voices. Plug-in voices are edited Board voices – voices that have

been specially programmed and processed for optimum use with this synthesizer. For more details, see page 74.

Settings: The following selections are available, for example, when a Plug-in voice using the Plug-in board installed to slot 1 is selected: PLG1USR (User Plug-in voice), PLGPRE1 (Preset

Plug-in voice), 032/000 ... (Indicates the Bank Select MSB/LSB of the Board voice. These values differ depending on the installed Plug-in board.)

[F3] EFFECT

Pressing the [F3] EFFECT button in the Voice Play mode calls up the same EFFECT display in the Voice Edit mode ([VOICE] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F6]

EFFECT). From this display, you can set the effect related parameters for the current Voice. See page 194.

[F4] PORTA (Portamento)

From this display you can select monophonic or polyphonic playback and set the Portamento parameters.

Portamento is used to create a smooth transition in pitch from the ﬁrst note played on the keyboard to the next.

Mono/Poly Determines whether the Voice is played back monophonically (single notes only) or polyphonically (multiple

simultaneous notes).

Settings: mono, poly

n When pressing the second note while holding the ﬁrst note with the PortaSw set to on and the Mono/Poly set to on, the second

note sound starts succeeding the transition of the ﬁrst note, or the second note starts not from the EG (AEG/PEG/FEG) start

point but from the EG (AEG/PEG/FEG) point the ﬁrst note reaches. This realizes the legato performance. This legato degree

can be set with the following operation: [VOICE] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF4] PORTA → LegatoSlope

(page 190).

PortaSw (Portamento Switch) Determines whether Portamento is applied to the current Voice or not.

Settings: off, on

Reference Voice Mode

Voice Edit mode Normal Voice Edit Common Edit

189

Owner’s Manual

There are three kinds of Voices: Normal Voices, Drum Voices and Plug-in Voices (if a Plug-in board has been installed). The following section

shows how to edit the different types of voices and explains the parameters available. Note that available parameters to be edited differ

depending on the Voice types (Normal Voice, Drum Voice, Plug-in Voice).

Normal Voice Edit

When a Normal Voice is selected, the Voice Edit parameters are divided into Common Edit (parameters common to all four Elements), and

Element Edit (parameters of individual Elements).

These parameters are for making global (or common) edits to all four Elements of the selected Normal Voice.

PortaTime (Portamento Time) Determines the pitch transition time. Higher values result in longer transition times.

Settings: 0 ~ 127

PortaMode (Portamento Mode) Determines the Portamento mode. The behavior of the Portamento varies depending on whether Mono/Poly is set to

“mono” or “poly.”

Settings: ﬁngered, fulltime

ﬁngered ........... Portamento is only applied when you play legato (playing the next note before releasing the previous one).

fulltime ............. Portamento is always applied.

[F5] EG (Envelope Generator)

This display contains the basic EG settings, both volume and ﬁlter, for the voice, as well as the ﬁlter’s cutoff frequency and resonance settings. The settings made

here are applied as offsets to the AEG and FEG settings in the Voice Edit mode.

The full names of the available parameters are shown in the chart below, as they appear in the display.

Settings: -64 ~ 0 ~ +63 (except --- above)

[F6] ARP (Arpeggio)

This display contains the basic settings for Arpeggio playback, including Type and Tempo. About the [SF1] - [SF5] buttons, see the explanation of the [F1] PLAY

display.

Bank,

Ctgr (Category),

Type

These three parameters determine the Arpeggio Type. The three-letter preﬁx number before the Type name

indicates the number within the selected Category.

Settings: Refer to the separate Data List.

Tempo Determines the Arpeggio Tempo. When MIDI Sync ([UTILITY] → [F5] MIDI → [SF3] SYNC → MIDI Sync) is set to

“MIDI,” “MIDI” is displayed here and cannot be set.

Settings: 1 ~ 300

VelLimit (Velocity Limit) Determines the lowest and highest velocity which can trigger the Arpeggio playback. The Arpeggio plays when you

play notes at velocities within in this range.

Settings: 1 ~ 127

n Keys played outside the set limit sound normally without any Arpeggio.

Switch Determines whether Arpeggio is on or off. You can also turn Arpeggio on/off from the front panel with the

[ARPEGGIO ON/OFF] button.

Settings: off, on

Hold Determines whether the Arpeggio playback is “held” or not. When this is set to “on,” the Arpeggio cycles

automatically, even if you release your ﬁngers from the keys, and it continues to cycle until the next key is pressed.

Settings: sync-off (see below), off, on

sync-off............ When set to “sync-off,” the Arpeggio playback continues to run silently, even when you release the keys. Pressing any

key turns the Arpeggio playback on again. In other words, you can use the key to “un-mute” or “mute” (not start or stop)

the Arpeggio playback by, respectively, holding it down or releasing it.

Voice Edit mode

[VOICE] → Voice selection → [EDIT]

Common Edit

[VOICE] → Normal Voice selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON]

[F1] GENERAL

[SF1] NAME

From this display you can assign the category (sub and main) of the selected voice, and create a name for the

voice. The voice name can contain up to 10 characters. For detailed instructions on naming a voice, see “Basic

Operation” on page 53.

ATK DCY SUS REL DEPTH CUTOFF RESO

AEG

Attack time Decay time

Sustain level

Release Time

--- --- ---

FEG --- Depth Cutoff frequency Resonance

Reference Voice Mode

Voice Edit mode Normal Voice Edit Common Edit

190

Owner’s Manual

[SF2] PLY MODE (Play mode)

From this display you can make various settings for the tone generator of this synthesizer, and assign different Micro

Tuning settings.

Mono/Poly Determines whether the Voice is played back monophonically (single notes only) or polyphonically multiple

simultaneous notes).

Settings: mono, poly

KeyAsgnMode

(Key Assign Mode)

When this is set to “single,” double playback of the same note is prevented. This is useful when two or more

instances of the same note are received nearly simultaneously, or without a corresponding note off message. To

allow playback of each instance of the same note, set this to “multi.”

Settings: single, multi

M. TuningNo.

(Micro Tuning Number)

Determines the tuning system for the voice. Normally, this should be set to 00 (Equal temperament); however

additional tuning systems are available for a variety of tuning applications and effects.

Settings: See the Micro Tuning List on page 209.

M. TuningRoot

(Micro Tuning Root)

Determines the root note of the Micro Tuning set above.

Settings: C ~ B

[SF3] MEQ OFS

(Master EQ Offset)

From this display you can adjust the master (global) EQ settings for the entire Voice. The settings made here are

applied as offsets to the EQ settings (with the exception of “MID”) from the Utility mode, with the following operation:

[VOICE] → [UTILITY] → [F3] VOICE → [SF1] MEQ. You can edit these parameters by using the Knobs.

Settings: -64 ~ 0 ~ +63

[SF4] PORTA (Portamento)

This display allows you to set the Portamento related parameters. Portamento is used to create a smooth transition in

pitch from the ﬁrst note played on the keyboard to the next.

Switch Determines whether Portamento is applied to your keyboard performance using the current Voice or not.

Settings: off, on

Time Determines the pitch transition time. Higher values result in a longer pitch change time, when Time Mode below is

set to “Time.”

Settings: 0 ~ 127

Mode Determines how the Portamento is applied to your keyboard performance.

Settings: ﬁngered, fulltime

ﬁngered............Portamento is only applied when you play legato (playing the next note before releasing the previous one).

fulltime..............Portamento is always applied.

TimeMode This determines how the pitch changes in time.

Settings: rate1, time1, rate2, time2

rate1.................Pitch changes at the speciﬁed rate.

time1 ................Pitch changes in the speciﬁed time.

rate2.................Pitch changes at the speciﬁed rate within a octave.

time2 ................Pitch changes in the speciﬁed time within a octave.

LegatoSlope Determines the speed of the attack of legato notes, when Switch above is set to on and Mono/Poly is set to mono.

(Legato notes “overlap” each other, the next being played before the previous is released.) The higher the value, the

slower the attack rate.

Settings: 0 ~ 7

[SF5] OTHER

From this display you can set the control functions for the Knobs, and determine the up/down range for the Pitch

Bend wheel.

Knob Assign Determines the function for the assignable Knobs (1-4). Pressing the [KNOB CONTROL FUNCTION] button on the

panel sets the desired function row, which is automatically stored to memory with the currently selected voice.

Settings: pan, tone, assign, MEQofs, MEF, arpFx

PB Upper

(Pitch Bend range Upper),

PB Lower

(Pitch Bend range Lower)

These two parameters determine the pitch change range of the Pitch Bend wheel.

Settings: -48 ~ 24

AssignA, AssignB,

Assign1, Assign2

Simply tweaking the knob with setting the Knob Assign (above) to “assign” to the desired value, which is

automatically stored to memory with the currently selected voice.

[F2] OUTPUT

Volume Determines the output level of the Voice.

Settings: 0 ~ 127

Pan Determines the stereo pan position of the Voice. You can also adjust this parameter using the PAN knob on the front

panel.

Settings: L63 (Left) ~ C (Center) ~ R63 (Right)

n When a stereo Voice is selected, this parameter setting may not be effective. Voices with Elements set to opposite Pan settings

(set in [F4] AMP → [SF1] LVL/PAN → Pan) — i.e., one at L63 and another at R63 — are considered stereo Voices.

Reference Voice Mode

Voice Edit mode Normal Voice Edit Common Edit

191

Owner’s Manual

RevSend Determines the Send level of the signal sent from Insertion Effect A/B (or the bypassed signal) to the Reverb effect.

You can also adjust this parameter using the REVERB knob on the front panel.

Settings: 0 ~ 127

ChoSend Determines the Send level of the signal sent from Insertion Effect A/B (or the bypassed signal) to the Chorus effect.

You can also adjust this parameter using the CHORUS knob on the front panel.

Settings: 0 ~ 127

n See page 179 for the Effect connection in the Voice mode.

[F3] ARP (Arpeggio)

[SF1] TYPE

The basic Arpeggio parameters (e.g., type, tempo) are provided in this display.

Bank,

Ctgr (Category),

Type

These three parameters determine the Arpeggio Type. The three-letter preﬁx number before the Type name

indicates the number within the selected Category. When user arpeggio is selected here, you can clear the selected

arpeggio data by using the [SF5] button.

Settings: Refer to the separate Data List.

Tempo Determines the Arpeggio Tempo. When MIDI Sync ([UTILITY] → [F5] MIDI → [SF3] SYNC → MIDI Sync) is set to

“MIDI,” “MIDI” is displayed here and Tempo cannot be set.

Settings: 1 ~ 300

ChgTiming (Change Timing) Determines the actual timing at which the Arpeggio type is switched when you select another type during Arpeggio

playback.

Settings: realtime, measure

realtime............ The Arpeggio type is switched immediately when you select another type.

measure........... The Arpeggio type is switched at the top of the next measure after you select another type.

Switch Determines whether Arpeggio is on or off. You can also turn Arpeggio on/off from the front panel with the

[ARPEGGIO ON/OFF] button.

Settings: off, on

Hold Determines whether the Arpeggio playback is “held” or not. When this is set to “on,” the Arpeggio cycles

automatically, even if you release your ﬁngers from the keys, and it continues to cycle until the next key is pressed.

Settings: sync-off (see below), off, on

sync-off............ When set to “sync-off,” the Arpeggio playback continues to run silently, even when you release the keys. Pressing any

key turns the Arpeggio playback on again. In other words, you can use the key to “un-mute” or “mute” (not start or stop)

the Arpeggio playback by, respectively, holding it down or releasing it.

KeyMode Determines how the Arpeggio plays back when playing the keyboard.

Settings: sort, thru, direct, sortdirect, thrudirect

sort .................. When you play speciﬁc notes (for example, the notes of a chord), the same sequence plays, no matter what order you

play the notes.

thru ..................When you play speciﬁc notes (for example, the notes of a chord), the resulting sequence differs depending on the order

of the notes.

direct ............... Note events of the Arpeggio sequence do not play; only the notes you play on the keyboard are heard. This setting is

for use with non-note Arpeggio data, such as Control Change or Pitch Bend. When the Arpeggio plays back, these

events are applied to the sound of your keyboard performance. Use this setting when the Arpeggio types includes non-

note data or when the Category type “Ctrl” is selected.

sortdirect ......... The Arpeggio is played back according to the “sort” setting here, and the note pressed is also sounded.

thrudirect ......... The Arpeggio is played back according to the “thru” setting here, and the note pressed is also sounded.

n Some Arpeggio types belonging to the “Cntr” Category may not have note evemts (page 170). When such an Arpeggio type

is selected and the KeyMode is set to “sort” or “thru,” no sound is produced even if you press the note on the keyboard.

n With the “sort” and “thru” settings, the order in which notes are played back will depend on the Arpeggio sequence data.

VelMode (Velocity Mode) This determines the playback velocity of the Arpeggio, or how it responds to your own playing strength.

Settings: original, thru

original............. The Arpeggio plays back at the preset velocities included in the Arpeggio sequence data.

thru .................. The Arpeggio plays back according to the velocity of your playing. For example, if you play the notes strongly, the

playback volume of the Arpeggio increases.

[SF2] LIMIT

NoteLimit

Determines the lowest and highest notes in the Arpeggio’s note range. Notes played in this range trigger the Arpeggio.

Settings: C -2 ~ G8

n You can also create a lower and an upper trigger range for the Arpeggio, with a note range “hole” in the middle, by specifying

the highest note ﬁrst. For example, setting a Note Limit of “C5 - C4” lets you trigger the Arpeggio by playing notes in the two

ranges of

C -2 to C4 and C5 to G8; notes played between C4 and C5 have no effect on the Arpeggio.

n You can also set the range directly from the keyboard, by holding down the [INFORMATION] button and pressing the desired

low and high keys.

n Please keep in mind that no sound is produced when the KeyMode is set to “sort” or “thru” and notes are played outside the

Note Limit setting here.

VelocityLimit Determines the lowest and highest velocity in the Arpeggio’s velocity range. This lets you control when the Arpeggio

sounds by your playing strength.

Settings: 1 ~ 127

n You can also create separate low and high trigger ranges for the Arpeggio playback, with a velocity “hole” in the middle, by

specifying the maximum value ﬁrst. For example, setting a Velocity Limit of 93 - 34 lets you play the Arpeggio from two

separate velocity ranges: soft (1 - 34) and hard (93 - 127). Notes played at middle velocities between 35 and 92 do not play

the Arpeggio.

Reference Voice Mode

Voice Edit mode Normal Voice Edit Common Edit

192

Owner’s Manual

[SF3] PLAY FX

These Play Effect parameters let you control the playback of the Arpeggio in useful and interesting ways. By

changing the timing and velocity of the notes, you can change the rhythmic “feel” of the Arpeggio.

UnitMultiply (Unit Multiply) Adjust the Arpeggio playback time. For example, if you set a value of 200%, the playback time will be doubled

(tempo is halved). On the other hand, if you set a value of 50%, the playback time will be halved (tempo is doubled).

Normal playback time is 100%.

Settings: 50%, 66%, 75%, 100%, 133%, 150%, 200%

Swing Delays notes on even-numbered beats (backbeats) to produce a swing feel.

Settings: -120 ~ +120

QuntValue (Quantize Value) Determines to what beats the note data in the Arpeggio sequence data will be aligned, or determines to what beats

in the Arpeggio sequence data the swing is applied.

Settings:

QuntStrength

(Quantize Strength)

The Strength value sets the “strength” by which note events are pulled toward the nearest quantize beats. A setting

of 100% produces exact timing set via the QuntValue parameter above. A setting of 0% results in no quantization.

Settings: 0% ~ 100%

VelocityRate Determines how much the Velocity of the Arpeggio playback is offset from the original value. For example, a setting

of 100% means the original values are used. Settings below 100% will reduce the velocity of the Arpeggio notes,

whereas settings above 100% will increase the velocities.

Settings: 0% ~ 200%

n The Velocity cannot be decreased or increased beyond its normal range of 1 to 127; any values outside that range will

automatically be limited to the minimum or maximum.

GateTimeRate Determines how much the Gate Time (length) of the Arpeggio notes is offset from the original value. A setting of

100% means the original values are used. Settings below 100% will shorten the gate times of the Arpeggio notes,

whereas settings above 100% will lengthen them.

Settings: 0% ~ 200%

n The Gate Time cannot be decreased beyond its normal minimum of 1; any values outside that range will automatically be

limited to the minimum.

[F4] CTL SET (Controller Set)

[SF1] SET1/2 - [SF3] SET5/6

Since up to six Controller Sets can be assigned to each Voice, three pages (Sets 1/2, Sets 3/4 and Sets 5/6) are

provided. For more information on Controller Sets, see page 155.

ElementSw Determines whether or not the selected controller affects each individual Element.

Settings: Elements 1 to 4 enabled (“1” to “4”) or disabled (“-”)

n This parameter is disabled when the Dest (Destination) described below is set to a parameter unrelated to the Voice Elements.

Source Determines which panel controller is to be assigned and used for the selected Set. This controller then is used to

control the parameter set in Destination below.

Settings: PB (Pitch Bend Wheel), MW (Modulation Wheel), AT (After Touch), FC1 (Foot Controller 1), FS (Footswitch),

RB (Ribbon Controller), BC (Breath Controller), AS1 (Knob ASSIGN 1), AS2 (Knob ASSIGN 2), FC2 (Foot Controller2)

Keep in mind that unlike the other controllers, the ASSIGN A and B knobs can each be assigned to one common function for the

entire system of this synthesizer, and not to different functions for each individual voice. Also refer to the Utility mode (page 263).

Dest (Destination) Determines the parameter that is controlled by the Source controller (above).

Settings: For a complete list of the available parameters/controls, refer to the separate Data List booklet.

Depth Determines the degree to which the Source controller affects the Destination parameter. For negative values, the

controller operation is reversed; maximum controller settings produce minimum parameter changes.

Settings: -64 ~ 0 ~+63

[F5] LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator)

From these displays, you can make a variety of LFO related settings. As its name suggests, the LFO creates waveforms of a low frequency. These waveforms can

be used to vary the pitch, ﬁlter or amplitude to create effects such as vibrato, wah and tremolo.

[SF1] WAVE

Wave Determines the LFO Wave.

Settings: tri, tri+, sawup, sawdwn, squ1/4, squ1/3, squ, squ2/3, squ3/4, trpzp, S/H 1, S/H 2, user

Speed Determines the speed of the LFO Wave modulation. Higher values result in faster modulation speeds.

Settings: 0 ~ 63

32nd note

16th note triplet

16th note

1/4 note8th note triplet

8th note

1/4 note triplet

Reference Voice Mode

Voice Edit mode Normal Voice Edit Common Edit

193

Owner’s Manual

TempoSync Determines whether or not the LFO is synchronized to the tempo of the Arpeggio or sequencer (song or pattern).

Settings: off (not synchronized), on (synchronized)

TempoSpeed This parameter is available only when TempoSync above has been set to “on.” It allows you to make detailed note

value settings that determine how the LFO pulses in sync with the Arpeggio or sequencer.

Settings: 16th, 8th/3 (eighth-note triplets), 16th. (dotted sixteenth notes), 8th, 4th/3 (quarter-note triplets), 8th. (dotted eighth notes), 4th

(quarter notes), 2nd/3 (half-note triplets), 4th. (dotted quarter notes), 2nd (half notes), whole/3 (whole-note triplets), 2nd.

(dotted half notes), 4th x 4 (quarter-note quadruplets; four quarter notes to the beat), 4th x 5 (quarter-note quintuplets; ﬁve

quarter notes to the beat), 4th x 6 (quarter-note sextuplets; six quarter notes to the beat), 4th x 7 (quarter-note septuplets;

seven quarter notes to the beat), 4th x 8 (quarter-note octuplets; eight quarter notes to the beat)

n The actual length of the note depends on the internal or external MIDI tempo setting.

KeyOnReset Determines whether or not the LFO is reset each time a note is pressed. The following three settings are available.

Settings: off, each-on, 1st-on

off..................... The LFO cycles freely with no key synchronization. Pressing a key starts the LFO wave at whatever phase the LFO

happens to be at that point.

each-on ........... The LFO resets with each note you play and starts a waveform at the phase speciﬁed by the Phase parameter (below).

1st-on .............. The LFO resets with every note you play and starts the waveform at the phase speciﬁed by the Phase parameter

(below). However, if you play a second note while the ﬁrst is being held, the LFO continues cycling according to the

same phase as triggered by the ﬁrst note. In other words, the LFO only resets if the ﬁrst note is released before the

second is played.

RandomSpeed Determines the degree to which the LFO speed changes at random. A setting of “0” results in the original speed.

Higher values result in a larger degree of speed change.

Settings: 0 ~ 127

[SF2] DELAY

Delay (Delay Time) Determines the delay time before the LFO comes into effect. A higher value results in a longer delay time.

Settings: 0 ~ 127

FadeIn (Fade In Time) Determines the amount of time for the LFO effect to fade in (after the Delay time has elapsed). A higher value results

in a slower fade-in.

Settings: 0 ~ 127

Hold (Hold Time) Determines the length of time during which the LFO is held at its maximum level. A higher value results in a longer

Hold time.

Settings: 0 ~ 127

FadeOut Determines the amount of time for the LFO effect to fade out (after the Delay time has elapsed). A higher value

results in a slower fade-out.

Settings: 0 ~ 127

Time

Key on

(second note)

Time

Key on

(first note)

Key on

(second note)

Time

Key on

(first note)

off

each-on

1st-on

FadeIn

Max

Time

Key on

FadeIn

Delay

Time

Key on

Max

Delay

Low FadeIn value

Faster fade-in

High FadeIn value

Slower fade-in

Hold

Time

Max

FadeOut

Hold

Max

Time

FadeOut

Time

Hold

Max

Low FadeOut value

Faster fade-out

Low FadeOut value

Faster fade-out

Reference Voice Mode

Voice Edit mode Normal Voice Edit Common Edit

194

Owner’s Manual

[SF3] PHASE

Phase Determines the starting phase point for the LFO Wave when it is reset.

Settings: 0, 90, 120, 180, 240, 270

Offset EL1 - EL4 (Phase Offset

Element1 - Element4)

Determines the offset values of the Phase parameter (above) for the respective Elements.

Settings: +0, +90, +120, +180, +240, +270

[SF4] BOX1 - 3

From this display you can select the destination parameter for the LFO (which aspect of the sound the LFO controls),

the Elements to be affected by the LFO, and the LFO Depth. Three pages (boxes) provided for setting the

destination let you assign multiple destinations.

ElemSw (Element Switch) Determines whether or not each Element is to be affected by the LFO. The Element number (1- 4) is shown when the

LFO is enabled; a dash (-) indicates the LFO is disabled for that Element.

Dest (Destination) Determines the parameters which are to be controlled (modulated) by the LFO Wave.

Settings: amd, pmd, fmd, reso (Resonance), pan, ELFOSpd (Element LFO Speed)

Depth Determines the LFO Wave Depth.

Settings: 0 ~ 127

DptRatio EL1 - EL4 (Depth Offset

Element1 - Element4)

Determines the offset values of the Depth parameter (above) for the respective Elements.

Settings: 0 ~ 127

[SF5] USER

This menu is available only when the User LFO wave is selected. You can create a custom LFO wave consisting of

up to sixteen steps.

Template You can select a pre-programmed template for the LFO wave. The selected template's wave graph appears on the

display and you can create the LFO wave by viewing it. Each time pressing the [SF1] random button, different LFO

wave is appears on the display randomly.

Settings:

all0 ...................Values of all the steps are set to 0.

all64 .................Values of all the steps are set to 64.

all127 ...............Values of all the steps are set to 127.

saw up .............Creates a saw shaped upward wave.

saw down.........Creates a saw shaped downward wave.

even step .........Values of all even steps are set to 127, and values of all odd steps are set to 0.

odd step...........Values of all odd steps are set to 127, and values of all even steps are set to 0.

Slope Determines the slope or ramp characteristics of the LFO wave.

Settings: OFF (no slope), up, down, up&down

Value Edits the value for each step.

Settings: 0 ~ 127

Step Selects the step number of the LFO wave.

Settings: 1 ~ 16

[F6] EFFECT

n For details on the Effect connections in the Voice mode, see page 179. For details on the Effect Types, refer to the Effect Type list in the separate Data List booklet.

[SF1] CONNECT

This display gives you comprehensive control over the effects.

EL: OUT 1-4

(Element 1-4 Effect Output)

Determines which Insertion effect (A or B) is used to process each individual Element. The “thru” setting lets you

bypass the Insertion effects for the speciﬁc Element.

Settings: insA, insB, thru

InsEF Connect

(Insertion Effect Connect)

Determines the effect routing for Insertion effects A and B. The setting changes are shown on the diagram in the

display, giving you a clear picture of how the signal is routed.

Settings: Para, InsAtoB, InsBtoA (See page 179.)

InsA Ctgry

(Insertion A Category),

InsA Type (Insertion A Type)

Determines the effect type for Insertion A.

Time

Phase

0° 90°

120° 240°

180° 270°

Reference Voice Mode

Voice Edit mode Normal Voice Edit Element Edit

195

Owner’s Manual

These parameters are for editing the individual Elements that make up a Normal Voice.

InsB Ctgry

(Insertion B Category),

InsB Type (Insertion B Type)

Determines the effect type for Insertion B.

Reverb Type Determines the effect type for Reverb.

Chorus Ctg

(Chorus Effect Category),

Chorus Typ (Chorus Effect Type)

Determines the effect type for Chorus.

Reverb Send Determines the level of the sound (from Insertion A or B, or the bypassed signal) that is sent to Reverb effect. A

setting of “0” results in no Reverb processing of the sound.

Settings: 0 ~ 127

Chorus Send Determines the level of the sound (from Insertion 1 or 2, or the bypassed signal) that is sent to Chorus effect. A

setting of “0” results in no Chorus processing of the sound.

Settings: 0 ~ 127

Reverb Return Determines the Return level of the Reverb Effect.

Settings: 0 ~ 127

Chorus Return Determines the Return level of the Chorus Effect.

Settings: 0 ~ 127

Chorus to Reverb Determines the Send level of the signal sent from the Chorus Effect to the Reverb Effect.

Settings: 0 ~ 127

Reverb Pan Determines the pan position setting for the Reverb effect.

Settings: L63 (far left) ~ cnt (center) ~ R63 (far right)

Chorus Pan Determines the pan position setting for the Chorus effect.

Settings: L63 (far left) ~ cnt (center) ~ R63 (far right)

[SF2] INS A (Insertion A)

These are for adjusting the various parameters of the Effect blocks.

The number of parameters and values available differs depending on the currently selected effect type. For more

information, see the Effect Type List in the separate Data List booklet.

Note that the menu of the corresponding Effect block disappears when the “thru” type is selected.

[SF3] INS B (Insertion A)

[SF4] REVERB

[SF5] CHORUS

Element Edit

[VOICE] → Normal Voice selection → [EDIT] → Element selection

[F1] OSC (Oscillator)

[SF1] WAVE

From this display you can select the desired waveform or sound used for the Element.

ElementSw (Element Switch) Determines whether the currently selected Element is on or off.

Settings: off (inactive), on (active)

Bank Determines whether the Preset Waveform or User Waveform is used.

Settings: preset, usr wav

n The User Waveform contains audio data you have created with the Sampling function or imported (as WAV or AIFF ﬁles) from

a SmartMedia/USB storage device.

Wave No. (Waveform Number),

WaveCtgry (Waveform Category)

Determines the Waveform for the selected Element. See the Waveform list in the separate Data List.

[SF2] OUTPUT

From this display you can set certain output parameters for the selected Element.

KeyOnDelay Determines the time (delay) between the moment you press a note on the keyboard and the point at which the sound

is played. You can set different delay times for each Element.

Settings: 0 ~ 127

DelayTempoSync Determines whether or not the KeyOnDelay is synchronized to the tempo of the Arpeggio or sequencer (song or

pattern).

Settings: off (not synchronized), on (synchronized)

DelayTempo Determines the timing of the KeyOnDelay when the DelayTempoSync is set to on.

Settings: 16th, 8th/3 (eighth-note triplets), 16th. (dotted sixteenth notes), 8th, 4th/3 (quarter-note triplets), 8th. (dotted eighth notes), 4th

(quarter notes), 2nd/3 (half-note triplets), 4th. (dotted quarter notes), 2nd (half notes), whole/3 (whole-note triplets), 2nd.

(dotted half notes), 4th x 4 (quarter-note quadruplets; four quarter notes to the beat), 4th x 5 (quarter-note quintuplets; ﬁve

quarter notes to the beat), 4th x 6 (quarter-note sextuplets; six quarter notes to the beat), 4th x 7 (quarter-note septuplets;

seven quarter notes to the beat), 4th x 8 (quarter-note octuplets; eight quarter notes to the beat)

Reference Voice Mode

Voice Edit mode Normal Voice Edit Element Edit

196

Owner’s Manual

InsEffectOut

(Insertion Effect Output)

Determines which Insertion effect (1 or 2) is used to process each individual Element. The “thru” setting lets you

bypass the Insertion effects for the speciﬁc Element. (This parameter is the same as “EL: OUT” on the [F6] EFFECT

→ [SF1] CONNECT display in Normal Common Edit. Making a setting here automatically changes the setting of that

parameter as well.)

Settings: thru, insA (Insertion Effect A), insB (Insertion Effect B)

[SF3] LIMIT

NoteLimit Determines the lowest and highest notes of the keyboard range for each Element. The selected Element will sound

only when you play notes within this range.

Settings: C -2 ~ G8

n You can also create a lower and an upper range for the Element, with a note range “hole” in the middle, by specifying the

highest note ﬁrst. For example, setting a Note Limit of “C5 - C4” lets you play the Element from two separate ranges: C -2 to C4

and C5 to G8. Notes played between C4 and C5 do not play the selected Element.

n You can also set the range directly from the keyboard, by holding down the [INFORMATION] button and pressing the desired

low and high keys. Refer to the Basic Operation section, page 53.

VelocityLimit Determines the minimum and maximum values of the velocity range within which each Element will respond. Each

Element will only sound for notes played within its speciﬁed velocity range. For example, this lets you have one

Element sound when you play softly and have a different one sound when you play strongly.

Settings: 1 ~127

n You can also create separate low and high ranges for the Element, with a velocity “hole” in the middle, by specifying the

maximum value ﬁrst. For example, setting a Velocity Limit of 93 - 34 lets you play the Element from two separate velocity

ranges: soft (1 - 34) and hard (93 - 127). Notes played at middle velocities between 35 and 92 do not play the selected

Element.

VelCrossFade

(Velocity Cross Fade)

This determines how gradually the sound of an Element decreases in volume in proportion to the distance of velocity

changes outside the Velocity Limit setting (above). The practical application of this parameter is to create natural-

sounding velocity crossfades, in which different Elements change gradually depending on how strongly or softly you

play. The higher the value, the more gradual the level change.

Settings: 0 ~ 127

[F2] PITCH

[SF1] TUNE

From this display you can set various pitch-related parameters for the selected Element.

Coarse Determines the pitch of each Element in semitones.

Settings: -48 ~ 0 ~ +48

Fine Determines the ﬁne tuning for the pitch of each Element.

Settings: -64 ~ 0 ~ +63

FineScaling Determines the degree to which the notes (speciﬁcally, their position or octave range) affect the pitch in ﬁne tuning

(set above) of the selected Element, regarding C3 as the basic pitch.

A positive setting will cause the pitch of lower notes to change lower and that of higher notes to change higher.

Negative values will have the opposite effect.

Settings: -64 ~ 0 ~+63

Random This lets you randomly vary the pitch of the Element for each note you play. This is effective in reproducing the

natural pitch variations in acoustic instruments. It is also useful for creating unusual random pitch changes. The

higher the value, the greater the pitch variation. A value of “0” results in no pitch change.

Settings: 0 ~127

[SF2] VEL SENS

(Velocity Sensitivity)

From this display you can determine how the Pitch EG responds to velocity.

EGTime,

Segment

Determines the velocity sensitivity of the PEG’s Time parameters. Select the Segment ﬁrst, then set its Time

parameter. Positive Time settings will play back the speciﬁed Segment faster in proportion to the played velocity and

negative values will play it back slower.

Settings: EGTime -64 ~0 ~+63

Settings: Segment: atk, atk+dcy, dcy, atk+rls, all

atk (attack) .............................EG Time Value affects Attack time.

atk+dcy (attack + decay) ......EG Time Value affects Attack/Decay1 time.

dcy (decay)............................EG Time Value affects Decay time.

atk+rls (attack + release).......EG Time Value affects Attack/Release time.

all ..........................................EG Time Value affects all PEG Time parameters.

EGDepth,

Curve

Determines the velocity sensitivity of the PEG Level. Positive settings will cause the pitch change to rise the harder

you play the keyboard, and negative values will cause it to fall. The Curve parameter lets you select from ﬁve

different preset velocity curves (graphically indicated in the display), that determine how velocity affects the Pitch

EG Depth.

Settings: EGDepth: -64 ~ 0 ~ +63

Settings: Curve: 0 ~ 4

Pitch Determines the velocity sensitivity of the Pitch. Extreme values produce greater variation in PEG Depth. For positive

values, the harder you play the keys, the greater the change in PEG Depth. For negative values, the softer you play

the keys, the greater the change in PEG Depth.

Settings: -64 ~ 0 ~ +63

Reference Voice Mode

Voice Edit mode Normal Voice Edit Element Edit

197

Owner’s Manual

[SF3] PEG

(Pitch Envelope Generator)

From this display you can make all the time and level settings for the Pitch EG, which determine how the pitch of the

sound changes over time. These can be used to control the change in pitch from the moment a note is pressed on

the keyboard to the moment the sound stops.

The full names of the available parameters are shown in the chart below, as they appear in the display.

Settings: TIME: 0 ~ 127

LEVEL: -128 ~ 0 ~ +127

DEPTH: -64 ~ 0 ~ +63

n For details on the PEG, see page 160.

[SF4] KEY FLW (Key Follow)

From this display you can set the Key Follow effect – in other words, how the pitch of the Element and its Pitch EG

respond to the particular notes (or octave range) you play.

PitchSens (Pitch Sensitivity) Determines the sensitivity of the Key Follow effect (the pitch interval of adjacent notes).

At +100 (the normal setting), adjacent notes are pitched one semitone (100 cents) apart. At 0, all notes are the same

pitch. At +50, one octave is stretched out over twenty-four notes. For negative values, the settings are reversed.

Settings: -200 ~ 0 ~ +200

n This parameter is useful for creating alternate tunings, or for use with sounds that do not need to be spaced in semitones,

such as pitched drum sounds in a Normal Voice.

FCenterKey

Determines the central note or pitch for the Key Follow effect on pitch. The note number set here is the same pitch as

normal regardless of the Pitch Sensitivity setting. Depending on the Pitch Sensitivity parameter above, the further

away from the Center Key the keys are played, the greater the degree of pitch change.

Settings: C -2 ~ G8

n You can also set the Center Key directly from the keyboard, by holding down the [INFORMATION] button and pressing the

desired key. Refer to the Basic Operation section, page 53.

EGTimeSens

(EG Time Sensitivity)

Determines the degree to which the notes (speciﬁcally, their position or octave range) affect the Pitch EG times of

the selected Element. The Center Key (next parameter) is used as the basic pitch for this parameter.

A positive setting will cause the pitch of lower notes to change slower and that of higher notes to change faster.

Negative values will have the opposite effect.

Settings: -64 ~ 0 ~+63

FCenterKey

Determines the central note or pitch for the Key Follow effect on Pitch EG.

When the Center Key note is played, the PEG behaves according to its actual settings. The pitch change

characteristics for other notes will vary in proportion to the EG Time settings.

Settings: C -2 ~ G8

n You can also set the Center Key directly from the keyboard, by holding down the [INFORMATION] button and pressing the

desired key. Refer to the Basic Operation on page 53.

[F3] FILTER

[SF1] TYPE

From this display you can make comprehensive settings for the Filter unit. The available parameters differ

depending on which Filter type is selected here. For more information on the Filter types as well as illustrations of

each type, refer to page 161.

Type Basically, there are four different Filter types: an LPF (Low Pass Filter), an HPF (High Pass Filter), a BPF (Band Pass

Filter) and a BEF (Band Elimination Filter). Each type has a different frequency response and produces a different

effect on the sound. This synthesizer also features special combination Filter types, for additional sonic control.

Settings: Refer to page 209.

Gain Determines the Gain (the amount of boost applied to the signal sent to the Filter).

Settings: 0 ~ 255

Cutoff Determines the cutoff frequency for the Filter, or the central frequency around which the Filter is applied.

Settings: 0 ~ 255

HOLD ATK DCY1 DCY2 REL DEPTH

TIME Hold time Attack time Decay1 time Decay2 time Release time

LEVEL Hold level Attack level Decay1 level Decay2 level Release level Depth

Center key

Higher

range

Lower

range

Large

Small

–

Amount of

pitch change

Positive value

Higher rangeLower range

Slower speed

Faster speed

+63

+30

-40

Negative value

When Pitch Sensitivity is set to 100

Pitch Sensitivity and Center Key

EG Time Sensitivity and Center Key

Reference Voice Mode

Voice Edit mode Normal Voice Edit Element Edit

198

Owner’s Manual

Resonance/Width

This parameter’s function varies according to the selected Filter Type. If the selected ﬁlter is an LPF, HPF, BPF (excluding

the BPFw), or BEF, this parameter is used to set the Resonance. For the BPFw, it is used to adjust the Width of the band.

Resonance is used to set the amount of Resonance (harmonic emphasis) applied to the signal at the cutoff frequency.

This can be used in combination with the cutoff frequency parameter to add further character to the sound. The Width

parameter is used to adjust the width of the band of signal frequencies passed by the ﬁlter with the BPFw.

Settings: 0 ~ 127

Distance Determines the distance between the Cutoff frequencies, for the Dual Filter types (which feature two identical ﬁlters

combined in parallel, and the LPF12 + BPF6 type).

Settings: 0 ~ 255

HPFCutoff Determines the central frequency for the Key Follow parameter (below) of the HPF. When a ﬁlter type “LPF12” or

“LPF6” is selected, this parameter is available.

Settings: 0 ~ 255

HPFKeyFlw (Key Follow) Determines the Key Follow setting for the HPF Cutoff frequency. This parameter varies the center frequency

according to the position of the notes played on the keyboard. A positive setting will raise the center frequency for

higher notes and lower it for lower notes. A negative setting will have the opposite effect. When a ﬁlter type “LPF12”

or “LPF6” is selected, this parameter is available.

Settings: -200 ~ 0 ~ +200

[SF2] VEL SENS

(Velocity Sensitivity)

From this display you can determine how the Filter and the FEG respond to velocity.

EGTime,

Segment

Determines the velocity sensitivity of the FEG’s Time parameters.

Select the Segment ﬁrst, then set its Time parameter. Positive Time settings will play back the speciﬁed Segment

faster in proportion to the played velocity and negative values will play it back slower.

Settings: EG Time -64 ~0 ~+63

Settings: Segment: atk, atk+dcy, dcy, atk+rls, all

atk (attack) .............................EG Time Value affects Attack time.

atk+dcy (attack + decay) ......EG Time Value affects Attack/Decay1 time.

dcy (decay)............................EG Time Value affects Decay time.

atk+rls (attack + release).......EG Time Value affects Attack/Release time.

all ..........................................EG Time Value affects all FEG Time parameters.

EGDepth,

Curve

Determines the velocity sensitivity of the FEG Level.

For positive settings, the more strongly you play the keyboard, the more Filter changes the sound. Negative settings

do the opposite; the more softly you play, the more the sound changes. The Curve parameter lets you select from

ﬁve different preset velocity curves (graphically indicated in the display), that determine how velocity affects the

Filter EG.

Settings: EGDepth: -64 ~ 0 ~ +63

Settings: Curve: 0 ~ 4

Cutoff Determines the degree to which velocity affects the Cutoff frequency of the Filter EG. For positive values, the more

strongly you play the keys, the greater the change in the Cutoff frequency. Negative values do the opposite; the

more softly you play, the greater the change in frequency.

Settings: -64 ~ 0 ~ +63

Resonance Determines the degree to which velocity affects the Resonance of the Filter EG. For positive values, the more

strongly you play the keys, the greater the Resonance change. Negative values do the opposite; the more softly you

play, the greater the change in Resonance.

Settings: -64 ~ 0 ~ +63

[SF3] FEG

(Filter Envelope Generator)

From this display you can make all the time and level settings for the Filter EG, which determine how the tonal quality

of the sound changes over time. These can be used to control the change in Cutoff Frequency from the moment a

note is pressed on the keyboard to the moment the sound stops.

The full names of the available parameters are shown in the chart below, as they appear in the display.

Settings: TIME: 0 ~ 127

LEVEL: -128 ~ 0 ~+127

DEPTH: -64 ~ 0 ~+63

n For details on the FEG, see page 161.

[SF4] KEY FLW (Key Follow)

From this display you can set the Key Follow effect for the Filter – in other words, how the tonal qualities of the

Element and its Filter EG respond to the particular notes (or octave range) you play.

CutoffSens (Cutoff Sensitivity) Determines the degree to which the notes (speciﬁcally, their position or octave range) affect the Filter of the selected

Element. A Center Key setting (next parameter) of C3 is used as the basic setting by the Cutoff parameter. A positive

setting will lower the Cutoff frequency for lower notes and raise it for higher notes. A negative setting will have the

opposite effect.

Settings: -200 ~ 0 ~ +200

HOLD ATK DCY1 DCY2 REL DEPTH

TIME Hold time Attack time Decay1 time Decay2 time Release time

LEVEL Hold level Attack level Decay1 level Decay2 level Release level Depth

Reference Voice Mode

Voice Edit mode Normal Voice Edit Element Edit

199

Owner’s Manual

FCenterKey

This indicates that the central note for Cutoff Sensitivity above is C3. At C3, the tone remains unchanged. For other

notes played, the Cutoff Frequency varies according to the particular note and the Cutoff Sensitivity setting. Keep in

mind that this is for display purposes only; the value cannot be changed.

Settings: C -2 ~ G8

EGTimeSens

(EG Time Sensitivity)

Determines the degree to which the notes (speciﬁcally, their position or octave range) affect the Filter EG times of the

selected Element. The basic speed of change for the FEG is at the note speciﬁed in the Center Key (next

parameter). A positive setting will cause slower changes for lower notes and faster changes for higher notes.

A negative setting will have the opposite effect.

Settings: -64 ~ 0 ~ +63

FCenterKey

Determines the central note or pitch for the Key Follow effect on Filter EG. Depending on the EG Time Sensitivity

parameter above, the further away from the Center Key the keys are played, the more the time of the Filter EG

deviates from the normal. When the Center Key note is played, the FEG behaves according to its actual settings.

The Filter change characteristics for other notes will vary in proportion to the EG Time settings.

Settings: C -2 ~ G8

n You can also set the Center Key directly from the keyboard, by holding down the [INFORMATION] button and pressing the

desired key. Refer to the Basic Operation section, page 53.

[SF5] SCALE (Filter Scaling)

Filter Scaling controls the ﬁlter cutoff frequency according to the positions of the notes on the keyboard. You can

divide the entire keyboard by four break points, and assign different offset values of Cutoff Frequency to them

respectively. Refer to the setting example on page 211.

Settings: BREAK POINT 1 ~ 4: C-2 ~ G8

OFFSET 1 ~ 4: 128 ~ 0 ~ +127

n You can also set the Break Point directly from the Keyboard, by holding down the [INFORMATION] button and pressing the

desired key. Refer to the Basic Operation section, page 53.

[F4] AMP (Amplitude)

[SF1] LVL/PAN (Level/Pan)

This display not only lets you make basic Level and Pan settings for each individual Element, it also gives you some

detailed and unusual parameters for affecting Pan position.

Level Determines the output level for the selected Element.

Settings: 0 ~ 127

Pan Determines the stereo Pan position for the selected Element. This will also be used as the basic Pan position for the

Alternate, Random and Scale settings.

Settings: L63 (Left) ~ C (Center) ~ R63 (Right)

AlternatePan Determines the amount by which the sound of the selected Element is panned alternately left and right for each note

you press. The Pan setting (above) is used as the basic Pan position.

Settings: L64 ~ 0 ~ R63

RandomPan Determines the amount by which the sound of the selected Element is panned randomly left and right for each note

you press. The Pan setting is used as the Center Pan position.

Settings: 0 ~ 127

ScalingPan Determines the degree to which the notes (speciﬁcally, their position or octave range) affect the Pan position, left

and right, of the selected Element. At note C3, the main Pan setting (above) is used for the basic Pan position.

Settings: -64 ~ 0 ~ +63

[SF2] VEL SENS

(Velocity Sensitivity)

From this display you can determine how the Amplitude (volume) EG responds to velocity.

EG Time,

Segment

Determines the velocity sensitivity of the AEG’s Time parameters.

Select the Segment ﬁrst, then set its Time parameter. Positive Time settings will play back the speciﬁed Segment

faster in proportion to the played velocity and negative values will play it back slower.

Settings: EG Time -64 ~0 ~+63

Settings: Segment: atk, atk+dcy, dcy, atk+rls, all

atk (attack) ............................ EG Time Value affects Attack time.

atk+dcy (attack + decay)...... EG Time Value affects Attack/Decay1 time.

dcy (decay) ........................... EG Time Value affects Decay time.

atk+rls (attack + release) ...... EG Time Value affects Attack/Release time.

all .......................................... EG Time Value affects all AEG Time parameters.

Center key

Higher

range

Lower

range

Large

Small

–

Amount of cutoff

frequency change

Positive value

Higher rangeLower range

Slower speed

Faster speed

+63

+30

-40

Negative value

When Cutoff Sensitivity is set to 100

Cutoff Sensitivity and Center Key

EG Time Sensitivity and Center Key

Reference Voice Mode

Voice Edit mode Normal Voice Edit Element Edit

200

Owner’s Manual

Level,

Curve

Determines the velocity sensitivity of the Amplitude EG Level. For positive settings, the more strongly you play the

keyboard, the more the volume changes. Negative settings do the opposite; the more softly you play, the more the

volume changes. The Curve parameter lets you select from ﬁve different preset velocity curves (graphically

indicated in the display), that determine how velocity affects the Amplitude EG.

Settings: Level: 64 ~ 0 ~ +63

Curve: 0 ~ 4

[SF3] AEG

(Amplitude Envelope Generator)

From this display you can make all the time and level settings for the Amplitude EG, which determine how the

volume of the sound changes over time. These can be used to control the change in volume from the moment a note

is pressed on the keyboard to the moment the sound stops.

The full names of the available parameters are shown in the chart below, as they appear in the display.

Settings: TIME: 0 ~ 127

LEVEL: 0 ~ 127

n For details on the AEG, see page 162.

[SF4] KEY FLW (Key Follow)

From this display you can set the Key Follow effect for Amplitude – in other words, how the volume of the Element

and its Amplitude EG respond to the particular notes (or octave range) you play.

LevelSens (Level Sensitivity) Determines the degree to which the notes (speciﬁcally, their position or octave range) affect the volume of the

selected Element. A Center Key setting of C3 is used as the basic setting.

A positive setting will lower the output level for lower notes and raise it for higher notes. A negative setting will have

the opposite effect.

Settings: -200 ~ 0 ~+200

FCenterKey

This indicates that the central note for Level Sensitivity above is C3. At C3, the volume (level) remains unchanged.

For other notes played, the volume varies according to the particular note and the Level Sensitivity setting. Keep in

mind that this is for display purposes only; the value cannot be changed.

EGTimeSens

(EG Time Sensitivity)

Determines the degree to which the notes (speciﬁcally, their position or octave range) affect the Amplitude EG times

of the selected Element. The Center Key (next parameter) is used as the basic amplitude for this parameter.

A positive setting will cause the amplitude of lower notes to change slower and that of higher notes to change faster.

Negative values will have the opposite effect.

Settings: -64 ~ 0 ~ +63

FCenterKey

Determines the central note or pitch for the Key Follow effect on Amplitude EG. Depending on the EG Time

Sensitivity parameter above, the further away from the Center Key the keys are played, the more the time of the

Amplitude EG deviates from the norm.

When the Center Key is played, the AEG behaves according to its actual settings. The amplitude change

characteristics for other notes will vary in proportion to the EGTime settings.

Settings: C -2 ~ G8

n You can also set the Center Key directly from the keyboard, by holding down the [INFORMATION] button and pressing the

desired key. Refer to the Basic Operation section, page 53.

[SF5] SCALE

(Amplitude Scaling)

Amplitude Scaling controls the output level (set in the [F4] AMP → [SF1] LVL /PAN display) according to the

positions of the notes on the keyboard. You can divide the entire keyboard by four break points, and assign different

offset values of amplitude to them respectively. Refer to the setting example on page 211.

Settings: BREAK POINT 1 ~ 4: C-2 ~ G8

Settings: OFFSET 1 ~ 4: -128 ~ 0 ~ +127

n You can also set the Break Point directly from the Keyboard, by holding down the [INFORMATION] button and pressing the

desired key. Refer to the Basic Operation section, page 53.

INIT ATK DCY1 DCY2 REL DEPTH

TIME --- Attack time Decay1 time Decay2 time Release time

LEVEL Initial level Attack level Decay1 level Decay2 level --- ---

Center key

Higher

range

Lower

range

Large

Small

–

Amount of AEG

level change

Positive value

Higher rangeLower range

Slower speed

Faster speed

+63

+30

-40

Negative value

When Level Sensitivity is set to 100

Level Sensitivity and Center Key EG Time Sensitivity and Center Key

Reference Voice Mode

Voice Edit mode Normal Voice Edit Element Edit

201

Owner’s Manual

[F5] LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator)

This display gives you a comprehensive set of controls over the LFO for each individual Element. The LFO can be used to create vibrato, wah, tremolo and other

special effects, by applying it to the pitch, ﬁlter and amplitude parameters.

Wave Determines the LFO waveform used to vary the sound.

Settings: saw, tri, squ

Speed Determines the speed of the LFO waveform. The higher the value, the faster the speed.

Settings: 0 ~ 63

KeyOnReset Determines whether or not the LFO is reset each time a note is played.

Settings: off, on

KeyOnDelay Determines the delay time between the moment you play a note on the keyboard and the moment the LFO comes

into effect. A higher value results in a longer delay time.

Settings: 0 ~ 127

PMod

(Pitch Modulation Depth)

Determines the amount (depth) by which the LFO waveform varies (modulates) the pitch of the sound.

The higher the value, the greater the amount of pitch modulation.

Settings: 0 ~ 127

FMod

(Filter Modulation Depth)

Determines the amount (depth) by which the LFO waveform varies (modulates) the Filter Cutoff frequency. The

higher the value, the greater the amount of ﬁlter modulation.

Settings: 0 ~ 127

AMod

(Amplitude Modulation Depth)

Determines the amount (depth) by which the LFO waveform varies (modulates) the amplitude or volume of the

sound. The higher the value, the greater the amount of amplitude modulation.

Settings: 0 ~ 127

FadeInTime Determines the amount of time for the LFO effect to fade in (after the KeyOnDelay time has elapsed).

A higher value results in a slower fade-in.

Settings: 0 ~ 127

[F6] EQ (Equalizer)

Type Determines the Equalizer Type. This synthesizer features a wide selection of various equalizer types, which can be

used not only to enhance the original sound, but even completely change the character of the sound. The particular

parameters and settings available depend on the speciﬁc Equalizer Type that is selected.

Settings: EQ L/H, P.EQ, boost6, boost12, boost18, thru

EQ L/H (Low/High) ................ This is a “shelving” equalizer, which combines separate high and low frequency bands.

P.EQ (Parametric EQ) ............ The Parametric EQ is used to attenuate or boost signal levels (gain) around the Frequency. This type

features 32 different “Q” settings, which determine the frequency band width of the equalizer.

boost6 (boost 6dB)/boost12 (boost 12dB)/boost18 (boost 18dB)

These can be used to boost the level of the entire signal by 6dB, 12dB and 18dB, respectively.

thru ........................................ If you select this, the equalizers are bypassed and the entire signal is unaffected.

saw (sawtooth wave)

squ (square wave)

tri (triangle wave)

Time

Key on

Time

Key on

Off

Low Freq

Low Gain

High Freq

High Gain

Frequency

Gain

Settings: 50.1Hz – 2.00kHz

Setttings: 503.8Hz – 10.1kHz

Settings: -32 – 0 – +32

–

Gain

Settings: -32 – 0 – +32

Freq

Settings: 139.7Hz – 12.9kHz

Q (Frequency characteristic)

Settings: 0 – 31

Frequency

Gain

When set to EQ L/H When set to P.EQ

Reference Voice Mode

Voice Edit mode Drum Voice Edit Common Edit

202

Owner’s Manual

Drum Voice Edit

When a Drum Voice is selected, Voice Edit parameters are divided into Common Edit (parameters common to all keys, up to 73), and Key Edit

(parameters of individual keys).

These parameters are for making global (or common) edits to all keys of the selected Drum Voice.

These parameters are for editing the individual keys that make up a Drum Voice.

Common Edit

[VOICE] → Drum Voice selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON]

[F1] GENERAL

[SF1] NAME

Same as in Normal Voice Common Edit. See page 189.

[SF3] MEQ OFS (Master EQ Offset)

[SF5] OTHER

[F2] OUTPUT

Same as in Normal Voice Common Edit. See page 190. In addition, the following two parameters are also available.

InsRevSend

(Insertion Reverb Send)

Determines the Send level for the entire Drum voice (all keys), sent from Insertion Effect A/B to the Reverb effect.

Settings: 0 ~ 127

InsChoSend

(Insertion Chorus Send)

Determines the Send level for the entire Drum voice (all keys), sent from Insertion Effect A/B to the Chorus effect.

Settings: 0 ~ 127

n Send level (to Reverb and Chorus) cannot be set independently for each Drum key; the value is ﬁxed at 127 (maximum).

[F3] ARP (Arpeggio)

[SF1] TYPE

Same as in Normal Voice Common Edit. See page 191.

[SF2] LIMIT

[SF3] PLAY FX

[F4] CTL SET (Controller Set)

Same as in Normal Voice Common Edit. See page 192.

Please note that the Element Switch parameter is not available in Drum Voice Common edit.

[F6] EFFECT

Same as in Normal Voice Common Edit. See page 194.

The only difference here is that “KEY: OUT” appears in the [SF1] CONNECT display instead of “EL: OUT” (in Normal Common Effect).

Key Edit

[VOICE] → Drum Voice selection → [EDIT] → Key selection

[F1] OSC (Oscillator)

[SF1] WAVE

From this display you can select the desired wave or Normal voice used for the individual Drum key.

Type Determines whether a Wave or a Normal voice is to be used for the selected key. Also, use the Bank, Number and

Category parameters below to specify the desired Wave or Normal voice.

Settings: pre wav (Preset wave), voice, usr wav (User wave)

n When the Type is set to “voice” here, some parameters in the Drum Voice Edit mode cannot be edited.

ElementSw (Element Switch) This parameter is available when Type (above) is set to “pre wav” or “user wav.” This determines whether the

currently selected key is on or off, or in other words, whether the wave for the key is active or inactive.

Settings: on, off

Bank This parameter is available when Type (above) is set to “voice.” Any of the Normal voice banks can be selected.

n Plug-in voices cannot be selected for Drum keys.

Number Determines the Wave/Voice number. The number differs depending on the selected Type. For details about available

Waves and Voices, refer to the separate Data List booklet.

Settings: When Type is set to “pre wav”: 001 ~ 1859

When Type is set to “voice”: 001 ~ 128

When Type is set to “usr wav”: 001 ~1024

Reference Voice Mode

Voice Edit mode Drum Voice Edit Key Edit

203

Owner’s Manual

Category Determines the Category of the Wave/Normal Voice. If you switch to another Category, the ﬁrst Wave/Normal Voice in

that Category will be selected.

n For more information about the Categories, refer to the separate Data List booklet.

[SF2] OUTPUT

From this display you can set certain output parameters for the selected Drum key.

InsEFOut

(Insertion Effect Output)

Determines which Insertion effect (A or B) is used to process each individual Drum key. The “thru” setting lets you

bypass the Insertion effects for the speciﬁc key.

Settings: thru, insA (Insertion Effect A), insB (Insertion Effect B)

RevSend (Reverb Send) Determines the level of the Drum key sound (the bypassed signal) that is sent to Reverb effect. A setting of “0”

results in no Reverb processing of the Drum key sound. This is available only when Insertion Effect Output (above) is

set to “thru.”

Settings: 0 ~ 127

ChoSend (Chorus Send) Determines the level of the Drum key sound (the bypassed signal) that is sent to Chorus effect. A setting of “0”

results in no Chorus processing of the Drum key sound. This is available only when Insertion Effect Output (above) is

set to “thru.”

Settings: 0 ~ 127

OutputSel (Output Select) Determines the speciﬁc output(s) for the individual Drum key signal. You can assign each individual Drum key sound

to be output from a speciﬁc hardware output jack on the rear panel. This is available only when Insertion Effect

Output (above) is set to “thru.”

Settings: See page 31.

[SF5] OTHER

From this display you can set various parameters related to how the individual notes of the Drum voice respond to

the keyboard and MIDI data.

AssignMode When this is set to “single,” double playback of the same note is prevented. This is useful when two or more

instances of the same note are received nearly simultaneously, or without a corresponding note off message. To

allow playback of each instance of the same note, set this to “multi.”

Settings: single, multi

RcvNoteOff (Receive Note Off) Determines whether or not the selected Drum key responds to MIDI Note Off messages.

Settings: off, on

n This parameter is available when the Type is set to “pre wav” or “usr wav” in the [F1] OSC → [SF1] WAVE display (page 202).

AlternateGroup Set the Alternate Group to which the key is assigned. In a real drum kit, some drum sounds cannot physically be

played simultaneously, such as open and closed hi-hats.You can prevent keys from playing back simultaneously by

assigning them to the same Alternate Group. Up to 127 Alternate Groups can be deﬁned. You can also select “off”

here if you wish to allow the simultaneous playback of sounds.

Settings: off, 1 ~ 127

[F2] PITCH

[SF1] TUNE

From this display you can set various pitch-related parameters for the selected key.

Coarse Determines the pitch of each Drum Key Wave (or Normal Voice) in semitones.

Settings: -48 ~ +48

If a Normal voice has been assigned to the key, this parameter adjusts the position of its note (not its pitch) relative to note C3.

Fine Determines the ﬁne tuning for the pitch of each Drum Key Wave (or Normal Voice).

Settings: -64 ~ +63

[SF2] VEL SENS

(Velocity Sensitivity)

Pitch Determines how the pitch of the selected Drum key responds to velocity. For positive values, the more strongly you

play the key, the higher the pitch becomes. For negative values, the more strongly you play the key, the lower the

pitch.

Settings: -64 ~ +63

[F3] FILTER

[SF1] CUTOFF

This synthesizer lets you apply a low pass ﬁlter and high pass ﬁlter to each individual Drum key — giving you

exceptionally detailed and comprehensive sonic control over the Drum voice.

Settings: This parameter is available when the Type is set to “pre wav” or “usr wav” in the [F1] OSC → [SF1] WAVE display (page 202).

LPFCutoff Determines the Cutoff frequency of the Low Pass Filter.

Settings: 0 ~ 255

LPFReso Determines the amount of Resonance (harmonic emphasis) applied to the signal at the Cutoff frequency.

Settings: 0 ~ 127

HPFCutoff Determines the Cutoff frequency of the High Pass Filter.

Settings: 0 ~ 255

Reference Voice Mode

Voice Edit mode Drum Voice Edit Key Edit

204

Owner’s Manual

[SF2] VEL SENS

(Velocity Sensitivity)

LPFCutoff Determines the velocity sensitivity of the Low Pass Filter Cutoff frequency. For positive settings, the more strongly

you play the keyboard, the higher the cutoff frequency becomes. For negative settings, the more strongly you play,

the lower the cutoff frequency.

Settings: -64 ~ 0 ~ +63

[F4] AMP (Amplitude)

[SF1] LVL/PAN (Level/Pan)

This display not only lets you make basic Level and Pan settings for the sound of each individual Drum key, it also

gives you some detailed and unusual parameters for affecting Pan position.

Level Determines the output for the selected Drum key (Wave). This lets you make detailed balance adjustments among

the various sounds of the Drum voice.

Settings: 0 ~ 127

Pan Determines the stereo Pan position for the selected Drum key (Wave). This will also be used as the basic Pan

position for the Alternate and Random settings.

Settings: L63 (Left) ~ C (Center) ~ R63 (Right)

AlternatePan Determines the amount by which the sound of the selected Drum key is panned alternately left and right for each

note you press. The Pan setting (above) is used as the basic Pan position.

Settings: L64 ~ 0 ~ R63

n This parameter is available when the Type is set to “pre wav” or “usr wav” in the [F1] OSC → [SF1] WAVE display (page 202).

RandomPan Determines the amount by which the sound of the selected Drum key is panned randomly left and right for each note

you press. The Pan setting (above) is used as the Center Pan position.

Settings: 0 ~ 127

n This parameter is available when the Type is set to “pre wav” or “usr wav” in the [F1] OSC → [SF1] WAVE display (page 202).

[SF2] VEL SENS

(Velocity Sensitivity)

Level Determines the velocity sensitivity of the Amplitude Envelope Generator's output level. Positive settings will cause

the output level to rise the harder you play the keyboard and, conversely, negative values will cause it to fall.

Settings: -64 ~ 0 ~ +63

[SF3] AEG

(Amplitude Envelope Generator)

AttackTime

Settings: 0 ~ 127

Decay1Time

Settings: 0 ~ 127

Decay1Lvl (Level)

Settings: 0 ~ 127

Decay2Time

Settings: 0 ~ 126, hold

[F6] EQ (Equalizer)

Same as in Normal Voice Element Edit. See page 201.

n This parameter is available when the Type is set to “pre wav” or “usr wav” in the [F1] OSC → [SF1] WAVE display (page 202).

Attack level Attack level

Key on

Attack

time

Decay1

time

Decay2

time

Attack

time

Decay1

time

Decay2

time

Decay1 level Decay1 level

Key on

Level

Time Time

Level

Decay2Time=0 – 126

Decay2Time=hold

Reference Voice Mode

Voice Edit mode Plug-in Voice Edit Common Edit

205

Owner’s Manual

Plug-in Voice Edit

These parameters are basically the same as in Normal Voice Edit. Unlike with Normal voices, the Plug-in voices only have one Element for

editing.

n Depending on the particular Plug-in board you are using, some of the parameters described here may not be available. For details, refer to the relevant

owner's manual of the Plug-in board.

n For details on the current lineup of available Plug-in boards, see page 74.

Common Edit

[VOICE] → Plug-in Voice selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON]

[F1] GENERAL

[SF1] NAME

Same as in Normal Voice Common Edit. See page 189.

[SF2] PLY MODE (Play mode)

Same as in Normal Voice Common Edit. See page 190.

Please note that Micro Tuning is not available in Plug-in Voice Common Edit.

[SF3] MEQ OFS

(Master EQ Offset)

Same as in Normal Voice Common Edit. See page 190.

[SF4] PORTA (Portamento)

Same as in Normal Voice Common Edit. See page 190.

Please note that Portamento Mode and Time Mode are not available in Plug-in Voice Common Edit.

[SF5] OTHER

Same as in Normal Voice Common Edit. See page 190.

Unlike with Normal Voice Edit, the Upper and Lower ranges cannot be independently set here.

[F2] OUTPUT

Same as in Normal Voice Common Edit. See page 190.

[F3] ARP (Arpeggio)

[SF1] TYPE

Same as in Normal Voice Common Edit. See page 191.

[SF2] LIMIT

[SF3] PLAY FX

[F4] CTL SET (Controller Set)

[SF1] SET1/2

Same as in Normal Voice Common Edit. See page 192.

Please note that Element Switch is not available in Plug-in Voice Common Edit.

[SF2] MW (Modulation Wheel)

From this display you can set how the Plug-in voice responds to the Modulation wheel, by changing the control

depth for the ﬁlter, pitch and amplitude (volume).

Filter Determines the depth of control of the Modulation Wheel over the ﬁlter cutoff frequency. Negative settings result in

reversed Modulation wheel operation (i.e., moving the wheel up results in less modulation).

Settings: -64 ~ 0 ~ +63

PMod (Pitch Modulation Depth) Determines the depth of control the Modulation Wheel has over pitch modulation. The higher the setting, the greater

the depth of control.

Settings: 0 ~ 127

FMod (Filter Modulation Depth) Determines the depth of control the Modulation Wheel has over ﬁlter cutoff modulation. The higher the setting, the

greater the depth of control.

Settings: 0 ~ 127

AMod

(Amplitude Modulation Depth)

Determines the depth of control the Modulation Wheel has over amplitude modulation. The higher the setting, the

greater the depth of control.

Settings: 0 ~ 127

[SF3] AT (After Touch)

This synthesizer gives you a comprehensive set of after touch controls for the Plug-in voice, allowing you to change

the pitch and ﬁlter settings, and produce modulation effects (pitch, ﬁlter and amplitude) — simply by pressing down

hard on the keys.

Pitch Determines the depth of control of keyboard aftertouch over pitch. You can set a value (in semitones) of up to two

octaves.

Settings: -24 ~ 0 ~ +24

Filter Determines the depth of control of keyboard aftertouch over the ﬁlter cutoff frequency.

Settings: -64 ~ 0 ~ +63

PMod (Pitch Modulation Depth) Determines the depth of control that keyboard aftertouch has over pitch modulation. The higher the setting, the

greater the depth of control.

Settings: 0 ~ 127

Reference Voice Mode

Voice Edit mode Plug-in Voice Edit Element Edit

206

Owner’s Manual

FMod (Filter Modulation Depth) Determines the depth of control that keyboard aftertouch has over ﬁlter cutoff modulation. The higher the setting, the

greater the depth of control.

Settings: 0 ~ 127

AMod

(Amplitude Modulation Depth)

Determines the depth of control that keyboard aftertouch has over amplitude modulation. The higher the setting, the

greater the depth of control.

Settings: 0 ~ 127

[SF4] AC (Assignable Control)

From this display you can assign MIDI Control Change numbers (as Src) and determine the degree to which

the assigned controllers affect the ﬁlter and the modulation effects (pitch, ﬁlter and amplitude).

Src (Source) Determines the MIDI Control Change number used to control the ﬁlter, PMod, FMod, and AMod.

Settings: 0 ~ 95

Filter Determines the depth of control the Control Change numbers (set in the Src parameter above) have over the ﬁlter

cutoff frequency.

Settings: -64 ~ 0 ~ +63

PMod (Pitch Modulation Depth) Determines the depth of control the Control Change messages (set in the Src parameter above) have over pitch

modulation. The larger the setting, the greater the depth of control.

Settings: 0 ~ 127

FMod (Filter Modulation Depth) Determines the depth of control the Control Change messages (set in the Src parameter above) have over ﬁlter

cutoff modulation. The larger the setting, the greater the depth of control.

Settings: 0 ~ 127

AMod

(Amplitude Modulation Depth)

Determines the depth of control the Control Change messages (set in the Src parameter above) have over amplitude

modulation. The larger the setting, the greater the depth of control.

Settings: 0 ~ 127

[F6] EFFECT

Same as in Normal Voice Common Edit. See page 194.

Please note that the EL: OUT settings are not available in the [SF1] CONNECT display and the parallel setting (Insertion Connection) is not available in the [SF1]

CONNECT display.

Element Edit

[VOICE] → Plug-in Voice selection → [EDIT] → Element selection

[F1] OSC (Oscillator)

[SF1] WAVE

From this display you can select the desired Board Voice used for the Element of the Plug-in voice. Keep in mind that

a Plug-in voice only has one Element.

Bank Determines the Board Voice Bank.

Settings: These depend on the particular Plug-in board; refer to the relevant owner’s manual for details.

Number Determines the Board Voice Number.

Settings: These depend on the particular Plug-in board; refer to the relevant owner’s manual for details.

[SF5] OTHER

VelocityDepth Determines the velocity sensitivity of the Plug-in Voice. For higher values, the harder you play the keyboard, the

louder the voice becomes.

Settings: 0 ~ 127

VelocityOffset This lets you specify an offset value for Velocity Depth (above). In other words, you can increase the relative velocity

(or level) of the voice by a set amount – so that all the notes you play have the added velocity.

Settings: 0 ~ 127

NoteShift Determines the transpose setting for the Plug-in voice, or the amount (in semitones) by which the pitch is raised or

lowered. The pitch range is two octaves, up or down.

Settings: -24 ~ 0 ~ +24

Reference Voice Mode

Voice Edit mode

207

Owner’s Manual

[F2] PITCH

From this display you can make various time and level settings for the Pitch EG, which determine how the pitch of the Plug-in Voice changes over time.

The full names of the available parameters are shown in the chart below, as they appear in the display.

[F3] FILTER

HPFCutoff (High Pass Filter

Cutoff frequency)

Determines the Cutoff frequency for the High Pass Filter.

Settings: -64 ~ 0 ~ +63

[F4] NATIVE

With a Plug-in board installed to this synthesizer, you can create a Plug-in Voice by editing both native parameters (those parameters exclusive to the particular

board) and unique parameters (related speciﬁcally to this synthesizer).

Pressing [F4] gives you access to the native parameters of the Plug-in board. The parameters will vary depending on the Plug-in Board. For details about each

parameter and its functions, refer to the Owner’s Manual or the on-line help that came with your Plug-in Board.

[F5] LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator)

From this display you can set the basic LFO parameters for modulating the pitch to create vibrato and other special effects.

Speed Determines the speed of the LFO waveform. Positive settings increase the speed and negative settings decrease it.

Settings: -64 ~ 0 ~ +63

Delay Determines the delay time between the moment you press note on the keyboard and the moment the LFO comes

into effect. Positive settings lengthen the delay and negative settings shorten it.

Settings: -64 ~ 0 ~ +63

PMod (Pitch Modulation Depth) Determines the amount by which the LFO waveform controls the pitch. Positive settings increase the amount and

negative settings decrease it.

Settings: -64 ~ 0 ~ +63

[F6] EQ (Equalizer)

From this display you can apply equalizer settings to the Plug-in Voice. This is a shelving equalizer with

two bands; one for high frequencies and the other for low frequencies.

n For details on the EQ, see page 178.

LowFreq (Low Frequency) Determines the shelving point for the low frequencies. The levels of signals below this frequency will be boosted/

attenuated by the amount set in the LowGain parameter.

Settings: 32Hz ~ 2.0kHz

LowGain (Low Gain) Determines the amount by which signals below the LowFreq frequency will be boosted/attenuated.

Settings: -64 ~ 0 ~ +63

HighFreq (High Frequency) Determines the shelving point for the high frequencies. The levels of signals above this frequency will be boosted/

attenuated by the amount set in the HighGain parameter.

Settings: 500Hz ~ 16.0kHz

HighGain (High Gain) Determines the amount by which signals above the HighFreq frequency will be boosted/attenuated.

Settings: -64 ~ 0 ~ +63

Initial level

Release level

Original pitch

Attack time

Release time

Key off

Time

Pitch

Settings: -64 ~ 0 ~ +63

INIT ATK DCY1 DCY2 REL DEPTH

TIME --- Attack time --- --- Release time

LEVEL Initial level --- --- --- Release level ---

LowFreq

LowGain

HighFreq

HighGain

Freque

Gain

Reference Voice Mode

Voice Job mode

208

Owner’s Manual

The Voice Job mode features several basic operations, such as Initialize and Copy. After setting parameters as required from the selected

display, press the [ENTER] button to execute the Job.

This function lets you store your edited voice to User memory (Flash ROM).

For details, refer to page 85 in the Quick Guide section.

Voice Job mode

[VOICE] → Voice selection → [JOB]

[F1] INIT (Initialize)

This function lets you reset (initialize) all Voice parameters to their default settings. It also allows you to selectively initialize certain parameters, such as Common

settings, settings for each Element/Drum key, and so on – very useful when creating a completely new voice from scratch.

Type of parameter to be initialized

When a Normal Voice is selected: ALL, Common, EL1 ~ 4, without Wave

When a Drum Voice is selected: ALL, Common, EL, without Wave

When a Plug-in Voice is selected: ALL, Common, EL, without Wave

n If you turn the check mark on when a Drum voice is selected, you can select a Drum key. For details on selecting a key, refer

to page 53 in the Basic Operation section.

[F2] RECALL (Edit Recall)

If you are editing a Voice and select a different Voice without storing your edited one, all the edits you’ve made will be erased. If this happens, you can use Edit

Recall to restore the Voice with your latest edits intact.

[F3] COPY

From this display you can copy Common and Element/Drum Key parameter settings from any Voice to

the Voice you are editing. This is useful if you are creating a Voice and wish to use some parameter

settings from another Voice.

Source voice

Determines the Voice and data type to be copied.

Data type

When a Normal voice is selected: Common, Element 1 ~ 4

When a Drum voice is selected: Common, Drum key C0 ~ C6

When a Plug-in voice is selected: Common, Element

n If the source Voice type (Normal/Drum/Plug-in) differs from one of the Voice you are currently editing (destination), you will only

be able to copy Common parameters.

Data type of Destination voice

(current selected voice)

If the source is a Normal or Drum Voice and data type is set to Element or Drum Key, you can set the data type of the

destination Voice.

Data type

When a Normal voice is selected: Common, Element 1 ~ 4

When a Drum voice is selected: Common, Drum key C0 ~ C6

n If you choose to copy Common parameters from the source, this display will change to “Common.”

[F4] BULK (Bulk Dump)

This function lets you send all your edited parameter settings for the currently selected Voice to a computer or another MIDI instrument for data archiving.

For details, see page 185.

n In order to execute Bulk Dump, you’ll need to set the correct MIDI Device Number, with the following operation: [UTILITY] → [F5] MIDI → [SF1] CH → DeviceNo.

Voice Store mode

[VOICE] → Voice selection → [STORE]

Source Voice

Destination Voice (Current Voice)

Reference Voice Mode

Supplementary infomation

209

Owner’s Manual

■ Supplementary information

Micro Tuning List

Filter Type List

LPF24D (24dB/oct Digital Low Pass Filter)

A dynamic 24dB/oct low-pass ﬁlter with a

characteristic digital sound. Compared to the

LPF24A type (below), this ﬁlter can produce a more

pronounced resonance effect.

LPF24A (24dB/oct Analog Low Pass Filter)

A digital dynamic low-pass ﬁlter with characteristics

similar to a 4-pole analog synth ﬁlter.

LPF18 (18dB/oct Low Pass Filter)

3-pole 18dB/oct low-pass ﬁlter.

LPF18s (18dB/oct Staggered Low Pass Filter)

3-pole 18dB/oct low-pass ﬁlter. This ﬁlter has a

smoother cutoff slope than the LPF18 type.

LPF12 (12dB/oct Low Pass Filter)

12dB/oct low-pass ﬁlter. This ﬁlter is designed to be

used in conjunction with a high-pass ﬁlter.

LPF6 (6dB/oct low-pass Filter)

1-pole 6dB/oct low-pass ﬁlter. No resonance. This

ﬁlter is designed to be used in conjunction with a

high-pass ﬁlter.

HPF24D (24dB/oct Digital High Pass Filter)

A dynamic 24dB/oct high-pass ﬁlter with a

characteristic digital sound. This ﬁlter can produce

a pronounced resonance effect.

[VOICE] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF2] PLY MODE → M.TuningNo./M.TuningRoot (page 190)

M.TuningNo. Type M.TuningRoot Comments

Equal Temp (Equal temperament)

The “compromise” tuning used for most of the last 200 years of Western music, and found

on most electronic keyboards. Each half step is exactly 1/12 of an octave, and music can

be played in any key with equal ease. However, none of the intervals are perfectly in tune.

PureMaj (Pure major)

C ~ B

This tuning is designed so that most of the intervals (especially the major third and perfect

ﬁfth) in the major scale are pure. This means that other intervals will be correspondingly

out of tune. You need to specify the key (C~B) you will be playing in.

02 PureMin (Pure minor) C ~ B The same as Pure Major, but designed for the minor scale.

Werckmeist (Werckmeister)

C ~ B

Andreas Werckmeiser, a contemporary of Bach, designed this tuning so that keyboard

instruments could be played in any key. Each key has a unique character.

Kirnberger

C ~ B

Johann Philipp Kirnberger, an 18th century composer, created this tempered scale to

allow performances in any key.

Vallot&Yng (Vallotti & Young)

C ~ B

Francescatonio Vallotti and Thomas Young (both mid-1700s) devised this adjustment to

the Pythagorean tuning, in which the ﬁrst six ﬁfths are lower by the same amount.

06 1/4 Shift (1/4 shifted) -- This is the normal equal tempered scale shifted up 50 cents.

1/4 tone

Twenty-four equally spaced notes per octave. (Play twenty-four notes to move one

octave.)

08 1/8 tone -- Forty-eight equally spaced notes per octave. (Play forty-eight notes to move one octave.)

09 Indian -- Usually observed in Indian music (white keys only).

10 Arabic 1

C ~ B

Usually observed in Arabic music.

11 Arabic 2

12 Arabic 3

[VOICE] → [EDIT] → Element selection → [F3] FILTER → [SF1] TYPE → Type (page 197)

Resonance

These frequencies are

“passed” by the ﬁlter.

Resonance

LPF18

LPF18s

Resonance

Reference Voice Mode

Supplementary

210

Owner’s Manual

HPF12 (12dB/oct High Pass Filter)

12dB/oct dynamic high-pass ﬁlter.

BPF12D (12dB/oct Digital Band Pass Filter)

BPFw (Wide Band Pass Filter)

A 12dB/oct BPF that combines HPF and LPF ﬁlters

to allow wider bandwidth settings.

BPF6 (6dB/oct Band Pass Filter)

BEF12 (12dB/oct Band Elimination Filter)

BEF6 (6dB/oct Band Elimination Filter)

Dual LPF (Dual Low Pass Filter)

Two 12dB/oct low-pass ﬁlters connected in parallel.

Dual HPF (Dual High Pass Filter)

Two 12dB/oct high-pass ﬁlters connected in

parallel.

Dual BPF (Dual Band Pass Filter)

Two 6dB/oct band-pass ﬁlters connected in

parallel.

Dual BEF (Dual Band Elimination Filter)

Two 6dB/oct band-elimination ﬁlters connected in

serial.

LPF12 + BPF6 (12dB/oct Low Pass Filter + 6dB/

oct Band Pass Filter)

A combined low-pass and high-pass ﬁlter.

thru

The ﬁlters are bypassed and the entire signal is

unaffected.

Resonance

12db/oct

Resonance

Cutoff range

Range passed

Level

Frequency

Width can be

increased

Cutoff range

Range passed

Level

Frequency

6db/oct

Resonance

Cutoff range

Range passed

Level

Frequency

Cutoff range

Range passed

Level

Frequency

Range passed

Center frequency

Level

Frequency

Distance

The lower cutoff frequency is set

directly on the display.

Level

Frequency

Distance

The lower cutoff frequency is set

directly on the display.

Level

Frequency

Distance

The lower cutoff frequency is set

directly on the display.

Level

Frequency

Distance

The lower cutoff frequency is set

directly on the display.

Level

Frequency

Distance

The lower cutoff frequency is set

directly on the display.

Reference Voice Mode

Voice Store mode

211

Owner’s Manual

Setting example of Filter Scaling

The best way to understand Filter Scaling is by example. For the

settings shown in the example display below, the basic Cutoff

frequency value is 64, and the various Offset values at the selected

Break point settings change that basic value accordingly. The

speciﬁc changes to the Cutoff frequency are shown in the diagram

below. The Cutoff frequency changes in a linear fashion between

successive Break Points as shown.

Setting example of Amplitude Scaling

The best way to understand Amplitude Scaling is by example.

For the settings shown in the example display above, the basic

Amplitude (volume) value for the selected Element is 80, and the

various Offset values at the selected Break point settings change

that basic value accordingly. The speciﬁc changes to the Amplitude

are shown in the diagram below. The Amplitude changes in a linear

fashion between successive Break Points as shown.

[VOICE] → [EDIT] → Element selection → [F3] FILTER → [SF5] SCALE

(page 199)



2C3A4

Cutoff Frequency

Break

Point 1

Break

Point 2

Break

Point 3

Break

Point 4

Note

[VOICE] → [EDIT] → Element selection → [F4] AMP → [SF5] SCALE

(page 200)

C1 C2 C3 C4

Amplitude

Break

Point 1

Break

Point 2

Break

Point 3

Break

Point 4

Note

Reference Performance Mode

Performance Play mode

212

Owner’s Manual

Performance mode

■ Creating Performances — basic procedure

You can create and edit your original Performances by setting various parameters in both the Performance Play mode and Performance Edit

mode, while the Performance Job mode provides some basic parameter-related tools, such as Initialize and Copy. Once you’ve edited a

Performance, you can store it to a User Bank in internal memory (Flash ROM) in the Performance Store mode and save all the edited

Performances to a SmartMedia/USB storage device in the File mode.

The Performance Play mode lets you perform a variety of general editing operations on the selected Performance. For more detailed and

comprehensive editing operations, use the Performance Edit mode.

n The parameters that have the same name in the Performance Play mode and in the Performance Edit mode have the same functions and settings.

Performance Play mode

[PERFORM] → Performance selection

[F1] PLAY

TCH (Transmit Channel) Same as in Voice Play mode.

These parameters are available both in the Voice mode and the Performance mode regardless of the selected Voice

or Performance.

OCT (Octave)

ASA (ASSIGN A),

ASB (ASSIGN B)

n TCH (Transmit Channel), OCT (Octave), ASA (ASSIGN A), and ASB (ASSIGN B) settings do not belong to each Performance. Because of this, these are not stored as an

individual Performance in the Performance Store mode (page 220).

AS1 (ASSIGN 1),

AS2 (ASSIGN 2)

Indicates the values obtained by controlling the respective Knobs (printed “ASSIGN 1” and “ASSIGN 2”) when the

lamps of both the [PAN/SEND] and [TONE] buttons are turned on. The functions assigned to these knobs depend on

the setting of the Voice assigned to each Part of the Performance.

[SF1] ARP1 (Arpeggio 1) - [SF5]

ARP5 (Arpeggio 5)

You can register the desired Arpeggio types to these buttons and call them up any time during your keyboard

performance. Refer to page 70 in the Quick Guide section.

[F2] VOICE

From this display you can select a Voice for each Part and determine the note range it can be played from.

[SF1] ADD INT

(Add Internal Voice)

Press this button to assign an internal Voice to the selected Part.

[SF2] ADD PLG

(Add Plug-in Voice)

Press this button to assign a Plug-in Voice to the selected Part.

[SF3] DELETE

Pressing this button deletes the Voice assignment for the selected Part, leaving the Part blank.

[SF4] LIMIT L (Note Limit Low)

This sets the lowest note of the range over which the Voice of the selected Part sounds. Simultaneously hold down

this button and press the desired key on the keyboard to set the note.

[SF5] LIMIT H (Note Limit High)

This sets the highest note of the range over which the Voice of the selected Part sounds. Simultaneously hold down

this button and press the desired key on the keyboard to set the note.

[F3] EFFECT

Pressing the [F3] EFFECT button in the Performance Play mode calls up the same EFFECT display in the Performance Edit mode ([PERFORM] → [EDIT] →

[COMMON] → [F6] EFFECT). From this display, you can set the effect related parameters for the current Performance. See page 215.

[F4] PORTA (Portamento)

From this display you can set the Portamento parameters. Portamento is used to create a smooth transition in pitch from the ﬁrst note played on the keyboard to

the next.

PortaSw (Portamento Switch) Determines whether Portamento is on or off for all Parts. (This is a global switch and overrides the individual Part

settings in Part Switch below.)

Settings: off, on

PortaTime (Portamento Time) Determines the pitch transition time. This parameter offsets the same parameter in Part Edit (page 216). Higher

values result in longer transition times.

Settings: -64 ~ 0 ~ +63

PartSwitch Determines whether Portamento is on or off for each individual Part. This is available only when the PortaSw (above)

is set to on.

Reference Performance Mode

Performance Edit mode Common Edit

213

Owner’s Manual

Voice Edit parameters are divided into Common Edit (parameters common to all four Parts), and Part Edit (parameters of individual Parts).

[F5] EG (Envelope Generator)

This display contains the basic EG settings, both volume and ﬁlter, for the Performance, as well as the ﬁlter’s cutoff frequency and resonance settings. The settings

made here are applied as offsets to the AEG and FEG settings in the Performance Edit mode (pages 218, 219).

The parameters are same as in Voice Play mode. See page 189.

[F6] ARP (Arpeggio)

This display contains the basic settings for Arpeggio playback, including Type and Tempo. Note that the Performance mode lets you independently enable or

disable Arpeggio playback for each Part.

The parameters are same as in the Voice Play mode (page 189) except for the following one.

PartSw Determines whether Arpeggio is on or off for the selected Part. The Parts for which boxes are checkmarked are

enabled for Arpeggio play.

Performance Edit mode

[PERFORM] → Performance selection → [EDIT]

Common Edit

[PERFORM] → Performance selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON]

[F1] GENERAL

[SF1] NAME

From this display you can assign the category (sub and main) of the selected Performance, and create a name for

the Performance. The Performance name can contain up to 10 characters. For detailed instructions on naming a

Performance, see “Basic Operation” on page 53.

[SF3] MEQ OFS

(Master EQ Offset)

From this display you can adjust the master (global) EQ settings for all Parts of the selected Performance. The level

of each of the four bands (with the exception of “MID”) can be adjusted. Moreover, you can also tweak these settings

directly from the four Knobs on the front panel. Editing by Knobs can be done in the Performance Play mode.

Settings: -64 ~ 0 ~+63

[SF4] PORTA (Portamento)

This display allows you to set the Portamento related parameters.

The parameters are the same as in the Performance Play mode. See page 212.

[SF5] OTHER

From this display you can set the control functions for the Knobs and related parameters.

With the exception of Pitch Bend, which cannot be set here, these parameters are the same as in the Voice Edit

mode (page 190).

[F2] OUT/MEF (Output/Master Effect)

[SF1] OUT (Output)

Volume Determines the output level of the selected Performance. You can adjust the overall volume, keeping the balance

between all Parts.

Settings: 0 ~ 127

Pan Determines the stereo pan position of the selected Performance. This parameter offsets the same parameter in the

Part Edit setting. You can also adjust this parameter using the PAN knob (with the [PAN/SEND] lamp turned on) on

the front panel. Editing by using the Knobs can be done also in the Performance Play mode.

Settings: L63 (Left) ~ C (Center) ~ R63 (Right)

n A setting of “C” (center) maintains the individual Pan settings of each Part.

RevSend Determines the Send level of the signal sent from Insertion Effect A/B (or the bypassed signal) to the Reverb effect.

You can also adjust this parameter using the REVERB knob (with the [PAN/SEND] lamp turned on) on the front panel.

Editing by using the Knobs can be done also in the Performance Play mode.

Settings: 0 ~ 127

ChoSend Determines the Send level of the signal sent from Insertion Effect A/B (or the bypassed signal) to the Chorus effect.

You can also adjust this parameter using the [CHORUS] knob (with the [PAN/SEND] lamp turned on) on the front

panel. Editing by using the Knobs can be done also in the Performance Play mode.

Settings: 0 ~127

n For details on Effect connections in the Performance mode, see page 179.

Reference Performance Mode

Performance Edit mode Common Edit

214

Owner’s Manual

[SF2] MEQ (Master EQ)

From this display you can apply ﬁve-band equalization to all Parts of the selected Performance. You can raise or

lower the signal level at the Frequency of each band (LOW, LOWMID, MID, HIGHMID, HIGH).

SHAPE Determines whether the equalizer type used is Shelving or Peaking. The Peaking type attenuates/boosts the signal

at the speciﬁed Frequency setting, whereas the Shelving type attenuates/boosts the signal at frequencies above or

below the speciﬁed Frequency setting. This parameter is available only for the LOW and HIGH frequency bands.

Settings: shelv (Shelving type), peak (Peaking type)

FREQ (Frequency) Determines the center frequency. Frequencies around this point are attenuated/boosted by the Gain setting.

Settings: LOW: Shelving 32Hz ~ 2.0kHz, Peaking 63Hz ~ 2.0kHz

LOWMID, MID, HIGHMID: 100Hz ~ 10.0kHz

HIGH: 500Hz ~ 16.0kHz

GAIN Determines the level gain for the Frequency (set above), or the amount the selected frequency band is attenuated or

boosted.

Settings: -12dB ~ 0dB ~ +12dB

Q (Frequency Characteristic) This varies the signal level at the Frequency setting to create various frequency curve characteristics.

Settings: 0.1 ~ 12.0

n For details on the EQ, see page 178.

[SF3] MEF (Master Effect)

From this display you can set the Master Effect related parameters. This display can be called up by pressing and

holding the [MASTER EFFECT] button on the front panel.

Switch Determines whether Master Effect is applied or not to the selected Performance. You can turn it on or off by pressing

the [MASTER EFFECT] button on the front panel.

Settings: off, on

Type Determines the Master effect type.

Settings: Refer to the Effect Types list in the separate Data List booklet.

n The available parameters except for the above two differ depending on the currently selected effect type. For more information, refer to the separate Data List booklet.

[F3] ARP (Arpeggio)

From this display you can set the Arpeggio related parameters.

[SF1] TYPE

Same as in Normal Voice Common Edit. See page 191.

[SF2] LIMIT

[SF3] PLAY FX (Play Effect)

[SF4] OUT CH (Output Channel)

From this display you can set a separate MIDI output channel for the Arpeggio playback data, letting you have the

Arpeggio sound from an external tone generator or synthesizer.

OutputSwitch When this is set to on, Arpeggio playback data is output via MIDI.

Settings: on, off

TransmitCh Determines the MIDI transmit channel for Arpeggio playback data. When set to “KbdCh,” the Arpeggio playback

data is output via the MIDI Keyboard Transmit Channel ([UTILITY] → [F5] MIDI → KBDTransCh).

Settings: 1 ~ 16, KbdCh (Keyboard Channel)

[F4] CTL ASN (Controller Assign)

You can assign Control Change numbers to the controllers listed below, letting you use the hardware controllers on the keyboard to alter the sound of external

MIDI devices, via the appropriate MIDI messages. When the MOTIF ES receives Control Change data corresponding to the settings here, the internal tone

generator responds as if the instrument's controllers were used.

BC (Breath Controller) Determines the Control Change number generated when you apply breath pressure to the Breath Controller

connected to the BREATH connector.

RB (Ribbon Controller) Determines the Control Change number generated when you run your ﬁnger across the surface of the Ribbon

Controller.

RBMode

(Ribbon Controller Mode)

Determines whether the Ribbon Controller value returns to a center value when you release your ﬁnger from the

Ribbon Controller (reset), or the value is retained at the value at the last point of contact (hold).

AS1 (Assign 1),

AS2 (Assign 2)

Determines the Control Change number generated when you control the KN3 (Knob3) and the KN4 (Knob4) with

both the [PAN/SEND] and [TONE] lamp turned on.

FC1 (Foot Controller 1),

FC2 (Foot Controller 2)

Determines the Control Change number generated when you use the Foot Controller connected to the FOOT

CONTROLLER jack.

n Keep in mind that the functions of these controllers set here are not changed for the internal tone generator. The controller assignments for the MOTIF ES itself depend on

the settings of the Voices assigned to each Part.

[F5] AUDIO IN

The audio signal input from the A/D INPUT jack, mLAN connector (when the optional mLAN16E has been installed to this synthesizer), DIGITAL IN or OPTICAL IN

connector (when the optional AIEB2 has been installed to this synthesizer) can be handled as an Audio Input Part. You can apply various parameters such as

Effect settings to this Part, just as with the other Parts.

n For details about the Audio Input Parts, see page 165.

Reference Performance Mode

Performance Edit mode Common Edit

215

Owner’s Manual

[SF1] OUTPUT

Volume Determines the output level of the Audio Input Part.

Settings: 0 ~ 127

Pan Determines the stereo pan position of the Audio Input Part.

Settings: L63 (Left) ~ C (Center) ~ R63 (Right)

RevSend Determines the Send level of the Audio Input Part signal sent to the Reverb effect.

Settings: 0 ~ 127

ChoSend Determines the Send level of the Audio Input Part signal sent to the Chorus effect.

Settings: 0 ~ 127

DryLevel Determines the level of the Audio Input Part which has not been processed with the System Effects (Reverb,

Chorus).

Settings: 0 ~ 127

n For details about Effect connection in the Performance mode, see page 179.

Mono/Stereo Determines the signal conﬁguration for the Audio Input Part, or how the signal or signals are routed (stereo or mono).

Settings: stereo, L mono, R mono, L+R mono

stereo............... Both the L and R channels of the audio input are used.

L (left) mono .... Only the L channel of the audio input is used.

R (right) mono . Only the R channel of the audio input is used.

L+R mono........ The L and R channels of the audio input are mixed and processed in mono.

OutputSel (Output Select) Determines the output jack assignment for the Audio Input Part.

Settings: See page 31.

[SF2] INS TYPE (Insertion Type)

This display is available only when the AD (A/D Part) is set to on from the [F6] EFFECT → [SF2] INS SW display. The

type and connection of the Insertion Effect applied to the A/D Part can be set from this display.

InsEF Connect

(Insertion Effect Connection)

Same as in the CONNECT display in the Voice Edit mode ([VOICE] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F6] EFFECT → [SF1]

CONNECT). Please note that the InsEF Connect cannot be set to “parallel” here.

InsA Ctgry (Insertion A Category)

InsA Type (Insertion A Type)

InsB Ctgry (Insertion B Category)

InsB Type (Insertion B Type)

n Insertion effects can be applied only to the A/D Part, among the Audio Input Parts.

[F6] EFFECT

This menu gives you comprehensive control over the effects. For details about the Effect connections in the Performance mode, see page 179.

[SF1] CONNECT (Connection)

EF PART → PLG-EF

(Plug-in Insertion Effect)

Determines the Part to which the Insertion effect is applied. This parameter is available only when a special Effect

Plug-in board (PLG100-VH) has been installed.

Settings: Part 1~4, PartP2~P3, AD, off

Chorus Ctg (Category),

Chorus Type

Determines the Chorus effect type.

Settings: Refer to the Effect Types list in the separate Data List booklet.

Chorus Return (Level) Determines the Return level of the Chorus Effect.

Settings: 0 ~ 127

Chorus Pan Determines the pan position of the Chorus effect sound.

Settings: L63 (far left) ~ C (center) ~ R63 (far right)

Chorus to Reverb Determines the Send level of the signal sent from the Chorus Effect to the Reverb Effect.

Settings: 0 ~ 127

Reverb Type Determines the Reverb effect type.

Settings: Refer to the Effect Types list in the separate Data List booklet.

Reverb Return Determines the Return level of the Reverb Effect.

Settings: 0 ~ 127

Reverb Pan Determines the pan position of the Reverb effect sound.

Settings: L63 (far left) ~ C (center) ~ R63 (far right)

Reference Performance Mode

Performance Edit mode Part Edit

216

Owner’s Manual

These parameters are for editing the individual Parts that make up a Performance.

To switch between the display for Parts 1 - 4 to which the internal Voices are assigned and the display for Plug-in Parts (PLG1 - 3) to which the

Plug-in Voices are assigned, press the [F6] button.

n When a Plug-in Voice is assigned to a Part of the selected Performance, some parameters may not be available depending on the installed Plug-in board.

[SF2] INS SW (Insertion Switch)

The Insertion Effects can be applied to up to eight Parts. This display lets you set to which Parts the Insertion Effects

are applied.

[SF3] PLG-EF (Plug-in Effect)

This display lets you set the Plug-in Insertion Effect related parameters when the Effect Plug-in Board PLG100-VH

has been installed to this synthesizer. For details on each parameter, refer to the Owner’s Manual included with the

PLG100-VH.

[SF4] REVERB

The number of parameters and values available differs depending on the currently selected effect type. For more

information, see the Effect Type List in the separate Data List booklet.

[SF5] CHORUS

Part Edit

[PERFORM] → Performance selection → [EDIT] → Part selection

[F1] VOICE

[SF1] VOICE

PartSw (Part Switch) Determines whether each Part is on or off. Since a Performance can consist of up to four Parts, you can select four

Parts from Parts 1 - 4 and the Plug-in Parts 1 - 3.

Settings: on, off

Bank Determines the Voice Bank (page 60) for each Part.

For details about the Plug-in Voice Bank, refer to the Owner’s Manual included with your Plug-in Board.

n When the cursor is located on the Bank, you can select a Voice via the way explained on page 60.

Number Determines the Voice Program number for each Part.

For details about the Plug-in Voice Program number, refer to the Owner’s Manual included with your Plug-in Board.

[SF2] MODE

Mono/Poly Determines the playback method of the Voice for each Part — monophonic (single notes only) or polyphonic

(multiple notes).

Settings: mono, poly

n This parameter is not available for the Part to which a Drum Voice is assigned.

ArpSwitch (Arpeggio Switch) Determines whether Arpeggio is on or off for the currently selected Part.

Settings: on, off

[SF3] LIMIT

NoteLimitH (Note Limit High) Determines the lowest and highest notes of the keyboard range for each Part. Each Part will only sound for notes

played within its speciﬁed range.

Settings: C -2~G8

n If you specify the highest note ﬁrst and the lowest note second, for example “C5 to C4,” then the note range covered will be

“C-2 to C4” and “C5 to G8.”

n You can set the note by pressing the keyboard while holding the [INFORMATION] button.

NoteLimitL (Note Limit Low)

VelLimitH (Velocity Limit High) Determines the minimum and maximum values of the velocity range within which each Part will respond. Each Part

will only sound for notes played within its speciﬁed velocity range.

Settings: 1~127

n If you specify the maximum value ﬁrst and the minimum value second, for example “93 to 34,” then the velocity range covered

will be “1 to 34” and “93 to 127.”

VelLimitL (Velocity Limit Low)

[SF4] PORTA (Portamento)

Determines the Portamento parameters for each Part. Portamento is used to create a smooth transition in pitch from

the ﬁrst note played on the keyboard to the next.

Switch Determines whether Portamento is on or off.

Settings: off, on

Time Determines the pitch transition time. Higher values mean longer transition times.

Settings: 0 ~127

Mode Determines the Portamento mode.

Settings: ﬁngr (ﬁngered), full (full time)

ﬁngr (ﬁngered) ......... Portamento is only applied when you play legato (playing the next note before releasing the previous one).

full (full time)............. Portamento is always applied.

n The Mode setting is not available for the Plug-in Part.

n These Portamento parameters above are not available for the Part to which the Drum Voice is assigned.

Reference Performance Mode

Performance Edit mode Part Edit

217

Owner’s Manual

[SF5] OTHER

PB (Pitch Bend) Upper,

PB (Pitch Bend) Lower

These two parameters are available for Parts 1 - 4 to which the internal Normal Voices are assigned. These

determine the pitch change range (in semitones) of the Pitch Bend wheel for the Part’s Voice. For example, a Lower

setting of -12 would result in the pitch being lowered up to a maximum of one octave (12 semitones) when the Pitch

Bend wheel is moved downwards. Similarly, setting the Upper parameter to +12 would result in a maximum pitch

rise of one octave when the wheel is moved upwards.

Settings: -48 ~0 ~+24

PB (Pitch Bend) Range This parameter is available for Parts 1 - 4 to which the internal Drum Voices are assigned and Plug-in Parts 1 - 3. This

determines the pitch change range (in semitones) of the Pitch Bend wheel. Unlike the Pitch Bend setting for Parts 1

- 4 to which the internal Normal Voices are assigned described above, the Upper and Lower ranges of the Drum

Voice Parts and Plug-in Parts cannot be set independently.

Settings: -24 ~ 0 ~ +24

VelSensDpt

(Velocity Sensitivity Depth)

Determines the degree to which the resulting volume of

the tone generator responds to your playing strength.

The higher the value, the more the volume changes in

response to your playing strength (as shown at right).

Settings: 0 ~ 127

VelSensOfst

(Velocity Sensitivity Offset)

Determines the amount by which played velocities are adjusted for the actual resulting velocity effect. This lets you

raise or lower all velocities by the same amount — allowing you to automatically compensate for playing too strongly

or too softly.

Settings: 0 ~ 127

[F2] OUTPUT

[SF1] VOL/PAN (Volume/Pan)

Volume Determines the volume for each Part, giving you detailed control over the level balance among the Parts.

Settings: 0~127

Pan Determines the stereo pan position for each Part.

Settings: L63 (far left) ~ C (center) ~ R63 (far right)

VoiceELPan (Voice Element Pan) Determines whether the individual pan settings for each Voice (made via [VOICE] → [EDIT] → Element selection →

[F4] AMP → [SF1] LVL/PAN → Pan) are applied or not. When this is set to “off,” the basic pan position for the

selected Part is set to center.

Settings: on, off

n This parameter is not available for the Plug-in Parts.

[SF2] EF SEND (Effect Send)

From this display you can set the Send Level and Dry Level sent to the System Effects for each Part. For details

about the Effect connection in the Performance mode, see page 179.

RevSend (Reverb Send) Determines the send level for the Reverb effect of the selected Part, giving you detailed control over the Reverb

balance among the Parts.

Settings: 0~127

ChoSend (Chorus Send) Determines the send level for the Chorus effect of the selected Part, giving you detailed control over the Chorus

balance among the Parts.

Settings: 0~127

Dry Level Determines the level of the unprocessed (dry) sound of the selected Part, letting you control the overall effect

balance among the Parts.

Settings: 0~127

127

0 127

Depth = 127

Depth = 32

Depth = 64

Depth = 0

When Offset (below) is set to 64:

Actual resulting

velocity (affecting the

tone generator)

Velocity with which you play a note

127

0 12764

12764

127

When Depth (above) = 64 and Offset = 32

When Depth (above) = 64 and Offset = 64

When Depth (above) = 64 and Offset = 96

Actual resulting

velocity (affecting

the tone generator)

Velocity with which you play a note

Reference Performance Mode

Performance Edit mode Part Edit

218

Owner’s Manual

[SF3] SELECT (Output Select)

From this display you can assign individual Parts to sound from independent output connectors (jacks).

OutputSel (Output Select) Determines the speciﬁc output(s) for the individual Part. You can assign each individual Part’s Voice to be output

from a speciﬁc hardware output jack on the rear panel.

Settings: See page 31.

InsEF (Insertion Effect) Determines whether the Insertion effects are applied to individual Parts or not.

Settings: on, off

[F3] EQ (Equalizer)

From this display you can adjust the EQ settings for each Part. Note that two different display types listed below are provided and you can switch between them

by pressing the [SF5] button. Each display type features the same settings in a different format; use the type you feel most comfortable with.

• Display showing four Parts

• Display showing all parameters for one Part

Keep in mind that since all the available parameters cannot be simultaneously displayed in the four-Part display, you will need to use the cursor controls to scroll

the display in order to see and set the other parameters.

For details about the Effect connection including the EQ in the Performance mode, see page 179.

n This display is not available for the Plug-in Part.

LowFreq (Low Frequency) Determines the center frequency of the low EQ band that is attenuated/boosted.

Settings: 50.1 ~ 2.00K

LowGain (Low Gain) Determines the amount of boost or attenuation applied to the low EQ band.

Settings: -32 ~ +32

MidFreq (Middle Frequency) Determines the center frequency of the middle EQ band that is attenuated/boosted.

Settings: 139.7 ~ 10.1K

MidGain (Middle Gain) Determines the amount of boost or attenuation applied to the middle EQ band.

Settings: -32 ~ +32

MidReso (Middle Resonance) Determines the resonance applied to the center frequency of the middle EQ band.

Settings: 0 ~ 31

HighFreq (High Frequency) Determines the center frequency of the high EQ band that is attenuated/boosted.

Settings: 503.8 ~ 14.0K

HighGain (High Gain) Determines the amount of boost or attenuation applied to the high EQ band.

Settings: -32 ~ +32

[F4] TONE

You can set parameters related to the pitch and tone for each Part. Keep in mind that the settings made here are applied as offsets to the Voice Edit settings.

[SF1] TUNE

NoteShift Determines the pitch (key transpose) setting for each Part in semitones.

Settings: -24 ~ +24

Detune Determines the ﬁne tuning for each Part.

Settings: -12.8Hz ~+12.7Hz

[SF2] FILTER

Cutoff Determines the cutoff frequency for each Part. This parameter is available for the LPF when the ﬁlter used by the Part

is a combination type of LPF and HPF.

Settings: -64 ~ 0 ~ +63

Resonance Determines the amount of ﬁlter resonance or emphasis of the Cutoff Frequency for each Part. The setting here

attenuates/boosts the resonance applied to the element of the Voice assigned to each Part.

Settings: -64 ~ 0 ~ +63

FEGDepth Determines the Filter Envelope Generator depth (amount of cutoff frequency) for each Part.

Settings: -64 ~ 0 ~ +63

n The FEG Depth setting is not available for the Plug-in Parts.

n For details about Filter, see page 161.

[SF3] FEG

(Filter Envelope Generator)

From this display you can set the FEG (Filter Envelope Generator) parameters for each Part.

n The FEG settings are not available for Plug-in Parts.

Attack (Attack Time) Determines each parameter of the FEG for each Part.

For details about FEG, see page 161.

Settings: -64 ~ 0 ~ +63

Decay (Decay Time)

Sustain (Sustain Level)

Release (Release Level)

Reference Performance Mode

Performance Job mode

219

Owner’s Manual

The Performance Job mode features several basic operations, such as Initialize and Copy. After setting parameters as required from the

selected display, press the [ENTER] button to execute the Job.

n Among the Audio Parts shown in the Job display, Audio 1 indicates the A/D Input Part. When the optional AIEB2 has been installed to this synthesizer,

Audio 2 indicates the AIEB2 Input Part. When the optional mLAN16E has been installed, Audio 2, 3, 4, and 5 indicate the mLAN Input Parts.

[SF4] AEG

(Amplitude Envelope Generator)

From this display you can set the AEG (Amplitude Envelope Generator) parameters for each Part.

Attack (Attack Time) Determines each parameter of the AEG for each Part. Please note that Sustain Level is not available for the Plug-in

Part.

For details about AEG, see

Settings: -64 ~ 0 ~ +63

Decay (Decay Time)

Sustain (Sustain Level)

Release (Release Level)

[F5] RCV SW (Receive Switch)

From this display you can set how each individual Part responds to various MIDI data, such as Control Change and Program Change messages. When the

relevant parameter is set to “on,” the corresponding Part responds to the appropriate MIDI data.

Note that two different display types listed below are provided and you can switch between them by pressing the [SF5] button. Each display type features the

same settings in a different format; use the type you feel most comfortable with.

• Display showing four Parts

• Display showing all parameters for one Part

Keep in mind that since all the available parameters cannot be simultaneously displayed in the four-Part display, you will need to use the cursor controls to scroll

the display in order to see and set the other parameters.

Settings: See below. Parameters marked with * are not available for the Plug-in Part.

CtrlChange (Control Change) Indicates all the Control Change messages.

PB (Pitch Bend) MIDI messages generated by using the Pitch Bend Wheel.

MW (Modulation Wheel) MIDI messages generated by using the Modulation Wheel.

RB (Ribbon Controller)* MIDI messages generated by using the Ribbon Controller.

ChAT (Channel After Touch) MIDI messages generated by pressing and holding the note on the keyboard.

FC1 (Foot Controller 1)* MIDI messages generated by using the optional Foot Controller connected to the rear panel.

FC2 (Foot Controller 2)*

Sus (Sustain) MIDI messages generated by using the optional Footswitch connected to the SUSTAIN jack on the rear panel.

FS (Footswitch)* MIDI messages generated by using the optional Footswitch connected to the ASSIGNABLE jack on the rear panel.

AS1 (Assign1)*, AS2 (Assign2)* MIDI messages generated by using the ASSIGN1 and ASSIGN2 Knobs with both the [PAN/SEND] and [TONE]

lamps turned on.

BC (Breath Controller)* MIDI messages generated by using the optional Breath Controller connected to the BREATH jack on the rear panel.

Exp (Expression) MIDI messages generated by using the optional Foot Controller connected to the rear panel.

Performance Job mode

[PERFORM] → Performance selection → [JOB]

[F1] INIT (Initialize)

This function lets you reset (initialize) all Performance parameters to their default settings. It also allows you to selectively initialize certain parameters, such as

Common settings, settings for each Part, and so on — very useful when creating a completely new Performance from scratch.

Type of parameter to be initialized

All (all settings for the selected Performance are initialized)

Common (Common parameter settings for the selected Performance are initialized)

Part 1 - 4, PLG 1 - 3 (Plug-in Part 1 - 3), Audio 1 - 5

[F2] RECALL (Edit Recall)

If you are editing a Performance and select a different Performance without storing your edited one, all the edits you’ve made will be erased. If this happens, you

can use Edit Recall to restore the Performance with your latest edits intact.

Reference Performance Mode

Performance Store mode

220

Owner’s Manual

This function lets you store your edited Performance to User memory (Flash ROM).

For details, refer to page 91 in the Quick Guide section.

[F3] COPY

From this display you can copy Part parameter settings from any Performance including the currently

edited (but not yet stored) one to a particular Part of the Performance you are editing. This is useful if you

are creating a Performance and wish to use some parameter settings from another Performance.

Source Performance/Part Determines the Performance and Part to be copied. You can specify “Current” (the Performance you are editing but

have not yet stored) as a Source Performance.

Type: Part 1 - 4, PartP1 - P3 (Plug-in Part 1 - 3), PartA1 - A5 (Audio Part 1 - 5)

Data type of Destination

Performance (currently selected

Performance)/Part

Determines the Part of the destination Performance.

Type: Part 1 - 4, PartP1 - P3, PartA1 - A5, Arp, Effect (Reverb, Chorus)

n If you choose Arp (Arpeggio) or Effect, the Arpeggio data or Effect settings for the Voice assigned to the source Part will be

copied.

[F4] BULK (Bulk Dump)

This function lets you send all your edited parameter settings for the currently selected Performance to a computer or another MIDI instrument for data archiving.

For details, see page 185.

n In order to execute Bulk Dump, you’ll need to set the correct MIDI Device Number, with the following operation: [UTILITY] → [F5] MIDI → [SF1] CH → DeviceNo.

Performance Store mode

[PERFORM] → Performance selection → [STORE]

Source Performance/Part

Data type of Destination Performance (currently selected

Performance)/Part

Reference Song Mode

Song Play mode

221

Owner’s Manual

Song mode

■ Creating Songs — basic procedure

Songs consist of the following three types of data:

• MIDI sequence data (created in the Song Record mode, Song Edit mode, and Song Job mode)

• Setup data (created in the Song Play mode)

• Mixing data (created in the Song Mixing mode/Mixing Edit mode and stored in the Song Mixing Store mode)

After creating the data in these modes described above, store the Mixing settings in the Song Mixing Store mode to archive it as Song data and

save the entire Song to the SmartMedia/USB storage device in the File mode.

n Non-note MIDI events (such as Voice number, volume, pan, and effect send level) which are necessary at the start of a Song are not recorded as MIDI

sequence data, but are stored instead as Mixing data.

Because Song data (MIDI sequence data, Setup data, and Mixing data) is recorded to DRAM (page 187), it will be lost when turning the power off. Make sure

to save any Song data created via the Record, Edit, Job, and Mixing setting to the SmartMedia/USB storage device in the File mode before turning the

power off. For details on saving Song data, see page 132.

Song Play mode

[SONG] → Song selection

[F1] PLAY

See page 55.

Loc1 (Location1),

Loc2 (Location 2)

Indicates the measure number to which the Song playback can be jumped by using the Location feature (page 58).

Trans (Transpose) Determines the key transpose setting for the entire Song, and can be adjusted in semitones.

Settings: -36 ~ +36

n If Transpose is applied to a Drum Voice, the results may not be musically appropriate. To ensure proper playback of a Drum

Voice, set the Note Shift parameter for the Drum Voice Part to an appropriate value ([SONG] → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → Part

selection → [F4] TONE → [SF1] TUNE → NoteShift).

MEAS (Measure) Indicates the current measure number and beat for the current Song. During playback, this indication changes

automatically according to the Song playback. You can input the desired measure number directly by using the

Number Input window called up via the [INFORMATION] button.

[SF1] ARP1 (Arpeggio 1) - [SF5]

ARP5 (Arpeggio 5)

You can register the desired Arpeggio types to these buttons and call them up any time during your keyboard

performance. Refer to page 105 in the Quick Guide section.

[F2] GROOVE (Grid Groove)

The Grid Groove function makes it possible to adjust the pitch, timing, length, and velocity of notes

in a speciﬁed track via a 1-measure 16th-note grid to create “grooves” that would not be possible

with precise sequencer-like programming. The Grid Groove function affects Song playback without

actually changing the sequence data.

NOTE OFST (Note Offset) Raises or lowers the pitch of the note(s) on the selected grid in semitones.

Settings: -99 ~ +99

CLOCK SFT (Clock Shift) Shifts the timing of the note(s) on the selected grid forward or back ward in clock increments.

Settings: -120 ~ +120

GATE OFST (Gate time Offset) Lengthens or shortens the note(s) on the selected grid in clock increments.

Settings: -120 ~ +120

VELO OFST (Velocity Offset) Increases or decreases the velocity of the note(s) on the selected grid.

Settings: -127 ~ +127

[F3] TRACK

[SF1] CHANNEL

From this display you can set the MIDI output channel/port for each of the sixteen tracks of the corresponding

internal/external tone generator.

OUT CH (Output Channel) Sets up the MIDI output channel for each track. Tracks set to “Off” will not sound.

Settings: off, 01 ~ 16

n In the Song/Pattern mode, the MIDI message created by playing the keyboard/knobs/wheels is sent to the tone generator

block or the external MIDI instruments via the MIDI output channel of the currently selected track.

CAUTION

VELO OFST (Velocity Offset)

GATE OFST (Gate Time Offset)

CLOCK SFT (Clock Shift)

NOTE OFST (Note Offset)

–

Reference Song Mode

Song Record mode Song Record Standby mode

222

Owner’s Manual

Song Record Standby mode

PORT Determines the MIDI transmission port for the corresponding track. Playback data of tracks set to off is output

without Port signal via MIDI.

When using the internal tone generator block, the Port setting here is available for the tracks assigned to the Plug-in

Parts 1-3 (when the single Plug-in Board has been installed) and Multi Plug-in Parts 17-32 (when the PLG100-XG

has been installed) are assigned. Tracks using the internal tone generator parts of this synthesizer are automatically

ﬁxed to Port 1.

Settings: off, 1 ~ 3

n Port data can be output only through the USB terminal. No port data is transmitted through the MIDI OUT terminal, even if the

corresponding track is set to a speciﬁc port number.

[SF2] OUT SW (Output Switch)

INT SW (Internal Switch) Determines whether playback data is transmitted to the internal tone generator block or not.

Settings: on, off

EXT SW (External Switch) Determines whether playback data is output to the external MIDI tone generator via MIDI or not.

Settings: on, off

[SF3] TR LOOP (Track Loop)

From this display you can determine whether the data in the selected track loops or not in playback. Using Loop can

be an effective way to repeat short patterns and phrases throughout the Song. For details, see page 238.

Settings: off, on

[F5] PHRASE

You can copy Pattern track data (Phrase) to a Song track. You can also copy preset

phrases that are not assigned to the Pattern track by using the Patch function (page

241). For details, refer to page 113 in the Quick Guide section.

[F6] CHAIN

This function allows Songs to be “chained” together for automatic sequential playback. For details, refer to the Quick Guide on page 59.

skip..................Skips past (ignores) the selected chain number and continues playback from the next chain number.

stop .................Stops Song chain playback at that chain number. You can restart the Song chain playback from the next chain number by pressing the [F] (Play) button.

end...................Indicates the end mark of the Song chain data.

Song Record mode

[SONG] → Song selection → [I] (Record)

[F1] SETUP

Type (Recording Type) Determines the recording method. For details on each method, refer to page 168 in the Basic Structure section.

Settings: When the RecTrack is set to any of 1-16: replace, overdub, punch, step

When the RecTrack is set to tempo: replace, punch, step

When the RecTrack is set to scene: replace, punch

When the RecTrack is set to multi: replace, overdub, punch

n When “punch” is selected, “Punch-in measure: beat” and “Punch-out measure: beat” appear in the display and should be set.

If you’ve set the Locate 1 and 2 points (Loc1, Loc2; see page 58), the punch-in/out points can be set with a single button

press. Move the cursor to the punch-in/out value, and notice that a “COPYLOC” menu item appears. Press the [SF1]

COPYLOC button, and the punch-in/out settings are automatically assigned to the existing Locate points.

n When “step” is selected, you should specify the event type to be entered.

Quantize This parameter is available when the Recording Type is set to something other than “step.” Record quantize aligns

the timing of notes automatically, as you record.

You can set this parameter also by using the Note Type selection window called up via the [INFORMATION] button.

For details, see page 49.

Settings: off, 60 (32nd note), 80 (16th note triplet), 120 (16th note), 160 (8th note triplet), 240 (8th note), 320 (1/4 note triplet), 480 (1/4

note)

Source Phrase

If sample data is included in the original

Phrase and you want to copy all of the

data, make sure to checkmark this box.

After completing the settings,

press the [ENTER] button to

execute Copy Phrase.

Specify the destination track and

measure of the current selected

song.

Reference Song Mode

Song Record mode Song Record Standby mode

223

Owner’s Manual

Event This parameter is available when the Recording Type is set to “step.” This lets you specify the event type to be

entered.

Settings: note, p.bend (pitch bend), CC#000~#119 (Control Change)

RecTrack Determines the track to be recorded.

Pressing the [F6] button lets you switch between Single Track recording and All Track recording.

Settings: tempo, scene, 1~16, multi

 (Tempo) Determines the Song tempo.

Settings: 001.0 ~300.0

Meas (Measure) Determines the measure from which Song recording will be started.

[F2] VOICE

In this display you can set the voice related parameters for the recording track. The settings here affect the Part for which the receive channel (set in the Mixing

mode) matches the transmit (output) channel of the recording track.

Voice Determines the voice used in the recording track. When the cursor is located here, you can select a voice by using

the BANK, GROUP, NUMBER buttons and the Category Search function (page 62). You can also select a Sample

Voice obtained via the Sampling function.

Volume Determines the volume of the recording track.

Settings: 0 ~ 127

Pan Determines the stereo pan position of the recording track.

Settings: L63 (Left) ~ C (Center) ~ R63 (Right)

InsEF

(Insertion Effect Part Switch)

Determines whether the Insertion effects are applied to the recording track or not.

Settings: on, off

 (Tempo) Determines the Song tempo.

Settings: 001.0 ~300.0

Meas (Measure) Determines the measure from which Song recording will be started.

[F3] ARP (Arpeggio)

From this display you can set parameters related to the Arpeggio of the recording track.

Bank, Ctgr (Category), Type These three parameters determine the Arpeggio Type. The three-letter preﬁx number before the Type name

indicates the number within the selected Category.

Settings: Refer to the separate Data List.

VelLimit (Velocity Limit) Determines the lowest and highest velocity which can trigger the Arpeggio playback. The Arpeggio plays when you

play notes at velocities within this range.

Settings: 1 ~ 127

Hold Determines whether the Arpeggio playback is “held” or not. When this is set to “on,” the Arpeggio cycles

automatically, even if you release your ﬁngers from the keys, and it continues to cycle until the next key is pressed.

Settings: sync-off, off, on

n About sync-off, see page 191.

PartSw (Part Switch) Determines whether Arpeggio is on or off for the tone generator Part corresponding to the recording track.

Settings: off, on

Meas (Measure) Determines the measure from which Song recording will be started. This parameter is same as the Meas parameter

in the [F1] SETUP display.

[SF1] ARP1 (Arpeggio 1) - [SF5]

ARP5 (Arpeggio 5)

You can register the desired Arpeggio types to these buttons and call them up any time during your keyboard

performance. Refer to page 123 in the Quick Guide section.

[F4] RECARP (Record Arpeggio)

RecArp (Record Arpeggio) Determines whether the sequence data played by Arpeggio is recorded to the Song track or not. When this is set to

on, the played sequence data is recorded.

Settings: off, on

OutputSwitch Determines whether the sequence data played by Arpeggio during recording is output via MIDI or not. When this is

set to on, the played sequence data by Arpeggio during recording is output via MIDI.

Settings: off, on

TransmitCh (Transmit Channel) Determines the MIDI transmit channel of the Arpeggio playback during recording.

Settings: 1 ~ 16, KbdCh

[F5] CLICK

Pressing the [F5] button lets you turn the click sound (metronome) on/off for recording.

Reference Song Mode

Song Record mode During Song Recording Step Recording

224

Owner’s Manual

[F6] ALL TR (All Track)/1TR (1 track)

Pressing the [F6] button lets you switch between Single Track recording and All Track recording.

During Song Recording

[SONG] → Song selection → [I] (Record) → [F] (Play)

Realtime Recording

Refer to page 118 in the Quick Guide section.

Step Recording

Examples of Step Recording are described on page 238.

[F1] SETUP

Beat Graph This is the display in which notes are “placed” during step recording. When the meter is 4/4, the display is divided

into four beats (one measure). Each diamond-shaped marker in the display represents one 32nd beat (each 1/4 note

division is divided into eight 32nd beats).

For example, if the following rhythmic pattern “ ” is entered in 4/4 time, a display like the one shown

above right will appear.

Pointer Determines the data-entry position. The triangular pointer above the beat graph indicates the data-entry position. To

move the pointer right or left, use the [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons or the data dial.

Value When the Event to be entered ([F1] SETUP → Event) is set to “note,” this value speciﬁes the velocity with which the

note will be entered.

Settings: When the Event is set to “note”: 1 ~ 127, kbd, rnd1 ~ rnd4

When the Event is set to “p.bend”: -8192 ~ +8191

When the Event is set to “CC (Control Change 001 - 119)”: 000 ~ 127

When the Event is set to “tempo” with the RecTrack = tempo: 001 ~ 300

n You can select “kbd” (keyboard) and “rnd1” - “rnd4” (random1 - 4) as well as the values 1 - 127 when the Event to be entered

is set to “note.” When “kbd” is selected, the actual playing strength will be entered as the velocity value. When one of the

random settings is selected, a random velocity value will be entered.

StepTime The “size” of the current recording step time for the next note to be entered. This determines to what position the

pointer will advance after a note has been entered.

Settings: 0001 - 0059, 32nd note, 16th note triplet, 16th note, 8th note triplet, 8th note, 1/4 note triplet, 1/4 note, half note, whole note

GateTime Sets the gate time to produce slurs, staccato notes, etc. “Gate time” refers to the actual length of time the note

sounds. For the same 1/4 note, for example, a long gate time will produce a slur while a short gate time will produce

a staccato effect. Gate time is indicated as a percent value of the step time. A setting of 50% produces a staccato

sound, values between about 80% and 90% produce normal note length, and a value of 99% will produce a slur.

Settings: 1% ~ 200%

[F3] REST

Press [F3] to enter a rest as long as the speciﬁed step time. The point will move ahead to the next data-entry position. Rests do not appear on the display.

n There is no actual data representing rests in the MIDI sequencer. When a “rest” is entered the pointer simply moves ahead to the next data-entry position, effectively leaving a rest.

[F4] TIE

When the [F4] button is pressed to enter a tie, the preceding note is lengthened to the full step time.

For example, in the phrase shown at left, note

1 is entered with 1/4 note step time. If the step time is then changed

to an 8th note and [F4] is pressed, note

2 is entered.

Dotted notes can also be entered using the TIE function. To produce a dotted 1/4 note, for example, set the step

time to an 8th note, enter a note and then press [F4] twice.

n This display is available only when the Event to be entered is set to “note.”

Pointer indicating the current note position.

Beat Graph

Reference Song Mode

Song Edit mode

225

Owner’s Manual

This mode gives you comprehensive, detailed controls for editing the MIDI events of individual Song tracks. MIDI events are messages (such as

note on/off, note number, program change number, etc.) that make up the data of a recorded Song.

[F5] DELETE

Press this to actually delete the note events at the current cursor position.

[F6] BAK DEL (Back Delete)

Moves the pointer backward by one step and deletes all notes at that location.

n Mistakenly entered notes can be erased by pressing [F6] immediately after they are entered (before changing the step time value).

Song Edit mode

[SONG] → Song selection → [EDIT]

[F1] CHANGE

Shows the Event List of the selected Song track. For information on how to edit the Event List, see page 124.

[F2] VIEW FLT (View Filter)

The Event View Filter lets you select the event types that appear on the Event List display ([F1] CHANGE display). For example, if you wish to edit only note events,

place a checkmark in the box next to “Note” so that only the note events appear in the Event List display.

Settings: Note, PitchBend, ProgramChange, ControlChange, Ch.AfterTouch, PolyAfterTouch, RPN (Registered Parameter Number), NRPN (Non Registered Parameter Number), Exclusive

[F5] CLR ALL (Clear All) Press the [F5] button to remove all checkmarks at once.

[F6] SET ALL Press the [F6] button to set checkmarks into all boxes.

[F4] TR SEL (Track Select)

You can switch between the display for 1 - 16 tracks, SCN (Scene) track, and TMP (Tempo) track by pressing this button.

[F5] INSERT

When the cursor is located at the desired position in the [F1] CHANGE display (Event List), pressing this button calls up the display for inserting new MIDI events

in the Song mode or Pattern mode.

Note This is the most common and prevalent type of data — the individual notes of a Song.

FNOTE (Note name) Determines the note name or the speciﬁc keyboard pitch of the note.

Settings: C -2 ~ G8

FGATE (Gate time) Determines the length of time that a note actually sounds in beats and clocks.

Settings: 00:001 ~ 999:479

n On this synthesizer, one clock is 1/480th of a quarter note.

FVELO (Velocity) Determines how strongly the selected note sounds.

Settings: 1 ~ 127

PitchBend These are the events that deﬁne continuous changes in pitch and these events are generated by Pitch Bend Wheel

operation.

FDATA Determines the Pitch Bend data.

Settings: -8192 ~ +8191

ProgramChange These events determine the Voice for the selected track.

FBANK Determines the Voice bank.

Settings: 000 ~ 127, ***

n Bank select MSB and LSB are actually part of the Control Change set of messages (below). However, since they apply

speciﬁcally to Voice selection, they are grouped and described here.

FPC NO

(Program Change Number)

Determines the speciﬁc Voice (from the bank selected by MSB and LSB above).

Settings: 000 ~ 127

n For a complete list of the available voice banks and numbers, refer to the Voice List in the separate Data List booklet.

Reference Song Mode

Song Job mode

226

Owner’s Manual

The Song Job mode contains a comprehensive set of editing tools and data transform functions you can use to change the sound of the Song.

It also includes a variety of convenient operations, such as copying or erasing data.

After setting parameters as required from the selected display, press the [ENTER] button to execute the Job.

An “Executing...” message is shown when it takes a short amount of time to execute the Job. Never attempt to turn off the power while an “Executing...”

message is shown. Turning the power off in this state results in loss of all user data.

ControlChange These events control the sound and certain response characteristics of the voice, and are usually generated/

recorded by moving a controller (such as a modulation wheel, knob, slider or foot controller).

FCTRL NO (Control Number) Determines the Control Change number.

Settings: 000 ~ 127

n For details on the speciﬁc functions assigned to each of the numbers, see page 182.

FDATA See page 182.

Settings: 000 ~ 127

Ch.AfterTouch

(Channel After Touch)

This event is generated when pressure is applied to a key after the note is played.

FDATA This represents the amount of pressure applied to the key.

Settings: 000 ~127

PolyAfterTouch

(Polyphonic Aftertouch)

This event is generated when pressure is applied to a key after the note is played. Unlike Channel Aftertouch above,

this is recorded and applied independently for each key pressed.

FNOTE (Note name) Determines the key to which aftertouch is applied.

Settings: C -2 ~ G8

FDATA This represents the amount of pressure applied to the key.

Settings: 000 ~ 127

RPN

(Registered Parameter Number)

This event changes parameter values for each tone generator Part. This event is used to set Part settings such as

Pitch Bend Sensitivity or Tuning.

FMSB-LSB See page 183.

Settings: 000 ~ 127

FDATA (Data Entry MSB-LSB) See page 182.

Settings: 000 ~ 127, ***

n Normally three types of control change data are sent: RPN MSB (101), RPN LSB (100), and Data Entry MSB (6). In this synthesizer, Data Entry LSB (38) is added to this and

the resulting group of control change events is handled as one in this display.

NRPN (Non Registered

Parameter Number)

These events are used to change the parameter values for each tone generator Part. They can be is used to edit

sounds via MIDI, allowing you to edit ﬁlter or EG settings, or adjust the pitch or level for each instrument of a drum

voice.

FMSB-LSB See page 183.

Settings: 000 ~ 127

FDATA (Data Entry MSB-LSB) See page 182.

Settings: 000 ~ 127, ***

n Normally three types of control change data are sent: NRPN MSB (99), NRPN LSB (98), and Data Entry MSB (6). In this synthesizer, this group of control change events is

handled as one in this display. For a complete list of the available RPN and NRPN numbers and their corresponding controls, refer to the MIDI Data Format in the separate

Data List booklet.

Exclusive (System Exclusive) A type of MIDI message used to exchange data unique to a speciﬁc model or type of device.

Unlike other MIDI events, these events differ depending on the manufacturer/device, and are incompatible among

different devices.

FDATA (HEX) See page 184.

Settings: 00 ~7F, F7 (Data must be entered in hexadecimal format.)

Song Job mode

[SONG] → Song selection → [JOB]

[F1] UNDO/REDO

The Undo Job cancels the changes you made in your most recent recording session, editing session, or Job, restoring the data to its previous state. This allows

you to recover from accidental data loss. Redo is available only after using Undo, and lets you restore the changes you made before undoing them.

Undo/Redo does not work with Sample Voice and Mixing Voice operations.

[F2] NOTE (Note data Job)

CAUTION

Reference Song Mode

Song Job mode

227

Owner’s Manual

n Before executing the Note data Job, make sure that you specify the track (01~16, all) and range (measure : beat : clock) to which the Job is applied.

01: Quantize

Quantization is the process of adjusting the timing of note events by moving them closer to the nearest exact beat.

You can use this feature, for example, to improve the timing of a performance recorded in real time.

TR (Track)

001 : 1 : 000 - 999 : 4 : 479

Determines the track (01-16, all) and range of measures/beats/clocks over which the Job is applied.

Quantize (Resolution) Determines to what beats the note data in the speciﬁed track will be aligned.

Settings: 32nd note, 16th note triplet, 16th note, 8th note triplet, 8th note, 1/4 note triplet, 1/4 note, 16th note + 16th note triplet, 8th note

+ 8th note triplet

Strength The Strength value sets the “strength” by which note events are pulled toward the nearest quantize beats. A setting

of 100% produces exact timing. A setting of 0% results in no quantization.

Settings: 000%~100%

SwingRate Delays notes on even-numbered beats (backbeats) to produce a swing feel.

For example, if the meter is 4/4 and the quantize value is quarter notes, the 2nd and 4th beats of the measure will be

delayed. When a triplet quantize value is used, the last note of each triplet is delayed. When the quantize value is

even-numbered, beats will be delayed.

Settings: See below.

If the quantize value is 1/4 note, 8th note, 16th note, 32nd note: 50%~75%

A setting of 100% is equivalent to twice the length of the speciﬁed quantize value. A setting of 50% produces exact timing and

therefore no swing feel. Settings above 51% increase the amount of swing, with 75% being equivalent to a dotted-note delay.

If the quantize value is 1/4 note triplet, 8th note triplet, 16th note triplet: 66%~83%

A setting of 100% is equivalent to three times the length of the speciﬁed quantize value. A setting of 66% produces exact

timing and therefore no swing feel. Settings above 67% increase the amount of swing, with 83% being equivalent to a

sextuplet delay.

If the quantize value is 8th note + 8th note triplet, 16th note + 16th note triplet: 50%~66%

A setting of 100% is equivalent to twice the length of a 8th note or 16th note. A setting of 50% produces exact timing and

therefore no swing feel. Settings above 51% increase the amount of swing, with 66% being equivalent to a triplet delay.

n If a swing value other than 100% results in notes being positioned after other non-swing notes, the latter notes are delayed

accordingly.

GateTime Determines the gate time (the length of time a note sounds) of the even-numbered backbeat notes to enhance the

swing feel. When a triplet quantize value is used, the gate time of the last note of each triplet is adjusted.

When the quantize value is 8th note + 8th note triplet or 16th note + 16th note triplet, the gate time of the even-

numbered 8th note or 16th note beats will be adjusted. A setting of 100% leaves the original gate time unchanged.

If an adjusted gate time value is less than 1, the value is rounded off to 1.

Settings: 000%~200%

02: Modify Velocity

This Job alters the velocity values of the speciﬁed range of notes, letting you selectively boost or cut the volume of

those notes. Velocity changes are calculated as follows:

Adjusted velocity = (original velocity x Rate) + Offset

If the result is 0 or less, the value is set to 1. If the result is higher than 127, the value is set to 127.

TR (Track)

001 : 1 : 000 - 999 : 4 : 479

Determines the track (01-16, all) and range of measures/beats/clocks over which the Job is applied.

SetAll Sets the velocities of all target notes to the same ﬁxed value (1 to 127). When set to “off” the Set All parameter has no

effect. When set to a value other than “off” the Rate and Offset parameters are unavailable and appear as “***” on

the display.

Settings: off (0), 001~127

Rate Determines the percentage by which the target notes will be shifted from their original velocities.

Settings below 100% reduce the velocities, and settings above 100% increase the velocities proportionately. When

the Set All parameter is not “OFF” this parameter appears as “***” and cannot be changed.

Settings: 000% ~ 200%, ***

Offset Adds a ﬁxed value to the Rate-adjusted velocity values. A setting of 0 produces no change. Settings below 0 reduce

the velocities, and settings above 0 increase the velocities. When the Set All parameter is not “OFF” this parameter

appears as “***” and cannot be changed.

Settings: -127 ~ +127, ***

03: Modify Gate Time

This Job alters the gate times of the speciﬁed range of notes. Gate time changes are calculated as follows:

Adjusted gate time = (original gate time x Rate) + Offset

If the result is 0 or less, the value is rounded off to 1.

TR (Track)

001 : 1 : 000 - 999 : 4 : 479

Determines the track (01-16, all) and range of measures/beats/clocks over which the Job is applied.

SetAll Sets the gate times of all target notes to the same ﬁxed value. When set to “off” the Set All parameter has no effect.

When set to a value other than “off,” the Rate and Offset parameters are unavailable and appear as “***” on the

display.

Settings: off (0), 0001 ~ 9999

Reference Song Mode

Song Job mode

228

Owner’s Manual

Rate Determines the percentage by which the gate time of the target notes will be changed.

Settings below 100% shorten the notes, and settings above 100% lengthen the notes proportionately. When the Set

All parameter (above) is set to something other than “off,” this parameter appears as “***” and cannot be changed.

Settings: 000% ~ 200%, ***

Offset Adds a ﬁxed value to the Rate-adjusted gate time values. A setting of 0 produces no change. Settings below 0

shorten the gate time, and settings above 0 lengthen the gate time. When the Set All parameter (above) is set to

something other than “off,” this parameter appears as “***” and cannot be changed.

Settings: -9999 ~ +9999, ***

04: Crescendo

This Job lets you create a crescendo or decrescendo over the speciﬁed range of notes. (Crescendo is a gradual

increase in volume, and decrescendo is a gradual decrease.)

TR (Track)

001 : 1 : 000 - 999 : 4 : 479

Determines the track (01-16, all) and range of measures/beats/clocks over which the Job is applied.

VelocityRange Determines the intensity of the crescendo or decrescendo. The velocity values of the notes in the speciﬁed range

are gradually increased or decreased starting at the ﬁrst note in the range. The velocity of the last note in the range

becomes the original velocity of the note plus the Velocity Range value. If the resultant velocity is outside the 1 ~ 127

range, it is set to 1 or 127 accordingly. Settings greater than 0 produce a crescendo, and settings less than 0

produce a decrescendo. A setting of 0 produces no effect.

Settings: -127 ~ +127

05: Transpose

Transpose lets you change the key or pitch of the notes in the speciﬁed range.

TR (Track)

001 : 1 : 000 - 999 : 4 : 479

Determines the track (01-16, all) and range of measures/beats/clocks over which the Job is applied.

Note Determines the range of note pitches over which the Job is applied. You can also set the Note directly from the

Keyboard, by holding down the [INFORMATION] button and pressing the desired key (page 53).

Settings: C-2 ~ G8

Transpose Transposes notes in the speciﬁed range (in semitones). A setting of +12 transposes up one octave, while a setting of

-12 transposes down an octave. A setting of 0 produces no change.

Settings: -127 ~ +127

06: Glide

The Glide Job replaces all notes following the ﬁrst note in the speciﬁed range with pitch bend data, producing

smooth glides from note to note. This is ideal for producing guitar-like slide or note-bending effects.

TR (Track)

001 : 1 : 000 - 999 : 4 : 479

Determines the track (01-16, all) and range of measures/beats/clocks over which the Job is applied.

GlideTime Determines the length of the glide. Higher values produce a longer glide between notes.

Settings: 000~100

PBRange (Pitch Bend Range) Determines the maximum pitch bend range to be applied by the Glide Job (in semitones).

Settings: 01~24

07: Create Roll

This Job creates a series of repeated notes (like a drum roll) in the speciﬁed range with the speciﬁed continuous

changes in clock step and velocity. This is ideal for creating fast staccato rolls and special stuttering effects.

TR (Track)

001 : 1 : 000 - 999 : 4 : 479

Determines the track (01-16) and range of measures/beats/clocks over which the Job is applied.

StartStep (Starting Step)

EndStep (Ending Step)

Determines the size of the step (i.e. the number of clocks) between each note in the roll. Both the starting and

ending clock values can be speciﬁed, making it easy to create rolls in which the step size varies during the roll.

Settings: StartStep: 001~999, EndStep: 001~999

Note Determines the speciﬁc note (or instrument in Drum voices) for the roll effect. You can also set the note directly from

the Keyboard, by holding down the [INFORMATION] button and pressing the desired key (page 53).

Settings: C-2~G8

StartVelo (Starting Velocity)

EndVelo (Ending Velocity)

Determines the velocity of the notes in the roll. Both the starting and ending velocity values can be speciﬁed, making

it easy to create rolls in which the velocity increases or decreases. This lets you create rolls that gradually increase or

decrease in volume (crescendo/decrescendo) — a technique often used in dance music.

Settings: StartVelo: 001~127, EndVelo: 001~127

08: Sort Chord

This Job sorts chord events (simultaneous note events) by order of pitch. The sort affects the order of the notes in

the Event List display (page 124), but does not change the timing of the notes. When used to pre-process chords

before using the Separate Chord Job (below), Chord Sort can be used to simulate the “stroke” or strumming sound

of guitars and similar instruments.

Reference Song Mode

Song Job mode

229

Owner’s Manual

TR (Track)

001 : 1 : 000 - 999 : 4 : 479

Determines the track (01-16, all) and range of measures/beats/clocks over which the Job is applied.

Type Determines how the chord note data is sorted.

Settings: up, down, up&down, down&up

up .................... The notes are sorted in ascending order. After executing this Job with this setting, execute the Separate Chord Job to

create a guitar-like upstroke strum.

down................ The notes are sorted in descending order. After executing this Job with this setting, execute the Separate Chord Job to

create a guitar-like downstroke strum.

up&down ......... Sorts chord notes on downbeats in ascending order and chord notes on upbeats in descending order, based on the

Grid setting (below).

down&up ......... Sorts chord notes on downbeats in descending order and chord notes on upbeats in ascending order, based on the

Grid setting (below).

Grid Determines the type of note that serves as the basis for the Chord Sort Job.

Settings: 32nd note, 16th note triplet, 16th note, 8th note triplet, 8th note, 1/4 note triplet, 1/4 note

09: Separate Chord

This Job slightly separates notes in chords within the speciﬁed range, inserting a speciﬁed number of clocks

between each note. Use this Job after the Chord Sort Job above, to create guitar-like upstroke or downstroke effects.

TR (Track)

001 : 1 : 000 - 999 : 4 : 479

Determines the track (01-16, all) and range of measures/beats/clocks over which the Job is applied.

Clock Determines the number of clock cycles inserted between adjacent chord notes.

Settings: 000 ~999

n Note that there are 480 clock cycles per quarter note.

n It is not possible to separate chords so that they cross the next chord or they overstep the range (set above).

[F3] EVENT (Event Job)

n Before executing the Event Job, make sure that you specify the track and range (measure : beat : clock) to which the Job is applied. Please note that the track to be speciﬁed

varies depending on the Job.

01: Shift Clock

This Job shifts all data events in the speciﬁed range forward or backward by the speciﬁed number of clocks.

TR (Track)

001 : 1 : 000 - 999 : 4 : 479

Determines the track (01-16, TMP, SCN, all) and range of measures/beats/clocks over which the Job is applied.

Clock Determines the amount by which the data will be delayed or advanced in measures, beats, and clocks.

Settings: 000:0:000 ~ 999:3:479

Direction Determines the direction in which the data will be shifted. ADVANCE moves the data toward the beginning of the

sequence, while DELAY shifts the data toward the end of the sequence.

Settings: Advance, Delay

02: Copy Event

This Job copies all data from a speciﬁed source

range to a speciﬁed destination location.

Execute this Job after setting:

• Source track (01-16, TMP, SCN, all)

• Source range (measure : beat : clock)

• Destination track (01-16, TMP, SCN, all)

• Destination range (measure : beat : clock)

• Top measure of destination

• Count (number of times data is to be copied)

NumberOfTimes Determines the number of times the data is copied.

Settings: 01 ~ 99

When Copy Event is executed, any data already existing at the Destination location will be overwritten.

03: Erase Event

This Job clears all speciﬁed events from the speciﬁed range, effectively producing a segment of silence.

TR (Track)

001 : 1 : 000 - 999 : 4 : 479

Determines the track (01-16, TMP, SCN, all) and range of measures/beats/clocks over which the Job is applied.

Event Type Determines the event type to be erased. All events are cleared when ALL is selected. Individual control change

numbers can be speciﬁed when erasing control change events.

Settings:

When TR is set to 01~16: Note (Note events), PC (Program Change), PB (Pitch Bend), CC (Control Change)*, CAT (Channel Aftertouch),

PAT (Polyphonic Aftertouch), EXC (System Exclusive), All (all events)

When TR is set to “TMP” (Tempo): TMP (tempo)

When TR is set to “SCN” (Scene): SceneMemory (Scene change information), TrackMute (Track mute setting change information)

* You can also specify the CC No. (Control Change number).

n Keep in mind that applying this Job to a track with Sample Voices erases the events that trigger the samples, but it does not erase the actual samples themselves.

Source track and range in measures, beats, and clocks

Destination track and the top (measure, beat, and clock)

of the destination.

CAUTION

Reference Song Mode

Song Job mode

230

Owner’s Manual

04: Extract Event

This Job moves all instances of speciﬁed event data from a speciﬁed range of a track to the same range in a

different track.

TR (Track)

001 : 1 : 000 - 999 : 4 : 479

Determines the track (01 - 16) and range of measures/beats/clocks over which the Job is applied.

EventType Selects the event type to be extracted. Speciﬁc note and control change numbers can also be speciﬁed as required.

Settings: Note, PC (Program Change), PB (Pitch Bend), CC (Control Change), CAT (Channel Aftertouch), PAT (Polyphonic Aftertouch),

EXC (System Exclusive)

→ TR Determines the destination track (01 - 16).

05: Create Continuous Data

This Job creates continuous pitch bend or control change data over the speciﬁed range.

TR (Track)

001 : 1 : 000 - 999 : 4 : 479

Determines the track (01 - 16, TMP, all) and range of measures/beats/clocks over which the Job is applied.

EventType Determines the event type to be created.

Settings: PB (Pitch Bend), CC (Control Change)*, CAT (Channel Aftertouch), EXC (System Exclusive), TMP (Tempo)

* You can also specify the CC No. (Control Change number).

Data (Data Range) Determines the lower and upper limits for the data range to be created. The left value is the lower limit, and the right

value is the upper limit.

Settings: When Event Type is set to PB: -8192~+8191

When Event Type is set to TMP: 1.0~300.0

When Event Type is set to other: 0~127

Clock Determines the number of clocks to be inserted between each created event.

Settings: 001~999

Curve Determines the “curve” of the continuous data.

Refer to the graph for approximate curve shapes.

Settings: -16 ~+16

NumberOfTimes Determines the number of times the data creation is to be repeated.

For example, if data is created in the range M001:1:000 ~ M003:1:000 and this parameter is set to 03, the same data

will be created at M003:1:000 ~ M005:1:000 and M005:1:000 ~ M007:1:000. This Job lets you insert continuous

volume or ﬁlter cutoff variations to create tremolo or wah effects.

Settings: 01~99

06: Thin Out

This Job thins out the speciﬁed type of continuous data in the speciﬁed range — allowing you to free up memory

space for other data or further recording.

TR (Track)

001 : 1 : 000 - 999 : 4 : 479

Determines the track (01 - 16, TMP, all) and range of measures/beats/clocks over which the Job is applied.

EventType Determines the event type to be thinned.

Settings: PB (Pitch Bend), CC (Control Change)*, CAT (Channel Aftertouch), PAT (Polyphonic Aftertouch), TMP (Tempo)

* You can also specify the CC No. (Control Change number).

n The Thin Out Job will not work on continuous data that has a clock interval of greater than 60 clocks per event.

07: Modify Control Data

This Job lets you change the values of a speciﬁed type of control change data — pitch bend, control change,

aftertouch, etc. — in the speciﬁed range. Data changes are calculated as follows:

Modiﬁed value = (original value x Rate) + Offset.

The modiﬁed value cannot exceed the minimum/maximum limits of the parameter. Any result lower than the minimum

is set to the minimum; any result higher than the maximum is set to the maximum.

TR (Track)

001 : 1 : 000 - 999 : 4 : 479

Determines the track (01 - 16, TMP, all) and range of measures/beats/clocks over which the Job is applied.

EventType Determines the event type to be modiﬁed.

Settings: PB (Pitch Bend), CC (Control Change)*, CAT (Channel Aftertouch), PAT (Polyphonic Aftertouch), TMP (Tempo)

* You can also specify the CC No. (Control Change number).

SetAll Sets all target events to the same ﬁxed value. When set to “off,” the Set All parameter has no effect. When set to a

value other than “off,” the Rate and Offset parameters are unavailable and appear as “***” on the display.

Settings: off, 000 ~127 (-8192 ~ +8191 for pitch bend, 0.1 ~ 300.0 for tempo)

Rate Determines the percentage by which the target events will be shifted from their original values. When the Set All

parameter (above) is set to something other than “off,” this parameter appears as “***” and cannot be changed.

Settings: 000% ~ 200%, ***

Offset Adds a ﬁxed value to the Rate-adjusted event values. When the Set All parameter (above) is set to something other

than “off,” this parameter appears as “***” and cannot be changed.

Settings: -127~127 (-8192 ~ +8191 for pitch bend, -275 ~ +275 for tempo), ***

Curve = +16 Curve = 0 (linear) Curve = -16

Start point

End point

This distance speciﬁed by Clock

Reference Song Mode

Song Job mode

231

Owner’s Manual

08: Beat Stretch

This Job performs time-expansion or compression over the selected range. Keep in mind that this operation affects

all event timing, note step times, and note gate times.

TR (Track)

001 : 1 : 000 - 999 : 4 : 479

Determines the track (01 - 16, all) and range of measures/beats/clocks over which the Job is applied.

Rate Determines the amount of time expansion or compression as a percentage. Settings higher than 100% produce

expansion, and settings below 100% produce compression.

Settings: 025%~400%

n Only MIDI data is affected by this Job. Sample Voices are not expanded or compressed. However, for samples recorded using

the Slice+Seq feature, the Beat Stretch Job expands or compresses the timing of the note data, step times, and gate times

that control playback of the sliced samples. The sample data itself is not affected.

[F4] MEAS (Measure Job)

01: Create Measure

This Job creates empty measures at the speciﬁed location in all tracks.

Meter of measures to be inserted Determines the meter or time signature of the measures to be created. You may ﬁnd it convenient to use this

parameter when you need to create a Song that incorporates meter changes.

Settings: 1/16~16/16, 1/8~16/8, 1/4~8/4

Insertion point

(Measure number)

Determines the insert point (measure number) at which the newly created blank measures will be inserted.

Settings: 001~999

Number of measures to be

inserted

Determines the number of empty measures to be created and inserted.

Settings: 01~99

n When empty measures are inserted, measure and meter data following the insert point are moved forward accordingly.

n If the insert point is set after the last measure containing data, only the meter data at that point is set without actually inserting the measures.

02: Delete Measure

This Job deletes the speciﬁed measures. Measure and meter data following the deleted measures are moved

backward accordingly.

Delete Range

Settings: 001~999

n Keep in mind that applying this Job to a range of measures with Sample Voices erases the events that trigger the samples, but

it does not erase the actual samples themselves.

[F5] TRACK (Track Job)

01: Copy Track

This Job copies all data from a speciﬁed source track

to the speciﬁed destination track.

The copy operation overwrites any data

previously existing on the destination

track.

Undo/Redo cannot be used to undo/

redo a sample voice copy operation.

Data Type to be copied Determines the type(s) of data to be copied. Select the desired type by checkmarking the appropriate box.

Settings: Seq Event (all events in the track), Grid Groove (for the selected track), Mix Part Param (all Mixing Part parameters), Sample

(all samples used by the track)

n When there is no memory available in the destination Song for sample voice data, an alert message will appear on the display and the Sample Voice data will not be

copied. If this occurs, use Sample Job 02 “Delete” (page 256) to delete any unused samples, then attempt the operation again.

001 – 004 005 013

001 – 004 005 016

024012––

–

Meter (time signature) of

measures to be inserted

Number of measures

to be inserted

Insertion point (measure number)

8 measures inserted at measure 5

The inserted 8 measures

Source data

001 – 004 005 013

001 – 004 005 016

024012––

–

Delete range

Measures M006 – M012 deleted

Source data

Source Song and Track Destination Song and Track

Data Type to be copied

CAUTION

Reference Song Mode

Song Job mode

232

Owner’s Manual

02: Exchange Track

This Job exchanges or “swaps” the speciﬁed type of

data between two speciﬁed tracks in the current Song.

Data Type to be exchanged Determines the type(s) of data to be exchanged. Select the desired type by checkmarking the appropriate box.

Settings: Seq Event (all events in the track), Grid Groove (for the selected track), Mix Part Param (all Mixing Part parameters)

03: Mix Track

This Job mixes all data from two selected tracks (“A” and “B”), and places the result in track B. One useful

application for this would be to free up the data in track A, letting you record new data to it.

Target tracks for the Mix

operation

Settings: 01~16

n Keep in mind that applying this Job to tracks with Sample Voices does not mix the Sample Voices.

04: Clear Track

This Job deletes all data of the selected type from the

selected track, or from all tracks.

Undo/Redo cannot be used to undo/redo

a Clear operation for tracks that contain

sample data.

Data type to be cleared Determines the type(s) of data to be cleared. Select the desired type by checkmarking the appropriate box.

Settings: Seq Event (all events in the track), Grid Groove (for the selected track), Mix Part Param (all Mixing Part parameters), Sample

(all samples used by the track)

05: Normalize Play Effect

This Job rewrites the data in the selected track so that it incorporates the current Grid Groove settings.

TR (Track) Determines the Song track to which the Job is applied.

Settings: 01~16, all

06: Divide Drum Track

Separates the note events in a drum performance assigned to a speciﬁed track, and places the notes

corresponding to different drum instruments in separate tracks (tracks 1 through 8).

TR (Track) Determines the Song track to which the Job is applied.

Settings: 01 ~ 16

07: Put Track To Arp

This Job copies data in the speciﬁed measures of a track for creating Arpeggio data. For details, refer to page 130

in the Quick Guide section.

[F6] SONG (Song Job)

01: Copy Song

This Job copies all data from a selected source Song to

a selected destination Song. The Sample Voice and

Mixing Voice used by the source Song are also copied.

This Job overwrites any data already

existing in the destination Song.

Data Type to be exchanged

Target tracks for the Exchange operation (01-16)

Track B

Mix Track

Track B

Track A

Track A (01-16) Track B (01-16)

Track for which data will be cleared (01-16, TMP, SCN, all)

Data to be cleared

CAUTION

Source Song

Destination Song

CAUTION

Reference Song Mode

Song Mixing mode

233

Owner’s Manual

In this mode, you can set up mixing data for your songs, and set various parameters for the tone generator parts — including the desired Voice,

as well as its level, pan, EQ, effect and other settings.

Pressing the [F6] button can switch between the display for the Parts 1 - 16 to which the internal Voices are assigned, the display for Multi Plug-

in Parts (17 - 32) to which the PLG100-XG voices are assigned and the display for Plug-in Parts (PLG1 - 3) to which the Plug-in Voices of the

single part Plug-in board are assigned.

Song Mixing parameters are not actually part of the Song sequence data in each track, but rather are settings for the tone generator, as it is

played back by the Song data. As such, the Song Mixing parameter settings are not recorded to the Song tracks.

Parameter settings made in the Song Mixing mode and Song Mixing Edit mode should be stored to internal memory (DRAM) as part of the Song data. In

addition, make sure to save the entire Song data (including the Mixing settings) to the SmartMedia/USB storage device, since the data in DRAM is stored

only temporarily (page 187).

n Parameter settings in the Song Mixing mode and Song Mixing Edit mode can be stored as a template to internal Flash ROM, as well as being stored as part

of a Song. See page 104 for details.

02: Split Song To Pattern

This Job allows you to copy a part of the current Song –

all 16 tracks over a speciﬁc range of measures – to a

speciﬁc Pattern, letting you use Song data to create a

Pattern.

This Job overwrites any data already

existing in the destination Pattern and

section.

Copy Sample When this box is checkmarked, sample voices assigned to each track in the source Song are copied to the split

destination Pattern as Sample Voices and are assigned to the corresponding tracks in that Pattern. This checkbox

has no effect if no Sample Voices are assigned to the tracks in the source Song.

03: Clear Song

This Job deletes all data from the selected Song or all Songs, including the Sample Voices and Mixing Voices.

04: Song Name

This Job lets you assign a name to the selected Song. See “Basic Operation” on page 53.

Song Mixing mode

[SONG] → Song selection → [MIXING]

[F1] VOL/PAN

From this display you can set the Pan and Volume for each Part (track).

n You can select a Part by moving the cursor or by using the NUMBER buttons while the [TRACK SELECT] indicator is on (page 58).

PAN Determines the stereo pan position for each part.

Settings: L63 (far left)~C (center)~R63 (far right)

VOLUME Determines the volume for each Part, allowing you to set the optimum level balance of all the Parts.

Settings: 0~127

n You can also adjust the Volume by using the Control Sliders. See page 130 for details.

[F2] VOICE

From this display you can select a voice for each Part. Sample Voices and Mixing Voices can also be selected.

n You can select a Part by moving the cursor or by using the NUMBER buttons while the [TRACK SELECT] indicator is on (page 58).

n The Category Search function can also be used to select Voices here, except for Voices of the Multipart Plug-in Parts 17 - 32 (when the PLG100-XG has been installed), Sample

Voices, and Mixing Voices.

[F3] EFFECT

Pressing the [F3] EFFECT button in the Song Mixing mode calls up the [SONG] → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F6] EFFECT display in the Song Mixing

Edit mode. From this display, you can set the effect related parameters for the current Song. See page 235 for details.

[F4] EF SEND (Effect Send)

From this display you can make basic effect settings for each Part — Send Level for the System Effect (Reverb, Chorus) as well as the Dry Level for Insertion

Effects.

n For information on the effect connections in the Song mode, see page 180.

[F5] VCE ED (Mixing Voice Edit)

Press the [F5] VCE ED button in the Song Mixing mode to enter the Mixing Voice Edit mode. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the original display in the Song

Mixing mode. For details, see page 105.

Normal Voices can be edited speciﬁcally for use with the Song/Pattern modes, creating a dedicated “Mixing Voice.” Refer to “Mixing Voice mode” on page 249 for

details.

Source Song range (in measures)

Destination Pattern and section

CAUTION

Reference Song Mode

Song Mixing Edit mode Common Edit

234

Owner’s Manual

This mode provides more detailed Mixing parameters than in the Song Mixing mode.

Keep in mind that Song Mixing parameters are not actually part of the Song sequence data in each track, but rather are settings for the tone

generator, as it is played back by the Song data. As such, the Song Mixing parameter settings are not recorded to the Song tracks.

Parameter settings made in the Song Mixing mode and Song Mixing Edit mode should be stored to internal memory (DRAM) as part of the Song data. In

addition, make sure to save the entire Song data (including the Mixing settings) to the SmartMedia/USB storage device, since the data in DRAM is stored

only temporarily (page 187).

n Parameter settings in the Song Mixing mode and Song Mixing Edit mode can be stored as a template to internal Flash ROM, as well as being stored as part

of a Song. See page 104 for details.

Use Common Edit to edit the settings common to all Parts.

n Common Edit operations cannot be performed on the Multi-part Plug-in Parts 17 - 32.

[F6] 17-32/PLG1-3/1-16

You can switch between the displays for three types of parts by pressing this button. 1 - 16 are Parts of the internal tone generator, 17 - 32 are Multi Plug-in Parts

of the optionally installed PLG100-XG, and PLG1 - 3 are Plug-in Parts of the optionally installed Single Part Plug-in board.

n Please note that the Multi-Part Plug-in Part (17~32) settings apply not to one individual Song but to all 64 Songs.

n If you wish to edit more detailed Mixing parameters, you can enter the Song Mixing Edit mode by pressing the [EDIT] button.

Song Mixing Edit mode

[SONG] → Song selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT]

Common Edit

[SONG] → Song selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → [COMMON]

[F1] GENERAL

[SF1] MEQ OFS

(Master EQ Offset)

The Song Mixing parameters feature global EQ settings for all Parts of the selected Song (see “MEQ,” below). The

settings made here in this display are applied as offsets to those MEQ settings.

Settings: -64~+63

[SF5] OTHER

KnobAssign Determines the function for the assignable Knobs (1 - 4). Pressing any of the [KNOB CONTROL FUNCTION] buttons

on the panel sets the desired function row, which is automatically stored to memory with the currently selected Song.

Settings: pan, tone, assign, partEQ, MEF, arpFx

Assign A, Assign B,

Assign 1, Assign 2

This lets you directly set and memorize the value for each Assign Knob (A, B, 1, and 2), from the Knob itself. Simply

tweak the knob to the desired setting.

Settings: -64 ~ 0 ~+63

[F2] MEQ/MEF (Master EQ/Master Effect)

[SF1] MEQ (Master EQ)

From this display you can apply ﬁve-band equalization to all Parts of the selected Song.

The parameters are the same as in Performance Common Edit. See page 214.

[SF2] MEF (Master Effect)

From this display you can set parameters related to the Master Effect (page 177).

The parameters are the same as in Performance Common Edit. See page 214.

[F3] ARP (Arpeggio)

[SF1] TYPE

The basic parameters (e.g., type) of the Arpeggio are provided in this display.

This is the same as in Normal Voice Common Edit (page 191), except that the Tempo setting is not available here,

since the Arpeggio plays according to the Song tempo.

[SF2] LIMIT

Same as in Normal Voice Common Edit. See page 191.

[SF3] PLAY FX (Play Effect)

Same as in Normal Voice Common Edit. See page 192.

[SF4] OUT CH (Output Channel)

Same as in Performance Common Edit. See page 214.

[F4] CTL ASN (Controller Assign)

From this display, you can assign Control Change numbers to the hardware controllers of the instrument (such as the Knobs), for each Song.

The parameters are the same as in Performance Common Edit. See page 214.

CAUTION

Reference Song Mode

Song Mixing Edit mode Part Edit

235

Owner’s Manual

These parameters are for editing the individual Parts that make up a Song Mixing. Press the [F6] button to switch among the various Part

displays — the display for Parts 1 - 16 to which the internal Voices are assigned, the display for Multi-part Plug-in Parts (17 - 32) to which the

PLG100-XG voices are assigned, and the display for Plug-in Parts (PLG1 - 3) to which the Plug-in Voices of the single part Plug-in board are

assigned.

n Please note that the Multi-Part Plug-in Part (17~32) settings apply not to one individual Song but to all 64 Songs.

[F5] AUDIO IN

From this display, you can set parameters related to the Audio Input Part in the Song mode.

The parameters are the same as in Performance Common Edit. See page 214.

[F6] EFFECT

n For information on the effect connections in the Song mode, see page 180.

[SF1] CONNECT

This display gives you comprehensive control over the effect connections.

The parameters are the same as in Performance Common Edit. See page 215.

[SF2] INS SW (Insertion Switch)

The Insertion Effects can be applied to up to eight parts. This display lets you set to which parts the Insertion Effects

are applied.

[SF3] PLG EF (Plug-in Effect)

This display lets you set the Plug-in Insertion Effect related parameters when the Effect Plug-in Board PLG100-VH

has been installed. For details on each parameter, refer to the Owner’s Manual included with the PLG100-VH.

[SF4] REVERB

The number of parameters and values available differs depending on the currently selected effect type. For more

information, see the Effect Type List in the separate Data List booklet.

[SF5] CHORUS

Part Edit

[SONG] → Song selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → Part selection

[F1] VOICE

[SF1] VOICE

Determines the Voice for each Part. For details, see page 102.

n When the cursor is located on the Bank, you can select a Voice (with the exception of Sample Voices, Mixing Voices, and

Voices of Multi-part Plug-in Parts) via the method explained in the Quick Guide on page 102.

[SF2] MODE

Mono/Poly Determines the playback method of the Voice for each Part — monophonic (single notes only) or polyphonic

(multiple notes).

Settings: mono, poly

n This parameter is not available for the part to which a Drum Voice is assigned.

ArpSwitch (Arpeggio Switch) Determines whether Arpeggio is on or off for the currently selected Part.

Settings: on, off

n Arpeggio Switch is applied to only one Part at the same time. It cannot be applied to multiple Parts simultaneously.

n Arpeggio Switch is not available for the Multi-part Plug-in Parts 17~32.

ReceiveCh (Receive Channel) Determines the MIDI receive channel for the selected Part. Since MIDI data may be coming from many channels at

once, you should set this to match the particular channel over which the desired controlling data is being sent.

Settings: 01~16, off

[SF3] LIMIT

From this display you can determine the note range and velocity range for each Part.

The parameters are the same as in Performance Part Edit. See page 216.

[SF4] PORTA (Portamento)

Determines the Portamento parameters for each Part.

The parameters are the same as in Performance Part Edit. See page 216.

n The Mode setting is not available for the Multi Plug-in parts 17-32 and the Plug-in parts 1-3.

[SF5] OTHER

Same as in Performance Part Edit. See page 217.

n For Multi-part Plug-in Parts 17 - 32 and Plug-in Parts 1 - 3, Pitch Bend Upper and Lower become a single parameter: PB

Range. Upper and Lower values cannot be set independently for Plug-in Parts. See page 164.

[F2] OUTPUT

[SF1] VOL/PAN (Volume/Pan)

Same as in Performance Part Edit. See page 217.

n The Voice Element Pan setting is not available for Multi-part Plug-in Parts 17 - 32 and Plug-in Parts 1 - 3.

[SF2] EF SEND (Effect Send)

Same as in Performance Part Edit. See page 217.

[SF3] SELECT (Output Select)

From this display you can assign individual Parts to sound from independent output connectors (jacks).

The parameters are the same as in Performance Part Edit. See page 218.

Reference Song Mode

Song Mixing Job mode

236

Owner’s Manual

The Song Mixing Job mode features several basic operations, such as Initialize and Copy. After setting parameters as required from the

selected display, press the [ENTER] button to execute the Job.

n Among the Audio Parts shown in the Song Mixing Job display, Audio Part 1 indicates the A/D Input Part. When the optional AIEB2 has been installed, Audio

Part 2 indicates the AIEB2 Input Part. When the optional mLAN16E has been installed, Audio Parts 2 - 5 are mLAN Input Parts.

[F3] EQ (Equalizer)

From this display you can set parameters related to the Part EQ (page 178).

The parameters are the same as in Performance Part Edit. See page 218.

[F4] TONE

[SF1] TUNE

Same as in Performance Part Edit. See page 218.

[SF2] FILTER

Same as in Performance Part Edit. See page 218.

n The FEG Depth setting is not available for Multi-part Plug-in Parts 17 - 32 and Plug-in Parts 1 - 3.

[SF3] FEG

(Filter Envelope Generator)

From this display you can set the FEG (Filter Envelope Generator) parameters for each Part. The parameters offset

the same parameters of the assigned Voice set in the Voice (Element) Edit mode (page 198).

The parameters are the same as in Performance Part Edit. See page 218.

n The FEG setting is not available for Multi-part Plug-in Parts 17-32, Plug-in Parts 1-3, or Parts to which Drum Voices have been

assigned.

[SF4] AEG

(Amplitude Envelope Generator)

From this display you can set the AEG (Amplitude Envelope Generator) parameters for each Part. The parameters

offset the same parameters of the assigned Voice set in the Voice (Element) Edit mode (page 200).

The parameters are the same as in Performance Part Edit. See page 219.

n The Sustain setting is not available for Multi-part Plug-in Parts 17 - 32, Plug-in Parts 1 - 3 or Parts to which Drum Voices have

been assigned.

n The Release setting is not available for Parts to which Drum Voices have been assigned.

[F5] RCV SW (Receive Switch)

From this display you can set how each individual Part responds to various MIDI data, such as Control Change and Program Change messages. When the

relevant parameter is set to “on,” the corresponding Part responds to the appropriate MIDI data.

Note that two different display types listed below are provided and you can switch between them by pressing the [SF5] button. Each display type features the

same settings in a different format; use the type you feel most comfortable with.

• Display showing four Parts

This display type shows the Receive Switch status for four Parts at a time. Set the desired Part on or off, for the corresponding MIDI data type. To view and edit

another set of four Parts, press the appropriate [NUMBER] button, [1] to [16].

Keep in mind that since all the available parameters cannot be simultaneously displayed, you will need to use the cursor controls to scroll the display in order to

see and set the other parameters.

• Display showing all parameters for one Part

This display type shows all of the Receive Switch settings for a single selected Part. Set the desired MIDI data type on or off for the selected Part. To select other

Parts, use the NUMBER [1] - [16] buttons (making sure that the [TRACK SELECT] button is on).

Song Mixing Job mode

[SONG] → Song selection → [MIXING] → [JOB]

[F1] INIT (Initialize)

This function lets you reset (initialize) all Song Mixing parameters to their default settings. It also allows you to selectively initialize certain parameters, such as

Common settings, settings for each Part, and so on — very useful when creating a completely new Song Mixing program from scratch.

Type of parameter to be initialized: All, Common (Common parameter settings for the selected Song Mixing), Part 1~16, PLG 1~3, Audio1~5

[F2] RECALL (Edit Recall)

If you are editing a Song Mixing program and select a different program without storing your edited one, all the edits you’ve made will be erased. If this happens,

you can use Edit Recall to restore the Song Mixing program with your latest edits intact.

[F3] COPY

From this display you can copy Part parameter settings from any Song Mixing program including the

currently edited (but not yet stored) one to a particular Part of the Song Mixing program you are

editing. This would come in handy when you want to use some settings from another program.

Source song Select a Song and Part to be copied. You can specify “Current” (the Song Mixing program you are editing and have

not yet stored) as a Source Song.

Part to be copied (Type): Part 1~16, PartP1~P3 (Plug-in Part 1~3), PartA1~A5 (Audio Part 1~5)

Source song and part

Destination song (current song) and part

Reference Song Mode

Song Mixing Store mode

237

Owner’s Manual

This function lets you store your edited Song Mixing program to User memory (DRAM).

For details, refer to page 131 in the Quick Guide section.

Data type of Destination Song

(current selected song)

Set the Part of the destination Song.

Destination part (Type): Part 1~16, PartP1~P3 (Plug-in Part 1~3), PartA1~A5 (Audio Part 1~5), Arp, Effect (Reverb, Chorus)

n If you choose Arp (Arpeggio) or Effect, the Arpeggio data or Effect settings for the Voice assigned to the source Part will be

copied.

[F4] BULK (Bulk Dump)

This function lets you send all your edited parameter settings for the currently selected Song Mixing program to a computer or another MIDI instrument for data

archiving.

n In order to execute Bulk Dump, you’ll need to set the correct MIDI Device Number. For details, see page 264.

[F5] PF COPY (Performance Copy)

This convenient operation lets you copy certain settings of the four Parts in a performance to the Song Mixing program currently being edited. This would come in

handy when a certain performance has settings that you want to use in your Song Mixing program. Use this Job to simply copy the settings you need.

The MIDI receive channel settings are set to match the basic channel settings (page 263). When the basic channel is set to “omni,” the receive channel here is set

to 1. To select a group of parameters for copying, checkmark the appropriate box in the display.

[F6] TEMPLATE

This convenient function lets you store your mixing settings as a template — allowing

you to easily set up similar mixes by calling up the proper template, then tweaking it

as needed. Templates are saved as part of the System data (page 186) in the Utility

mode and not as data for each song.

After inputting a Template number and name, press the [SF5] PUT button to save the

current setting to the Template. After selecting the desired Template number, press the

[SF4] GET button to call it up.

n Since the Mixing templates are stored as System data (page 186) in Flash ROM, the data is

maintained even when the power is turned off. The Mixing template stored here can be called

up in the Pattern mode as a Pattern Mixing program.

Song Mixing Store mode

[SONG] → Song selection → [STORE]

Te mplate

Number

Template

Name

Pressing the [SF4] button lets you

call up the template selected at left.

Press the [SF5] button lets you save the current

setting to the template selected at left.

Reference Song Mode

Supplementary information

238

Owner’s Manual

■ Supplementary information

Song Track Loop — setting example

In the example below, a 40-measure song has been recorded and

Track 1 is set to play back normally over the 40 measures. Track 2 has

been set to loop, and will repeat until the [J] (Stop) button is

pressed.

When Track Loop has been set to on, you can specify the range to be

looped. (Only the end point can be set; the start point of looped

playback is ﬁxed to the beginning of the song.)

Please note that changing the Track Loop from off to on will delete the data

of the area that is not looped.

1 Press [F1] to call up the Song Play display. Here, change

the change the current measure — this will be used for the

last measure of the loop.

2 Call up the [F3] TRACK → [SF3] TR LOOP display and

move the cursor to the track to be looped.

3 Set the selected track to on by using the [INC/YES] and

[DEC/NO] buttons or the data dial. (The display prompts

you for conﬁrmation.)

4 Press the [INC/YES] button. The Loop is set to on and the

data after the loop end is deleted

If you want to restore the deleted data and return the selected

track to off, press the [SF5] UNDO button.

The Undo function can only be used on the last Track Loop operation.

If you’ve set other tracks to loop, the data of those previous tracks can-

not be recovered.

Step Recording — examples

This section explains how to step-record notes, using three speciﬁc

examples.

n The explanations here using the Song mode display apply also to the

Pattern mode.

• Example 1

1 Set the parameters as illustrated below.

Press the Record button to call up the display below. Here, we'll

set the Step Time to (480) so that quarter notes will be entered,

and set the GateTime to 100% to have the notes play in legato.

2 Play the keys C, D, E, F, G, A, B and C in order.

Each time you press a key and release it, the pointer moves

forward by one step and the played note is recorded.

3 Move the pointer to the top (beginning) of the song and

press the [F] (Play) button to hear the note data you just

recorded in steps #1 and 2.

[SONG] → [F3] TRACK → [SF3] TR LOOP (Track Loop) page 222

Playback

The four-measure data is repeated ten times

Tra ck1

(40 measures of data)

Tra ck2

(40 measures of data)

CAUTION

In this example, set to “004.”

CAUTION

[SONG] or [PATTERN] → [I] (Record) → [F1] SETUP

→ Type = step

page 224

SEQ TRANSPORT

LOCATE 1 2

Reference Song Mode

Supplementary information

239

Owner’s Manual

• Example 2 (Using the Tie function)

1 Set the parameters as illustrated below.

Since the ﬁrst note is a half note, set the StepTime to the half-note

icon (a value of 960), and set the GateTime to 80%, since you

don't want the notes to play in legato.

2 Enter the ﬁrst note F.

3 Enter the next 8th notes.

Keep the display settings unchanged for the remaining notes in

the measure, and press/release each key one by one as shown

below.

4 Follow the instructions below to enter the next dotted half

note.

5 Enter the last quarter note by pressing and releasing F.

6 Move the pointer to the top (beginning) of the song and

press the [F] (Play) button to hear the note data you just

recorded in steps #1 - 5.

1 Press and release F.

2 Change this to an eighth

note (240).

3 Press the [F4] button to tie the two F notes (half note and

8th note).

1 Change this to a quarter

note (480).

2 Press and release A.

3 Press the [F4] button twice to expand the quarter note to

a dotted half note.

SEQ TRANSPORT

LOCATE 1 2

Reference Song Mode

Supplementary information

240

Owner’s Manual

• Example 3 (Using the Rest function)

1 Set the parameters as illustrated below.

Set the StepTime to a quarter note (480) and the Gate Time to

80%.

2 Enter the ﬁrst note, F.

3 Enter the next 8th rest as shown below.

4 Enter the next 8th note A.

5 Enter the next 4th note C as shown below.

6 Enter the next 8th rest as you did in step #3 above.

7 Enter the last 8th note, F.

8 Move the pointer to the top (beginning) of the song and

press the [F] (Play) button to hear the note data you just

recorded in steps #1 - #7.

Press and release A.

1 Change this to an eighth note (240), since we’ll

be entering an eighth-note rest.

2 Enter the selected rest value (eighth note) by

pressing the [F3] button

Press and release A.

Entering a chord

In Step recording, you can also enter chords. Press and hold

down each note of the chord in succession, then release them

all together to record them as a chord. Keep in mind that notes

are not actually recorded to a track until they are released.

1 Change this value to 480, since the rest value

is a quarter note.

2 Press and release C.

Press and release F.

SEQ TRANSPORT

LOCATE 1 2

TIP

Reference Pattern Mode

Pattern Play mode

241

Owner’s Manual

Pattern mode

■ Creating Patterns — basic procedure

Patterns consist of the following three types of data:

• MIDI sequence data (created in the Pattern Record mode, Pattern Edit mode, and Pattern Job mode)

• Setup data (created in the Pattern Play mode)

• Mixing data (created in the Pattern Mixing mode/Mixing Edit mode and stored in the Pattern Mixing Store mode)

After creating the data in these modes described above, store the Mixing settings in the Pattern Mixing Store mode to archive it as Pattern data

and save the entire Pattern to the SmartMedia/USB storage device in the File mode.

n Non-note MIDI events (such as Voice number, volume, pan, and effect send level) which are necessary at the start of a Pattern are not recorded as MIDI

sequence data, but are stored instead as Mixing data.

Because Pattern data (MIDI sequence data, Setup data, and Mixing data) is recorded to DRAM (page 187), it will be lost when turning the power off. Make

sure to save any Pattern data created via the Record, Edit, Job, and Mixing setting to the SmartMedia/USB storage device in the File mode before turning

the power off. For details on saving Pattern data, see page 132.

Pattern Play mode

[PATTERN] → Pattern selection

[F1] PLAY

Refer to page 56 in the Quick Guide section.

Trans (Transpose) Determines the key transpose setting for the Pattern, and can be adjusted in semitones.

Settings: -36 ~ +36

n If Transpose is applied to a Drum Voice, the results may not be musically appropriate. To ensure proper playback of a Drum

Voice, set the Note Shift parameter for the Drum Voice Part to an appropriate value ([PATTERN] → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → Part

selection → [F4] TONE → [SF1] TUNE → NoteShift).

MEAS (Measure) Indicates the current measure number and beat for the current Pattern. During playback, this indication changes

automatically according to the Pattern playback. You can input the desired measure number directly by using the

Number Input window called up via the [INFORMATION] button.

[SF1] ARP1 (Arpeggio 1) - [SF5]

ARP5 (Arpeggio 5)

You can register the desired Arpeggio types to these buttons and call them up any time during your keyboard

performance.

[F2] GROOVE (Grid Groove)

Same as in the Song Play mode. See page 221.

[F3] TRACK

[SF1] CHANNEL

Same as in the Song Play mode. See page 221.

[SF2] OUT SW (Output Switch)

Same as in the Song Play mode. See page 222.

[SF3] TR VCE (Track Voice)

Determines whether the program change data contained in the phrase data is effective or not. For most purposes,

this should be set to “off.” For example, if a phrase has embedded Voice changes (program change messages) but

you don’t want the Voice to change in the middle of the phrase, set this to “off.” Tracks that are set to “off” here

automatically play back with the Voice number assigned to the Part set in the Mixing mode.

n The Phrase Voice embedded in the Phrase can be speciﬁed from the Voice display in the Pattern Record mode (page 243).

[F4] PATCH

Refer to page 113 in the Quick Guide section.

From this display, you can assign a Preset phrase or a User phrase (recorded in the Pattern Record mode) to each track and create a Pattern that contains up to

16 tracks.

n The Patch function allows you to use only User phrases recorded to a track of the currently selected Pattern. If you wish to use User phrases recorded to tracks of other Patterns,

use the Phrase Data Copy function, selected with [SF5] button.

Section Shows the current edited section. For details about how to change sections, see page 57.

Meas Shows Measure : Beat for current playback location.

[SF4] CLEAR

This clears the Phrase assignment to the currently selected track and leaves the track empty.

CAUTION

Reference Pattern Mode

Pattern Play mode

242

Owner’s Manual

[SF5] COPY

The User phrases that can be assigned with

the Patch function are limited to the ones

contained in the currently selected Pattern.

This function lets you copy phrases in another

Pattern to the selected one. Press the [SF5]

button to call up the display shown at left. After

setting the parameters as needed, press the

[ENTER] button to copy the phrase data.

The copy operation overwrites any data

previously existing in the destination

phrase.

[F5] REMIX

This function gives you a variety of semi-random presets for dividing the MIDI sequence data and altering the note lengths, letting you create completely new

variations of a Pattern. This function is particularly effective when used on a track which contains a sample voice created by using the Sampling feature with the

SLICE+SEQ sample type or samples sliced using the Sample Slice Job.

Set the parameters below, then press the [ENTER] button to execute the Remix operation. You can press the Play button at this point to hear the results of the

Remix. If you’re not satisﬁed with the results, try another Type/Variation and press [ENTER]. If you want to keep the changes, press [SF5] OK. (Undo cannot be

used with Remix.) To return to the original display without altering the data, press the [SF4] CANCEL button.

n Since the remixed data is stored as a new phrase and assigned to the current track, the original phrase data remains as an unassigned phrase.

Type Determines how the data in the selected track will be divided and rearranged. The division and rearrangement rules

are different for each remix type. The type is also shown graphically in the display.

Settings: 1~16

Variation Determines how the original MIDI sequence data will be modiﬁed.

Settings: Normal1~16, Reverse1~16, Break 1~16, Pitch 1~16, Roll 1~16

Normal 1~16 ....The original data is only divided and rearranged. 16 variations are provided.

Reverse1~16 ...In addition to division and rearrangement, some portions of the data may be played in reverse. 16 variations are

provided.

Break 1~16 ......In addition to division and rearrangement, some portions of the data may be deleted to create breaks. 16 variations are

provided.

Pitch 1~16........In addition to division and rearrangement, some portions of the data may be pitch-shifted. 16 variations are provided.

Roll 1~16..........In addition to division and rearrangement, some portions of the data may be played with a roll effect. 16 variations are

provided.

[F6] CHAIN

Refer to page 115 in the Quick Guide section.

Pattern Chain Play mode

[PATTERN] → [F6]

This mode lets you play the programmed section chain sequence created in the Pattern Record mode and Pattern

Edit mode. The parameters are the same as in the [F1] PLAY display.

Pattern Chain Record mode

[PATTERN] → [F6] → [I] (Record)

Recording Standby mode

You can select one of the following tracks for recording.

• patt (Pattern): Records section changes during

playback

• tempo: Records tempo change information during

playback

• scene: Records track mute settings during playback

During Recording [PATTERN] → [F6] → [I] (Record) → [F] (Play)

When recording the tempo track, you can change the tempo value.

When recording the scene track, you can change the track mute setting.

When recording the Pattern track, you can change the section.

Pattern Chain Edit mode

[PATTERN] → [F6] → [EDIT]

[F1] CHANGE

The Pattern Chain Edit mode makes it possible to edit the order of the sections in a chain, as well as insert tempo,

and scene/mute event data.

Call up the desired track display by pressing the [F4] TR SEL button to edit the selected track.

Pattern Track Edit From this display, you can edit the section changes for each measure. Move the cursor to the “Section” column for

the desired measure, and enter the desired section. To set the end of the chain, enter an END mark at the

appropriate measure. (For more information, see page 116.)

To clear the event at the currently selected location, press the [F6] CLEAR button.

Scene Track Edit You can edit the track mute change in beats. Use the [F5] INSERT and [F6] DELETE button to insert/delete the event.

Tempo Track Edit You can edit the tempo change in beats. Use the [F5] INSERT and [F6] DELETE button to insert/delete the event.

Source Pattern number,

phrase number

When this box is checkmarked, Sample Voices

assigned to the source phrase are copied to

the destination phrase as Sample Voices, and

are assigned to the corresponding tracks in the

selected Pattern.

Destination phrase and track

of the current edited Pattern

After setting, press the

[ENTER] button to copy

the phrase.

CAUTION

Recording track

Reference Pattern Mode

Pattern Record mode Pattern Record Standby mode

243

Owner’s Manual

Pattern Record Standby mode

[F2] COPY

This display lets you copy all Pattern chain events from

a speciﬁed range of measures (source) to a destination

location.

After specifying the source range in measures, the top

measure of the destination location, and

NumberOfTimes (number of times the data is copied),

press the [ENTER] button to execute the Copy

operation.

This operation overwrites any events already existing at the destination.

[F3] SONG

This function converts the Pattern chain data to Song data (standard MIDI format) and places the results in the

normal Song tracks.

After specifying the desired destination Song and measure number to which the converted data is to be copied,

then press the [ENTER] button to execute.

This operation overwrites any data already existing at the destination range.

Pattern Record mode

[PATTERN] → Pattern selection → [I] (Record)

[F1] SETUP

Type (Recording Type) Determines the recording method.For information on each method, refer to page 168 in the Basic Structure section.

Settings: replace, overdub, step

n Unlike in the Song Record mode, Punch recording is not available for Pattern recording.

Loop Tur ns loop recording ON or OFF.

When ON, the phrase will play repeatedly during real-time recording. This can be handy when recording drum parts

(page 168), allowing you to add different instruments on each pass.

When OFF recording stops after one pass through the phrase.

Settings: on, off

Quantize Same as in the Song Record mode. See page 222.

Event Same as in the Song Record mode. See page 223.

 (Tempo) Determines the Pattern tempo.

Settings: 001.0 ~300.0

n Unlike in Songs, Scene track and Tempo track are not available for Patterns.

Meas (Measure) Determines the measure from which Pattern recording will be started.

[F2] VOICE

From this display you can set Voice-related parameters for the selected track. The settings made here affect the tone generator parts whose MIDI receive

channels match the MIDI transmit channel of the song track. The Voice set here becomes the phrase Voice (page 167).

Parameters are the same as in the Song Record mode. See page 223.

[F3] ARP (Arpeggio)

From this display you can set parameters related to the Arpeggio of the recording track.

Parameters are the same as in the Song Record mode. See page 223.

[F4] REC ARP (Record Arpeggio)

From this display you can determine whether the sequence data played by Arpeggio is recorded to the Pattern track or not.

Parameters are the same as in the Song Record mode. See page 223.

[F5] CLICK

Pressing the [F5] button lets you turn the click sound (metronome) on/off for recording.

Source range

Top measure of destination

CAUTION

Reference Pattern Mode

Pattern Edit mode

244

Owner’s Manual

Same as in the Song Edit mode. See page 225.

The Pattern Job mode contains a comprehensive set of editing tools and functions you can use to change the sound of the Pattern. It also

includes a variety of convenient operations, such as copying or erasing data.

After setting parameters as required from the selected display, press the [ENTER] button to execute the Job.

An “Executing...” message is shown when it takes a short amount of time to execute the Job. Never attempt to turn off the power while an “Executing...”

message is shown. Turning the power off in this state results in loss of all user data.

During Pattern Recording

[PATTERN] → Pattern selection → [I] (Record) → [F] (Play)

Realtime Recording

Refer to page 110 in the Quick Guide section.

Step Recording

Examples of Step Recording are described on page 238.

Parameters in the displays are the same as in the Song Record mode. See page 224.

Pattern Edit mode

[PATTERN] → Pattern selection → [EDIT]

Pattern Job mode

[PATTERN] → Pattern selection → [JOB]

[F1] UNDO/REDO

The Undo Job cancels the changes you made in your most recent recording session, editing session, or Job, restoring the data to its previous state. This allows

you to recover from accidental data loss.

Redo is available only after using Undo, and lets you restore the changes you made before undoing them.

Undo/Redo does not work with Sample Voice and Mixing Voice operations.

[F2] NOTE (Note data Job)

The Note data Jobs in the Pattern mode are basically same as in the Song Job mode. However, unlike

in the Song Job mode, Pattern Note data Jobs are applied to the phrases (001 - 256) and a selected

range in the phrase (measure : beat : clock).

01: Quantize

Same as in the Song Job mode. See page 227.

02: Modify Velocity

Same as in the Song Job mode. See page 227.

03: Modify Gate Time

Same as in the Song Job mode. See page 227.

04: Crescendo

Same as in the Song Job mode. See page 228.

05: Transpose

Same as in the Song Job mode. See page 228.

06: Glide

Same as in the Song Job mode. See page 228.

07: Create Roll

Same as in the Song Job mode. See page 228.

08: Sort Chord

Same as in the Song Job mode. See page 228.

09: Separate Chord

Same as in the Song Job mode. See page 229.

[F3] EVENT (Event Job)

The Event Jobs in the Pattern mode are basically same as in the Song Job mode. However, unlike in the Song Job mode, Pattern Event Jobs are applied to the

phrases (001 - 256) and a selected range in the phrase (measure : beat : clock).

01: Shift Clock

Same as in the Song Job mode. See page 229.

CAUTION

Specify the phrase and the range (in measures/beats/clocks)

over which the Job is applied.

Reference Pattern Mode

Pattern Job mode

245

Owner’s Manual

02: Copy Event

Same as in the Song Job mode. See page 229.

03: Erase Event

Same as in the Song Job mode. See page 229.

n Unlike in the Song Job mode, “Tempo,” “Scene Memory,” or “Track Mute” cannot be selected as Event Types.

04: Extract Event

Same as in the Song Job mode. See page 230.

05: Create Continuous Data

Same as in the Song Job mode. See page 230.

n Unlike in the Song Job mode, “Tempo” cannot be selected as an Event Type.

06: Thin Out

Same as in the Song Job mode. See page 230.

07: Modify Control Data

Same as in the Song Job mode. See page 230.

n Unlike in the Song Job mode, “Tempo” cannot be selected as an Event Type.

08: Beat Stretch

Same as in the Song Job mode. See page 231.

[F4] PHRASE (Phrase Job)

01: Copy Phrase

This Job copies a selected phrase to the designated

destination phrase.

After specifying the source Pattern and phrase, the

destination Pattern and phrase, and setting the

checkbox of Copy Sample, press the [ENTER] button to

execute this Job.

When the Copy Sample box is checkmarked, Sample

Voices used by the source phrase are copied to the

destination Pattern as Sample Voices, and are assigned

to the destination phrase. This is available only when

the Sample Voice is used in the source phrase.

n When there is no memory available in the destination Pattern for Sample Voice data, an error message will appear on the

display and the Sample Voice data will not be copied. If this occurs, use Sample Job 02 “Delete” to delete any unused Sample

Voices, then try again.

Any previous data in the copy destination will be overwritten.

Undo/Redo (page 244) cannot be used to undo/redo a Sample Voice copy operation.

02: Exchange Phrase

This Job exchanges or “swaps” the contents of two speciﬁed phrases (“A” and “B”).

n If this Job is applied to phrases which use Sample Voices, the Sample Voices will not be exchanged.

03: Mix Phrase

This Job mixes all data from two selected user phrases (“A” and

“B”), and places the result in phrase B.

n Keep in mind that applying this Job to phrases with Sample Voices

does not mix the Sample Voices.

04: Append Phrase

This Job appends one phrase (A) to the end of another (B) to

create one longer phrase (B).

n If this Job is applied to phrases which use Sample Voices, the

Sample Voices will not be appended.

05: Split Phrase

This Job splits a selected phrase (A) into two separate phrases (A

and B).

The data before the split point is stored to the original phrase A

and the data after the split point is moved and stored to another

phrase B. You can also set the Meter of the phrase B after the Split

Phrase Job.

n When either Pattern or Phrase is set to “off,” the split Phrase B data

is erased.

n If this Job is applied to phrases which use Sample Voices, the

Sample Voices will not be split.

The Job overwrites any data already existing in destination phrase B.

Selects the Pattern and phrase to be copied.

(Preset phrase also can be selected.)

Specify the destination Pattern and phrase.

CAUTION

Phrase A

Phrase B

Mix Phrase

Phrase A

Phrase B

Append Phrase

Phrase A

Phrase B

Phase A is divided at the Split Point

Phrase A

CAUTION

Reference Pattern Mode

Pattern Job mode

246

Owner’s Manual

06: Get Phrase From Song

This Job copies a segment of sequence-track data from

a Song into the designated destination phrase.

After specifying the source Song/track/range of

measures to be copied, the destination phrase, and

setting the checkbox of Copy Sample, press the

[ENTER] button to execute this Job.

When the Copy Sample box is checkmarked, Sample

Voices used by the source track are copied to the

destination Pattern as Sample Voices, and are assigned

to the destination phrase. This parameter has no effect when no Sample Voice is used by the source track.

n When there is no memory available in the destination Pattern for Sample Voice data, an error message will appear on the

display and the Sample Voice data will not be copied. If this occurs, use Sample Job 02 “Delete” to delete any unused

samples, then try again.

The Job overwrites any data already existing in the destination phrase.

Undo/Redo (page 244) cannot be used to undo/redo a Sample Voice copy operation.

07: Put Phrase To Song

This Job copies a selected user phrase into a speciﬁed

area of a selected song.

After specifying the source phrase, destination Song/

track/top measure, and setting the Copy Sample

checkbox, press the [ENTER] button to execute this

Job.

When the Copy Sample box is checkmarked, Sample

Voices used by the source phrase are copied to the

destination Song as Sample Voices, and are assigned

to the destination Song track. This parameter has no effect when no Sample Voice is used by the source phrase.

n When there is no memory available in the destination Song for Sample Voice data, an error message will appear on the display

and the Sample Voice data will not be copied. If this occurs, use Sample Job “Delete” to delete any unused samples, then try

again.

The Job overwrites any data already existing in the destination track.

Undo/Redo (page 244) cannot be used to undo/redo a Sample Voice copy operation.

08: Clear Phrase

This Job deletes all data from the selected phrase.

When the Delete Sample box is checkmarked, sample data assigned to the selected phrase will be deleted. This

parameter has no effect when no Sample Voice is used by the selected phrase.

Undo/Redo (page 244) cannot be used to undo/redo a Delete Sample operation.

09: Phrase Name

This Job lets you assign a name (of up to eight characters) to the selected phrase.

For instructions on naming, refer to page 53 in the Basic Operation section.

[F5] TRACK (Track Job)

01: Copy Track

This Job copies all data from a speciﬁed source track to

the speciﬁed destination track.

The types of data to be copied are the same as in the

Song Job mode. See page 231.

02: Exchange Track

This Job exchanges or “swaps” the speciﬁed type of

data between two speciﬁed tracks in the current Pattern

and section. The types of data to be exchanged are the

same as in the Song Job mode. See page 232.

03: Clear Track

This Job deletes all data of the selected type from the

selected Pattern track.

The types of data to be cleared are the same as in the

Song Job mode. See page 232.

Source Song, track, and range of measures

to be copied.

Destination phrase

CAUTION

Source phrase

Destination Song, track,

and top measures

CAUTION

Source Pattern, section, and track

Types of data to be copied Destination Pattern, section,

and track

Target tracks for the Exchange operation

Types of data to be exchanged

Section and track from which data is to be cleared

Types of data to be cleared

Reference Pattern Mode

Pattern Job mode

247

Owner’s Manual

04: Normalize Play Effect

This Job rewrites the data in the selected track so that it incorporates the current Grid Groove settings.

After specifying a track (TR 01-16) to which this Job is applied, press the [ENTER] button to execute this Job.

05: Divide Drum Track

Separates the note events in a drum performance assigned to a speciﬁed track, and places the notes

corresponding to different drum instruments in separate tracks (tracks 1 through 8).

After specifying a track (TR 01-16) to which this Job is applied, press the [ENTER] button to execute this Job.

n In order to use this Job, tracks 1 - 8 must be empty. If there aren’t enough empty tracks, an error message appears. If this

happens, use the Clear Track Job (page 246) to delete tracks 1 - 8, then try the Job again.

06: Put Track To Arp

This Job copies data in the speciﬁed measures of a section/track for creating Arpeggio data. For details, refer to

page 130 in the Quick Guide section.

[F6] PATTERN (Pattern Job)

01: Copy Pattern

This Job copies all data from a selected source Pattern

to a selected destination Pattern.

After specifying the source Pattern/section, and the

destination Pattern/section, as well as setting the

checkboxes as necessary, press the [ENTER] button to

execute this Job.

n If you set the source section to “all,” the destination section is also set to “all” automatically. With this status, execute this Job to copy the entire source Pattern data to the

destination.

Preset Phrase → User When this box is checkmarked, Preset Phrases (if included in the source Pattern) are copied to the User Phrase,

which will be assigned to the destination Pattern.

Duplicate User Phrase When this box is checkmarked, User Phrases (if included in the source Pattern) are copied to another User Phrase,

which will be assigned to the destination Pattern.

Chain When this box is checkmarked, Pattern chain data (if included in the source Pattern) is copied to the destination

Pattern.

02: Append Pattern

Appends one Pattern to the end of another to create

one longer Pattern with all 16 tracks.

n If this job is applied to Patterns which use Sample Voices,

the Sample Voices will not be appended.

n If the Pattern length becomes greater than 256 measures

as a result of the Append Pattern Job, an error message

will be displayed and the Job will be aborted.

Keep Original Phrase When this box is checkmarked, the original destination Pattern data is retained in memory, along with the new

appended Pattern data. If the box is not checkmarked, the original destination Pattern is erased and replaced with

the newly created data.

n When the KEEP ORIGINAL PHRASE checkbox is checked, this Job requires twice the number of empty user phrases as the

number of tracks containing data in which to store the appended phrase data. If the required space is unavailable, an alert

message will appear and the Job will be aborted. If this occurs use the Clear Phrase Job (page 246) to delete unused phrases

and try again.

03: Split Pattern

This Job splits a selected Pattern (all 16 tracks data)

into two Patterns. After the Split Pattern operation, the

part of the Pattern before the speciﬁed Split Point will

remain, and the part following the Split Point will be

moved to the destination Pattern.

The Job overwrites any data already

existing in the destination Pattern.

Split Point Determines the Split Point by setting a measure number.

Keep Original Phrase When this box is checkmarked, the original Source Pattern data is retained in memory and the results of the Split Job

are written to empty phrases. When this box is not checkmarked, the original Source Pattern is erased and replaced

with the newly created data.

Source Pattern and section

Destination Pattern and section

Source Pattern

and section

Destination Pattern and section

Source Pattern and section

Destination Pattern

and section

CAUTION

Reference Pattern Mode

Pattern Mixing mode

248

Owner’s Manual

In this mode, you can set up mixing data for your patterns, and set various parameters for the tone generator parts — including the desired

Voice, as well as its level, pan, EQ, effect and other settings.

Pattern Mixing parameters are not actually part of the Pattern sequence data in each track, but rather are settings for the tone generator, as it is

played back by the Pattern data. As such, the Pattern Mixing parameter settings are not recorded to the Pattern tracks.

Mixing operations and parameters are the same as those of the Song Mixing mode. See page 236.

Parameter settings made in the Pattern Mixing mode and Pattern Mixing Edit mode should be stored to internal memory (DRAM) as part of the Pattern data.

In addition, make sure to save the entire Pattern data (including the Mixing settings) to the SmartMedia/USB storage device, since the data in DRAM is

stored only temporarily (page 187).

n Parameter settings in the Pattern Mixing mode and Pattern Mixing Edit mode can be stored as a template to internal Flash ROM, as well as being stored as

part of a Pattern. See page 104 for details.

This mode provides more detailed Mixing parameters than in the Pattern Mixing mode.

Keep in mind that Pattern Mixing parameters are not actually part of the Pattern sequence data in each track, but rather are settings for the tone

generator, as it is played back by the Pattern data. As such, the Pattern Mixing parameter settings are not recorded to the pattern tracks.

Mixing operations and parameters are the same as those of the Song Mixing mode. See page 234.

Parameter settings made in the Pattern Mixing mode and Pattern Mixing Edit mode should be stored to internal memory (DRAM) as part of the Pattern data.

In addition, make sure to save the entire Pattern data (including the Mixing settings) to the SmartMedia/USB storage device, since the data in DRAM is

stored only temporarily (page 187).

n Parameter settings in the Pattern Mixing mode and Pattern Mixing Edit mode can be stored as a template to internal Flash ROM, as well as being stored as

part of a Pattern. See page 104 for details.

Same as in the Song Mixing Job mode. See page 236.

This function lets you store your edited Pattern Mixing to User memory (DRAM).

For details, refer to page 131 in the Quick Guide section.

Sample When this box is checkmarked, Sample Voices (if included in the source pattern) are copied to the destination

Pattern.

n When the KEEP ORIGINAL PHRASE checkbox is checked, this Job requires twice the number of empty user phrases as the number of tracks containing data in which to

store the appended phrase data. If the required space is unavailable, an alert message will appear and the job will be aborted. If this occurs use the Clear Phrase Job

(page 246) to delete unused phrases and try again.

04: Clear Pattern

This Job deletes all data from the selected Pattern, or from all Patterns. When the speciﬁc section is selected to be cleared, you can unmark the Chain box.

If the Chain box is not checkmarked, the Pattern Chain data will be kept even though the Clear Pattern Job is executed.

05: Pattern Name

This Job lets you assign a name to the selected Pattern.

For instructions on naming, refer to page 53 in the Basic Operation section.

Pattern Mixing mode

[PATTERN] → Pattern selection → [MIXING]

Pattern Mixing Edit mode

[PATTERN] → Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT]

Pattern Mixing Job mode

[PATTERN] → Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [JOB]

Pattern Mixing Store mode

[PATTERN] → Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [STORE]

CAUTION

Reference Mixing Voice Mode

Mixing Voice Edit mode Common Edit

249

Owner’s Manual

Mixing Voice mode

■ Creating Mixing Voices — basic procedure

The Mixing Voice mode provides most of the same Normal Voice editing parameters as the Voice mode, with the main exception that these

Voices are dedicated for use with the Songs and Patterns, and are stored speciﬁcally as Mixing Voices.

The Mixing Voice Job mode lets you use the supplementary functions like Copy and Delete. After completing the Mixing Voice editing, you can

store the edited Voice to a User Bank to internal memory (Flash ROM) or you can store it as a part of the current Song/Pattern data to internal

memory (DRAM). When storing the edited Mixing Voice as a part of the current Song/Pattern data, make sure to save the data to a SmartMedia/

USB storage device in the File mode.

The Mixing Voice Edit mode is divided into Common Edit, for setting parameters common to all four Elements, and Element Edit, for setting

parameters of individual Elements.

These parameters are for making global (or common) edits to all four Elements of the selected Normal Voice.

n The Mixing Voice Edit parameters are basically the same as those in the Voice Edit mode. However, some parameters having the same name as those in the

Song Mixing/Pattern Mixing Part Edit mode are not available in the Mixing Voice Edit mode.

These parameters are for editing the individual Elements that make up a Normal Voice.

Mixing Voice Edit mode

[SONG] or [PATTERN] → [MIXING] → [F2] VOICE →

Normal Voice selection → [F5] VCE ED

Common Edit

[SONG] or [PATTERN] → [MIXING] → [F2] VOICE → Normal Voice selection → [F5] VCE ED → [COMMON]

[F1] GENERAL

Same as in the Normal Voice Common Edit mode. See page 189.

Please note that the [SF3] MEQ OFS (Master EQ Offset) display is not available in the Mixing Voice Edit mode.

[F2] OUTPUT

Same as in the Normal Voice Common Edit mode. See page 190.

[F4] CTL SET (Controller Set)

Same as in the Normal Voice Common Edit mode. See page 192.

[F5] LFO

Same as in the Normal Voice Common Edit mode. See page 192.

[F6] EFFECT

Same as in the Normal Voice Common Edit mode. See page 194.

Please note that the [SF4] REVERB and [SF5] CHORUS displays are not available in the Mixing Voice Edit mode.

Element Edit

[SONG] or [PATTERN] → [MIXING] → [F2] VOICE → Normal Voice selection → [F5] VCE ED →

Element selection

[F1] OSC (Oscillator)

Same as in the Normal Voice Element Edit mode. See page 195.

[F2] PITCH

Same as in the Normal Voice Element Edit mode. See page 196.

[F3] FILTER

Same as in the Normal Voice Element Edit mode. See page 197.

[F4] AMP (Amplitude)

Same as in the Normal Voice Element Edit mode. See page 199.

[F5] LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator)

Same as in the Normal Voice Element Edit mode. See page 201.

[F6] EQ (Equalizer)

Same as in the Normal Voice Element Edit mode. See page 201.

Reference Mixing Voice Mode

Mixing Voice Job mode

250

Owner’s Manual

The Mixing Voice Job mode features two basic operations, Copy and Delete. After setting parameters as required from the selected display,

press the [ENTER] button to execute the Job.

This function lets you store your edited Mixing Voice to User memory (Flash ROM or DRAM).

For details, refer to page 106 in the Quick Guide section.

Mixing Voice Job mode

[SONG] or [PATTERN] → [MIXING] → [F5] VCE ED → [JOB]

[F2] RECALL

If you are editing a Mixing Voice and select a different Mixing Voice, Mixing program, Song or Pattern without storing your edited one, all the edits you’ve made will

be erased. Edits are also erased if the current part to which the edited Mixing Voice is assigned receives a program change from an external MIDI instrument.

If this happens, you can use Edit Recall to restore the Mixing Voice with your latest edits intact by pressing the [ENTER] button from the [F2] RECALL display.

n Since a Recall Buffer for the Mixing Voice is prepared for each Part of the current Song or Pattern, you can specify the Part to which the Mixing Voice to be recalled is assigned

before executing the Edit Recall.

[F3] COPY

This Job lets you copy the Mixing Voice stored to a speciﬁed Part in one Song/Pattern to a Part in

another Song/Pattern.

[F5] DELETE

This Job lets you delete a Mixing Voice assigned to a speciﬁed Song/Pattern’s Part.

Mixing Voice Store mode

[SONG] or [PATTERN] → [MIXING] → [F5] VCE ED → [STORE]

Source song/pattern and part

Destination song/pattern and part

Reference Sampling Mode

Sampling Record mode When entering the Sampling mode from the Voice mode/Performance mode

251

Owner’s Manual

Sampling mode

■ Creating samples — basic procedure

In the Sampling mode, the following three types of data can be created.

• Waveform: Created by recording a sample.

• Sample Voice: Created by recording a sample (depending on the settings before recording) in the Sampling mode entered from the Song

mode/Pattern mode. The resulting Waveform can be assigned to a Sample Voice.

• User Voice: Created by recording a sample (depending on the settings before recording) in the Sampling mode entered from the Voice

mode/Performance mode. The resulting Waveform can be assigned to a User Voice.

After creating the data described above, save them to a SmartMedia/USB storage device in the File mode. Sample Voices that are assigned to

Song tracks can be saved along with Song data. When saving Song data (that includes Sample Voices) or User Voice data, all Waveforms

assigned to the data will be saved automatically. Waveforms assigned to the Sample Voices or User Voices will be saved together automatically.

Waveforms which are not assigned to any Song or Voice data should be saved individually as Waveforms.

IMPORTANT:

The Sampling mode is available only when optional DIMMs (page 289) have been installed to the MOTIF ES.

The waveforms created in the Sampling mode reside temporarily in the optionally installed DIMMs (page 187). Because data contained in DIMM is lost when

the power is turned off, you should always save the waveforms created by recording, editing, and using Jobs to a SmartMedia/USB storage device before

turning off the power. For information on how to save, see page 97.

In this mode, you can record sounds to this synthesizer (for example, your voice, a guitar, or sounds from a CD), edit them, and use them to

create voices you can play from the keyboard. Or, if you enter this mode from the Song or Pattern mode, the sounds you record (commonly

called “sample”) can be assigned to the tracks and played back automatically with the song or pattern. What’s more, by using the Resampling

function, you can create new samples from your edits, or make samples from the sounds of this synthesizer itself.

When entering the Sampling mode from the Voice mode/Performance mode

In this case, you can create a Waveform or User Voice by recording sounds input from external devices such as a microphone and audio

equipment.

Sampling Record mode

[INTEGRATED SAMPLING]

[F1] DEST (Destination)

From this display you can determine the destination location to which the recorded sample will be stored.

Waveform Determines the Waveform number to which the recorded sample is assigned.

Settings: 001~1024

Keybank Determines the note number located at the center of the Key Bank.

Settings: C-2 ~G8

n For details about Waveform and Key Bank, see page 173.

Part Determines the Performance Part to which the recorded sample is assigned. This is available only when entering the

Sampling mode from the Performance mode. When set to “off,” only the Voice will be created by sampling.

Settings: off, 1~ 4

Voice The recorded sample can be stored as a User voice. This parameter determines the User voice bank and number to

which the recorded sample is assigned.

n When this is set to “---,” only a Waveform is created; the sample is not stored as a User voice. The sample is stored to the

smallest numbered Waveform available. If you wish to hear the new sample, go to the WAVE display ([VOICE] → Voice

selection → [EDIT] → Element selection → [F1] OSC → [SF1] WAVE) or KEYBANK display ([INTEGRATED SAMPLING] →

[EDIT] → [F1] KEYBANK) and search through the User Waveforms to ﬁnd the desired sample.

Key Available only when the User voice bank is set to UDR (User Drum). This parameter lets you determine the key to

which the sample obtained via the Sampling feature will be assigned.

Settings: C0 ~ C6

[F2] SOURCE

From this display you can set parameters related to the audio source.

Type Determines the Sampling type. Keep in mind that this parameter is ﬁxed to “sample” when entering the Sampling

mode from the Voice/Performance mode.

CAUTION

Reference Sampling Mode

Sampling Record mode When entering the Sampling mode from the Voice mode/Performance mode

252

Owner’s Manual

Source Determines the recording source.

Settings: A/D, resample, AIB2, mLAN1~4

A/D ...................Analog audio from the A/D INPUT jacks is recognized as the recording source.

resample ..........The audio signal produced from the instrument when you play the keyboard along with the Audio Input part (in other

words all the audio signals output from the OUTPUT jacks) is recognized as a recording source and “resampled.”

AIEB2 ...............Digital audio from the DIGITAL IN terminal or OPTICAL IN terminal (with optional AIEB2) is recognized as the recording

source.

mLAN1~4.........The mLAN connector (with optional mLAN16E) is recognized as the recording source.

Next Determines whether multiple samples can be recorded without exiting from the Record mode (on) or not (off). When

you wish to assign individual samples to the keys one by one to create a Drum Voice, set this parameter to on.

Keep in mind that the Next parameter may be ﬁxed to “off” and cannot be changed. This occurs when you enter the

Sampling mode from the Voice mode/Performance mode, set the Voice to something other than “off” in the [F1]

DEST display, and set the Source (above) to “resample” in the [F2] SOURCE display.

Mono/Stereo Determines whether new samples will be recorded as stereo or mono samples.

Settings: monoL, monoR, monoL+R, stereo

L mono .............The L-channel signal will be recorded as a mono sample.

R mono.............The R-channel signal will be recorded as a mono sample.

L+Rmono .........The L-channel and R-channel signals will be mixed and recorded as a mono sample.

stereo ...............A stereo sample will be recorded.

Frequency

(Sampling Frequency)

Speciﬁes the sampling frequency. The rate at which digital readings are taken is referred to as the sampling

frequency. Higher sampling frequencies result in higher quality sound, but use up more memory.

Settings: 44.1k (44.1 kHz), 22.0kLo (22.05 kHz Lo-Fi), 11.0kLo (11.025 kHz Lo-Fi), 5.5kLo (5.5125 kHz Lo-Fi)

n When the Source is set to any of mLAN1~4 and the mLAN terminal is used as an audio input, the Frequency is ﬁxed to 44.1

kHz and cannot be changed.

n At settings other than 44.1 kHz, the sound monitored during recording may be different from the recorded sound, depending

on the source signal.

[F6] REC

Even if you press the [F6] REC button, recording (sampling) will not start immediately. Set various parameters such as Trigger Mode in the Sampling Standby

display, then start the actual sampling according to the settings.

STANDBY (Sampling Standby)

Press the [REC] button to enter the Sampling Standby display. From this display you can turn the Conﬁrm function on

or off by pressing the [F2] CONFM button as well as set parameters listed below. For details on the Conﬁrm function,

refer to page 95 in the Quick Guide section.

TrggrMode (Trigger Mode) Speciﬁes the method by which sampling will be triggered.

Settings: level, manual

level..................When this is selected, press the [F6] REC button to enable the Trigger Waiting condition. Sampling will then begin as

soon as an input signal exceeding the speciﬁed trigger level is received. When this is selected, you need also set the

Trigger Level (1~127).

manual .............When this is selected, sampling will begin as soon as the [F6] START button is pressed, regardless of the input signal

level.

Key This is the same parameter as Keybank in the [F1] DEST display.

RecMonitor (Recording Monitor) Determines the output level of the monitor for the input signal.

This monitor signal is output from the PHONES jack or the OUTPUT R and L/MONO jacks. This has no effect on the

recording level.

Settings: 0 ~ 127

RecGain (Recording Gain) Determines the recording gain when resampling. This parameter is available only when the Source is set to

“resample.”

Settings: -12dB ~ +12dB

WAITING (Trigger Waiting)

When Trigger Mode is set to “level” in the Sampling Standby display, press the [F6] REC button again to enter the

Trigger Waiting condition; the [F6] menu changes to “STOP.” In this status, sampling will begin as soon as an input

signal exceeding the speciﬁed trigger level is received. Before recording starts, press the [F6] STOP button or

[EXIT] button to return to the Sampling Standby display.

Keep in mind that the Conﬁrm function can also be turned on or off by using the [F2] CONFM button in the Trigger

Waiting condition.

RECORDING

During recording, press the [F6] STOP button or [EXIT] button to stop the sampling.

After sampling (recording) stops:

The following menus appear only when the Conﬁrm function is turned on.

[F3] AUDITION Pressing this lets you hear the sample obtained by recording (sampling).

[F4] CANCEL Pressing this deletes the sample obtained by recording (sampling) and return to the Sampling Standby display.

[F5] OK Pressing this stores the sample obtained by recording (sampling) to the speciﬁed destination.

Reference Sampling Mode

Sampling Record mode When entering the Sampling mode from the Song mode/Pattern mode

253

Owner’s Manual

When entering the Sampling mode from the Song mode/Pattern mode

In this case, you can create a Waveform or Sample Voice by recording sounds input from external devices such as a microphone and audio

equipment.

[F1] DEST (Destination)

From this display you can determine the destination location to which the recorded sample will be stored.

Track Determines the track number to which the recorded sample is assigned.

Settings: 1 ~ 16

Keybank Determines the note number located at the center of the Key Bank. This parameter is available only when the

Sampling type is set to “sample” or “sample+note” (in the Type parameter below).

Settings: C-2 ~ G8

[F2] SOURCE

From this display you can set parameters related to the audio source.

Type Determines the Sampling type. When entering the Sampling mode from the Song/Pattern mode, the data created by

Sampling varies depending on this setting.

Settings: sample, sample+note, slice+seq

sample.................. Only sample (wave) data is created.

sample+note ........ In addition to sample data, the appropriate note data for playing the sample is created and recorded to the track

speciﬁed in the [F1] DEST display.

slice+seq.............. The recorded sample is automatically divided into “slices,” and these are assigned to successive notes on the

keyboard.

n Detailed settings (meter, measure number etc,) are speciﬁed in the Slice display after sampling.

Source Determines the recording source.

Same as in the Sampling mode from the Voice mode/Performance mode. See above.

Next Determines whether multiple samples can be recorded without exiting from the Record mode (on) or not (off). When

you wish to assign individual samples to the keys one by one to create a Drum Voice, set this parameter to on.

Keep in mind that this parameter is ﬁxed to off when the Source is set to “slice + seq.”

Mono/Stereo Determines whether new samples will be recorded as stereo or mono samples.

Same as in the Sampling mode from the Voice mode/Performance mode. See above.

Frequency

(Sampling Frequency)

Speciﬁes the sampling frequency.

Same as in the Sampling mode from the Voice mode/Performance mode. See above.

[F6] REC

Even if you press the [F6] REC button, recording (sampling) will not start immediately. Set various parameters such as Trigger Mode in the Sampling Standby

display, then start the actual sampling according to the settings.

STANDBY (Sampling Standby)

Press the [REC] button to enter the Sampling Standby display. From this display you can turn the Conﬁrm function on

or off by pressing the [F2] CONFM button as well as set parameters listed below. For details about the Conﬁrm

function, refer to page 95 in the Quick Guide section.

Please keep in mind that the Conﬁrm function is not available when the Type in the [F2] SOURCE display is set to

“slice+seq.”

TrggrMode (Trigger Mode) Speciﬁes the method by which sampling will be triggered.

Settings: level, meas, manual

level ...................... Same as in the Sampling mode from the Voice mode/Performance mode. See above.

meas (measure) ... This should be set together with the Punch-in/out measure. After the [F6] START button is pressed, sampling will

begin at the speciﬁed punch-in measure, and end at the speciﬁed punch-out measure. Sampling will also stop when

the Song/Pattern is stopped by pressing the [J] (Stop) button.

manual.................. Same as in the Sampling mode from the Voice mode/Performance mode. See above.

Key This appears when Type in the [F2] SOURCE display is set to something other than “slice+seq.” This is the same

parameter as Keybank in the [F1] DEST display.

RecMonitor (Recording Monitor) Determines the output level of the monitor for the input signal.

This monitor signal is output from the PHONES jack or the OUTPUT R and L/MONO jacks. This has no effect on the

recording level.

Settings: 0 ~ 127

RecGain (Recording Gain) Determines the recording gain when resampling. This parameter is available only when the Source is set to

“resample.”

Settings: -12dB ~ +12dB

Reference Sampling Mode

Sampling Record mode When entering the Sampling mode from the Song mode/Pattern mode

254

Owner’s Manual

WAITING (Trigger Waiting or

Punch-in Waiting)

When Trigger Mode is set to “level” in the Sampling Standby display, press the [F6] REC button again to enter the

Trigger Waiting condition; the [F6] menu changes to “STOP.” In this condition, sampling will begin as soon as an

input signal exceeding the speciﬁed trigger level is received.

When the Trigger Mode is set to “meas” in the Sampling Standby display, press the [F6] REC button again to enter

the Punch-in Waiting condition; the [F6] menu changes to “STOP.” In this condition, sampling will begin as soon as a

song or pattern playback reaches the punch-in measure.

Before recording starts in either condition, press the [F6] STOP button or [EXIT] button to return to the Sampling

Standby display. Keep in mind that the Conﬁrm function can be tuned on or off by using the [F2] CONFM button also

in the Trigger Waiting or Punch-in Waiting condition if the Sampling type is set to other than “slice+seq.”

RECORDING

During recording, press the [F6] STOP button or [EXIT] button to stop sampling.

After sampling (recording) stops:

The following menus appear when the Sampling type is set to “sample” or “sample+note” and the Conﬁrm function

is turned on.

[F3] AUDITION Pressing this lets you hear the sample obtained by recording (sampling).

[F4] CANCEL Pressing this deletes the sample obtained by recording (sampling) and return to the Sampling Standby display.

[F5] OK Pressing this stores the sample obtained by recording (sampling) to the speciﬁed destination.

TRIM/SLICE display after

sampling stops

If you’ve entered the Sampling Record mode for the Song or Pattern mode and you’ve set the sampling type to

“slice+seq,” you should set the following Slice related parameters after the Sampling stops.

Please note that the Conﬁrm function is not available in this case.

[F1] TRIM

The trim function makes it possible to specify the beginning and end points to be played back within an entire sample. You can also specify the tempo for

the range of the looped playback and determine its beat.

Start (Start Point) Determines the Start point for the sample playback.

Loop (Loop Start Point)

Determines the Top point of the loop playback (the point where the loop begins) within the range of the entire sample.

End (End Point) Determines the End point of the loop playback within the range of the entire sample.

Beat Indicates the (beat) and tempo of the range from the Loop Start Point to the End Point.

[SF1] AUDITION

Press the [SF1] button to sound the recorded sample according to the settings in this display.

[SF2] LP=ST

When the menu indication here is “LP=ST,” the Start (Start Point) and the Loop (Loop Start Point) will share the same

address, meaning that both of them will be changed simultaneously, even if just one of them is changed. Pressing

the [SF2] button in this condition changes the menu from “LP=ST” to “LP≠ST.” When the menu indication here is

“LP≠ST,” the Start (Start Point) and the Loop (Loop Start Point) can be changed independently. When pressing the

[SF2] button in this condition, the address value of the Start will be copied to that of the Loop, with the result that

both of them will have the same address value. The menu indication also changes from “LP≠ST” to “LP=ST.”

[SF3] SET END

Pressing this calls up the display for determining the End Point, from which you can set the tempo, beat, and

measure for the sample. Press the [ENTER] button to actually set End Point. If you are satisﬁed with the results

(press [SF1] to audition the sample), press the [F6] OK button to return to the original display. Doing this stores your

edited sample to the DIMM memory. To return to the original display without changing the data, press the [F5]

CANCEL button.

[SF4] EXTRACT

Delete all unnecessary sample data located ahead of the Start point and located after the End point) by pressing the

[SF4] button.

[F5] ZOOM-

[F6] ZOOM+

Press the [F5] and [F6] buttons to zoom in and out of the wave display.

[F2] SLICE

This powerful feature lets you automatically divide the recorded sample into separate “slices.” These slices are then assigned to successive notes and

arranged as sequence data.

n Before executing the Slice operation, you’ll need to accurately adjust the length of the sample. Use the [SF1] AUDITION button in the [F1] TRIM display to loop the sample

and precisely set the Start and End points as required.

After specifying the following parameters, press the [ENTER] button. (The display prompts you for conﬁrmation.) Press the [INC/YES] button to execute the

Slice. You can hear and conﬁrm the sliced samples by pressing the [SF1] AUDITION button. If you are satisﬁed with the result of the operation, press the

[F6] OK button to store the result of the Slice operation and go back to the Sampling Setup display. If not, press the [F5] CANCEL button to go back to the

Sampling Setup display without storing the result.

Type (Slice Type) Speciﬁes how the sample is sliced, and to some extent determines the resulting sound quality. Select the type that

best suits the original phrase.

Settings: beat1~3, phrase1~4, quick

beat1~3 ...........This slice type is suited for percussive phrases such as drums or bass with a fast attack and short decay. Three

variations are provided.

phrase1~4 .......Ideal for phrases containing cymbals or other instruments with a long decay. Four variations are provided.

quick ................Regardless of the phrase content, the sample is divided at the speciﬁed note sub-divisions. The number of slices per

measure is calculated by multiplying the top number of the Meter (time signature) parameter by the bottom number of

the SubDivide parameter.

n For helpful hints on getting the Slice Type parameter to work for different samples, see “Tips for using the Slice Types” on page

259.

Reference Sampling Mode

Sampling Edit mode

255

Owner’s Manual

This mode gives you a variety of sample editing tools, with which you can change the samples you’ve recorded in the Sampling Record mode,

and customize them for your applications as needed.

n For samples that have been recorded in stereo (with Stereo Sampling), both the left and right waves of the sample are edited together. In the actual process,

any edits made to the left channel wave are duplicated exactly in the right channel. The exception to this, of course, is Pan — since the sample already is in

stereo.

n Unlike in the Sampling Record mode, all parameters and functions of the Sampling Edit mode are the same, no matter which mode was previously selected.

n All Sampling Edit operations apply to the Waveform (actual sample), not the voice.

Measure Determines the number of measures in the sample to be sliced.

When the slice operation is executed, sequence data corresponding to the speciﬁed number of measures is

created. The sequence data is created from the beginning of the current measure at which sampling is started.

Settings: 1~8

Meter Speciﬁes the meter (time signature) of the sample. The setting here is the basic slice unit.

Settings: 1/16 ~ 16/16, 1/8 ~ 16/8, 1/4 ~ 8/4

SubDivide The Meter parameter sets the basic slice unit, and SubDivide

speciﬁes even ﬁner resolution for phrases containing regions with

shorter notes. For the phrase shown at right, for example, the

Meter should be set to 4/4 and SubDivide to 1/2.

Settings:

When Meter is set to 1 ~ 8/4 ............. quarter note (1/1), 8th note (1/2), 4th

note triplet (1/3), 16th note (1/4), 8th note

triplet (1/6), 32nd note (1/8), 16th note triplet (1/12)

When Meter is set to 1 ~ 16/8 ........... 8th note (1/1), 16th note (1/2), 8th note triplet (1/3), 32nd note (1/4), 16th note triplet (1/6)

When Meter is set to 1 ~ 16/16 ......... 16th note (1/1), 32nd note (1/2), 16th note triplet (1/3)

n This parameter has no effect when the Slice Type parameter is set to beat 1~3.

n The maximum slice resolution for stereo samples is 64 slices, and for mono samples 128 slices.

Sens (Envelope Sensitivity) Further adjusts the sub-divisions speciﬁed by the SubDivide parameter. Higher values result in higher resolution,

allowing even ﬁner notes and smaller sounds to be detected and sliced. Use the Audition function (press [SF1]) to

hear the results, and if you’re not satisﬁed with them, change the setting and try again.

Settings: 1 ~ 5

n This parameter has no effect when the “quick” slice type is selected.

Sampling Edit mode

[INTEGRATED SAMPLING] → [EDIT]

[F1] KEYBANK

From this display you can determine the destination location to which the recorded sample will be stored.

Waveform Select a Waveform that contains a Sample you wish to edit. Move the cursor to the Waveform number and select the

desired number by using the [INC/YES] button, [DEC/NO] button, or the data dial.

To select the desired Key Bank, simultaneously hold down the [INFORMATION] button and press the appropriate

key on the keyboard. Press the [SF2] SELECT button to call up in order the Samples assigned to the selected Key

Bank.

Keybank Indicates information about the selected Key Bank. The Key Range and Velocity Range (which cannot be edited

here) can be edited in the [F4] RANGE display.

[SF1] AUDITION

You can hear (audition) the selected sample by pressing the [SF1] button.

[SF2] SELECT

Press the [SF2] button to call up in order the Samples assigned to the selected Key Bank.

n The [SF1] AUDITION and [SF2] SELECT buttons can be used in the same way also with other displays in the Sampling Edit mode and the Sampling Job mode.

[F2] TRIM

This operation is the same as in the Sampling Record mode (when Sampling Type is set to “slice+seq”). See page 253.

[F3] PARAM (Parameter)

Level Determines the output level of the selected sample.

Settings: -94.5dB ~ -0.0dB

Pan Determines the stereo position of the selected sample. Please note that this is not available for samples recorded in

stereo.

Settings: L64 (far left) ~ C (center) ~ R63 (far right)

Reference Sampling Mode

Sampling Job mode

256

Owner’s Manual

The Sampling Job mode contains a comprehensive set of editing tools and functions you can use to change the sound of the sample you’ve

created and edited in the Sampling Edit mode. It also includes a variety of convenient operations, such as copying or erasing data.

After setting parameters as required in the selected display, press the [ENTER] button to execute the Job.

n Unlike in the Sampling Record mode, all parameters and functions of the Sampling Job mode are the same, no matter which mode was previously selected.

The only exception to this is the Slice Job ([F1] →12 below), which varies depending on whether the previously selected mode was Voice/Performance or

Song/Pattern.

n All Sampling Job operations apply to the Waveform (actual sample), not the Voice.

PlayMode Determines how the selected sample is to be played back.

Settings: oneshot, reverse, loop

oneshot ............The Sample plays back one time from Start point to End point.

reverse .............The Sample plays back one time in reverse from End point to Start point.

loop ..................Sample playback begins from the Start point, continues to the Loop point, then repeats indeﬁnitely between the Loop

point and End point.

n For details on the above settings, see page 176.

OriginalKey Determines the base key for the sample. Since the sample will be pitched shifted for keys played around this base

key, this should be set as close as possible to the original pitch or note value of the actual sample.

Settings: C - 2 ~ G8

FineTune Determines the ﬁne tuning for the pitch of the sample.

Settings: -100 cent ~ 0 cent ~ 99 cent

[SF1] AUDITION

You can hear (audition) the selected sample by pressing the [SF1] button.

[SF2] SELECT

Press the [SF2] button to call up in order the Samples assigned to the selected Key Bank.

[F4] RANGE

From this display you can set the Key Range and the Velocity Range for the sample assigned to the selected Key Bank. Note that both the Key range and Velocity

range values are graphically indicated in the display.

n When the cursor is at one of the Key Range values, you can directly set the Key Range parameter from the keyboard. (Simultaneously hold down the [INFORMATION] button and

press the appropriate key on the keyboard.)

[SF1] AUDITION

You can hear (audition) the selected sample by pressing the [SF1] button.

[SF2] SELECT

Press the [SF2] button to call up in order the Samples assigned to the selected Key Bank.

Sampling Job mode

[INTEGRATED SAMPLING] → [JOB]

[F1] KEYBANK (Key Bank Job)

Before executing the Key Bank Job by pressing the [ENTER] button, you’ll need to specify the Waveform and Key Bank.

First, select the desired Waveform by moving the cursor to the 4-digit number in the display and change it by using the [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons or the

data dial. Second, move the cursor to the Key value, select the desired key by using the [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons or the data dial, then use the [SF2]

SELECT button to select in order the Key Bank (sample) assigned to the selected key. You can select the desired key also by pressing the note on the keyboard

directly while holding the [INFORMATION] button. As in the Sampling Edit mode, the [SF1] AUDITION button lets you hear the sample assigned to the selected

Key Bank.

01: Copy

This Job copies the data of a sample contained in a

speciﬁed Key Bank to another Key Bank. After

specifying the source Waveform and Key Bank as well

as the destination Waveform and Key Bank, press the

[ENTER] button to execute the Copy Job.

02: Delete

This Job deletes the speciﬁed Key Bank and its sample. After specifying the Waveform and Key Bank, press the

[ENTER] button to execute the Delete Job. If the Key Bank is set to “all” and the Job is executed, all the samples of

the selected Waveform are deleted.

n If all the samples of the speciﬁed Waveform are deleted, the Waveform itself is deleted.

03: Extract

This Job deletes all unnecessary sample data

(located ahead of the Start point and located after the

End point). In effect, it extracts only the sample data

you want to use, trimming all unneeded sound from

the start and end of the sample.

After specifying the Waveform and Key Bank, press

the [ENTER] button to execute the Extract Job. If the

Key Bank is set to “all” and the Job is executed, this Job is applied to all the samples of the selected Waveform.

Source Waveform and Key Bank

Destination Waveform and Key Bank

Start Point

End Point

Extract

Start Point End Point

Reference Sampling Mode

Sampling Job mode

257

Owner’s Manual

04: Move

This Job lets you move a sample contained in a

speciﬁed Key Bank to another Key Bank. This would be

useful for creating a new Waveform from the samples of

various other existing Waveforms.

After specifying the source Waveform and Key Bank as

well as the destination Waveform and Key Bank, press

the [ENTER] button to execute the Move Job.

n If the last remaining sample is moved from the source

Waveform, the source Waveform itself is deleted.

05: Normalize

This Job maximizes (normalizes) the overall level of the

speciﬁed sample. The “100” (100%) setting is a quick

and convenient way to boost the level of an entire

sample, to make it as loud as possible without distorting.

After specifying the Waveform and Key Bank, then press

the [ENTER] button to execute the Normalize Job.

Ratio Speciﬁes the post-normalization sample level. A setting of 100% maximizes the level so that the highest peak level in

the sample is just below clipping (maximum digital signal level). Settings below 100% reduce the level of the sample

accordingly. Settings higher than 100% will raise the sample level above the maximum, producing deliberate

clipping.

Settings: 001 ~ 800%

06: Time-Stretch

This Job lets you change the length of the sample without changing the pitch.

The basic steps in using this Job are the same as in 05: Normalize explained above.

Ratio Determines the length of post-process sample as a ratio of the length of the original sample (100%). Lower values

compress the sample, while higher values expand the sample.

Settings: 0~400%

Accuracy Determines the quality of the resulting sample by specifying which aspect of the original is to be emphasized: sound

quality or rhythmic feel.

Settings: sound4 - sound1, normal, rhythm1 - rhythm 2

sound4 - sound1 .............. These settings place emphasis on sound quality, with the “SOUND 4” setting producing the highest sound

quality.

normal .............................. Produces an optimum balance of sound quality and rhythmic feel.

rhythm1 - rhythm 2 ........... These settings place emphasis on rhythmic feel, with the “Rhythm 2” setting producing the most accurate

rhythmic feel.

07: Convert Pitch

This Job lets you change the pitch of the sample without changing the length.

The basic steps in using this Job are the same as in 05: Normalize explained above.

Pitch Determines the amount and direction of pitch shift in semitone increments.

Settings: -12 ~ 0 ~+12

Fine Determines the amount and direction of ﬁne pitch shift in cent increments (1 cent = 1/100th of a semitone).

Settings: -50 ~ 0 ~ +50

08: Fade In/Out

This Job lets you create fade-ins and fade-outs for the sample.

The basic steps in using this Job are the same as in 05: Normalize explained above.

Type Determines the type of level fade: fade-in or fade-out.

Settings: in (fade-in), out (fade-out)

Source Waveform and Key Bank

Destination Waveform and Key Bank

Set the Waveform and Key Bank containing

the sample to be normalized.

Press the [ENTER] button to execute the job.

Press the [F5] (CANCEL) button

to cancel the operation.

Press the [F6] (OK) button to assign the

normalized sample to the speciﬁed Key Bank.

Press the [ENTER] button to execute the operation.

If you are not satisﬁed with the results, change the Ratio

value and press the [ENTER] button again. This

automatically reverts back to the original settings and

executes the operation again with the new settings.

Source Wave

Ratio = less than 100%

Ratio = 100%

Ratio = more than 100%

Reference Sampling Mode

Sampling Job mode

258

Owner’s Manual

Length Determines the length of the fade-in or fade-out.

When a fade-in is selected, this parameter

speciﬁes the length of the fade starting at the

speciﬁed Start point.

When a fade-out is selected, this parameter

speciﬁes the length of the fade starting at the

beginning of the fade and ending at the

speciﬁed End point.

Settings: 0000000 ~ End point

09: Convert Freq

(Convert Frequency)

This Job lets you halve the sampling frequency of the speciﬁed sample. This can be used to convert hi-ﬁ samples to

a lo-ﬁ sound, and reduce the sample size by half to conserve memory.

The basic steps in using this Job are the same as in 05: Normalize explained above.

10: Stereo to Mono

This Job lets you convert a stereo sample to a mono sample.

The basic steps in using this Job are the same as in 05: Normalize explained above.

Type Determines which channel, or both channels, of the stereo sample will be converted to a mono sample.

Settings: L+R>mono, L>mono, R>mono

L+R>mono.......The left and right channels of the stereo sample are mixed and converted to a mono sample.

L>mono............The left channel of the stereo sample is converted to a mono sample.

R>mono ...........The right channel of the stereo sample is converted to a mono sample.

11: Loop-Remix

This Job lets you automatically cut the sample into separate “slices” and randomly rearrange the slices for special

effects and unusual rhythmic variations. A variety of audio transform operations are also included for even greater

changes in the sound.

The basic steps in using this Job are the same as in 05: Normalize explained above.

Type Determines the degree to which the looped portion of the sample will be sliced.

Settings: 1~4

Variation Determines how the original sample is varied by the this Job.

Settings: normal1~2, reverse1~2

normal1~2........These settings slice and rearrange the sample data, without performing any other audio changes.

reverse1~2.......In addition to slicing and rearranging, these settings reverse the playback of some of the slices.

12: Slice

This Job lets you divide the sample into separate “slices,” the number of which is determined by the note length

(with Measure, Meter, and SubDivide).

When entering this Job from the Song/Pattern mode, note data for playing the slices in sequence is also created.

(Keep in mind that the results of this Job vary depending on the previously selected mode: Voice/Performance or

Song/Pattern.)

The basic steps in using this Job are the same as in 05: Normalize explained above.

With the exception of the parameter below, all parameters and settings are the same as in the Slice display of the

Sampling Record mode (page 254).

Lowest Key Speciﬁes the lowest key number from which the sliced samples are assigned in order.

Settings: C - 2 ~ G8

n In the Slice display of the Sampling Record mode (page 254), this parameter is ﬁxed to “C-1” for the MOTIF ES6, “E0” for the

MOTIF ES7, and “A-1” for the MOTIF ES8, and cannot be set.

[F2] WAVEFORM (Waveform Job)

01: Copy

This Job lets you copy the data of one Waveform to

another.

After specifying the source Waveform and destination

Waveform, press the [ENTER] button to execute the

Copy Job.

02: Delete

This Job lets you delete a speciﬁc Waveform from memory.

03: Transpose

This Job lets you transpose the Key bank setting of a speciﬁed Waveform.

Octave Determines the amount in octaves by which the Key Bank is transposed. When you want to transpose by less than

one octave, set this to “0” and use the Note parameter below.

Settings: -3~ 0 ~+3

Note Determines the amount in semitones by which the Key Bank is transposed. When you want to transpose by exact

octaves, set this to “0” and use the Octave parameter above.

Settings: -11~ 0 ~+11

Length

Start point

Fade In

Length

Start point

Fade Out

Source Waveform

Destination Waveform

Reference Sampling Mode

Sampling Job mode

259

Owner’s Manual

■ Supplementary

Tips for using the Slice Types

• Slicing percussive phrases having short decays

First, try slicing using “beat1.” If the result has a weak attack or the

release portions of the phrase seem to overlap, try again using

“beat2.” Try adjusting the envelope sensitivity for ﬁner control.

If after using “beat1” the attack portions overlap or the overall

rhythmic feel is degraded, try again using “beat3.” Use the

SubDivide parameter to adjust the slice resolution, and make ﬁnal

adjustments with the Envelope Sensitivity parameter.

• Slicing phrases having long decays

First, try slicing using “phrase1.” If the result has a weak attack or the

release portions of the phrase seem to overlap, try again using

“phrase2.” Use the SubDivide parameter to adjust the slice

resolution, and make ﬁnal adjustments with the Envelope Sensitivity

parameter.

If after using “phrase1” the points between the slices sounds rough

and the overall feel is choppy, try again using “phrase3” or “phrase4”

and set SubDivide to a ﬁner resolution. Make ﬁnal adjustments with

the Envelope Sensitivity parameter. The “phrase3” setting is

generally best for sustained strings or brass type sounds with no

vibrato — in other words, the pitch remains constant. It can also

produce echo-like effects when applied to percussive phrases with

short decay. The “phrase4” setting is generally best for sustained

strings or brass type sounds with vibrato, as well as vocal phrases.

Wave Memory Required for Slice Operations

Individual wave data slices created through slice operations require

approximately 1.5 times the original memory because a tail section is

automatically added and fade-in and fade-out sections are

automatically created at the beginning and end of the wave data.

This helps to maintain maximum sound quality when the tempo is

increased, and results in smoother connections between slices (no

tail section is created when the “quick” slice type is selected).

A memory work area is required for the processing calculations

carried out for each slice operation, as well as sufﬁcient memory to

hold the completed waveforms. When the sampling frequency is

44.1 kHz, the approximate amount of memory (expressed in

kilobytes) required for each slice type is listed below.

beat1: Original wave size x N + (0.3 x number of slices)

beat2: Original wave size x N + (0.2 x number of slices)

beat3: Original wave size x N + (0.3 x number of slices)

phrase1: Original wave size x N + (5.8 x number of slices)

phrase2: Original wave size x N + (1.4 x number of slices)

phrase3: Original wave size x N + (0.4 x number of slices)

phrase4: Original wave size x N + (1.4 x number of slices)

quick: Original wave size x 3 + (0.7 x number of slices)

For monaural samples N = 5.5, and for stereo samples N = 8.

Also, the number of slices is doubled for stereo samples.

04: Name

This Job lets you assign a name to the selected Waveform.

For speciﬁc instructions on naming, refer to page 53 in the Basic Operation section.

[F3] OTHER

01: Clean Up Memory

This Job deletes all the waveforms to which User voices or Sample voices are not assigned.

02: Optimize Memory

This Job optimizes the memory (DRAM) for sampling.

03: Delete All

This Job deletes all the waveforms.

04: Convert to Drum Voice

This Job lets you convert the selected waveform to a speciﬁc Drum voice.

Source

Waveform

Sliced

Waveform

Ta il section

Fade section

Reference Utility Mode

Utility mode

260

Owner’s Manual

Utility mode

The Utility mode features a variety of important settings related to overall operation of the MOTIF ES. These settings can also be stored — simply

press the [STORE] button from any mode (with the exception of the Utility Job mode), and store the data to internal Flash ROM as system

settings (page 186). You can also save the settings to a SmartMedia/USB storage device in the File mode.

In this mode, you can set parameters that apply to the entire system of the MOTIF ES.

This mode is actually a sub-mode of the Voice/Performance/Song/Pattern mode. Press the [UTILITY] button in each mode to enter the Utility

mode and press the [EXIT] button after making settings to go back to the previous mode.

Utility mode

[UTILITY]

[F1] GENERAL

[SF1] TG (Tone Generator)

From this display you can make overall settings for the internal tone generator. Settings here do not affect MIDI

messages transmitted to the external MIDI instrument.

Volume Determines the overall volume of the instrument.

Settings: 0~127

NoteShift Determines the amount (in semitones) by which the pitch of all notes is shifted.

Settings: -24~0~+24

Tune Determines the ﬁne tuning (in 0.1 cent steps) of the internal tone generator’s overall sound.

Settings: -102.4~+102.3

BCCurve

(Breath Controller Curve)

These four curves determine how the sound of the internal tone generator responds to use of a Breath Controller.

The setting here affects the Destination parameters when the Source is set to “BC,” both of which can be set in the

CTL SET displays ([VOICE] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F4] CTL SET).

The graph shown in the display indicates the controller response curve. (The horizontal line represents the received

breath control values, while the vertical line represents the actual response of the internal tone generator.)

Settings: thru, soft, hard, wide

[SF2] KBD (Keyboard)

From this display you can set the keyboard-related parameters. The settings here affect the MIDI messages

generated by playing the keyboard.

Octave Determines the amount in octaves by which the range of the keyboard is shifted up or down. This setting can be

changed also by pressing any of the [OCTAVE] buttons.

Settings: -3~0~+3

Transpose Determines the amount in semitones by which the range of the keyboard is shifted up or down.

Settings: -11~ 0 ~+11

n If you transpose beyond the note range limits (C-2 and G8), notes in the adjacent octaves will be used. For example, a

transposed note of F9 will be changed to F8.

VelCurve (Velocity Curve) These ﬁve curves determine how the actual velocity will be generated and transmitted according to the velocity

(strength) with which you play notes on the keyboard.

The graph shown in the display indicates the velocity response curve. (The horizontal line represents the received

velocity values (strength of your playing), while the vertical line represents the actual velocity values transmitted to

the internal/external tone generators.)

Settings: norm, soft, hard, wide, ﬁxed

norm (normal) .......This linear “curve” produces one-to-one correspondence between the strength of your keyboard playing (velocity)

and the actual sound change.

soft ........................This curve provides increased response, especially for lower velocities. In other words, playing softly results in

higher response than the “norm” curve.

hard.......................This curve provides increased response, especially for higher velocities. In other words, playing hard results in

higher response than the “norm” curve.

wide ......................This setting provides opposite response curves for lower and higher velocities. It widens the apparent dynamic

range of the controller, producing less sound change in the softer range and more change in the higher range.

ﬁxed ......................This setting produces the same amount of sound change (set in Fixed Velocity below), no matter what your playing

strength.

FixedVelocity This parameter is only available if you select the “ﬁxed” Velocity Curve above. The velocity of the note you play is

ﬁxed at the value set here.

Settings: 1 ~ 127

[SF3] EF BYPS (Effect Bypass)

From this display you can select the speciﬁc effect(s) to be bypassed when the [INSERTION] or [SYSTEM] button of

EFFECT BYPASS buttons is turned on.

Insertion

FInternal When this is set to on and the [INSERTION] button is turned on, the internal Insertion effect is bypassed.

FPLG-EF (Plug-in Effect) When this is set to on and the [INSERTION] button is turned on, the PLG100-VH Insertion effect is bypassed. This is

available only when the PLG100-VH has been installed.

Reference Utility Mode

Utility mode

261

Owner’s Manual

System

Reverb

When this is set to on and the [SYSTEM] button is turned on, the Reverb effect is bypassed.

Chorus

When this is set to on and the [SYSTEM] button is turned on, the Chorus effect is bypassed.

For details about the Effects, see page 177.

[SF4] OTHER

AutoLoad

Determines whether the Auto Load function is on or off. When this is on, the instrument will automatically load the

speciﬁed ﬁles (from SmartMedia/USB storage device) to User memory — whenever the power is turned on.

For details about the Auto Load function, see page 135.

Settings:

on, off

PowerOnMode

This determines the default power-on mode (and memory bank) — letting you select which condition is automatically

called up when you turn the power on.

Settings:

performance, voice (USR1), voice (PRE1), GM, last, master

performance.... When turning the power on next time, the Performance Play mode is entered and the ﬁrst program number (USER: 001)

is selected automatically.

voice (USR1) ... When turning the power on next time, the Voice Play mode is entered and the ﬁrst program number of the User Voices

(USR1: 001) is selected automatically.

voice (PRE1).... When turning the power on next time, the Voice Play mode is entered and the ﬁrst program number of the Preset Voices

(PRE 1: 001) is selected automatically.

GM................... When turning the power on next time, the Voice Play mode is entered and the ﬁrst program number of the GM Voices

(GM: 001) is selected automatically.

last................... When turning the power on next time, the mode and program number (Voice/Performance/Song/Pattern/Master)

registered the last time before turning the power off are called up. For information on how to register the mode and

program number for “last,” see page 265.

master ............. When turning the power on next time, the Master Play mode is entered and the ﬁrst program number (001) is selected

automatically.

CtrlReset (Controller Reset)

Determines the status of the controllers (Modulation Wheel, Aftertouch, Foot Controller, Breath Controller, Knobs,

etc.) when switching between voices. When this is set to “hold,” the controllers are kept at the current setting. When

this is set to “reset,” the controllers are reset to the default states (below).

Settings:

reset, hold

If you select “reset,” the controllers will be reset to the following states/positions:

Pitch Bend.....................Center

Modulation Wheel..........Minimum

Aftertouch .....................Minimum

Foot Controller ..............Maximum

Breath Controller ..........Maximum

Foot Switch ...................Off

Expression ....................Maximum

Foot Volume ..................Maximum

Sustain ..........................Off

[F2] I/O (Input/Output)

[SF1] INPUT

From this display you can set parameters related to audio input.

Mic/Line

When using the A/D INPUT jacks, this determines the input source, microphone (mic) or line.

Settings:

mic, line

mic................... Intended for low output equipment, such as a microphone, electric guitar or bass.

line................... Intended for high output equipment, such as a keyboard, synthesizer, or CD player.

Digital

When the optional AIEB2 board is installed, two separate input connections for digital audio transfer are available:

coaxial and optical. One or the other must be set; the two cannot be used at the same time.

Settings:

coaxial, optical

[SF2] OUTPUT

From this display you can set parameters related to audio output.

L&RGain

Set the output gain of each jack.

Settings:

0dB, +6dB

Assign Gain L&R, 1&2, 3&4, 5&6,

7&8, 9&10, 11&12, 13&14

Digital

Specify the digital output resolution of the optionally installed AIEB2 board (page 25).

Settings:

20bit, 24bit

mLAN MonitorSw

When this is set to on, the audio signal of the instrument output via an IEEE1394 cable to a computer will be output

also via the main OUTPUT L/MONO and R jacks. When this is set to on, the audio signal sent from a computer to the

instrument will be output via the main OUTPUT L/MONO and R jacks directly, bypassing the Effect block.

Settings:

on, off

[F3] VOICE

[VOICE]

→

[UTILITY]

→

[F3]

These special voice-related settings are available only when entering the Utility mode from the Voice mode, letting you set parameters related to all the Voices.

Reference Utility Mode

Utility mode

262

Owner’s Manual

[SF1] MEQ (Master EQ)

From this display you can apply ﬁve-band equalization to all Voices, raising or lowering the level of each frequency

band (LOW, LOWMID, MID, HIGHMID, HIGH).

The parameters are the same as in the Performance Common Edit. See page 214.

Settings: For details about EQ, see page 178.

[SF2] MEF (Master Effect)

From this display you can set the Master Effect related parameters applied to all the Voices. This display can be

called up by pressing and holding the [MASTER EFFECT] button on the front panel in the Voice mode.

The parameters are the same as in the Performance Common Edit. See page 214.

[SF3] ARP CH

(Arpeggio Channel)

From this display you can set parameters related to output of the Arpeggio MIDI data in the Voice mode.

OutputSwitch This enables or disables MIDI data output for the Arpeggio function. When this is set to “on,” Arpeggio data is sent

via MIDI — allowing you to send the Arpeggio data to an external sequencer or play back the Arpeggios on

connected MIDI tone generators.

Settings: on (enable), off (disable)

TransmitCh (Transmit channel) Determines the MIDI channel through which Arpeggio playback data will be sent (when Output Switch above is on).

Settings: 1 ~ 16

[SF4] CTL ASN

(Controller Assign)

Sets the parameters related to the controllers in the Voice mode.

Details on each parameter are the same as in Performance Common Edit. See page 214.

[F3] SEQ (Sequencer)

[SONG] or [PATTERN] → [UTILITY] → [F3]

These special song- and pattern-related settings are available only when entering the Utility mode from the Song or Pattern mode.

[SF1] CLICK

From this display you can set the parameters related to the click sound (metronome) that is used during recording or

playback in the Song/Pattern mode.

Mode Determines whether and when the metronome click will sound.

Settings: off, rec, rec/play, all

off .....................The click will not sound.

rec ....................The click will sound during song/pattern recording only.

rec/play ............The click will sound during song/pattern recording and playback.

all .....................The click will always sound.

Beat Determines on which beats the metronome click will sound.

Settings: 16 (16th notes), 08 (8th notes), 04 (quarter notes), 02 (half notes), 01 (whole notes)

Volume Determines the click sound volume.

Settings: 0 ~ 127

Type Determines the click sound type.

Settings: 1 ~ 10

RecCount Sets the number of count-in measures provided before recording actually starts after pressing the [F] (Play)

button in the Record standby mode.

Settings: off (Recording starts as soon as the [F] button is pressed), 1 meas ~ 8 meas

SmplPrCnt (Sampling pre-count) This is available when entering the Sampling mode from the Song mode/Pattern mode, setting the Type to

“sample+note” then setting the Trigger mode to “meas.” This parameter sets the number of count-in measures

provided before a song/pattern starts after starting sampling.

n Since the click sound is created with the internal tone generator, using click playback affects the overall polyphony of this synthesizer.

[SF2] FILTER (MIDI Filter)

From this display you can set which MIDI events will be recognized/transmitted via MIDI. The settings made here

apply only to Song/Pattern playback data; they do not affect the MIDI events generated by your keyboard playing or

panel operations in the Voice and Performance modes.

MIDI events to which the Filter is applied:

Note, PgmChange (Program Change), CtrlChange (Control Change), PB (Pitch Bend), ChAt (Channel Aftertouch), PolyAT (Polyphonic

Aftertouch), Exclusive

[SF3] OTHER

PtnQuantize (Pattern Quantize) Determines the quantize value for Pattern switching during playback. When set to “1,” Patterns (sections) will always

switch on the ﬁrst beat of the measure during playback. When “1/16” is selected, Patterns (sections) can be

switched on any 16th beat during playback.

Settings: 1 (1 measure), 1/2 (Half note), 1/4 (Quarter note), 1/8 (8th note), 1/16 (16th note)

PtnTempoHold

(Pattern Tempo Hold)

Determines whether or not the tempo setting will switch to the tempo value stored with each Pattern when a new

Pattern is selected during playback. When set to “on,” the tempo will be retained when Patterns are switched. When

set to “off,” the tempo will switch to that stored with the new Pattern when Patterns are switched.

Settings: on, off

n The tempo setting data in the Pattern Chain is not affected by this parameter.

Reference Utility Mode

Utility mode

263

Owner’s Manual

SongEventChase Event Chase allows you to specify which non-note data types are properly recognized during fast-forward and

rewind operations. Normally, if a Song or Pattern is played back from mid-point and/or fast-forward or rewind are

used, certain data types (such as Program Change, Pitch Bend, and Control Change) may not play back as

expected. Setting this to a speciﬁc event ensures the playback integrity of the event, even when fast forwarding or

rewinding.

Settings: Off, PC (Program Change), PC+PB+Ctrl (Program Change+Pitch Bend+Control Change), all (All events)

n Keep in mind that settings other than “off” may result in slower operation — for example, a pause before starting playback, or

slower rewind/fast forward speed.

n When this is set to “all,” an excessive amount of MIDI data may be generated, possibly resulting in a MIDI error on the

connected device.

DumpInterval (Bulk Dump

Exclusive Interval Time)

When playing back system exclusive data (bulk data) that is recorded on the sequence tracks, this sets the interval

that is inserted for each 1KB.

When sending bulk data from this synthesizer to a connected MIDI device, a MIDI error may result if the device

cannot handle large amounts of data in a short time. This parameter compensates for that by setting an interval that

provides enough time for the receiving device to process the bulk data.

Settings: 0 ~ 900 (msec)

n The playback may be a little slower depending on the currently set interval. Also when a MIDI error occurs, try to set the

interval a little higher and send the data again.

LoadMix Determines whether the Mixing settings are loaded (on) or not (off) when the Song/Pattern number is changed.

Settings: off, on

n This setting affects the Song/Pattern change during Song/Pattern chain playback.

SendXGOn

ToMultiPartPB

Determines whether an XG reset message is sent to the Multi-part Plug-in board tone generator block (on) or not

(off) when starting an XG song or changing the Song/Pattern number.

Settings: on, off

[F4] CTL ASN (Controller Assign)

[SF1] ARP (Arpeggio)

Switch Determines the Control Change Number that controls on/off status of Arpeggio playback.

Settings: 00~95

Hold Determines the Control Change Number that controls on/off status of Arpeggio Hold (page 189).

Settings: 00~95

[SF2] ASSIGN

From this display you can assign speciﬁc functions to the ASSIGN A and B knobs (when the [PAN/SEND] and

[TONE] lamps are on).

ASA (Assign A)

Dest (Destination)

Two parameters are available here. The ﬁrst (ASA) determines the Control Change number generated by the

ASSIGN A knob. The second, Destination (Dest), determines what parameter or aspect of the sound is affected by

the knob. Keep in mind that if the same MIDI Control Change messages as set here are received from an external

device, the internal tone generator also responds to those messages.

Settings: Refer to the separate Data List booklet.

ASB (Assign B)

Dest (Destination)

Two parameters are available here. The ﬁrst (ASB) determines the Control Change number generated by the

ASSIGN B knob. The second, Destination (Dest), determines what parameter or aspect of the sound is affected by

the knob. Keep in mind that if the same MIDI Control Change messages as set here are received from an external

device, the internal tone generator also responds to those messages.

Settings: Refer to the separate Data List booklet.

[SF3] FT SW (Footswitch)

From this display you can determine the Control Change number generated by using the Footswitch connected to

the ASSIGNABLE jack. Keep in mind that if the same MIDI Control Change messages as set here are received from

an external device, the internal tone generator also responds to those messages as if the Footswitch of the

instrument was used.

Settings: 000~100 (000, 032: off, 096: Arpeggio Switch, 097: Arpeggio Hold, 098: Song/Pattern playback start/stop, 099/100: Program

Change INC/DEC 101: Octave Rest)

[SF4] REMOTE

Two different computer sequencer control modes can be selected here, as well as the respective MIDI port settings

for control. When you’ve made the desired settings, press the [ENTER] button to actually call up the preset control

templates for the software. For details, refer to the Quick Guide on page 147.

[SF5] MEF (Master Effect)

From this display you can set the parameters related to the Master Effect Knob operations. (Press both the [ARP FX]

and [EQ] buttons so that their lamps light.)

Knob1 ~ Knob4 Assigns a parameter of the Master Effect to each knob. Available parameters differ depending on the selected

Master Effect type.

[F5] MIDI

[SF1] CH (Channel)

From this display you can make basic MIDI settings.

BasicRcvCh

(Basic Receive Channel)

Determines the MIDI receive channel when this synthesizer is set to single-timbre tone generator mode (Voice/

Performance modes).

Settings: 1~16, omni (all channels), off

n In the multi-timbral tone generator mode (Song/Pattern modes), each Part receives MIDI data according to its assigned MIDI

receive channel ([SONG] or [PATTERN] → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → Part selection → [F1] VOICE → [SF2] MODE → ReceiveCh).

Reference Utility Mode

Utility mode

264

Owner’s Manual

KBDTransCh

(Keyboard Transmit Channel)

Determines the MIDI channel over which the instrument sends MIDI data (to an external sequencer, tone generator,

or other device). This parameter is available in the single-timbre tone generator mode (Voice/Performance modes).

Settings: 1~16, off

n In the multi-timbral tone generator mode (Song/Pattern modes), MIDI data generated by playing the keyboard (and its

controllers) is sent to the internal tone generator and external devices via the MIDI output channel, set from the CHANNEL

display ([SONG] or [PATTERN] → [F3] TRACK → [SF1] CHANNEL).

DeviceNo. (Device Number) Determines the device number used by this synthesizer in receiving or transmitting data. This number must match

the Device Number of the external MIDI device when transmitting/receiving bulk data, parameter changes or other

system exclusive messages.

Settings: 1~16, all, off

[SF2] SWITCH

BankSel This switch enables or disables Bank Select messages, both in transmission and reception. When this is set to “on,”

this synthesizer responds to incoming Bank Select messages, and it also transmits appropriate Bank Select

messages (when using the panel).

Settings: off, on

PgmChange (Program Change) This switch enables or disables Program Change messages, both in transmission and reception. When this is set to

“on,” this synthesizer responds to incoming Program Change messages, and it also transmits appropriate Program

Change messages (when using the panel).

Settings: off, on

CtrlChange

(Control Change mode)

Determines how this synthesizer receives and recognizes the AEG Sustain MIDI message. When set to mode1, it is

received as a Parameter Change. When set to mode2, it is received as a Control Change message.

Settings: mode1, mode2

LocalCtrl (Local Control On/Off) This determines whether or not the tone generator of the instrument responds to your keyboard playing. Normally,

this should be set to “on” — since you’ll want to hear the sound of the MOTIF ES as you play it. However, for external

sequencer applications, you may need to set this to “off” to avoid getting “double” notes, in which the tone generator

of the instrument is played twice — once by the keyboard and once again by the keyboard data routed through the

sequencer.

Even if this is set to “off,” the data will be transmitted via MIDI. Also, the internal tone generator block will respond to

messages received via MIDI.

Settings: off, on

RcvBulk (Receive Bulk) Determines whether or not Bulk Dump data can be received.

Settings: protect (not received), on (received)

[SF3] SYNC (Synchronization)

From this display you can set various parameters related to MIDI clock and synchronization.

MIDI Sync Determines whether Song/Pattern/Arpeggio playback will be synchronized to the instrument’s internal clock or an

external MIDI clock.

Settings: internal, MIDI, MTC

internal ..............................Synchronization to internal clock. Use this setting when this synthesizer is to be used alone or as the master

clock source for other equipment.

MIDI ..................................Synchronization to a MIDI clock received from an external MIDI instrument via MIDI.

MTC (MIDI Time Code).....Synchronization to an MTC signal received via MIDI. MMC signals are transmitted via MIDI. Use this setting

when this synthesizer is to be used as a MIDI slave, such as when synchronized to an MTC-capable MTR.

The MTC Sync function is available only in the Song mode.

n Please keep in mind that the song or pattern will not start even if you press the [F] (Play) button when the MIDI Sync is set to

other than “internal.”

n MTC (MIDI Time Code) allows simultaneous synchronization of multiple audio devices via standard MIDI cables. It includes

data corresponding to hours, minutes, seconds, and frames. This synthesizer does not transmit MTC. A device such as the

Yamaha AW4416 is necessary in order to use this synthesizer as an MTC master.

n MMC (MIDI Machine Control) allows remote control of multitrack recorders, MIDI sequencers, etc. A MMC-compatible

multitrack recorder, for example, will automatically respond to start, stop, fast forward, and fast reverse operations performed

on the controlling sequencer, thus keeping playback of the sequencer and multitrack recorder aligned.

ClockOut Determines whether MIDI clock (F8) messages will be transmitted via MIDI.

Settings: on (transmitted), off

SeqCtrl (Sequencer Control) Determines whether Sequencer Control signals – start, continue, stop, and song position pointer – will be received

and/or transmitted via MIDI.

Settings: off, in, out, in/out

off .....................Not transmitted/recognized.

in ......................Recognized but not transmitted.

out ....................Transmitted but not recognized.

in/out ...............Transmitted/recognized.

MTC StartOffset Determines the speciﬁc time code point from which sequence playback starts, when MTC is received. This feature

can be used to accurately align playback of this synthesizer with an external MTC-compatible device.

Settings: Hour : Minute : Second : Frame

Hour ................00~23

Minute .............00~59

Second ............00~59

Frame ..............00~29

Reference Utility Mode

Utility Job mode

265

Owner’s Manual

In this Mode, you can restore this synthesizer’s User memory (page 186) to the factory default settings (Factory Set). For details, see page 44.

n Since the settings of the Plug-in Boards in the Utility mode are stored not to internal User memory but to the memory on the respective boards themselves,

the data cannot be restored with this Job.

■ Supplementary

Setting the default display when turning the power on

1 Enter the desired mode and the program number you wish to call up ﬁrst when turning the power on.

2 Press the [ENTER] button while holding the [STORE] button to register the mode and program number set in step #1.

3 Set the PowerOnMode parameter to “last” in the [UTILITY] →→

→→

[F1] GENERAL →→

→→

[SF4] OTHER display.

4 Press the [STORE] button to store the Utility setting made in step #3 above.

5 Turn the power off and turn the power on again to call up the mode/program number set in step #2 to the display.

[SF4] OTHER

MIDI IN/OUT Determines which physical output terminal(s) will be used for transmitting/receiving MIDI data: MIDI IN/OUT, USB, or

mLAN (when the optional mLAN16E has been installed).

Settings: MIDI, USB, mLAN

n Three types of terminals above cannot be used at the same time. Only one of them can be used to transmit/receive MIDI data.

ThruPort (Through Port) Many computer sequencers are capable of transmitting data over several MIDI ports, effectively breaking the 16-

channel barrier. When using the USB terminal or mLAN terminal (when the optional mLAN16E has been installed) for

MIDI transmission/reception, you can have this synthesizer respond to MIDI data over one port, while relaying the

data for another port number (you can set here) to a separate tone generator (connected to the MIDI OUT terminal).

In this way, 16 channels of data can be played on this synthesizer and another 16 can be played on the connected

MIDI device.

Settings: 1~8

n When the mLAN16E has been installed and the MIDI IN/OUT is set to mLAN, ports 5 ~ 8 are not available even if you set them

here.

[F6] PLUG

[SF1] STATUS

Plug1: ~ Plug3: Indicates the name of the Plug-in Board which has been installed to this synthesizer.

PolyExpand This parameter is accessible only when you have two or three identical Plug-in boards installed. The “off” setting

enables two or three boards to work separately (you can select them for two or three different Parts). When this is set

to “on,” the two boards effectively function together as one board (used in a single part) — giving you double the

amount of polyphonic notes you can play at one time.

Settings: on, off

[SF2] MIDI

From this display you can set various MIDI-related parameters for the Plug-in board.

DEVNO. (Device Number) Determines the MIDI Device Number of the Plug-in Board. This number must match the Device Number of the

external MIDI device when transmitting/receiving bulk data, parameter changes or other system exclusive

messages.

Settings: 1~16, all, off

PORTNO. (Port number) Determines the MIDI Port number over which the Plug-in board receives MIDI data in the multi-timbral tone

generator mode (Song/Pattern modes). One port can be set for a Multi-part Plug-in board and two ports can be set

for a Single part Plug-in board.

Settings: off, 1~3

n The Port number for the Effect Plug-in board (VH) is ﬁxed to 1.

n For information on the Plug-in board and the internal tone generator block, see page 163.

GM/XG Determines whether “GM on” and “XG on” messages are recognized (on) or not (off). This parameter is available

only when a Multi-part Plug-in board has been installed to slot 3.

Settings: on, off

[SF3] NATIVE1

From this display you can set the Native System parameters of the Plug-in board installed to slot 1.

For details on the parameters, refer to the owner’s manual of your particular Plug-in board.

[SF4] NATIVE2

From this display you can set the Native System parameters of the Plug-in board installed to slot 2.

For details on the parameters, refer to the owner’s manual of your particular Plug-in board.

[SF5] NATIVE3

From this display you can set the Native System parameters of the Plug-in board installed to slot 3.

For details on the parameters, refer to the owner’s manual of your particular Plug-in board.

Utility Job mode

[UTILITY] → [JOB]

[UTILITY] →→

→→

[F1] GENERAL →→

→→

[SF4] OTHER →→

→→

PowerOnMode

Reference File Mode

File mode

266

Owner’s Manual

File mode

The File mode provides tools for transferring data between the instrument and various storage media and devices, such as SmartMedia cards,

hard disk drives and compact ﬂash devices.

n For details about SmartMedia and USB storage devices, see page 27.

n For details about the relationship between the data created on this synthesizer and the ﬁles for saving, see page 186.

n For information on how to select a ﬁle/folder and how to create a new folder, see page 268.

File mode

[FILE]

[F1] CONFIG

[SF1] CURRENT

From this display you can set the parameters about the currently recognized device (SmartMedia/USB storage

device).

Current In this display you can select the device to be recognized by this synthesizer — a SmartMedia inserted to the Card

slot or a properly USB storage device connected to the USB TO DEVICE connector.

When Current is set to CARD, the Volume Label is shown on the second line. When Current is set to USB, the

partition information is shown on the second line. If the connected USB storage device supports multiple media, set

the slot number at the right corner of the display.

Settings: CARD, USB

Status Indicates the status of the storage device recognized by this synthesizer.

FFree Indicates the amount of unused (free) memory on the current device.

FTotal Indicates the amount of total memory on the current device.

[SF2] MOUNT

From this display you can select speciﬁc partitions for saving/loading data, within the device mounted in the [SF1]

CURRENT display (above).

[SF3] FORMAT

Before you can use a new SmartMedia/USB storage device with this synthesizer, you will need to format it. Use this

operation to format the SmartMedia/USB storage device and assign a Volume Label to it. For instructions on

formatting, see page 268.

Format Determines the storage device to be formatted. When set to “USB,” “Slot” appears at the right corner of this display.

Select a slot to be accessed when the connected USB storage device supports multiple media.

Settings: CARD, USB

Type This is available when Format (above) is set to “USB.” Specify the partition to be formatted.

Settings: all, partition1 ~ 4

Volume Label Names the Volume Label. For instructions on naming, refer to page 53 in the Basic Operation section.

[F2] SAVE

This operation lets you save ﬁles to a SmartMedia/USB storage device.

For instructions on saving ﬁles of the various data types, refer to the following pages:

page 86 (Voices), page 92 (Performances), page 97 (Waveforms), page 132 (Songs/Patterns).

Current Indicates the current directory (folder). This indication is automatically changed according to the current directory

(folder) speciﬁed in the File/Folder selection box.

TYPE Among the various types of data created on this synthesizer, you can save all of them or only a speciﬁc type of data

to a single ﬁle. This parameter determines which speciﬁc type of data will be saved to a single ﬁle.

Settings: Refer to “Supplementary information” on page 268.

[F3] LOAD

This operation lets you load ﬁles from a SmartMedia/USB device to this synthesizer.

Current Indicates the current directory (folder). This indication is automatically changed according to the current directory

(folder) speciﬁed in the File/Folder selection box.

TYPE Among the various types of data saved in a single ﬁle on a SmartMedia/USB storage device, you can load all of

them or only a speciﬁc type of data to this synthesizer. This parameter determines which speciﬁc type of data will be

loaded from a single ﬁle.

Settings: Refer to “Supplementary information” on page 268.

File/Folder name

File/Folder selection box

Press the [F6] NEW button to create a new folder.

Reference File Mode

File mode

267

Owner’s Manual

[F4] RENAME

From this display you can rename ﬁles or folders in the selected SmartMedia/USB storage device,

using up to eight alphabetic and numeric characters.

Files are named according to the MS-DOS naming convention. If the ﬁle name contains spaces and

other characters unrecognized in MS-DOS, these characters will automatically be replaced by “_”

(underscore) characters when saving.

[F5] DELETE

From this display you can delete ﬁles/folders from the selected SmartMedia/USB storage device.

Select the desired ﬁle or folder as shown below, then press the [ENTER] button.

n When you wish to delete a folder, delete all the ﬁles and folders contained in the folder beforehand.

Please keep in mind that only folders that contain no ﬁles or other nested folders can be deleted.

Select the desired ﬁle type. Select the ﬁle/folder to be renamed.

Rename the selected ﬁle/folder here.

See “Basic Operation” on page 53.

Press the [F6] NEW button to create a new folder.

Select the desired ﬁle type.

Select the ﬁle or folder to be deleted.

Reference File Mode

Supplementary information

268

Owner’s Manual

■ Supplementary information

File ( )/Folder ( ) selection

The illustrations and instructions below show you how to select ﬁles

and folders on the SmartMedia/USB storage devices within the File

mode.

Formatting a SmartMedia/USB storage device

Before you can use a new SmartMedia/USB storage device with this

synthesizer, you will need to format it. Follow the instructions below.

If data is already saved on the SmartMedia/USB storage device, be careful

not to format it. If you format the SmartMedia/USB storage device, all the

previously recorded data will be deleted.

1 Insert a SmartMedia into the CARD slot or connect a USB

storage device to the USB TO DEVICE connector.

If necessary, insert the proper media into the slot of the USB

storage device.

2 Press the [FILE] mode to enter the File mode.

3 Press the [F1] CONFIG button, then [SF3] FORMAT

button to call up the Format display.

4 Select the media to be formatted.

Move the cursor to the Format value location and select “CARD”

or “USB.” When selecting “USB,” specify the slot number at the

right top of the display as necessary and select the partition to

be formatted at the Type value location in the second line of the

display.

5 Set the Volume Label.

Move the cursor to the “Volume Label” and input a Volume Label.

For instructions on naming, refer to page 53 in the Basic

Operation section.

6 Press the [ENTER] button. (The display prompts you for

conﬁrmation.)

Press the [DEC/NO] button to cancel the Format operation.

7 Press the [INC/YES] button to execute the Format.

After formatting has been completed, a “Completed” message

appears and operation returns to the original display.

While formatting is in process, make sure to follow these precautions:

• Never remove or eject the media from the device (SmartMedia or

USB storage).

• Never unplug or disconnect any of the devices.

• Never turn off the power of the MOTIF ES or the relevant devices.

8 Press the [SF1] CURRENT button and check whether the

currently recognized device is “CARD” (SmartMedia in

the CARD slot) or “USB” (USB storage device connected

to this synthesizer).

Change the Current setting as needed.

n By executing the Format operation in the File mode, the SmartMedia/

USB storage device will be formatted to MS-DOS or Windows format.

The formatted SmartMedia/USB storage device may not be

compatible with other devices such as a Macintosh computer or

digital camera.

Move the cursor to the desired ﬁle or folder by using the [INC/YES] and

[DEC/NO] buttons or the data dial.

To return to the next

highest level, press

the [EXIT] button.

To call up the contents of a

desired folder, highlight the

folder and press the [ENTER]

button.

Move the cursor to the desired ﬁle or folder by using the [INC/YES]

and [DEC/NO] buttons or the data dial.

CAUTION

Volume Level of the selected partition.

Reference File Mode

Supplementary information

269

Owner’s Manual

File types that can be handled by the MOTIF ES

File types that can be saved from the instrument to the SmartMedia/USB storage device [FILE] → [F2] SAVE → TYPE

* Automatically assigned to the saved ﬁle.

n When selecting “AllSong” or “AllPattern” as a ﬁle type, Sample Voices and assigned Waveforms created via the Sampling function in the Song/Pattern mode

are also saved together.

File types that can be loaded from SmartMedia/USB storage device to the instrument [FILE] → [F3] LOAD → TYPE

TYPE

File

extension*

Description

Dir When this is set to “TYPE,” only the directories (folders) are displayed in the File/Folder selection box and the Save operation

cannot be executed.

All .W7A All data in this synthesizer’s internal User Memory (Flash ROM) is treated as a single ﬁle, and can be saved to the SmartMedia/

USB storage device.

AllVoice .W7V All the User Voice data in this synthesizer’s internal User Memory (Flash ROM) is treated as a single ﬁle, and can be saved to

the SmartMedia/USB storage device. Also the Waveforms obtained via the Sampling function and assigned to any of the

voices are saved together.

PluginAllBulk1, 2, 3 .W2B All the data in a Plug-in board (Board Voice data created by using the editor software that comes with the Plug-in Board and

the Board related settings in the Utility mode) is treated as a single ﬁle, and can be saved to the SmartMedia/USB storage

device. The numbers 1, 2, and 3 correspond to the Plug-in slots.

UserARP .W7G All the User Arpeggio data in this synthesizer’s internal User Memory (Flash ROM) is treated as a single ﬁle, and can be saved

to the SmartMedia/USB storage device.

AllSong .W7S All the User Song data in this synthesizer’s internal User Memory (DRAM) is treated as a single ﬁle, and can be saved to the

SmartMedia/USB storage device.

AllPattern .W7P All the User Pattern data in this synthesizer’s internal User Memory (DRAM) is treated as a single ﬁle, and can be saved to the

SmartMedia/USB storage device.

SMF .MID Sequence track (1 - 16) and Tempo track data of Songs or Patterns created in the Song/Pattern mode can be saved to the

SmartMedia/USB storage device as Standard MIDI File (format 0) data.

AllWaveform .W7W All the User Wave and Sample data in this synthesizer’s internal User Memory (DRAM) is treated as a single ﬁle, and can be

saved to the SmartMedia/USB storage device.

Wav.WAV Sample data created in the Sampling mode can be saved to the SmartMedia/USB storage device as a WAV ﬁle (Windows

audio format).

Aiff .AIF Sample data created in the Sampling mode can be saved to the SmartMedia/USB storage device as an AIFF ﬁle (Macintosh

audio format).

Voice Editor .W7E All the User Voice data stored on User Banks (Flash ROM) is handled as a single ﬁle and saved to the SmartMedia/USB

storage device. The saved ﬁle can be loaded to the Voice Editor software (included in the CD-ROM) on your computer.

TYPE

File

extension*

Description

Dir When this is set to “TYPE,” only the directories (folders) are displayed in the File/Folder selection box and the Load operation

cannot be executed.

All .W7A Files of the “All” type saved to SmartMedia/USB storage device can be loaded and restored to the instrument. When the box at

the left of “without System” is checkmarked, only the Utility mode settings will not be loaded.

AllVoice .W7V Files of the “All Voice” type saved to SmartMedia/USB storage device can be loaded and restored to the instrument.

Voice .W7A

.W7V

A speciﬁed voice in a ﬁle that is saved to the SmartMedia/USB storage device as “All” or “All Voice” type can be individually

selected and loaded to the instrument. Please note that the ﬁle icons of “W7A” and “W7V” are changed to (as virtual

folders) when this ﬁle type is selected (Quick Guide on page 87).

Performance .W7A A speciﬁed performance in a ﬁle that is saved to the SmartMedia/USB storage device as “All” type can be individually selected

and loaded to the instrument. Please note that the ﬁle icon of “W7A” is changed to (as a virtual folder) when this ﬁle type

is selected (Quick Guide on page 92).

PluginAllBulk 1, 2, 3 .W2B A ﬁle that is saved to the SmartMedia/USB storage device as “Plugin All Bulk 1, 2, 3” type can be loaded and restored to the

Plug-in board installed to the instrument. Please note that the same Plug-in Boards should be installed to the same slot as when

the ﬁle was saved.

UserARP .W7G Files of the “Usr ARP” type saved to SmartMedia/USB storage device can be loaded and restored to the instrument.

AllSong .W7S Files of the “All Song” type saved to SmartMedia/USB storage device can be loaded and restored to the instrument.

Song .W7A

.W7S

.MID

A speciﬁed Song in a ﬁle that is saved to the SmartMedia/USB storage device as “All” or “All Song” type can be individually

selected and loaded to the instrument. Please note that the ﬁle icons of “W7A” and “W7S” are changed to (as virtual

folders) when this ﬁle type is selected (Quick Guide on page 133). In addition, selecting this ﬁle type lets you load the Standard

MIDI ﬁle (format 0, 1) to a speciﬁc Song.

AllPattern .W7P Files of the “All Pattern” type saved to SmartMedia/USB storage device can be loaded and restored to the instrument.

Pattern .W7A

.W7P

.MID

A speciﬁed Song in a ﬁle that is saved to the SmartMedia/USB storage device as “All” or “All Pattern” type can be individually

selected and loaded to the instrument. Please note that the ﬁle icons of “W7A” and “W7P” are changed to (as virtual

folders) when this ﬁle type is selected (Quick Guide on page 133). In addition, selecting this ﬁle type lets you load the Standard

MIDI ﬁle (format 0, 1) to a speciﬁc section of a Pattern.

Reference File Mode

Supplementary information

270

Owner’s Manual

* Assigned to the ﬁle which can be loaded.

n In addition to the ﬁle types above, Yamaha A5000/A4000/A3000/SU700 ﬁles and AKAI S1000/S3000 ﬁles can be loaded to the MOTIF ES.

n When ﬁles of the Yamaha A series samplers (A5000/4000/3000) are loaded, an “S” mark by the ﬁle name indicates the ﬁle contains only sample data and a

“P” mark indicates program data (voice related parameters and so on). When entering the File mode from the Voice/Performance mode, the “P” marked ﬁle

can be loaded and the following two types can be selected instead of Waveform or Key Bank.

• Type 1: Only one sample is imported to a certain waveform. This type utilizes the various settings of the MOTIF ES, and the parameters corresponding to

the four elements are also loaded. Extra samples are not loaded.

• Type 2: Several samples are imported to a certain waveform. Parameters corresponding to the four elements are not loaded to the MOTIF ES. Extra

samples are not loaded.

Data Compatibility with the MOTIF 6/MOTIF 7/MOTIF 8

Among the data created on the MOTIF 6/MOTIF 7/MOTIF 8, Voices, Waveforms, Sample Voices can be loaded to the MOTIF ES6/MOTIF ES7/

MOTIF ES8.

• Voices

A speciﬁed Voice in a ﬁle (extension: W2A, W2V) that is saved to the storage device as “All” or “AllVoice” type on the MOTIF can be individually

selected and loaded to the MOTIF ES. Set the TYPE in the [F3] LOAD display to “Voice” and execute the Load procedure.

Likewise, a ﬁle (extension: W2V) that is saved to the SmartMedia/USB storage device as “AllVoice” type on the MOTIF can be loaded to the

MOTIF ES. Set the TYPE in the [F3] LOAD display to “AllVoice” and execute the Load procedure.

In addition, Voice Editor ﬁles (extension: W2E) can be loaded to the MOTIF ES. Set the TYPE in the [F3] LOAD display to “Voice Editor” and

execute the Load procedure.

n The Voices loaded to the MOTIF ES 6/7/8 may not produce the exact same sound as those on the original MOTIF 6/7/8, since the contents of the preset

Waveforms and the Effect structure are different between the two instrument series.

• Waveforms

A speciﬁed Waveform in a ﬁle (extension: W2A, W2W) that is saved to the storage device as “All” or “AllWaveform” type on the MOTIF can be

individually selected and loaded to the MOTIF ES. Set the TYPE in the [F3] LOAD display to “Waveform” and execute the Load procedure.

Likewise, a ﬁle (extension: W2W) that is saved to the storage device as “AllWaveform” type on the MOTIF can be loaded to the MOTIF ES. Set

the TYPE in the [F3] LOAD display to “AllWaveform” and execute the Load procedure.

• Sample Voices

A speciﬁed Sample Voice (extension: W2A, W2S, W2P) in a ﬁle that is saved to the storage device as “All” or “AllSong” or “AllPattern” type on the

MOTIF can be individually selected and loaded to the MOTIF ES. Set the TYPE in the [F3] LOAD display to “SampleVoice” and execute the Load

procedure.

AllWaveform .W7W Files of the “All” or “All Waveform” types saved to SmartMedia/USB storage device can be loaded and restored to the

instrument.

Waveform .W7A

.W7W

.WAV

.AIF

A speciﬁed Waveform in a ﬁle that is saved to the SmartMedia/USB storage device as “All” or “All Waveform” type can be

individually selected and loaded to the instrument. Please note that the ﬁle icons of “W7A” and “W7W” are changed to

(as virtual folders) when this ﬁle type is selected (Quick Guide on page 133). In addition, selecting this ﬁle type lets you load

the WAV ﬁle and AIFF ﬁle to the speciﬁed destination, which differs depending on the mode before entering the File mode

(Quick Guide on pages 100 and 109).

SampleVoice .W7A

.W7S

.W7P

A speciﬁed Sample Voice in a ﬁle that is saved to the SmartMedia/USB storage device as “All” or “All Song” or “All Pattern”

type can be individually selected and loaded to the instrument. Please note that the ﬁle icons of “W7A” and “W7S” and

“W7P” are changed to (as virtual folders) when this ﬁle type is selected (Quick Guide on page 133). This ﬁle type is

available only when entering the File mode from the Song mode/Pattern mode.

Voice Editor .W7E The Voice data edited via the included Voice Editor software on your computer can be loaded to the instrument.

TYPE

File

extension*

Description

Reference

Master Mode

Master Play mode

271

Owner’s Manual

Master mode

■ Creating Masters — basic procedure

The Master mode lets you play and edit special program combinations called “Masters.” A Master can contain up to four different Voices or

Performances, each assigned to a separate MIDI “Zone.” Alternately, it can contain speciﬁc Songs or Patterns. As such, it lets you set up the

instrument just as you need for live performance, switching through the Masters in order as you need them.

To create a Master, set the various parameters below in the Master Play and Master Edit modes. Use the Master Job mode to initialize data or

transfer it to another device.

Once you’ve edited a Master, you can store it to a User Bank in internal memory (Flash ROM) and save all the edited Masters to a SmartMedia/

USB storage device in the File mode.

The Master Play mode lets you perform a variety of general editing operations on the selected Master. For more detailed and comprehensive

editing operations, use the Master Edit mode. Edited parameters with the exception of some parameters are stored to internal Flash ROM as a

User Master.

The Master Edit is divided into Common Edit, for setting parameters common to all four Zones, and Zone Edit, for setting parameters of

individual Zones.

When Zone Switch is set to on in the [F2] MEMORY display in the Master Play mode, only the Common Edit is available.

Master Play mode

[MASTER] → Master selection

[F1] PLAY

OCT (Octave) Indicates Keyboard Octave setting set via the [OCTAVE] buttons.

This can be changed also with the following operation: [UTILITY] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF2] KBD → Octave.

ASA (ASSIGN A),

ASB (ASSIGN B)

Indicates the functions assigned to the respective Knobs (printed “ASSIGN A” and “ASSIGN B”) when the lamps of

both the [PAN/SEND] and [TONE] buttons are turned on. The functions are assigned from the [UTILITY] → [F4] CTL

ASN → [SF2] ASSIGN display.

n OCT (Octave), ASA (ASSIGN A), and ASB (ASSIGN B) settings are not independently assignable for each Master. Because of this, these are not stored as an individual

Master in the Master Store mode (page 137).

AS1 (ASSIGN 1),

AS2 (ASSIGN 2)

Indicates the values obtained by controlling the respective Knobs (printed “ASSIGN 1” and “ASSIGN 2”) when the

lamps of both the [PAN/SEND] and [TONE] buttons are turned on. The functions assigned to these knobs depend on

the setting of the Voice selected as a Master program.

[SF1] ARP1 (Arpeggio 1) - [SF5]

ARP5 (Arpeggio 5)

You can call up the Arpeggio types by pressing these buttons to which the Arpeggio types are assigned.

The Arpeggio type assigned to each button depends on the program (Voice, Performance, Song, Pattern) selected

as a Master.

[F2] MEMORY

From this display you can set basic parameters for the Master, including the mode that is called up with the Master and the program number.

Mode Determines the mode that is called up when the Master number is selected.

Settings: Voice, Performance, Pattern, Song

Memory Determines the Program number that is called up when the Master is selected.

Settings:

When the Mode is set to Voice: Select a Voice bank and number. Refer to the instructions page 60.

When the Mode is set to Performance: Select a Performance bank and number. Refer to the instructions on page 67.

When the Mode is set to Pattern: Select a Pattern and section. Refer to the instructions on page 57.

When the Mode is set to Song: Select a Song number. Refer to the instructions on page 56.

ZoneSwitch Determines whether the Zone function is used (on) or not (off). See page 137 for details about the Zone function.

n When the Mode is set to “Voice” or “Performance” and the Zone Switch is turned on, only Zone 1 can be used in the default

setting (playing Zones 2-4 will produce no sound). You can use these Zones by setting various parameters in the Master Edit

mode.

Master Edit mode

[MASTER] → Master selection → [EDIT]

Reference

Master Mode

Master Edit mode Common Edit

272

Owner’s Manual

These parameters are for making global (or common) edits to all four Zones of the selected Master.

These parameters are for editing the individual Zones that make up a Master. Zone Edit is available only when the Zone Switch is turned on in the

[F2] MEMORY display in the Master Play mode.

Common Edit

[MASTER] → Master selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON]

[F1] NAME

From this display you can create a name for the Master. For instructions on naming, refer to page 53 in the Basic Operation section.

[F2] OTHER

Knob/Slider

From this display you can set which row of Knob/Slider functions will be lit and selected.

Settings:

pan ...........................Selecting the Master lights the [PAN/SEND] lamp, for control over the Pan/Send row.

tone ..........................Selecting the Master lights the [TONE] lamp, for control over the Tone row.

assign.......................Selecting the Master lights the [PAN/SEND] and [TONE] lamps, for control over the Assign row.

MEQofs or partEQ ....Selecting the Master lights the [EQ] lamp, for control over the EQ row. When the Mode is set to Voice, MEQofs is

available. When the Mode is set to Performance, Song, or Pattern, partEQ is available.

MEF ..........................Selecting the Master lights the [ARP FX] and [EQ] lamps, for control over the Master Effects row.

arpFx ........................Selecting the Master lights the [ARP FX] lamp, for control over the Arpeggio FX row.

zone..........................Selecting the Master lights no lamp and automatically calls up the Knob/Slider functions speciﬁcally set for each

respective Zone (page 137). This is available only when the Zone Switch is set to on in the [F2] MEMORY display

in the Master Play mode.

Zone Edit

[MASTER] → Master selection → [EDIT] → Zone selection

[F1] TRANS (Transmit)

From this display you can set how each Zone transmits MIDI messages when you play the keyboard.

TransCh (Transmit Channel) Determines the MIDI Transmit Channel for each Zone.

Settings: 1 ~ 16

TGSwitch

(Tone Generator Switch)

Determines whether or not MIDI data for each Zone is transmitted to the internal tone generator.

Settings: on, off

MIDISwitch Determines whether or not MIDI data for each Zone is transmitted to an external MIDI device.

Settings: on, off

[F2] NOTE

From this display you can set the pitch- and keyboard-related parameters for each Zone — allowing you to set up Zone splits and determine the pitch range for

each Zone.

Octave Determines the amount in octaves by which the range of the Zone is shifted up or down.

Settings: -3 ~ 0 (Default) ~ +3

Transpose Determines the amount in semitones by which the range of the Zone is shifted up or down.

Settings: -11 ~ 0 (Default) ~ +11

NoteLimitH, L (High, Low) Determines the lowest and highest notes of the range for each Zone. The selected Zone will sound only when you

play notes within this range.

Settings: C -2 ~ G8

n You can also set the range directly from the keyboard, by holding down the [INFORMATION] button and pressing the desired

low and high keys.

[F3] TX SW (Transmit Switch)

From this display you can set how the playing of each individual Zone affects transmission of various MIDI messages, such as Control Change and Program

Change messages. When the relevant parameter is set to “on,” playing the selected Zone will transmit the corresponding MIDI messages.

Note that two different display types are provided (see below). Each display type features the same settings in a different format; use the type you feel most

comfortable with.

• Display showing four Zones

• Display showing all parameters for one Zone

Keep in mind that since all the available parameters cannot be simultaneously displayed in the four-Zone display, you will need to use the cursor controls to scroll

the display in order to see and set the other parameters.

Settings:

Bank (TG) Determines whether or not to transmit Bank Select MSB/LSB messages to the internal tone generator.

PC (TG) Determines whether or not to transmit Program Change messages to the internal tone generator.

Bank (MIDI) Determines whether or not to transmit Bank Select MSB/LSB messages to the external tone generator via MIDI.

PC (MIDI) Determines whether or not to transmit Program Change messages to the external tone generator via MIDI.

PB (Pitch Bend) Determines whether or not to transmit Pitch Bend messages to the internal and external tone generator.

Reference

Master Mode

Master Job mode Zone Edit

273

Owner’s Manual

The Master Job mode contains two convenient operations (called “Jobs”) — one letting you initialize (reset) the Master data, and the other letting

you transmit your edited Master data to an external MIDI device or computer.

After setting parameters as required from the selected display, press the [ENTER] button to execute the Job.

MW (Modulation Wheel) Determines whether or not to transmit MIDI messages generated by using the Modulation Wheel to the internal and

external tone generator.

RB (Ribbon Controller) Determines whether or not to transmit MIDI messages generated by using the Ribbon Controller to the internal and

external tone generator.

ChAT (Channel Aftertouch) Determines whether or not to transmit Channel Aftertouch messages generated by pressing the keys to the internal

and external tone generator.

FC1 (Foot Controller1)

FC2 (Foot Controller2)

Determines whether or not to transmit MIDI messages generated by pressing the optional Foot Controller to the

internal and external tone generator.

Sus (Sustain) Determines whether or not to transmit Sustain messages generated by pressing the Footswitch connected to the

SUSTAIN jack to the internal and external tone generator.

FS (Footswitch) Determines whether or not to transmit MIDI messages generated by pressing the Footswitch connected to the

ASSIGNABLE jack to the internal and external tone generator.

Knob Determines whether or not to transmit MIDI messages generated by using the Knobs to the internal and external

tone generator.

Slider Determines whether or not to transmit MIDI messages generated by using the Sliders to the internal and external

tone generator.

BC (Breath Controller) Determines whether or not to transmit MIDI messages generated by using the Breath controller connected to the

BREATH connector to the internal and external tone generator.

Vol (Volume) Determines whether or not to transmit Volume messages to the internal and external tone generator.

Pan Determines whether or not to transmit Pan messages to the internal and external tone generator.

[F4] PRESET

From this display you can make the Voice-related settings for each Zone, in the selected Master program number. In this way, selecting a different Master

automatically calls up a completely different set of Voices and Voice-related settings for the four Zones.

BankMSB,

BankLSB,

PgmChange (Program Change)

Determines the Voice assignment for each Zone in the selected Master.

Settings: Refer to the Voice List in the separate Data List booklet.

Volume Determines the output level of the Voice in each Zone.

Settings: 0 ~ 127

Pan Determines the stereo pan position of the Voice in each Zone.

Settings: L64 (Left) ~ C (Center) ~ R63 (Right)

[F5] KN/CS (Knob/Control Slider)

From this display you can determine which Control Change numbers are used for the Knobs and Sliders for each Zone. These settings are available only when the

Knob/Slider parameter (in the [F2] OTHER display in Common Edit) is set to “zone.”

Settings: off, 1~95

Master Job mode

[MASTER] → [JOB]

[F1] INIT (Initialize)

This function lets you reset (initialize) all Master parameters to their default settings. It also allows you to selectively initialize certain parameters, such as Common

settings, settings for each Zone, and so on — very useful when creating a completely new Master from scratch.

Parameter Types (for Initializing): All, Common, Zone

ALL All settings for the selected Master are initialized.

Common Common parameter settings for the selected Master are initialized.

Zone You can initialize the Zone setting to one of the following three types.

Split

Splits the keyboard range using Zone 1 and Zone 2. “UpperCh” determines the MIDI transmit channel of the upper range of the keyboard, “LowerCh” determines

the MIDI transmit channel of the lower range of the keyboard, and “SplitPoint” determines the note (C2 ~ G8) number which separates the upper range and lower

range of the keyboard.

4Zone Initializes all four Zones.

Layer Lets you layer two parts using Zone 1 and Zone 2. “UpperCh” and “LowerCh” determine the MIDI transmit channels of the two Zones respectively.

Reference

Master Mode

Master Store mode Zone Edit

274

Owner’s Manual

This function lets you store your edited Master to User memory (Flash ROM).

For details, refer to page 137 in the Quick Guide section.

[F4] BULK (Bulk Dump)

This function lets you send all your edited parameter settings for the currently selected Master to a computer or another MIDI device for data archiving. For details,

see page 185.

n In order to execute Bulk Dump, you’ll need to set the correct MIDI Device Number, with the following operation: [UTILITY] → [F5] MIDI → [SF1] CH → DeviceNo.

Master Store mode

[MASTER] → Master selection → [STORE]

Information Displays

275

Owner’s Manual

Appendix

Information Displays

The convenient Information displays let you see at-a-glance some of the more important settings relevant to each mode. Select

the desired mode, then press the [INFORMATION] button to call up the Information display for that mode. To exit from the

display, press the button again (or any other panel button).

Voice mode

Bank

Indicates the Bank/Number (page 60) of the currently

selected Voice.

EL 1234

Indicates the currently selected Voice, on/off status of the four

Elements and mono/poly (page 79) status.

Porta (Portamento)

Indicates the Portamento switch on/off status of the currently

selected Voice.

PB (Pitch Bend)

Indicates the Upper/Lower setting of the Pitch Bend range.

InsA (Insertion A), InsB (Insertion B), Rev (Reverb),

Cho (Chorus)

Indicates the currently selected effect type for each effect

block (page 179).

Performance mode

Bank

Indicates the Bank/Number (page 67) of the currently

selected Performance.

1 (Plug-in board 1), 2 (Plug-in board 2), 3 (Plug-in board 3)

Indicates the installation status of the respective Plug-in board.

The Plug-in board name is displayed at the right of the

corresponding slot number. When PolyExpand (page 265) is set to

on in the Utility mode, “P” is indicated at the left of the slot number.

Ins (Insertion), InsPLG (Plug-in Insertion)

Indicates the Part number to which the Insertion effect is

applied and the Part number to which the Plug-in Insertion

effect is applied (when the PLG100-VH is installed).

Rev (Reverb), Cho (Chorus)

Indicates the currently selected effect type for each effect

block (page 179).

Song mode

● Song Play mode

Indicates the amount of currently unused (available) memory

(DRAM) for song recording.

● Song Mixing mode

PlugInfo/Port (Plug-in board installation status)

Indicates the Plug-in board name and its MIDI port number

page 265) at the right of the slot number. When PolyExpand

(page 265) is set to on in the Utility mode, “P” is indicated at

the left of the slot number.

Ins (Insertion), InsPLG (Plug-in Insertion)

Indicates the Part number to which the Insertion effect is

applied and the Part number to which the Plug-in Insertion

effect is applied (when the PLG100-VH is installed).

Rev (Reverb), Cho (Chorus)

Indicates the currently selected effect type for each effect

block (page 180).

Appendix

Information Displays

276

Owner’s Manual

Pattern mode

● Pattern Play mode

Indicates the amount of currently unused (available) memory

(DRAM) for Pattern Phrase recording.

● Pattern Mixing mode

Same as in the Song Mixing mode.

● Mixing Voice Edit mode

Same as in the Voice mode.

Sampling mode

● Sampling mode

SampleMemory

Indicates the amount of memory used by Sampling.

RecordableSize

Indicates the amount of the available sampling memory

(unused memory) and the available sampling time.

n Keep in mind that 320 KB of memory in the installed DIMMs is needed

for wave (sample) management, even if no actual samples are

contained in memory.

Utility mode

PlugInfo/Port (Plug-in board installation status)

Indicates the Plug-in board name and its MIDI port number

(page 265) at the right of the slot number. When PolyExpand

(page 265) is set to on in the Utility mode, “P” is indicated at

the left of the slot number.

MIDI IN/OUT

Indicates which physical output terminal(s) will be used for

transmitting/receiving MIDI data: MIDI IN/OUT/THRU, USB, or

mLAN (when the optional mLAN16E has been installed).

File mode

Card Free/USB Free

Indicates the amount of currently available (unused) memory

of the SmartMedia inserted to the Card slot or the USB

storage device connected to the MOTIF ES.

Partition

Indicates the mounted partition of the connected USB storage

device.

Current Dir (Current Directory)

Indicates the currently selected directory.

Master mode

Mode

Indicates the mode and program number memorized to the

currently selected Master.

ZoneSwitch

Indicates the on/off status of the Zone switch.

ZoneTCH (Zone Transmit Channel)

Indicates the MIDI transmit channel of each Zone (when the

Zone Switch is set to on).

Remote Control mode

For details, see page 152.

Appendix

Display Messages

277

Owner’s Manual

Display Messages

LCD Indication Explanation

Are you sure ? [YES]/[NO] Conﬁrms whether you want to execute a speciﬁed operation or not. Press [INC/YES] or [DEC/NO] as required.

Arp memory full The internal memory for Arpeggio data is full, preventing storing the recorded sequence data as an Arpeggio.

Arpeggio type stored The current Arpeggio type has been stored to one of the [SF1] - [SF5] buttons.

Bad disk or card. The SmartMedia or USB storage device is unusable. Format the SmartMedia or USB storage device and try again.

Bulk protected. Bulk data was received when RcvBulk was set to “protect.” (See page 264.)

Can’t ﬁnd associated ﬁles. The related voice ﬁle cannot be found when loading an AKAI S1000/S3000 format ﬁle.

Can’t undo OK? [YES]/[NO]

When certain Song/Pattern Jobs are executed, internal memory becomes too full for use of the Undo operation. Press

[INC/YES] if this is OK, or [DEC/NO] to abort the operation. Try again after erasing unwanted Songs, Patterns, or User

phrases.

Choose user phrase.

You have attempted to record a Pattern track to which a preset phrase is assigned. If you wish to use a preset phrase as

raw material for Pattern recording, copy it to a User phrase before recording.

Completed. The speciﬁed load, save, format, or other Job has been completed.

Copy protected. You have attempted to export or save a copy-protected digital audio source.

Device number is off. Bulk data cannot be transmitted/received since the device number is off.

Device number mismatch. Bulk data cannot be transmitted/received since the device numbers don’t match.

Digital in unlocked. Digital input signal of the AIEB2 is unlocked (not properly received or recorded).

Disk or card full.

The SmartMedia or USB storage device is full and no more data can be saved. Use a new SmartMedia or USB storage

device, or make space by erasing unwanted data from the SmartMedia or USB storage device.

Disk or card not ready. A SmartMedia or USB storage device is not properly inserted in or connected to the MOTIF ES.

Disk or card read/write error. An error occurred while reading or writing to/from a SmartMedia or USB storage device.

Disk or card write protected.

The SmartMedia or USB storage device is write protected, or you have attempted to write to a read-only medium such as

CD-ROM.

Effect plug-in is not in slot 1.

The Effect Plug-in board does not work because it has not been installed to slot 1. The Effect Plug-in board should be

installed to slot 1.

Executing... A format operation or Job is being executed. Please wait.

File already exists. A ﬁle having the same name as the one you are about to save already exists.

File not found. The ﬁle of the speciﬁed type cannot be found on the SmartMedia/USB storage device

Folder is too deep. Directories below this level cannot be accessed.

Illegal check box.

No check boxes have been checked in a Sequencer track Job which requires a check box selection. Check the

appropriate check box.

Illegal ﬁle The ﬁle speciﬁed for loading is unusable by the MOTIF ES or cannot be loaded in the current mode.

Illegal ﬁle name. The speciﬁed ﬁle name is invalid. Try entering a different name.

Illegal input. An invalid input or value has been speciﬁed. Check the input method or value.

Illegal measure. An invalid measure number has been speciﬁed in the Song/Pattern mode. Select the measure again.

Illegal phrase number. An invalid phrase number has been speciﬁed in the Pattern mode. Select the phrase again.

Illegal sample data. The sample ﬁle speciﬁed for loading is unusable by the MOTIF ES.

Illegal track number. An invalid track number has been speciﬁed in the Song/Pattern mode. Select the track again.

Incompatible USB device A USB device which cannot be used with the MOTIF ES has been connected to the USB TO DEVICE connector.

Meter mismatch

In the Pattern Job mode, the meter (time signature) of the destination Pattern is different from the meter of the source

Pattern.

MIDI buffer full. Failed to process the MIDI data because too much data was received at one time.

MIDI checksum error. An error occurred when receiving bulk data.

MIDI data error. An error occurred when receiving MIDI data.

Mixing stored In the Song/Pattern mode, the Mixing settings have been loaded from the ﬁle.

Mixing Voice full The Mixing Voice cannot be stored because the number of Voices already stored has exceeded the maximum capacity.

Multi plug-in is not in slot 3.

The Multi-Part Plug-in board does not work because it has not been installed to slot 3. The Multi-Part Plug-in board

should be installed to slot 3.

No data.

When a Song/Pattern Job is executed, the selected track or range contains no data. Select an appropriate track or

range. In addition, this message appears when a Job related to a Mixing Voice cannot be executed because the

speciﬁed Mixing Voice is not available.

No DIMM Memory Installed. An appropriate pair of expansion DIMMs is not properly installed, or the pair is not properly matched (page 289).

No F7 (End of Exc.)

Exclusive data has been entered or changed without the necessary “End of Exclusive” byte (F7). Make sure F7 is included.

Display Messages

278

Owner’s Manual

Appendix

No response from USB device

There is no response from the USB device connected to the USB TO DEVICE terminal.

No sample data. This message appears when a sample-related Job cannot be executed because the speciﬁed sample is not available.

Not empty folder You have attempted to delete a folder that contains data.

Now checking plug-in board. The MOTIF ES is checking the Plug-in board installation status during power-on.

Now loading... (xxxx) Indicates that a ﬁle is being loaded.

Now saving... (xxxx) Indicates that a ﬁle is being saved.

Now scanning auto loaded ﬁles Scanning for the ﬁles speciﬁed for Auto Load.

Now working...

Executing the memory arrangement after ﬁnishing Sampling or canceling the Load/Save operation by pressing the

[EXIT] button.

Overwrite? [YES]/[NO]

A save operation will overwrite data on the SmartMedia/USB storage device, and this message conﬁrms whether it is OK

to continue or not. Press [INC/YES] or [DEC/NO] as required.

Pattern length mismatch. A Pattern Job will result in the length of a Pattern being greater than 256 measures.

Phrase length mismatch A Pattern Job will result in the length of a phrase being greater than 256 measures.

Phrase number overﬂow The maximum number of phrases (256) has been exceeded when recording, executing a Pattern Job, or editing.

Please keep power on.

The data is being written to Flash ROM.

Never attempt to turn off the power while data is being written to Flash ROM. Turning the power off while this message is

shown results in loss of all user data and may cause the system to freeze (due to corruption of data in the Flash ROM).

This may also result in the MOTIF ES being unable to properly start up the next time the power is turned on.

Please stop sequencer. The operation you’ve attempted to execute cannot be done during Song/Pattern playback.

PLG100 not supported. The Plug-in All Bulk Save function does not apply to the PLG100 series boards.

Plug-in1 communication error. The Plug-in board that has been installed to slot 1 does not work.

Plug-in1 type mismatch.

The User Voice created by using the Plug-in board previously installed to slot 1 (but now removed from the slot) has been

selected.

Plug-in2 communication error. The Plug-in board that has been installed to slot 2 does not work.

Plug-in2 type mismatch.

The User Voice created by using the Plug-in board previously installed to slot 2 (but now removed from the slot) has been

selected.

Plug-in3 communication error. The Plug-in board that has been installed to slot 3 does not work.

Plug-in3 type mismatch.

The User Voice created by using the Plug-in board previously installed to slot 3 (but now removed from the slot) has been

selected.

Power on mode stored The setting of the program number automatically selected when turning the power on has been stored.

Receiving MIDI bulk The MOTIF is receiving MIDI bulk data.

Sample freq is too low. The sampling frequency is too low and the Frequency Convert Job cannot be executed.

Sample is protected. The sample cannot be overwritten because it is protected.

Sample is too long. The sample size is too large and the Time Stretch Job cannot be executed.

Sample is too short. The sample length is too short and the Frequency Convert Job cannot be executed.

Sample memory full. The sample memory is full and further sampling operations, Jobs, or load operations cannot be executed.

Scene & Arpeggio type stored The Song Scene and current Arpeggio type has been stored to one of the [SF1] - [SF5] buttons.

Seq memory full.

The internal memory for Sequence data is full, preventing any further operation (such as recording, editing, Job

execution, MIDI reception/transmission, or loading from the SmartMedia/USB storage device). Try again after erasing

unwanted Song, Pattern, or User phrase data.

System memory crashed. Writing data to Flash ROM has failed.

This performance uses user voices.

The performance you have loaded includes User voice data. Check whether the voice you saved exists at the

appropriate User voice bank.

Too many favorites You’ve attempted to assign more than 257 voices to the Favorite category.

Too many ﬁxed notes

When converting the song or pattern data to the Arpeggio data, the amount of different notes in the data to be converted

has exceeded sixteen.

Too many samples. The maximum overall number of samples (8192) has been exceeded.

Transmitting MIDI bulk The MOTIF ES is transmitting MIDI bulk data.

USB connection terminated. Press

[ENTER].

A break in the connection with the USB storage device has occurred because of an abnormal electric current.

Disconnect the USB storage device from the USB TO DEVICE connector, then press the [ENTER] button.

USB device connecting Recognizing the USB storage device connected to the USB TO DEVICE terminal.

USB power consumption exceeded.

The power consumption of the USB storage device connected to the USB TO DEVICE connector exceeds the regulated

value.

USB transmission error An error occurs when communicating with the USB storage device.

Utility stored The settings in the Utility mode have been stored.

LCD Indication Explanation

Appendix

Troubleshooting

279

Owner’s Manual

Troubleshooting

No sound is produced even when playing the keyboard

•Are all four Sliders set to appropriate levels (other than zero or minimum)? ............................................................................................................ page 51

• Check the value of the [UTILITY] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF1] TG → Volume parameter. ...................................................................................... page 260

•

Check the setting of the [UTILITY]

→

[F5] MIDI

→

[SF2] SWITCH

→

LocalCtrl parameter. If this is set to off, the internal tone generator will not sound.

....... page 264

• Is the power of the MOTIF ES and any external equipment connected to the MOTIF ES turned on?

• Have you made all the appropriate level settings – including the Master Volume on the MOTIF ES and the volume settings on any connected external

equipment?

• Is the Foot Controller pressed down (when it is connected to the FOOT CONTROLLER jack)?.............................................................................. page 42

• Is the MOTIF ES properly connected to related external equipment (e.g., ampliﬁer or speaker) via audio cables?

•

When the Voice produces no sound, are the effect and ﬁlter settings appropriate? (Inappropriate ﬁlter cutoff frequency settings can result in no sound.)

...... page 197

• When the Voice produces no sound, are all four Elements properly turned on?...................................................................................................... page 79

• When the Voice produces no sound, is the volume parameter set appropriately in the Voice Common Edit?...................................................... page 190

• When the Voice produces no sound, are the parameters in the Voice Element Edit (e.g., Element Switch, Note Limit, Velocity Limit) set appropriately in

the Voice Common Edit?......................................................................................................................................................................................... page 195

•

When the Performance produces no sound, has a Voice been assigned to each Part? Check this in the [PERFORM] → [F2] VOICE display.

...... page 71

• When the Performance produces no sound, are the Note Limit, volume, and output parameters of each Part set appropriately?........................ page 71

• When playing the keyboard in the Song/Pattern mode produces no sound, check whether or not the Sample Voice or Mixing Voice is assigned to the

current Part. ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................page 102

• When the Song/Pattern playback produces no sound, are any or all of the tracks muted? .................................................................................... page 58

• When the Song/Pattern playback produces no sound, are the output channel of each track in the play mode and the receive channel of each Part in the

Mixing mode set appropriately? .............................................................................................................................................................................page 164

• When the Song/Pattern playback produces no sound, is the volume or output setting of each Part in the Mixing mode set appropriately?....... page 233

• When the Song/Pattern playback produces no sound, is the MIDI ﬁlter set so that note-on messages are blocked in the [SONG] or [PATTERN] →

[UTILITY] → [F3] SEQ → [SF2] FILTER display? .................................................................................................................................................... page 262

Playback continues without stopping

• When the [ARPEGGIO ON/OFF] button is turned on, press it so that its lamp is turned off. .................................................................................. page 19

• When in the Song mode or Pattern mode, press the [■] (Stop) button. .................................................................................................................. page 20

•

When the click sound continues, set the [SONG] or [PATTERN] → [UTILITY] → [F3] SEQ → [SF1] CLICK → Mode parameter to something other than “all.”

..... page 262

Sound level is too low

•Are the MIDI volume or MIDI expression settings too low (by using the Foot Controller)?....................................................................................... page 42

• Is the cutoff frequency of the ﬁlters set too high/low?............................................................................................................................................. page 161

• When the Song/Pattern playback produces a soft sound, is the velocity offset in the Groove display set too low?.............................................. page 114

Distorted sound

•Are the effect settings appropriate?........................................................................................................................................................................ page 177

•Are the ﬁlter settings appropriate? (Excessively high ﬁlter resonance settings can cause distortion.).................................................................. page 161

• Is the MASTER VOLUME set so high that clipping is occurring? ............................................................................................................................. page 18

• Is the volume of each Element in the Voice mode or the volume of each part in the Performance mode or the volume of each track/Part in the Song/

Pattern mode set too high? ..................................................................................................................................................................................... page 213

Sound is cut off

•Are you exceeding the maximum polyphony of the MOTIF ES? ............................................................................................................................ page 162

Only one note sounds at a time

• When this situation occurs in the Voice mode, is the [VOICE] → [F4] PORTA → Mono/Poly parameter set to “mono” ? If you wish to play the chord, set

this parameter to “poly.” ......................................................................................................................................................................................... page 188

• When this situation occurs in the Song mode/Pattern mode, is the Mono/Poly parameter set to “mono” in the [SONG] or [PATTERN] → [MIXING] →

[EDIT] → Part selection → [F1] VOICE → [SF2] MODE display? If you wish to play chords, set this parameter to “poly.” ................................. page 235

Troubleshooting

280

Owner’s Manual

Appendix

Pitch or intervals are wrong

• Is the Master Tune parameter in the [UTILITY] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF1] TG display set to a value other than “0”?.......................................... page 260

• Is the Note Shift parameter in the [UTILITY] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF1] TG display set to a value other than “0”?.............................................. page 260

•

When the Voice produces a wrong pitch, check the Micro Tuning setting in the [VOICE]

→

[EDIT]

→

[COMMON]

→

[F1] GENERAL

→

[SF2] PLY MODE display.

.... page 190

• When the Voice produces a wrong pitch, is the LFO Pitch Modulation Depth in the Voice Edit mode set too high? ............................................ page 201

• When the Performance produces a wrong pitch, is the Note Shift parameter of each Part set to a value other than “0”? ................................... page 218

• When the Performance produces a wrong pitch, is the Detune parameter of each Part set to a value other than “0”? ....................................... page 218

•

When the Song/Pattern playback produces a wrong pitch, is the Note Offset parameter in the Groove display set to a value other than “0”?

.................... page 114

No effect is applied

• Is the [EFFECT BYPASS] button turned off? ........................................................................................................................................................... page 177

• Have the [REVERB] and [CHORUS] knobs been turned fully counter-clockwise (to the minimum)? ...................................................................... page 50

• Have any or all of the Elements’ Effect Output parameters been set to “thru” in the effect setting display in the Voice Edit mode? .................... page 194

• Have any or all of the effect types been set to “thru” or “off”?................................................................................................................................ page 179

•

When this occurs in the Performance mode/Song mode/Pattern mode, check whether the Insertion Switch (INS SW) parameters are set properly or not.

........pages 216, 235

The Edit Indicator appears, even when parameters are not being edited

• Keep in mind that even though the Voice Play mode or Performance Play mode is active, simply moving a Knob or Slider changes the current Voice or

Performance, automatically displaying the Edit indicator. ................................................................................................................................pages 65, 69

• In the Song Mixing mode or Pattern Mixing mode, keep in mind that simply playing back a Song or Pattern may change the Mixing parameters of the

current Song/Pattern, automatically displaying the Edit indicator. ......................................................................................................................... page 104

Arpeggio problems

■ Cannot start the Arpeggio

Check whether the [ARPEGGIO ON/OFF] button is turned on or off. When the Arpeggio doesn’t start even though the button is

turned on, check the following points.

• When the User Arpeggio type is selected, does the currently selected Arpeggio actually contain data?............................................................ page 189

•Are the Arpeggio related parameters such as Note Limit and Velocity Limit set appropriately? ........................................................................... page 191

• When this situation occurs in the Performance mode, check the ArpSwitch parameters for all Parts in the [PERFORM] → [EDIT] → Part selection → [F1]

VOICE → [SF2] MODE display. If parameters of all Parts are turned off, the Arpeggio will not be played back even if the [ARPEGGIO ON/OFF] button is

turned on. ............................................................................................................................................................................................................... page 216

• When this situation occurs in the Song mode/Pattern mode, check the ArpSwitch parameter in the [SONG] or [PATTERN] → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → Part

selection → [F1] VOICE → [SF2] MODE display. If this parameter for the current Part is turned off, Arpeggio playback will not be triggered by your

keyboard performance even if the [ARPEGGIO ON/OFF] button is turned on. .................................................................................................... page 235

■ Cannot stop the Arpeggio

• When Arpeggio playback does not stop even if you release the key, set the Arpeggio Hold parameter to “off.” ................................................ page 191

n For details and a list of the Arpeggio related functions, see page 169.

Song/Pattern problems

■ The Song/Pattern cannot be started even when pressing the [F] (Play) button.

• Does the selected Song or Pattern (phrase) actually contain data? .................................................................................................................pages 57, 59

• Is the Remote Control feature turned on?............................................................................................................................................................... page 147

• Is the MIDI sync parameter set to internal (using internal clock) in the [UTILITY] → [F5] MIDI → [SF3] SYNC display? ..................................... page 264

■ Song/Pattern (Phrase) cannot be recorded.

• Is there enough free memory for recording? The total MOTIF ES memory capacity determines the number of Songs/Patterns (phrases) that can be

recorded. For example, if the memory contains Songs/Patterns (phrases) that use up a large amount of memory, the memory may become full even

though the available Pattern or Song numbers are not all used. ........................................................................................................................... page 275

• In the Pattern Record mode, does the speciﬁed track to which the Phrase is assigned have preset data? Recording cannot be done to a track that

contains preset data. .............................................................................................................................................................................................. page 113

■ Cannot enter the Pattern Job mode even when pressing the [JOB] button in the Pattern mode.

•

Check whether the MOTIF ES is in the Pattern Chain mode or not. If so, exit from the Pattern Chain mode, then press the [JOB] button

. .................. page 115

■ Cannot enter the Pattern Mixing mode even when pressing the [MIXING] button in the Pattern mode.

•

Check whether the MOTIF ES is in the Pattern Chain mode or not. If so, exit from the Pattern Chain mode, then press the [MIXING] button.

........................ page 115

Appendix

Troubleshooting

281

Owner’s Manual

■ The drum sound is wrong or unexpected when changing the transpose value.

• This is normal. Changing the transpose setting while playing a Drum Voice will produce different sounds for the same keys played.

Microphone does not work properly

•

Check the current mode. In the Voice mode and Voice Edit mode, the A/D part which handles the microphone sound cannot be recognized.

......... page 165

• Check whether the Mic/Line parameter is set to “mic” or not in the [UTILITY] → [F2] I/O → [SF1] INPUT display. ............................................. page 261

• Check whether the Gain Knob on the rear panel is set to minimum position or not. ............................................................................................... page 25

Can’t record samples

• If you cannot enter the Sampling mode, check whether DIMMs have been installed or not. In order to enter the Sampling mode and record Samples,

DIMM modules must be installed. .......................................................................................................................................................................... page 289

• Have you exceeded the maximum allowable number of samples (key banks)? ................................................................................................... page 174

• Is there enough sample memory available? ........................................................................................................................................................... page 276

• Is the Sampling Source setting appropriate?..........................................................................................................................................................page 172

• Is the Trigger mode set appropriately? ................................................................................................................................................................... page 175

Plug-in Board problems

■ A Plug-in Voice cannot be selected even if the Plug-in Board has been installed.

• Check whether the SLOT lamp (from SLOT1 - 3) corresponding to the selected PLG button ([PLG1] - [PLG3]) is turned on or off. .................... page 21

• If the User bank is selected in the [VOICE] → [F2] BANK display, select the preset bank. ................................................................................. page 188

• Check whether the PLG which corresponds to the PLG100-XG slot is selected or not. The Voice on the PLG100-XG cannot be selected in the Voice

mode or Performance mode. ................................................................................................................................................................................. page 163

• Check whether the PLG which corresponds to the PLG100-VH slot is selected or not. The PLG100-VH contains no Voices for selection, since it is an

Effect Plug-in Board. ................................................................................................................................................................................................ page 74

■ Plug-in board does not work.

• Is the lamp of the corresponding slot number to which the Plug-in board has been installed lit? ........................................................................... page 21

• Has the PLG100-VH been installed to slot 2 or 3? (The PLG100-VH should be installed to slot 1.) ........................................................................ page 78

• Has the PLG100-XG been installed to slot 1 or 2? (The PLG100-XG should be installed to slot 3.)........................................................................ page 77

Computer/MIDI instrument problems

■ Data communication between the computer and the MOTIF ES does not work properly.

• Check whether the Port setting on the computer is appropriate or not.

• Check whether the MIDI IN/OUT parameter is set properly in the [UTILITY] → [F5] MIDI → [SF4] OTHER display. Set this parameter to “USB” when

using a USB cable to connect to the computer. Set this parameter to “mLAN” when using an IEEE 1394 cable to connect to the computer.

Set this parameter to “MIDI” when using MIDI cables to connect to the computer. .............................................................................................. page 265

■ Data communication between the MIDI instrument and the MOTIF ES does not work properly.

• Check whether the MIDI IN/OUT parameter is set to “MIDI” or not in the [UTILITY] → [F5] MIDI → [SF4] OTHER display. ................................ page 265

■ The MOTIF ES does not sound properly even when playing back the song data on the computer or the MIDI instrument

connected to the MOTIF ES.

• Make sure to set the MOTIF ES to the Song mode or Pattern mode. The Voice mode or Performance mode may not produce the proper sound even

when playing back the Song data on the MIDI instrument or the computer connected to the MOTIF ES. ............................................................. page 36

■ MIDI bulk data transmission/reception does not work properly.

•

When reception does not work properly, is the Receive Bulk parameter set to “protect” in the [UTILITY]

→

[F5] MIDI

→

[SF2] SWITCH display?

.................. page 264

• When transmission does not work properly, is the device number of the MIDI instrument connected to the MOTIF ES set to match the DeviceNo.

parameter in the [UTILITY] → [F5] MIDI → [SF1] CH display? ............................................................................................................................. page 263

Can’t save data to the SmartMedia card or the USB storage

• Is the SmartMedia/USB storage device being used write protected? (Write-protect should be set to off for saving data.).................................... page 28

• Is the SmartMedia/USB storage device being used properly formatted? .............................................................................................................. page 268

Can’t enter the Edit mode

• Is the Category Search function turned on? After exiting from the Category Search function, press the [EDIT] button. ....................................... page 62

• Is the MOTIF ES in the File mode? After exiting from the File mode, press the [EDIT] button. ............................................................................. page 266

Installing Optional Hardware

282

Owner’s Manual

Appendix

Installing Optional Hardware

Available devices

The following optional devices can be installed to the MOTIF ES.

Installation locations

Installation Precautions

Before installing the optional hardware, make sure you have a Philips screwdriver and ample space to work. Protective cushions

or supports for the instrument may also be needed.

• Before beginning installation, switch off the power to the instrument and connected peripherals, and unplug them from the power outlet. Then remove all

cables connecting the instrument to other devices. (Leaving the power cord connected while working can result in electric shock. Leaving other cables

connected can interfere with work.) Installation or removal of any devices should be started ONLY after the instrument (and the optional hardware)

returns to normal room temperature.

• Be careful not to drop any screws inside the instrument during installation (this can be prevented by keeping the optional units and cover away from the

instrument while attaching). If this does happen, be sure to remove the screw(s) from inside the unit before turning the power on. Loose screws inside

the instrument can cause improper operation or serious damage. If you are unable to retrieve a dropped screw, consult your Yamaha dealer for advice.

• Install the optional units carefully as described in the procedure below. Improper installation can cause shorts which may result in irreparable damage

and pose a ﬁre hazard.

• Do not disassemble, modify, or apply excessive force to board areas and connectors on optional units. Bending or tampering with boards and

connectors may lead to electric shock, ﬁre, or equipment failures.

• Before handling the optional units, you should brieﬂy touch the metal surface to which the optional unit cover is attached (or other such metallic area \ be

careful of any sharp edges) with your bare hand so as to drain off any static charge from your body. Note that even a slight amount of electrostatic

discharge may cause damage to these components.

• It is recommended that you wear gloves to protect your hands from metallic projections on optional units and other components. Touching leads or

connectors with bare hands may cause ﬁnger cuts, and may also result in poor electrical contact or electrostatic damage.

• Handle the optional units with care. Dropping or subjecting them to any kind of shock may cause damage or result in a malfunction.

• Be careful of static electricity. Static electricity discharge can damage the IC chips on the Plug-in board. Before you handle the optional Plug-in board, to

reduce the possibility of static electricity, touch the metal parts other than the painted area or a ground wire on the devices that are grounded.

• Do not touch the exposed metal parts in the circuit board. Touching these parts may result in a faulty contact.

• When moving a cable, be careful not to let it catch on the circuit Plug-in board. Forcing the cable in anyway may cut the cable, cause damage, or result in

a malfunction.

• Be careful not to misplace any of the screws since all of them are used.

• Do not use any screws other than what are installed on the instrument.

● Plug-in Boards ● AIEB 2 or mLAN16E ● DIMM

Up to three boards can be installed.

MOTIF ES6 MOTIF ES7 MOTIF ES8

MOTIF ES6 MOTIF ES7

MOTIF ES8

● Plug-in Boards

● AIEB2, mLAN16E, DIMM

Plug-in Board

cover

Plug-in

Board cover

Plug-in

Board cover

Bottom cover for

optional units

Rear cover for the

AIEB2 or mLAN16E

Rear cover for the

AIEB2 or mLAN16E

Rear cover for the

AIEB2 or mLAN16E

Bottom cover for

optional units

Bottom cover for

optional units

WARNING

CAUTION

Installing Optional Hardware

283

Owner’s Manual

Appendix

Optional Plug-in Board Installation

A variety of optional Plug-in boards sold separately let you expand the voice library of your instrument. For details about the

Plug-in Board line up which can be used with the MOTIF ES, see page 74.

The MOTIF ES provides three slots on the rear panel for Plug-in Boards, allowing you to install up to three boards for

simultaneous use.

n The Vocal Harmony Plug-in board (PLG100-VH) can be installed only to slot 1.

n The Multi part Plug-in board (PLG-100XG) can be installed only to slot 3.

n The Single part Plug-in board can be installed to any of three slots.

Installing the Plug-in Board

1 Turn the power of the MOTIF ES off, and disconnect the

AC power cord. Also, make sure to disconnect the

MOTIF ES from any connected external devices.

2 Remove the large screw from the expansion bay cover

on the rear panel using a Phillips screwdriver.

Keep the removed screw in a safe place. It will be used when re-

attaching the cover to the instrument.

3 Remove the ribbon cables that are to be connected to

the Plug-in board from the inside of the MOTIF ES.

The slots are assigned to the color-coded cables as

follows:

4 Insert the board along the guide rails about two-thirds

of the way inside the MOTIF ES, with the connector side

face up and toward you.

GREEN

YELLOW

ORANGE

Plug-in SLOT

OUTPUT

ASSIGNABLE

OUTPUT

L MONO

PHONES

DINPUT

GAIN

GREEN

YELLOW

ORANGE

Plug-in SLOT

OUTPUT

ASSIGNABLE

OUTPUT

L MONO

PHONES

DINPUT

GAIN

MOTIF ES6 / MOTIF ES7

GREEN

YELLOW

ORANGE

Plug-in SLOT

GREEN

YELLOW

ORANGE

Plug-in SLOT

MOTIF ES8

OUTPUT

ASSIGNABLE

OUTPUT

L MONO

PHONES

INPUT

GAIN

GREEN

YELLOW

ORANGE

Plug-in SLOT

Slot 3

Slot 2

Slot 1

Cable for Slot 3

(Green)

Slot 1–Orange

Slot 2–Yellow

Slot 3–Green

Cable for Slot 2

(Yellow)

Cable for Slot 1

(Orange)

OUTPUT

ASSIGNABLE

OUTPUT

L MONO

PHONES

D INPUT

GAIN

GREEN

YELLOW

ORANGE

Plug-in SLOT

Slot 3

Slot 2

Slot 1

Securely insert the board into the appropriate slot,

taking care that the board isn’t jammed between slots.

Appendix

Installing Optional Hardware

284

Owner’s Manual

5 With the board still protruding slightly from the

expansion bay, bring the cable end around and connect

it to the board.

Make sure to connect the proper cable, matching the color

of the cable to the slot used. Also, take care not to pull too

strongly on the cable as you connect it to the board.

n The Vocal Harmony Plug-in board (PLG100-VH) can be installed only

to slot 1.

The Multi part Plug-in board (PLG-100XG) can be installed only to slot 3.

6 Insert the Plug-in board the rest of the way into the

expansion bay.

Carefully put the ribbon cable back into the MOTIF ES,

making sure that no part of the cable sticks out of the

instrument.

7 Replace the cover with the screw you removed in step 2

above.

8 Check that the installed Plug-in board is functioning

properly.

After connecting the AC power cord to the MOTIF ES, turn

on the power.

A message appears indicating that the installed Plug-in

Board is being checked. The main display then appears

and the corresponding slot indicator at the right top of the

front panel lights. This indicates that the board has been

successfully installed.

If the cable is not connected properly (refer to the notes

above) or ﬁrmly, the indicator will not light.

OUTPUT

ASSIGNABLE

OUTPUT

L MONO

PHONES

INPUT

GAIN

GREEN

YELLOW

ORANGE

Plug-in SLOT

Plug-in Connector Press the connectors together until

the two notches lock into the sockets.

Notch

Connector from MOTIF ES Plug-in board

OUTPUT

ASSIGNABLE

OUTPUT

L MONO

PHONES

INPUT

GAIN

GREEN

YELLOW

ORANGE

Plug-in SLOT

FAVORITES

DRUM KITS

A. PIANO KEYBOARD ORGAN

PRE 5 PRE 6

PRE 1 PRE 2 PRE 3 PRE 4

MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER

Integrated Sampling Sequencer /

Modular Synthesis Plug-in System /

Real-time External Control Surface

USER 1

GUITAR/

PLUCKED

SYN LEAD

ABCDEFG

SECTION

GROUP

CATEGORY

BANK

SYN PAD/

CHOIR

SYN COMP

CHROMATIC

PERCUSSION

DRUM/

PERCUSSION

SE MUSICAL FX COMBI

USER 2

STRINGS

PLG 1

SLOT 1 SLOT 2 SLOT 3

BRASS

PLG 2

REED/PIPE

PLG 3

BASS

Slot indicator lit

In this example, a Plug-in board has

been installed to slot 1.

Installing Optional Hardware

285

Owner’s Manual

Appendix

Optional AIEB2 or mLAN16E Installation

By installing an optional mLAN expansion board (mLAN16E) or an I/O expansion board (AIEB2), you can increase the input/output

capability and interfacing options of the MOTIF ES.

Installing the AIEB2

1 Turn the power of the MOTIF ES off, and disconnect the

AC power cord. Also, make sure to disconnect the

MOTIF ES from any connected external devices.

2 Turn over the MOTIF ES so that the keyboard faces

down, giving you direct access to the underside of the

instrument.

To protect the Knobs, Wheels and Sliders from damage,

place the keyboard so the four corners are supported by

something that provides sufﬁcient support like magazines

or cushions.

Since the instrument — particularly the MOTIF ES8 — is very heavy, this

procedure should not be done alone, but by two or three people.

3 Remove the cover from the bottom.

With the rear panel of the instrument facing you, remove the

screws from the cover and slide the cover away to remove

it. (The MOTIF ES6 and MOTIF ES7 have seven screws,

while the MOTIF ES8 has ﬁve.) On the MOTIF ES6/7, slide

the cover away from you (toward the front of the instrument,

as shown). On the MOTIF ES8, slide the cover to the right.

Keep the removed screws in a safe place. They will be used when re-

attaching the cover to the instrument after installing the AIEB2.

MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER

Place supports at all four corners, taking care

not to touch the Knobs, Wheels and Sliders.

View of the keyboard

from the bottom

CAUTION

MOTIF ES6 / MOTIF ES7

MOTIF ES8

Bottom

↓ Rear side

Slide the cover

away to remove.

Bottom

Slide the cover

away to remove.

↓ Rear side

Bottom

↓ Rear side

Bottom

↓ Rear side

Appendix

Installing Optional Hardware

286

Owner’s Manual

4 Remove the three screws from the rear cover while

holding it from inside the MOTIF ES with your left hand.

Keep the removed screws in a safe place. They will be used when

re-attaching the cover to the instrument after installing the AIEB2.

5 Remove the AIEB2 power cables from the hook shaped

cable clip in the MOTIF ES.

6 Remove the AIEB2 from its package.

The AIEB2 has one ﬂat ribbon cable and two power cables.

Since these two power cables are used for the main body

and are not needed when installing to the MOTIF ES, you

can remove them from the AIEB2.

7 Connect the ﬂat ribbon cable coming from AIEB2 to the

circuit board of the MOTIF ES.

Be careful to connect the cable in the proper direction as

shown.

Rear side of the

MOTIF ES

MOTIF ES6 / MOTIF ES7

MOTIF ES8

↑ Top (keyboard side) of the MOTIF ES

Underside

↓ Rear panel

Unlatch the cable clip by

pulling out the tab as

shown. Replace the clip

after pulling out the

power cable.

↑ Top (keyboard side)

of the MOTIF ES

Underside

↓ Rear panel

AIEB2

Remove the two

power cables.

AIEB2

Flat ribbon cable

of the AIEB2

Align the connectors

as shown.

Connector on the circuit

board of the MOTIF ES

↓ Rear panel

Installing Optional Hardware

287

Owner’s Manual

Appendix

8 Connect the power cable coming from MOTIF ES to the

AIEB2.

Connect the 3-pin cable to the CN3 connector of the

AIEB2, and the 4-pin cable to the CN1 connector.

9 Fasten the AIEB2 to the MOTIF ES.

Flip the unit over, so that the bottom of the plate can be

seen, and that each connector section of the AIEB2 can be

seen from the back (rear) side of MOTIF ES. Supporting the

unit with one hand, attach it to the rear of the MOTIF ES with

the three screws you removed in step 4. If you start

replacing the screws from the center screw, it will be easy

to replace the remaining screws.

10Let the ribbon cable fall into place between the AIEB2

and the circuit board of the MOTIF ES.

11Re-install the cover you removed in step #3, in reverse

order.

Connect the 4-pin

cable to the CN1

connector

Connect the 3-pin

cable to the CN3

connector

↓ Rear panel of

the MOTIF ES

* Make sure to properly match the cables and connectors.

Avoid applying excessive force when connecting.

Flip over the AIEB2 taking care not to

bend or damage the ﬂat ribbon cable.

If you start replacing the

screws from the center screw,

it will be easy to replace the

remaining screws.

Bottom of

the AIEB2

AIEB2

↓ Rear panel

Slide the ﬂat ribbon cable in

the space between the

MOTIF ES and the AIEB2.

Underside of the MOTIF ES

↓ Rear panel

Appendix

Installing Optional Hardware

288

Owner’s Manual

Installing the mLAN16E

1~4

Using the same procedure as in steps 1 - 4 of “Installing

the AIEB2” above, remove the cover on the underside

of the MOTIF ES, then remove the cover of the mLAN-I/

O expansion bay on the rear panel.

5 Remove the mLAN16E from its package.

6 Insert the connector on the other end of the ﬂat ribbon

cable to the circuit board of the MOTIF ES.

7 Fasten the mLAN16E to the MOTIF ES.

Flip the unit over, so that each connector section of the

mLAN16E can be seen from the back side of MOTIF ES.

Supporting the unit with one hand, attach it to the rear of

the MOTIF ES with the two screws you removed in step #4,

as shown below.

8 Separate the cover you removed in step #4 into two

parts (A and B shown below), then attach part A to the

rear panel of the MOTIF ES, covering the empty space

left by the installation of the mLAN16E.

9 Let the ﬂat ribbon cable fall into place between the

mLAN16E and the circuit board of the MOTIF ES.

10Re-install the cover you removed in step #3, in reverse

order.

mLAN16E

Underside of

mLAN16E

↓ Rear panel of the MOTIF ES

Flip over the mLAN16E and

fasten it to the MOTIF ES.

↓ Rear panel of the MOTIF ES

Remove the screw to separate

the cover into two parts.

Installing Optional Hardware

289

Owner’s Manual

Appendix

Optional DIMM Installation

This section explains how to install DIMM memory modules to the MOTIF ES.

Compatible DIMMs

The MOTIF ES does not necessarily support all commercially

available DIMMs. Yamaha cannot guarantee operation of

DIMMs that you purchase. Before purchasing DIMMs, please

consult your Yamaha dealer, or an authorized Yamaha

distributor (see list at end of the Owner’s Manual) for advice,

or see the following page:

http://www.yamahasynth.com/

DIMM Type and DIMM Conﬁguration

•Yamaha recommends that you purchase DIMMs that

conform to the JEDEC* standard. Please be aware,

however, that conformance to this standard does not

constitute a guarantee that the DIMMs will operate correctly

on the MOTIF ES.

* JEDEC (Joint Electron Device Engineering Council) sets standards for

terminal conﬁgurations within electronic devices.

• Use only 168-pin DIMMs of 64, 128 or 256 MB capacity

(synchronized DRAM; PC100 or PC133).

• When installing DIMMs, make sure to install them in a

matched pair of the same capacity. You cannot install only

one module and leave the second memory socket open.

Also make sure each DIMM in the pair is of the same

manufacturer and the same type. DIMMs of different

makers and conﬁgurations may not work together.

• When purchasing DIMMs, make sure that the DIMM design

does not utilize more than 18 memory chips per module.

(DIMMs comprised of more than 18 chips do not operate

correctly on the MOTIF ES.)

DIMM Installation

1~3

Use the same operation as in “Installing the AIEB2.”

4 Insert the two DIMMs into the DIMM sockets.

5 Re-install the cover you removed in step #3, in reverse

order (page 285).

Check that the installed DIMMs are functioning properly.

Set the MOTIF ES right-side up, and connect the power

cord to the rear-panel AC INLET jack and an AC outlet. Turn

on the power, go to the SAMPLING display by pressing the

[INTEGRATED SAMPLING] button, and press the

[INFORMATION] button (page 276). If the DIMMs have

been installed properly, the appropriate available memory

size is indicated in the display.

n If the DIMMs have not been installed properly, the MOTIF ES may

freeze when you press the [INTEGRATED SAMPLING] button. If

this occurs, turn the power off, perform the instructions above

again, and make sure to install the DIMMs ﬁrmly in step #4.

Removing DIMMs

64MB x 2 = 128MB 128MB x 2 = 256MB

256MB x 2 = 512MB

168-pin DIMMs

Notch for alignment

Ejector

lever

Location for DIMM installation

DIMM sockets

Underside of the MOTIF ES

Installing the DIMM modules to the sockets

Make sure that the DIMM module is

aligned correctly before you install it.

Insert the DIMM vertically

in the socket.

Press it in ﬁrmly until it

“snaps” or locks in place.

↓ Rear panel

Press the ejector lever

until the DIMM unlocks.

Pull the DIMM vertically

out of the socket.

Appendix

Glossary

290

Owner’s Manual

Glossary

This section explains in detail various words and terms that were not covered in the manual. Another resource for looking up

unfamiliar technical terms related to music, synthesis and audio is a special website we’ve prepared, the Glossary for Electronic

Musical Instruments. If you come across a musical or technical term you don’t know, click on the following URL.

■ Glossary for Electronic Musical Instruments

http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/word/index.html (This URL and title may be changed without notice.)

Audition

The function or process of hearing the edited sample (in the

Sampling function).

Channel

There are two types of channels: MIDI channels, which are used to

transmit MIDI messages, and audio channels, which are used to

send audio signals. You can set the MIDI channel in the display of the

MOTIF ES.

Clock

[1] A unit of note resolution for MIDI Sequence data.

The sequencer determines the playback position of the Song or

Pattern (MIDI sequence data) by using the units Measure, Beat,

and Clock.

[2] Also referred to as “MIDI Clock” or “Timing Clock” deﬁned as

System Realtime Message in MIDI.

This message is transmitted at a ﬁxed interval (24 times per 1/4

note) to synchronize connected MIDI instruments.

On the MOTIF ES, the Utility mode lets you select whether the

instrument’s internal clock will be used as the Timing Clock, or

external Timing Clock messages received via MIDI IN will be

used.

Common

This edit related term refers to the editing of parameters that affect all

Elements or Parts of a program. For each program, this term is used

as listed below.

• Normal Voice.................Common Edit and Element Edit

• Plug-in Voice .................Common Edit and Element Edit

• Drum Voice....................Common Edit and Key Edit

• Performance .................Common Edit and Part Edit

• Song Mixing ..................Common Edit and Part Edit

• Pattern Mixing ..............Common Edit and Part Edit

• Master ...........................Common Edit and Zone Edit

Destination

The MOTIF ES provides the following three types of destination.

[1] In copy operations, this refers to the location to which the original

“source” data or ﬁle is to be copied.

[2] In sampling operations, this refers to the internal memory area to

which the external audio “source” is to be recorded.

[3] In the Controller Set function, this refers to the parameter adjusted

by the controller deﬁned as “Source.”

Documenttranscriptie

SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION PRODUCT SAFETY MARKINGS: Yamaha electronic products may Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small non-rechargable have either labels similar to the graphics shown below or molded/stamped facsimiles of these graphics on the enclosure. The explanation of these graphics appears on this page. Please observe all cautions indicated on this page and those indicated in the safety instruction section. battery which (if applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of battery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes necessary, contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN Warning: Do not attempt to recharge, disassemble, or incinerate this type of battery. Keep all batteries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regulated by applicable laws. Note: In some areas, the servicer is required by law to return the defective parts. However, you do have the option of having the servicer dispose of these parts for you. Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged beyond CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK. DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. repair, or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to lack of knowledge relating to how a function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer before requesting service. The exclamation point within the equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within the equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electrical shock. NAME PLATE LOCATION: The graphic below indicates the location of the name plate. The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase. MOTIF ES6 POWER ON OFF USB AC INLET mLAN I/O EXPANSION TO DEVICE THRU TO HOST MOTIF ES7 IMPORTANT NOTICE: All Yamaha electronic products are tested and approved by an independent safety testing laboratory in order that you may be sure that when it is properly installed and used in its normal and customary manner, all foreseeable risks have been eliminated. DO NOT modify this unit or commission others to do so unless specifically authorized by Yamaha. Product performance and/or safety standards may be diminished. Claims filed under the expressed warranty may be denied if the unit is/has been modified. Implied warranties may also be affected. SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update existing units. ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the following: 92-469- ➀ (rear) POWER ON OFF AC INLET mLAN I/O EXPANSION MOTIF ES8 POWER ON OFF AC INLET Model Serial No. Purchase Date mLAN I/O EXPANSION MIDI OUT IN BREATH AS IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS INFORMATION RELATING TO PERSONAL INJURY, ELECTRICAL SHOCK, AND FIRE HAZARD POSSIBILITIES HAS BEEN INCLUDED IN THIS LIST. WARNING- When using any electrical or electronic product, basic precautions should always be followed. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Read all Safety Instructions, Installation Instructions, Special Message Section items, and any Assembly Instructions found in this manual BEFORE making any connections, including connection to the main supply. 2. Do not attempt to service this product beyond that described in the user-maintenance instructions. All other servicing should be referred to qualified service personnel. 3. Main Power Supply Verification: Yamaha products are manufactured specifically for the supply voltage in the area where they are to be sold. If you should move, or if any doubt exists about the supply voltage in your area, please contact your dealer for supply voltage verification and (if applicable) instructions. The required supply voltage is printed on the name plate. For name plate location, please refer to the graphic found in the Special Message Section of this manual. 4. DANGER-Grounding Instructions: This product must be grounded and therefore has been equipped with a three pin attachment plug. If this product should malfunction, the ground pin provides a path of low resistance for electrical current, reducing the risk of electrical shock. If your wall socket will not accommodate this type plug, contact an electrician to have the outlet replaced in accordance with local electrical codes. Do NOT modify the plug or change the plug to a different type! 5. WARNING: Do not place this product or any other objects on the power cord or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connecting cords of any kind. The use of an extension cord is not recommended! If you must use an extension cord, the minimum wire size for a 25’ cord (or less) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller the AWG number, the larger the current handling capacity. For longer extension cords, consult a local electrician. 6. Ventilation: Electronic products, unless specifically designed for enclosed installations, should be placed in locations that do not interfere with proper ventilation. If instructions for enclosed installations are not provided, it must be assumed that unobstructed ventilation is required. 8. This product was NOT designed for use in wet/damp locations and should not be used near water or exposed to rain. Examples of wet / damp locations are; near a swimming pool, spa, tub, sink, or wet basement. 9. This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a cart,rack, or stand that is recommended by the manufacturer. If a cart, rack, or stand is used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory product. 10. The power supply cord (plug) should be disconnected from the outlet when electronic products are to be left unused for extended periods of time. Cords should also be disconnected when there is a high probability of lightning and/or electrical storm activity. 11. Care should be taken that objects do not fall and liquids are not spilled into the enclosure through any openings that may exist. 12. Electrical/electronic products should be serviced by a qualified service person when: a. The power supply cord has been damaged; or b. Objects have fallen, been inserted, or liquids have been spilled into the enclosure through openings; or c. The product has been exposed to rain; or d. The product does not operate, exhibits a marked change in performance; or e. The product has been dropped, or the enclosure of the product has been damaged. 13. This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for a long period of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist. IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before damage occurs. 14. Some Yamaha products may have benches and/or accessory mounting fixtures that are either supplied as a part of the product or as optional accessories. Some of these items are designed to be dealer assembled or installed. Please make sure that benches are stable and any optional fixtures (where applicable) are well secured BEFORE using. Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only. No other uses are recommended. 7. Temperature considerations: Electronic products should be installed in locations that do not seriously contribute to their operating temperature. Placement of this product close to heat sources such as; radiators, heat registers etc., should be avoided. PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL 92-469-3 PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING * Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference. WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/AC power adaptor Water warning • Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument. • Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it. • Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into any openings. • Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands. • Use only the supplied power cord/plug. • Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over it. Fire warning • Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning item may fall over and cause a fire. If you notice any abnormality Do not open • This instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. Do not attempt to disassemble or modify the internal components in any way. • If the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. CAUTION Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/Power cord Location • Always connect the three-pin attachment plug to a properly grounded power source. (For more information about the main power supply, see page 26.) • When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it. • Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms. • Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the outlet. (2)-8 • Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal components. • Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise. • Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. • Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables. • Do not place objects in front of the instrument’s air vent, since this may prevent adequate ventilation of the internal components, and possibly result in the instrument overheating. 1/2 Connections Saving data • Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. Maintenance • When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths. Saving and backing up your data • DRAM data (see page 186) is lost when you turn off the power to the instrument. Save the data to a SmartMedia/USB storage device. • Never attempt to turn off the power while data is being written to Flash ROM (while an “Executing...” or “Please keep power on” message is shown). Turning the power off in this state results in loss of all user data and may cause the system to freeze (due to corruption of data in the Flash ROM). This means that this synthesizer may not be able to start up properly, even when turning the power on next time. Backing up the SmartMedia/external media Handling caution • Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the key cover or instrument. • Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the panel or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • To protect against data loss through media damage, we recommend that you save your important data onto two SmartMedia/external media. • Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard. • Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors. • Do not operate the instrument for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician. Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed. Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use. (2)-8 2/2 Introduction Introduction Congratulations and thank you for your purchase of the Yamaha MOTIF ES6/MOTIF ES7/MOTIF ES8 Music Production Synthesizer! You now own what is perhaps the best-sounding, most versatile, and certainly most powerful synthesizer and total music production instrument on the planet. We strove to put virtually all our synthesizer technology and music making know-how into one instrument — and we succeeded. The new MOTIF ES not only gives you the latest and greatest sounds and rhythms (as well as the ability to create and sample your own), it gives you powerful, easy-to-use tools for playing, combining and controlling these dynamic sounds/rhythms — in real time, as you perform! Take time to look through this manual carefully. It’s packed with important information on how to get the most from this amazing instrument. Dive in now and enjoy! Accessories The following items have been included with your MOTIF ES 6/MOTIF ES 7/MOTIF ES 8. Check to see that you have everything listed here. • AC Power cord • CD-ROM x 3 • Owner’s Manual (this book) • Data List • Installation Guide About the included CD-ROMs The following three CD-ROMs are included in the MOTIF ES package. • TOOLS for MOTIF ES6/MOTIF ES7/MOTIF ES8 This CD-ROM contains special software for use with this instrument. It includes the latest version of SQ01 (V2), a full-featured audio/MIDI sequencer/mixer for comprehensive music production, Voice Editor, which gives you comprehensive and intuitive sound editing tools, and Multi Part Editor, for editing the Mixing parameters of Songs and Patterns. For details, see the separate Installation Guide or the online manuals included with the software. • Sound Library for MOTIF ES6/MOTIF ES7/MOTIF ES8 This CD-ROM contains various types of data for use with the MOTIF ES. For information on the contents, refer to the List file in the CD-ROM. You can use the data by loading it in the File mode. Insert the CD-ROM into a CD-ROM drive* connected to the USB TO DEVICE connector via USB and execute the Load operation. Alternately, you can access the data from a USB storage device (such as a hard disk) or a SmartMedia card (inserted to the CARD slot) to which the data has been copied. For details about how to load each type of data, refer to the following pages. • Voice • Pattern • WAV file extension: W7V extension: W7P extension: WAV page 87 page 132 pages 100 and 109 * For information on what USB devices (model name, etc.) can be used with the MOTIF ES, see page 29. n If you are loading audio WAV files, make sure that DIMM modules are installed to the imt. (For DIMM compatibility information, see page 289.) Also, when loading Voice data from this CD-ROM, make sure to install DIMM modules, because the Voice data contains User Waveforms. If DIMM modules are not installed, an error message appears when you try to load a WAV file or Voice data from this CD-ROM. • TOOLS for Modular Synthesis Plug-in System This CD-ROM contains a variety of computer applications, including the Voice Editor for editing Voices of the optional Plug-in Boards. For more information, refer to the “Readme” file in the CD-ROM. • Copying of commercially available music sequence data and/or digital audio files for any purpose other than your own personal use is strictly prohibited. • This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has license to use others' copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software, styles files, MIDI files, WAVE data and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of copyright has legal consequences. DON'T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES. 6 Owner’s Manual Main Features Main Features Wide range of dynamic and authentic voices. Use the Category Search function to quickly call up the sounds you want, based on their instrument type. page 60 Performance mode lets you use four different voices together — in layers or in a keyboard split. page 67 Integrated Sampling Sequencer — seamlessly combines audio and MIDI recording. page 172 • Full Sample recording and editing features, and up to 512MB of sample memory (with optional DIMM modules). • Wide data compatibility lets you load AIFF and WAV files, as well as samples and program/voice data from other popular samplers, such as the Yamaha Aseries. • Convenient Resampling function lets you sample the sound of the MOTIF itself directly. Play your own melodies, riffs and rhythms — and use them as samples. • Unique Slice feature automatically chops up your rhythms and riffs into their individual beats and notes. This lets you manipulate the component parts of your sample loops as MIDI data, and gives you the power to easily change tempo and even the rhythmic feel, without disturbing the pitch or sound quality. Extensive effect processing, with Reverb (20 types), Chorus (49 types), eight separate Insertion blocks each of which has two blocks (total 116 types), Master Effect (8 types), and a digital equalizer (3-band Part EQ and 5-band Master EQ). Comprehensive real-time control with four knobs and four sliders — letting you adjust filter, levels, effects, EG, and more, while you play. Pattern mode functions let you craft different rhythmic sections and riffs as individual elements — which you can easily and intuitively combine in real time to create full rhythm tracks. In addition to being able to create User voices in the Voice mode, you can create special Mixing voices for Songs and Patterns. These voices can be edited and stored in the Song/Pattern mode, making it exceptionally easy and convenient to create voices for use with Songs and Patterns. The versatile Arpeggio feature automatically plays a variety of sequenced phrases in response to the keys you play. This function is especially powerful with drum voices — letting you easily call up various rhythm patterns at the touch of a key, and providing instant inspiration for song creation and performance. When used with normal voices, the Arpeggio phrase changes harmonically and melodically with the chords you play, giving you intuitive control over the patterns as you compose or perform. Arpeggios can be triggered not only according to the keys you play, but also by how strongly you play them — for even greater performance power. page 289 pages 100, 270 Once you’ve collected all the audio samples, loops, MIDI data, and patterns you need for your song, use Pattern Chain to arrange the pieces in real time. This hands-on approach makes it easier than ever to come up with great ideas and amazing songs. Song Scene is another powerful tool that lets you take “snapshots” of the sequencer track settings (such as pan, volume, track mute and so on). Then, during playback or recording, simply switch among the Scenes for instant, dynamic changes. Master mode — for using the MOTIF ES as a master keyboard controller (with independent Zones), and for easily reconfiguring the instrument between Voice/ Performance play and Song/Pattern play in live applications. Exceptionally easy-to-understand interface with twotiered operation buttons: [F1] - [F6] and [SF1] - [SF5] page 99 page 107 page 177 page 50 page 106 Remote Control — for operating your favorite sequencing software from the panel controls. Mute tracks, control transport (Play, Stop, Record, etc.), mix both MIDI and audio tracks (up to 16) with this instrument’s knobs and sliders, pan the tracks, control EQ, and tweak effect sends — all without ever touching the mouse. Three Modular Synthesis Plug-in System slots let you upgrade the MOTIF ES with a completely new synthesizer or sound-processing engine. These Plug-in boards give you more voices, more effects, more polyphony and more instrument parts. Plus, special Plug-in voices have already been programmed and stored to the MOTIF ES, ready to be played as soon as you install the proper board. A full rear panel of input/output connections provides maximum interfacing flexibility. These include Assignable Outputs, A/D Inputs, MIDI, two USB connectors and a memory card slot. Moreover, an optional AIEB2 or mLAN16E board can be installed. The mLAN interface is particularly powerful — making it possible to transfer both digital audio and MIDI data via a single broadband cable. page 105 The instrument features two USB connectors — USB TO HOST for connecting to computer, and USB TO DEVICE for connecting to storage devices, such as a hard disk drive or flash disk. page 66 Included software — the CD-ROM accompanying your instrument (Tools for MOTIF ES) features a variety of convenient and powerful programs for using the MOTIF ES with a computer. These include the Voice Editor which provides comprehensive, easy-to-use editing features and parameters, and a Multi Part Editor for intuitive editing of Song/Pattern Mixing parameters from your computer screen. page 115 page 123 page 136 page 47 page 147 page 74 page 39 page 29 page 142 Owner’s Manual 7 How to use this manual How to use this manual The Controls & Connectors ............................................................................................... Page 16 Use this section to find out about all of the buttons, controls and connectors of this instrument. Setting Up .......................................................................................................................... Page 26 Before going on to any other part of the manual, we strongly suggest you read this section first. It shows you how to get started playing and using your new instrument. Application Index ................................................................................................................ Page 9 This special index is organized not by single words, but by functions and applications — allowing you to quickly and easily find how to perform a particular operation or explore a topic of interest. Basic Structure ................................................................................................................. Page 154 This section provides a detailed overview of all of the main functions and features of this instrument, and shows how they fit together. Basic Operation.................................................................................................................. Page 45 This section introduces you to the basic operating conventions of this instrument, such as editing values and changing settings. Quick Guide ........................................................................................................................ Page 55 In this tutorial section, you will take a guided tour through the various functions of this instrument, and get some hands-on experience in playing and using it. Reference ......................................................................................................................... Page 188 The MOTIF ES encyclopedia. This section explains all parameters, settings, functions, features, modes and operations in full detail. Troubleshooting............................................................................................................... Page 279 If this instrument does not function as expected or you have some problem with the sound or operation, refer to this section before calling your Yamaha dealer or service center. Most common problems and their solutions are covered here in a very simple and easy-to-understand way. Appendix .......................................................................................................................... Page 275 This section contains detailed information on this instrument such as Specifications and an Alert Message List as well as instructions for installing optional equipment (e.g., DIMM modules, AIEB2, mLAN16E interface, and Plug-in Boards). Data List (separate booklet) This contains various important lists such as the Voice List, Preset Pattern Phrase List, Effect List, MIDI Data Format, and MIDI Implementation Chart. Installation Guide (separate booklet) Refer to this for instructions on installing the included software programs (on the “TOOLS for MOTIF ES6/MOTIF ES7/ MOTIF ES8” CD-ROM) to your computer. Various pages and menus appear on the LCD display of this instrument depending the selected mode or function. Throughout this manual, arrows are used in the instructions, indicating in shorthand the process of calling up certain displays and functions. The example instructions below indicate to 1) press the [VOICE] button, 2) select a Normal Voice, 3) press the [EDIT] button, 4) select an Element, 5) press the [F1] OSC button, and 6) press the [SF2] OUTPUT button. [VOICE] → Normal Voice selection → [EDIT] → Element selection → [F1] OSC → [SF2] OUTPUT n * * * * 8 When a confirmation message (page 52) or Control Function window (page 50) is shown in the display, press the [EXIT] button to exit from that condition, then execute the instructions as in the above example. Likewise, press the REMOTE [ON/OFF] button to exit from the Remote Control mode, then execute the instructions as in the above example when the MOTIF ES is in the Remote Control mode. Apple and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. Windows is the registered trademark of Microsoft® Corporation. All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders. The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument. Owner’s Manual Application Index Application Index Listening to the MOTIF ES • • • • Listening to the Demo song/pattern.....................................................................................................................................................................Page 55 Listening to Song Chain playback........................................................................................................................................................................Page 59 Listening to Pattern Chain playback ..................................................................................................................................................................Page 115 Listening to Arpeggio playback .................................................................Pages 66 (Voice mode), 70 (Performance mode), 105 (Song/Pattern mode) Playing the keyboard • • • • • • • Selecting a Voice and playing the keyboard ..................................................................................... Pages 60 (Voice mode), 102 (Song/Pattern mode) Selecting a Voice of the Plug-in Board and playing the keyboard .................................................. Pages 75 (Voice mode), 121 (Song/Pattern mode) Selecting a Performance and playing the keyboard ...........................................................................................................................................Page 67 Using the instrument as a Master Keyboard .....................................................................................................................................................Page 136 Sounding the metronome ..................................... [SONG] or [PATTERN] → [UTILITY] → [F3] SEQ → [SF1] CLICK → Mode = all ................Page 262 Splitting the keyboard – Setting upper and lower ranges for the Voices ..................................... Pages 70 (Performance mode), 141 (Master mode) Layering two Voices (or Parts) together .......................................................................................... Pages 70 (Performance mode), 141 (Master mode) Selecting programs and making settings on the MOTIF ES • Selecting a Voice ................................................................................................................................. Pages 60 (Voice mode), 102 (Song/Pattern mode) Using the Category Search function ....................................................................................................................................................................Page 62 • Selecting a Performance .......................................................................................................................................................................................Page 67 • Selecting a Song ....................................................................................................................................................................................................Page 56 • Selecting a Pattern .................................................................................................................................................................................................Page 57 Selecting a Section ................................................................................................................................................................................................Page 57 Selecting a Phrase and assigning it to a Pattern track.....................................................................................................................................Page 113 • • • • • • Selecting a Mixing template for a Song/Pattern ................................................................................................................................................Page 103 Selecting a Master................................................................................................................................................................................................Page 136 Selecting an Arpeggio type........................................................................Pages 66 (Voice mode), 70 (Performance mode), 105 (Song/Pattern mode) Selecting a Waveform ..........................................................................................................................................................................................Page 174 Selecting a Filter type ..........................................................................................................................................................................................Page 209 Selecting an Effect type Selecting a Reverb type/Chorus type/Insertion type [VOICE] → Voice selection → [F3] EFFECT .........................................................................................................................................................Page 194 [PERFORM] → Performance selection → [F3] EFFECT → [SF1] CONNECT ......................................................................................................Page 215 [SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song/Pattern selection→ [MIXING] → [F3] EFFECT → [SF1] CONNECT ...................................................................Page 235 Selecting a Master Effect type [VOICE] → [UTILITY] → [F3] VOICE → [SF2] MEF ..............................................................................................................................................Page 262 [PERFORM] → Performance selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F2] OUT/MEF → [SF3] MEF ......................................................................Page 214 [SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song/Pattern selection→ [MIXING] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F2] MEQ/MEF → [SF2] MEF .................................Page 234 Selecting a Master EQ type [VOICE] → [UTILITY] → [F3] VOICE → [SF1] MEQ .............................................................................................................................................Page 262 [PERFORM] → Performance selection→ [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F2] OUT/MEF → [SF2] MEQ ......................................................................Page 214 [SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song/Pattern selection→ [MIXING] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F2] OUT/MEF → [SF1] MEQ .................................Page 234 Using controllers ..............................................Pages 66 (Voice mode), 69 (Performance mode), 104 (Song/Pattern mode) • • • • Understanding the organization and structure of the controllers ...................................................................................................................Page 154 Assigning functions to the controllers for each Voice (Controller Set) ..........................................................................................................Page 155 Assigning Control Change numbers to each controller...................................................................................................................................Page 156 Setting the Pitch Bend Range [VOICE] → Voice selection→ [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF5] OTHER → PB Upper/PB Lower .............................................Page 190 [SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song/Pattern selection→ [MIXING] → [EDIT] → Part selection→ [F1] VOICE → [SF5] OTHER → PB Upper/PB Lower ..............Page 235 • • • • • • Checking the currently assigned parameters for knob control ................Page 81 (Voice mode), 90 (Performance mode), 129 (Song/Pattern mode) Checking the currently assigned parameters for Control Slider (CS) control ...............................................................................................Page 140 Using a Foot Pedal as a sustain pedal .................................................................................................................................................................Page 42 Starting/stopping a song or pattern by pressing a Footswitch ................................ [UTILITY] → [F4] CTL ASN → [SF3] FT SW ................Page 263 Changing a Voice or a Performance by pressing a Footswitch ................................ [UTILITY] → [F4] CTL ASN → [SF3] FT SW ................Page 263 Turning Arpeggio playback on or off by pressing a Footswitch............................... [UTILITY] → [F4] CTL ASN → [SF3] FT SW ................Page 263 Owner’s Manual 9 Application Index • Determining how the sound responds to a Breath Controller [UTILITY] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF1] TG → BCCurve .........................................................................................................................................Page 260 • Keeping the effect of a controller (Modulation Wheel, etc.) the same, even when changing Voices [UTILITY] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF4] OTHER → CtrlReset = hold ...................................................................................................................... Page 261 Sounding only the specified Part or Voice • Turning each element on or off in the Voice Edit mode...................................................................................................................................... Page 79 • Determining whether each Element is used or not in the Voice Edit mode [VOICE] → [EDIT] → Element selection → [F1] OSC → [SF1] WAVE → ElementSw = on/off ............................................................................. Page 195 • Determining whether each Part is used or not in the Performance mode [PERFORM] → Performance selection→ [EDIT] → Part selection → [F1] VOICE → [SF1] VOICE → PartSw = on/off ....................................... Page 216 • Turning each track (Part) of a song/pattern on or off .........................................................................................................................................Page 58 • Turning off or muting playback of a Song/Pattern Part, by setting the receive channel to off [SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song/Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → part selection → [F1] VOICE → [SF2] MODE → ReceiveCh ................. Page 235 Adjusting the volume or output level • Overall Adjusting the Master Volume output................................................................................................................ [MASTER VOLUME] .................. Page 18 Adjusting the entire volume of the instrument’s internal tone generator block..... [UTILITY] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF1] TG → Volume ................ Page 260 Adjusting the output gain of each Output connector....................................................... [UTILITY] → [F2] I/O → [SF2] OUTPUT ................ Page 261 • In the Voice mode Adjusting the volume balance of the Elements of a Normal Voice with the Control Sliders [VOICE] → Normal Voice selection → [EDIT] → Element selection→ [F4] AMP → [SF1] LVL/PAN → Level ........................................................ Page 81 Adjusting the entire volume for the selected Voice (common to all Elements/keys) [VOICE] → Voice selection→ [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F2] OUTPUT → Volume ............................................................................................... Page 190 • In the Performance mode Adjusting the volume balance of the Parts of an edited Performance with the Control Sliders [PERFORM] → Performance selection → [EDIT] → Part selection → [F2] OUTPUT → [SF1] VOL/PAN → Volume ....................................... Page 81 Adjusting the entire volume for the selected Performance (common to all Parts) [PERFORM] → Performance selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F2] OUT/MEQ → [SF1] OUT → Volume .................................................. Page 213 Adjusting the volume of the audio input (of a microphone or external audio equipment) [PERFORM] → Performance selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F5] AUDIO IN → [SF1] OUTPUT → Volume ............................................ Page 215 • In the Song mode/Pattern mode Adjusting the volume balance of the Parts of an edited Song with the Control Sliders [SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song/Pattern selection → [MIXING] → Part Selection → [F1] VOL/PAN → VOLUME ................................................ Page 130 Adjusting the volume of the audio input (of a microphone or external audio equipment) [SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song/Pattern selection → [MIXING → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F5] AUDIOIN → [SF1] OUTPUT → Volume .......... Page 235 Inputting audio from a microphone, instrument or other audio device • • • • About the organization of audio input parts .....................................................................................................................................................Page 165 Connecting a microphone to the A/D INPUT connector.......................... [UTILITY] → [F2] I/O → [SF1] INPUT → Mic/line = mic .................. Page 72 Connecting audio equipment to the A/D INPUT connector .................... [UTILITY] → [F2] I/O → [SF1] INPUT → Mic/line = line .................. Page 73 Setting audio input related parameters [PERFORM] → Performance selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F5] AUDIO IN ............................................................................................ Page 214 [SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song/Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F5] AUDIO IN ....................................................... Page 235 • Sampling (recording) audio from a microphone.................................................................................................................................................Page 94 • Sampling (recording) audio from another audio device .................................................................................................................................... Page 98 • Applying a vocal harmony effect to the microphone sound by using the Plug-in Board PLG100-VH........................................................... Page 78 Using Plug-in Boards Installing a Plug-in Board....................................................................................................................................................................................Page 283 Checking that a Plug-in Board is properly installed ..................................................... [UTILITY] → [F6] PLUG → [SF1] STATUS .................. Page 75 Checking the receive port of the installed Plug-in Board ......................................................... [UTILITY] → PLUG → [SF2] MIDI .................. Page 75 Selecting and playing a voice of a Single Part Plug-in Board (PLG150-AN, PLG-150-PF, PLG150-DX, PLG150-VL, etc.) .............................................................................................................................................................. Pages 75 (Voice mode), 121 (Song/Pattern mode) • Playing an XG song by using the Multi-part Plug-in Board PLG100-XG ......................................................................................................... Page 77 • Applying a vocal harmony effect to the microphone sound by using the Plug-in Board PLG150-VH........................................................... Page 78 • • • • 10 Owner’s Manual Application Index Creating Data • Creating a Voice Creating a Normal Voice in the Voice Edit mode .................................................................................................................................................Page 79 Creating a Drum Voice in the Voice Edit mode ....................................................................................................................................................Page 82 Creating a Plug-in Voice in the Voice Edit mode .................................................................................................................................................Page 84 Creating a Normal Voice/Drum Voice by using the Sampling function .............................................................................................................Page 94 Creating a Sample Voice by using the Sampling function ...............................................................................................................................Page 107 Creating a Normal/Drum Voice by importing a WAV or AIFF file......................................................................................................................Page 100 Creating a Sample Voice by importing a WAV or AIFF file................................................................................................................................Page 109 Creating a Mixing Voice especially for a Song or Pattern ................................................................................................................................Page 105 • Creating a Performance.........................................................................................................................................................................................Page 87 • Creating a Song Recording your keyboard performance to a Song track (Realtime Recording) .............................................................................................Page 118 Recording over (replacing) existing material in a Song track — Punch-in Recording [SONG] → [●] (Record) → [F1] SETUP → Type = punch ....................................................................................................................................Page 119 Recording additional material to an existing Song track (without erasing previous material) — Overdub Recording [SONG] → [●] (Record) → [F1] SETUP → Type = overdub ................................................................................................................................Page 119 Sounding a metronome during recording ............................... [SONG] → [UTILITY] → [F3] SEQ → [SF1] CLICK → Mode = rec ................Page 262 Recording a Song by using a Performance ......................................................................................................................................................Page 120 Recording a Song with the sounds of a Plug-in Board ....................................................................................................................................Page 121 Using the Step Recording function .......................................................... [SONG] → [●] (Record) → [F1] SETUP → Type = step ................Page 238 Editing MIDI events for each track of an already-recorded Song ...................................... [SONG] → [EDIT] → Track selection ................Page 124 Inserting Tempo change information in the middle of the Song ............................................. [SONG] → [EDIT] → [F4] TR SEL ................Page 125 Inserting Voice change information [SONG] → [EDIT] → Track selection → Inserting a Bank Select MSB/LSB and Program Change ....................................................................Page 225 Editing Song Mixing settings, such as the volume of each Part ................................................................. [SONG] → [MIXING] ................Page 127 Using convenient “Jobs,” such as Copy, Clear, Quantize........................................................ [SONG] → [JOB] → Job selection ................Page 126 • Creating a Pattern Assigning a Preset Phrase to each track of a Pattern (Patch function)..........................................................................................................Page 113 Recording (Sampling) your favorite rhythm (audio) to a Pattern track to create a Phrase ...........................................................................Page 107 Importing a WAV file or an AIFF file to a Pattern track to create a Phrase .....................................................................................................Page 109 Recording your keyboard performance to a Pattern track to create a Phrase ...............................................................................................Page 110 Recording a newly found Arpeggio rhythm pattern to a Pattern track ...........................................................................................................Page 112 Sounding the metronome during recording ....................... [PATTERN] → [UTILITY] → [F3] SEQ → [SF1] CLICK → Mode = rec ................Page 262 Using the Step Recording function ..................................................... [PATTERN] → [●] (Record) → [F1] SETUP → Type = step ................Page 238 Editing MIDI events for each track of an already-recorded Pattern................................ [PATTERN] → [EDIT] → Track selection ................Page 124 Editing Pattern Mixing settings, such as the volume of each Part ......................................................... [PATTERN] → [MIXING] ................Page 127 Using convenient “Jobs,” such as Copy, Clear, Quantize................................................... [PATTERN] → [JOB] → Job selection ................Page 126 Programming a sequence of a Section to create a Pattern Chain....................................................... [PATTERN] → [F6] CHAIN ................Page 115 Converting a Pattern Chain to Song data ...................... [PATTERN] → Pattern selection → [F6] CHAIN → [EDIT] → [F3] SONG ................Page 117 • Creating a Master .................................................................................................................................................................................................Page 136 • Creating an Arpeggio ..........................................................................................................................................................................................Page 130 • Creating a Waveform .............................................................................................................................................................................................Page 94 Storing/Saving the created data • Storing an edited Voice to internal memory (Flash ROM) and saving all the Voices in internal memory to a SmartMedia/USB storage device .............Page 85 • Storing an edited Performance to internal memory (Flash ROM) and saving all the Performances in internal memory to a SmartMedia/USB storage device ..........................................................................................................................................................................Page 91 • Saving the Song/Pattern data Storing Song Mixing/Pattern Mixing settings to internal memory (DRAM) ....................................................................................................Page 131 Storing the entire Song/Pattern data to SmartMedia/USB storage device .....................................................................................................Page 132 • Storing Mixing settings to internal memory (Flash ROM) as a template ........................................................................................................Page 104 • Storing an edited Master to internal memory (Flash ROM) and saving all the Masters on internal memory to a SmartMedia/USB storage device .....................................................................................................................................................................................................Page 137 • Saving all Arpeggios in internal memory (Flash ROM) to a SmartMedia/USB storage device.....................................................................Page 269 • Saving all Samples (obtained via the Sampling function) in internal memory (DRAM) to a SmartMedia/USB storage device ..................Page 97 Owner’s Manual 11 Application Index Naming your created data ..........................................................................................................................................Page 53 Recovering lost data • Voice Comparing the Voice before editing with the just-edited one (Compare function).......................................................................................... Page 80 Recalling an edited, but not-stored Voice (when another Voice has been selected) — Recall function........................................................ Page 82 • Performance Comparing the Performance before editing with the just-edited one (Compare function)............................................................................. Page 89 Recalling an edited, but not-stored Performance (when another Performance has been selected) — Recall function .............................. Page 91 • Song/Pattern Canceling the changes made in the recent session such as Recording and Job to restore the data to its previous status [SONG] or [PATTERN] → [JOB] → [F1] UNDO ....................................................................................................................................................Page 127 Comparing the Mixing settings before editing with the just-edited ones (Compare function) ................................................................... Page 129 Recalling edited, but not-stored Mixing settings (when another Mixing set has been selected) — Recall function ................................. Page 129 Initializing • • • • • • • Resetting the User Memory to the Initial Factory Settings ................................................................................................................................ Page 44 Formatting a SmartMedia card ...........................................................................................................................................................................Page 268 Initializing the edited Voice ............................................................................................................... [VOICE] → [JOB] → [F1] INIT ................ Page 208 Initializing the edited Performance............................................................................................. [PERFORM] → [JOB] → [F1] INIT ................ Page 219 Initializing the edited Master.......................................................................................................... [MASTER] → [JOB] → [F1] INIT ................ Page 273 Initializing the edited Song Mixing settings ................................................................ [SONG] → [MIXING] → [JOB] → [F1] INIT ................ Page 236 Initializing the edited Pattern Mixing settings ........................................................ [PATTERN] → [MIXING] → [JOB] → [F1] INIT ................ Page 248 Pitch related settings (Tune, Note Shift, etc.) • Overall Changing the octave setting of the keyboard ............................................ [UTILITY] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF2] KBD → Octave Shifting the note up or down on the keyboard ..................................... [UTILITY] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF2] KBD → Transpose Shifting the note up or down in the tone generator block ........................ [UTILITY] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF1] TG → NoteShift Adjusting the tuning to other instruments ........................................................ [UTILITY] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF1] TG → Tune .................. Page 63 .................. Page 63 ................ Page 260 ................ Page 260 • In the Voice mode Setting the tuning system for the voice [VOICE] → Voice selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF2] PLY MODE → M.TuningNo. ............................................ Page 190 Adjusting the pitch for each Element of the edited Voice in semitones [VOICE] → Voice selection→ [EDIT] → Element selection→ [F2] PITCH → [SF1] TUNE → Coarse .................................................................. Page 196 Finely adjusting the pitch for each Element of the edited Voice [VOICE] → Voice selection→ [EDIT] → Element selection→ [F2] PITCH → [SF1] TUNE → Tune ...................................................................... Page 196 Setting the all notes (keys) to the same pitch [VOICE] → Voice selection→ [EDIT] → Element selection→ [F2] PITCH → [SF4] KEY FLW → PitchSens = 0 .................................................. Page 197 • In the Performance mode Shifting the note up or down for each Part of the edited Performance [PERFORM] → Performance selection → [EDIT] → Part selection → [F4] TONE → [SF1] TUNE → NoteShift ................................................... Page 218 Finely adjusting the pitch for each Part of the edited Performance [PERFORM] → Performance selection → [EDIT] → Part selection → [F4] TONE → [SF1] TUNE → Detune ...................................................... Page 218 • In the Song mode/Pattern mode Shifting the note up or down for each Part of the current Song/Pattern [SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song/Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → Part selection → [F4] TONE→ [SF1] TUNE → NoteShift ............... Page 236 Finely adjusting the pitch for each Part of the current Song/Pattern [SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song/Pattern selection→ [MIXING] → [EDIT] → Part selection → [F4] TONE → [SF1] TUNE → Detune ............. Page 236 • In the Master mode Shifting the keyboard octave up or down for each zone of the edited Master [MASTER] → Master selection → [F2] MEMORY → ZoneSwitch = on → [EDIT] → Zone selection → [F2] NOTE → Octave ............................ Page 272 Finely adjusting the keyboard pitch for each zone of the edited Master [MASTER] → Master selection→ [F2] MEMORY → ZoneSwitch = on → [EDIT] → Zone selection → [F2] NOTE → Transpose ........................ Page 272 12 Owner’s Manual Application Index Connecting to a computer/external MIDI instrument • Determining which connector (among the MIDI, USB TO HOST, mLAN) is used as a MIDI input/output connector [UTILITY] → [F5] MIDI → [SF4] OTHER → MIDI IN/OUT .....................................................................................................................................Page 265 • Using the sounds of the MOTIF ES for song playback from a MIDI sequencer ...............................................................................................Page 36 • Setting whether or not Bulk Dump data can be received [UTILITY] → [F5] MIDI → [SF2] SWITCH → RevBulk = on/protect ......................................................................................................................Page 264 • Sounding only the external MIDI tone generator and turning the internal tone generator off [UTILITY] → [F5] MIDI → [SF2] SWITCH → LocalCtrl = off .................................................................................................................................Page 264 • Synchronizing with an external MIDI instrument/computer Using the MOTIF ES as a MIDI master [UTILITY] → [F5] MIDI → [SF3] SYNC → MIDI Sync = internal, ClockOut = on, Seqctrl = out ..........................................................................Page 36 Using the MOTIF ES as a MIDI slave [UTILITY] → [F5] MIDI → [SF3] SYNC → MIDI Sync = MIDI, ClockOut = off, Seqctrl = in ....................................................................................Page 36 Using the MOTIF ES as a MTC slave [UTILITY] → [F5] MIDI → [SF3] SYNC → MIDI Sync = MTC, ClockOut = off, Seqctrl = in ....................................................................................Page 37 • Disabling synchronization with the external MIDI instrument/computer Maintaining normal playback on an external MIDI sequencer, even when starting/stopping Song/Pattern playback on the MOTIF ES [UTILITY] → [F5] MIDI → [SF3] SYNC → MIDI Sync = internal, Seqctrl = off .................................................................................... ................Page 264 Maintaining normal Song/Pattern playback on the MOTIF ES, even when starting/stopping playback on an external MIDI sequencer [UTILITY] → [F5] MIDI → [SF3] SYNC → Seqctrl = off ...................................................................................................................... ................Page 264 • Synchronizing the LFO wave speed of the Voice with an external MIDI instrument/computer [UTILITY] → [F5] MIDI → [SF3] SYNC → MIDI Sync = MIDI ................................................................................................................................Page 264 [VOICE] → Normal Voice selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F5] LFO → [SF1] WAVE → TempoSync = on ................................................Page 193 • Setting which MIDI events will be transmitted or recognized via the MIDI, USB TO HOST, and mLAN connectors [SONG] or [PATTERN] → [UTILITY] → [F3] SEQ → [SF2] FILTER .......................................................................................................................Page 262 • Setting the MIDI transmit channel Setting the MIDI transmit channel of the keyboard in the Voice mode/Performance mode [UTILITY] → [F5] MIDI → [SF1] CH → KBDTransCh ..............................................................................................................................................Page 64 Setting the MIDI transmit channel and port for each track of a Song/Pattern [SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song/Pattern selection → [F3] TRACK → [SF1] CHANNEL ........................................................................................Page 221 Setting the MIDI transmit channel of Arpeggio playback [UTILITY] → [F3] VOICE → [SF3] ARP CH → TransmitCh ...................................................................................................................................Page 262 • Setting the MIDI receive channel Setting the MIDI receive channel of the keyboard in the Voice mode/Performance mode [UTILITY] → [F5] MIDI → [SF1] CH → BasicRcvCh .............................................................................................................................................Page 263 Setting the MIDI receive channel for each part of a Song/Pattern [SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song/Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → Part selection→ [F1] VOICE → [SF2] MODE → ReceiveCh ..................Page 235 • Setting parameters for Program Change transmission/recognition Enabling or disabling the sending of Bank Select and Program Change messages, when selecting a Voice or Performance [UTILITY] → [F5] MIDI → [SF2] SWITCH → BankSel, PgmChange .....................................................................................................................Page 264 Enabling or disabling selection of MOTIF ES Voices/Performances from an external MIDI device [UTILITY] → [F5] MIDI → [SF2] SWITCH → BankSel, PgmChange .....................................................................................................................Page 264 [SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song/Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → Part selection→ [F5] RCV SW → BankSel, PgmChange ...............Page 235 Setting related parameters so that the MIDI messages produced by the Song/Pattern playback will not be transmitted via MIDI [SONG] or [PATTERN] → [UTILITY] → [F3] SEQ → [SF2] FILTER ....................................................................................................................Page 262 • Setting whether each track playback sounds the internal tone generator or an external tone generator [SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song/Pattern selection → [F3] TRACK → [SF2] OUT SW ..........................................................................................Page 222 Other tips • Loading the specified file on the SmartMedia/USB storage device automatically when the power is turned on ......................................Page 135 • Setting the Mode set automatically when the power is turned on [UTILITY] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF4] OTHER → PowerOnMode .........................................................................................................................Page 261 • Setting an individual Output connector for each key of the Drum Voice or for each part of the Performance/Song/Pattern......................Page 31 Owner’s Manual 13 Table of Contents Table of Contents Introduction.................................................................... 6 Accessories ................................................................... 6 Main Features ................................................................ 7 How to use this manual ................................................ 8 Application Index................................... 9 Quick Guide — Playing the MOTIF ES .. 55 Playing the Demo Songs/Patterns .............................55 Playing the Keyboard (in the Voice Play mode)........60 Selecting a Voice ................................................................60 Using Controllers ................................................................64 Using the Arpeggio feature ................................................66 Playing the Keyboard (in the Performance Play mode) .........67 The Controls & Connectors .................. 16 Front panel ................................................................... 16 Rear Panel .................................................................... 22 Selecting a Performance ....................................................67 Using Controllers ................................................................69 Using the Arpeggio feature ................................................70 Assigning desired Voices to each part...............................70 Using the A/D input sound..................................................72 Using the Plug-in Board ..............................................74 Setting Up ............................................. 26 Power Supply............................................................... 26 About data storage to SmartMedia cards and USB storage devices................................................... 27 Data lost and data retained when power is turned off........27 Using the SmartMedia™* cards .........................................28 Using USB storage devices................................................29 Connections................................................................. 31 Connecting to External Audio Equipment...........................31 Connecting External MIDI Instruments ...............................34 Connecting to a Computer .................................................38 Connecting Various Controllers ..........................................42 Available Plug-in Boards ....................................................74 Using a Single Part Plug-in Board ......................................75 Using a Multi Part Plug-in Board.........................................77 Using an Effect Plug-in Board ............................................78 Quick Guide — Advanced Course ........ 79 Editing a Voice .............................................................79 Normal Voice Edit ...............................................................79 Drum Voice Edit ..................................................................82 Plug-in Voice Edit................................................................85 Storing/Saving the created Voice .......................................85 Editing a Performance.................................................87 Storing/Saving the created Performance............................91 Turning the power on/off ............................................ 43 Creating a Voice by using the Sampling function ....94 Power-on Procedure ...........................................................43 Turning the MOTIF ES on/off...............................................43 Sampling your voice with a microphone and creating a Normal Voice ...................................................................................94 Sampling the sound of an audio device to create a Drum Voice ......98 Resetting the User Memory to the Initial Factory Settings ........................................................................ 44 Basic Operation .................................... 45 Modes ........................................................................... 45 Mode Structure ...................................................................45 Mode table..........................................................................46 Functions and Sub-Functions.................................... 47 Selecting a Program.................................................... 47 Moving the Cursor and Setting Parameters.............. 49 Creating a Song on the MOTIF ES............................102 Recording your keyboard performance ...........................102 Creating a Pattern.............................................................106 Creating a Song................................................................117 Storing/Saving the created Song/Pattern .........................131 Using as a Master Keyboard.....................................136 Selecting a Master ............................................................136 Memorize to a Master .......................................................137 Using Zones (keyboard area)...........................................137 Quick Guide — Computer applications.... 142 Knob (KN) and Control Slider (CS) ............................ 50 Knob (KN) ...........................................................................50 Control Slider (CS) ..............................................................51 Setting up ...................................................................142 About the editing functions........................................ 51 Edit Indicator.......................................................................51 Compare Function ..............................................................52 Edit Recall Function ............................................................52 Using a sequencer to play multiple Voices on the MOTIF ES ....143 Using the Multi Part Editor to create/edit Mixing settings.144 Using the Voice Editor to create/edit a Voice ...................145 Using the TWE Wave Editor to edit Samples....................146 Confirmation Message ................................................ 52 Controlling a computer from the instrument ..........147 Information Display ..................................................... 53 Setting up for Remote Control ..........................................148 Functions assigned to the panel buttons in the Remote Control mode.................................................150 Note (Key) settings...................................................... 53 Naming ......................................................................... 53 14 Owner’s Manual Controlling the instrument from a computer ..........143 Table of Contents Basic Structure ....................................154 Appendix ............................................ 275 Internal Structure (System Overview) ......................154 Information Displays ................................................. 275 Controller Block.................................................................154 Tone Generator block .......................................................157 Sequencer Block...............................................................165 Sampling Block .................................................................172 Effect Block .......................................................................177 Display Messages...................................................... 277 About MIDI ..................................................................181 MIDI channels ...................................................................181 MIDI Messages Transmitted/Recognized by this synthesizer ........181 Internal Memory and File Management....................185 Maintaining data ...............................................................185 Troubleshooting ........................................................ 279 Setting Up Installing Optional Hardware.................................... 282 Available devices..............................................................282 Installation locations..........................................................282 Installation Precautions .....................................................282 Optional Plug-in Board Installation ...................................283 Optional AIEB2 or mLAN16E Installation ..........................285 Optional DIMM Installation................................................289 Basic Operation Quick Guide — Playing the MOTIF ES Glossary ..................................................................... 290 Reference ............................................188 Specifications ............................................................ 292 Voice mode .................................................................188 Index ................................................... 294 Voice Play mode ...............................................................188 Voice Edit mode................................................................189 Voice Store mode..............................................................208 Voice Job mode ................................................................208 The Controls & Connectors Quick Guide — Advanced Course Quick Guide — Computer applications Performance mode ....................................................212 Performance Play mode....................................................212 Performance Edit mode ....................................................213 Performance Job mode ....................................................219 Performance Store mode ..................................................220 Song mode..................................................................221 Song Play mode................................................................221 Song Record mode...........................................................222 Song Edit mode ................................................................225 Song Job mode.................................................................226 Song Mixing mode ............................................................233 Song Mixing Edit mode.....................................................234 Song Mixing Job mode .....................................................236 Song Mixing Store mode...................................................237 Basic Structure Reference Voice mode Performance mode Song mode Pattern mode ..............................................................241 Pattern Play mode.............................................................241 Pattern Record mode........................................................243 Pattern Edit mode .............................................................244 Pattern Job mode..............................................................244 Pattern Mixing mode .........................................................248 Pattern Mixing Edit mode..................................................248 Pattern Mixing Job mode ..................................................248 Pattern Mixing Store mode................................................248 Mixing Voice mode.....................................................249 Mixing Voice Edit mode ....................................................249 Mixing Voice Store mode ..................................................250 Mixing Voice Job mode ....................................................250 Pattern mode Mixing Voice mode Sampling mode Utility mode Sampling mode ..........................................................251 Sampling Record mode ....................................................251 Sampling Edit mode..........................................................255 Sampling Job mode..........................................................256 File mode Utility mode.................................................................260 Utility mode .......................................................................260 Utility Job mode ................................................................265 Master mode File mode ....................................................................266 File mode ..........................................................................266 Master mode ...............................................................271 Master Play mode .............................................................271 Master Edit mode..............................................................271 Master Job mode ..............................................................273 Master Store mode............................................................274 Appendix Owner’s Manual 15 Front Panel The Controls & Connectors The Controls & Connectors Front Panel 7 9 ! ) # $ % MOTIF ES6 ASSIGN A PAN/SEND ASSIGN TONE ASSIGN B ASSIGN 1 ASSIGN 2 TEMPO PAN REVERB CUTOFF RESONANCE ATTACK RELEASE SWING GATE TIME VELOCITY UNITMULTIPLY CHORUS REMOTE ARPEGGIO R-AUDIO G-MIDI ON / OFF KNOB CONTROL FUNCTION ON / OFF MODE EFFECT ARP FX KN 1 LOW KN 2 LOW MID KN 3 HIGH MID KN 4 HIGH VOLUME 1 VOLUME 2 VOLUME 3 VOLUME 4 BYPASS INSERTION SYSTEM MASTER EFFECT VOICE PERFORM MASTER EQ SEQUENCER SONG PATTERN FILE INTEGRATED SAMPLING MIXING UTILITY EDIT JOB STORE SEQ TRANSPORT DEMO SCENE SF2 SF1 LOCATE 1 COMPARE OCTAVE 2 DOWN SF4 INFORMATION SF5 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 SCENE STORE SET LOCATE UP 6 MASTER VOLUME 8 CS 1 CS 2 ZONE 1 ZONE 2 CS 3 CS 4 ZONE 3 ZONE 4 @ & C1 D1 E1 F1 G1 A1 B1 C2 3 SF3 2 5 ^ * C3 C 4 1 7 9 ! ) # MOTIF ES7 ASSIGN A PAN/SEND ASSIGN TONE ASSIGN B ASSIGN 1 CHORUS ASSIGN 2 PAN REVERB CUTOFF RESONANCE ATTACK RELEASE SWING GATE TIME VELOCITY UNITMULTIPLY TEMPO REMOTE ON / OFF KNOB CONTROL FUNCTION ARPEGGIO R-AUDIO G-MIDI ON / OFF MODE EFFECT ARP FX KN 1 LOW KN 2 LOW MID KN 3 HIGH MID KN 4 HIGH VOLUME 1 VOLUME 2 VOLUME 3 VOLUME 4 BYPASS INSERTION SYSTEM MASTER EFFECT VOICE PERFORM MASTER EQ SEQUENCER SONG PATTERN FILE INTEGRATED SAMPLING MIXING UTILITY EDIT JOB STORE SEQ TRANSPORT DEMO SCENE SF2 SF1 LOCATE 1 2 COMPARE OCTAVE 2 DOWN MASTER VOLUME 8 CS 1 CS 2 ZONE 1 ZONE 2 CS 3 CS 4 ZONE 3 ZONE 4 E0 F0 G0 A0 B0 C1 D1 E1 F1 G1 A1 B1 C2 16 Owner’s Manual SCENE STORE SET LOCATE UP 6 3 F1 5 4 1 @ & C3 F2 ¡ ( § º The Controls & Connectors Front Panel ∞ Integrated Sampling Sequencer / Modular Synthesis Plug-in System / Real-time External Control Surface MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER PRE 1 PRE 2 PRE 3 PRE 4 SLOT 1 DEC/NO SLOT 3 PRE 5 PRE 6 USER 1 USER 2 GM PLG 1 PLG 2 PLG 3 A. PIANO KEYBOARD ORGAN GUITAR/ PLUCKED BASS STRINGS BRASS REED/PIPE A B C D E F G H SYN LEAD SYN PAD/ CHOIR SYN COMP 1 2 3 INC / YES DRUM/ CHROMATIC PERCUSSION PERCUSSION CATEGORY SEARCH BANK SECTION GROUP SE MUSICAL FX COMBI 4 5 6 7 8 TRACK SELECT 12 13 14 15 16 MUTE 9 ENTER ¢ ™ ¤ SOLO EXECUTE £ ¶ • C4 C5 n ‚ NUMBER 11 10 ª ⁄ ELEMENT/PERF. PART/ZONE COMMON EXIT SLOT 2 DRUM KITS FAVORITES C6 When both of the [OCTAVE] buttons are turned off, each key corresponds to the note name shown in the illustrations. Refer to this illustration when setting parameters having note name values, such as Note Limit. $ % ¡ ( § º ∞ Integrated Sampling Sequencer / Modular Synthesis Plug-in System / Real-time External Control Surface MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER PRE 1 PRE 2 PRE 3 PRE 4 SLOT 1 DEC/NO F2 SF3 SF4 F4 PRE 6 USER 1 USER 2 GM PLG 1 PLG 2 PLG 3 KEYBOARD ORGAN GUITAR/ PLUCKED BASS STRINGS BRASS REED/PIPE A B C D E F G H SYN LEAD SYN PAD/ CHOIR SYN COMP 1 2 3 INC / YES DRUM/ CHROMATIC PERCUSSION PERCUSSION BANK SECTION GROUP SE MUSICAL FX COMBI 4 5 6 7 8 TRACK SELECT EXIT F6 12 13 14 15 16 MUTE ELEMENT/PERF. PART/ZONE 9 ENTER 10 11 ª ‚ ⁄ NUMBER * £ C4 ™ ¢ ¤ SOLO EXECUTE ^ CATEGORY SEARCH INFORMATION SF5 F5 SLOT 3 PRE 5 A. PIANO COMMON F3 SLOT 2 DRUM KITS FAVORITES ¶ • C5 C6 Owner’s Manual 17 Front Panel 7 9 ! ) # MOTIF ES8 The Controls & Connectors ASSIGN A PAN/SEND ASSIGN TONE ASSIGN B ASSIGN 1 ASSIGN 2 TEMPO PAN REVERB CUTOFF RESONANCE ATTACK RELEASE SWING GATE TIME VELOCITY UNITMULTIPLY CHORUS REMOTE ON / OFF KNOB CONTROL FUNCTION ARPEGGIO R-AUDIO G-MIDI ON / OFF MODE EFFECT ARP FX KN 1 LOW KN 2 LOW MID KN 3 HIGH MID KN 4 HIGH VOLUME 1 VOLUME 2 VOLUME 3 VOLUME 4 BYPASS INSERTION SYSTEM MASTER EFFECT VOICE PERFORM MASTER EQ SEQUENCER SONG PATTERN FILE INTEGRATED SAMPLING MIXING UTILITY EDIT JOB SEQ TRANSPORT DEMO LOCATE 1 2 COMPARE 6 MASTER VOLUME 4 8 CS 1 CS 2 ZONE 1 ZONE 2 CS 3 CS 4 ZONE 3 ZONE 4 STORE SCENE STORE SET LOCATE @ 3 A-1 B-1 C0 D0 E0 F0 G0 H0 B0 C1 5 1 1 Keyboard 4 Modulation wheel The MOTIF ES6 features a 61-key keyboard, while the MOTIF ES7 has 76 keys and the MOTIF ES8 has 88 keys. All are equipped with a touch response feature (both initial touch and aftertouch). With initial touch, the instrument senses how strongly or softly you play the keys, and uses that playing strength to affect the sound in various ways, depending on the selected voice. With aftertouch, the instrument senses how much pressure you apply to the keys while playing, and uses that pressure to affect the sound in various ways, depending on the selected voice. Moreover, any of a variety of functions can be assigned to aftertouch for each voice. 2 OCTAVE [UP] and [DOWN] buttons Because of its extended keyboard, the MOTIF ES8 does not have OCTAVE buttons. 3 Pitch bend wheel Page 64 Controls the pitch bend effect. You can also assign other functions to this controller. 18 Owner’s Manual Page 64 Controls the modulation effect. You can also assign other functions to this controller. 5 Ribbon controller Page 65 This Controller is touch sensitive, and is controlled by running your finger lightly across its surface laterally. You can also assign other functions to this controller. 6 MASTER VOLUME Adjusts the volume of the overall sound, as output from the rear-panel OUTPUT L/MONO and R jacks as well as the PHONES jack. Page 63 Use these buttons to change the note range of the keyboard. To restore the normal octave setting, press both buttons simultaneously. n C2 7 Four KNOB CONTROL FUNCTION buttons and four Knobs Page 50 These four highly versatile knobs let you adjust various aspects or parameters of the current Voice. Use the [KNOB CONTROL FUNCTION] buttons to change the parameter set for the knobs. The corresponding LED lights to indicate which group of parameters are active. Front Panel % ¡ ( § º ∞ The Controls & Connectors $ Integrated Sampling Sequencer / Modular Synthesis Plug-in System / Real-time External Control Surface MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER PRE 1 PRE 2 PRE 3 PRE 4 SLOT 1 DEC/NO SF2 SF1 PRE 6 USER 1 USER 2 GM PLG 1 PLG 2 PLG 3 KEYBOARD ORGAN GUITAR/ PLUCKED BASS STRINGS BRASS REED/PIPE A B C D E F G H SYN LEAD SYN PAD/ CHOIR SYN COMP 1 2 3 INC / YES F2 SF3 F3 SF4 F4 SF5 F5 DRUM/ CHROMATIC PERCUSSION PERCUSSION EXIT F6 SECTION GROUP SE MUSICAL FX COMBI 4 5 6 7 8 TRACK SELECT 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 MUTE ª ‚ ⁄ NUMBER ^ C3 * £ ™ C4 ¢ ¤ SOLO EXECUTE n BANK ELEMENT/PERF. PART/ZONE 9 ENTER RE E & CATEGORY SEARCH INFORMATION COMMON F1 SLOT 3 PRE 5 A. PIANO DEMO SCENE SLOT 2 DRUM KITS FAVORITES ¶ • C5 C6 C7 When [UTILITY] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF2] KBD → Octave is set to “0,” each key corresponds to the note name shown in the illustrations. Refer to this illustration when setting a note name of a parameter like Note Limit. 8 [CS1] - [CS4] (Control Slider) Page 51 These sliders control the volume of four elements which make up a Normal Voice in the Voice mode, the volume of four parts in the Performance mode, the volume of four parts including the current part in the Song mode/Pattern mode, and the volume of four zones in the Master mode. n If all of the Control Sliders are set to the minimum, you may not hear any sound from the instrument, even when playing the keyboard or a song/pattern. If this is the case, raise all the sliders to a suitable level. n The [MASTER VOLUME] slider adjusts the output level from this instrument. On the other hand, the Control Slider adjusts the MIDI volume value for the corresponding element or part. 9 REMOTE buttons Page 147 The Remote mode lets you control sequencer software on your computer from the panel controls of the instrument. Turn the [ON/OFF] button on to enter the Remote mode. You can use the [R-AUDIO/G-MIDI] button to switch control between your audio tracks (red lamp) and MIDI tracks (green lamp), when Mode A or B is set to “General” ([UTILITY] → [F4] CTL ASN → [SF4] REMOTE). n When setting the MIDI IN/OUT parameter to “MIDI” ([UTILITY] → [F5] MIDI → [SF4] OTHER) or setting both of Mode A and Mode B to “off” ([UTILITY] → [F4] CTL ASN → [SF4] REMOTE), you cannot enter the Remote mode even by pressing the REMOTE [ON/OFF] button. Set these parameters to appropriate values (page 148) then enter the Remote mode. ) EFFECT buttons Page 177 The extensive effect section of the instrument provides Insertion effects (eight sets, with two effect units per set), System effects (Reverb and Chorus), and Master effects. The effects can be applied to the keyboard-played voices and to Song/Pattern playback. These three buttons enable you to turn the corresponding Effect blocks (as printed on the panel) on or off with a single touch. Keep in mind that the [INSERTION] and [SYSTEM] buttons are bypass switches, while the [MASTER EFFECT] button is an on/off switch. The distinction is important — when the lamp of the [INSERTION] or [SYSTEM] button is on, the effect is off (or bypassed). The [MASTER EFFECT] button is the opposite: when the lamp is on, the Master effect is on. Also, to access the Master Effect setting display, press and hold the [MASTER EFFECT] button for a second or two. ! [ARPEGGIO ON/OFF] button Page 66 Press this button to enable or disable playback of the Arpeggio for each Voice, Performance, Song, or Pattern. If the Arpeggio Switch of the selected part is set to off in the Performance/Song/Pattern mode, however, pressing this button has no effect. Owner’s Manual 19 Front Panel @ SEQ TRANSPORT buttons Page 56 These buttons control recording and playback of the Song/Pattern sequence data. The Controls & Connectors [ ](Top) button Instantly returns to the beginning of the current song or pattern (i.e., the first beat of the first measure). [ ](Reverse) button Press briefly to move back one measure at a time, or hold to continuously rewind. [ ](Forward) button Press briefly to move forward one measure at a time, or hold to continuously fast-forward. [●] (Record) button Press this to enable recording (Song or pattern phrase). (The indicator lights.) [ ](Play) button Press to start playback from the current point in the song or pattern. During recording and playback, the indicator flashes at the current tempo. Page 45 These buttons select the operating modes (e.g., Voice mode). $ LCD Display The large backlit LCD displays the parameters and values related to the currently selected operation or mode. ( Data dial Page 43 Use this control to set the LCD display for optimum legibility. ^ [F1] - [F6] (Function) buttons Page 47 These buttons located directly below the LCD display call up the corresponding functions indicated in the display. In the display hierarchy, these functions [F] rank just below the modes. & [SF1] - [SF5] (Sub Function) buttons Page 47 These buttons located directly below the LCD display call up the corresponding sub functions indicated in the display. In the display hierarchy, these sub functions [SF] rank just below the functions [F]. These buttons can be also used to store/recall the Arpeggio type in each Play mode and Song/Pattern Record mode. They can be also used to store/recall the Song Scene (page 123) in the Song Play/Song Record/ Pattern Chain Record modes. 20 Owner’s Manual Page 49 For editing the currently selected parameter. To increase the value, turn the dial right (clockwise); to decrease the value, turn the dial left (counter-clockwise). If a parameter with a wide value range is selected, you can change the value in broader strokes by quickly turning the dial. Page 49 For increasing the value of the currently selected parameter. Also use it to actually execute a Job or a Store operation. ¡ [DEC/NO] button Page 49 For decreasing the value of the currently selected parameter. Also use it to cancel a Job or a Store operation. n You can also use the [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons to quickly move through parameter values in 10-unit jumps, especially those with large ranges. Simply hold down one of the buttons (of the direction you want to jump), and simultaneously press the other. For example, to jump in the positive direction, hold down the [INC/ YES] button and press [DEC/NO]. ™ Cursor Buttons % LCD Contrast Control Page 53 For calling up a special “help” feature that shows information about the currently selected mode. You can go back to the previous display by pressing this button again or pressing any other button. Depending on the selected display, this button may be used to call up a window for inputting characters (page 54), for inputting numbers (page 49), for selecting note lengths (page 49), or for selecting keys or note names (page 53). º [INC/YES] button [ ](Stop) button Press to stop recording or playback. # MODE buttons * [INFORMATION] button Page 49 The cursor buttons move the “cursor” around the LCD display screen, highlighting and selecting the various parameters. £ [EXIT] button Page 46 The menus and displays of this synthesizer are organized according to a hierarchical structure. Press this button to exit from the current display and return to the previous level in the hierarchy. ¢ [ENTER] button Use this button to execute a Job or a Store operation. Also use this button to actually enter a number when selecting a Memory or Bank for Voice or Performance. In the File mode, use this button to go to the next lowest level in the selected directory. Front Panel Page 284 These three lamps show the installation status of the Plugin Boards. If the Plug-in Board has been correctly installed, the corresponding SLOT lamp will light. n The Vocal Harmony Plug-in Board (PLG100-VH) can be installed only to slot 1. It cannot be installed to slot 2 or 3. n The Multi part Plug-in Board (PLG100-XG) can be installed only to slot 3. It cannot be installed to slot 1 or 2. § BANK buttons Page 60 Each button selects a Voice or Performance Bank. When the [CATEGORY SEARCH] button is turned on, these buttons can be used to select the desired category (printed below each button). When the [SECTION] button is turned on in the Pattern mode, these buttons are used to select the desired section. ¶ GROUP [A] - [H] buttons Page 48 Each button selects a Voice or Performance Group. When the [CATEGORY SEARCH] button is turned on, these buttons can be used to select the desired category (printed below each button). When the [SECTION] button is turned on in the Pattern mode, these buttons are used to select the desired section. • NUMBER [1] - [16] buttons Page 48 Use of these buttons differs depending on the on/off status of the [TRACK SELECT] and [MUTE] buttons. Functions of the NUMBER [1] - [16] buttons When [TRACK SELECT] is on Keyboard Voice Play mode transmit channel setting Voice Edit mode Performance Play mode Performance Edit mode When [MUTE] is on — Element selection (1 - 4) and Element Mute setting (9 - 12) When both [TRACK SELECT] [MUTE] are off ª [CATEGORY SEARCH] button Page 62 When this button is turned on in the Performance mode, the lower row of [BANK] buttons (labeled A.PIANO REED/PIPE below the buttons) and the [GROUP] buttons can be used to select the Performance category. When this button is turned on in another mode, the lower row of [BANK] buttons (labeled A.PIANO - REED/PIPE below the buttons) and the [GROUP] buttons can be used to select the Voice category. ‚ [SECTION] button The Controls & Connectors ∞ SLOT 1-3 lamps Page 57 When this button is turned on in the Pattern mode, the GROUP [A] - [H] buttons can be used to select Pattern Sections A - H and the [PRE5] - [PLG3] buttons of the BANK buttons can be used to select Pattern Sections I - P. ⁄ [TRACK SELECT] button Page 58 Turning this button on in the Song/Pattern mode enables the NUMBER [1] - [16] buttons for selecting corresponding Song/Pattern tracks. The on/off status of this button affects the NUMBER [1] - [16] buttons in different ways, depending on the selected mode. (See • “NUMBER [1] - [16] buttons” above.) ¤ [MUTE] button Page 58 Turning this button on in the Song/Pattern mode enables the NUMBER [1] - [16] buttons for muting corresponding Song/Pattern tracks. Press one of the NUMBER [1] - [16] buttons while holding this button to solo the corresponding track of the current selected Song/Pattern. The on/off status of this button affects the NUMBER [1] [16] buttons in different ways, depending on the selected mode. (See • “NUMBER [1] - [16] buttons” above.) Voice selection, according to Groups A-H — Performance or Voice selection Performance part (if cursor is located Mute setting at Voice name), Performance part (1 - 4) according to Groups selection (1 - 4) A-H Keyboard transmit channel setting Master Play mode Keyboard transmit channel setting (when memorizing the Voice mode or Performance mode to the current Master) or Song/Pattern track selection (when memorizing the Song mode or Pattern mode to the current Master) — Master selection, according to Groups A-H Master Edit mode Zone selection (1 - 4) — — Song/Pattern Play mode Song/Pattern track selection Song/Pattern track Mute setting Song/Pattern Mixing mode Song/Pattern selection, according Song/Pattern part Song/Pattern part to Groups A - H selection Mute setting Mixing Voice Edit mode Element selection (1- 4) and Element Mute setting (9- 12) — Owner’s Manual 21 Rear Panel Rear Panel The Controls & Connectors MOTIF ES6 USB POWER ON OFF AC INLET 1 2 mLAN I/O EXPANSION 3 TO DEVICE THRU TO HOST 4 5 MOTIF ES7 POWER ON OFF AC INLET 1 2 mLAN I/O EXPANSION 3 MOTIF ES8 22 POWER ON OFF AC INLET 1 2 Owner’s Manual MIDI OUT mLAN I/O EXPANSION 3 IN BREATH ASSIG 6 The Controls & Connectors Rear Panel $ 3.3V % GREEN YELLOW ORANGE CARD Plug-in SLOT FOOT CONTROLLER FOOT SWITCH 2 ASSIGNABLE SUSTAIN 7 1 ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT R L 8 9 R OUTPUT L /MONO PHONES A / D INPUT R L ) ! GAIN @ # $ 3.3V % CARD Plug-in SLOT FOOT SWITCH USB TO DEVICE THRU TO HOST 4 MIDI OUT 5 IN BREATH ASSIGNABLE SUSTAIN 6 7 GREEN YELLOW ORANGE FOOT CONTROLLER 2 8 1 ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT R L 9 R OUTPUT L /MONO PHONES ) ! A / D INPUT R L GAIN @ # $ 3.3V CARD FOOT SWITCH USB TO DEVICE TO HOST 4 Plug-in SLOT GREEN YELLOW ORANGE % THRU MIDI OUT 5 IN BREATH ASSIGNABLE SUSTAIN 6 7 FOOT CONTROLLER 2 1 8 ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT R L 9 R OUTPUT L /MONO PHONES ) ! A / D INPUT R L GAIN @ # Owner’s Manual 23 Rear Panel 1 POWER Switch Page 43 Press to turn power ON or OFF. The Controls & Connectors 2 AC INLET (AC Power Cord Socket) 6 BREATH Controller Jack Page 26 Be sure to plug the AC power cord into this socket before plugging the power cord into an AC outlet. Use only the AC power cord supplied with this instrument. If the supplied cord is lost or damaged and needs to be replaced, contact your Yamaha dealer. The use of an inappropriate replacement can pose a fire and shock hazard! 7 FOOT SWITCH jacks 3 mLAN expansion board (mLAN16E) or I/O expansion board (AIEB2) cover Page 25 Either the mLAN expansion board (mLAN16E) or the I/O expansion board (AIEB2) sold separately can be installed to this instrument. With the mLAN16E board, you can conveniently and easily hook up your MOTIF ES to other mLAN compatible instruments or devices. The AIEB2 board gives you additional digital I/O options, featuring both optical and coaxial connectors. Moreover, the board also includes three stereo ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT pairs (six analog jacks). Page 29 This instrument is equipped with two types of USB connectors on the rear panel – USB TO HOST and USB TO DEVICE. The USB TO HOST connector is used to connect this instrument to the computer via the USB cable. The USB connection between the instrument and the computer can only be used for transfer of MIDI data. No audio data can be transferred via USB. The USB TO DEVICE connector is used to connect this instrument to a USB storage device (hard disk drive, CD-ROM drive, MO drive, flash disk, etc.) via the USB cable. This lets you save the data created on this instrument to the external USB storage device and load the data from the external USB storage device to the instrument. Save/Load operations can be performed in the File mode. n For details about USB, see Page 29. Page 42 For connection of optional foot controllers (FC7, etc.). Each jack lets you continuously control one of various different assignable functions – such as volume, tone, pitch, or other aspects of the sound. 9 ASSIGNABLE OUT L and R jacks Page 31 Line level audio signals are output from this instrument via these phone jacks (1/4" mono phone plug). These outputs are independent of the main output (at the L/MONO and R jacks below), and can be freely assigned to any of the Drum Voice keys or the Parts. This lets you route specific Voices or sounds for processing with a favorite outboard effect unit. The parts which can be assigned to these jacks are as follows: • Drum Voice key to which the drum/percussion instrument is assigned • Any part of a Performance* • Any part of a Song* • Any part of a Pattern* Page 203 Page 218 Page 235 Page 235 * Including the Audio Input part ) OUTPUT L/MONO and R jacks Page 31 Line level audio signals are output via these phone jacks. For monophonic output, use just the L/MONO jack. ! PHONES jack Page 31 For connection to a pair of stereo headphones. USB USB is an abbreviation for Universal Serial Bus. It is a serial interface for connecting a computer with peripheral devices, and enables much faster data transfer compared to conventional serial port connections. 5 MIDI IN/OUT/THRU connectors Page 34 MIDI IN is for receiving control or performance data from another MIDI device, such as an external sequencer. MIDI THRU is simply for redirecting any received MIDI data (via MIDI IN) to connected devices, allowing convenient chaining of additional MIDI instruments. MIDI OUT is for transmitting all control, performance and playback data from the MOTIF to another MIDI device, such as an external sequencer. 24 Page 42 For connection of optional FC4 or FC5 Footswitches. When connected to the SUSTAIN jack, the Footswitch controls sustain. When connected to ASSIGNABLE, it can control one of various different assignable functions. 8 FOOT CONTROLLER jacks 4 USB connectors Page 42 Connect an optional Yamaha BC3 Breath Controller here for expressive breath control capability. Owner’s Manual @ A/D INPUT jacks Page 33 External audio signals can be input via these phone jacks (1/4" mono phone plug). Various devices such as microphone, guitar, bass, CD player, synthesizer can be connected to these jacks and their audio input signal can be sounded as the AUDIO IN part of the Performance, Song, or Pattern. In the Sampling mode, these jacks are used for capturing audio data as samples. For stereo signals (such as from audio equipment), use both jacks. For mono signals (such as from a microphone or guitar), use only the L jack. Rear Panel Page 73 For adjusting the input gain of the audio at the A/D INPUT jacks (above). Depending on the connected device (microphone, CD player, etc.), you may need to adjust this for optimum level. $ CARD (Card slot) 1 2 3 Page 27 Insert a SmartMedia (memory) card here to transfer various data to/from this instrument. Read carefully the precautions on using a SmartMedia (page 28) before inserting a SmartMedia card. % Plug-in board cover Page 283 Installing an optional Plug-in Board to this instrument lets you greatly expand the sonic palette of the instrument. Up to three boards can be installed to the rear panel. ■ When the optional mLAN16E has been installed: 1 mLAN EXPANSION BOARD mLAN16E 2 ■ When the optional AIEB2 has been installed: The Controls & Connectors # GAIN knob 1 OPTICAL IN, OUT connectors Pages 33, 34 Use these connectors to input or output digital signals over optical-fiber cable. You can use the OPTICAL IN to record a digital signal at frequencies of 48kHz, 44.1kHz, or 32kHz. The OPTICAL OUT connector outputs a digital signal of 44.1kHz. 2 DIGITAL IN, OUT connectors Pages 33, 34 Use these connectors to input or output digital signals over coaxial (RCA-pin) cable. The digital signal format is CD/DAT (S/P DIF). You can use the DIGITAL IN connector to record a digital signal at frequencies of 48kHz, 44.1kHz, or 32kHz. The DIGITAL OUT connector outputs a digital signal of 44.1kHz. IEEE1394 1 ACTIVE MADE IN JAPAN 3 ASSIGNABLE OUT jacks (AS1 to AS6) 1 mLAN (IEEE1394) connector 1, 2 For connecting mLAN devices or IEEE1394-compatible (FireWire) devices via standard IEEE1394 (6-pin) cables. Page 31 Line level audio signals are output from this instrument via these phone jacks (1/4" mono phone plug). These outputs are independent of the main output (at the L/MONO and R jacks above), and can be freely assigned to any of the Drum Voice key or the Parts. This lets you route specific Voices or sounds for processing with your favorite outboard effect unit. The parts which can be assigned to these jacks are as follows: About mLAN “mLAN” is a digital network designed for musical applications. It uses and extends the industry standard IEEE 1394 high performance serial bus. For details, refer to the Guide Book of the mLAN16E. • Drum Voice key to which the drum/percussion instrument is assigned Page 203 • Any part of a Performance* Page 218 • Any part of a Song* Page 235 • Any part of a Pattern* Page 235 * Including the Audio Input part * The name “mLAN” and its logo (above) are trademarks. n The digital audio output via the mLAN connector is fixed to a resolution of 24 bit/44.1 kHz. n Digital audio output via the OPTICAL OUT connector or DIGITAL OUT connector can be changed between 20-bit and 24-bit resolution in the [UTILITY] → [F2] I/O → [SF2] OUTPUT display. The frequency, however, is fixed at 44.1 kHz. Owner’s Manual 25 Power Supply Setting Up Setting Up Please read this section carefully before using your new MOTIF ES. This section explains how to connect your MOTIF ES to an AC power source, external audio and MIDI devices, and a computer system. Only switch the MOTIF ES on after you have made all the necessary connections (page 43). Power Supply Rear panel AC INLET Power cord (included) 1 2 3 Make sure the POWER switch on the MOTIF ES is set to OFF. Connect the supplied power cord to the AC INLET on the instrument’s rear panel. Connect the other end of the power cord to an AC outlet. Make sure your MOTIF ES meets the voltage requirement for the country or region in which it is being used. WARNING Make sure your MOTIF ES is rated for the AC voltage supplied in the area in which it is to be used (as listed on the rear panel). Connecting the unit to the wrong AC supply can cause serious damage to the internal circuitry and may even pose a shock hazard! WARNING Use only the AC power cord supplied with the MOTIF ES. If the supplied cord is lost or damaged and needs to be replaced, contact your Yamaha dealer. The use of an inappropriate replacement can pose a fire and shock hazard! WARNING The type of AC power cord provided with the MOTIF ES may be different depending on the country in which it is purchased (a third prong may be provided for grounding purposes). Improper connection of the grounding conductor can create the risk of electrical shock. Do NOT modify the plug provided with the MOTIF ES. If the plug will not fit the outlet, have a proper outlet installed by a qualified electrician. Do not use a plug adapter which defeats the grounding conductor. 26 Owner’s Manual About data storage to SmartMedia cards and USB storage devices About data storage to SmartMedia cards and USB storage devices SmartMedia (page 28) Setting Up As you make music with this instrument, you’ll create a wide variety of data — such as custom Voice data (including Voices, Performances, etc.), MIDI sequence data (Songs, Patterns, Arpeggios), and waveform data (with the Sampling function). Naturally, you’ll want to store this data for safekeeping and future use, and the instrument is equipped with a variety of storage options. You can save your data to SmartMedia card (inserted to the Card slot) or to a USB storage device (connected to the USB TO DEVICE connector). To recall the data, use the Load function. (Save and Load operations are done in the File mode; see page 266.) Keep in mind that certain types of data are lost when you turn off the power and should be properly saved. Also keep in mind that since there are several storage options (including SmartMedia card, hard disk, flash disk, etc.), you should always have the proper media formatted and on hand BEFORE you start creating or editing data. USB storage device (page 29) USB TO DEVICE connector MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER MOTIF ES n The Save/Load operation in the File mode can be executed between the SmartMedia card inserted to the CARD slot on the rear panel and the instrument, or between the USB storage device connected to the USB TO DEVICE connector and the instrument. Please keep in mind that the Save /Load operation in the File mode cannot be executed between the SmartMedia card inserted to the CARD slot on the rear panel and the USB storage device connected to the USB TO DEVICE connector. In short, data can be saved/loaded between the storage media and the instrument, but not between the two storage media devices. Data lost and data retained when power is turned off The chart below lists the data types you can create on the instrument and the internal memory locations to which they are stored, permanently or temporarily. CAUTION Make sure to save any data remaining in DRAM to SmartMedia or a USB storage device before turning off the power, other wise the data will be lost. Data types * Page Voice 79 Mode in which data is created Internal memory types to which data is stored Voice mode Flash ROM DRAM ➜ Will be lost when turning the power off! Mixing Voice 105 Mixing Voice mode Performance 87 Performance mode Flash ROM Song* 117 Song mode DRAM ➜ Will be lost when turning the power off! Song Chain 59 Song Chain mode DRAM ➜ Will be lost when turning the power off! Pattern* 106 Pattern mode DRAM ➜ Will be lost when turning the power off! Pattern Chain 115 Pattern Chain mode DRAM ➜ Will be lost when turning the power off! Phrase (Pattern) 110 Pattern mode DRAM ➜ Will be lost when turning the power off! Arpeggio 130 Song mode, Pattern mode Flash ROM Master 136 Master mode Flash ROM Waveform** 94 Sampling mode DIMM (DRAM) ➜ Will be lost when turning the power off! Mixing Template*** 103 Song Mixing mode, Pattern Mixing mode Flash ROM System settings 185 Utility mode Flash ROM Includes the Mixing settings (pages 103, 127) ** If you create the User Voices or Sample Voices by using the Sampling function, the corresponding Waveforms can be saved automatically by saving the User Voice data or Song/Pattern data to the SmartMedia/USB storage device. *** Song Mixing/Pattern Mixing can be stored as Song/Pattern data and as a Mixing Template (which are not associated with a specific Song/Pattern). n For details about the data types you can create on this instrument, the internal memory locations to which they are stored, and file types when saving the created data to the SmartMedia/USB storage device, refer to “Memory Structure” on page 186. CAUTION Data of up to 128 MB can be saved to a SmartMedia card inserted to the CARD slot on the rear panel. Yamaha recommends the use of a large-capacity USB storage device, since you may want to save data more 128 MB — especially if you’ve installed optional DIMMs (page 289) and are using the Sampling feature. Owner’s Manual 27 About data storage to SmartMedia cards and USB storage devices Using the SmartMedia™* cards Be sure to handle SmartMedia cards with care. Follow the important precautions below. * SmartMedia is a trademark of Toshiba Corporation. ■ Compatible SmartMedia card Type Setting Up 3.3V (3V) SmartMedia cards can be used. 5V type SmartMedia cards are not compatible with this instrument. ■ Memory Capacity There are seven types of SmartMedia cards: 2MB/4MB/8MB/ 16MB/32MB/64MB/128MB. Keep in mind that only SmartMedia cards conforming to SSFDC standards (bearing the SmartMedia logo) can be used. ■ Inserting/Removing SmartMedia cards Inserting a SmartMedia card With the gold-plated contact side facing down, insert the SmartMedia card firmly but carefully into the card slot, as far as it will go. Be careful not to insert the card upside down or back side in. Also, do not insert anything else into the slot, other than a proper SmartMedia card. Removing a SmartMedia card Before removing the SmartMedia card, be sure to confirm that the SmartMedia card is not in use, or it is not being accessed by the instrument. Then pull the SmartMedia card out slowly by hand. If the SmartMedia card is being accessed*, a message indicating that it is in use appears on the instrument’s display. * This includes all save, load, format, delete and create directory operations for the SmartMedia card. Also, be aware that the instrument will automatically access the SmartMedia card to check the media type when it is inserted while the instrument is turned on. ■ About the SmartMedia cards Handle SmartMedia cards with care! • SmartMedia cards are very sensitive and can be damaged by static electricity. Before handling a SmartMedia card, make sure to discharge any static electricity in your body by touching something made of metal, such as a door knob or aluminum blinds. • Be sure to remove the SmartMedia card from the CARD slot when it is not in use for a long time. • Do not expose the SmartMedia card to direct sunlight, extremely high or low temperatures, or excessive humidity, dust or liquids. • Do not place heavy objects on a SmartMedia card or bend or apply pressure to the SmartMedia card in any way. • Never touch the gold-plated contact with your fingers or let it come in contact with any other metallic or hard surface. • Do not expose the SmartMedia card to magnetic fields, such as those produced by televisions, speakers, motors, etc., since magnetic fields can partially or completely erase data on the SmartMedia card, rendering it unreadable. • Do not attach anything other than the provided labels to a SmartMedia card. Also make sure that labels are attached in the proper location. Protecting your data (write-protect) To prevent important data from being inadvertently erased, apply the write-protect seal (provided with the SmartMedia card) to the circle spot indicated on the card. If you are saving data to the card, make sure to remove the write-protect seal. Do not reuse a seal that has been removed; it may not stick properly to the card and could come off in the slot. CAUTION Never attempt to remove the SmartMedia card or turn the power off during accessing. Doing so can damage the data on the instrument/SmartMedia card and possibly the SmartMedia card itself. ■ Formatting SmartMedia cards Before using a SmartMedia card with your instrument it must first be formatted (page 268). Once it is formatted all data on it will be erased. Make sure that no important data is contained on the card beforehand. n The SmartMedia cards formatted with this instrument may be unusable with other instruments or devices. ■ Data Backup For maximum data security Yamaha recommends that you keep two copies of important data on separate SmartMedia cards. This gives you a backup if one SmartMedia card is lost or damaged. ■ Burglarproof Lock This instrument is equipped with a burglarproof lock for the SmartMedia card. If necessity arises, install the burglarproof lock onto the instrument. To install the burglarproof lock: 1 2 28 Owner’s Manual Remove the metallic part using a Phillips screwdriver. Turn the metallic part upside down and replace it in the new position. About data storage to SmartMedia cards and USB storage devices Using USB storage devices When using USB storage devices, make sure to connect them to the USB TO DEVICE connector, and follow the important precautions below. ■ Compatible USB devices The MOTIF ES does not necessarily support all commercially available USB storage devices. Yamaha cannot guarantee operation of USB storage devices that you purchase. Before purchasing USB storage devices, please consult your Yamaha dealer, or an authorized Yamaha distributor (see list at end of the Owner’s Manual) for advice, or see the following page: http://www.yamahasynth.com/ n Although CD-R/W drives can be used to load data to the instrument, they cannot be used for saving data. However, you can transfer data to a computer and save data to a CD using the CD-R/W drive on the computer. ■ Formatting USB storage media When a USB storage device is connected or media is inserted, a “Disk or card unformatted” message may appear in the LCD display, indicating that the device or media must be formatted for use. Execute the Format operation in the File mode (page 268). USB connector types There are two different types of USB connectors, and the rear panel of the instrument features both. Take care not to confuse the two. ■ USB TO HOST connector This type is used to connect the instrument to a computer, and allows you to transfer MIDI data between the devices. Unlike MIDI, USB can handle multiple ports via a single cable. USB cables have different connectors on each end: the A type and the B type. Connect the A type to your computer and the B type to the USB TO HOST connector. ■ USB TO DEVICE connector This type is used to connect the instrument to a USB storage device, and allows you to save data you’ve created to the connected device, as well as load data from the connected device. Save and Load operations are executed in the File mode. USB cables have different connectors on each end: the A type and the B type. Connect the A type to the USB TO HOST connector and the B type to the USB storage device. Precautions when using the USB TO DEVICE connector MIDI data transfer Connecting to a computer CAUTION Saving/Loading data in the File mode (page 266) • Never turn the USB device’s power on/off and never plug/unplug the USB cable when the connected USB storage device is the selfpowered type. Doing so may result in the operation of the synthesizer “freezing” or hanging up. • While the instrument is accessing data (such as in the Save, Load and Delete operations in the File mode), do NOT unplug the USB cable, do NOT remove the media from the device, and do NOT turn the power off to either device. Doing so may corrupt the data on either or both devices. Setting Up Connect only a USB storage device (such as hard disk, CDROM, flash disk and other drives) to the USB TO DEVICE connector. Other devices such as a computer keyboard or mouse cannot be used. Both bus-powered (powered by the host device) or selfpowered (battery or external power supply) types can be used. B type USB TO HOST connector A type USB TO DEVICE connector Connecting to a USB storage device (hard disk, CD-ROM, flash disk and other drives) MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER ■ Protecting your data (write-protect) To prevent important data from being inadvertently erased, apply the write-protect provided with each storage device or media. If you are saving data to the USB storage device, make sure to remove the write-protect. MOTIF ES n The computer cannot access the USB storage device connected to the MOTIF ES’s USB TO DEVICE connector, even if connecting as shown above. Only from the File mode on the instrument itself can you access the data on the USB storage device connected to the USB TO DEVICE connector. n Though the MOTIF ES supports the USB 1.1 standard, you can connect and use a USB 2.0 storage device with the MOTIF ES. However, note that the transfer speed complies to USB 1.1. Owner’s Manual 29 About data storage to SmartMedia cards and USB storage devices Basic settings for using SmartMedia or a USB storage device 1 2 Press the [FILE] button to enter the File mode. Setting Up Press the [SF1] CURRENT button to check which device is selected. When Current is set to “CARD” The instrument recognizes the SmartMedia inserted to the Card slot. When Current is set to “USB” The instrument recognizes the USB storage device. Volume Label of the selected device TIP Backing up your data to a computer • Backing up MOTIF ES data to a computer Once you’ve saved data to a SmartMedia card or USB storage device, you can copy the data to the hard disk of your computer, then archive and organize the files as desired. Simply reconnect the device as shown below. Saving created data to the USB storage device in the File mode (page 266) 3 Set Current to “CARD” if you wish to access the SmartMedia, or set Current to “USB” if you wish to access the USB storage device. If the USB storage device supports multiple types of media, you’ll need to set the Slot number after setting Current to “USB.” To check which media corresponds to which USB number (1 or 2) and which slot number, see the Volume Label or Partition setting in this window. Once you’ve made the settings above, you can perform any of the other File operations (in the bottom tabs, called up with the [F2] - [F5] buttons). n When a USB storage device is connected or media is inserted, a “Disk or card unformatted” message may appear in the LCD display, indicating that the device or media must be formatted for use. Execute the Format operation in the File mode (page 268). • Loading data from a computer to the MOTIF ES Data and files contained on the hard disk of a computer can be loaded to the MOTIF ES by copying them first to the storage media, then transferring them to the instrument. In this way, you can use data created on the computer or another instrument with the MOTIF ES. For example, you can load Standard MIDI files to the instrument as Song/ Pattern data, or import audio WAV or AIFF files for use as waveform data. Copying the files of the hard disk of the computer to the USB storage device USB storage device Computer USB TO DEVICE connector MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER USB storage device Computer MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER MOTIF ES Disconnect the USB storage device from the synthesizer and connect it to the computer MOTIF ES Disconnect the USB storage device from the computer and connect it to the synthesizer Backing up data to a computer and organizing files/folders Loading files on the USB storage device to the synthesizer in the File mode (page 266) USB storage device Computer MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER USB storage device Computer USB TO DEVICE connector MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER MOTIF ES n 30 Though the example here shows the use of a connected USB storage device, you can also back up your created data that you’ve saved to a SmartMedia inserted to the CARD slot on the rear panel. Owner’s Manual MOTIF ES Connections Connections Connecting to External Audio Equipment Setting Up Since the MOTIF ES has no built-in speakers, you’ll need an external audio system or a set of stereo headphones to properly monitor it. The following illustrations show various connection examples; use the one most similar to your intended setup. Audio Output ■ Connecting stereo powered speakers (analog output) For optimum, accurate reproduction of the instrument’s rich sounds, effects and full stereo image, use a pair of powered speakers. Connect the powered speakers to the OUTPUT L/MONO and R jacks on the rear panel. Powered speaker (Left) Powered speaker (Right) Headphones OUTPUT L/MONO OUTPUT R PHONES MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER MOTIF ES n When using just one powered speaker, connect it to the OUTPUT L/MONO jack on the rear panel. ■ Connecting a mixer There are extra audio outputs in addition to the OUTPUT (L/MONO and R) jacks. Connect these outputs to a mixer for separately controlling the analog outputs of Drum keys or parts (Performance, Song, and Pattern). You can expand the output capabilities by installing the optional I/O board (AIEB2) or the optional mLAN16E. Installing the AIEB2 adds six extra OUTPUT jacks, while installing the mLAN16E expands the output capabilities with fourteen addition digital outputs, over a single FireWire (IEEE 1394) connector/cable. For details on how to set the Part/output jack assignments, refer to the chart below. Outputting separate notes (keys) of a Drum Voice Determined from the OutputSel parameter (as selected below) as Drum Voice data. Page 203 [VOICE] ➞ Drum Voice selection ➞ [EDIT] ➞ Drum Key selection ➞ [F1] OSC ➞ [SF2] OUTPUT ➞ OutputSel This setting is available for the Part for which the OutputSel parameter is set to “drum” in another mode (e.g., Performance or Song). Outputting separate Parts of a Performance Determined from the OutputSel parameter (as selected below). Page 218 [PERFORM] ➞ Performance selection ➞ [EDIT] ➞ Part selection ➞ [F2] OUTPUT ➞ [SF3] SELECT ➞ OutputSel Assigning an audio input Part of a Performance to an output is done from the OutputSel parameter (as selected below). [PERFORM] ➞ Performance selection ➞ [EDIT] ➞ [COMMON] ➞ [F5] AUDIO IN ➞ [SF1] OUTPUT ➞ OutputSel Outputting separate Parts of a Song Determined from the OutputSel parameter (as selected below). Page 235 [SONG] ➞ Song selection ➞ [MIXING] ➞ [EDIT] ➞ Part selection ➞ [F2] OUTPUT ➞ [SF3] SELECT ➞ OutputSel Assigning an audio input Part of a Song to an output is done from the OutputSel parameter (as selected below). [SONG] ➞ Song selection ➞ [MIXING] ➞ [EDIT] ➞ [COMMON] ➞ [F5] AUDIO IN ➞ [SF1] OUTPUT ➞ OutputSel Outputting separate Parts of a Pattern Determined from the OutputSel parameter (as selected below). Page 235 [PATTERN] ➞ Pattern selection ➞ [MIXING] ➞ [EDIT] ➞ Part selection ➞ [F2] OUTPUT ➞ [SF3] SELECT ➞ OutputSel Assigning an audio input Part of a Pattern to an output is done from the OutputSel parameter (as selected below). [PATTERN] ➞ Pattern selection ➞ [MIXING] ➞ [EDIT] ➞ [COMMON] ➞ [F5] AUDIO IN ➞ [SF1] OUTPUT ➞ OutputSel Owner’s Manual 31 Connections The following settings can be made from the parameter pages listed above. LCD Output jacks Stereo/Mono LCD Output jacks Stereo/Mono Setting Up L&R OUTPUT L and R Stereo asL ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT L Mono asL&R ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT L and R Stereo asR ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT R Mono as1&2 ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT 1 and 2 Stereo (1: L, 2: R) * as1 ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT 1 Mono * as3&4 ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT 3 and 4 Stereo (3: L, 4: R) * : as5&6 ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT 5 and 6 Stereo (5: L, 6: R) * as6 ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT 6 Mono * as7&8 ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT 7 and 8 Stereo (7: L, 8: R) ** as7 ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT 7 Mono ** as9&10 ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT 9 and 10 Stereo (9: L, 10: R) ** : as11&12 ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT 11and 12 Stereo (11: L, 12: R) ** as13&14 ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT 13 and 14 Stereo (13: L, 14: R) ** as14 : : : : ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT 14 Mono ** * Available only when the optional AIEB2 board or mLAN16E board has been installed. ** Available only when the optional mLAN16E board has been installed. Connection example when the optional AIEB2 board has been installed (analog output) Headphones OUTPUT L OUTPUT L/MONO OUTPUT R OUTPUT R ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT L ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT R Pro R3 PHONE jack Mixer Amplifier AIEB2 MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER Speaker (Left) Speaker (Right) MOTIF ES Connection example when the optional mLAN16E board has been installed (analog and digital output) Headphones OUTPUT L OUTPUT L/MONO OUTPUT R OUTPUT R ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT L ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT R IEEE1394 cable PHONE jack Mixer Amplifier mLAN16E MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER Speaker (Left) Speaker (Right) MOTIF ES n 32 About the main output jacks and the Assignable Output jacks • Connecting a set of headphones to the PHONES jack does not affect the sound output from the OUTPUT L/MONO and R jacks. The sound monitored through the headphones is identical to the sound of the OUTPUT L/MONO and R jacks. • Any parts assigned to the ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT jacks (including those of the optional AIEB2 interface or mLAN16E interface) will not be output through the OUTPUT L/MONO and R jacks or PHONES jack. • The System Effects (Reverb, Chorus), the Master EQ, and the Master Effect are not applied to the sound output through the ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT jacks (including those of the optional AIEB2 interface or mLAN16E interface). (Only the Part EQ and the Insertion Effect are applied.) Owner’s Manual Connections ■ Digital Output using the optional AIEB2 When the optional AIEB2 board has been installed to the rear panel, the sound output through the OUTPUT jacks by analog can also be output by digital through the OPTICAL OUTPUT jack and the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. Using these digital output jacks, you can record the keyboard performance or Song/Pattern playback of this synthesizer to external media (e.g., an MD recorder) with exceptionally high-quality sound. Recording Setting Up Optical cable Coaxial cable Recording OPTICAL OUTPUT AIEB2 DIGITAL INPUT DIGITAL OUTPUT OPTICAL INPUT MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER DAT DAT DAT or CD recorder MOTIF ES n The digital output resolution of the optionally installed AIEB2 board can be set in the UTILITY mode with the following operation. [UTILITY] ➞ [F2] I/O ➞ [SF2] OUTPUT Page 261 Audio Input ■ Connecting a microphone or other audio equipment to the A/D INPUT jacks (analog input) External instruments and audio equipment, such as a microphone, guitar, bass, CD player or even another synthesizer/keyboard can be connected to the A/D INPUT jacks. This audio can be used as input for the AUDIO IN Part in the Performance/Song/ Pattern mode, and can be used to create samples with the Sampling function (page 172). With the use of an optional PLG100VH Plug-in Board, you can even apply an automatic vocal harmony effect to the microphone sound. Stereo audio equipment (CD player, etc.) L Microphone (MONO) R L A/D INPUT L A/D INPUT R MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER MOTIF ES n Bass Apply effects to the microphone sound by using the Vocal Harmony Plug-in board (PLG100-VH) A/D INPUT L MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER MOTIF ES Guitar A/D INPUT L MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER MOTIF ES MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER MOTIF ES Depending on the connected equipment, change the parameter settings in the Utility mode as needed, with the following operations. • When the output level of the connected equipment (such as a microphone, guitar, bass) is low: [UTILITY] ➞ [F2] I/O ➞ [SF1] INPUT ➞ Mic/Line = mic • When the output level of the connected equipment (such as a synthesizer, keyboard, CD player) is high: [UTILITY] ➞ [F2] I/O ➞ [SF1] INPUT ➞ Mic/Line = line n After the above connections are complete, you may need to adjust the input gain of the audio source using the GAIN knob (page 73). n The audio input sound is not available in the Voice mode because the Voice mode does not have an AUDIO IN Part. Owner’s Manual 33 Connections ■ Digital Input using the optional AIEB2 By installing the optional AIEB2 I/O expansion board, you can directly record digital audio from digital sources — such as a CD player or DAT deck. For maximum compatibility and flexibility, the AIEB2 board includes two different input types: OPTICAL (optical fiber) and DIGITAL (coaxial cable). Coaxial cable Optical cable Sampling Setting Up AIEB2 Sampling OPTICAL OUTPUT OPTICAL INPUT AIEB2 MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER DAT DAT DAT or CD recorder DAT or CD recorder MOTIF ES n DIGITAL OUTPUT DIGITAL INPUT MOTIF ES Either one of the connectors (OPTICAL or DIGITAL) can be used; however, both cannot be used at the same time. Select which connector is used for digital input in the Utility mode with the following operation. [UTILITY] ➞ [F2] I/O ➞ [SF1] INPUT ➞ Digital Page 261 ■ Digital Input using the optional mLAN16E The optional mLAN16E allows you to connect this instrument to an mLAN device or computer, giving you high-speed audio and MIDI data transfer between devices with just one IEEE 1394 cable connection. IEEE1394 cable mLAN device (Data Rate S400) Computer with an IEEE1394 interface mLAN16E IEEE1394 MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER MOTIF ES Connecting External MIDI Instruments With a standard MIDI cable (available separately), you can connect an external MIDI device, and control it from the MOTIF ES. Likewise, you can use an external MIDI device (such as a keyboard or sequencer) to control the MOTIF ES sounds. Below are several different MIDI connection examples; use the one most similar to your intended setup. n Any one of the these interfaces can be used for MIDI data transmission/reception: the MIDI connectors, the mLAN connector (when an optional mLAN16E has been installed), or the USB connector. However, they cannot be used at the same time. Select which connector is used for MIDI data transfer in the Utility mode with the following operation. [UTILITY] ➞ [F5] MIDI ➞ [SF4] OTHER ➞ MIDI IN/OUT Page 265 ■ Controlling from an external MIDI keyboard Use an external keyboard to remotely select and play Voices of the MOTIF ES. MIDI IN MIDI OUT MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER External MIDI keyboard or synthesizer, such as the S/SY/EX series MOTIF ES 34 Owner’s Manual Connections MIDI Transmit Channel and Receive Channel Make sure match the MIDI Transmit Channel of the external MIDI instrument with the MIDI Receive Channel of the MOTIF ES. For details on setting the MIDI Transmit Channel of the external MIDI instrument, refer to the Owner’s Manual of the MIDI instrument. For details on setting the MIDI Receive Channel of the MOTIF ES, check the following points. • In the Voice mode/Performance mode (using the MOTIF ES as a single timbre tone generator) Setting Up Check the MIDI Basic Receive Channel with the following operation. [UTILITY] ➞ [F5] MIDI ➞ [SF1] CH ➞ BasicRcvCh If necessary, change this parameter to the same number as the MIDI Transmit Channel of the external MIDI instrument. • In the Song mode/Pattern mode (using the MOTIF ES as a multi-timbral tone generator) Check the MIDI Receive Channel for each part of the Song/Pattern with the following operation. [SONG] or [PATTERN] ➞ [MIXING] ➞ [EDIT] ➞ Part selection ➞ [F1] VOICE ➞ [SF2] MODE ➞ ReceiveCh Change the settings of the desired parts to match the MIDI Transmit Channel settings on the external MIDI instrument. Please note that all the parts whose MIDI Receive Channel are same as MIDI Transmit Channel of the external MIDI instrument are sounded by your keyboard performance. n The functions of the internal tone generator differ depending on whether the Voice/Performance mode (single timbre, keyboard playback) or the Song/Pattern mode (multi-timbral, sequencer playback) is selected. For details, see page 163. ■ Controlling an external MIDI keyboard from this synthesizer This connection lets you sound an external MIDI tone generator (synthesizer, tone generator module, etc.) by playing the MOTIF ES or playing back the Song/Pattern of the MOTIF ES. Use this connection when you wish to sound the other instrument as well as the MOTIF ES. MIDI OUT MIDI IN MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER External MIDI keyboard or synthesizer, such as the S/SY/EX series MOTIF ES TIP Splitting the sound between the MOTIF ES and an external tone generator by MIDI channel (Part 1) Using the connection example shown above, you can play both instruments and have them separately sound different parts — for example, having your keyboard performance sound the external instrument while the Song/Pattern plays the sounds of the MOTIF ES. Check the following points. • In the Voice mode/Performance mode You can check the MIDI Transmit Channel at the right corner of the [F1] PLAY display in the Voice Play mode/Performance Play mode. If necessary, you can change the MIDI Transmit Channel by turning the [TRACK SELECT] button on and entering the desired value with the [NUMBER] buttons. When you wish to sound only the external tone generator, set Master Volume to “0” or set Local Control to “off” with the following operation. [UTILITY] ➞ [F5] MIDI ➞ [SF2] SWITCH ➞ LocalCtrl About how to set the MIDI Receive Channel of the external MIDI instrument, refer to the Owner’s Manual of the external MIDI instrument. • In the Song mode/Pattern mode You can check the MIDI Transmit Channel for each track of the current Song/Pattern with the following operation. Change this setting as necessary. [SONG] or [PATTERN] ➞ [F3] TRACK ➞ [SF1] CHANNEL Alternately, you can set the output destination (Internal or external MIDI tone generator) for each track from the following display. [SONG] or [PATTERN] ➞ [F3] TRACK ➞ [SF2] OUTSW In this case, you’ll need to set the external MIDI tone generator to multi-timbral operation and set the MIDI Receive Channel for each part. For details, refer to the owner’s manual of the external MIDI tone generator. Alternately, you can have your keyboard performance split and assigned to different MIDI channels by using the Zone settings in the Master mode. (See page 137.) n The functions of the internal tone generator differ depending on whether the Voice/Performance mode (single timbre, keyboard playback) or the Song/Pattern mode (multi-timbral, sequencer playback) is selected. For details, see page 163. Owner’s Manual 35 Connections ■ Recording and playback using an external MIDI sequencer In this connection example, song data on the external MIDI sequencer plays the sounds of the tone generator on the MOTIF ES. The external song data can also be recorded to Song/Pattern tracks on the MOTIF ES. MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI IN MIDI OUT Setting Up MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER Sounding the MOTIF ES tone generator from a MIDI sequencer, such as the QX/QY series, RM1x, RS7000 MOTIF ES In this case, make sure that the MOTIF ES is set to the Song mode or Pattern mode. If the instrument is set to the Voice mode or to the Performance mode in which multi-channel MIDI messages are not recognized, the external sequence data (containing multi-channel data) will not play back properly on the MOTIF ES. In addition, you may have to make certain MIDI synchronization settings (see below). Synchronizing with an external MIDI instrument (Master and Slave) The Songs and Patterns of this instrument can be synchronized to the playback of an external MIDI sequencer, To do this, one device must be set to internal clock operation and the other (as well as all other devices to be controlled) to external clock. The device set to internal clock serves as a reference for all connected devices, and is referred to as the “master” instrument. The connected devices set to external clock are referred to as “slaves.” When recording playback data of the external MIDI sequencer to a Song/Pattern of the MOTIF ES in the above connection example, make sure to set the MIDI synchronization parameter to the use of external clock in the Utility mode with the following operation. [UTILITY] ➞ [F5] MIDI ➞ [SF3] SYNC ➞ MIDI Sync = MIDI n For details on how to record the playback data of an external MIDI sequencer to a Song on the MOTIF ES, see page 143. ■ Controlling another MIDI instrument via MIDI THRU If you have more synthesizers and tone generators than MIDI ports, you can use the MIDI THRU jack to connect and control additional devices. Here, the playback data of a MIDI sequencer is used to play the sounds of another MIDI instrument (connected to the MIDI THRU connector) as well as the MOTIF ES. The MIDI THRU connector simply redirects any received MIDI data (via MIDI IN) to connected instrument. MIDI OUT MIDI IN MIDI THRU MIDI IN MIDI IN MIDI OUT C MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER MIDI tone generator MIDI synthesizer MIDI sequencer such as the QY/ QX series, RM1x, RS7000 MOTIF ES In this case, make sure that the MOTIF ES is set to the Song mode or Pattern mode. If the instrument is set to the Voice mode or to the Performance mode in which multi-channel MIDI messages are not recognized, the external sequence data (containing multi-channel data) will not play back properly on the MOTIF ES. In addition, you may have to make certain MIDI synchronization settings (see below). Likewise, make sure to set the MIDI tone generator (connected to the MIDI THRU connector) to the multi-timbral mode. Beside, you need to set the MIDI synchronization related parameters of the MOTIF ES to use of the external clock from the following display. [UTILITY] ➞ [F5] MIDI ➞ [SF3] SYNC ➞ MIDI Sync = MIDI 36 Owner’s Manual Connections TIP Splitting the sound between the MOTIF ES and an external tone generator by MIDI channel (Part 2) In this connection example shown above, you can split the sequence playback between the MOTIF ES and another instrument connected to MIDI THRU and have them sound different parts. For example, on the MOTIF ES assign the Song/Pattern parts to MIDI Receive Channels 1 through 9 with the following operation, and set the rest of the parts (not to be sounded) to off. Setting Up [SONG] or [PATTERN] ➞ [MIXING] ➞ [EDIT] ➞ Part selection ➞ [F1] VOICE ➞ [SF2] MODE ➞ ReceiveCh On the connected MIDI tone generator, assign the parts to be sounded to MIDI Receive Channels 10 through 16, and set the rest of the parts (not to be sounded) to off. ■ Using an mLAN interface (when an optional mLAN16E has been installed) The connection example shown on page 32 lets you transfer MIDI messages as well as audio data. The mLAN connection to computer (page 39) allows you to transfer both audio and MIDI data between your MOTIF ES and a computer. ■ Connecting to an MTR (Multi Track Recorder) Since this synthesizer can receive the MTC (MIDI Time Code) and can transmit the MMC (MIDI Machine Control), you can produce music by synchronizing to a MTC- or MMC-compatible multi-track. You can use two types of MTR control (illustrated below) by setting the MIDI Sync to MTC in the Utility mode, with the following operation. [UTILITY] ➞ [F5] MIDI ➞ [SF3] SYNC ➞ MIDI Sync = MTC n MTC and MMC are available only in the Song mode. • Synchronizing the MOTIF ES to the MTC signal from an external MTR After receiving the MTC signal transmitted from the MTR by starting the MTR playback, the Song of the MOTIF ES will start at the moment the MTC Start Offset time elapses (set from the display [UTILITY] ➞ [F5] MIDI ➞ [SF3] SYNC ➞ MTC StartOffset in the Utility mode). MIDI cable MTC OUT MIDI IN MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER AW4416, etc. MOTIF ES n MTC (MIDI Time Code) allows simultaneous synchronization of multiple audio devices via standard MIDI cables. It includes data corresponding to hours, minutes, seconds, and frames. The MOTIF ES does not transmit MTC. An instrument such as the Yamaha AW4416 is necessary as an MTC master. • Controlling an MTR by using MMC transmitted from the MOTIF ES You can control the start/stop and fast forward/rewind of the MMC-compatible MTR from the SEQ TRANSPORT buttons on the front panel of this synthesizer, outputting MMC messages via MIDI. MIDI cable MIDI IN SEQ TRANSPORT MIDI OUT MIDI IN MIDI OUT MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER LOCATE 1 2 MOTIF ES n AW4416, etc. MMC (MIDI Machine Control) allows remote control of multitrack recorders, MIDI sequencers, etc. A MMC-compatible multitrack recorder, for example, will automatically respond to start, stop, fast forward, and rewind operations performed on the controlling sequencer, thus keeping playback of the sequencer and multitrack recorder aligned. Owner’s Manual 37 Connections Connecting to a Computer Connecting this instrument to a computer via MIDI opens up a whole world of musical possibilities — such as using sequencer software to record and play back compositions with the MOTIF ES sounds or using the included Voice Editor software to create and edit your own custom Voices. n Setting Up When connecting to a Macintosh computer (with the exception of Mac OS X), make sure to install OMS to the computer as well as the desired software (sequence software, Voice Editor, etc.). For details, refer to the separate Install Guide. Using a USB TO HOST connector When connecting via this method, make sure to set the following parameter to “USB.” [UTILITY] ➞ [F5] MIDI ➞ [SF4] OTHER ➞ MIDI IN/OUT = USB USB cable USB TO HOST MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER Computer with a USB interface MOTIF ES n USB cables have different connectors on each end: the A type and the B type. When connecting this synthesizer to the computer, connect the A type to your computer and the B type to the USB TO HOST connector. n When connecting to a computer (Windows/Macintosh) via USB, make sure to install the USB-MIDI driver to the computer as well as the desired software (sequence software, Voice Editor, etc.). For details, refer to the separate Installation Guide. n If you are using the Remote Control function to control operations on a computer sequencer, you should make connections with a USB cable. MIDI channel and MIDI port While a MIDI cable can transfer MIDI messages of 16 channels simultaneously, a USB cable can transfer MIDI messages of more than 16 channels simultaneously. MIDI data is assigned to one of sixteen channels, and this synthesizer is capable of simultaneously playing sixteen separate parts, via the sixteen MIDI channels. However, the sixteen-channel limit can be overcome by using separate MIDI “ports,” each supporting sixteen channels. A USB cable can handle MIDI data on up to eight ports, letting you use up to 128 channels (8 ports x 16 channels) on your computer. 38 n This synthesizer can recognize and use up to three ports at the same time. n When using a USB connection, make sure to match the MIDI transmit port and the MIDI receive port as well as the MIDI transmit channel and the MIDI receive channel. Owner’s Manual Connections TIP About the Thru Port Setting MIDI ports can be used to divide playback among multiple synthesizers, as well as expand the MIDI channel capacity beyond sixteen. In the example below, a separate synthesizer connected to the MOTIF ES is played by MIDI data via port 5, as set in the ThruPort parameter with the following operation. MIDI IN Only MIDI data over port 5 will be transmitted through the MOTIF ES to this tone generator. MIDI cable Setting Up [UTILITY] ➞ [F5] MIDI ➞ [SF4] OTHER ➞ ThruPort = 5 USB cable MIDI OUT USB TO HOST Outputting the MIDI data via multiple ports MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER Only MIDI data over ports 1, 2, and 3 are recognized. For details on the relationship between the MIDI port and the tone generator block, see page 163. Precautions when using the USB TO HOST connector CAUTION When connecting the computer to the USB TO HOST connector, make sure to observe the following points. If you do not observe these points, you risk freezing the computer, corrupting the data, and losing the data. If the computer or the instrument freezes, turn the power to the instrument off or restart the computer. • Before connecting the computer to the USB TO HOST connector, exit from any power-saving mode (such as suspended, sleep, standby) of the computer. • Before turning on the power to the instrument, connect the computer to the USB TO HOST connector. • Execute the following before turning the power to the instrument on/off or plugging/unplugging the USB cable to/from the USB TO HOST connector. - Quit any open applications (such as Voice Editor, Multi Part Editor, and SQ01). - Make sure that data is not being transmitted from the instrument. (Data is transmitted only by playing notes on the keyboard or playing back a song.) • While a USB device is connected to the instrument, you should wait for three seconds or more between these operations: When turning the power of the instrument off then on again, or when alternately connecting/disconnecting the USB cable. Using an IEEE1394 interface (when an optional mLAN16E has been installed) By installing an optional mLAN16E interface, you can connect a computer (with an IEEE 1394 interface) to this instrument via a single cable. When connecting via this method, make sure to set the following parameter to “mLAN.” [UTILITY] ➞ [F5] MIDI ➞ [SF4] OTHER ➞ MIDI IN/OUT = mLAN IEEE1394 cable mLAN16E mLAN connector MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER MOTIF ES Computer with an IEEE1394 interface The mLAN connection using an IEEE1394 cable lets you transfer both MIDI data and audio data. For example, you can record your keyboard performance and Song/Pattern playback to hard disk of the computer as audio data (page 153). Owner’s Manual 39 Connections Using a MIDI interface • Using the computer’s MIDI interface MIDI cable MIDI IN MIDI OUT Setting Up MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER MIDI IN MIDI OUT Computer with MIDI interface MOTIF ES • Using an external MIDI interface MIDI cable MIDI IN MIDI interface Serial port (modem or printer port) or USB port MIDI OUT MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER MOTIF ES Computer n Please use the appropriate MIDI interface for your computer. n If you are using a computer that has a USB interface, make sure to connect the computer and this synthesizer by USB. (The data transfer rate is faster than MIDI and you’ll have access to multiple MIDI ports.) Selecting Voices from a computer You can select Voices on this instrument from your computer software by specifying the following MIDI messages. • Bank Select MSB • Bank Select LSB • Program Change For details on what values are assigned to the Voice Bank/Number of this synthesizer, refer to the separate Data List. 40 Owner’s Manual Connections Local On/Off – when Connected to a Computer Setting Up When connecting this synthesizer to a computer, the keyboard performance data is generally sent to the computer, and then returned from the computer to play the tone generator block. If the Local Control in the Utility mode is set to “on,” a “double” sound may result, since the tone generator is receiving performance data from both the keyboard directly and the computer. Use the setting suggestions below as a guideline; specific instructions may differ depending on your computer and the software used. • When MIDI “Echo” (MIDI through) is set to on the software/computer: Computer (SQ01, etc.) USB TO HOST MOTIF ES IN OUT OUT Tone generator block Keyboard [UTILITY] ➞ [F5] MIDI ➞ [SF2] SWITCH ➞ LocalCtrl = off n IN MIDI Echo (MIDI thru) = on When transmitting or receiving System Exclusive data (such as with the Bulk Dump function), use the setting example below, making sure that MIDI “Echo” (MIDI through) on the computer software is set to “off.” • When MIDI “Echo” (MIDI through) is set to off the software/computer: Computer (SQ01, etc.) USB TO HOST MOTIF ES Tone generator block OUT IN Keyboard [UTILITY] ➞ [F5] MIDI ➞ [SF2] SWITCH ➞ LocalCtrl = on n MIDI Echo (MIDI thru) = off Although not indicated in the illustration above, the MOTIF ES actually receives and responds to MIDI data from the computer application (sequencer), regardless of the Local Control setting on the MOTIF ES. * MIDI “Echo” is a function on sequencers that takes any data received via the MIDI IN and “echoes” it (or sends it as is) through the MIDI OUT. In some software, this function is also called “MIDI Thru.” n For details about the MIDI Echo, refer to the owner’s manual of your particular software. Owner’s Manual 41 Connections Connecting Various Controllers The MOTIF ES features several controller jacks on the rear panel — letting you independently control various aspects of the sound and a variety of functions with optional controllers. FOOT SWITCH Setting Up 3.3V CARD Plug-in SLOT FOOT SWITCH USB ON OFF AC INLET mLAN I/O EXPANSION TO DEVICE TO HOST THRU MIDI OUT IN BREATH ASSIGNABLE SUSTAIN FOOT CONTROLLER BREATH ASSIGNABLE SUSTAIN GREEN YELLOW ORANGE 2 1 FOOT CONTROLLER 2 1 ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT R L R OUTPUT L /MONO PHONES A / D INPUT R L GAIN MOTIF ES rear panel FC7 FC4 or FC5 BC3 FC4 or FC5 FC7 ■ Breath Controller You can connect an optional Breath Controller (BC3) to the BREATH jack on the rear panel. Then use it to control a large number of this synthesizer’s parameters, particularly those controlled by a wind player’s breath: dynamics, timbre, pitch and so on. The Breath Controller is ideally suited for realistic expression with wind instrument type Voices. n Breath Controller parameters can be set for each Voice (page 192). ■ Footswitch (assignable) An optional Yamaha FC4 or FC5 Foot Switch connected to the rear panel FOOT SWITCH ASSIGNABLE jack can be assigned to a range of parameters. It is suited for switch-type (on/off) controls, such as Portamento Switch, increment/decrement of a Voice or Performance Number, start/stop of the Sequencer, and holding the Arpeggiator on or off. n The parameter assigned to the Footswitch is set in the Utility mode (page 263). ■ Footswitch (sustain) An optional FC4 or FC5 Footswitch connected to the SUSTAIN jack on the rear panel lets you control sustain — particularly useful when playing piano and strings voices. Keep in mind that some sounds may not be suitable for use in all situations with the Sustain footswitch. For example, for organ sounds that have no natural decay, the sound continues at the same level when holding down the Sustain footswitch. On the other hand, many sounds benefit from the use of Sustain, such as piano, which has a natural decay when a note is held. Using Sustain with these kinds of Voices provides a smooth after-sound and gives you expressive control in your performance. n The sustain level of the Amplitude EG (page 162) is maintained while holding down the Sustain footswitch, even when releasing your fingers from the keys. n You cannot assign a function other than Sustain to the SUSTAIN jack. ■ Foot Controller Optional Foot Controllers (such as the FC7), connected to the FOOT CONTROLLER jacks on the rear panel, can be assigned to a number of controller parameters. By using a foot controller for parameter control, both your hands are left free to play the keyboard (or to operate other controllers) — exceptionally convenient when you’re playing live. n 42 Foot Controller parameters can be set for each Voice (page 192). Owner’s Manual Turning the power on/off Turning the power on/off Power-on Procedure Setting Up Once you’ve made all the necessary connections between your MOTIF ES and any other devices, make sure that all volume settings are turned down all the way to zero. Then turn on the every device in your setup in the order of MIDI masters (senders), MIDI slaves (receivers), then audio equipment (mixers, amplifiers, speakers, etc.). This ensures smooth signal flow from the first device to the last (first MIDI, then audio). When powering down the setup, first turn down the volume for each audio devices, then switch off each device in the reverse order (first audio devices, then MIDI). When using the MOTIF ES as MIDI receiver: 1 2 3 POWER ON!! MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER MUSIC SYNTHESIZER Modular Synthesis Plug-in System MIDI sender MOTIF ES Audio equipment (first mixer, then amplifier) Turning the MOTIF ES on/off The explanations here apply when audio equipment (amplifier and speaker) is connected to the MOTIF ES. 1 2 Make sure that the external audio equipment is connected to the MOTIF ES properly. Also be sure to set the volume of the MOTIF ES and the external audio equipment to 0. Press the POWER switch on the rear panel to turn the MOTIF ES on. The Opening display (together with the message that confirms the status of the Plug-in Board installation) appears and after a while, the Master mode display appears. POWER ON OFF AC INLET Rear panel of the MOTIF ES Master mode display n At the time this synthesizer is shipped from the factory, the Master mode display will appear when turning the power on. You can change the default display when turning the power on with the following operation. [UTILITY] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF4] OTHER → PowerOnMode (page 261) n Because the Auto Load parameter (page 135) is set to on at the time this synthesizer is shipped from the factory, it takes a short amount of time before the instrument assumes normal playing status (in which you can play the keyboard). You can switch the on/off status of the Auto Load function from the [UTILITY] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF5] OTHER display (page 135). 3 4 5 6 Turn the power of the connected audio equipment on. Raise the sound system volume of the audio equipment and the MOTIF ES gradually to a reasonable level. If necessary, adjust the legibility of the LCD display by using the LCD Contrast Control. After turning the power of the audio equipment off or turning down the volume of the audio equipment, turn the MOTIF ES’s power off. Owner’s Manual 43 Resetting the User Memory to the Initial Factory Settings Resetting the User Memory to the Initial Factory Settings The original factory setting of this synthesizer’s User Memory (page 186) can be restored as follows. CAUTION Setting Up When the factory settings are restored, all the Voice, Performance, Song, Pattern, and system setting in the Utility mode you created will be erased. Be sure to save all important data to SmartMedia or USB storage device before executing this procedure (pages 85, 91 and 131). 1 Press the [UTILITY] button to enter the Utility mode (the lamp lights). SEQUENCER SONG PATTERN FILE INTEGRATED SAMPLING MIXING UTILITY EDIT JOB STORE DEMO COMPARE 2 SCENE STORE SET LOCATE Press the [JOB] button to enter the Utility Job mode. SEQUENCER SONG PATTERN FILE INTEGRATED SAMPLING MIXING UTILITY EDIT JOB STORE DEMO COMPARE 3 Press the [ENTER] button. (The display prompts you for confirmation.) n 4 SCENE STORE SET LOCATE To cancel the Job, press the [DEC/NO] button. Press the [INC/YES] button to execute the Job. After the Job has been completed, a “Completed” message appears and operation returns to the original display. CAUTION An “Executing...” or “Please keep power on” message is shown when it takes a short amount of time to execute the Job. Never attempt to turn off the power while data is being written to Flash ROM (while an “Executing...” or “Please keep power on” message is shown). Turning the power off in this state results in loss of all user data and may cause the system to freeze (due to corruption of data in the Flash ROM). This means that this synthesizer may not be able to start up properly, even when turning the power on next time. n 44 All settings in the Utility mode that are related to the Plug-in boards are stored only to the memory on those respective boards, and not to the User memory of this synthesizer. Because of this, the Factory Set operation cannot be used to restore settings for those boards. Owner’s Manual Modes Basic Operation In this section, we’ll take a look at the fundamental operating conventions of the MOTIF ES. Here, you’ll learn the basics – how to select modes, call up the various functions, change settings, and edit parameter values. Take time to familiarize yourself with these nuts-and-bolts operations, and you’ll be on your way to mastering the instrument. Before reading further, familiarize yourself with the basic terms used with the MOTIF ES in the chart below. Description Page Voice Musical instrument voices Performance A program in which multiple Voices are combined in a layer 158 158 Song Music data consisting of MIDI events 166 Pattern Rhythm pattern data which consist of MIDI events used for looped playback 167 Sampling The function that lets you record the audio data (such as your own voice and CD playback sound) and play those sounds just like any other synthesizer’s Voice. 172 Master A program which lets you register the settings in each mode – Voice, Performance, Song, and Pattern 136 File A collection of settings for storing and managing your created data 186 Basic Operation Term Modes Mode Structure This synthesizer is organized into various modes, each covering a different set of operations and functions. Keep in mind that there are two basic types of modes, depending on the status of the tone generator block. The first type includes the Voice and Performance modes, and the internal tone generator is used in single timbre operation — meaning that only one Voice, or one channel of MIDI data is used. The second type includes the Song and Pattern modes, and the internal tone generator is used in multi-timbral operation — meaning that several Voices, or multiple MIDI channels are used. Along with each of these types are sub modes — the Sampling mode and the Utility mode. Remember that the particular displays and parameters in these two modes differ depending on which type of mode (Voice/Performance or Song/Pattern) was active before calling up the sub-mode. In addition to the above mentioned, there are two special modes. The Master mode lets you memorize your desired settings in each mode (Voice/Performance/Song/Pattern) and recall them instantly anytime you need them with a single button. The File mode lets you manage your created data. Keyboard Playback mode (single timbre tone generator) Voice mode Voice Play mode Voice Edit mode Voice Job mode Voice Store mode VOICE MODE PERFORM Performance mode Performance Play mode Performance Edit mode Performance Job mode Performance Store mode Keyboard Playback mode (multi-timbral tone generator) SONG Song mode Song Play mode Song Record mode Song Edit mode Song Job mode Song Mixing mode Song Mixing Edit mode Song Mixing Job mode Song Mixing Store mode PATTERN Pattern mode Pattern Play mode Pattern Record mode Pattern Edit mode Pattern Job mode Pattern Mixing mode Pattern Mixing Edit mode Pattern Mixing Job mode Pattern Mixing Store mode VOICE Sampling mode Sampling Record mode Sampling Edit mode Sampling Job mode Utility mode Utility Job mode (Mixing Voice mode) Mixing Voice Edit mode Mixing Voice Job mode Mixing Voice Store mode INTEGRATED SAMPLING PERFORM MASTER SEQUENCER SONG PATTERN FILE INTEGRATED SAMPLING MIXING UTILITY DEMO UTILITY Master mode Master Play mode Master Edit mode Master Job mode Master Store mode MASTER FILE File mode MIXING Owner’s Manual 45 Modes Mode table The functions of each mode and how to enter each mode are as follows: Mode Voice mode Performance mode Basic Operation Song mode Pattern mode (Mixing Voice mode) Sampling mode Voice Play mode Function Playing a Voice How to enter the mode [VOICE] Voice Edit mode Editing/Creating a Voice [VOICE] → [EDIT] Voice Job mode Initializing a Voice, etc. [VOICE] → [JOB] Voice Store mode Storing a Voice to internal memory [VOICE] → [STORE] Performance Play mode Playing a Performance [PERFORM] Performance Edit mode Editing/Creating a Performance [PERFORM] → [EDIT] Performance Job mode Initializing a Performance, etc. [PERFORM] → [JOB] Performance Store mode Storing a Performance to internal memory [PERFORM] → [STORE] Song Play mode Playing a Song [SONG] Song Record mode Recording a Song [SONG] → [●] (REC) Song Edit mode Editing a Song MIDI events [SONG] → [EDIT] Song Job mode Converting and transforming Song data [SONG] → [JOB] Song Mixing mode Setting tone generator parameters [SONG] → [MIXING] Song Mixing Edit mode Setting tone generator parameters in detail [SONG] → [MIXING] → [EDIT] Song Mixing Job mode Initializing a Song Mixing, etc. [SONG] → [MIXING] → [JOB] Song Mixing Store mode Storing a Song Mixing internal memory [SONG] → [MIXING] → [STORE] Pattern Play mode Playing a Pattern [PATTERN] Pattern Record mode Recording a Pattern [PATTERN] → [●] (REC) Pattern Edit mode Editing a Pattern MIDI events [PATTERN] → [EDIT] Pattern Job mode Converting and transforming Pattern data [PATTERN] → [JOB] Pattern Mixing mode Setting tone generator parameters [PATTERN] → [MIXING] Pattern Mixing Edit mode Setting tone generator parameters in detail [PATTERN] → [MIXING] → [EDIT] Pattern Mixing Job mode Initializing a Pattern Mixing, etc. [PATTERN] → [MIXING] → [JOB] Pattern Mixing Store mode Storing a Pattern Mixing internal memory [PATTERN] → [MIXING] → [STORE] Mixing Voice Edit mode Editing/Creating a Voice dedicated for Song/Pattern [SONG] or [PATTERN] → [MIXING] → [F5] VCE ED Mixing Voice Job mode Initializing a Mixing Voice, etc. [SONG] or [PATTERN] → [MIXING] → [F5] VCE ED → [JOB] Mixing Voice Store mode Storing a Mixing Voice to internal memory [SONG] or [PATTERN] → [MIXING] → [F5] VCE ED → [STORE] Sampling Record mode Recording a Sample [INTEGRATED SAMPLING] Sampling Edit mode Editing a sample [INTEGRATED SAMPLING] → [EDIT] Sampling job mode Converting and transforming Sample data [INTEGRATED SAMPLING] → [JOB] Utility mode Utility mode Setting System related parameters [UTILITY] Utility Job mode Resetting the User Memory to the Initial Factory Settings [UTILITY] → [JOB] Master mode Master Play mode Playing a Master [MASTER] Master Edit mode Editing/Creating a Master [MASTER] → [EDIT] Master Job mode Initializing a Master, etc. [MASTER] → [JOB] File mode Master Store mode Storing a Master to internal memory [MASTER] → [STORE] File mode Managing Files and Folders (Directories) [FILE] ■ How to leave the current display For most operations or displays (except for the File mode, Song/Pattern Record mode, and Remote Control mode), pressing the [EXIT] button will let you leave the current display and return you to the previous one. You can return back to any of the modes — Voice Play, Performance Play, Song Play, Pattern Play, and Master Play — by pressing the [EXIT] button several times in the respective mode. DEC/NO INC / YES EXIT ENTER EXECUTE 46 Owner’s Manual Functions and Sub-Functions Functions and Sub-Functions Each mode described above contains various displays, with various functions and parameters. To navigate your way through these displays and select a desired function, use the [F1] - [F6] buttons and the [SF1] - [SF5] buttons. When you select a mode, the available displays or menus appear directly above the buttons at the bottom of the display (as shown below). Basic Operation Using the Function buttons [F1] - [F6] These functions can be selected via the corresponding button ([F1] - [F6]). SCENE SF2 SF1 F1 F2 SF3 F3 SF4 F4 INFORMATION SF5 F5 F6 In this example, press the [F5] button to go to the LFO display. Depending on the currently selected mode, up to six functions are available and can be called up with the [F1] - [F6] buttons. Keep in mind that the available functions differ depending on the selected mode. Using the Sub-Function buttons [SF1] - [SF5] These functions can be selected via the corresponding button ([SF1] - [SF5]). SCENE SF2 SF1 F1 F2 SF3 F3 SF4 F4 INFORMATION SF5 F5 In this example, press the [SF5] button to go to the OTHER display. F6 Depending on the currently selected mode, up to five functions (sub-functions) are available and can be called up with the [SF1] - [SF5] buttons. Keep in mind that the available functions differ depending on the selected mode. (Some displays may not have any sub-functions for these buttons.) Selecting a Program In order to play the MOTIF ES you’ll need to call up one of its programs, i.e., a Voice, Performance, Song, Pattern, or Master. These programs can be selected in each Play mode via the same procedure. ■ Using the [INC/YES], [DEC/NO] buttons and the data dial The [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons let you step up or down through the program numbers in any of the Play modes (Voice, Performance, Song, Pattern, and Master). Rotating the data dial to the right (clockwise) increases the program number, while rotating it to the left (counter-clockwise) decreases it. This control works in the same way as the [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons, but lets you scroll through the programs more quickly. Decreases number Increases number DEC/NO Decreases number INC / YES Increases number Owner’s Manual 47 Selecting a Program ■ Using the [GROUP], [NUMBER] buttons As shown below, you can select a program number by pressing any of the GROUP [A] - [H] buttons and pressing any of the NUMBER [1] - [16] buttons. The explanations here apply when these four button indicators are off. SLOT 1 SLOT 2 SLOT 3 Basic Operation PRE 5 PRE 6 USER 1 USER 2 GM PLG 1 PLG 2 PLG 3 A. PIANO KEYBOARD ORGAN GUITAR/ PLUCKED BASS STRINGS BRASS REED/PIPE A B C D E F G H SYN LEAD SYN PAD/ CHOIR SYN COMP 1 2 3 DRUM/ CHROMATIC PERCUSSION PERCUSSION CATEGORY SEARCH BANK SECTION GROUP SE MUSICAL FX COMBI 4 5 6 7 8 TRACK SELECT 12 13 14 15 16 MUTE ELEMENT/PERF. PART/ZONE 9 11 10 NUMBER SOLO n The convenient Category Search function (page 62) lets you easily locate and select the Voices you want by type. The Voice program numbers and the corresponding Group/Numbers are listed below. 48 Program Number Group Number Program Number Group Number Program Number Group Number Program Number Group Number 001 A 1 033 C 1 065 E 1 097 G 1 002 A 2 034 C 2 066 E 2 098 G 2 003 A 3 035 C 3 067 E 3 099 G 3 004 A 4 036 C 4 068 E 4 100 G 4 005 A 5 037 C 5 069 E 5 101 G 5 006 A 6 038 C 6 070 E 6 102 G 6 007 A 7 039 C 7 071 E 7 103 G 7 008 A 8 040 C 8 072 E 8 104 G 8 009 A 9 041 C 9 073 E 9 105 G 9 010 A 10 042 C 10 074 E 10 106 G 10 011 A 11 043 C 11 075 E 11 107 G 11 012 A 12 044 C 12 076 E 12 108 G 12 013 A 13 045 C 13 077 E 13 109 G 13 014 A 14 046 C 14 078 E 14 110 G 14 015 A 15 047 C 15 079 E 15 111 G 15 016 A 16 048 C 16 080 E 16 112 G 16 017 B 1 049 D 1 081 F 1 113 H 1 018 B 2 050 D 2 082 F 2 114 H 2 019 B 3 051 D 3 083 F 3 115 H 3 020 B 4 052 D 4 084 F 4 116 H 4 021 B 5 053 D 5 085 F 5 117 H 5 022 B 6 054 D 6 086 F 6 118 H 6 023 B 7 055 D 7 087 F 7 119 H 7 024 B 8 056 D 8 088 F 8 120 H 8 025 B 9 057 D 9 089 F 9 121 H 9 026 B 10 058 D 10 090 F 10 122 H 10 027 B 11 059 D 11 091 F 11 123 H 11 028 B 12 060 D 12 092 F 12 124 H 12 029 B 13 061 D 13 093 F 13 125 H 13 030 B 14 062 D 14 094 F 14 126 H 14 031 B 15 063 D 15 095 F 15 127 H 15 032 B 16 064 D 16 096 F 16 128 H 16 n When selecting a Voice, it is necessary to press one of the [BANK] buttons before pressing the [GROUP] and [NUMBER] buttons. n The amount of numbers differ depending on the program. For example, while the selected number range of the Normal Voice, Performance, and Master is 001 - 128, the selected number range of the Song and Pattern is 001- 064. Owner’s Manual Moving the Cursor and Setting Parameters Moving the Cursor and Setting Parameters Changing (editing) parameter values Rotating the data dial to the right (clockwise) increases the value, while rotating it to the left (counter-clockwise) decreases it. DEC/NO INC / YES EXIT ENTER For parameters with large value ranges, you can increase the value by 10 by simultaneously holding down the [INC/ YES] button and pressing the [DEC/NO] button. To decrease by 10, do the opposite; simultaneously hold down the [DEC/NO] button and press the [INC/YES] button. Basic Operation Moving the cursor Use these four buttons to navigate the display, moving the cursor around the various selectable items and parameters in the screen. When selected, the relevant item is highlighted (the cursor appears as a dark block with inverse characters). You can change the value of the item (parameter) at which the cursor is located by using the data dial, [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons. EXECUTE ■ Inputting a number directly For parameters having large value ranges (such as the start and end points of a sample), you can also enter the value directly, using the buttons below the LCD display as a numeric keypad. When the cursor is located on such a parameter, the [NUM] icon appears at the lower right corner of the LCD display indicating that you can call up the number input window by pressing the [INFORMATION] button. From this window, you can input a number directly by pressing the [F1] - [F6] buttons and the [SF1] [SF5] buttons. First, press the [F6] button so that the cursor appears at the Input Number within the bracket. Move the cursor to the desired digit by using the Cursor buttons [>] and [<], then input the number of the selected digit. After completing the number input, press the [ENTER] button to actually enter the number. Press the [EXIT] button to go back to the original display. Number Input window SCENE SF2 SF1 F1 F2 SF3 F3 SF4 F4 INFORMATION SF5 F5 Input Number SCENE SF2 SF1 F6 F1 F2 SF3 F3 SF4 F4 INFORMATION SF5 F5 F6 ■ Selecting a note type When the cursor is located on the parameter to which the note type is set, the note icon appears at the lower right corner indicating that you can call up the Note Type selection window by pressing the [INFORMATION] button. You can specify the note type by pressing the [F1] - [F6] buttons and the [SF1] - [SF5] buttons. After selecting one of the note types, press the [ENTER] button to actually enter the selection. Press the [EXIT] button to go back to the original display. Note Type selection window SCENE SF2 SF1 F1 F2 SF3 F3 SF4 F4 INFORMATION SF5 F5 F6 SCENE SF2 SF1 F1 F2 SF3 F3 SF4 F4 INFORMATION SF5 F5 F6 Owner’s Manual 49 Knob (KN) and Control Slider (CS) Knob (KN) and Control Slider (CS) Knob (KN) You can change the brightness and tone characteristics of the current Voice or Performance in realtime by turning the knobs while you play. Rotating it to the right (clockwise) increases the program number, while rotating it to the left (counter-clockwise) decreases it. You can select the function set assigned to the knobs among the following seven sets by pressing the appropriate [KNOB CONTROL FUNCTION] button. Basic Operation Function sets assigned to the Knobs (KN) Button of which the lamp is turned on Operation Functions controlled by each Knob KN1 (Knob 1) KN2 (Knob 2) KN3 (Knob 3) KN4 (Knob 4) When pressing the [PAN/ SEND] button [PAN/SEND] button Pan (stereo position) of the Voice/ Performance Reverb Send Level Chorus Send Level Tempo of the Song/ Pattern/Arpeggio playback When pressing the [TONE] button [TONE] button Filter Cutoff Frequency (degree of brightness) Resonance (the level of the signal in the area of the cutoff frequency) Attack Time of the sound Release Time of the sound (decay time after the key is released)* When pressing the [ARP FX] button [ARP FX] button Swing degree of the Arpeggio playback Gate time (length) of the Arpeggio playback Velocity of the Arpeggio playback Arpeggio playback time When pressing the [EQ] button [EQ] button Low band of the Master EQ in the Voice/Performance mode, part EQ in the Song/Pattern mode Low-mid band of the Master EQ in the Voice/Performance mode, Mid band of the Part EQ in the Song/Pattern mode High-mid band of the Master EQ in the Voice/Performance mode. (Not available in the Song/Pattern mode.) High band of the Master EQ in the Voice/Performance mode, part EQ in the Song/Pattern mode When pressing the [PAN/ SEND] button and the [TONE] button simultaneously [PAN/SEND] button [TONE] button Function assigned from the [UTILITY] → [F4] CTLASN → [SF2] ASSIGN display (page 263) in the Utility mode When pressing the [TONE] button and the [ARP FX] button simultaneously** All the buttons are off Function assigned for each Master from the [MASTER] → [EDIT] → Zone selection → [F5] KN/CS display (page 140) When pressing the [ARP FX] button and the [EQ] button simultaneously [ARP FX] button [EQ] button Function assigned to the Master Effect parameters from the [UTILITY] → [F4] CTLASN → [SF5] MEF display. Function assigned for each Voice from the [VOICE] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F4] CTLSET display (page 155) * For Drum Voices, this affects the release time for all played notes, whether held or released. ** Available only when setting the Zone Switch to on in the Master Mode (page 137) When pressing any of the [KNOB CONTROL FUNCTION] buttons, the lamp(s) of the buttons will light according to the above table and the status of the Knobs and Control Sliders (currently assigned functions and set values) is shown on the LCD display. The appearance of the knob in the display indicates the actual control status of the knob. When a knob indication is black, the control knob on the panel affects the sound. When an indication is white, moving the panel knob does not affect the sound, until the current value is reached (after which the indication turns black, indicating normal control). Turning these Knobs will affect the sound. ASSIGN A PAN/SEND ASSIGN TONE ASSIGN B ASSIGN 1 ASSIGN 2 PAN REVERB CHORUS TEMPO CUTOFF RESONANCE ATTACK RELEASE SWING GATE TIME VELOCITY UNITMULTIPLY KN 1 LOW KN 2 LOW MID KN 3 HIGH MID KN 4 HIGH KNOB CONTROL FUNCTION ARP FX EQ Turning these Knobs will not affect the sound. 50 Owner’s Manual About the editing functions Control Slider (CS) You can adjust the volume of the Voice/Performance you play on the keyboard, or the volume of the specified part (track) of the Song/Pattern by using the Control Sliders (CS). In the Master mode, various functions as well as the volume can be assigned to the Control Sliders (CS) when the Zone Switch is set to on (page 137). Function sets assigned to the Control Slider (CS) Functions controlled by each Slider Mode Voice mode Master mode n CS3 CS4 When a Normal Voice is selected (page 60) Element1 Volume When a Drum Voice is selected (page 61) Volume of the entire Voice sound (moving any Slider produces same volume) Element2 Volume Element3 Volume Element4 Volume Part1 Volume Part2 Volume Part3 Volume Part4 Volume When tracks (Parts) 1 - 4 are selected Track1 (Part1) Volume Track2 (Part2) Volume Track3 (Part3) Volume Track4 (Part4) Volume When tracks (Parts) 5 - 8 are selected Track5 (Part5) Volume Track6 (Part6) Volume Track7 (Part7) Volume Track8 (Part8) Volume When tracks (Parts) 9 - 12 are selected Track9 (Part9) Volume Track10 (Part10) Volume Track11 (Part11) Volume Track12 (Part12) Volume When tracks (Parts) 13 - 16 are selected Track13 (Part13) Volume Track14 (Part14) Volume Track15 (Part15) Volume Track16 (Part16) Volume When the Zone Switch is set to on (page 137) Function assigned for each Master from the [MASTER] → [EDIT] → Zone selection → [F4] KN/CS display (page 140) Performance mode Song mode/Pattern mode CS2 Basic Operation CS1 The [MASTER VOLUME] slider adjusts the overall output level of the instrument, while the Control Sliders adjust the MIDI Volume setting of the corresponding Element or Part. About the editing functions There are three types of method for creating data – Editing parameters (Voice, Performance, etc.), Recording MIDI data (Song, Pattern, etc.), and Recording audio data (Sampling). In this section, we’ll explain the basic operations for editing the Voice, Performance, Song Mixing, Pattern Mixing, Mixing Voice settings. n For details on recording MIDI data, see pages 118 (Song) and 110 (Pattern). For details on recording audio data (for Sampling), see pages 94 and 107. n The Song Edit function (for editing the Song MIDI sequence data) and the Pattern Edit function (for editing the Pattern MIDI sequence data) are not explained here. See page 124. Edit Indicator You can adjust or set various parameters by using the data dial, [INC/YES] button, [DEC/NO] button, Knobs, and Control Sliders in the Voice mode (Play/Edit mode), Performance mode (Play/Edit mode), Song Mixing mode, Pattern Mixing mode, and Mixing Voice mode. When changing the value of the parameter in these modes, the [E] (Edit Indicator) will appear on the top left corner of the LCD display. This indicates that the current program has been modified but not yet stored. If you wish to store your sound obtained by edit operation, be sure to store the current program to internal User memory in the Store mode before selecting another program. Edit Indicator EDIT If the Edit Indicator appears... Voice Edit Performance Edit Song Mixing Edit Pattern Mixing Edit Mixing Voice Edit COMPARE JOB STORE SCENE STORE SET LOCATE Voice Store Performance Store Song Mixing Store Pattern Mixing Store Mixing Voice Store Owner’s Manual 51 Confirmation Message Compare Function This convenient function lets you switch between the edited sound and its original, unedited condition – allowing you to listen to the difference between the two and better hear how your edits affect the sound. For example, when editing a Voice in the Voice Edit mode, the “E” Edit indicator is shown. Pressing the [COMPARE] button in this condition reverts to the original unedited sound (the button lamp flashes and the “C” Compare indicator is shown). Press the [COMPARE] button again to return to the edited sound. Edit Indicator (newly edited sound) Changes to the Compare Indicator (original sound) Basic Operation EDIT JOB COMPARE STORE EDIT SCENE STORE SET LOCATE COMPARE JOB STORE SCENE STORE SET LOCATE Lamp flashes Edit Recall Function If you are editing a program and select a different program without storing your edited one, all the edits you’ve made will be erased. However, the edited program is maintained in a backup memory location called the Recall buffer (page 187). To restore the lost data with your latest edits intact, use the Edit Recall function in the Job mode. Job mode How to call up the Edit Recall display Voice [VOICE] → [JOB] → [F2] RECALL Performance [PERFORM] → [JOB] → [F2] RECALL Song Mixing [SONG] → [MIXING] → [JOB] → [F2] RECALL Pattern Mixing [PATTERN] → [MIXING] → [JOB] → [F2] RECALL Mixing Voice [SONG] or [PATTERN] → [MIXING] → [F5] VCE ED → [JOB] → [F2] RECALL Confirmation Message When you execute certain operations, such as those in the Job, Store, and File modes, this synthesizer shows a confirmation message. This lets you actually execute the operation or cancel it if desired. If a confirmation message (like the one illustrated above) appears, press the [INC/YES] button to execute the operation or press the [DEC/NO] button to cancel it. 52 Owner’s Manual Information Display Information Display This convenient function lets you call up relevant details about the selected mode – simply by pressing the [INFORMATION] button. For example, when the Voice mode is active, you can quickly check information about which voice bank is selected, what Play mode (poly or mono) is being used, which effects are applied, and so on. Basic Operation INFORMATION For details, see page 275. Note (Key) settings Several parameters let you set a key range for a function – for example, in setting up a keyboard split – by specifying certain note values. You can use the [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons or data dial to set these parameters, or you can directly enter the values from the keyboard by pressing the appropriate keys (as shown below). INFORMATION When Note Limit is selected, the [KBD] mark appears, indicating that you can use the keyboard to set the value. Simultaneously hold down the [INFORMATION] button and press the appropriate key. n About the note name assigned to each key, see page 16. Naming You can freely name the created data like Voice and the file saved to the SmartMedia/USB storage device. The chart below lists the types of data that can be named along with the operations for calling up the respective naming displays. Data types that can be named How to call up the naming display Voice [VOICE] → [EDIT] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF1] NAME Page Performance [PERFORM] → [EDIT] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF1] NAME 89 Song [SONG] → [JOB] → [F6] SONG → 04: Song Name 233 Pattern [PATTERN] → [JOB] → [F6] PATTERN → 05: Pattern Name 248 Mixing Template [SONG] or [PATTERN] → [MIXING] → [JOB] → [F6] TEMPLATE 237 Mixing Voice [SONG] or [PATTERN] → [MIXING] → [F5] VCEED → [F1] GENERAL →[SF1] NAME 106 Phrase [PATTERN] → [JOB] → [F4] PHRASE → 09: Phrase Name 246 Master [MASTER] → [EDIT] → [F1] NAME 138 Waveform [INTEGRATED SAMPLING] → [JOB] → [F2] WAVE → 04: NAME 259 Arpeggio [SONG] → [JOB] → [F5] TRACK → 07: Put Track To Arp 130 [PATTERN] → [JOB] → [F5] TRACK → 06: Put Track To Arp 130 Volume Label of the SmartMedia/ USB storage device [FILE] → [F1] CONFIG → [SF3] FORMAT 266 File/Folder saved to the SmartMedia/ USB storage device [FILE] → [F2] SAVE or [F4] RENAME 132 80 First, call up the name input display according to the above table, then, move the cursor by using the Cursor button to the desired location and input a character. See below for details. n Since the name of the program is part of the data, make sure that you properly save the program after naming it. Owner’s Manual 53 Naming ■ Basic naming operation As shown below, you can set the name by repeating the two operations – moving the cursor to the desired location by using the Cursor button and selecting a character by using the data dial, [INC/YES] button, and [DEC/NO] button. Moving the cursor to the desired location on the name Basic Operation DEC/NO INC / YES EXIT ENTER Selecting a character at the cursor location DEC/NO INC / YES EXECUTE ■ Using the character list If you find it difficult to select the desired characters with the above method, you may want to use the following method — selecting the characters from a list. INFORMATION When the cursor is located at the Name, this [LIST] icon appears and you can call up the Character List display by holding the [INFORMATION] button. Release the [INFORMATION] button to return back to the original display. Perform the operations below while holding the [INFORMATION] button. Select a character for the cursor location on the name. Move the cursor to the desired location. DEC/NO INC / YES INFORMATION INFORMATION EXIT ENTER DEC/NO EXECUTE 54 Owner’s Manual INC / YES Playing the Demo Songs/Patterns Quick Guide — Playing the MOTIF ES Playing the Demo Songs/Patterns Here’s the best place to start your explorations of the MOTIF ES. The Song and Pattern Demos have been specially programmed so you can hear just how amazing the sounds are, and find out just how powerful the instrument really is — for music creation, performance and production. Before you can play the Demos, you’ll need to load the Demo data (contained in ROM) to the DRAM memory location as shown below. Load Song 64 Song 02 Song 02 Song 01 Song 01 Demo Pattern data (ROM) Memory area for Pattern playback (DRAM) Pattern 64 Load Pattern 02 Pattern 02 Pattern 01 A Pattern 01 P A Sections A - P n Quick Guide — Playing the MOTIF ES Memory area for Song playback (DRAM) Demo Song data (ROM) P Sections A - P For details about ROM and DRAM, see page 187. CAUTION When the Demo Song/Pattern data is loaded, the memory area for playback will be overwritten and the following Utility settings will be changed in order to play back the Demo Song/Pattern properly. [UTILITY] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF1] TG → Volume, NoteShift, Tune [UTILITY] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF4] OTHER → CtrlRest [UTILITY] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF3] EF BYPAS Important data should always be backed up to a SmartMedia/USB storage device. In some cases such as those listed below, the Demo Song/Pattern data will be loaded automatically when turning the power on. • When turning the power on with no SmartMedia card in the CARD slot when the instrument is in its factoryshipped state or after the Factory Set (page 44) is executed. • When turning the power on with a SmartMedia card containing no Auto Load files in the CARD slot when the instrument is in its factory-shipped state or after the Factory Set (page 44) is executed. 1 Press the [FILE] button and [UTILITY] button simultaneously. MODE VOICE PERFORM MASTER SEQUENCER SONG PATTERN FILE INTEGRATED SAMPLING MIXING UTILITY DEMO In cases such as those listed above, steps #1-#3 are unnecessary. Press the [SONG] button to enter the Song mode, then perform the instructions below from step #4. n This synthesizer features an Auto Load function by which the Demo Song/Pattern data or the specified files in the SmartMedia card inserted in the CARD slot will be loaded automatically when turning the power on. For details about the Auto Load function, see page 135. Owner’s Manual 55 Playing the Demo Songs/Patterns 2 5 Set the LoadType to “All.” You can select from the three Load Types listed below. Here, we’ll select “All.” All Loads both the Demo Song and Pattern data. Song Loads only the Demo Song data. Pattern Loads only the Demo Pattern data. Select and play another Demo Song. Move the cursor to “Song Number: Name” (with the cursor buttons) then select another song by using the Data Dial, or the [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons. Decreases number Increases number DEC/NO INC / YES Decreases number Increases number Quick Guide — Playing the MOTIF ES Song Number: Name SEQ TRANSPORT LOCATE 1 2 Start 3 Press the [ENTER] button to load the Demo data. Next, let’s play a Demo Pattern. After the data is loaded, the Song Play display is automatically called up. 6 Press the [PATTERN] button to enter the Pattern mode. MODE VOICE PERFORM MASTER SEQUENCER If “Pattern” is selected in step #2 above, the Pattern Play display is automatically called up once the data is loaded. SONG PATTERN FILE INTEGRATED SAMPLING MIXING UTILITY DEMO n 4 Keep in mind that the example displays shown in this manual are for instruction purposes only, and the contents (for example, the Demo Song/Pattern names) may differ slightly from those on your instrument. Press the [F] (Play) button to start Song playback. When playback of the selected Song is finished, the Song automatically stops. You can stop the Song anytime during playback by pressing the [■] (Stop) button. This pauses the song at the current position. To resume playback of the Song from that point, press the [F] (Play) again. To instantly return to the beginning of the Song, press the [ ] (Top) button. SEQ TRANSPORT SEQ TRANSPORT Top button LOCATE 1 2 LOCATE Start 56 Owner’s Manual 1 Stop 2 Playing the Demo Songs/Patterns n Press the [F] (Play) button to start Pattern playback. There is another way to start Pattern playback – by pressing the note son the keyboard. Move the cursor to the keyboard icon and press the [INC/YES] button so that the F mark appears. In this status, press any key to start the pattern playback. Press the [DEC/NO] button with the cursor located at the keyboard icon to turn the F mark off. 9 Some Sections of the Demo Pattern may have no data. Because of this, selecting some Sections may result in no sound. Press the [■] (Stop) button to stop Pattern playback. Unlike Song playback, Pattern playback continues in a loop until the [■] (Stop) button is pressed. You can stop the Pattern anytime during playback by pressing the [■] (Stop) button. This pauses the Pattern at the current position. To resume playback of the Pattern from that point, press the [F] (Play) again. To instantly return to the beginning of the Pattern, press the [ ] (Top) button. SEQ TRANSPORT Quick Guide — Playing the MOTIF ES 7 SEQ TRANSPORT Top button 8 Select different Sections of the Pattern. LOCATE Make sure that the [SECTION] lamp is on (press the button if necessary), then press any of the buttons shown below to select and play the various Sections contained in a Pattern. Pressing the [A] - [H] buttons calls up Sections A - H and pressing the [PRE5] - [PLG3] buttons calls up the Sections I P. Try out various rhythm variations by changing the Section. PRE 5 PRE 6 USER 1 USER 2 GM PLG 1 PLG 2 PLG 3 A. PIANO KEYBOARD ORGAN GUITAR/ PLUCKED BASS STRINGS BRASS REED/PIPE A B C D E F G H SYN LEAD SYN PAD/ CHOIR SYN COMP SE MUSICAL FX COMBI DRUM/ CHROMATIC PERCUSSION PERCUSSION CATEGORY SEARCH BANK SECTION GROUP 1 2 LOCATE Start 10 1 2 Stop Select and play another Demo Song. Selecting a Pattern is done in the same way as selecting a Song. Refer to step #5 above. Parameters in the Song Play mode Location settings for the selected Song Measure : Beat (for current playback location) ARP1-ARP5 Tempo for the selected Song Transpose setting (for entire Song) Currently selected Song 03 : New Song 1 Song number Use the [SF1] - [SF5] buttons to call up the Arpeggio type and Song Scene assigned to each button (page 123). Time signature for the selected Song (You can change the value by moving the cursor here and using the [INC/YES]/[DEC/NO] buttons and data dial.) Song name Indicates muted track. Indicates soloed track (page 58). Song track number and track mute/solo status Track data status Indicates that the track has no recorded data. Indicates a sample track (page 168) containing a Sample Voice (page 173). Indicates a MIDI track (page 168) containing MIDI sequence data. Owner’s Manual 57 Playing the Demo Songs/Patterns Using Mute/Solo with the Song and Pattern tracks 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TRACK SELECT 12 13 14 15 16 MUTE ELEMENT/PERF. PART/ZONE Try this with the Demo Songs to hear how the tracks sound both in isolation and in various combinations. 9 10 11 NUMBER SOLO ■ To mute a track Quick Guide — Playing the MOTIF ES 1 Press the [MUTE] button (the lamp lights). 2 Press any of the NUMBER [1] - [16] buttons to select the track number to be muted. The corresponding track is set to mute (its lamp goes off) and produces no sound. When pressing the same number button again, the track mute is canceled (its lamp lights). 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TRACK SELECT 12 13 14 15 16 MUTE ELEMENT/PERF. PART/ZONE 9 10 11 NUMBER SOLO To turn Mute off, press the [MUTE] button again (the lamp goes off). ■ To solo a track Simultaneously hold down the [MUTE] button and press one of the NUMBER buttons [1] to [16] to solo the corresponding track. Once you’ve selected a track for soloing, the [MUTE] button’s lamp flashes, indicating the Solo function is active. While Solo is active, you can change the soloed track simply by pressing the corresponding NUMBER button [1] to [16]. To cancel the Solo function, press the [MUTE] button again. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TRACK SELECT 12 13 14 15 16 MUTE ELEMENT/PERF. PART/ZONE 9 10 11 If you want you can also mute a track and play the part of the track yourself. To do this, select the desired track as described, then mute the track (as explained in “To mute a track” above). Song Location The Song Play mode has a convenient Location function that lets you jump to user-specified parts of a song. This lets you assign a specific measure number in the selected song, and instantly jump to the assigned measure – either during playback or when the song is stopped. Two Locations can be assigned. ■ Assigning Locations Select the desired measure in the recorded song for the Location. (Highlight “MEAS” and use the [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons or data dial.) Then, to assign the measure to Location 1, simultaneously hold down the [SET LOCATE] button and press the [G] (Reverse) button. To assign Location 2, use the [H] (Forward) button. Specify a measure number to be registered. NUMBER SOLO EDIT COMPARE JOB SEQ TRANSPORT STORE SCENE STORE SET LOCATE LOCATE Selecting a Song/Pattern track and playing the keyboard You can play along with the Song or Pattern using the sound of a track — for example, playing additional drum/percussion sounds on a drum track while the Song plays. Press the [TRACK SELECT] button so that its lamp lights, and select a track by pressing the one of the NUMBER buttons [1] to [16]. Owner’s Manual 2 ■ Jumping to an assigned Location To instantly jump to the assigned Location 1 or 2, simultaneously hold down the [LOCATE] button and pressing the [G] (Reverse) button (for Location 1) or the [H] (Forward) button (for Location 2). SEQ TRANSPORT LOCATE 58 1 In this example, the selected measure is assigned to Location 1. The current settings for Locations 1 and 2 are shown at the top right of the display. 1 2 Playing the Demo Songs/Patterns Song Chain In addition, the following parameters can be set in the Song Chain. This function allows Songs to be “chained” together for automatic sequential playback. In this section, try using the Song Chain features with the Demo Songs. 1 Press the [F6] CHAIN button to call up the Song Chain display. From this display you can program and play your own custom Song sequences. skip Skips past (ignores) the selected chain number and continues playback from the next chain number. stop Stops Song Chain playback at that chain number. You can restart Song Chain playback from the next chain number by pressing the [F] (Play) button. end Indicates the end mark of the Song Chain data. 3 Play the Song Chain. Quick Guide — Playing the MOTIF ES Move the cursor to the top of the Song Chain display, and press the [F] (Play) button to start Song playback. SEQ TRANSPORT LOCATE 2 1 2 Program the desired order of the Songs. Move the cursor to “001” by using the cursor buttons and select the desired Song by using the Data Dial, or the [INC/ YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons. Likewise, assign the other Songs to locations 002, 003, 004, and so on. When the Song Chain programmed in step #2 reaches to the end, playback stops automatically. Press the [■] (Stop) button during playback to stop Song Chain playback. n The Song Chain can only be played back in the Song Chain display, and not from any other display. Parameters in the Pattern Play mode When theFmark appears, pressing any note on the keyboard starts Pattern playback (page 57). Measure : Beat (for current playback location) Currently selected Pattern and Section ARP1-ARP5 Transpose setting (for entire Pattern) Tempo for the selected Pattern Time signature for the selected pattern (You can change the value by moving the cursor here and using the [INC/ YES]/[DEC/NO] buttons and data dial.) Use the [SF1] - [SF5] buttons to call up the Arpeggio type assigned to each button (page 123). 01 : New Pattern A Pattern number Pattern number Section Indicates muted track. Indicates soloed track (page 58). Pattern track number and track mute/solo status Track data status Indicates that the track has no recorded data. (No Phrase is assigned.) Indicates a sample track (page 168) containing a Sample Voice (page 173). Indicates a MIDI track (page 168) containing MIDI sequence data. Pattern Chain Pattern Chain allows you to string several different Sections together to make a single Song. About the Pattern Chain structure, see page 168. For information on how to create Pattern Chain data, see page 115. Owner’s Manual 59 Playing the Keyboard (in the Voice Play mode) Playing the Keyboard (in the Voice Play mode) The Voice Play mode is where you select and play the instrument sounds (voices) of this synthesizer. Selecting a Voice Selecting a Normal Voice Quick Guide — Playing the MOTIF ES Internally, there are two Voice Types: Normal Voices and Drum Voices. Normal Voices are mainly pitched musical instrument-type sounds that can be played over the range of the keyboard. Drum Voices are mainly percussion/drum sounds that are assigned to individual notes on the keyboard. In this section, we’ll show you how to select a Normal Voice. You can select the desired Voice from various Voice Banks (Preset 1~6, User 1~2, GM preset, Plug-in 1~3) as shown below. Voice Bank PRE 1 PRE 2 PRE 3 PRE 4 PRE 5 PRE 6 USER 1 USER 2 GM PLG 1 PLG 2 PLG 3 A. PIANO KEYBOARD ORGAN GUITAR/ PLUCKED BASS STRINGS BRASS REED/PIPE Preset Bank Contains the Voices built into this instrument. SLOT 1 SLOT 2 Plug-in Bank Available when Plug-in Boards have been installed. See page 74. GM Bank User Bank Contains the voices allocated according to the GM standard. For details, see page 160. Contains the voices you create in the Voice Edit mode. 1 SLOT 3 Press the [VOICE] button to enter the Voice Play mode. In this condition, playing the keyboard sounds the Voice indicated in the display. The parameters shown in the Voice Play mode are briefly explained below. MODE VOICE PERFORM MASTER Indicates the Keyboard MIDI transmit channel. See page 64 for details. Indicates the Keyboard Octave setting set via the [OCTAVE] buttons. See page 63 for details. ARP1-ARP5 Indicates the functions assigned to the respective Control knobs. See page 81. Use the [SF1] - [SF5] buttons to call up the Arpeggio type assigned to each button (page 66). Indicates the currently selected voice. Bank and Voice Program number Category and Voice name USR1 : 001 (A01) Bank Number (selected via the BANK buttons) (selected via the NUMBER [1]-[16] buttons) Gt : MegaAcGtr Category Voice name Group (selected via the GROUP [A]-[H] buttons) Voice Program number (corresponding to Groups A to H and Numbers 01 to 16) n 60 Keep in mind that the example displays shown in this manual are for instruction purposes only, and the contents (for example, the Voice name here) may differ slightly from those on your instrument. Owner’s Manual Playing the Keyboard (in the Voice Play mode) Selecting a Drum Voice 2 Select a Normal Voice Bank. PRE 1 PRE 2 PRE 3 PRE 4 PRE 5 PRE 6 USER 1 USER 2 GM PLG 1 PLG 2 PLG 3 A. PIANO KEYBOARD ORGAN GUITAR/ PLUCKED BASS STRINGS BRASS REED/PIPE SLOT 1 Group SLOT 2 SLOT 3 Voice Internally, there are two Voice Types: Normal Voices and Drum Voices. Normal Voices are mainly pitched musical instrumenttype sounds that can be played over the range of the keyboard. Drum Voices are mainly percussion/drum sounds that are assigned to individual notes on the keyboard. In this section, we’ll show you how to select a Drum Voice. 1 Press the [VOICE] button to enter the Voice Play mode. 2 Select a Drum Voice Bank. Quick Guide — Playing the MOTIF ES Select one of the Banks from Preset 1~6, User 1~2, and GM. While holding the [DRUM KITS] button, press one of the arrow-indicated buttons: [PRE5] (Preset Drum), [USER1] (User Drum), or [GM] (GM Drum). 3 DRUM KITS PRE 5 PRE 6 USER 1 USER 2 GM FAVORITES A. PIANO KEYBOARD ORGAN GUITAR/ PLUCKED BASS Select a Normal Voice Group. Voices in each Bank are divided into Groups [A] ~ [H]. Select a Group to display the Voices that belong to the selected Group. A B C SYN LEAD SYN PAD/ CHOIR SYN COMP D E DRUM/ CHROMATIC PERCUSSION PERCUSSION F G H SE MUSICAL FX COMBI SECTION GROUP 3 This operation is basically the same as in selecting a Normal Voice. You can select a Group from A to D when selecting the Preset Drum Bank in step #2. You can select a Group from A or B when selecting the User Drum Bank in step #2. You can select only A when selecting the GM Drum Bank in step #2. 4 4 Press one of the NUMBER [1] - [16] buttons. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TRACK SELECT ELEMENT/PERF. PART/ZONE 9 10 11 NUMBER 12 13 14 15 16 Select a Drum Voice Number. This is the same as in selecting a Normal Voice. Select a Normal Voice Number. 1 Select a Drum Voice Group. 5 Play the keyboard and check what instrument is assigned to each key. n For details about the instrument assignments for each key, refer to the separate Data List. MUTE SOLO Using the [INC/YES], [DEC/NO] buttons and data dial You can select a Voice Number by using the [INC/YES], [DEC/NO] buttons and data dial in steps #3 and #4. Decreases number 5 DEC/NO Play the keyboard. Decreases number n Increases number INC / YES Increases number The procedure for selecting Voices in other modes differs from above. For details on selecting Voices in the Performance mode, see page 71. For details on selecting Voices in the Song/Pattern mode, see page 102. Owner’s Manual 61 Playing the Keyboard (in the Voice Play mode) Using the Category Search function This synthesizer features a powerful Category Search function that gives you quick access to the sounds you want, irrespective of their bank locations. Simply select a Voice category, such as A. PIANO or SYN LEAD, and you can browse through all related Voices one by one – and audition each of them, too. If you’ve installed a Plug-in Board to the instrument, those Voices are automatically included in the search as well. Plus, you can use the special Favorites category to store the Voices you use most. 1 Turn the Category Search function on by pressing the [CATEGORY SEARCH] button. Quick Guide — Playing the MOTIF ES In this condition with the button lit, you can use the BANK and GROUP buttons to specify the Category. Press the [CATEGORY SEARCH] button again to turn this function off. PRE 5 PRE 6 USER 1 USER 2 GM PLG 1 PLG 2 PLG 3 A. PIANO KEYBOARD ORGAN GUITAR/ PLUCKED BASS STRINGS BRASS REED/PIPE A B C D E F G H SYN LEAD SYN PAD/ CHOIR SYN COMP SE MUSICAL FX COMBI DRUM/ CHROMATIC PERCUSSION PERCUSSION Category CATEGORY SEARCH BANK SECTION GROUP All Categories are divided into two or three Sub Categories for further ease in selection. The Sub Category names are displayed at the bottom of the Category Search display. Press the [F1] - [F3] buttons to select the first Voice in the corresponding Sub Category. SF1 F1 F3 An alternate way of selecting categories is to use the Cursor buttons to select and highlight the Category name in the display, then use the [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons or the data dial to select the Category. Then, move the cursor to the Voice list at the right of the display to select the Voice (see step #3 below). n Some Voices such as User Voices may not be registered to any Category. You can search for these Voices by setting the Category to “--------------.” 3 Select a Voice from the Voice List in the display. Step through the available Voices by using the data dial. You can also use the [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons, or use the Cursor [ ]/[ ] buttons. Voice DEC/NO INC / YES EXIT ENTER Select a Category. Press one of the BANK and GROUP buttons to call up the selected Category name and the Voice list. The first Voice in the Category is selected. PRE 5 PRE 6 USER 1 USER 2 GM PLG 1 PLG 2 PLG 3 A. PIANO KEYBOARD ORGAN GUITAR/ PLUCKED BASS STRINGS BRASS REED/PIPE A B C D E F G H SYN LEAD SYN PAD/ CHOIR SYN COMP SE MUSICAL FX COMBI DRUM/ CHROMATIC PERCUSSION PERCUSSION CATEGORY SEARCH BANK SECTION GROUP Category names Category Voice List Sub Category 62 F2 SF3 n Sub Category 2 SF2 Owner’s Manual EXECUTE 4 Press the [CATEGORY SEARCH] button to turn this function off and go back to the original display. n You can also use the [ENTER] button or [EXIT] button to exit from the Category function. Playing the Keyboard (in the Voice Play mode) ■ Favorite Category 1 Turn the Category Search function on by pressing the [CATEGORY SEARCH] button. 2 Specify the Category and Sub Category, then select a Voice (page 62). 3 Register the Voice selected in step #2 to the Favorite Category by Pressing the [F5] SET/CLR button to checkmark the box next to the Voice name. You can un-checkmark it by pressing the [F5] button again. SF1 F1 SF2 F2 SF3 F3 SF4 F4 SF5 F5 F6 Pressing the [CATEGORY SEARCH] button to exit from the Category Search display will store the Favorite Category settings to internal Flash ROM automatically. 7 CAUTION Make sure to execute step #7. The settings made in steps #3 - 4 will be lost if you turning the power off without executing step #7. CAUTION Never attempt to turn off the power while data (e.g., Voice) is being written to Flash ROM (while a “Please keep power on” message is shown). Turning the power off in this state may not only cause the system to freeze (due to data corruption in the Flash ROM) and prevent normal startup the next time the power is turned on, it may also result in loss of all user data. Quick Guide — Playing the MOTIF ES Use this convenient function to store all your favorite, oftenused Voices in a single, easy-to-access location – and call them up by pressing the [FAVORITES] button. Select any Voice you want, from any desired category, and enter each to the Favorites Category. In this way, you can go directly to all the Voices you use the most, without having to hop around other Categories – a great aid when playing live. Keyboard octave setting (MOTIF ES6/MOTIF ES7) Sometimes when playing a voice, you may wish to play in a lower or higher pitch range. For example, you may want to shift the pitch down lower to get extra bass notes, or shift up to get higher notes for leads and solos. The Octave Up/Down controls let you do this quickly and easily. Each time you press the [OCTAVE UP] button on the panel, the overall pitch of the voice goes up by one octave. Likewise, each press of the [OCTAVE DOWN] button takes the pitch down by one octave. The range is from -3 to +3, with 0 being standard pitch. When this is set to Octave Up, the lamp of the [OCTAVE UP] button lights, and when it is set to Octave Down, the [OCTAVE DOWN] button’s lamp lights. The current octave setting is shown at the top right of the display. You can instantly restore standard pitch (0) by simultaneously pressing both the [OCTAVE UP] button and the [OCTAVE DOWN] button (both lamps turn off). Pressing [F5] toggles between Checkmark on the two settings: Checkmark off OCTAVE DOWN UP To remove all the marked Voices from the Favorite Category, simply press the [F6] CLR ALL button. 4 Set other Voices to the Favorite Category as required by repeating step #2 - 3. n 5 Press the [FAVORITES] button to see the Voices set to the Favorite Category in steps #2 - 4. You can use the [F5] SET/CLR and [F6] CLR ALL buttons also in this display to register/remove the voices to/from the Favorite Category. DRUM KITS FAVORITES The Octave setting made here is automatically reflected in the identical Octave parameter in the Utility mode ([UTILITY] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF2] KBD → Octave). This setting is available in all modes. TIP Transpose setting of the keyboard You can set the amount in semitones by which the range of the keyboard is shifted up or down as well as the octave setting. 1 Press the [UTILITY] button to enter the Utility mode. SEQUENCER SONG PATTERN FILE INTEGRATED SAMPLING MIXING UTILITY EDIT JOB STORE DEMO 6 Press the [FAVORITES] button again to return to the Category Search display. COMPARE SCENE STORE SET LOCATE Owner’s Manual 63 Playing the Keyboard (in the Voice Play mode) 2 Press the [F1] GENERAL button, then the [SF2] KBD button. Using Controllers Pitch Bend Wheel SCENE SF2 SF1 SF3 SF4 INFORMATION SF5 Use the Pitch Bend wheel to bend notes up (roll the wheel away from you) or down (roll the wheel toward you) while playing the keyboard. This wheel is self-centering and will automatically return to normal pitch when released. Try out the Pitch Bend wheel while pressing a note on the keyboard. Pitch Up F1 Quick Guide — Playing the MOTIF ES 3 4 5 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Move the cursor to “Transpose” by using the Cursor button. Pitch Down Change the Transpose value by using the [INC/ YES], [DEC/NO] buttons and data dial. Pitch Bend Wheel n Each preset Voice has its own default Pitch Bend Range setting. The Pitch Bend Range setting for each Voice can be changed in the [VOICE] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF5] OTHER display and stored as a User Voice in the Voice Store mode. From this display you can also reverse the Pitch Bend function — so that moving the wheel up lowers the pitch, and moving it down raises the pitch. n Functions other than Pitch Bend can be assigned to the Pitch Bend Wheel in the [VOICE] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F4] CTL SET display. These assignment settings can be stored as a User Voice in the Voice Store mode. Even if a different function is assigned to this wheel, the Pitch Bend function is available and Pitch Bend messages are still generated when the wheel is used. n Using the Pitch Bend wheel generates the same MIDI message to extend devices, regardless of the assignments made in the Voice Edit mode. Press the [STORE] button to store the Transpose setting to internal Flash ROM. CAUTION Make sure to execute step #5. The settings made in step #4 will be lost if you turning the power off without executing step #7. CAUTION Never attempt to turn off the power while data (e.g., Voice) is being written to Flash ROM (while a “Please keep power on” message is shown). Turning the power off in this state may not only cause the system to freeze (due to data corruption in the Flash ROM) and prevent normal startup the next time the power is turned on, it may also result in loss of all user data. n The transpose setting is available in all modes. Modulation Wheel Keyboard MIDI transmit channel setting This function is especially convenient when recording to an external sequencer or controlling another instrument via MIDI. It lets you easily change the transmit channel with just a couple of button presses. Press the [TRACK SELECT] button (the lamp lights), then press the appropriate NUMBER button ([1] - [16]). The transmit channel setting is shown at the top right of the display. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TRACK SELECT 12 13 14 15 16 MUTE ELEMENT/PERF. PART/ZONE 9 10 11 Even though the Modulation wheel is conventionally used to apply vibrato to the sound, many of the preset Voices have other functions and effects assigned to the wheel. The more you move this wheel up, the greater the effect that is applied to the sound. Try out the Modulation wheel with various preset voices while playing the keyboard. Maximum NUMBER Minimum SOLO Modulation Wheel n 64 You can also set the MIDI keyboard transmit channel from the Utility mode ([UTILITY] → [F5] MIDI → [SF1] CH → KBDTransCh). This parameter is available for the Voice mode/Performance mode but not for the Song mode/Pattern mode. Owner’s Manual n To avoid accidentally applying effects to the current Voice, make sure the Modulation Wheel is set to minimum before you start playing. n Various functions can be assigned to the Modulation Wheel in the [VOICE] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F4] CTL SET display. These assignment settings can be stored as a User Voice in the Voice Store mode. n Using the Modulation wheel generates the same MIDI message to external devices, regardless of the assignments made in the Voice Edit mode. Playing the Keyboard (in the Voice Play mode) Ribbon Controller Edit Indicator The Ribbon Controller is touch sensitive, and is controlled by running your finger laterally across the surface. Various function are assigned to each preset Voice. Try out the Ribbon Controller with various preset Voices while playing the keyboard. Tweaking the knobs in the Voice mode directly changes the parameters of the Voice. When any of the Voice parameters are changed, the [E] (Edit) Indicator appears in the top left of the display. This indicates that the current voice has been modified but not yet stored. n You can set the Ribbon Controller to control different functions on connected external MIDI devices from the functions assigned for the instrument itself. You can also determine whether the Ribbon Controller value returns to the center, or stays at the point where you released your finger. Both of these setting can be made in the Utility mode ([UTILITY] → [F3] VOICE → [SF4] CTL ASN). Knobs (KN) These knobs let you change various aspects of the Voice’s sound in real time – while you play. Turn a knob to the right to increase the value, and left to decrease it. For each preset Voice, various functions are assigned to four knobs. Try out these knobs with various preset Voices while playing keyboard. ASSIGN A ASSIGN B ASSIGN 1 ASSIGN 2 PAN REVERB CHORUS TEMPO CUTOFF RESONANCE ATTACK RELEASE SWING GATE TIME VELOCITY UNITMULTIPLY KN 1 LOW KN 2 LOW MID KN 3 HIGH MID KN 4 HIGH Quick Guide — Playing the MOTIF ES Edit Indicator If you’re satisfied with the tweaks you made and the resulting sound, you can store the changes as a User Voice in the Voice Store mode (page 85). CAUTION If you select another Voice during editing, the [E] (Edit) indicator will disappear and all your edits will be lost. It is a good idea to store the edited Voice data from the Voice Store mode (page 85). Even if you lose the edited Voice data, you can restore it by using the Edit Recall function (page 82). Control Sliders In the Voice mode, the four Control Sliders let you independently adjust the levels of the Elements of a Normal Voice or the Drum Voice keys. When Normal Voice is selected, you can adjust the volume balance among the four Elements. VOLUME 1 1 VOLUME 2 VOLUME 3 1 1 VOLUME 4 CS 1 CS 2 CS 3 CS 4 ZONE 1 ZONE 1 2 ZONE 1 3 ZONE 1 4 You can change which particular group of functions or parameters the knobs are assigned to by pressing any of the [KNOB CONTROL FUNCTION] buttons. For details, see page 81. n In certain situations, using the knobs may not result in any change in the sound. For more information, refer to page 50 in the Basic Operation section. n Inadvertent use of the sliders may result in no sound. If this occurs, move the sliders upward. Owner’s Manual 65 Playing the Keyboard (in the Voice Play mode) Using the Arpeggio feature This function lets you trigger rhythm patterns, riffs and phrases using the current Voice by simply playing notes on the keyboard. Since the preset Voices already have their own Arpeggio types pre-assigned, all you need to do is select the desired Voice and turn on the Arpeggio function. Try selecting different Voices and check out the various Arpeggio types. n For details about Arpeggio, see page 169. Register your favorite Arpeggio types to the [SF1] - [SF5] buttons 1 Press the [ARPEGGIO ON/OFF] button to turn Arpeggio on. For certain Voices, simply selecting the Voice will turn Arpeggio on. REMOTE ARPEGGIO R-AUDIO G-MIDI Quick Guide — Playing the MOTIF ES ON / OFF You can change the default settings and assign any Arpeggio types you like to the [SF1] - [SF5] buttons. The selected Arpeggio indication is highlighted in white. If two buttons share the same type, both will appear in white. The settings can be stored as a User Voice in the Voice Store mode. 1 ON / OFF 2 2 Play a note or notes on the keyboard to trigger the Arpeggio playback. 3 The particular rhythm pattern or phrase that plays depends on the actual notes or chords you play, as well as on the selected Arpeggio type. For details, refer to page 169 in the Basic Operation section. 4 5 ■ Changing the Arpeggio type during keyboard performance A different Arpeggio type is assigned to each of the [SF1] ARP1 [SF5] ARP5 buttons for each preset Voice. When a musical note icon appears to the right of each Arpeggio number in the display (see below), the corresponding button is assigned an Arpeggio type. Try out various Arpeggio types by pressing the [SF1] - [SF5] buttons. Press the [ARPEGGIO ON/OFF] button to turn Arpeggio on. Select the desired Arpeggio type in the [VOICE] → [F6] ARP display. While holding the [STORE] button, press one of the [SF1] - [SF5] button. The currently selected Arpeggio type is assigned to the pressed button. If you execute this operation with the [ARPEGGIO ON/OFF] lamp off, no Arpeggio type will be assigned to the pressed button. Repeat steps #2 - 3 as necessary. Press and release the [STORE] button to enter the Voice Store mode and store the setting as a User Voice (page 85). n Keep in mind that holding and releasing the [STORE] button WITHOUT pressing one of the [SF1] - [SF5] buttons will automatically enter the Voice Store mode, instead of storing the Arpeggio type. ■ Controlling Arpeggio playback by using the knobs You can adjust the Arpeggio related parameters such as volume and tempo by rotating the knobs. If you are satisfied with the results, you can store the changes as a User Voice in the Voice Store mode. 1 SF1 SF2 SF3 SF4 SF5 Press the KNOB CONTROL FUNCTION [ARP FX] button (the lamp lights). Selecting some voices automatically turns this lamp on. PAN/SEND You can confirm the currently selected Arpeggio type in the [F6] ARP display. ASSIGN TONE ASSIGN A ASSIGN B ASSIGN 1 PAN REVERB CHORUS TEMPO CUTOFF RESONANCE ATTACK RELEASE SWING GATE TIME VELOCITY UNITMULTIPLY KN 1 LOW KN 2 LOW MID KN 3 HIGH MID KN 4 HIGH ASSIGN 2 KNOB CONTROL FUNCTION ARP FX EQ Arpeggio type currently selected 66 Bank Indicates “pre (preset)” or “usr (user).” Ctgr See page 169. Type Refer to the separate Data List booklet. Owner’s Manual 2 Tweak the knobs while the Arpeggio is playing. For details on what functions each knob controls while the [ARP FX] lamp is on, see page 81. 3 If you’re satisfied with the results, you can store the changes as a User Voice in the Voice Store mode (page 85). Playing the Keyboard (in the Performance Play mode) Playing the Keyboard (in the Performance Play mode) As in the Voice Play mode, the Performance Play mode is where you select and play the instrument sounds of this synthesizer. In a Performance, you can mix several different Voices together in a layer, or split them across the keyboard, or even set up a combination layer/split. Each Performance can contain up to four different Parts. Selecting a Performance 128 Performances (1 bank) are provided in internal User memory (Flash ROM). In the Performance Play mode, you can select and play individual User performances. Since there is only one bank for Performances, you need not select a Performance Bank. 1 Quick Guide — Playing the MOTIF ES Press the [PERFORM] button to enter the Performance Play mode. In this condition, playing the keyboard sounds the Performance indicated in the display. The parameters shown in the Performance Play mode are briefly explained below. MODE VOICE PERFORM MASTER Indicates the Keyboard MIDI transmit channel. See page 68 for details. Indicates the Keyboard Octave setting set via the [OCTAVE] buttons. See page 68 for details. ARP1-ARP5 Use the [SF1] - [SF5] buttons to call up the Arpeggio type assigned to each button (page 70). Indicates settings related to the Control knobs. See page 90. Indicates the currently selected Performance. Bank and Performance Program number Category and Performance name USER : 001 (A01) Ap : New Peform Number (selected via the NUMBER [1]-[16] buttons) Bank Category Performance name Group (selected via the GROUP [A]-[H] buttons) Performance Program number (corresponding to Groups A to H and Numbers 01 to 16) n 2 Keep in mind that the example displays shown in this manual are for instruction purposes only, and the contents (for example, the Performance name here) may differ slightly from those on your instrument. 3 Select a Performance Group. Performances are divided into Groups [A] ~ [H]. Select a Group to show a list of the Performances. Select a Performance Number. Press one of the NUMBER [1] - [16] buttons. 1 A B C SYN LEAD SYN PAD/ CHOIR SYN COMP D E F G H SE MUSICAL FX COMBI SECTION 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TRACK SELECT 12 13 14 15 16 MUTE GROUP ELEMENT/PERF. PART/ZONE DRUM/ CHROMATIC PERCUSSION PERCUSSION 9 10 11 NUMBER SOLO Group Performance Owner’s Manual 67 Playing the Keyboard (in the Performance Play mode) 4 Using the Category Search function Play the keyboard. As in the Voice Play mode, you can use the Category Search and Favorite Category functions in the Performance Play mode. For details on how to use the function, see page 62. Keyboard octave setting (MOTIF ES6/MOTIF ES7) Using the [INC/YES], [DEC/NO] buttons and data dial Quick Guide — Playing the MOTIF ES Rather than using the BANK/NUMBER buttons described in steps #2 and 3 above, you can select a Performance by using the [INC/YES], [DEC/NO] buttons and data dial. Decreases number As in the Voice Play mode, you can use the [OCTAVE UP/ DOWN] button to shift the note of the keyboard up or down in octaves. n The Octave setting made here is automatically reflected in the identical Octave parameter in the Utility mode ([UTILITY] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF2] KBD → Octave). This setting is available in all modes. Increases number DEC/NO INC / YES Decreases number Increases number TIP Transpose setting of the keyboard As in the Voice Play mode, you can set the amount in semitones by which the range of the keyboard is shifted up or down in the Utility mode. n Performance Part mute/solo Each performance can contain a maximum of four Parts, each of which can be turned on or off independently. Muting and soloing of Parts is done in the same way as that of tracks in a Song/Pattern. See page 58. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TRACK SELECT 12 13 14 15 16 MUTE The transpose setting is available in all modes. Keyboard MIDI transmit channel setting As in the Voice Play mode, you can change the MIDI transmit channel for the keyboard. Press the [TRACK SELECT] button (the lamp lights), then press the appropriate NUMBER button ([1] - [16]). The transmit channel setting is shown at the top right of the display. ELEMENT/PERF. PART/ZONE 9 10 11 SOLO 68 Owner’s Manual n You can also set the MIDI keyboard transmit channel from the Utility mode ([UTILITY] → [F5] MIDI → [SF1] CH → KBDTransCh). This parameter is available for the Voice mode/Performance mode but not for the Song mode/Pattern mode. Playing the Keyboard (in the Performance Play mode) Using Controllers This is basically the same as in the Voice Play mode (page 64). n The Pitch Bend Range setting depends on the setting (made in the Voice mode) of the Voice assigned to each Part. n The functions assigned to the Pitch Bend Wheel depend on the setting (made in the Voice mode) of the Voice assigned to each Part. n Even if a different function is assigned to the wheel, Pitch bend is still available and Pitch Bend messages are still generated when the wheel is used. Edit Indicator Tweaking the knobs in the Performance mode directly changes the parameters of the Performance. When any of the Performance parameters are changed, the [E] (Edit) Indicator appears in the top left of the display. This indicates that the current Performance has been modified but not yet stored. Edit Indicator Quick Guide — Playing the MOTIF ES Pitch Bend Wheel Modulation Wheel This is basically the same as in the Voice Play mode (page 64). n To avoid accidentally applying effects to the current Voice, make sure the Modulation Wheel is set to minimum before you start playing. n The functions assigned to the Modulation Wheel depend on the settings (made in the Voice mode) of the Voice assigned to each Part. n Using the Modulation wheel generates the same MIDI message to external devices, regardless of the assignments made in the Voice Edit mode. If you’re satisfied with the tweaks you made and the resulting sound, you can store the changes as a User Performance in the Performance Store mode (page 91). CAUTION If you select another Performance during editing, the [E] (Edit) indicator will disappear and all your edits will be lost. It is a good idea to store the edited Performance data from the Performance Store mode (page 91). Even if you lose the edited Performance data, you can restore it by using the Edit Recall function (page 91). CAUTION Ribbon Controller This is basically the same as in the Voice Play mode (page 65). n The functions assigned to the Ribbon Controller depend on the settings (made in the Voice mode) of the Voice assigned to each Part. n You can set the Ribbon Controller to control a different functions on connected external MIDI devices from the functions assigned for the Performance on the instrument itself. You can also determine whether the Ribbon Controller value returns to the center for each Performance, or stays at the point where you released your finger. Both of these setting can be made in the Performance Edit mode ([PERFORM] → Performance selection → [EDIT] → COMMON → [F4] CTL ASN). When shipped from the factory, this synthesizer contains a full set of specially programmed 128 User Performances in the User bank. You can edit and store these Performances and overwrite them in the Performance Store mode. You can also restore them to the original factory presets by pressing the [ENTER] button in the [UTILITY] → [JOB] display (page 44). Control Sliders In the Performance mode, the four Control Sliders let you independently adjust the levels of the Parts of a Performance. You can adjust the volume balance among four parts. VOLUME 1 1 VOLUME 2 VOLUME 3 1 1 VOLUME 4 Knobs (KN) These knobs let you change various aspects of the Performance sound in real time – while you play. Turn a knob to the right to increase the value, and left to decrease it. For each Performance, various functions are assigned to four knobs. Try out these knobs with various Performances while playing the keyboard. You can change which particular group of functions or parameters the knobs are assigned to by pressing any of the [KNOB CONTROL FUNCTION] buttons. For details, see page 90. n In certain situations, using the knobs may not result in any change in the sound. For more information, refer to page 50 in the Basic Operation section. CS 1 CS 2 CS 3 CS 4 ZONE 1 ZONE 1 2 ZONE 1 3 ZONE 1 4 n Inadvertent use of the sliders may result in no sound. If this occurs, move the sliders upward. n In certain situations, using the Control Sliders may not result in any change in the sound. For more information, refer to page 50 in the Basic Operation section. Owner’s Manual 69 Playing the Keyboard (in the Performance Play mode) Using the Arpeggio feature As in the Voice mode, you can use the Arpeggio feature in the Performance mode. In the Performance mode, you can make independent Arpeggio playback settings for each Part of the Performance — including the on/off setting, as well as the Arpeggio type and related parameters. This means you can set the Performance such that any or all Parts can be used to trigger Arpeggio playback. A useful application of this would be to assign a Drum Voice to one Part and use Arpeggio playback on only that Part — so that you can have a rhythm pattern accompaniment playing while you play another Voice. Since the preset Performances already have their own Arpeggio types pre-assigned, all you need to do is select the desired Performance and turn on the Arpeggio function. Try selecting different Performances and check out the various Arpeggio types. n Different Arpeggio types cannot be played back for each Part. n For details about Arpeggio, see page 169. Quick Guide — Playing the MOTIF ES ■ Changing the Arpeggio type during your performance As in the Voice Play mode (page 66), the Performance play mode lets you use the [SF1] - [SF5] buttons to assign the Arpeggio types and recall them. The Arpeggio type for the current Performance can be selected in the [PERFORM] → [F6] ARP display or the [PERFORM] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F3] ARP display. If you assign the desired Arpeggio type to the [SF1] - [SF5] buttons, store the settings as a User Performance in the Performance Store mode (page 91). ■ Controlling Arpeggio playback by using the knobs You can tweak Arpeggio related parameters such as volume and tempo by using the knobs. If you’re satisfied with the tweaks you made and the resulting sound, you can store the changes as a User Performance in the Performance Store mode. For information on using the knobs, refer to the Voice Play mode (page 66). Assigning desired Voices to each part Performances can be made up of a maximum of four Parts (Voices), selected from the internal tone generator Parts 1 - 4 and Plug-in board Parts 1 - 3. You can create a Performance by layering several Voices together, and by assigning different Voices to separate ranges of the keyboard. You can then store up to 128 of your original, edited Performances to internal User memory. Split (example) Layer (example) Built-in tone generator Parts 1 2 3 Built-in tone generator Parts Plug-in Parts* 4 PLG1 PLG2 PLG3 1 2 3 Plug-in Parts* 4 PLG1 PLG2 *Available when the Plug-in Board has been installed. 70 Owner’s Manual PLG3 Playing the Keyboard (in the Performance Play mode) This calls up a list indicating which Voice is assigned to each Part of the current Performance. SCENE SF2 SF1 F1 F2 SF3 F3 SF4 F4 PRE1 (Preset1) ~ PRE6 (Preset 6) Preset Banks 1 - 6 of the Normal Voice. These correspond to the [PRE1] - [PRE6] buttons in the Voice mode. USER1 ~ USER2 User Banks 1 - 2 of the Normal Voice. These correspond to the [USER1] - [USER2] buttons in the Voice mode. GM GM Normal Voice Bank. This corresponds to the [GM] button in the Voice mode. PDR (Preset Drum) Preset Bank of the Drum Voice. This corresponds to pressing the [DRUM KITS] button and the [PRE5] button simultaneously. GMDR (GM Drum) GM Drum Voice Bank. This corresponds to pressing the [DRUM KITS] button and the [GM] button simultaneously. UDR (User Drum) User Bank of the Drum Voice. This corresponds to pressing the [DRUM KITS] button and the [USER1] button simultaneously. INFORMATION SF5 F5 When an internal Voice is assigned to a Part, the following Voice Banks are available. F6 Quick Guide — Playing the MOTIF ES 1 Press the [F2] VOICE button in the Performance Play mode. When a Plug-in Board Voice is assigned to a Part, the available Voice Banks differ depending on the installed Plugin Board. For details, refer to the Owner’s Manual that came with the Plug-in Board. 2 Assign the desired Voice to each Part. Move the cursor to the desired Part. When a Voice has already been assigned to the selected Part, change the Voice Bank or Number by using the data dial, the [INC/YES] and the [DEC/NO] button. When no Voice is assigned to the selected Part, press the [SF1] ADD INT button or [SF2] ADD PLG button to execute the assignment, then change the Voice Bank or Number. You can also select a Voice Bank/Number by using the BANK, GROUP, and NUMBER buttons (page 60). 3 Specify the note range of each part, as required. You can set the lowest note of the range over which the Voice of the selected Part sounds by simultaneously holding the [SF4] button and pressing the desired key. To set the highest note of the range, simultaneously hold the [SF5] button and press the desired key. Select a Voice Bank/Number at the cursor location. Note Limit Low SF 4 DEC/NO Voice Bank Voice Number SF2 SF1 F2 Assign an internal Voice to the selected Part. SF3 F3 SF4 F4 INFORMATION SF5 F5 4 Change the volume of each Part and adjust the relative balance among the four Parts by using the Control sliders. 5 Store the settings as a User Performance in the Performance Store mode. F6 Delete the Voice assignment of the selected Part. Assign a Plug-in Voice to the selected Part. (Available when the Plug-in Board has been installed.) n SF 5 INC / YES SCENE F1 Note Limit High Voices of the Multi part Plug-in Board PLG100-XG cannot be assigned to Performance parts. Press the [STORE] button to enter the Performance Store mode, select the destination Performance number, then press the [ENTER] button to execute the store operation. For details about Performance Store, see page 91. Owner’s Manual 71 Playing the Keyboard (in the Performance Play mode) Using the A/D input sound One of the enormous benefits of the Performance mode is that you can have the A/D input sound — such as your voice through a microphone, a guitar, bass, or CD player — assigned as one of the four Parts of a Performance. Various Part parameters such as volume, pan, and effects can be set for this Part, and the sound of the Part is mixed and output together with the other Parts. These parameters are set and stored in the Performance Store mode for each Performance. n The Audio Input part is available also in the Song mode/Pattern mode, but is not available in the Voice mode. The procedure and explanations here apply to the Song and Pattern modes as well. The microphone related parameters (corresponding to step #8 below) of each Song/Pattern are edited in the Song Mixing mode/Pattern Mixing mode. Connecting a microphone to the A/D INPUT jack 5 Press the [UTILITY] button to enter the Utility mode, press the [F2] I/O button, then press the [SF1] INPUT button. Quick Guide — Playing the MOTIF ES The explanation below applies in particular to low-level equipment, such as microphones, guitars and basses. 1 Make sure to turn the power of the MOTIF ES off and set the GAIN knob on the rear panel to the minimum. 2 Plug the microphone to the A/D INPUT jack on the rear panel. SEQUENCER n 72 3 Turn the power on. 4 Press the [PERFORM] button to enter the Performance Play mode and select the desired Performance. Owner’s Manual FILE INTEGRATED SAMPLING MIXING UTILITY SCENE F1 GAIN A standard dynamic microphone is recommended. (The MOTIF ES does not support phantom-powered condenser microphones.) PATTERN DEMO SF2 SF1 A / D INPUT R L SONG 6 F2 SF3 F3 SF4 F4 INFORMATION SF5 F5 F6 Set Mic/Line to “mic.” Move the cursor to the “Mic/Line” parameter by using the Cursor button and set it to “mic” by using the [INC/YES] button, [DEC/NO] button, or data dial. n When the output level of the connected equipment (such as a microphone, guitar, bass) is low, set this parameter to “mic.” When the output level of the connected equipment (such as a synthesizer keyboard, CD player) is high, set this parameter to “line.” n This setting is available for all modes. If you wish to store this setting, press the [STORE] button. Playing the Keyboard (in the Performance Play mode) Adjust the microphone input level by using the GAIN knob on the rear panel. A / D INPUT R L 8 4 Press the [PERFORM] button to enter the Performance Play mode and select the desired Performance. 5 Press the [UTILITY] button to enter the Utility mode, press the [F2] I/O button, then press the [SF1] INPUT button. 6 Set Mic/Line to “line.” GAIN Set the audio input related parameters as necessary from the AUDIO IN display ([PERFORM] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F5] AUDIO IN). For details about each parameter, refer to page 214 in the Reference section. Move the cursor to the “Mic/Line” parameter by using the Cursor button and set it to “line” by using the [INC/YES] button, [DEC/NO] button, or data dial. n When the output level of the connected equipment (such as a microphone, guitar, bass) is low, set this parameter to “mic.” When the output level of the connected equipment (such as a synthesizer keyboard, CD player) is high, set this parameter to “line.” n This setting is available for all modes. If you wish to store this setting, press the [STORE] button. When the optional AIEB2 or mLAN16E has been installed, the [F5] AUDIO IN menu has two indications: “A/D” and “AIEB2” or “mLAN16E.” Here, call up the A/D display by pressing the [SF5] button. 9 Store the settings as a User Performance in the Performance Store mode (page 91). 7 Quick Guide — Playing the MOTIF ES 7 Adjust the audio input level by using the GAIN knob on the rear panel. Connecting audio equipment to the A/D INPUT jack A / D INPUT R L GAIN The explanation below applies in particular to high-level audio equipment, such as CD players, synthesizers, and other keyboards. 1 Make sure to turn off the power of both the MOTIF ES and the relevant audio equipment. 2 Plug the audio equipment cable to the A/D INPUT jack on the rear panel. A / D INPUT R L L 8 GAIN R Set the audio input related parameters as necessary from the AUDIO IN display ([PERFORM] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F5] AUDIO IN). For details about each parameter, refer to page 214 in the Reference section. When an optional AIEB2 or mLAN16E has been installed, press the [SF5] button to call up the A/D display. L 3 R Switch the power of the connected audio equipment on, then switch the power of the MOTIF ES on. 9 Store the settings as a User Performance in the Performance Store mode (page 91). n Audio input signals from the OPTICAL INPUT and DIGITAL INPUT connector (when the optional AIEB2 has been installed) or the mLAN connector (when the optional mLAN16E has been installed) can also be handled as Audio Input Parts. For details, see page 165. Owner’s Manual 73 Using the Plug-in Board Using the Plug-in Board Plug-in Boards give you an enormous amount of additional sonic flexibility and power. When installed, they work seamlessly and transparently within the system of this synthesizer – meaning that you can use their sounds and functions just as if they were built right into this synthesizer at the factory. The boards that are available for and can be installed to this synthesizer are described below. Up to three Plug-in boards can be installed to the MOTIF ES. These boards are not simply a source of more Voices; they are also full-featured, editable tone generators in their own right and extend the system-level specifications such as maximum polyphony. In addition, they allow you to use synthesis systems besides AWM2. You can play Plug-in Voices just like ordinary internal Voices and use them as Parts in a Song/Pattern/Performance. This synthesizer is compatible with the Modular Synthesis Plug-in System (see below). Quick Guide — Playing the MOTIF ES About MODULAR SYNTHESIS PLUG-IN SYSTEM The Yamaha Modular Synthesis Plug-in System offers powerful expansion and upgrade capabilities for Modular SynthesisPlug-in-compatible synthesizers, tone generators and sound cards. This enables you to easily and effectively take advantage of sophisticated synthesizer and effects technology, allowing you to keep pace with the rapid and multi-faceted advances in modern music production. Available Plug-in Boards There are three types of Modular Synthesis Plug-in System-compatible Plug-in Boards: Single Part, Multi-Part and Effect Plug-in Board. Using these, you can build your own system based on the sounds you require. Single Part Plug-in Boards ● Drum Plug-in Board (PLG150-DR)/Percussion Plug-in Board (PLG150-PC) Single Part Plug-in Boards let you add a completely different synthesizer or single timbre tone generator (page 162) and play its voices by using a single part of this synthesizer. Some boards allow you to use synthesis systems besides AWM2. Once connected and installed, the PLG150-DR/PLG150-PC becomes a seamless additional sound source of AWM2 for the host tone generator or synthesizer – providing a total of 88 drum/ percussion voices. Thanks to the built-in effect processing power, the PLG150-DR/PLG150-PC has two separate effect blocks – Insertion and Reverb – that can be applied to each kit. ● Analog Physical Modeling Plug-in Board (PLG150-AN) Using Analog Physical Modeling (AN) synthesis, the very latest digital technology is used to accurately reproduce the sound of analog synthesizers. With this board installed, you have real-time control over the playback of vintage synthesizer sounds as well as the very latest sounds heard in today’s club-oriented music. ● Piano Plug-in Board (PLG150-PF) A massive waveform memory is dedicated to the reproduction of piano sounds. This board offers 136 stereo sounds, including a number of acoustic and electric pianos, and up to 64-note polyphony. You can even install two of these boards to double the polyphony to 128 notes. ● Advanced DX/TX Plug-in Board (PLG150-DX) The sounds of the DX7 are available on this Plug-in Board. Unlike PCM-based tone generators, this board uses the powerful FM Synthesis system – the same as found on DX-series synthesizers – for extraordinarily versatile and dynamic sound shaping potential. Sounds are compatible with those of the DX7, and the board can even receive DX7 data via MIDI bulk dump. ● Virtual Acoustic Plug-in Board (PLG150-VL) With Virtual Acoustic (VA) synthesis, the sounds of real instruments are modeled (simulated) in real time, giving a degree of realism that cannot be achieved using conventional PCM-based synthesis techniques. When playing these sounds using an optional MIDI Wind Controller (WX5), you can even capture some of the physical feel of woodwind instruments. 74 Owner’s Manual Multi-Part Plug-in Board Multi-Part Plug-in Boards let you add a completely independent multi-timbral tone generator to the MOTIF ES (page 162) — expanding the Voice capacity and polyphony of the instrument with a full sixteen additional instrument parts. ● XG Plug-in Board (PLG100-XG) This Plug-in Board is a 16-part XG sound generator. You can play back XG/GM song files using the rich variety of sounds and effects on this board. Effect Plug-in Board Effect Plug-in Boards let you add a completely different effect block to the host synthesizer. ● Vocal Harmony Plug-in Board (PLG100-VH) With this board installed, you can add harmonies to selected parts using four types of effects. Chorus parts for vocals can be created automatically from chords that have been prepared and stored as MIDI data. You can also use this synthesizer like a vocoder by connecting and using a microphone while playing the keyboard. Using the Plug-in Board Using a Single Part Plug-in Board Install any of the Single Part Plug-in Boards such as PLG150-AN, PLG150-PF, PLG150-DX, PLG150-VL, PLG150-DR, and PLG150-PC to the MOTIF ES and play the Plug-in Voice in the Voice Play mode. 1 After turning the power off, install a Single Part Plug-in Board to the instrument. 4 Set the MIDI port of the installed Plug-in Board to “2” or “3” in the [UTILITY] → [F6] PLUG → [SF2] MIDI display. See page 283. 2 Switch the MOTIF ES on. SLOT 1 3 SLOT 2 PLG 2 PLG 3 STRINGS BRASS REED/PIPE Check the status of the installed Plug-in Boards in the [UTILITY] → [F6] PLUG → [SF1] STATUS display. 5 Press the [VOICE] button to enter the Voice Play mode and select a Plug-in Voice. Selecting a Plug-in Voice is done in the same way as selecting a Normal Voice (page 60) with the exception that you select one of the PLG (Plug-in) Banks. Press the PLG button which corresponds to the slot to which the Plug-in Board has been installed. MODE PERFORM If the MIDI Port number here is set to “1” or “off,” the Plug-in Voice may sound simultaneously with the internal Voice, when playing back Song/Pattern data. To keep this from happening, make sure the MIDI Port number of the Plug-in Board is set to “2” or “3” — especially when using the Song/Pattern mode. To prevent a similar problem when using both a Single Part Plug-in Board and a Multi Part Plug-in Board together, set each board to a different MIDI Port number. SLOT 3 PLG 1 VOICE n Quick Guide — Playing the MOTIF ES The corresponding slot indicator at the right top of the front panel lights. This indicates that the board has been successfully installed. MASTER SEQUENCER PATTERN SONG FILE SLOT 1 SLOT 2 SLOT 3 PLG 1 PLG 2 PLG 3 STRINGS BRASS REED/PIPE DEMO INTEGRATED SAMPLING MIXING UTILITY You’ll also need to select a Bank within the Plug-in Board. Press the [F2] BANK button to call up the Plug-in Board Bank selection display, then select the desired Bank. SCENE SF2 SF1 F1 F2 SF3 F3 SF4 F4 INFORMATION SF5 F5 F6 n The name of the installed Plug-in Board is displayed. 6 n For details about the Bank structure of each Plug-in Board, refer to the Owner’s Manual of each Plug-in Board. Regarding the PLGPRE (Plugin Preset) bank, refer to the Plug-in Voice List. Regarding the Board Voice bank displayed as “035/000,” refer to the Voice Map/List. The PLGUSR (Plug-in User) banks contain the Voices you edited and stored as User Voices. Play the keyboard. Playing Voices of the Plug-in User banks (PLG1USR, PLG2USR, PLG3USR) will result in no sound, if the Plug-in Board has just been installed. These banks become available only after you edit a Plug-in Voice and store it as a User Plug-in Voice. Owner’s Manual 75 Using the Plug-in Board Plug-in Voices and Board Voices The Voices of a Single Part Plug-in Board installed to this synthesizer can be divided into two types: Board Voices and Plug-in Voices. Board Voices are unprocessed, unaltered Voices of the Plug-in board – the “raw material” used for the Plugin Voices. Plug-in Voices, on the other hand, are edited Board Voices – Voices that have been specially programmed and processed for optimum use with the host synthesizer. Since the MOTIF ES includes preset Plug-in Voices for all the Plug-in Boards, you can call up and play appropriate Voices for each board immediately after installing it. n The Plug-in Voices can be edited in the Voice Edit mode. n The Board Voices can be edited using the computer software supplied for each Plug-in Board. Quick Guide — Playing the MOTIF ES TIP Playing the PLG150-VL sound with the Breath Controller With Virtual Acoustic (VA) synthesis, the PLG150-VL has the sounds of real instruments modeled (simulated) in real time, giving a degree of realism that cannot be achieved using conventional PCM-based synthesis techniques. When playing these sounds using an optional Breath Controller, you can even capture some of the physical feel of woodwind instruments. 1 2 Install the PLG150-VL to the MOTIF ES. 6 Connect the Breath Controller BC3 to the BREATH connector on the rear panel (page 42). 7 Press the [VOICE] button to enter the Voice Play mode, then select a Plug-in Voice of the PLG150-VL. Play the Voice and blow into the Breath Controller to expressively change the sound. FOOT SWITCH BREATH ASSIGNABLE SUSTAIN You can also use the MIDI Wind Controller WX5 to play the Plug-in Voice of the PLG150-VL. Connect the WX5 to the MOTIF ES with a MIDI cable. WX5 MIDI OUT connector MIDI cable MIDI IN connector MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER 3 4 5 76 Switch the MOTIF ES power on. Set the Plug-in Board related parameters in the Utility mode, corresponding to steps #3 and 4 in the instructions on the previous page. Set the Breath Controller Curve via the [UTILITY] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF1] TG → BCCurve parameter (page 260). Owner’s Manual MOTIF ES Using the Plug-in Board Using a Multi Part Plug-in Board In this section, we’ll explain how to play back an XG for mat song, using the PLG100-XG Plug-in Board. Naturally, to get the most out of these instructions, you should have XG song data (Standar d MIDI File) stored on a SmartMedia card or USB storage device. After turning the power off, install the Multi Part Plug-in Board PLG100-XG to slot 3 of this synthesizer. 2 See page 283 for details. 3 2 Switch the MOTIF ES power on. 3 Check the status of the installed Plug-in Boards in the [UTILITY] → [F6] PLUG → [SF1] STATUS display. Press the [FILE] button to enter the File mode, then set the basic parameters. Refer to “Basic settings for using SmartMedia or a USB storage device” on page 30. Set the [FILE] → [F3] LOAD → TYPE parameter to “Song.” Quick Guide — Playing the MOTIF ES 1 File/folder list The name of the installed Plug-in Board is displayed. 4 4 Set the MIDI port of the PLG100-XG to “2” or “3” in the [UTILITY] → [F6] PLUG → [SF2] MIDI display. 5 Move the cursor to the list of files to be loaded, select the desired file, then press the [ENTER] button. Specify the destination Song number, then press the [ENTER] button to execute the Load operation. CAUTION Loading data to this synthesizer automatically erases and replaces any existing data in the User memory. Make sure to save any important data to a SmartMedia/USB storage device before performing any Load operations. n If the MIDI Port number here is set to “1” or “off,” the Plug-in Voice may sound simultaneously with the internal Voice, when playing back Song/Pattern data. To keep this from happening, make sure the MIDI Port number of the Plug-in Board is set to “2” or “3” — especially when using the Song/Pattern mode. To prevent a similar problem when using both a Single Part Plug-in Board and the PLG100-XG together, set each board to a different MIDI Port number. 5 Press the [SONG] button to enter the Song mode, then press the [FILE] button to enter the File mode. 6 Load the XG song file (Standard MIDI file) from the SmartMedia/USB storage device to the MOTIF ES in the [FILE] → [F3] LOAD display, as described in the sub-instructions below. 7 Press the [SONG] button to enter the Song Play mode, then select the Song number to which the XG song file was loaded. 8 Set the MIDI transmit port of all the tracks to the number set in step #4 from the [SONG] → [F3] TRACK → [SF1] CHANNEL display. Set MIDI transmit ports. 1 Insert a SmartMedia card which contains the XG song files into the CARD slot, or use a USB storage device (connected to the USB TO DEVICE connector) containing appropriate XG song files. 9 F] (Play) button to play the XG Press the [F song. Owner’s Manual 77 Using the Plug-in Board Using an Effect Plug-in Board In the example explanation below, the PLG100-VH Vocal Harmony Plug-in Board is used to apply harmony effects to the microphone sound in the Performance mode. n For Songs/Patterns, the Effect Plug-in Board related parameters (which correspond to step #6 - 7 below) can be edited in the Song Mixing mode/Pattern Mixing mode. n Please note that the Effect Plug-in Board cannot be used in the Voice mode. 1 After turning the power off, install the Effect Plug-in Board PLG100-VH to slot 1. 7 Quick Guide — Playing the MOTIF ES See page 283 for details. Set related parameters (such as the Effect Type, and others) from the Plug-in Effect display ([PERFORM] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F6] EFFECT → [SF3] PLG-EF). For details, refer to the Owner’s Manual of the PLG100-VH. 2 Plug the microphone to the A/D INPUT jack on the rear panel (page 72). A / D INPUT R L GAIN 8 Sing or talk into the microphone to check the effect sound, and adjust the settings as necessary. A / D INPUT R L n 3 4 A standard dynamic microphone is recommended. (The MOTIF ES does not support phantom-powered condenser microphones.) Turn the MOTIF ES power on. Press the [PERFORM] button to enter the Performance Play mode, select the desired Performance, then set the microphone related parameters. For details, refer to steps #4 - 9 on page 72. 5 Check the status of the installed Plug-in Boards in the [UTILITY] → [F6] PLUG → [SF1] STATUS display. 6 Select “PartAD” as the Part to which the Plug-in Insertion Effect is applied in the CONNECT display ([PERFORM] → [F3] EFFECT → [SF1] CONNECT). Move the cursor here, then select the Part. 78 GAIN Owner’s Manual 9 If desired, store the settings for the microphone sound and PLG100-VH as a Performance in the Performance Store mode (page 91). Editing a Voice Quick Guide — Advanced Course Editing a Voice The Voice Edit mode ([VOICE] → [EDIT]) gives you comprehensive tools for creating your own original Voices, either from scratch by changing the basic sounds, or by tweaking the various Voice parameters. Create your custom sounds by calling up a preset Voice and editing as desired. The actual parameters available and the methods for editing differ depending on the Voice type. ● Normal Voice Edit A Normal Voice can consist of up to four Elements. There are two types of Voice Edit displays: those for Common Edit to edit the settings common to all four Elements, and those for editing individual Elements. ● Drum Voice Edit Quick Guide — Advanced Course Each Drum voice consists of various Waves and/or Normal voices, each assigned to notes across the keyboard, from C0 to C6. There are two types of Drum Voice Edit displays: those for Common Edit to edit the settings that apply to all Drum keys in the voice, and those for editing individual keys (Elements). ● Plug-in Voice Edit This is basically the same as Normal Voice Edit. Unlike with Normal voices, the Plug-in voices only have one Element for editing. Normal Voice Edit 1 Press the [VOICE] button to enter the Voice mode, then select a Normal Voice to be edited. 2 Press the [EDIT] button to enter the Voice Edit mode. 3 Call up the Common Edit display or Element Edit display. EDIT COMPARE JOB STORE SCENE STORE SET LOCATE If you wish to edit the sounds that make up a Voice and the basic parameters that determine the sound, such as Oscillator, Pitch, Filter, Amplitude, and EG (Envelope Generator), call up the Element Edit display. If you wish to edit more global parameters related to the overall Voice and how it’s processed, such as Arpeggio, Controller, and Effects, call up the Common Edit display. While in the Voice Edit mode, you can switch between the Common Edit display and the Element Edit display as shown below. Calling up the Common Edit display Press the [COMMON] button to call up the Common Edit display. DRUM KITS PRE 5 PRE 6 USER 1 USER 2 FAVORITES A. PIANO KEYBOARD ORGAN GUITAR/ PLUCKED A B C D SYN LEAD SYN PAD/ CHOIR SYN COMP CHROMATIC PERCUSSION 1 2 3 4 In the Edit mode, the [DRUM KITS] button functions as the [COMMON] button. Calling up the Element Edit display Press the desired element number from the ELEMENT [1] - [4] buttons to call up the Element Edit display. Indicates the display for editing Element 1. Indicates a Common Edit display. ELEMENT/PERF. PART/ZONE COMMON 9 10 11 12 To turn each Element on or off (to hear how each affects the overall sound), use buttons [9] - [12]. You can also isolate or solo an Element by holding down the [MUTE] button and pressing the desired number button ([9] - [12]). To cancel the solo, press the [MUTE] button again. Common Edit Element Edit 1 Element Edit 2 Element Edit 3 Element Edit 4 Owner’s Manual 79 Editing a Voice 4 Select the menu you wish to edit by pressing the [F1] - [F6] and [SF1] - [SF5] buttons, then edit the parameters. The following briefly describes the main Voice parameters. 7 Store the edited Voice to internal User memory (page 187). The edited Voice can be stored in the Voice Store mode. See page 85 for details. ● Basic parameters for creating a sound Element selection → [F1] - [F6] If you wish to edit the basic sound-generating and soundshaping parameters for the Voice, such as Oscillator, Pitch, Filter, Amplitude, and EG (Envelope Generator), use the Common Edit display. [F1] OSC (Oscillator) pages 160, 195 [F2] PITCH pages 160, 196 [F3] FILTER pages 161, 197 Quick Guide — Advanced Course [F4] AMP (Amplitude) pages 162, 199 [F5] LFO pages 162, 201 [F6] EQ (Equalizer) pages 178, 201 8 If desired, save the edited and stored voices to a SmartMedia/USB storage device. Keep in mind that edited Voice data is stored to internal User memory (Flash ROM) and is stored even when turning the power off. As such it is not necessary to save the data to SmartMedia card or another device; however, you may want to save it to another media for backup or organizational purposes. For more information, see page 85. Compare Function ● Effect related parameters .................... Pages 177 and 194 [COMMON] → [F6] EFFECT The Effects use DSP (Digital Signal Processing) to alter and enhance the sound of a Voice. Effects are applied in the final stages of editing, letting you change the sound of the created Voice as desired. The Common Edit display lets you edit the Effect related parameters. This convenient function lets you switch between the edited Voice and its original, unedited condition – allowing you to listen to the difference between the two and better hear how your edits affect the sound. 1 ● Controller related parameters ........... Pages 155 and 192 In the Voice Edit mode (the [EDIT] indicator lighting), press the [EDIT] button so that its indicator flashes. The [C] indicator is shown at the top of the display (in place of the [E] indicator), and the original, unedited voice is restored for monitoring. For each Voice, you can assign various functions to built-in controllers such as Pitch Bend Wheel, Modulation Wheel, Ribbon Controller, Knobs (ASSIGN1 and 2), Keyboard Aftertouch and optionally connected controllers such as Footswitch, Foot Controller, Breath Controller. These settings can be edited in the Common Edit display. EDIT COMPARE JOB STORE SCENE STORE SET LOCATE ● Arpeggio related parameters ............. Pages 169 and 191 [COMMON] → [F3] ARP (Arpeggio) For each Voice, you can set the Arpeggio related parameters such as Arpeggio type and playback tempo. These can be edited in the Common Edit display. 5 Repeat #3 - 4 as desired. 6 Name the edited Normal Voice. Press the [EDIT] button again to disable the “Compare” function and restore the settings for your edited Voice. Compare the edited sound with the unedited sound by repeating steps #1 and 2. n Enter a name for the Voice from the NAME display ([COMMON] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF1] NAME). For detailed instructions on naming, refer to page 53 in the Basic Operation section. Enter the desired Voice name. 80 2 Owner’s Manual While Compare is active, you cannot make edits to the Voice. Editing a Voice TIP Editing a Voice by using the Knobs The four knobs at the top left of the instrument are not only for tweaking the sound while you perform — you can also use them to edit a Voice, either in the Voice Play mode or the Voice Edit mode. ● When the [PAN/SEND] indicator is turned on: PAN Determines the stereo pan position of the Voice. [VOICE] → Voice selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F2] OUTPUT → Pan Page 190 REVERB Determines the amount of Reverb effect that is applied to the Voice. [VOICE] → Voice selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F2] OUTPUT → RevSend Page 191 CHORUS Determines the amount of Chorus effect that is applied to the Voice. [VOICE] → Voice selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F2] OUTPUT → ChoSend Page 191 TEMPO Determines the tempo of the Arpeggio assigned to the currently selected Voice. [VOICE] → Voice selection → [F6] ARP → Tempo Page 189 CUTOFF Raises or lowers the Filter cutoff frequency to adjust the tone brilliance. [VOICE] → Voice selection → [F5] EG → CUTOF Page 189 RESONANCE Boosts or attenuates the level at the area around the Filter cutoff frequency. [VOICE] → Voice selection → [F5] EG → RESO Page 189 ATTACK Determines the attack time of the sound. For example, you can adjust a strings Voice so that the sound gradually swells in volume by setting a slow attack time – simply turn this knob to the right. [VOICE] → Voice selection → [F5] EG → ATK (AEG) Page 189 RELEASE Determines the release time of the sound. Turning the knob to the right sets a long release time and (depending on the selected Voice) lets the sound sustain after the key is released. To produce a sharp release, in which the sound abruptly cuts off, set a short release time. [VOICE] → Voice selection → [F5] EG → REL (AEG) Page 189 n Quick Guide — Advanced Course ● When the [TONE] indicator is turned on: The settings above are applied as offsets to the AEG and FEG settings in the Voice Edit mode. ● When the [ARP FX] indicator is turned on: SWING Adjusts the swing feel of the Arpeggio playback. [VOICE] → Voice selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F3] ARP → [SF3] PLAY FX → Swing Page 192 GATE TIME Adjusts the Gate Time (length) of the Arpeggio notes. [VOICE] → Voice selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F3] ARP → [SF3] PLAY FX → GateTimeRate Page 192 VELOCITY Adjusts the velocity of the Arpeggio notes. [VOICE] → Voice selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F3] ARP → [SF3] PLAY FX → VelocityRate Page 192 UNITMULTIPLY Adjusts the Arpeggio playback time based on tempo. [VOICE] → Voice selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F3] ARP → [SF3] PLAY FX → UnitMultiply Page 192 ● When the [EQ] indicator is turned on: LO Determines the amount of boost or attenuation applied to the low frequency band of the Master EQ. [VOICE] → Voice selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF3] MEQ OFS → LOW Page 190 LO MID Determines the amount of boost or attenuation applied to the lowmidrange frequency band of the Master EQ. [VOICE] → Voice selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF3] MEQ OFS → LOW MID Page 190 HI MID Determines the amount of boost or attenuation applied to the highmidrange frequency band of the Master EQ. [VOICE] → Voice selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF3] MEQ OFS → HIGH MID Page 190 HI Determines the amount of boost or attenuation applied to the high frequency band of the Master EQ. [VOICE] → Voice selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF3] MEQ OFS → HIGH Page 190 n The settings above are applied as offsets to the EQ settings in the [VOICE] → [UTILITY] → [F3] VOICE → [SF1] MEQ display. ● When both the [PAN/SEND] and [TONE] indicators are turned on (by pressing them simultaneously): ASSIGN A Adjusts parameters assigned to these knobs in the [UTILITY] → [F4] CTL ASN → [SF2] ASSIGN display. Page 263 Adjusts parameters assigned to these knobs in the [VOICE] → Voice selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F4] CTL SET display. Page 192 ASSIGN B ASSIGN 1 ASSIGN 2 n In addition to above functions, Master Effect related parameters (set in the [UTILITY] → [F3] VOICE → [SF2] MEF display) can be assigned to these four knobs by pressing the [ARP FX] and [EQ] buttons simultaneously. The particular parameters assigned to the four knobs can be set in the [UTILITY] → [F4] CTL ASN → [SF5] MEF display. TIP Editing a Voice by using the Control Sliders (CS) [VOICE] → Voice selection → [EDIT] → Element selection → [F4] AMP → [SF1] LVL/PAN → Level In the Voice mode, the four Control Sliders let you independently adjust the levels of the Elements of a Normal Voice or the Drum Voice keys. When a Normal Voice is selected, you can adjust the level balance among the four Elements. n Inadvertent use of the sliders may result in no sound. If this occurs, move the sliders upward. Owner’s Manual 81 Editing a Voice To solo an Element for editing Edit Recall This feature is useful for isolating the sound of single Element, for ease in editing. If you are editing a Voice and select a different Voice without storing the one you were editing, all the edits you’ve made will be erased. If this happens, you can use Edit Recall to restore the Voice with your latest edits intact. 1 In the Normal Voice Edit mode, simultaneously hold down the [MUTE] button and press one of the NUMBER buttons [9] to [12] to solo the corresponding Element. Once you’ve selected an Element for soloing, the [MUTE] button’s lamp flashes, indicating the Solo function is active and only the selected Element can be edited. 1 Press the [JOB] button in the Voice mode to enter the Voice Job mode. 2 Press the [F2] RECALL button to call up the Recall display. In this example, only Element 3 is turned on and can be edited. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TRACK SELECT 12 13 14 15 16 MUTE ELEMENT/PERF. PART/ZONE 9 10 11 3 Quick Guide — Advanced Course Press the [ENTER] button. (The display prompts you for confirmation.) If you wish to cancel the operation, press the [DEC/ NO] button. NUMBER SOLO 4 2 3 Press the [INC/YES] button to execute Edit Recall to restore the voice. To solo another Element, simply press the appropriate number button ([9] - [12]). To exit from the Solo function, press the [MUTE] button again. Drum Voice Edit 1 Press the [VOICE] button to enter the Voice mode, then select a Drum Voice to be edited. 2 Press the [EDIT] button to enter the Voice Edit mode. 3 Call up the Common Edit display or Key Edit display. EDIT JOB COMPARE STORE SCENE STORE SET LOCATE If you want to edit the sounds that make up a Drum Voice and the basic parameters that determine the sound, such as Oscillator, Pitch, Filter, Amplitude, and EG (Envelope Generator), call up the Key Edit display. To edit more global parameters related to the overall Drum Voice and how it’s processed, such as Arpeggio, Controller, and Effects, call up the Common Edit display. While in the Voice Edit mode, you can switch between the Common Edit display and the Element Edit display as shown below. Calling up the Common Edit display Press the [COMMON] button to call up the Common Edit display. In the Edit mode, the [DRUM KITS] button functions as the [COMMON] button. DRUM KITS PRE 5 PRE 6 USER 1 USER 2 FAVORITES A. PIANO KEYBOARD ORGAN GUITAR/ PLUCKED A B C D SYN LEAD SYN PAD/ CHOIR SYN COMP CHROMATIC PERCUSSION 1 2 3 4 Indicates a Common Edit display. Calling up the Key Edit display Press any of the ELEMENT [1] - [4] buttons to call up the Key Edit display, then select the key to which the desired instrument is assigned. Indicates the display for editing the key C0. ELEMENT/PERF. PART/ZONE COMMON 9 10 11 12 Common Edit C0 C6 C1 Key Edit (1-73) Key 1 82 Owner’s Manual Key 5 Key 10 Key 18 Key 21 Key 73 Editing a Voice The main parameters available are basically the same as in the Normal Voice Edit (page 80). What is called Key Edit in the Drum Voice corresponds to Element Edit in the Normal Voice. Please keep in mind that the LFO parameters are not available in the Drum Voice. 5 Repeat #3 - 4 as desired. 6 Name the edited Drum Voice. Enter a name for the Voice from the NAME display ([COMMON] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF1] NAME). For detailed instructions on naming a voice, refer to page 53 in the Basic Operation section. 7 Store the edited Voice to internal User memory (page 186). The edited Voice can be stored in the Voice Store mode. See page 85 for details. 8 If desired, save the edited and stored voices to a SmartMedia/USB storage device. Keep in mind that edited Voice data is stored to internal User memory (Flash ROM) and is stored even when turning the power off. As such it is not necessary to save the data to SmartMedia card or another device; however, you may want to save it to another media for backup or organizational purposes. For more information, see page 85. Quick Guide — Advanced Course Select the desired menu for editing by pressing the [F1] - [F6] and [SF1] - [SF5] buttons, then edit the parameters. 4 Enter the desired Voice name. TIP Assigning drum/percussion instruments to individual keys [VOICE] → Drum Voice selection → [EDIT] → Key selection → [F1] OSC → [SF1] WAVE In the Drum Voice Edit mode, you can create your own original drum kits by assigning specific instrument sounds to individual keys — in any desired order — and edit detailed parameters for each key’s sound. 1 2 3 Call up the Key Edit display in the Voice Edit mode. Refer to step #3 on page 82. 4 Call up the [F1] OSC → [SF1] WAVE display. Select the desired Waveform to be assigned. Move the cursor to “Number” and change the value by using the data dial, [INC/YES] button, and [DEC/NO] button. Then, press the same key set in step #3 again to confirm the selected instrument sound. Press the key to which you want to assign a sound. The drum instrument currently assigned to the pressed key will sound. You can also select a different sound category (such as Percussion, or even a Normal Voice sound), by moving the cursor to “Category”and changing the setting. 5 6 7 Create your original drum kit by repeating steps #3 - 4. Store the created drum kit as a Drum Voice in User memory. The edited Voice can be stored in the Voice Store mode. See page 85 for details. If desired, save the edited and stored voices to a SmartMedia/USB storage device. Owner’s Manual 83 Editing a Voice TIP Setting the drum key for independent open and closed hi-hat sounds [VOICE] → Drum Voice selection → [EDIT] → Key selection → [F1] OSC → [SF5] OTHER → AltnateGroup In a real drum kit, some drum sounds cannot physically be played simultaneously, such as open and closed hi-hats. You can prevent drum instruments from playing back simultaneously by assigning them to the same Alternate Group. The preset Drum Voices have many such Alternate Group assignments to ensure the most authentic, natural sound. When creating a Voice from scratch, you can use this feature — either to ensure authentic sound, or to create special effects, where playing one sound cancels out a previous one. 1 2 Quick Guide — Advanced Course 3 Call up the Key Edit display in the Voice Edit mode. Refer to step #3 on page 82. 4 Press the key which corresponds to “Hi-Hat Close” and set it to the same Alternate Group (1) as in step #3. Call up the [F1] OSC → [SF5] OTHER display. Press the key which corresponds to “Hi-Hat Open” and set the Alternate Group to “1.” 5 Confirm whether the Alternate Group has been set properly. Immediately after pressing the “Hi-Hat Open” key, press the “Hi-Hat Close” key. Pressing the second key should cut off the sound of the first. Since the settings above are included in the Drum Voice data, store them as a Drum Voice in the Voice Store mode. TIP Determining how the Drum Voice responds when the key is released [VOICE] → Drum Voice selection → [EDIT] → Key selection → [F1] OSC → [SF5] OTHER → RcvNoteOff You can determine whether or not the selected Drum key responds to MIDI Note Off messages. Setting the Receive Note Off parameter to “off” can be useful for cymbal sounds and other sustaining sounds. This lets you have the selected sounds sustain to the length of their natural decay – even if you release the note, or when a Note Off message is received. If this parameter is set to “on,” the sound will stop immediately when the note is released or a Note Off message is received. TIP Setting the Output jack for each key (drum/percussion instrument) [VOICE] → Drum Voice selection → [EDIT] → Key selection → [F1] OSC → [SF2] OUTPUT → OutputSel You can change the output jack on the rear panel for the individual Drum key signal. This function is useful when you wish to apply a connected external effect to a specific drum instrument. For details, see page 31. 84 Owner’s Manual Editing a Voice Plug-in Voice Edit The Plug-in Voices (available when installing optional Plug-in Boards to the instrument) can be edited in basically the same way as in Normal Voice Edit (page 79). Unlike with Normal voices, the Plug-in voices only have one Element for editing. In addition, some of the other parameters may not be available. Refer to page 205 in the Reference section. Storing/Saving the created Voice Two steps are necessary in order to store (save) your voice – storing the edited voice to internal memory and saving the stored voices to a SmartMedia/USB storage device. User Drum Voice 001 User Drum Voice 002 User Drum Voice 003 STORE User Drum Voice Bank User Normal Voice Bank 1 SmartMedia User Plug-in Voice 001 Plug-in Voice UserUser Plug-in Voice 002 001 User Plug-in Voice 001 Plug-in Voice UserUser Plug-in Voice 003 002 User Plug-in Voice 002 User Plug-in Voice 003 User Plug-in Voice 003 USB storage device User Plug-in Voice Bank 1 User Drum Voice 32 User Plug-in Voice 064 User Plug-in Voice 064 User Plug-in Voice 064 Storing edited Voices individually SAVE User Normal Voice 128 User Normal Voice 128 All the User Voice data in internal memory can be saved as a single file. Quick Guide — Advanced Course Voice Edit Internal memory (Flash ROM) User Normal Voice 001 User Normal Voice 002 User Normal Voice 003 File extension: W7A File extension: W7V File extension: W7E The W7E file can be loaded to the Voice Editor, computer software. Keep in mind that edited Voice data is stored to internal User memory (Flash ROM) and is stored even when turning the power off. As such it is not necessary to save the data to SmartMedia card or another device; however, you may want to save it to another media for backup or organizational purposes, using the Save operation. For more information, see page 86. Storing the edited Voice as a User Voice to internal memory [VOICE] → [STORE] 1 After editing the Voice, press the [STORE] button to enter the Voice Store mode. Make sure to execute the Store operation before selecting another Voice. 2 Select the destination Voice memory. Select a User Bank (“USR1” or “USR2” when storing a Normal Voice, “UDR” when storing a Drum Voice, “P1-U” ~ “P3-U” when storing a Plug-in Voice) and the desired Voice number by using the data dial, [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] button. CAUTION When you execute the Store operation, the settings for the destination memory will be overwritten. Important data should always be backed up to a separate SmartMedia/USB storage device. 3 Press the [ENTER] button. The display prompts you for confirmation. To cancel the Store operation, press the [DEC/NO] button. DEC/NO INC / YES EXIT ENTER EXECUTE Select a User Bank. Select a Voice number. Owner’s Manual 85 Editing a Voice 4 Press the [INC/YES] button to execute the Store operation. 3 Set the Type parameter to “All Voice.” After the Voice has been stored, a “Completed” message appears and operation returns to the Voice Play display. DEC/NO EXIT INC / YES ENTER EXECUTE Move the cursor to TYPE, then select a file type by using the data dial, [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons. The following three file types are available for saving Voice data. Here, select “All Voice.” Quick Guide — Advanced Course All When this is selected, execute the Save operation to save all the created data including the User Voices as a single file (extension: W7A). All Voice When this is selected, execute the Save operation to save all User Voices as a single file (extension: W7V). Voice Editor When this is selected, execute the Save operation to save all User Voices as a single file (extension: W7E) which can be exported to the Voice Editor software contained in the included CD-ROM. CAUTION Keep in mind that the Store operation may take a short time to complete, during which an “Executing..” or “Please keep power on” message may be shown. Never attempt to turn off the power while data is being written to Flash ROM while such a message is displayed. Turning the power off in this state results in loss of all user data and may cause the system to freeze (due to corruption of data in the Flash ROM). This may also result in the MOTIF ES being unable to properly start up the next time the power is turned on. 4 Input a file name. Move the cursor to the file name input location, then input a file name. For detailed instructions on naming, refer to page 53 in the Basic Operation section. CAUTION If you select another Voice without storing, the currently edited Voice will be lost. Make sure to store the edited Voice before selecting another Voice. Saving the edited Voices to a SmartMedia/USB storage device [FILE] → [F2] SAVE File name 5 Press the [ENTER] button to execute the Save operation. Whether you are saving data to SmartMedia or a USB storage device, the procedure is the same. Insert a SmartMedia card (to the CARD slot) or connect the USB device and follow the instructions below. 1 Press the [FILE] button to enter the File mode, then execute the basic settings. Refer to “Basic settings for using SmartMedia or a USB storage device” on page 30. 2 Press the [F2] SAVE button to call up the Save display. DEC/NO INC / YES EXIT ENTER EXECUTE If you are about to overwrite an existing file, the display prompts you for confirmation. Press the [INC/YES] button to execute the Save operation to overwrite the existing file, or press the [DEC/NO] button to cancel it. CAUTION While the data is being saved, make sure to follow these precautions: • Never remove or eject the media from the device (SmartMedia or USB storage). • Never unplug or disconnect any of the devices. • Never turn off the power of the MOTIF ES or the relevant devices. 86 Owner’s Manual Editing a Performance ■ Loading Voice data from the SmartMedia/USB storage device When Type is set to “Voice”: When Type is set to “Voice,” you can specify and load a specific Voice from a file (with the extension W7V or W7A). [FILE] → [F3] LOAD In the previous section, we saved Voice data as an “All Voice” file to a SmartMedia card or USB storage device. Here, we’ll recall that Voice data and load it to the instrument with the Load operation. Move the cursor to the file (extension: W7V) saved in the operation explained on the previous page. ENTER 1 Press the [FILE] button to enter the File mode, then execute the basic settings. EXECUTE Refer to “Basic settings for using SmartMedia or a USB storage device” on page 30. 3 Select the file type to be loaded. Select a source Voice Bank from the selected file with the following operation. To select a User Normal Voice Bank, press one of the [USER1] and [USER2] buttons. To select a User Drum Voice Bank, simultaneously hold the [DRUM KITS] button and press the [USER1] button. To select a User Plug-in Voice Bank, press one of the [PLG1], [PLG2] and [PLG3] buttons. After selecting a source Voice Bank, all the Voices contained in the selected Bank are listed in the display. Move the cursor to the desired Voice to be loaded. Quick Guide — Advanced Course 2 Press the [F3] LOAD button to call up the Load display. ENTER EXECUTE The file saved in operation explained on the previous page has all the User Voices. If you wish to load all the User Voices, set Type to “All Voice.” If you wish to load only a specific voice, set Type to “Voice.” Select a destination Voice Number. You can also change the destination Voice Bank when loading a Normal Voice or a Plug-in Voice by moving the cursor to the location of “USR1” in the above display and using the data dial. When loading Plug-in Voice data, note that the Plug-in Board for the source Voice Bank should match the one for the destination Voice Bank. When a source Voice Bank is created for the PLG150-AN, for example, you should select the Voice Bank for the PLG150AN as the destination. n 4 Select a file ( ) to be loaded. Move the cursor to the file (extension: W7V) saved in the operation explained on the previous page. If you’ve set the Type to “AllVoice” in step #3, go to step #5. If you’ve set the Type to “Voice” in step #3, execute the operations in the following box, then go to step #5. If you want to change the source Voice Bank/Number, press the [EXIT] button to return the display to the first one (shown at the top of this box) then perform the above instructions again. CAUTION Loading data to this synthesizer automatically erases and replaces any existing data in the User memory. Make sure to save any important data to a SmartMedia/USB storage device before performing any Load operations. 5 Press the [ENTER] button to execute the Load operation. After the data has been loaded, a “Completed” message appears and operation returns to the original display. CAUTION While the data is being saved, make sure to follow these precautions: • Never remove or eject the media from the device (SmartMedia or USB storage). • Never unplug or disconnect any of the devices. • Never turn off the power of the MOTIF ES or the relevant devices. Editing a Performance The Performance Edit mode ([PERFORM] → [EDIT]) lets you create your own original Performances — containing up to four different Parts (Voices) — by editing the various parameters. The Voices can be selected from the internal tone generator or the installed Plug-in Boards. After assigning different Voices to separate ranges of the keyboard, edit the detailed parameters in the Performance Edit mode. Owner’s Manual 87 Editing a Performance 1 Press the [PERFORM] button to enter the Performance mode, then select a Performance to be edited. 2 Press the [EDIT] button to enter the Performance Edit mode. 3 Call up the Common Edit display or Part Edit display. Use the Part Edit to edit the parameters for each Part. Use Common Edit to edit the parameters for all of the Parts. While in the Voice Edit mode, you can switch between the Common Edit display amd the Part Edit display as shown below. Calling up the Common Edit display DRUM KITS PRE 5 PRE 6 USER 1 USER 2 Press the [COMMON] button to call up the Common Edit display. FAVORITES A. PIANO KEYBOARD ORGAN GUITAR/ PLUCKED A B C D SYN LEAD SYN PAD/ CHOIR SYN COMP CHROMATIC PERCUSSION 1 2 3 4 In the Edit mode, the [DRUM KITS] button functions as the [COMMON] button. Calling up the Part Edit display Press the desired Part number from the PERF. PART [1] - [4] buttons to call up the Part Edit display. Quick Guide — Advanced Course Indicates the display for editing Part 1. Indicates a Common Edit display. COMMON ELEMENT/PERF. PART/ZONE To switch between the Part 1 - 4 display and the Plug-in Part 1 - 3 display, press the [F6] button. n You can mute or solo a Part in the Performance Edit mode, just as in the Performance Play mode or the Song/Pattern mode (page 68). You can select the four Performance Parts from this group of seven. Part1 Edit Part2 Edit Part3 Edit Common Edit F6 Parts to which Internal voices are assigned Part4 Edit Plug-in part 1 (PLG1) Edit Plug-in part 2 (PLG2) Edit Plug-in part 3 (PLG3) Edit 4 Select the menu you wish to edit by pressing the [F1] - [F6] and [SF1] - [SF5] buttons, then edit the parameters. The following briefly describes the main Performance parameters. ● Parameters for the Voice assigned to each Part...Page 216 Part selection → [F1] VOICE The Voice assigned to each part and its note range can be set also in the Performance Play mode (page 71). In addition to the parameters available in the Performance Play mode, the Performance Edit mode also lets you set Portamento (pitch glide) and Arpeggio Switch (which determines whether the Arpeggio plays a specific Part or not). ● Basic parameters for making sound................Page 218 Part selection → [F4] TONE If you wish to edit the basic parameters for the synthesizer such as Tune, Filter, and Amplitude, use the Part Edit display. 88 Owner’s Manual Parts to which Plug-in Board voices are assigned ● Parameters related to the Audio Input part ........... Page 214 [COMMON] → [F5] AUDIO IN The audio signal input from the A/D INPUT jack (or the optional audio inputs) can be handled as an Audio Input part. You can apply various parameters such as Volume, Pan, and Effect settings to this Part — just as you can with the other Parts. The parameters related to the Audio Input Part can be edited in Common Edit for each Performance. ● Parameters related to the OUTPUT jacks for each part................................................................................ Page 218 Part selection → [F2] OUTPUT → [SF3] SELECT → OutputSel You can assign each individual Part’s Voice to be output from a specific hardware output jack on the rear panel. This function is useful when you want to output a specific Part to a separate speaker or process it with a favorite external effect. Editing a Performance ● Effect related parameters ................ Pages 177 and 215 [COMMON] → [F6] EFFECT 5 Repeat steps #3 - 4 as desired. 6 Name the edited Performance. [COMMON] → [F2] OUT/MEF → [SF3] MEF (Master Effect) The Effects use DSP (Digital Signal Processing) to alter and enhance the sound of a Performance. The Common Edit display lets you edit the Effect related parameters. ● Master EQ related parameters ........ Pages 178 and 214 Enter a name for the Performance from the NAME display ([COMMON] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF1] NAME). For detailed instructions on naming, refer to page 53 in the Basic Operation section. These parameters let you use the five-band Master EQ to process the overall sound of the Performance. Master EQ also features separate EQ shape parameters for the Low and High bands, as well as the Frequency, Gain and Q controls for each band. Enter the desired Performance name. Quick Guide — Advanced Course ● Controller related parameters ........... Pages 155 and 214 [COMMON] → [F4] CTL ASN (Controller Assign) For each Performance, you can assign the Control Change Number to built-in controllers such as Ribbon Controller, Knobs (ASSIGN1 and 2), and optionally connected controllers, such as Foot Controller and Breath Controller. n 7 The edited Performance can be stored in the Performance Store mode. See page 91 for details. Functions assigned to Controllers depend on the settings of each Part’s Voice edited in the Voice Edit mode. ● Arpeggio related parameters............. Pages 169 and 214 For each Performance, you can set the Arpeggio related parameters, such as Arpeggio type and playback tempo. These can be edited in the Common Edit display. Store the edited Performance to internal User memory (page 186). 8 If desired, save the edited and stored Performances to a SmartMedia/USB storage device. Keep in mind that edited Performance data is stored to internal User memory (Flash ROM) and is stored even when turning the power off. As such it is not necessary to save the data to SmartMedia card or another device; however, you may want to save it to another media for backup or organizational purposes. For more information, see page 91. Compare Function Just as in the Voice Edit mode, you can use the Compare function also in the Performance Edit mode. This convenient function lets you switch between the edited voice and its original, unedited condition – allowing you to listen to the difference between the two and better hear how your edits affect the sound. 1 2 In the Performance Edit mode (with the [EDIT] indicator lit), press the [EDIT] button so that its indicator flashes. The [C] indicator is shown at the top of the display (in place of the [E] indicator), and the original, unedited Performance is restored for monitoring. Press the [EDIT] button again to disable the “Compare” function and restore the settings for your edited Performance. Compare the edited sound with the unedited sound as desired by repeating steps #1 and 2. n While Compare is active, you cannot make edits to the Performance. Owner’s Manual 89 Editing a Performance TIP Editing a Performance by using the Knobs The four knobs at the top left of the instrument are not only for tweaking the sound while you perform — you can also use them to edit a Performance, either in the Performance Play mode or the Performance Edit mode. ● When the [PAN/SEND] indicator is turned on: PAN Determines the stereo pan position of the Performance. [PERFORM] → Performance selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F2] OUT/MEF → [SF1] OUT → Pan Page 213 REVERB Determines the amount of Reverb effect that is applied to the Performance. [PERFORM] → Performance selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F2] OUT/MEF → [SF1] OUT → RevSend Page 213 CHORUS Determines the amount of Chorus effect that is applied to the Performance. [PERFORM] → Performance selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F2] OUT/MEF → [SF1] OUT → ChoSend Page 213 TEMPO Determines the tempo of the Arpeggio assigned to the currently selected Performance. [PERFORM] → Performance selection → [F6] ARP → Tempo Page 213 ● When the [TONE] indicator is turned on: Quick Guide — Advanced Course CUTOFF Raises or lowers the Filter cutoff frequency to adjust the tone brilliance. [PERFORM] → Performance selection → [F5] EG → CUTOF Page 213 RESONANCE Boosts or attenuates the level at the area around the Filter cutoff frequency. [PERFORM] → Performance selection → [F5] EG → RESO Page 213 ATTACK Determines the attack time of the sound. For example, you can adjust a strings Voice so that the sound gradually swells in volume by setting a slow attack time – simply turn this knob to the right. [PERFORM] → Performance selection → [F5] EG → ATK (AEG) Page 213 RELEASE Determines the release time of the sound. Turning the knob to the right sets a long release time and (depending on the Voice assigned to the selected Performance) lets the sound sustain after the key is released. To produce a sharp release, in which the sound abruptly cuts off, set a short release time. [PERFORM] → Performance selection → [F5] EG → REL (AEG) Page 213 n The settings above are applied as offsets to the AEG and FEG settings in the Performance Edit mode. ● When the [ARP FX] indicator is turned on: SWING Adjusts the swing feel of the Arpeggio playback. [PERFORM] → Performance selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F3] ARP → [SF3] PLAY FX → Swing Page 214 GATE TIME Adjusts the Gate Time (length) of the Arpeggio notes. [PERFORM] → Performance selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F3] ARP → [SF3] PLAY FX → GateTimeRate Page 214 VELOCITY Adjusts the velocity of the Arpeggio notes. [PERFORM] → Performance selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F3] ARP → [SF3] PLAY FX → VelocityRate Page 214 UNITMULTIPLY Adjusts the Arpeggio playback time based on tempo. [PERFORM] → Performance selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F3] ARP → [SF3] PLAY FX → UnitMultiply Page 214 ● When the [EQ] indicator is turned on: LO Determines the amount of boost or attenuation applied to the low frequency band of the Master EQ. [PERFORM] → Performance selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF3] MEQ OFS → LOW Page 213 LO MID Determines the amount of boost or attenuation applied to the lowmidrange frequency band of the Master EQ. [PERFORM] → Performance selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF3] MEQ OFS → LOW MID Page 213 HI MID Determines the amount of boost or attenuation applied to the highmidrange frequency band of the Master EQ. [PERFORM] → Performance selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF3] MEQ OFS → HIGH MID Page 213 HI Determines the amount of boost or attenuation applied to the high frequency band of the Master EQ. [PERFORM] → Performance selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF3] MEQ OFS → HIGH Page 213 n The settings above are applied as offsets to the EQ settings in the [PERFORM] → Performance selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F2] OUT/MEF → [SF2] MEQ (Master EQ) display. ● When both the [PAN/SEND] and [TONE] indicators are turned on (by pressing them simultaneously): ASSIGN A Adjusts parameters assigned to these knobs in the [UTILITY] → [F4] CTL ASN → [SF2] ASSIGN display. Page 263 Depends on the settings of the Voice assigned to the selected Performance. Page 192 ASSIGN B ASSIGN 1 ASSIGN 2 n 90 In addition to above functions, Master Effect related parameters (set in the [PERFORM] → Performance selection → [COMMON] → [F2] OUT/MEF → [SF3] MEF display) can be assigned to these four knobs by pressing the [ARP FX] and [EQ] buttons simultaneously. The particular parameters are assigned to the four knobs can be set in the [UTILITY] → [F4] CTL ASN → [SF5] MEF display. Owner’s Manual Editing a Performance TIP Editing a Performance by using the Con- Edit Recall trol Sliders (CS) If you are editing a Performance and select a different Performance without storing the one you were editing, all the edits you’ve made will be erased. If this happens, you can use Edit Recall to restore the Performance with your latest edits intact. 1 In the Performance mode, the four Control Sliders let you independently adjust the levels of the Parts (Voices), letting you control the overall balance of the Parts. n 2 3 Inadvertent use of the sliders may result in no sound. If this occurs, move the sliders upward. 4 Press the [JOB] button in the Performance mode to enter the Performance Job mode. Press the [F2] RECALL button to call up the Recall display. Press the [ENTER] button. (The display prompts you for confirmation.) If you wish to cancel the operation, press the [DEC/NO] button. Press the [INC/YES] button to execute the Edit Recall to restore the Performance. Quick Guide — Advanced Course [PERFORM] → Performance selection → [EDIT] → Part selection → [F2] OUTPUT → [SF1] VOL/PAN → Volume Storing/Saving the created Performance Two steps are necessary in order to store (save) your Performance – storing the edited Performance to internal memory and saving the stored Performances to a SmartMedia/USB storage device. Internal memory (Flash ROM) STORE Performance Edit Storing edited Performances individually SmartMedia Performance 001 Performance 002 Performance 003 SAVE USB storage device All the User Performance data in internal memory can be saved as a single file. Performance 128 File extension: W7A Keep in mind that edited Performance data is stored to internal User memory (Flash ROM) and is stored even when turning the power off. As such it is not necessary to save the data to SmartMedia card or another device; however, you may want to save it to another media for backup or organizational purposes, using the Save operation. Storing the edited Performance as a User Performance to internal memory [PERFORM] → [STORE] 1 After editing the Performance, press the [STORE] button to enter the Performance Store mode. Make sure to execute the Store operation before selecting another Performance. 2 Select the destination Performance memory. Select a Performance number by using the data dial, [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] button. CAUTION When you execute the Store operation, the settings for the destination memory will be overwritten. Important data should always be backed up to a separate SmartMedia/USB storage device. 3 Press the [ENTER] button. The display prompts you for confirmation. To cancel the Store operation, press the [DEC/NO] button. EXIT ENTER EXECUTE Owner’s Manual 91 Editing a Performance 4 Press the [INC/YES] button to execute the Store operation. After the Performance has been stored, a “Completed” message appears and operation returns to the Performance Play display. DEC/NO INC / YES EXIT ENTER Move the cursor to TYPE, then select a file type by using the data dial, [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons. When Type is set to “All,” execute the Save operation to save all the created data, including the Performances as well as the Voices assigned to them, as a single file (extension: W7A). 4 Input a file name. Move the cursor to the file name input location, then input a file name. For detailed instructions on naming, refer to page 53 in the Basic Operation section. EXECUTE File name Quick Guide — Advanced Course CAUTION Keep in mind that the Store operation may take a short time to complete, during which an “Executing..” or “Please keep power on” message may be shown. Never attempt to turn off the power while data is being written to Flash ROM while such a message is displayed. Turning the power off in this state results in loss of all user data and may cause the system to freeze (due to corruption of data in the Flash ROM). This may also result in the MOTIF ES being unable to properly start up the next time the power is turned on. 5 Press the [ENTER] button to execute the Save operation. DEC/NO INC / YES EXIT ENTER CAUTION If you select another Performance without storing, the currently edited Performance will be lost. Make sure to store the edited Performance before selecting another Performance. Saving the edited Performances to a SmartMedia/USB storage device EXECUTE If you are about to overwrite an existing file, the display prompts you for confirmation. Press the [INC/YES] button to execute the Save operation to overwrite the existing file, or press the [DEC/NO] button to cancel it. CAUTION [FILE] → [F2] SAVE Whether you are saving data to SmartMedia or a USB storage device, the procedure is the same. Insert a SmartMedia card (to the CARD slot) or connect the USB device and follow the instructions below. 1 Press the [FILE] button to enter the File mode, then execute the basic settings. Refer to “Basic settings for using SmartMedia or a USB storage device” on page 30. 2 Press the [F2] SAVE button to call up the Save display. 3 Set the Type parameter to “All.” While the data is being saved, make sure to follow these precautions: • Never remove or eject the media from the device (SmartMedia or USB storage). • Never unplug or disconnect any of the devices. • Never turn off the power of the MOTIF ES or the relevant devices. ■ Loading the Performance data from the SmartMedia/USB storage device [FILE] → [F3] LOAD In the previous section, we saved Performance data as an “All” file (extension: W7A) to a SmartMedia card or USB storage device. Here, we’ll recall that Performance data and load it to the instrument with the Load operation. 1 Press the [FILE] button to enter the File mode, then execute the basic settings. Refer to “Basic settings for using SmartMedia or a USB storage device” on page 30. 2 92 Owner’s Manual Press the [F3] LOAD button to call up the Load display. Editing a Performance 3 Select the file type to be loaded. The file saved in operation explained on the previous page contains all the Performances. If you wish to load all the Performances, set Type to “All.” In this case, all data that can be created on the MOTIF ES will be loaded in step #5 below. If you wish to load only a specific Performance, set Type to “Performance.” SmartMedia/USB storage device Performance 128 File extension: W7A Internal Memory (Flash ROM) Performance 001 Performance 002 Performance 003 All Performances are loaded when Type is set to “All.” Quick Guide — Advanced Course Performance 001 Performance 002 Performance 003 Loading a specific Performance when Type is set to “Performance.” Performance 128 CAUTION When Type (file type) is set to “All” and the Load operation is executed, all data that can be created on the instrument will be loaded. This means that any existing data in User memory will automatically be overwritten and lost. Make sure to save any important data to a SmartMedia/USB storage device before performing the Load operations, especially when Type is set to “All.” n 4 When Type (file type) is set to “Performance” and the Load operation is executed, the sound of the Performances may not be reproduced properly if the User Voices assigned to the Performances saved in the file have been changed by editing. Select a file ( ) to be loaded. Move the cursor to the file (extension: W7A) saved in the operation explained on the previous page. If you set the Type parameter to “All” in step #3, go to step #5. If you set the Type parameter to “Performance” in step #3, execute the operations in the following box, then go to step #5. When Type is set to “Performance”: When Type is set to “Performance,” you can specify and load a specific Performance from a file (with the extension W7A). Move the cursor to the file (extension: W7A) saved in the operation explained on the previous page. ENTER EXECUTE All the Performances contained in the selected file are listed on the display. Move the cursor to the desired Performance. ENTER Select the desired Performance to be loaded. EXECUTE Select the destination Performance number. CAUTION Loading data to this synthesizer automatically erases and replaces any existing data in the User memory. Make sure to save any important data to a SmartMedia/USB storage device before performing any Load operations. 5 Press the [ENTER] button to execute the Load operation. After the data has been loaded, a “Completed” message appears and operation returns to the original display. CAUTION While the data is being saved, make sure to follow these precautions: • Never remove or eject the media from the device (SmartMedia or USB storage). • Never unplug or disconnect any of the devices. • Never turn off the power of the MOTIF ES or the relevant devices. Owner’s Manual 93 Creating a Voice by using the Sampling function Creating a Voice by using the Sampling function Sampling is a powerful function that lets you bring your own recorded sounds – your voice, an instrument, rhythms, special sound effects, etc. – into the system of this synthesizer, and play those sounds just like any other voices. These sounds, the audio data you capture with the Sampling function, are referred to as “Samples.” The data you create by Sampling differs depending on which mode you enter the Sampling mode from — the Voice/ Performance mode or the Song/Pattern mode. In this section, we’ll describe how to use the Sampling function from the Voice/ Performance mode in creating a User Voice. n See page 173 for instructions on using the Sampling function in the Song mode/Pattern mode. In order to use the Sampling function, DIMM modules must be installed to the instrument. For details on installing DIMMs, see page 289. Depending on the size of the audio (sample) data obtained via the Sampling function, you may not be able to save all of the desired data to a SmartMedia card (maximum capacity: 128MB). For this reason, we recommend using a large-capacity USB storage device for your Sampling data. Sampling your voice with a microphone and creating a Normal Voice Quick Guide — Advanced Course 1 Connect a microphone to the instrument. 4 Follow steps #1 - 8 on page 72. 2 Press the [F1] DEST button to call up the display for setting the Sampling Destination, then set the parameters as described below. Press the [INTEGRATED SAMPLING] button in the Voice mode or Performance mode to enter the Sampling mode. MODE VOICE PERFORM MASTER SEQUENCER SONG PATTERN FILE INTEGRATED SAMPLING MIXING UTILITY DEMO 3 Press the [F2] SOURCE button to call up the display for setting the Sampling Source, then set the parameters as shown below. Type: Source: Next: Mono/Stereo: Frequency: sample A/D off L mono 44.1k For details about each parameter, see page 251. 94 Owner’s Manual Waveform Determines the Waveform number. Select a number which has no data ([--- : -----------] is indicated). For details about the Waveform, see page 173. Keybank Here, set this parameter to “C3.” After the Sampling is completed, you can hear the sampled sound by pressing the note set here. For details about the Keybank, see page 173. Part This is available when entering the Sampling mode from the Performance mode. This parameter determines the Performance Part to which the Voice (below) created by sampling is assigned. Voice Set the Bank to “USR1” or “USR2” (one of the User Normal Voice Banks), then select a User Normal Voice Number. After the Sampling is completed, you can hear the created Voice by selecting the Voice number set here. n If the Voice parameter above is set to “off,” you won’t be able to play the sampled sound as a Voice after completing this operation. However, you can call up the sampled sound by selecting a Waveform. For details on how to select a Waveform, see . Creating a Voice by using the Sampling function Press the [F6] REC button to call up the Sampling Record display (Sampling Standby status), then set the parameters as required. F6 6 Doing this puts sample recording on standby, waiting for an input signal that exceeds the Trigger level. You can change the Keybank (set in step #4) also in this display. Trigger Level Press the [F6] REC button again to enable Sampling Trigger Waiting. F6 Indicates Sampling Standby status. Indicates that sample recording is waiting for a signal of an appropriate level. Turn the Confirm function on or off ● Setting the Confirm function When the [F2] CONFM (Confirm function) is turned on ( is indicated), you can easily listen back to your just-recorded sample and conveniently re-record it if you’re not satisfied with the results. Here, set the [F2] CONFM button on. ● Setting the Trigger mode 7 Quick Guide — Advanced Course 5 Sing into the microphone to start sampling. Sing into the microphone. (You may want to match the pitch of your voice to the note C3, set in step #4 above.) The sampling actually starts as soon as the an input signal exceeding the specified trigger level is received. The Trigger mode lets you determine how the Sampling actually starts. For example, you can start the Sampling simply by pressing the button or when the Song/Pattern playback reaches a specified point. Here, set the TrggrMode (Trigger mode) to “level” which lets you start sampling as soon as the microphone level exceeds the specified Trigger Level. ● Setting the Trigger Level When the Trigger mode is set to “level,” you’ll also need to set the Trigger Level. This determines when sampling actually starts, depending on the level of the input signal (in this case, your voice). As you sing into the microphone, notice the movement of the level meter (bar), and when the bar crosses the Trigger Level arrow. If necessary, select the Trigger Level value and use the data dial to change it, moving the arrow as low or as high as needed. Trigger Level Trigger Level Indicates Sampling Standby status. The section of the bar exceeding the Trigger Level becomes black. 8 Press the [F6] STOP button to stop sampling, then check the results. Press the [F3] AUDITION button to hear the sampled sound. If you’re not satisfied with the results and you wish to try again, press the [F4] CANCEL button to return to the Sampling Standby display and try sampling from step #5 again. If you are satisfied with the results, press the [F5] OK button to store the sampled sound as a “sample” and return to the [F1] DEST or [F2] SOURCE display. Keep in mind that if the Confirm function is turned off in step #5 above, the display shown above will not appear when stopping sampling. Instead, stopping sampling returns directly to the [F1] DEST or [F2] SOURCE display. Owner’s Manual 95 Creating a Voice by using the Sampling function 9 Press the [EDIT] button to enter the Sampling Edit mode, then press the [F4] RANGE button to call up the Range setting display. EDIT When you play the sample from the keyboard, the more distant the played samples are from the original key, the less natural the samples sound. For this reason, you should try to make multiple samples and multiple key ranges, so that each key range is shorter and the samples sound more natural. COMPARE 12 F4 Save your newly created User Voice to a SmartMedia/USB storage device. Refer to “Saving a Sample” on page 97. CAUTION The recorded (edited) sample data resides temporarily in DIMM (page 187). Because data contained in DIMM is lost when the power is turned off, you should always save any data residing in DIMM to a SmartMedia /USB storage device before turning off the power. Quick Guide — Advanced Course 10 Set the key range within which the sample is sounded. Immediately after sampling, the sample is assigned only to one key — the one set in step #4 as “KeyBank.” This display lets you expand the key range within which the sample is sounded. Here, set the key range to C2 - B3. Indicates the original key of the currently selected sample. If you wish to select a different sample, call up the [F1] KEYBANK display, then press a different key while holding the [INFORMATION] button. Set the key range. Use the data dial, [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] button, or press the key while holding the [INFORMATION] button. Play the keyboard within the key range set above. Your sampled voice is sounded, following the pitches of the notes you play. 11 Repeat step #4 - 10 to add another sample to the same Voice (Waveform). For example, in step #4 set Keybank to “G4,” sing into the microphone as described in step #7 (matching the pitch G4, if necessary), and set the Key Range to C4 - E5 in step #10. As a result, the sample is assigned to the keys as illustrated below. The sample is sounded within this key range. The sample is sounded within this key range. C3 The original sample is assigned to this key. 96 Owner’s Manual G4 The original sample is assigned to this key. About Samples, Key Banks, Waveforms, and Voices Understanding the Sampling-related terms below will help you better understand the Sampling function itself and how to use it. Keep in mind the hierarchy here as it relates to sampling — the audio source (e.g., your voice) starts as a Sample, becomes part of a Key Bank, which makes up a Waveform, which is used to create a Voice. ● Sample The sound obtained via the Sampling function is referred to as “Sample.” ● Key Bank In order to play the sample from the keyboard, the sample must be assigned to notes on the keyboard. First, assign the sample to a specified key when sampling (step #4 on page 94), then expand the key range within which the sample is sounded (step #10 on page 96). The Key Range and the Velocity Range within which the sample is sounded is referred to as a “Key Bank.” In step #10 above, you saw how to set the Key Range. From the same display, you can also set a Velocity Range. Using these two parameters, you can create a Key Bank. ● Waveform The group of Key Banks to which sample data is assigned is referred to as a “Waveform.” The Waveform is assigned to each Element of a Normal Voice. In step #11 above, you saw how to add Key Banks one by one to create a Waveform. ● Voice After completing a Waveform, you can create an Element by applying various sound-making parameters such as Pitch, Filter, Amplitude and other parameters such as Effect and EQ to it. Finally, combine four Elements (each containing its own Waveform) to create a Normal Voice. n You can select and hear the Waveforms created via the Sampling function as well as all the preset Waveforms in the WAVE display ([VOICE] → [EDIT] → Element selection → [F1] OSC → [SF1] WAVE). Creating a Voice by using the Sampling function Saving a Sample [FILE] → [F2] SAVE Assign the Samples obtained via the Sampling function to specific Key Ranges to create a Waveform. Because the Waveform data including Samples which resides temporarily in DIMM (page 187) is lost when the power is turned off, you should always save the Waveform data or Samples to a SmartMedia/USB storage device before turning off the power. The following four methods can be used to save a Sample that is assigned to a Waveform. Execute the Save operation in the File mode. CAUTION While the data is being saved, make sure to follow these precautions: • Never remove or eject the media from the device (SmartMedia or USB storage). • Never unplug or disconnect any of the devices. • Never turn off the power of the MOTIF ES or the relevant devices. When you save a User Voice that contains Samples, all the related data — the Waveform assigned to the Voice, the Samples assigned to the Waveform, as well as the User Voice itself — is automatically saved together. Insert a SmartMedia into the CARD slot or connecting the USB storage device to this synthesizer, and follow the instructions below. 1 2 3 4 5 Press the [FILE] button to enter the File mode, then execute the basic settings. Refer to “Basic settings for using SmartMedia or a USB storage device” on page 30. 2 3 4 Set the TYPE parameter to “Wav” in the [F2] SAVE display. Input a file name. Move the cursor to the file name input location, then input a file name. For detailed instructions on naming, refer to page 53 in the Basic Operation section. Quick Guide — Advanced Course ● Saving as a User Voice Press the [ENTER] button, then select a Sample to be saved. When a Normal Voice is selected in step #1: Specify the Element and Key Bank to call up the Sample assigned to the selected Voice. You can hear the Sample by pressing the [SF1] AUDITION button. Go through the Samples in this way to find the desired Sample. Press the [F2] SAVE button to call up the Save display. Set the TYPE parameter to “All” or “AllVoice.” When “All” is selected, execute the Save operation to save all the created data including the User Voices as a single file. When “AllVoice” is selected, execute the Save operation to save all User Voices, including Waveforms assigned to Normal Voice Elements or Drum Voice Keys, as a single file. This is available only when the cursor is located at the KeyBank. Each press of the [SF2] button calls up a different Key Bank assigned to a specific velocity range (for the same key). Input a file name. Move the cursor to the file name input location, then input a file name. For detailed instructions on naming, refer to page 53 in the Basic Operation section. You can hear the selected sample by pressing the [SF1] button. (Audition function) When a Drum Voice is selected in step #1: Specify the Note and Key Bank to call up the Sample assigned to the selected Drum Voice. You can hear the Sample by pressing the [SF1] AUDITION button. Go through the Samples in this way to find the desired Sample. Press the [ENTER] button to execute the Save operation. If you are about to overwrite an existing file, the display prompts you for confirmation. Press the [INC/YES] button to execute the Save operation to overwrite the existing file, or press the [DEC/NO] button to cancel it. ● Saving as a Waveform When you save a Waveform that makes up a Voice, all the Samples that are assigned to the Waveform are automatically saved together. The procedure for saving is the same as described in “Saving a User Voice” above, with the exception that Type is set to “AllWaveform” in step #3. ● Saving as a WAV file You can select a specific Sample from a Waveform and save it as a WAV file (Windows audio format). Insert a SmartMedia into the CARD slot or connecting the USB storage device to this synthesizer, and follow the instructions below. 1 Select a Voice containing the Sample to be saved in the Voice Play mode, then press the [FILE] button to enter the File mode, and execute the basic settings. Refer to “Basic settings for using SmartMedia or a USB storage device” on page 30. You can hear the selected sample by pressing the [SF1] button. (Audition function) 5 Press the [ENTER] button to execute the Save operation. If you are about to overwrite an existing file, the display prompts you for confirmation. Press the [INC/YES] button to execute the Save operation and overwrite the existing file, or press the [DEC/NO] button to cancel it. ● Saving as a AIFF file You can select a specific Sample from a Waveform and save it as a AIFF file (Macintosh audio format). The procedure for saving is the same as described in “Saving as a WAV file” above with the exception that Type is set to “AIFF” in step #2. Owner’s Manual 97 Creating a Voice by using the Sampling function Sampling the sound of an audio device to create a Drum Voice In the previous section on page 94, you learned how to record a Sample using a microphone. Here, you’ll learn how to record Samples from an audio device, such as a CD player or MD player, and use the Samples to create a Drum Voice. In order to use the Sampling function, DIMM modules must be installed to the instrument. For details on installing DIMMs, see page 289. Depending on the size of the audio (sample) data obtained via the Sampling function, you may not be able to save all of the desired data to a SmartMedia card (maximum capacity: 128MB). For this reason, we recommend using a large-capacity USB storage device for your Sampling data. 1 Connect an audio device (CD player, etc.) to the instrument. Follow steps #1 - 8 on page 73. 5 Press the [F6] REC button to call up the Sampling Record display (Sampling Standby status), then set the parameters as required. F6 Quick Guide — Advanced Course 2 Press the [INTEGRATED SAMPLING] button in the Voice mode or Performance mode to enter the Sampling mode. 3 Press the [F2] SOURCE button to call up the display for setting the Sampling Source, then set the parameters as shown below. Type: Source: Next: Mono/Stereo: Frequency: sample A/D on stereo 44.1k When creating a Drum Voice consisting of many separate Samples, you’ll want to quickly be able to record a Sample, assign it to a key, then move on to the next one. To do this smoothly and easily, set the Next parameter to “on.” You can also change the Keybank (set in step #4) in this display. Indicates Sampling Standby status. Turn the Confirm function on or off Trigger Level ● Setting the Confirm function When the [F2] CONFM (Confirm function) is turned on ( is indicated), you can easily listen back to your just-recorded sample and conveniently re-record it if you’re not satisfied with the results. Here, set the [F2] CONFM button on. ● Setting the Trigger mode For details about each parameter, see page 251. 4 98 Press the [F1] DEST button to call up the display for setting the Sampling Destination, then set the parameters as described below. Part This is available when entering the Sampling mode from the Performance mode. This parameter determines the Performance Part to which the Voice (below) created by sampling is assigned. Voice Set the Bank to “UDR” (User Drum Voice Bank), then select a User Drum Voice Number. After the Sampling is completed, you can hear the created Voice by selecting the Voice number set here. Key Here, set this parameter to “C3.” After the Sampling is completed, you can hear the sampled sound by pressing the note set here. n If the Voice parameter above is set to “off,” you won’t be able to play the sampled sound as a Voice after completing this operation. However, you can call up the sampled sound by selecting a Waveform. For details on how to select a Waveform, see page 174. Owner’s Manual The Trigger mode lets you determine how the Sampling actually starts. For example, you can start the Sampling simply by pressing the button or when the Song/Pattern playback reaches a specified point. Here, set the TrggrMode (Trigger mode) to “level” which lets you start sampling as soon as the input signal from the audio device exceeds the specified Trigger Level. ● Setting the Trigger Level When the Trigger mode is set to “level,” you’ll also need to set the Trigger Level. This determines when sampling actually starts, depending on the level of the input signal of the audio device. As the sound plays, notice the movement of the level meter (bar), and when the bar crosses the Trigger Level arrow. If necessary, select the Trigger Level value and use the data dial to change it, moving the arrow as low or as high as needed. Trigger Level Indicates Sampling Standby status. Trigger Level The section of the bar exceeding the Trigger Level becomes black. Creating a Voice by using the Sampling function 6 Press the [F6] REC button again to enable Sampling Trigger Waiting. By repeating steps #5 - 8 above, you can create a Drum Voice in which each key has a different sound (as shown below). Doing this puts sample recording on standby, waiting for an input signal that exceeds the Trigger level. F6 Sound Effect A Sound Effect C Sound Effect Y Sound Effect B 10 Save your newly created User Voice to a SmartMedia/USB storage device. Refer to “Saving a Sample” on page 97. 7 Start the external audio device. The sampling actually starts as soon as the an input signal exceeding the specified trigger level is received. CAUTION The recorded (edited) sample data resides temporarily in DIMM (page 187). Because data contained in DIMM is lost when the power is turned off, you should always save any data residing in DIMM to a SmartMedia /USB storage device before turning off the power. Quick Guide — Advanced Course Indicates that sample recording is waiting for a signal of an appropriate level. Example Sampling sources The examples below show you some of the different audio sources you can use as raw material for your Samples and Sample Voices. ● Vocals with effects With a PLG100-VH Plug-in Board installed, you can apply a vocal harmony effect to your voice, and sample the entire processed sound. After setting the PLG100-VH related parameters as required referring to “Using an Effect Plug-in Board” on page 78, execute the Sampling operation. 8 Press the [F6] STOP button to stop sampling, then stop the external audio device. ● The sound of an mLAN compatible instrument After setting up referring to page 34, execute the Sampling operation. You should set the [INTEGRATED SAMPLING] → [F2] SOURCE → Source parameter to “mLAN1 - 4.” ● Electric guitar or bass Instruments such as guitar and bass can also be sampled, using the A/D INPUT jack. After setting up referring to page 33, execute the Sampling operation. You should set the [INTEGRATED SAMPLING] → [F2] SOURCE → Source parameter to “A/D.” Press the [F3] AUDITION button to hear the sampled sound. If you’re not satisfied with the results and you wish to try again, press the [F4] CANCEL button to return to the Sampling Standby display and try sampling from step #5 again. If you are satisfied with the results, press the [F5] OK button to store the sampled sound as a “sample” and return to the Sampling Standby display. Keep in mind that if the Confirm function is turned off in step #5 above, the display shown above will not appear when stopping sampling. Instead, stopping sampling returns directly to the Sampling Standby display. 9 Repeat steps #5 - 8 above to assign additional Samples to the notes as desired to create your Drum Voice. In step #7, select a different sound (on a CD, for example) for each Sample. Though the Key is automatically set to the note name the next one higher than that just assigned, you can change it in step #5. ● Digital audio With an optional AIEB2 interface installed to the instrument, you can connect to the digital out jack on your DAT deck or CD/MD player and directly record digital audio, for the highest possible sound quality. For details on installing the AIEB2, refer to page 285; for details on connecting digital audio devices to the instrument, refer to page 34. When executing AIEB2, you should set the [INTEGRATED SAMPLING] → [F2] SOURCE → Source parameter to “AIEB2.” ● Resampling the MOTIF ES You can also resample anything you play on the MOTIF ES itself — riffs, rhythms, melodies, thick multi-layered chord pads, etc. You should set the [INTEGRATED SAMPLING] → [F2] SOURCE → Source parameter to “resample.” ● WAV or AIFF audio files Audio data created and edited on a computer can also be used for Samples. (For details, see the next page.) Owner’s Manual 99 Creating a Voice by using the Sampling function TIP Loading WAV or AIFF audio files to create a Waveform/Voice Any audio data created and edited on a computer and saved in the WAV or AIFF format can also be used as material for Samples on the MOTIF ES. Set up the media containing the desired WAV/AIFF audio files (e.g., insert a SmartMedia card to the CARD slot or connect a USB storage device), then follow the instructions below. In order to use the Sampling function, DIMM modules must be installed to the instrument. For details on installing DIMMs, see page 289. Depending on the size of the audio (sample) data obtained via the Sampling function, you may not be able to save all of the desired data to a SmartMedia card (maximum capacity: 128MB). For this reason, we recommend using a large-capacity USB storage device for your Sampling data. n 1 Quick Guide — Advanced Course 2 3 The instructions here apply when you enter the File mode from the Voice mode. When entering the File mode from the Performance mode, the instructions are the same with the exception that you should set the destination Performance number and Part in step #4. In the Voice mode, press the [FILE] button to enter the File mode, then execute the basic settings. Refer to “Basic settings for using SmartMedia or a USB storage device” on page 30. When assigning a WAV file/AIFF file to a Drum Voice: Press the [F3] LOAD button to call up the Load display. Select the file type to be loaded. Set Type to “Waveform.” This setting lets you select and load a specific Waveform from a file (extension: W7W) saved as “AllWaveform” or load a WAV file/ AIFF file as a Waveform. Voice When this is set to “on,” you can load and assign a WAV file/AIFF file to the destination Voice set below UDR:001 (A01) This is available when the Voice (above) is set to “on.” Select “UDR” as the destination Drum Voice Bank and select a destination Voice number. Note Determines the destination key of the Drum Voice set above. n When assigning a WAV file/AIFF file to a Drum Voice, a Sample from the WAV file/AIFF file is assigned to the empty Waveform automatically. CAUTION 4 Select the file ( ) to be loaded and specify the destination. When moving the cursor to a WAV file (extension: WAV) or AIFF file (extension: AIF), the destination parameter automatically appears in the display. When assigning a WAV file/AIFF file to a Normal Voice: Loading data to this synthesizer automatically erases and replaces any existing data in the User memory. Make sure to save any important data to a SmartMedia/USB storage device before performing any Load operations. 5 Press the [ENTER] button to execute the Load operation. After the data has been loaded, a “Completed” message appears and operation returns to the original display. CAUTION 100 Voice When this is set to “on,” you can load and assign a WAV file/AIFF file to the destination Voice set below. USR1:001 (A01) This is available when the Voice (above) is set to “on.” Select “USR1” or “USR2” as the destination Normal Voice Bank and select a destination Voice number. Waveform Determines the destination Waveform number. KeyBank Determines the destination Key Bank of the Waveform set above. Owner’s Manual While the data is being saved, make sure to follow these precautions: • Never remove or eject the media from the device (SmartMedia or USB storage). • Never unplug or disconnect any of the devices. • Never turn off the power of the MOTIF ES or the relevant devices. Creating a Voice by using the Sampling function When creating a Drum Voice in steps #4 - 5 By repeating steps #5 - 8 above, you can create a Drum Voice in which each key has a different sound (as shown below). After creating the Normal or Drum Voice, go on to step #7 below. Depending on whether you’re creating a Normal Voice or a Drum Voice, follow the appropriate instructions below. When creating a Normal Voice in steps #4 - 5 After entering the Sampling Edit mode ([INTEGRATED SAMPLING] → [EDIT]), press the [F1] KEYBANK button to call up the Key Bank display. From this display, select a Waveform and Key Bank. To specify the Key Bank, simultaneously hold down the [INFORMATION] button and press the desired note on the keyboard. To select Waveforms assigned to different velocities, hold down the [INFORMATION] button and press the [SF2] SELECT button. Sound Effect A Sound Effect C Sound Effect Y Sound Effect B 7 Play the Voice created by the Load operation. Press the [VOICE] button to enter the Voice Play mode, then select the Voice number set in step #4. Quick Guide — Advanced Course 6 After selecting a Waveform and Key Bank above, press the [F4] RANGE button. Once you’ve loaded the sample in step #5, it can only be sounded by playing the note specified in step #4. From this display however, you can expand the note range over which the loaded sample will sound. Determine the Key Range. Use the data dial, [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons or press the note on the keyboard while holding the [INFORMATION] button. Play the keyboard within the Key Range set above. You can hear the loaded sample following the pitches of the notes you play. Owner’s Manual 101 Creating a Song on the MOTIF ES Creating a Song on the MOTIF ES The MOTIF ES is a full-featured and enormously powerful music production machine, and all of the instrument’s advanced features and functions come together seamlessly in the creation of a Song. Here, you’ll learn how to get the most out of the sequencer-related functions of the MOTIF ES, using primarily the Song and Pattern modes. This section is quite detailed and comprehensive. However, rather than following it step-by-step all the way through and trying to use every feature in a single song, use it instead as a guide or a springboard for further exploration. Recording your keyboard performance Generally, you’ll start recording a Song or Pattern by playing a Voice from the keyboard. Since the instrument is set to multitimbral operation (page 162), the Voice you actually play and record depends on the Voice settings for the Song or Pattern, made in the Mixing settings described below. Selecting a Voice Quick Guide — Advanced Course Selecting a Voice for recording is different than selecting a Voice for playing. Voice settings for the Song/Pattern mode are handled in Song Mixing/Pattern Mixing. 1 Press the [SONG] button/[PATTERN] button to enter the Song mode/Pattern mode, then select a Song number/Pattern number to be created. See page 56 for instructions on how to select a Song or Pattern. 2 Enter the Mixing Edit mode ([MIXING] → [EDIT]), then select a Part (track) and call up the Voice setting display ([F1] VOICE → [SF1] VOICE). For information on how to select a Song track or Pattern track, see page 58. 3 Select a voice referring to the instructions below. ● Move the cursor to “Bank” and select the desired Voice Bank by using the data dial, [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons. PRE1 (Preset1) ~ PRE6 (Preset 6) Preset Banks 1 - 6 of the Normal Voice. These correspond to the [PRE1] - [PRE6] buttons in the Voice mode. USER1 ~ USER2 User Banks 1 - 2 of the User Voice. These correspond to the [USER1] - [USER2] buttons in the Voice mode. GM GM Normal Voice Bank. This corresponds to the [GM] button in the Voice mode. PDR (Preset Drum) Preset Bank of the Drum Voice. This corresponds to pressing the [DRUM KITS] button and the [PRE5] button simultaneously. GMDR (GM Drum) GM Drum Voice Bank. This corresponds to pressing the [DRUM KITS] button and the [GM] button simultaneously. UDR (User Drum) User Bank of the Drum Voice. This corresponds to pressing the [DRUM KITS] button and the [USER1] button simultaneously. SMPL (Sample Voice) Indicates the Bank for the Sample Voices created via the Sampling function (page 173). MIXV (Mixing Voice) This bank is for the Mixing Voices (page 105) dedicated for the Song mode/Pattern mode. SEQUENCER SONG PATTERN FILE DEMO INTEGRATED SAMPLING MIXING UTILITY EDIT JOB STORE COMPARE 1 2 3 4 SCENE STORE SET LOCATE 5 6 7 TRACK SELECT 8 ELEMENT/PERF. PART/ZONE 9 10 NUMBER 11 12 13 14 16 15 MUTE ● Move the cursor to “Number” and select the desired Voice Number by using the data dial, [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] button. Refer to the separate Data List. SOLO Turn the [TRACK SELECT] indicator on and select one of the [1] - [16] buttons. SCENE SF2 SF1 F1 F2 SF3 F3 SF4 F4 Owner’s Manual n With the exception of Sample Voices and Mixing Voices, you can also use the Category Search (page 62) in this display. n The Voice for each Part of the current Song or Pattern can be selected also in the [SONG] → Song selection → [MIXING] → [F2] VOICE display or the [PATTERN] → Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [F2] VOICE display. You can also use the Category Search (page 62) in this display. n For information on how to select a voice of a Plug-in Board in the Song mode/Pattern mode, see page 121. 4 Play the keyboard to confirm the selected Voice. 5 Repeat steps #2 - 4 to set the Voice settings (Mixing Settings) for each Part (track). F6 Indicates the current Part number. Parts 01-16 are internal tone generator Parts. Parts 17-32 are tone generator Parts of the PLG100-XG Multi Part Plug-in Board. Parts PLG01-03 are tone generator parts of the Single Part Plug-in Board. Keep in mind that the example instructions here use the internal tone generator. 102 With the [TRACK SELECT] lamp turned off, Normal Voices can be selected in the way described on page 60. INFORMATION SF5 F5 n Press the [F6] button to switch between the display for Parts 01-16, 17-32, and PLG1-3. Creating a Song on the MOTIF ES If desired, make a backup of the Voice (Mixing) settings made above. ● First, store the Voice settings as Song Mixing/Pattern Mixing. Press the [STORE] button to enter the Song Mixing Store mode/Pattern Mixing Store mode, then press the [ENTER] button to execute the Store operation (page 131). 3 Select a Template number by using the data dial, or the [INC/ YES]/[DEC/NO] buttons. For details, refer to the Mixing Template list in the separate Data List booklet. ● Next, save the stored Song Mixing as a file for all Songs created on the instrument before turning the power off. Press the [FILE] button to enter the File mode, then execute the Save operation by following the instructions described on page 132. Selecting a Mixing Template Move the cursor to the Template number location, then select a Mixing Template. Template number 4 Template name Press the [SF4] button to actually call up the selected Mixing Template for the current Song. Here is an exceptionally convenient Song/Pattern creation tool. The MOTIF ES has 32 different Mixing Templates for use with a Song or Pattern, each pre-programmed for a variety of music styles and applications. Simply dial up the template that comes closest to the type of Song or Pattern you wish to create, tweak the settings as desired, then start recording. It’s a quick, smooth and inspiring way to get your ideas down. 1 Press the [SONG]/[PATTERN] button to enter the Song mode/Pattern mode, then select a Song/ Pattern number to be created. 2 Call up the Mixing Template selection display in the Song Mixing Job mode ([MIXING] → [JOB] → [F6] TEMPLATE). Quick Guide — Advanced Course 6 SF4 EXIT The Edit indicator appears. SEQUENCER SONG PATTERN FILE INTEGRATED SAMPLING MIXING UTILITY DEMO 5 EDIT JOB COMPARE STORE SCENE STORE SET LOCATE F6 Play the keyboard to check the Mixing settings — especially the Voices. You can confirm the Voice settings for the Parts by selecting tracks one by one and playing the keyboard with each. If you wish to check the detailed settings, call up and view each display in the Song Mixing mode and Song Mixing Edit mode. 6 Change the Mixing settings as desired. Tweak and change the Mixing parameters — especially the Voices — to fit the song you intend to create. For details about the Mixing Edit mode, see page 127. Owner’s Manual 103 Creating a Song on the MOTIF ES 7 If desired, make a backup of the Mixing settings made above. ● First, store the Voice settings as Song Mixing/Pattern Mixing. Press the [STORE] button to enter the Song Mixing Store mode/ Pattern Mixing Store mode, then press the [ENTER] button to execute the Store operation (page 131). ● Next, save the stored Song Mixing as a file for all Songs created on the instrument before turning the power off. Press the [FILE] button to enter the File mode, then execute the Save operation by following the instructions described on page 132. The Mixing settings you make can be stored as a Template — letting you create your own custom Mixing/Voice configurations for future use in recording Songs. Press the [SF5] PUT button in step #4 above to store the settings to the destination (current) Template number. The following illustration shows the memory structure for Mixing. Song 01 - 64 Song 64 GET Quick Guide — Advanced Course Mixing Template 01 - 32 SAVE Song 01 Mixing* PUT Mixing Template 32 DRAM Mixing Template 01 Pattern 01 - 64 GET Flash ROM PUT GET....Loads the Mixing template to the current Song/Pattern. PUT....Stores the Mixing settings for each Song/Pattern to the Template. * Mixing parameters can be edited and stored as Song/Pattern data in the Song Mixing mode and Pattern Mixing mode. SAVE SmartMedia or USB storage device Pattern 64 Pattern 01 Save as Song data/Pattern data Mixing* DRAM CAUTION Whereas Mixing Template data resides in internal Flash ROM, Song data and Pattern data — including the Mixing settings — resides in DRAM. Because data contained in DRAM is lost when the power is turned off, you should always save any data residing in DRAM to a SmartMedia/USB storage device in the File mode before turning off the power. CAUTION The currently edited Mixing program will be lost when selecting a different Song/Pattern or going to a different mode without saving (putting) it to a template or storing it to the current Song/Pattern. In addition, simply playing back the Song/Pattern or receiving any MIDI messages from an external MIDI instrument may change the current Mixing program. Make sure to put or store the Mixing program before executing these operations. Using Controllers Just as in the Voice/Performance mode, the controllers of the instrument — Pitch Bend wheel, Modulation wheel, Ribbon Controller, Knobs, and Control Sliders — can also be used in the Song/Pattern mode. n The Pitch Bend Range in the Song mode/Pattern mode can be set in the Mixing Edit made for each Song/Pattern. This can be changed with the PB Upper/Lower parameters ([SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song or Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → Part selection → [F1] VOICE → [SF5] OTHER → PB Upper/PB Lower). n The functions assigned to the Pitch Bend Wheel, Modulation Wheel, Ribbon Controller, and Knobs (ASSIGN 1 and 2) in the Song mode/ Pattern mode depends on the setting (made in the Voice mode) of the Voice assigned to each Mixing Part . n The functions assigned to the Knobs (ASSIGN A and B) can be set in the [UTILITY] → [F4] CTL ASN → [SF2] ASSIGN display. n You can set the Ribbon Controller to control different functions on connected external MIDI devices from the functions assigned in Song Mixing/Pattern Mixing for the instrument itself. You can also determine whether the Ribbon Controller value returns to the center, or stays at the point where you released your finger. Both of these setting can be made in the Song/Pattern Mixing Edit mode ([SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song or Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F4] CTL ASN). n 104 For information on using the Control Sliders in the Song mode/Pattern mode, see page 130. Owner’s Manual Edit Indicator Tweaking the knobs in the Song or Pattern mode directly changes the Song/Pattern Mixing parameters. When any of the Song Mixing/Pattern Mixing parameters are changed, the [E] (Edit) Indicator appears in the top left of the display. This indicates that the current Song Mixing/Pattern Mixing has been modified but not yet stored. If you’re satisfied with the tweaks you made and the resulting sound, you can store the changes as a Song Mixing/Pattern Mixing in the Song Mixing/Pattern Mixing Store mode (page 131). n The [E] (Edit) indicator also appears in the following situations — even if the Mixing parameters are not edited. • Playing back song data (either on this instrument or from a connected MIDI sequencer) that changes the settings, such as the Voices. • Calling up the Mixing template. CAUTION If you select another Song/Pattern during editing, the [E] (Edit) indicator will disappear and all your edits will be lost. It is a good idea to store the edited Song Mixing/Pattern Mixing data in the Song Mixing/Pattern Mixing Store mode (page 131). Even if you lose the Song Mixing/Pattern Mixing edited data, you can restore it by using the Edit Recall function (page 129). Creating a Song on the MOTIF ES Using the Arpeggio Function Just as in the Voice/Performance mode, you can use Arpeggio playback in the Song/Pattern mode. 1 2 Press the [MIXING] button (the lamp lights) to enter the Song Mixing mode/Pattern Mixing mode, then select the Part containing the desired Voice. Set the ArpSwitch parameter for the current part to “on” ([SONG] or [PATTERN] → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → Part selection → [F1] VOICE → [SF2] MODE). MIXING This parameter can be set to “on” simultaneously for more than one Part, but only if the Parts have the same MIDI Receive Channel settings. 2 Select an Arpeggio type ([SONG] or [PATTERN] → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F3] ARP → [SF1] TYPE). 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TRACK SELECT 12 13 14 15 16 MUTE 3 n n 10 11 With the [ARPEGGIO ON/OFF] lamp turned on, press any note on the keyboard to trigger Arpeggio playback. Just as in the Voice mode and Performance mode, the Song mode and Pattern mode let you register the desired Arpeggio type to the [SF1] - [SF5] buttons. Quick Guide — Advanced Course ELEMENT/PERF. PART/ZONE 9 SOLO 3 Press the [F5] VCE ED (Voice Edit) button to enter the Mixing Voice Edit mode. Arpeggio related parameters (such as Type, etc.) are included in Song/Pattern Mixing data. Using the Audio Input sound Just as in the Performance mode, the audio input can be used as an audio Part in the Mixing settings in the Song mode/Pattern mode. The related parameters can be set with the following operation: [SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song/ Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F5] AUDIO IN. Creating Mixing Voices exclusively for Songs/Patterns If you assign User Voices to your Song or Pattern and then edit them (in the Voice Edit mode), the Voices may sound different than expected. This convenient feature lets you create dedicated Mixing Voices for your songs and Patterns — ensuring that the Voices will play exactly as they were edited for the Song/Pattern. n 1 F5 n You can enter the Mixing Voice Edit mode only when a Normal Voice is assigned to the current Part. 4 Call up the Common Edit or Element Edit display as required. These displays are the same as in the Voice mode. See page 79. Only Normal Voices can be created/edited as Mixing Voices. Press the [SONG] button/[PATTERN] button to enter the Song mode/Pattern mode, then select the desired Song/Pattern for which the Mixing settings will be edited. See page 56 for instructions on how to select a Song or Pattern. 5 Select the desired menu for editing by pressing the [F1] - [F6] and [SF1] - [SF5] buttons, then edit the parameters. The actual parameters and procedures for editing them are the same as in the Voice Edit mode. See page 80. 6 Repeat steps #4 and 5 as desired. Owner’s Manual 105 Creating a Song on the MOTIF ES 7 Name the edited Mixing Voice. Input a name in the [COMMON] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF1] NAME display. For detailed instructions on naming, refer to page 53 in the Basic Operation section. 8 Store the edited Song Mixing/Pattern Mixing to internal User memory. 9 Press the [EXIT] button several times to return to the Song Mixing mode/Pattern Mixing mode, press the [STORE] button to enter the Song Mixing Store mode/Pattern Mixing Store mode, then press the [ENTER] button to execute the Store operation (page 131). Store the edited Mixing Voice to internal User memory. 1 Press the [STORE] button to enter the Mixing Voice Store mode. 2 Set the destination Voice Bank to “MIXV” and select the destination Voice number. Quick Guide — Advanced Course Destination Voice Number 10 Save the Song data/Pattern data to a SmartMedia/USB storage device in the File mode (page 132) before turning off the power. CAUTION Mixing Voices are assigned to Parts of the Song/Pattern and stored to internal DRAM. Because data contained in DRAM is lost when the power is turned off, you should always save any data residing in DRAM to a SmartMedia/USB storage device in the File mode before turning off the power. Destination Voice Bank 3 Press the [ENTER] button to execute the Store operation. n You can store the Voice edited in the Mixing Voice Edit mode as a User Normal Voice by setting the Voice Bank to “USER1” or “USER2.” Creating a Pattern When you create a Song, one of the most essential aspects is the rhythm. It is almost always the first thing you start with, and provides a foundation for the rest of the music. The Pattern mode gives you the tools to create rhythm patterns for the accompaniment of the Song. Here, in brief, are the basic steps in using Patterns to create a Song: 1) In the Pattern mode, create and chain together the phrases that will be used for the accompaniment and the Song. 2) Convert the Pattern data to a Song. 3) In the Song mode, record a melody on a separate track of the Song. Here, we’ll explain in detail the first of these steps. CAUTION The created pattern (phrase) data resides temporarily in DRAM (page 187). Because data contained in DRAM is lost when the power is turned off, you should always store any data residing in DRAM to a SmartMedia/USB storage device before turning off the power. Creating a Phrase by recording a rhythm pattern to a track In the following sections you’ll learn various different methods of creating Pattern data (also called “Phrases” — the raw material for a Pattern) to a single track. The following five methods are explained. ● ● ● ● ● Sampling a rhythm loop (audio data) to a Pattern track ................................................................................................ Page 107 Loading a WAV file/AIFF file to a Pattern track .............................................................................................................. Page 109 Recording your keyboard performance to a Pattern track ............................................................................................ Page 110 Recording a rhythm pattern created by Arpeggio playback to a Pattern track............................................................. Page 112 Assigning a pre-programmed Phrase to a Pattern track .............................................................................................. Page 113 The first two methods involve using both audio data (created via Sampling, or imported from another device) and MIDI data. Keep in mind that to use audio data, DIMM modules must be installed (page 289). The other three use only MIDI data. 106 Owner’s Manual Creating a Song on the MOTIF ES ■ Sampling a rhythm loop (audio data) to a Pattern track With this method, you can record drum loops and rhythm patterns from CDs to the MOTIF ES by using the Sampling function, then slice the sample into separate components and assign the slices to different keys. This powerful feature lets you match the sampled rhythm to virtually any tempo without stretching or compressing the audio, since each “hit” becomes a separate MIDI note. Sample Voice Sample Sampling Slice MIDI sequence data CANCEL 1 Connect an audio device (CD player, etc.) to the instrument. Follow steps #1 - 8 on page 73, substituting the instructions below for steps #4 and 8. In step #4, press the [PATTERN] button to enter the Pattern mode, then select a pattern number and section to be created. In step #8, set the related parameters in the [PATTERN] → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F5] AUDIO display. 2 Press the [INTEGRATED SAMPLING] button in the Pattern Play mode to enter the Sampling mode. 5 Press the [F6] REC button to call up the Sampling Record display (Sampling Standby status), then set the TrggrMode to “level” and set an appropriate Trigger Level value. Refer to step #5 on page 98. 6 Press the [F6] REC button again to enable Sampling Trigger Waiting. Doing this puts sample recording on standby, waiting for an input signal that exceeds the Trigger level. F6 3 Press the [F2] SOURCE button to call up the display for setting the Sampling Source, then set the parameters as shown below. Type: Source: Next: Mono/Stereo: Frequency: Quick Guide — Advanced Course In order to use the Sampling function, DIMM modules must be installed to the instrument. For details on installing DIMMs, see page 289. Indicates that sample recording is waiting for a signal of an appropriate level. slice+seq A/D off stereo 44.1k 7 Start the audio device (CD player, etc.). The sampling actually starts as soon as an input signal exceeding the specified trigger level is received. For details about each parameter, see page 253. 4 Press the [F1] DEST button to call up the display for setting the Sampling Destination, then set the parameters as described below. 8 Track This parameter determines the Pattern track to which the Sample Voice is assigned. Press the [F6] STOP button to stop sampling. Press the [F6] STOP button at the point you want sample recording to stop, and the Slice display is automatically called up. After stopping recording, stop playback of the connected audio device. Owner’s Manual 107 Creating a Song on the MOTIF ES 9 Edit the sample data in the [F1] TRIM display. 4 Press the [F2] SLICE button to call up the Slice display. A 10 B C D E F Quick Guide — Advanced Course A These parameters determine the portion of the sample that will be used. B Press the [SF1] AUDITION button to sound the recorded sample according to the settings in this display. C When the menu indication here is “LP=ST,” the Start (Start Point) and the Loop (Loop Start Point) will share the same address, meaning that both of them will be changed simultaneously, even if just one of them is changed. Pressing the [SF2] button in this condition changes the menu from “LP=ST” to “LP≠ST.” When the menu indication here is “LP≠ST,” the Start (Start Point) and the Loop (Loop Start Point) can be changed independently. When pressing the [SF2] button in this condition, the address value of the Start will be copied to the one of the Loop, with the result that both of them share the same address value. The menu indication also changes from “LP≠ST” to “LP=ST.” D See below. E Press the [SF4] EXTRACT button to delete all unnecessary sample data (located ahead of the Start point and located after the End point). F Press the [F5] and [F6] buttons to zoom in and out of the wave display. 1 Press the [SF1] AUDITION button to hear the recorded sample. 2 Set the start and end points to determine the actual portion of the sample to be used. The “Start” parameter determines the actual start of the sample (letting you cut unwanted sound at the beginning), while the “End” parameter determines the end of the sample (letting you cut unwanted sound at the end). Pressing [SF3] SET END calls up the following convenient display for making rhythmically accurate End point edits. Execute the Slice operation in the [F2] SLICE display. 1 Set the parameters shown below. Measure Determines the number of measures the sample is recognized as having. Meter Determines the rhythmic meter the sample is recognized as having. Set other parameters as necessary, referring to page 254. 2 Press the [ENTER] button (the display prompts you for confirmation), then press the [INC/YES] button to execute the Slice. 3 Confirm the result of the operation. Play the assigned keys in order (C3, C#3, D3, etc.) to hear the individual slices of the sample. To hear how the resulting pattern would sound when played by MIDI sequence data, press the [SF1] AUDITION button. 4 If you’re satisfied with the results of the Slice operation, press the [F6] OK button. If you’re not satisfied with the results and want to continue editing, press the [F5] CANCEL button and attempt the operation again from step #10-1 above. Slice display (before executing Slice) Slice display (after executing the Slice) Many commercially available sample/loop CDs include information on the tempo and meter of specific loops. Use that information to make the settings here and ensure proper playback. After setting the parameters (above right), press the [ENTER] button to automatically determine the proper End point. Listen back to the edited sample by pressing the [SF1] AUDITION button. If you’re satisfied with the results, press the [F6] OK button. If you’re not and you want to continue editing, press [F5] CANCEL. 3 Once you’ve trimmed the sample above, you may want to [F5] CANCEL button 11 Return to the Pattern Play mode by pressing the [PATTERN] button or [EXIT] button. 12 F] (Play) button to play the created Press the [F Pattern. 13 Save the created Pattern data to a SmartMedia/ USB storage device (page 132) before turning the power off. delete the unneeded portions of the sound (before and after the Start/End points), to free up memory space. Press the [SF4] EXTRACT button to delete this excess data. Start Loop End (Start Point) (Loop Point) (End Point) [SF4] EXTRACT Start Loop End (Start Point) (Loop Point) (End Point) 108 Owner’s Manual [ENTER] button Creating a Song on the MOTIF ES ■ Loading a WAV file/AIFF file to a Pattern track Audio data you’ve created and stored in the common WAV or AIFF computer audio formats can be loaded to the instrument and used with the Slice function to divide the sample and assign the slices to different MIDI notes — letting you match the sampled rhythm to virtually any tempo. Set up the media containing the desired WAV/AIFF audio files (e.g., insert a SmartMedia card to the CARD slot or connect a USB storage device), then follow the instructions below. Sample Voice Sample Load Slice MIDI sequence data CANCEL 1 In the Pattern mode, select a Pattern and Section to be created, press the [FILE] button to enter the File mode, then execute the basic settings. Refer to “Basic settings for using SmartMedia or a USB storage device” on page 30. 2 Press the [F3] LOAD button to call up the Load display. 3 Select a file type to be loaded. Set Type to “Waveform.” This setting lets you select and load a specific Waveform from a file (extension: W7W) saved as “AllWaveform” or load a WAV file/AIFF file as a Waveform. Select the file ( destination. 4 Quick Guide — Advanced Course In order to use the Sampling function, DIMM modules must be installed to the instrument. For details on installing DIMMs, see page 289. Depending on the size of the audio (sample) data obtained via the Sampling function, you may not be able to save all of the desired data to a SmartMedia card (maximum capacity: 128MB). For this reason, we recommend using a large-capacity USB storage device for your Sampling data. ) to be loaded and specify the When moving the cursor to a WAV file (extension: WAV) or AIFF file (extension: AIF), the destination parameter automatically appears in the display. Track Determines the destination Track number of the current pattern. KeyBank Determines the key to which the loaded file is to be assigned. Immediately after loading, you can hear the loaded file sound by pressing the key set here. CAUTION Loading data to this synthesizer automatically erases and replaces any existing data in the User memory. Make sure to save any important data to a SmartMedia/USB storage device before performing any Load operations. 5 Press the [ENTER] button to execute the Load operation. After the data has been loaded, a “Completed” message appears and operation returns to the original display. CAUTION While the data is being saved, make sure to follow these precautions: • Never remove or eject the media from the device (SmartMedia or USB storage). • Never unplug or disconnect any of the devices. • Never turn off the power of the MOTIF ES or the relevant devices. 6 Press the key set in step #4 for Key Bank to confirm the loaded file sound. 7 Press the [INTEGRATED SAMPLING] button, then the [JOB] button to enter the Sampling Job mode. Owner’s Manual 109 Creating a Song on the MOTIF ES 8 Call up the Slice Job display. 10 Return to the Pattern Play mode by pressing the [PATTERN] button or [EXIT] button. 11 Press the [F] (Play) button to play the created Pattern. 12 Save the created Pattern data to a SmartMedia/ USB storage device (page 132). Press the [F1] KEYBANK button, move the cursor to “12: Slice,” then press the [ENTER] button. 9 Execute the Slice Job. 1 Set the parameters shown below. Measure Determines the number of measures the sample is recognized as having. Meter Determines the rhythmic meter the sample is recognized as having. LowestKey Determines the lowest key (first MIDI note) from which the sample slices will be assigned in order. Quick Guide — Advanced Course Set other parameters as necessary, referring to page 258. ■ Recording your keyboard performance to a Pattern track 1 In the Pattern Play mode, select a Pattern and Section to be created. 2 Set the Mixing parameters (including the Voice settings) by following the instructions on pages 127 - 128. 2 Press the [ENTER] button (the display prompts you for confirmation), then press the [INC/YES] button to execute Slice. 3 Confirm the result of the operation. Play the assigned keys in order (from the one set in step #9-1 above) to hear the individual slices of the sample. To hear how the resulting pattern would sound when played by MIDI sequence data, press the [SF1] AUDITION button. 4 If you’re satisfied with the results of the Slice operation, press the [F6] OK button. If you’re not satisfied with the results and want to continue editing, press the [F5] CANCEL button and attempt the operation again from step #9-1 above. You can make changes to the Voice settings after entering the Record mode (in step #4 below). However, if you intend to make detailed settings to the Mixing parameters, you should do so before enabling recording. 3 Set the meter (time signature), tempo, and length of the pattern. Slice display (before executing Slice) Meter (time signature) Indicates the Waveform and Key Bank containing the sample for which the Job is applied. In this case, you won’t need to change these settings since they were set when loading the data. [ENTER] button Slice display (after executing Slice) Owner’s Manual Length of pattern Press the [●] (Record) button to enter the Pattern Record mode. SEQ TRANSPORT LOCATE [F5] CANCEL button 110 4 Tempo 1 2 Creating a Song on the MOTIF ES 5 Press the [TRACK SELECT] button (the lamp lights), then select the desired track from the number buttons [1] - [16]. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TRACK SELECT 12 13 14 15 16 MUTE ELEMENT/PERF. PART/ZONE 9 10 11 8 Press the [F] (Play) button to start recording. When a Drum Voice is selected, for example, try recording the rhythm pattern shown below. As shown in the example below, notes that you record will play back from the next repetition (loop), letting you record while hearing previously recorded material. SEQ TRANSPORT SOLO LOCATE 1 2 Recording track Start recording 6 Quick Guide — Advanced Course Actual recording starts after one measure. Set the parameters related to recording in the [F1] SETUP display. Set the Type to “overdub” then set the Loop to “on.” These settings let you repeat the pattern recording in a “loop” and record additional note events without deleting alreadyrecorded data. Set other parameters as necessary. See page 243 for details. Loop 1st round Bass Drum Loop 2nd round 7 Set the parameters related to the Voice you wish to use during recording in the [F2] VOICE display. Snare Drum Bass Drum Call up the display for setting a Voice by pressing the [F2] VOICE button. You won’t need to make settings in this display if you’ve already completed Voice/Mixing settings in step #2 above. Bank Loop 3rd round Hi-Hat Snare Drum Bass Drum Number 9 This lets you turn the click sound (metronome) on/off for recording. (Press the [F5] button.) Press the [■] (Stop) button to stop recording. This operation exits from the Pattern Record mode to the Pattern Play mode. 10 Press the [F] (Play) button to hear your newly recorded phrase. 11 Record different phrases to other tracks by repeating steps #4 - 10. 12 Save the created Pattern data to a SmartMedia/ USB storage device (page 132) before turning the power off. Owner’s Manual 111 Creating a Song on the MOTIF ES ■ Recording a rhythm pattern created by Arpeggio playback to a Pattern track The Arpeggio function is a virtually endless source of creative inspiration, putting a huge variety of rhythm patterns, riffs and phrases at your fingertips — patterns that change depending on the notes you play. Once you come with some patterns you like and want to use in a Song, you can record them to a Pattern track. 1 In the Pattern mode, select a Pattern and Section to be created. 2 Set the Mixing parameters (including the Voice settings) by following the instructions on pages 127 - 128. Quick Guide — Advanced Course You can make changes to the Voice settings after entering the Record mode (in step #5 below). However, if you intend to make detailed settings to the Mixing parameters, you should do so before enabling recording. 3 Play with the Arpeggio features and find a rhythmic pattern/phrase you like. 1 Enter the Mixing Edit mode ([MIXING] → [EDIT]), select the desired Part (track to be recorded), then press the [F1] VOICE button, followed by the [SF2] MODE button. 2 Set the ArpSwitch (Arpeggio Switch) parameter to “on.” 4 Go back to the Pattern Play mode, then set the meter, tempo, and length of the current pattern. 5 Press the [●] (Record) button to enter the Pattern Record mode. 6 Select the desired track for recording ([1] - [16]). For details about how to select a track, see page 58. 7 Set Type to “replace” and set Loop to “off.” Set other parameters as necessary. See page 243 for details. 8 4 Select the desired Arpeggio type in the [SF1] TYPE display, then press the [ARPEGGIO ON/OFF] button (the lamp lights). REMOTE ON / OFF R-AUDIO G-MIDI 9 Set the parameters related to an Arpeggio you wish to use during recording in the [F3] ARP display. Call up the display for setting a Voice by pressing the [F3] ARP button. You won’t need to make settings in this display if you’ve already completed Arpeggio settings in the Mixing Edit mode, in step #3 above. ARPEGGIO ON / OFF Select an Arpeggio Type and Bank. Try out various Arpeggio types, and also try tweaking various parameters in the [SF1] - [SF4] displays. When you find a rhythm or phrase that you like and want to use, go to step #4. 112 Set the parameters related to the Voice you wish to use during recording in the [F2] VOICE display. Call up the display for setting a Voice by pressing the [F2] VOICE button. You won’t need to make settings in this display if you’ve already completed Voice/Mixing settings in step #2 above. 3 Call up the Arpeggio Type selection display ([COMMON] → [F3] ARP → [SF1] TYPE). Set the parameters related to recording in the [F1] SETUP display. Owner’s Manual 10 Set the RecArp parameter to “on” in the [F4] RECARP display. When this is set to “on,” the Arpeggio playback data is recorded to a track as MIDI sequence data. Creating a Song on the MOTIF ES 11 Press the [F] (Play) button to start recording. During recording, play the note or notes needed to trigger the Arpeggio you found in step #3. Start recording Arpeggio playback SEQ TRANSPORT LOCATE 1 Recording stops automatically when Pattern playback reaches the end, since Loop is set to “off.” 2 12 Turn the [ARPEGGIO ON/OFF] indicator off, and press the [F] (Play) button to hear your newly recorded phrase. 13 Save the created Pattern data to a SmartMedia/USB storage device (page 132) before turning the power off. Quick Guide — Advanced Course Actual recording starts after one measure. ■ Assigning a pre-programmed Phrase to a Pattern track The Pattern mode also has a versatile Patch function that lets you assign pre-programmed one-track rhythm “Phrases” to each track. Use the special preset Phrases already in internal memory, or create your own User Phrases — by recording, or loading Pattern data from the included CD-ROM (Sound Library for MOTIF ES6/MOTIF ES7/MOTIF ES8). Use the Assigning Phrases function to assemble your original Patterns, with up to 16 tracks. 1 In the Pattern Play mode, select a Pattern and Section to be created. 2 Press the [F4] PATCH button to call up the Patch display. 3 Select the desired track and assign a Phrase to the selected track. Indicates the category of the preset Phrases. Indicates the Phrase number. SEQ TRANSPORT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TRACK SELECT 12 13 14 15 16 MUTE LOCATE 1 2 ELEMENT/PERF. PART/ZONE 9 11 10 DEC/NO Play the Pattern to confirm the assigned Phrase. INC / YES SOLO Select a track. 4 Select a Preset Phrase. Select another track and assign a User Phrase to it. The instrument provides a total capacity of 256 User Phrases. Keep in mind that these are originally empty and have no data, unless you record or load data to them. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TRACK SELECT 12 13 14 15 16 MUTE SEQ TRANSPORT ELEMENT/PERF. PART/ZONE 9 10 11 LOCATE DEC/NO INC / YES SOLO Select a track. Select a User Phrase. 1 2 Play the Pattern to confirm the assigned Phrase. Owner’s Manual 113 Creating a Song on the MOTIF ES 5 Select a different track and copy the User Phrase from the another pattern to the selected Pattern’s track. The User Phrases that can be assigned with the Patch function are limited to the ones contained in the currently selected Pattern. To copy Phrases from other Patterns for use in the current one, follow the instructions below. 1 In the [F4] PATCH display, press the [SF5] COPY button to call up the Copy Phrase display. 2 First, specify the source Pattern number and Phrase number as well as the destination (current Pattern) Phrase number and track number. Then, press the [ENTER] button to execute the Copy operation. When this box is checkmarked, Sample Voices assigned to the source Phrase are copied to the destination Phrase as Sample Voices, and are assigned to the corresponding tracks in the selected Pattern. Source Pattern number, Phrase number Destination Phrase and track of the current edited Pattern. F] (Play) button to 3 Press the [EXIT] button to return to the [F4] PATCH display, then check the assigned Phrase by pressing the [F play the Pattern. Quick Guide — Advanced Course 6 Save the created Pattern data to a SmartMedia/USB storage device (page 132) before turning the power off. Using the Groove function The Groove function makes it possible to adjust the pitch, timing, length, and velocity of notes in a specified track via a 1-measure 16th-note grid to create interesting, unique “grooves” that would not be possible with precise sequencer-like programming. n The Groove settings are applied to all measures of the current Pattern. Keep in mind that you cannot apply different Groove settings to each measure. n The Grid Groove function affects Pattern playback without actually changing the MIDI sequence data (created via the Recording, Sampling, File Loading, and Patch functions). The Groove settings are handled separately from MIDI sequence data. See page 167. 1 In the Pattern Play mode, select a Pattern and Section for which the Groove is to be applied. 2 Press the [F2] GROOVE button to call up the Groove display. 3 Select the desired track and adjust the Groove parameters. Select a track. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TRACK SELECT 12 13 14 15 16 MUTE n ELEMENT/PERF. PART/ZONE 9 10 11 Move the cursor to the desired parameter and grid point and set the offset value. SOLO Set each parameter. Move the cursor... DEC/NO You can edit the Groove parameters in real time during playback. Set the value. INC / YES minus 0 plus NOTE OFST CLOCK SFT GATE OFST EXIT ENTER DEC/NO VELO OFST INC / YES EXECUTE Play the Pattern to check the result of the Groove settings. 114 Grid SEQ TRANSPORT LOCATE 1 2 Owner’s Manual NOTE OFST (Note Offset) Raises or lowers the pitch of the note(s) on the selected grid in semitones. CLOCK SFT (Clock Shift) Shifts the timing of the note(s) on the selected grid forward or backward in clock increments. GATE OFST (Gate time Offset) Lengthens or shortens the note(s) on the selected grid in clock increments. VELO OFST (Velocity Offset) Increases or decreases the velocity of the note(s) on the selected grid. Creating a Song on the MOTIF ES 4 Save the created Pattern data to a SmartMedia/USB storage device (page 132) before turning the power off. TIP Using the Groove settings to change the Pattern data Grid Groove is a playback-only feature that processes the recorded data of a Pattern without actually changing it. In other words, the original data (created via the Recording, Sampling, File Loading and Patch functions) remains intact. If you want to make the Grid Groove settings permanent and change the data, use Normalize Play Effect in the Pattern Jobs ([PATTERN] → [JOB] → [F5] TRACK → 04: Normalize Play Effect). From this display, specify the track to be changed according to the Groove settings, and press the [ENTER] button to execute. Creating a Section and Pattern Chain ■ Creating a Section Quick Guide — Advanced Course Each Pattern consists of 16 Sections (A~H) which can be used as Pattern variations. Create the desired rhythm pattern variations, or Sections, that you wish to use as accompaniment and backing for your new Song. After you’ve created the Sections, you can string these Sections together in any order desired to assemble the backing part of the Song, over which you can record a melody line and any other parts, in the Song Record mode. Pattern Chain.....Enter the desired Sections for the Song Section A Section B Section F Section H ........ Convert Song n Pattern Mixing, Groove, and Phrase Voice (Track Voice) on/off (page 167) cannot be set independently for each Section, but apply to all Sections. CAUTION The same User Phrases can be assigned to different Sections within a pattern. Keep in mind, however, that the Section data will automatically be changed if another Section sharing the same User Phrase is changed. For example, if you’ve assigned a certain User Phrase to both Section A and Section D, and you change that User Phrase for Section A, the same Phrase will be changed for Section D as well. ■ Creating a Pattern Chain by changing a Section while playing a Pattern Switching of sections, track muting, scene/mute changes, and tempo changes can all be recorded in real time as the Pattern Chain. 1 The Pattern (“patt”) track lets you record Section changes at the desired measure points in the Song. Pattern Chain Play display In the Pattern Play mode, select a Pattern for which data has already been created. SEQ TRANSPORT 2 Press the [F6] CHAIN button to call up the Pattern Chain Play display. 3 Press the [●] (REC) button to enter the Pattern Chain Record mode, then set the basic parameters. In the Pattern Chain Record Setup display, you can set the Recording track and tempo. Three Pattern Chain track types are available. The Tempo track lets you record tempo changes for the Chain, and the Scene track lets you record track on/off changes. LOCATE 1 2 Pattern Chain Record Setup display Tempo Set the recording track to “patt” and enter the Sections to the desired measures. Owner’s Manual 115 Creating a Song on the MOTIF ES 4 Press the [F] (Play) button to start recording and play the Pattern. Change the Section at the desired points, as the Pattern plays. SEQ TRANSPORT LOCATE 1 ■ Editing a Pattern Chain The Pattern Chain Edit mode makes it possible to edit the order of the Sections in a chain as well as inserting tempo, and scene/mute event data. 1 In the Pattern Play mode, select a Pattern for which data has already been created. 2 Press the [F6] CHAIN button to call up the Pattern Chain Play display. 3 Press the [EDIT] button to enter the Pattern Chain Edit mode, then edit each track of the Pattern Chain. 2 Section I-P PRE 5 PRE 6 USER 1 USER 2 GM PLG 1 PLG 2 PLG 3 A. PIANO KEYBOARD ORGAN GUITAR/ PLUCKED BASS STRINGS BRASS REED/PIPE A B C D E F G H SYN LEAD SYN PAD/ CHOIR SYN COMP SE MUSICAL FX COMBI CATEGORY SEARCH SECTION Quick Guide — Advanced Course EDIT DRUM/ CHROMATIC PERCUSSION PERCUSSION Section A-H Pattern Track Edit 5 Press the [■] (Stop) button to stop recording. Operation returns to the Pattern Chain display. 6 7 Enter the desired section (A - P) or the End mark by using the [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons. Press the [F] (Play) button to hear the recorded Pattern Chain. [F4] button Press the [F6] button to clear the event at the cursor location. Scene Track Edit Save the created Pattern data to a SmartMedia/ USB storage device (page 132) before turning the power off. [F4] button You can also record the Tempo track and Scene track as desired. When the recording track is set to “tempo,” move the cursor to tempo value (during recording in step #4 above) and use the data dial and the [INC/YES]/[DEC/NO] buttons to change the tempo while the Chain is playing. When the recording track is set to “scene,” press the [MUTE] button (the lamp lights) and use the number buttons [1] - [16] to turn each track on/off as desired during recording. Tempo Track Edit Press the [F5] button to insert the event to the cursor location. [F4] button 116 Owner’s Manual Press the [F6] button to delete the event at the cursor location. 4 Press the [EXIT] button to return to the Pattern Chain Play display, then press the [F] (Play) button to hear the edited Pattern Chain. 5 Save the created Pattern Chain as Pattern data to a SmartMedia/USB storage device (page 132) before turning the power off. Creating a Song on the MOTIF ES ■ Converting a Pattern Chain to Song data 2 Press the [F6] CHAIN button to call up the Pattern Chain Play display. 3 Press the [EDIT] button to enter the Pattern Chain Edit mode. 4 Press the [F3] SONG button to call up the “Convert to Song” display, then specify the destination Song. 5 Press the [ENTER] button to execute the Convert operation. The Pattern Chain data is converted to Song data and copied to the top measure of the destination Song. CAUTION This operation overwrites any data already existing at the destination Song. 6 Save the Song data to a SmartMedia/USB storage device (page 132) before turning the power off. CAUTION The created Song data resides temporarily in DRAM (page 187). Because data contained in DRAM is lost when the power is turned off, you should always store any data residing in DRAM to a SmartMedia/USB storage device before turning off the power. Quick Guide — Advanced Course 1 In the Pattern Play mode, select a Pattern for which Pattern Chain data has already been created. Destination Song number and the top measure number When this box is checkmarked, program change messages in the MIDI sequence data are not copied. Creating a Song The following chart illustrates the basic procedure for creating a Song, using the various methods and functions described in this tutorial. Now, that you’ve assembled the backing tracks for your Song (by converting the Phrases or Pattern Chain to Song data, you can now record melody parts on top of them. Song track Song track 1 Song track 2 Keyboard Performance Song track 3 Record your keyboard performance to each track one by one in the Song Record mode, called up via [SONG] → [●] (REC). Page 118 Song track 4 Song track 5 Song track 6 Audio data Record audio data in the Sampling mode. Page 122 Song track 7 Song track 8 Phrase Song track 9 Copy the Phrase to the Song in the [SONG] → [F5] PHRASE display. Page 222 Song track 10 Song track 11 Song track 12 Song track 13 Pattern Chain Convert the Pattern Chain to Song data ([PATTERN] → [F6] CHAIN → [EDIT] → [F3] SONG). Page 117 Song track 14 Song track 15 Song track 16 CAUTION The created Song data resides temporarily in DRAM (page 187). Because data contained in DRAM is lost when the power is turned off, you should always store any data residing in DRAM to a SmartMedia/USB storage device before turning off the power. Owner’s Manual 117 Creating a Song on the MOTIF ES Recording with the keyboard to a Song track (in the Song Record mode) ■ Recording your keyboard performance to an empty track (Replace) Use the Replace recording method to record your keyboard performance to an empty track or overwriting an already recorded track with new data. 1 In the Song Play mode, select a Song to be created. 2 Set the Mixing parameters (including the Voice settings) by following the instructions on pages 103 - 104. 5 Set the parameters related to recording in the [F1] SETUP display. Set the Type parameter to “replace.” Set other parameters as necessary. See page 222 for details. 6 Set the parameters related to the Voice you wish to use during recording in the [F2] VOICE display. Call up the display for setting a Voice by pressing the [F2] VOICE button. You won’t need to make settings in this display if you’ve already completed Voice/Mixing settings in step #2 above. Bank Number Quick Guide — Advanced Course You can make changes to the Voice settings after entering the Record mode (in step #3 below). However, if you intend to make detailed settings to the Mixing parameters, you should do so before enabling recording. 3 Press the [●] (Record) button to enter the Song Record mode. n SEQ TRANSPORT LOCATE 1 This lets you turn the click sound (metronome) on/off for recording. (Press the [F5] button.) 2 7 Non-note settings (such as Voice, volume and pan) that are made at the beginning of a Song are not recorded as MIDI sequence data but rather as Mixing setup data. However, when these non-note settings are recorded in the middle of a Song, they are recorded as part of the MIDI sequence data. Press the [F] (Play) button to start recording. Listen to the playback of the already recorded tracks and play (record) the keyboard along with them. SEQ TRANSPORT 4 Press the [TRACK SELECT] button (the lamp lights), then select the desired track from the number buttons [1] - [16]. Start recording 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TRACK SELECT 12 13 14 15 16 MUTE ELEMENT/PERF. PART/ZONE 9 10 11 1 2 Actual recording starts after one measure. Song data is made up of three different types — Scene, Tempo and Pattern — each of which have their own separate tracks. The Scene track contains Song Scene (page 123) changes and the Tempo track contains playback tempo changes. The Song tracks (1 - 16) contain the actual note data. Since you’ll be recording a melody with the keyboard, select one of the number tracks, using the [1] - [16] buttons. 1 LOCATE 8 Press the [■] (Stop) button to stop recording. This operation exits from the Song Record mode to the Song Play mode. SOLO tempo scene n 118 1-16 When the RecTrack is set to “multi,” you can simultaneously record multiple channels of MIDI data (up to 16 channels) to all 16 tracks. For details, see page 143. Owner’s Manual 9 Press the [F] (Play) button to hear your newly recorded song. 10 Record additional melody parts to the other tracks as needed by repeating steps #3 - 9 above. 11 Save the created Song data to a SmartMedia/USB storage device (page 132) before turning the power off. Creating a Song on the MOTIF ES ■ Re-recording a specific part of a Song (Punch In/Out) Use the Punch In/Out recording method to record over only a specific portion of the track. In the example instructions below, you’ll see how to re-record measures three through five of an already recorded Song. Punch In/Out recording is available only in the Song Record mode. This is not available in the Pattern Record mode. In the Song Play mode, select a Song to be created. 2 Press the [●] (Record) button to enter the Song Record mode. 3 Press the [TRACK SELECT] button (the lamp lights), then select the desired track from the number buttons [1] - [16]. 4 n Save the created Song data to a SmartMedia/USB storage device (page 132) before turning the power off. ■ Recording additional notes to an alreadyrecorded track (Overdub) Use the Overdub recording method when you want to add more data to a track that already contains data. This is useful not only for recording more notes to a track; it’s also convenient for adding non-note, sound-shaping data, such as that of the Knobs and Ribbon Controller. 1 In the Song Play mode, select a song to be created. 2 Press the [●] (Record) button to enter the Song Record mode. 3 Press the [TRACK SELECT] button (the lamp lights), then select the desired track from the number buttons [1] - [16]. 4 Set the parameters related to recording in the [F1] SETUP display. Set the parameters related to recording in the [F1] SETUP display. Set the Type parameter to “punch” and specify the area to be re-recorded. Set other parameters as necessary. See page 222 for details. Punch In (Recording start measure : beat) Playback of the recording track is turned off from this point, and your keyboard performance will be recorded to the track. Location setting (page 58) Punch Out (Recording end measure : beat) Quick Guide — Advanced Course 1 8 Set the Type parameter to “overdub.” Set other parameters as necessary. See page 222 for details. Recording ends at this point and normal playback of the recording track starts. Press the [SF1] COPY LOC to assign the measure numbers registered to the Locations (Loc1 and Loc2) to the Punch In and Punch Out points. 5 Press the [F] (Play) button to start recording. SEQ TRANSPORT LOCATE 1 5 Press the [F] (Play) button to start recording. Playback starts, and the notes (or controller data) you play are added to the existing data. 2 Playback start When Song playback reaches the Punch In point, play the keyboard. 6 Press the [■] (Stop) button to stop recording after the Song playback reaches the Punch Out point. 7 Press the [F] (Play) button to hear the part you’ve just re-recorded. 6 Press the [■] (Stop) button to stop recording after the Song playback reaches the Punch Out point. 7 Press the [F] (Play) button to hear the part you’ve just re-recorded. 8 Save the created Song data to a SmartMedia/USB storage device (page 132) before turning the power off. Owner’s Manual 119 Creating a Song on the MOTIF ES TIP Rehearsing parts before recording TIP Song Recording using a Performance Quick Guide — Advanced Course The MOTIF ES has a convenient Rehearsal mode in recording, that lets you easily and temporarily disable recording in order to practice a part or try out various ideas (while listening to the other tracks) without actually recording. To temporarily disengage the record mode and enter the “Rehearsal” mode, simply press the [●] (Record) button during realtime recording – the [●] (Record) indicator will flash and playback will continue uninterrupted but no data will be recorded. To return to the record mode press the [●] (Record) button again – the [●] (Record) indicator will light continuously. You can repeat this process as often as you wish, pressing the [■] (Stop) button to cancel the Rehearsal mode. The Record button lamp indicates the Recording/ Rehearsal status: continuously lit indicates Recording, and flashing indicates Rehearsal. Recording If you have a favorite Performance or one that would fit the Song to be recorded, you can copy certain settings of up to four Parts of the Performance to the Song Mixing settings currently being edited. 1 2 3 Enter the Song Mixing Job mode ([SONG] → [MIXING] → [JOB]). Press the [F5] PF COPY button to call up the Performance Copy display. Set the parameters as necessary in the [F5] PF COPY display, then press the [ENTER] button to execute the Copy operation. Select a source Performance. Checkmark the boxes of the desired parameters. Rehearsal mode (playback continues) SEQ TRANSPORT SEQ TRANSPORT LOCATE 1 2 LOCATE 1 The destination Mixing Parts appear automatically. The displayed Part numbers differ depending on the source Performance. If the source Performance contains four Parts, “1, 2, 3, 4” appears here. 2 4 TIP Insert a Tempo change event to the middle of the Song You can use the following three methods to change the tempo in the middle of the already-recorded song. ● Using the Tempo track Start recording after setting the Type parameter to “replace,” setting RecTrack to “tempo,” and moving the cursor to the tempo value in step #4 on page 118. During recording, change the tempo value while listening to Song playback. ● Song Edit In the Song Play mode, press the [EDIT] button to enter the Song Edit mode. Select the Tempo track (TMP) by pressing the [F4] TR SEL button once or twice, then change the existing tempo value or insert a new tempo value by using the [F5] INSERT button. For details about Song Edit, see page 124. ● Step Recording In step #4 on page 118, set the Type parameter to “step” and RecTrack to “tempo” then press the [F] (Play) button to start Step recording. After moving the cursor to “Value,” move the song pointer by using the [H] (Forward) button and change the tempo value at the desired point. For details about Step Recording, see page 238. 120 Owner’s Manual 5 6 7 Press the [SONG] button to return to the Song Play mode, then select Track 1 and play the keyboard. Check whether the sound you hear is the same as that of the source Performance or not. Record your keyboard performance to Track 1. Store the Song Mixing in the [SONG] → [MIXING] → [STORE] display. The settings copied from the Performance should be stored as Song Mixing data. Save the created Song data to a SmartMedia/USB storage device (page 132) before turning the power off. n The explanations above also apply to the Pattern mode. Step Recording The explanations in this Quick Guide have concentrated on Realtime Recording. However, the Step Recording method is also available, letting you record a Song by entering notes and events individually — much like writing them down on paper. This is especially useful for recording passages that would be difficult or impossible to play. The Step Recording can be executed by setting the Type to “step” in the [F1] SETUP display in the Song Record mode. For details on using Step Recording, see page 238. n Step Recording can be used both in the Song Record mode and the Pattern Record mode. Creating a Song on the MOTIF ES TIP Song Recording using Plug-in Voices This section shows you how to use the Voices of an optional Single Part Plug-in Board (such as PLG150-AN, PLG150-PF and PLG150-DX) in recording a Song. Install a Single Part Plug-in Board to the instrument, then follow steps #1 - 4 on page 75 to set the necessary parameters. In step #4, set PORT.NO (port number) to “2” or “3.” Keep in mind that if you’ve also installed a PLG100XG Multi-Part Plug-in Board, the boards should be set to different numbers. When a Single Part Plug-in Board has been installed to slot 1, move the cursor here then set the port number. 5 6 Enter the Song Play mode and call up the MIDI output setting display ([SONG] → [F3] TRACK → [SF1] CHANNEL). Select the track for recording, making sure that the track number is the same as that of the slot to which the Plug-in Board is installed, and set the port number. The track number must match the slot number, and the port number must be the same as set in step #4 above. When you play the keyboard, you should be able to hear the selected Voice of the Plug-in Board. If the Voice of the Plug-in Board does not sound as expected, check the following points. ● Make sure that the OUT CH of the track matches the Receive Channel of the corresponding Part of the tone generator. Check the ReceiveCh (MIDI Receive Channel) in the display called up by pressing the [SF2] MODE in the above display, then check the OUT CH (MIDI Output Channel) of track 1 in the display shown in step #6. These two channels should be same. Quick Guide — Advanced Course 1~4 ● Make sure that the destination tone generator is set to internal, not external. Check the settings in the display called up via the [F1] PLAY → [SF2] OUT CH button. The INT SW of the corresponding track (1 in this case) should be set to “on.” 8 Record your keyboard performance using the Plugin Voice to track 1. 9 Store the Song Mixing settings in the [SONG] → When a Single Part Plug-in Board has been installed to slot 1, move the cursor here then set the port number. 7 Select a Voice of the installed Plug-in Board. Enter the Mixing Edit mode ([MIXING] → [EDIT] → Part selection). Press the [F6] button once or twice to call up the display for the Plug-in Board parts (PLG parts) as shown below (page 164). Next, press the [TRACK SELECT] button (the lamp lights), and select the PLG Part of Slot 1 by pressing the [1] button. Finally, press the [F1] VOICE button, followed by the [SF1] VOICE button, then select the desired Voice on the Plug-in Board. [MIXING] → [STORE] display (page 131). The settings related to the Plug-in Board voice should be stored as Song Mixing data. 10 Save the created Song data to a SmartMedia/USB storage device (page 131) before turning the power off. n The explanations above apply also to the Pattern modes. Voice Bank Voice Number Owner’s Manual 121 Creating a Song on the MOTIF ES Using the Groove function Just as in the Pattern Play mode, the Groove function is available also in the Song Play mode. For details, refer to the explanation of Groove in the Pattern Play mode (page 114). 1 In the Song Play mode, select a Song for which the Groove settings are to be applied. 2 Press the [F2] GROOVE button to call up the Groove setting display. 3 Select a track, then adjust the Groove settings. 3 Press the [F2] SOURCE button to call up the display for setting the Sampling Source, then set the parameters as shown below. Type: Source: Next: Mono/Stereo: Frequency: sample+note A/D off stereo 44.1k For details about each parameter, see page 253. Quick Guide — Advanced Course 4 Save the created Song data to a SmartMedia/USB storage device (page 132) before turning the power off. 4 Press the [F1] DEST button to call up the display for setting the Sampling Destination, set the parameters as described below. CAUTION The created Song data resides temporarily in DRAM (page 187). Because data contained in DRAM is lost when the power is turned off, you should always store any data residing in DRAM to a SmartMedia/USB storage device before turning off the power. Sampling a one-shot sound to a Song track The MOTIF ES conveniently lets you sample audio material, even while a Song is playing. This allows you to quickly and easily “fly in” samples to your Song as you need them — for example, capturing short sound effects from a CD, or recording background vocal phrases with a microphone. Sounds like these can be added to the Song as desired, and can even be aligned in time as needed after recording in the Song Edit mode. In order to use the Sampling function, DIMM modules must be installed to the instrument. For details on installing DIMMs, see page 289. 1 Connect an audio device (CD player, etc.) to the instrument. Follow steps #1 - 8 on page 73, substituting the instructions below for steps #4 and 8. In step #4, press the [SONG] button to enter the Song Play mode then select a song to be created. In step #8, set the related parameters from the AUDIO IN display ([SONG] → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F5] AUDIO IN). 2 122 Press the [INTEGRATED SAMPLING] button in the Song mode to enter the Sampling mode. Owner’s Manual Track This parameter determines the Song track to which the Sample Voice is assigned. Keybank This parameter determines the note to which the sample is assigned. 5 Press the [F6] REC button to call up the Sampling Record display (Sampling Standby status), then set the parameters as required. Set the TrggrMode (Trigger Mode) to “meas” then specify the Punch In measure (at which the Sampling starts automatically) and the Punch Out measure (at which Sampling stops automatically). Punch In measure Measure number at which Sampling starts automatically Punch Out measure Measure number at which Sampling stops automatically Indicates Sampling Standby status. Creating a Song on the MOTIF ES Press the [F6] REC button again enable Punch In Waiting. Doing this puts sample recording on standby, waiting for song/pattern playback to reach the specified Punch-in measure. 9 Press the [F3] AUDITION button to hear the sampled sound. If you’re not satisfied with the results and you wish to try again, press the [F4] CANCEL button to return to the Sampling Standby display and try sampling from step #5 again. If you are satisfied with the results, press the [F5] OK button to store the sampled sound as a “sample” and return to the [F1] DEST or [F2] SOURCE display. Keep in mind that if the Confirm function is turned off in step #5 above, the display shown above will not appear when stopping sampling. Instead, stopping sampling returns directly to the [F1] DEST or [F2] SOURCE display. F6 Indicates that sample recording is waiting for song/pattern playback to reach the specified Punch-in measure. 7 Press the [F] (Play) button to start Song playback. 8 Start the audio equipment when the Song reaches the Punch In point (when sampling actually starts). Stop the audio equipment when the Song reaches the Punch Out point (when sampling stops). 10 Press the [SONG] button or [EXIT] button to return to the Song Play mode. 11 Press the [F] (Play) button to play the Song. Quick Guide — Advanced Course 6 Listen back to the Song (the sample automatically sounds along with playback) and check that the timing is correct. If you’re not satisfied with the timing, you can adjust it as needed in the Song Edit mode. For details about Song Edit, see page 124. Audio is recorded to the instrument. 12 Save the Song data to a SmartMedia/USB storage device in the File mode (page 132) before turning the power off. Registering a Song Scene and Arpeggio type simultaneously to the [SF1] - [SF5] buttons Song Scenes and Arpeggio types can both be registered to the [SF1] - [SF5] buttons (when the ARP1 - ARP5 menu items are shown at the bottom of the display). These settings are stored as Song data. Song Scene is a powerful function that allows you to store five different “snapshots” of important Song related parameters – including transpose, tempo, track mute status, and the basic sound/ mixing controls (all parameter settings controllable from the Knobs with the [PAN/SEND] or [TONE] lamp turned on, and the Control Sliders). The Arpeggio function and Arpeggio types are discussed in detail in the Voice mode, on page 66. You can call up both the Song Scene and Arpeggio type simultaneously by simply pressing one of the [SF1] - [SF5] buttons (when ARP1 - ARP5 are shown at the bottom of the display in the Song mode). ● Registering a Song Scene and Arpeggio type simultaneously to the [SF1] - [SF5] buttons STORE ● Recalling a Song Scene and Arpeggio type simultaneously from the [SF1] - [SF5] buttons SCENE SCENE SF1 SF2 SF3 SF4 SF5 SF1 SF2 SF3 SF4 SF5 SCENE STORE SET LOCATE Simultaneously hold the [STORE] button and press one of the [SF1] - [SF5] buttons. ARPEGGIO ON / OFF In the Song mode, you can register the Song Scene and Arpeggio type simultaneously to the [SF1] - [SF5] buttons only when the ARP1 - ARP5 menus appear at the bottom in the display. Owner’s Manual 123 Creating a Song on the MOTIF ES ■ Recalling a Song Scene and Arpeggio type during recording ARP1 - ARP5 menus appear also in the [F3] ARP display in the Song Record mode as well as the [F1] PLAY display in the Song Play mode. These indicate that you can change the Song Scene and Arpeggio type simultaneously during Song recording from the [F3] ARP display. ■ Recording Song Scene changes to a song Each Song contains a Scene track to which you can record Scene changes. When the RecTrack is set to “scene” in step #4 described on page 118, you can record Scene changes from any display (even from those in which ARP1 - ARP5 are not shown) by pressing the [SF1] - [SF5] buttons during recording. n The explanations on Arpeggio here also apply to the Pattern mode. n As in the Voice mode and Performance mode, Arpeggio types can only be registered to the [SF1] - [SF5] buttons when the [ARPEGGIO ON/OFF] button is turned off. n For details on how to select an Arpeggio type in the Song mode/Pattern mode, see page 105. Quick Guide — Advanced Course Editing the recorded song The Song Edit mode and Song Job mode can be used to edit or change the data of the already recorded song. The Song Edit mode lets you change the recorded data and insert new data if needed. This includes note data as well as nonnote data, such as program (Voice) changes and MIDI control change messages. The Song Job mode on the other hand provides a comprehensive variety of tools you can use to transform the recorded data — such as cleaning up the timing (Quantize), transposing, changing the velocity of notes, modifying the length of notes, and other useful operations for altering the sound. It also includes a variety of convenient operations, such as copying or erasing data. Most of these operations can be performed on either an entire track or a selected range of measures in the track. n The explanations here also apply to the Pattern mode. ■ Editing the recorded Song data by MIDI event (in the Song Edit mode) 1 Press the [SONG] button to enter the Song Play mode, then select a Song to be edited. 2 Enter the Song Edit mode by pressing the [EDIT] button (the lamp lights), then press the [F1] CHANGE button to call up the MIDI event list display. EDIT Song position MIDI events 007:1-007 Measure number Beat 124 Owner’s Manual Clock (480 clocks per quarter-note) Creating a Song on the MOTIF ES 3 When changing the value, the entire line will flash on the display indicating this is being edited and not fixed yet. Select a track to be edited. Select one of the three available track types by pressing the [F4] TR SEL (Track Select) button. Each press of the button alternates among the track types. To select one of the Pattern tracks (1 - 16), make sure the 1-16 track edit display is selected (see below), then turn the [TRACK SELECT] button on and press any of the [1] - [16] buttons. [ENTER] button TRACK SELECT 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 12 13 14 15 16 MUTE ELEMENT/PERF. PART/ZONE 9 10 11 This value has been fixed as data. SOLO Select a track to be edited from 1 - 16. ● Inserting New Events To insert an event, use the up/down cursor buttons to highlight an event at the desired point in the track measure, beat, clock) – this is the location to which the new event will be inserted. Then, follow the steps below. 1 - 16 track edit display Scene track edit display Press the [F6] button to delete the event at the current location. [F4] button Press the [F1] button or [EXIT] button to abort and return to the main Event List display. Tempo track edit display [F5] button [F4] button [F1] button or [EXIT] button [F4] button ENTER EXECUTE 4 Quick Guide — Advanced Course 1 Edit the MIDI events of the Song. Press the [F6] SET button to actually insert the event shown in the display and remain in display. If you wish to insert the event type currently shown in the display several times, use [F6] SET and press the [F1] or [EXIT] button to return to the main Event List display. Press the [ENTER] button to actually insert the event and return to the main Event List display. ● Editing/Deleting Existing Events To edit data in the Event List, use the up/down cursor buttons to highlight the specific event you want to edit, and use the left/right cursor buttons to highlight the data type or parameter to be edited. Then, change the value as needed by using the [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons or the data dial. The entire line of the edited event will flash on the display. Press the [ENTER] button to actually enter the edited data (the entire line of the edited event will stop flashing). To abort an edit simply highlight to a new event location without pressing the [ENTER] button. Press the [F6] button to delete the event at the current location. In the Event List display, you can edit various types of events such as Voice, volume, and pan as well as note events. This means that you could, for example, enter Voice changes to the middle of a track, even if the track was recorded using only one Voice. n For details about the MIDI events handled in the Event List display, see page 225. n If you find the display too cluttered, you can filter out certain event types with the View Filter. Simply press the [F2] VIEW FLT button and select the event types you want to be displayed. For details, see page 225. Owner’s Manual 125 Creating a Song on the MOTIF ES 5 Press the [F] (Play) button to hear your edited data. Since the Song can be played back from within the Song Edit mode, you can instantly hear and check the changes you’ve made while editing. If you want to hear just the track being edited, use the Solo function (page 58). 6 Edit other tracks as required by repeating steps #3 through #5 as desired. 7 After editing, press the [SONG] button to return to the Song Play mode. Quick Guide — Advanced Course 8 Save the edited Song data to a SmartMedia/USB storage device (page 132) before turning the power off. ■ Transforming the recorded data and other operations — Song Job mode The Song Job mode has a wide variety of operations for changing and working with Song data. Virtually all of the Jobs share the same procedure, so we’ll explain only one of them here — Quantize, which lets you clean up the timing of a previously recorded track. In the following example, this musical passage has been written with exact quarter-note and eighth-note values. Even though you think you may have recorded the passage accurately, your actual performance may be slightly ahead of or behind the beat (or both!). Quantize allows you to align all the notes in a track so that the timing is absolutely accurate to the specified note value. 1 2 Press the [SONG] button to enter the Song Play mode, then select a Song for which the Job is to be applied. Press the [JOB] button to enter the Song Job mode. As shown below, the Jobs are divided into six main groups, each of which is selected using the [F1] - [F6] buttons. Indicates the Job List. Because all the Jobs cannot be displayed simultaneously, you will need to use the cursor buttons to scroll the display in order to find the desired Job. [F1] UNDO Undo (Canceling the executed Job)/Redo (Restoring the executed Job) functions [F2] NOTE Note Data Job [F3] EVENT Event Job [F4] MEAS Measure Job [F5] TRACK Track Job [F6] SONG Song Job 3 Press the [F2] NOTE button, move the cursor to “01: Quantize” then press the [ENTER] button to call up the Quantize Job display. 4 Set the relevant Job parameters. After specifying the track and range over which the Job is to be applied, set Quantize to “ ” (8th note) according to the notation example above. Set the Strength to “100%,” SwingRate to “050%,” and GateTime to “100%.” Regarding these parameters, see page 227. Track over which the Job is applied n 5 126 [F2] [F3] [F4] Owner’s Manual [F5] [F6] Set the Quantize value to correspond to the smallest value notes in the track you are working with. For example, if the data was recorded with both quarter notes and eighth notes, use eighth note for the quantize value. Press the [ENTER] button to execute the Job. After the Job has been completed, a “Completed” message appears and operation returns to the original display. CAUTION An “Executing...” message is shown when it takes a short amount of time to execute the Job. Never attempt to turn off the power while the Job is being executed. Turning the power off in this state results in loss of all user data. 6 Press the [SONG] button to return to the Song Play mode, then press the [F] button to hear the song over which the Job is applied. If you are satisfied with the result of the Job, go to step #7. If not, execute the UNDO Job in the [F1] UNDO display in the Song Job mode to restore the data to its previous state, then try out the Job (from step #4) again. For details about Undo, see next page. 7 [F1] Range over which the Job is applied Save the Song data to a SmartMedia/USB storage device in the File mode (page 132) before turning the power off. In addition to Quantize, you’ll find a variety of other useful and powerful Jobs in the Song Job mode (page 226) and Pattern Job mode (page 244). Creating a Song on the MOTIF ES TIP Using the Undo/Redo functions If you’re not satisfied with the results of a just-executed Job, or you want to hear the difference of the sound before and after using a Job, you can use the convenient Undo and Redo functions. After changing the data with a particular Job, repeat steps #1 -4 as desired. 1 2 Press the [SONG] button to return to the Song Play mode, then press the [F] button to hear the Song as it was changed by the Job. This lets you check the results of the Job. After stopping the song, press the [JOB] button followed by the [F1] UNDO button to call up the Undo display. Press the [ENTER] button to execute Undo. The Song data is restored to its previous state. Indicates the operation to be affected by Undo. 3 4 Quick Guide — Advanced Course [ENTER] button Changes to “Redo.” F] (Play) button to play the song. Press the [SONG] button to return to the Song Play mode, then press the [F This lets you check the sound before actually making changes to it with the Job. After stopping the song, press the [JOB] button followed by the [F1] UNDO button to call up the Undo display. Press the [ENTER] button to execute the Redo. This lets you “redo” the Job, restoring the Song to the changes you made before using Undo in step #2 above. [ENTER] button Indicates the operation to be affected by Redo. n Undo/Redo is applied to the most recent operation (Job, Edit, Record, etc.). n The Undo/Redo Job is available also in the Pattern Job mode. Changes to “Undo.” Editing Mixing parameters to complete a Song (in the Mixing mode/Mixing Edit mode) In this final step (other than saving your precious work, which we’ll cover next), you can mix down your tracks with the Song Mixing function – adjusting the volume balance and pan setting of all the parts and tweaking the effect levels. n The explanations here also apply to the Pattern mode. 1 Press the [SONG] button to enter the Song Play mode, then select a Song for which Mixing edits have been made. 2 Enter the Song Mixing mode by pressing the [MIXING] button (the lamp lights). Select the menu you wish to edit by pressing the [F1] - [F4] buttons, then edit the parameters in each display. If you alter any parameters, the [E] indicator will appear in the top left of the display. Press the [F6] button to switch between the display for Parts 01-16 (for the internal tone generator), 17-32 (for the Multi-Part Plug-in Board PLG100-XG), and PLG1-3 (for the Single Part Plug-in Board). Press the [F5] VCE ED button to enter the Mixing Voice Edit mode (page 105). You can use the Song Mixing mode for Sample Mixing as well. For information on the available parameters, see page 233. If you wish to edit more detailed Mixing parameters, enter the Song Mixing Edit mode. Owner’s Manual 127 Creating a Song on the MOTIF ES 3 Press the [EDIT] button to enter the Song Mixing Edit mode. EDIT JOB COMPARE 4 STORE SCENE STORE SET LOCATE Call up the Common Edit display or Part Edit display. Use Part Edit to edit the parameters for each Part. Use Common Edit to edit the parameters for all of the Parts. While in the Song Mixing Edit mode, you can switch between the Common Edit display and the Element Edit display as shown below. Calling up the Common Edit display Quick Guide — Advanced Course Press the [COMMON] button to call up the Common Edit display. In the Edit mode, the [DRUM KITS] button functions as the [COMMON] button. Calling up the Part Edit display DRUM KITS PRE 5 PRE 6 USER 1 USER 2 FAVORITES A. PIANO KEYBOARD GUITAR/ PLUCKED GUITAR A B C D SYN LEAD SYN PAD/ CHOIR SYN COMP CHROMATIC PERCUSSION 1 2 3 Indicates a Common Edit display. Press the desired Part number from the PART [1] [16] buttons to call up the Part Edit display. Indicates the display for editing Part 1. 8 ...... ELEMENT/PERF. PART/ZONE COMMON 9 10 11 16 ...... n To switch between the Part 1 - 16 display, Part 17 - 32, and Part PLG1 - 3 display, press the [F6] button. F6 Part1 Edit You can mute or solo a Part just as is done with tracks in the Song Play mode or Pattern Play mode. Part2 Edit Part3 Edit Internal Tone Generator ..... Part4 Edit Part 16 Edit Part 17 Edit ..... Common Edit n 5 Multi-Part Plug-in Board PLG100-XG Part 32 Edit Common Edit operations cannot be performed on the Multi-part Plug-in parts 17 - 32. The Mixing settings for the MultiPart Plug-in Part (17~32) apply not to one individual song but to all 64 songs. Plug-in part 1 (PLG1) Edit Plug-in part 2 (PLG2) Edit Plug-in part 3 (PLG3) Edit Single Part Plug-in Board Select the menu you wish to edit by pressing the [F1] - [F5] buttons and [SF1] - [SF5] buttons, then edit the parameters in each display. For details on the available parameters, see page 234. 6 Repeat steps #4 - 5 as desired. 7 Store the edited Song Mixing settings to internal User memory (DRAM). After pressing the [EXIT] button to return to the Song Mixing mode, press the [STORE] button to enter the Song Mixing Store mode, then press the [ENTER] button to execute the Store operation (page 131). 8 128 Before turning the power off, save the stored Song Mixing settings to a SmartMedia/USB storage device as Song data in the File mode (page 132). Owner’s Manual Creating a Song on the MOTIF ES TIP Editing a Mixing by using the Knobs (in the Song mode/Pattern mode) The four knobs at the top left of the instrument can be used to tweak the Song/Pattern Mixing settings as they play (in the Song Play/Pattern Play mode). What’s mode, you can use them to edit the Mixing settings, in the Song Mixing Edit/Pattern Mixing Edit modes. For details on the parameters edited by the knobs, refer to the descriptions in the Performance mode (page 90). PAN [SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song/Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → Part selection → [F2] OUTPUT → [SF1] VOL/PAN → Pan Page 235 REVERB [SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song/Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → Part selection → [F2] OUTPUT → [SF2] EF SEND → RevSend Page 235 CHORUS [SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song/Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → Part selection → [F2] OUTPUT → [SF2] EF SEND → ChoSend Page 235 TEMPO Tempo of the current Song/Pattern Pages 57 and 59 Quick Guide — Advanced Course ● When the [PAN/SEND] indicator is turned on: ● When the [TONE] indicator is turned on: CUTOFF [SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song/Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → Part selection → [F4] TONE → [SF2] FILTER → Cutoff Page 236 RESONANCE [SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song/Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → Part selection → [F4] TONE → [SF2] FILTER → Resonance Page 236 ATTACK [SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song/Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → Part selection → [F4] TONE → [SF4] AEG → Attack Page 236 RELEASE [SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song/Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → Part selection → [F4] TONE → [SF4] AEG → Release Page 236 ● When the [ARP FX] indicator is turned on: SWING [SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song/Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F3] ARP → [SF3] PLAY FX → Swing Page 234 GATE TIME [SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song/Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F3] ARP → [SF3] PLAY FX → GateTimeRate Page 234 VELOCITY [SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song/Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F3] ARP → [SF3] PLAY FX → VelocityRate Page 234 UNITMULTIPLY [SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song/Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F3] ARP → [SF3] PLAY FX → UnitMultiply Page 234 ● When the [EQ] indicator is turned on: LO [SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song/Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → Part selection → [F3] EQ → Low Gain Page 236 LO MID [SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song/Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → Part selection → [F3] EQ → Mid Gain Page 236 — HI MID - [SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song/Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → Part selection → [F3] EQ → High Gain HI Page 236 ● When both the [PAN/SEND] and [TONE] indicators are turned on (by pressing them simultaneously): ASSIGN A Adjusts parameters assigned to these knobs in the [UTILITY] → [F4] CTL ASN → [SF2] ASSIGN display. ASSIGN 1 Depend on the settings of the voice assigned to the currently selected part. ASSIGN 2 n Page 263 Page 263 ASSIGN B Page 192 Page 192 In addition to the above functions, Master Effect related parameters ([SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song/Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F2] MEQ/MEF → [SF2] MEF) can be assigned to these four knobs, and the knobs can be used for these assignments by pressing the [ARP FX] and [EQ] buttons simultaneously to turn them on. The particular parameters assigned to the four knobs can be set in the [UTILITY] → [F4] CTL ASN → [SF5] MEF display. Compare function and Edit Recall (in the Song mode/Pattern mode) These are the same as in the Voice mode and Performance mode. See pages 80 and 82. Owner’s Manual 129 Creating a Song on the MOTIF ES TIP Editing a Mixing by using Control Sliders (in the Song mode/Pattern mode) [SONG] → Song selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → Part selection → [F2] OUTPUT → [SF1] VOL/PAN → Volume In the Song/Pattern mode, the four Control Sliders let you independently adjust the levels of the Parts (Voices), letting you control the overall balance of the Parts. n Inadvertent use of the sliders may result in no sound. If this occurs, move the sliders upward. TIP Creating an Arpeggio In addition using the preset Arpeggios, you can also create your own original Arpeggio data. Actually, there is no direct operation for recording Arpeggios. First, you have to record a Phrase to a Song or Pattern track. Then, use the appropriate Song or Pattern Job function to convert the data to Arpeggio data. Quick Guide — Advanced Course the MIDI sequence data to be 1 Record 2 used as the basis for base of the Arpeggio Convert the MIDI sequence data (recorded to the Song or Pattern) as Arpeggio data. to a Song or Pattern. Song or Pattern Record Arpeggio Track 1 User Arpeggio 256 Track 2 Track 3 Record User Arpeggio 001 Track 4 Record Track 5 Track 1 Track 6 Track 2 Track 7 Track 3 Track 8 Track 4 Track 9 Track 10 Track 11 Track 12 Record Track 13 Track 14 Convert [SONG] → [JOB] → [F5] TRACK → 07: Put Track To Arp After setting the parameters as shown below, press the [ENTER] button to execute Convert. Specify the destination Arpeggio number. Specify the source Song/ Pattern number and measure range. Track 15 Track 16 You can record MIDI sequence data for the Arpeggio to any of the tracks. After recording, select four tracks from all sixteen and convert them to Arpeggio data. Select a convert type by track (see below). Specify the tracks of the source Song or Pattern. Set unused tracks to “off.” Set the root note when the convert type of any track is set to “OrgNote.” ■ Determining how Song/Pattern data is converted to an Arpeggio — Convert Type MIDI sequence data (of Song/Pattern tracks) can be converted to Arpeggio data in one of three ways, according to the Convert types below. These types can also be selected independently for each destination track — providing enormous flexibility and performance control. 130 Normal The Arpeggio is played back using only the played note and its octave notes. Fixed Playing any note(s) will trigger the same MIDI sequence data. OrgNotes (Original Notes) Basically same as “Fixed” with the exception that the Arpeggio playback notes differ according to the played chord. Owner’s Manual Creating a Song on the MOTIF ES Record the MIDI sequence data to a Song or Pattern track, referring to the previous instructions in this chapter as needed. The examples listed below are used as reference. ● Creating a rhythm pattern (using a Drum Voice) Track 1 Record a basic rhythm pattern using various drum instruments. ➔ Convert via “Fixed.” Track 2 - 4 Record a different rhythm pattern using a specific drum instrument to each track. ➔ Convert via “Normal.” ● Creating a bass line (using a Normal Voice) ➔ Convert via “OrgNote” after the OrgNotesRoot is set. Record a bass line using a specific desired key (root). Track 1 ➔ off Track 2 - 4 Track 1 Record a guitar backing part using a specific desired key (root). ➔ Convert via “Normal.” Track 2 Record a different rhythm using one of the “special” sounds, such as a finger mute or scratching noise. ➔ Convert via “Fixed.” ➔ off Track 3 - 4 n Quick Guide — Advanced Course ● Creating a guitar backing (using a Keyboard Mega Voice) Up to 16 unique note numbers can be recorded to the Arpeggio track. (This does not apply to multiple instances of the same note number.) If more than 16 different note numbers have been recorded to the MIDI sequence data, the Convert operation reduces the notes in excess of the limit. Because of this, be careful to record only up to 16 different notes when you create an Arpeggio, especially when using all four tracks. ■ Convert type which determines how the Song/Pattern data is converted to the Arpeggio data The Arpeggio data created via the above instructions is stored on internal Flash ROM, meaning that it will not be lost, even if you turn the power off. When saving the Arpeggio data to a SmartMedia/USB storage device, set the file type (TYPE) to “All” or “UsrArp” in step #3 described on page 132. Storing/Saving the created Song/Pattern The created Song/Pattern data resides on DRAM (page 187). Because data contained in DRAM is lost when the power is turned off, you should always save any data residing in DRAM to a SmartMedia/USB storage device in the File mode before turning off the power. Please note that the edited Mixing settings should be stored before saving to a SmartMedia/USB storage device. Internal memory (DRAM) Song/Pattern SmartMedia Mixing Mixing Edit Store Mixing Voice Edit Mixing Voice Save USB storage device Store Record MIDI sequence data Sampling Sample Settings in the Play mode Groove, etc. Save all Songs or Patterns in internal DRAM as a single file. File extension: W7A File extension: W7S File extension: W7P Storing the edited Song Mixing/Pattern Mixing settings to internal memory (DRAM) [MIXING] → [STORE] Press the [STORE] button to enter the Song Mixing Store mode/Pattern Mixing Store mode, then press the [ENTER] button to execute the Store operation. The Mixing settings are actually stored to a Song/Pattern by executing the Store operation. CAUTION The currently edited Mixing program will be lost when selecting a different Song/Pattern or going to a different mode without storing it to the current Song/ Pattern. In addition, simply playing back the Song/Pattern or receiving any MIDI messages from an external MIDI instrument may change the current Mixing program. Make sure to store the Mixing program before executing these operations. Owner’s Manual 131 Creating a Song on the MOTIF ES Saving the Song/Pattern data to the SmartMedia/USB storage device [FILE] → [F2] SAVE CAUTION The recorded Song, Pattern and Sample (Waveform) data resides temporarily in DIMM (page 187). Because data contained in DIMM is lost when the power is turned off, you should always save any data residing in DIMM to a SmartMedia /USB storage device before turning off the power. After inserting a SmartMedia into the CARD slot or connecting the USB storage device to this synthesizer, follow the instructions below. 1 Press the [FILE] button to enter the File mode, then execute the basic settings. Quick Guide — Advanced Course Refer to “Basic settings for using SmartMedia or a USB storage device” on page 30. 2 Press the [F2] SAVE button to call up the Save display. 3 Set the TYPE parameter to “All.” Press the [ENTER] button to execute the Save operation. 5 If you are about to overwrite an existing file, the display prompts you for confirmation. Press the [INC/YES] button to execute the Save operation to overwrite an existing file, or press the [DEC/NO] button to cancel it. After the data has been saved, a “Completed” message appears and operation returns to the original display. CAUTION While the data is being saved, make sure to follow these precautions: • Never remove or eject the media from the device (SmartMedia or USB storage). • Never unplug or disconnect any of the devices. • Never turn off the power of the MOTIF ES or the relevant devices. Saving a Song or a Pattern Section as a Standard MIDI File After inserting a SmartMedia into the CARD slot or connecting the USB storage device to the instrument, follow the instructions below. 1 2 Move the cursor to the TYPE, then set the File type by using the data dial, [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] button. You can select one of the following four file types to save the Song or Pattern data. Here, select “All” because various kinds of data have been created in order to complete a song. All 3 Press the [FILE] button to enter the File mode, then execute the basic settings. Refer to “Basic settings for using SmartMedia or a USB storage device” on page 30. Press the [F2] SAVE button to call up the Save display. Set the TYPE parameter to “SMF” then select a Song/Pattern to be saved. When saving a Song as SMF: All data in this synthesizer’s internal User Memory is treated as a single file (extension: W7A), and can be saved to a SmartMedia/ USB storage device. All Song All the User Song data in this synthesizer’s internal User Memory (DRAM) is treated as a single file (extension: W7S), and can be saved to a SmartMedia/USB storage device. Please keep in mind that Sample Voices and assigned Waveforms created via the Sampling function in the Song mode are also saved together. All Pattern All the User Pattern data in this synthesizer’s internal User Memory (DRAM) is treated as a single file (extension: W7P), and can be saved to a SmartMedia/USB storage device. Please keep in mind that Sample Voices and assigned Waveforms created via the Sampling function in the Pattern mode are also saved together. SMF Sequence track (1 - 16) and Tempo track data of a Song/Pattern created in the Song/Pattern mode can be saved to a SmartMedia/ USB storage device as Standard MIDI File (format 0) data. Select a Song number. When saving a Pattern as SMF: Select a Pattern number and Section. 4 Input a file name. Move the cursor to the file name input location, then input a file name. For detailed instructions on naming, refer to page 53 in the Basic Operation section. File name input location 132 Owner’s Manual 4 Input a file name. Move the cursor to the file name input location, then input a file name. For detailed instructions on naming, refer to page 53 in the Basic Operation section. Creating a Song on the MOTIF ES Press the [ENTER] button to execute the Save operation. If you are about to overwrite an existing file, the display prompts you for confirmation. Press the [INC/ YES] button to execute the Save operation to overwrite an existing file, or press the [DEC/NO] button to cancel it. After the data has been saved, a “Completed” message appears and operation returns to the original display. n When loading a SMF (Standard MIDI File), set the file type to “Song” or “Pattern.” n Only the sequence track (1 - 16) and tempo track data of a Song/Pattern created in the Song/Pattern mode can be saved to a SmartMedia/USB storage device as Standard MIDI File (format 0) data. The Mixing settings will not be saved to a Standard MIDI File. If you wish to save the entire Song/Pattern including the Mixing settings, set the file type to “All” or “AllSong.” or “AllPattern.” Loading a file saved to a SmartMedia/ USB storage device [FILE] → [F3] LOAD These instructions describe how to recall the data saved as a file type “All (extension: W7A)” described on page 132 from the SmartMedia/ USB storage device to the instrument by using the Load operation. CAUTION Loading a file (extension: W7A) to this synthesizer automatically erases and replaces all existing data in the User memory. Make sure to save any important data to a SmartMedia/USB storage device before performing any Load operations. n • Enter the Voice mode if you wish to assign the Waveform to a Voice. • Select a Performance in the Performance mode if you wish to assign the Waveform to a Part of the Performance. • Select a Song in the Song mode if you wish to assign the Waveform to a Part of the Song. • Select a Pattern in the Pattern mode if you wish to assign the Waveform to a Part of the Pattern. Saving a Sample Voice as a WAV file/AIFF file After inserting a SmartMedia into the CARD slot or connecting the USB storage device to the instrument, follow the instructions below. 1 2 3 In the Song mode/Pattern mode, select a Song/ Pattern including the desired Sample, press the [FILE] button to enter the File mode, then execute the basic settings. Refer to “Basic settings for using SmartMedia or a USB storage device” on page 30. Press the [F2] SAVE button to call up the Save display. Set the TYPE parameter to “Wav” or “Aiff,” press the [ENTER] button, then select a sample to be saved. Select the track containing the sample to be saved. If you wish to select and load a specified Waveform in the file (extension: W7A), enter the File mode (in step #1 below) after executing the following operations: Quick Guide — Advanced Course 5 n If you wish to select and load a specified Sample Voice in the file (extension: W7A), enter the File mode (in step #1 below) after executing the following operations: • Select a Song in the Song mode if you wish to assign the Sample Voice to a Song. • Select a Pattern in the Pattern mode if you wish to assign the Sample Voice to a Pattern. 1 Press the [FILE] button to enter the File mode, then execute the basic settings. Refer to “Basic settings for using SmartMedia or a USB storage device” on page 30. 2 Press the [F3] LOAD button to call up the Load display. 3 Select a file type to be loaded. You can load the file (extension: W7A) saved as “All” by selecting one of the following file types. You can hear the selected sample by pressing the [SF1] button. (Audition function) 4 This is available only when the cursor is located at KeyBank. Each press of the [SF2] SELECT button selects, one by one, the Key Banks assigned to specific velocity ranges for the selected key. Press the [ENTER] button to execute the Save operation. If you are about to overwrite an existing file, the display prompts you for confirmation. Press the [INC/ YES] button to execute the Save operation to overwrite an existing file, or press the [DEC/NO] button to cancel it. After the data has been saved, a “Completed” message appears and operation returns to the original display. All All data in a file that is saved to the SmartMedia/USB storage device as an “All” type can be loaded and restored to this instrument. Voice A specified Voice in a file can be individually selected and loaded to this instrument. Performance A specified Performance in a file can be individually selected and loaded to this synthesizer. Song A specified Song in a file can be individually selected and loaded to this instrument. Pattern A specified Pattern in a file can be individually selected and loaded to this instrument. Waveform A specified Waveform in a file can be individually selected and loaded to this instrument. Sample Voice A specified Sample Voice in a file can be individually selected and loaded to this instrument. Owner’s Manual 133 Creating a Song on the MOTIF ES 4 Select a file ( ) to be loaded. Move the cursor to the file (extension: W7A) which was saved as “All” on previous page. When Type is set to “All,” go to step #5. When Type is set to something other than “All,” follow the instructions below then go to step #5. ● When Type is set to “Voice” or “Performance”: You can select and load a specified Voice or Performance in the file (extension: W7A) to this instrument. Move the cursor to the file (extension: W7A) which was saved as “All” on previous page. ENTER EXECUTE All Voices or Performances in the selected file are listed. Move the cursor to the desired Voice or Performance to be loaded. ENTER EXECUTE Select the desired Voice or Performance. Quick Guide — Advanced Course Select the destination Voice number or Performance number. ● When Type is set to “Song” or “Pattern”: You can select and load a specified Song or Pattern in the file (extension: W7A) to this instrument. Move the cursor to the file (extension: W7A) which was saved as “All” on previous page. ENTER EXECUTE All Songs or Patterns in the selected file are listed. Move the cursor to the desired Song or Pattern to be loaded. ENTER EXECUTE Select the desired Song or Pattern. Select the destination Song number or Pattern number. ● When Type is set to “Waveform”: You can select and load a specified Waveform in the file (extension: W7A) to this instrument. Move the cursor to the file (extension: W7A) which was saved as “All” on previous page. ENTER EXECUTE All Waveforms in the selected file are listed. Move the cursor to the desired Waveform to be loaded. ENTER EXECUTE Select the desired Waveform. Select the destination. (See below.) In this case, the destination differs depending on the mode selected before entering the File mode. 134 When entering the File mode from the Voice mode: Set the Voice bank and number as the destination. When entering the File mode from the Performance mode: Set the Part of the current Performance then set the Voice bank/number of the Part as the destination. When entering the File mode from the Song mode/Pattern mode: Set the track of the current Song/Pattern as the destination. Owner’s Manual Creating a Song on the MOTIF ES ● When Type is set to “Sample Voice”: Only when entering the File mode from the Song mode/Pattern mode, you can select and load a specified Sample Voice in the file (extension: W7A) to this instrument. ENTER Move the cursor to the file (extension: W7A) which was saved as “All” on previous page. ENTER Select “Pattern” or “Song.” EXECUTE EXECUTE All Songs or Patterns which contain the Sample Voices are listed. Move the cursor to the desired Song or Pattern. ENTER EXECUTE ENTER EXECUTE Select the track of the current Song or Pattern as destination. Quick Guide — Advanced Course All Sample Voices assigned to the selected Song or Pattern in the selected file are listed. Move the cursor to the desired Sample Voice to be loaded. CAUTION Loading data to this synthesizer automatically erases and replaces any existing data in the User memory. Make sure to save any important data to a SmartMedia/USB storage device before performing any Load operations. 5 Press the [ENTER] button to execute the Load operation. After the data has been loaded, a “Completed” message appears and operation returns to the original display. CAUTION While the data is being saved, make sure to follow these precautions: • Never remove or eject the media from the device (SmartMedia or USB storage). • Never unplug or disconnect any of the devices. • Never turn off the power of the MOTIF ES or the relevant devices. TIP Setting a specific file to load automatically when the power is turned on The MOTIF ES is very easy to use and you can create Voices, Performances, Patterns and Songs very quickly on it. However, there may be times that creating and editing of data may be spread out over several sessions. In such a case, you may find it convenient to have the instrument automatically load the appropriate files for you when you turn it on, so you can easily resume your editing session. Save the data after editing. The saved files are loaded automatically when you turn the power on next time. Turn the power off Auto Load Save MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER n The Auto Load parameter is set to on when this synthesizer is shipped from the factory. n The file types which can be loaded automatically are “All,” “Plugin All Bulk 1,” “Plugin All Bulk 2,” and “Plugin All Bulk 3.” 1 MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER 2 3 Change the names of the files you wish to have load automatically when the power is turned on as described below, and save them together in a single folder or in the root directory. File type File name All AUTOLOAD. W7A Plugin All Bulk 1 (for slot 1) AUTOLD1. W7B Plugin All Bulk 2 (for slot 2) AUTOLD2. W7B Plugin All Bulk 3 (for slot 3) AUTOLD3. W7B After you’ve finished naming the appropriate files, keep the corresponding folder selected in the display and go to step #2. Enter the Utility mode and call up the Auto Load display ([UTILITY] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF4] OTHER). Set “Auto Load” to on, and press the [SF5] GET button. The device and folder selected in step #1 (the folder containing the desired files for auto loading) are registered as the Auto Load path. Set this to on. 4 Press the [STORE] button to store the Auto Load setting. n If the Auto Load files cannot be found (for example, a SmartMedia/USB storage device is not installed properly or a SmartMedia/USB storage device containing no Auto Load files is installed, etc.) when turning the power on even with the Auto Load parameter set to on, the Demo Song/ Pattern data (page 55) in the internal ROM will be loaded automatically. Owner’s Manual 135 Using as a Master Keyboard Using as a Master Keyboard This synthesizer is loaded with such a wealth of different features, functions and operations, you may find it difficult to locate and call up the particular feature you need. This is where the Master function comes in handy. You can use it to memorize the operations you use most often in each mode, and call them up instantly anytime you need them with a single button press. This synthesizer has space for a total of 128 of your own User Master settings. Master Number Setting examples Memorized mode Memorized program number Zone Switch * 001 Voice mode Voice number 102 (Preset 1) Off 002 Voice mode Voice number 088 (Preset 3) Off 003 Voice mode Voice number 049 (Preset 2) Off 004 Voice mode Voice number 092 (Preset 2) Off 005 Performance mode Performance number 044 Off : : 127 Pattern mode Pattern number 061 On 128 Song mode Song number 025 On : * See page 137 about “Zone Switch.” : Quick Guide — Advanced Course Selecting a Master The MOTIF ES features 128 specially programmed Masters, stored to internal User memory (Flash ROM). Try some of these out now. 1 Press the [MASTER] to enter the Master Play mode. MASTER Mode memorized to the current Master. Program number (Voice number in this example) memorized to the current Master. Indicates the Keyboard Octave setting set via the [OCTAVE] buttons. Same as in the Voice mode/Performance mode (page 63). Indicates the currently selected Master. Use the [SF1] - [SF5] buttons to call up the Arpeggio type assigned to each button (page 66). Assigned types depend on the program number memorized to the current Master. Indicates information related to the Control Knobs. The settings depend on the program number memorized to the current Master. 2 Select a Master. Selecting a Master is done in basically the same way as selecting a Voice. Since the there is only one bank for Masters, you need not select a Master Bank. 3 Play the selected Master program. When the Mode is set to Voice or Performance, play the keyboard. When the Mode is set to Song or Pattern, press the [F] (Play) button. SEQ TRANSPORT LOCATE 136 Owner’s Manual 1 2 Using as a Master Keyboard Memorize to a Master 1 Select a Master to be created. 2 Press the [F2] MEMORY button to call up the Mode setting display. 5 Store the edited Master to internal User memory. 1 Press the [STORE] button to enter the Master Store mode. 2 Select the destination Master by using the data dial, [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] button. 3 Set the Mode, Program number and Zone Switch on/off (page 138) which you wish to memorize to the Master. Determine the mode that is called up when the Master number is selected. Set the Zone Switch (below) to on or off. CAUTION When you execute the Store operation, the settings for the destination memory will be overwritten. Important data should always be backed up to a separate SmartMedia/USB storage device. 3 Press the [ENTER] button. (The display prompts you for Quick Guide — Advanced Course confirmation.) To cancel the Store operation, press the [DEC/NO] button. 4 Press the [INC/YES] button to execute the Store operation. Determine the Program number that is called up when the Master is selected. When the Mode is set to Voice Select a Voice bank and number. When the Mode is set to Performance Select a Performance bank and number. When the Mode is set to Song Select a Song number. When the Mode is set to Pattern Select a Pattern number. 4 Name the edited Master. Input a name in the [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F1] NAME display. For detailed instructions on naming, refer to page 53 in the Basic Operation section. CAUTION Keep in mind that the Store operation may take a short time to complete, during which an “Executing..” or “Please keep power on” message may be shown. Never attempt to turn off the power while data is being written to Flash ROM while such a message is displayed. Turning the power off in this state results in loss of all user data and may cause the system to freeze (due to corruption of data in the Flash ROM). This may also result in the MOTIF ES being unable to properly start up the next time the power is turned on. CAUTION If you select another Master without storing, the currently edited Master will be lost. Make sure to store the edited Master before selecting another Master. 6 As necessary, save the edited and stored Masters to a SmartMedia/USB storage device. For details, see page 132. Set the file type to “All.” Input a Master name. Using Zones (keyboard area) In the Master mode, you can divide the keyboard into (up to) four independent areas (called “Zones”). To each Zone can be assigned different MIDI channels and different functions of the Knobs and Control Sliders. This makes it possible to control several parts of the multi-timbral tone generator simultaneously by a single keyboard or to control voices of an external MIDI instrument over several different channels in addition to the internal voices of this synthesizer itself — letting you use the MOTIF ES to effectively do the work of several keyboards. You can set the parameters related to the four Zones in the Master Edit mode and store the settings as a User Master. 1 Select a Master to be created. Owner’s Manual 137 Using as a Master Keyboard 2 Press the [F2] MEMORY button to call up the Mode setting display. 3 After setting the Mode and Program number which you wish to memorize to the Master, set the Zone Switch to “on”. Set the Zone Switch to “on.” Determine the mode that is called up when the Master number is selected. Determine the Program number that is called up when the Master is selected. 4 Press the [EDIT] button to enter the Master Edit mode. Quick Guide — Advanced Course EDIT JOB STORE COMPARE 5 SCENE STORE SET LOCATE Call up the Common Edit display or Zone Edit display. Use Zone Edit to edit the parameters for each Zone. Use Common Edit to edit the parameters for all of the Zones. While in the Master Edit mode, you can switch between the Common Edit display and the Zone Edit display as shown below. Calling up the Common Edit display Press the [COMMON] button to call up the Common Edit display. In the Edit mode, the [DRUM KITS] button functions as the [COMMON] button. DRUM KITS PRE 5 PRE 6 USER 1 USER 2 Calling up the Zone Edit display FAVORITES A. PIANO KEYBOARD GUITAR/ PLUCKED GUITAR Press the desired Zone number from the ZONE [1] - [4] buttons to call up the Zone Edit display. A B C D SYN LEAD SYN PAD/ CHOIR SYN COMP CHROMATIC PERCUSSION 1 2 3 4 Indicates the display for editing Zone 1. Indicates a Common Edit display. ELEMENT/PERF. PART/ZONE COMMON 9 10 11 12 Zone 1 Edit Common Edit Zone 2 Edit Zone 3 Edit Zone 4 Edit 6 Select the menu you wish to edit by pressing the [F1] - [F6] and [SF1] - [SF5] buttons, then edit the parameters. See the next page for details and some setting examples. 7 Name the edited Master. Input a name in the [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F1] NAME display. For detailed instructions on naming, refer to page 53 in the Basic Operation section. 8 Store the edited Master to internal User memory. For details, refer to steps #5 - 6 on page 137. 138 Owner’s Manual Using as a Master Keyboard Using Zones effectively with external The two examples below show how to use the Zones with both the internal tone generator and a connected external tone generator. These instructions correspond to step #6 on the previous page. n Though all four Zones are used in the example below, you can use any number of Zones (two, three, or four). The settings are made with the MIDISwitch parameter ([MASTER] → [EDIT] → Zone selection → [F1] TRANS → MIDISwitch) and the TGSwitch parameter ([MASTER] → [EDIT] → Zone selection → [F1] TRANS → TGSwitch). n In these examples, the Zones are assigned to different areas of the keyboard. However, two or more Zones can also be assigned to the same area in a layer, from the NOTE display ([MASTER] → [EDIT] → Zone selection → [F2] NOTE). ■ Master settings with the Voice mode/Performance mode (Single-timbre tone generator mode) External tone generator (Multi-timbral) Corresponds to step #6 on the previous page Set the MIDI receive channel for each part. Quick Guide — Advanced Course For each Zone, set whether or not MIDI data is transmitted to the external instrument. [MASTER] → [EDIT] → Zone selection → [F1] TRANS → MIDISwitch Determine the MIDI Transmit Channel for each zone. MIDI Transmit Channel 1 MIDI Transmit Channel 2 MIDI Transmit Channel 3 MIDI Transmit Channel 4 [MASTER] → [EDIT] → Zone selection → [F1] TRANS → TransCh Determine the note range of each zone. [MASTER] → [EDIT] → Zone selection → [F2] NOTE → NoteLimitH [MASTER] → [EDIT] → Zone selection → [F2] NOTE → NoteLimitL For each Zone, set whether or not MIDI data is transmitted to each Part of the internal tone generator. [MASTER] → [EDIT] → Zone selection → [F1] TRANS → TGSwitch Internal tone generator (Single Timbre) [UTILITY] → [F5] MIDI → [SF1] CH → BasicRcvCh = 01 ■ Master settings with the Song mode/Pattern mode (Multi-timbral tone generator mode) External tone generator (Multi-timbral) Set the MIDI receive channel for each part. Corresponds to step #6 on the previous page For each Zone, set whether or not MIDI data is transmitted to the external instrument. [MASTER] → [EDIT] → Zone selection → [F1] TRANS → MIDISwitch MIDI Transmit Channel 1 MIDI Transmit Channel 2 MIDI Transmit Channel 3 MIDI Transmit Channel 4 Determine the MIDI Transmit Channel for each zone. [MASTER] → [EDIT] → Zone selection → [F1] TRANS → TransCh Determine the note range of each zone. [MASTER] → [EDIT] → Zone selection → [F2] NOTE → NoteLimitH [MASTER] → [EDIT] → Zone selection → [F2] NOTE → NoteLimitL For each Zone, set whether or not MIDI data is transmitted to each Part of the internal tone generator. [MASTER] → [EDIT] → Zone selection → [F1] TRANS → TGSwitch Part 05 Receive Channel 1 Part 13 Receive Channel 2 Internal tone generator (Multi-timbral) [SONG] → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → Part selection → [F1]VOICE → [SF2]MODE → ReceiveCh Owner’s Manual 139 Using as a Master Keyboard Assigning Control Change numbers to the Knobs/Sliders for each Zone Here in the KN/CS display of the Master Edit mode, you can set how the Control Knobs and Sliders will affect each Zone. This lets you specify a separate MIDI Control Change number for each Knob and Slider. Set the parameters as shown below, corresponding to step #6 on page 138. PAN/SEND ASSIGN TONE ASSIGN A ASSIGN B ASSIGN 1 PAN REVERB CHORUS TEMPO CUTOFF RESONANCE ATTACK RELEASE SWING GATE TIME VELOCITY UNITMULTIPLY ASSIGN 2 KNOB CONTROL FUNCTION ARP FX KN 1 LOW All indicators are turned off by setting the [MASTER] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F2] OTHER → Knob/Slider parameter to “zone.” Quick Guide — Advanced Course KN 2 LOW MID KN 3 HIGH MID KN 4 HIGH VOLUME 1 VOLUME 2 1 VOLUME 3 1 VOLUME 4 1 CS 1 CS 2 CS 3 CS 4 ZONE 1 ZONE 1 2 ZONE 1 3 ZONE 1 4 EQ MASTER VOLUME You can determine which Control Change numbers are used for the Knobs and Sliders for each zone in the [MASTER] → [EDIT] → Zone selection → [F5] KN/CS display. In the example above, the Control Knobs for all Zones have been set to 10 (Pan), and the Sliders have been set to 11 (Expression). In this way, you can control the stereo position of each Zone with the appropriate Knob, and use the Sliders to adjust the relative volume balance among the Zones. 140 Owner’s Manual Using as a Master Keyboard TIP Setting up the Master Zones to Split or Layer This operation lets you easily determine whether the Zones of the selected Master are to be used in a Split or a Layer. The note range settings for each Zone can be determined by setting the NoteLimitH and NoteLimitL parameters from the NOTE display ([MASTER] → [EDIT] → Zone selection → [F2] NOTE). n Zones 1 and 2 are used in the explanations here. 1 In the Master Play mode, press the [JOB] button to enter the Master Job mode. 2 Press the [F1] INIT button to call up the Initialize display. 3 Uncheckmark the box of “All” by using the [DEC/NO] button and checkmark the box of “Zone.” Quick Guide — Advanced Course 4 Set the Type to “Split” or “Layer.” When Type is set to “Split” Set the UpperCh (MIDI transmit channel of the upper range), LowerCh (MIDI transmit channel of the lower range), and Split Point (which separates the keyboard into the upper range and lower range). Lower Split Point (C3) Upper When Type is set to “Layer” Set the UpperCh (MIDI transmit channel of Zone 1) and LowerCh (MIDI transmit channel of Zone 2). Layer (Upper) Layer (Lower) 5 Press the [ENTER] button. (The display prompts you for confirmation.) To cancel the Job, press the [DEC/NO] button. 6 Press the [INC/YES] button to execute the Job. After the Job has been completed, a “Completed” message appears and operation returns to the original display. CAUTION Keep in mind that the Job may take a short time to complete, during which an “Executing..” or “Please keep power on” message may be shown. Never attempt to turn off the power while data is being written to Flash ROM while such a message is displayed. Turning the power off in this state results in loss of all user data and may cause the system to freeze (due to corruption of data in the Flash ROM). This may also result in the MOTIF ES being unable to properly start up the next time the power is turned on. Owner’s Manual 141 Setting up Quick Guide — Computer applications Although the MOTIF ES is a powerful instrument in its own right and can effectively be used by itself for music creation and production, it is also designed for easy and comprehensive interfacing with a computer system. In this section, we’ll show you how set up the instrument with a computer (via USB) and how to use it with the software provided on the included CD-ROM, “Tools for MOTIF ES.” n For information on how to install each software and the minimum system requirements, refer to the separate Installation Guide. n About how to use each software, refer to the relevant documentation (PDF manual or on-line Help). n By installing an optional mLAN16E board and using the mLAN connection with your computer, you can transfer both audio and MIDI data between the devices over the same mLAN cable. See page 39. Setting up 1 Confirm the minimum system requirements of the software you wish to use. 6 Install the desired software to the computer. Quick Guide — Computer applications • For software on the included “Tools for MOTIF ES” CD-ROM (Voice Editor, USB MIDI driver, etc.), refer to the separate Installation Guide. • To install software from the included “Tools for MOTIF ES” CD-ROM (Voice Editor, SQ01, etc.), refer to the separate Installation Guide. • For other software, refer to the relevant manual or documentation. • To install other software, refer to the relevant manual or documentation. 2 Connect the computer to the instrument with a USB cable. 7 USB TO DEVICE TO HOST USB connector Set the MIDI IN/OUT parameter to “USB” ([UTILITY] → [F5] MIDI → [SF4] OTHER), then press the [ENTER] button to store the Utility settings. USB TO HOST connector Rear panel A type n USB cable B type You can also connect the instrument to a computer by using MIDI cables (page 40) or IEEE1394 cable (page 39). EDIT 3 Start the computer and insert the “Tools for MOTIF ES” CD-ROM into the CD drive of the computer. 4 Turn the power of the MOTIF ES on. 5 Install the USB MIDI driver to the computer. • For a computer running Windows, the Add New Hardware Wizard may appear on the computer display. In this case, install the driver following the on-screen instructions. For details, refer to the separate Installation Guide. • For a Macintosh computer, install OMS then install the USB MIDI driver. Refer to the separate Installation Guide. n 142 If you have installed the optional mLAN16E and are connecting the instrument to a computer with an IEEE 1394 cable, you’ll need to install the mLAN driver. Owner’s Manual COMPARE JOB STORE SCENE STORE SET LOCATE CAUTION The settings in the Utility mode are stored as system settings to internal Flash ROM. Never attempt to turn off the power while data is being written to Flash ROM (while a “Please keep power on” message is shown). Turning the power off in this state results in loss of all user data and may cause the system to freeze (due to corruption of data in the Flash ROM). This may also result in the MOTIF ES being unable to properly start up the next time the power is turned on. Controlling the instrument from a computer Controlling the instrument from a computer Using a sequencer to play multiple Voices on the MOTIF ES The sequence software program SQ01 contained in the included CD-ROM lets you create and edit multi-part song data — which can be played using the sounds of the MOTIF ES. Follow the instructions described in “Setting up for using a computer” (page 142) then install the SQ01 to the computer. Refer to the separate Installation Guide. 2 Start the SQ01 on the computer then set all MIDIrelated parameters, including synchronization. For details on the MIDI settings, refer to the separate Installation Guide. For details on synchronization settings, refer to the on-line help of the SQ01. 3 Open the desired song file on the SQ01. From the “File” menus on the SQ01, select “Open” to call up the dialog box. Then select the desired song file. 4 Set the MIDI Sync parameter to “MIDI” and SeqCtrl to “in” in the SYNC display ([UTILITY] → [F5] MIDI → [SF3] SYNC). These settings make it possible for the Songs and Patterns on the MOTIF ES to start, play and stop in exact synchronization with the external controlling device (in this case, the computer sequencer). 5 Press the [SONG] button to enter the Song mode. 6 Start the song playback on the SQ01. Quick Guide — Computer applications 1 Click the [F] (Play) button on the SQ01 to start the selected song. TIP Recording sequencer song data to Song tracks on the MOTIF ES If you have MIDI sequence data on your computer and want to use it as a Song on the MOTIF ES, you can play back the data on a MIDI sequencer (such as the SQ01) and record it to the MOTIF ES. 1 Follow the instructions described in “Setting up for using a computer” (page 142). 2 Start the SQ01 on the computer then set all MIDIrelated parameters, including synchronization. For details on the MIDI settings, refer to the separate Installation Guide. For details on synchronization settings, refer to the online help of the SQ01. 3 Open the desired song file on the SQ01. From the “File” menus on the SQ01, select “Open” to call up the dialog box. Then select the desired song. 4 Set the MIDI Sync parameter to “MIDI” and the SeqCtrl to “in” in the SYNC display ([UTILITY] → [F5] MIDI → [SF3] SYNC). These settings make it possible for the Songs and Patterns on the MOTIF ES to start, play and stop in exact synchronization with the SQ01. 5 Press the [SONG] button to enter the Song Play mode, then select a Song to be recorded. 6 Press the [●] (Record) button to enter the Song Record mode. 7 Set RecTrack to “multi.” This setting makes it possible to record MIDI sequence data to 16 tracks simultaneously. 8 Start song playback on the SQ01. Song recording on the MOTIF ES automatically starts at the same time. 9 Stop the song playback on the SQ01. Song recording on the MOTIF ES automatically stops at the same time. 10 Save the recorded song on the MOTIF ES. Before selecting a different Song, store the Mixing settings as Song data (page 131). Before turning the power off, save the recorded Song to a SmartMedia/USB storage device (page 132). Owner’s Manual 143 Controlling the instrument from a computer Using the Multi Part Editor to create/edit Mixing settings The Multi Part Editor software (included on the CD-ROM) provides an intuitive way to create and edit the Mixing settings of the currently selected Song or Pattern. Thanks to the easy-to-understand graphical interface, you can edit virtually all of the Mixing parameters right from your computer – using the mouse to adjust the virtual knobs, sliders, and buttons and entering values from the computer keyboard. Edit the Mixing Save a set of Mixing settings as a single file. To edit Mixing settings based on data saved to computer, make sure to transfer the Mixing data to the current Song/Pattern on the MOTIF ES (with the Bulk Transmission function) before editing. MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER To edit Mixing settings based on data contained on the MOTIF ES, make sure to transfer the Mixing data of the current Song/ Pattern to the computer (with the Bulk Dump function) before editing. After storing the Mixing settings as a Song Mixing/Pattern Mixing, save all the Songs/Patterns. SmartMedia/USB storage device Quick Guide — Computer applications n If you want to assign a User Voice to a Part, make sure to transfer the User Voice data on the MOTIF ES to the computer (with the Bulk Dump function) before editing parameters on the Multi Part Editor. n Parts to which Mixing Voices have been assigned cannot be edited with the Multi Part Editor. 1 Follow the instructions described in “Setting up for using a computer” (page 142) then install the Multi Part Editor to the computer. For details about how to install the Multi Part Editor, refer to the separate Installation Guide. 2 3 Enter the Song mode or Pattern mode on the MOTIF ES, then select the desired Song or Pattern. Start the Multi Part Editor on the computer. Refer to the PDF manual of the Multi Part Editor. 4 Set the MIDI related parameters on the Multi Part Editor. Refer to the PDF manual of the Multi Part Editor. 5 Edit the parameters on the Multi Part Editor to create your original Mixing. Refer to the PDF manual of the Multi Part Editor. 6 144 Check the results of your edits by playing the Song/Pattern or playing the keyboard on the MOTIF ES. Owner’s Manual 7 Store the edited Mixing settings to the current Song Mixing/Pattern Mixing. Press the [MIXING] button then [STORE] button to enter the Song Mixing mode/Pattern Mixing mode, then press the [ENTER] button to execute the Store operation. 8 n 9 Save all the songs or patterns to a SmartMedia/ USB storage device. You can store the settings as a Mixing Template. See page 132. Also save the edited data as a Multi Part Editor file to your computer’s hard disk. Controlling the instrument from a computer Using the Voice Editor to create/edit a Voice The Voice Editor software (included on the CD-ROM) provides an intuitive way to create and edit Voices for the MOTIF ES. Thanks to the easy-to-understand graphical interface, you can edit virtually all of the Voice parameters right from your computer – using the mouse to adjust the virtual knobs, sliders, and buttons and entering values from the computer keyboard. Edit the Voice Use the Bulk Transmission function to transfer the edited Voice data (in a Voice bank) to the MOTIF ES. MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER Use the Bulk Receive function to transfer the specified User Voice bank from the MOTIF ES to the computer. Save the result of editing as a Library file (extension: W7E). Load a Voice Editor file (extension: W7E). SmartMedia/USB storage device Quick Guide — Computer applications Save the result of editing as a Voice Editor file (extension: W7E). Load a Library file (extension: W7E). Library file = Voice Editor file (extension: W7E) All voices stored on internal User memory are saved to a single file which can be loaded to the Voice Editor on the computer. 1 Follow the instructions described in “Setting up for using a computer” (page 142) then install the Voice Editor to the computer. 5 Edit the parameters on the Voice Editor to create your original Voice. Refer to the PDF manual of the Voice Editor. For details about how to install the Voice Editor, refer to the separate Installation Guide. 2 Enter the Voice mode on the MOTIF ES, then start the Voice Editor on the computer. 6 After editing the Voice, store the data, then transfer it to the MOTIF ES with the Bulk Transmission function on the Voice Editor. Refer to the PDF manual of the Voice Editor. Refer to the PDF manual of the Multi Part Editor. CAUTION 3 Set the MIDI related parameters on the Voice Editor. The Bulk Transmission from the computer to the MOTIF ES will erase (overwrite) the destination Voice Bank data on the MOTIF ES. If you wish to maintain the voices of the destination Bank, save the Voice data to a SmartMedia/USB storage device before executing Bulk Transmission. Refer to the PDF manual of the Voice Editor. 4 Call up the Voice data to be edited on the Voice Editor. Create a new Library file or open an existing Library file. To edit data contained on the MOTIF ES, use the Bulk Receive function to transfer User Voice data to the computer. For details, refer to the PDF manual of the Voice Editor. 7 Save the edited data as a Library file to your computer’s hard disk. 8 Check the results of your edits by selecting the User Voice and playing the keyboard in the Voice Play mode. Owner’s Manual 145 Controlling the instrument from a computer Editing Plug-in Voices and Board Voices As described on page 76, the voices of a Plug-in Board installed to the MOTIF ES can be divided into two types: Board voices and Plug-in voices. Plug-in Voices can be edited in the Voice Edit mode on the MOTIF ES or can be edited by using the Voice Editor on the computer. Board Voices, however, are edited using the dedicated editor software contained on the included CD-ROM, “TOOLS for Modular Synthesis Plug-in System.” ■ Plug-in Voice Plug-in Preset Voice Plug-in User Voice Select and call up Edit in the Voice Play mode/Voice Edit. Store Voice Play display Use the Voice Editor contained in the included CD-ROM, “TOOLS for MOTIF ES6/7/8.” or Select Voice Edit display MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER Plug-in Board Quick Guide — Computer applications Save* SmartMedia/USB storage device Computer MOTIF ES ■ Board Voice Use the dedicated Editor contained in the included CD-ROM, “TOOLS for Modular Synthesis Plug-in System.” Save Board Custom Voice Bulk transmission/Edit Board Preset Voice * Set the file type to Plugin All Bulk 1, 2 or 3 (file extension: W2B) Using the TWE Wave Editor to edit Samples The TWE wave editing software (included on the CD-ROM) lets you edit audio on your computer and save them as samples for use with the MOTIF ES. Thanks to the easy-to-understand graphical interface, you can edit virtually all of the wave parameters right from your computer. Edit the Wave using TWE MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER Save the result of editing as a WAV file or AIFF file. Load a WAV file or AIFF file (page 100). SmartMedia/USB storage device Load a WAV file or AIFF file. 146 Save the sample as a WAV file or AIFF file (page 97). n For details on how to install TWE and the minimum system requirements, refer to the separate Installation Guide. n For information on how to use TWE, refer to the TWE manual (PDF format) on the CD-ROM. Owner’s Manual Controlling a computer from the instrument Controlling a computer from the instrument As you’ve seen in previous sections, the MOTIF ES can be controlled from a computer. In this section, we’ll see how it can do the opposite — control the operation of music/audio software on the computer. This powerful feature lets you control two different software programs by using knobs, sliders and buttons on the panel of the MOTIF ES, rather than your computer’s mouse and keyboard. The MOTIF ES can be used to control DAW (digital audio workstation) software, such as Cubase SX and SONAR, as well as the Multi Part Editor program (contained on the included CD-ROM). The Remote Control function emulates popular hardware controllers such as the Yamaha 01X, letting you use the panel buttons/controllers on the MOTIF ES for controlling your music/audio software. As shown in the example below, the MOTIF ES uses two of the four available USB ports to control two different software programs, while the two remaining ports handle MIDI sequence data. Mode A- Cubase, Port 4.... Panel operations on the MOTIF ES control sequencer (Cubase SX) functions on the computer via MIDI port 4. ON / OFF R-AUDIO G-MIDI Panel operations on the MOTIF ES control Mode B- General, Port 3.... mixing software (Multi Part Editor) functions Change the software (port) to be controlled. on the computer via MIDI port 3. The “General” mode setting lets you control Yamaha software. Quick Guide — Computer applications Press the REMOTE [ON/ OFF] button (the lamp flashes) to enter the Remote Control mode. Press this button again to exit from the Remote Control mode. REMOTE USB cable The MIDI data played back by the Cubase SX is transferred to the MOTIF ES via the MIDI ports 1 and 2. USB TO HOST connector Multi Part Editor (Mixing software) MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER Cubase SX (DAW software) Computer with a USB interface n SEQ TRANSPORT LOCATE DEC/NO 1 2 INC / YES Among other things, the Remote Control mode lets you start/stop the playback of the DAW software on the computer by using the SEQ TRANSPORT buttons and control the song position on the DAW software by using the data dial, [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons. For more information about the functions assigned to the panel buttons in the Remote Control mode, see page 151. As with the USB connection explained here, Remote Control can also be used with an IEEE1394 cable connection when the optional mLAN16E has been installed. Various functions are assigned to the [F1] - [F6] and [SF1] - [SF5] buttons depending on the DAW software to be controlled. The assigned functions are shown at the bottom of the display. For details, see page 151 and the separate Data List. The functions of eight knobs/faders on the emulated hardware controllers (such as the Yamaha 01X) are assigned to the four Knobs/Sliders on the MOTIF ES. Pressing the [SF5] button changes which group's functions (1 - 4 or 5 - 8) are assigned to the four Knobs/Sliders. The eight knobs on the emulated hardware controllers (such as the Yamaha 01X) can also be used as switches. However, since the four Knobs on the MOTIF ES do not have switch capability, the [PRE1] - [PRE4] buttons are used instead. While the eight knobs on the emulated devices have “endless” rotary control, the four Knobs on the MOTIF ES stop at certain points. For some parameters this may mean that the value may not reach to the minimum and maximum points. If this occurs, you can use the data dial to adjust the value as desired. The data dial is active for the parameter corresponding to the Knob last turned. Owner’s Manual 147 Controlling a computer from the instrument ■ Computer Software that can be controlled from the instrument • For Windows • For Macintosh SQ01 V2 Logic 5.5 Cubase SX Digital Performer 3.1 SONAR 2.0 Multi Part Editor for MOTIF-RACK Multi Part Editor for MOTIF ES6/7/8 Setting up for Remote Control Setting up on the MOTIF ES 1 Quick Guide — Computer applications Set the MIDI IN/OUT parameter to “USB” ([UTILITY] → [F5] MIDI → [SF4] OTHER), When connecting the computer to the MOTIF ES via mLAN (with the optional mLAN16E installed), set this parameter to “mLAN.” 2 Call up the Remote Control Setup display by pressing the [F4] CTL ASN button, followed by the [SF4] REMOTE button. 3 Set the software to be controlled and Port number, referring to the illustration on the previous page. Setting up on the computer 1 For details on the Yamaha software contained in the included CD-ROM, refer to the separate Installation Guide. 2 Press the [ENTER] button to actually call up the settings made in step #3 above. 5 Press the [STORE] button to store the settings made in steps #1 and 4 above. CAUTION The settings in the Utility mode are actually stored on internal User memory (Flash ROM) by pressing the [STORE] button. Please keep in mind that the settings will be lost if you turn off the power without executing the Store operation. CAUTION The settings in the Utility mode are stored as system settings to internal Flash ROM. Never attempt to turn off the power while data is being written to Flash ROM (while a “Please keep power on” message is shown). Turning the power off in this state results in loss of all user data and may cause the system to freeze (due to corruption of data in the Flash ROM). This may also result in the MOTIF ES being unable to properly start up the next time the power is turned on. 148 Owner’s Manual Enter the Song mode or Pattern mode on the MOTIF ES, then start the software on the computer. For instructions on how to start the software, refer to the relevant documentation. 3 4 After following the instructions in “Setting up for using a computer” on page 147, install the desired software to your computer. Set the parameters related to MIDI and Remote Control on the computer software. Set the MIDI port, referring to the illustration on the previous page. For details, refer to the documentation of the particular software. Instructions on how to set up the various software follow on the next page. Controlling a computer from the instrument 1 Pull down the [Devices] menu and select [Device Setup] to call up the “Device Setup” window. 2 Click the [Add/Remove] tab and add the “Mackie Control.” 3 Select the added Mackie Control device and click the [Setup] tab. 4 When setting the Port to “4,” for example, in step #3 of “Setting up on the MOTIF ES,” set the MIDI Input to “YAMAHA USB IN 0-4” and the MIDI Output to “YAMAHA USB OUT 0-4.” n The functions of buttons on the Mackie Control are assigned to the buttons of the MOTIF ES, with the exception of UserA and UserB (FootSw) which are not supported by the MOTIF ES. ■ SONAR 1 Pull down the [Options] menu and select [MIDI Devices] to call up the “MIDI Devices” window. 2 When setting the Port to “4” for example in step #3 of “Setting up on the MOTIF ES,” add “YAMAHA USB IN 0-4” to the “Inputs” and add “YAMAHA USB OUT 0-4” to the “Outputs.” 3 Pull down the [Options] menu and select [Control Surfaces] to call up the Control Surface window. 4 Click the “New” icon, select “Mackie Control,” then set the Input Port to “YAMAHA USB IN 0-4” and the Output Port to “YAMAHA USB OUT 0-4” (for example, when setting the Port to “4” in step #3 of “Setting up on the MOTIF ES”). ■ Digital Performer 1 Pull down the [Basics] menu and select [Control Surface Setup] to call up the “Control Surface” window. 2 Select “Mackie Control” in the Driver section. If Mackie Control is not available here, see the supplementary instructions below. 3 In the box for setting “Unit” and “MIDI,” select “Mackie Control” in the “Unit” section and select the MIDI port in the “MIDI” section. ■ Logic When turning on the power of the MOTIF ES before starting Logic: 1 Set the software to be controlled to “Logic” in the Utility mode, then enter the Remote Control mode. 2 Start Logic on the computer. Logic automatically recognizes the MOTIF ES and performs the required settings. When starting Logic before turning on the power of the MOTIF ES: 1 Start Logic on the computer, then turn the power to the MOTIF ES on. If you have already set the software to be controlled to “Logic” in the Utility mode, you need not perform step #2 because Logic automatically recognizes the MOTIF ES when this step is performed. 2 Set the software to be controlled to “Logic” in the Utility Quick Guide — Computer applications ■ Cubase SX mode, then enter the Remote Control mode. Logic automatically recognizes the MOTIF ES and performs the required settings. If for some reason Logic fails to recognize the MOTIF ES, follow the instructions below. 1) Select [Option] → [Preference] → [Control Surface] → [Install] from the menu. 2) Scan Logic Control on the window called up in step #1). When the scanning is successful, the Logic recognizes the MOTIF ES and performs the required settings automatically. If Logic still fails to recognize the MOTIF ES even after performing the above instructions, follow the instructions below. 1) Select [Option] → [Preference] → [Control Surface] → [Install] from the menu. 2) Add Logic Control on the window called up in step #1). 3) Specify the Input Port and Output Port on the CONTROL SURFACE SETUP window called up in step #2). * Logic Control is the registered trademark of Emagic, Inc. ■ SQ01 When you cannot select “Mackie Control” in step #2: For information about how to set the MIDI port, refer to the separate Installation Guide. For information on using Remote Control, follow the instructions below. 1) Download the Mackie Control Plug-in software from “www.motu.com” and save it to your hard disk. 1 Select [Setup] → [Remote Control] to call up the 2) Move the Mackie Control file to the “Plug-ins” folder contained in the folder to which Digital Performer has been installed. 2 Select “01X” as mode, then set the Input Device/Output Remote Control Setup window. Device to the appropriate port number. 3) Start Digital Performer. * Mackie Control is the trademark of Mackie Designs, Inc. Owner’s Manual 149 Controlling a computer from the instrument Functions assigned to the panel buttons in the Remote Control mode To enter the Remote Control mode, press the REMOTE [ON/OFF] button (the lamp flashes). The REMOTE display appears (like those shown below), and the panel controls are enabled for Remote operation of the computer software (their normal functions are disabled). Press this button again to exit from the Remote Control mode. REMOTE ON / OFF Mode A This button is available when the Mode is set to “General” and is used to switch between editing audio tracks (lamp is red) and MIDI tracks of the sequence software (lamp is green). R-AUDIO G-MIDI Changing the Mode (Changing the software to be controlled) Mode B REMOTE F6 ON / OFF R-AUDIO G-MIDI Quick Guide — Computer applications Change the Mode by pressing the REMOTE [ON/OFF] button while holding the [F6] SHIFT button. Press the [KNOB CONTROL FUNCTION] button to change the functions assigned to the [F1] - [F6] and [SF1] [SF5] buttons (shown at the bottom of the display). Refer to the separate Data List. This is the cursor which indicates the currently edited track/part by the knob/slider. Controlling the knob/slider moves the cursor to the corresponding track/part automatically. You can also move the cursor by using the Cursor [<] and [>] buttons. Parameters and their values controlled by knobs/ sliders are shown in two rows, in the boxes. Parameter names are shown according to the information transferred from the DAW software on the computer. The characters may be garbled depending on the DAW software or OS language of your computer. When [<<BANK] and [BANK>>] are shown here, you can use the [F4] and [F5] buttons to change the bank of eight tracks/parts (shown in the display) to be controlled. PAN/SEND ASSIGN TONE KNOB CONTROL FUNCTION SF5 ARP FX EQ 150 n Controlling the knob may change the [SF4] menu to indicate [DIAL]. When [DIAL] is shown here, the function of the last operated knob is assigned to the data dial, [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons. If you wish to restore these to the original function (song position control), press the [SF4] button to delete the [DIAL] menu. Owner’s Manual To switch the cursor between the upper and lower row, press the [SF5] button. Controlling a computer from the instrument The following explains which sequencer functions are assigned to which panel controls in the Remote Control mode. ■ SEQ TRANSPORT buttons ■ Control Sliders The Remote Control mode lets you start/stop playback of the DAW software on the computer by using the SEQ TRANSPORT buttons and control the song position on the DAW software by using the data dial, [INC/YES] and [DEC/ NO] buttons. The functions of eight faders on the Mackie Control, Logic Control and 01X are assigned to the four Sliders on the MOTIF ES. Pressing the [SF5] button changes which group’s functions (1 - 4 or 5 - 8) are assigned to the four Sliders. When [<<BANK] and [BANK>>] are shown in the display, you can use the [F4] and [F5] buttons to change the bank of eight tracks/parts (shown in the display) to be controlled. When the cursor is shown at any track/part in the boxes of two rows of the LCD display, the data dial, [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons function as the last operated knob and cannot be used to control the song position. To restore these to the original song position control, press the Cursor [<]/[>] buttons several times or press the [SF4] button (if the [DIAL] menu is shown) to delete the cursor. ■ Knob, Data dial, and [PRE1] - [PRE4] buttons The functions of eight knobs on the emulated hardware controllers (such as the Yamaha 01X) are assigned to the four Knobs on the MOTIF ES. Pressing the [SF5] button changes which group’s functions (1 - 4 or 5 - 8) are assigned to the four Knobs. When [<<BANK] and [BANK>>] are shown in the display, you can use the [F4] and [F5] buttons to change the bank of eight tracks/parts (shown in the display) to be controlled. The eight knobs on the emulated hardware controllers (such as the Yamaha 01X) can also be used as switches. However, since the four Knobs on the MOTIF ES do not have switch capability, the [PRE1] - [PRE4] buttons are used instead. For convenience, the switch function corresponding to the last Knob operated is also assigned automatically to the [ENTER] button. While the eight knobs on the emulated devices have “endless” rotary control, the four Knobs on the MOTIF ES stop at certain points. With some parameters this may mean that the value may not reach to the minimum and maximum points. If this occurs, you can use the data dial to adjust the value as desired. For convenience, the data dial is active for the parameter corresponding to the Knob last turned. n To restore the function of the data dial, [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons to the original song position control, press the [SF4] button (if the [DIAL] menu is shown) to delete the cursor. ■ [F1] - [F6] buttons and [SF1] - [SF5] buttons The functions assigned to these buttons depends on the selected Mode (A or B) and the particular software being used (as set in step #3 in “Setting up on the MOTIF ES” on page 148). When the Mode is set to “General,” these buttons are assigned to perform the same functions as panel buttons on the Yamaha 01X, for controlling various Yamaha music/audio software. The corresponding names of the 01X panel buttons are also indicated at the bottom of the display of the MOTIF ES. Quick Guide — Computer applications n When the Mode is set to “Logic,” these buttons are assigned to perform the same functions as panel buttons on the Logic Control, for controlling Logic on the computer. The corresponding names of the Logic Control panel buttons are also indicated at the bottom of the display of the MOTIF ES. When the Mode is set to “Cubase” or “SONAR” or “D.Perf,” these buttons are assigned to perform the same functions as panel buttons on the Mackie Control, for controlling the corresponding software on the computer. The corresponding names of the Mackie Control panel buttons are also indicated at the bottom of the display of the MOTIF ES. The function assignment can be changed by pressing the [KNOB CONTROL FUNCTION] buttons. The function assignment tables of the [F1] - [F6] buttons and [SF1] - [SF5] buttons for each DAW software are contained in the separate Data List. n Among the functions assigned to the [F1] - [F6] buttons and [SF1] [SF5] buttons, the functions indicated with brackets (such as [DIAL]) are not related to the Mackie Control, Logic Control and 01X but are unique to the MOTIF ES. ■ Data dial, [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons Although the data dial and [INC/YES]/[DEC/NO] buttons are generally to change the song position on the DAW software, when you turn one of the Knobs on the MOTIF ES, the control function assigned to that Knob is automatically assigned to these panel controls as well, and the [DIAL] menu appears (at the [SF4] button). In this condition, these controllers cannot be used to control the song position. To restore the function of the data dial, [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons to the original song position control, press the [SF4] button (if the [DIAL] menu is shown) to delete the [DIAL] menu. Owner’s Manual 151 Controlling a computer from the instrument ■ Cursor [<] and [>] buttons By moving the cursor left/right, you can change the track or part to controlled by the data dial and [INC/YES]/[DEC/NO] buttons. For example, when the cursor is at the upper box in the display, pressing the Cursor [>] button moves through the columns in succession (1, 2, 3, 4...). After 4, the cursor is hidden and wraps around to 1. When the cursor is shown in the display, the parameter at which the cursor is located can be edited by the data dial, [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons. When the cursor is hidden, the data dial and [INC/YES]/[DEC/ NO] buttons can be used for their normal function — controlling the song position. Checking the Remote Control assignments If you’re unsure as to which software function has been assigned to a particular panel control on the MOTIF ES, this convenient feature lets you quickly check it from the display. 1 2 In the Remote Control mode, press the [INFORMATION] button to call up the information display, indicating the function of the last pressed button. Press the button for which you want to check the assignment. ■ Cursor [ ] and [ ] buttons Quick Guide — Computer applications When the Mode is set to “General,” the Cursor [ ]/[ ] buttons perform the same function as that of the DISPLAY [ ]/[ ] buttons on the 01X. When the Mode is set to something other than “General,” the Cursor [ ]/[ ] buttons perform the same function as that of the Cursor [ ]/[ ] buttons on the Mackie Control and Logic Control. This display shown above appears when you press the [F] (Play) button of SEQ TRANSPORT. In this way, you can check each button’s control assignment simply by pressing it. ■ [EXIT] button When the Mode is set to “General,” this button performs the same function as that of the [PAGE SHIFT] button on the 01X. When the Mode is set to something other than “General,” the button has no control function. ■ BANK, GROUP and NUMBER button These buttons are assigned to perform the same functions as the buttons directly over the faders on the 01X, Mackie Control and Logic Control. 152 [PRE1] - [PRE4] buttons The eight knobs on the 01X, Mackie Control and Logic Control can also be used as switches. However, since the four Knobs on the MOTIF ES do not have switch capability, the [PRE1] - [PRE4] buttons are used instead. [PRE5] - [PLG3] buttons The functions of the eight [REC/RDY] buttons on the Mackie Control and Logic Control are assigned to these buttons. Please note that these buttons are not available when the Mode is set to “General.” [A] - [H] buttons The functions of the eight [SOLO] buttons on the Mackie Control and Logic Control are assigned to these buttons. Please note that these buttons are not available when the Mode is set to “General.” [1] - [8] and [TRACK SELECT] buttons When the Mode is set to “General,” the functions of the nine [SEL] buttons on the 01X are assigned to these buttons. When the Mode is set to something other than “General,” the functions of the eight [MUTE] buttons on the Mackie Control and Logic Control are assigned to the [1] - [8] buttons. [9] - [16] and [MUTE] buttons When the Mode is set to “General,” the functions of the nine [ON] buttons on the 01X are assigned to these buttons. When the Mode is set to something other than “General,” the functions of the eight [SELECT] buttons on the Mackie Control and Logic Control are assigned to the [9] - [16] buttons. Owner’s Manual 3 Press the [INFORMATION] button again to return to the Remote Control mode. n While the Information display is shown, the panel buttons cannot be used to control the computer software. Controlling a computer from the instrument Recording the sounds of the MOTIF ES to computer via mLAN By using the optional mLAN16E interface and an IEEE 1394 cable connection, you can record multitrack audio from the MOTIF ES to an mLAN-compatible DAW (digital audio workstation) program on your computer. This lets you transfer the audio data of multi-part Songs on the MOTIF ES to the DAW application for further editing and storage on your computer’s hard disk drive. In the example instructions below, Song playback and/or your keyboard performance in the Song mode can be recorded to the computer, on separate tracks of the DAW application. Audio signal of the MOTIF ES sound mLAN16E mLAN input MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER Computer with an IEEE1394 interface Quick Guide — Computer applications MOTIF ES Setup for connecting the computer to the MOTIF ES via mLAN Setup on the MOTIF ES installed, these indicate the different audio channels within the single mLAN connection. 1 Install the optional mLAN16E to the MOTIF ES (page 288). 2 After turning the power on, set the MIDI IN/OUT parameter to “mLAN” ([UTILITY] → [F5] MIDI → [SF4] OTHER). 3 Press the [SONG] button to enter the Song mode and select the desired Song for playback, or the particular Mixing settings you want to use. 4 Set the mLAN MonitorSw parameter to “on” ([UTILITY] → [F2] I/O → [SF2] OUTPUT). When this parameter is set to on, the audio signal output via mLAN to the computer is also output to the external audio equipment via the main OUTPUT L/MONO and R jacks. This allows you to monitor the sound going to the computer with a set of headphones. Setup on the computer 1 Connect the computer to the MOTIF ES using an IEEE1394 cable. 2 Install all necessary software to the computer, including the mLAN driver. Refer to the relevant documentation for the mLAN16E. 3 Install an mLAN-compatible audio sequencer or DAW application to the computer. Refer to the separate Installation Guide for information on how to install mLAN-compatible Yamaha applications. 4 Set the audio related parameters on the DAW 5 Determine the Output connector or channel of audio signal for each part. Make the desired OutputSel parameter settings ([SONG] → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → Part selection → [F2] OUTPUT → [SF3] SELECT). For example, set the OutputSel parameter for Part 1 to “as1&2,” Part 2 to “as3&4,” and Part 3 to “as5&6.” These settings (as1&2, as3&4, etc.) indicate the hardware output jacks on the optional AIEB2, when the device has been installed. When the mLAN16E is software. Refer to the relevant documentation for the particular software. Executing the Hard Disk Recording After completing the setup described above, try out to record your keyboard performance to the hard disk of the computer by using the DAW software. For details about how to execute this, refer to the relevant document of the software. Owner’s Manual 153 Internal Structure (System Overview) Basic Structure This section gives you an easy-to-understand overview of the MOTIF ES — its wide range of sophisticated features, its MIDI control and performance functions, and its convenient file management system for original data you’ve created with the instrument. Internal Structure (System Overview) This synthesizer is made up of several blocks, as shown here. Controller block Keyboard VOLUME 1 VOLUME 2 VOLUME 3 Controllers VOLUME 4 MIDI output CS 1 CS 2 CS 3 CS 4 ZONE 1 ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4 SWING GATE TIME VELOCITY UNITMULTIPLY KN 1 LOW KN 2 LOW MID KN 3 HIGH MID KN 4 HIGH Basic Structure Recording by the keyboard performance Sequencer block Effect block Tone Generator block Playback MIDI sequence data • Song • Pattern • Arpeggio Internal AWM2 Plug-in board DSP • Reverb • Chorus • Master Effect • Part Equalizer • Master Equalizer • Voice • Performance Sampling block Recording Operating the panel Keyboard performance Microphone, Guitar, Bass, Audio equipment, etc. Playback Microphone, Guitar, Bass, Audio equipment, etc. Audio (sound) output Playback Audio signal flow External MIDI instrument MIDI messages flow Controller Block Controller supported by the MOTIF ES This block consists of the keyboard, Pitch Bend and Modulation Wheels, Ribbon Controller, Knobs, Control Sliders and so on. The keyboard itself doesn’t generate sounds, but instead generates/transmits note on/off, velocity and other information (MIDI messages) to the synthesizer’s tone generator block when you play notes. The controllers also generates/transmits MIDI messages. The synthesizer’s tone generator block produces the sound according to the MIDI messages transmitted from the keyboard and controllers. The controllers you can use on this synthesizer and the reference pages are as follows: ● Controllers with which the MOTIF ES is equipped Keyboard (Initial Touch, Aftertouch) ................ page 18 Pitch Bend Wheel ............................................ page 64 Modulation Wheel ............................................ page 64 Ribbon Controller............................................. page 65 Knob (KN)........................................................ page 50 Control Slider (CS)........................................... page 51 ● Controllers (sold separately) that can be connected to the rear panel of the MOTIF ES Foot Controller ................................................. page 42 Footswitch ....................................................... page 42 Breath Controller.............................................. page 42 154 Owner’s Manual Internal Structure (System Overview) Controller related parameters in each mode The chart below shows the operations for calling up the Controller related parameters in each mode. Parameters for the Footswitch and the Assign Knobs A/B apply to the entire instrument, regardless of the selected program (Voice/Performance/ Song/Pattern). Controller Set (for each Voice) [VOICE] → Voice selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F4] CTL SET Assigning the Control Change number to each Controller (for all Voices) [VOICE] → [UTILITY] → [F3] VOICE → [SF4] CTL ASN Page 262 Performance mode Assigning the Control Change number to each Controller (for each Performance) [PERFORM] → Performance selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F4] CTL ASN Page 214 Song mode Assigning the Control Change number to each Controller (for each Song Mixing) [SONG] → Song selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F4] CTL ASN Page 234 Pattern mode Assigning the Control Change number to each Controller (for each Pattern Mixing) [PATTERN] → Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F4] CTL ASN Page 248 Assigning the function and Control Change number to the Assign Knob A/B [UTILITY] → [F4] CTL ASN → [SF2] ASSIGN Page 263 Assigning the function and Control Change number to the Footswitch (connected to the ASSIGNABLE connector) [UTILITY] → [F4] CTL ASN → [SF3] FT SW Page 263 All modes [VOICE] → Voice selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F4] CTL SET Controller Set See below. Page 192 Basic Structure Voice mode Aside from their default control parameters, the controllers of the instrument, such as the Pitch Bend wheel and the Modulation wheel, can be freely assigned to a variety of different parameters. For example, you could assign Resonance to the Modulation Wheel and set aftertouch to apply vibrato. These settings for all the controllers are referred to as a “Controller Set,” and up to six Controller Sets can be created for each Voice. Voice Controller Set Controller Set 1 - 6 Source = Controller SWING GATE TIME KN 1 LOW KN 2 LOW MID Depth = Degree to which the controller affects the sound Element Switches n You can set whether the controller affects each Element by setting the Element Switch on or off as desired. Note that this applies only to Normal Voices. n The Element Switch parameters are not available when a function unrelated to Elements (1 - 40) is set as the destination. ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF 1 2 3 4 Destination (Dest) = function Volume, Reverb Send Level, Chorus Send Level, Filter Cutoff Frequency, Filter Resonance, etc. ● Source and Destination “source” refers to the hardware controller and “destination” refers to the parameter or function being controlled. An extensive variety of destination parameters are available, far more than those listed above. For a complete list of destination parameters, see the separate Data List. Owner’s Manual 155 Internal Structure (System Overview) ● Using one source to control several destinations For example, set the Source parameter of Control Set 1 to MW (Modulation Wheel) and the Destination parameter to ELFO-PM (Element LFO Pitch Modulation Depth). Then set the Source parameter of Control Set 2 also to MW, but set the Destination parameter to ELM PAN (Element Pan). You will also need to specify the Element to be controlled and also the depth (amount) of control. In this example, when you move the Modulation Wheel upward, the amount of Pitch Modulation increases accordingly, and the Element is panned from left to right. In this way, you can have the sound change in several different ways, simply by adjusting a single controller. ● Using several sources to control one destination For example, set the Source parameter of Control Set 1 to MW (Modulation Wheel) and the Destination parameter to ELFO-PM (Element LFO Pitch Modulation Depth). Then set the Source parameter of Control Set 2 to FC (Foot Controller) and set the Destination parameter also to ELFO-PM (Element LFO Pitch Modulation Depth). Now, Pitch Modulation is assigned to both the Modulation Wheel and Foot Controller. In this way, you can have several different controllers affect the same aspect of the sound. This can be useful in live performance situations, letting you use any one of several controllers depending on which is convenient at the time. n The Controller Set edited in the Voice Edit mode is available when the corresponding Voice is selected in the Performance mode, Song mode, and Pattern mode. n The function assigned to the Controller by the Controller Set function can be applied only to the internal tone generator block. Operating the Controller will transmit the MIDI message (Control Change Number assigned below) to the external MIDI instrument. Basic Structure Assigning Control Change numbers to the controllers The functions assigned to the controllers by the Controller Set function can be applied only to the internal tone generator block. For connected external MIDI instruments, use of the controllers generates MIDI Control Change messages, as shown in the chart below. Controller Generated MIDI message Display Aftertouch Channel Aftertouch (DnH) – Pitch Bend Wheel Pitch Bend (EnH) – Modulation Wheel Control Change (BnH, 01H) – Footswitch (connected to the SUSTAIN connector)* Control Change (BnH, 40H) – ASSIGN Knob A, B* Control Change (BnH) [UTILITY] → [F4] CTL ASN → [SF2] ASSIGN Footswitch (connected to the ASSIGNABLE connector)* Control Change (BnH) [UTILITY] → [F4] CTL ASN → [SF3] FT SW Ribbon Controller Control Change (BnH) [VOICE] → [UTILITY] → [F3] VOICE → [SF3] CTL ASN ASSIGN Knob 1, 2 [PERFORM] → Performance selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F4] CTL ASN Foot Controller 1, 2 [SONG] → Song selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F4] CTL ASN Breath Controller [PATTERN] → Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F4] CTL ASN * These Controllers are not used in the Controller Set function As shown above, the keyboard Aftertouch, Pitch Bend Wheel, Modulation Wheel, Footswitch connected to the SUSTAIN connector, were originally designed for a particular purpose, and send pre-defined MIDI Control Change messages when used, regardless of their Control Set allocations within the synthesizer. For example, when the pan function is assigned to the Pitch Bend Wheel with the Controller Set, using the Pitch Bend Wheel will apply the pan function to the internal tone generator and will transmit the Pitch Bend messages to the external MIDI instrument. Using the other controllers will transmit the Control Change messages set from the display shown above to the external MIDI instrument while it will apply the functions set via the Controller Set to the internal tone generator block. You can also set up a controller such that it sends one kind of Control message to the synthesizer’s internal tone generator yet another kind to the external MIDI instrument. For example, in a Controller Set you could assign Resonance to the ASSIGN Knob 1. Then, in the Utility mode, you could assign Control Change Number 1 (modulation) to the same knob. Now, when you turn the knob, resonance will be applied to the sound of the internal tone generator block; however, at the same time, modulation messages will be transmitted to the external MIDI instrument. 156 Owner’s Manual Internal Structure (System Overview) Tone Generator block The Tone Generator block is what actually produces sound in response to the MIDI messages generated by playing the keyboard, using the controllers, and the playback of the sequencer (Song/Pattern/Arpeggio). Outputs the wave that makes up the sound. Changes the tonal quality of the sound output from the PITCH unit. Tone Generator OSC PITCH FILTER Controls the pitch of the sound. AMP To the Effect block Controls the output level (amplitude) of the sound output from the FILTER unit. The signals are then sent at this level to the Effect block. Internal AWM2 Tone Generator and optional Plug-in boards Internal AWM2 Tone Generator Basic Structure The tone generator block in this synthesizer consists of the built-in AWM2 sound source and optional Plug-in Board(s). Plug-in boards (optional) Up to three boards can be installed. ● AWM2 (Advanced Wave Memory 2) AWM2 (Advanced Wave Memory 2) is a synthesis system based on sampled waves (sound material), and is used in many Yamaha synthesizers. For extra realism, each AWM2 Voice uses multiple samples of a real instrument’s waveform. Furthermore, a wide variety of parameters — envelope generator, filter, modulation, and others — can be applied. You can also create your own waves (Samples) via microphone or from external audio equipment by using the Sampling function. These are then stored in internal memory (DRAM) and can be used just like the preset waves. ● Plug-in Board For details on using the optional Plug-in Boards for even more sounds, see page 74. Owner’s Manual 157 Internal Structure (System Overview) Voice, Performance, and Mixing This instrument features three different types of programs, that form the basis for creating and playing sounds. “Performance.” Each Performance can contain up to four different parts (Voices). Each Performance can be created by editing parameters unique to each part and parameters common to all the parts in the Performance mode (page 212). ● Voice ● Mixing A program that contains the sonic elements for generating a specific musical instrument sound is referred to as a “Voice.” Each Voice consists of up to four elements (Normal Voice) or up to 73 keys (Drum Voice). Each Voice is created by editing parameters unique to each element/key and parameters common to all the elements/keys in the Voice mode (page 188) or in the Mixing Voice mode (page 249). A program in which multiple Voices are assigned to Parts for multi-timbral play in the Song and Pattern modes is referred to as a “Mixing.” Each Mixing can contain up to 34 parts (page 163). Each Mixing can be created by editing parameters unique to each part and parameters common to all the parts in the Song Mixing mode (page 233) or in the Pattern Mixing mode (page 248). n ● Performance A program in which multiple Voices (parts) are combined in a layer, or in other configurations is referred to as a One Voice VOICE The Mixing belongs to the Song or Pattern. The illustration below shows the structure and interrelationship of the Voices, Performances, and Mixings. Element 1 - 4 or Key C0-C6 Up to four elements (Normal Voice) Up to 73 keys (Drum Voice) Common Edit parameters Arpeggio, Effects, Controller Set, etc. Basic Structure This synthesizer has two types of Voices – Voices created in the Voice mode and Mixing Voices (dedicated for the Song/Pattern) created in the Mixing Voice mode. One Performance PERFORM SONG MIXING PATTERN MIXING One Part Voice One Mixing • 1 - 16 parts (of the internal tone generator) Up to four parts • 17 - 32 parts (of the optionally installed PLG100-XG) • PLG1 - 3 parts (of the optionally installed single part Plug-in boards) Part Edit parameters CH1 One Part Voice Part Edit parameters CH16 Common Edit parameters Common Edit parameters Different Voice for each part Element Edit parameters or Key Edit parameters LFO Different Voice for each part Low Frequency Oscillator OSC (Oscillator) PITCH Waveform (AWM2) AMP (Amplitude) FILTER EG PEG FEG AEG Pitch Envelope Generator Filter Envelope Generator Amplitude Envelope Generator Set in the Voice Edit mode (page 79) n 158 The Drum Voice Key Edit parameters do not contain LFO settings. Owner’s Manual Internal Structure (System Overview) The following illustrations may help in understanding the memory structure of the Voices, Performances, and Mixings. VOICE Normal Voice PRE 1 Normal Voices: 768 Drum Voices: 64 Preset 1 (128 Voices) 1 PRE 2 GM Normal Voices: 128 Drum Voice: 1 BASS User Voice USER 1 Normal Voices: 256 Drum Voices: 32 ORGAN Mixing Voice 1 ...... 128 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 Plug-in Voice SLOT 1 PLG 1 GUITAR/ PLUCKED .................. ...... 16 1 .................. ...... 16 .................. ...... 128 USER 1 ORGAN .................. ...... 128 2 ...... 128 1 ...... 128 2 2 SLOT 2 ...... 64 PLG 2 2 1 FAVORITES A. PIANO DRUM KITS GM FAVORITES BASS DRUM KITS USER 1 FAVORITES ORGAN 1 2 ...... 64 2 ...... 128 GM Drum (1 Voice) 1 User Drum (32 Voices) 1 2 ...... 32 2 ...... 16 Pattern 64 (16 Voices) 2 ...... 16 Song 64 (128 Voices) 2 ...... 128 Pattern 64 (128 Voices) 2 ...... 128 PLG2 Preset (64 Voices) 1 2 ...... 64 PLG2 User (64 Voices) 1 2 SLOT 3 PLG 3 PLG3 Preset (64 Voices) 1 ...... 64 PLG3 User (64 Voices) REED/PIPE ...... 64 2 1 2 ...... 64 MIXING SONG Preset Drum (64 Voices) Song 64 (16 Voices) BRASS ...... 64 PRE 5 ...... 128 User 2 (128 Voices) 1 Song 01 (16 Parts + PLG Parts) User 1 (128 Performances) 1 2 DRUM KITS Preset 6 (128 Voices) 1 ➜ ➜ 1 1 PLG1 User (64 Voices) 1 PERFORM Preset 5 (128 Voices) 1 PLG1 Preset (64 Voices) STRINGS Mixing 2 USER 2 ...... 128 Pattern 01 (128 Voices) The Sample Voices can be created by recording the audio signal to a Song/Pattern track via the Sampling function (page 172). KEYBOARD ...... 128 ...... 128 Song 01 (128 Voices) The Sample Voices can be selected only in the Song mode/Pattern mode. These cannot be selected in the Voice mode or assigned to each Part in the Performance mode. PRE 6 User 1 (128 Voices) 1 (Up to 128 Voices for each Song/Pattern, 1024 Voices for all Songs/Patterns) Performance 2 Pattern 01 (16 Voices) Sample Voice A. PIANO 2 GM Preset (128 Voices) 1 The Mixing Voices can be selected only in the Song mode/Pattern mode. These cannot be selected in the Voice mode or assigned to each Part in the Performance mode. PRE 5 ...... 128 Song 01 (16 Voices) Normal Voices: up to 256 (Up to 16 Voices for each Song/Pattern) * When the PLG150-VL is installed, there are three Preset Banks and 192 Preset Voices. 2 Preset 4 (128 Voices) 1 Preset 3 (128 Voices) 1 GM Voice ...... 128 Preset 2 (128 Voices) 1 PRE 3 2 PRE 4 Basic Structure Preset Voice Drum Voice .................. Song 64 (16 Parts + PLG Parts) Template 1 2 MIXING PATTERN ➜ Pattern 01 (16 Parts + PLG Parts) .................. Pattern 64 (16 Parts + PLG Parts) ...... Voices 32 Owner’s Manual 159 Internal Structure (System Overview) ● Oscillator ■ Normal Voices & Drum Voices Internally, there are two Voice Types: Normal Voices and Drum Voices. Normal Voices are mainly pitched musical instrumenttype sounds that can be played over the range of the keyboard. Drum Voices are mainly percussion/drum sounds that are assigned to individual notes on the keyboard. A collection of assigned percussion/drum waves or Normal Voices is known as a Drum Kit. Normal Voice Waveform (Preset 1-1859, User 1-1024) Element 3 Element 2 Velocity One Voice Element 1 Element 4 VOICE] → Voice selection → [EDIT] → Element selection/ Drum Key selection → [F1] OSC This unit outputs the wave which determines the basic pitch. You can assign the wave (or basic sound material) to each Element of the Normal Voice or each Key of the Drum Voice. In the case of the Normal Voice, you can set the note range for Element (the range of notes on the keyboard over which the Element will sound) as well as the velocity response (the range of note velocities within which the Element will sound). For example, you could set one Element to sound in an upper range of the keyboard, and another Element to sound in a lower range. Thus, even within the same Voice, you can have two different sounds for different areas of the keyboard or you can make the two Element ranges overlap so that their sounds are layered over a set range. Furthermore, you can set each Element to respond to different velocity ranges so that one Element sounds for lower note velocities, whereas another Element sounds for higher note velocities. See the illustration at left of this page. n Basic Structure Drum Voice You can assign the wave with the following operation. [VOICE] → Voice selection → [EDIT] → Element selection/Drum Key selection → [F1] OSC → [SF1] WAVE Strictly speaking, what is assigned here to an Element or Key is not a “wave” but a “waveform.” The difference between the two terms is explained on page 173. ● Pitch C0 C1 C6 Individual drum sounds (different for each key) Key 1 Key 5 Key 10 Key 18 Key 21 Key 73 ■ GM Voices GM (General MIDI) is a worldwide standard for Voice organization and MIDI functions of synthesizers and tone generators. It was designed primarily to ensure that any song data created with a specific GM device would sound virtually the same on any other GM device – no matter the manufacturer or the model. The GM Voice bank on this synthesizer is designed to appropriately play back GM song data. However, keep in mind that the sound may not be exactly the same as played by the original tone generator. ■ Tone generator parameters that produce the Voice sound Among various parameters that makes up one Voice, Oscillator, Pitch, Filter, Amplitude, LFO and three Envelope Generators (PEG, FEG, AEG) shown in the illustration on pages 160-162 are the basic parameters for creating the Voice sound. Parameters about Oscillator, Pitch, Filter and Amplitude determine the three basic elements of the sound – Pitch (how low or high it is), Tone (or its overall sound quality), and Volume (how loud its volume level is) of the Voice. Parameters such as LFO and EG (Envelope Generator) determine the transition in these three basic elements of the sound from the moment the sound starts to the moment the sound stops. In the sections that follow, we’ll explain in detail about the sound-related parameters and provide an introduction to the basics of electronic synthesis. 160 Owner’s Manual [VOICE] → Voice selection → [EDIT] → Element selection/ Drum Key selection → [F2] PITCH This unit controls the pitch of the sound (wave) output from the Oscillator. In the case of the Normal Voice, you can detune separate Elements, apply Pitch Scaling and so on. Also, by setting the PEG (Pitch Envelope Generator), you can control how the pitch changes over time. PEG (Pitch Envelope Generator) Using the PEG, you can control the transition in pitch from the moment the sound starts the moment the sound stops. You can create the PEG by setting parameters as illustrated below. When you press a note on the keyboard, the pitch of the Voice will change according to these envelope settings. This is useful for creating automatic changes in pitch, which is effective for the Synth Brass. Furthermore, different PEG parameters can be set for each Element or each Key. Attack Level Pitch Decay1 Level Hold Level Sustain Level (Decay2 Level) Release Level 0 Hold Time Attack Time Decay1 Time Pressing the key (Key on) Decay2 Time Release Time Time Releasing the key (Key off) Internal Structure (System Overview) ● Filter • Band Pass Filter [VOICE] → Voice selection → [EDIT] → Element selection/ Drum Key selection → [F3] FILTER This passes only those a band of signals around the Cutoff frequency. The width of this band can be varied. Range passed This unit modifies the tone of the sound output from Pitch by cutting the output of a specific frequency portion of the sound. Level Cutoff Frequency and Resonance Here’s how filters work. In the example below (a low pass filter), a portion of the signal lower than a given frequency is allowed to pass, and signals above that frequency are cut. This frequency is referred to as the cutoff frequency. You can produce a relatively bright or darker sound by setting the cutoff. Resonance is a parameter that boosts the level of the signal in the area of the cutoff frequency. By emphasizing the overtones in this area, this can produce a distinctive “peaky” tone, making the sound brighter and harder. Frequency Center frequency Cutoff range • Band Elimination Filter This attenuates a band of signals around the Cutoff frequency, but passes everything else. Cutoff range Cutoff frequency Level Frequency Center frequency These frequencies are “passed” by the filter. Frequency (pitch) Resonance Level Frequency (pitch) Cutoff frequency About the main Filter types The Low Pass Filter is shown in the illustration above – however, this synthesizer features other Filter types (four total) as shown below. Basic Structure Level Range passed FEG (Filter Envelope Generator) Using the FEG, you can control the transition in tone from the moment the sound starts to the moment the sound stops. You can create the FEG by setting parameters as illustrated below. When you press a note on the keyboard, the cutoff frequency will change according to these envelope settings. This is useful for creating automatic wah or filter sweep effects, for example. Furthermore, different FEG parameters can be set for each Element Key. Attack Level Cutoff Frequency Decay1 Level Hold Level • Low Pass Filter (above) Sustain Level (Decay2 Level) This passes only those signals below the Cutoff frequency. You can then use the Reso (Resonance) parameter to add further character to the sound. Release Level 0 Time • High Pass Filter This passes only those signals above the Cutoff frequency. You can then use the Reso (Resonance) parameter to add further character to the sound. Hold Time Attack Time Decay1 Time Pressing the key (Key on) Decay2 Time Release Time Releasing the key (Key off) These frequencies are “passed” by the filter. Level Resonance Cutoff frequency Owner’s Manual 161 Internal Structure (System Overview) ● Amplitude [VOICE] → Voice selection → [EDIT] → Element selection/ Drum Key selection → [F4] AMP This unit controls the output level (amplitude) of the sound output from Filter. The signals are then sent at this level to the Effect block. Also, by setting the AEG (Amplitude Envelope Generator), you can control how the volume changes over time. Single Timbre Tone Generator (Voice/ Performance mode) and Multi-timbral Tone Generator (Song/Pattern mode) The internal tone generator block operates in two different ways (Single timbre and Multi-timbral) depending on the selected mode. The difference between the two is whether they can handle the multi-MIDI channels or not at the same time. AEG (Amplitude Envelope Generator) Using the AEG, you can control the transition in volume from the moment the sound starts is to the moment the sound stops. You can create the AEG by setting parameters as illustrated below. When you press a note on the keyboard, the volume will change according to these envelope settings. Furthermore, different AEG parameters can be set for each Element Key. Level (Volume) A MIDI tone generator that receives over a single MIDI channel and plays a single instrument part is referred to as a “single timbre” tone generator. This is the operating status of the internal tone generator in the Voice and Performance modes. n Attack Level Sustain Level (Decay2 Level) Basic Structure Initial Level Release Level 0 Time Attack Time Decay1 Time To set the MIDI receive channel for single timbre operation (Voice and Performance modes), use the following operation in the Utility mode. [UTILITY] → [F5] MIDI → [SF1] CH → BasicRcvCh ● Multi-timbral Tone Generator (Song/Pattern mode) Decay1 Level Decay2 Time Pressing the key (Key on) n ● Single Timbre Tone Generator (Voice/Performance mode) Release Time Releasing the key (Key off) When you release the key while holding the Footswitch connected to the SUSTAIN connector, the sound will maintain at the Sustain Level shown above. For Voices having a Sustain Level value greater than 0, the sound continues. For Voices having a Sustain Level of 0, the sound decays naturally to silence. ● LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator) [VOICE] → Voice selection → [EDIT] → Element selection/ Drum Key selection → [F5] LFO [VOICE] → Voice selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F5] LFO As its name suggests, the LFO produces a wave of a low frequency. These waves can be used to vary the pitch, filter or amplitude of each Element to create effects such as vibrato, wah and tremolo. LFO can be set independently for each Element; it can also be set globally for all Elements. A MIDI tone generator that simultaneously receives over multiple MIDI channels and plays multiple instrument parts is referred to as a “multi-timbral” tone generator. This allows playback of multi-channel MIDI song data — such as on a MIDI sequencer or computer — with each internal part being assigned to and played by a different track or channel. This is the operating status of the internal tone generator in the Song and Pattern modes. n To set the MIDI receive channel for multi-timbral operation (Song and Pattern modes), use the following operation in the Utility mode. [SONG] or [PATTERN] → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → Part selection → [F1] VOICE → [SF2] MODE → ReceiveCh n When using an external MIDI sequencer or computer to play this instrument, make sure to use the Song mode or Pattern mode. Maximum Polyphony Maximum polyphony refers to the highest number of notes that can be sounded simultaneously from the internal tone generator of the instrument. The maximum polyphony of this synthesizer is 128. When the internal tone generator block receives a number of notes exceeding the maximum polyphony, previously played notes are cut off. Keep in mind this may be especially noticeable with Voices not having decay. Furthermore, the maximum polyphony applies to the number of voice elements used, not the number of voices. When the normal voices that include up to four elements are used, the maximum number of simultaneous notes may be less than 128. n 162 Owner’s Manual When the Plug-in board is installed, the maximum polyphony increases accordingly. For details on maximum polyphony for the Plug-in Boards, refer to the Owner’s Manual of the particular board. Internal Structure (System Overview) This synthesizer plays the sounds in the tone generator block in response to MIDI messages received from the controller or sequencer block. The MIDI messages are assigned to sixteen independent channels, and this synthesizer is capable of simultaneously playing sixteen separate parts, via the sixteen MIDI channels. However, the sixteen-channel limit can be overcome by using separate MIDI “ports,” each supporting sixteen channels. The multiple sound sources of this synthesizer (internal tone generator and Plug-in Boards) take advantage of the three MIDI ports included on the instrument. Tone Generator block Part for Voice mode Parts used in modes other than the Voice mode Port 2 Port 3 Port 1 Part 1 Part 2 Part 17 Part 18 Part 33 Part 34 Part 14 Part 15 Part 16 Part 30 Part 31 Part 32 Part 46 Part 47 Part 48 As shown in the above illustration, up to 48 parts are provided for the modes (excepting the Voice mode). However, the number of parts that are actually used is a maximum of 34 in the Song and Pattern modes, as we will see later in some examples. n n The USB cable supports up to eight separate MIDI ports. The Tone Generator block of this synthesizer supports three separate ports as illustrated above. A single MIDI cable/connection cannot handle data over multiple MIDI ports. ■ Part structure of the tone generator block in the Voice mode In this mode, a Voice is played from the keyboard, using a single part. This part is used also when the Plug-in Voice is selected. The tone generator block in the Voice mode receives MIDI data over a single channel. Keep in mind that song data on an external sequencer consisting of multiple MIDI channels will not play back properly in this mode. If you are using an external MIDI sequencer or computer to play the instrument, make sure to use the Song mode or Pattern mode. n The MIDI receive channel in the Voice mode can be set from the following display in the Utility mode. [UTILITY] → [F5] MIDI → [SF1] CH → BasicRcvCh The MIDI port number which this synthesizer can recognize in the Voice mode is 1. n The Multi-Part Plug-in Board (PLG100-XG) cannot be used in the Voice mode. ■ Part structure of the tone generator block in the Performance mode This mode lets you play a Performance (which multiple Voices (parts) are combined – in a layer, or in other configurations) using the keyboard. While a total of seven parts are available in this mode (as shown below), a maximum of four parts can be used simultaneously. Although this mode lets you play several parts at the same time, all are set to receive over the same single MIDI channel, as in the Voice mode. For this reason, song data on an external sequencer consisting of multiple MIDI channels will not play back properly in this mode. If you are using an external MIDI sequencer or computer to play the instrument, make sure to use the Song mode or Pattern mode. Tone generator block When three single part Plug-in boards are installed to the synthesizer. PLG3 PLG2 Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Part 1 Part 17 Part 33 Part 2 Part 18 Part 34 Part 3 Part 4 PLG1 Part 5 Part 13 PLG3 part Part 14 Part 30 Part 46 PLG2 part Part 15 Part 31 Part 47 PLG1 part Part 16 Part 32 Part 48 Parts 5-13 and 17-48 are not used. These seven parts (1, 2, 3, 4, 14, 15, 16) are reserved for use in the Performance mode; however, only up to four of them can be used at the same time. n The MIDI receive channel in the Performance mode can be set with the following operation in the Utility mode. [UTILITY] → [F5] MIDI → [SF1] CH → BasicRcvCh In the Voice mode, the instrument recognizes only data over MIDI Port 1. n The Multi-part Plug-in Board (PLG100-XG) cannot be used in the Performance mode. Tone generator block Part for Voice mode Basic Structure Part structure of the tone generator block Parts used in modes other than the Voice mode Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Part 1 Part 2 Part 3 Part 4 Part 5 Part 17 Part 18 Part 33 Part 34 Part 30 Part 31 Part 32 Part 46 Part 47 Part 48 Part 16 Parts 1-48 are not used. Owner’s Manual 163 Internal Structure (System Overview) ■ Part structure of the tone generator block in the Song mode/Pattern mode In these modes, multiple parts are provided and different voice and different melodies or phrases can be played back for each part. Because these modes let you set the MIDI channel for each part of the tone generator block, you can use an external MIDI sequencer as well as the sequencer block of the instrument to play the sounds. As illustrated below, the sequence data of each track plays the corresponding parts (those having the same MIDI channel assignment) in the tone generator block. Sequencer block (example) Tone Generator block (example) When setting the Transmit Channel/Port to the following example in the Song/Pattern mode or on the external MIDI sequencer or on the computer: When a Multi-part Plug-in Board (PLG100-XG) and a two Single part Plug-in Board are installed to this synthesizer and setting the Receive Channel/Port to the following example: Port 1 Track 1 Transmit Channel = 1 (Port 1) Track 2 Transmit Channel = 2 (Port 1) Track 3 Transmit Channel = 3 (Port 1) Track 4 Transmit Channel = 4 (Port 1) Track 5 Transmit Channel = 5 (Port 1) Track 6 Transmit Channel = 6 (Port 1) Track 7 Basic Structure Track 8 Part 1 Receive Channel = 2 Part 2 Receive Channel = 3 Part 3 Receive Channel = 4 Part 4 Receive Channel = 1 Part 15 Receive Channel = 5 Part 16 Receive Channel = 6 Part 17 Receive Channel = 8 Transmit Channel = 7 (Port 2) Part 18 Receive Channel = 7 Transmit Channel = 8 (Port 2) Part 19 Receive Channel = 10 Part 20 Receive Channel = 13 Part 31 Receive Channel = 14 Part 32 Receive Channel = 15 Track 9 Transmit Channel = off (Port off) Track 10 Transmit Channel = 10 (Port 2) Track 11 Transmit Channel = 11 (Port 3) Track 12 Transmit Channel = off (Port off) Port 2 Multi-part Plug-in Board Port 3 Part 33 Part 34 Track 13 Transmit Channel = 13 (Port 2) Track 14 Transmit Channel = 14 (Port 2) Track 15 Transmit Channel = 15 (Port 2) Track 16 Transmit Channel = 16 (Port 3) Single part Plug-in Board Part 35 Part 46 Part 47 Receive Channel = 11 Part 48 Receive Channel = 16 Single part Plug-in Board Parts 33-46 are not used. The MIDI Transmit Channel/Port of the Song/Pattern can be set with the following operation. In the Song mode: [SONG] → Song selection → [F3] TRACK → [SF1] CHANNEL In the Pattern mode: [PATTERN] → Pattern selection → [F3] TRACK → [SF1] CHANNEL When sounding the internal tone generator block, assign the tracks to Transmit Port 1 and use Parts 1 - 16. Keep in mind that data over Transmit Ports 2 or 3 cannot sound the internal tone generator block. The tone generator of the installed Plug-in Board can be sounded via any of the MIDI ports 1 - 3. The MIDI Receive Channel of the tone generator’s part can be set with the following operation. In the Song mode: [SONG] → Song selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → Part selection → [F1] VOICE → [SF2] MODE → ReceiveCh In the Pattern mode: [PATTERN] → Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → Part selection → [F1] VOICE → [SF2] MODE → ReceiveCh You can set the port number assignment for the Plug-in Board with the following operation. [UTILITY] → [F6] PLUG → [SF2] MIDI 164 n For details about MIDI, see page 181. n The Plug-in Board lets you use only a single Voice at the same time. Please note that you cannot assign multiple Voices of the Plug-in Board to multiple parts at the same time. n The Voice and related settings (volume, pan, etc.) are sounded by the keyboard according to the Part parameters in the Mixing settings of the current Song/ Pattern and Part. Other settings such as Controllers and Effect types correspond to the Common parameters in the Mixing settings of the current Song/ Pattern. Owner’s Manual Internal Structure (System Overview) Audio Input Part (AUDIO IN) The Performance mode, Song mode, and Pattern mode are capable of handling the audio input signal as a Part. Various parameters such as volume, pan, and effect can be set to this Part and the sound is output together with other Parts. Other available settings include how stereo input signals are handled, as well the output assignment of the audio Part. These parameters are set and stored for each Performance, Song Mixing, and Pattern Mixing. Please note that the Audio Input Part is not available in the Voice mode. Among the following three types of Audio Input parts which this synthesizer can handle, two types (five stereo parts if the mLAN16E has been installed) can be handled at the same time, since the optional mLAN16E and AIEB2 cannot be installed together. A/D Input part This part (one stereo part) is input from the external audio equipment connected to the A/D INPUT jack. mLAN Input parts (when the optional mLAN16E has been installed) These four stereo parts are input from external mLAN-compatible audio equipment connected to the mLAN jack via a single IEEE1394 cable. AIEB2 parts (when the optional AIEB2 has been installed) This part (one stereo part) is input from external audio equipment connected to the OPTICAL INPUT or the DIGITAL INPUT (Coaxial) connector. Either one of the connectors (OPTICAL or DIGITAL) can be used; however, both cannot be used at the same time. Select which connector is used for digital input with the following operation in the Utility mode. [UTILITY] → [F2] I/O → [SF1] INPUT → Digital In the Performance mode [PERFORM] → Performance selection→ [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F5] AUDIO IN In the Song mode [SONG] → Song selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F5] AUDIO IN In the Pattern mode [PATTERN] → Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F5] AUDIO IN n Basic Structure Parameters for the above Parts can be set with the following operations. Although the Insertion Effects of this synthesizer can be applied to the A/D Input Part, they cannot be applied to the mLAN Input part and the AIEB2 Input part. Sequencer Block This block lets you create songs and patterns by recording and editing your performances as MIDI data (from the controller block), then playing it back with the tone generator block. The sequencer block can be operated in the Song mode, in the Pattern mode, and with the Arpeggio feature. When a Song or a Pattern is played back, the musical data of each sequence track is transmitted to the tone generator block according to the Transmit Channel settings. n Songs can be played back only in the Song mode. They cannot be played back in other modes. Patterns can be played back only in the Pattern mode. They cannot be played back in other modes. Arpeggios can be played back in any modes. Song and Pattern Songs and Patterns are MIDI sequence data consisting of up to 16 tracks. A Song on this synthesizer is effectively the same as a Song on a MIDI sequencer, and playback automatically stops at the end of the recorded data. In the MOTIF ES, the term “Pattern” refers to a relatively short musical or rhythmic phrase — 1 to 256 measures — which is used for looped playback. Therefore, once Pattern playback starts, it continues until you press the [■] (Stop) button. This synthesizer features a variety of preset Phrase data that is used as the basic material in making up Patterns. Owner’s Manual 165 Internal Structure (System Overview) ■ Song data structure The following illustration shows the track structure of a Song. Songs are created by recording MIDI sequence data to individual tracks and by setting tone generator related parameters (in Song Mixing). Song 64 Song 63 Song 02 Song 01 Tempo track Scene track Musical performance data Tempo change Track mute status/Scene memory change/Arpeggio type change (including tempo, transpose, etc.) Scene 1 Scene 2 Scene 3 Scene 4 Scene 5 Track 1 MIDI sequence data Groove, Transmit Channel/Port, Track loop settings Sample Voice Track 2 MIDI sequence data Groove, Transmit Channel/Port, Track loop settings Sample Voice Track 3 MIDI sequence data Groove, Transmit Channel/Port, Track loop settings Sample Voice Track 16 MIDI sequence data Groove, Transmit Channel/Port, Track loop settings Sample Voice Song Mixing (Tone Generator related settings) Basic Structure Part 1 Mixing settings Part 17 Mixing settings Part PLG1 Mixing settings Part 2 Mixing settings Part 18 Mixing settings Part PLG2 Mixing settings Part 3 Mixing settings Part 19 Mixing settings Part PLG3 Mixing settings Audio Input part Mixing settings Part 16 Mixing settings Part 32 Mixing settings Mixing Common Edit Parameters applied to all the parts Mixing Voice 16 Mixing Voice 01 Please note that the Multi-part Plug-in Part (17-32) settings apply not to one individual Song but to all 64 Songs. Set in the Song Play mode Created in the Song Record mode, Song Edit mode, and Song Job mode Set in the Song Mixing mode and Song Mixing Edit mode Created in the Mixing Voice Edit mode Created in the Sampling mode entered from the Song mode ● Song Mixing ● Scene Even if you record your keyboard performance to a Song track, the setup data (non-note events such as voice, pan, volume) which for proper playback should be recorded at the top of the Song will not be recorded to it. For this reason, the setup data handled as Song Mixing settings should be stored in the Song Mixing Store mode. Because the Song Mixing is a collection of settings related to the tone generator, it can be applied to the sequence data transmitted from the external MIDI sequencer as well as this synthesizer’s Song playback. A Song Scene is a “snapshot” of important settings, and contains parameter settings such as transpose, tempo, and track mute and the tone generator related parameters controllable from the Knobs with the [PAN/SEND] or [TONE] lamp turned on, and the Control Sliders. Five settings can be registered to the [SF1] - [SF5] buttons for each Song. n When the Multi-Part Plug-in Board PLG100-XG has been installed, Mixing of sixteen parts (17 - 32) can be set. Please note that the Multipart Plug-in Part (17 - 32) settings apply not to one individual Song but to all 64 Songs. ● Song Chain This function allows songs to be “chained” together for automatic sequential playback. The Song Chain can be created and played back from the [SONG] → [F6] CHAIN display. This instrument allows you to create one Song Chain data. Song 01 166 Owner’s Manual Song 22 Song 15 Internal Structure (System Overview) ■ Pattern data structure The following illustration shows the track structure of a Pattern. Patterns are created by recording MIDI sequence data to individual tracks, by assigning Phrases (Preset and User) which is material for a Pattern to individual tracks, and by setting tone generator related parameters (in a Pattern Mixing). Pattern 64 Pattern 01 Mixing settings Groove, Transmit Channel/Port, Track loop, Track Voice settings Mixing settings Mixing settings Pattern Mixing (Tone Generator related settings) Mixing settings Part 1 Mixing settings Part 17 Mixing settings Part PLG1 Mixing settings Part 2 Part 3 Mixing settings Mixing settings Part 18 Part 19 Mixing settings Mixing settings Part PLG2 Mixing settings Mixing Common Edit Parameters Part PLG3 applied to all the parts Mixing settings Audio Input part Mixing settings Mixing settings Part 32 Pattern Chain A B Mixing settings Mixing Common Edit Parameters User Phrase 1 - 256 (MIDI sequence data) applied to all the parts Mixing Voice 16 P Mixing Voice 01 User Phrase 1 - 256 (MIDI sequence data) User Phrase Basic Structure Part 16 Sample Voice 16 Sections Track 1 MIDI sequence data Track 2 Track 3 MIDI sequence data MIDI sequence data Track 16 MIDI sequence data Copy the Phrase recorded to a track of another pattern Preset Phrase 1 - 687 (MIDI sequence data) Please note that the Multi-part Plug-in Part (17-32) settings apply not to one individual Pattern but to all 64 Patterns. Preset Phrase The Patch function lets you assign a Phrase to each track. Set in the Pattern Play mode Created in the Pattern Record mode, Pattern Edit mode, and Pattern Job mode Set in the Pattern Mixing mode and Pattern Mixing Edit mode Created in the Mixing Voice Edit mode Created in the Sampling mode entered from the Pattern mode Created in the Pattern Chain mode ● Pattern Mixing ● Section Even if you record your keyboard performance to a Pattern track, the setup data (non-note events such as voice, pan, volume) which for proper playback should be recorded at the top of the Pattern will not be recorded to it. For this reason, the setup data handled as Pattern Mixing settings should be stored in the Pattern Mixing Store mode. Unlike the Song, only the voice number is recorded to a track as a Track Voice (Phrase Voice) which is used for playback normally. Because the Pattern Mixing is a collection of settings related to the tone generator, it can be applied to the sequence data transmitted from the external MIDI sequencer as well as this synthesizer’s Pattern playback. A Pattern consists of one or more “Sections” (Pattern variations). You can play the Pattern by specifying a Section after selecting a Pattern. n When the Multi-Part Plug-in Board PLG100-XG has been installed, Mixing of sixteen parts (17 - 32) can be set. Please note that the MultiPart Plug-in Part (17 - 32) settings apply not to one individual Pattern but to all 64 Patterns. ● Phrase This is the basic MIDI sequence data – and the smallest unit – used in creating a Pattern. “Phrase” is a short musical/ rhythmic passage for a single instrument, such as a rhythm pattern for the rhythm part, a bass line for the bass part, or a chord backing for the guitar part. This synthesizer features 687 Preset Phrases, and features memory space for 256 of your own original User Phrases. Owner’s Manual 167 Internal Structure (System Overview) ● Pattern Chain ● Realtime recording and Step recording Pattern Chain allows you to string several different Sections (within a single Pattern) together to make a single Song. You can have the synthesizer automatically change Sections by creating Pattern Chains in this way beforehand. You can create the Pattern Chain by recording a Pattern playback with Section changes from the [PATTERN] → [F6] CHAIN display or by editing the timing of Section changes from the [PATTERN] → [F6] CHAIN → [EDIT] display. The created Pattern Chain can be played back when calling up the [PATTERN] → [F6] CHAIN display. You can also use them when creating Songs based on a certain Pattern, since the created Pattern Chain can be converted into a Song from the [PATTERN] → [F6] CHAIN → [EDIT] → [F3] SONG display. This synthesizer lets you create one Pattern Chain for each Pattern. Realtime recording With realtime recording, the instrument functions in the same way as a tape recorder, recording the performance data as it is played. This allows you to capture all the nuances of an actual performance. This method is used for the Recording types explained below, such as Replace, Overdub, Loop, and Punch In/Out. Step recording (Type = step) With step recording, you can compose your performance by “writing” it down one event at a time. This is a non-realtime, step recording method — similar to writing music notation onto paper. ● Replace and Overdub (Song/Pattern) Replace Pattern Chain Pattern track Section change Scene track Track mute setting Tempo track Tempo change You can use this method when you want to overwrite an already recorded track with new data. The first recording is lost, and the new one takes its place. Overdub Basic Structure Example Section J Section H Section P You can use this method when you want to add more data to a track that already contains data. The first recording is kept, and the new one is added. This method lets you build up a complex phrase together with Loop recording (below). ● Loop Recording (Pattern) ■ MIDI tracks and Sample tracks The Song/Pattern tracks (1 - 16) of this synthesizer are divided into two groups: MIDI tracks and Sample tracks. MIDI tracks are created by recording your keyboard performance in the Song Record mode/Pattern Record mode. On the other hand, Sample tracks are created by recording and obtaining a Sample in the Sampling mode. ● Sample tracks — with Sample Voices Voices which are automatically created and stored using the Sampling feature in the sequencer (Song/Pattern) mode, are referred to as “Sample Voices.” Tracks using these Sample Voices are referred to as “Sample” tracks — to distinguish them from the MIDI tracks. Sample Voices are stored as original, dedicated Voices for each Song or Pattern. If you wish to use a Sample Voice of a certain song/pattern for another song/pattern, execute the copy operation in the Song Job mode (page 226) or in the Pattern Job mode (page 244). [PATTERN] → [●] (Record) → [F1] SETUP → loop = on Pattern repeats the rhythm pattern of several measures (1 to 256 measures) in a “loop,” and its recording is also done using loops. This method is used when recording a Pattern Phrase using the Overdub method (above). As shown in the example below, notes that you record will play back from the next repetition (loop), letting you record while hearing previously recorded material. When recording a rhythm of Bass Drum, Snare Drum, Hi-Hat cymbal in order: Loop 1st round Bass Drum Loop 2nd round Snare Drum ■ MIDI track recording method Bass Drum [SONG] or [PATTERN] → [●] (Record) → [F1] SETUP → Type The following explanations are important points for you to keep in mind as you record your User Songs/Patterns. The recording methods explained here should be set from the Setup display in the Song Record mode/Pattern Record mode before recording. n 168 See page 173 for details about the Sample track recording method. Owner’s Manual Loop 3rd round Hi-Hat Snare Drum Bass Drum n Loop Recording can only be used with Realtime recording. Internal Structure (System Overview) ● Punch In/Out (Song) You can use this method when you want to re-record only over a specific area of the track. You’ll need to set the start and end points before re-recording. In the eight-measure example below, the third measures through the fifth measure are re-recorded. Recording start Recording stop After re-recording Before re-recording Punch Out Punch In 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 2 3 8 n Punch In/Out Recording can only be used with Realtime recording. n Note that the Punch In/Out method always replaces (destroys) the original data over the specified area. 4 5 6 7 8 Newly recorded data Arpeggio This function lets you automatically trigger musical and rhythmic phrases using the current Voice by simply pressing a note or notes on the keyboard. The Arpeggio sequence also changes in response to the actual notes or chords you play, giving you a wide variety of inspiring musical phrases and ideas — both in composing and performing. n A single Arpeggio type can be played back at the same time even in the Performance, Song, and Pattern mode, enabling you to play multiple tone generator’s parts simultaneously. Basic Structure ■ Category of the Arpeggio type The Arpeggio types are divided into 18 categories as listed below. LCD Category Name Description Seq Synth Sequence Various arpeggio phrases suited for synth voices. ChSq Synth Chord Sequence Various rhythmic chord phrases or synth voices. HySq Synth Hybrid Sequence Various arpeggio types programmed so that bass phrases are played with the lower keys and chords or melodies are played with the midrange and higher keys. These arpeggio types ar e useful for split voice combinations. In addition, there are also Hybrid Velocity (“HybVel...”) types that feature different phrases for different velocity ranges, letting you change the arpeggio phrase depending on how str ongly you play the keyboard. APKb Acoustic Piano & Keyboard Various arpeggio types suited for piano and other keyboar d voices, such as electric piano and clav. Orgn Organ Various arpeggio types suited for organ voices. GtPl Guitar & Plucked Various arpeggio types suited for guitar and harp voices. GtKM Guitar - Keyboard Mega Voice Various arpeggio types suited for guitar Keyboard Mega voices (see note below). Bass Bass Various arpeggio types suited for bass or synth bass voices. BaKM Bass - Keyboard Mega Voice Various arpeggio types suited for bass Keyboard Mega voices (see note below). Strn Strings Various arpeggio types suited for strings and pizzicato voices. Bras Brass Various arpeggio types suited for brass voices. RdPp Reed & Pipe Various arpeggio types suited for saxophone and fl ute voices. Lead Synth Lead Various arpeggio types suited for synth lead voices. PdMe Synth Pad & Musical FX Various arpeggio types suited for synth pad voices and special musical ef fects voices, including percussive sounds. CPrc Chromatic Percussion Various arpeggio types suited for chromatic percussion voices. DrPc Drum & Percussion Various arpeggio types suited for drum and percussion voices (drum kits). Comb Combination Various arpeggio types suited for Per formances. These are combination arpeggios, with separate phrases suitable for drum voices, bass voices, and chord/melody instruments. Cntr Control Various arpeggio types programmed primarily with Control Change and Pitch Bend data. These arpeggio types change the tone or pitch of the sound, rather than play specifi c notes. In fact, some types contain no note data at all. When using a type of this categor y, set the KeyMode parameter to “direct” in each mode. n Keyboard Mega Voices Normal voices use velocity switching to make the sound quality and/or level of a voice according to how strongly or softly you play it. This makes the voices sound authentic and natural. However, with Keyboard Mega Voices, each velocity range (the measure of your playing strength) has a completely different sound. For example, a guitar voice includes the sounds of various performance techniques. In conventional instruments, different voices having those sounds would be called up via MIDI and played in combination to achieve the desired effect. However, now with Keyboard Mega voices, a convincing guitar part can be played with just a single voice, using specific velocity values to play the desired sounds. Owner’s Manual 169 Internal Structure (System Overview) ■ Arpeggio playback types The MOTIF ES features a total of 1787 Arpeggio types divided into 18 categories, each with its own playback type designed for use with particular types of Voices, as described below. ● Arpeggios for Normal Voices Arpeggio types (belonging to the categories except for the DrPC and Cntr) created for use of Normal Voices have the following two playback types. Playback only of the played notes The Arpeggio is played back using only the played note and its octave notes. Playback of a programmed sequence according to the played chord These Arpeggio types have the several sequences each of which is suited for a certain chord type. Even if you press only one note, the Arpeggio is played back using the programmed sequence — meaning that notes other than the ones you play may be sounded. Adding notes to those already held changes the sequence accordingly — in other words, the arpeggio plays back according to the chord you play. n The two playback types above are not distinguished by the category name or type name. You’ll have to actually play the types and hear the difference. n Since these types are programmed for Normal Voices, using them with Drum Voices may not give musically appropriate results. ● Arpeggios for Drum/Percussion Voices — Category: DrPc These arpeggio types are programmed specifically for use with Drum Voices, giving you instant access to various rhythm patterns. Three different playback types are available. Basic Structure Playback of a drum pattern Pressing any note(s) will trigger the same rhythm pattern. Playback of a drum pattern, plus additional played notes (assigned drum instruments) Pressing any note will trigger the same rhythm pattern. Adding notes to the one already held produces additional sounds (assigned drum instruments) for the drum pattern, Playback only of the played notes (assigned drum instruments) Playing a note or notes will trigger a rhythm pattern using only the notes played (assigned drum instruments). Keep in mind that even if you play the same notes, the triggered rhythm pattern differs depending on the order of the notes played. This gives you access to different rhythm patterns using the same instruments simply by changing the order in which you play the notes. n The three playback types above are not distinguished by the category name or type name. You’ll have to actually play the types and hear the difference. n Since these types are programmed for Drum Voices, using them with Normal Voices may not give musically appropriate results. ● Arpeggios for Performances — Category: Comb The Arpeggio types belonging to the category “Comb” are programmed so that different arpeggios are triggered — an arpeggio for a Normal Voice and an arpeggio for a Drum Voice — depending on the played note. These types are useful in the Performance mode in which multiple voices (Drum Voice and Normal Voice) are combined in a layer since these types enable you trigger the arpeggio for the Normal Voice and the Drum Voice at the same time. ● Arpeggios containing mainly non-note events — Category: Cntr These arpeggio types are programmed primarily with Control Change and Pitch Bend data. They are used to change the tone or pitch of the sound, rather than play specific notes. In fact, some types contain no note data at all. When using a type of this category, set the KeyMode parameter to “direct” with the following operations. 170 Voice mode [VOICE] → Voice selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F3] ARP → [SF1] TYPE → KeyMode Performance [PERFORM] → Performance selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F3] ARP → [SF1] TYPE → KeyMode Song mode [SONG] → Song selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F3] ARP → [SF1] TYPE → KeyMode Pattern mode [PATTERN] → Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F3] ARP → [SF1] TYPE → KeyMode Owner’s Manual Internal Structure (System Overview) ■ Arpeggio related parameters The Arpeggio related parameters can be set from the following displays, depending on the selected mode. ● Voice mode [VOICE] → Voice selection → [F6] ARP Page 189 [VOICE] → Voice selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F3] ARP Page 191 Assigning Arpeggio types to the [SF1] - [SF5] buttons for each Voice [VOICE] → Voice selection → [F1] PLAY Page 188 MIDI output parameters for Arpeggio playback for all the Voices [VOICE] → [UTILITY] → [F3] VOICE → [SF3] ARP CH Page 262 Arpeggio type parameters called up when selecting a Voice n MIDI output parameters for Arpeggio playback are set for each Voice in the Voice mode. In the other modes, however, they can be set for each Performance, Song, and Pattern. ● Performance mode [PERFORM] → Performance selection → [F6] ARP Page 213 [PERFORM] → Performance selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F3] ARP Page 214 [PERFORM] → Performance selection → [F1] PLAY Page 212 Parameters about the Arpeggio type called up when selecting a Song (including MIDI output parameters for Arpeggio playback) [SONG] → Song selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F3] ARP Page 234 Assigning Arpeggio types to the [SF1] - [SF5] buttons for each Song [SONG] → Song selection → [F1] PLAY Page 221 [SONG] → Song selection → [●] (Record) → [F3] ARP Page 223 [SONG] → Song selection → [●] (Record) → [F4] REC ARP Page 223 Arpeggio type parameters called up when selecting a Performance (including MIDI output parameters for Arpeggio playback) Assigning Arpeggio types to the [SF1] - [SF5] buttons for each Performance Arpeggio type parameters in recording n Basic Structure ● Song mode Arpeggio related parameters in the Song mode belong to the Mixing. Therefore, if desired, store them to internal memory (DRAM) in the Song Mixing Store mode and save them to the SmartMedia/USB storage device as Song data in the File mode. ● Pattern mode Parameters about the Arpeggio type called up when selecting a Pattern (including MIDI output parameters for Arpeggio playback) [PATTERN] → Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F3] ARP Page 248 Assigning Arpeggio types to the [SF1] - [SF5] buttons for each Pattern [PATTERN] → Pattern selection → [F1] Play Page 241 [PATTERN] → Pattern selection → [●] (Record) → [F3] ARP Page 243 [PATTERN] → Pattern selection → [●] (Record) → [F4] REC ARP Page 243 Arpeggio type parameters in recording n Arpeggio related parameters in the Pattern mode belong to the Mixing. Therefore, if desired, store them to internal memory (DRAM) in the Pattern Mixing Store mode and save them to the SmartMedia/USB storage device as Pattern data in the File mode. Owner’s Manual 171 Internal Structure (System Overview) Sampling Block Sampling is a powerful function that lets you bring your own recorded sounds – voice, instrument, rhythm, special sound effects, etc. – into the system of this synthesizer, and play those sounds just as you would the Voices of the instrument. In order to use the Sampling features of the instrument, you’ll need to install DIMM memory modules (sold separately) to the instrument. n In addition to being able to record samples directly with the MOTIF ES, you can also import existing audio data (in WAV or AIFF file format) in the File mode. This lets you use audio you’ve recorded and edited on computer with the instrument. Sampling Source SmartMedia/ USB storage device Before sampling, connect the source to the appropriate connector. Microphone, etc. CD, MD, etc. mLAN device (Data Rate S400) USB 3.3V DAT A / D INPUT R L TO DEVICE CARD TO HOST GAIN OPTICAL IN OUT DIGITAL IN OUT USB connector A/D INPUT jacks OPTICAL IN connector or DIGITAL IN connector (when the optional AIEB2 has been installed) mLAN connector (when the optional mLAN16E has been installed) Load Loading the WAV file/AIFF file from the [FILE] → [F3] LOAD display, setting the file type to “Waveform.” Sampling Basic Structure Executing from the [INTEGRATED SAMPLING] → [F6] REC display in the Sampling mode Sample (Wave) Optional DIMM (up to 512MB) Sampling Destination Before sampling, set the appropriate location for storing the sample (Waveform, User Voice) from the [INTEGRATED SAMPLING] → [F1] DEST display. Velocity Waveform 127 Sample 1 (Key bank) 40 D2 Sample 2 (Key bank) Sample 4 (Key bank) Sample 3 (Key bank) Sample 5 (Key bank) A2 User Voice (When executing the Sampling function in the Voice mode/Performance mode) 172 Owner’s Manual G2 Waveform F4 Key number (Note number) Sample Voice (When executing the Sampling function in the Song mode/Pattern mode) Internal Structure (System Overview) Data created by Sampling Note Data Regardless of the mode, the raw Sampled data is the same, of course. However, various parameters are different, depending on the particular mode or settings. Briefly, here is an explanation of what kinds of data are created in the Sampling function. When you set the Type to “Sample + note” from the [SONG] or [PATTERN] → [INTEGRATED SAMPLING] → [F2] SOURCE display and execute Sampling, a Sample Voice is created and the sampled wave is assigned to a specified note and recorded as simple MIDI sequence data to a specified track (as shown below). ● Sampling data common to all modes Sample Wave (Sample data) This is the raw audio data stored in this synthesizer’s internal memory when sampling. Key Bank The note range and velocity range to which the Sample is assigned, is called the Key Bank. Assign the Sample to a specified key (note) to create a Sample Voice. Waveform ● Data created by sampling in the Voice/Performance mode User Voice Before you can play the recorded/imported sample data (Waves), you’ll need to save them as User Voices, after which they can be selected and played from the keyboard or sequencer — the same as other Voices. Also, these User Voices can be assigned as Performance parts – just as with the Preset Voices. ● Data created by sampling in the Song/Pattern mode Sequence data Key Bank and Sequence data When you set the Type to “Sample + seq” from the [SONG] or [PATTERN] → [INTEGRATED SAMPLING] → [F2] SOURCE display and execute Sampling, a Sample Voice is created and the sampled wave is “sliced” or divided into several component samples — and each is assigned to specific notes, with sequence data for playing the notes to recreate the sample. This is useful with rhythmic samples, giving you fine control over the playback, including tempo changes. Basic Structure The group of Key Banks to which sample data is assigned is called the Waveform. Sample Sample Voice Song or Pattern Specify the track. Sampling Track 1 Record to create a Sample Voice. Slice the Sample and assign the sliced Sample to specified keys (notes) to create a Sample Voice. Track 2 Track 3 Track 16 Sequence data When sampling in the Song/Pattern mode, the recorded/ imported sample data is automatically stored as a Sample Voice. Sample Voices can be assigned to the Mixing parts corresponding to the track which was assigned from the [INTEGRATED SAMPLING] → [F1] DEST display, and they can be sounded while Song/Pattern data is being played back. Sample Voices are original, dedicated Voices for the particular Song/Pattern that was selected when sampling. Because of this, you cannot take a Sample Voice belonging to one Song or Pattern and use it in another Song or Pattern. n You cannot select Sample Voices in the Voice or Performance mode. (However, you CAN select the Wave of the Sample Voice in Voice Edit.) Owner’s Manual 173 Internal Structure (System Overview) Waveform and User Voices/Sample Voices Waveform (User 001 - 1024) Pattern 64 001 When entering Sampling mode from Voice/Performance mode 002 Sampling Pattern 02 Pattern 01 003 A User Voice B C P 004 16 sections 001 005 002 003 006 004 007 005 008 Pattern Track 1 When entering Sampling mode from Pattern mode Sampling Track 2 Track 3 128 009 When entering File mode from Voice/Performance mode 010 Track 16 When entering File mode from Pattern mode Loading WAV/AIFF files Loading WAV/AIFF files Sample Voices (recorded to each track) Basic Structure 1023 1024 Song 64 Song 02 Song 01 Waveform Velocity 40 Track 1 Track 2 127 Sample 2 Sample 4 Sample 1 (Key bank) (Key bank) Waveform (Key bank) Sample 3 Sample 5 (Key bank) (Key bank) F4 D2 A2 G2 When entering Sampling mode from Song mode Sampling Track 3 Track 16 When entering File mode from Song mode Loading WAV/AIFF files Sample Voices (recorded to each track) n n n 174 When executing the Sampling in the Sampling mode entered from the Voice mode/Performance mode, you can specify the Waveform number and User Voice number as a Destination (location to which the sampled wave is stored) beforehand. Likewise, you can specify the same parameters also when loading the WAV file/AIFF file in the File mode entered from the Voice mode/Performance mode. When executing the Sampling in the Sampling mode entered from the Song mode/Pattern mode, you can specify the track number as a Destination (location to which the sampled wave is stored) beforehand. Likewise, you can specify the same parameters also when loading the WAV file/AIFF file in the File mode entered from the Song mode/Pattern mode. When creating Waveforms, sampled audio waves are automatically stored starting from the lowest numbered available space. Up to 128 keybanks can be assigned to a single waveform. Up to a maximum of 4096 key banks can be created on the instrument. Owner’s Manual ■ How to select and hear the Waveform You can select and hear any of Waveforms from the following display in the Voice Edit mode. [VOICE] → [EDIT] → Element selection → [F1] OSC → [SF1] WAVE If you set the Bank parameter to “usr wave,” you can select and hear the Waveform obtained by using the Sampling function or loading the WAV file/AIFF file. You can also select and hear the User Waveform from the following display in the Sampling mode. [INTEGRATED SAMPLING] → [EDIT] → [F1] KEY BANK Internal Structure (System Overview) ■ Start recording when the Song/Pattern playback reaches a specified point Trigger mode [INTEGRATED SAMPLING] → [F6] REC → TriggerMode The Trigger mode is a convenient feature in Sampling that lets you determine how sample recording is started — manually or automatically, based on the audio level. ■ Start recording manually [INTEGRATED SAMPLING] → [F6] REC → TriggerMode =manual Regardless of the audio input signal level or the Song/Pattern playback status, sampling starts soon after you press the [F6] REC button in the Sampling Setup display. Sampling also starts regardless of the playback/stop status of the Song/ Pattern. ■ Start recording when the input signal exceeds the Trigger Level [INTEGRATED SAMPLING] → [F6] REC → TriggerMode = meas After pressing the [F6] REC button in the Sampling Setup display, start and stop of sampling is linked to playback of the Song/Pattern. This setting is available only when the Song/Pattern mode and recording type (Rec Type) are set to “Slice + Seq” or “Sample + Note.” Song/ Pattern start Sampling stop Sampling start Punch In Punch Out 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 After pressing the [F6] REC button in the Sampling Setup display (in any mode), sampling starts as soon as a strong enough audio signal is received. The threshold for this audiotriggered start is called the Trigger Level (explained in the illustration below). Level Basic Structure [INTEGRATED SAMPLING] → [F6] REC → TriggerMode =level Wave data Sample recording starts here. Recording trigger level. A Level B C D E Sample recording starts here. A B C D E Recording trigger level. As you can see, the higher the Trigger Level setting, the louder the input audio needs to be in order to start sampling. On the other hand, if the Trigger Level is set too low, a soft noise may be enough to inadvertently start sampling. Owner’s Manual 175 Internal Structure (System Overview) Sample playback types Sample Wave Loop Playback [INTEGRATED SAMPLING] → [EDIT] → [F3] PARAM → PlayMode Samples can be set to play back in the following three different ways. ■ One Shot [INTEGRATED SAMPLING] → [EDIT] → [F3] PARAM → PlayMode = oneshot When you press a note on the keyboard, the Sample plays from beginning to end just once. This type of playback is commonly used for drum and percussion sounds. Start Point Top Point End Point ■ Reverse [INTEGRATED SAMPLING] → [EDIT] → [F3] PARAM → PlayMode = reverse When you press a note on the keyboard, the Sample plays from end to beginning just once. This is useful for creating reversed cymbal sounds and other special effects. Basic Structure Start Point Key on End Point ■ Loop [INTEGRATED SAMPLING] → [EDIT] → [F3] PARAM → PlayMode = loop This is used primarily to create long continuous sounds, such as brass and strings, or instruments with naturally long decay, such as piano. An appropriate part of the sample near the end is looped to reproduce a long sustain or decay. When you play a note on the keyboard, the Sample plays from the start point to the end point. It then returns to the loop start point and plays to the end point again, and keeps doing this until you release the note. With musical instruments in general, the characteristic part of the sound (the “attack” section) is usually at the beginning, just after the start point. After this, the sound does not vary a great deal while the note is being held, and you can set the loop and end points at either end of this section. When playing back a Sample of an instrument that has been looped like this, the attack section of the sound is played back once and then the looped section is played back continuously until you release the note. Looping is also way of creating usable instrument sounds without using up too much memory. You can set each point in the Sampling mode. Since this synthesizer is capable of displaying the entire image of the sampled audio data in the LCD (zoom in and zoom out are available), you can edit the loop points visually – making sample editing accurate and easy. 176 Owner’s Manual Start Point End Point Internal Structure (System Overview) This block applies effects to the output of the tone generator block, processing and enhancing the sound using sophisticated DSP (digital signal processing) technology. Effect structure The effect processing of this synthesizer features the System Effects, Insertion Effects, Master Effect, Part EQ (Equalizer), and Master EQ (Equalizer). ■ Plug-in Insertion Effects This is a special effect system, only available when an effecttype Plug-in Board is installed. Plug-in Board effects are not available in the Voice mode. n ■ Master Effect This block applies effects to the final stereo output signal of the entire sound. A total of 8 different Master Effect types are available. n ■ System Effects (Reverb, Chorus) System Effects are applied to the overall sound, whether it be a Voice, an entire Performance, a Song, etc. With System effects, the sound of each Part is sent to the effect according to the effect Send Level for each Part. The processed sound (referred to as “wet”) is sent back to the mixer, according to the Return Level, and output – after being mixed with the unprocessed “dry” sound. This arrangement lets you prepare an optimum balance of the effect sound and the original sound of the Parts. Reverb The Reverb effects add a warm ambience to the sound, simulating the complex reflections of actual performance spaces, such as a concert hall or a small club. A total of 20 different Reverb types are available. Chorus The Chorus effects use various types of modulation processing, including flanger and phaser, to enhance the sound in a variety of ways. A total of 49 types are available, including reverb and delay effects. n About the System Effect related display in each mode, see pages 179 and 180. ■ Insertion Effects A, B Insertion effects can be applied individually to each part. Insertion effects are mainly used to directly process a single part. The depth of the effect is adjusted by setting the dry/wet balance. Since an Insertion effect can only be applied to one particular part, it should be used for sounds you want to drastically change or for sounds that use an effect unintended for other sounds. You can also set the balance so that only the effect sound is heard, by setting Wet to 100%. This synthesizer features eight sets of Insertion effects (one set has A and B units). They can be applied to all parts of the Performance, and applied to eight parts (maximum) of the Song/Pattern. A total of 116 different Chorus types are available. n In the Voice mode, only one set of the Insertion effects is available. n For details on the displays related to the Insertion effects in each mode, see pages 179 and 180. n Among the AUDIO IN parts, Insertion effects cannot be applied to the mLAN parts and AIEB2 parts. For details on the displays related to the Plug-in Insertion effects in each mode, see pages 179 and 180. For details on the displays related to the Master effects in each mode, see pages 179 and 180. EFFECT Buttons Three EFFECT buttons on the panel let you switch each effect block on and off. EFFECT BYPASS INSERTION SYSTEM MASTER EFFECT Basic Structure Effect Block Press the [INSERTION] button below “BYPASS” so that the lamp lights to turn the Insertion effects off. You can specify which Insertion effects (only the internal Insertion effect, only the Plug-in Insertion effect, or both of them) are bypassed from the [UTILITY] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF3] EF BYPS display in the Utility mode. Press the [SYSTEM] button below “BYPASS” so that the lamp lights to turn the System effects off. You can specify which System effects (only the Reverb effect, only the Chorus effect, or both of them) are bypassed from the [UTILITY] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF3] EF BYPS display in the Utility mode. Press the [MASTER EFFECT] button so that the lamp lights to turn the Master effect on. Keep in mind that pressing and holding this button calls up the Master effect setup display in the current mode. Controlling the Master effect by using the Knobs When pressing the [ARP FX] button and the [EQ] button simultaneously (both lamps light), you can control the Knobs to adjust the Master effect related parameters specified in the [UTILITY] → [F4] CTL ASN → [SF5] MEF display of the Utility mode. Owner’s Manual 177 Internal Structure (System Overview) ■ Equalizer (EQ) ● Part EQ Usually an equalizer is used to correct the sound output from amps or speakers to match the special character of the room, or to change the tonal character of the sound. The sound is divided into several frequency bands, and adjustments are made to the sound by raising or lowering the level of each band. By adjusting the sound according to the genre – classical music being more refined, pop music more crisp, and rock music more dynamic – you can draw out the special characteristics of the music and make your performance more enjoyable. Three separate EQ sections are available on the instrument: Element EQ, Part EQ, and Master EQ. This 3-band EQ is applied to each part of the Performance/ Song/Pattern, The high band and low band are the shelving type. The middle band is the peaking type. Gain + 0 Frequency – 3 bands ● Element EQ n [VOICE] → Voice selection → [EDIT] → Element selection/ Key selection → [F6] EQ The Element EQ is applied to each element of the Normal Voice and each key of the Drum Voice. You can specify which shape is used among the two shapes described below and set the related parameters. Basic Structure Peaking type This type of EQ shape lets you attenuate/boost the signal at the specified Frequency setting. Q (frequency bandwidth) LOW MID HIGH The part EQ is not available in the Voice mode. ● Master EQ Master EQ is applied to the final (post-effect), overall sound of the instrument. In this EQ, all bands can be set to peaking, or the lowest and highest bands can be set to shelving (as shown below). EQ for which all bands are set to peaking type Gain Q (frequency bandwidth) + Gain + 0 0 Frequency Frequency – – 3 bands Shelving type LOW LOWMID MID HIGHMID HIGH EQ for which LOW and HIGH are set to shelving type This type of EQ shape lets you attenuate/boost the signal at frequencies above or below the specified Frequency setting. Gain Q (frequency bandwidth) Gain Low Gain High Gain + + 0 Frequency Frequency 0 – – Low Freq n 178 High Freq In addition to the individual gain controls, there is also an overall level parameter that attenuates/boosts the entire frequency range. Owner’s Manual 5 bands LOW LOWMID MID HIGHMID HIGH Internal Structure (System Overview) Effect connection in each mode ● In the Voice mode The Effect parameters in the Voice mode are set for each Voice and the settings are stored to internal flash ROM as a User Voice. Please note that the Master Effect and Master EQ parameters are set for all the Voices in the Utility mode and stored to internal flash ROM as System settings by pressing the [STORE] button also in the Utility mode. [VOICE] → Voice selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F6] EFFECT → [SF1] CONNECT Insertion Effect Send Level Return Level Element or Key Element EQ [VOICE] → [UTILITY] → [F3] VOICE → [SF2] MEF (for all Voices) Master Effect Output [VOICE] → [UTILITY] → [F3] VOICE → [SF1] MEQ (for all Voices) You can select the Insertion connection from the three types shown below. You can set which Insertion system, A or B, is applied to each Element (or to each key when the Drum voice is selected). The Insertion effect can also be bypassed. Master EQ A to B B to A parallel A A A B B B n The parallel connection is not available for Plug-in voices. n The Plug-in Insertion effect (when the Effect Plug-in board has been installed) is not available in the Voice mode. [VOICE] → Voice selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF3] MEQ OFS Basic Structure Tone Generator block System Effect Reverb (REV), Chorus (CHO) ● In the Performance mode The Effect parameters in the Performance mode are set for each Performance and the settings are stored to internal flash ROM as User data. [PERFORM] → Performance selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F6] EFFECT → [SF1] CONNECT The Insertion connection type depends on the setting of the Voice assigned to the selected part. System Effect Reverb (REV), Chorus (CHO) *4 Part 1 B Part 1 Part EQ *3 Master EQ Output [PERFORM] → Performance selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F2] OUT/MEF → [SF3] MEF only to the A/D Input Part. Plug-in Insertion Effect (PLG-EF) *1 *5 Master Effect *1 Among all of the audio input Parts, the Insertion effect can be applied *2 Audio Input part Return Level Insertion Effect (VCE INS) A Tone Generator block Send Level *2 Select the part to which the Plug-in Insertion effect is applied from Parts 1-4, Plug-in Parts 1-3, and the audio input Part in the following display. [PERFORM] → Performance selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F6] EFFECT → [SF1] INS SW *3 [PERFORM] → Performance selection → [EDIT] → Part selection → [F3] EQ *2 When the PLG100-VH has been installed *4 [PERFORM] → Performance selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F2] OUT/MEF → [SF1] OUT *5 [PERFORM] → Performance selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F2] OUT/MEF → [SF2] MEQ [PERFORM] → Performance selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF3] MEQ OFS Owner’s Manual 179 Internal Structure (System Overview) ● In the Song mode/Pattern mode The Effect parameters in the Song mode/Pattern mode are set for each Song/Pattern. The Effect settings are stored to internal DRAM in the Song Mixing mode/Pattern Mixing mode and saved to the SmartMedia/USB storage device in the File mode. [SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song/Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F6] EFFECT → [SF1] CONNECT System Effects Reverb (REV), Chorus (CHO) *5 Send Level Tone Generator block *3 Insertion Effects (VCE INS) Part 1-16 Part 1 Part EQ *6 *4 A Master EQ Output [SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song/Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F2] MEQ/MEF → [SF2] MEF *1 Basic Structure Audio Input part Master Effect B Plug-in Part 1-3 (When the Single part Plug-in board has been installed) *2 Return Level Part 1 Plug-in Insertion Effect (PLG-EF) *1 When the PLG100-VH has been installed *1 Select the part to which the Plug-in Insertion effect is applied from Parts 1-4, Plug-in Parts 1- 3, and the audio input Part. *2 Among all of the audio input Parts, the Insertion effect can be applied only to the A/D Input Part. *3 The Insertion effects can be applied to up to eight Parts, selectable from Parts 1-4, Plug-in Parts 1-3, and the A/D input Part in the following display. [SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song/Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F6] EFFECT → [SF2] INS SW The connection type depends on the setting of the Voice assigned to the selected part. *4 [SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song/Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → Part selection → [F3] EQ *5 [SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song/Pattern selection → [F4] EF SEND *6 [SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song/Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F2] MEQ/MEF → [SF1] MEQ [SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song/Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF1] MEQ OFS Tone Generator block Part 17-32 (When the Multi-part Plug-in Board PLG100-XG has been installed) 180 n The Insertion Effect, Plug-in Insertion Effect, and the System Effect cannot be applied to Parts 17-32 (using the Multi-part Plug-in board PLG100-XG). n The Part EQ cannot be applied to parts of the Plug-in Board. n The System Effects (Reverb, Chorus), the Master EQ, and the Master Effect are not applied to the sound output through the ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT jacks (including those of the AIEB2) or the mLAN connector of the mLAN16E board. (Only the Part EQ and the Insertion Effect are applied.) Owner’s Manual About MIDI About MIDI MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) is a standard which allows electronic musical instruments to communicate with each other, by sending and receiving compatible Note, Control Change, Program Change and various other types of MIDI data, or messages. This synthesizer can control other MIDI devices by transmitting note related data and various types of controller data. It can also be controlled by incoming MIDI messages which automatically determine the tone generator mode, select MIDI channels, voices and effects, change parameter values, and of course play the voices specified for the various Parts. Many MIDI messages are expressed in hexadecimal or binary numbers. Hexadecimal numbers may include the letter “H” as a suffix. The letter “n” indicates a certain whole number. The chart below lists the corresponding decimal number for each hexadecimal/binary number. MIDI channels MIDI performance data is assigned to one of sixteen MIDI channels. Using these channels, 1 - 16, the performance data for sixteen different instrument parts can be simultaneously sent over one MIDI cable. Think of the MIDI channels as TV channels. Each TV station transmits its broadcasts over a specific channel. Your home TV set receives many different programs simultaneously from several TV stations and you select the appropriate channel to watch the desired program. News 1 Basic Structure Weather Report 2 News 2 MIDI operates on the same basic principle. The transmitting instrument sends MIDI data on a specific MIDI channel (MIDI Transmit Channel) via a single MIDI cable to the receiving instrument. If the receiving instrument’s MIDI channel (MIDI Receive Channel) matches the Transmit Channel, the receiving instrument will sound according to the data sent by the transmitting instrument. For information on how to set the MIDI transmit channel and the MIDI receive channel, see page 35. MIDI cable MIDI Transmit channel 2 MIDI Receive channel 2 MIDI data is assigned to one of sixteen channels. However, we can overcome the sixteen-channel limit by using separate MIDI “ports,” each supporting sixteen channels. For details, see page 38. MIDI Messages Transmitted/Recognized by this synthesizer MIDI messages can be divided into two groups: Channel messages and System messages. Below is an explanation of the various types of MIDI messages which this synthesizer can recognize/transmit. The messages transmitted/recognized by this synthesizer are shown in the MIDI Data Format and MIDI Implementation Chart of the separate Data List. n This synthesizer’s tone generator and sequencer blocks handle different MIDI events. These are listed separately in the MIDI Data Format as well as in the MIDI Implementation Chart. Owner’s Manual 181 About MIDI CHANNEL MESSAGES Data Entry MSB (Control #006) Data Entry LSB (Control #038) Channel messages contain data related to the performance on the keyboard for the specific channel. Messages which set the value for the parameter specified by RPN MSB/LSB (page 183) and NRPN MSB/LSB (page 183). Parameter value is determined by combining the MSB and LSB. ■ Note On/Note Off (Key On/Key Off) Messages which are generated when the keyboard is played. Reception note range = C-2 (0) - G8 (127), C3 = 60 Velocity range = 1 - 127 (Only the Note On velocity is received) Note On: Generated when a key is pressed. Note Off: Generated when a key is released. Each message includes a specific note number which corresponds to the key which is pressed, plus a velocity value based on how hard the key is struck. ■ Control Change Control Change messages let you select a voice bank, control volume, panning, modulation, portamento time, brightness and various other controller parameters, through specific Control Change numbers which correspond to each of the various parameters. Basic Structure Bank Select MSB (Control #000) Bank Select LSB (Control #032) Messages which select variation voice bank numbers by combining and sending the MSB and LSB from an external device. The functions of MSB and LSB messages differ depending on the tone generator mode. MSB numbers select voice type (Normal Voice or Drum Voice), and LSB numbers select voice banks. (For more information about Banks and Programs, see Voice List in the separate Data List.) A new bank selection will not become effective until the next Program Change message is received. Messages which control the volume of each Part. Setting the value to 127 produces maximum volume and 0 results in volume off. Pan (Control #010) Messages which control the stereo panning position of each Part (for stereo output). Setting the value to 127 positions the sound to the far right and 0 positions the sound to the far left. Expression (Control #011) Messages which control intonation expression of each Part during performance. Setting the value to 127 produces maximum volume and 0 results in volume off. Hold1 (Control #064) Messages which control sustain on/off. Setting the value between 64 - 127 turns the sustain on, between 0 - 63 turns the sustain off. Portamento Switch (Control #065) Messages which control portamento on/off. Setting the value between 64 -127 turns the portamento on, between 0 - 63 turns the portamento off. Sostenuto (Control #066) Messages which control vibrato depth using the Modulation Wheel. Setting the value to 127 produces maximum vibrato and 0 results in vibrato off. Messages which control sostenuto on/off. Holding specific notes and then pressing and holding the sostenuto pedal will sustain those notes as you play subsequent notes, until the pedal is released. Setting the value between 64 -127 turns the sostenuto on, between 0 - 63 turns the sostenuto off. Portamento Time (Control #005) Harmonic Content (Control #071) Messages which control the duration of portamento, or a continuous pitch glide between successively played notes. When the parameter Portamento Switch (Control #065) is set to on, the value set here can adjust the speed of pitch change. Setting the value to 127 produces maximum portamento time and 0 results in minimum portamento time. Messages which adjust the filter resonance set for each Part. The value set here is an offset value which will be added to or subtracted from the voice data. Higher values will result in a more characteristic, resonant sound. Depending on the voice, the effective range may be narrower than the range available for adjustment. Modulation (Control #001) 182 Main Volume (Control #007) Owner’s Manual About MIDI Release Time (Control #072) Messages which adjust the AEG release time set for each Part. The value set here is an offset value which will be added to or subtracted from the voice data. Attack Time (Control #073) Messages which adjust the AEG attack time set for each Part. The value set here is an offset value which will be added to or subtracted from the voice data. Brightness (Control #074) Messages which adjust the filter cutoff frequency set for each Part. The value set here is an offset value which will be added to or subtracted from the voice data. Lower values result in a softer sound. Depending on the voice, the effective range may be narrower than the range available for adjustment. RPN (Registered Parameter Number) LSB (Control #100) RPN (Registered Parameter Number) MSB (Control #101) Messages which offset, or add or subtract values from a Part’s pitch bend sensitivity, tuning, or other parameter settings. First send the RPN MSB and RPN LSB to specify the parameter which is to be controlled. Then use Data Increment/Decrement (page 183) to set the value of the specified parameter. Note that once the RPN has been set for a channel, subsequent data entry will be recognized as the same RPN’s value change. Therefore after you use the RPN, you should set a Null (7FH, 7FH) value to avoid unexpected results. The following RPN numbers can be received. RPN MSB RPN LSB PARAMETER 00 00 Pitch Bend Sensitivity 00 01 Fine Tune 00 02 Coarse Tune 7F 7F Null Decay Time (Control #075) ■ Channel Mode Messages The following Channel Mode Messages can be received. 2nd BYTE 3rd BYTE Effect1 Depth (Reverb Send Level) (Control #091) 120 0 All Sounds Off Messages which adjust the send level for the Reverb effect. 121 0 Reset All Controllers 123 0 All Notes Off 126 0 - 16 127 0 Effect3 Depth (Chorus Send Level) (Control #093) Messages which adjust the send level for the Chorus effect. Data Increment (Control #096) Decrement (Control #097) for RPN Messages which increase or decrease the MSB value of pitch bend sensitivity, fine tune, or coarse tune in steps of 1. You will need to assign one of those parameters using the RPN in the external device in advance. The data byte is ignored. When the maximum value or minimum value is reached, the value will not be incremented or decremented further. (Incrementing the fine tune will not cause the coarse tune to be incremented.) NRPN (Non-Registered Parameter Number) LSB (Control #098) (Plug-in Board only) NRPN (Non-Registered Parameter Number) MSB (Control #099) (Plug-in Board only) Messages which adjust a voice’s vibrato, filter, EG, drum setup or other parameter settings. First send the NRPN MSB and NRPN LSB to specify the parameter which is to be controlled. Then use Data Entry (page 182) to set the value of the specified parameter. Note that once the NRPN has been set for a channel, subsequent data entry will be recognized as the same NRPN’s value change. Therefore, after you use the NRPN, you should set a Null (7FH, 7FH) value to avoid unexpected results. For details, refer to the owner’s manual of the relevant Plug-in Board. Basic Structure Messages which adjust the AEG decay time set for each Part. The value set here is an offset value which will be added to or subtracted from the voice data. MESSAGE Mono Poly All Sounds Off (Control #120) Clears all sounds currently sounding on the specified channel. However, the status of channel messages such as Note On and Hold On is maintained. Reset All Controllers (Control #121) The values of the following controllers will be reset to the defaults. CONTROLLER VALUE Pitch Bend Change 0 (center) Aftertouch 0 (off) Polyphonic Aftertouch 0 (off) Modulation 0 (off) Expression 127 (max) Hold1 0 (off) Portamento 0 (off) Sostenuto 0 (off) Soft Pedal 0 (off) Portamento Control Cancels the Portamento source key number RPN Number not specified; internal data will not change NRPN Number not specified; internal data will not change All Notes Off (Control #123) Clears all notes currently on for the specified channel. However, if Hold1 or Sostenuto is on, notes will continue sounding until these are turned off. Owner’s Manual 183 About MIDI Mono (Control #126) Master Volume Performs the same function as when an All Sounds Off message is received, and if the 3rd byte (mono number) is in the range of 0 - 16, it sets the corresponding channel to Mono Mode (Mode 4: m = 1). When received, the Volume MSB will be effective for the System Parameter. Poly (Control #127) ■ System Realtime Messages Performs the same function as when an All Sounds Off message is received, and sets the corresponding channel to Poly Mode. These messages control the sequencer, that is to say Song and Pattern. ■ Program Change Messages that determine which voice to select for each Part. With a combination of Bank Select, you can select not only basic voice numbers, but also variation voice bank numbers. For a list of the Voices, see the separate Data List. ■ Pitch Bend Pitch Bend messages are continuous controller messages that allow the pitch of designated notes to be raised or lowered by a specified amount over a specified duration. ■ Channel Aftertouch Basic Structure Messages which let you control the sounds by the pressure you apply to the keys after the initial striking of the keys, over the entire channel. This synthesizer does not transmit this data from the keyboard; however, this synthesizer does properly respond to this data when received from an external device. ■ Polyphonic Aftertouch Messages which let you control the sounds by the pressure you apply to the keys after the initial striking of the keys, for each individual key. This synthesizer does not transmit this data from the keyboard; however, the data is transmitted from the internal sequencer. SYSTEM MESSAGES System messages are the data related to the overall system of the device. ■ System Exclusive Messages System Exclusive messages control various functions of this synthesizer, including master volume and master tuning, tone generator mode, effect type and various other parameters. General MIDI (GM) System On (Song mode/Pattern only) When “General MIDI system on” is received, the MOTIF ES will receive the MIDI messages which are compatible with GM System Level 1, and consequently will not receive NRPN and Bank Select messages. F0 7E 7F 09 01 F7 (Hexadecimal) n 184 Make sure that the interval between this message and the first note data of the song is at least a quarter note or greater in length. Owner’s Manual F0 7F 7F 04 01 ll mm F7 (Hexadecimal) * mm (MSB) = appropriate volume value, ll (LSB) = ignored Active Sensing (FEH) Once FEH (Active Sensing) has been received, if no MIDI data is subsequently received for longer than an interval of approximately 300 msec, the MOTIF ES will perform the same function as when All Sounds Off, All Notes Off, and Reset All Controllers messages are received, and will then return to a status in which FEH is not monitored Timing Clock (F8H) This message is transmitted with a fixed interval (24 times per 1/4 note) to synchronize connected MIDI instruments. You can select whether the sequencer block uses the internal Timing Clock, or external Timing Clock messages received via MIDI IN by setting the MIDI Sync parameter: [UTILITY] → [F5] MIDI → [SF3] SYNC → MIDI Sync. Start (FAH) This message lets the MIDI sequence data start playing back from the beginning. This message will be transmitted when pressing the [F] (Play) button at the top of the Song or Pattern. Continue (FBH) This message lets the MIDI sequence data start playing back from the current song position. This message will be transmitted when pressing the [F] (Play) button at the middle of the Song or Pattern. Stop (FCH) This message causes MIDI sequence data (song) to stop playing back. This message will be transmitted when pressing the [■] (Stop) button during playback. n You can select whether this synthesizer will transmit Timing Clock, Start, Continue, and Stop messages by setting the SeqCtrl parameter: [UTILITY] → [F5] MIDI → [SF3] SYNC → SeqCtrl. ■ System Common Message System Common messages also control the sequencer, including Song Select and Song Position Pointer messages. Internal Memory and File Management Internal Memory and File Management As you use the MOTIF ES, you’ll create many different kinds of data, including Voices, Performances, Songs, and Patterns. This section describes how to maintain the various types of data and use the memory devices/media for storing them. Maintaining data You can maintain the data you’ve created via the following three methods. ● Store This is a process of transferring or saving the created data of this synthesizer to a dedicated location (User Memory) in the internal memory. Each type of data can be stored with the following operations. Voice [VOICE] → Voice selection → [STORE] Page 85 Performance [PERFORM] → Performance selection → [STORE] Page 91 Song Mixing [SONG] → Song selection → [MIXING] → [STORE] Page 131 Pattern Mixing [PATTERN] → Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [STORE] Page 131 Mixing Voice [SONG] or [PATTERN] → Song/Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [F5] VCE ED → [STORE] Page 106 Master [MASTER] → Master selection → [STORE] Page 137 System settings [UTILITY] → [STORE] * Page 260 * Please note that pressing the [STORE] in the Utility mode starts the Store operation of the System settings immediately. Basic Structure CAUTION Since Song Mixing, Pattern Mixing, and Mixing Voice data is stored to DRAM (page 187), all such data is lost when turning off the power — even if the data has been stored with the operations above. Make sure to save this data to the SmartMedia/USB storage device in the File mode after storing. CAUTION Never attempt to turn off the power while data (e.g., Voice) is being written to Flash ROM (while an “Executing...” or “Please keep power on” message is shown). Turning the power off in this state may cause the system to freeze (due to corruption of data in the Flash ROM) and prevent normal startup the next time the power is turned on, as well as resulting in the loss of all user data. ● Save [FILE] → [F2] SAVE This is a process of transferring or saving the created data of this synthesizer to an external memory device (SmartMedia/USB storage device). This process can be done in the File mode. The Save operation can be done via various methods, such as saving all data as a single file or saving a specified type of data (e.g., only Voices) as a single file. For details, see Memory Structure (page 186) and Reference (page 188). The saved data as files can be recalled by loading them in the File mode. ● Bulk Dump This function lets you save the data in the Edit buffer (DRAM) or Flash ROM by transmitting it as Bulk data (system exclusive message) to an external MIDI instrument or sequence software on a computer. This can be done with the following operations. [VOICE] → Voice selection → [JOB] → [F4] BULK Voice Performance [PERFORM] → Performance selection → [JOB] → [F4] BULK Song Mixing [SONG] → Song selection → [MIXING] → [JOB] → [F4] BULK Pattern Mixing [PATTERN] → Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [JOB] → [F4] BULK Master [MASTER] → Master selection → [JOB] → [F4] BULK n Mixing Voice data cannot be transmitted as Bulk data via panel operations. n User Arpeggio data and some of the System settings are not handled as Bulk data. n The data in the User Memory of Flash ROM can be transmitted to an external MIDI instrument or computer upon reception of a bulk request message. For details about the bulk request message and bulk dump format, see the separate Data List. Voice and Plug-in Voice data can be transmitted to a computer for editing with the Voice Editor software (on the included CD-ROM). The edited Voice data can then be transmitted back to the instrument in banks as bulk data. Similarly, Voice data created in the Voice Edit mode can be sent to the computer in banks as bulk data. Song Mixing and Pattern Mixing data can also be transmitted to a computer for editing, using the Multi Part Editor software (on the included CDROM). The edited Mixing data can then be transmitted back to the instrument as bulk data. Mixing data created in the Song Mixing Edit and Pattern Mixing modes can also be sent to the computer in banks as bulk data. Owner’s Manual 185 Internal Memory and File Management Memory Structure This diagram details the relationship among the functions of the MOTIF ES and the internal memory and SmartMedia/USB storage device. Internal Memory Internal data communication Recall Buffer Compare Buffer (DRAM) Data communication between this synthesizer and the external device Preset Data (ROM) • Voice • Plug-in Voice • Preset Phrase (Pattern) • Preset Arpeggio • Demo Excluding Master and Utility settings MIDI instrument or computer Sequence software Voice Editor in the included CD-ROM Multi Part Editor in the included CD-ROM Bulk Dump *1 Edit Buffer (DRAM) User Memory B ul k D um p* 1 *2 SmartMedia/USB storage device Flash ROM • Voice Edit • User Voice (Normal, Drum) File extensions “.W7V” and “.W7E” • File extensions “.WAV” and “.AIF” • A5000/4000/3000 data • AKAI format data • Plug-in Voice Edit • Performance Edit • User Plug-in Voice • User Performance • Master Edit • User Master • Utility settings • User Arpeggio • Pattern Mixing Edit *3 • System settings (Utility settings + Mixing Template) • Song Mixing Edit *3 DRAM Store *1 *4 • Song Record • Song • Song Chain • Song Chain Store *1 • Pattern Record • Phrase • Pattern Patch • Pattern • Pattern Chain • Pattern Chain • Sampling • Waveform File extensions “.W7G” Load/Save (executed in the File mode) *1 Basic Structure Store *1 • Mixing Voice Edit File extensions “.W7A” (including all the data on the User Memory) File extensions “.MID” File extensions “.W7S” File extensions “.W7P” File extensions “.W7W” *5 • File extensions “.WAV” and “.AIF” • A5000/4000/3000 data • SU700 data • AKAI format data Computer Editing the Board Voice (page 76) using the software Plug-in Board Editor supplied with each Plug-in Board Plug-in board (DRAM) File extensions “.W2B” • Plug-in All Bulk *1 For details on the Bulk Dump, Save, and Store operations, see page 185. *2 Only the currently edited data can be transmitted as Bulk data. Note that the Mixing Voice cannot be transmitted as Bulk data. *3 The Mixing settings can be stored/recalled as a template in the Song Mixing Job mode/Pattern Mixing Job mode. *4 You can convert the MIDI sequence data recorded in the Song Record mode/Pattern Record mode to Arpeggio data. This can be executed with the following operations: • [SONG] → [JOB] → [F5] TRACK → 07: Put Track to Arp • [PATTERN] → [JOB] → [F5] TRACK → 06: Track to Arp *5 In order to create a Waveform by sampling or importing an audio file, optional DIMM modules must be installed. 186 Owner’s Manual Internal Memory and File Management Internal Memory Below are explanations of the basic terms used in the Memory Structure illustration on the previous page. ● Flash ROM ROM (Read Only Memory) is memory designed specifically for reading out of data, and as such data cannot be written to it. Unlike conventional ROM, Flash ROM can be overwritten – allowing you to store your own original data. The contents of Flash ROM are maintained even when the power is turned off. ● DRAM RAM (Random Access Memory) is memory designed specifically for data writing and data reading operations. There are two different kinds of RAM, depending on the condition for storing the data: SRAM (Static RAM) and DRAM (Dynamic RAM). The created data stored on DRAM is lost when the power is turned off. Because of this, you should always store any data residing in DRAM to the SmartMedia/USB storage device before turning off the power. ● DIMM DIMM modules must be installed in order to use the Sampling function or to load audio data (Waveform/WAV file/AIFF file) to the instrument. As with DRAM described above, the created data stored on DIMM is lost when the power is turned off. Because of this, you should always store any data residing in DIMM to the SmartMedia/USB storage device before turning off the power. ● Edit Buffer and User Memory Basic Structure The edit buffer is the memory location for edited data of these types: Voice, Performance, Master, Song Mixing, and Pattern Mixing. Data edited in this location will be stored to the User Memory. If you select another Voice, Performance, Master, Song, or Pattern, the entire contents of the edit buffer will be rewritten with the newly selected Voice/Performance/Master/Song Mixing/Pattern Mixing data. Make sure to store any important data before selecting another Voice, etc. ● Edit Buffer and Recall Buffer If you’ve selected another Voice/Performance/Song/Pattern without storing the one you were editing, you can recall your original edits, since the edit buffer’s contents are stored in backup memory. n Keep in mind that the recall buffer is not available in the Master Edit mode. Owner’s Manual 187 Voice Play mode Reference Voice mode ■ Creating Voices — basic procedure You can create and edit your original Voices by setting various parameters in both the Voice Play mode and Voice Edit mode, while the Voice Job mode provides some basic parameter-related tools, such as Initialize and Copy. Once you’ve edited a Voice, you can store it to a User Bank in internal memory (Flash ROM) and save all edited Voices to a SmartMedia/USB storage device in the File mode. [VOICE] → Voice selection Voice Play mode The Voice Play mode lets you perform a variety of general editing operations on the selected voice. For more detailed and comprehensive editing operations, use the Voice Edit mode. n In the Voice Play mode and Voice Edit mode, you can set the parameters for each Voice. The parameters for all the Voices such as Master EQ and Master Effect can be set from the [UTILITY] → [F3] VOICE display in the Utility mode. n The parameters that have the same name in the Voice Play mode and in the Voice Edit mode have the same functions and settings. n When a Plug-in voice is selected, certain parameters are not available for editing, even if they’re described here. [F1] PLAY Reference Voice Mode TCH (Transmit Channel) Indicates the Keyboard MIDI transmit channel. You can change the Keyboard MIDI transmit channel by pressing the [TRACK SELECT] button so that its indicator lights and pressing any of the NUMBER [1] - [16] buttons. The Keyboard MIDI transmit channel can be changed also with the following operation: [UTILITY] → [F5] MIDI → [SF1] CH → KBDTransCh. OCT (Octave) Indicates Keyboard Octave setting set via the [OCTAVE] buttons. This can be changed also with the following operation: [UTILITY] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF2] KBD → Octave. ASA (ASSIGN A), ASB (ASSIGN B) Indicates the functions assigned to the respective Knobs (printed “ASSIGN A” and “ASSIGN B”) when the lamps of both the [PAN/SEND] and [TONE] buttons are turned on. The functions are assigned with the following operation: [UTILITY] → [F4] CTL ASN → [SF2] ASSIGN. n TCH (Transmit Channel), OCT (Octave), ASA (ASSIGN A), and ASB (ASSIGN B) settings do not belong to each Voice. Because of this, these are not stored as an individual Voice in the Voice Store mode (page 208). Indicates the functions assigned to the respective Knobs (printed “ASSIGN 1” and “ASSIGN 2”) when the lamps of both the [PAN/SEND] and [TONE] buttons are turned on. The functions are assigned by setting the Voice Edit common parameters with the following operation: [VOICE] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F4] CTL SET. AS1 (ASSIGN 1), AS2 (ASSIGN 2) [SF1] ARP1 (Arpeggio 1) - [SF5] ARP5 (Arpeggio 5) You can register the desired Arpeggio types to these buttons and call them up any time during your keyboard performance. Refer to page 66 in the Quick Guide section. [F2] BANK This display is available only when a Plug-in Board has been installed and a Voice of the Plug-in Board is selected. From this display you can select the particular bank on the Plug-in board, and determine whether you will be using a Plug-in voice or a “Board” voice. Board voices are unprocessed, unaltered voices of the Plug-in board – the “raw material” for Plug-in voices. Plug-in voices are edited Board voices – voices that have been specially programmed and processed for optimum use with this synthesizer. For more details, see page 74. Settings: The following selections are available, for example, when a Plug-in voice using the Plug-in board installed to slot 1 is selected: PLG1USR (User Plug-in voice), PLGPRE1 (Preset Plug-in voice), 032/000 ... (Indicates the Bank Select MSB/LSB of the Board voice. These values differ depending on the installed Plug-in board.) [F3] EFFECT Pressing the [F3] EFFECT button in the Voice Play mode calls up the same EFFECT display in the Voice Edit mode ([VOICE] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F6] EFFECT). From this display, you can set the effect related parameters for the current Voice. See page 194. [F4] PORTA (Portamento) From this display you can select monophonic or polyphonic playback and set the Portamento parameters. Portamento is used to create a smooth transition in pitch from the first note played on the keyboard to the next. Determines whether the Voice is played back monophonically (single notes only) or polyphonically (multiple simultaneous notes). Mono/Poly Settings: mono, poly n When pressing the second note while holding the first note with the PortaSw set to on and the Mono/Poly set to on, the second note sound starts succeeding the transition of the first note, or the second note starts not from the EG (AEG/PEG/FEG) start point but from the EG (AEG/PEG/FEG) point the first note reaches. This realizes the legato performance. This legato degree can be set with the following operation: [VOICE] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF4] PORTA → LegatoSlope (page 190). PortaSw (Portamento Switch) Determines whether Portamento is applied to the current Voice or not. Settings: off, on 188 Owner’s Manual Voice Edit mode Normal Voice Edit Common Edit PortaTime (Portamento Time) Determines the pitch transition time. Higher values result in longer transition times. PortaMode (Portamento Mode) Determines the Portamento mode. The behavior of the Portamento varies depending on whether Mono/Poly is set to “mono” or “poly.” Settings: 0 ~ 127 Settings: fingered, fulltime fingered ........... Portamento is only applied when you play legato (playing the next note before releasing the previous one). fulltime ............. Portamento is always applied. [F5] EG (Envelope Generator) This display contains the basic EG settings, both volume and filter, for the voice, as well as the filter’s cutoff frequency and resonance settings. The settings made here are applied as offsets to the AEG and FEG settings in the Voice Edit mode. The full names of the available parameters are shown in the chart below, as they appear in the display. AEG FEG ATK DCY Attack time Decay time SUS Sustain level --- REL Release Time DEPTH --Depth CUTOFF --Cutoff frequency RESO --Resonance Settings: -64 ~ 0 ~ +63 (except --- above) [F6] ARP (Arpeggio) This display contains the basic settings for Arpeggio playback, including Type and Tempo. About the [SF1] - [SF5] buttons, see the explanation of the [F1] PLAY display. Bank, Ctgr (Category), Type These three parameters determine the Arpeggio Type. The three-letter prefix number before the Type name indicates the number within the selected Category. Tempo Determines the Arpeggio Tempo. When MIDI Sync ([UTILITY] → [F5] MIDI → [SF3] SYNC → MIDI Sync) is set to “MIDI,” “MIDI” is displayed here and cannot be set. Settings: Refer to the separate Data List. Settings: 1 ~ 300 VelLimit (Velocity Limit) Determines the lowest and highest velocity which can trigger the Arpeggio playback. The Arpeggio plays when you play notes at velocities within in this range. Switch Reference Voice Mode Settings: 1 ~ 127 n Keys played outside the set limit sound normally without any Arpeggio. Determines whether Arpeggio is on or off. You can also turn Arpeggio on/off from the front panel with the [ARPEGGIO ON/OFF] button. Settings: off, on Hold Determines whether the Arpeggio playback is “held” or not. When this is set to “on,” the Arpeggio cycles automatically, even if you release your fingers from the keys, and it continues to cycle until the next key is pressed. Settings: sync-off (see below), off, on sync-off............ When set to “sync-off,” the Arpeggio playback continues to run silently, even when you release the keys. Pressing any key turns the Arpeggio playback on again. In other words, you can use the key to “un-mute” or “mute” (not start or stop) the Arpeggio playback by, respectively, holding it down or releasing it. Voice Edit mode [VOICE] → Voice selection → [EDIT] There are three kinds of Voices: Normal Voices, Drum Voices and Plug-in Voices (if a Plug-in board has been installed). The following section shows how to edit the different types of voices and explains the parameters available. Note that available parameters to be edited differ depending on the Voice types (Normal Voice, Drum Voice, Plug-in Voice). Normal Voice Edit When a Normal Voice is selected, the Voice Edit parameters are divided into Common Edit (parameters common to all four Elements), and Element Edit (parameters of individual Elements). Common Edit [VOICE] → Normal Voice selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] These parameters are for making global (or common) edits to all four Elements of the selected Normal Voice. [F1] GENERAL [SF1] NAME From this display you can assign the category (sub and main) of the selected voice, and create a name for the voice. The voice name can contain up to 10 characters. For detailed instructions on naming a voice, see “Basic Operation” on page 53. Owner’s Manual 189 Voice Edit mode Normal Voice Edit [SF2] PLY MODE (Play mode) Common Edit From this display you can make various settings for the tone generator of this synthesizer, and assign different Micro Tuning settings. Determines whether the Voice is played back monophonically (single notes only) or polyphonically multiple simultaneous notes). Mono/Poly Settings: mono, poly KeyAsgnMode (Key Assign Mode) When this is set to “single,” double playback of the same note is prevented. This is useful when two or more instances of the same note are received nearly simultaneously, or without a corresponding note off message. To allow playback of each instance of the same note, set this to “multi.” Settings: single, multi M. TuningNo. (Micro Tuning Number) Determines the tuning system for the voice. Normally, this should be set to 00 (Equal temperament); however additional tuning systems are available for a variety of tuning applications and effects. Settings: See the Micro Tuning List on page 209. M. TuningRoot (Micro Tuning Root) [SF3] MEQ OFS (Master EQ Offset) Determines the root note of the Micro Tuning set above. Settings: C ~ B From this display you can adjust the master (global) EQ settings for the entire Voice. The settings made here are applied as offsets to the EQ settings (with the exception of “MID”) from the Utility mode, with the following operation: [VOICE] → [UTILITY] → [F3] VOICE → [SF1] MEQ. You can edit these parameters by using the Knobs. Settings: -64 ~ 0 ~ +63 [SF4] PORTA (Portamento) This display allows you to set the Portamento related parameters. Portamento is used to create a smooth transition in pitch from the first note played on the keyboard to the next. Determines whether Portamento is applied to your keyboard performance using the current Voice or not. Switch Settings: off, on Determines the pitch transition time. Higher values result in a longer pitch change time, when Time Mode below is set to “Time.” Time Settings: 0 ~ 127 Determines how the Portamento is applied to your keyboard performance. Mode Reference Voice Mode Settings: fingered, fulltime fingered............Portamento is only applied when you play legato (playing the next note before releasing the previous one). fulltime..............Portamento is always applied. This determines how the pitch changes in time. TimeMode Settings: rate1, time1, rate2, time2 rate1.................Pitch changes at the specified rate. time1 ................Pitch changes in the specified time. rate2.................Pitch changes at the specified rate within a octave. time2 ................Pitch changes in the specified time within a octave. Determines the speed of the attack of legato notes, when Switch above is set to on and Mono/Poly is set to mono. (Legato notes “overlap” each other, the next being played before the previous is released.) The higher the value, the slower the attack rate. LegatoSlope Settings: 0 ~ 7 [SF5] OTHER From this display you can set the control functions for the Knobs, and determine the up/down range for the Pitch Bend wheel. Determines the function for the assignable Knobs (1-4). Pressing the [KNOB CONTROL FUNCTION] button on the panel sets the desired function row, which is automatically stored to memory with the currently selected voice. Knob Assign Settings: pan, tone, assign, MEQofs, MEF, arpFx These two parameters determine the pitch change range of the Pitch Bend wheel. PB Upper (Pitch Bend range Upper), PB Lower (Pitch Bend range Lower) Settings: -48 ~ 24 AssignA, AssignB, Assign1, Assign2 Simply tweaking the knob with setting the Knob Assign (above) to “assign” to the desired value, which is automatically stored to memory with the currently selected voice. [F2] OUTPUT Determines the output level of the Voice. Volume Settings: 0 ~ 127 Determines the stereo pan position of the Voice. You can also adjust this parameter using the PAN knob on the front panel. Pan Settings: L63 (Left) ~ C (Center) ~ R63 (Right) n When a stereo Voice is selected, this parameter setting may not be effective. Voices with Elements set to opposite Pan settings (set in [F4] AMP → [SF1] LVL/PAN → Pan) — i.e., one at L63 and another at R63 — are considered stereo Voices. 190 Owner’s Manual Voice Edit mode RevSend Normal Voice Edit Common Edit Determines the Send level of the signal sent from Insertion Effect A/B (or the bypassed signal) to the Reverb effect. You can also adjust this parameter using the REVERB knob on the front panel. Settings: 0 ~ 127 ChoSend Determines the Send level of the signal sent from Insertion Effect A/B (or the bypassed signal) to the Chorus effect. You can also adjust this parameter using the CHORUS knob on the front panel. Settings: 0 ~ 127 n See page 179 for the Effect connection in the Voice mode. [F3] ARP (Arpeggio) [SF1] TYPE Bank, Ctgr (Category), Type The basic Arpeggio parameters (e.g., type, tempo) are provided in this display. These three parameters determine the Arpeggio Type. The three-letter prefix number before the Type name indicates the number within the selected Category. When user arpeggio is selected here, you can clear the selected arpeggio data by using the [SF5] button. Settings: Refer to the separate Data List. Tempo Determines the Arpeggio Tempo. When MIDI Sync ([UTILITY] → [F5] MIDI → [SF3] SYNC → MIDI Sync) is set to “MIDI,” “MIDI” is displayed here and Tempo cannot be set. Settings: 1 ~ 300 ChgTiming (Change Timing) Determines the actual timing at which the Arpeggio type is switched when you select another type during Arpeggio playback. Settings: realtime, measure realtime............ The Arpeggio type is switched immediately when you select another type. measure........... The Arpeggio type is switched at the top of the next measure after you select another type. Switch Determines whether Arpeggio is on or off. You can also turn Arpeggio on/off from the front panel with the [ARPEGGIO ON/OFF] button. Settings: off, on Hold Determines whether the Arpeggio playback is “held” or not. When this is set to “on,” the Arpeggio cycles automatically, even if you release your fingers from the keys, and it continues to cycle until the next key is pressed. KeyMode Reference Voice Mode Settings: sync-off (see below), off, on sync-off............ When set to “sync-off,” the Arpeggio playback continues to run silently, even when you release the keys. Pressing any key turns the Arpeggio playback on again. In other words, you can use the key to “un-mute” or “mute” (not start or stop) the Arpeggio playback by, respectively, holding it down or releasing it. Determines how the Arpeggio plays back when playing the keyboard. Settings: sort, thru, direct, sortdirect, thrudirect sort .................. When you play specific notes (for example, the notes of a chord), the same sequence plays, no matter what order you play the notes. thru .................. When you play specific notes (for example, the notes of a chord), the resulting sequence differs depending on the order of the notes. direct ............... Note events of the Arpeggio sequence do not play; only the notes you play on the keyboard are heard. This setting is for use with non-note Arpeggio data, such as Control Change or Pitch Bend. When the Arpeggio plays back, these events are applied to the sound of your keyboard performance. Use this setting when the Arpeggio types includes nonnote data or when the Category type “Ctrl” is selected. sortdirect ......... The Arpeggio is played back according to the “sort” setting here, and the note pressed is also sounded. thrudirect ......... The Arpeggio is played back according to the “thru” setting here, and the note pressed is also sounded. n Some Arpeggio types belonging to the “Cntr” Category may not have note evemts (page 170). When such an Arpeggio type is selected and the KeyMode is set to “sort” or “thru,” no sound is produced even if you press the note on the keyboard. n With the “sort” and “thru” settings, the order in which notes are played back will depend on the Arpeggio sequence data. VelMode (Velocity Mode) This determines the playback velocity of the Arpeggio, or how it responds to your own playing strength. Settings: original, thru original............. The Arpeggio plays back at the preset velocities included in the Arpeggio sequence data. thru .................. The Arpeggio plays back according to the velocity of your playing. For example, if you play the notes strongly, the playback volume of the Arpeggio increases. [SF2] LIMIT NoteLimit Determines the lowest and highest notes in the Arpeggio’s note range. Notes played in this range trigger the Arpeggio. Settings: C -2 ~ G8 n You can also create a lower and an upper trigger range for the Arpeggio, with a note range “hole” in the middle, by specifying the highest note first. For example, setting a Note Limit of “C5 - C4” lets you trigger the Arpeggio by playing notes in the two ranges of C -2 to C4 and C5 to G8; notes played between C4 and C5 have no effect on the Arpeggio. n You can also set the range directly from the keyboard, by holding down the [INFORMATION] button and pressing the desired low and high keys. n Please keep in mind that no sound is produced when the KeyMode is set to “sort” or “thru” and notes are played outside the Note Limit setting here. VelocityLimit Determines the lowest and highest velocity in the Arpeggio’s velocity range. This lets you control when the Arpeggio sounds by your playing strength. Settings: 1 ~ 127 n You can also create separate low and high trigger ranges for the Arpeggio playback, with a velocity “hole” in the middle, by specifying the maximum value first. For example, setting a Velocity Limit of 93 - 34 lets you play the Arpeggio from two separate velocity ranges: soft (1 - 34) and hard (93 - 127). Notes played at middle velocities between 35 and 92 do not play the Arpeggio. Owner’s Manual 191 Voice Edit mode Normal Voice Edit [SF3] PLAY FX Common Edit These Play Effect parameters let you control the playback of the Arpeggio in useful and interesting ways. By changing the timing and velocity of the notes, you can change the rhythmic “feel” of the Arpeggio. UnitMultiply (Unit Multiply) Adjust the Arpeggio playback time. For example, if you set a value of 200%, the playback time will be doubled (tempo is halved). On the other hand, if you set a value of 50%, the playback time will be halved (tempo is doubled). Normal playback time is 100%. Settings: 50%, 66%, 75%, 100%, 133%, 150%, 200% Delays notes on even-numbered beats (backbeats) to produce a swing feel. Swing Settings: -120 ~ +120 QuntValue (Quantize Value) Determines to what beats the note data in the Arpeggio sequence data will be aligned, or determines to what beats in the Arpeggio sequence data the swing is applied. Settings: 32nd note 16th note triplet 16th note QuntStrength (Quantize Strength) 8th note triplet 8th note 1/4 note triplet 1/4 note The Strength value sets the “strength” by which note events are pulled toward the nearest quantize beats. A setting of 100% produces exact timing set via the QuntValue parameter above. A setting of 0% results in no quantization. Settings: 0% ~ 100% Determines how much the Velocity of the Arpeggio playback is offset from the original value. For example, a setting of 100% means the original values are used. Settings below 100% will reduce the velocity of the Arpeggio notes, whereas settings above 100% will increase the velocities. VelocityRate Settings: 0% ~ 200% n The Velocity cannot be decreased or increased beyond its normal range of 1 to 127; any values outside that range will automatically be limited to the minimum or maximum. Determines how much the Gate Time (length) of the Arpeggio notes is offset from the original value. A setting of 100% means the original values are used. Settings below 100% will shorten the gate times of the Arpeggio notes, whereas settings above 100% will lengthen them. GateTimeRate Settings: 0% ~ 200% n The Gate Time cannot be decreased beyond its normal minimum of 1; any values outside that range will automatically be limited to the minimum. [F4] CTL SET (Controller Set) Reference Voice Mode [SF1] SET1/2 - [SF3] SET5/6 Since up to six Controller Sets can be assigned to each Voice, three pages (Sets 1/2, Sets 3/4 and Sets 5/6) are provided. For more information on Controller Sets, see page 155. Determines whether or not the selected controller affects each individual Element. ElementSw Settings: Elements 1 to 4 enabled (“1” to “4”) or disabled (“-”) n This parameter is disabled when the Dest (Destination) described below is set to a parameter unrelated to the Voice Elements. Determines which panel controller is to be assigned and used for the selected Set. This controller then is used to control the parameter set in Destination below. Source Settings: PB (Pitch Bend Wheel), MW (Modulation Wheel), AT (After Touch), FC1 (Foot Controller 1), FS (Footswitch), RB (Ribbon Controller), BC (Breath Controller), AS1 (Knob ASSIGN 1), AS2 (Knob ASSIGN 2), FC2 (Foot Controller2) n Keep in mind that unlike the other controllers, the ASSIGN A and B knobs can each be assigned to one common function for the entire system of this synthesizer, and not to different functions for each individual voice. Also refer to the Utility mode (page 263). Determines the parameter that is controlled by the Source controller (above). Dest (Destination) Settings: For a complete list of the available parameters/controls, refer to the separate Data List booklet. Determines the degree to which the Source controller affects the Destination parameter. For negative values, the controller operation is reversed; maximum controller settings produce minimum parameter changes. Depth Settings: -64 ~ 0 ~+63 [F5] LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator) From these displays, you can make a variety of LFO related settings. As its name suggests, the LFO creates waveforms of a low frequency. These waveforms can be used to vary the pitch, filter or amplitude to create effects such as vibrato, wah and tremolo. [SF1] WAVE Determines the LFO Wave. Wave Settings: tri, tri+, sawup, sawdwn, squ1/4, squ1/3, squ, squ2/3, squ3/4, trpzp, S/H 1, S/H 2, user Determines the speed of the LFO Wave modulation. Higher values result in faster modulation speeds. Speed Settings: 0 ~ 63 192 Owner’s Manual Voice Edit mode Normal Voice Edit Common Edit TempoSync Determines whether or not the LFO is synchronized to the tempo of the Arpeggio or sequencer (song or pattern). TempoSpeed This parameter is available only when TempoSync above has been set to “on.” It allows you to make detailed note value settings that determine how the LFO pulses in sync with the Arpeggio or sequencer. Settings: off (not synchronized), on (synchronized) Settings: 16th, 8th/3 (eighth-note triplets), 16th. (dotted sixteenth notes), 8th, 4th/3 (quarter-note triplets), 8th. (dotted eighth notes), 4th (quarter notes), 2nd/3 (half-note triplets), 4th. (dotted quarter notes), 2nd (half notes), whole/3 (whole-note triplets), 2nd. (dotted half notes), 4th x 4 (quarter-note quadruplets; four quarter notes to the beat), 4th x 5 (quarter-note quintuplets; five quarter notes to the beat), 4th x 6 (quarter-note sextuplets; six quarter notes to the beat), 4th x 7 (quarter-note septuplets; seven quarter notes to the beat), 4th x 8 (quarter-note octuplets; eight quarter notes to the beat) n The actual length of the note depends on the internal or external MIDI tempo setting. KeyOnReset Determines whether or not the LFO is reset each time a note is pressed. The following three settings are available. Settings: off, each-on, 1st-on off..................... The LFO cycles freely with no key synchronization. Pressing a key starts the LFO wave at whatever phase the LFO happens to be at that point. each-on ........... The LFO resets with each note you play and starts a waveform at the phase specified by the Phase parameter (below). 1st-on .............. The LFO resets with every note you play and starts the waveform at the phase specified by the Phase parameter (below). However, if you play a second note while the first is being held, the LFO continues cycling according to the same phase as triggered by the first note. In other words, the LFO only resets if the first note is released before the second is played. 1st-on off each-on Time Key on RandomSpeed Time Time Key on (first note) Key on (first note) Key on (second note) Key on (second note) Determines the degree to which the LFO speed changes at random. A setting of “0” results in the original speed. Higher values result in a larger degree of speed change. Settings: 0 ~ 127 [SF2] DELAY Determines the delay time before the LFO comes into effect. A higher value results in a longer delay time. Reference Voice Mode Delay (Delay Time) Settings: 0 ~ 127 FadeIn (Fade In Time) Determines the amount of time for the LFO effect to fade in (after the Delay time has elapsed). A higher value results in a slower fade-in. Settings: 0 ~ 127 Low FadeIn value Faster fade-in High FadeIn value Slower fade-in FadeIn FadeIn Max Max Time Time Delay Delay Key on Hold (Hold Time) Key on Determines the length of time during which the LFO is held at its maximum level. A higher value results in a longer Hold time. Settings: 0 ~ 127 Hold Max Time FadeOut Determines the amount of time for the LFO effect to fade out (after the Delay time has elapsed). A higher value results in a slower fade-out. Settings: 0 ~ 127 Low FadeOut value Faster fade-out Hold Low FadeOut value Faster fade-out FadeOut Hold Max FadeOut Max Time Time Owner’s Manual 193 Voice Edit mode Normal Voice Edit Common Edit [SF3] PHASE Determines the starting phase point for the LFO Wave when it is reset. Phase Settings: 0, 90, 120, 180, 240, 270 Time Phase 0° Offset EL1 - EL4 (Phase Offset Element1 - Element4) [SF4] BOX1 - 3 90° 180° 270° 120° 240° Determines the offset values of the Phase parameter (above) for the respective Elements. Settings: +0, +90, +120, +180, +240, +270 From this display you can select the destination parameter for the LFO (which aspect of the sound the LFO controls), the Elements to be affected by the LFO, and the LFO Depth. Three pages (boxes) provided for setting the destination let you assign multiple destinations. ElemSw (Element Switch) Determines whether or not each Element is to be affected by the LFO. The Element number (1- 4) is shown when the LFO is enabled; a dash (-) indicates the LFO is disabled for that Element. Dest (Destination) Determines the parameters which are to be controlled (modulated) by the LFO Wave. Settings: amd, pmd, fmd, reso (Resonance), pan, ELFOSpd (Element LFO Speed) Determines the LFO Wave Depth. Depth Settings: 0 ~ 127 DptRatio EL1 - EL4 (Depth Offset Element1 - Element4) [SF5] USER Determines the offset values of the Depth parameter (above) for the respective Elements. Settings: 0 ~ 127 This menu is available only when the User LFO wave is selected. You can create a custom LFO wave consisting of up to sixteen steps. You can select a pre-programmed template for the LFO wave. The selected template's wave graph appears on the display and you can create the LFO wave by viewing it. Each time pressing the [SF1] random button, different LFO wave is appears on the display randomly. Reference Voice Mode Template Settings: all0 ...................Values of all the steps are set to 0. all64 .................Values of all the steps are set to 64. all127 ...............Values of all the steps are set to 127. saw up .............Creates a saw shaped upward wave. saw down.........Creates a saw shaped downward wave. even step .........Values of all even steps are set to 127, and values of all odd steps are set to 0. odd step...........Values of all odd steps are set to 127, and values of all even steps are set to 0. Determines the slope or ramp characteristics of the LFO wave. Slope Settings: OFF (no slope), up, down, up&down Edits the value for each step. Value Settings: 0 ~ 127 Selects the step number of the LFO wave. Step Settings: 1 ~ 16 [F6] EFFECT n For details on the Effect connections in the Voice mode, see page 179. For details on the Effect Types, refer to the Effect Type list in the separate Data List booklet. [SF1] CONNECT This display gives you comprehensive control over the effects. EL: OUT 1-4 (Element 1-4 Effect Output) Determines which Insertion effect (A or B) is used to process each individual Element. The “thru” setting lets you bypass the Insertion effects for the specific Element. Settings: insA, insB, thru InsEF Connect (Insertion Effect Connect) Determines the effect routing for Insertion effects A and B. The setting changes are shown on the diagram in the display, giving you a clear picture of how the signal is routed. Settings: Para, InsAtoB, InsBtoA (See page 179.) InsA Ctgry (Insertion A Category), InsA Type (Insertion A Type) 194 Owner’s Manual Determines the effect type for Insertion A. Voice Edit mode Normal Voice Edit Element Edit InsB Ctgry (Insertion B Category), InsB Type (Insertion B Type) Determines the effect type for Insertion B. Reverb Type Determines the effect type for Reverb. Chorus Ctg (Chorus Effect Category), Chorus Typ (Chorus Effect Type) Determines the effect type for Chorus. Reverb Send Determines the level of the sound (from Insertion A or B, or the bypassed signal) that is sent to Reverb effect. A setting of “0” results in no Reverb processing of the sound. Settings: 0 ~ 127 Chorus Send Determines the level of the sound (from Insertion 1 or 2, or the bypassed signal) that is sent to Chorus effect. A setting of “0” results in no Chorus processing of the sound. Settings: 0 ~ 127 Reverb Return Determines the Return level of the Reverb Effect. Settings: 0 ~ 127 Chorus Return Determines the Return level of the Chorus Effect. Settings: 0 ~ 127 Chorus to Reverb Determines the Send level of the signal sent from the Chorus Effect to the Reverb Effect. Settings: 0 ~ 127 Reverb Pan Determines the pan position setting for the Reverb effect. Settings: L63 (far left) ~ cnt (center) ~ R63 (far right) Chorus Pan Determines the pan position setting for the Chorus effect. Settings: L63 (far left) ~ cnt (center) ~ R63 (far right) [SF3] INS B (Insertion A) [SF4] REVERB These are for adjusting the various parameters of the Effect blocks. The number of parameters and values available differs depending on the currently selected effect type. For more information, see the Effect Type List in the separate Data List booklet. Note that the menu of the corresponding Effect block disappears when the “thru” type is selected. Reference Voice Mode [SF2] INS A (Insertion A) [SF5] CHORUS Element Edit [VOICE] → Normal Voice selection → [EDIT] → Element selection These parameters are for editing the individual Elements that make up a Normal Voice. [F1] OSC (Oscillator) [SF1] WAVE ElementSw (Element Switch) From this display you can select the desired waveform or sound used for the Element. Determines whether the currently selected Element is on or off. Settings: off (inactive), on (active) Bank Determines whether the Preset Waveform or User Waveform is used. Settings: preset, usr wav n The User Waveform contains audio data you have created with the Sampling function or imported (as WAV or AIFF files) from a SmartMedia/USB storage device. Wave No. (Waveform Number), WaveCtgry (Waveform Category) [SF2] OUTPUT KeyOnDelay Determines the Waveform for the selected Element. See the Waveform list in the separate Data List. From this display you can set certain output parameters for the selected Element. Determines the time (delay) between the moment you press a note on the keyboard and the point at which the sound is played. You can set different delay times for each Element. Settings: 0 ~ 127 DelayTempoSync Determines whether or not the KeyOnDelay is synchronized to the tempo of the Arpeggio or sequencer (song or pattern). Settings: off (not synchronized), on (synchronized) DelayTempo Determines the timing of the KeyOnDelay when the DelayTempoSync is set to on. Settings: 16th, 8th/3 (eighth-note triplets), 16th. (dotted sixteenth notes), 8th, 4th/3 (quarter-note triplets), 8th. (dotted eighth notes), 4th (quarter notes), 2nd/3 (half-note triplets), 4th. (dotted quarter notes), 2nd (half notes), whole/3 (whole-note triplets), 2nd. (dotted half notes), 4th x 4 (quarter-note quadruplets; four quarter notes to the beat), 4th x 5 (quarter-note quintuplets; five quarter notes to the beat), 4th x 6 (quarter-note sextuplets; six quarter notes to the beat), 4th x 7 (quarter-note septuplets; seven quarter notes to the beat), 4th x 8 (quarter-note octuplets; eight quarter notes to the beat) Owner’s Manual 195 Voice Edit mode Normal Voice Edit InsEffectOut (Insertion Effect Output) Element Edit Determines which Insertion effect (1 or 2) is used to process each individual Element. The “thru” setting lets you bypass the Insertion effects for the specific Element. (This parameter is the same as “EL: OUT” on the [F6] EFFECT → [SF1] CONNECT display in Normal Common Edit. Making a setting here automatically changes the setting of that parameter as well.) Settings: thru, insA (Insertion Effect A), insB (Insertion Effect B) [SF3] LIMIT Determines the lowest and highest notes of the keyboard range for each Element. The selected Element will sound only when you play notes within this range. NoteLimit Settings: C -2 ~ G8 n You can also create a lower and an upper range for the Element, with a note range “hole” in the middle, by specifying the highest note first. For example, setting a Note Limit of “C5 - C4” lets you play the Element from two separate ranges: C -2 to C4 and C5 to G8. Notes played between C4 and C5 do not play the selected Element. n You can also set the range directly from the keyboard, by holding down the [INFORMATION] button and pressing the desired low and high keys. Refer to the Basic Operation section, page 53. Determines the minimum and maximum values of the velocity range within which each Element will respond. Each Element will only sound for notes played within its specified velocity range. For example, this lets you have one Element sound when you play softly and have a different one sound when you play strongly. VelocityLimit Settings: 1 ~127 n You can also create separate low and high ranges for the Element, with a velocity “hole” in the middle, by specifying the maximum value first. For example, setting a Velocity Limit of 93 - 34 lets you play the Element from two separate velocity ranges: soft (1 - 34) and hard (93 - 127). Notes played at middle velocities between 35 and 92 do not play the selected Element. VelCrossFade (Velocity Cross Fade) This determines how gradually the sound of an Element decreases in volume in proportion to the distance of velocity changes outside the Velocity Limit setting (above). The practical application of this parameter is to create naturalsounding velocity crossfades, in which different Elements change gradually depending on how strongly or softly you play. The higher the value, the more gradual the level change. Settings: 0 ~ 127 [F2] PITCH [SF1] TUNE From this display you can set various pitch-related parameters for the selected Element. Determines the pitch of each Element in semitones. Coarse Reference Voice Mode Settings: -48 ~ 0 ~ +48 Determines the fine tuning for the pitch of each Element. Fine Settings: -64 ~ 0 ~ +63 Determines the degree to which the notes (specifically, their position or octave range) affect the pitch in fine tuning (set above) of the selected Element, regarding C3 as the basic pitch. A positive setting will cause the pitch of lower notes to change lower and that of higher notes to change higher. Negative values will have the opposite effect. FineScaling Settings: -64 ~ 0 ~+63 This lets you randomly vary the pitch of the Element for each note you play. This is effective in reproducing the natural pitch variations in acoustic instruments. It is also useful for creating unusual random pitch changes. The higher the value, the greater the pitch variation. A value of “0” results in no pitch change. Random Settings: 0 ~127 [SF2] VEL SENS (Velocity Sensitivity) From this display you can determine how the Pitch EG responds to velocity. Determines the velocity sensitivity of the PEG’s Time parameters. Select the Segment first, then set its Time parameter. Positive Time settings will play back the specified Segment faster in proportion to the played velocity and negative values will play it back slower. EGTime, Segment Settings: EGTime -64 ~0 ~+63 Settings: Segment: atk, atk+dcy, dcy, atk+rls, all atk (attack) .............................EG Time Value affects Attack time. atk+dcy (attack + decay) ......EG Time Value affects Attack/Decay1 time. dcy (decay)............................EG Time Value affects Decay time. atk+rls (attack + release).......EG Time Value affects Attack/Release time. all ..........................................EG Time Value affects all PEG Time parameters. Determines the velocity sensitivity of the PEG Level. Positive settings will cause the pitch change to rise the harder you play the keyboard, and negative values will cause it to fall. The Curve parameter lets you select from five different preset velocity curves (graphically indicated in the display), that determine how velocity affects the Pitch EG Depth. EGDepth, Curve Settings: EGDepth: -64 ~ 0 ~ +63 Settings: Curve: 0 ~ 4 Determines the velocity sensitivity of the Pitch. Extreme values produce greater variation in PEG Depth. For positive values, the harder you play the keys, the greater the change in PEG Depth. For negative values, the softer you play the keys, the greater the change in PEG Depth. Pitch Settings: -64 ~ 0 ~ +63 196 Owner’s Manual Voice Edit mode [SF3] PEG (Pitch Envelope Generator) Normal Voice Edit Element Edit From this display you can make all the time and level settings for the Pitch EG, which determine how the pitch of the sound changes over time. These can be used to control the change in pitch from the moment a note is pressed on the keyboard to the moment the sound stops. The full names of the available parameters are shown in the chart below, as they appear in the display. TIME LEVEL HOLD Hold time Hold level ATK Attack time Attack level DCY1 Decay1 time Decay1 level DCY2 Decay2 time Decay2 level REL Release time Release level DEPTH Depth Settings: TIME: 0 ~ 127 LEVEL: -128 ~ 0 ~ +127 DEPTH: -64 ~ 0 ~ +63 n For details on the PEG, see page 160. [SF4] KEY FLW (Key Follow) From this display you can set the Key Follow effect – in other words, how the pitch of the Element and its Pitch EG respond to the particular notes (or octave range) you play. Determines the sensitivity of the Key Follow effect (the pitch interval of adjacent notes). At +100 (the normal setting), adjacent notes are pitched one semitone (100 cents) apart. At 0, all notes are the same pitch. At +50, one octave is stretched out over twenty-four notes. For negative values, the settings are reversed. PitchSens (Pitch Sensitivity) Settings: -200 ~ 0 ~ +200 n This parameter is useful for creating alternate tunings, or for use with sounds that do not need to be spaced in semitones, such as pitched drum sounds in a Normal Voice. FCenterKey Determines the central note or pitch for the Key Follow effect on pitch. The note number set here is the same pitch as normal regardless of the Pitch Sensitivity setting. Depending on the Pitch Sensitivity parameter above, the further away from the Center Key the keys are played, the greater the degree of pitch change. Settings: C -2 ~ G8 n You can also set the Center Key directly from the keyboard, by holding down the [INFORMATION] button and pressing the desired key. Refer to the Basic Operation section, page 53. Determines the degree to which the notes (specifically, their position or octave range) affect the Pitch EG times of the selected Element. The Center Key (next parameter) is used as the basic pitch for this parameter. A positive setting will cause the pitch of lower notes to change slower and that of higher notes to change faster. Negative values will have the opposite effect. EGTimeSens (EG Time Sensitivity) FCenterKey Reference Voice Mode Settings: -64 ~ 0 ~+63 Determines the central note or pitch for the Key Follow effect on Pitch EG. When the Center Key note is played, the PEG behaves according to its actual settings. The pitch change characteristics for other notes will vary in proportion to the EG Time settings. Settings: C -2 ~ G8 n You can also set the Center Key directly from the keyboard, by holding down the [INFORMATION] button and pressing the desired key. Refer to the Basic Operation on page 53. EG Time Sensitivity and Center Key Pitch Sensitivity and Center Key When Pitch Sensitivity is set to 100 Positive value Large Amount of pitch change Negative value + Small Faster speed +63 +30 Lower range Higher range -40 – Lower range Center key Slower speed Higher range Center key [F3] FILTER [SF1] TYPE Type From this display you can make comprehensive settings for the Filter unit. The available parameters differ depending on which Filter type is selected here. For more information on the Filter types as well as illustrations of each type, refer to page 161. Basically, there are four different Filter types: an LPF (Low Pass Filter), an HPF (High Pass Filter), a BPF (Band Pass Filter) and a BEF (Band Elimination Filter). Each type has a different frequency response and produces a different effect on the sound. This synthesizer also features special combination Filter types, for additional sonic control. Settings: Refer to page 209. Gain Determines the Gain (the amount of boost applied to the signal sent to the Filter). Settings: 0 ~ 255 Cutoff Determines the cutoff frequency for the Filter, or the central frequency around which the Filter is applied. Settings: 0 ~ 255 Owner’s Manual 197 Voice Edit mode Normal Voice Edit Element Edit This parameter’s function varies according to the selected Filter Type. If the selected filter is an LPF, HPF, BPF (excluding the BPFw), or BEF, this parameter is used to set the Resonance. For the BPFw, it is used to adjust the Width of the band. Resonance is used to set the amount of Resonance (harmonic emphasis) applied to the signal at the cutoff frequency. This can be used in combination with the cutoff frequency parameter to add further character to the sound. The Width parameter is used to adjust the width of the band of signal frequencies passed by the filter with the BPFw. Resonance/Width Settings: 0 ~ 127 Determines the distance between the Cutoff frequencies, for the Dual Filter types (which feature two identical filters combined in parallel, and the LPF12 + BPF6 type). Distance Settings: 0 ~ 255 Determines the central frequency for the Key Follow parameter (below) of the HPF. When a filter type “LPF12” or “LPF6” is selected, this parameter is available. HPFCutoff Settings: 0 ~ 255 HPFKeyFlw (Key Follow) Determines the Key Follow setting for the HPF Cutoff frequency. This parameter varies the center frequency according to the position of the notes played on the keyboard. A positive setting will raise the center frequency for higher notes and lower it for lower notes. A negative setting will have the opposite effect. When a filter type “LPF12” or “LPF6” is selected, this parameter is available. Settings: -200 ~ 0 ~ +200 [SF2] VEL SENS (Velocity Sensitivity) From this display you can determine how the Filter and the FEG respond to velocity. Determines the velocity sensitivity of the FEG’s Time parameters. Select the Segment first, then set its Time parameter. Positive Time settings will play back the specified Segment faster in proportion to the played velocity and negative values will play it back slower. EGTime, Segment Settings: EG Time -64 ~0 ~+63 Settings: Segment: atk, atk+dcy, dcy, atk+rls, all atk (attack) .............................EG Time Value affects Attack time. atk+dcy (attack + decay) ......EG Time Value affects Attack/Decay1 time. dcy (decay)............................EG Time Value affects Decay time. atk+rls (attack + release).......EG Time Value affects Attack/Release time. all ..........................................EG Time Value affects all FEG Time parameters. Reference Voice Mode Determines the velocity sensitivity of the FEG Level. For positive settings, the more strongly you play the keyboard, the more Filter changes the sound. Negative settings do the opposite; the more softly you play, the more the sound changes. The Curve parameter lets you select from five different preset velocity curves (graphically indicated in the display), that determine how velocity affects the Filter EG. EGDepth, Curve Settings: EGDepth: -64 ~ 0 ~ +63 Settings: Curve: 0 ~ 4 Determines the degree to which velocity affects the Cutoff frequency of the Filter EG. For positive values, the more strongly you play the keys, the greater the change in the Cutoff frequency. Negative values do the opposite; the more softly you play, the greater the change in frequency. Cutoff Settings: -64 ~ 0 ~ +63 Determines the degree to which velocity affects the Resonance of the Filter EG. For positive values, the more strongly you play the keys, the greater the Resonance change. Negative values do the opposite; the more softly you play, the greater the change in Resonance. Resonance Settings: -64 ~ 0 ~ +63 [SF3] FEG (Filter Envelope Generator) From this display you can make all the time and level settings for the Filter EG, which determine how the tonal quality of the sound changes over time. These can be used to control the change in Cutoff Frequency from the moment a note is pressed on the keyboard to the moment the sound stops. The full names of the available parameters are shown in the chart below, as they appear in the display. TIME LEVEL HOLD Hold time Hold level ATK Attack time Attack level DCY1 Decay1 time Decay1 level DCY2 Decay2 time Decay2 level REL Release time Release level DEPTH Depth Settings: TIME: 0 ~ 127 LEVEL: -128 ~ 0 ~+127 DEPTH: -64 ~ 0 ~+63 n For details on the FEG, see page 161. [SF4] KEY FLW (Key Follow) CutoffSens (Cutoff Sensitivity) From this display you can set the Key Follow effect for the Filter – in other words, how the tonal qualities of the Element and its Filter EG respond to the particular notes (or octave range) you play. Determines the degree to which the notes (specifically, their position or octave range) affect the Filter of the selected Element. A Center Key setting (next parameter) of C3 is used as the basic setting by the Cutoff parameter. A positive setting will lower the Cutoff frequency for lower notes and raise it for higher notes. A negative setting will have the opposite effect. Settings: -200 ~ 0 ~ +200 198 Owner’s Manual Voice Edit mode FCenterKey Normal Voice Edit Element Edit This indicates that the central note for Cutoff Sensitivity above is C3. At C3, the tone remains unchanged. For other notes played, the Cutoff Frequency varies according to the particular note and the Cutoff Sensitivity setting. Keep in mind that this is for display purposes only; the value cannot be changed. Settings: C -2 ~ G8 Determines the degree to which the notes (specifically, their position or octave range) affect the Filter EG times of the selected Element. The basic speed of change for the FEG is at the note specified in the Center Key (next parameter). A positive setting will cause slower changes for lower notes and faster changes for higher notes. A negative setting will have the opposite effect. EGTimeSens (EG Time Sensitivity) Settings: -64 ~ 0 ~ +63 FCenterKey Determines the central note or pitch for the Key Follow effect on Filter EG. Depending on the EG Time Sensitivity parameter above, the further away from the Center Key the keys are played, the more the time of the Filter EG deviates from the normal. When the Center Key note is played, the FEG behaves according to its actual settings. The Filter change characteristics for other notes will vary in proportion to the EG Time settings. Settings: C -2 ~ G8 n You can also set the Center Key directly from the keyboard, by holding down the [INFORMATION] button and pressing the desired key. Refer to the Basic Operation section, page 53. Cutoff Sensitivity and Center Key When Cutoff Sensitivity is set to 100 EG Time Sensitivity and Center Key Positive value Large Amount of cutoff frequency change Negative value + Small Faster speed +63 +30 Lower range Higher range -40 – Lower range Center key Slower speed Higher range Center key Reference Voice Mode [SF5] SCALE (Filter Scaling) Filter Scaling controls the filter cutoff frequency according to the positions of the notes on the keyboard. You can divide the entire keyboard by four break points, and assign different offset values of Cutoff Frequency to them respectively. Refer to the setting example on page 211. Settings: BREAK POINT 1 ~ 4: C-2 ~ G8 OFFSET 1 ~ 4: 128 ~ 0 ~ +127 n You can also set the Break Point directly from the Keyboard, by holding down the [INFORMATION] button and pressing the desired key. Refer to the Basic Operation section, page 53. [F4] AMP (Amplitude) [SF1] LVL/PAN (Level/Pan) Level This display not only lets you make basic Level and Pan settings for each individual Element, it also gives you some detailed and unusual parameters for affecting Pan position. Determines the output level for the selected Element. Settings: 0 ~ 127 Pan Determines the stereo Pan position for the selected Element. This will also be used as the basic Pan position for the Alternate, Random and Scale settings. Settings: L63 (Left) ~ C (Center) ~ R63 (Right) AlternatePan Determines the amount by which the sound of the selected Element is panned alternately left and right for each note you press. The Pan setting (above) is used as the basic Pan position. Settings: L64 ~ 0 ~ R63 RandomPan Determines the amount by which the sound of the selected Element is panned randomly left and right for each note you press. The Pan setting is used as the Center Pan position. Settings: 0 ~ 127 ScalingPan Determines the degree to which the notes (specifically, their position or octave range) affect the Pan position, left and right, of the selected Element. At note C3, the main Pan setting (above) is used for the basic Pan position. Settings: -64 ~ 0 ~ +63 [SF2] VEL SENS (Velocity Sensitivity) EG Time, Segment From this display you can determine how the Amplitude (volume) EG responds to velocity. Determines the velocity sensitivity of the AEG’s Time parameters. Select the Segment first, then set its Time parameter. Positive Time settings will play back the specified Segment faster in proportion to the played velocity and negative values will play it back slower. Settings: EG Time -64 ~0 ~+63 Settings: Segment: atk, atk+dcy, dcy, atk+rls, all atk (attack) ............................ EG Time Value affects Attack time. atk+dcy (attack + decay)...... EG Time Value affects Attack/Decay1 time. dcy (decay) ........................... EG Time Value affects Decay time. atk+rls (attack + release) ...... EG Time Value affects Attack/Release time. all .......................................... EG Time Value affects all AEG Time parameters. Owner’s Manual 199 Voice Edit mode Normal Voice Edit Element Edit Determines the velocity sensitivity of the Amplitude EG Level. For positive settings, the more strongly you play the keyboard, the more the volume changes. Negative settings do the opposite; the more softly you play, the more the volume changes. The Curve parameter lets you select from five different preset velocity curves (graphically indicated in the display), that determine how velocity affects the Amplitude EG. Level, Curve Settings: Level: 64 ~ 0 ~ +63 Curve: 0 ~ 4 [SF3] AEG (Amplitude Envelope Generator) From this display you can make all the time and level settings for the Amplitude EG, which determine how the volume of the sound changes over time. These can be used to control the change in volume from the moment a note is pressed on the keyboard to the moment the sound stops. The full names of the available parameters are shown in the chart below, as they appear in the display. TIME LEVEL INIT --Initial level ATK Attack time Attack level DCY1 Decay1 time Decay1 level DCY2 Decay2 time Decay2 level REL Release time --- DEPTH --- Settings: TIME: 0 ~ 127 LEVEL: 0 ~ 127 n For details on the AEG, see page 162. [SF4] KEY FLW (Key Follow) From this display you can set the Key Follow effect for Amplitude – in other words, how the volume of the Element and its Amplitude EG respond to the particular notes (or octave range) you play. Determines the degree to which the notes (specifically, their position or octave range) affect the volume of the selected Element. A Center Key setting of C3 is used as the basic setting. A positive setting will lower the output level for lower notes and raise it for higher notes. A negative setting will have the opposite effect. LevelSens (Level Sensitivity) Settings: -200 ~ 0 ~+200 FCenterKey This indicates that the central note for Level Sensitivity above is C3. At C3, the volume (level) remains unchanged. For other notes played, the volume varies according to the particular note and the Level Sensitivity setting. Keep in mind that this is for display purposes only; the value cannot be changed. EGTimeSens (EG Time Sensitivity) Determines the degree to which the notes (specifically, their position or octave range) affect the Amplitude EG times of the selected Element. The Center Key (next parameter) is used as the basic amplitude for this parameter. A positive setting will cause the amplitude of lower notes to change slower and that of higher notes to change faster. Negative values will have the opposite effect. Reference Voice Mode Settings: -64 ~ 0 ~ +63 FCenterKey Determines the central note or pitch for the Key Follow effect on Amplitude EG. Depending on the EG Time Sensitivity parameter above, the further away from the Center Key the keys are played, the more the time of the Amplitude EG deviates from the norm. When the Center Key is played, the AEG behaves according to its actual settings. The amplitude change characteristics for other notes will vary in proportion to the EGTime settings. Settings: C -2 ~ G8 n You can also set the Center Key directly from the keyboard, by holding down the [INFORMATION] button and pressing the desired key. Refer to the Basic Operation section, page 53. Level Sensitivity and Center Key EG Time Sensitivity and Center Key When Level Sensitivity is set to 100 Positive value Large Amount of AEG level change Negative value + Small Faster speed +63 +30 Lower range Higher range -40 – Lower range Center key Slower speed Higher range Center key Amplitude Scaling controls the output level (set in the [F4] AMP → [SF1] LVL /PAN display) according to the positions of the notes on the keyboard. You can divide the entire keyboard by four break points, and assign different offset values of amplitude to them respectively. Refer to the setting example on page 211. [SF5] SCALE (Amplitude Scaling) Settings: BREAK POINT 1 ~ 4: C-2 ~ G8 Settings: OFFSET 1 ~ 4: -128 ~ 0 ~ +127 n You can also set the Break Point directly from the Keyboard, by holding down the [INFORMATION] button and pressing the desired key. Refer to the Basic Operation section, page 53. 200 Owner’s Manual Voice Edit mode Normal Voice Edit Element Edit [F5] LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator) This display gives you a comprehensive set of controls over the LFO for each individual Element. The LFO can be used to create vibrato, wah, tremolo and other special effects, by applying it to the pitch, filter and amplitude parameters. Determines the LFO waveform used to vary the sound. Wave Settings: saw, tri, squ tri (triangle wave) saw (sawtooth wave) squ (square wave) Determines the speed of the LFO waveform. The higher the value, the faster the speed. Speed Settings: 0 ~ 63 Determines whether or not the LFO is reset each time a note is played. KeyOnReset Settings: off, on Off On Time Time Key on Key on Determines the delay time between the moment you play a note on the keyboard and the moment the LFO comes into effect. A higher value results in a longer delay time. KeyOnDelay Settings: 0 ~ 127 Determines the amount (depth) by which the LFO waveform varies (modulates) the pitch of the sound. The higher the value, the greater the amount of pitch modulation. PMod (Pitch Modulation Depth) Reference Voice Mode Settings: 0 ~ 127 Determines the amount (depth) by which the LFO waveform varies (modulates) the Filter Cutoff frequency. The higher the value, the greater the amount of filter modulation. FMod (Filter Modulation Depth) Settings: 0 ~ 127 AMod (Amplitude Modulation Depth) Determines the amount (depth) by which the LFO waveform varies (modulates) the amplitude or volume of the sound. The higher the value, the greater the amount of amplitude modulation. Settings: 0 ~ 127 Determines the amount of time for the LFO effect to fade in (after the KeyOnDelay time has elapsed). A higher value results in a slower fade-in. FadeInTime Settings: 0 ~ 127 [F6] EQ (Equalizer) Determines the Equalizer Type. This synthesizer features a wide selection of various equalizer types, which can be used not only to enhance the original sound, but even completely change the character of the sound. The particular parameters and settings available depend on the specific Equalizer Type that is selected. Type Settings: EQ L/H, P.EQ, boost6, boost12, boost18, thru EQ L/H (Low/High) ................ This is a “shelving” equalizer, which combines separate high and low frequency bands. P.EQ (Parametric EQ) ............ The Parametric EQ is used to attenuate or boost signal levels (gain) around the Frequency. This type features 32 different “Q” settings, which determine the frequency band width of the equalizer. boost6 (boost 6dB)/boost12 (boost 12dB)/boost18 (boost 18dB) These can be used to boost the level of the entire signal by 6dB, 12dB and 18dB, respectively. thru ........................................ If you select this, the equalizers are bypassed and the entire signal is unaffected. When set to EQ L/H When set to P.EQ Low Freq Settings: 50.1Hz – 2.00kHz Gain High Freq Setttings: 503.8Hz – 10.1kHz Q (Frequency characteristic) Settings: 0 – 31 + 0 Gain + 0 Gain – – Frequency Frequency Settings: -32 – 0 – +32 Low Gain High Gain Freq Settings: -32 – 0 – +32 Settings: -32 – 0 – +32 Settings: 139.7Hz – 12.9kHz Owner’s Manual 201 Voice Edit mode Drum Voice Edit Common Edit Drum Voice Edit When a Drum Voice is selected, Voice Edit parameters are divided into Common Edit (parameters common to all keys, up to 73), and Key Edit (parameters of individual keys). [VOICE] → Drum Voice selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] Common Edit These parameters are for making global (or common) edits to all keys of the selected Drum Voice. [F1] GENERAL [SF1] NAME Same as in Normal Voice Common Edit. See page 189. [SF3] MEQ OFS (Master EQ Offset) [SF5] OTHER [F2] OUTPUT Same as in Normal Voice Common Edit. See page 190. In addition, the following two parameters are also available. Determines the Send level for the entire Drum voice (all keys), sent from Insertion Effect A/B to the Reverb effect. InsRevSend (Insertion Reverb Send) Settings: 0 ~ 127 InsChoSend (Insertion Chorus Send) Settings: 0 ~ 127 n Determines the Send level for the entire Drum voice (all keys), sent from Insertion Effect A/B to the Chorus effect. Send level (to Reverb and Chorus) cannot be set independently for each Drum key; the value is fixed at 127 (maximum). [F3] ARP (Arpeggio) [SF1] TYPE Same as in Normal Voice Common Edit. See page 191. [SF2] LIMIT [SF3] PLAY FX Reference Voice Mode [F4] CTL SET (Controller Set) Same as in Normal Voice Common Edit. See page 192. Please note that the Element Switch parameter is not available in Drum Voice Common edit. [F6] EFFECT Same as in Normal Voice Common Edit. See page 194. The only difference here is that “KEY: OUT” appears in the [SF1] CONNECT display instead of “EL: OUT” (in Normal Common Effect). [VOICE] → Drum Voice selection → [EDIT] → Key selection Key Edit These parameters are for editing the individual keys that make up a Drum Voice. [F1] OSC (Oscillator) [SF1] WAVE From this display you can select the desired wave or Normal voice used for the individual Drum key. Determines whether a Wave or a Normal voice is to be used for the selected key. Also, use the Bank, Number and Category parameters below to specify the desired Wave or Normal voice. Type Settings: pre wav (Preset wave), voice, usr wav (User wave) n When the Type is set to “voice” here, some parameters in the Drum Voice Edit mode cannot be edited. ElementSw (Element Switch) This parameter is available when Type (above) is set to “pre wav” or “user wav.” This determines whether the currently selected key is on or off, or in other words, whether the wave for the key is active or inactive. Settings: on, off This parameter is available when Type (above) is set to “voice.” Any of the Normal voice banks can be selected. Bank n Plug-in voices cannot be selected for Drum keys. Determines the Wave/Voice number. The number differs depending on the selected Type. For details about available Waves and Voices, refer to the separate Data List booklet. Number Settings: When Type is set to “pre wav”: 001 ~ 1859 When Type is set to “voice”: 001 ~ 128 When Type is set to “usr wav”: 001 ~1024 202 Owner’s Manual Voice Edit mode Category InsEFOut (Insertion Effect Output) Key Edit Determines the Category of the Wave/Normal Voice. If you switch to another Category, the first Wave/Normal Voice in that Category will be selected. n [SF2] OUTPUT Drum Voice Edit For more information about the Categories, refer to the separate Data List booklet. From this display you can set certain output parameters for the selected Drum key. Determines which Insertion effect (A or B) is used to process each individual Drum key. The “thru” setting lets you bypass the Insertion effects for the specific key. Settings: thru, insA (Insertion Effect A), insB (Insertion Effect B) RevSend (Reverb Send) Determines the level of the Drum key sound (the bypassed signal) that is sent to Reverb effect. A setting of “0” results in no Reverb processing of the Drum key sound. This is available only when Insertion Effect Output (above) is set to “thru.” Settings: 0 ~ 127 ChoSend (Chorus Send) Determines the level of the Drum key sound (the bypassed signal) that is sent to Chorus effect. A setting of “0” results in no Chorus processing of the Drum key sound. This is available only when Insertion Effect Output (above) is set to “thru.” Settings: 0 ~ 127 OutputSel (Output Select) Determines the specific output(s) for the individual Drum key signal. You can assign each individual Drum key sound to be output from a specific hardware output jack on the rear panel. This is available only when Insertion Effect Output (above) is set to “thru.” Settings: See page 31. [SF5] OTHER AssignMode From this display you can set various parameters related to how the individual notes of the Drum voice respond to the keyboard and MIDI data. When this is set to “single,” double playback of the same note is prevented. This is useful when two or more instances of the same note are received nearly simultaneously, or without a corresponding note off message. To allow playback of each instance of the same note, set this to “multi.” Settings: single, multi RcvNoteOff (Receive Note Off) Determines whether or not the selected Drum key responds to MIDI Note Off messages. AlternateGroup Reference Voice Mode Settings: off, on n This parameter is available when the Type is set to “pre wav” or “usr wav” in the [F1] OSC → [SF1] WAVE display (page 202). Set the Alternate Group to which the key is assigned. In a real drum kit, some drum sounds cannot physically be played simultaneously, such as open and closed hi-hats.You can prevent keys from playing back simultaneously by assigning them to the same Alternate Group. Up to 127 Alternate Groups can be defined. You can also select “off” here if you wish to allow the simultaneous playback of sounds. Settings: off, 1 ~ 127 [F2] PITCH [SF1] TUNE Coarse From this display you can set various pitch-related parameters for the selected key. Determines the pitch of each Drum Key Wave (or Normal Voice) in semitones. Settings: -48 ~ +48 n If a Normal voice has been assigned to the key, this parameter adjusts the position of its note (not its pitch) relative to note C3. Fine Determines the fine tuning for the pitch of each Drum Key Wave (or Normal Voice). Settings: -64 ~ +63 [SF2] VEL SENS (Velocity Sensitivity) Pitch Determines how the pitch of the selected Drum key responds to velocity. For positive values, the more strongly you play the key, the higher the pitch becomes. For negative values, the more strongly you play the key, the lower the pitch. Settings: -64 ~ +63 [F3] FILTER [SF1] CUTOFF This synthesizer lets you apply a low pass filter and high pass filter to each individual Drum key — giving you exceptionally detailed and comprehensive sonic control over the Drum voice. Settings: This parameter is available when the Type is set to “pre wav” or “usr wav” in the [F1] OSC → [SF1] WAVE display (page 202). LPFCutoff Determines the Cutoff frequency of the Low Pass Filter. Settings: 0 ~ 255 LPFReso Determines the amount of Resonance (harmonic emphasis) applied to the signal at the Cutoff frequency. Settings: 0 ~ 127 HPFCutoff Determines the Cutoff frequency of the High Pass Filter. Settings: 0 ~ 255 Owner’s Manual 203 Voice Edit mode Drum Voice Edit Key Edit [SF2] VEL SENS (Velocity Sensitivity) Determines the velocity sensitivity of the Low Pass Filter Cutoff frequency. For positive settings, the more strongly you play the keyboard, the higher the cutoff frequency becomes. For negative settings, the more strongly you play, the lower the cutoff frequency. LPFCutoff Settings: -64 ~ 0 ~ +63 [F4] AMP (Amplitude) [SF1] LVL/PAN (Level/Pan) This display not only lets you make basic Level and Pan settings for the sound of each individual Drum key, it also gives you some detailed and unusual parameters for affecting Pan position. Determines the output for the selected Drum key (Wave). This lets you make detailed balance adjustments among the various sounds of the Drum voice. Level Settings: 0 ~ 127 Determines the stereo Pan position for the selected Drum key (Wave). This will also be used as the basic Pan position for the Alternate and Random settings. Pan Settings: L63 (Left) ~ C (Center) ~ R63 (Right) Determines the amount by which the sound of the selected Drum key is panned alternately left and right for each note you press. The Pan setting (above) is used as the basic Pan position. AlternatePan Settings: L64 ~ 0 ~ R63 n This parameter is available when the Type is set to “pre wav” or “usr wav” in the [F1] OSC → [SF1] WAVE display (page 202). Determines the amount by which the sound of the selected Drum key is panned randomly left and right for each note you press. The Pan setting (above) is used as the Center Pan position. RandomPan Settings: 0 ~ 127 n This parameter is available when the Type is set to “pre wav” or “usr wav” in the [F1] OSC → [SF1] WAVE display (page 202). [SF2] VEL SENS (Velocity Sensitivity) Determines the velocity sensitivity of the Amplitude Envelope Generator's output level. Positive settings will cause the output level to rise the harder you play the keyboard and, conversely, negative values will cause it to fall. Level Reference Voice Mode Settings: -64 ~ 0 ~ +63 [SF3] AEG (Amplitude Envelope Generator) AttackTime Settings: 0 ~ 127 Decay1Time Settings: 0 ~ 127 Decay1Lvl (Level) Settings: 0 ~ 127 Decay2Time Settings: 0 ~ 126, hold Decay2Time=hold Decay2Time=0 – 126 Level Attack level Level Attack level Decay1 level Attack time Key on Decay1 time Decay2 time Decay1 level Time Attack time Key on [F6] EQ (Equalizer) Same as in Normal Voice Element Edit. See page 201. n 204 This parameter is available when the Type is set to “pre wav” or “usr wav” in the [F1] OSC → [SF1] WAVE display (page 202). Owner’s Manual Decay1 time Decay2 time Time Voice Edit mode Plug-in Voice Edit Common Edit Plug-in Voice Edit These parameters are basically the same as in Normal Voice Edit. Unlike with Normal voices, the Plug-in voices only have one Element for editing. n Depending on the particular Plug-in board you are using, some of the parameters described here may not be available. For details, refer to the relevant owner's manual of the Plug-in board. n For details on the current lineup of available Plug-in boards, see page 74. Common Edit [VOICE] → Plug-in Voice selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] [F1] GENERAL [SF1] NAME Same as in Normal Voice Common Edit. See page 189. [SF2] PLY MODE (Play mode) Same as in Normal Voice Common Edit. See page 190. Please note that Micro Tuning is not available in Plug-in Voice Common Edit. [SF3] MEQ OFS (Master EQ Offset) Same as in Normal Voice Common Edit. See page 190. [SF4] PORTA (Portamento) Same as in Normal Voice Common Edit. See page 190. Please note that Portamento Mode and Time Mode are not available in Plug-in Voice Common Edit. [SF5] OTHER Same as in Normal Voice Common Edit. See page 190. Unlike with Normal Voice Edit, the Upper and Lower ranges cannot be independently set here. [F2] OUTPUT Same as in Normal Voice Common Edit. See page 190. [F3] ARP (Arpeggio) [SF1] TYPE Same as in Normal Voice Common Edit. See page 191. Reference Voice Mode [SF2] LIMIT [SF3] PLAY FX [F4] CTL SET (Controller Set) [SF1] SET1/2 Same as in Normal Voice Common Edit. See page 192. Please note that Element Switch is not available in Plug-in Voice Common Edit. [SF2] MW (Modulation Wheel) From this display you can set how the Plug-in voice responds to the Modulation wheel, by changing the control depth for the filter, pitch and amplitude (volume). Filter Determines the depth of control of the Modulation Wheel over the filter cutoff frequency. Negative settings result in reversed Modulation wheel operation (i.e., moving the wheel up results in less modulation). Settings: -64 ~ 0 ~ +63 PMod (Pitch Modulation Depth) Determines the depth of control the Modulation Wheel has over pitch modulation. The higher the setting, the greater the depth of control. Settings: 0 ~ 127 FMod (Filter Modulation Depth) Determines the depth of control the Modulation Wheel has over filter cutoff modulation. The higher the setting, the greater the depth of control. Settings: 0 ~ 127 AMod (Amplitude Modulation Depth) Determines the depth of control the Modulation Wheel has over amplitude modulation. The higher the setting, the greater the depth of control. Settings: 0 ~ 127 [SF3] AT (After Touch) Pitch This synthesizer gives you a comprehensive set of after touch controls for the Plug-in voice, allowing you to change the pitch and filter settings, and produce modulation effects (pitch, filter and amplitude) — simply by pressing down hard on the keys. Determines the depth of control of keyboard aftertouch over pitch. You can set a value (in semitones) of up to two octaves. Settings: -24 ~ 0 ~ +24 Filter Determines the depth of control of keyboard aftertouch over the filter cutoff frequency. Settings: -64 ~ 0 ~ +63 PMod (Pitch Modulation Depth) Determines the depth of control that keyboard aftertouch has over pitch modulation. The higher the setting, the greater the depth of control. Settings: 0 ~ 127 Owner’s Manual 205 Voice Edit mode Plug-in Voice Edit FMod (Filter Modulation Depth) Element Edit Determines the depth of control that keyboard aftertouch has over filter cutoff modulation. The higher the setting, the greater the depth of control. Settings: 0 ~ 127 AMod (Amplitude Modulation Depth) Determines the depth of control that keyboard aftertouch has over amplitude modulation. The higher the setting, the greater the depth of control. Settings: 0 ~ 127 [SF4] AC (Assignable Control) From this display you can assign MIDI Control Change numbers (as Src) and determine the degree to which the assigned controllers affect the filter and the modulation effects (pitch, filter and amplitude). Determines the MIDI Control Change number used to control the filter, PMod, FMod, and AMod. Src (Source) Settings: 0 ~ 95 Determines the depth of control the Control Change numbers (set in the Src parameter above) have over the filter cutoff frequency. Filter Settings: -64 ~ 0 ~ +63 PMod (Pitch Modulation Depth) Determines the depth of control the Control Change messages (set in the Src parameter above) have over pitch modulation. The larger the setting, the greater the depth of control. Settings: 0 ~ 127 FMod (Filter Modulation Depth) Determines the depth of control the Control Change messages (set in the Src parameter above) have over filter cutoff modulation. The larger the setting, the greater the depth of control. Settings: 0 ~ 127 AMod (Amplitude Modulation Depth) Determines the depth of control the Control Change messages (set in the Src parameter above) have over amplitude modulation. The larger the setting, the greater the depth of control. Settings: 0 ~ 127 [F6] EFFECT Same as in Normal Voice Common Edit. See page 194. Please note that the EL: OUT settings are not available in the [SF1] CONNECT display and the parallel setting (Insertion Connection) is not available in the [SF1] CONNECT display. Reference Voice Mode [VOICE] → Plug-in Voice selection → [EDIT] → Element selection Element Edit [F1] OSC (Oscillator) [SF1] WAVE From this display you can select the desired Board Voice used for the Element of the Plug-in voice. Keep in mind that a Plug-in voice only has one Element. Determines the Board Voice Bank. Bank Settings: These depend on the particular Plug-in board; refer to the relevant owner’s manual for details. Determines the Board Voice Number. Number Settings: These depend on the particular Plug-in board; refer to the relevant owner’s manual for details. [SF5] OTHER Determines the velocity sensitivity of the Plug-in Voice. For higher values, the harder you play the keyboard, the louder the voice becomes. VelocityDepth Settings: 0 ~ 127 This lets you specify an offset value for Velocity Depth (above). In other words, you can increase the relative velocity (or level) of the voice by a set amount – so that all the notes you play have the added velocity. VelocityOffset Settings: 0 ~ 127 Determines the transpose setting for the Plug-in voice, or the amount (in semitones) by which the pitch is raised or lowered. The pitch range is two octaves, up or down. NoteShift Settings: -24 ~ 0 ~ +24 206 Owner’s Manual Voice Edit mode [F2] PITCH From this display you can make various time and level settings for the Pitch EG, which determine how the pitch of the Plug-in Voice changes over time. The full names of the available parameters are shown in the chart below, as they appear in the display. TIME LEVEL INIT --Initial level ATK Attack time --- DCY1 ----- DCY2 ----- REL Release time Release level DEPTH Original pitch Pitch Initial level --- Release level Settings: -64 ~ 0 ~ +63 0 Attack time Release time Key off Time [F3] FILTER HPFCutoff (High Pass Filter Cutoff frequency) Determines the Cutoff frequency for the High Pass Filter. Settings: -64 ~ 0 ~ +63 [F4] NATIVE With a Plug-in board installed to this synthesizer, you can create a Plug-in Voice by editing both native parameters (those parameters exclusive to the particular board) and unique parameters (related specifically to this synthesizer). Pressing [F4] gives you access to the native parameters of the Plug-in board. The parameters will vary depending on the Plug-in Board. For details about each parameter and its functions, refer to the Owner’s Manual or the on-line help that came with your Plug-in Board. [F5] LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator) From this display you can set the basic LFO parameters for modulating the pitch to create vibrato and other special effects. Speed Determines the speed of the LFO waveform. Positive settings increase the speed and negative settings decrease it. Settings: -64 ~ 0 ~ +63 Delay Determines the delay time between the moment you press note on the keyboard and the moment the LFO comes into effect. Positive settings lengthen the delay and negative settings shorten it. PMod (Pitch Modulation Depth) Reference Voice Mode Settings: -64 ~ 0 ~ +63 Determines the amount by which the LFO waveform controls the pitch. Positive settings increase the amount and negative settings decrease it. Settings: -64 ~ 0 ~ +63 [F6] EQ (Equalizer) From this display you can apply equalizer settings to the Plug-in Voice. This is a shelving equalizer with two bands; one for high frequencies and the other for low frequencies. n Gain + LowFreq HighFreq For details on the EQ, see page 178. Frequen 0 - LowFreq (Low Frequency) LowGain HighGain Determines the shelving point for the low frequencies. The levels of signals below this frequency will be boosted/ attenuated by the amount set in the LowGain parameter. Settings: 32Hz ~ 2.0kHz LowGain (Low Gain) Determines the amount by which signals below the LowFreq frequency will be boosted/attenuated. Settings: -64 ~ 0 ~ +63 HighFreq (High Frequency) Determines the shelving point for the high frequencies. The levels of signals above this frequency will be boosted/ attenuated by the amount set in the HighGain parameter. Settings: 500Hz ~ 16.0kHz HighGain (High Gain) Determines the amount by which signals above the HighFreq frequency will be boosted/attenuated. Settings: -64 ~ 0 ~ +63 Owner’s Manual 207 Voice Job mode [VOICE] → Voice selection → [JOB] Voice Job mode The Voice Job mode features several basic operations, such as Initialize and Copy. After setting parameters as required from the selected display, press the [ENTER] button to execute the Job. [F1] INIT (Initialize) This function lets you reset (initialize) all Voice parameters to their default settings. It also allows you to selectively initialize certain parameters, such as Common settings, settings for each Element/Drum key, and so on – very useful when creating a completely new voice from scratch. Type of parameter to be initialized When a Normal Voice is selected: ALL, Common, EL1 ~ 4, without Wave When a Drum Voice is selected: ALL, Common, EL, without Wave When a Plug-in Voice is selected: ALL, Common, EL, without Wave n If you turn the check mark on when a Drum voice is selected, you can select a Drum key. For details on selecting a key, refer to page 53 in the Basic Operation section. [F2] RECALL (Edit Recall) If you are editing a Voice and select a different Voice without storing your edited one, all the edits you’ve made will be erased. If this happens, you can use Edit Recall to restore the Voice with your latest edits intact. [F3] COPY From this display you can copy Common and Element/Drum Key parameter settings from any Voice to the Voice you are editing. This is useful if you are creating a Voice and wish to use some parameter settings from another Voice. Source Voice Destination Voice (Current Voice) Source voice Determines the Voice and data type to be copied. Reference Voice Mode Data type When a Normal voice is selected: Common, Element 1 ~ 4 When a Drum voice is selected: Common, Drum key C0 ~ C6 When a Plug-in voice is selected: Common, Element n If the source Voice type (Normal/Drum/Plug-in) differs from one of the Voice you are currently editing (destination), you will only be able to copy Common parameters. Data type of Destination voice (current selected voice) If the source is a Normal or Drum Voice and data type is set to Element or Drum Key, you can set the data type of the destination Voice. Data type When a Normal voice is selected: Common, Element 1 ~ 4 When a Drum voice is selected: Common, Drum key C0 ~ C6 n If you choose to copy Common parameters from the source, this display will change to “Common.” [F4] BULK (Bulk Dump) This function lets you send all your edited parameter settings for the currently selected Voice to a computer or another MIDI instrument for data archiving. For details, see page 185. n In order to execute Bulk Dump, you’ll need to set the correct MIDI Device Number, with the following operation: [UTILITY] → [F5] MIDI → [SF1] CH → DeviceNo. Voice Store mode [VOICE] → Voice selection → [STORE] This function lets you store your edited voice to User memory (Flash ROM). For details, refer to page 85 in the Quick Guide section. 208 Owner’s Manual Supplementary infomation ■ Supplementary information Micro Tuning List [VOICE] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF2] PLY MODE → M.TuningNo./M.TuningRoot (page 190) M.TuningNo. Type M.TuningRoot Comments -- The “compromise” tuning used for most of the last 200 years of Western music, and found on most electronic keyboards. Each half step is exactly 1/12 of an octave, and music can be played in any key with equal ease. However, none of the intervals are perfectly in tune. C~B This tuning is designed so that most of the intervals (especially the major third and perfect fifth) in the major scale are pure. This means that other intervals will be correspondingly out of tune. You need to specify the key (C~B) you will be playing in. Equal Temp (Equal temperament) 00 PureMaj (Pure major) 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 PureMin (Pure minor) Werckmeist (Werckmeister) Kirnberger Vallot&Yng (Vallotti & Young) 1/4 Shift (1/4 shifted) 1/4 tone C~B The same as Pure Major, but designed for the minor scale. C~B Andreas Werckmeiser, a contemporary of Bach, designed this tuning so that keyboard instruments could be played in any key. Each key has a unique character. C~B Johann Philipp Kirnberger, an 18th century composer, created this tempered scale to allow performances in any key. C~B Francescatonio Vallotti and Thomas Young (both mid-1700s) devised this adjustment to the Pythagorean tuning, in which the first six fifths are lower by the same amount. -- This is the normal equal tempered scale shifted up 50 cents. -- Twenty-four equally spaced notes per octave. (Play twenty-four notes to move one octave.) Forty-eight equally spaced notes per octave. (Play forty-eight notes to move one octave.) 08 1/8 tone -- 09 Indian -- 10 Arabic 1 11 Arabic 2 12 Arabic 3 Usually observed in Indian music (white keys only). Usually observed in Arabic music. Reference Voice Mode C~B Filter Type List [VOICE] → [EDIT] → Element selection → [F3] FILTER → [SF1] TYPE → Type (page 197) LPF24D (24dB/oct Digital Low Pass Filter) A dynamic 24dB/oct low-pass filter with a characteristic digital sound. Compared to the LPF24A type (below), this filter can produce a more pronounced resonance effect. LPF18 (18dB/oct Low Pass Filter) 3-pole 18dB/oct low-pass filter. LPF18s (18dB/oct Staggered Low Pass Filter) 3-pole 18dB/oct low-pass filter. This filter has a smoother cutoff slope than the LPF18 type. LPF6 (6dB/oct low-pass Filter) 1-pole 6dB/oct low-pass filter. No resonance. This filter is designed to be used in conjunction with a high-pass filter. Resonance Resonance These frequencies are “passed” by the filter. LPF24A (24dB/oct Analog Low Pass Filter) A digital dynamic low-pass filter with characteristics similar to a 4-pole analog synth filter. Resonance LPF18 LPF18s LPF12 (12dB/oct Low Pass Filter) 12dB/oct low-pass filter. This filter is designed to be used in conjunction with a high-pass filter. HPF24D (24dB/oct Digital High Pass Filter) A dynamic 24dB/oct high-pass filter with a characteristic digital sound. This filter can produce a pronounced resonance effect. Resonance Resonance Owner’s Manual 209 Supplementary HPF12 (12dB/oct High Pass Filter) 12dB/oct dynamic high-pass filter. BEF12 (12dB/oct Band Elimination Filter) BEF6 (6dB/oct Band Elimination Filter) Level Dual BPF (Dual Band Pass Filter) Two 6dB/oct band-pass filters connected in parallel. Cutoff range Resonance Level Distance Frequency Range passed Range passed Frequency The lower cutoff frequency is set directly on the display. Center frequency BPF12D (12dB/oct Digital Band Pass Filter) Resonance Level Cutoff range Cutoff range Dual LPF (Dual Low Pass Filter) Two 12dB/oct low-pass filters connected in parallel. Level Dual BEF (Dual Band Elimination Filter) Two 6dB/oct band-elimination filters connected in serial. Distance 12db/oct Level Distance Frequency Range passed Frequency BPFw (Wide Band Pass Filter) A 12dB/oct BPF that combines HPF and LPF filters to allow wider bandwidth settings. Level Cutoff range Cutoff range The lower cutoff frequency is set directly on the display. Frequency The lower cutoff frequency is set directly on the display. Dual HPF (Dual High Pass Filter) Two 12dB/oct high-pass filters connected in parallel. Level Distance Width can be increased Level Reference Voice Mode Frequency Range passed Frequency The lower cutoff frequency is set directly on the display. BPF6 (6dB/oct Band Pass Filter) Cutoff range Frequency Distance The lower cutoff frequency is set directly on the display. Resonance Level Cutoff range thru The filters are bypassed and the entire signal is unaffected. 6db/oct Frequency Range passed 210 LPF12 + BPF6 (12dB/oct Low Pass Filter + 6dB/ oct Band Pass Filter) A combined low-pass and high-pass filter. Owner’s Manual Voice Store mode Setting example of Filter Scaling Setting example of Amplitude Scaling [VOICE] → [EDIT] → Element selection → [F3] FILTER → [SF5] SCALE (page 199) The best way to understand Filter Scaling is by example. For the settings shown in the example display below, the basic Cutoff frequency value is 64, and the various Offset values at the selected Break point settings change that basic value accordingly. The specific changes to the Cutoff frequency are shown in the diagram below. The Cutoff frequency changes in a linear fashion between successive Break Points as shown. Cutoff Frequency 81 [VOICE] → [EDIT] → Element selection → [F4] AMP → [SF5] SCALE (page 200) The best way to understand Amplitude Scaling is by example. For the settings shown in the example display above, the basic Amplitude (volume) value for the selected Element is 80, and the various Offset values at the selected Break point settings change that basic value accordingly. The specific changes to the Amplitude are shown in the diagram below. The Amplitude changes in a linear fashion between successive Break Points as shown. 97 Amplitude 74 90 68 84 76 Note C1 D2 C3 A4 Break Point 1 Break Point 2 Break Point 3 Break Point 4 Note C1 C2 Break Point 1 Break Point 2 C3 Break Point 3 C4 Break Point 4 Reference Voice Mode 60 Owner’s Manual 211 Performance Play mode Performance mode ■ Creating Performances — basic procedure You can create and edit your original Performances by setting various parameters in both the Performance Play mode and Performance Edit mode, while the Performance Job mode provides some basic parameter-related tools, such as Initialize and Copy. Once you’ve edited a Performance, you can store it to a User Bank in internal memory (Flash ROM) in the Performance Store mode and save all the edited Performances to a SmartMedia/USB storage device in the File mode. Performance Play mode [PERFORM] → Performance selection The Performance Play mode lets you perform a variety of general editing operations on the selected Performance. For more detailed and comprehensive editing operations, use the Performance Edit mode. n The parameters that have the same name in the Performance Play mode and in the Performance Edit mode have the same functions and settings. [F1] PLAY TCH (Transmit Channel) OCT (Octave) Same as in Voice Play mode. These parameters are available both in the Voice mode and the Performance mode regardless of the selected Voice or Performance. ASA (ASSIGN A), ASB (ASSIGN B) n TCH (Transmit Channel), OCT (Octave), ASA (ASSIGN A), and ASB (ASSIGN B) settings do not belong to each Performance. Because of this, these are not stored as an individual Performance in the Performance Store mode (page 220). Indicates the values obtained by controlling the respective Knobs (printed “ASSIGN 1” and “ASSIGN 2”) when the lamps of both the [PAN/SEND] and [TONE] buttons are turned on. The functions assigned to these knobs depend on the setting of the Voice assigned to each Part of the Performance. AS1 (ASSIGN 1), AS2 (ASSIGN 2) [SF1] ARP1 (Arpeggio 1) - [SF5] ARP5 (Arpeggio 5) You can register the desired Arpeggio types to these buttons and call them up any time during your keyboard performance. Refer to page 70 in the Quick Guide section. [F2] VOICE From this display you can select a Voice for each Part and determine the note range it can be played from. Reference Performance Mode [SF1] ADD INT (Add Internal Voice) Press this button to assign an internal Voice to the selected Part. [SF2] ADD PLG (Add Plug-in Voice) Press this button to assign a Plug-in Voice to the selected Part. [SF3] DELETE Pressing this button deletes the Voice assignment for the selected Part, leaving the Part blank. [SF4] LIMIT L (Note Limit Low) This sets the lowest note of the range over which the Voice of the selected Part sounds. Simultaneously hold down this button and press the desired key on the keyboard to set the note. [SF5] LIMIT H (Note Limit High) This sets the highest note of the range over which the Voice of the selected Part sounds. Simultaneously hold down this button and press the desired key on the keyboard to set the note. [F3] EFFECT Pressing the [F3] EFFECT button in the Performance Play mode calls up the same EFFECT display in the Performance Edit mode ([PERFORM] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F6] EFFECT). From this display, you can set the effect related parameters for the current Performance. See page 215. [F4] PORTA (Portamento) From this display you can set the Portamento parameters. Portamento is used to create a smooth transition in pitch from the first note played on the keyboard to the next. PortaSw (Portamento Switch) Determines whether Portamento is on or off for all Parts. (This is a global switch and overrides the individual Part settings in Part Switch below.) Settings: off, on PortaTime (Portamento Time) Determines the pitch transition time. This parameter offsets the same parameter in Part Edit (page 216). Higher values result in longer transition times. Settings: -64 ~ 0 ~ +63 Determines whether Portamento is on or off for each individual Part. This is available only when the PortaSw (above) is set to on. PartSwitch 212 Owner’s Manual Performance Edit mode Common Edit [F5] EG (Envelope Generator) This display contains the basic EG settings, both volume and filter, for the Performance, as well as the filter’s cutoff frequency and resonance settings. The settings made here are applied as offsets to the AEG and FEG settings in the Performance Edit mode (pages 218, 219). The parameters are same as in Voice Play mode. See page 189. [F6] ARP (Arpeggio) This display contains the basic settings for Arpeggio playback, including Type and Tempo. Note that the Performance mode lets you independently enable or disable Arpeggio playback for each Part. The parameters are same as in the Voice Play mode (page 189) except for the following one. PartSw Determines whether Arpeggio is on or off for the selected Part. The Parts for which boxes are checkmarked are enabled for Arpeggio play. Performance Edit mode [PERFORM] → Performance selection → [EDIT] Voice Edit parameters are divided into Common Edit (parameters common to all four Parts), and Part Edit (parameters of individual Parts). Common Edit [PERFORM] → Performance selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] [F1] GENERAL [SF1] NAME From this display you can assign the category (sub and main) of the selected Performance, and create a name for the Performance. The Performance name can contain up to 10 characters. For detailed instructions on naming a Performance, see “Basic Operation” on page 53. [SF3] MEQ OFS (Master EQ Offset) From this display you can adjust the master (global) EQ settings for all Parts of the selected Performance. The level of each of the four bands (with the exception of “MID”) can be adjusted. Moreover, you can also tweak these settings directly from the four Knobs on the front panel. Editing by Knobs can be done in the Performance Play mode. [SF4] PORTA (Portamento) This display allows you to set the Portamento related parameters. The parameters are the same as in the Performance Play mode. See page 212. [SF5] OTHER From this display you can set the control functions for the Knobs and related parameters. With the exception of Pitch Bend, which cannot be set here, these parameters are the same as in the Voice Edit mode (page 190). Reference Performance Mode Settings: -64 ~ 0 ~+63 [F2] OUT/MEF (Output/Master Effect) [SF1] OUT (Output) Volume Determines the output level of the selected Performance. You can adjust the overall volume, keeping the balance between all Parts. Settings: 0 ~ 127 Pan Determines the stereo pan position of the selected Performance. This parameter offsets the same parameter in the Part Edit setting. You can also adjust this parameter using the PAN knob (with the [PAN/SEND] lamp turned on) on the front panel. Editing by using the Knobs can be done also in the Performance Play mode. Settings: L63 (Left) ~ C (Center) ~ R63 (Right) n A setting of “C” (center) maintains the individual Pan settings of each Part. RevSend Determines the Send level of the signal sent from Insertion Effect A/B (or the bypassed signal) to the Reverb effect. You can also adjust this parameter using the REVERB knob (with the [PAN/SEND] lamp turned on) on the front panel. Editing by using the Knobs can be done also in the Performance Play mode. Settings: 0 ~ 127 ChoSend Determines the Send level of the signal sent from Insertion Effect A/B (or the bypassed signal) to the Chorus effect. You can also adjust this parameter using the [CHORUS] knob (with the [PAN/SEND] lamp turned on) on the front panel. Editing by using the Knobs can be done also in the Performance Play mode. Settings: 0 ~127 n For details on Effect connections in the Performance mode, see page 179. Owner’s Manual 213 Performance Edit mode Common Edit [SF2] MEQ (Master EQ) From this display you can apply five-band equalization to all Parts of the selected Performance. You can raise or lower the signal level at the Frequency of each band (LOW, LOWMID, MID, HIGHMID, HIGH). Determines whether the equalizer type used is Shelving or Peaking. The Peaking type attenuates/boosts the signal at the specified Frequency setting, whereas the Shelving type attenuates/boosts the signal at frequencies above or below the specified Frequency setting. This parameter is available only for the LOW and HIGH frequency bands. SHAPE Settings: shelv (Shelving type), peak (Peaking type) FREQ (Frequency) Determines the center frequency. Frequencies around this point are attenuated/boosted by the Gain setting. Settings: LOW: Shelving 32Hz ~ 2.0kHz, Peaking 63Hz ~ 2.0kHz LOWMID, MID, HIGHMID: 100Hz ~ 10.0kHz HIGH: 500Hz ~ 16.0kHz Determines the level gain for the Frequency (set above), or the amount the selected frequency band is attenuated or boosted. GAIN Settings: -12dB ~ 0dB ~ +12dB Q (Frequency Characteristic) This varies the signal level at the Frequency setting to create various frequency curve characteristics. Settings: 0.1 ~ 12.0 n For details on the EQ, see page 178. [SF3] MEF (Master Effect) From this display you can set the Master Effect related parameters. This display can be called up by pressing and holding the [MASTER EFFECT] button on the front panel. Switch Determines whether Master Effect is applied or not to the selected Performance. You can turn it on or off by pressing the [MASTER EFFECT] button on the front panel. Type Determines the Master effect type. Settings: off, on Settings: Refer to the Effect Types list in the separate Data List booklet. n The available parameters except for the above two differ depending on the currently selected effect type. For more information, refer to the separate Data List booklet. [F3] ARP (Arpeggio) From this display you can set the Arpeggio related parameters. [SF1] TYPE Same as in Normal Voice Common Edit. See page 191. [SF2] LIMIT Reference Performance Mode [SF3] PLAY FX (Play Effect) [SF4] OUT CH (Output Channel) From this display you can set a separate MIDI output channel for the Arpeggio playback data, letting you have the Arpeggio sound from an external tone generator or synthesizer. When this is set to on, Arpeggio playback data is output via MIDI. OutputSwitch Settings: on, off Determines the MIDI transmit channel for Arpeggio playback data. When set to “KbdCh,” the Arpeggio playback data is output via the MIDI Keyboard Transmit Channel ([UTILITY] → [F5] MIDI → KBDTransCh). TransmitCh Settings: 1 ~ 16, KbdCh (Keyboard Channel) [F4] CTL ASN (Controller Assign) You can assign Control Change numbers to the controllers listed below, letting you use the hardware controllers on the keyboard to alter the sound of external MIDI devices, via the appropriate MIDI messages. When the MOTIF ES receives Control Change data corresponding to the settings here, the internal tone generator responds as if the instrument's controllers were used. BC (Breath Controller) Determines the Control Change number generated when you apply breath pressure to the Breath Controller connected to the BREATH connector. RB (Ribbon Controller) Determines the Control Change number generated when you run your finger across the surface of the Ribbon Controller. RBMode (Ribbon Controller Mode) Determines whether the Ribbon Controller value returns to a center value when you release your finger from the Ribbon Controller (reset), or the value is retained at the value at the last point of contact (hold). AS1 (Assign 1), AS2 (Assign 2) Determines the Control Change number generated when you control the KN3 (Knob3) and the KN4 (Knob4) with both the [PAN/SEND] and [TONE] lamp turned on. FC1 (Foot Controller 1), FC2 (Foot Controller 2) Determines the Control Change number generated when you use the Foot Controller connected to the FOOT CONTROLLER jack. n Keep in mind that the functions of these controllers set here are not changed for the internal tone generator. The controller assignments for the MOTIF ES itself depend on the settings of the Voices assigned to each Part. [F5] AUDIO IN The audio signal input from the A/D INPUT jack, mLAN connector (when the optional mLAN16E has been installed to this synthesizer), DIGITAL IN or OPTICAL IN connector (when the optional AIEB2 has been installed to this synthesizer) can be handled as an Audio Input Part. You can apply various parameters such as Effect settings to this Part, just as with the other Parts. n 214 For details about the Audio Input Parts, see page 165. Owner’s Manual Performance Edit mode Common Edit [SF1] OUTPUT Determines the output level of the Audio Input Part. Volume Settings: 0 ~ 127 Determines the stereo pan position of the Audio Input Part. Pan Settings: L63 (Left) ~ C (Center) ~ R63 (Right) RevSend Determines the Send level of the Audio Input Part signal sent to the Reverb effect. Settings: 0 ~ 127 ChoSend Determines the Send level of the Audio Input Part signal sent to the Chorus effect. Settings: 0 ~ 127 DryLevel Determines the level of the Audio Input Part which has not been processed with the System Effects (Reverb, Chorus). Settings: 0 ~ 127 n For details about Effect connection in the Performance mode, see page 179. Mono/Stereo Determines the signal configuration for the Audio Input Part, or how the signal or signals are routed (stereo or mono). Settings: stereo, L mono, R mono, L+R mono stereo............... Both the L and R channels of the audio input are used. L (left) mono .... Only the L channel of the audio input is used. R (right) mono . Only the R channel of the audio input is used. L+R mono........ The L and R channels of the audio input are mixed and processed in mono. OutputSel (Output Select) Determines the output jack assignment for the Audio Input Part. Settings: See page 31. [SF2] INS TYPE (Insertion Type) InsEF Connect (Insertion Effect Connection) This display is available only when the AD (A/D Part) is set to on from the [F6] EFFECT → [SF2] INS SW display. The type and connection of the Insertion Effect applied to the A/D Part can be set from this display. Same as in the CONNECT display in the Voice Edit mode ([VOICE] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F6] EFFECT → [SF1] CONNECT). Please note that the InsEF Connect cannot be set to “parallel” here. InsA Ctgry (Insertion A Category) InsA Type (Insertion A Type) InsB Ctgry (Insertion B Category) InsB Type (Insertion B Type) Insertion effects can be applied only to the A/D Part, among the Audio Input Parts. Reference Performance Mode n [F6] EFFECT This menu gives you comprehensive control over the effects. For details about the Effect connections in the Performance mode, see page 179. [SF1] CONNECT (Connection) EF PART → PLG-EF (Plug-in Insertion Effect) Determines the Part to which the Insertion effect is applied. This parameter is available only when a special Effect Plug-in board (PLG100-VH) has been installed. Settings: Part 1~4, PartP2~P3, AD, off Chorus Ctg (Category), Chorus Type Chorus Return (Level) Determines the Chorus effect type. Settings: Refer to the Effect Types list in the separate Data List booklet. Determines the Return level of the Chorus Effect. Settings: 0 ~ 127 Chorus Pan Determines the pan position of the Chorus effect sound. Settings: L63 (far left) ~ C (center) ~ R63 (far right) Chorus to Reverb Determines the Send level of the signal sent from the Chorus Effect to the Reverb Effect. Settings: 0 ~ 127 Reverb Type Determines the Reverb effect type. Settings: Refer to the Effect Types list in the separate Data List booklet. Reverb Return Determines the Return level of the Reverb Effect. Settings: 0 ~ 127 Reverb Pan Determines the pan position of the Reverb effect sound. Settings: L63 (far left) ~ C (center) ~ R63 (far right) Owner’s Manual 215 Performance Edit mode Part Edit [SF2] INS SW (Insertion Switch) The Insertion Effects can be applied to up to eight Parts. This display lets you set to which Parts the Insertion Effects are applied. [SF3] PLG-EF (Plug-in Effect) This display lets you set the Plug-in Insertion Effect related parameters when the Effect Plug-in Board PLG100-VH has been installed to this synthesizer. For details on each parameter, refer to the Owner’s Manual included with the PLG100-VH. [SF4] REVERB The number of parameters and values available differs depending on the currently selected effect type. For more information, see the Effect Type List in the separate Data List booklet. [SF5] CHORUS [PERFORM] → Performance selection → [EDIT] → Part selection Part Edit These parameters are for editing the individual Parts that make up a Performance. To switch between the display for Parts 1 - 4 to which the internal Voices are assigned and the display for Plug-in Parts (PLG1 - 3) to which the Plug-in Voices are assigned, press the [F6] button. n When a Plug-in Voice is assigned to a Part of the selected Performance, some parameters may not be available depending on the installed Plug-in board. [F1] VOICE [SF1] VOICE PartSw (Part Switch) Determines whether each Part is on or off. Since a Performance can consist of up to four Parts, you can select four Parts from Parts 1 - 4 and the Plug-in Parts 1 - 3. Settings: on, off Determines the Voice Bank (page 60) for each Part. For details about the Plug-in Voice Bank, refer to the Owner’s Manual included with your Plug-in Board. Bank n When the cursor is located on the Bank, you can select a Voice via the way explained on page 60. Determines the Voice Program number for each Part. For details about the Plug-in Voice Program number, refer to the Owner’s Manual included with your Plug-in Board. Number [SF2] MODE Determines the playback method of the Voice for each Part — monophonic (single notes only) or polyphonic (multiple notes). Mono/Poly Reference Performance Mode Settings: mono, poly n This parameter is not available for the Part to which a Drum Voice is assigned. ArpSwitch (Arpeggio Switch) Determines whether Arpeggio is on or off for the currently selected Part. Settings: on, off [SF3] LIMIT NoteLimitH (Note Limit High) NoteLimitL (Note Limit Low) VelLimitH (Velocity Limit High) VelLimitL (Velocity Limit Low) [SF4] PORTA (Portamento) Determines the lowest and highest notes of the keyboard range for each Part. Each Part will only sound for notes played within its specified range. Settings: C -2~G8 n If you specify the highest note first and the lowest note second, for example “C5 to C4,” then the note range covered will be “C-2 to C4” and “C5 to G8.” n You can set the note by pressing the keyboard while holding the [INFORMATION] button. Determines the minimum and maximum values of the velocity range within which each Part will respond. Each Part will only sound for notes played within its specified velocity range. Settings: 1~127 n If you specify the maximum value first and the minimum value second, for example “93 to 34,” then the velocity range covered will be “1 to 34” and “93 to 127.” Determines the Portamento parameters for each Part. Portamento is used to create a smooth transition in pitch from the first note played on the keyboard to the next. Determines whether Portamento is on or off. Switch Settings: off, on Determines the pitch transition time. Higher values mean longer transition times. Time Settings: 0 ~127 Determines the Portamento mode. Mode Settings: fingr (fingered), full (full time) fingr (fingered) ......... Portamento is only applied when you play legato (playing the next note before releasing the previous one). full (full time)............. Portamento is always applied. n The Mode setting is not available for the Plug-in Part. n These Portamento parameters above are not available for the Part to which the Drum Voice is assigned. 216 Owner’s Manual Performance Edit mode Part Edit [SF5] OTHER PB (Pitch Bend) Upper, PB (Pitch Bend) Lower These two parameters are available for Parts 1 - 4 to which the internal Normal Voices are assigned. These determine the pitch change range (in semitones) of the Pitch Bend wheel for the Part’s Voice. For example, a Lower setting of -12 would result in the pitch being lowered up to a maximum of one octave (12 semitones) when the Pitch Bend wheel is moved downwards. Similarly, setting the Upper parameter to +12 would result in a maximum pitch rise of one octave when the wheel is moved upwards. Settings: -48 ~0 ~+24 PB (Pitch Bend) Range This parameter is available for Parts 1 - 4 to which the internal Drum Voices are assigned and Plug-in Parts 1 - 3. This determines the pitch change range (in semitones) of the Pitch Bend wheel. Unlike the Pitch Bend setting for Parts 1 - 4 to which the internal Normal Voices are assigned described above, the Upper and Lower ranges of the Drum Voice Parts and Plug-in Parts cannot be set independently. Settings: -24 ~ 0 ~ +24 VelSensDpt (Velocity Sensitivity Depth) Determines the degree to which the resulting volume of the tone generator responds to your playing strength. The higher the value, the more the volume changes in response to your playing strength (as shown at right). When Offset (below) is set to 64: Depth = 127 127 Depth = 64 Settings: 0 ~ 127 Actual resulting velocity (affecting the tone generator) Depth = 32 Depth = 0 0 127 Velocity with which you play a note VelSensOfst (Velocity Sensitivity Offset) Determines the amount by which played velocities are adjusted for the actual resulting velocity effect. This lets you raise or lower all velocities by the same amount — allowing you to automatically compensate for playing too strongly or too softly. Settings: 0 ~ 127 When Depth (above) = 64 and Offset = 32 127 127 When Depth (above) = 64 and Offset = 96 When Depth (above) = 64 and Offset = 64 127 0 64 127 0 64 127 Velocity with which you play a note 0 64 Reference Performance Mode Actual resulting velocity (affecting the tone generator) 127 [F2] OUTPUT [SF1] VOL/PAN (Volume/Pan) Volume Determines the volume for each Part, giving you detailed control over the level balance among the Parts. Settings: 0~127 Pan Determines the stereo pan position for each Part. Settings: L63 (far left) ~ C (center) ~ R63 (far right) VoiceELPan (Voice Element Pan) Determines whether the individual pan settings for each Voice (made via [VOICE] → [EDIT] → Element selection → [F4] AMP → [SF1] LVL/PAN → Pan) are applied or not. When this is set to “off,” the basic pan position for the selected Part is set to center. Settings: on, off n This parameter is not available for the Plug-in Parts. [SF2] EF SEND (Effect Send) RevSend (Reverb Send) From this display you can set the Send Level and Dry Level sent to the System Effects for each Part. For details about the Effect connection in the Performance mode, see page 179. Determines the send level for the Reverb effect of the selected Part, giving you detailed control over the Reverb balance among the Parts. Settings: 0~127 ChoSend (Chorus Send) Determines the send level for the Chorus effect of the selected Part, giving you detailed control over the Chorus balance among the Parts. Settings: 0~127 Dry Level Determines the level of the unprocessed (dry) sound of the selected Part, letting you control the overall effect balance among the Parts. Settings: 0~127 Owner’s Manual 217 Performance Edit mode Part Edit [SF3] SELECT (Output Select) OutputSel (Output Select) From this display you can assign individual Parts to sound from independent output connectors (jacks). Determines the specific output(s) for the individual Part. You can assign each individual Part’s Voice to be output from a specific hardware output jack on the rear panel. Settings: See page 31. InsEF (Insertion Effect) Determines whether the Insertion effects are applied to individual Parts or not. Settings: on, off [F3] EQ (Equalizer) From this display you can adjust the EQ settings for each Part. Note that two different display types listed below are provided and you can switch between them by pressing the [SF5] button. Each display type features the same settings in a different format; use the type you feel most comfortable with. • Display showing four Parts • Display showing all parameters for one Part Keep in mind that since all the available parameters cannot be simultaneously displayed in the four-Part display, you will need to use the cursor controls to scroll the display in order to see and set the other parameters. For details about the Effect connection including the EQ in the Performance mode, see page 179. n This display is not available for the Plug-in Part. LowFreq (Low Frequency) Determines the center frequency of the low EQ band that is attenuated/boosted. Settings: 50.1 ~ 2.00K LowGain (Low Gain) Determines the amount of boost or attenuation applied to the low EQ band. Settings: -32 ~ +32 MidFreq (Middle Frequency) Determines the center frequency of the middle EQ band that is attenuated/boosted. Settings: 139.7 ~ 10.1K MidGain (Middle Gain) Determines the amount of boost or attenuation applied to the middle EQ band. Settings: -32 ~ +32 MidReso (Middle Resonance) Determines the resonance applied to the center frequency of the middle EQ band. Settings: 0 ~ 31 HighFreq (High Frequency) Determines the center frequency of the high EQ band that is attenuated/boosted. Settings: 503.8 ~ 14.0K HighGain (High Gain) Determines the amount of boost or attenuation applied to the high EQ band. Settings: -32 ~ +32 Reference Performance Mode [F4] TONE You can set parameters related to the pitch and tone for each Part. Keep in mind that the settings made here are applied as offsets to the Voice Edit settings. [SF1] TUNE Determines the pitch (key transpose) setting for each Part in semitones. NoteShift Settings: -24 ~ +24 Determines the fine tuning for each Part. Detune Settings: -12.8Hz ~+12.7Hz [SF2] FILTER Determines the cutoff frequency for each Part. This parameter is available for the LPF when the filter used by the Part is a combination type of LPF and HPF. Cutoff Settings: -64 ~ 0 ~ +63 Determines the amount of filter resonance or emphasis of the Cutoff Frequency for each Part. The setting here attenuates/boosts the resonance applied to the element of the Voice assigned to each Part. Resonance Settings: -64 ~ 0 ~ +63 Determines the Filter Envelope Generator depth (amount of cutoff frequency) for each Part. FEGDepth Settings: -64 ~ 0 ~ +63 n The FEG Depth setting is not available for the Plug-in Parts. n For details about Filter, see page 161. [SF3] FEG (Filter Envelope Generator) Attack (Attack Time) Decay (Decay Time) Sustain (Sustain Level) Release (Release Level) 218 Owner’s Manual From this display you can set the FEG (Filter Envelope Generator) parameters for each Part. n The FEG settings are not available for Plug-in Parts. Determines each parameter of the FEG for each Part. For details about FEG, see page 161. Settings: -64 ~ 0 ~ +63 Performance Job mode [SF4] AEG (Amplitude Envelope Generator) Attack (Attack Time) Decay (Decay Time) Sustain (Sustain Level) From this display you can set the AEG (Amplitude Envelope Generator) parameters for each Part. Determines each parameter of the AEG for each Part. Please note that Sustain Level is not available for the Plug-in Part. For details about AEG, see . Settings: -64 ~ 0 ~ +63 Release (Release Level) [F5] RCV SW (Receive Switch) From this display you can set how each individual Part responds to various MIDI data, such as Control Change and Program Change messages. When the relevant parameter is set to “on,” the corresponding Part responds to the appropriate MIDI data. Note that two different display types listed below are provided and you can switch between them by pressing the [SF5] button. Each display type features the same settings in a different format; use the type you feel most comfortable with. • Display showing four Parts • Display showing all parameters for one Part Keep in mind that since all the available parameters cannot be simultaneously displayed in the four-Part display, you will need to use the cursor controls to scroll the display in order to see and set the other parameters. Settings: See below. Parameters marked with * are not available for the Plug-in Part. CtrlChange (Control Change) Indicates all the Control Change messages. PB (Pitch Bend) MIDI messages generated by using the Pitch Bend Wheel. MW (Modulation Wheel) MIDI messages generated by using the Modulation Wheel. RB (Ribbon Controller)* MIDI messages generated by using the Ribbon Controller. ChAT (Channel After Touch) MIDI messages generated by pressing and holding the note on the keyboard. FC1 (Foot Controller 1)* MIDI messages generated by using the optional Foot Controller connected to the rear panel. Sus (Sustain) MIDI messages generated by using the optional Footswitch connected to the SUSTAIN jack on the rear panel. FS (Footswitch)* MIDI messages generated by using the optional Footswitch connected to the ASSIGNABLE jack on the rear panel. AS1 (Assign1)*, AS2 (Assign2)* MIDI messages generated by using the ASSIGN1 and ASSIGN2 Knobs with both the [PAN/SEND] and [TONE] lamps turned on. BC (Breath Controller)* MIDI messages generated by using the optional Breath Controller connected to the BREATH jack on the rear panel. Exp (Expression) MIDI messages generated by using the optional Foot Controller connected to the rear panel. Performance Job mode Reference Performance Mode FC2 (Foot Controller 2)* [PERFORM] → Performance selection → [JOB] The Performance Job mode features several basic operations, such as Initialize and Copy. After setting parameters as required from the selected display, press the [ENTER] button to execute the Job. n Among the Audio Parts shown in the Job display, Audio 1 indicates the A/D Input Part. When the optional AIEB2 has been installed to this synthesizer, Audio 2 indicates the AIEB2 Input Part. When the optional mLAN16E has been installed, Audio 2, 3, 4, and 5 indicate the mLAN Input Parts. [F1] INIT (Initialize) This function lets you reset (initialize) all Performance parameters to their default settings. It also allows you to selectively initialize certain parameters, such as Common settings, settings for each Part, and so on — very useful when creating a completely new Performance from scratch. Type of parameter to be initialized All (all settings for the selected Performance are initialized) Common (Common parameter settings for the selected Performance are initialized) Part 1 - 4, PLG 1 - 3 (Plug-in Part 1 - 3), Audio 1 - 5 [F2] RECALL (Edit Recall) If you are editing a Performance and select a different Performance without storing your edited one, all the edits you’ve made will be erased. If this happens, you can use Edit Recall to restore the Performance with your latest edits intact. Owner’s Manual 219 Performance Store mode [F3] COPY From this display you can copy Part parameter settings from any Performance including the currently edited (but not yet stored) one to a particular Part of the Performance you are editing. This is useful if you are creating a Performance and wish to use some parameter settings from another Performance. Source Performance/Part Data type of Destination Performance (currently selected Performance)/Part Source Performance/Part Determines the Performance and Part to be copied. You can specify “Current” (the Performance you are editing but have not yet stored) as a Source Performance. Type: Part 1 - 4, PartP1 - P3 (Plug-in Part 1 - 3), PartA1 - A5 (Audio Part 1 - 5) Data type of Destination Performance (currently selected Performance)/Part Determines the Part of the destination Performance. Type: Part 1 - 4, PartP1 - P3, PartA1 - A5, Arp, Effect (Reverb, Chorus) n If you choose Arp (Arpeggio) or Effect, the Arpeggio data or Effect settings for the Voice assigned to the source Part will be copied. [F4] BULK (Bulk Dump) This function lets you send all your edited parameter settings for the currently selected Performance to a computer or another MIDI instrument for data archiving. For details, see page 185. n In order to execute Bulk Dump, you’ll need to set the correct MIDI Device Number, with the following operation: [UTILITY] → [F5] MIDI → [SF1] CH → DeviceNo. Performance Store mode [PERFORM] → Performance selection → [STORE] This function lets you store your edited Performance to User memory (Flash ROM). For details, refer to page 91 in the Quick Guide section. Reference Performance Mode 220 Owner’s Manual Song Play mode Song mode ■ Creating Songs — basic procedure Songs consist of the following three types of data: • MIDI sequence data (created in the Song Record mode, Song Edit mode, and Song Job mode) • Setup data (created in the Song Play mode) • Mixing data (created in the Song Mixing mode/Mixing Edit mode and stored in the Song Mixing Store mode) After creating the data in these modes described above, store the Mixing settings in the Song Mixing Store mode to archive it as Song data and save the entire Song to the SmartMedia/USB storage device in the File mode. n Non-note MIDI events (such as Voice number, volume, pan, and effect send level) which are necessary at the start of a Song are not recorded as MIDI sequence data, but are stored instead as Mixing data. CAUTION Because Song data (MIDI sequence data, Setup data, and Mixing data) is recorded to DRAM (page 187), it will be lost when turning the power off. Make sure to save any Song data created via the Record, Edit, Job, and Mixing setting to the SmartMedia/USB storage device in the File mode before turning the power off. For details on saving Song data, see page 132. [SONG] → Song selection Song Play mode [F1] PLAY See page 55. Loc1 (Location1), Loc2 (Location 2) Indicates the measure number to which the Song playback can be jumped by using the Location feature (page 58). Trans (Transpose) Determines the key transpose setting for the entire Song, and can be adjusted in semitones. Settings: -36 ~ +36 n If Transpose is applied to a Drum Voice, the results may not be musically appropriate. To ensure proper playback of a Drum Voice, set the Note Shift parameter for the Drum Voice Part to an appropriate value ([SONG] → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → Part selection → [F4] TONE → [SF1] TUNE → NoteShift). MEAS (Measure) [SF1] ARP1 (Arpeggio 1) - [SF5] ARP5 (Arpeggio 5) Indicates the current measure number and beat for the current Song. During playback, this indication changes automatically according to the Song playback. You can input the desired measure number directly by using the Number Input window called up via the [INFORMATION] button. You can register the desired Arpeggio types to these buttons and call them up any time during your keyboard performance. Refer to page 105 in the Quick Guide section. Reference Song Mode [F2] GROOVE (Grid Groove) The Grid Groove function makes it possible to adjust the pitch, timing, length, and velocity of notes in a specified track via a 1-measure 16th-note grid to create “grooves” that would not be possible with precise sequencer-like programming. The Grid Groove function affects Song playback without actually changing the sequence data. – 0 + NOTE OFST (Note Offset) CLOCK SFT (Clock Shift) GATE OFST (Gate Time Offset) VELO OFST (Velocity Offset) NOTE OFST (Note Offset) Raises or lowers the pitch of the note(s) on the selected grid in semitones. Settings: -99 ~ +99 CLOCK SFT (Clock Shift) Shifts the timing of the note(s) on the selected grid forward or back ward in clock increments. Settings: -120 ~ +120 GATE OFST (Gate time Offset) Lengthens or shortens the note(s) on the selected grid in clock increments. Settings: -120 ~ +120 VELO OFST (Velocity Offset) Increases or decreases the velocity of the note(s) on the selected grid. Settings: -127 ~ +127 [F3] TRACK [SF1] CHANNEL OUT CH (Output Channel) From this display you can set the MIDI output channel/port for each of the sixteen tracks of the corresponding internal/external tone generator. Sets up the MIDI output channel for each track. Tracks set to “Off” will not sound. Settings: off, 01 ~ 16 n In the Song/Pattern mode, the MIDI message created by playing the keyboard/knobs/wheels is sent to the tone generator block or the external MIDI instruments via the MIDI output channel of the currently selected track. Owner’s Manual 221 Song Record mode Song Record Standby mode Determines the MIDI transmission port for the corresponding track. Playback data of tracks set to off is output without Port signal via MIDI. When using the internal tone generator block, the Port setting here is available for the tracks assigned to the Plug-in Parts 1-3 (when the single Plug-in Board has been installed) and Multi Plug-in Parts 17-32 (when the PLG100-XG has been installed) are assigned. Tracks using the internal tone generator parts of this synthesizer are automatically fixed to Port 1. PORT Settings: off, 1 ~ 3 n Port data can be output only through the USB terminal. No port data is transmitted through the MIDI OUT terminal, even if the corresponding track is set to a specific port number. [SF2] OUT SW (Output Switch) Determines whether playback data is transmitted to the internal tone generator block or not. INT SW (Internal Switch) Settings: on, off Determines whether playback data is output to the external MIDI tone generator via MIDI or not. EXT SW (External Switch) Settings: on, off [SF3] TR LOOP (Track Loop) From this display you can determine whether the data in the selected track loops or not in playback. Using Loop can be an effective way to repeat short patterns and phrases throughout the Song. For details, see page 238. Settings: off, on [F5] PHRASE Source Phrase Specify the destination track and measure of the current selected song. If sample data is included in the original Phrase and you want to copy all of the data, make sure to checkmark this box. You can copy Pattern track data (Phrase) to a Song track. You can also copy preset phrases that are not assigned to the Pattern track by using the Patch function (page 241). For details, refer to page 113 in the Quick Guide section. After completing the settings, press the [ENTER] button to execute Copy Phrase. [F6] CHAIN This function allows Songs to be “chained” together for automatic sequential playback. For details, refer to the Quick Guide on page 59. skip..................Skips past (ignores) the selected chain number and continues playback from the next chain number. stop .................Stops Song chain playback at that chain number. You can restart the Song chain playback from the next chain number by pressing the [F] (Play) button. end...................Indicates the end mark of the Song chain data. Reference Song Mode [SONG] → Song selection → [I] (Record) Song Record mode Song Record Standby mode [F1] SETUP Type (Recording Type) Determines the recording method. For details on each method, refer to page 168 in the Basic Structure section. Settings: When the RecTrack is set to any of 1-16: replace, overdub, punch, step When the RecTrack is set to tempo: replace, punch, step When the RecTrack is set to scene: replace, punch When the RecTrack is set to multi: replace, overdub, punch n When “punch” is selected, “Punch-in measure: beat” and “Punch-out measure: beat” appear in the display and should be set. If you’ve set the Locate 1 and 2 points (Loc1, Loc2; see page 58), the punch-in/out points can be set with a single button press. Move the cursor to the punch-in/out value, and notice that a “COPYLOC” menu item appears. Press the [SF1] COPYLOC button, and the punch-in/out settings are automatically assigned to the existing Locate points. n When “step” is selected, you should specify the event type to be entered. This parameter is available when the Recording Type is set to something other than “step.” Record quantize aligns the timing of notes automatically, as you record. You can set this parameter also by using the Note Type selection window called up via the [INFORMATION] button. For details, see page 49. Quantize Settings: off, 60 (32nd note), 80 (16th note triplet), 120 (16th note), 160 (8th note triplet), 240 (8th note), 320 (1/4 note triplet), 480 (1/4 note) 222 Owner’s Manual Song Record mode Event Song Record Standby mode This parameter is available when the Recording Type is set to “step.” This lets you specify the event type to be entered. Settings: note, p.bend (pitch bend), CC#000~#119 (Control Change) RecTrack Determines the track to be recorded. Pressing the [F6] button lets you switch between Single Track recording and All Track recording. Settings: tempo, scene, 1~16, multi (Tempo) Determines the Song tempo. Settings: 001.0 ~300.0 Meas (Measure) Determines the measure from which Song recording will be started. [F2] VOICE In this display you can set the voice related parameters for the recording track. The settings here affect the Part for which the receive channel (set in the Mixing mode) matches the transmit (output) channel of the recording track. Voice Volume Determines the voice used in the recording track. When the cursor is located here, you can select a voice by using the BANK, GROUP, NUMBER buttons and the Category Search function (page 62). You can also select a Sample Voice obtained via the Sampling function. Determines the volume of the recording track. Settings: 0 ~ 127 Pan Determines the stereo pan position of the recording track. Settings: L63 (Left) ~ C (Center) ~ R63 (Right) InsEF (Insertion Effect Part Switch) (Tempo) Determines whether the Insertion effects are applied to the recording track or not. Settings: on, off Determines the Song tempo. Settings: 001.0 ~300.0 Meas (Measure) Determines the measure from which Song recording will be started. [F3] ARP (Arpeggio) From this display you can set parameters related to the Arpeggio of the recording track. Bank, Ctgr (Category), Type These three parameters determine the Arpeggio Type. The three-letter prefix number before the Type name indicates the number within the selected Category. VelLimit (Velocity Limit) Determines the lowest and highest velocity which can trigger the Arpeggio playback. The Arpeggio plays when you play notes at velocities within this range. Settings: Refer to the separate Data List. Hold Reference Song Mode Settings: 1 ~ 127 Determines whether the Arpeggio playback is “held” or not. When this is set to “on,” the Arpeggio cycles automatically, even if you release your fingers from the keys, and it continues to cycle until the next key is pressed. Settings: sync-off, off, on n About sync-off, see page 191. PartSw (Part Switch) Determines whether Arpeggio is on or off for the tone generator Part corresponding to the recording track. Settings: off, on Meas (Measure) [SF1] ARP1 (Arpeggio 1) - [SF5] ARP5 (Arpeggio 5) Determines the measure from which Song recording will be started. This parameter is same as the Meas parameter in the [F1] SETUP display. You can register the desired Arpeggio types to these buttons and call them up any time during your keyboard performance. Refer to page 123 in the Quick Guide section. [F4] RECARP (Record Arpeggio) RecArp (Record Arpeggio) Determines whether the sequence data played by Arpeggio is recorded to the Song track or not. When this is set to on, the played sequence data is recorded. Settings: off, on OutputSwitch Determines whether the sequence data played by Arpeggio during recording is output via MIDI or not. When this is set to on, the played sequence data by Arpeggio during recording is output via MIDI. Settings: off, on TransmitCh (Transmit Channel) Determines the MIDI transmit channel of the Arpeggio playback during recording. Settings: 1 ~ 16, KbdCh [F5] CLICK Pressing the [F5] button lets you turn the click sound (metronome) on/off for recording. Owner’s Manual 223 Song Record mode During Song Recording Step Recording [F6] ALL TR (All Track)/1TR (1 track) Pressing the [F6] button lets you switch between Single Track recording and All Track recording. During Song Recording [SONG] → Song selection → [I] (Record) → [F] (Play) Realtime Recording Refer to page 118 in the Quick Guide section. Step Recording Examples of Step Recording are described on page 238. [F1] SETUP Pointer indicating the current note position. Beat Graph Beat Graph This is the display in which notes are “placed” during step recording. When the meter is 4/4, the display is divided into four beats (one measure). Each diamond-shaped marker in the display represents one 32nd beat (each 1/4 note division is divided into eight 32nd beats). For example, if the following rhythmic pattern “ ” is entered in 4/4 time, a display like the one shown above right will appear. Pointer Determines the data-entry position. The triangular pointer above the beat graph indicates the data-entry position. To move the pointer right or left, use the [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons or the data dial. Value When the Event to be entered ([F1] SETUP → Event) is set to “note,” this value specifies the velocity with which the note will be entered. Reference Song Mode Settings: When the Event is set to “note”: 1 ~ 127, kbd, rnd1 ~ rnd4 When the Event is set to “p.bend”: -8192 ~ +8191 When the Event is set to “CC (Control Change 001 - 119)”: 000 ~ 127 When the Event is set to “tempo” with the RecTrack = tempo: 001 ~ 300 n You can select “kbd” (keyboard) and “rnd1” - “rnd4” (random1 - 4) as well as the values 1 - 127 when the Event to be entered is set to “note.” When “kbd” is selected, the actual playing strength will be entered as the velocity value. When one of the random settings is selected, a random velocity value will be entered. The “size” of the current recording step time for the next note to be entered. This determines to what position the pointer will advance after a note has been entered. StepTime Settings: 0001 - 0059, 32nd note, 16th note triplet, 16th note, 8th note triplet, 8th note, 1/4 note triplet, 1/4 note, half note, whole note Sets the gate time to produce slurs, staccato notes, etc. “Gate time” refers to the actual length of time the note sounds. For the same 1/4 note, for example, a long gate time will produce a slur while a short gate time will produce a staccato effect. Gate time is indicated as a percent value of the step time. A setting of 50% produces a staccato sound, values between about 80% and 90% produce normal note length, and a value of 99% will produce a slur. GateTime Settings: 1% ~ 200% [F3] REST Press [F3] to enter a rest as long as the specified step time. The point will move ahead to the next data-entry position. Rests do not appear on the display. n There is no actual data representing rests in the MIDI sequencer. When a “rest” is entered the pointer simply moves ahead to the next data-entry position, effectively leaving a rest. [F4] TIE 1 When the [F4] button is pressed to enter a tie, the preceding note is lengthened to the full step time. For example, in the phrase shown at left, note 1 is entered with 1/4 note step time. If the step time is then changed to an 8th note and [F4] is pressed, note 2 is entered. Dotted notes can also be entered using the TIE function. To produce a dotted 1/4 note, for example, set the step time to an 8th note, enter a note and then press [F4] twice. 2 n This display is available only when the Event to be entered is set to “note.” 224 Owner’s Manual Song Edit mode [F5] DELETE Press this to actually delete the note events at the current cursor position. [F6] BAK DEL (Back Delete) Moves the pointer backward by one step and deletes all notes at that location. n Mistakenly entered notes can be erased by pressing [F6] immediately after they are entered (before changing the step time value). [SONG] → Song selection → [EDIT] Song Edit mode This mode gives you comprehensive, detailed controls for editing the MIDI events of individual Song tracks. MIDI events are messages (such as note on/off, note number, program change number, etc.) that make up the data of a recorded Song. [F1] CHANGE Shows the Event List of the selected Song track. For information on how to edit the Event List, see page 124. [F2] VIEW FLT (View Filter) The Event View Filter lets you select the event types that appear on the Event List display ([F1] CHANGE display). For example, if you wish to edit only note events, place a checkmark in the box next to “Note” so that only the note events appear in the Event List display. Settings: Note, PitchBend, ProgramChange, ControlChange, Ch.AfterTouch, PolyAfterTouch, RPN (Registered Parameter Number), NRPN (Non Registered Parameter Number), Exclusive [F5] CLR ALL (Clear All) Press the [F5] button to remove all checkmarks at once. [F6] SET ALL Press the [F6] button to set checkmarks into all boxes. [F4] TR SEL (Track Select) You can switch between the display for 1 - 16 tracks, SCN (Scene) track, and TMP (Tempo) track by pressing this button. [F5] INSERT When the cursor is located at the desired position in the [F1] CHANGE display (Event List), pressing this button calls up the display for inserting new MIDI events in the Song mode or Pattern mode. Note This is the most common and prevalent type of data — the individual notes of a Song. FNOTE (Note name) Determines the note name or the specific keyboard pitch of the note. FGATE (Gate time) Reference Song Mode Settings: C -2 ~ G8 Determines the length of time that a note actually sounds in beats and clocks. Settings: 00:001 ~ 999:479 n On this synthesizer, one clock is 1/480th of a quarter note. FVELO (Velocity) Determines how strongly the selected note sounds. Settings: 1 ~ 127 PitchBend These are the events that define continuous changes in pitch and these events are generated by Pitch Bend Wheel operation. FDATA Determines the Pitch Bend data. Settings: -8192 ~ +8191 ProgramChange These events determine the Voice for the selected track. FBANK Determines the Voice bank. Settings: 000 ~ 127, *** n Bank select MSB and LSB are actually part of the Control Change set of messages (below). However, since they apply specifically to Voice selection, they are grouped and described here. FPC NO (Program Change Number) Determines the specific Voice (from the bank selected by MSB and LSB above). Settings: 000 ~ 127 n For a complete list of the available voice banks and numbers, refer to the Voice List in the separate Data List booklet. Owner’s Manual 225 Song Job mode These events control the sound and certain response characteristics of the voice, and are usually generated/ recorded by moving a controller (such as a modulation wheel, knob, slider or foot controller). ControlChange FCTRL NO (Control Number) Determines the Control Change number. Settings: 000 ~ 127 n For details on the specific functions assigned to each of the numbers, see page 182. FDATA See page 182. Settings: 000 ~ 127 Ch.AfterTouch (Channel After Touch) This event is generated when pressure is applied to a key after the note is played. FDATA This represents the amount of pressure applied to the key. Settings: 000 ~127 PolyAfterTouch (Polyphonic Aftertouch) FNOTE (Note name) This event is generated when pressure is applied to a key after the note is played. Unlike Channel Aftertouch above, this is recorded and applied independently for each key pressed. Determines the key to which aftertouch is applied. Settings: C -2 ~ G8 FDATA This represents the amount of pressure applied to the key. Settings: 000 ~ 127 RPN (Registered Parameter Number) FMSB-LSB This event changes parameter values for each tone generator Part. This event is used to set Part settings such as Pitch Bend Sensitivity or Tuning. See page 183. Settings: 000 ~ 127 FDATA (Data Entry MSB-LSB) See page 182. Settings: 000 ~ 127, *** n Normally three types of control change data are sent: RPN MSB (101), RPN LSB (100), and Data Entry MSB (6). In this synthesizer, Data Entry LSB (38) is added to this and the resulting group of control change events is handled as one in this display. NRPN (Non Registered Parameter Number) These events are used to change the parameter values for each tone generator Part. They can be is used to edit sounds via MIDI, allowing you to edit filter or EG settings, or adjust the pitch or level for each instrument of a drum voice. FMSB-LSB See page 183. Settings: 000 ~ 127 FDATA (Data Entry MSB-LSB) See page 182. Settings: 000 ~ 127, *** Reference Song Mode n Normally three types of control change data are sent: NRPN MSB (99), NRPN LSB (98), and Data Entry MSB (6). In this synthesizer, this group of control change events is handled as one in this display. For a complete list of the available RPN and NRPN numbers and their corresponding controls, refer to the MIDI Data Format in the separate Data List booklet. Exclusive (System Exclusive) FDATA (HEX) A type of MIDI message used to exchange data unique to a specific model or type of device. Unlike other MIDI events, these events differ depending on the manufacturer/device, and are incompatible among different devices. See page 184. Settings: 00 ~7F, F7 (Data must be entered in hexadecimal format.) Song Job mode [SONG] → Song selection → [JOB] The Song Job mode contains a comprehensive set of editing tools and data transform functions you can use to change the sound of the Song. It also includes a variety of convenient operations, such as copying or erasing data. After setting parameters as required from the selected display, press the [ENTER] button to execute the Job. CAUTION An “Executing...” message is shown when it takes a short amount of time to execute the Job. Never attempt to turn off the power while an “Executing...” message is shown. Turning the power off in this state results in loss of all user data. [F1] UNDO/REDO The Undo Job cancels the changes you made in your most recent recording session, editing session, or Job, restoring the data to its previous state. This allows you to recover from accidental data loss. Redo is available only after using Undo, and lets you restore the changes you made before undoing them. CAUTION Undo/Redo does not work with Sample Voice and Mixing Voice operations. [F2] NOTE (Note data Job) 226 Owner’s Manual Song Job mode n Before executing the Note data Job, make sure that you specify the track (01~16, all) and range (measure : beat : clock) to which the Job is applied. 01: Quantize Quantization is the process of adjusting the timing of note events by moving them closer to the nearest exact beat. You can use this feature, for example, to improve the timing of a performance recorded in real time. TR (Track) 001 : 1 : 000 - 999 : 4 : 479 Determines the track (01-16, all) and range of measures/beats/clocks over which the Job is applied. Quantize (Resolution) Determines to what beats the note data in the specified track will be aligned. Settings: 32nd note, 16th note triplet, 16th note, 8th note triplet, 8th note, 1/4 note triplet, 1/4 note, 16th note + 16th note triplet, 8th note + 8th note triplet Strength The Strength value sets the “strength” by which note events are pulled toward the nearest quantize beats. A setting of 100% produces exact timing. A setting of 0% results in no quantization. Settings: 000%~100% SwingRate Delays notes on even-numbered beats (backbeats) to produce a swing feel. For example, if the meter is 4/4 and the quantize value is quarter notes, the 2nd and 4th beats of the measure will be delayed. When a triplet quantize value is used, the last note of each triplet is delayed. When the quantize value is even-numbered, beats will be delayed. Settings: See below. If the quantize value is 1/4 note, 8th note, 16th note, 32nd note: 50%~75% A setting of 100% is equivalent to twice the length of the specified quantize value. A setting of 50% produces exact timing and therefore no swing feel. Settings above 51% increase the amount of swing, with 75% being equivalent to a dotted-note delay. If the quantize value is 1/4 note triplet, 8th note triplet, 16th note triplet: 66%~83% A setting of 100% is equivalent to three times the length of the specified quantize value. A setting of 66% produces exact timing and therefore no swing feel. Settings above 67% increase the amount of swing, with 83% being equivalent to a sextuplet delay. If the quantize value is 8th note + 8th note triplet, 16th note + 16th note triplet: 50%~66% A setting of 100% is equivalent to twice the length of a 8th note or 16th note. A setting of 50% produces exact timing and therefore no swing feel. Settings above 51% increase the amount of swing, with 66% being equivalent to a triplet delay. n If a swing value other than 100% results in notes being positioned after other non-swing notes, the latter notes are delayed accordingly. GateTime Determines the gate time (the length of time a note sounds) of the even-numbered backbeat notes to enhance the swing feel. When a triplet quantize value is used, the gate time of the last note of each triplet is adjusted. When the quantize value is 8th note + 8th note triplet or 16th note + 16th note triplet, the gate time of the evennumbered 8th note or 16th note beats will be adjusted. A setting of 100% leaves the original gate time unchanged. If an adjusted gate time value is less than 1, the value is rounded off to 1. Settings: 000%~200% This Job alters the velocity values of the specified range of notes, letting you selectively boost or cut the volume of those notes. Velocity changes are calculated as follows: Adjusted velocity = (original velocity x Rate) + Offset If the result is 0 or less, the value is set to 1. If the result is higher than 127, the value is set to 127. TR (Track) 001 : 1 : 000 - 999 : 4 : 479 Determines the track (01-16, all) and range of measures/beats/clocks over which the Job is applied. SetAll Sets the velocities of all target notes to the same fixed value (1 to 127). When set to “off” the Set All parameter has no effect. When set to a value other than “off” the Rate and Offset parameters are unavailable and appear as “***” on the display. Reference Song Mode 02: Modify Velocity Settings: off (0), 001~127 Rate Determines the percentage by which the target notes will be shifted from their original velocities. Settings below 100% reduce the velocities, and settings above 100% increase the velocities proportionately. When the Set All parameter is not “OFF” this parameter appears as “***” and cannot be changed. Settings: 000% ~ 200%, *** Offset Adds a fixed value to the Rate-adjusted velocity values. A setting of 0 produces no change. Settings below 0 reduce the velocities, and settings above 0 increase the velocities. When the Set All parameter is not “OFF” this parameter appears as “***” and cannot be changed. Settings: -127 ~ +127, *** 03: Modify Gate Time This Job alters the gate times of the specified range of notes. Gate time changes are calculated as follows: Adjusted gate time = (original gate time x Rate) + Offset If the result is 0 or less, the value is rounded off to 1. TR (Track) 001 : 1 : 000 - 999 : 4 : 479 Determines the track (01-16, all) and range of measures/beats/clocks over which the Job is applied. SetAll Sets the gate times of all target notes to the same fixed value. When set to “off” the Set All parameter has no effect. When set to a value other than “off,” the Rate and Offset parameters are unavailable and appear as “***” on the display. Settings: off (0), 0001 ~ 9999 Owner’s Manual 227 Song Job mode Determines the percentage by which the gate time of the target notes will be changed. Settings below 100% shorten the notes, and settings above 100% lengthen the notes proportionately. When the Set All parameter (above) is set to something other than “off,” this parameter appears as “***” and cannot be changed. Rate Settings: 000% ~ 200%, *** Adds a fixed value to the Rate-adjusted gate time values. A setting of 0 produces no change. Settings below 0 shorten the gate time, and settings above 0 lengthen the gate time. When the Set All parameter (above) is set to something other than “off,” this parameter appears as “***” and cannot be changed. Offset Settings: -9999 ~ +9999, *** 04: Crescendo This Job lets you create a crescendo or decrescendo over the specified range of notes. (Crescendo is a gradual increase in volume, and decrescendo is a gradual decrease.) TR (Track) 001 : 1 : 000 - 999 : 4 : 479 Determines the track (01-16, all) and range of measures/beats/clocks over which the Job is applied. VelocityRange Determines the intensity of the crescendo or decrescendo. The velocity values of the notes in the specified range are gradually increased or decreased starting at the first note in the range. The velocity of the last note in the range becomes the original velocity of the note plus the Velocity Range value. If the resultant velocity is outside the 1 ~ 127 range, it is set to 1 or 127 accordingly. Settings greater than 0 produce a crescendo, and settings less than 0 produce a decrescendo. A setting of 0 produces no effect. Settings: -127 ~ +127 05: Transpose Transpose lets you change the key or pitch of the notes in the specified range. TR (Track) 001 : 1 : 000 - 999 : 4 : 479 Determines the track (01-16, all) and range of measures/beats/clocks over which the Job is applied. Note Determines the range of note pitches over which the Job is applied. You can also set the Note directly from the Keyboard, by holding down the [INFORMATION] button and pressing the desired key (page 53). Settings: C-2 ~ G8 Transposes notes in the specified range (in semitones). A setting of +12 transposes up one octave, while a setting of -12 transposes down an octave. A setting of 0 produces no change. Transpose Settings: -127 ~ +127 06: Glide The Glide Job replaces all notes following the first note in the specified range with pitch bend data, producing smooth glides from note to note. This is ideal for producing guitar-like slide or note-bending effects. TR (Track) 001 : 1 : 000 - 999 : 4 : 479 Determines the track (01-16, all) and range of measures/beats/clocks over which the Job is applied. GlideTime Determines the length of the glide. Higher values produce a longer glide between notes. Settings: 000~100 PBRange (Pitch Bend Range) Determines the maximum pitch bend range to be applied by the Glide Job (in semitones). Reference Song Mode Settings: 01~24 07: Create Roll This Job creates a series of repeated notes (like a drum roll) in the specified range with the specified continuous changes in clock step and velocity. This is ideal for creating fast staccato rolls and special stuttering effects. TR (Track) 001 : 1 : 000 - 999 : 4 : 479 Determines the track (01-16) and range of measures/beats/clocks over which the Job is applied. StartStep (Starting Step) EndStep (Ending Step) Determines the size of the step (i.e. the number of clocks) between each note in the roll. Both the starting and ending clock values can be specified, making it easy to create rolls in which the step size varies during the roll. Settings: StartStep: 001~999, EndStep: 001~999 Determines the specific note (or instrument in Drum voices) for the roll effect. You can also set the note directly from the Keyboard, by holding down the [INFORMATION] button and pressing the desired key (page 53). Note Settings: C-2~G8 StartVelo (Starting Velocity) EndVelo (Ending Velocity) Determines the velocity of the notes in the roll. Both the starting and ending velocity values can be specified, making it easy to create rolls in which the velocity increases or decreases. This lets you create rolls that gradually increase or decrease in volume (crescendo/decrescendo) — a technique often used in dance music. Settings: StartVelo: 001~127, EndVelo: 001~127 08: Sort Chord 228 This Job sorts chord events (simultaneous note events) by order of pitch. The sort affects the order of the notes in the Event List display (page 124), but does not change the timing of the notes. When used to pre-process chords before using the Separate Chord Job (below), Chord Sort can be used to simulate the “stroke” or strumming sound of guitars and similar instruments. Owner’s Manual Song Job mode TR (Track) 001 : 1 : 000 - 999 : 4 : 479 Determines the track (01-16, all) and range of measures/beats/clocks over which the Job is applied. Type Determines how the chord note data is sorted. Settings: up, down, up&down, down&up up .................... The notes are sorted in ascending order. After executing this Job with this setting, execute the Separate Chord Job to create a guitar-like upstroke strum. down................ The notes are sorted in descending order. After executing this Job with this setting, execute the Separate Chord Job to create a guitar-like downstroke strum. up&down ......... Sorts chord notes on downbeats in ascending order and chord notes on upbeats in descending order, based on the Grid setting (below). down&up ......... Sorts chord notes on downbeats in descending order and chord notes on upbeats in ascending order, based on the Grid setting (below). Determines the type of note that serves as the basis for the Chord Sort Job. Grid Settings: 32nd note, 16th note triplet, 16th note, 8th note triplet, 8th note, 1/4 note triplet, 1/4 note 09: Separate Chord This Job slightly separates notes in chords within the specified range, inserting a specified number of clocks between each note. Use this Job after the Chord Sort Job above, to create guitar-like upstroke or downstroke effects. TR (Track) 001 : 1 : 000 - 999 : 4 : 479 Determines the track (01-16, all) and range of measures/beats/clocks over which the Job is applied. Clock Determines the number of clock cycles inserted between adjacent chord notes. Settings: 000 ~999 n Note that there are 480 clock cycles per quarter note. n It is not possible to separate chords so that they cross the next chord or they overstep the range (set above). [F3] EVENT (Event Job) n Before executing the Event Job, make sure that you specify the track and range (measure : beat : clock) to which the Job is applied. Please note that the track to be specified varies depending on the Job. 01: Shift Clock This Job shifts all data events in the specified range forward or backward by the specified number of clocks. TR (Track) 001 : 1 : 000 - 999 : 4 : 479 Determines the track (01-16, TMP, SCN, all) and range of measures/beats/clocks over which the Job is applied. Clock Determines the amount by which the data will be delayed or advanced in measures, beats, and clocks. Settings: 000:0:000 ~ 999:3:479 Direction Determines the direction in which the data will be shifted. ADVANCE moves the data toward the beginning of the sequence, while DELAY shifts the data toward the end of the sequence. Settings: Advance, Delay Source track and range in measures, beats, and clocks Destination track and the top (measure, beat, and clock) of the destination. NumberOfTimes This Job copies all data from a specified source range to a specified destination location. Execute this Job after setting: • Source track (01-16, TMP, SCN, all) • Source range (measure : beat : clock) • Destination track (01-16, TMP, SCN, all) • Destination range (measure : beat : clock) • Top measure of destination • Count (number of times data is to be copied) Reference Song Mode 02: Copy Event Determines the number of times the data is copied. Settings: 01 ~ 99 CAUTION When Copy Event is executed, any data already existing at the Destination location will be overwritten. 03: Erase Event This Job clears all specified events from the specified range, effectively producing a segment of silence. TR (Track) 001 : 1 : 000 - 999 : 4 : 479 Determines the track (01-16, TMP, SCN, all) and range of measures/beats/clocks over which the Job is applied. Event Type Determines the event type to be erased. All events are cleared when ALL is selected. Individual control change numbers can be specified when erasing control change events. Settings: When TR is set to 01~16: Note (Note events), PC (Program Change), PB (Pitch Bend), CC (Control Change)*, CAT (Channel Aftertouch), PAT (Polyphonic Aftertouch), EXC (System Exclusive), All (all events) When TR is set to “TMP” (Tempo): TMP (tempo) When TR is set to “SCN” (Scene): SceneMemory (Scene change information), TrackMute (Track mute setting change information) * You can also specify the CC No. (Control Change number). n Keep in mind that applying this Job to a track with Sample Voices erases the events that trigger the samples, but it does not erase the actual samples themselves. Owner’s Manual 229 Song Job mode 04: Extract Event This Job moves all instances of specified event data from a specified range of a track to the same range in a different track. TR (Track) 001 : 1 : 000 - 999 : 4 : 479 Determines the track (01 - 16) and range of measures/beats/clocks over which the Job is applied. EventType Selects the event type to be extracted. Specific note and control change numbers can also be specified as required. Settings: Note, PC (Program Change), PB (Pitch Bend), CC (Control Change), CAT (Channel Aftertouch), PAT (Polyphonic Aftertouch), EXC (System Exclusive) → TR Determines the destination track (01 - 16). 05: Create Continuous Data This Job creates continuous pitch bend or control change data over the specified range. TR (Track) 001 : 1 : 000 - 999 : 4 : 479 Determines the track (01 - 16, TMP, all) and range of measures/beats/clocks over which the Job is applied. EventType Determines the event type to be created. Settings: PB (Pitch Bend), CC (Control Change)*, CAT (Channel Aftertouch), EXC (System Exclusive), TMP (Tempo) * You can also specify the CC No. (Control Change number). Data (Data Range) Determines the lower and upper limits for the data range to be created. The left value is the lower limit, and the right value is the upper limit. Settings: When Event Type is set to PB: -8192~+8191 When Event Type is set to TMP: 1.0~300.0 When Event Type is set to other: 0~127 Determines the number of clocks to be inserted between each created event. Clock Settings: 001~999 Determines the “curve” of the continuous data. Refer to the graph for approximate curve shapes. Curve Curve = +16 Curve = 0 (linear) Curve = -16 Settings: -16 ~+16 End point Start point This distance specified by Clock Determines the number of times the data creation is to be repeated. For example, if data is created in the range M001:1:000 ~ M003:1:000 and this parameter is set to 03, the same data will be created at M003:1:000 ~ M005:1:000 and M005:1:000 ~ M007:1:000. This Job lets you insert continuous volume or filter cutoff variations to create tremolo or wah effects. NumberOfTimes Settings: 01~99 Reference Song Mode 06: Thin Out This Job thins out the specified type of continuous data in the specified range — allowing you to free up memory space for other data or further recording. TR (Track) 001 : 1 : 000 - 999 : 4 : 479 Determines the track (01 - 16, TMP, all) and range of measures/beats/clocks over which the Job is applied. EventType Determines the event type to be thinned. Settings: PB (Pitch Bend), CC (Control Change)*, CAT (Channel Aftertouch), PAT (Polyphonic Aftertouch), TMP (Tempo) * You can also specify the CC No. (Control Change number). n The Thin Out Job will not work on continuous data that has a clock interval of greater than 60 clocks per event. 07: Modify Control Data This Job lets you change the values of a specified type of control change data — pitch bend, control change, aftertouch, etc. — in the specified range. Data changes are calculated as follows: Modified value = (original value x Rate) + Offset. The modified value cannot exceed the minimum/maximum limits of the parameter. Any result lower than the minimum is set to the minimum; any result higher than the maximum is set to the maximum. TR (Track) 001 : 1 : 000 - 999 : 4 : 479 Determines the track (01 - 16, TMP, all) and range of measures/beats/clocks over which the Job is applied. EventType Determines the event type to be modified. Settings: PB (Pitch Bend), CC (Control Change)*, CAT (Channel Aftertouch), PAT (Polyphonic Aftertouch), TMP (Tempo) * You can also specify the CC No. (Control Change number). Sets all target events to the same fixed value. When set to “off,” the Set All parameter has no effect. When set to a value other than “off,” the Rate and Offset parameters are unavailable and appear as “***” on the display. SetAll Settings: off, 000 ~127 (-8192 ~ +8191 for pitch bend, 0.1 ~ 300.0 for tempo) Determines the percentage by which the target events will be shifted from their original values. When the Set All parameter (above) is set to something other than “off,” this parameter appears as “***” and cannot be changed. Rate Settings: 000% ~ 200%, *** Adds a fixed value to the Rate-adjusted event values. When the Set All parameter (above) is set to something other than “off,” this parameter appears as “***” and cannot be changed. Offset Settings: -127~127 (-8192 ~ +8191 for pitch bend, -275 ~ +275 for tempo), *** 230 Owner’s Manual Song Job mode 08: Beat Stretch This Job performs time-expansion or compression over the selected range. Keep in mind that this operation affects all event timing, note step times, and note gate times. TR (Track) 001 : 1 : 000 - 999 : 4 : 479 Determines the track (01 - 16, all) and range of measures/beats/clocks over which the Job is applied. Rate Determines the amount of time expansion or compression as a percentage. Settings higher than 100% produce expansion, and settings below 100% produce compression. Settings: 025%~400% n Only MIDI data is affected by this Job. Sample Voices are not expanded or compressed. However, for samples recorded using the Slice+Seq feature, the Beat Stretch Job expands or compresses the timing of the note data, step times, and gate times that control playback of the sliced samples. The sample data itself is not affected. [F4] MEAS (Measure Job) 01: Create Measure This Job creates empty measures at the specified location in all tracks. Meter (time signature) of measures to be inserted Number of measures to be inserted Source data 001 – 004 005 – 016 8 measures inserted at measure 5 001 – 004 Insertion point (measure number) Meter of measures to be inserted 005 – 012 013 – 024 The inserted 8 measures Determines the meter or time signature of the measures to be created. You may find it convenient to use this parameter when you need to create a Song that incorporates meter changes. Settings: 1/16~16/16, 1/8~16/8, 1/4~8/4 Determines the insert point (measure number) at which the newly created blank measures will be inserted. Insertion point (Measure number) Settings: 001~999 Number of measures to be inserted Settings: 01~99 n n Determines the number of empty measures to be created and inserted. When empty measures are inserted, measure and meter data following the insert point are moved forward accordingly. If the insert point is set after the last measure containing data, only the meter data at that point is set without actually inserting the measures. 02: Delete Measure This Job deletes the specified measures. Measure and meter data following the deleted measures are moved backward accordingly. Source data 005 – 012 013 – 024 Reference Song Mode 001 – 004 Measures M006 – M012 deleted 001 – 004 005 – 016 Delete range Delete Range Settings: 001~999 n Keep in mind that applying this Job to a range of measures with Sample Voices erases the events that trigger the samples, but it does not erase the actual samples themselves. [F5] TRACK (Track Job) 01: Copy Track Source Song and Track Destination Song and Track This Job copies all data from a specified source track to the specified destination track. CAUTION The copy operation overwrites any data previously existing on the destination track. CAUTION Undo/Redo cannot be used to undo/ redo a sample voice copy operation. Data Type to be copied Data Type to be copied Determines the type(s) of data to be copied. Select the desired type by checkmarking the appropriate box. Settings: Seq Event (all events in the track), Grid Groove (for the selected track), Mix Part Param (all Mixing Part parameters), Sample (all samples used by the track) n When there is no memory available in the destination Song for sample voice data, an alert message will appear on the display and the Sample Voice data will not be copied. If this occurs, use Sample Job 02 “Delete” (page 256) to delete any unused samples, then attempt the operation again. Owner’s Manual 231 Song Job mode 02: Exchange Track Target tracks for the Exchange operation (01-16) This Job exchanges or “swaps” the specified type of data between two specified tracks in the current Song. Data Type to be exchanged Data Type to be exchanged Determines the type(s) of data to be exchanged. Select the desired type by checkmarking the appropriate box. Settings: Seq Event (all events in the track), Grid Groove (for the selected track), Mix Part Param (all Mixing Part parameters) 03: Mix Track This Job mixes all data from two selected tracks (“A” and “B”), and places the result in track B. One useful application for this would be to free up the data in track A, letting you record new data to it. Track A (01-16) Track B (01-16) Track A Track B Mix Track Track B Target tracks for the Mix operation 04: Clear Track Settings: 01~16 n Keep in mind that applying this Job to tracks with Sample Voices does not mix the Sample Voices. Track for which data will be cleared (01-16, TMP, SCN, all) This Job deletes all data of the selected type from the selected track, or from all tracks. CAUTION Undo/Redo cannot be used to undo/redo a Clear operation for tracks that contain sample data. Data to be cleared Data type to be cleared Determines the type(s) of data to be cleared. Select the desired type by checkmarking the appropriate box. Settings: Seq Event (all events in the track), Grid Groove (for the selected track), Mix Part Param (all Mixing Part parameters), Sample (all samples used by the track) 05: Normalize Play Effect This Job rewrites the data in the selected track so that it incorporates the current Grid Groove settings. Determines the Song track to which the Job is applied. TR (Track) Reference Song Mode Settings: 01~16, all 06: Divide Drum Track Separates the note events in a drum performance assigned to a specified track, and places the notes corresponding to different drum instruments in separate tracks (tracks 1 through 8). Determines the Song track to which the Job is applied. TR (Track) Settings: 01 ~ 16 07: Put Track To Arp This Job copies data in the specified measures of a track for creating Arpeggio data. For details, refer to page 130 in the Quick Guide section. [F6] SONG (Song Job) 01: Copy Song Source Song This Job copies all data from a selected source Song to a selected destination Song. The Sample Voice and Mixing Voice used by the source Song are also copied. CAUTION This Job overwrites any data already existing in the destination Song. Destination Song 232 Owner’s Manual Song Mixing mode 02: Split Song To Pattern Source Song range (in measures) This Job allows you to copy a part of the current Song – all 16 tracks over a specific range of measures – to a specific Pattern, letting you use Song data to create a Pattern. CAUTION This Job overwrites any data already existing in the destination Pattern and section. Destination Pattern and section Copy Sample When this box is checkmarked, sample voices assigned to each track in the source Song are copied to the split destination Pattern as Sample Voices and are assigned to the corresponding tracks in that Pattern. This checkbox has no effect if no Sample Voices are assigned to the tracks in the source Song. 03: Clear Song This Job deletes all data from the selected Song or all Songs, including the Sample Voices and Mixing Voices. 04: Song Name This Job lets you assign a name to the selected Song. See “Basic Operation” on page 53. Song Mixing mode [SONG] → Song selection → [MIXING] In this mode, you can set up mixing data for your songs, and set various parameters for the tone generator parts — including the desired Voice, as well as its level, pan, EQ, effect and other settings. Pressing the [F6] button can switch between the display for the Parts 1 - 16 to which the internal Voices are assigned, the display for Multi Plugin Parts (17 - 32) to which the PLG100-XG voices are assigned and the display for Plug-in Parts (PLG1 - 3) to which the Plug-in Voices of the single part Plug-in board are assigned. Song Mixing parameters are not actually part of the Song sequence data in each track, but rather are settings for the tone generator, as it is played back by the Song data. As such, the Song Mixing parameter settings are not recorded to the Song tracks. CAUTION Parameter settings made in the Song Mixing mode and Song Mixing Edit mode should be stored to internal memory (DRAM) as part of the Song data. In addition, make sure to save the entire Song data (including the Mixing settings) to the SmartMedia/USB storage device, since the data in DRAM is stored only temporarily (page 187). n Parameter settings in the Song Mixing mode and Song Mixing Edit mode can be stored as a template to internal Flash ROM, as well as being stored as part of a Song. See page 104 for details. [F1] VOL/PAN n Reference Song Mode From this display you can set the Pan and Volume for each Part (track). You can select a Part by moving the cursor or by using the NUMBER buttons while the [TRACK SELECT] indicator is on (page 58). PAN Determines the stereo pan position for each part. Settings: L63 (far left)~C (center)~R63 (far right) VOLUME Determines the volume for each Part, allowing you to set the optimum level balance of all the Parts. Settings: 0~127 n You can also adjust the Volume by using the Control Sliders. See page 130 for details. [F2] VOICE From this display you can select a voice for each Part. Sample Voices and Mixing Voices can also be selected. n n You can select a Part by moving the cursor or by using the NUMBER buttons while the [TRACK SELECT] indicator is on (page 58). The Category Search function can also be used to select Voices here, except for Voices of the Multipart Plug-in Parts 17 - 32 (when the PLG100-XG has been installed), Sample Voices, and Mixing Voices. [F3] EFFECT Pressing the [F3] EFFECT button in the Song Mixing mode calls up the [SONG] → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F6] EFFECT display in the Song Mixing Edit mode. From this display, you can set the effect related parameters for the current Song. See page 235 for details. [F4] EF SEND (Effect Send) From this display you can make basic effect settings for each Part — Send Level for the System Effect (Reverb, Chorus) as well as the Dry Level for Insertion Effects. n For information on the effect connections in the Song mode, see page 180. [F5] VCE ED (Mixing Voice Edit) Press the [F5] VCE ED button in the Song Mixing mode to enter the Mixing Voice Edit mode. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the original display in the Song Mixing mode. For details, see page 105. Normal Voices can be edited specifically for use with the Song/Pattern modes, creating a dedicated “Mixing Voice.” Refer to “Mixing Voice mode” on page 249 for details. Owner’s Manual 233 Song Mixing Edit mode Common Edit [F6] 17-32/PLG1-3/1-16 You can switch between the displays for three types of parts by pressing this button. 1 - 16 are Parts of the internal tone generator, 17 - 32 are Multi Plug-in Parts of the optionally installed PLG100-XG, and PLG1 - 3 are Plug-in Parts of the optionally installed Single Part Plug-in board. n n Please note that the Multi-Part Plug-in Part (17~32) settings apply not to one individual Song but to all 64 Songs. If you wish to edit more detailed Mixing parameters, you can enter the Song Mixing Edit mode by pressing the [EDIT] button. Song Mixing Edit mode [SONG] → Song selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] This mode provides more detailed Mixing parameters than in the Song Mixing mode. Keep in mind that Song Mixing parameters are not actually part of the Song sequence data in each track, but rather are settings for the tone generator, as it is played back by the Song data. As such, the Song Mixing parameter settings are not recorded to the Song tracks. CAUTION Parameter settings made in the Song Mixing mode and Song Mixing Edit mode should be stored to internal memory (DRAM) as part of the Song data. In addition, make sure to save the entire Song data (including the Mixing settings) to the SmartMedia/USB storage device, since the data in DRAM is stored only temporarily (page 187). n Parameter settings in the Song Mixing mode and Song Mixing Edit mode can be stored as a template to internal Flash ROM, as well as being stored as part of a Song. See page 104 for details. [SONG] → Song selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] Common Edit Use Common Edit to edit the settings common to all Parts. n Common Edit operations cannot be performed on the Multi-part Plug-in Parts 17 - 32. [F1] GENERAL [SF1] MEQ OFS (Master EQ Offset) The Song Mixing parameters feature global EQ settings for all Parts of the selected Song (see “MEQ,” below). The settings made here in this display are applied as offsets to those MEQ settings. Settings: -64~+63 [SF5] OTHER Determines the function for the assignable Knobs (1 - 4). Pressing any of the [KNOB CONTROL FUNCTION] buttons on the panel sets the desired function row, which is automatically stored to memory with the currently selected Song. KnobAssign Reference Song Mode Settings: pan, tone, assign, partEQ, MEF, arpFx Assign A, Assign B, Assign 1, Assign 2 This lets you directly set and memorize the value for each Assign Knob (A, B, 1, and 2), from the Knob itself. Simply tweak the knob to the desired setting. Settings: -64 ~ 0 ~+63 [F2] MEQ/MEF (Master EQ/Master Effect) [SF1] MEQ (Master EQ) From this display you can apply five-band equalization to all Parts of the selected Song. The parameters are the same as in Performance Common Edit. See page 214. [SF2] MEF (Master Effect) From this display you can set parameters related to the Master Effect (page 177). The parameters are the same as in Performance Common Edit. See page 214. [F3] ARP (Arpeggio) [SF1] TYPE The basic parameters (e.g., type) of the Arpeggio are provided in this display. This is the same as in Normal Voice Common Edit (page 191), except that the Tempo setting is not available here, since the Arpeggio plays according to the Song tempo. [SF2] LIMIT Same as in Normal Voice Common Edit. See page 191. [SF3] PLAY FX (Play Effect) Same as in Normal Voice Common Edit. See page 192. [SF4] OUT CH (Output Channel) Same as in Performance Common Edit. See page 214. [F4] CTL ASN (Controller Assign) From this display, you can assign Control Change numbers to the hardware controllers of the instrument (such as the Knobs), for each Song. The parameters are the same as in Performance Common Edit. See page 214. 234 Owner’s Manual Song Mixing Edit mode Part Edit [F5] AUDIO IN From this display, you can set parameters related to the Audio Input Part in the Song mode. The parameters are the same as in Performance Common Edit. See page 214. [F6] EFFECT n For information on the effect connections in the Song mode, see page 180. [SF1] CONNECT This display gives you comprehensive control over the effect connections. The parameters are the same as in Performance Common Edit. See page 215. [SF2] INS SW (Insertion Switch) The Insertion Effects can be applied to up to eight parts. This display lets you set to which parts the Insertion Effects are applied. [SF3] PLG EF (Plug-in Effect) This display lets you set the Plug-in Insertion Effect related parameters when the Effect Plug-in Board PLG100-VH has been installed. For details on each parameter, refer to the Owner’s Manual included with the PLG100-VH. [SF4] REVERB The number of parameters and values available differs depending on the currently selected effect type. For more information, see the Effect Type List in the separate Data List booklet. [SF5] CHORUS Part Edit [SONG] → Song selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → Part selection These parameters are for editing the individual Parts that make up a Song Mixing. Press the [F6] button to switch among the various Part displays — the display for Parts 1 - 16 to which the internal Voices are assigned, the display for Multi-part Plug-in Parts (17 - 32) to which the PLG100-XG voices are assigned, and the display for Plug-in Parts (PLG1 - 3) to which the Plug-in Voices of the single part Plug-in board are assigned. n Please note that the Multi-Part Plug-in Part (17~32) settings apply not to one individual Song but to all 64 Songs. [F1] VOICE [SF1] VOICE Determines the Voice for each Part. For details, see page 102. n When the cursor is located on the Bank, you can select a Voice (with the exception of Sample Voices, Mixing Voices, and Voices of Multi-part Plug-in Parts) via the method explained in the Quick Guide on page 102. [SF2] MODE Mono/Poly Determines the playback method of the Voice for each Part — monophonic (single notes only) or polyphonic (multiple notes). ArpSwitch (Arpeggio Switch) Reference Song Mode Settings: mono, poly n This parameter is not available for the part to which a Drum Voice is assigned. Determines whether Arpeggio is on or off for the currently selected Part. Settings: on, off n Arpeggio Switch is applied to only one Part at the same time. It cannot be applied to multiple Parts simultaneously. n Arpeggio Switch is not available for the Multi-part Plug-in Parts 17~32. ReceiveCh (Receive Channel) Determines the MIDI receive channel for the selected Part. Since MIDI data may be coming from many channels at once, you should set this to match the particular channel over which the desired controlling data is being sent. Settings: 01~16, off [SF3] LIMIT From this display you can determine the note range and velocity range for each Part. The parameters are the same as in Performance Part Edit. See page 216. [SF4] PORTA (Portamento) Determines the Portamento parameters for each Part. The parameters are the same as in Performance Part Edit. See page 216. n [SF5] OTHER The Mode setting is not available for the Multi Plug-in parts 17-32 and the Plug-in parts 1-3. Same as in Performance Part Edit. See page 217. n For Multi-part Plug-in Parts 17 - 32 and Plug-in Parts 1 - 3, Pitch Bend Upper and Lower become a single parameter: PB Range. Upper and Lower values cannot be set independently for Plug-in Parts. See page 164. [F2] OUTPUT [SF1] VOL/PAN (Volume/Pan) Same as in Performance Part Edit. See page 217. n The Voice Element Pan setting is not available for Multi-part Plug-in Parts 17 - 32 and Plug-in Parts 1 - 3. [SF2] EF SEND (Effect Send) Same as in Performance Part Edit. See page 217. [SF3] SELECT (Output Select) From this display you can assign individual Parts to sound from independent output connectors (jacks). The parameters are the same as in Performance Part Edit. See page 218. Owner’s Manual 235 Song Mixing Job mode [F3] EQ (Equalizer) From this display you can set parameters related to the Part EQ (page 178). The parameters are the same as in Performance Part Edit. See page 218. [F4] TONE [SF1] TUNE Same as in Performance Part Edit. See page 218. [SF2] FILTER Same as in Performance Part Edit. See page 218. n [SF3] FEG (Filter Envelope Generator) From this display you can set the FEG (Filter Envelope Generator) parameters for each Part. The parameters offset the same parameters of the assigned Voice set in the Voice (Element) Edit mode (page 198). The parameters are the same as in Performance Part Edit. See page 218. n [SF4] AEG (Amplitude Envelope Generator) The FEG Depth setting is not available for Multi-part Plug-in Parts 17 - 32 and Plug-in Parts 1 - 3. The FEG setting is not available for Multi-part Plug-in Parts 17-32, Plug-in Parts 1-3, or Parts to which Drum Voices have been assigned. From this display you can set the AEG (Amplitude Envelope Generator) parameters for each Part. The parameters offset the same parameters of the assigned Voice set in the Voice (Element) Edit mode (page 200). The parameters are the same as in Performance Part Edit. See page 219. n n The Sustain setting is not available for Multi-part Plug-in Parts 17 - 32, Plug-in Parts 1 - 3 or Parts to which Drum Voices have been assigned. The Release setting is not available for Parts to which Drum Voices have been assigned. [F5] RCV SW (Receive Switch) From this display you can set how each individual Part responds to various MIDI data, such as Control Change and Program Change messages. When the relevant parameter is set to “on,” the corresponding Part responds to the appropriate MIDI data. Note that two different display types listed below are provided and you can switch between them by pressing the [SF5] button. Each display type features the same settings in a different format; use the type you feel most comfortable with. • Display showing four Parts This display type shows the Receive Switch status for four Parts at a time. Set the desired Part on or off, for the corresponding MIDI data type. To view and edit another set of four Parts, press the appropriate [NUMBER] button, [1] to [16]. Keep in mind that since all the available parameters cannot be simultaneously displayed, you will need to use the cursor controls to scroll the display in order to see and set the other parameters. • Display showing all parameters for one Part This display type shows all of the Receive Switch settings for a single selected Part. Set the desired MIDI data type on or off for the selected Part. To select other Parts, use the NUMBER [1] - [16] buttons (making sure that the [TRACK SELECT] button is on). Song Mixing Job mode [SONG] → Song selection → [MIXING] → [JOB] Reference Song Mode The Song Mixing Job mode features several basic operations, such as Initialize and Copy. After setting parameters as required from the selected display, press the [ENTER] button to execute the Job. n Among the Audio Parts shown in the Song Mixing Job display, Audio Part 1 indicates the A/D Input Part. When the optional AIEB2 has been installed, Audio Part 2 indicates the AIEB2 Input Part. When the optional mLAN16E has been installed, Audio Parts 2 - 5 are mLAN Input Parts. [F1] INIT (Initialize) This function lets you reset (initialize) all Song Mixing parameters to their default settings. It also allows you to selectively initialize certain parameters, such as Common settings, settings for each Part, and so on — very useful when creating a completely new Song Mixing program from scratch. Type of parameter to be initialized: All, Common (Common parameter settings for the selected Song Mixing), Part 1~16, PLG 1~3, Audio1~5 [F2] RECALL (Edit Recall) If you are editing a Song Mixing program and select a different program without storing your edited one, all the edits you’ve made will be erased. If this happens, you can use Edit Recall to restore the Song Mixing program with your latest edits intact. [F3] COPY Source song and part From this display you can copy Part parameter settings from any Song Mixing program including the currently edited (but not yet stored) one to a particular Part of the Song Mixing program you are editing. This would come in handy when you want to use some settings from another program. Destination song (current song) and part Select a Song and Part to be copied. You can specify “Current” (the Song Mixing program you are editing and have not yet stored) as a Source Song. Source song Part to be copied (Type): Part 1~16, PartP1~P3 (Plug-in Part 1~3), PartA1~A5 (Audio Part 1~5) 236 Owner’s Manual Song Mixing Store mode Data type of Destination Song (current selected song) Set the Part of the destination Song. Destination part (Type): Part 1~16, PartP1~P3 (Plug-in Part 1~3), PartA1~A5 (Audio Part 1~5), Arp, Effect (Reverb, Chorus) n If you choose Arp (Arpeggio) or Effect, the Arpeggio data or Effect settings for the Voice assigned to the source Part will be copied. [F4] BULK (Bulk Dump) This function lets you send all your edited parameter settings for the currently selected Song Mixing program to a computer or another MIDI instrument for data archiving. n In order to execute Bulk Dump, you’ll need to set the correct MIDI Device Number. For details, see page 264. [F5] PF COPY (Performance Copy) This convenient operation lets you copy certain settings of the four Parts in a performance to the Song Mixing program currently being edited. This would come in handy when a certain performance has settings that you want to use in your Song Mixing program. Use this Job to simply copy the settings you need. The MIDI receive channel settings are set to match the basic channel settings (page 263). When the basic channel is set to “omni,” the receive channel here is set to 1. To select a group of parameters for copying, checkmark the appropriate box in the display. [F6] TEMPLATE This convenient function lets you store your mixing settings as a template — allowing you to easily set up similar mixes by calling up the proper template, then tweaking it as needed. Templates are saved as part of the System data (page 186) in the Utility mode and not as data for each song. After inputting a Template number and name, press the [SF5] PUT button to save the current setting to the Template. After selecting the desired Template number, press the [SF4] GET button to call it up. Pressing the [SF4] button lets you call up the template selected at left. Template Number Template Name Press the [SF5] button lets you save the current setting to the template selected at left. Song Mixing Store mode n Since the Mixing templates are stored as System data (page 186) in Flash ROM, the data is maintained even when the power is turned off. The Mixing template stored here can be called up in the Pattern mode as a Pattern Mixing program. [SONG] → Song selection → [STORE] Reference Song Mode This function lets you store your edited Song Mixing program to User memory (DRAM). For details, refer to page 131 in the Quick Guide section. Owner’s Manual 237 Supplementary information ■ Supplementary information Song Track Loop — setting example [SONG] → [F3] TRACK → [SF3] TR LOOP (Track Loop) Step Recording — examples page 222 In the example below, a 40-measure song has been recorded and Track 1 is set to play back normally over the 40 measures. Track 2 has been set to loop, and will repeat until the [J] (Stop) button is pressed. Playback Track1 (40 measures of data) [SONG] or [PATTERN] → [I] (Record) → [F1] SETUP → Type = step page 224 This section explains how to step-record notes, using three specific examples. n The explanations here using the Song mode display apply also to the Pattern mode. • Example 1 Track2 (40 measures of data) The four-measure data is repeated ten times When Track Loop has been set to on, you can specify the range to be looped. (Only the end point can be set; the start point of looped playback is fixed to the beginning of the song.) 1 Set the parameters as illustrated below. Press the Record button to call up the display below. Here, we'll set the Step Time to (480) so that quarter notes will be entered, and set the GateTime to 100% to have the notes play in legato. CAUTION Please note that changing the Track Loop from off to on will delete the data of the area that is not looped. 1 Press [F1] to call up the Song Play display. Here, change the change the current measure — this will be used for the last measure of the loop. 2 Play the keys C, D, E, F, G, A, B and C in order. In this example, set to “004.” Reference Song Mode 2 3 4 Call up the [F3] TRACK → [SF3] TR LOOP display and move the cursor to the track to be looped. Set the selected track to on by using the [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons or the data dial. (The display prompts you for confirmation.) Press the [INC/YES] button. The Loop is set to on and the data after the loop end is deleted Each time you press a key and release it, the pointer moves forward by one step and the played note is recorded. 3 Move the pointer to the top (beginning) of the song and press the [F] (Play) button to hear the note data you just recorded in steps #1 and 2. SEQ TRANSPORT If you want to restore the deleted data and return the selected track to off, press the [SF5] UNDO button. CAUTION The Undo function can only be used on the last Track Loop operation. If you’ve set other tracks to loop, the data of those previous tracks cannot be recovered. 238 Owner’s Manual LOCATE 1 2 Supplementary information • Example 2 (Using the Tie function) 4 Follow the instructions below to enter the next dotted half note. 1 Change this to a quarter note (480). 1 2 Press and release A. Set the parameters as illustrated below. Since the first note is a half note, set the StepTime to the half-note icon (a value of 960), and set the GateTime to 80%, since you don't want the notes to play in legato. 3 Press the [F4] button twice to expand the quarter note to a dotted half note. 2 Enter the first note F. 5 1 Press and release F. 2 Change this to an eighth note (240). 3 Press the [F4] button to tie the two F notes (half note and 8th note). 6 Enter the last quarter note by pressing and releasing F. Move the pointer to the top (beginning) of the song and press the [F] (Play) button to hear the note data you just recorded in steps #1 - 5. LOCATE 3 1 Reference Song Mode SEQ TRANSPORT 2 Enter the next 8th notes. Keep the display settings unchanged for the remaining notes in the measure, and press/release each key one by one as shown below. Owner’s Manual 239 Supplementary information • Example 3 (Using the Rest function) 5 Enter the next 4th note C as shown below. 1 Change this value to 480, since the rest value is a quarter note. 1 Set the parameters as illustrated below. Set the StepTime to a quarter note (480) and the Gate Time to 80%. 2 Press and release C. 2 Enter the first note, F. Press and release A. 3 Enter the next 8th rest as shown below. 1 Change this to an eighth note (240), since we’ll be entering an eighth-note rest. 6 Enter the next 8th rest as you did in step #3 above. 7 Enter the last 8th note, F. Press and release F. 2 Enter the selected rest value (eighth note) by pressing the [F3] button Reference Song Mode 8 4 Enter the next 8th note A. Move the pointer to the top (beginning) of the song and press the [F] (Play) button to hear the note data you just recorded in steps #1 - #7. SEQ TRANSPORT Press and release A. LOCATE 1 2 TIP Entering a chord In Step recording, you can also enter chords. Press and hold down each note of the chord in succession, then release them all together to record them as a chord. Keep in mind that notes are not actually recorded to a track until they are released. 240 Owner’s Manual Pattern Play mode Pattern mode ■ Creating Patterns — basic procedure Patterns consist of the following three types of data: • MIDI sequence data (created in the Pattern Record mode, Pattern Edit mode, and Pattern Job mode) • Setup data (created in the Pattern Play mode) • Mixing data (created in the Pattern Mixing mode/Mixing Edit mode and stored in the Pattern Mixing Store mode) After creating the data in these modes described above, store the Mixing settings in the Pattern Mixing Store mode to archive it as Pattern data and save the entire Pattern to the SmartMedia/USB storage device in the File mode. n Non-note MIDI events (such as Voice number, volume, pan, and effect send level) which are necessary at the start of a Pattern are not recorded as MIDI sequence data, but are stored instead as Mixing data. CAUTION Because Pattern data (MIDI sequence data, Setup data, and Mixing data) is recorded to DRAM (page 187), it will be lost when turning the power off. Make sure to save any Pattern data created via the Record, Edit, Job, and Mixing setting to the SmartMedia/USB storage device in the File mode before turning the power off. For details on saving Pattern data, see page 132. [PATTERN] → Pattern selection Pattern Play mode [F1] PLAY Trans (Transpose) Refer to page 56 in the Quick Guide section. Determines the key transpose setting for the Pattern, and can be adjusted in semitones. Settings: -36 ~ +36 n If Transpose is applied to a Drum Voice, the results may not be musically appropriate. To ensure proper playback of a Drum Voice, set the Note Shift parameter for the Drum Voice Part to an appropriate value ([PATTERN] → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → Part selection → [F4] TONE → [SF1] TUNE → NoteShift). MEAS (Measure) [SF1] ARP1 (Arpeggio 1) - [SF5] ARP5 (Arpeggio 5) Indicates the current measure number and beat for the current Pattern. During playback, this indication changes automatically according to the Pattern playback. You can input the desired measure number directly by using the Number Input window called up via the [INFORMATION] button. You can register the desired Arpeggio types to these buttons and call them up any time during your keyboard performance. [F2] GROOVE (Grid Groove) Same as in the Song Play mode. See page 221. [SF1] CHANNEL Same as in the Song Play mode. See page 221. [SF2] OUT SW (Output Switch) Same as in the Song Play mode. See page 222. [SF3] TR VCE (Track Voice) Determines whether the program change data contained in the phrase data is effective or not. For most purposes, this should be set to “off.” For example, if a phrase has embedded Voice changes (program change messages) but you don’t want the Voice to change in the middle of the phrase, set this to “off.” Tracks that are set to “off” here automatically play back with the Voice number assigned to the Part set in the Mixing mode. n [F4] PATCH Reference Pattern Mode [F3] TRACK The Phrase Voice embedded in the Phrase can be specified from the Voice display in the Pattern Record mode (page 243). Refer to page 113 in the Quick Guide section. From this display, you can assign a Preset phrase or a User phrase (recorded in the Pattern Record mode) to each track and create a Pattern that contains up to 16 tracks. n The Patch function allows you to use only User phrases recorded to a track of the currently selected Pattern. If you wish to use User phrases recorded to tracks of other Patterns, use the Phrase Data Copy function, selected with [SF5] button. Section Shows the current edited section. For details about how to change sections, see page 57. Meas Shows Measure : Beat for current playback location. [SF4] CLEAR This clears the Phrase assignment to the currently selected track and leaves the track empty. Owner’s Manual 241 Pattern Play mode [SF5] COPY Source Pattern number, phrase number When this box is checkmarked, Sample Voices assigned to the source phrase are copied to the destination phrase as Sample Voices, and are assigned to the corresponding tracks in the selected Pattern. The User phrases that can be assigned with the Patch function are limited to the ones contained in the currently selected Pattern. This function lets you copy phrases in another Pattern to the selected one. Press the [SF5] button to call up the display shown at left. After setting the parameters as needed, press the [ENTER] button to copy the phrase data. CAUTION Destination phrase and track of the current edited Pattern The copy operation overwrites any data previously existing in the destination phrase. After setting, press the [ENTER] button to copy the phrase. [F5] REMIX This function gives you a variety of semi-random presets for dividing the MIDI sequence data and altering the note lengths, letting you create completely new variations of a Pattern. This function is particularly effective when used on a track which contains a sample voice created by using the Sampling feature with the SLICE+SEQ sample type or samples sliced using the Sample Slice Job. Set the parameters below, then press the [ENTER] button to execute the Remix operation. You can press the Play button at this point to hear the results of the Remix. If you’re not satisfied with the results, try another Type/Variation and press [ENTER]. If you want to keep the changes, press [SF5] OK. (Undo cannot be used with Remix.) To return to the original display without altering the data, press the [SF4] CANCEL button. n Since the remixed data is stored as a new phrase and assigned to the current track, the original phrase data remains as an unassigned phrase. Determines how the data in the selected track will be divided and rearranged. The division and rearrangement rules are different for each remix type. The type is also shown graphically in the display. Type Settings: 1~16 Determines how the original MIDI sequence data will be modified. Variation Settings: Normal1~16, Reverse1~16, Break 1~16, Pitch 1~16, Roll 1~16 Normal 1~16 ....The original data is only divided and rearranged. 16 variations are provided. Reverse1~16 ...In addition to division and rearrangement, some portions of the data may be played in reverse. 16 variations are provided. Break 1~16 ......In addition to division and rearrangement, some portions of the data may be deleted to create breaks. 16 variations are provided. Pitch 1~16........In addition to division and rearrangement, some portions of the data may be pitch-shifted. 16 variations are provided. Roll 1~16..........In addition to division and rearrangement, some portions of the data may be played with a roll effect. 16 variations are provided. [F6] CHAIN Refer to page 115 in the Quick Guide section. Pattern Chain Play mode [PATTERN] → [F6] This mode lets you play the programmed section chain sequence created in the Pattern Record mode and Pattern Edit mode. The parameters are the same as in the [F1] PLAY display. Pattern Chain Record mode [PATTERN] → [F6] → [I] (Record) Recording Standby mode Recording track You can select one of the following tracks for recording. Reference Pattern Mode • patt (Pattern): Records section changes during playback • tempo: Records tempo change information during playback • scene: Records track mute settings during playback During Recording [PATTERN] → [F6] → [I] (Record) → [F] (Play) When recording the tempo track, you can change the tempo value. When recording the scene track, you can change the track mute setting. When recording the Pattern track, you can change the section. Pattern Chain Edit mode 242 [PATTERN] → [F6] → [EDIT] [F1] CHANGE The Pattern Chain Edit mode makes it possible to edit the order of the sections in a chain, as well as insert tempo, and scene/mute event data. Call up the desired track display by pressing the [F4] TR SEL button to edit the selected track. Pattern Track Edit From this display, you can edit the section changes for each measure. Move the cursor to the “Section” column for the desired measure, and enter the desired section. To set the end of the chain, enter an END mark at the appropriate measure. (For more information, see page 116.) To clear the event at the currently selected location, press the [F6] CLEAR button. Scene Track Edit You can edit the track mute change in beats. Use the [F5] INSERT and [F6] DELETE button to insert/delete the event. Tempo Track Edit You can edit the tempo change in beats. Use the [F5] INSERT and [F6] DELETE button to insert/delete the event. Owner’s Manual Pattern Record mode [F2] COPY Source range Top measure of destination Pattern Record Standby mode This display lets you copy all Pattern chain events from a specified range of measures (source) to a destination location. After specifying the source range in measures, the top measure of the destination location, and NumberOfTimes (number of times the data is copied), press the [ENTER] button to execute the Copy operation. CAUTION This operation overwrites any events already existing at the destination. [F3] SONG This function converts the Pattern chain data to Song data (standard MIDI format) and places the results in the normal Song tracks. After specifying the desired destination Song and measure number to which the converted data is to be copied, then press the [ENTER] button to execute. CAUTION This operation overwrites any data already existing at the destination range. [PATTERN] → Pattern selection → [I] (Record) Pattern Record mode Pattern Record Standby mode [F1] SETUP Type (Recording Type) Determines the recording method.For information on each method, refer to page 168 in the Basic Structure section. Settings: replace, overdub, step n Unlike in the Song Record mode, Punch recording is not available for Pattern recording. Loop Turns loop recording ON or OFF. When ON, the phrase will play repeatedly during real-time recording. This can be handy when recording drum parts (page 168), allowing you to add different instruments on each pass. When OFF recording stops after one pass through the phrase. Settings: on, off Quantize Same as in the Song Record mode. See page 222. Event Same as in the Song Record mode. See page 223. (Tempo) Determines the Pattern tempo. Settings: 001.0 ~300.0 n Unlike in Songs, Scene track and Tempo track are not available for Patterns. Determines the measure from which Pattern recording will be started. Reference Pattern Mode Meas (Measure) [F2] VOICE From this display you can set Voice-related parameters for the selected track. The settings made here affect the tone generator parts whose MIDI receive channels match the MIDI transmit channel of the song track. The Voice set here becomes the phrase Voice (page 167). Parameters are the same as in the Song Record mode. See page 223. [F3] ARP (Arpeggio) From this display you can set parameters related to the Arpeggio of the recording track. Parameters are the same as in the Song Record mode. See page 223. [F4] REC ARP (Record Arpeggio) From this display you can determine whether the sequence data played by Arpeggio is recorded to the Pattern track or not. Parameters are the same as in the Song Record mode. See page 223. [F5] CLICK Pressing the [F5] button lets you turn the click sound (metronome) on/off for recording. Owner’s Manual 243 Pattern Edit mode During Pattern Recording [PATTERN] → Pattern selection → [I] (Record) → [F] (Play) Realtime Recording Refer to page 110 in the Quick Guide section. Step Recording Examples of Step Recording are described on page 238. Parameters in the displays are the same as in the Song Record mode. See page 224. [PATTERN] → Pattern selection → [EDIT] Pattern Edit mode Same as in the Song Edit mode. See page 225. [PATTERN] → Pattern selection → [JOB] Pattern Job mode The Pattern Job mode contains a comprehensive set of editing tools and functions you can use to change the sound of the Pattern. It also includes a variety of convenient operations, such as copying or erasing data. After setting parameters as required from the selected display, press the [ENTER] button to execute the Job. CAUTION An “Executing...” message is shown when it takes a short amount of time to execute the Job. Never attempt to turn off the power while an “Executing...” message is shown. Turning the power off in this state results in loss of all user data. [F1] UNDO/REDO The Undo Job cancels the changes you made in your most recent recording session, editing session, or Job, restoring the data to its previous state. This allows you to recover from accidental data loss. Redo is available only after using Undo, and lets you restore the changes you made before undoing them. CAUTION Undo/Redo does not work with Sample Voice and Mixing Voice operations. [F2] NOTE (Note data Job) The Note data Jobs in the Pattern mode are basically same as in the Song Job mode. However, unlike in the Song Job mode, Pattern Note data Jobs are applied to the phrases (001 - 256) and a selected range in the phrase (measure : beat : clock). Reference Pattern Mode Specify the phrase and the range (in measures/beats/clocks) over which the Job is applied. 01: Quantize Same as in the Song Job mode. See page 227. 02: Modify Velocity Same as in the Song Job mode. See page 227. 03: Modify Gate Time Same as in the Song Job mode. See page 227. 04: Crescendo Same as in the Song Job mode. See page 228. 05: Transpose Same as in the Song Job mode. See page 228. 06: Glide Same as in the Song Job mode. See page 228. 07: Create Roll Same as in the Song Job mode. See page 228. 08: Sort Chord Same as in the Song Job mode. See page 228. 09: Separate Chord Same as in the Song Job mode. See page 229. [F3] EVENT (Event Job) The Event Jobs in the Pattern mode are basically same as in the Song Job mode. However, unlike in the Song Job mode, Pattern Event Jobs are applied to the phrases (001 - 256) and a selected range in the phrase (measure : beat : clock). 01: Shift Clock 244 Same as in the Song Job mode. See page 229. Owner’s Manual Pattern Job mode 02: Copy Event Same as in the Song Job mode. See page 229. 03: Erase Event Same as in the Song Job mode. See page 229. n Unlike in the Song Job mode, “Tempo,” “Scene Memory,” or “Track Mute” cannot be selected as Event Types. 04: Extract Event Same as in the Song Job mode. See page 230. 05: Create Continuous Data Same as in the Song Job mode. See page 230. n Unlike in the Song Job mode, “Tempo” cannot be selected as an Event Type. 06: Thin Out Same as in the Song Job mode. See page 230. 07: Modify Control Data Same as in the Song Job mode. See page 230. n 08: Beat Stretch Unlike in the Song Job mode, “Tempo” cannot be selected as an Event Type. Same as in the Song Job mode. See page 231. [F4] PHRASE (Phrase Job) 01: Copy Phrase Selects the Pattern and phrase to be copied. (Preset phrase also can be selected.) Specify the destination Pattern and phrase. n This Job copies a selected phrase to the designated destination phrase. After specifying the source Pattern and phrase, the destination Pattern and phrase, and setting the checkbox of Copy Sample, press the [ENTER] button to execute this Job. When the Copy Sample box is checkmarked, Sample Voices used by the source phrase are copied to the destination Pattern as Sample Voices, and are assigned to the destination phrase. This is available only when the Sample Voice is used in the source phrase. When there is no memory available in the destination Pattern for Sample Voice data, an error message will appear on the display and the Sample Voice data will not be copied. If this occurs, use Sample Job 02 “Delete” to delete any unused Sample Voices, then try again. CAUTION Any previous data in the copy destination will be overwritten. CAUTION Undo/Redo (page 244) cannot be used to undo/redo a Sample Voice copy operation. 02: Exchange Phrase This Job exchanges or “swaps” the contents of two specified phrases (“A” and “B”). n 03: Mix Phrase If this Job is applied to phrases which use Sample Voices, the Sample Voices will not be exchanged. This Job mixes all data from two selected user phrases (“A” and “B”), and places the result in phrase B. n Phrase B Phrase A Keep in mind that applying this Job to phrases with Sample Voices does not mix the Sample Voices. Mix Phrase Phrase B This Job appends one phrase (A) to the end of another (B) to create one longer phrase (B). n Phrase A If this Job is applied to phrases which use Sample Voices, the Sample Voices will not be appended. Reference Pattern Mode 04: Append Phrase Append Phrase Phrase B 05: Split Phrase This Job splits a selected phrase (A) into two separate phrases (A and B). The data before the split point is stored to the original phrase A and the data after the split point is moved and stored to another phrase B. You can also set the Meter of the phrase B after the Split Phrase Job. n n When either Pattern or Phrase is set to “off,” the split Phrase B data is erased. If this Job is applied to phrases which use Sample Voices, the Sample Voices will not be split. Phase A is divided at the Split Point Phrase A Phrase A Phrase B CAUTION The Job overwrites any data already existing in destination phrase B. Owner’s Manual 245 Pattern Job mode 06: Get Phrase From Song This Job copies a segment of sequence-track data from a Song into the designated destination phrase. After specifying the source Song/track/range of measures to be copied, the destination phrase, and setting the checkbox of Copy Sample, press the [ENTER] button to execute this Job. When the Copy Sample box is checkmarked, Sample Voices used by the source track are copied to the destination Pattern as Sample Voices, and are assigned to the destination phrase. This parameter has no effect when no Sample Voice is used by the source track. Source Song, track, and range of measures Destination phrase to be copied. n When there is no memory available in the destination Pattern for Sample Voice data, an error message will appear on the display and the Sample Voice data will not be copied. If this occurs, use Sample Job 02 “Delete” to delete any unused samples, then try again. CAUTION The Job overwrites any data already existing in the destination phrase. CAUTION Undo/Redo (page 244) cannot be used to undo/redo a Sample Voice copy operation. 07: Put Phrase To Song This Job copies a selected user phrase into a specified area of a selected song. After specifying the source phrase, destination Song/ track/top measure, and setting the Copy Sample checkbox, press the [ENTER] button to execute this Job. When the Copy Sample box is checkmarked, Sample Voices used by the source phrase are copied to the destination Song as Sample Voices, and are assigned to the destination Song track. This parameter has no effect when no Sample Voice is used by the source phrase. Source phrase n Destination Song, track, and top measures When there is no memory available in the destination Song for Sample Voice data, an error message will appear on the display and the Sample Voice data will not be copied. If this occurs, use Sample Job “Delete” to delete any unused samples, then try again. CAUTION The Job overwrites any data already existing in the destination track. CAUTION Undo/Redo (page 244) cannot be used to undo/redo a Sample Voice copy operation. 08: Clear Phrase This Job deletes all data from the selected phrase. When the Delete Sample box is checkmarked, sample data assigned to the selected phrase will be deleted. This parameter has no effect when no Sample Voice is used by the selected phrase. CAUTION Undo/Redo (page 244) cannot be used to undo/redo a Delete Sample operation. 09: Phrase Name This Job lets you assign a name (of up to eight characters) to the selected phrase. For instructions on naming, refer to page 53 in the Basic Operation section. [F5] TRACK (Track Job) 01: Copy Track This Job copies all data from a specified source track to the specified destination track. The types of data to be copied are the same as in the Song Job mode. See page 231. Source Pattern, section, and track Reference Pattern Mode Types of data to be copied 02: Exchange Track Destination Pattern, section, and track Target tracks for the Exchange operation This Job exchanges or “swaps” the specified type of data between two specified tracks in the current Pattern and section. The types of data to be exchanged are the same as in the Song Job mode. See page 232. Types of data to be exchanged 03: Clear Track Section and track from which data is to be cleared Types of data to be cleared 246 Owner’s Manual This Job deletes all data of the selected type from the selected Pattern track. The types of data to be cleared are the same as in the Song Job mode. See page 232. Pattern Job mode 04: Normalize Play Effect This Job rewrites the data in the selected track so that it incorporates the current Grid Groove settings. After specifying a track (TR 01-16) to which this Job is applied, press the [ENTER] button to execute this Job. 05: Divide Drum Track Separates the note events in a drum performance assigned to a specified track, and places the notes corresponding to different drum instruments in separate tracks (tracks 1 through 8). After specifying a track (TR 01-16) to which this Job is applied, press the [ENTER] button to execute this Job. n 06: Put Track To Arp In order to use this Job, tracks 1 - 8 must be empty. If there aren’t enough empty tracks, an error message appears. If this happens, use the Clear Track Job (page 246) to delete tracks 1 - 8, then try the Job again. This Job copies data in the specified measures of a section/track for creating Arpeggio data. For details, refer to page 130 in the Quick Guide section. [F6] PATTERN (Pattern Job) 01: Copy Pattern n Source Pattern and section Destination Pattern and section This Job copies all data from a selected source Pattern to a selected destination Pattern. After specifying the source Pattern/section, and the destination Pattern/section, as well as setting the checkboxes as necessary, press the [ENTER] button to execute this Job. If you set the source section to “all,” the destination section is also set to “all” automatically. With this status, execute this Job to copy the entire source Pattern data to the destination. Preset Phrase → User When this box is checkmarked, Preset Phrases (if included in the source Pattern) are copied to the User Phrase, which will be assigned to the destination Pattern. Duplicate User Phrase When this box is checkmarked, User Phrases (if included in the source Pattern) are copied to another User Phrase, which will be assigned to the destination Pattern. Chain When this box is checkmarked, Pattern chain data (if included in the source Pattern) is copied to the destination Pattern. 02: Append Pattern Source Pattern and section Destination Pattern and section Appends one Pattern to the end of another to create one longer Pattern with all 16 tracks. n If this job is applied to Patterns which use Sample Voices, the Sample Voices will not be appended. n If the Pattern length becomes greater than 256 measures as a result of the Append Pattern Job, an error message will be displayed and the Job will be aborted. When this box is checkmarked, the original destination Pattern data is retained in memory, along with the new appended Pattern data. If the box is not checkmarked, the original destination Pattern is erased and replaced with the newly created data. n When the KEEP ORIGINAL PHRASE checkbox is checked, this Job requires twice the number of empty user phrases as the number of tracks containing data in which to store the appended phrase data. If the required space is unavailable, an alert message will appear and the Job will be aborted. If this occurs use the Clear Phrase Job (page 246) to delete unused phrases and try again. 03: Split Pattern Source Pattern and section Destination Pattern and section Reference Pattern Mode Keep Original Phrase This Job splits a selected Pattern (all 16 tracks data) into two Patterns. After the Split Pattern operation, the part of the Pattern before the specified Split Point will remain, and the part following the Split Point will be moved to the destination Pattern. CAUTION The Job overwrites any data already existing in the destination Pattern. Split Point Determines the Split Point by setting a measure number. Keep Original Phrase When this box is checkmarked, the original Source Pattern data is retained in memory and the results of the Split Job are written to empty phrases. When this box is not checkmarked, the original Source Pattern is erased and replaced with the newly created data. Owner’s Manual 247 Pattern Mixing mode When this box is checkmarked, Sample Voices (if included in the source pattern) are copied to the destination Pattern. Sample n When the KEEP ORIGINAL PHRASE checkbox is checked, this Job requires twice the number of empty user phrases as the number of tracks containing data in which to store the appended phrase data. If the required space is unavailable, an alert message will appear and the job will be aborted. If this occurs use the Clear Phrase Job (page 246) to delete unused phrases and try again. 04: Clear Pattern This Job deletes all data from the selected Pattern, or from all Patterns. When the specific section is selected to be cleared, you can unmark the Chain box. If the Chain box is not checkmarked, the Pattern Chain data will be kept even though the Clear Pattern Job is executed. 05: Pattern Name This Job lets you assign a name to the selected Pattern. For instructions on naming, refer to page 53 in the Basic Operation section. Pattern Mixing mode [PATTERN] → Pattern selection → [MIXING] In this mode, you can set up mixing data for your patterns, and set various parameters for the tone generator parts — including the desired Voice, as well as its level, pan, EQ, effect and other settings. Pattern Mixing parameters are not actually part of the Pattern sequence data in each track, but rather are settings for the tone generator, as it is played back by the Pattern data. As such, the Pattern Mixing parameter settings are not recorded to the Pattern tracks. Mixing operations and parameters are the same as those of the Song Mixing mode. See page 236. CAUTION Parameter settings made in the Pattern Mixing mode and Pattern Mixing Edit mode should be stored to internal memory (DRAM) as part of the Pattern data. In addition, make sure to save the entire Pattern data (including the Mixing settings) to the SmartMedia/USB storage device, since the data in DRAM is stored only temporarily (page 187). n Parameter settings in the Pattern Mixing mode and Pattern Mixing Edit mode can be stored as a template to internal Flash ROM, as well as being stored as part of a Pattern. See page 104 for details. Pattern Mixing Edit mode [PATTERN] → Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [EDIT] This mode provides more detailed Mixing parameters than in the Pattern Mixing mode. Keep in mind that Pattern Mixing parameters are not actually part of the Pattern sequence data in each track, but rather are settings for the tone generator, as it is played back by the Pattern data. As such, the Pattern Mixing parameter settings are not recorded to the pattern tracks. Mixing operations and parameters are the same as those of the Song Mixing mode. See page 234. CAUTION Reference Pattern Mode Parameter settings made in the Pattern Mixing mode and Pattern Mixing Edit mode should be stored to internal memory (DRAM) as part of the Pattern data. In addition, make sure to save the entire Pattern data (including the Mixing settings) to the SmartMedia/USB storage device, since the data in DRAM is stored only temporarily (page 187). n Parameter settings in the Pattern Mixing mode and Pattern Mixing Edit mode can be stored as a template to internal Flash ROM, as well as being stored as part of a Pattern. See page 104 for details. Pattern Mixing Job mode [PATTERN] → Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [JOB] Same as in the Song Mixing Job mode. See page 236. Pattern Mixing Store mode [PATTERN] → Pattern selection → [MIXING] → [STORE] This function lets you store your edited Pattern Mixing to User memory (DRAM). For details, refer to page 131 in the Quick Guide section. 248 Owner’s Manual Mixing Voice Edit mode Common Edit Mixing Voice mode ■ Creating Mixing Voices — basic procedure The Mixing Voice mode provides most of the same Normal Voice editing parameters as the Voice mode, with the main exception that these Voices are dedicated for use with the Songs and Patterns, and are stored specifically as Mixing Voices. The Mixing Voice Job mode lets you use the supplementary functions like Copy and Delete. After completing the Mixing Voice editing, you can store the edited Voice to a User Bank to internal memory (Flash ROM) or you can store it as a part of the current Song/Pattern data to internal memory (DRAM). When storing the edited Mixing Voice as a part of the current Song/Pattern data, make sure to save the data to a SmartMedia/ USB storage device in the File mode. Mixing Voice Edit mode [SONG] or [PATTERN] → [MIXING] → [F2] VOICE → Normal Voice selection → [F5] VCE ED The Mixing Voice Edit mode is divided into Common Edit, for setting parameters common to all four Elements, and Element Edit, for setting parameters of individual Elements. Common Edit [SONG] or [PATTERN] → [MIXING] → [F2] VOICE → Normal Voice selection → [F5] VCE ED → [COMMON] These parameters are for making global (or common) edits to all four Elements of the selected Normal Voice. n The Mixing Voice Edit parameters are basically the same as those in the Voice Edit mode. However, some parameters having the same name as those in the Song Mixing/Pattern Mixing Part Edit mode are not available in the Mixing Voice Edit mode. [F1] GENERAL Same as in the Normal Voice Common Edit mode. See page 189. Please note that the [SF3] MEQ OFS (Master EQ Offset) display is not available in the Mixing Voice Edit mode. [F2] OUTPUT Same as in the Normal Voice Common Edit mode. See page 190. [F4] CTL SET (Controller Set) Same as in the Normal Voice Common Edit mode. See page 192. [F5] LFO Same as in the Normal Voice Common Edit mode. See page 192. [F6] EFFECT Same as in the Normal Voice Common Edit mode. See page 194. Please note that the [SF4] REVERB and [SF5] CHORUS displays are not available in the Mixing Voice Edit mode. Element Edit [SONG] or [PATTERN] → [MIXING] → [F2] VOICE → Normal Voice selection → [F5] VCE ED → Element selection Reference Mixing Voice Mode These parameters are for editing the individual Elements that make up a Normal Voice. [F1] OSC (Oscillator) Same as in the Normal Voice Element Edit mode. See page 195. [F2] PITCH Same as in the Normal Voice Element Edit mode. See page 196. [F3] FILTER Same as in the Normal Voice Element Edit mode. See page 197. [F4] AMP (Amplitude) Same as in the Normal Voice Element Edit mode. See page 199. [F5] LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator) Same as in the Normal Voice Element Edit mode. See page 201. [F6] EQ (Equalizer) Same as in the Normal Voice Element Edit mode. See page 201. Owner’s Manual 249 Mixing Voice Job mode Mixing Voice Job mode [SONG] or [PATTERN] → [MIXING] → [F5] VCE ED → [JOB] The Mixing Voice Job mode features two basic operations, Copy and Delete. After setting parameters as required from the selected display, press the [ENTER] button to execute the Job. [F2] RECALL If you are editing a Mixing Voice and select a different Mixing Voice, Mixing program, Song or Pattern without storing your edited one, all the edits you’ve made will be erased. Edits are also erased if the current part to which the edited Mixing Voice is assigned receives a program change from an external MIDI instrument. If this happens, you can use Edit Recall to restore the Mixing Voice with your latest edits intact by pressing the [ENTER] button from the [F2] RECALL display. n Since a Recall Buffer for the Mixing Voice is prepared for each Part of the current Song or Pattern, you can specify the Part to which the Mixing Voice to be recalled is assigned before executing the Edit Recall. [F3] COPY Source song/pattern and part This Job lets you copy the Mixing Voice stored to a specified Part in one Song/Pattern to a Part in another Song/Pattern. Destination song/pattern and part [F5] DELETE This Job lets you delete a Mixing Voice assigned to a specified Song/Pattern’s Part. Mixing Voice Store mode [SONG] or [PATTERN] → [MIXING] → [F5] VCE ED → [STORE] This function lets you store your edited Mixing Voice to User memory (Flash ROM or DRAM). For details, refer to page 106 in the Quick Guide section. Reference Mixing Voice Mode 250 Owner’s Manual Sampling Record mode When entering the Sampling mode from the Voice mode/Performance mode Sampling mode ■ Creating samples — basic procedure In the Sampling mode, the following three types of data can be created. • Waveform: Created by recording a sample. • Sample Voice: Created by recording a sample (depending on the settings before recording) in the Sampling mode entered from the Song mode/Pattern mode. The resulting Waveform can be assigned to a Sample Voice. • User Voice: Created by recording a sample (depending on the settings before recording) in the Sampling mode entered from the Voice mode/Performance mode. The resulting Waveform can be assigned to a User Voice. After creating the data described above, save them to a SmartMedia/USB storage device in the File mode. Sample Voices that are assigned to Song tracks can be saved along with Song data. When saving Song data (that includes Sample Voices) or User Voice data, all Waveforms assigned to the data will be saved automatically. Waveforms assigned to the Sample Voices or User Voices will be saved together automatically. Waveforms which are not assigned to any Song or Voice data should be saved individually as Waveforms. IMPORTANT: The Sampling mode is available only when optional DIMMs (page 289) have been installed to the MOTIF ES. CAUTION The waveforms created in the Sampling mode reside temporarily in the optionally installed DIMMs (page 187). Because data contained in DIMM is lost when the power is turned off, you should always save the waveforms created by recording, editing, and using Jobs to a SmartMedia/USB storage device before turning off the power. For information on how to save, see page 97. Sampling Record mode [INTEGRATED SAMPLING] In this mode, you can record sounds to this synthesizer (for example, your voice, a guitar, or sounds from a CD), edit them, and use them to create voices you can play from the keyboard. Or, if you enter this mode from the Song or Pattern mode, the sounds you record (commonly called “sample”) can be assigned to the tracks and played back automatically with the song or pattern. What’s more, by using the Resampling function, you can create new samples from your edits, or make samples from the sounds of this synthesizer itself. When entering the Sampling mode from the Voice mode/Performance mode In this case, you can create a Waveform or User Voice by recording sounds input from external devices such as a microphone and audio equipment. [F1] DEST (Destination) From this display you can determine the destination location to which the recorded sample will be stored. Waveform Determines the Waveform number to which the recorded sample is assigned. Settings: 001~1024 Keybank Determines the note number located at the center of the Key Bank. Settings: C-2 ~G8 n For details about Waveform and Key Bank, see page 173. Part Determines the Performance Part to which the recorded sample is assigned. This is available only when entering the Sampling mode from the Performance mode. When set to “off,” only the Voice will be created by sampling. Settings: off, 1~ 4 The recorded sample can be stored as a User voice. This parameter determines the User voice bank and number to which the recorded sample is assigned. n Key Reference Sampling Mode Voice When this is set to “---,” only a Waveform is created; the sample is not stored as a User voice. The sample is stored to the smallest numbered Waveform available. If you wish to hear the new sample, go to the WAVE display ([VOICE] → Voice selection → [EDIT] → Element selection → [F1] OSC → [SF1] WAVE) or KEYBANK display ([INTEGRATED SAMPLING] → [EDIT] → [F1] KEYBANK) and search through the User Waveforms to find the desired sample. Available only when the User voice bank is set to UDR (User Drum). This parameter lets you determine the key to which the sample obtained via the Sampling feature will be assigned. Settings: C0 ~ C6 [F2] SOURCE From this display you can set parameters related to the audio source. Type Determines the Sampling type. Keep in mind that this parameter is fixed to “sample” when entering the Sampling mode from the Voice/Performance mode. Owner’s Manual 251 Sampling Record mode When entering the Sampling mode from the Voice mode/Performance mode Determines the recording source. Source Settings: A/D, resample, AIB2, mLAN1~4 A/D ...................Analog audio from the A/D INPUT jacks is recognized as the recording source. resample ..........The audio signal produced from the instrument when you play the keyboard along with the Audio Input part (in other words all the audio signals output from the OUTPUT jacks) is recognized as a recording source and “resampled.” AIEB2 ...............Digital audio from the DIGITAL IN terminal or OPTICAL IN terminal (with optional AIEB2) is recognized as the recording source. mLAN1~4.........The mLAN connector (with optional mLAN16E) is recognized as the recording source. Determines whether multiple samples can be recorded without exiting from the Record mode (on) or not (off). When you wish to assign individual samples to the keys one by one to create a Drum Voice, set this parameter to on. Keep in mind that the Next parameter may be fixed to “off” and cannot be changed. This occurs when you enter the Sampling mode from the Voice mode/Performance mode, set the Voice to something other than “off” in the [F1] DEST display, and set the Source (above) to “resample” in the [F2] SOURCE display. Next Determines whether new samples will be recorded as stereo or mono samples. Mono/Stereo Settings: monoL, monoR, monoL+R, stereo L mono .............The L-channel signal will be recorded as a mono sample. R mono.............The R-channel signal will be recorded as a mono sample. L+Rmono .........The L-channel and R-channel signals will be mixed and recorded as a mono sample. stereo ...............A stereo sample will be recorded. Frequency (Sampling Frequency) Specifies the sampling frequency. The rate at which digital readings are taken is referred to as the sampling frequency. Higher sampling frequencies result in higher quality sound, but use up more memory. Settings: 44.1k (44.1 kHz), 22.0kLo (22.05 kHz Lo-Fi), 11.0kLo (11.025 kHz Lo-Fi), 5.5kLo (5.5125 kHz Lo-Fi) n When the Source is set to any of mLAN1~4 and the mLAN terminal is used as an audio input, the Frequency is fixed to 44.1 kHz and cannot be changed. n At settings other than 44.1 kHz, the sound monitored during recording may be different from the recorded sound, depending on the source signal. [F6] REC Even if you press the [F6] REC button, recording (sampling) will not start immediately. Set various parameters such as Trigger Mode in the Sampling Standby display, then start the actual sampling according to the settings. STANDBY (Sampling Standby) TrggrMode (Trigger Mode) Press the [REC] button to enter the Sampling Standby display. From this display you can turn the Confirm function on or off by pressing the [F2] CONFM button as well as set parameters listed below. For details on the Confirm function, refer to page 95 in the Quick Guide section. Specifies the method by which sampling will be triggered. Settings: level, manual level..................When this is selected, press the [F6] REC button to enable the Trigger Waiting condition. Sampling will then begin as soon as an input signal exceeding the specified trigger level is received. When this is selected, you need also set the Trigger Level (1~127). manual .............When this is selected, sampling will begin as soon as the [F6] START button is pressed, regardless of the input signal level. Key This is the same parameter as Keybank in the [F1] DEST display. RecMonitor (Recording Monitor) Determines the output level of the monitor for the input signal. This monitor signal is output from the PHONES jack or the OUTPUT R and L/MONO jacks. This has no effect on the recording level. Settings: 0 ~ 127 RecGain (Recording Gain) Determines the recording gain when resampling. This parameter is available only when the Source is set to “resample.” Settings: -12dB ~ +12dB Reference Sampling Mode 252 WAITING (Trigger Waiting) When Trigger Mode is set to “level” in the Sampling Standby display, press the [F6] REC button again to enter the Trigger Waiting condition; the [F6] menu changes to “STOP.” In this status, sampling will begin as soon as an input signal exceeding the specified trigger level is received. Before recording starts, press the [F6] STOP button or [EXIT] button to return to the Sampling Standby display. Keep in mind that the Confirm function can also be turned on or off by using the [F2] CONFM button in the Trigger Waiting condition. RECORDING During recording, press the [F6] STOP button or [EXIT] button to stop the sampling. After sampling (recording) stops: The following menus appear only when the Confirm function is turned on. [F3] AUDITION Pressing this lets you hear the sample obtained by recording (sampling). [F4] CANCEL Pressing this deletes the sample obtained by recording (sampling) and return to the Sampling Standby display. [F5] OK Pressing this stores the sample obtained by recording (sampling) to the specified destination. Owner’s Manual Sampling Record mode When entering the Sampling mode from the Song mode/Pattern mode When entering the Sampling mode from the Song mode/Pattern mode In this case, you can create a Waveform or Sample Voice by recording sounds input from external devices such as a microphone and audio equipment. [F1] DEST (Destination) From this display you can determine the destination location to which the recorded sample will be stored. Track Determines the track number to which the recorded sample is assigned. Settings: 1 ~ 16 Keybank Determines the note number located at the center of the Key Bank. This parameter is available only when the Sampling type is set to “sample” or “sample+note” (in the Type parameter below). Settings: C-2 ~ G8 [F2] SOURCE From this display you can set parameters related to the audio source. Type Determines the Sampling type. When entering the Sampling mode from the Song/Pattern mode, the data created by Sampling varies depending on this setting. Settings: sample, sample+note, slice+seq sample.................. Only sample (wave) data is created. sample+note ........ In addition to sample data, the appropriate note data for playing the sample is created and recorded to the track specified in the [F1] DEST display. slice+seq.............. The recorded sample is automatically divided into “slices,” and these are assigned to successive notes on the keyboard. n Detailed settings (meter, measure number etc,) are specified in the Slice display after sampling. Source Determines the recording source. Same as in the Sampling mode from the Voice mode/Performance mode. See above. Next Determines whether multiple samples can be recorded without exiting from the Record mode (on) or not (off). When you wish to assign individual samples to the keys one by one to create a Drum Voice, set this parameter to on. Keep in mind that this parameter is fixed to off when the Source is set to “slice + seq.” Mono/Stereo Determines whether new samples will be recorded as stereo or mono samples. Same as in the Sampling mode from the Voice mode/Performance mode. See above. Frequency (Sampling Frequency) Specifies the sampling frequency. Same as in the Sampling mode from the Voice mode/Performance mode. See above. [F6] REC Even if you press the [F6] REC button, recording (sampling) will not start immediately. Set various parameters such as Trigger Mode in the Sampling Standby display, then start the actual sampling according to the settings. STANDBY (Sampling Standby) TrggrMode (Trigger Mode) Press the [REC] button to enter the Sampling Standby display. From this display you can turn the Confirm function on or off by pressing the [F2] CONFM button as well as set parameters listed below. For details about the Confirm function, refer to page 95 in the Quick Guide section. Please keep in mind that the Confirm function is not available when the Type in the [F2] SOURCE display is set to “slice+seq.” Specifies the method by which sampling will be triggered. Key This appears when Type in the [F2] SOURCE display is set to something other than “slice+seq.” This is the same parameter as Keybank in the [F1] DEST display. RecMonitor (Recording Monitor) Determines the output level of the monitor for the input signal. This monitor signal is output from the PHONES jack or the OUTPUT R and L/MONO jacks. This has no effect on the recording level. Reference Sampling Mode Settings: level, meas, manual level ...................... Same as in the Sampling mode from the Voice mode/Performance mode. See above. meas (measure) ... This should be set together with the Punch-in/out measure. After the [F6] START button is pressed, sampling will begin at the specified punch-in measure, and end at the specified punch-out measure. Sampling will also stop when the Song/Pattern is stopped by pressing the [J] (Stop) button. manual.................. Same as in the Sampling mode from the Voice mode/Performance mode. See above. Settings: 0 ~ 127 RecGain (Recording Gain) Determines the recording gain when resampling. This parameter is available only when the Source is set to “resample.” Settings: -12dB ~ +12dB Owner’s Manual 253 Sampling Record mode When entering the Sampling mode from the Song mode/Pattern mode WAITING (Trigger Waiting or Punch-in Waiting) When Trigger Mode is set to “level” in the Sampling Standby display, press the [F6] REC button again to enter the Trigger Waiting condition; the [F6] menu changes to “STOP.” In this condition, sampling will begin as soon as an input signal exceeding the specified trigger level is received. When the Trigger Mode is set to “meas” in the Sampling Standby display, press the [F6] REC button again to enter the Punch-in Waiting condition; the [F6] menu changes to “STOP.” In this condition, sampling will begin as soon as a song or pattern playback reaches the punch-in measure. Before recording starts in either condition, press the [F6] STOP button or [EXIT] button to return to the Sampling Standby display. Keep in mind that the Confirm function can be tuned on or off by using the [F2] CONFM button also in the Trigger Waiting or Punch-in Waiting condition if the Sampling type is set to other than “slice+seq.” RECORDING During recording, press the [F6] STOP button or [EXIT] button to stop sampling. After sampling (recording) stops: The following menus appear when the Sampling type is set to “sample” or “sample+note” and the Confirm function is turned on. [F3] AUDITION Pressing this lets you hear the sample obtained by recording (sampling). [F4] CANCEL Pressing this deletes the sample obtained by recording (sampling) and return to the Sampling Standby display. [F5] OK Pressing this stores the sample obtained by recording (sampling) to the specified destination. TRIM/SLICE display after sampling stops If you’ve entered the Sampling Record mode for the Song or Pattern mode and you’ve set the sampling type to “slice+seq,” you should set the following Slice related parameters after the Sampling stops. Please note that the Confirm function is not available in this case. [F1] TRIM The trim function makes it possible to specify the beginning and end points to be played back within an entire sample. You can also specify the tempo for the range of the looped playback and determine its beat. Start (Start Point) Determines the Start point for the sample playback. Loop (Loop Start Point) Determines the Top point of the loop playback (the point where the loop begins) within the range of the entire sample. End (End Point) Determines the End point of the loop playback within the range of the entire sample. Beat Indicates the (beat) and tempo of the range from the Loop Start Point to the End Point. [SF1] AUDITION Press the [SF1] button to sound the recorded sample according to the settings in this display. [SF2] LP=ST When the menu indication here is “LP=ST,” the Start (Start Point) and the Loop (Loop Start Point) will share the same address, meaning that both of them will be changed simultaneously, even if just one of them is changed. Pressing the [SF2] button in this condition changes the menu from “LP=ST” to “LP≠ST.” When the menu indication here is “LP≠ST,” the Start (Start Point) and the Loop (Loop Start Point) can be changed independently. When pressing the [SF2] button in this condition, the address value of the Start will be copied to that of the Loop, with the result that both of them will have the same address value. The menu indication also changes from “LP≠ST” to “LP=ST.” [SF3] SET END Pressing this calls up the display for determining the End Point, from which you can set the tempo, beat, and measure for the sample. Press the [ENTER] button to actually set End Point. If you are satisfied with the results (press [SF1] to audition the sample), press the [F6] OK button to return to the original display. Doing this stores your edited sample to the DIMM memory. To return to the original display without changing the data, press the [F5] CANCEL button. [SF4] EXTRACT Delete all unnecessary sample data located ahead of the Start point and located after the End point) by pressing the [SF4] button. [F5] ZOOM[F6] ZOOM+ Press the [F5] and [F6] buttons to zoom in and out of the wave display. [F2] SLICE Reference Sampling Mode This powerful feature lets you automatically divide the recorded sample into separate “slices.” These slices are then assigned to successive notes and arranged as sequence data. n Before executing the Slice operation, you’ll need to accurately adjust the length of the sample. Use the [SF1] AUDITION button in the [F1] TRIM display to loop the sample and precisely set the Start and End points as required. After specifying the following parameters, press the [ENTER] button. (The display prompts you for confirmation.) Press the [INC/YES] button to execute the Slice. You can hear and confirm the sliced samples by pressing the [SF1] AUDITION button. If you are satisfied with the result of the operation, press the [F6] OK button to store the result of the Slice operation and go back to the Sampling Setup display. If not, press the [F5] CANCEL button to go back to the Sampling Setup display without storing the result. Specifies how the sample is sliced, and to some extent determines the resulting sound quality. Select the type that best suits the original phrase. Type (Slice Type) Settings: beat1~3, phrase1~4, quick beat1~3 ...........This slice type is suited for percussive phrases such as drums or bass with a fast attack and short decay. Three variations are provided. phrase1~4 .......Ideal for phrases containing cymbals or other instruments with a long decay. Four variations are provided. quick ................Regardless of the phrase content, the sample is divided at the specified note sub-divisions. The number of slices per measure is calculated by multiplying the top number of the Meter (time signature) parameter by the bottom number of the SubDivide parameter. n For helpful hints on getting the Slice Type parameter to work for different samples, see “Tips for using the Slice Types” on page 259. 254 Owner’s Manual Sampling Edit mode Measure Determines the number of measures in the sample to be sliced. When the slice operation is executed, sequence data corresponding to the specified number of measures is created. The sequence data is created from the beginning of the current measure at which sampling is started. Settings: 1~8 Specifies the meter (time signature) of the sample. The setting here is the basic slice unit. Meter Settings: 1/16 ~ 16/16, 1/8 ~ 16/8, 1/4 ~ 8/4 SubDivide The Meter parameter sets the basic slice unit, and SubDivide specifies even finer resolution for phrases containing regions with shorter notes. For the phrase shown at right, for example, the Meter should be set to 4/4 and SubDivide to 1/2. Settings: When Meter is set to 1 ~ 8/4 ............. quarter note (1/1), 8th note (1/2), 4th note triplet (1/3), 16th note (1/4), 8th note triplet (1/6), 32nd note (1/8), 16th note triplet (1/12) When Meter is set to 1 ~ 16/8 ........... 8th note (1/1), 16th note (1/2), 8th note triplet (1/3), 32nd note (1/4), 16th note triplet (1/6) When Meter is set to 1 ~ 16/16 ......... 16th note (1/1), 32nd note (1/2), 16th note triplet (1/3) n This parameter has no effect when the Slice Type parameter is set to beat 1~3. n The maximum slice resolution for stereo samples is 64 slices, and for mono samples 128 slices. Sens (Envelope Sensitivity) Further adjusts the sub-divisions specified by the SubDivide parameter. Higher values result in higher resolution, allowing even finer notes and smaller sounds to be detected and sliced. Use the Audition function (press [SF1]) to hear the results, and if you’re not satisfied with them, change the setting and try again. Settings: 1 ~ 5 n This parameter has no effect when the “quick” slice type is selected. Sampling Edit mode [INTEGRATED SAMPLING] → [EDIT] This mode gives you a variety of sample editing tools, with which you can change the samples you’ve recorded in the Sampling Record mode, and customize them for your applications as needed. n For samples that have been recorded in stereo (with Stereo Sampling), both the left and right waves of the sample are edited together. In the actual process, any edits made to the left channel wave are duplicated exactly in the right channel. The exception to this, of course, is Pan — since the sample already is in stereo. n Unlike in the Sampling Record mode, all parameters and functions of the Sampling Edit mode are the same, no matter which mode was previously selected. n All Sampling Edit operations apply to the Waveform (actual sample), not the voice. [F1] KEYBANK Waveform Select a Waveform that contains a Sample you wish to edit. Move the cursor to the Waveform number and select the desired number by using the [INC/YES] button, [DEC/NO] button, or the data dial. To select the desired Key Bank, simultaneously hold down the [INFORMATION] button and press the appropriate key on the keyboard. Press the [SF2] SELECT button to call up in order the Samples assigned to the selected Key Bank. Keybank Indicates information about the selected Key Bank. The Key Range and Velocity Range (which cannot be edited here) can be edited in the [F4] RANGE display. [SF1] AUDITION You can hear (audition) the selected sample by pressing the [SF1] button. [SF2] SELECT Press the [SF2] button to call up in order the Samples assigned to the selected Key Bank. n Reference Sampling Mode From this display you can determine the destination location to which the recorded sample will be stored. The [SF1] AUDITION and [SF2] SELECT buttons can be used in the same way also with other displays in the Sampling Edit mode and the Sampling Job mode. [F2] TRIM This operation is the same as in the Sampling Record mode (when Sampling Type is set to “slice+seq”). See page 253. [F3] PARAM (Parameter) Level Determines the output level of the selected sample. Settings: -94.5dB ~ -0.0dB Pan Determines the stereo position of the selected sample. Please note that this is not available for samples recorded in stereo. Settings: L64 (far left) ~ C (center) ~ R63 (far right) Owner’s Manual 255 Sampling Job mode Determines how the selected sample is to be played back. PlayMode Settings: oneshot, reverse, loop oneshot ............The Sample plays back one time from Start point to End point. reverse .............The Sample plays back one time in reverse from End point to Start point. loop ..................Sample playback begins from the Start point, continues to the Loop point, then repeats indefinitely between the Loop point and End point. n For details on the above settings, see page 176. Determines the base key for the sample. Since the sample will be pitched shifted for keys played around this base key, this should be set as close as possible to the original pitch or note value of the actual sample. OriginalKey Settings: C - 2 ~ G8 Determines the fine tuning for the pitch of the sample. FineTune Settings: -100 cent ~ 0 cent ~ 99 cent [SF1] AUDITION You can hear (audition) the selected sample by pressing the [SF1] button. [SF2] SELECT Press the [SF2] button to call up in order the Samples assigned to the selected Key Bank. [F4] RANGE From this display you can set the Key Range and the Velocity Range for the sample assigned to the selected Key Bank. Note that both the Key range and Velocity range values are graphically indicated in the display. n When the cursor is at one of the Key Range values, you can directly set the Key Range parameter from the keyboard. (Simultaneously hold down the [INFORMATION] button and press the appropriate key on the keyboard.) [SF1] AUDITION You can hear (audition) the selected sample by pressing the [SF1] button. [SF2] SELECT Press the [SF2] button to call up in order the Samples assigned to the selected Key Bank. [INTEGRATED SAMPLING] → [JOB] Sampling Job mode The Sampling Job mode contains a comprehensive set of editing tools and functions you can use to change the sound of the sample you’ve created and edited in the Sampling Edit mode. It also includes a variety of convenient operations, such as copying or erasing data. After setting parameters as required in the selected display, press the [ENTER] button to execute the Job. n Unlike in the Sampling Record mode, all parameters and functions of the Sampling Job mode are the same, no matter which mode was previously selected. The only exception to this is the Slice Job ([F1] →12 below), which varies depending on whether the previously selected mode was Voice/Performance or Song/Pattern. n All Sampling Job operations apply to the Waveform (actual sample), not the Voice. [F1] KEYBANK (Key Bank Job) Before executing the Key Bank Job by pressing the [ENTER] button, you’ll need to specify the Waveform and Key Bank. First, select the desired Waveform by moving the cursor to the 4-digit number in the display and change it by using the [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons or the data dial. Second, move the cursor to the Key value, select the desired key by using the [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons or the data dial, then use the [SF2] SELECT button to select in order the Key Bank (sample) assigned to the selected key. You can select the desired key also by pressing the note on the keyboard directly while holding the [INFORMATION] button. As in the Sampling Edit mode, the [SF1] AUDITION button lets you hear the sample assigned to the selected Key Bank. 01: Copy Source Waveform and Key Bank Reference Sampling Mode This Job copies the data of a sample contained in a specified Key Bank to another Key Bank. After specifying the source Waveform and Key Bank as well as the destination Waveform and Key Bank, press the [ENTER] button to execute the Copy Job. Destination Waveform and Key Bank 02: Delete This Job deletes the specified Key Bank and its sample. After specifying the Waveform and Key Bank, press the [ENTER] button to execute the Delete Job. If the Key Bank is set to “all” and the Job is executed, all the samples of the selected Waveform are deleted. n 03: Extract 256 If all the samples of the specified Waveform are deleted, the Waveform itself is deleted. This Job deletes all unnecessary sample data Start Point End Point End Point Start Point (located ahead of the Start point and located after the End point). In effect, it extracts only the sample data you want to use, trimming all unneeded sound from the start and end of the sample. Extract After specifying the Waveform and Key Bank, press the [ENTER] button to execute the Extract Job. If the Key Bank is set to “all” and the Job is executed, this Job is applied to all the samples of the selected Waveform. Owner’s Manual Sampling Job mode 04: Move Source Waveform and Key Bank Destination Waveform and Key Bank 05: Normalize Set the Waveform and Key Bank containing the sample to be normalized. This Job lets you move a sample contained in a specified Key Bank to another Key Bank. This would be useful for creating a new Waveform from the samples of various other existing Waveforms. After specifying the source Waveform and Key Bank as well as the destination Waveform and Key Bank, press the [ENTER] button to execute the Move Job. n If the last remaining sample is moved from the source Waveform, the source Waveform itself is deleted. This Job maximizes (normalizes) the overall level of the specified sample. The “100” (100%) setting is a quick and convenient way to boost the level of an entire sample, to make it as loud as possible without distorting. After specifying the Waveform and Key Bank, then press the [ENTER] button to execute the Normalize Job. Ratio = less than 100% Press the [ENTER] button to execute the job. Source Wave Press the [F5] (CANCEL) button to cancel the operation. Ratio = 100% Ratio = more than 100% Press the [F6] (OK) button to assign the normalized sample to the specified Key Bank. Press the [ENTER] button to execute the operation. If you are not satisfied with the results, change the Ratio value and press the [ENTER] button again. This automatically reverts back to the original settings and executes the operation again with the new settings. Ratio Specifies the post-normalization sample level. A setting of 100% maximizes the level so that the highest peak level in the sample is just below clipping (maximum digital signal level). Settings below 100% reduce the level of the sample accordingly. Settings higher than 100% will raise the sample level above the maximum, producing deliberate clipping. Settings: 001 ~ 800% 06: Time-Stretch Ratio This Job lets you change the length of the sample without changing the pitch. The basic steps in using this Job are the same as in 05: Normalize explained above. Determines the length of post-process sample as a ratio of the length of the original sample (100%). Lower values compress the sample, while higher values expand the sample. Settings: 0~400% Accuracy Determines the quality of the resulting sample by specifying which aspect of the original is to be emphasized: sound quality or rhythmic feel. Settings: sound4 - sound1, normal, rhythm1 - rhythm 2 sound4 - sound1 .............. These settings place emphasis on sound quality, with the “SOUND 4” setting producing the highest sound quality. normal .............................. Produces an optimum balance of sound quality and rhythmic feel. rhythm1 - rhythm 2 ........... These settings place emphasis on rhythmic feel, with the “Rhythm 2” setting producing the most accurate rhythmic feel. Pitch This Job lets you change the pitch of the sample without changing the length. The basic steps in using this Job are the same as in 05: Normalize explained above. Reference Sampling Mode 07: Convert Pitch Determines the amount and direction of pitch shift in semitone increments. Settings: -12 ~ 0 ~+12 Fine Determines the amount and direction of fine pitch shift in cent increments (1 cent = 1/100th of a semitone). Settings: -50 ~ 0 ~ +50 08: Fade In/Out Type This Job lets you create fade-ins and fade-outs for the sample. The basic steps in using this Job are the same as in 05: Normalize explained above. Determines the type of level fade: fade-in or fade-out. Settings: in (fade-in), out (fade-out) Owner’s Manual 257 Sampling Job mode Determines the length of the fade-in or fade-out. When a fade-in is selected, this parameter specifies the length of the fade starting at the specified Start point. When a fade-out is selected, this parameter specifies the length of the fade starting at the beginning of the fade and ending at the specified End point. Length Fade In Length Start point Settings: 0000000 ~ End point Fade Out Length Start point 09: Convert Freq (Convert Frequency) This Job lets you halve the sampling frequency of the specified sample. This can be used to convert hi-fi samples to a lo-fi sound, and reduce the sample size by half to conserve memory. The basic steps in using this Job are the same as in 05: Normalize explained above. 10: Stereo to Mono This Job lets you convert a stereo sample to a mono sample. The basic steps in using this Job are the same as in 05: Normalize explained above. Determines which channel, or both channels, of the stereo sample will be converted to a mono sample. Type Settings: L+R>mono, L>mono, R>mono L+R>mono.......The left and right channels of the stereo sample are mixed and converted to a mono sample. L>mono............The left channel of the stereo sample is converted to a mono sample. R>mono ...........The right channel of the stereo sample is converted to a mono sample. 11: Loop-Remix This Job lets you automatically cut the sample into separate “slices” and randomly rearrange the slices for special effects and unusual rhythmic variations. A variety of audio transform operations are also included for even greater changes in the sound. The basic steps in using this Job are the same as in 05: Normalize explained above. Determines the degree to which the looped portion of the sample will be sliced. Type Settings: 1~4 Determines how the original sample is varied by the this Job. Variation Settings: normal1~2, reverse1~2 normal1~2........These settings slice and rearrange the sample data, without performing any other audio changes. reverse1~2.......In addition to slicing and rearranging, these settings reverse the playback of some of the slices. 12: Slice This Job lets you divide the sample into separate “slices,” the number of which is determined by the note length (with Measure, Meter, and SubDivide). When entering this Job from the Song/Pattern mode, note data for playing the slices in sequence is also created. (Keep in mind that the results of this Job vary depending on the previously selected mode: Voice/Performance or Song/Pattern.) The basic steps in using this Job are the same as in 05: Normalize explained above. With the exception of the parameter below, all parameters and settings are the same as in the Slice display of the Sampling Record mode (page 254). Specifies the lowest key number from which the sliced samples are assigned in order. Lowest Key Settings: C - 2 ~ G8 n In the Slice display of the Sampling Record mode (page 254), this parameter is fixed to “C-1” for the MOTIF ES6, “E0” for the MOTIF ES7, and “A-1” for the MOTIF ES8, and cannot be set. [F2] WAVEFORM (Waveform Job) 01: Copy Source Waveform Reference Sampling Mode This Job lets you copy the data of one Waveform to another. After specifying the source Waveform and destination Waveform, press the [ENTER] button to execute the Copy Job. Destination Waveform 02: Delete This Job lets you delete a specific Waveform from memory. 03: Transpose This Job lets you transpose the Key bank setting of a specified Waveform. Determines the amount in octaves by which the Key Bank is transposed. When you want to transpose by less than one octave, set this to “0” and use the Note parameter below. Octave Settings: -3~ 0 ~+3 Determines the amount in semitones by which the Key Bank is transposed. When you want to transpose by exact octaves, set this to “0” and use the Octave parameter above. Note Settings: -11~ 0 ~+11 258 Owner’s Manual Sampling Job mode 04: Name This Job lets you assign a name to the selected Waveform. For specific instructions on naming, refer to page 53 in the Basic Operation section. [F3] OTHER 01: Clean Up Memory This Job deletes all the waveforms to which User voices or Sample voices are not assigned. 02: Optimize Memory This Job optimizes the memory (DRAM) for sampling. 03: Delete All This Job deletes all the waveforms. 04: Convert to Drum Voice This Job lets you convert the selected waveform to a specific Drum voice. ■ Supplementary Tips for using the Slice Types • Slicing percussive phrases having short decays First, try slicing using “beat1.” If the result has a weak attack or the release portions of the phrase seem to overlap, try again using “beat2.” Try adjusting the envelope sensitivity for finer control. If after using “beat1” the attack portions overlap or the overall rhythmic feel is degraded, try again using “beat3.” Use the SubDivide parameter to adjust the slice resolution, and make final adjustments with the Envelope Sensitivity parameter. Wave Memory Required for Slice Operations Individual wave data slices created through slice operations require approximately 1.5 times the original memory because a tail section is automatically added and fade-in and fade-out sections are automatically created at the beginning and end of the wave data. This helps to maintain maximum sound quality when the tempo is increased, and results in smoother connections between slices (no tail section is created when the “quick” slice type is selected). Source Waveform Fade section Sliced Waveform • Slicing phrases having long decays Tail section First, try slicing using “phrase1.” If the result has a weak attack or the release portions of the phrase seem to overlap, try again using “phrase2.” Use the SubDivide parameter to adjust the slice resolution, and make final adjustments with the Envelope Sensitivity parameter. A memory work area is required for the processing calculations carried out for each slice operation, as well as sufficient memory to hold the completed waveforms. When the sampling frequency is 44.1 kHz, the approximate amount of memory (expressed in kilobytes) required for each slice type is listed below. beat1: beat2: beat3: phrase1: phrase2: phrase3: phrase4: quick: Original wave size x N + (0.3 x number of slices) Original wave size x N + (0.2 x number of slices) Original wave size x N + (0.3 x number of slices) Original wave size x N + (5.8 x number of slices) Original wave size x N + (1.4 x number of slices) Original wave size x N + (0.4 x number of slices) Original wave size x N + (1.4 x number of slices) Original wave size x 3 + (0.7 x number of slices) Reference Sampling Mode If after using “phrase1” the points between the slices sounds rough and the overall feel is choppy, try again using “phrase3” or “phrase4” and set SubDivide to a finer resolution. Make final adjustments with the Envelope Sensitivity parameter. The “phrase3” setting is generally best for sustained strings or brass type sounds with no vibrato — in other words, the pitch remains constant. It can also produce echo-like effects when applied to percussive phrases with short decay. The “phrase4” setting is generally best for sustained strings or brass type sounds with vibrato, as well as vocal phrases. For monaural samples N = 5.5, and for stereo samples N = 8. Also, the number of slices is doubled for stereo samples. Owner’s Manual 259 Utility mode Utility mode The Utility mode features a variety of important settings related to overall operation of the MOTIF ES. These settings can also be stored — simply press the [STORE] button from any mode (with the exception of the Utility Job mode), and store the data to internal Flash ROM as system settings (page 186). You can also save the settings to a SmartMedia/USB storage device in the File mode. Utility mode [UTILITY] In this mode, you can set parameters that apply to the entire system of the MOTIF ES. This mode is actually a sub-mode of the Voice/Performance/Song/Pattern mode. Press the [UTILITY] button in each mode to enter the Utility mode and press the [EXIT] button after making settings to go back to the previous mode. [F1] GENERAL [SF1] TG (Tone Generator) From this display you can make overall settings for the internal tone generator. Settings here do not affect MIDI messages transmitted to the external MIDI instrument. Determines the overall volume of the instrument. Volume Settings: 0~127 Determines the amount (in semitones) by which the pitch of all notes is shifted. NoteShift Settings: -24~0~+24 Determines the fine tuning (in 0.1 cent steps) of the internal tone generator’s overall sound. Tune Settings: -102.4~+102.3 BCCurve (Breath Controller Curve) These four curves determine how the sound of the internal tone generator responds to use of a Breath Controller. The setting here affects the Destination parameters when the Source is set to “BC,” both of which can be set in the CTL SET displays ([VOICE] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F4] CTL SET). The graph shown in the display indicates the controller response curve. (The horizontal line represents the received breath control values, while the vertical line represents the actual response of the internal tone generator.) Settings: thru, soft, hard, wide [SF2] KBD (Keyboard) From this display you can set the keyboard-related parameters. The settings here affect the MIDI messages generated by playing the keyboard. Determines the amount in octaves by which the range of the keyboard is shifted up or down. This setting can be changed also by pressing any of the [OCTAVE] buttons. Octave Settings: -3~0~+3 Determines the amount in semitones by which the range of the keyboard is shifted up or down. Transpose Settings: -11~ 0 ~+11 n If you transpose beyond the note range limits (C-2 and G8), notes in the adjacent octaves will be used. For example, a transposed note of F9 will be changed to F8. VelCurve (Velocity Curve) These five curves determine how the actual velocity will be generated and transmitted according to the velocity (strength) with which you play notes on the keyboard. The graph shown in the display indicates the velocity response curve. (The horizontal line represents the received velocity values (strength of your playing), while the vertical line represents the actual velocity values transmitted to the internal/external tone generators.) Reference Utility Mode Settings: norm, soft, hard, wide, fixed norm (normal) .......This linear “curve” produces one-to-one correspondence between the strength of your keyboard playing (velocity) and the actual sound change. soft ........................This curve provides increased response, especially for lower velocities. In other words, playing softly results in higher response than the “norm” curve. hard.......................This curve provides increased response, especially for higher velocities. In other words, playing hard results in higher response than the “norm” curve. wide ......................This setting provides opposite response curves for lower and higher velocities. It widens the apparent dynamic range of the controller, producing less sound change in the softer range and more change in the higher range. fixed ......................This setting produces the same amount of sound change (set in Fixed Velocity below), no matter what your playing strength. This parameter is only available if you select the “fixed” Velocity Curve above. The velocity of the note you play is fixed at the value set here. FixedVelocity Settings: 1 ~ 127 [SF3] EF BYPS (Effect Bypass) From this display you can select the specific effect(s) to be bypassed when the [INSERTION] or [SYSTEM] button of EFFECT BYPASS buttons is turned on. Insertion 260 FInternal When this is set to on and the [INSERTION] button is turned on, the internal Insertion effect is bypassed. FPLG-EF (Plug-in Effect) When this is set to on and the [INSERTION] button is turned on, the PLG100-VH Insertion effect is bypassed. This is available only when the PLG100-VH has been installed. Owner’s Manual Utility mode System FReverb When this is set to on and the [SYSTEM] button is turned on, the Reverb effect is bypassed. FChorus When this is set to on and the [SYSTEM] button is turned on, the Chorus effect is bypassed. n For details about the Effects, see page 177. [SF4] OTHER AutoLoad Determines whether the Auto Load function is on or off. When this is on, the instrument will automatically load the specified files (from SmartMedia/USB storage device) to User memory — whenever the power is turned on. For details about the Auto Load function, see page 135. Settings: on, off PowerOnMode This determines the default power-on mode (and memory bank) — letting you select which condition is automatically called up when you turn the power on. Settings: performance, voice (USR1), voice (PRE1), GM, last, master performance.... When turning the power on next time, the Performance Play mode is entered and the first program number (USER: 001) is selected automatically. voice (USR1) ... When turning the power on next time, the Voice Play mode is entered and the first program number of the User Voices (USR1: 001) is selected automatically. voice (PRE1).... When turning the power on next time, the Voice Play mode is entered and the first program number of the Preset Voices (PRE 1: 001) is selected automatically. GM................... When turning the power on next time, the Voice Play mode is entered and the first program number of the GM Voices (GM: 001) is selected automatically. last ................... When turning the power on next time, the mode and program number (Voice/Performance/Song/Pattern/Master) registered the last time before turning the power off are called up. For information on how to register the mode and program number for “last,” see page 265. master ............. When turning the power on next time, the Master Play mode is entered and the first program number (001) is selected automatically. CtrlReset (Controller Reset) Determines the status of the controllers (Modulation Wheel, Aftertouch, Foot Controller, Breath Controller, Knobs, etc.) when switching between voices. When this is set to “hold,” the controllers are kept at the current setting. When this is set to “reset,” the controllers are reset to the default states (below). Settings: reset, hold If you select “reset,” the controllers will be reset to the following states/positions: Pitch Bend .....................Center Modulation Wheel..........Minimum Aftertouch .....................Minimum Foot Controller ..............Maximum Breath Controller ..........Maximum Foot Switch ...................Off Expression ....................Maximum Foot Volume ..................Maximum Sustain ..........................Off [F2] I/O (Input/Output) [SF1] INPUT Mic/Line From this display you can set parameters related to audio input. When using the A/D INPUT jacks, this determines the input source, microphone (mic) or line. Settings: mic, line mic................... Intended for low output equipment, such as a microphone, electric guitar or bass. line ................... Intended for high output equipment, such as a keyboard, synthesizer, or CD player. Digital When the optional AIEB2 board is installed, two separate input connections for digital audio transfer are available: coaxial and optical. One or the other must be set; the two cannot be used at the same time. Settings: coaxial, optical L&RGain Assign Gain L&R, 1&2, 3&4, 5&6, 7&8, 9&10, 11&12, 13&14 Digital From this display you can set parameters related to audio output. Set the output gain of each jack. Settings: 0dB, +6dB Specify the digital output resolution of the optionally installed AIEB2 board (page 25). Reference Utility Mode [SF2] OUTPUT Settings: 20bit, 24bit mLAN MonitorSw When this is set to on, the audio signal of the instrument output via an IEEE1394 cable to a computer will be output also via the main OUTPUT L/MONO and R jacks. When this is set to on, the audio signal sent from a computer to the instrument will be output via the main OUTPUT L/MONO and R jacks directly, bypassing the Effect block. Settings: on, off [F3] VOICE [VOICE] → [UTILITY] → [F3] These special voice-related settings are available only when entering the Utility mode from the Voice mode, letting you set parameters related to all the Voices. Owner’s Manual 261 Utility mode [SF1] MEQ (Master EQ) From this display you can apply five-band equalization to all Voices, raising or lowering the level of each frequency band (LOW, LOWMID, MID, HIGHMID, HIGH). The parameters are the same as in the Performance Common Edit. See page 214. Settings: For details about EQ, see page 178. [SF2] MEF (Master Effect) From this display you can set the Master Effect related parameters applied to all the Voices. This display can be called up by pressing and holding the [MASTER EFFECT] button on the front panel in the Voice mode. The parameters are the same as in the Performance Common Edit. See page 214. [SF3] ARP CH (Arpeggio Channel) From this display you can set parameters related to output of the Arpeggio MIDI data in the Voice mode. This enables or disables MIDI data output for the Arpeggio function. When this is set to “on,” Arpeggio data is sent via MIDI — allowing you to send the Arpeggio data to an external sequencer or play back the Arpeggios on connected MIDI tone generators. OutputSwitch Settings: on (enable), off (disable) TransmitCh (Transmit channel) Determines the MIDI channel through which Arpeggio playback data will be sent (when Output Switch above is on). Settings: 1 ~ 16 [SF4] CTL ASN (Controller Assign) Sets the parameters related to the controllers in the Voice mode. Details on each parameter are the same as in Performance Common Edit. See page 214. [F3] SEQ (Sequencer) [SONG] or [PATTERN] → [UTILITY] → [F3] These special song- and pattern-related settings are available only when entering the Utility mode from the Song or Pattern mode. [SF1] CLICK From this display you can set the parameters related to the click sound (metronome) that is used during recording or playback in the Song/Pattern mode. Determines whether and when the metronome click will sound. Mode Settings: off, rec, rec/play, all off .....................The click will not sound. rec....................The click will sound during song/pattern recording only. rec/play ............The click will sound during song/pattern recording and playback. all .....................The click will always sound. Determines on which beats the metronome click will sound. Beat Settings: 16 (16th notes), 08 (8th notes), 04 (quarter notes), 02 (half notes), 01 (whole notes) Determines the click sound volume. Volume Settings: 0 ~ 127 Determines the click sound type. Type Settings: 1 ~ 10 Sets the number of count-in measures provided before recording actually starts after pressing the [F] (Play) button in the Record standby mode. RecCount Settings: off (Recording starts as soon as the [F] button is pressed), 1 meas ~ 8 meas SmplPrCnt (Sampling pre-count) n This is available when entering the Sampling mode from the Song mode/Pattern mode, setting the Type to “sample+note” then setting the Trigger mode to “meas.” This parameter sets the number of count-in measures provided before a song/pattern starts after starting sampling. Since the click sound is created with the internal tone generator, using click playback affects the overall polyphony of this synthesizer. [SF2] FILTER (MIDI Filter) From this display you can set which MIDI events will be recognized/transmitted via MIDI. The settings made here apply only to Song/Pattern playback data; they do not affect the MIDI events generated by your keyboard playing or panel operations in the Voice and Performance modes. MIDI events to which the Filter is applied: Note, PgmChange (Program Change), CtrlChange (Control Change), PB (Pitch Bend), ChAt (Channel Aftertouch), PolyAT (Polyphonic Aftertouch), Exclusive [SF3] OTHER Reference Utility Mode PtnQuantize (Pattern Quantize) Determines the quantize value for Pattern switching during playback. When set to “1,” Patterns (sections) will always switch on the first beat of the measure during playback. When “1/16” is selected, Patterns (sections) can be switched on any 16th beat during playback. Settings: 1 (1 measure), 1/2 (Half note), 1/4 (Quarter note), 1/8 (8th note), 1/16 (16th note) PtnTempoHold (Pattern Tempo Hold) Determines whether or not the tempo setting will switch to the tempo value stored with each Pattern when a new Pattern is selected during playback. When set to “on,” the tempo will be retained when Patterns are switched. When set to “off,” the tempo will switch to that stored with the new Pattern when Patterns are switched. Settings: on, off n The tempo setting data in the Pattern Chain is not affected by this parameter. 262 Owner’s Manual Utility mode SongEventChase Event Chase allows you to specify which non-note data types are properly recognized during fast-forward and rewind operations. Normally, if a Song or Pattern is played back from mid-point and/or fast-forward or rewind are used, certain data types (such as Program Change, Pitch Bend, and Control Change) may not play back as expected. Setting this to a specific event ensures the playback integrity of the event, even when fast forwarding or rewinding. Settings: Off, PC (Program Change), PC+PB+Ctrl (Program Change+Pitch Bend+Control Change), all (All events) n Keep in mind that settings other than “off” may result in slower operation — for example, a pause before starting playback, or slower rewind/fast forward speed. n When this is set to “all,” an excessive amount of MIDI data may be generated, possibly resulting in a MIDI error on the connected device. DumpInterval (Bulk Dump Exclusive Interval Time) When playing back system exclusive data (bulk data) that is recorded on the sequence tracks, this sets the interval that is inserted for each 1KB. When sending bulk data from this synthesizer to a connected MIDI device, a MIDI error may result if the device cannot handle large amounts of data in a short time. This parameter compensates for that by setting an interval that provides enough time for the receiving device to process the bulk data. Settings: 0 ~ 900 (msec) n The playback may be a little slower depending on the currently set interval. Also when a MIDI error occurs, try to set the interval a little higher and send the data again. LoadMix Determines whether the Mixing settings are loaded (on) or not (off) when the Song/Pattern number is changed. Settings: off, on n This setting affects the Song/Pattern change during Song/Pattern chain playback. SendXGOn ToMultiPartPB Determines whether an XG reset message is sent to the Multi-part Plug-in board tone generator block (on) or not (off) when starting an XG song or changing the Song/Pattern number. Settings: on, off [F4] CTL ASN (Controller Assign) [SF1] ARP (Arpeggio) Switch Determines the Control Change Number that controls on/off status of Arpeggio playback. Settings: 00~95 Hold Determines the Control Change Number that controls on/off status of Arpeggio Hold (page 189). Settings: 00~95 [SF2] ASSIGN ASA (Assign A) Dest (Destination) From this display you can assign specific functions to the ASSIGN A and B knobs (when the [PAN/SEND] and [TONE] lamps are on). Two parameters are available here. The first (ASA) determines the Control Change number generated by the ASSIGN A knob. The second, Destination (Dest), determines what parameter or aspect of the sound is affected by the knob. Keep in mind that if the same MIDI Control Change messages as set here are received from an external device, the internal tone generator also responds to those messages. Settings: Refer to the separate Data List booklet. ASB (Assign B) Dest (Destination) Two parameters are available here. The first (ASB) determines the Control Change number generated by the ASSIGN B knob. The second, Destination (Dest), determines what parameter or aspect of the sound is affected by the knob. Keep in mind that if the same MIDI Control Change messages as set here are received from an external device, the internal tone generator also responds to those messages. Settings: Refer to the separate Data List booklet. [SF3] FT SW (Footswitch) From this display you can determine the Control Change number generated by using the Footswitch connected to the ASSIGNABLE jack. Keep in mind that if the same MIDI Control Change messages as set here are received from an external device, the internal tone generator also responds to those messages as if the Footswitch of the instrument was used. [SF4] REMOTE Two different computer sequencer control modes can be selected here, as well as the respective MIDI port settings for control. When you’ve made the desired settings, press the [ENTER] button to actually call up the preset control templates for the software. For details, refer to the Quick Guide on page 147. [SF5] MEF (Master Effect) From this display you can set the parameters related to the Master Effect Knob operations. (Press both the [ARP FX] and [EQ] buttons so that their lamps light.) Knob1 ~ Knob4 Reference Utility Mode Settings: 000~100 (000, 032: off, 096: Arpeggio Switch, 097: Arpeggio Hold, 098: Song/Pattern playback start/stop, 099/100: Program Change INC/DEC 101: Octave Rest) Assigns a parameter of the Master Effect to each knob. Available parameters differ depending on the selected Master Effect type. [F5] MIDI [SF1] CH (Channel) BasicRcvCh (Basic Receive Channel) From this display you can make basic MIDI settings. Determines the MIDI receive channel when this synthesizer is set to single-timbre tone generator mode (Voice/ Performance modes). Settings: 1~16, omni (all channels), off n In the multi-timbral tone generator mode (Song/Pattern modes), each Part receives MIDI data according to its assigned MIDI receive channel ([SONG] or [PATTERN] → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → Part selection → [F1] VOICE → [SF2] MODE → ReceiveCh). Owner’s Manual 263 Utility mode KBDTransCh (Keyboard Transmit Channel) Determines the MIDI channel over which the instrument sends MIDI data (to an external sequencer, tone generator, or other device). This parameter is available in the single-timbre tone generator mode (Voice/Performance modes). Settings: 1~16, off n In the multi-timbral tone generator mode (Song/Pattern modes), MIDI data generated by playing the keyboard (and its controllers) is sent to the internal tone generator and external devices via the MIDI output channel, set from the CHANNEL display ([SONG] or [PATTERN] → [F3] TRACK → [SF1] CHANNEL). DeviceNo. (Device Number) Determines the device number used by this synthesizer in receiving or transmitting data. This number must match the Device Number of the external MIDI device when transmitting/receiving bulk data, parameter changes or other system exclusive messages. Settings: 1~16, all, off [SF2] SWITCH This switch enables or disables Bank Select messages, both in transmission and reception. When this is set to “on,” this synthesizer responds to incoming Bank Select messages, and it also transmits appropriate Bank Select messages (when using the panel). BankSel Settings: off, on PgmChange (Program Change) This switch enables or disables Program Change messages, both in transmission and reception. When this is set to “on,” this synthesizer responds to incoming Program Change messages, and it also transmits appropriate Program Change messages (when using the panel). Settings: off, on CtrlChange (Control Change mode) Determines how this synthesizer receives and recognizes the AEG Sustain MIDI message. When set to mode1, it is received as a Parameter Change. When set to mode2, it is received as a Control Change message. Settings: mode1, mode2 LocalCtrl (Local Control On/Off) This determines whether or not the tone generator of the instrument responds to your keyboard playing. Normally, this should be set to “on” — since you’ll want to hear the sound of the MOTIF ES as you play it. However, for external sequencer applications, you may need to set this to “off” to avoid getting “double” notes, in which the tone generator of the instrument is played twice — once by the keyboard and once again by the keyboard data routed through the sequencer. Even if this is set to “off,” the data will be transmitted via MIDI. Also, the internal tone generator block will respond to messages received via MIDI. Settings: off, on RcvBulk (Receive Bulk) Determines whether or not Bulk Dump data can be received. Settings: protect (not received), on (received) [SF3] SYNC (Synchronization) From this display you can set various parameters related to MIDI clock and synchronization. Determines whether Song/Pattern/Arpeggio playback will be synchronized to the instrument’s internal clock or an external MIDI clock. MIDI Sync Settings: internal, MIDI, MTC internal ..............................Synchronization to internal clock. Use this setting when this synthesizer is to be used alone or as the master clock source for other equipment. MIDI ..................................Synchronization to a MIDI clock received from an external MIDI instrument via MIDI. MTC (MIDI Time Code).....Synchronization to an MTC signal received via MIDI. MMC signals are transmitted via MIDI. Use this setting when this synthesizer is to be used as a MIDI slave, such as when synchronized to an MTC-capable MTR. The MTC Sync function is available only in the Song mode. n Please keep in mind that the song or pattern will not start even if you press the [F] (Play) button when the MIDI Sync is set to other than “internal.” n MTC (MIDI Time Code) allows simultaneous synchronization of multiple audio devices via standard MIDI cables. It includes data corresponding to hours, minutes, seconds, and frames. This synthesizer does not transmit MTC. A device such as the Yamaha AW4416 is necessary in order to use this synthesizer as an MTC master. n MMC (MIDI Machine Control) allows remote control of multitrack recorders, MIDI sequencers, etc. A MMC-compatible multitrack recorder, for example, will automatically respond to start, stop, fast forward, and fast reverse operations performed on the controlling sequencer, thus keeping playback of the sequencer and multitrack recorder aligned. Determines whether MIDI clock (F8) messages will be transmitted via MIDI. ClockOut Settings: on (transmitted), off SeqCtrl (Sequencer Control) Reference Utility Mode Determines whether Sequencer Control signals – start, continue, stop, and song position pointer – will be received and/or transmitted via MIDI. Settings: off, in, out, in/out off .....................Not transmitted/recognized. in ......................Recognized but not transmitted. out ....................Transmitted but not recognized. in/out ...............Transmitted/recognized. Determines the specific time code point from which sequence playback starts, when MTC is received. This feature can be used to accurately align playback of this synthesizer with an external MTC-compatible device. MTC StartOffset Settings: Hour : Minute : Second : Frame Hour ................00~23 Minute .............00~59 Second ............00~59 Frame ..............00~29 264 Owner’s Manual Utility Job mode [SF4] OTHER MIDI IN/OUT Determines which physical output terminal(s) will be used for transmitting/receiving MIDI data: MIDI IN/OUT, USB, or mLAN (when the optional mLAN16E has been installed). Settings: MIDI, USB, mLAN n Three types of terminals above cannot be used at the same time. Only one of them can be used to transmit/receive MIDI data. ThruPort (Through Port) Many computer sequencers are capable of transmitting data over several MIDI ports, effectively breaking the 16channel barrier. When using the USB terminal or mLAN terminal (when the optional mLAN16E has been installed) for MIDI transmission/reception, you can have this synthesizer respond to MIDI data over one port, while relaying the data for another port number (you can set here) to a separate tone generator (connected to the MIDI OUT terminal). In this way, 16 channels of data can be played on this synthesizer and another 16 can be played on the connected MIDI device. Settings: 1~8 n When the mLAN16E has been installed and the MIDI IN/OUT is set to mLAN, ports 5 ~ 8 are not available even if you set them here. [F6] PLUG [SF1] STATUS Plug1: ~ Plug3: Indicates the name of the Plug-in Board which has been installed to this synthesizer. PolyExpand This parameter is accessible only when you have two or three identical Plug-in boards installed. The “off” setting enables two or three boards to work separately (you can select them for two or three different Parts). When this is set to “on,” the two boards effectively function together as one board (used in a single part) — giving you double the amount of polyphonic notes you can play at one time. Settings: on, off [SF2] MIDI DEVNO. (Device Number) From this display you can set various MIDI-related parameters for the Plug-in board. Determines the MIDI Device Number of the Plug-in Board. This number must match the Device Number of the external MIDI device when transmitting/receiving bulk data, parameter changes or other system exclusive messages. Settings: 1~16, all, off PORTNO. (Port number) Determines the MIDI Port number over which the Plug-in board receives MIDI data in the multi-timbral tone generator mode (Song/Pattern modes). One port can be set for a Multi-part Plug-in board and two ports can be set for a Single part Plug-in board. Settings: off, 1~3 n The Port number for the Effect Plug-in board (VH) is fixed to 1. n For information on the Plug-in board and the internal tone generator block, see page 163. GM/XG Determines whether “GM on” and “XG on” messages are recognized (on) or not (off). This parameter is available only when a Multi-part Plug-in board has been installed to slot 3. Settings: on, off [SF3] NATIVE1 From this display you can set the Native System parameters of the Plug-in board installed to slot 1. For details on the parameters, refer to the owner’s manual of your particular Plug-in board. [SF4] NATIVE2 From this display you can set the Native System parameters of the Plug-in board installed to slot 2. For details on the parameters, refer to the owner’s manual of your particular Plug-in board. [SF5] NATIVE3 From this display you can set the Native System parameters of the Plug-in board installed to slot 3. For details on the parameters, refer to the owner’s manual of your particular Plug-in board. Utility Job mode [UTILITY] → [JOB] In this Mode, you can restore this synthesizer’s User memory (page 186) to the factory default settings (Factory Set). For details, see page 44. Since the settings of the Plug-in Boards in the Utility mode are stored not to internal User memory but to the memory on the respective boards themselves, the data cannot be restored with this Job. Reference Utility Mode n ■ Supplementary Setting the default display when turning the power on [UTILITY] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF4] OTHER → PowerOnMode 1 2 3 4 5 Enter the desired mode and the program number you wish to call up first when turning the power on. Press the [ENTER] button while holding the [STORE] button to register the mode and program number set in step #1. Set the PowerOnMode parameter to “last” in the [UTILITY] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF4] OTHER display. Press the [STORE] button to store the Utility setting made in step #3 above. Turn the power off and turn the power on again to call up the mode/program number set in step #2 to the display. Owner’s Manual 265 File mode File mode The File mode provides tools for transferring data between the instrument and various storage media and devices, such as SmartMedia cards, hard disk drives and compact flash devices. n For details about SmartMedia and USB storage devices, see page 27. n For details about the relationship between the data created on this synthesizer and the files for saving, see page 186. File mode n [FILE] For information on how to select a file/folder and how to create a new folder, see page 268. [F1] CONFIG [SF1] CURRENT From this display you can set the parameters about the currently recognized device (SmartMedia/USB storage device). In this display you can select the device to be recognized by this synthesizer — a SmartMedia inserted to the Card slot or a properly USB storage device connected to the USB TO DEVICE connector. When Current is set to CARD, the Volume Label is shown on the second line. When Current is set to USB, the partition information is shown on the second line. If the connected USB storage device supports multiple media, set the slot number at the right corner of the display. Current Settings: CARD, USB Status Indicates the status of the storage device recognized by this synthesizer. FFree Indicates the amount of unused (free) memory on the current device. FTotal Indicates the amount of total memory on the current device. [SF2] MOUNT From this display you can select specific partitions for saving/loading data, within the device mounted in the [SF1] CURRENT display (above). [SF3] FORMAT Before you can use a new SmartMedia/USB storage device with this synthesizer, you will need to format it. Use this operation to format the SmartMedia/USB storage device and assign a Volume Label to it. For instructions on formatting, see page 268. Format Determines the storage device to be formatted. When set to “USB,” “Slot” appears at the right corner of this display. Select a slot to be accessed when the connected USB storage device supports multiple media. Type This is available when Format (above) is set to “USB.” Specify the partition to be formatted. Settings: CARD, USB Settings: all, partition1 ~ 4 Names the Volume Label. For instructions on naming, refer to page 53 in the Basic Operation section. Volume Label [F2] SAVE File/Folder name File/Folder selection box This operation lets you save files to a SmartMedia/USB storage device. For instructions on saving files of the various data types, refer to the following pages: page 86 (Voices), page 92 (Performances), page 97 (Waveforms), page 132 (Songs/Patterns). Press the [F6] NEW button to create a new folder. Current Indicates the current directory (folder). This indication is automatically changed according to the current directory (folder) specified in the File/Folder selection box. TYPE Among the various types of data created on this synthesizer, you can save all of them or only a specific type of data to a single file. This parameter determines which specific type of data will be saved to a single file. Settings: Refer to “Supplementary information” on page 268. [F3] LOAD Reference File Mode This operation lets you load files from a SmartMedia/USB device to this synthesizer. Current Indicates the current directory (folder). This indication is automatically changed according to the current directory (folder) specified in the File/Folder selection box. TYPE Among the various types of data saved in a single file on a SmartMedia/USB storage device, you can load all of them or only a specific type of data to this synthesizer. This parameter determines which specific type of data will be loaded from a single file. Settings: Refer to “Supplementary information” on page 268. 266 Owner’s Manual File mode [F4] RENAME Select the desired file type. Select the file/folder to be renamed. From this display you can rename files or folders in the selected SmartMedia/USB storage device, using up to eight alphabetic and numeric characters. Files are named according to the MS-DOS naming convention. If the file name contains spaces and other characters unrecognized in MS-DOS, these characters will automatically be replaced by “_” (underscore) characters when saving. Rename the selected file/folder here. See “Basic Operation” on page 53. Press the [F6] NEW button to create a new folder. [F5] DELETE From this display you can delete files/folders from the selected SmartMedia/USB storage device. Select the desired file or folder as shown below, then press the [ENTER] button. Select the desired file type. n When you wish to delete a folder, delete all the files and folders contained in the folder beforehand. Please keep in mind that only folders that contain no files or other nested folders can be deleted. Reference File Mode Select the file or folder to be deleted. Owner’s Manual 267 Supplementary information ■ Supplementary information 4 File ( )/Folder ( ) selection Move the cursor to the desired file or folder by using the [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons or the data dial. 5 To return to the next highest level, press the [EXIT] button. To call up the contents of a desired folder, highlight the folder and press the [ENTER] button. Select the media to be formatted. Move the cursor to the Format value location and select “CARD” or “USB.” When selecting “USB,” specify the slot number at the right top of the display as necessary and select the partition to be formatted at the Type value location in the second line of the display. The illustrations and instructions below show you how to select files and folders on the SmartMedia/USB storage devices within the File mode. Set the Volume Label. Move the cursor to the “Volume Label” and input a Volume Label. For instructions on naming, refer to page 53 in the Basic Operation section. 6 Press the [ENTER] button. (The display prompts you for confirmation.) Press the [DEC/NO] button to cancel the Format operation. Move the cursor to the desired file or folder by using the [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons or the data dial. 7 Press the [INC/YES] button to execute the Format. After formatting has been completed, a “Completed” message appears and operation returns to the original display. CAUTION While formatting is in process, make sure to follow these precautions: • Never remove or eject the media from the device (SmartMedia or USB storage). • Never unplug or disconnect any of the devices. • Never turn off the power of the MOTIF ES or the relevant devices. Formatting a SmartMedia/USB storage device Before you can use a new SmartMedia/USB storage device with this synthesizer, you will need to format it. Follow the instructions below. 8 CAUTION If data is already saved on the SmartMedia/USB storage device, be careful not to format it. If you format the SmartMedia/USB storage device, all the previously recorded data will be deleted. 1 Press the [SF1] CURRENT button and check whether the currently recognized device is “CARD” (SmartMedia in the CARD slot) or “USB” (USB storage device connected to this synthesizer). Volume Level of the selected partition. Insert a SmartMedia into the CARD slot or connect a USB storage device to the USB TO DEVICE connector. If necessary, insert the proper media into the slot of the USB storage device. 2 3 Press the [FILE] mode to enter the File mode. n Press the [F1] CONFIG button, then [SF3] FORMAT button to call up the Format display. Reference File Mode 268 Change the Current setting as needed. Owner’s Manual By executing the Format operation in the File mode, the SmartMedia/ USB storage device will be formatted to MS-DOS or Windows format. The formatted SmartMedia/USB storage device may not be compatible with other devices such as a Macintosh computer or digital camera. Supplementary information File types that can be handled by the MOTIF ES File types that can be saved from the instrument to the SmartMedia/USB storage device [FILE] TYPE File extension* Dir → [F2] SAVE → TYPE Description When this is set to “TYPE,” only the directories (folders) are displayed in the File/Folder selection box and the Save operation cannot be executed. All .W7A All data in this synthesizer’s internal User Memory (Flash ROM) is treated as a single file, and can be saved to the SmartMedia/ USB storage device. AllVoice .W7V All the User Voice data in this synthesizer’s internal User Memory (Flash ROM) is treated as a single file, and can be saved to the SmartMedia/USB storage device. Also the Waveforms obtained via the Sampling function and assigned to any of the voices are saved together. PluginAllBulk1, 2, 3 .W2B All the data in a Plug-in board (Board Voice data created by using the editor software that comes with the Plug-in Board and the Board related settings in the Utility mode) is treated as a single file, and can be saved to the SmartMedia/USB storage device. The numbers 1, 2, and 3 correspond to the Plug-in slots. UserARP .W7G All the User Arpeggio data in this synthesizer’s internal User Memory (Flash ROM) is treated as a single file, and can be saved to the SmartMedia/USB storage device. AllSong .W7S All the User Song data in this synthesizer’s internal User Memory (DRAM) is treated as a single file, and can be saved to the SmartMedia/USB storage device. AllPattern .W7P All the User Pattern data in this synthesizer’s internal User Memory (DRAM) is treated as a single file, and can be saved to the SmartMedia/USB storage device. SMF .MID Sequence track (1 - 16) and Tempo track data of Songs or Patterns created in the Song/Pattern mode can be saved to the SmartMedia/USB storage device as Standard MIDI File (format 0) data. AllWaveform .W7W All the User Wave and Sample data in this synthesizer’s internal User Memory (DRAM) is treated as a single file, and can be saved to the SmartMedia/USB storage device. Wav .WAV Sample data created in the Sampling mode can be saved to the SmartMedia/USB storage device as a WAV file (Windows audio format). Aiff .AIF Sample data created in the Sampling mode can be saved to the SmartMedia/USB storage device as an AIFF file (Macintosh audio format). Voice Editor .W7E All the User Voice data stored on User Banks (Flash ROM) is handled as a single file and saved to the SmartMedia/USB storage device. The saved file can be loaded to the Voice Editor software (included in the CD-ROM) on your computer. * Automatically assigned to the saved file. n When selecting “AllSong” or “AllPattern” as a file type, Sample Voices and assigned Waveforms created via the Sampling function in the Song/Pattern mode are also saved together. File types that can be loaded from SmartMedia/USB storage device to the instrument [FILE] File extension* Dir All Description When this is set to “TYPE,” only the directories (folders) are displayed in the File/Folder selection box and the Load operation cannot be executed. .W7A Files of the “All” type saved to SmartMedia/USB storage device can be loaded and restored to the instrument. When the box at the left of “without System” is checkmarked, only the Utility mode settings will not be loaded. AllVoice .W7V Files of the “All Voice” type saved to SmartMedia/USB storage device can be loaded and restored to the instrument. Voice .W7A .W7V A specified voice in a file that is saved to the SmartMedia/USB storage device as “All” or “All Voice” type can be individually selected and loaded to the instrument. Please note that the file icons of “W7A” and “W7V” are changed to (as virtual folders) when this file type is selected (Quick Guide on page 87). Performance .W7A A specified performance in a file that is saved to the SmartMedia/USB storage device as “All” type can be individually selected and loaded to the instrument. Please note that the file icon of “W7A” is changed to (as a virtual folder) when this file type is selected (Quick Guide on page 92). PluginAllBulk 1, 2, 3 .W2B A file that is saved to the SmartMedia/USB storage device as “Plugin All Bulk 1, 2, 3” type can be loaded and restored to the Plug-in board installed to the instrument. Please note that the same Plug-in Boards should be installed to the same slot as when the file was saved. UserARP .W7G Files of the “Usr ARP” type saved to SmartMedia/USB storage device can be loaded and restored to the instrument. AllSong .W7S Files of the “All Song” type saved to SmartMedia/USB storage device can be loaded and restored to the instrument. Song .W7A .W7S .MID A specified Song in a file that is saved to the SmartMedia/USB storage device as “All” or “All Song” type can be individually selected and loaded to the instrument. Please note that the file icons of “W7A” and “W7S” are changed to (as virtual folders) when this file type is selected (Quick Guide on page 133). In addition, selecting this file type lets you load the Standard MIDI file (format 0, 1) to a specific Song. AllPattern .W7P Files of the “All Pattern” type saved to SmartMedia/USB storage device can be loaded and restored to the instrument. Pattern .W7A .W7P .MID A specified Song in a file that is saved to the SmartMedia/USB storage device as “All” or “All Pattern” type can be individually selected and loaded to the instrument. Please note that the file icons of “W7A” and “W7P” are changed to (as virtual folders) when this file type is selected (Quick Guide on page 133). In addition, selecting this file type lets you load the Standard MIDI file (format 0, 1) to a specific section of a Pattern. Owner’s Manual Reference File Mode TYPE → [F3] LOAD → TYPE 269 Supplementary information TYPE File extension* Description AllWaveform .W7W Files of the “All” or “All Waveform” types saved to SmartMedia/USB storage device can be loaded and restored to the instrument. Waveform .W7A .W7W .WAV .AIF A specified Waveform in a file that is saved to the SmartMedia/USB storage device as “All” or “All Waveform” type can be individually selected and loaded to the instrument. Please note that the file icons of “W7A” and “W7W” are changed to (as virtual folders) when this file type is selected (Quick Guide on page 133). In addition, selecting this file type lets you load the WAV file and AIFF file to the specified destination, which differs depending on the mode before entering the File mode (Quick Guide on pages 100 and 109). SampleVoice .W7A .W7S .W7P A specified Sample Voice in a file that is saved to the SmartMedia/USB storage device as “All” or “All Song” or “All Pattern” type can be individually selected and loaded to the instrument. Please note that the file icons of “W7A” and “W7S” and “W7P” are changed to (as virtual folders) when this file type is selected (Quick Guide on page 133). This file type is available only when entering the File mode from the Song mode/Pattern mode. Voice Editor .W7E The Voice data edited via the included Voice Editor software on your computer can be loaded to the instrument. * Assigned to the file which can be loaded. n In addition to the file types above, Yamaha A5000/A4000/A3000/SU700 files and AKAI S1000/S3000 files can be loaded to the MOTIF ES. n When files of the Yamaha A series samplers (A5000/4000/3000) are loaded, an “S” mark by the file name indicates the file contains only sample data and a “P” mark indicates program data (voice related parameters and so on). When entering the File mode from the Voice/Performance mode, the “P” marked file can be loaded and the following two types can be selected instead of Waveform or Key Bank. • Type 1: Only one sample is imported to a certain waveform. This type utilizes the various settings of the MOTIF ES, and the parameters corresponding to the four elements are also loaded. Extra samples are not loaded. • Type 2: Several samples are imported to a certain waveform. Parameters corresponding to the four elements are not loaded to the MOTIF ES. Extra samples are not loaded. Data Compatibility with the MOTIF 6/MOTIF 7/MOTIF 8 Among the data created on the MOTIF 6/MOTIF 7/MOTIF 8, Voices, Waveforms, Sample Voices can be loaded to the MOTIF ES6/MOTIF ES7/ MOTIF ES8. • Voices A specified Voice in a file (extension: W2A, W2V) that is saved to the storage device as “All” or “AllVoice” type on the MOTIF can be individually selected and loaded to the MOTIF ES. Set the TYPE in the [F3] LOAD display to “Voice” and execute the Load procedure. Likewise, a file (extension: W2V) that is saved to the SmartMedia/USB storage device as “AllVoice” type on the MOTIF can be loaded to the MOTIF ES. Set the TYPE in the [F3] LOAD display to “AllVoice” and execute the Load procedure. In addition, Voice Editor files (extension: W2E) can be loaded to the MOTIF ES. Set the TYPE in the [F3] LOAD display to “Voice Editor” and execute the Load procedure. n The Voices loaded to the MOTIF ES 6/7/8 may not produce the exact same sound as those on the original MOTIF 6/7/8, since the contents of the preset Waveforms and the Effect structure are different between the two instrument series. • Waveforms A specified Waveform in a file (extension: W2A, W2W) that is saved to the storage device as “All” or “AllWaveform” type on the MOTIF can be individually selected and loaded to the MOTIF ES. Set the TYPE in the [F3] LOAD display to “Waveform” and execute the Load procedure. Likewise, a file (extension: W2W) that is saved to the storage device as “AllWaveform” type on the MOTIF can be loaded to the MOTIF ES. Set the TYPE in the [F3] LOAD display to “AllWaveform” and execute the Load procedure. • Sample Voices A specified Sample Voice (extension: W2A, W2S, W2P) in a file that is saved to the storage device as “All” or “AllSong” or “AllPattern” type on the MOTIF can be individually selected and loaded to the MOTIF ES. Set the TYPE in the [F3] LOAD display to “SampleVoice” and execute the Load procedure. Reference File Mode 270 Owner’s Manual Master Play mode Master mode ■ Creating Masters — basic procedure The Master mode lets you play and edit special program combinations called “Masters.” A Master can contain up to four different Voices or Performances, each assigned to a separate MIDI “Zone.” Alternately, it can contain specific Songs or Patterns. As such, it lets you set up the instrument just as you need for live performance, switching through the Masters in order as you need them. To create a Master, set the various parameters below in the Master Play and Master Edit modes. Use the Master Job mode to initialize data or transfer it to another device. Once you’ve edited a Master, you can store it to a User Bank in internal memory (Flash ROM) and save all the edited Masters to a SmartMedia/ USB storage device in the File mode. [MASTER] → Master selection Master Play mode The Master Play mode lets you perform a variety of general editing operations on the selected Master. For more detailed and comprehensive editing operations, use the Master Edit mode. Edited parameters with the exception of some parameters are stored to internal Flash ROM as a User Master. [F1] PLAY OCT (Octave) Indicates Keyboard Octave setting set via the [OCTAVE] buttons. This can be changed also with the following operation: [UTILITY] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF2] KBD → Octave. ASA (ASSIGN A), ASB (ASSIGN B) Indicates the functions assigned to the respective Knobs (printed “ASSIGN A” and “ASSIGN B”) when the lamps of both the [PAN/SEND] and [TONE] buttons are turned on. The functions are assigned from the [UTILITY] → [F4] CTL ASN → [SF2] ASSIGN display. n OCT (Octave), ASA (ASSIGN A), and ASB (ASSIGN B) settings are not independently assignable for each Master. Because of this, these are not stored as an individual Master in the Master Store mode (page 137). AS1 (ASSIGN 1), AS2 (ASSIGN 2) [SF1] ARP1 (Arpeggio 1) - [SF5] ARP5 (Arpeggio 5) Indicates the values obtained by controlling the respective Knobs (printed “ASSIGN 1” and “ASSIGN 2”) when the lamps of both the [PAN/SEND] and [TONE] buttons are turned on. The functions assigned to these knobs depend on the setting of the Voice selected as a Master program. You can call up the Arpeggio types by pressing these buttons to which the Arpeggio types are assigned. The Arpeggio type assigned to each button depends on the program (Voice, Performance, Song, Pattern) selected as a Master. [F2] MEMORY From this display you can set basic parameters for the Master, including the mode that is called up with the Master and the program number. Mode Determines the mode that is called up when the Master number is selected. Settings: Voice, Performance, Pattern, Song Memory Determines the Program number that is called up when the Master is selected. Settings: When the Mode is set to Voice: Select a Voice bank and number. Refer to the instructions page 60. When the Mode is set to Performance: Select a Performance bank and number. Refer to the instructions on page 67. When the Mode is set to Pattern: Select a Pattern and section. Refer to the instructions on page 57. When the Mode is set to Song: Select a Song number. Refer to the instructions on page 56. ZoneSwitch Determines whether the Zone function is used (on) or not (off). See page 137 for details about the Zone function. n Master Edit mode When the Mode is set to “Voice” or “Performance” and the Zone Switch is turned on, only Zone 1 can be used in the default setting (playing Zones 2-4 will produce no sound). You can use these Zones by setting various parameters in the Master Edit mode. [MASTER] → Master selection → [EDIT] Reference Master Mode The Master Edit is divided into Common Edit, for setting parameters common to all four Zones, and Zone Edit, for setting parameters of individual Zones. When Zone Switch is set to on in the [F2] MEMORY display in the Master Play mode, only the Common Edit is available. Owner’s Manual 271 Master Edit mode Common Edit [MASTER] → Master selection → [EDIT] → [COMMON] Common Edit These parameters are for making global (or common) edits to all four Zones of the selected Master. [F1] NAME From this display you can create a name for the Master. For instructions on naming, refer to page 53 in the Basic Operation section. [F2] OTHER From this display you can set which row of Knob/Slider functions will be lit and selected. Knob/Slider Settings: pan ...........................Selecting the Master lights the [PAN/SEND] lamp, for control over the Pan/Send row. tone ..........................Selecting the Master lights the [TONE] lamp, for control over the Tone row. assign .......................Selecting the Master lights the [PAN/SEND] and [TONE] lamps, for control over the Assign row. MEQofs or partEQ ....Selecting the Master lights the [EQ] lamp, for control over the EQ row. When the Mode is set to Voice, MEQofs is available. When the Mode is set to Performance, Song, or Pattern, partEQ is available. MEF ..........................Selecting the Master lights the [ARP FX] and [EQ] lamps, for control over the Master Effects row. arpFx ........................Selecting the Master lights the [ARP FX] lamp, for control over the Arpeggio FX row. zone..........................Selecting the Master lights no lamp and automatically calls up the Knob/Slider functions specifically set for each respective Zone (page 137). This is available only when the Zone Switch is set to on in the [F2] MEMORY display in the Master Play mode. [MASTER] → Master selection → [EDIT] → Zone selection Zone Edit These parameters are for editing the individual Zones that make up a Master. Zone Edit is available only when the Zone Switch is turned on in the [F2] MEMORY display in the Master Play mode. [F1] TRANS (Transmit) From this display you can set how each Zone transmits MIDI messages when you play the keyboard. TransCh (Transmit Channel) Determines the MIDI Transmit Channel for each Zone. Settings: 1 ~ 16 TGSwitch (Tone Generator Switch) Determines whether or not MIDI data for each Zone is transmitted to the internal tone generator. Settings: on, off Determines whether or not MIDI data for each Zone is transmitted to an external MIDI device. MIDISwitch Settings: on, off [F2] NOTE From this display you can set the pitch- and keyboard-related parameters for each Zone — allowing you to set up Zone splits and determine the pitch range for each Zone. Determines the amount in octaves by which the range of the Zone is shifted up or down. Octave Settings: -3 ~ 0 (Default) ~ +3 Determines the amount in semitones by which the range of the Zone is shifted up or down. Transpose Settings: -11 ~ 0 (Default) ~ +11 NoteLimitH, L (High, Low) Determines the lowest and highest notes of the range for each Zone. The selected Zone will sound only when you play notes within this range. Settings: C -2 ~ G8 n You can also set the range directly from the keyboard, by holding down the [INFORMATION] button and pressing the desired low and high keys. [F3] TX SW (Transmit Switch) From this display you can set how the playing of each individual Zone affects transmission of various MIDI messages, such as Control Change and Program Change messages. When the relevant parameter is set to “on,” playing the selected Zone will transmit the corresponding MIDI messages. Note that two different display types are provided (see below). Each display type features the same settings in a different format; use the type you feel most comfortable with. • Display showing four Zones • Display showing all parameters for one Zone Keep in mind that since all the available parameters cannot be simultaneously displayed in the four-Zone display, you will need to use the cursor controls to scroll the display in order to see and set the other parameters. Settings: Reference Master Mode 272 Bank (TG) Determines whether or not to transmit Bank Select MSB/LSB messages to the internal tone generator. PC (TG) Determines whether or not to transmit Program Change messages to the internal tone generator. Bank (MIDI) Determines whether or not to transmit Bank Select MSB/LSB messages to the external tone generator via MIDI. PC (MIDI) Determines whether or not to transmit Program Change messages to the external tone generator via MIDI. PB (Pitch Bend) Determines whether or not to transmit Pitch Bend messages to the internal and external tone generator. Owner’s Manual Master Job mode Zone Edit MW (Modulation Wheel) Determines whether or not to transmit MIDI messages generated by using the Modulation Wheel to the internal and external tone generator. RB (Ribbon Controller) Determines whether or not to transmit MIDI messages generated by using the Ribbon Controller to the internal and external tone generator. ChAT (Channel Aftertouch) Determines whether or not to transmit Channel Aftertouch messages generated by pressing the keys to the internal and external tone generator. FC1 (Foot Controller1) FC2 (Foot Controller2) Determines whether or not to transmit MIDI messages generated by pressing the optional Foot Controller to the internal and external tone generator. Sus (Sustain) Determines whether or not to transmit Sustain messages generated by pressing the Footswitch connected to the SUSTAIN jack to the internal and external tone generator. FS (Footswitch) Determines whether or not to transmit MIDI messages generated by pressing the Footswitch connected to the ASSIGNABLE jack to the internal and external tone generator. Knob Determines whether or not to transmit MIDI messages generated by using the Knobs to the internal and external tone generator. Slider Determines whether or not to transmit MIDI messages generated by using the Sliders to the internal and external tone generator. BC (Breath Controller) Determines whether or not to transmit MIDI messages generated by using the Breath controller connected to the BREATH connector to the internal and external tone generator. Vol (Volume) Determines whether or not to transmit Volume messages to the internal and external tone generator. Pan Determines whether or not to transmit Pan messages to the internal and external tone generator. [F4] PRESET From this display you can make the Voice-related settings for each Zone, in the selected Master program number. In this way, selecting a different Master automatically calls up a completely different set of Voices and Voice-related settings for the four Zones. BankMSB, BankLSB, PgmChange (Program Change) Determines the Voice assignment for each Zone in the selected Master. Settings: Refer to the Voice List in the separate Data List booklet. Determines the output level of the Voice in each Zone. Volume Settings: 0 ~ 127 Determines the stereo pan position of the Voice in each Zone. Pan Settings: L64 (Left) ~ C (Center) ~ R63 (Right) [F5] KN/CS (Knob/Control Slider) From this display you can determine which Control Change numbers are used for the Knobs and Sliders for each Zone. These settings are available only when the Knob/Slider parameter (in the [F2] OTHER display in Common Edit) is set to “zone.” Settings: off, 1~95 Master Job mode [MASTER] → [JOB] The Master Job mode contains two convenient operations (called “Jobs”) — one letting you initialize (reset) the Master data, and the other letting you transmit your edited Master data to an external MIDI device or computer. After setting parameters as required from the selected display, press the [ENTER] button to execute the Job. [F1] INIT (Initialize) This function lets you reset (initialize) all Master parameters to their default settings. It also allows you to selectively initialize certain parameters, such as Common settings, settings for each Zone, and so on — very useful when creating a completely new Master from scratch. Parameter Types (for Initializing): All, Common, Zone All settings for the selected Master are initialized. Common Common parameter settings for the selected Master are initialized. Zone You can initialize the Zone setting to one of the following three types. Split Splits the keyboard range using Zone 1 and Zone 2. “UpperCh” determines the MIDI transmit channel of the upper range of the keyboard, “LowerCh” determines the MIDI transmit channel of the lower range of the keyboard, and “SplitPoint” determines the note (C2 ~ G8) number which separates the upper range and lower range of the keyboard. 4Zone Initializes all four Zones. Layer Lets you layer two parts using Zone 1 and Zone 2. “UpperCh” and “LowerCh” determine the MIDI transmit channels of the two Zones respectively. Owner’s Manual Reference Master Mode ALL 273 Master Store mode Zone Edit [F4] BULK (Bulk Dump) This function lets you send all your edited parameter settings for the currently selected Master to a computer or another MIDI device for data archiving. For details, see page 185. n In order to execute Bulk Dump, you’ll need to set the correct MIDI Device Number, with the following operation: [UTILITY] → [F5] MIDI → [SF1] CH → DeviceNo. Master Store mode [MASTER] → Master selection → [STORE] This function lets you store your edited Master to User memory (Flash ROM). For details, refer to page 137 in the Quick Guide section. Reference Master Mode 274 Owner’s Manual Information Displays Appendix Information Displays The convenient Information displays let you see at-a-glance some of the more important settings relevant to each mode. Select the desired mode, then press the [INFORMATION] button to call up the Information display for that mode. To exit from the display, press the button again (or any other panel button). Voice mode Rev (Reverb), Cho (Chorus) Indicates the currently selected effect type for each effect block (page 179). Song mode ● Song Play mode Bank Indicates the Bank/Number (page 60) of the currently selected Voice. EL 1234 Indicates the currently selected Voice, on/off status of the four Elements and mono/poly (page 79) status. Indicates the amount of currently unused (available) memory (DRAM) for song recording. Porta (Portamento) Indicates the Portamento switch on/off status of the currently selected Voice. ● Song Mixing mode PB (Pitch Bend) Indicates the Upper/Lower setting of the Pitch Bend range. InsA (Insertion A), InsB (Insertion B), Rev (Reverb), Cho (Chorus) Indicates the currently selected effect type for each effect block (page 179). Performance mode PlugInfo/Port (Plug-in board installation status) Indicates the Plug-in board name and its MIDI port number page 265) at the right of the slot number. When PolyExpand (page 265) is set to on in the Utility mode, “P” is indicated at the left of the slot number. Ins (Insertion), InsPLG (Plug-in Insertion) Indicates the Part number to which the Insertion effect is applied and the Part number to which the Plug-in Insertion effect is applied (when the PLG100-VH is installed). Rev (Reverb), Cho (Chorus) Bank Indicates the Bank/Number (page 67) of the currently selected Performance. Indicates the currently selected effect type for each effect block (page 180). 1 (Plug-in board 1), 2 (Plug-in board 2), 3 (Plug-in board 3) Indicates the installation status of the respective Plug-in board. The Plug-in board name is displayed at the right of the corresponding slot number. When PolyExpand (page 265) is set to on in the Utility mode, “P” is indicated at the left of the slot number. Ins (Insertion), InsPLG (Plug-in Insertion) Appendix Indicates the Part number to which the Insertion effect is applied and the Part number to which the Plug-in Insertion effect is applied (when the PLG100-VH is installed). Owner’s Manual 275 Information Displays Pattern mode File mode ● Pattern Play mode Indicates the amount of currently unused (available) memory (DRAM) for Pattern Phrase recording. ● Pattern Mixing mode Same as in the Song Mixing mode. ● Mixing Voice Edit mode Card Free/USB Free Indicates the amount of currently available (unused) memory of the SmartMedia inserted to the Card slot or the USB storage device connected to the MOTIF ES. Partition Same as in the Voice mode. Indicates the mounted partition of the connected USB storage device. Sampling mode Current Dir (Current Directory) Indicates the currently selected directory. ● Sampling mode Master mode SampleMemory Indicates the amount of memory used by Sampling. RecordableSize Mode Indicates the amount of the available sampling memory (unused memory) and the available sampling time. Indicates the mode and program number memorized to the currently selected Master. n Keep in mind that 320 KB of memory in the installed DIMMs is needed for wave (sample) management, even if no actual samples are contained in memory. ZoneSwitch Indicates the on/off status of the Zone switch. ZoneTCH (Zone Transmit Channel) Indicates the MIDI transmit channel of each Zone (when the Zone Switch is set to on). Utility mode Remote Control mode PlugInfo/Port (Plug-in board installation status) Indicates the Plug-in board name and its MIDI port number (page 265) at the right of the slot number. When PolyExpand (page 265) is set to on in the Utility mode, “P” is indicated at the left of the slot number. MIDI IN/OUT Indicates which physical output terminal(s) will be used for transmitting/receiving MIDI data: MIDI IN/OUT/THRU, USB, or mLAN (when the optional mLAN16E has been installed). Appendix 276 Owner’s Manual For details, see page 152. Display Messages Display Messages Explanation Confirms whether you want to execute a specified operation or not. Press [INC/YES] or [DEC/NO] as required. Arp memory full The internal memory for Arpeggio data is full, preventing storing the recorded sequence data as an Arpeggio. Arpeggio type stored The current Arpeggio type has been stored to one of the [SF1] - [SF5] buttons. Bad disk or card. The SmartMedia or USB storage device is unusable. Format the SmartMedia or USB storage device and try again. Bulk protected. Bulk data was received when RcvBulk was set to “protect.” (See page 264.) Can’t find associated files. The related voice file cannot be found when loading an AKAI S1000/S3000 format file. Can’t undo OK? [YES]/[NO] When certain Song/Pattern Jobs are executed, internal memory becomes too full for use of the Undo operation. Press [INC/YES] if this is OK, or [DEC/NO] to abort the operation. Try again after erasing unwanted Songs, Patterns, or User phrases. Choose user phrase. You have attempted to record a Pattern track to which a preset phrase is assigned. If you wish to use a preset phrase as raw material for Pattern recording, copy it to a User phrase before recording. Completed. The specified load, save, format, or other Job has been completed. Copy protected. You have attempted to export or save a copy-protected digital audio source. Device number is off. Bulk data cannot be transmitted/received since the device number is off. Device number mismatch. Bulk data cannot be transmitted/received since the device numbers don’t match. Digital in unlocked. Digital input signal of the AIEB2 is unlocked (not properly received or recorded). Disk or card full. The SmartMedia or USB storage device is full and no more data can be saved. Use a new SmartMedia or USB storage device, or make space by erasing unwanted data from the SmartMedia or USB storage device. Disk or card not ready. A SmartMedia or USB storage device is not properly inserted in or connected to the MOTIF ES. Disk or card read/write error. An error occurred while reading or writing to/from a SmartMedia or USB storage device. Disk or card write protected. The SmartMedia or USB storage device is write protected, or you have attempted to write to a read-only medium such as CD-ROM. Effect plug-in is not in slot 1. The Effect Plug-in board does not work because it has not been installed to slot 1. The Effect Plug-in board should be installed to slot 1. Executing... A format operation or Job is being executed. Please wait. File already exists. A file having the same name as the one you are about to save already exists. File not found. The file of the specified type cannot be found on the SmartMedia/USB storage device Folder is too deep. Directories below this level cannot be accessed. Illegal check box. No check boxes have been checked in a Sequencer track Job which requires a check box selection. Check the appropriate check box. Illegal file The file specified for loading is unusable by the MOTIF ES or cannot be loaded in the current mode. Illegal file name. The specified file name is invalid. Try entering a different name. Illegal input. An invalid input or value has been specified. Check the input method or value. Illegal measure. An invalid measure number has been specified in the Song/Pattern mode. Select the measure again. Illegal phrase number. An invalid phrase number has been specified in the Pattern mode. Select the phrase again. Illegal sample data. The sample file specified for loading is unusable by the MOTIF ES. Illegal track number. An invalid track number has been specified in the Song/Pattern mode. Select the track again. Incompatible USB device A USB device which cannot be used with the MOTIF ES has been connected to the USB TO DEVICE connector. Meter mismatch In the Pattern Job mode, the meter (time signature) of the destination Pattern is different from the meter of the source Pattern. MIDI buffer full. Failed to process the MIDI data because too much data was received at one time. MIDI checksum error. An error occurred when receiving bulk data. MIDI data error. An error occurred when receiving MIDI data. Mixing stored In the Song/Pattern mode, the Mixing settings have been loaded from the file. Mixing Voice full The Mixing Voice cannot be stored because the number of Voices already stored has exceeded the maximum capacity. Multi plug-in is not in slot 3. The Multi-Part Plug-in board does not work because it has not been installed to slot 3. The Multi-Part Plug-in board should be installed to slot 3. No data. When a Song/Pattern Job is executed, the selected track or range contains no data. Select an appropriate track or range. In addition, this message appears when a Job related to a Mixing Voice cannot be executed because the specified Mixing Voice is not available. No DIMM Memory Installed. An appropriate pair of expansion DIMMs is not properly installed, or the pair is not properly matched (page 289). No F7 (End of Exc.) Exclusive data has been entered or changed without the necessary “End of Exclusive” byte (F7). Make sure F7 is included. Owner’s Manual Appendix LCD Indication Are you sure ? [YES]/[NO] 277 Display Messages LCD Indication Appendix 278 Explanation No response from USB device There is no response from the USB device connected to the USB TO DEVICE terminal. No sample data. This message appears when a sample-related Job cannot be executed because the specified sample is not available. Not empty folder You have attempted to delete a folder that contains data. Now checking plug-in board. The MOTIF ES is checking the Plug-in board installation status during power-on. Now loading... (xxxx) Indicates that a file is being loaded. Now saving... (xxxx) Indicates that a file is being saved. Now scanning auto loaded files Scanning for the files specified for Auto Load. Now working... Executing the memory arrangement after finishing Sampling or canceling the Load/Save operation by pressing the [EXIT] button. Overwrite? [YES]/[NO] A save operation will overwrite data on the SmartMedia/USB storage device, and this message confirms whether it is OK to continue or not. Press [INC/YES] or [DEC/NO] as required. Pattern length mismatch. A Pattern Job will result in the length of a Pattern being greater than 256 measures. Phrase length mismatch A Pattern Job will result in the length of a phrase being greater than 256 measures. Phrase number overflow The maximum number of phrases (256) has been exceeded when recording, executing a Pattern Job, or editing. Please keep power on. The data is being written to Flash ROM. Never attempt to turn off the power while data is being written to Flash ROM. Turning the power off while this message is shown results in loss of all user data and may cause the system to freeze (due to corruption of data in the Flash ROM). This may also result in the MOTIF ES being unable to properly start up the next time the power is turned on. Please stop sequencer. The operation you’ve attempted to execute cannot be done during Song/Pattern playback. PLG100 not supported. The Plug-in All Bulk Save function does not apply to the PLG100 series boards. Plug-in1 communication error. The Plug-in board that has been installed to slot 1 does not work. Plug-in1 type mismatch. The User Voice created by using the Plug-in board previously installed to slot 1 (but now removed from the slot) has been selected. Plug-in2 communication error. The Plug-in board that has been installed to slot 2 does not work. Plug-in2 type mismatch. The User Voice created by using the Plug-in board previously installed to slot 2 (but now removed from the slot) has been selected. Plug-in3 communication error. The Plug-in board that has been installed to slot 3 does not work. Plug-in3 type mismatch. The User Voice created by using the Plug-in board previously installed to slot 3 (but now removed from the slot) has been selected. Power on mode stored The setting of the program number automatically selected when turning the power on has been stored. Receiving MIDI bulk The MOTIF is receiving MIDI bulk data. Sample freq is too low. The sampling frequency is too low and the Frequency Convert Job cannot be executed. Sample is protected. The sample cannot be overwritten because it is protected. Sample is too long. The sample size is too large and the Time Stretch Job cannot be executed. Sample is too short. The sample length is too short and the Frequency Convert Job cannot be executed. Sample memory full. The sample memory is full and further sampling operations, Jobs, or load operations cannot be executed. Scene & Arpeggio type stored The Song Scene and current Arpeggio type has been stored to one of the [SF1] - [SF5] buttons. Seq memory full. The internal memory for Sequence data is full, preventing any further operation (such as recording, editing, Job execution, MIDI reception/transmission, or loading from the SmartMedia/USB storage device). Try again after erasing unwanted Song, Pattern, or User phrase data. System memory crashed. Writing data to Flash ROM has failed. This performance uses user voices. The performance you have loaded includes User voice data. Check whether the voice you saved exists at the appropriate User voice bank. Too many favorites You’ve attempted to assign more than 257 voices to the Favorite category. Too many fixed notes When converting the song or pattern data to the Arpeggio data, the amount of different notes in the data to be converted has exceeded sixteen. Too many samples. The maximum overall number of samples (8192) has been exceeded. Transmitting MIDI bulk The MOTIF ES is transmitting MIDI bulk data. USB connection terminated. Press [ENTER]. A break in the connection with the USB storage device has occurred because of an abnormal electric current. Disconnect the USB storage device from the USB TO DEVICE connector, then press the [ENTER] button. USB device connecting Recognizing the USB storage device connected to the USB TO DEVICE terminal. USB power consumption exceeded. The power consumption of the USB storage device connected to the USB TO DEVICE connector exceeds the regulated value. USB transmission error An error occurs when communicating with the USB storage device. Utility stored The settings in the Utility mode have been stored. Owner’s Manual Troubleshooting Troubleshooting No sound is produced even when playing the keyboard • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Are all four Sliders set to appropriate levels (other than zero or minimum)? ............................................................................................................ page 51 Check the value of the [UTILITY] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF1] TG → Volume parameter. ...................................................................................... page 260 Check the setting of the [UTILITY] → [F5] MIDI → [SF2] SWITCH → LocalCtrl parameter. If this is set to off, the internal tone generator will not sound. ....... page 264 Is the power of the MOTIF ES and any external equipment connected to the MOTIF ES turned on? Have you made all the appropriate level settings – including the Master Volume on the MOTIF ES and the volume settings on any connected external equipment? Is the Foot Controller pressed down (when it is connected to the FOOT CONTROLLER jack)?.............................................................................. page 42 Is the MOTIF ES properly connected to related external equipment (e.g., amplifier or speaker) via audio cables? When the Voice produces no sound, are the effect and filter settings appropriate? (Inappropriate filter cutoff frequency settings can result in no sound.) ...... page 197 When the Voice produces no sound, are all four Elements properly turned on?...................................................................................................... page 79 When the Voice produces no sound, is the volume parameter set appropriately in the Voice Common Edit?...................................................... page 190 When the Voice produces no sound, are the parameters in the Voice Element Edit (e.g., Element Switch, Note Limit, Velocity Limit) set appropriately in the Voice Common Edit?......................................................................................................................................................................................... page 195 When the Performance produces no sound, has a Voice been assigned to each Part? Check this in the [PERFORM] → [F2] VOICE display. ...... page 71 When the Performance produces no sound, are the Note Limit, volume, and output parameters of each Part set appropriately?........................ page 71 When playing the keyboard in the Song/Pattern mode produces no sound, check whether or not the Sample Voice or Mixing Voice is assigned to the current Part. ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... page 102 When the Song/Pattern playback produces no sound, are any or all of the tracks muted? .................................................................................... page 58 When the Song/Pattern playback produces no sound, are the output channel of each track in the play mode and the receive channel of each Part in the Mixing mode set appropriately? ............................................................................................................................................................................. page 164 When the Song/Pattern playback produces no sound, is the volume or output setting of each Part in the Mixing mode set appropriately?....... page 233 When the Song/Pattern playback produces no sound, is the MIDI filter set so that note-on messages are blocked in the [SONG] or [PATTERN] → [UTILITY] → [F3] SEQ → [SF2] FILTER display? .................................................................................................................................................... page 262 Playback continues without stopping • When the [ARPEGGIO ON/OFF] button is turned on, press it so that its lamp is turned off. .................................................................................. page 19 • When in the Song mode or Pattern mode, press the [■] (Stop) button. .................................................................................................................. page 20 • When the click sound continues, set the [SONG] or [PATTERN] → [UTILITY] → [F3] SEQ → [SF1] CLICK → Mode parameter to something other than “all.” ..... page 262 Sound level is too low • Are the MIDI volume or MIDI expression settings too low (by using the Foot Controller)?....................................................................................... page 42 • Is the cutoff frequency of the filters set too high/low?............................................................................................................................................. page 161 • When the Song/Pattern playback produces a soft sound, is the velocity offset in the Groove display set too low?.............................................. page 114 Distorted sound • • • • Are the effect settings appropriate?........................................................................................................................................................................ page 177 Are the filter settings appropriate? (Excessively high filter resonance settings can cause distortion.).................................................................. page 161 Is the MASTER VOLUME set so high that clipping is occurring? ............................................................................................................................. page 18 Is the volume of each Element in the Voice mode or the volume of each part in the Performance mode or the volume of each track/Part in the Song/ Pattern mode set too high? ..................................................................................................................................................................................... page 213 Sound is cut off • Are you exceeding the maximum polyphony of the MOTIF ES? ............................................................................................................................ page 162 Only one note sounds at a time Appendix • When this situation occurs in the Voice mode, is the [VOICE] → [F4] PORTA → Mono/Poly parameter set to “mono” ? If you wish to play the chord, set this parameter to “poly.” ......................................................................................................................................................................................... page 188 • When this situation occurs in the Song mode/Pattern mode, is the Mono/Poly parameter set to “mono” in the [SONG] or [PATTERN] → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → Part selection → [F1] VOICE → [SF2] MODE display? If you wish to play chords, set this parameter to “poly.” ................................. page 235 Owner’s Manual 279 Troubleshooting Pitch or intervals are wrong • • • • • • • Is the Master Tune parameter in the [UTILITY] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF1] TG display set to a value other than “0”?.......................................... page 260 Is the Note Shift parameter in the [UTILITY] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF1] TG display set to a value other than “0”?.............................................. page 260 When the Voice produces a wrong pitch, check the Micro Tuning setting in the [VOICE] → [EDIT] → [COMMON] → [F1] GENERAL → [SF2] PLY MODE display. .... page 190 When the Voice produces a wrong pitch, is the LFO Pitch Modulation Depth in the Voice Edit mode set too high? ............................................ page 201 When the Performance produces a wrong pitch, is the Note Shift parameter of each Part set to a value other than “0”? ................................... page 218 When the Performance produces a wrong pitch, is the Detune parameter of each Part set to a value other than “0”? ....................................... page 218 When the Song/Pattern playback produces a wrong pitch, is the Note Offset parameter in the Groove display set to a value other than “0”? .................... page 114 No effect is applied • • • • • Is the [EFFECT BYPASS] button turned off? ........................................................................................................................................................... page 177 Have the [REVERB] and [CHORUS] knobs been turned fully counter-clockwise (to the minimum)? ...................................................................... page 50 Have any or all of the Elements’ Effect Output parameters been set to “thru” in the effect setting display in the Voice Edit mode? .................... page 194 Have any or all of the effect types been set to “thru” or “off”?................................................................................................................................ page 179 When this occurs in the Performance mode/Song mode/Pattern mode, check whether the Insertion Switch (INS SW) parameters are set properly or not. ........pages 216, 235 The Edit Indicator appears, even when parameters are not being edited • Keep in mind that even though the Voice Play mode or Performance Play mode is active, simply moving a Knob or Slider changes the current Voice or Performance, automatically displaying the Edit indicator. ................................................................................................................................pages 65, 69 • In the Song Mixing mode or Pattern Mixing mode, keep in mind that simply playing back a Song or Pattern may change the Mixing parameters of the current Song/Pattern, automatically displaying the Edit indicator. ......................................................................................................................... page 104 Arpeggio problems ■ Cannot start the Arpeggio Check whether the [ARPEGGIO ON/OFF] button is turned on or off. When the Arpeggio doesn’t start even though the button is turned on, check the following points. • When the User Arpeggio type is selected, does the currently selected Arpeggio actually contain data?............................................................ page 189 • Are the Arpeggio related parameters such as Note Limit and Velocity Limit set appropriately? ........................................................................... page 191 • When this situation occurs in the Performance mode, check the ArpSwitch parameters for all Parts in the [PERFORM] → [EDIT] → Part selection → [F1] VOICE → [SF2] MODE display. If parameters of all Parts are turned off, the Arpeggio will not be played back even if the [ARPEGGIO ON/OFF] button is turned on. ............................................................................................................................................................................................................... page 216 • When this situation occurs in the Song mode/Pattern mode, check the ArpSwitch parameter in the [SONG] or [PATTERN] → [MIXING] → [EDIT] → Part selection → [F1] VOICE → [SF2] MODE display. If this parameter for the current Part is turned off, Arpeggio playback will not be triggered by your keyboard performance even if the [ARPEGGIO ON/OFF] button is turned on. .................................................................................................... page 235 ■ Cannot stop the Arpeggio • When Arpeggio playback does not stop even if you release the key, set the Arpeggio Hold parameter to “off.” ................................................ page 191 n For details and a list of the Arpeggio related functions, see page 169. Song/Pattern problems ■ The Song/Pattern cannot be started even when pressing the [F] (Play) button. • Does the selected Song or Pattern (phrase) actually contain data? .................................................................................................................pages 57, 59 • Is the Remote Control feature turned on? ............................................................................................................................................................... page 147 • Is the MIDI sync parameter set to internal (using internal clock) in the [UTILITY] → [F5] MIDI → [SF3] SYNC display? ..................................... page 264 ■ Song/Pattern (Phrase) cannot be recorded. • Is there enough free memory for recording? The total MOTIF ES memory capacity determines the number of Songs/Patterns (phrases) that can be recorded. For example, if the memory contains Songs/Patterns (phrases) that use up a large amount of memory, the memory may become full even though the available Pattern or Song numbers are not all used. ........................................................................................................................... page 275 • In the Pattern Record mode, does the specified track to which the Phrase is assigned have preset data? Recording cannot be done to a track that contains preset data. .............................................................................................................................................................................................. page 113 ■ Cannot enter the Pattern Job mode even when pressing the [JOB] button in the Pattern mode. • Check whether the MOTIF ES is in the Patter n Chain mode or not. If so, exit from the Pattern Chain mode, then press the [JOB] button . .................. page 115 Appendix ■ Cannot enter the Pattern Mixing mode even when pressing the [MIXING] button in the Pattern mode. • Check whether the MOTIF ES is in the Patter n Chain mode or not. If so, exit from the Pattern Chain mode, then press the [MIXING] button. ........................ page 115 280 Owner’s Manual Troubleshooting ■ The drum sound is wrong or unexpected when changing the transpose value. • This is normal. Changing the transpose setting while playing a Drum Voice will produce different sounds for the same keys played. Microphone does not work properly • Check the current mode. In the Voice mode and Voice Edit mode, the A/D part which handles the microphone sound cannot be recognized. ......... page 165 • Check whether the Mic/Line parameter is set to “mic” or not in the [UTILITY] → [F2] I/O → [SF1] INPUT display. ............................................. page 261 • Check whether the Gain Knob on the rear panel is set to minimum position or not. ............................................................................................... page 25 Can’t record samples • If you cannot enter the Sampling mode, check whether DIMMs have been installed or not. In order to enter the Sampling mode and record Samples, DIMM modules must be installed. .......................................................................................................................................................................... page 289 • Have you exceeded the maximum allowable number of samples (key banks)? ................................................................................................... page 174 • Is there enough sample memory available? ........................................................................................................................................................... page 276 • Is the Sampling Source setting appropriate?.......................................................................................................................................................... page 172 • Is the Trigger mode set appropriately? ................................................................................................................................................................... page 175 Plug-in Board problems ■ A Plug-in Voice cannot be selected even if the Plug-in Board has been installed. • Check whether the SLOT lamp (from SLOT1 - 3) corresponding to the selected PLG button ([PLG1] - [PLG3]) is turned on or off. .................... page 21 • If the User bank is selected in the [VOICE] → [F2] BANK display, select the preset bank. ................................................................................. page 188 • Check whether the PLG which corresponds to the PLG100-XG slot is selected or not. The Voice on the PLG100-XG cannot be selected in the Voice mode or Performance mode. ................................................................................................................................................................................. page 163 • Check whether the PLG which corresponds to the PLG100-VH slot is selected or not. The PLG100-VH contains no Voices for selection, since it is an Effect Plug-in Board. ................................................................................................................................................................................................ page 74 ■ Plug-in board does not work. • Is the lamp of the corresponding slot number to which the Plug-in board has been installed lit? ........................................................................... page 21 • Has the PLG100-VH been installed to slot 2 or 3? (The PLG100-VH should be installed to slot 1.) ........................................................................ page 78 • Has the PLG100-XG been installed to slot 1 or 2? (The PLG100-XG should be installed to slot 3.)........................................................................ page 77 Computer/MIDI instrument problems ■ Data communication between the computer and the MOTIF ES does not work properly. • Check whether the Port setting on the computer is appropriate or not. • Check whether the MIDI IN/OUT parameter is set properly in the [UTILITY] → [F5] MIDI → [SF4] OTHER display. Set this parameter to “USB” when using a USB cable to connect to the computer. Set this parameter to “mLAN” when using an IEEE 1394 cable to connect to the computer. Set this parameter to “MIDI” when using MIDI cables to connect to the computer. .............................................................................................. page 265 ■ Data communication between the MIDI instrument and the MOTIF ES does not work properly. • Check whether the MIDI IN/OUT parameter is set to “MIDI” or not in the [UTILITY] → [F5] MIDI → [SF4] OTHER display. ................................ page 265 ■ The MOTIF ES does not sound properly even when playing back the song data on the computer or the MIDI instrument connected to the MOTIF ES. • Make sure to set the MOTIF ES to the Song mode or Pattern mode. The Voice mode or Performance mode may not produce the proper sound even when playing back the Song data on the MIDI instrument or the computer connected to the MOTIF ES. ............................................................. page 36 ■ MIDI bulk data transmission/reception does not work properly. • When reception does not work properly, is the Receive Bulk parameter set to “protect” in the [UTILITY] → [F5] MIDI → [SF2] SWITCH display? .................. page 264 • When transmission does not work properly, is the device number of the MIDI instrument connected to the MOTIF ES set to match the DeviceNo. parameter in the [UTILITY] → [F5] MIDI → [SF1] CH display? ............................................................................................................................. page 263 Can’t save data to the SmartMedia card or the USB storage • Is the SmartMedia/USB storage device being used write protected? (Write-protect should be set to off for saving data.).................................... page 28 • Is the SmartMedia/USB storage device being used properly formatted? .............................................................................................................. page 268 Appendix Can’t enter the Edit mode • Is the Category Search function turned on? After exiting from the Category Search function, press the [EDIT] button. ....................................... page 62 • Is the MOTIF ES in the File mode? After exiting from the File mode, press the [EDIT] button. ............................................................................. page 266 Owner’s Manual 281 Installing Optional Hardware Installing Optional Hardware Available devices The following optional devices can be installed to the MOTIF ES. ● Plug-in Boards ● AIEB 2 or mLAN16E ● DIMM Up to three boards can be installed. Installation locations ● Plug-in Boards MOTIF ES6 MOTIF ES7 MOTIF ES8 Plug-in Board cover Plug-in Board cover Plug-in Board cover ● AIEB2, mLAN16E, DIMM MOTIF ES6 Bottom cover for optional units Rear cover for the AIEB2 or mLAN16E MOTIF ES7 Rear cover for the AIEB2 or mLAN16E Bottom cover for optional units MOTIF ES8 Bottom cover for optional units Rear cover for the AIEB2 or mLAN16E Installation Precautions Before installing the optional hardware, make sure you have a Philips screwdriver and ample space to work. Protective cushions or supports for the instrument may also be needed. WARNING • Before beginning installation, switch off the power to the instrument and connected peripherals, and unplug them from the power outlet. Then remove all cables connecting the instrument to other devices. (Leaving the power cord connected while working can result in electric shock. Leaving other cables connected can interfere with work.) Installation or removal of any devices should be started ONLY after the instrument (and the optional hardware) returns to normal room temperature. • Be careful not to drop any screws inside the instrument during installation (this can be prevented by keeping the optional units and cover away from the instrument while attaching). If this does happen, be sure to remove the screw(s) from inside the unit before turning the power on. Loose screws inside the instrument can cause improper operation or serious damage. If you are unable to retrieve a dropped screw, consult your Yamaha dealer for advice. • Install the optional units carefully as described in the procedure below. Improper installation can cause shorts which may result in irreparable damage and pose a fire hazard. • Do not disassemble, modify, or apply excessive force to board areas and connectors on optional units. Bending or tampering with boards and connectors may lead to electric shock, fire, or equipment failures. • Before handling the optional units, you should briefly touch the metal surface to which the optional unit cover is attached (or other such metallic area \ be careful of any sharp edges) with your bare hand so as to drain off any static charge from your body. Note that even a slight amount of electrostatic discharge may cause damage to these components. CAUTION Appendix • It is recommended that you wear gloves to protect your hands from metallic projections on optional units and other components. Touching leads or connectors with bare hands may cause finger cuts, and may also result in poor electrical contact or electrostatic damage. • Handle the optional units with care. Dropping or subjecting them to any kind of shock may cause damage or result in a malfunction. • Be careful of static electricity. Static electricity discharge can damage the IC chips on the Plug-in board. Before you handle the optional Plug-in board, to reduce the possibility of static electricity, touch the metal parts other than the painted area or a ground wire on the devices that are grounded. • Do not touch the exposed metal parts in the circuit board. Touching these parts may result in a faulty contact. • When moving a cable, be careful not to let it catch on the circuit Plug-in board. Forcing the cable in anyway may cut the cable, cause damage, or result in a malfunction. • Be careful not to misplace any of the screws since all of them are used. • Do not use any screws other than what are installed on the instrument. 282 Owner’s Manual Installing Optional Hardware Optional Plug-in Board Installation A variety of optional Plug-in boards sold separately let you expand the voice library of your instrument. For details about the Plug-in Board line up which can be used with the MOTIF ES, see page 74. The MOTIF ES provides three slots on the rear panel for Plug-in Boards, allowing you to install up to three boards for simultaneous use. n The Vocal Harmony Plug-in board (PLG100-VH) can be installed only to slot 1. n The Multi part Plug-in board (PLG-100XG) can be installed only to slot 3. n The Single part Plug-in board can be installed to any of three slots. Installing the Plug-in Board 1 Turn the power of the MOTIF ES off, and disconnect the AC power cord. Also, make sure to disconnect the MOTIF ES from any connected external devices. 2 Remove the large screw from the expansion bay cover on the rear panel using a Phillips screwdriver. Keep the removed screw in a safe place. It will be used when reattaching the cover to the instrument. ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT L R R 3 2 1 the Plug-in board from the inside of the MOTIF ES. The slots are assigned to the color-coded cables as follows: Slot 3 – Green Slot 2 – Yellow Slot 1 – Orange Cable for Slot 3 (Green) Plug- in SLOT 3 2 1 GREEN YELLOW ORANGE Slot 3 Cable for Slot 2 (Yellow) Cable for Slot 1 (Orange) MOTIF ES6 / MOTIF ES7 Plug-in SLOT 3 Remove the ribbon cables that are to be connected to Slot 2 Slot 1 ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT R L R OUTPUT L MONO PHONES A D INPUT R L GAIN GREEN YELLOW ORANGE OUTPUT L MONO PHONES A D INPUT R L GAIN 4 Insert the board along the guide rails about two-thirds of the way inside the MOTIF ES, with the connector side face up and toward you. Plug-in SLOT 3 2 1 GREEN YELLOW ORANGE Plug-in SLOT ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT L R R OUTPUT L MONO PHONES A D INPUT R L 3 2 1 GREEN YELLOW ORANGE GAIN ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT R L R OUTPUT L MONO PHONES A D INPUT R L GAIN MOTIF ES8 Slot 3 Plug-in SLOT GREEN YELLOW ORANGE Slot 2 Slot 1 Securely insert the board into the appropriate slot, taking care that the board isn’t jammed between slots. GREEN YELLOW ORANGE Appendix Plug-in SLOT Owner’s Manual 283 Installing Optional Hardware 5 With the board still protruding slightly from the expansion bay, bring the cable end around and connect it to the board. Make sure to connect the proper cable, matching the color of the cable to the slot used. Also, take care not to pull too strongly on the cable as you connect it to the board. Plug-in Connector Press the connectors together until the two notches lock into the sockets. Notch Connector from MOTIF ES 7 Replace the cover with the screw you removed in step 2 above. 8 Check that the installed Plug-in board is functioning properly. After connecting the AC power cord to the MOTIF ES, turn on the power. A message appears indicating that the installed Plug-in Board is being checked. The main display then appears and the corresponding slot indicator at the right top of the front panel lights. This indicates that the board has been successfully installed. If the cable is not connected properly (refer to the notes above) or firmly, the indicator will not light. Plug-in board In this example, a Plug-in board has been installed to slot 1. Plug-in SLOT 3 2 1 GREEN YELLOW ORANGE Slot indicator lit Integrated Sampling Sequencer / Modular Synthesis Plug-in System / Real-time External Control Surface MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER PRE 1 PRE 2 PRE 3 PRE 4 DRUM KITS PRE 5 PRE 6 USER 1 USER 2 GM PLG 1 PLG 2 PLG 3 FAVORITES A. PIANO KEYBOARD ORGAN GUITAR/ PLUCKED BASS STRINGS BRASS REED/PIPE D E SLOT 1 ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT R L R OUTPUT L MONO PHONES A D INPUT R L GAIN n The Vocal Harmony Plug-in board (PLG100-VH) can be installed only to slot 1. n The Multi part Plug-in board (PLG-100XG) can be installed only to slot 3. 6 Insert the Plug-in board the rest of the way into the expansion bay. Carefully put the ribbon cable back into the MOTIF ES, making sure that no part of the cable sticks out of the instrument. Plug-in SLOT ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT R L R 3 2 1 GREEN YELLOW ORANGE OUTPUT L MONO PHONES Appendix 284 Owner’s Manual A D INPUT R L GAIN A B C SYN LEAD SYN PAD/ CHOIR SYN COMP DRUM/ CHROMATIC PERCUSSION PERCUSSION SLOT 2 SLOT 3 F G H SE MUSICAL FX COMBI CATEGORY SEARCH BANK SECTION GROUP Installing Optional Hardware Optional AIEB2 or mLAN16E Installation By installing an optional mLAN expansion board (mLAN16E) or an I/O expansion board (AIEB2), you can increase the input/output capability and interfacing options of the MOTIF ES. Installing the AIEB2 MOTIF ES6 / MOTIF ES7 1 Turn the power of the MOTIF ES off, and disconnect the AC power cord. Also, make sure to disconnect the MOTIF ES from any connected external devices. 2 Turn over the MOTIF ES so that the keyboard faces down, giving you direct access to the underside of the instrument. To protect the Knobs, Wheels and Sliders from damage, place the keyboard so the four corners are supported by something that provides sufficient support like magazines or cushions. Bottom ↓ Rear side Slide the cover away to remove. Bottom ↓ Rear side View of the keyboard from the bottom MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER MOTIF ES8 Place supports at all four corners, taking care not to touch the Knobs, Wheels and Sliders. Bottom ↓ Rear side CAUTION Since the instrument — particularly the MOTIF ES8 — is very heavy, this procedure should not be done alone, but by two or three people. 3 Remove the cover from the bottom. With the rear panel of the instrument facing you, remove the screws from the cover and slide the cover away to remove it. (The MOTIF ES6 and MOTIF ES7 have seven screws, while the MOTIF ES8 has five.) On the MOTIF ES6/7, slide the cover away from you (toward the front of the instrument, as shown). On the MOTIF ES8, slide the cover to the right. Bottom Slide the cover away to remove. ↓ Rear side Appendix Keep the removed screws in a safe place. They will be used when reattaching the cover to the instrument after installing the AIEB2. Owner’s Manual 285 Installing Optional Hardware 4 Remove the three screws from the rear cover while holding it from inside the MOTIF ES with your left hand. 6 Remove the AIEB2 from its package. The AIEB2 has one flat ribbon cable and two power cables. Since these two power cables are used for the main body and are not needed when installing to the MOTIF ES, you can remove them from the AIEB2. AIEB2 Rear side of the MOTIF ES Remove the two power cables. Keep the removed screws in a safe place. They will be used when re-attaching the cover to the instrument after installing the AIEB2. 5 Remove the AIEB2 power cables from the hook shaped cable clip in the MOTIF ES. 7 Connect the flat ribbon cable coming from AIEB2 to the MOTIF ES6 / MOTIF ES7 ↑ Top (keyboard side) of the MOTIF ES circuit board of the MOTIF ES. Be careful to connect the cable in the proper direction as shown. Underside Flat ribbon cable of the AIEB2 Align the connectors as shown. Connector on the circuit board of the MOTIF ES ↓ Rear panel MOTIF ES8 ↑ Top (keyboard side) of the MOTIF ES Unlatch the cable clip by pulling out the tab as shown. Replace the clip after pulling out the power cable. ↓ Rear panel AIEB2 Underside ↓ Rear panel Appendix 286 Owner’s Manual Installing Optional Hardware 8 Connect the power cable coming from MOTIF ES to the AIEB2. Connect the 3-pin cable to the CN3 connector of the AIEB2, and the 4-pin cable to the CN1 connector. 10 Let the ribbon cable fall into place between the AIEB2 and the circuit board of the MOTIF ES. Underside of the MOTIF ES Slide the flat ribbon cable in the space between the MOTIF ES and the AIEB2. AIEB2 ↓ Rear panel of the MOTIF ES Connect the 4-pin cable to the CN1 connector Connect the 3-pin cable to the CN3 connector ↓ Rear panel Underside of the MOTIF ES * Make sure to properly match the cables and connectors. Avoid applying excessive force when connecting. 9 Fasten the AIEB2 to the MOTIF ES. Flip the unit over, so that the bottom of the plate can be seen, and that each connector section of the AIEB2 can be seen from the back (rear) side of MOTIF ES. Supporting the unit with one hand, attach it to the rear of the MOTIF ES with the three screws you removed in step 4. If you start replacing the screws from the center screw, it will be easy to replace the remaining screws. Flip over the AIEB2 taking care not to bend or damage the flat ribbon cable. AIEB2 ↓ Rear panel 11 Re-install the cover you removed in step #3, in reverse order. Bottom of the AIEB2 Appendix If you start replacing the screws from the center screw, it will be easy to replace the remaining screws. Owner’s Manual 287 Installing Optional Hardware Installing the mLAN16E 7 Fasten the mLAN16E to the MOTIF ES. 1~4 Using the same procedure as in steps 1 - 4 of “Installing the AIEB2” above, remove the cover on the underside of the MOTIF ES, then remove the cover of the mLAN-I/ O expansion bay on the rear panel. Flip the unit over, so that each connector section of the mLAN16E can be seen from the back side of MOTIF ES. Supporting the unit with one hand, attach it to the rear of the MOTIF ES with the two screws you removed in step #4, as shown below. 5 Remove the mLAN16E from its package. mLAN16E 6 Insert the connector on the other end of the flat ribbon cable to the circuit board of the MOTIF ES. 8 Separate the cover you removed in step #4 into two parts (A and B shown below), then attach part A to the rear panel of the MOTIF ES, covering the empty space left by the installation of the mLAN16E. Remove the screw to separate the cover into two parts. ↓ Rear panel of the MOTIF ES Flip over the mLAN16E and fasten it to the MOTIF ES. B A Underside of mLAN16E ↓ Rear panel of the MOTIF ES 9 Let the flat ribbon cable fall into place between the mLAN16E and the circuit board of the MOTIF ES. 10 Re-install the cover you removed in step #3, in reverse Appendix order. 288 Owner’s Manual Installing Optional Hardware Optional DIMM Installation This section explains how to install DIMM memory modules to the MOTIF ES. Compatible DIMMs Location for DIMM installation The MOTIF ES does not necessarily support all commercially available DIMMs. Yamaha cannot guarantee operation of DIMMs that you purchase. Before purchasing DIMMs, please consult your Yamaha dealer, or an authorized Yamaha distributor (see list at end of the Owner’s Manual) for advice, or see the following page: DIMM sockets http://www.yamahasynth.com/ DIMM Type and DIMM Configuration • Yamaha recommends that you purchase DIMMs that conform to the JEDEC* standard. Please be aware, however, that conformance to this standard does not constitute a guarantee that the DIMMs will operate correctly on the MOTIF ES. Underside of the MOTIF ES ↓ Rear panel Installing the DIMM modules to the sockets Make sure that the DIMM module is aligned correctly before you install it. * JEDEC (Joint Electron Device Engineering Council) sets standards for terminal configurations within electronic devices. Notch for alignment Ejector lever • Use only 168-pin DIMMs of 64, 128 or 256 MB capacity (synchronized DRAM; PC100 or PC133). • When installing DIMMs, make sure to install them in a matched pair of the same capacity. You cannot install only one module and leave the second memory socket open. Also make sure each DIMM in the pair is of the same manufacturer and the same type. DIMMs of different makers and configurations may not work together. • When purchasing DIMMs, make sure that the DIMM design does not utilize more than 18 memory chips per module. (DIMMs comprised of more than 18 chips do not operate correctly on the MOTIF ES.) 64MB x 2 = 128MB 128MB x 2 = 256MB 256MB x 2 = 512MB Insert the DIMM vertically in the socket. 5 Re-install the cover you removed in step #3, in reverse order (page 285). 6 Check that the installed DIMMs are functioning properly. Set the MOTIF ES right-side up, and connect the power cord to the rear-panel AC INLET jack and an AC outlet. Turn on the power, go to the SAMPLING display by pressing the [INTEGRATED SAMPLING] button, and press the [INFORMATION] button (page 276). If the DIMMs have been installed properly, the appropriate available memory size is indicated in the display. n DIMM Installation Press it in firmly until it “snaps” or locks in place. If the DIMMs have not been installed properly, the MOTIF ES may freeze when you press the [INTEGRATED SAMPLING] button. If this occurs, turn the power off, perform the instructions above again, and make sure to install the DIMMs firmly in step #4. Removing DIMMs 1~3 Use the same operation as in “Installing the AIEB2.” 4 Insert the two DIMMs into the DIMM sockets. Press the ejector lever until the DIMM unlocks. Pull the DIMM vertically out of the socket. Appendix 168-pin DIMMs Owner’s Manual 289 Glossary Glossary This section explains in detail various words and terms that were not covered in the manual. Another resource for looking up unfamiliar technical terms related to music, synthesis and audio is a special website we’ve prepared, the Glossary for Electronic Musical Instruments. If you come across a musical or technical term you don’t know, click on the following URL. ■ Glossary for Electronic Musical Instruments http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/word/index.html (This URL and title may be changed without notice.) A Directory The function or process of hearing the edited sample (in the Sampling function). This is a path created on a data storage device (such as SmartMedia card or hard disk), allowing a tree-like hierarchical organization of data files and folders. Effectively a virtual file cabinet, this is the place where files are stored and arranged according to type or application. C F Channel Filter There are two types of channels: MIDI channels, which are used to transmit MIDI messages, and audio channels, which are used to send audio signals. You can set the MIDI channel in the display of the MOTIF ES. The MOTIF ES provides the following three types of Filter. Clock [2] A function (referred to as “Event View Filter”) that lets you select the event types that appear on the Event List display in the Song Edit/Pattern Edit display (page 225). Audition [1] A unit of note resolution for MIDI Sequence data. The sequencer determines the playback position of the Song or Pattern (MIDI sequence data) by using the units Measure, Beat, and Clock. [1] A circuit or processor that modifies tone by blocking or passing a specific frequency range of the sound. This is one of the Voice parameters (page 161). [3] A function (referred to as “MIDI Filter”) that determines which MIDI events will be transmitted/recognized via the MIDI IN/OUT (page 262). [2] Also referred to as “MIDI Clock” or “Timing Clock” defined as System Realtime Message in MIDI. This message is transmitted at a fixed interval (24 times per 1/4 note) to synchronize connected MIDI instruments. On the MOTIF ES, the Utility mode lets you select whether the instrument’s internal clock will be used as the Timing Clock, or external Timing Clock messages received via MIDI IN will be used. This is an organizational feature on a data storage device (such as SmartMedia card or hard disk), allowing you to group data files together according to type or application. Folders can be nested in hierarchical order for organizing data. (Also see “Directory.”) L Common LSB This edit related term refers to the editing of parameters that affect all Elements or Parts of a program. For each program, this term is used as listed below. [1] An abbreviation for Least Significant Byte, referring to the lower byte of data when MIDI control change data (such as Bank Select and Data Entry) is divided into two bytes (the MSB and LSB) for transmission. • • • • • • • [2] An abbreviation for Least Significant Bit, referring to the lowest bit among eight bits that make up one byte. Normal Voice.................Common Edit and Element Edit Plug-in Voice .................Common Edit and Element Edit Drum Voice....................Common Edit and Key Edit Performance .................Common Edit and Part Edit Song Mixing ..................Common Edit and Part Edit Pattern Mixing ..............Common Edit and Part Edit Master ...........................Common Edit and Zone Edit D Destination The MOTIF ES provides the following three types of destination. [1] In copy operations, this refers to the location to which the original “source” data or file is to be copied. [2] In sampling operations, this refers to the internal memory area to which the external audio “source” is to be recorded. [3] In the Controller Set function, this refers to the parameter adjusted by the controller defined as “Source.” Appendix 290 Folder Owner’s Manual M MSB [1] An abbreviation for Most Significant Byte, referring to the upper byte of data when MIDI control change data (such as Bank Select and Data Entry) is divided into two bytes (the MSB and LSB) for transmission. [2] An abbreviation for Most Significant Bit, referring to the uppermost bit among the eight bits that make up one byte. In MIDI, this “bit” is very important because it determines whether the byte to which this “bit” belongs is a status byte or data byte. O Offset A type of editing in which a specified value (the “offset”) is added to or subtracted from the current parameter value. Unlike normal editing, in which the parameter is given a specific, new value, offset editing changes the parameter relative to its current value. Glossary P Parameter A setting or data item which you can edit in the various mode and sub mode displays. Part This refers to sound producing sections in the tone generator block that make up a Song, Pattern or Performance. In the Performance mode, all four Parts are set to the same MIDI channel; in the Song/ Pattern mode, each Part can be independently assigned to a spceifc MIDI receive channel. [1] In copy operations, this refers to the original file or data which is to be copied. [2] In sampling operations, this refers to external audio which is to be recorded (to the internal memory “destination” area) (page 172). [3] In the Controller Set function, this refers to the controller that is assigned to adjust a particular parameter (the “destination”) (page 155). Synchronization Refers to the function or process of “locking” the timing of two devices (for example, two sequencers connected via MIDI), using the timing clock of one to control the other. Preset This refers to pre-programmed data supplied with the internal memory of the instrument as shipped from the factory. There are various types of Preset data, such as Preset Voices and Preset Phrases. The other type of data, User, is for data you’ve created or edited on the instrument (or computer), such as User Voices and User Phrases. T Track A memory location on the sequencer where musical performance (MIDI event) and audio data is recorded. Tune/Tuning Quantize A function that lets you “clean up” or “tighten” the timing of notes. The MOTIF ES provides three different Quantize functions: [1] One of the Jobs provided in the Song Job mode/Pattern Job mode, which lets you “clean up” or “tighten” the timing of notes you’ve recorded in Realtime recording (page 227). [2] A function in the Song Record mode/Pattern Record mode, which aligns the timing of notes automatically as you record (page 222). [3] A parameter that determines the timing (such as measure, 1/2 note, and 1/4 note) by which the pattern actually switches when changing a pattern during playback (page 262). R Record A process of matching the pitch of two or more instruments when playing in an ensemble. Normally, A3 is tuned to 440 Hz. There are two types of tune: Coarse Tune that adjusts the tuning in semitones and Fine Tune that adjusts the tuning in cents. In addition, the MOTIF ES has a Voice parameter (Micro Tuning) that lets you set the tuning of each individual note of the keyboard. U User Refers to the data you create via various functions on the MOTIF ES (or computer). There are various types of User data, such as User Voices and User Phrases. The other type of data, Preset, refers to data that has been created or pre-programmed for the instrument at the factory, such as Preset Voices and Preset Phrases. V On the MOTIF ES, this term refers to the following operations. Velocity [1] Recording of your musical performance using the keyboard or controllers to a Song track as MIDI events. Song Record mode ....................................................page 118 A parameter within the MIDI Note On message that conveys the force of the note. [2] Recording of your musical performance using the keyboard or controllers to a Pattern track as MIDI events. Pattern Record mode .................................................page 110 [3] Recording the audio signal from a microphone or an external audio source (played back via the audio equipment such as a CD player) to the internal memory as a Sample (Audio data). Sampling Record mode ................................ pages 94 and 107 S Sequencer Voice A musical instrument sound built into the MOTIF ES. The following types of Voices are available on the instrument. • • • • • • • Normal Voice ................ page 160 Drum Voice ................... page 160 Plug-in Voice................. page 76 Board Voice .................. page 76 Mixing Voice ................. page 105 Sample Voice................ page 173 Phrase Voice................. page 167 An instrument or function that records, edits, modifies, and plays back a musical performance in the form of MIDI messages. You can use the MOTIF ES as a sequencer in the Song mode and Pattern mode. Voice data that is supplied with the internal memory of the instruments shipped from the factory is referred to as a “Preset Voice.” Voice data you create or edit via the Voice Edit or the Sampling function, using the preset waves supplied with the instrument or the wave obtained via the Sampling function is referred to as a “User Voice.” Source Volume Label On the MOTIF ES, “source” has three different meanings or uses: This refers to the name you can assign to storage devices such as a SmartMedia and hard disk. Owner’s Manual Appendix Q 291 Specifications Specifications Keyboards MOTIF ES8 MOTIF ES7 MOTIF ES6 88 keys, Balanced Hammer Effect Keyboard (Initial Touch/Aftertouch) 76 keys, FS Keyboard (Initial Touch/Aftertouch) 61 keys, FS Keyboard (Initial Touch/Aftertouch) Tone Generator block Tone Generator AWM2 (complying with the Modular Synthesis Plug-in System) Polyphony 128 notes + the polyphony of the Plug-in Board (if installed) Multi Timbral Capacity 16 parts (internal) + 3 or more Plug-in Board parts (1 for each Single Plug-in Board; 16 for Multi Plug-in Board), Audio Input parts (A/D, AIEB2, mLAN*) * 4 stereo parts Wave 175MB (when converted to 16- bit linear format), 1859 waveforms Voice Preset: 768 normal voices + 64 drum kits GM: 128 normal voices + 1 drum kit User: 128 x 2 (Bank1: Original, Bank2: Picked up from Preset) Normal Voice + 32 drum kits Plug-in Voice Preset for the PLG150-AN/DX/PF/DR/PC: 64 Preset for the PLG-150VL: 192 User: 64 for each Plug-in slot Performance User: 128 (up to 4 parts) Filter 18 types Effect System Reverb x 20 types, Chorus x 49 types, Insertion (A, B) x 116 types x 8 blocks, Master Effect x 8 types, Master Equalizer (5 bands), Part EQ (3 bands, stereo), Plug-in Insertion (available when the PLG100-VH has been installed to slot 1) Expandability 3 Slots for Modular Synthesis Plug-in Boards Samples Up to 1024 Waveforms (Multi Samples) Up to 128 Key Banks per Waveform Up to 4096 Key Banks Sampling Source Analog input L/R, Stereo output (Resampling), Digital/Optical (available when the AIEB2 has been installed), mLAN (available when the mLAN16E has been installed) A/D Conversion 20-bit, 64 x oversampling D/A Conversion 24-bit, 128 x oversampling Sample Data Bits 16 Sampling Frequency 44.1kHz, 22.05kHz, 11.025kHz, 5.5125kHz (Stereo/Mono) Sampling block (Available when DIMMs have been installed.) • Digital Sampling Frequency (when the AIEB2 has been installed) 48kHz, 44.1kHz, 32kHz * Can be input, with converted to the Sampling Frequency of the MOTIF ES. • Sampling Frequency via the mLAN (when the mLAN16E has been installed) 44.1kHz (fixed) Sampling Memory Optionally installed, expandable to 512MB (256MB DIMM x 2 slots) * DIMMs are not installed to the instrument when shipped from the factory. Sample Length Mono: 32 MB Stereo: 64 MB Sampling Time 44.1kHz: 6 min. 20 sec., 22.05kHz: 12 min. 40 sec., 11.025kHz: 25 min. 20 sec., 5.0125kHz: 55 min. 40 sec. * Mono/Stereo Sample Format Original format, WAV, AIFF, A3000/4000/5000/SU700 format (loadable only), AKAI S1000/S3000 format (loadable only) Appendix 292 Owner’s Manual Specifications Sequencer block Others Note Capacity Approx. 226,000 notes Note Resolution 480 ppq (parts per quarter note) Maximum Polyphony 124 notes Tempo 1 - 300 Recording type Real time replace, Real time overdub (with the exception of the Pattern Chain), Real time punch (Song only), Step (with the exception of the Pattern Chain) Tracks Pattern Mode: 16 phrase tracks Pattern Chain Mode: Pattern track, Tempo track, Scene track Song Mode: 16 sequence tracks (Loop on/off can be set for each track), Tempo track, Scene track Patterns 64 patterns (x 16 sections) Measures: 256 maximum Phrases Preset Phrases: 687 phrases User Phrases: 256 per pattern Songs 64 songs Arpeggio Preset x 1787 types User x 256 types * MIDI Sync, MIDI transmit/receive channel, Velocity Limit, and Note Limit can be set. Scene Memory 5 per Song Scequence Format Original format, SMF format 0, 1 (Format 1 load only) Master User: 128 * 4 Zones (Master keyboard settings), Assignable Knob/Slider settings, Program Change Table Sequence Software compatible with the Remote Control function • For Windows ® SQ01 V2, Cubase SX, SONAR 2.0, Multi Part Editor for MOTIF-RACK, Multi Part Editor for MOTIF ES • For Macintosh ® Logic 5.5, Digital Performer 3.1 Controllers Pitch Bend wheel, Modulation wheel, Ribbon Controller, Assignable Control Sliders (4), Assignable Knobs (4), Data dial Display 240 x 64 dot graphic backlit LCD External Memory SmartMedia™ (3.3V) * Up to 128MB can be used. Connectors OUTPUT L/MONO, R (standard phone jack) ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT L, R (standard phone jack) AD INPUT L, R (standard phone jack) PHONES (standard stereo phone jack) FOOT CONTROLLER 1, 2 FOOT SWITCH x 2 (SUSTAIN, ASSIGNABLE) BREATH, MIDI IN/OUT/THRU, USB (TO HOST, TO DEVICE), AC INLET Power Consumption 38W Dimensions, Weight MOTIF ES8: 1,458 (W) x 465 (D) x 167.4 (H)mm, 28.3kg MOTIF ES7: 1,255 (W) x 394 (D) x 136.4 (H)mm, 19.2kg MOTIF ES6: 1,048 (W) x 394 (D) x 136.4 (H)mm, 16.5kg Accessories AC Power cord, CD-ROM x 3, Owner’s Manual (this book), Data List, Installation Guide Owner’s Manual Appendix * Specifications and descriptions in this owner's manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer. 293 Index Index 1/4 Shift (1/4 shifted) ........................................................ 209 1/4 tone ............................................................................ 209 1/8 tone ............................................................................ 209 1st-on ............................................................................... 193 A A/D Input .......................................................................... 165 A/D INPUT jacks ................................................................ 24 AC (Assignable Control) .................................................. 206 AC INLET (AC Power Cord Socket) ................................... 24 Accuracy .......................................................................... 257 ADD INT ..................................................................... 71, 212 ADD PLG ................................................................... 71, 212 Advanced DX/TX Plug-in Board ........................................ 74 AEG (Amplitude Envelope Generator) ... 162, 200, 204, 219, 236 Aftertouch ........................................................................ 184 AIEB2 ......................................................................... 25, 285 Aiff (AIFF) ......................................................................... 269 All ..................................................................................... 269 AllPattern .......................................................................... 269 AllSong ............................................................................. 269 AllVoice ............................................................................ 269 AllWaveform ............................................................. 269, 270 AlternateGroup ................................................................ 203 AlternatePan ............................................................ 199, 204 AltnateGroup ...................................................................... 84 AMod ....................................................................... 205, 206 Amplitude ......................................................................... 162 Amplitude Envelope Generator ....................................... 162 analog output ............................................................... 31, 32 Analog Physical Modeling Plug-in Board .......................... 74 Append Pattern ................................................................ 247 Append Phrase ................................................................ 245 Arabic .............................................................................. 209 ARP (Arpeggio) ................................ 189, 191, 213, 214, 223 ARP CH (Arpeggio Channel) ........................................... 262 ARP FX ................................................................. 81, 90, 129 Arpeggio .............................................. 66, 70, 105, 130, 169 [ARPEGGIO ON/OFF] button ............................................. 19 Arpeggio type .................................................................. 169 ArpSwitch (Arpeggio Switch) ................................... 216, 235 AS1 (ASSIGN 1) ............................................... 188, 212, 271 AS1 (Assign 1) ................................................................. 214 AS2 (ASSIGN 2) ............................................... 188, 212, 271 AS2 (Assign 2) ................................................................. 214 ASA (ASSIGN A) .............................................. 188, 212, 271 ASB (ASSIGN B) .............................................. 188, 212, 271 ASSIGN ............................................................................ 263 ASSIGNABLE OUT ...................................................... 24, 25 AssignMode ..................................................................... 203 AT (After Touch) ............................................................... 205 ATTACK ............................................................... 81, 90, 129 Attack Time .............................................. 160, 161, 162, 183 AUDIO IN ......................................................................... 214 Audio Input ........................................................................ 33 Audio Input Part ............................................................... 165 Audition ............................................................................ 290 Auto Load ........................................................................ 135 AutoLoad ......................................................................... 261 AWM2 (Advanced Wave Memory 2) ............................... 157 B Appendix BAK DEL .......................................................................... 225 Band Elimination Filter ..................................................... 161 Band Pass Filter ............................................................... 161 BANK buttons .................................................................... 21 Bank Select ................................................................ 40, 182 BankLSB .......................................................................... 273 BankMSB ......................................................................... 273 BankSel ............................................................................ 264 BasicRcvCh (Basic Receive Channel) ............................ 263 BC (Breath Controller) ..................................... 214, 219, 273 BCCurve ............................................................................ 76 BCCurve (Breath Controller Curve) ................................. 260 Beat .............................................................................. 57, 59 Beat Graph ...................................................................... 224 Beat Stretch ............................................................. 231, 245 BEF12 .............................................................................. 210 BEF6 ................................................................................ 210 Board Voice ..................................................................... 146 BPF12D ............................................................................ 210 BPF6 ................................................................................ 210 BPFw ................................................................................ 210 294 Owner’s Manual BREAK POINT ..................................................199, 200, 211 Breath Controller ..........................................................42, 76 BREATH Controller Jack ....................................................24 Brightness ........................................................................183 BULK (Bulk Dump) ...................................208, 220, 237, 274 Bulk Dump .......................................................................185 Burglarproof Lock ..............................................................28 C CARD (Card slot) ...............................................................25 CAT (Channel Aftertouch) ........................................229, 230 Category Search ................................................................62 [CATEGORY SEARCH] button ...........................................21 CD-ROM ...............................................................................6 CenterKey ........................................................197, 199, 200 Chain ................................................................................247 Channel ............................................................................290 Channel Aftertouch ..........................................................184 ChAT (Channel Aftertouch) ..............................................273 ChgTiming (Change Timing) ............................................191 CHORUS ......................................81, 90, 129, 195, 216, 235 Chorus ..............................................................................177 Chorus Ctg (Category) .....................................................215 Chorus Ctg (Chorus Effect Category) ..............................195 Chorus Pan ..............................................................195, 215 Chorus Return ..........................................................195, 215 Chorus Send ....................................................................195 Chorus to Reverb .....................................................195, 215 Chorus Typ (Chorus Effect Type) ....................................195 Chorus Type .....................................................................215 ChoSend ..........................................191, 203, 213, 215, 217 Clean Up Memory ............................................................259 Clear Pattern ....................................................................248 Clear Phrase ....................................................................246 Clear Song .......................................................................233 Clear Track ...............................................................232, 246 Clock ................................................................229, 230, 290 CLOCK SFT ..............................................................114, 221 ClockOut ..........................................................................264 Coarse ......................................................................196, 203 Common ...........................................................................290 Common Edit (Drum Voice) .............................................202 Common Edit (Master) .....................................................138 Common Edit (Normal Voice) ....................................79, 189 Common Edit (Performance) .............................................88 Common Edit (Plug-in Voice) ...........................................205 Common Edit (Song Mixing/Pattern Mixing) ....................128 Compare ............................................................................52 CONFIG ...........................................................................266 Confirmation Message .......................................................52 Connections ...................................................................5, 31 Control Change ................................................................182 Control Change numbers .........................................140, 156 Controller ....................................................................42, 154 Controller Block ................................................................154 Controller Set ...................................................................155 Convert Freq ....................................................................258 Convert Pitch ....................................................................257 Convert to Drum Voice .....................................................259 COPY ...............................................208, 220, 242, 243, 250 Copy .........................................................................256, 258 Copy Event ...............................................................229, 245 Copy Pattern ....................................................................247 Copy Phrase ....................................................................245 Copy Sample ...................................................233, 245, 246 Copy Song .......................................................................232 Copy Track ...............................................................231, 246 Create Continuous Data ...........................................230, 245 Create Measure ...............................................................231 Create Roll ...............................................................228, 244 Crescendo ...............................................................228, 244 CS (Control Sliders) .....................................................19, 50 [CS1] - [CS4] (Control Slider) ............................................19 CTL ASN (Controller Assign) ...................214, 234, 262, 263 CTRL NO (Control Number) .............................................226 CtrlChange (Control Change mode) ................................264 CtrlChange (Control Change) ..........................................219 CtrlReset (Controller Reset) .............................................261 CURRENT ........................................................................266 Cursor ................................................................................49 Cursor buttons ...........................................................20, 152 Curve ........................................................196, 198, 200, 230 CUTOFF ...............................................81, 90, 129, 189, 203 Cutoff ................................................................197, 198, 218 Cutoff Frequency ..............................................................161 CutoffSens (Cutoff Sensitivity) ..........................................198 D Data (Data Range) ...........................................................230 Data dial .............................................................................20 Data Entry .........................................................................182 [DEC/NO] button ................................................................20 Decay .......................................................................218, 219 Decay Time ......................................................................183 Decay1 Level ...................................................160, 161, 162 Decay1 Time ....................................................160, 161, 162 Decay1Lvl (Level) ............................................................204 Decay1Time .....................................................................204 Decay2 Level ...................................................160, 161, 162 Decay2 Time ....................................................160, 161, 162 Decay2Time .....................................................................204 Delay ........................................................................193, 207 DelayTempo .....................................................................195 DelayTempoSync .............................................................195 DELETE ............................................................225, 250, 267 Delete .......................................................................256, 258 Delete All ..........................................................................259 Delete Measure ................................................................231 Demo ..................................................................................55 Depth ........................................................................192, 194 DEST (Destination) ...................................................251, 253 Dest (Destination) .....................................................192, 194 Destination .......................................................................290 Detune ..............................................................................218 DeviceNo. (Device Number) ............................................264 DEVNO. (Device Number) ...............................................265 Digital ...............................................................................261 DIGITAL IN, OUT connectors .............................................25 Digital Input ........................................................................34 Digital Output .....................................................................33 DIMM ........................................................................187, 289 direct ................................................................................191 Direction ...........................................................................229 Display Messages ............................................................277 Distance ...........................................................................198 Divide Drum Track ...................................................232, 247 DRAM ...............................................................................187 Drum Plug-in Board ............................................................74 Drum Voice Edit .........................................................79, 202 DryLevel ...........................................................................215 Dual BEF ..........................................................................210 Dual BPF ..........................................................................210 Dual HPF ..........................................................................210 Dual LPF ...........................................................................210 DumpInterval (Bulk Dump Exclusive Interval Time) .........263 E each-on ............................................................................193 Echo ...................................................................................41 Edit Buffer .........................................................................187 Edit Indicator ..................................................51, 65, 69, 104 Edit Recall ......................................................52, 82, 91, 129 EF BYPS (Effect Bypass) ..................................................260 EF PART ...........................................................................215 EF SEND (Effect Send) .....................................217, 233, 235 Effect ................................................................................177 Effect Block ......................................................................177 EFFECT buttons .........................................................19, 177 Effect Bypass ...........................................................177, 260 [EFFECT BYPASS] buttons ..............................................177 Effect connection .............................................................179 Effect Plug-in Board .....................................................74, 78 Effect structure .................................................................177 EG (=Envelope Generator) ..............................................158 EGDepth ...................................................................196, 198 EGTime .....................................................................196, 198 EGTimeSens .....................................................197, 199, 200 Element ............................................................................158 Element Edit .......................................................................79 ElementSw ........................................................192, 195, 202 end ...................................................................................222 End (End Point) ................................................................254 End Point ..........................................................................176 EndStep ............................................................................228 EndVelo ............................................................................228 [ENTER] button ..................................................................20 Envelope Generator (EG) .................................................158 Index F [F1] - [F6] (Function) buttons ............................................ 20 Factory Settings ................................................................ 44 Fade In/Out ..................................................................... 257 FadeInTime ..................................................................... 201 FadeOut .......................................................................... 193 Favorite Category .............................................................. 63 FC1 (Foot Controller 1) ............................................ 214, 219 FC2 (Foot Controller 2) ............................................ 214, 219 FEG (Filter Envelope Generator) ..................... 161, 218, 236 FEGDepth ........................................................................ 218 File ................................................................................... 185 File mode ................................................................... 46, 266 File types ......................................................................... 269 FILTER ............................................. 197, 203, 207, 218, 236 Filter ................................................................................. 161 FILTER (MIDI Filter) ......................................................... 262 Filter Envelope Generator ............................................... 161 Filter type ......................................................................... 161 Filter Type List ................................................................. 209 Fine .................................................................. 196, 203, 257 FineTune .......................................................................... 256 fingered ........................................................... 189, 190, 216 Fixed ................................................................................ 130 FixedVelocity ................................................................... 260 Flash ROM ....................................................................... 187 FMod ....................................................................... 205, 206 Folder .............................................................................. 290 Foot Controller ................................................................... 42 FOOT CONTROLLER jacks ............................................... 24 FOOT SWITCH jacks ......................................................... 24 Footswitch ......................................................................... 42 Format ..................................................................... 266, 268 Forward button .................................................................. 20 FREQ (Frequency) .......................................................... 214 Frequency ............................................................... 252, 253 Front Panel ........................................................................ 16 fulltime ..................................................................... 189, 190 G Gain ................................................................................. 197 GAIN knob ................................................................... 25, 73 GATE OFST ............................................................. 114, 221 GATE TIME .......................................................... 81, 90, 129 GateTime ................................................................. 224, 227 GateTimeRate ................................................................. 192 Get Phrase From Song .................................................... 246 Glide ................................................................................ 228 GlideTime ........................................................................ 228 GM Voices ....................................................................... 160 Grid ................................................................................. 229 Grid Groove ..................................................................... 221 GROOVE ......................................................................... 221 GROUP .............................................................................. 48 GROUP [A] - H] buttons .................................................... 21 H HIGH ............................................................................... 214 High Pass Filter ............................................................... 161 HighFreq ................................................................. 207, 218 HighGain ................................................................. 207, 218 HIGHMID ......................................................................... 214 Hold ................................................. 189, 191, 193, 223, 263 Hold Level ............................................................... 160, 161 Hold time ................................................................. 197, 198 How to leave the current display ....................................... 46 HPF12 .............................................................................. 210 HPF24D ........................................................................... 209 HPFCutoff ........................................................ 198, 203, 207 HPFKeyFlw ...................................................................... 198 I IEEE1394 interface .............................................. 34, 39, 153 [INC/YES] button ............................................................... 20 Indian ............................................................................... 209 [INFORMATION] button .............................................. 20, 53 Information Display ............................................................ 53 INIT (Initialize) .................................................. 208, 219, 273 InsA Ctgry (Insertion A Category) ................................... 215 InsA Ctgry (Insertion A Category), InsA Type (Insertion A Type) ........................................... 194 InsA Type (Insertion A Type) ........................................... 215 InsB Ctgry (Insertion B Category) ........................... 195, 215 InsB Type (Insertion B Type) ................................... 195, 215 InsChoSend (Insertion Chorus Send) .............................. 202 InsEF (Insertion Effect Part Switch) ................................. 223 InsEF (Insertion Effect) .................................................... 218 InsEF Connect (Insertion Effect Connect) ....................... 194 InsEF Connect (Insertion Effect Connection) .................. 215 InsEFOut (Insertion Effect Output) .................................. 203 Insertion Effects ............................................................... 177 InsRevSend (Insertion Reverb Send) .............................. 202 Installing Optional Hardware ........................................... 282 INT SW (Internal Switch) .................................................. 222 Internal AWM2 Tone Generator ....................................... 157 Internal Memory ............................................................... 185 J Job ................................................................................... 126 K KBDTransCh (Keyboard Transmit Channel) ................... 264 Key Bank ................................................................... 96, 173 KEY FLW (Key Follow) ..................................... 197, 198, 200 KeyAsgnMode (Key Assign Mode) ................................. 190 Keybank .......................................................... 251, 253, 255 KEYBANK (Key Bank Job) .............................................. 256 Keyboard ........................................................................... 18 Keyboard Transmit Channel ............................................ 264 KeyMode ......................................................................... 191 KeyOnDelay ............................................................ 195, 201 KeyOnReset ............................................................ 193, 201 Kirnberger ....................................................................... 209 Knob .................................................................................. 50 [KNOB CONTROL FUNCTION] button ....................... 18, 50 Knob/Slider ...................................................................... 272 KnobAssign ..................................................................... 234 L last ................................................................................... 261 Layer .................................................................. 70, 141, 273 LCD Contrast Control ........................................................ 20 LCD Display ...................................................................... 20 Level ........................................................ 199, 200, 204, 255 level ......................................................................... 252, 253 LevelSens (Level Sensitivity) ........................................... 200 LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator) ..................... 162, 192, 201 LIMIT ........................ 191, 196, 202, 205, 214, 216, 234, 235 LIMIT H ............................................................................ 212 LIMIT L ............................................................................. 212 LOAD ............................................................................... 266 Load .................................................................... 87, 92, 100 LoadMix ........................................................................... 263 Loc1 (Location1) ............................................................. 221 Loc2 (Location 2) ............................................................ 221 LocalCtrl (Local Control On/Off) ...................................... 264 Location ............................................................................. 58 Loop ................................................................................ 176 Loop (Loop Recording) ................................................... 243 Loop (Loop Start Point) ................................................... 254 Loop Recording ............................................................... 168 Loop-Remix ..................................................................... 258 LOW ................................................................................. 214 Low Frequency Oscillator ................................................ 162 Low Pass Filter ................................................................ 161 Lowest Key ...................................................................... 258 LowFreq ................................................................... 207, 218 LowGain .................................................................. 207, 218 LOWMID .......................................................................... 214 LPF12 .............................................................................. 209 LPF18 .............................................................................. 209 LPF18s ............................................................................. 209 LPF24A ............................................................................ 209 LPF24D ............................................................................ 209 LPF6 ................................................................................. 209 LPFCutoff ................................................................. 203, 204 LPFReso .......................................................................... 203 LVL/PAN (Level/Pan) ............................................... 199, 204 M M. TuningNo. (Micro Tuning Number) ..................... 190, 209 M. TuningRoot (Micro Tuning Root) ......................... 190, 209 manual ............................................................. 175, 252, 253 MASTER ........................................................................... 271 Master ........................................................................ 36, 136 Master Edit mode ...................................................... 46, 271 Master Effect .................................................................... 177 Master EQ ........................................................................ 178 Master Job mode ....................................................... 46, 273 Master Keyboard ............................................................. 136 Master mode .............................................................. 46, 271 Master Play mode ...................................................... 46, 271 Master Store mode .................................................... 46, 274 MASTER VOLUME ............................................................. 18 Maximum Polyphony ....................................................... 162 MEAS ............................................................... 221, 231, 241 Meas ........................................................................ 223, 243 meas ........................................................................ 175, 253 Measure ................................................................... 110, 255 Measure Job .................................................................... 231 MEF (Master Effect) ................................. 214, 262, 263, 272 Memory ............................................................................ 271 Memory Structure ............................................................ 186 MEQ (Master EQ) ............................................................ 234 MEQ OFS (Master EQ Offset) .......... 190, 202, 205, 213, 234 Meter ................................................................................ 255 Mic/Line ........................................................................... 261 Micro Tuning List ............................................................. 209 MIDI ................................................................................. 181 MIDI channels .................................................................. 181 MIDI IN/OUT/THRU connectors ......................................... 24 MIDI interface .................................................................... 40 MIDI Sync ........................................................................ 264 MIDI tracks ...................................................................... 168 MIDISwitch ....................................................................... 272 Mix Phrase ....................................................................... 245 Mix Track ......................................................................... 232 Mixing .............................................................................. 158 Mixing Voice ............................................................ 105, 159 Mixing Voice Edit mode ............................................. 46, 249 Mixing Voice Job mode ............................................. 46, 250 Mixing Voice mode .................................................... 46, 249 Mixing Voice Store mode ........................................... 46, 250 mLAN ................................................................................. 25 mLAN (IEEE1394) connector ............................................. 25 mLAN MonitorSw ............................................................. 261 mLAN16E ........................................................................... 25 Mode ................................................................................ 271 Mode A .................................................................... 147, 150 Mode B .................................................................... 147, 150 MODE buttons ................................................................... 20 Modes ................................................................................ 45 Modify Control Data ................................................. 230, 245 Modify Gate Time .................................................... 227, 244 Modify Velocity ........................................................ 227, 244 MODULAR SYNTHESIS PLUG-IN SYSTEM ....................... 74 Modulation Wheel .................................................. 18, 64, 69 Mono/Poly ................................................ 188, 190, 216, 235 Mono/Stereo .................................................... 215, 252, 253 Move ................................................................................ 257 MTC ........................................................................... 37, 264 MTC StartOffset ............................................................... 264 Multi Part Editor ............................................................... 144 Multi-Part Plug-in Board ..................................................... 74 Mute ................................................................................... 58 [MUTE] button ................................................................... 21 MW (Modulation Wheel) .................................. 205, 219, 273 N Name ............................................................................... 259 Naming .............................................................................. 53 NATIVE1 .......................................................................... 265 NATIVE2 .......................................................................... 265 NATIVE3 .......................................................................... 265 Normal Voice ............................................................. 60, 160 Normal Voice Edit .............................................................. 79 Normalize ......................................................................... 257 Normalize Play Effect ............................................... 232, 247 NOTE ....................................................... 225, 226, 244, 272 Note (Key) settings ............................................................ 53 Owner’s Manual Appendix EQ (Equalizer) ......................... 201, 204, 207, 218, 236, 249 Equal Temp (Equal temperament) .................................. 209 Equalizer ......................................................................... 178 Erase Event ............................................................. 229, 245 Event ....................................................................... 223, 243 EVENT (Event Job) .................................................. 229, 244 Event Type ...................................................................... 229 Exchange Phrase ............................................................ 245 Exchange Track ...................................................... 232, 246 [EXIT] button ....................................................... 20, 46, 152 EXT SW (External Switch) ................................................ 222 Extract ............................................................................. 256 Extract Event ........................................................... 230, 245 295 Index NOTE OFST ............................................................. 114, 221 Note On/Note Off (Key On/Key Off) ................................. 182 NoteLimit .................................................................. 191, 196 NoteShift .......................................................................... 260 NRPN (Non-Registered Parameter Number) ................... 183 Number ............................................................ 202, 206, 216 NUMBER [1] - [16] buttons ................................................ 21 NumberOfTimes ....................................................... 229, 230 O OCT (Octave) ................................................... 188, 212, 271 Octave ............................................................. 258, 260, 272 OCTAVE[UP] and [DOWN] buttons ................................... 18 Offset ............................................................... 227, 228, 230 OFFSET 1 ~ 4 .......................................................... 199, 200 One Shot .......................................................................... 176 oneshot ............................................................................ 256 OPTICAL IN, OUT connectors ........................................... 25 Optimize Memory ............................................................. 259 OrgNotes (Original Notes) ............................................... 130 OriginalKey ...................................................................... 256 OSC ......................................................... 195, 202, 206, 249 Oscillator .......................................................................... 160 OUT (Output) ................................................................... 213 OUT CH (Output Channel) ............................... 214, 221, 234 OUT SW (Output Switch) ......................................... 222, 241 OUTPUT ........................................................................... 215 OUTPUT L/MONO and R jacks .......................................... 24 OutputSel (Output Select) ........................................ 203, 218 OutputSwitch ................................................... 214, 223, 262 Overdub ................................................... 119, 168, 222, 243 P Appendix PAN .................................................................................. 233 Pan ........... 182, 190, 199, 204, 213, 215, 217, 223, 255, 273 PAN/SEND ..................................................... 50, 81, 90, 129 Parameter ........................................................................ 291 Part ................................................................................... 251 Part Edit ................................................................... 216, 235 Partition ............................................................................ 276 PartSw ...................................................................... 216, 223 PartSwitch ................................................................ 212, 213 PATCH ............................................................................. 241 Patch ................................................................................ 113 Pattern .............................................................................. 165 Pattern Chain ................................................................... 168 Pattern Chain Play mode ................................................. 242 Pattern Chain Record mode ............................................ 242 Pattern Edit mode ...................................................... 46, 244 Pattern Job mode ...................................................... 46, 244 Pattern Mixing .................................................................. 167 Pattern Mixing Edit mode ........................................... 46, 248 Pattern Mixing Job mode ........................................... 46, 248 Pattern Mixing mode .................................................. 46, 248 Pattern Mixing Store mode ........................................ 46, 248 Pattern mode ............................................................. 46, 241 Pattern Play mode ...................................................... 46, 241 Pattern Record mode ................................................. 46, 243 PB Lower .......................................................................... 190 PB Upper ......................................................................... 190 PBRange (Pitch Bend Range) ......................................... 228 PEG (Pitch Envelope Generator) ............................. 160, 197 Performance .................................................................... 158 Performance Edit mode ............................................. 46, 213 Performance Job mode ............................................. 46, 219 Performance mode .................................................... 46, 212 Performance Play mode ............................................ 46, 212 Performance Store mode ........................................... 46, 220 PF COPY (Performance Copy) ........................................ 237 PgmChange ............................................................. 264, 273 Phase ............................................................................... 194 PHONES jack ..................................................................... 24 Phrase .............................................................................. 167 PHRASE (Phrase Job) ..................................................... 245 Phrase Name ................................................................... 246 Piano Plug-in Board ........................................................... 74 PITCH ....................................................... 196, 203, 207, 249 Pitch ......................................................... 196, 203, 205, 257 Pitch Bend Wheel .................................................. 18, 64, 69 Pitch Envelope Generator ................................................ 160 PitchBend ........................................................................ 225 PitchSens ......................................................................... 197 Play button ......................................................................... 20 PLAY FX ........................................... 192, 202, 205, 214, 234 PLG100-VH .................................................................. 74, 78 PLG100-XG .................................................................. 74, 77 296 Owner’s Manual PLG150-AN ........................................................................74 PLG150-DR ........................................................................74 PLG150-DX ........................................................................74 PLG150-PC ........................................................................74 PLG150-PF .........................................................................74 PLG150-VL .........................................................................74 PLUG ................................................................................265 Plug-in Board .............................................................74, 283 Plug-in board cover ...........................................................25 Plug-in Insertion .......................................................215, 275 Plug-in Voice Edit .........................................79, 85, 146, 205 Plug-in Voices ............................................................76, 121 PluginAllBulk ....................................................................269 PLY MODE (Play mode) ...........................................190, 205 PMod ................................................................205, 206, 207 Pointer ..............................................................................224 PolyExpand ......................................................................265 Polyphonic Aftertouch ..............................................184, 226 PORTA (Portamento) ........188, 190, 205, 212, 213, 216, 235 Portamento Switch ...........................................................182 Portamento Time ..............................................................182 PortaMode (Portamento Mode) ........................................189 PortaSw (Portamento Switch) ...................................188, 212 PortaTime (Portamento Time) ..................................189, 212 PORTNO. (Port number) ..................................................265 Power Supply .....................................................................26 POWER Switch ...................................................................24 Power-on Procedure ..........................................................43 PowerOnMode .................................................................261 Preset ...............................................................................291 Preset Phrase ...................................................................167 Program .............................................................................47 Program Change ..............................................................184 PtnQuantize (Pattern Quantize) .......................................262 PtnTempoHold (Pattern Tempo Hold) ..............................262 punch ...............................................................................222 Punch In/Out ....................................................................169 Punch-in Waiting ..............................................................254 PureMaj (Pure major) .......................................................209 PureMin (Pure minor) .......................................................209 Put Phrase To Song .........................................................246 Put Track To Arp ......................................................232, 247 Q Q (Frequency Characteristic) ..................................201, 214 Quantize ...................................................222, 227, 243, 291 R Random ............................................................................196 RandomPan .....................................................................199 Rate ..........................................................227, 228, 230, 231 Ratio .................................................................................257 RB (Ribbon Controller) .....................................214, 219, 273 RBMode (Ribbon Controller Mode) .................................214 RCV SW (Receive Switch) ........................................219, 236 RcvBulk ............................................................................264 RcvNoteOff .......................................................................203 Realtime Recording .................................................168, 224 Rear Panel ..........................................................................22 REC ARP ..........................................................................243 RECALL ............................................................208, 219, 236 Recall Buffer .....................................................................187 RecGain ...................................................................252, 253 RecMonitor .......................................................................253 Record button ....................................................................20 Recording Type ...............................................................222 RecTrack ..........................................................................223 RELEASE ..............................................................81, 90, 129 Release Level ...................................................160, 161, 162 Release Time ...........................................160, 161, 162, 183 REMOTE buttons ................................................................19 Remote Control ................................................................147 RENAME ..........................................................................267 Replace ............................................................................168 replace .....................................................................222, 243 resample ..........................................................................252 Resampling the MOTIF ES .................................................99 RESONANCE .......................................................81, 90, 129 Resonance .......................................................161, 198, 218 REST ................................................................................224 REVERB .......................................81, 90, 129, 195, 216, 235 Reverb ......................................................................177, 261 Reverb Pan ..............................................................195, 215 Reverb Return ..........................................................195, 215 Reverb Send ....................................................................195 Reverb Type .............................................................195, 215 Reverse ............................................................................176 reverse .............................................................................256 Reverse button ...................................................................20 RevSend ...................................................203, 213, 215, 217 Ribbon Controller ...................................................18, 65, 69 ROM .................................................................................187 RPN (Registered Parameter Number) ..............................183 S Sample .......................................................................96, 173 Sample playback types ....................................................176 Sample tracks ..................................................................168 Sample Voice ...........................................................159, 251 Sample+note ....................................................................173 sample+note ....................................................................253 Sampling Block ................................................................172 Sampling Edit mode ...................................................46, 255 Sampling Job mode .........................................................256 Sampling job mode ............................................................46 Sampling mode ..........................................................46, 251 Sampling Record mode .............................................46, 251 SAVE ................................................................................266 Save .................................................................................185 ScalingPan .......................................................................199 scene ................................................................................223 Section .............................................................................167 [SECTION] button ..............................................................21 Segment ...........................................................196, 198, 199 SendXGOn ToMultiPartPB ................................................263 Sens .................................................................................255 Separate Chord ........................................................229, 244 SEQ ..................................................................................262 SEQ TRANSPORT buttons .................................................20 SeqCtrl .............................................................................264 Sequencer Block ..............................................................165 SetAll ........................................................................227, 230 [SF1] - [SF5] (Sub Function) buttons .................................20 SHAPE ..............................................................................214 Shift Clock ................................................................229, 244 Single Part Plug-in Boards .................................................74 skip ...................................................................................222 Slave ...................................................................................36 SLICE ...............................................................................254 Slice ..........................................................................107, 258 slice+seq ..........................................................................253 Slope ................................................................................194 SLOT 1-3 lamps .................................................................21 SMF (Standard MIDI File) .........................................132, 269 SmplPrCnt (Sampling pre-count) .....................................262 Solo ..............................................................................58, 82 Song .................................................................................165 Song Chain .......................................................................166 Song Edit mode ..........................................................46, 225 Song Job mode ..........................................................46, 226 Song Location ....................................................................58 Song Mixing Edit mode ..............................................46, 234 Song Mixing Job mode ..............................................46, 236 Song Mixing mode .....................................................46, 233 Song Mixing Store mode ....................................46, 131, 237 Song mode .................................................................46, 221 Song Name ......................................................................233 Song Play mode .........................................................46, 221 Song Record mode ....................................................46, 222 Song Scene ..............................................................123, 166 SongEventChase ..............................................................263 sort ...................................................................................191 Sort Chord ................................................................228, 244 Source ......................................................155, 192, 252, 253 Specifications ...................................................................292 Speed ...............................................................192, 201, 207 Split ..................................................................................273 Split Pattern ......................................................................247 Split Phrase ......................................................................245 Split Song To Pattern ........................................................233 Src (Source) .....................................................................206 STANDBY (Sampling Standby) ........................................252 Start ..................................................................................254 Start (Start Point) ..............................................................108 Start Point .........................................................................176 StartStep ...........................................................................228 StartVelo ...........................................................................228 STATUS ............................................................................265 Status ...............................................................................266 Step Recording ........................................................120, 168 StepTime ..........................................................................224 Stereo to Mono .................................................................258 stop ..................................................................................222 Stop button .........................................................................20 Index Store ................................................................................ 185 Strength ........................................................................... 227 Sub Function ............................................................... 20, 47 SubDivide ........................................................................ 255 sustain ............................................................................... 42 Sustain Level ................................................... 160, 161, 162 SWING ................................................................. 81, 90, 129 SwingRate ....................................................................... 227 Switch .............................................. 189, 190, 191, 214, 216 SYNC ............................................................................... 264 Synchronization ............................................................... 291 System Effects ................................................................. 177 System Exclusive Messages ........................................... 184 System Overview ............................................................. 154 System settings ............................................................... 185 T TCH (Transmit Channel) .......................................... 188, 212 TEMPLATE ...................................................................... 237 Template ......................................................................... 194 TEMPO ................................................................ 81, 90, 129 Tempo ..................................................................... 189, 191 TempoSpeed ................................................................... 193 TempoSync ..................................................................... 193 TG (Tone Generator) ....................................................... 260 TGSwitch ......................................................................... 272 Thin Out ................................................................... 230, 245 ThruPort ........................................................................... 265 TIE ................................................................................... 224 TIME ........................................................ 197, 198, 200, 207 Time ......................................................................... 190, 216 TimeMode ....................................................................... 190 Time-Stretch .................................................................... 257 TONE ................................................................... 81, 90, 129 Tone Generator block ..................................................... 157 Top button ......................................................................... 20 TR (Track) ........................................ 227, 228, 229, 230, 231 TR LOOP (Track Loop) .................................................... 222 TR SEL (Track Select) ..................................................... 225 TR VCE (Track Voice) ...................................................... 241 TRACK (Track Job) ......................................................... 246 [TRACK SELECT] button ................................................... 21 Track Voice ..................................................................... 167 TRANS (Transmit) ............................................................ 272 Trans (Transpose) ................................................... 221, 241 TransCh ........................................................................... 272 TransmitCh ...................................................... 214, 223, 262 Transpose ....................................... 228, 244, 258, 260, 272 TrggrMode (Trigger Mode) ..................................... 252, 253 Trigger mode ....................................................... 95, 98, 175 Trigger Waiting ........................................................ 252, 254 TRIM ........................................................................ 254, 255 Troubleshooting .............................................................. 279 TUNE ....................................................... 196, 203, 218, 236 Tune ................................................................................ 260 TX SW (Transmit Switch) ................................................. 272 TYPE (Arpeggio) .............................................................. 234 Type (Arpeggio) ...................................................... 189, 191 Type (Equalizer) .............................................................. 201 Type (Filter) ..................................................................... 197 Type (Master Effect) ........................................................ 214 Type (Recording Type) ........................................... 222, 243 Type (Remix) ................................................................... 242 Type (Sampling) .............................................................. 253 Type (Slice Type) ............................................................ 254 Type (Waveform) ............................................................. 202 V Vallot&Yng (Vallotti & Young) .......................................... 209 Value ........................................................................ 194, 224 Variation ................................................................... 242, 258 VCE ED (Mixing Voice Edit) ..................................... 233, 249 VEL SENS (Velocity Sensitivity) ....... 196, 198, 199, 203, 204 VelCrossFade .................................................................. 196 VelCurve (Velocity Curve) ............................................... 260 VelLimit (Velocity Limit) ............................................ 189, 223 VelLimitH ......................................................................... 216 VelLimitL .......................................................................... 216 VelMode (Velocity Mode) ................................................ 191 VELO OFST ..................................................................... 221 VelocityDepth .................................................................. 206 VelocityLimit ............................................................ 191, 196 VelocityOffset .................................................................. 206 VelocityRange ................................................................. 228 VelocityRate ..................................................................... 192 VelSensDpt ...................................................................... 217 VelSensOfst ..................................................................... 217 VIEW FLT (View Filter) ..................................................... 225 Virtual Acoustic Plug-in Board ........................................... 74 Vocal Harmony Plug-in Board ........................................... 74 VOICE .............................. 212, 216, 223, 233, 235, 243, 261 Voice .......................................................................... 60, 158 Voice Bank ........................................................................ 60 Voice Edit .......................................................................... 79 Voice Edit mode ........................................................ 46, 189 Voice Editor ..................................................................... 145 Voice Job mode ........................................................ 46, 208 Voice mode ............................................................... 46, 188 Voice Play mode ........................................................ 46, 188 Voice Store mode .............................................................. 46 VoiceELPan ..................................................................... 217 VOL/PAN ......................................................... 217, 233, 235 Volume ..................... 190, 213, 215, 217, 223, 260, 262, 273 Volume Label ................................................................... 266 W WAITING (Trigger Waiting) ...................................... 252, 254 WAV ................................................................................. 269 Wave ........................................................................ 192, 201 Wave No. ......................................................................... 195 WaveCtgry ....................................................................... 195 Waveform .......................................................... 96, 173, 251 WAVEFORM (Waveform Job) .......................................... 258 Werckmeist ...................................................................... 209 Width ............................................................................... 198 X XG Plug-in Board ............................................................... 74 Z Zone ........................................................................ 137, 273 Zone Edit ......................................................................... 272 ZoneSwitch .............................................................. 271, 276 U Appendix UNDO/REDO ........................................................... 226, 244 Undo/Redo ...................................................................... 127 UNITMULTIPLY ................................................... 81, 90, 129 UnitMultiply (Unit Multiply) ............................................... 192 USB ................................................................................... 24 USB connectors ................................................................ 24 USB storage devices ........................................................ 29 USB TO DEVICE ................................................................ 29 USB TO HOST ................................................................... 29 User ................................................................................. 291 User Arpeggio ................................................................. 130 User Memory ................................................................... 186 User Phrase ..................................................................... 167 User Voice ....................................................................... 251 UserARP .......................................................................... 269 Utility Job mode ........................................................ 46, 265 Utility mode ............................................................... 46, 260 Owner’s Manual 297 FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.) 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM Connecting the Plug and Cord WARNING: THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code: GREEN-AND-YELLOW : EARTH BLUE : NEUTRAL BROWN : LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured GREEN-and-YELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked by the letter E or by the safety earth symbol or colored GREEN or GREEN-and-YELLOW. The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. • This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd. (3 wires) product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620 The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. (class B) For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below. Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante. NORTH AMERICA CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. 135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario, M1S 3R1, Canada Tel: 416-298-1311 U.S.A. Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620, U.S.A. Tel: 714-522-9011 CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA MEXICO Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V. Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149, Col. Guadalupe del Moral C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México Tel: 55-5804-0600 BRAZIL Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda. Av. Reboucas 2636-Pinheiros CEP: 05402-400 Sao Paulo-SP. Brasil Tel: 011-3085-1377 Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen Bestimmungsländern erhältlich. Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo. Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Belgium Rue de Geneve (Genevastraat) 10, 1140 - Brussels, Belgium Tel: 02-726 6032 FRANCE Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Sucursal de Argentina Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053, Buenos Aires, Argentina Tel: 1-4371-7021 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES/ CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella, Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá Tel: +507-269-5311 EUROPE THE UNITED KINGDOM Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd. Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes, MK7 8BL, England Tel: 01908-366700 IRELAND Danfay Ltd. 61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin Tel: 01-2859177 GERMANY THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd. 25/F., United Plaza, 1468 Nanjing Road (West), Jingan, Shanghai, China Tel: 021-6247-2211 HONG KONG Yamaha Musique France BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France Tel: 01-64-61-4000 ITALY Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A. Combo Division Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd. 11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel: 2737-7688 INDONESIA Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy Tel: 02-935-771 SPAIN/PORTUGAL Yamaha-Hazen Música, S.A. Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230 Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain Tel: 91-639-8888 GREECE Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House 147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece Tel: 01-228 2160 SWEDEN ARGENTINA ASIA BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor) PT. Nusantik Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia Tel: 21-520-2577 KOREA Yamaha Music Korea Ltd. Tong-Yang Securities Bldg. 16F 23-8 Yoido-dong, Youngdungpo-ku, Seoul, Korea Tel: 02-3770-0660 MALAYSIA Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd. Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya, Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia Tel: 3-78030900 Yamaha Scandinavia AB J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1 Box 30053 S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden Tel: 031 89 34 00 PHILIPPINES Yupangco Music Corporation DENMARK YS Copenhagen Liaison Office 339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO, Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines Tel: 819-7551 SINGAPORE Generatorvej 8B DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark Tel: 44 92 49 00 Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd. #03-11 A-Z Building 140 Paya Lebor Road, Singapore 409015 Tel: 747-4374 FINLAND F-Musiikki Oy TAIWAN Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260, SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland Tel: 09 618511 Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd. NORWAY Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB 3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei. Taiwan 104, R.O.C. Tel: 02-2511-8688 THAILAND Grini Næringspark 1 N-1345 Østerås, Norway Tel: 67 16 77 70 Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd. 891/1 Siam Motors Building, 15-16 floor Rama 1 road, Wangmai, Pathumwan Bangkok 10330, Thailand Tel: 02-215-2626 ICELAND Skifan HF Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120 IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland Tel: 525 5000 OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: +49-4101-3030 Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2317 OCEANIA SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Switzerland Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland Tel: 01-383 3990 AUSTRIA Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: 01-60203900 THE NETHERLANDS Yamaha Music Central Europe, Branch Nederland Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands Tel: 0347-358 040 AFRICA Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2312 AUSTRALIA Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd. Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, Victoria 3006, Australia Tel: 3-9693-5111 NEW ZEALAND MIDDLE EAST TURKEY/CYPRUS Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 OTHER COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Gulf FZE LB21-128 Jebel Ali Freezone P.O.Box 17328, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: +971-4-881-5868 Music Houses of N.Z. Ltd. 146/148 Captain Springs Road, Te Papapa, Auckland, New Zealand Tel: 9-634-0099 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2312 HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2445 SY34 http://www.yamahasynth.com U.R.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation © 2003 Yamaha Corporation WB17970 406MWAP2.3-05E0 Printed in Japan